Skip to main content

Full text of "Therapeutic sarcognomy. The application of sarcognomy, the science of the soul, brain and body, to the therapeutic philosophy and treatment of bodily and mental diseases by means of electricity, nervaura, medicine and haemospasia, with a review of authors on animal magnetism and massage and presentation of new instruments for electro-therapeutics"

See other formats 


-olf 


»?**,  '&MK5FJ   *<°*    '•SUm*!     >°v 


'-Tfr«'  .o»         <^  '•?:,•'   J 


jr  ...  ^"""  .<*' 


"of 


vv  . 


c.   <?,    .*.   .*. 


*   ^o* 


.*^r.*  /    \^^\<p     v*^;-\/    %-^^v/ 

^     .SsJ&z.%.    y.'A'i:./^     ^.tfifc.V    yj 


*->'  ; 


*???>*  \/^$V*  *v^?V*   %^$\4? 


^/^-aflfe'v^'.-'' 


^t:^  %*  *r     V'Tri^  jP       v  * ^r^*  > 


k     *>  -; 


»°V 


v- 


star-.  ^«i    >VSfe*.    ^rf*   .'.fro-  ^ao*    : 


L0< 


oV 
>0^     V 


,4^    :vm*e^:     ,o 


roVl 


>      ^ 


+*o« 


fcs? 


:*■ 


*<>  ••TT.»*  .** 


v^V-   ' 


>v 


<*   *<...• 


Z^      <&        ♦ 


**b' 


^ 


*     . 


»0^ 


:    *0« 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  PSYCHO-PHYSIOLOGICAL 
CHART    OF    SARCOGNOMY. 


All  human  faculties  are  inherent  in  the  soul,  and  are  manifested 
through  the  co-operation  of  the  brain ;  every  distinct  portion  of  the 
brain  having  a  distinct  function.  The  relation  of  the  brain  to  the 
body  through  the  spinal  cord  and  other  nerves  establishes  an  exact 
sympathy  between  each  part  of  the  surface  of  the  brain  and  the  cor- 
responding parts  of  the  surface  of  the  body ;  thus  the  upper  half  of 
one  corresponds  and  sympathizes  with  the  upper  half  of  the  other, 
and  the  lower  half  with  the  lower  —  the  anterior  with  the  anterior 
and  the  posterior  with  the  posterior.  The  map  of  the  organs  of  the 
brain  is  reproduced  on  the  body. 

This  wonderful  discovery,  made  in  1842,  has  been  verified  in  innu- 
merable experiments  since  by  myself  and  my  pupils,  and,  being  a  law 
of  nature,  is  verified  in  every  disease.  But  its  easy  verification  by 
simple  experiments,  and  its  universal  presence  as  the  law  of  life  in  dis- 
ease, have  not  led  to  its  discovery  or  even  the  suspicion  of  its  existence- 
Its  demonstration  is  so  easy  and  convincing  that  the  science  will  be 
universally  recognized  as  the  most  important  addition  ever  made  to 
biology,  as  soon  as  the  attention  of  the  educated  is  seriously  given 
to  the  investigation  ;  for  all  competent  and  candid  observers  will  easily 
find  what  I  have  found,  and  what  all  my  pupils  readily  discover  in 
others  or  in  themselves. 

In  these  engravings,  designed  not  for  psychic  philosophy,  but  for 
the  guidance  of  therapeutic  treatment,  I  have  not  thought  it  necessary 
to  make  minute  psychic  divisions.  Heroism,  for  example,  is  not  sep- 
arated from  Firmness,  nor  Approbativeness  from  Health,  nor  any  sub- 
division introduced  between  Adhesiveness  and  Combativeness. 

The  reader  should  understand  that  each  portion  of  the  surface  of 
the  body  is  related  directly  to  a  physiological  function,  and  only 
indirectly  to  a  psychic  function,  through  its  sympathetic  connection 
with  the  psychic  organ,  the  brain.  When  the  nervous  system  is  very 
active  and  sensitive,  the  psychic  effects  are  conspicuous  ;  but  when  the 
opposite  condition  exists,  there  is  far  less  of  psychic  effect  from  any 
operation  on  the  body. 

To  appreciate  Sarcognomy  justly  this  entire  volume  must  be  pe- 
rused, for  a  science  cannot  be  satisfactorily  represented  by  a  map, 
nor  is  this  volume  a  perfect  and  complete  exposition  of  the  subject; 
its  chief  purpose  is  to  guide  those  who  wish  to  reduce  its  principles  to 
practice.  Many  things  have  been  omitted  which  would  have  been 
introduced  in  a  more  extensive  volume,  and  I  would  mention  one  im- 
portant omission  as  to  the  location  just  behind  Sanity,  marked  as 
Dignity  in  the  posterior  view,  which  is  of  much  value  as  a  tonic  to 
the  mind  and  nervous  system,  reinforcing  the  will-power,  mental  and 
physical  inspiration,  and  independence  of  character. 


THERAPEUTIC   SARCOGNOMY. 


THE    APPLICATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY,  THE    SCIENCE    OF   THE 


SOUL,  BRAIN  AND  BODY, 


Therapeutic  Philosophy  and  Treatment 


BODILY  AND    MENTAL    DISEASES 


BY    MEANS    OF 


Electricity,  Nervaura,  Medicine  and  Haemospasia, 

With    a    Review    of    Authors    on    Animal    Magnetism    and 

Massage,  and  Presentation  of  New  Instruments 

for    Electro-Therapeutics. 


t 


By  JOSEPH  RODES  BUCHANAN,  M.D., 

author  of 

System   of  Anthropology,"  "Manual  of  Psychometry,"  and  "The  New 
Education."    Formerly  Dean  of  the  Faculty  of  the  Eclectic 
Medical    Institute,   and   Professor  of   Physiology 
and  Institutes  of  Medicine  in  Four  Med- 
ical Colleges  successively  from 

1846    TO     l88l. 


BOSTON : 
G.  CUPPLES   CO.,  Publishers. 

1891. 


Copyrighted,   1S91, 
By  J.  R.  BUCHANAN,  M.D. 


All  rights  reserved. 


4 


Hodges  &*  Adams,  Printers,  21  Knapp  St.,  Bouoru 


TO 

MY    NOBLE,    WISE    AND    MODEST    FRIEND, 

UNEQUALLED    AMONG    MILLIONS 

IN    THE    READY,    JUST    AND    GENEROUS    APPRECIATION 

OF    GREAT    TRUTHS, 

EULOGIO   PRIETO, 

OF    CUBA, 

(Jifn'a  Ufllume  is  Effect  ton  atclg  ©eotcaUo  bg 

The  Author. 


CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

I NTRODUC  TION 


Discovery  of  the  cerebral  functions.  The  grandeur  of  its  scope  and  the  resistance 
of  mental  inertia.  A  few  honorable  recognitions.  The  Medical  Faculty, 
the  Scotch  Phrenologists,  and  the  Academy  of  Sciences.  The  Eclectic 
movement.  Position  of  the  medical  profession  as  expressed  by  Prof.  Gross 
and  others.  Discovery  and  statement  of  Sarcognomy.  Cerebral  physi- 
ology and  corporeal  psychology.  Practical  value  of  Sarcognomy  and  char- 
acter of  my  lectures  and  demonstrations.  Practical  certainty.  Future  of 
Sarcognomy  in  relation  to  medicine.     The  present  volume,  .         .         5- 

CHAPTER   II. 

dF  LIFE  AS  A  SPIRITUAL  POWER,  AND  ITS  LOCATION  IN  THE  BRAIN. 

Ancient  medical  philosophy  spiritual  or  vital.  Des  Cartes  the  apostle  of  modern 
scepticism.  His  visionary  dogmatism.  Prof.  Huxley  a  follower.  Medical 
scepticism  criticised  by  Dr.  Lionel  Beale.  Living  structures  confound 
materialism.  Unfairness  and  intolerance  of  medical  dogmatism.  Its  repu- 
diation by  Dr.  Reynolds.  The  unproved  hypotheses  of  scientists.  Physio- 
logical statements  of  Prof.  Bennett  and  absurd  theory.  Phenomena  of 
living  bodies  described  by  Dr.  Beale.  Phenomena  of  amoebae  and  white 
globules  of  the  blood.  Prof.  Ranvier's  statements.  Phenomena  of  bacteria 
and  vibriones.  Ciliary  movements  illustrated.  Movements  of  hydra.  Life 
in  simple  microscopic  structures.  Vegetable  life  similar  to  animal.  Illus- 
trative examples.  Haeckel's  wild  hypothesis  of  spontaneous  generation. 
Huxley's  admission  that  abiogenesis  never  occurs.  The  example  of 
Monera  refutes  materialism.  "Bastian's  description  of  amoebae  and  evasion 
of  the  issue.  No  anatomical  difference  to  explain  different  vital  endow- 
ments in  the  nerves.  Vitality  an  independent  and  permanent  existence 
which  should  be  honestly  recognized.  Total  failure  of  the  fashionable 
physiology  to  explain  muscular  motion  by  caloric.  Exposition  of  this  ab- 
surdity. Fallacious  ideas  of  the  action  of  the  brain  and  its  influence  on 
health.  Fallacies  in  education.  Chemical  constitution  of  living  matter. 
Brain  matter  different  from  Huxley's  protoplasm.  Oxygen  a  necessary  ele- 
ment. Bioplasm  cannot  be  chemically  produced.  Nervous  influx  indis- 
pensable to  life.  Life  dependent  on  nervous  centres  and  nuclei.  Comes 
from  the  nervous  system  and  leaves  from  the  brain.  Death  from  below 
upwards,  as  shown  by  Bernard.  More  important  to  energize  the  brain  and 
soul  than  to  cultivate  the  body.  Effect  of  dark  or  watery  blood  on  the 
brain.  Effect  of  pressure.  Effect  of  shower  bath  on  head,  and  of  ablation 
of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain.  Influx  not  exclusively  to  the  bra'.n  but 
also  to  the  ganglia.  Transference  of  senses  to  the  epigastric  region,  and 
co-operation  of  central  regions  of  the  body  with  the  brain.  Influence  of 
oxygen  similar  to  a  spiritual  atmosphere.  Influence  of  solar  plexus,  pineal  - 
gland,  and  cardiac  plexuses  and  ganglia.  Cerebro-spinal  system  primitive 
seat  of  life.  Development  of  the  human  embryo.  Report  of  M.  Gasparin  on 
Belgian  miners.  Cerebral  stimulants  a  substitute  for  food.  Something 
more  than  chemical  elements  necessary.  Spiritual  causes  equally  important. 
Life  arrested  when  transmission  from  brain  is  interrupted. 

Effect  of  injuries  of  the  spinal  cord.  Fatality  from  severe  laceration. 
Pathological  effects  of  spinal  injuries.  Effects  on  the  heart.  Analogy  to 
typhoid  fever.  Effects  of  injury  of  the  brain.  Typhus  fever  and  cerebral 
disease.     Effects  of  wounds  of  the  brain.     Bichat's  experiments  on  the  brain 


VI  CONTENTS. 

in  dogs.  Majendie's  injection  of  water.  Great  quantity  of  blood  in  the  brain. 
Effects  of  injuries  of  nerves.  Fallacy  of  Claude  Bernard.  Wasting  of  the 
muscles  from  lack  of  nervous  influence.  The  ganglionic  system  dependent 
on  the  cerebro-spinal.  Brain  controls  both  voluntary  and  involuntary  proc- 
esses,        .............         14—46 

CHAPTER   III. 

CRITICAL    DISCUSSION   AND    EXPOSITION   OF   ERRORS. 

Tenacity  of  the  old  ideas.  Centralization  of  life  in  higher  developments.  In- 
capacity to  realize  the  functions  of  the  heart  and  the  brain.  Disregard  of 
Gall  and  indifference  to  experiments.  Prof.  Mitchell's  experiments.  De- 
fective reasoning  capacity.  Origin  of  life  by  influx.  Sanative  power  of  the 
brain.  Philosophy  of  life.  Huxley's  admissions  as  to  the  vital  power. 
Opposition  to  psychic  science.  Importance  of  psychic  co-operation.  If 
life  is  but  the  forces  of  matter  the  largest  animals  must  have  the  most. 
Superiority  of  the  small.  Psychic  truth  demands  our  support.  Vague  ideas 
of  physiologists  :  Todd  and  Bowman,  Bennett,  Flint,  Bain.  Doctrines  of 
John  Hunter,  Dr.  Prout,  Muller,  Beclard,  Bichat,  Carpenter.  Life  is  not 
transformed  heat.  Carpenter's  absurdities.  Beale's  statements  as  to  the 
nerves.  Chemical  action  not  the  source  of  life.  Life  always  comes  from 
life,  as  matter  comes  from  matter. 

Ultimate  seat  of  life  in  the  tissues,  in  fluids  and  imponderables.  Living 
substances  in  the  air.  How  to  obtain  amoebae.  Vital  actions  of  minute 
bodies.  Their  psychic  life.  Character  and  action  of  bioplasm.  How  it 
forms  the  body.  Passage  of  vital  forces  by  contact,  in  and  out  of  the  body. 
Nerve  organization  beyond  the  microscope, «        47-65 

CHAPTER  IV. 

SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL  VIEW. 

Definition  of  Sarcognomy.  Its  origin.  Why  do  we  recognize  psychic  in- 
fluence in  the  body.  Contrary  to  prevalent  medical  doctrines.  The  mis- 
directed energy  of  the  medical  profession.  Incapacity  of  the  colleges  for 
psychic  investigations.  The  body  has  no  psychic  functions  in  man.  Con- 
scious life  in  the  brain,  physiological  processes  in  the  body.  Soul  controls 
both.  The  triple  reaction  is  the  process  of  life.  Vagary  of  Leibnitz.  Fail- 
ure down  to  the  present  age  to  investigate  these  problems.  The  five  great 
reasons  for  the  failure.  Ruskin's  view  of  it.  Gall  and  Swedenborg.  Pur- 
pose of  this  work.  Necessity  for  Sarcognomy.  Its  bases,  philosophical, 
physiological,  pathological  and  experimental.  The  triune  sj-mpathies.  Il- 
lustrations of  Sarcognomy.  To  be  treated  only  as  a  basis  for  healing.  The 
three  methods.  Indications  of  impressibility.  Psychic  treatment.  Man- 
ual treatment  on  brain  and  body.  Correspondence  of  soul,  brain  and  body. 
General  statement  and  directions  for  operating.  Laws  of  location  of  the 
organs,      . 66-81 

CHAPTER  V. 

THE  SPINAL  REGION  —  ITS  ANATOMICAL,  NEUROLOGICAL,  AND  THERAPEUTIC 

RELATIONS. 

Duty  of  the  healer.  Necessary  predominance  of  the  upper  and  posterior  re- 
gions. Their  antagonism  to  the  abdominal  region.  Upward  passes. 
Morbid  tendencies  and  vital  relations  of  the  abdominal  region.  Dispersive 
passes.  Medical  applications.  Spinal  region:  demonstration  of  its  impor- 
tance. Treatment  of  intermittent  fever  by  M.  Gondret  on  the  spine. 
Counter-irritation  at  the  origins  of  nerves.  Special  endowments  and  in- 
creased development  of  different  parts  of  the  spinal  cord.  Flexor  muscles 
governed  by  upper,  and  extensor  by  lower  portion  of  the  cord.  Importance 
of  the  cephalic  region  of  the  spine.  Its  brachial  plexus  and  phrenic  nerve. 
Its  extensive  distribution.  The  vertebral  ganglia  and  arteries.  Their  con- 
trol over  vital  powers  explained  anatomically.  Electric  experience  of  Dr. 
Rockwell.  Resuscitation  of  a  moribund  patient  through  the  cephalic  re- 
gion. Importance  of  the  cephalic  region  in  fevers.  Testimony  of  Drs. 
Gerhard  and  Beard.     The  upper  dorsal  nerves  and  cilio-spinal  region  at  the 


CONTENTS.  Vll 

second  dorsal  nerve.  Connection  of  the  cuneus  and  angular  gyrus  in  the 
brain  with  vision.  Testimony  of  Onimus  and  Legros  as  to  the  cephalic  re- 
gion. Thoracic  and  abdominal  divisions  of  the  dorsal  region.  Pulmonic 
influence  of  the  dorsal  region.  Cardiac  region  of  the  cord.  Caries  of  the 
spinal  vertebrae,  as  reported  by  Brodie,  showing  the  functions  of  the  cord. 
Pathological  observations  of  Dr.  Little.  Anatomical  connections  of  the 
upper  dorsal  region.  Treatment  of  hooping-cough  through  the  upper 
spinal  region.  Differences  of  the  upper  and  lower  dorsal  region  explained. 
Illustrations  in  consumption,  pneumonia.  Sympathies  of  the  chest  with  the 
upper  region  of  the  brain.  Influence  of  the  affections.  Illustrations  in 
sunstroke,  typhus,  and  insanity.  Connection  of  pneumonia  and  delir- 
ium. 

Relation  of  the  heart  to  the  dorsal  and  cervical  regions.  Illustrations  of 
the  lower  dorsal  region.  Connection  of  the  cephalic  region  with  respiration 
and  circulation,  through  the  phrenic  nerve,  ganglia,  and  plexuses.  Rela- 
tions of  dorsal  region  to  respiration.  Experiment  of  Onimus  and  Legros. 
Relation  of  the  diaphragm  to  the  spine.  Explanation  of  coughs.  The  most 
effective  current  for  stimulating  the  diaphragm.  Control  of  the  lower  dor- 
sal region  over  the  abdominal  functions.  The  respiratory  tract  on  the 
abdomen.  Experiments  of  Valentine  and  observations  of  Sherwood. 
Backache  from  constipation.  Opposite  tendencies  of  the  upper  and  lower 
portions  of  the  spinal  cord.  Power  of  the  lumbar  region.  Experiments  of 
Brachet  on  the  lumbar  region.  Experiments  of  Budge.  Anatomical  de- 
scription of  the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves.  Seats  of  sexual  functions.  Ob- 
servations of  Longet,  Breschet,  and  Brachet.  Sacral  and  hypogastric 
plexuses.  Budge's  sexual  centre.  Connection  of  the  sexual  and  muscular. 
Antagonism  to  brain  in  pelvic  region  and  lower  limbs.  General  view  of 
the  spine  and  its  nervous  control. 

Correlation  and  combination  of  functions.  Van  Kempen's  experiment. 
Roots  of  the  nerves.  Complex  relations  of  the  heart  with  ganglia,  phrenic 
nerve,  and  spine.  Relations  of  the  thoracic  part  of  the  cord.  Cervical 
ganglia  and  pneumogastric.  Relations  of  splanchnic  nerves.  Combina- 
tion of  brain,  lungs  and  stomach.  Connection  of  cardiac  and  pulmonary 
nerve  forces.     Importance  of  the  ganglionic  system,  .         .         .         82-124 

CHAPTER  VI. 

PRACTICAL     DIRECTIONS    FOR   THERAPEUTIC    SPINAL     TREATMENT. 

How  to  invigorate  the  brain  for  various  purposes.  Stimulation  of  posterior  part 
of  the  body.  Stimulation  of  the  cephalic  region.  Treatment  of  the  lungs 
through  brain  and  body  and  by  hsemostasis.  Treatment  of  diaphragm. 
Treatment  of  the  liver,  stomach  and  bowels.  Calorification  and  urinary 
organs.  The  Sexual  energies.  Treatment  of  paralysis.  Six  methods  of 
treatment.     Cerebral  paralysis, .         125-134 

CHAPTER  VII. 

RELATION    OF    THE   BRAIN   TO   VITALITY   IN    ITS   DIFFERENT   REGIONS. 

Division  of  the  brain  by  the  vertical  and  horizontal  lines.  Rational  illustration. 
Plan  of  the  human  constitution,  front  and  back,  above  and  below  the  ventri- 
cles. Fundamental  law  of  direction.  Action  of  basilar  organs.  Their  ef- 
fect on  the  body.  Coronal  organs  antagonistic  to  the  basilar.  Effects  of 
each.  How  the  paralysis  of  either  becomes  fatal.  Superior  vitality  of  the 
upper  surface  of  the  brain.  Anterior  and  posterior  basilar  organs.  Seats 
of  vital  force  at  the  base  of  the  brain.  The  anterior  basilar  region  and  its 
subdivisions.  The  gastric  region.  Seat  of  appetite.  The  love  of  stimulus, 
effect  of  its  development.  How  to  control  intemperance.  Medical  remedies. 
The  moral  and  religious  cure.  Effects  of  malaria  and  of  animal  food.  Treat- 
ment of  the  digestive  organs  through  the  brain.  General  character  of  the 
antero-basilar  region.  Calorification,  how  to  excite  it ;  how  to  protect  it. 
Effects  of  its  overaction.  The  respiratory  region.  Signs  of  pulmonic  dis-~" 
ease  in  the  mouth.  Region  of  Sensibility.  Its  confirmation  by  Ferrier. 
The  organ  of  Language.  Heating  and  cooling  the  temples.  Region  of 
Somnolence  and  its  mental  phenomena.  Anterior  coronal  region.  Tem- 
poral region,  ...  .......         i35-'45 


Vlll  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

ZON  AL  ARRANGEMENT  AND  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT  OF  THE  BRAIN. 

Explanation  of  Zonal  Arrangement,  with  illustrations.  Its  indications  of  con- 
stitutional development.  General  law  of  functions.  Vertical  Zone  of  Ex- 
citability. Treatment  on  the  cephalic  region.  Treatment  of  the  heart.  Of 
the  thoracic  region  and  of  the  liver.  The  Gastric  and  Abdominal  region,  and 
the  Crural.  The  Morbid  Zone  explained.  Hygienic  caution,  and  curious 
illustrations.  Relation  of  disease  to  the  brain.  Treatment  of  the  Crural 
region.  The  Sexual  region.  Treatment  of  special  functions.  Health 
and  disease.  Sleep  and  wakefulness.  The  ideal  powers.  General  vigor. 
Feverish  conditions.  Mental  soundness.  Warmth.  Mental  discipline. 
Nature  of  nervauric  treatment, 146-159 

CHAPTER   IX. 

HEALTH   AND    ITS   RESTORATION. 

Definition  of  Health  as  an  organ  and  faculty.  Why  that  name  is  used.  Effects 
of  the  organ  of  Health.  ^  Animation.  Health  associated  with  happiness, 
virtue,  and  activity.  Position  and  influence  of  the  organ.  Its  ethical  and 
spiritual  relations.  Vital  power  and  animation,  disease  and  death.  Func- 
tion of  the  shoulders  and  crown  of  the  head.  Relations  of  Health  to  ethics 
and  religion.  Its  position  in  the  brain  between  the  moral  and  physical. 
The  spiritual  as  the  support  of  physical  health.  Deficiency  of  Language  for 
nomenclature.  Bia,  Zoe,  Anima,  Animus,  Psyche,  Psychobiosis,  and  Psy- 
chodynamia  as  names.  Animation  and  Health.  Difficulty  of  expressing 
psychic  and  physical  life  in  conjunction.  Their  combination  in  the  superior 
posterior  region  of  the  brain  and  body.  Healthful  physical  and  moral  ex- 
ercises. Cultivation  of  the  sentiments  qualifies  for  healing.  Love  and 
Health  correlative.  Experience  of  Dr.  Jennings.  Personal  healing  by  New- 
ton and  others.  The  religious  and  spiritual  elements.  Necessity  of  sci- 
entific preparation  for  healing. 

Psychic  Treatment.  Permanent  or  constitutional  health  should  be  es- 
tablished. This  requires  moral  power,  not  passive  or  negative,  but  active  vir- 
tues. Power  the  element  of  success.  Pursuit  of  duty  the  only  satisfactory 
success.  The  higher  virtues,  heroic.  Happiness  may  be  brought  to  fami- 
lies and  a  perfect  education  to  youth.  Psychic  treatment  an  indispensable 
part  of  education.  Health  and  Virtue  twin  brothers.  Special  directions  for 
treatment  by  the  hand  and  the  battery,  ...  .  160-173 

CHAPTER  X. 

OPERATIVE    METHODS. 

Transmission  of  vital  power.  Proof  by  experiments  on  frogs  and  by  anatomy. 
Failure  of  electrical  experiments  by  eminent  physiologists.  Functions  of 
the  convolutions  which  they  could  not  reach.  My  reasons  for  neglecting 
galvanism.  Medical  opposition.  Psycho-vital  influences  most  appropriate 
to  the  brain.  Discussion  of  the  experiments  of  Fritzch  and  Hitzig.  How 
to  begin  experiments.  Use  of  plasters  and  other  agents.  Familiar  illus- 
trations of  Sarcognomy.  Pathological  illustrations.  Initiating  experi- 
ments. Vital  emanations.  Positive  and  negative  poles.  Evils  and  dan- 
gers of  electricity.  Relations  of  operator  and  patient.  Necessary  influences 
for  the  operator.  Spiritual  inspiration  ;  its  philosophy  and  power.  Power 
of  diagnosis.  Prof.  Draper's  testimony  as  to  the  spirit.  Conduct  in  the 
sick  chamber;  hygienic  precautions.  Dispersive  manipulations.  Non- 
conductors. Effect  of  passes.  Quackery  of  massage.  Activity  in  heal- 
ing.    Precautions  for  maintenance  of  health.     Dangers  of  contagion,     174-194 

CHAPTER  XI. 

NERVAURIC     THERAPEUTICS. 

Impressibility  the  first  question;  its  various  external  indications  and  causes. 
Influence  of  love.  Improvement  at  the  critical  period  of  life.  Test  by  the 
hand.     Test  by  the  eye.     The  receptive  or  impressible  condition.     The  use 


CONTENTS.  IX 

of  medicines.  Impressible  region  of  body.  Passive  and  active  methods. 
Influence  of  warmth,  food,  and  medicine.  Virtue  the  best  foundation.  Four 
controlling  powers  :  health,  brain  power,  vital  force,  sexual  development. 
The  shoulder.  Plan  of  the  human  constitution.  Parallelism  of  the  spirit- 
ual faculties  operating  through  the  brain,  and  the  physical  powers  dis- 
played in  the  body.  The  psycho-dynamic  health  power;  why  at  the  shoul- 
der; its  proximity  to  the  life  centres;  its  connection  with  the  spinal  centre 
of  power  and  ethical  region  of  chest;  its  approbative  character;  relation 
to  intercostal  nerves.  The  foundation  of  Sarcognomy.  Importance  of  shoul- 
der exercises.  The  shoulder  as  a  regulating  region  and  centre.  Treatment 
on  the  back.  Narrow  and  exclusive  views  deprecated.  Back  to  back  prac- 
tice. Fantastic  theories  and  unscientific  methods.  Narrowness  and  preju- 
dice. Importance  of  protecting  the  shoulders  and  back.  Nature  protects  the 
shoulders  and  back.  Nature  protects  the  vital  regions  of  head  and 
body, 195-207 

CHAPTER  XII. 

THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES. 

Brain  power  and  its  location.  Prior  development  of  the  brain.  False  doctrines 
corrected.  Superior  organs  necessary  to  vitaLpower  in  man.  Brain  power 
compared  to  Health  power.  Connection  of  the  latter  with  Moral  power  and 
conduct.  Local  treatment.  Vital  Force  and  sexual  vitality.  Locations  of 
Vital  Force.  Its  distinction  from  Health.  Influence  of  Vital  Force  when 
roused.  Its  connection  with  Nutrition.  Location  of  the  latter.  Its  in- 
fluence on  the  constitution.  Importance  to  invalids.  Treatment  through 
brain.  Digestion.  Its  connection  with  the  spine  and  with  the  gastric  region. 
Organ  of  Alimentiveness.  Its  depressing  influence.  Buoyant  Fortitude. 
Its  moral  association.  Fasting.  Influence  of  Firmness  pathognomically  ex- 
plained. Hunger  and  appetite.  Best  method  of  treating  stomach.  Physi- 
ological influences  of  Firmness  and  the  shoulder.  Gastric  irritations  and 
emesis.  Gastric  medicines.  Proper  manipulations.  Region  of  assimila- 
tive absorption.  Moral  forces  concerned.  How  to  promote  assimilation. 
Spiritual  relations  of  this  region.  Intellectual  and  occipital  influences. 
Retentive  power  of  the  latter.  Relaxing  power  of  the  former.  Contrast  of 
the  Adhesive  and  intellectual  regions.  Adhesiveness  on  the  occiput  and  on 
the  back.  Combativeness,  its  location  and  influence.  Importance  of  Ad- 
hesiveness to  patients.  Importance  in  society  and  business.  Retentive  in- 
fluence of  the  back.  Its  explanation.  Region  of  Business  Energy.  Effect 
of  spinal  injuries.  Of  repletion.  Co-operation  of  the  energies.  Conserva- 
tive and  destructive  agencies.  Upper  and  lower  part  of  the  abdomen.  Re- 
storative influence  of  Adhesive  region;  its  connection. with  Coolness  and 
Sleep.  Philosophy  of  the  production  of  sleep,  and  the  organs  concerned  in 
sleep  and  wakefulness, 208-225 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

THE   ABDOMINAL   AND   CRURAL   REGIONS. 

The  Gastro-enteric  region,  its  locations  and  treatment.  The  anti-abdominal  or 
tonic  (and  the  atonic)  region.  Its  accurate  demonstration  and  location  by 
European  physiologists  subsequent  to  my  discoveries.  The  brain  convolu- 
tions that  it  occupies  shown  in  engraving.  Its  psychic  functions.  Debili- 
tating influences  of  abdominal  region.  Philosophy  of  Intemperance. 
Its  medical  and  electric  treatment.  Illustrative  experiments.  Organ  of 
intoxication  discovered.  Remedies  for  gastric  derangements.  Philosophy 
of  absorbent  and  repellent  functions.     Modes  of  treatment. 

Abdominal  Locations.  i,  Epigastric  region.  2,  Assimilation.  3, 
Respiration.  4,  Calorification.  5,  Excitability.  6,  Lethargy.  7,  Sex- 
uality. 8,  Melancholy.  9,  Selfishness.  10,  Irritability.  11,  Abdominal 
functions  from  digestion  to  defecation.  12,  Disease.  13,  Expression. 
Philosophy  of  Calorification  and  Coolness.  The  lower  limbs.  The  thigh. 
Locomotion,  Nutrition,  Turbulence.  The  leg,  its  relation  to  evolution. 
Fanciful  notions  of  a  microcosm.  Range  of  forces  in  the  genesis  of  man, 
mineral,  vegetable,  animal,  radiata,  mollusca,  vertebrata,  aquatic,  aerial, 
mammalian.  Locations  of  animal  life  on  leg,  its  application  to  physiol- 
ogy and  therapeutics.  Suppression  of  inflammation  in  pneumonia  and  fe- 
ver, and  control  of  all  vital  functions  by  Haemospasia,        .         .         .         226-243 


X  CONTENTS. 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

PNEUMATIC   SARCOGNOMY. 

Exposition  of  Haemostasis  and  Dr.  Buckler's  experiments.  Dr.  Bevier's  practice. 
Drs.  Kellie  and  Robonan.  Superiority  of  Hsemospasia.  Junod  and 
Hahnemann's  case.  Rationale  of  Hsemospasia.  Balloons  and  caissons. 
Effects  of  light  and  heavy  pressure  on  muscular  and  nervous  systems.  Ori- 
gin and  reception  of  Junod's  discoveries  in  Hsemospasia.  Effects  of  Hse- 
mospasia. Summary  of  293  cases.  Professional  neglect.  Description  of 
its  success  in  thirty-three  cases.  Success  of  others.  Its  enlargement  by 
Sarcognomy.  Special  treatment  described.  Treatment  of  spine.  Aids  to 
diagnosis.  Various  effects  of  pneumatic  treatment.  Description  of  pneu- 
matic apparatus,    . 244-288 

CHAPTER  XV. 

PELVIC    FUNCTIONS   AND   ORGANS. 

JLumbo-sacral  region.  Importance  of  sexual  development.  Its  effects.  Injury 
by  deficiency.  Its  influence  for  health  and  development.  Conjugal  rela- 
tions. Centres  of  Love,  spiritual  and  physical.  Difference  of  the  sexes. 
Sensibility  of  the  womb.  Pelvic  disorders.  Value  of  treatment  on  the  back. 
Use  of  Helonias.  Medical  quackery.  Inguinal  region.  Uterine  region. 
Region  of  Sanity  and  Chastity.  Sexual  excitement,  its  control  and  its  seat 
in  the  brain.  Pathological  cases  illustrating  its  location.  Influence  of 
virility  on  Health  and  Vigor.  Health  as  a  co-operative.  Centre  of  cerebel- 
lum as  a  re-inforcement  of  Vitality.  Treatment  of  the  eyes.  Anatomical 
references  and  correlative  organs  that  sustain  vision.  Pathological  rela- 
tions to  insanity  and  nausea.  Morbid  tendencies  of  the  basilar  and  pelvic 
organs.  The  true  nature  of  insanity.  Its  location  in  the  brain  and  the 
body.  How  insanity  is  to  be  cured  by  treatment  on  the  body  and  the  brain. 
Counter-irritation  on  the  back  of  the  neck.  The  hypochondriac  region  con- 
cerned. Location  of  nausea  on  the  body.  The  colon,  cholic,  nausea,  vom- 
iting and  diarrhoea.  Nausea  of  pregnancy.  Influence  of  nausea.  Method 
of  its  treatment,        .  289-304 

CHAPTER    XVI. 

ANIMAL    MAGNETISM    REVIEWED    AND   RECTIFIED. 

Deleuze  and  EsdailJs   Works. 

Its  marvellous  phenomena.  Opposition  of  materialism.  Its  unscientific  char- 
acter. Its  neglect  by  the  medical  profession  and  cultivation  by  Egyptian 
priests.  Sarcognomy.  Deleuze's  "  Practical  instruction."  His  errone- 
ous theories  corrected.  His  formula  for  magnetizing.  The  scientific 
method  of  producing  the  results.  The  localities  on  the  head  and  the  body. 
The  evil  effects  of  the  unscientific  method.  Effects  of  the  downward  passes. 
Superiority  of  the  upward.  Nature  of  the  magnetic  seance.  Blind  empiri- 
cism. The  improper  method  of  removing  pain  or  disease.  Prevalence  of 
contagion.  Use  of  the  breath  and  of  water.  Method  of  waking.  Use  of 
magnetized  water.  The  baquet.  Exalted  powers  of  Somnambulism.  Their 
source  and  philosophy.  Explanation  of  the  power  of  operators  and  best  meth- 
ods. Blind  routine  of  magnetizers.  Failure  of  the  medical  profession.  Harts- 
horn's translation,  its  valuable  testimony.  Mechanical  ideas  of  the  medical 
profession.  How  to  produce  insensibility.  Testimony  of  Cuvier,  La  Place 
andGeorget.  Corroboration  by  Pyschometry.  Treatment  of  Dr.  Elliotson 
in  London.  Cloquet's  operation  in  the  magnetic  state.  Clairvoyance  of 
Miss  Brackett.     Duty  of  the  disciples  of  truth. 

Value  of  Dr.  Esdaile's  "  Mesmerism  in  India."  His  numerous  cases  and 
liberal  sentiments.  Facility  of  the  practice  in  India.  A  mesmeric  magician. 
Testimony  of  the  Catholic  Church  to  the  truth  of  animal  magnetism  and 
prohibition  of  its  practice.  Dr.  Esdaile's  first  experiments  on  a  criminal 
patient  described.  Great  increase  of  impressibility.  Therapeutic  benefit  of 
the  trance.  Description  and  explanation  of  the  processes  used  in  magnetiz- 
ing. Of  catalepsv  and  its  removal.  Intellectual  and  unintellectual  methods. 
Demonstrations  made  upon  a  blind  man.  Controlling  his  subjects  in  court. 
Practical  vaLue  of  Sarcognomy  in  India, 3°5_338 


CONTENTS.  XI 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

MECHANOTHERAPY  —  INCLUDING  MASSAGE. 

Mechano-therapy  a  quackery.  Works  of  Schreiber  and  Murrell.  French  names 
for  massage.  Pedantic  trivialities.  Superiority  of  methods  of  barbarians, 
Sandwich  Islanders,  Chinese,  Egyptians.  Painful  processes  of  mechano- 
therapy.  Superiority  of  those  not  taught  by  the  colleges.  Old  practice  of 
Drs.  Balfour  of  Edinburgh,  Grosvenor  and  Cleobury  of  Oxford.  Great- 
rakes'  cures  in  1662.  Collegiate  opposition.  Liberal  sentiments  of  Hoff- 
man. Professional  prejudice.  Mechanical  benefits  of  massage.  Preten- 
tious pedantry  of  the  books.  Ignorance  of  Ling,  the  author  of  the  Swedish 
movement-cure.  Practice  recommended  by  Schreiber.  Mechanical  treat- 
ment of  narcotic  poisoning.  Transfer  of  vital  force.  Treatment  of  sprains. 
Mechanical  treatmentof  the  tonsils,  the  womb,  tumors,  oedema  and  diseases 
of  the  eye.  Miscellaneous  imperfect  treatment.  Superiority  of  the  nervau- 
ric.  Professional  treatment  of  sprains.  Concussion  with  the  hands.  Jap- 
anese shampooing.     Summary  estimate  of  mechano-therapy,      .         .      339-362 

CHAPTER   XVIII. 

RATIONAL  PRACTICE  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY. 

The  proper  philosophic  view  of  medical  science,  sects,  and  prejudices.  False 
ideas  of  poisons.  Rational  practice.  Statements  of  Dr.  Grosvenor  Swan, 
Dr.  J.  P.  Chamberlin,  Dr.  Wm.  E.  Wheelock,  Dr.  A.  J.  Symes,  Dr.  Z.  L 
Baldwin,  Dr.  Orrin  Robertson  and  L.  A.  Hulse,  Esq.,  concerning  their  prac- 
tice, guided  by  Sarcognomy  and  Psychometry, 363-392 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

THE   HYGIENE    OF   SARCOGNOMY. 

Cultivation  of  the  higher  organs  indispensable.  The  various  methods  illus- 
trated. Effects  of  high  altitudes  on  the  lungs.  Importance  of  costal  res- 
piration. Illustration  of  the  subject  by  the  Georgia  Eclectic  Medical  Jour- 
nal. Relation  of  the  upper  thoracic  region  to  the  ethical.  Exercises  of 
the  limbs.  Influence  of  altitudes.  Importance  of  nutrition  to  the  brain. 
False  theories  of  a  medical  author.  The  principles  that  should  guide 
our  exercises.  Evil  effects  of  excessive  muscular  culture  and  passional 
excitement.  Plan  of  culture  proposed.  Cultivation  of  the  soul  and  relig- 
ious sentiments  as  the  basis  of  health.  Of  social  intercourse  and  smiles. 
Importance  of  activity,  energy  and  sport.  Causes  of  exhaustion.  Of  vocal 
culture  and  oratory.  System  of  culture  devised  by  Mr.  Checkley.  Treat- 
ment of  the  skin.  Tight  lacing.  Thoracic  hygiene  and  atmospheric  con- 
ditions,           393-419 

CHAPTER    XX. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  PRACTICAL  RULES  FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT. 

With  supplementary  suggestions  as  to  the  spinal  column,  ganglionic  nerves,  anat- 
omy of  the  thorax,  and  relation  of  the  limbs  to  the  trunk,     .         .  .        420-438 

CHAPTER   XXI. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

General  Statement. 

Nine  methods  of  electrical  treatment  :  galvanism,  primary,  secondary,  com- 
bined, static,  unilateral,  statico-chemical,  magnetic  and  electro-medical. 
Use  of  the  commutator.  Simple  stimulation.  Rheostat.  Use  of  the 
alternating  current  and  its  locations.  Anterior  and  posterior,  superior  and 
inferior.  Method  of  using  the  negative  pole.  Method  of  manual  and  of  elec- 
tro-medical treatment.  Nature  and  use  of  the  positive  and  negative  in  elec- 
tricity.    Static  electricity  and  magnetism, 439-454 

CHAPTER  XXII. 

REVIEW   OF    THE   CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF   ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The  galvanic  current,  the  Faradic  and  their  phenomena  —  their  taste  —  their  ac- 
tion on  the  muscles.     Negative  and  positive  currents.     Merits  of  galvanism, 


XI 1  CONTENTS. 

Faradism  and  static  electricity.  Their  reception  by  the  profession.  Elec- 
tricity as  a  test  of  death.  Heat  developed  by  the  current.  Sensations  from 
currents.  Value  of  the  Humboldt  battery.  Chemical  effects  and  prolonged 
influences.  Use  of  the  two-plate  battery.  Action  of  galvanism  on  motor 
nerves  and  production  of  increased  strength.  Effects  of  direct,  inverse  and 
alternating  currents.  Character  of  the  Faradic  or  induced  current  in  com- 
parison with  the  galvanic.  Experiment  on  vibrating  cilia.  Refreshing  and 
strengthening  effects  of  galvanism.  Exhaustive  effects  of  Faradism.  Ano- 
djme  effects  of  galvanism,  and  cases  requiring  Faradism  —  how  its  effects 
are  produced.  Cure  of  locomotor  ataxy  and  neuralgia  by  galvanism  —  its 
catalytic  effects.  Cutaneous  Faradization.  Cure  of  contractions.  Treatment 
of  antagonistic  muscles.  Harsh  effects  of  Faradism.  Remarkable  physio- 
logical errors  of  Prof.  Claude  Bernard.  Antagonism  of  the  sensitive  and 
muscular  systems.  Relation  of  the  nervous  system  to  growth.  Danger  of 
Faradization  on  the  front  of  the  neck.  Cures  by  galvanism  when  Faradism 
had  failed.  Effectof  the  interruptions.  Comparison  continued.  Direct  ac- 
tion on  the  muscles.  Penetrative  power  of  currents.  Stimulant  action  of 
Faradism.  Medication  by  electric  currents.  Removal  of  poisons  by  elec- 
tricity. Injurious  effects  of  the  common  batteries.  Advantage  of  the  muriate 
of  ammonia.  Action  of  galvanism  on  the  ganglionic  nerves.  Its  anti-spas- 
modic influence.  Distinction  of  voluntary  and  involuntary  structures. 
Galvanic  current  down  the  bowels  for  constipation.  Failure  of  Fara- 
dism. Differences  of  electrodes.  Interruptions.  Delicate  currents.  Prac- 
tical value  of  the  primary  current,  intermediate  between  the  galvanic  and 
Faradic, 455*498 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

THE   EXPERIMENTAL    INVESTIGATION   OF   MAN   AND   DEMONSTRATION    OF 

SARCOGNOMY. 

By  Illustrative  Experiments,        . 499-531 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC   APPARATUS. 

Electric  treatment.  Electricity  as  a  stimulant  and  in  cholera.  Batteries  for 
electro-therapeutics,  the  "different  cells  in  use,  their  penetrative  power. 
Combination  of  cell  and  coil.  The  common  portable  battery.  Electric 
currents  and  their  modes  of  application.  The  Faradic  current,  its  use  in 
infantile  marasmus.  Qualities  of  the  currents.  Galvanic  batteries.  Cur- 
rent measurement.  Connections.  Mode  of  application.  Important  im- 
provement. Electrodes.  Electric  measurements.  The  coil  and  the  cell 
combined.  Currents  applied  to  the  human  body  and  their  modification  and 
combination.  Movable  coil.  Standard  coil.  Electric  baths.  Static  elec- 
tricity in  nature.  Its  rationale  misunderstood.  Wires  and  electrodes. 
Static  treatment  by  currents  and  shocks,  not  Faradism.  Proper  construc- 
tion for  this.  Method  of  using  static  electricity.  Its  combination  with 
other  currents  and  with  magnetism.     Use  of  the  static  currents,         .         534"5^2 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS   GUIDED   BY    SARCOGNOMY. 

Electric  currents  and  batteries.  Treatment  of  Head  and  nervous  system, 
directions  of  authors.  Paralysis.  Cerebral  disorders  and  their^  treatment. 
Chorea  and  spasm.  Neuralgia.  Treatment  of  eyes.  Diphtheria.  Tooth- 
ache. Hydrophobia.  Treatment  of  Thorax.  Pneumonia.  Asphyxia. 
Consumption.  Pleurisy.  Diseases  of  the  heart.  Aneurism.  The  dia- 
phragm. Hiccough.  Treatment  of  the  Abdominal  Region.  Fevers. 
The  stomach.  Nausea  and  vomiting.  Cholera.  Constipation  and  hernia. 
Dropsy.  Rectal  diseases.  The  liver.  Electric  development.  Treat- 
ment of  Pelvic  Organs,  amenorrhcea,  dysmenorrhea,  menorrhagia 
and  parturition.  Hemorrhoids.  Stricture  of  "the  urethra.  Impotence  and 
spermatorrhoea.  Diseases  of  the  skin.  Treatment  of  limbs.  Use  of  ap- 
paratus. Batteries.  Static  apparatus.  Electro-puncture.  Cauteriza- 
tion,       ...  .  „  563-615 


CONTENTS.  Xlll 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

PATHOLOGICAL    DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY. 

Change  of  plan.  Concise  review.  Sympathy  of  brain  and  skin.  Climate, 
cold,  heat,  moisture,  electricity,  clothing.  Fever.  Meningitis.  Clammy 
sweats.  Electric  shocks:  Nervous  prostration  and  sweating.  Dr.  Luys 
on  the  intellectual  influence  of  the  skin.  Illustrations  of  cutaneous  an- 
aesthesia and  impairment  of  the  brain.  Eruptive  fever  and  cerebral  inflam- 
mation. Small-pox,  erysipelas,  and  scarlatina.  Typhus  and  typhoid  fevers. 
Sympathy  of  subjacent  organs. 

Pulmonary  Sympathies.  Correspondence  of  lungs  with  brain  and  re- 
lation to  the  Pons  Varolii  as  the  seat  of  respiratory  power.  Relation  to  the 
nose  and  mouth.  Effects  of  catarrh  and  asthma.  Sunstroke.  Experiments 
on  rabbits.  Consumption  and  its  psychic  symptoms.  Heat  and  perspi- 
ration. Bronchitis  and  affection  of  the  front  lobe.  Its  exhausting  effect. 
Sympathy  of  the  abdomen  with  respiration.  Pneumonia :  affecting  the 
whole  brain,  delirium,  heat  of  skin,  perspiration,  antagonism  to  abdom- 
inal organs.  Pleurisy:  its  relation  to  the  womb;  its  more  violent  manifes- 
tations. Laryngitis:  it*  influence  on  the  brain.  Sympathies  of  the  Heart  : 
Its  correspondence  in  the  brain.  Mania  from  heart  disease.  Prostration 
of  the  brain  and  impressibility.  Mistakes  of  carditis  for  brain  disease. 
Close  sympathies  of  heart  and  brain.  Different  effects  from  other  organs. 
Ganglia  in  the  neck.     Connection  of  apoplexy  and  hypertrophy  of  heart. 

Relations  of  the  liver  and  subjacent  region.  Disease  of  its  control- 
ling temporo-sphenoid  convolution.  Relations  of  different  parts  of  the 
liver.  Its  proximity  to  morbid  influences.  The  great  depression  of  spirits 
that  it  produces.  Its  influence  in  delirium  tremens  and  in  jaundice.  Dif- 
ference of  its  upper  and  lower  surfaces.  Morbid  character  of  abdominal 
inflammation.  Dysentery,  typhoid,  irritation  of  rectum  and  anus.  Melsena. 
Fevers  omitted. 

Sympathies  of  pelvic  region.  Relation  to  under-jaw  region  and  de- 
structive effects  on  nervous  system.  Illustration  of  this  by  orificial  surgery. 
Relation  of  womb  to  hypersesthesia  and  hysteria.  The  two  regions  of 
sensibility  in  the  brain  and  in  the  body.  Relation  of  uterine  disease  to  in- 
sanity. Sympathy  of  brain  and  body  not  uniform.  Pain  of  urethral 
caruncles.  Prostrating  effect  of  chronic  diseases  of  the  colon.  Statements 
of  Dr.  Prout.  Cases  of  rectal  obstruction  in  Ireland.  Injury  of  sacrum  in 
a  boy  —  of  coccyx  in  a  woman.  Fractures  of  thigh.  Mental  phenomena 
of  hysteria  and  quasi  disease.  Inflammation  of  the  bladder.  Influence  of 
the  sexual  faculties.  Physiological  explanation.  Extreme  contagiousness. 
Puerperal  mania.      Morbid  effects  from  glans  and  prepuce. 

Sympathies  of  the  limbs.  Correspondence  of  upper  and  lower.  Pas- 
sionate tendencies  of  gout  and  rheumatism.  Remarkable  effects  of  injuries 
of  the  knee  and  the  foot.     Conclusion, 616-666 

Glossary,    .  667-671 

Anatomical  Illustrations, 672-675 


PREFACE. 


In  this  volume,  prepared  in  the  very  limited  time  allowed  by  my 
engagements,  I  cannot  claim  that  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  is  either 
very  fully  or  very  accurately  developed.  What  time  forbids  to  me 
will  be  more  fully  accomplished  by  my  successors  ;  and  perhaps  in 
future  editions  the  necessary  emendations  and  additions  may  be 
made. 

Nevertheless,  it  is  a  fearless  solution  of  the  problem  of  soul  and 
body,  which  lies  at  the  foundation  of  all  philosophy  —  a  problem 
which  my  predecessors  generally  have  shunned  as  if  it  were  inacces- 
sible to  human  intelligence,  Gall  and  Swedenborg  alone  having 
attempted  each  a  partial  solution. 

The  correctness  of  my  exposition  of  the  triune  constitution  of  man 
is  sustained  by  the  experiments  which  I  have  for  many  years  been 
making  in  private  and  before  classes,  which  my  pupils  have  satisfac- 
torily repeated,  and  it  is  sustained  by  universal  experience  in  the  his- 
tory of  diseases,  which  demonstrate  according  to  their  locality  the 
laws  of  Sarcognomy.  It  has  also  a  beautiful  and  interesting  artistic 
illustration  in  the  varieties  of  the  human  form,  attitude,  and  gesture, 
which  I  hope  hereafter  to  present.  Nevertheless,  in  view  of  the 
history  of  scientific  progress  (which  shows  the  ability  of  ignorance 
and  falsehood  to  hold  their  ground  for  several  generations  against 
positive  demonstration),  it  would  be  folly  to  anticipate  a  full  and 
candid  investigation  of  Sarcognomy  by  the  leading  authorities  during 
the  remaining  years  of  the  present  century.  Candid  investigation 
of  strange  truths  is  not  the  habit  of  any  nation,  and  is  not  taught  in 
any  system  of  education  at  present.  The  experience  of  Hahnemann 
and  Beach,  as  well  as  prior  reformers,  shows  the  immense  intellectual 
inertia  of  the  colleges. 

The  scientific  innovator  is  compelled  to  realize  the  opposition  of 
blind  conservatism  as  Darwin  did  in  1845,  when  he  wrote:  "I  am  a 
bold  man  to  lay  myself  open  to  being  thought  a  complete  fool  and  a 
most  deliberate  one ; "  and  again  :  "  I  know  how  much  I  open  myself 
to  reproach  for  such  a  conclusion,  but  I  have  at  least  honestly  and 


2  PREFACE. 

deliberately  come  to  it."  Yet  these  conclusions  were  reached  by 
moving  along  in  accordance  with  the  general  trend  of  scientific  thought 
among  the  most  advanced  thinkers.  But  he  who  opposes  the  spirit 
of  the  age,  and  the  authority  of  all  the  universities  and  eminent 
authors,  cannot  reasonably  expect  justice  or  success  in  his  lifetime, 
even  with  a  strictly  demonstrable  science,  for  habit  and  prejudice 
are,  as  they  ever  have  been,  much  stronger  than  reason,  and  the  in- 
novator whose  knowledge  is  revolutionary  is  refused  a  Jieariiig  until 
he  has  gathered  a  considerable  and  influential  following.  To  gather 
such  a  following  and  win  a  personal  triumph  has  not  been  my  purpose. 
I  am  content  to  know  that  (whatever  errors  or  inaccuracies  I  have 
fallen  into)  I  have  surely  developed  eternal  truths  and  laid  a  basis  for 
the  philosophy  that  will  elevate  the  destiny  of  man.  Of  this  philos- 
ophy Sarcognomy  is  an  important  part. 

As  to  the  verity  of  my  experiments  on  the  brain  and  body  on 
which  the  science  of  Anthropology  rests  for  its  evidence,  I  refer  to 
my  experiments  before  public  audiences  in  New  York  and  Boston, 
to  the  reports  of  many  committees  of  investigation  forty  years  ago, 
especially  those  of  the  faculty  of  Indiana  University,  the  committee 
of  Boston  physicians  and  the  New  York  committee  of  which  Dr. 
Forry  and  the  poet  Bryant  were  members,  and  the  unanimous  testi- 
mony of  those  who  have  repeated  my  experiments  wherever  I  have 
taught,  including  a  number  of  eminent  medical  professors  who  have 
been  my  colleagues.  The  large  and  intelligent  medical  class  of  the 
Eclectic  Medical  Institute  of  1849-50  (then  the  leading  medical  col- 
lege at  Cincinnati)  (Prof.  Warriner  being  chairman)  expressed  their 
conclusions  as  follows  :  "  Many  of  us  at  the  commencement  of  these 
series  of  lectures  were  sceptical  as  to  the  impressibility  of  the  subject 
in  the  waking  state,  but  we  take  pleasure  in  announcing  that  the  re- 
motest doubt  is  now  dispelled.  We  have  seen  the  subject  deprived  of 
muscular  power ;  we  have  witnessed  a  great  increase  of  his  strength  ; 
we  have  seen  any  faculty  of  the  mind  brightened  or  subdued  at  pleas- 
ure ;  we  have  personally  performed  many  of  the  experiments  set 
forth  in  the  "Journal  of  Man,"  and  can  testify,  as  can  many  in  this 
city  who  have  witnessed  our  experiments  in  private  circles,  that  the 
half  has  not  yet  been  published  to  the  world."  The  frequent  repeti- 
tion of  my  experiments,  not  only  in  this  country  but  in  Great  Britain, 
by  the  late  Dr.  Spencer  T.  Hall  and  many  others,*  in  private  and  in 


*  I  have  not  thought  it  necessary  to  describe  in  this  volume  the  numerous  and 
marvellous  experiments  on  the  brains  of  adults  during  the  last  forty  years,  but  would 
mention  another  class  still  more  convincing. 

The  eminent  Dr.  Ashburner,  of  London,  published  among  accurate  and  well- 
authenticated  facts  the  statement  of  his  friend,  A.  Lidington  :  "  I  have  many  times 


PREFACE.  3 

public,  has  given  as  broad  a  foundation  as  could  be  demanded  for  the 
verification  of  such  discoveries,  even  though  they  constitute  a  com- 
plete revolution  in  Physiology  and  Psychology. 

The  "consensus  of  the  competent"  is  the  foundation  on  which  all 
established  sciences  rest,  and  the  competent  are  those  only  who  seek 
the  truth,  and  by  carefully  investigating  a  science  arrive  at  positive 
and  unanimous  convictions.  I  cannot  recognize  those  as  competent 
who,  when  scientific  demonstrations  are  made  known  to  them,  obey 
a  thoughtless  impulse  or  prejudice  by  neglecting  or  refusing  to  in- 
vestigate. No  matter  what  their  standing,  they  cannot  be  recognized 
as  competent  until  they  have  shown  their  competency  by  candid  and 
careful  investigation.  The  French  Academy  in  rejecting  Harvey 
proved  itself  incompetent,  and  professors  who  from  prejudice  neglect 
investigation  must  ever  be  accounted  as  incompetent  as  the  ignorant 
mob. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  unanimous  concurrence  of  all  who  have  be- 
come well  acquainted  with  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  demonstrates  its 
apparent  scientific  truth,  and  this  concurrent  sentiment  of  all  who 
have  attended  my  expositions  was  well  expressed  as  follows,  by  the 
students  attending  the  8th  session  of  the  College  of  Therapeutics  in 
Boston,  in  1887  :  — 

"  We  feel  that  we  have  been  very  fortunate  in  finding  so  valuable 
a  source  of  knowledge,  whose  future  benefits  to  the  human  race,  in 
many  ways,  cannot  be  briefly  stated ;  and  we  would  assure  all  who 
may  attend  this  college  or  read  the  published  works  of  Prof. 
Buchanan,  or  his  monthly,  the  "Journal  of  Man,"  that  they  will,  when 
acquainted  with  the  subject,  be  ready  to  unite  with  us  in  appreciating 
and  honoring  the  greatest  addition  ever  made  to  biological  and  phys- 
iological sciences." 

Among  the  competent  observers  may  be  mentioned  Prof.  G.  W. 
Winterburn,  who  as  editor  of  the  "American  Homceopathist"  expressed 
himself  as  follows  :  "  Having  been  cognizant  of  the  very  valuable  and 

excited  the  different  phrenological  organs  of  the  brain  of  this  child,  and  he  has 
answered  to  each  one  most  correctly ;  for  instance,  when  I  mesmerized  the  organ  of 
Tune,  he  has  declared  to  me  that  he  can  hear  beautiful  music;  and  so  with  Venera- 
tion, he  has  felt  irresistibly  impelled  to  pray  and  speak  of  God  and  heaven.  I  have 
more  often  operated  upon  little  children  than  adults,  purposely  to  convince  the  people 
of  the  truth  of  your  science;  for  surely  children  so  young,  and  many  of  whom  I  have 
never  seen  before,  could  not  be  guilty  of  any  deception." 

In  my  experiments  with  private  classes,  nearly  every  member  of  the  class  was  usu- 
ally made  a  subject  of  experiments,  which  was  not  practicable  with  larger  audiences. 
The  report  by  Drs.  Ingalls,  Mattson,  and  others  on  my  Boston  lectures  in  1843, 
said  :  "Most  of  us  witnessed  many  hundred  experiments  on  at  least  six  impressible 
subjects  —  one  a  gentleman  and  member  of  the  class,  whose  intelligence  and  moral 
worth  cannot  be  questioned." 


4  PREFACE. 

original  work  accomplished  by  Prof. Buchanan  in  physiology,  and  having 
seen  him  demonstrate  many  times  on  persons  of  all  grades  of  intellec- 
tual and  physical  health  the  truths  he  here  affirms,  the  subject  has 
lost  the  sense  of  novelty  to  us,  and  is  accepted  as  undoubtedly 
proven." 

This  volume  is  therefore  presented,  not  to  introduce  the  subject  by 
argument  and  evidence,  for  the  evidence  has  long  been  on  record, 
but  to  introduce  its  readers  to  a  portion  of  the  vast  science  of  Anthro- 
pology, the  future  guide  of  human  progress. 

The  knowledge  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy,  when  widely  diffused 
and  incorporated  in  popular  education,  will  bring  the  grand  philoso- 
phy of  Anthropology  into  familiar  contact  with  daily  life,  enforcing  its 
educational  principles  as  to  the  development  of  character.  It  will 
give  the  mother  and  father  a  power  of  controlling  their  offspring  in  a 
manner  heretofore  unknown,  by  which  the  development  of  both  soul 
and  body  may  be  gradually  carried  on  towrard  perfection,  freeing  the 
soul  from  selfish  vices,  freeing  the  body  from  disease  and  weakness, 
and  clarifying  the  mind  for  the  recognition  of  truth. 

In  the  treatment  of  disease  it  gives  many  suggestions  arising  from 
a  new  philosophy  of  life,  many  remedial  measures  now  unknown  in 
medical  colleges,  of  wide  application,  and  comprehensive  methods  of 
treatment,  which  upon  impressible  constitutions  produce  cures  so 
marvellous  and  so  speedy  as  to  excite  a  stubborn  scepticism  among 
those  who  have  been  kept  in  ignorance  of  the  powers  of  the  nervous 
system. 

There  is  a  large  class  of  persons,  constituting  a  large  majority  in 
southern  climates,  whose  constitutions  can  be  controlled  and  diseases 
relieved  by  nervauric  treatment  with  the  hand.  To  all  such  a  knowl- 
edge of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  will  constitute  a  protection  to 
health  and  a  prolongation  of  life. 

It  will  guard  them  also  by  teaching  them  how  to  make  a  proper 
jhoice  of  medicines  and  avoid  submitting  to  erroneous  treatment, 
prided  by  their  own  psychometric  skill. 

To  another  large  class  it  will  furnish  facilities  for  successful  electric 
reatment,  under  their  own  direction.  The  importance  of  thus  pla- 
:ing  scientific  treatment  within  the  reach  of  all  will  be  realized  when 
ve  reflect  that  there  are  no  diseases,  excepting  those  of  accidental  or 
:ontagious  origin,  which  may  not  be  warded  off  in  their  first  ap- 
proaches. To  teach  this  to  mankind  will  abolish  a  large  majority  of 
their  ill-health. 


CHAPTER  I.— INTRODUCTION. 


Discovery  of  the  cerebral  functions  —  The  grandeur  of  its  scope  and  the  resistance 
of  mental  inertia  —  A  few  honorable  recognitions  —  The  Medical  Faculty,  the 
Scotch  Phrenologists,  and  the  Academy  of  Sciences — The  Eclectic  movement  — 
Position  of  the  medical  profession  as  expressed  by  Prof.  Gross  and  others  —  Discov- 
ery and  statement  of  Sarcognomy  —  Cerebral  physiology  and  corporeal  psychology 
— Practical  value  of  Sarcognomy  and  character  of  my  lectures  and  demonstrations  — 
Practical  certainty  —  Future  of  Sarcognomy  in  relation  to  medicine  —  The  present 
volume. 

In  i 84 i  I  had  the  good  fortune  to  consummate  six  years  of  investi- 
gation of  the  cerebral  functions  by  the  discovery  that  the  functions  of 
the  human  brain,  instead  of  being  an  inaccessible  mystery,  as  they  have 
seemed  to  the  scientific  world,  were  really  the  most  accessible  of  all  the 
great  secrets  of  nature,  and  that  a  method  of  investigation,  the  very 
simplicity  of  which  had  caused  it  to  be  scornfully  overlooked,  was  com- 
petent to  open  the  citadel  of  life,  the  organ  of  the  soul,  the  seat  of  all 
consciousness,  all  faculties  and  passions,  the  organic  embodiment  of 
that  divine  principle  in  which  exist  all  the  potentialities  of  the  universe, 
and  consequently  the  basis  of  all  science  and  wisdom. 

Of  all  subjects  that  have  ever  interested  the  mind  of  man,  this  is 
beyond  all  comparison  the  most  important,  whether  we  consider  its 
scope  and' its  grandeur  as  a  philosophy,  the  light  which  it  throws  on 
all  other  departments  of  investigation,  or  its  immediate  practical 
utility  in  reorganizing,  correcting,  and  developing  therapeutics,  sociol- 
ogy, education,  religion,  pneumatology,  and  the  arts  of  human  expres- 
sion. Its  scope,  its  power,  and  its  grandeur  in  these  respects  cannot 
\>e  adequately  conceived  until  the  sciences  and  the  philosophies,  that 
must  result  from  such  a  discovery,  shall  have  been  developed  and 
published,  although  to  a  clear  intuitive  thinker  it  may  be  apparent, 
as  it  was  to  David  Hume,  that  in  mastering  Anthropology  we  conquer 
all  science  and  philosophy.  But  few  can  realize  this  fully  until  they 
become  acquainted  with  the  vast  extent  of  Anthropology.  To  many 
it  becomes  apparent  when  they  master  the  first  chapter  of  Anthropol- 
ogy—  the  science  of  Psychometry. 

Such  a  discovery  in  science  and  philosophy,  bringing  within  our 


6  INTRODUCTION.  [CHAP.    I. 

reach  a  larger  realm  of  truth  than  all  the  sciences  and  philosophies 
taught  in  the  universities,  was  like  the  discovery  of  Columbus,  which 
added  a  new  and  better  world  to  geographical  knowledge  and  national 
expansion,  the  initial  incident  which  marked  the  humble  beginning  of 
a  mighty  change  in  human  destiny  ;  and  if  it  were  not  the  still  exist- 
ing condition  of  the  human  mind  to  be  dominated  by  the  past  —  if  habit 
and  conservative  inertia  were  not  still,  as  they  have  ever  been,  the 
dominant  forces  of  human  existence,  the  authentic  announcement  that 
such  a  discovery  had  been  made  in  the  honorable  and  sincere  cultiva- 
tion of  science  would  have  commanded  the  attention  of  the  civilized 
world,  not  with  telegraphic  speed,  for  telegraphs  were  then  unknown, 
but  as  rapidly  as  the  mail  could  have  borne  the  news,  and  an  imme- 
diate investigation  by  all  the  colleges  and  learned  societies  would  have 
settled  the  question  in  the  public  mind,  and  made  the  year  1841  the 
most  significant  epoch  in  intellectual  history  —  the  year  in  which  man- 
kind added  demonstrable  psychic  to  demonstrable  physical  science, 
by  which  we  approach  nearer  to  the  world  of  causes  and  to  the  ele- 
ments of  divine  wisdom.  But  there  were  no  collegiate  organizations 
prepared  or  willing  to  look  to  the  future,  as  there  were  none  to  wel- 
come the  discoveries  of  Galileo  and  of  Harvey.  The  great  ear  of  the 
literary  world  was  still  turned  backward  to  catch  the  lingering  echoes 
of  the  crude  speculations  that  preceded  the  dawn  of  science,  for  the 
names  of  Plato  and  Aristotle  were  still  revered  in  the  universities. 

It  is  true  the  announcement  appearing  in  the  "  Louisville  Journal " 
was  copied  throughout  the  United  States,  that  my  experiments  on 
the  brain  were  immediately  repeated  by  Prof.  Mitchell,  of  Jefferson 
Medical  College,  and  that  many  repetitions  of  them  in  an  imperfect 
manner  were  made  before  public  audiences  in  this  country  and  abroad, 
while  I  was  myself  for  a  few  years  actively  engaged  in  presenting  the 
subject  by  lectures  and  experiments,  and  challenging  investigation  by 
the  scientific ;  but  it  soon  became  apparent  that  habit,  not  reason, 
governed  the  world,  and  that  a  professor  of  European  astronomy 
would  not  be  no  more  uninteresting  and  unwelcome  in  China,  than  a 
discoverer  presenting  the  key  to  a  new  world  of  science  in  Amer- 
ican colleges  or  scientific  magazines,  and  I  abandoned  the  thankless 
task  of  propagandism  to  confine  my  teaching  to  a  college  in  which  I 
addressed  my  own  pupils. 

There  were,  of  course,  some  honorable  recognitions  of  my  demon- 
strations (see  credentials  of  Anthropology  in  the  Appendix),  and  the 
"Democratic  Review,"  recognizing  logically  the  importance  of  the  dis- 
coveries, affirmed  that  all  prior  discoveries  in  physiological  science 
shrunk  into  insignificance  in  comparison  with  these  discoveries  in  the 
brain ;  but  it  was  the  only  magazine,  I  believe,  which  had  the  logical 


CHAP.    I.]  INTRODUCTION.  J 

capacity  and  the  manliness  to  make  such  a  statement,  although  it 
would  not  seem  to  require  any  great  intellectual  capacity  to  under- 
stand that  a  discovery  of  the  functions  of  the  brain,  which  reveals  the 
exact  capacities  of  the  soul,  and  the  mental  and  physiological  powers 
of  the  brain,  the  seat  of  life,  the  controller  of  all  physiological  func- 
tions, the  centre  of  all  physiology  and  psychology,  must  be  of  far 
greater  importance  than  any  scientific  discoveries  heretofore  made. 

I  cannot  speak  upon  such  a  theme  in  the  language  of  diffidence  and 
doubt,  with  reverence  for  the  wisdom  which  governs  the  world  (and 
forbids  all  rapid  progress),  for  the  true  discoverer  who  has  ascertained 
any  fact  is,  as  to  that  fact,  an  authority  superior  to  the  entire  world 
to  whom  it  is  unknown.  My  discoveries  of  over  forty  years  standing, 
often  verified  by  others,  and  never  refuted  or  seriously  impeached, 
challenge  attention  still,  but  I  present  them  only  as  a  teacher  to 
those  who  wish  to  profit  by  new  science,  without  seeking  to  force 
them  upon  the  attention  of  those  who  have  no  desire  to  enlarge  their 
knowledge  of  such  subjects. 

It  is  true  that  in  my  credulous  and  inexperienced  enthusiasm  I  did 
at  first  suppose  that  a  science  derived  from  and  resting  upon  experi- 
ment, and  eagerly  courting  investigation  by  the  experimental  method 
—  a  science  of  unequalled  importance  and  fascination — would  speedily 
interest  the  educated  classes  of  all  nations,  but  I  was  quickly  unde- 
ceived. Of  the  medical  professors  in  whose  halls  I  had  heard  the 
first  exposition  of  medical  science,  I  found  but  one  (and  he  the  most 
learned  and  distinguished)  who  had  either  the  interest  in  the  subject 
to  induce  them  to  investigate,  or  the  intellectual  training  and  knowl- 
edge that  would  have  made  them  fully  competent.  Under  his  auspices 
I  sent  an  account  of  my  discoveries  to  what  I  supposed  to  be  the 
most  competent  and  appreciative  body  in  Great  Britain — the  gentle- 
men who  had  maintained  a  phrenological  society  at  Edinburgh  and 
published  the  "  Phrenological  Journal,"  and  were  therefore  familiar  with 
novel  investigations  of  the  brain  ;  but  my  report,  though  authenticated 
by  one  whom  they  knew  as  a  distinguished  scientist  (Prof.  Charles 
Caldwell,  the  virtual  founder  of  the  Louisville  Medical  College),  was 
too  marvellous  for  them,  and  they  simply  filed  it  away  (like  a  caveat) 
as  a  document  fit  to  be  preserved  for  future  reference,  but  not  fit  to 
be  published. 

After  the  failure  with  the  Faculty,  the  failure  at  Edinburgh,  and  an 
abortive  attempt  to  procure  a  thorough  investigation  by  the  Academy 
of  Arts  and  Sciences  at  Boston,  medical  journals  being  closed  against 
such  investigations  as  mine,  I  thought  it  useless  to  seek  any  further  a 
decision  by  any  authoritative  scientific  tribunal,  and  united  with  other 
unconquerable  liberals  in  the  medical  profession  to  establish  a  liberal 


8  INTRODUCTION.  [CHAP.    I. 

system  of  medical  education  and  break  the  unreformable  intellectual 
despotism  which  had  held  and  still  holds  the  great  mass  of  the  med- 
ical profession.  That  effort  was  successful,  and  the  flourishing  con- 
dition of  the  Eclectic  party  in  medicine,  which  was  then  organized, 
gives  promise  that  in  time  there  will  be  freedom  of  investigation  in 
medical  study,  medical  practice,  and  medical  discovery. 

That  such  discoveries  as  the  new  cerebral  science  which  constitutes 
a  complete  Anthropology  were  entirely  inaccessible  to  the  mass  of 
the  medical  profession  under  their  old  code,  was  very  apparent ;  and 
that  they  would  not,  under  any  circumstances,  be  examined  by  the 
National  Association  which  dominates  over  the  profession  in  Amer- 
ica, and  therefore  that  it  would  be  folly  to  address  a  memoir  to  them 
or  invite  an  experimental  investigation  of  the  new  science,  I  was  very 
courteously  but  very  distinctly  informed,  in  a  letter  by  the  late  Prof. 
Gross,  in  1878,  who  was,  if  any  one,  then  entitled  to  be  recognized  as 
the  head  of  the  profession  in  this  country,  and  who,  appreciating  the 
impossibility  under  the  code  (and  the  unwritten  code)  which  governs 
the  Association,  advised  me  to  seek  some  scientific  body  outside  of 
the  medical  profession,  to  investigate  discoveries  which  belong  to  the 
sphere  of  medical  science  (of  which  biology  is  a  conspicuous  portion), 
entirely  unconscious  of  the  latent  satire  upon  his  profession  which  he 
expressed. 

I  was  previously  well  aware  of  its  truth,  as  a  memoir  upon  cerebral 
embryology  which  I  offered  the  National  Scientific  Association  at 
Cincinnati  in  1851  was  suppressed  by  the  intrigues  of  medical  oppo- 
nents who  desired  to  crush  the  movement  of  medical  liberalism  rep- 
resented by  our  college  ;  and  the  committee  of  investigation  appointed 
by  the  Kentucky  State  Medical  Society  at  my  request,  in  1877,  so 
entirely  neglected  their  duties  that  they  did  not  even  hold  a  meeting. 

Under  these  circumstances,  the  reader  will  not  wonder  that  this 
work  comes  forth,  as  a  manual  for  students,  on  my  own  authority,  not 
authenticated  by  the  medical  profession  or  any  collegiate  body, 
excepting  its  support  by  the  parent  school  of  American  Eclecticism, 
in  which  for  ten  years  my  teaching  was  the  recognized  philosophy  of 
the  Institute. 

The  present  volume,  however,  is  not  an  exposition  of  Anthropology, 
but  a  sketch  of  the  therapeutic  application  of  Sarcognomy,  published 
in  advance  of  its  proper  place  in  the  exposition  of  Anthropology,  to 
satisfy  the  demands  of  students  for  a  text-book  to  aid  in  retaining  my 
instructions,  and  to  reach  a  great  number  of  healing  practitioners  who 
need  an  exposition  of  the  science  which  makes  manual  healing  a 
scientific  art. 

This  application  of  my  discoveries  arises  from  the  fact  that  in  1842 


CHAP.    I.]  INTRODUCTION.  9 

my  discovery  of  the  cerebral  functions  was  completed  by  the  discov- 
ery of  the  sympathetic  relations  of  the  brain  and  the  body,  in  conse- 
quence of  which,  the  functional  operations  of  the  brain,  which  when 
confined  within  the  cranium  are  purely  psychic,  become,  when  trans- 
ferred to  the  body  by  the  laws  of  sympathy  and  the  laws  of  functional 
operation,  physiological  in  their  effects,  and  also,  by  the  inevitable 
manner  in  which  they  use  the  body  for  their  purposes  in  voluntary 
acts,  produce  the  same  effects  which  result  directly  from  the  laws  of 
sympathy  —  a  wonderful  illustration  of  the  ingenuity  and  divine 
wisdom  of  the  plan  of  the  human  constitution. 

But  the  reactive  effect  of  the  same  law  renders  operations  which 
are  purely  physiological  in  the  body,  such  as  circulation,  digestion,  or 
muscular  action,  in  their  reflex  influence  on  the  brain,  disturbing  or 
modifying  influences  of  psychic  life.  That  such  reflex  influence  is 
continually  in  progress,  we  readily  perceive  when  we  think  of  the 
effects  on  the  brain  and  mind  of  an  excessive  dinner,  a  glass  of  brandy, 
or  a  copious  inhalation  of  pure  air;  and  a  vast  array  of  mental  symp- 
toms accompanying  diseases  of  various  organs,  which  have  been 
observed  especially  by  homoeopathic  physicians,  carries  us  still  further 
into  a  recognition  of  the  special  influences  each  portion  of  the  body 
exerts,  in  its  irritated  or  inflamed  conditions,  upon  the  state  of  the 
mind. 

Thus  we  have,  by  rational  necessity,  a  science  of  cerebral  physiology, 
or  physiological  influences  of  the  brain,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  a 
science  of  corporeal  psychology,  or  influence  of  the  body  upon  the 
brain  and  mind.  In  all  of  which  we  understand  that  these  inverted 
or  reflex  sciences,  cerebral  physiology  and  corporeal  psychology,  are 
partly  sciences  of  sympathetic  association  and  reflex  influence,  and 
partly  sciences  of  functional  action,  as  the  vital  forces  in  the  brain 
act  directly  upon  their  subordinate  apparatus  in  the  body,  and  the 
organs  of  the  body  in  their  functional  action  directly  influence  the 
brain,  by  means  of  nervous  connection,  and  by  their  influence  upon 
the  blood,  which,  as  it  passes  through  the  body,  receives  and  carries 
along  the  influence  and  modification  produced  by  each  organ.  In 
addition  to  which,  each  organ  in  the  brain  or  body  is  compelled  for 
its  own  efficiency  to  use  its  correspondent  organ,  as  Combativeness 
uses  the  muscles  and  heart,  and  as  the  vigorous  muscular  and  cardiac 
action  rouses  the  combative  spirit  —  or  as  the  perceptive  organs  use 
the  eye,  and  the  eye,  in  its  visual  action,  rouses  the  perceptive  facul- 
ties. 

Thus,  we  have  a  science  of  cerebral  and  corporeal  correspondence 
and  association,  which,  above,  is  cerebral  physiology,  and  below, 
a  compound  science  of  corporeal  psychology  and  physiology  combined, 


IO       •  INTRODUCTION.  [CHAP.    I. 

which  I  have  called  Sarcognomy  ;  the  primitive  effect  of  any  excite- 
ment in  the  body  being  physiological,  and  the  secondary  psycho- 
logical. 

It  is  this  primitive  physiological  effect  to  which  this  volume  will  be 
mostly  devoted,  for  Sarcognomy  embraces  not  only  the  discovery  of 
the  sympathetic  psychic  effects,  but  the  still  more  important  principle 
that  each  vital  function  of  the  body  and  the  soul  is  expressed  at  the  sur- 
face of  the  brain  and  of  the  body,  and  that  for  every  function  there  is 
an  external  locality  at  which  it  may  be  reached,  and  stimulated  or 
tranquillized  by  nervauric  methods,  by  electricity,  or  by  heat,  cold,  and 
medical  applications. 

How  very  important  it  is,  then,  that  those  who  treat  human  diseases 
by  the  application  of  the  hand  or  by  electricity  should  know  the  in- 
fluence of  each  portion  of  the  surface,  and  of  the  currents  passed 
through  the  body  from  one  locality  to  another,  since  these  vital 
forces  which  have  been  discovered,  and  which  are  controlled  by  the 
hand  (and  the  battery),  are  not  merely  specific  and  limited  influences 
for  each  organ,  but  are  also  general  influences  for  the  brain  and  body, 
productive  of  general  conditions,  as,  for  example,  the  influences  at 
the  shoulder,  which  are  universally  tonic,  and  restorative  to  mind  and 
body,  the  irritations  of  the  abdominal  viscera,  which  are  peculiarly 
exhaustive  and  depressing,  and  the  pelvic  irritations,  which  derange 
the  nervous  system.  The  influence  of  the  electric  hygienic  current 
animates  every  function  of  life,  and  every  current  through  the  body 
produces  specific  physiological  and  psychic  effects.  This  gives  us  an 
entirely  new  conception  of  the  vital  forces  of  the  human  constitution. 

The  principles  of  Sarcognomy  were  very  briefly  presented  in  my 
system  of  Anthropology  thirty-five  years  ago,  but  without  the  full- 
ness of  directions  necessary  to  guide  the  medical  practitioner  in  its 
application.  When  I  resumed  medical  instruction  in  1877,  I  began  to 
teach  classes  the  manual  treatment  of  disease  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  Sarcognomy,  giving  some  hints  also  as  to  the  collateral  use 
of  electricity  ;  and  in  the  College  of  Therapeutics  at  Boston  I  have 
given  a  complete  exposition  of  manual  and  electric  treatment.  But 
experience  has  convinced  me  of  the  absolute  necessity  of  a  manual  for 
habitual  guidance  of  the  practitioner  in  a  matter  so  entirely  foreign  to 
the  education  and  habits  of  society. 

My  lectures  have  been  invariably  accompanied  by  practical  demon- 
stration of  the  truth  of  all  that  was  taught ;  the  majority  of  the 
classes  have  been  sufficiently  sensitive  to  feel,  recognize,  and  describe 
the  influence  of  every  function  described  by  Sarcognomy,  often  throw- 
ing new  light  upon  the  subject  by  the  peculiar  manner  in  which  each 
one  was  affected. 


CHAP.     I.]  INTRODUCTION.  II 

As  a  method  of  healing,  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  was  regularly 
illustrated  upon  the  members  of  the  classes  by  treatment  of  their  own 
infirmities,  pains,  or  diseases,  as  a  demonstration  of  the  value  of  the 
methods  and  a  part  of  the  instruction.  There  was  no  more  hesitation 
or  doubt  than  in  the  collegiate  lectures  which  present  and  illustrate 
the  experimental  science  of  chemistry,  nor  will  there  be  any  difficulty 
or  hesitation  among  those  who  read  this  volume,  and,  entering  into 
the  spirit  of  the  subject,  engage  in  the  experimental  demonstrations 
which  would  make  them  practically  familiar  with  the  subject,  in  the 
manner  that  I  have  recommended.  Students  who  are  now  healing 
diseases  upon  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy  find  their  faith  and 
zeal  continually  increasing  by  the  results  of  practice.  But  I  presume 
the  result  may  be  different  with  those  who  approach  the  subject  in  a 
spirit  of  antagonistic  scepticism,  and,  without  proper  experimental 
inquiry,  attempt  to  form  opinions  by  a  priori  speculations  upon  the 
basis  of  their  knowledge  of  other  subjects  and  their  ignorance  of  this. 
Perchance  there  may  be  reviewers,  too,  who  would  rather  assail  than 
investigate,  and  who  do  not  feel  that  practical  ignorance  of  any  sub- 
ject is  any  disqualification  for  instructing  the  public.  This  volume 
was  not  written  for  that  class,  but  for  sincere  seekers  of  scientific 
truth  who  have  sufficient  sincerity  and  rationality  to  recognize  the 
same  qualities  in  the  author,  and  to  believe  that  a  system  of  science 
which  has  been  cordially  accepted  by  all  who  have  become  well 
acquainted  with  it  is  worthy  of  patient  study. 

I  might  have  introduced  a  long  array  of  the  unanimous  testimony 
of  those  who  have  felt  the  truth  of  Sarcognomy  in  their  own  persons 
and  of  those  who  have  been  healed  upon  its  principles  ;  but  such  is 
not  the  custom  of  scientific  teachers.  We  state  the  truths  that  exist 
in  nature  ;  we  state  what  we  have  found,  and  we  show  others  how  to 
find  the  same. 

That  which  I  have  taught  as  to  the  constitution  of  man,  which  I 
have  illustrated  in  thousands  of  experiments  upon  others,  is  also  to 
me  a  matter  of  personal  knowledge.  I  feel  the  influence  of  many 
localized  functions  described  in  Sarcognomy,  and  I  can  speak  of  them 
with  confidence  as  I  could  say  that  I  see  with  my  eyes  or  hear  with 
my  ears,  and  hence  I  do  not  feel  like  arguing  upon  such  subjects  or 
adducing  any  testimony  as  to  truths  which  are  so  familiar. 

Yet,  although  I  do  not  consider  such  testimonials  necessary  in  this 
volume,  I  am  not  indifferent  to  the  expressions  of  those  who  honor- 
ably and  sincerely  study  the  laws  of  nature  in  the  same  spirit  as 
myself,  and  who  by  their  observations  may  throw  additional  light 
upon  the  laws  and  phenomena  which  I  have  so  briefly  stated.  I 
would    therefore  earnestly  invite  the  correspondence  of   those   who 


12  INTRODUCTION.  [CHAP.    I. 

undertake  to  investigate  and  practice  in  this  new  department  and  to 
cultivate  a  science  which  time  has  not  permitted  me  to  elaborate  to 
the  perfection  in  which  it  may  be  enjoyed  by  posterity. 

I  shall  respond  with  equal  pleasure  whether  my  correspondent 
shall  enumerate  his  triumphs  or  state  his  difficulties  ;  whether  he 
desires  additional  information  or  contributes  facts  and  discoveries 
made  by  himself  in  the  boundless  field  of  Sarcognomy  and  Therapeu- 
tics. 

The  period  of  life  at  which  I  have  arrived  does  not  permit  me  to 
anticipate  witnessing  the  future  triumphs  of  Sarcognomy  and  its  rev- 
olutionary influence  on  medical  science,  or  the  new  aspects  its  thera- 
peutics may  assume  under  scientific  cultivation,  and  I  am,  therefore, 
more  desirous  of  communicating  with  those  who  become  my  co-labor- 
ers in  this  science,  of  which  this  volume  is  a  partial  exposition  only. 
In  another  volume  1  propose  to  show  the  existing  status  of  Electric 
Therapeutics,  and  the  fundamental  changes  in  its  practice  and  princi- 
ples which  are  made  by  Sarcognomy,  as  well  as  the  new  apparatus  by 
which  I  hope  to  enlarge  its  powers  and  render  it  more  worthy  of  gen- 
eral use  by  medical  practitioners  and  manual  healers.  With  or  with- 
out the  aid  of  electricity  Sarcognomy  must  become  a  very  important 
element  in  popular  hygiene  and  education  —  a  grand  agency 
for  the  prevention  of  disease  and  development  of  health. 

In  the  higher  civilization  of  the  approaching  century  a  knowledge 
of  the  constitution  and  laws  of  the  soul,  brain,  and  body,  which  con- 
stitutes the  only  philosophic  basis  of  hygiene,  therapeutics,  education, 
religion,  and  sociology,  will  become  the  most  important  acquisition  of 
a  liberal  education,  and  will  be  considered  a  necessary  element  in  the 
education  of  all. 

It  is  well,  before  offering  the  specific  therapeutics  of  this  volume, 
to  glance  at  the  entire  scope  of  the  Therapeutics  to  be  developed  by 
Sarcognomy.  If  the  healing  art  is  based  upon  the  true  science  of 
life,  and  if  (as  will  be  shown)  life  is  an  enduring  spiritual  power,  in  a 
being  of  wonderfully  complex  constitution  and  capacities,  which 
organizes  the  human  form  into  a  complete  expression  of  itself  and  of 
every  faculty  of  its  complex  existence  (designed  to  act  on  matter  here 
and  in  a  spiritual  world  hereafter)  —  each  faculty  having  a  double 
purpose,  spiritual  and  material,  and  having  a  specific  structure  for 
manifestation  in  the  brain  and  in  the  body — and  if  these  vital 
powers  (their  localities  being  shown  by  Sarcognomy)  can  be  reached, 
stimulated,  strengthened,  and  modified  by  other  means  than  drugs, 
with  a  precision  never  before  known,  may  not  this  new  therapeutics 
largely  supersede  the  drugging  method  by  virtue  of  its  simplicity  and 
safety  ?  To  what  extent  this  can  be  done  must  be  shown  by  the  stu- 
dents of  Sarcognomy. 


CHAP.    I.]  INTRODUCTION.  1 3 

To  a  large  class,  at  present,  the  vital  nervaura  has  proved  suffi. 
ciently  potent  to  make  medicines  unnecessary,  but  to  a  still  larger 
class,  in  the  temperate  zones,  it  is  not  sufficient,  and  cannot  be  sub- 
stituted for  the  cheaper  agency  of  medicine  to  any  great  extent. 
For  that  larger  class,  however,  we  have  the  irresistible  agencies  of 
electricity  and  caloric,  the  application  of  which  needs  only  the  guid- 
ance of  Sarcognomy  to  which  this  volume  is  devoted.  With  such 
agencies  at  command,  enthusiasts  may  exclaim,  "  Throw  physic  to  the 
dogs  ;  "  but  medical  remedies  are  too  potent,  too  convenient  and  eco- 
nomical, to  be  discarded  by  those  who  understand  their  value.  Nor 
can  they  be  very  extensively  discarded  to  introduce  the  use  of  elec- 
tricity, until  its  application  shall  have  been  perfected  by  Sarcognomy, 
and  until  by  apparatus  different  from  any  now  in  use  it  shall  have 
been  made  more  genial,  safe,  and  curative.  The  new  methods  of  Psy. 
chometry  and  Sarcognomy  will  give  to  society  that  thorough  under- 
tanding  of  remedies  which  will  render  their  use  safe,  and  removes 
one  of  the  great  evils  of  the  old-fashioned  practice. 

In  this  volume,  the  nervauric  method,  which  uses  the  human  hand, 
will  be  fully  presented,  with  the  anatomical  and  physiological  bases  of 
Sarcognomy,  and  with  incidental  instruction  in  the  use  of  electricity. 
The  numerous  illustrations  of  Sarcognomy  in  the  principal  diseases 
will  be  briefly  stated,  the  important  psychic  laws  of  therapeutics 
will  be  explained,  the  mechanical  methods  of  controlling  the  circula- 
tion illustrated,  and  the  processes  of  Animal  Magnetism,  Massage, 
and  Psychic  Healing  reviewed. 

Boston,   1889. 


CHAPTER    II. 

OF  LIFE  AS  A  SPIRITUAL  POWER,  AND  ITS 
LOCATION  IN  THE  BRAIN. 

Ancient  medical  philosophy  spiritual  or  vital  — Des  Cartes  the  apostle  of  modern 
scepticism  —  His  visionary  dogmatism  —  Prof.  Huxley  a  follower  —  Medical  scep- 
ticism criticised  by  Dr.  Lionel  Beale  —  Living  structures  confound  materialism  — 
Unfairness  and  intolerance  of  medical  dogmatism  —  Its  repudiation  by  Dr.  Reynolds 

—  The  unproved  hypotheses  of  scientists  —  Physiological  statements  of  Prof.  Ben- 
nett and  absurd  theory  —  Phenomena  of  living  bodies  described  by  Dr.  Beale  — 
Phenomena  of  amoeba?  and  white  globules  of  the  blood  —  Prof.  Ranvier's  statements 

—  Phenomena  of  bacteria  and  vibriones  —  Ciliary  movements  illustrated  —  Move- 
ments of  hydra  —  Life  in  simple  microscopic  structures — Vegetable  life  similar  to 
animal  —  Illustrative  examples  —  Haeckel's  wild  hypothesis  of  spontaneous  genera- 
tion—  Huxley's  admission  that  abiogenesis  never  occurs  —  The  example  of  Monera 
refutes  materialism — Bastian's  description  of  amoebae  and  evasion  of  the  issue  —  No 
anatomical  difference  to  explain  different  vital  endowments  in  nerves  — ■  Vitality  an 
independent  and  permanent  existence  which  should  be  honestly  recognized  — Total 
failure  of  the  fashionable  physiology  to  explain  muscular  motion  by  caloric  —  Expo- 
sition of  this  absurdity  —  Fallacious  ideas  of  the  action  of  the  brain  and  its  influence 
on  health  —  Fallacies  in  education  —  Chemical  constitution  of  living  matter  —  Brain 
matter  different  from  Huxley's  protoplasm  —  Oxygen  a  necessary  element  —  Bio- 
plasm cannot  be  chemically  produced  —  Nervous  influx  indispensable  to  life — Life 
dependent  on  nervous  centres  and  nuclei  —  Comes  from  the  nervous  system  and 
leaves  from  the  brain — Death  from  below  upwards,  as  shown  by  Bernard  —  More 
important  to  energize  the  brain  and  soul  than  to  cultivate  the  body  —  Effect  of  dark 
or  watery  blood  on  the  brain  —  Effect  of  pressure  —  Effect  of  shower  bath  on  head, 
and  of  ablation  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain  —  Influx  not  exclusively  to  the 
brain  but  also  to  the  ganglia — Transference  of  senses  to  the  epigastric  region,  and 
co-operation  of  central  regions  of  the  body  with  the  brain  — Influence  of  oxygen 
similar  to  a  spiritual  atmosphere  —  Influence  of  solar  plexus,  pineal  gland,  and  car- 
diac plexuses  and  ganglia  —  Cerebro-spinal  system  primitive  seat  of  life  —  Develop- 
ment of  the  human  embryo  —  Report  of  M.  Gasparin  on  Belgian  miners  —  Cerebral 
stimulants  a  substitute  for  food  —  Something  more  than  chemical  elements  neces- 
sary—  Spiritual  causes  equally  important — Life  arrested  when  transmission  from 
brain  is  interrupted. 

Effect  of  injuries  of  the  spinal  cord  —  Fatality  from  severe  laceration  —  Patholog- 
ical effects  of  spinal  injuries  —  Effects  on  the  heart  —  Analogy  to  typhoid  fever  — 
Effects  of  injury  of  the  brain  —  Typhus  fever  and  cerebral  disease  —  Effects  of 
wounds  of  the  brain  —  Bichat's  experiments  on  the  brain  in  dogs — Majendie's 
injection  of  water  —  Great  quantity  of  blood  in  the  brain  —  Effects  of  injuries  of 
nerves  —  Fallacy  ofClaude  Bernard  —  Wasting  of  the  muscles  from  lack  of  nervous 
influence  —  The  ganglionic  system  dependent  on  the  cerebro-spinal  —  Brain  controls 
both  voluntary  and  involuntary  processes. 


CHAP.    II.  J  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  I  5 

The  medical  philosophy  of  to-day  is  low  in  the  trough  between  the 
great  waves  of  thought  which  once  touched  the  higher  realms  of 
being,  and  will  again  in  its  reaction  from  a  downward  career. 

The  old  medical  philosophy  which  exclusively  ruled  the  world  until 
the  17th  century,  recognized  the  spirit  or  pneuma  as  the  basis  or 
essence  of  vitality.*  Van  Helmont,  Stahl,  Harvey,  Hunter,  Cuvier, 
and  Bichat  were  vitalists,  recognizing  the  vital  force  as  distinct 
from  and  superior  to  the  chemical  forces  which  were  subordinate 
and  antagonistic  to  vitality. 

Des  Cartes  (1596-1650),  the  apostle  of  Scepticism,  led  the  way  in 
that  style  of  dogmatic  denial,  inspired  by  the  combative  animal 
nature,  which  has  done  so  much  for  the  limitation  of  human  knowl- 
edge and  the  diffusion  of  falsehood  ;  for  dogmatism  is  not  merely 
agnostic  and  sceptical  —  not  content  with  simply  ignoring  principles 
or  truths  that  are  great  and  wonderful,  but  associated  with  a  self- 
sufficiency  which  prompts  to  the  arrogant  presentation  of  a  priori 
hypotheses,  often  of  the  most  absurd  nature,  to  sustain  its  own  con- 
tracted views,  which  originate  in  the  rejection  of  evidence  and  neg- 
lect of  observation.  His  astronomical  system  of  vortices  was  but  a 
crude  speculation,  which  was  set  aside  by  the  scientific  researches  of 
Newton.  Equally  visionary  were  his  conceptions  of  the  human  con- 
stitution as  a  physical  body  operating  wholly  by  physical  laws,  but 
giving  lodgment  to  a  soul  in  the  pineal  gland,  which  was  simply  a 
spectator,  having  no  action  upon  the  body  and  receiving  no  influence 
from  it  —  a  baseless  notion,  more  fully  developed  afterward  by 
Leibnitz.  The  speculative  dogmatism  of  Des  Cartes  has  commended 
him  to  the  admiration  of  the  famous  modern  sceptic,  Prof.  Huxley, 
who  has  revamped  the  other  insane  notion  of  Des  Cartes,  that  ani- 
mals are  mere  machines,  operating  without  consciousness  or  thought, 
as  a  clock  or  any  other  physical  apparatus  —  a  very  logical  inference 
from  materialism. 

•  The  Cartesian  spirit  of  dogmatism,  limiting  the  mind  to  the  concep- 
tion of  physical  facts,  has  taken  possession  of  the  medical  profession, 
and  Dr.  Lionel  Beale  well  says  : — 

"The  disciples  of  the  new  philosophy  insist  that  there  is  but  one 
force  or  power  in  nature,  that  the  sun  is  the  source  of  that  force,  and 
forms  livers,  hearts,  lungs  and  brains  ;  and  that  every  living  thing  is 
formed  by  him  ;  that,  in  the  language  of  Bence  Jones  —  'The  one 
law  of  the  union  of  force  and  matter,  and  of  the  conservation  of 
energy,  obtains  throughout  the  organic  as  well  as  the  inorganic  crea- 


♦Van  Helmont  located    the  6oul  in  the  epigastric  region,  because  he  supposed 
the  brain  had  no  circulation  of  blood. 


1 6  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

tion.'*  I  feel  quite  sure  that  if  the  physicists  who  make  these  con- 
fident assertions  could  condescend  to  study  the  phenomena  of  very 
simple  living  things,  they  could  very  soon  discover  that  they  had  no 
case  at  all.  Physico-chemical  dogmatizing  of  this  kind  has  been 
going  on  for  twenty  years.  It  has  done  nothing  towards  unravelling 
the  mysteries  of  life  which  meet  an  honest  student  of  nature  at  every 
turn,  and  it  has  led  a  number  of  idle  people  to  believe  that  we  really 
know  a  great  deal  more  than  we  do  know."     v 

The  "simple  living  things"  which  confound  materialism  are  seen 
in  every  living  structure.  Such  structures  are  built  up  by  a  struc- 
tureless, transparent  jelly,  called  protoplasm,  or  more  properly 
bioplasm,  which  is  the  seat  of  life,  and  is  self-moving  with  motions 
for  which  no  scientist  has  ever  discovered  any  other  cause  than 
vitality  —  with  a  power  of  assimilating  and  vitalizing  dead  matter, 
and  a  power  of  organizing  structures  for  the  formation  of  which  no 
reason  can  be  given  except  that  their  formation  is  the  result  of  the 
vitality  which  maintains  the  mysterious  motions  of  the  bioplasm. 

Medical  dogmatism  is  not  philosophic  ;  it  is  not  a  faithful  seeker 
of  facts,  but  rejects  or  stubbornly  evades  those  which  might  give 
deeper  philosophic  views,  and  seems  to  hold  that  any  fact  contradict- 
ing materialistic  theories  may  be  ignored  entirely,  or  may  be  dis- 
carded on  any  frivolous  pretext,  and  that  any  author  who  records 
such  facts  should  be  suppressed  or  ignored.  Hence  a  large  amount 
of  most  valuable  scientific  literature  is  entirely  unknown  to  the  pupils 
of  the  colleges,  and  this  ignorance  is  firmly  maintained  ;  for  the  phy- 
sician is  ostracised  or  scoffed  at,  and  the  professor  ejected  from  every 
honorable  position,  who  treats  all  facts  with  fairness  and  makes  no 
secret  of  his  convictions.  Yet  all  are  not  governed  by  this  absolute 
materialism.  Dr.  Reynolds,  in  the  address  on  medicine  delivered  in 
1874  before  the  British  Medical  Association,  said:  "Physical  force 
may  be  compared  to  vital  acts,  but  life  itself  is  the  special  property 


*"Dr.  Tyndall  teaches  people  that  the  sun  "forms"  muscle  and  "builds"  the 
brain,  and  jet  omits  to  tell  them  that  such  very  rough  and  simple  pieces  of  mech- 
anism, comparatively  speaking,  as  water-mills  and  wind-mills  and  clocks  and 
watches  are  really  formed  and  built  by  the  sun.  This  omission  requires  an  explan- 
ation upon  his  part,  for  it  must  be  obvious  even  to  a  child  that  if  the  sun  can  form 
a  muscle,  and  build  a  brain,  it  ought  to  be  able  to  perform  such  comparatively  sim- 
ple operations  as  raising  a  wall  or  building  a  house  or  making  a  wheel.  Still  Dr. 
Tyndall  does  not  say  that  walls  and  houses  and  clocks  are  the  -workmanship  of  the 
6un,  though  he  has  nevertheless  affirmed,  without  explaining  what  he  means  by  the 
phrase,  that  lilies  and  verdure  and  cattle  are  the  sun's  workmanship." —  (Beale  on 
Protoplasm,  or  Matter  and  Life.) 

This  idea  of  Tyndall  does  not  differ  much  from  the  theory  of  Carpenter  that 
caloric,  by  transformation  into  vitality,  produces  the  vital  phenomena.  Writers 
who  ignore  life  cannot  avoid  falling  into  some  absurdity. 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  1 7 

or  the  condition  of  the  special  material  which  effects  that  peculiar 
relation,  and  it  is  as  far  from  comprehension  now  as  a  thousand  years 
ago."  To  the  suggestion  that  by  further  experimentation  we  may 
get  rid  of  the  term  and  the  idea  of  life  itself,  and  so  make  a  great 
advance  in  science,  he  says  :  "I  believe  it  will  not  be  done,  but  that 
there  will  ever  remain  the  same  kind  of  mystery  with  regard  to  life 
itself  .  .  .  that  still  shrouds  the  nature  of  the  simpler  forces, 
such,  for  instance,  as  gravitation  or  heat."  "The  view  that  is  taken 
of  the  correlation  of  vital  and  physical  forces,  when  it  assumes  the 
form  that  I  have  mentioned,  is,  I  think,  mischievous  in  therapeutics." 
He  refers  especially  to  the  abuse  of  electricity,  which  "has  again  and 
again  been  used  when  it  could  by  no  possibility  have  been  productive 
of  the  slightest  advantage,  and  when  the  production  of  such  enforced 
action  of  muscle  and  nerve  has  but  diminished  the  strength  and 
exhausted  both  the  energies  and  the  endurance  of  those  who  had  not 
one  grain  of  either  of  those  qualities  to  spare."  What  was  needed, 
he  says,  was  the  "conservation  of  the  central  nutrition,  and  a  conse- 
quent addition  to  the  stock  of  vital  force,"  not  "  Faradization,  alcohol, 
or  strychnia." 

Alas,  if  the  whole  tale  could  be  told  of  the  destruction  of  health 
and  life  by  false  and  narrow  medical  theories,  it  would  rival  the  hor- 
rors of  war. 

The  fact  that  chemical  manipulation  cannot  produce  the  most 
highly  organized  substances  and  structures  which  are  developed  in 
human  bodies,  does  not  embarrass  the  anti-vital  colleges,  for  they  can 
hold  on  to  their  improved  JiypotJusis  a  thousand  years,  and  if  at  the 
end  of  that  time  they  shall  have  produced  the  greater  portion  of  those 
substances  by  chemical  methods,  they  will  be  still  as  far  off  as  ever, 
for  they  will  be  unable  to  make  any  of  their  substances  act  as  living 
bodies  do,  and  it  will  still  be  as  apparent  as  ever  that  life  comes  only 
from  life,  and  never  from  mere  organization.  But  it  will  not  require 
a  thousand  years  to  improve  the  brain  development  sufficiently  to 
enable  men  to  investigate  in  a  candid  spirit,  and  give  due  weight 
to  facts  a  thousand  times  demonstrated.  Prof.  John  Hughes  Bennett 
gives  the  following  interesting  illustrations  of  vitality  :  "  Other 
movements  which  are  unquestionably  vital  occur  in  the  molecules  of 
the  yolk,  on  the  entrance  into  the  ovum  of  the  spermatozoid.  Here 
it  cannot  be  maintained  that  the  results  are  purely  physical,  because 
in  different  ova  we  see  such  widely  varying  effects  from  apparently 
the  same  cause.  Neither  can  it  be  attributed  to  any  direct  influence 
of  the  cell,  or  of  its  nucleus  —  the  germinal  vesicle.  For  example, 
an  egg  is  fully  maturated  in  the  female  organs  of  generation,  and 
would  prove  abortive  if  a  spermatozoid  did  not  find  its  way  through 


l8  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

the  zona-pellucida,  and  get  amongst  the  molecules  of  the  yolk.  As 
soon  as  it  does  so,  the  apparently  purposeless  Brunonian  movements 
receive  a  new  impulse  and  direction.  Both  spermatozoid  and  germi- 
nal vesicle  are  dissolved  among  them,  and  wonderful  phenomenon  of 
the  division  of  the  yolk  takes  place,  not  by  cleavage  or  other  action 
of  the  cell-wall  or  nucleus,  but  by  the  separation  of  the  mass  into 
two  masses  instead  of  one.  The  nature  of  the  phenomenon  in  this 
case  may  be  compared  to  what  is  observable  in  a  dense  crowd  of  men 
called  upon  to  pass  over  to  the  right  or  left  hand  in  order  to  settle 
any  disputed  question  by  a  majority.  At  first  unusual  confusion  is 
communicated  to  the  whole  —  some  hurry  in  one  direction,  others  in 
another  ;  but  after  a  time  is  seen  at  the  margins,  where  the  crowd  is 
least  dense,  a  clear  space,  which  gradually  approaches  the  centre, 
and  at  length  bisecting  the  whole,  produces  a  complete  segregation 
of  the  crowd  into  two  portions.  So  with  the  molecules  of  the  yolk 
in  the  egg  after  impregnation.  Their  movements  are  directed  by 
conditions  which  did  not  previously  exist,  and  a  stimulus  is  imparted 
to  them  which  causes  the  peculiar  result.  It  is  the  division  and  sub- 
division of  the  yolk,  wholly  or  in  part,  which  produces  the  germinal 
mass  out  of  which  the  embryo  is  formed,  and  this  not  by  any  direct 
influence  of  the  cell  or  nucleus,  but  in  consequence  of  a  power  inher- 
ent in  the  molecules  themselves, 'which  was  communicated  to  them 
for  a  specific  purpose." 

And  yet  this  same  Professor  J.  H.  Bennett  who  has  given  this 
clear  description  of  vital  operations  stultifies  himself  by  surrendering 
to  the  doctrine  that  life  is  "  but  a  condition  of  matter  "  —  ay,  the  elo- 
quence of  a  Demosthenes  or  the  poetry  of  Milton  is  "  but  a  condition 
of  matter." 

How  much  more  philosophically  does  Dr.  Lionel  Beale  treat  the 
subject  as  follows:  "Although  plants  and  animals  have  been  often- 
times compared  with  machines,  no  one  has  yet  taught  exactly  in 
what  particulars  any  plant  or  animal  is  like  any  machine.  For  my 
part  I  cannot  discover  the  slightest  resemblance  in  origin,  form,  com- 
position or  mode  of  action.  I  have  looked  over  and  over  again  at 
the  matter  of  the  living  plant  and  animal  in  which  and  by  which  the 
wonderful  changes  characteristic  of  it  are  effected  in  health  and 
in  disease,  but  I  have  seen  nothing  save  a  little  transparent,  structure- 
less, colorless,  semi-fluid  stuff.  I  even  see  this  move.  While  under 
my  observation  various  substances  of  complex  chemical  composition 
may  be  formed  through  its  agency,  but  the  highest  magnifying 
powers  do  not  enable  me  to  form  any  conception  concerning  how  this 
is  done.  The  living  matter  may  increase  in  size,  and  I  may  see  it 
divide  and  subdivide  so  as  to  give  rise  to  other  masses  like  itself.    But 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  19 

Jiozv  it  moves,  how  it  grows,  how  it  forms,  and  how  or  why  it  divides, 
I  cannot  tell.  I  know,  however,  it  does  not  move  like  any  mechan- 
ism of  which  we  have  any  experience,  for  it  moves  in  any  and  every 
direction,  and  every  minute  portion  exhibits  movements  of  its  own 
accord,  not  from  being  pushed  or  pulled  by  others.  There  is  no 
machine  that  moves  of  its  own  accord  in  any  part.  The  parts  of  a 
machine  are  moved.  The  living  matter  does  not  grow  like  a  crystal, 
for  the  stuff  of  which  it  is  made  cannot  be  detected  in  the  solution 
around  it,  nor  is  the  matter  deposited  particle  after  particle  upon  the 
surface."  "There  is,  as  I  have  shown,  a  great  distinction  between 
the  inanimate  grannies  or  molecules  which  may  be  precipitated  from 
fluids  and  the  living  molecules  which  spring  from  pre-existing  mole- 
cules. I  have  adduced  reasons  for  believing  that  living,  independent 
organisms  exist,  which  are  so  small  as  not  to  be  visible  by  the  highest 
power  until  they  have  lived  for  some  time  and  grown." 

"  A  number  of  minute  living  particles  being  suspended  in  fluid 
never  run  together  and  form  collections.  So  far  from  aggregating 
together,  they  divide  and  subdivide  and  multiply  enormously  in  num- 
ber. Inanimate  particles,  on  the  other  hand,  always  become  aggre- 
gated together  or  coalesce  to  form  larger  masses.  Under  no 
circumstances  known  do  living  particles  become  aggregated  to  form 
a  compound  living  mass,  but  each  absorbs  nutrient  matter  and 
divides  into  smaller  masses.  Indeed,  living  particles  multiply  in 
number,  emanating  from,  instead  of  collecting  towards,  centres!' 

There  are  numerous  phenomena  in  every  animal  body  which  are 
entirely  distinct  from  the  operation  of  physical  forces,  and  which  to 
a  clear  intuitive  mind  are  an  instantaneous  demonstration  of  a  con- 
trolling power  utterly  different  from  mechanical  and  chemical  energies. 
The  incessant  locomotion  and  change  of  form  occurring  in  amoebae 
and  in  the  white  globules  of  the  blood  cannot  be  explained  mechani- 
cally. These  white  globules  (which  in  man  vary  from  one  fiftieth  to 
one  five-hundredth  of  the  red,  in  number,  show  continual  changes  on 
their  surface,  putting  out  or  withdrawing  a  small  portion  of  their 
exterior,  like  living  amoebae,  until  after  a  few  hours  this  vital  prop- 
erty disappears  and  they  remain  spherical  and  at  rest.  Professor 
Huxley  describes  them  as  "  creeping  about  as  if  they  were  indepen- 
dent organisms."  Professor  Ranvier,  in  his  Lectures  in  the  College 
of  France  says  :  "  In  studying  the  amoebae,  white  globules  of  the  blood, 
and  the  lymphatic  cells  (organic  equivalents  of  the  nervous  system) 
we  have  stated  that  their  movements,  styled  amoeboid,  are  not  pro- 
duced by  accident  or  at  random.  The  prolonging  of  their  substance 
in  their  movements  shows  itself  at  the  points  where  the  cellules  are 
subjected  to  some  irritation.     The  cell  is  then  sensible,  and  its  sensi- 


2Q  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.     II. 

bility  excited  acts  on  its  mass,  which  responds  by  a  movement.  The 
amoeboid  cell  is  then  an  element  at  once  nervous  and  muscular,  but 
its  sensibility  and  mobility  are  not  localized  ;  they  do  not  depend 
upon  any  organic  differentiation  according  to  the  precise  expression 
of  naturalists.  This  differentiation  begins  among  beings  a  little  more 
complex  —  such,  for  example,  as  the  polypi."  The  white  corpuscle 
thus  has  the  character  of  a  minute  animal  or  animalcule,  and,  accord- 
ing to  one  microscopic  observer,  reproduces  itself  abundantly  by  dis- 
charging successively  the  nuclei  in  its  interior,  which  go  forth 
independently  originating  new  corpuscles. 

Unaccountable  are  the  movements,  continually  in  progress,  of  the 
granules  in  the  interior  of  the  white  corpuscles,  which  continue 
after  the  white  corpuscle  has  been  dissolved  and  its  contents  have 
escaped.  Nor  is  there  any  physical  explanation  of  the  movements 
of  bacteria  and  vibriones  which  originate  when  animal  matter  is 
undergoing  decomposition  in  fluids.  Still  more  mysterious  are  the 
strange  movements  of  conception  when  the  male  and  female  ele- 
ments unite  in  forming  the  embryo.  The  materialist  looks  at  this, 
and  instead  of  drawing  the  most  obvious  and  natural  inference,  and 
recognizing  the  presence  of  life-force,  substitutes  the  hypothesis  that 
in  some  future  age  we  shall  discover  the  physical  causes  which  he 
supposes  to  be  the  agents,  without  any  scieiitific  basis  for  his  opinion. 

The  origination  of  bacteria  and  vibriones  in  fluids  from  matter 
once  vitalized  as  vegetable  or  animal  substance  (independent  of  the 
atmospheric  germs  for  which  M=  Pasteur  contends  so  firmly)  would 
give  no  substantial  aid  to  the  hypothesis  of  the  materialist.  It 
would  simply  prove  that  life  is  capable  of  entering  into  very  close 
union  with  certain  albuminous  substances,  so  close  as  to  remain  in 
combination  after  the  substance  is  separated  from  the  body  in  which 
it  was  produced,  in  which  it  worked  in  combination  with  the  general 
vitality.  There  is  no  vital  chemistry  to  explain  this  combination  of 
organized -matter  with  vitality  except  that  which  I  have  derived  from 
Psychometry.  That  the  globules  of  blood  and  of  milk,  separated  from 
the  body  to  which  they  belong,  originate  new  forms  of  life,  as  bacteria, 
vibriones,  or  the  mildew  on  milk,  is  well  known  ;  and  it  has  also  been 
observed  that  the  general  vitality  does  not  always  control  these  sub- 
ordinate growths,  as  some  species  of  bacteria  have  been  observed  in 
the  fluids  of  various  plants,  such  as  the  Apocynum  Cannabinum 
(Indian  hemp),  Asclepias  Cornuti  (milk-weed),  and  Sambucus  Cana- 
densis (elder),  which  are  supposed  to  be  transformed  starch  globules. 
Bacteria  and  fungi  have  been  found  in  the  interior  of  the  brain,  of  the 
liver,  in  hepatic  cells,  epithelium  cells,  membranes  and  other  parts  of 
dead  animal  bodies  or  parts  of  living  bodies  undergoing  decay.     They 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  21 

have  also  been  found  in  eggs.  Their  occurrence  in  the  living  body,  cir- 
culating in  the  blood  (as  I  have  found  in  certain  patients),  is  simply  an 
evidence  of  the  failure  of  the  general  vitality  to  control  subordinate 
parts,  allowing  abnormal  action  to  take  place,  as  occurs  in  fever, 
inflammation,  and  gangrene,  when  vitality  is  injured  and  unable  to 
control  the  fluids  of  the  body,  which  continually  tend  by  their  chem- 
ical properties  toward  decomposition,  in  which  new  forms  arise  ;  for 
which  reason  antiseptics  give  great  assistance  to  vitality  in  fevers,  in 
controlling  the  fatal  septic  tendency  of  animal  compounds.  The 
bisulphites  of  lime  and  soda,  by  their  great  antiseptic  power,  counter- 
act the  degenerations  of  fever  and  the  tendency  to  evolution  of  bac- 
teria. 

The  foregoing  facts  show  that  structures  occupied  by  vitality  have 
the  power  of  organizing  and  vitalizing  matter  of  which  they  take 
possession,  imparting  thereto  vital  powers  which  may  be  retained 
after  disconnection  from  the  vitalizing  structure.  This  is  also 
signally  displayed  in  the  ciliary  movements  which  prevail  so  exten- 
sively throughout  the  animal  kingdom  (except  among  the  Articulata). 
The  moving  cilia  are  almost  always  present  on  the  mucous  and 
serous  membranes,  especially  of  the  digestive  and  respiratory  pas- 
sages, and  are  sometimes  found  on  external  surfaces.  These  cilia, 
varying  in  length  from  i-iooo  to  i- 12000  of  an  inch,  are  in  continual 
motion,  waving  like  a  field  of  wheat  in  a  breeze,  at  an  average  rate 
of  about  200  to  700  vibrations  a  minute  — a  movement  as  completely 
inexplicable  and  apparently  spontaneous  or  causeless  as  those  of  the 
amoebae  —  a  movement  which  propels  the  fluids  in  which  they  wave. 

The  still  more  marvellous  fact  concerning  the  cilia  is  that  they  re- 
tain these  vital  motions  when  detached  from  the  animal  to  which 
they  belong,  or  after  its  death.  A  piece  of  epitheliun  scraped  from 
the  throat  of  a  living  frog  will  continue  for  many  hours,  if  kept 
moist,  to  show  these  motions  of  the  cilia.  It  has  been  observed  for 
seventeen  hours.  The  continuance  of  the  ciliary  motions  after 
dcath  has  been  observed  as  long  as  sixteen  days  in  a  turtle,  after 
death  by  decapitation.  In  the  higher  animals,  however,  it  generally 
ceases  on  the  second  day,  in  accordance  with  the  general  law  that  as 
organization  advances  to  a  higher  grade,  life  is  more  concentrated  in 
the  headquarters  of  the  nervous  system,  and  less  identified  or  con- 
nected with  lower  structures. 

When  through  a  microscope  we  observe  the  cilia  in  motion,  we  feel 
that  we  are  in  the  presence  of  a  mystery  for  which  no  physical  laws 
give  any  explanation,  and  upon  which  physiologists  have  thrown  little 
light.  It  is  an  arbitrary,  mysterious  fact,  that  as  gravity  unaccount- 
ably draws  bodies  into  aggregate  masses,  life  unaccountably  draws 


22  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

atoms  into  organic  forms,  and  then  gives  them  most  mysterious  mo- 
tions. 

Dr.  Beale  offers  the  only  explanation  of  ciliary  motion  by  showing 
that  the  cilia  are  fine  tubes  occupied  by 
an  extension  of  the  bioplasm  which  is  found 
at  their  base.  This,  however,  only  shows 
that  the  mystery  consists  in  the  action  of 
the  bioplasm  that  impels  the  ciliary  motion. 
Spontaneous  action  is  the  mystery  of  life. 

Bennett  confesses  that  their  movement 
"  must  depend  on  an  inherent  power,  the 
nature    of  which    is    essentially  vital"  and 

A  few  cilia  from  the  frog's  tongue,  i  >  i 

showing  their  connection  with  the  "they  are  clear  and  structureless. 

bioplasm,  which   can  be    traced  Beale  -^     the     annexed    yiew     Qf      cilia 

into  each  cilium ;  magnified   1400  ° 

diameters.  from  a  frog's  tongue  magnified  1400  times. 

Where  life  exists,  it  needs  not  the  organs  to  which  we  are  accus- 
tomed to  refer  it.  It  works  in  a  simple 
jelly  ;  and  in  the  hydra  locomotion  is  effec- 
ted by  its  members,  in  which  we  can  find  no 
trace  of  either  a  muscular  or  nervous  system. 
Hence  it  is  evident  that  all  the  powers  of  life  which  in  man  are  so 
grand  and  complex  can  exist  in  a  rudimental  stage  in  any  bioplasm, 
and  from  that  bioplasm  elaborate  structures  of  a  higher  type. 

The  phenomena  of  life  extend  from  its  ample  development  in  man, 
all  the  way  through  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms,  to  the  border 
of  the  mineral,  and  its  essential  nature  is  everywhere  the  same,  vary- 
ing only  in  degree.  It  has  everywhere  a  sensibility  or  receptivity  for 
impressions,  and  a  reactive  power,  a  vital  force,  tending  downward, 
and  a  spiritual,  sustaining,  reproductive  force,  tending  upward,  mani- 
festing itself  in  the  conservation  of  the  species  and  in  forms  more  or 
less  beautiful  —  conditions  more  or  less  beneficent.  Minute  insect 
brains  have  a  psychology  as  complex  as  that  of  the  whale. 

The  simple  cells  of  animal  life,  consisting  of  protoplasm  and  nu- 
cleus, still  retain  a  psychic  capacity  by  which  they  select  and  appro- 
priate their  food.  The  Vampyrella  Spirogyrce,  consisting  merely  of 
protoplasm  and  nucleus,  attacks  the  Spirogyra  only,  for  food  ;  and  the 
simple  cellule,  the  Monas  amyli,  feeds  only  on  grains  of  starch. 
According  to  our  most  recent  authority,  A.  Binet,  the  minute  cellu- 
lar beings  revealed  by  the  microscope  all  have  a  "  complex  psychol- 
ogy." "Psychic  life"  (he  says)  "  like  its  substratum,  living  matter, 
is,  when  closely  studied,  an  exceedingly  complex  subject.  This  fact  is 
with  me  a  profound  conviction  ;  it  rests,  not  upon  abstract  ideas  and 
methods,  but  upon  the  observations  that  I  have  given,  —  observations 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  23 

that  are  not  founded  upon  my  own  personal  authority  alone,  but 
which  are  drawn  from  the  highest  authorities,  and  most  of  which  I 
have  been  able  to  verify  with  my  own  eyes." 

To  perceive  what  is  near  us,  to  pursue  and  attain  what  is  desired, 
avoiding  what  is  not  desired,  to  exercise  the  necessary  perseverance, 
and  suspend  action  when  there  is  no  motive,  or  increase  its  vigor  as 
required,  —  such  are  the  psychic  elements  that  belong  to  the  simplest 
animal  structures  revealed  by  the  microscope.  They  are  never  re- 
duced to  simple  irritability. 

If  this  occurs  anywhere  it  must  be  in  the  vegetable  kingdom,  but 
even  there  vitality  manifests  itself  in  a  rationally  or  properly  directed 
impulse  and  action  which  cannot  be  explained  by  chemistry  or 
physics.  There  is  a  feeble  remnant  of  that  intelligence  which  recog- 
nizes the  situation,  and  that  volitionary  impulse  which  acts  according 
to  circumstances.  When  the  radicle  and  plumule  of  a  bean  appear,, 
why  does  the  radicle  always  turn  down,  whatever  its  position,  and  the 
plumule  turn  up  ;  and  when  roots  grow  down  in  the  ground  is  not 
their  ability  to  find  their  way  something  that  resembles  intelligence. 

Darwin  says  :  "  It  is  hardly  an  exaggeration  to  say  that  the  life  of 
the  radicle,  endowed  as  it  is  with  such  diverse  kinds  of  sensitiveness, 
acts  like  the  brain  of  animals." 

To -the  modern  student  (says  Arthur  Smith  in  the  "  National  Re- 
view"), "the  plant  is  no  longer  an  inanimate  being,  but  stands  re- 
vealed as  an  organism  exhibiting  animal  functions,  such  as  breathing, 
circulation  of  the  blood  or  sap,  various  complex  movements,  and 
sleeping,  which  are  as  certainly  equally  well  defined  as  are  the  analo- 
gous traits  in  the  existence  of  the  animal." 

"  All  those  who  have  studied  the  habits  of  plants  know  full  well 
that  they  have  the  power  of  adapting  themselves  to  circumstances, 
and  have  many  movements  and  traits  that  are  the  very  reverse  of 
automatic.  Numerous  instances  might  be  pointed  out  in  which  not 
only  are  the  signs  of  sensibility  as  fully  developed  in  the  plant  as  in 
the  animal,  but  many  phases  of  animal  life  are  exactly  imitated.  Take, 
for  example,  those  wonderful  plants,  the  Mimosae,  sensitive  to  the 
most  delicate  touch.  It  folds  itself  at  the  close  of  day,  and  there  is 
no  doubt,  if  it  were  not  allowed  to  sleep  it  would  like  ourselves  soon 
die.  This  is  not  only  an  example  of  the  necessity  of  sleep  for  the 
regaining  of  nervous  energy  and  recuperation  of  brain  power,  but  a 
proof  of  the  existence  of  the  same  in  the  vegetable  kingdom.  Then 
there  are  the  carnivorous  plants,  the  Venus  fly-trap  (Dionaea),  for  in- 
stance, which  will  digest  raw  beef  as  readily  as  its  insect  prey.  A 
still  more  remarkable  instance  of  intelligent  plant  movement  is  found 
in  one  of  the  lowest  forms  of   the  vegetable  kingdom,  Pteronospora 


24  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

infestanSy  the  well-known  potato  fungus.  When  the  spore  cases 
burst  a  multitude  of  little  bodies  escape  ;  if  these  bodies  gain  access 
to  water  they  develop  a  couple  of  curious  little  tails,  and  by  means 
of  these  tails  they  swim  about  after  the  manner  of  tadpoles." 

To  ignore  the  existence  of  vital  power  as  a  peculiar  self-guiding 
energy  in  all  living  growing  beings,  seems  like  a  stolid  suspension  of 
our  reasoning  faculties.  Nor  is  it  at  all  unreasonable  to  believe  that 
this  vital  power,  after  its  separation  from  matter,  may  continue  to 
exist  in  a  different  sphere  in  accordance  with  the  doctrine  of  the  in- 
destructibility of  force. 

That  there  is  something  in  plant  life  correlative  with  humanity  is 
shown  in  the  admiration  and  love  that  are  given  to  flowers  and  trees 
and  the  actual  worship  of  flowers  by  some  Persians.  That  human 
vitality  can  in  some  cases  materially  aid  the  growth  of  plants  is  an 
opinion  that  some  profess  to  base  on  experience,  but  has  not  been 
tested  by  scientific  investigation. 

To  deny  the  existence  of  life  power  as  something  distinct  from 
matter,  is  to  assume  that  matter  may  come  together  and  originate 
life  by  its  accidental  grouping.  But  this  has  been  sought  in  vain  ; 
and  Haeckel  has  been  driven  to  rely  upon  the  Monera  or  Amoeba,  in 
which  the  marvellous  properties  of  life  are  manifested  by  an  appar- 
ently homogeneous  speck  of  gelatinous  matter,  as  the  "  primeval  par- 
ent of  life  on  the  earth!'  This  example  he  considers  of  "the  very 
greatest  importance  to  the  hypothesis  of  spontaneous  generation;" 
but  his  example  proves  nothing,  except  that  he  can,  as  he  says, 
"" easily  imagine  their  origin  by  spontaneous  generation;"  and  he 
must  also  imagine  a  miraculous  transformation  of  the  lower  into  the 
higher  order  of  animal  life,  proceeding  through  countless  ages  with- 
out leaving  any  record  ;  so  that  his  theory  at  last  is  but  an  affair  of 
imagination,  like  the  vortices  of  Des  Cartes.  If  this  "  semifluid, 
formless,  and  simple  lump  of  albumen,"  as  he  describes  it,  is  "the 
primeval  parent  of  all  other  organisms,"  why  does  not  a  formless  and 
simple  drop  of  albumen  from  an  egg  or  from  the  coagulable  lymph  of 
the  blood  manifest  the  same  active  life  and  again  act  as  "  the  prime- 
val parent  of  all  other  organisms  ? "  Why  do  we  never  see  an 
example  of  the  spontaneous  origin  of  vital  protoplasm  and  its  prog- 
ress as  a  primeval  parent  into  "  all  other  organisms  "  ?  Such  things 
never  occur  in  nature,  and  even  Prof.  Huxley,  the  champion  dogma- 
tist of  materialistic  writers,  said  in  his  article  in  the  third  volume  of 
the  "  Encyclopaedia  Britannica  :  "  "  Of  the  causes  which  have  led  to 
the  origination  of  living  matter  it  may  be  said  that  we  know  absolutely 
nothing  ;  "  and  again  :  "  The  fact  is  that  at  the  present  moment  there 
is  not  a  shadow  of  trustworthy  direct  evidence  that  abiogenesis  does 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  25 

take  place  or  has   taken   place  within   the   period   during  which   the 
existence  of  life  on  the  globe  is  recorded." 

The  example  of  the  Monera,  instead  of  helping  the  materialist,  is 
really  one  of  the  best  evidences  of  the  futility  of  their  hypothesis,  as 
it  shows  that  vitality  is  competent  to  display  its  powers  in  an  organi- 
zation of  the  simplest  character,  while  a  structure  apparently  the 
same,  without  the  vitality,  simply  goes  into  decomposition.  The 
vital  power  displayed  by  the  amoebae  are  not  explicable  by  any  com- 
plexity of  organization.  "The  amoeba/'  says  Bastian,  "  is  forever 
changing  its  form.  It  is  composed  of  a  clear,  jelly-like  material, 
endowed  with  a  superabundance  of  that  intrinsic  activity  character- 
istic of  animal  life  generally.  Those  internal  molecular  movements, 
indeed,  which  are  inferred  to  occur  to  a  marked  extent  in  all  living 
matter,  seem  to  take  place  in  it  in  a  pre-eminent  degree.  Its  whole 
substance  shows  a  mobility  of  the  most  striking  kind.  It  continually 
moves  through  the  water  or  over  surfaces,  by  alternate  projections 
and  retractions  of  its  active  body-substance."  Thus,  without  visible 
muscles  it  moves,  and  without  a  digestive  apparatus  it  takes  and 
digests  food,  taking  it  at  any  point  of  its  surface.  The  vital  powers 
are,  as  Bastian  says,  "  uniformly  possessed  by  all  parts  of  the  organ- 
ism," " composed  almost  wholly  of  undifferentiated  protoplasm." 
And  from  this  "undifferentiated  protoplasm,"  or  "  jelly-like  mate- 
rial," the  vital  energy  builds  up  the  muscular  and  other  organs.  The 
formation  of  muscular  and  nervous  tissue  by  vital  processes  acting  on 
the  jelly-like  substance,  is  the  conclusion  adopted  by  Bastian  ;  and 
what  other  conclusion  could  be  adopted,  in  view  of  the  facts  of  embry- 
ology, than  that  life  constructs  its  organs  in  the  first  place,  as  it  modi- 
fies them  continually  so  long  as  it  holds  them.  But  Bastian,  as  a 
materialist,  is  compelled  to  express  himself  vaguely  ;  instead  of  a 
vital  force  modifying  and  carrying  on  development,  he  regards  the 
processes  as  the  cause  of  the  development  —  thus  assuming  that  all 
the  powers  of  life  are  inherent  in  the  jelly-like  substance.  But  if 
this  were  so  (nature  operating  by  unvarying  laws)  we  might  expect 
that  all  such  jelly-like  substances  would  show  the  same  inherent 
powers  of  life,  and  if  they  did  it  would  give  great  plausibility  to  the 
position  of  the  materialist.  In  meeting  the  issue  Bastian  uncon- 
sciously resorts  to  a  subterfuge.  To  say  that  "vital  processes"  are 
the  cause  of  anything  is  as  lucid  as  to  say  that  locomotion  is  the  cause 
of  our  travelling.  Vital  processes  are  not  a  substance  or  a  power,  but 
merely  a  name  for  the  action  of  vitality.  If  we  deny  the  vitality, 
then  the  processes  are  merely  chemical  and  mechanical,  and  the  use 
of  the  word  vital  is  inappropriate. 

Organization  is  not  the  cause  but  the  effect  of  vitality.     The  most 


26  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

learned  anatomists  can  discover  no  organization  that  explains  the 
movements  of  amoebae,  and  they  seek  in  vain  for  any  perceptible  dif- 
ference in  peripheral  nerve  filaments  between  those  which  have  sen- 
sitive and  those  which  have  motive  power.  Vitality  or  vital  power  is 
continually  going  beyond  organization,  seizing  and  appropriating 
dead  matter,  and  endowing  it  with  vital  properties  by  the  union  with 
an  existing  organism  which  is  called  assimilation  ;  and  when  suffi- 
ciently developed  and  free  from  material  incumbrance,  it  is  competent 
to  take  hold  of  dead  matter,  producing  wonderful  changes  and  trans- 
mutations, or  moving  large  bodies  weighing  more  than  the  human 
form  with  great  force.  These  facts,  older  than  any  facts  of  modern 
scientific  discovery,  and'  in  recent  years  as  extensively  demonstrated 
before  intelligent  and  critical  observers,  are  unknown  only  to  those 
who  do  not  desire  or  seek  to  know  them.  If  eminent  scientists  close 
their  eyes  and  turn  away  their  heads  when  their  dogmas  are  demol- 
ished, they  may  nevertheless  live  long  enough  to  blush  for  their  wil- 
ful ignorance.  I  do  not  choose  to  follow  their  shameful  example  in 
ignoring  the  most  wonderful  Scientific  facts  established  in  the  nine- 
teenth century,  in  which  an  invisible,  immaterial,  intelligent  energy 
has  lifted  tables,  pianos,  and  other  heavy  bodies,  has  produced  chem- 
ical changes  in  liquids,  constructed  cloths  of  delicate  texture,  and 
produced  beautiful  drawings,  paintings  and  flowers. 

There  is  no  evasion  of  the  issue.  Either  chemical  and  mechanical 
forces  do  all  that  is  done,  or  a  higher  and  subtler  power,  called  vitality 
or  spirit  power,  does  what  is  essential.  If  that  higher  power  exists,  it 
is,  like  other  primitive  forces,  indestructible,  and  must  be  capable  of 
existing  in  other  forms  and  places  when  it  leaves  any  embodiment. 
Like  caloric,  it  passes  from  one  place  to  another  without  loss  ;  but,  un- 
like caloric,  it  has  an  organized  coherence  which  prevents  its  dissipation 
or  reduction.  The  honest  and  enlightened  scientist  who  is  not 
cramped  by  bigotry  or  dogmatism  is  bound  to  seek  the  existence  of 
this  force  after  it  departs  from  the  human  body,  if  it  can  be  any- 
where detected  ;  and  when  millions,  uncramped  by  prejudice,  have 
followed  and  recognized  it  in  spiritual  forms,  in  more  perfect  exhibi- 
tion than  it  makes  in  the  human  body  ;  when,  moreover,  the  research 
has  been  most  severely  critical  and  exact,  conducted  often  by  those 
whose  names  are  eminent  in  science, —  to  refuse  to  investigate  or  even 
look  at  the  results  of  investigation  is  the  same  exhibition  of  fatuous 
bigotry  which  was  arrayed  against  Galileo. 

The  fashionable  Physiology,  in  its  attempted  explanation  of  mus- 
cular motion  independent  of  life,  is  compelled  to  rely  upon  a  mere 
hypothesis.    It  pretends  to  account  for  muscular  power  as  a  result  of 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  2J 

the   combustion  of  elements  of  the   muscle  or  of  the  blood,   which 
furnish  carbon  and  hydrogen.* 

But  combustion  does  not  generate  contractile  power ;  on  the  con- 
trary it  generates  caloric,  which  is  an  expansive  power,  and  which,  so 
far  from  favoring  muscularity,  is  a  relaxing,  debilitating  influence  ; 
and  the  greatly  increased  combustion  of  fever  is  accompanied  by  the 
almost  entire  destruction  of  muscular  strength.  To  assume  that  an 
expansive  force  like  caloric  is  under  such  circumstances  converted 
into  a  contractile  force,  when  there  is  no  example  in  the  human  body 
or  in  any  department  of  nature  of  such  a  transformation,  is  a  most 
unscientific  and  unwarrantable  exercise  of  a  credulous  imagination. 
It  is  difficult  for  me  to  comprehend  how  men  of  scientific  ability 
could  have  yielded  to  so  evident  an  absurdity,  unless  we  suppose  that 
they  were  dominated  by  an  invincible  materialism  and  willing  to  over- 
look any  fallacy  to  sustain  that  hypothesis  ;  yet  even  Liebig 
assumed  that  muscular  tissue  became  disintegrated  and  oxidated  and 
thereby  evolved  caloric,  which  contracted  the  muscle  and  did  the 
work  i  !  !  Could  human  folly  go  any  farther  ?  Traube,  following  the 
same  baseless  theory,  maintained  that  muscular  action  was  due  to  the 
combustion,  not  of  muscle,  but  of  fats  and  carbohydrates.  Seriously, 
however,  if  such  a  notion  deserves  a  serious  argument,  how  does  the 
nervous  system  gather  and  hold  this  caloric,  to  discharge  it  on  the 
muscle  when  we  wish  to  act.  We  know  the  caloric  is  immediately 
diffused  according  to  the  laws  of  conduction.  Caloric  in  the  steam 
engine  manifests  force,  but  it  is  expansive  force  alone,  it  never  shows 
contractile  power.  Combustion  occurring  in  a  muscle  is  the  same 
chemical  fact  as  when  it  occurs  elsewhere,  and  must  produce  the 
same  effect  —  but  the  more  rapid  the  combustion,  the  greater  the 
heat,  the  more  the  muscle  is  relaxed.  The  muscle  is  much  more  con- 
tractile when  cold,  and  its  maximum  persistence  of  contraction  is  in 
the  coldness  of  death  —  the  rigor  mortis.  Contractility  belongs  to 
cold  and  magnetism,  but  the  attractive  power  of  the  magnet  is  de- 
stroyed by  heat.  Contractility  is  a  property  of  muscular  substance 
given  to  it  by  the  forces  of  vitality  in  its  organization,  and  controlled 
by  vitality  in  its  operation,  but  it  is  still  an  unsolved  mystery  in  phys- 
iology. Certainly  it  is  not  the  effect  of  combustion,  nor  is  it  any 
less  conspicuous  in  the  cold  muscles  of  the  fish,  in  which  there  is  so 


*  "According  to  Hermann,  who  has  specially  studied  the  chemistry  of  the  devel- 
opment of  heat  during  muscular  contraction,  muscular  work  is  the  result  of  the 
decomposition  of  nitrogenous  substances."  —  Dr.  Beard.  This  is  an  inversion  of 
the  truth.  The  decomposition  of  nitrogenous  substances  is  a  consequence  of  mus- 
cular action,  which  hinders  and  ultimately  arrests  all  muscular  action  instead  c\ 
causing  it. 


28  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.     II. 

little  of  oxidation.*  How  entirely  fanciful  this  oxygen  and  caloric 
theory  appears  when  we  attempt  to  apply  it  to  the  movements  of 
amoebae  ! 

It  is  very  remarkable  that  this  obvious  sciolism  should  have  been 


so  unanimously  adopted  with  unquestioning  faith  by  modern  biolo- 
gists, when  it  is  but  a  metaphysical  inference  from  their  a  priori 
dogma  of  matter  and  force,  as  the  cause  of  all  things,  though  a 
moment's  candid  reflection  might  have  suggested  that  when  one 
form  of  force  is  converted  into  another,  it  entirely  disappears  by  the 
transformation,  and  exists  only  in  the  new  form.  The  work  that  is 
done  in  a  steam  engine  is  commensurate  with  the  consumption  and 
disappearance  of  caloric,  but  there  is  no  evidence  that  caloric  is  ever 
in  the  slightest  degree  consumed  or  diminished  by  muscular  contrac- 
tion ;  on  the  contrary,  there  is  commonly  an  elevation  of  temperature 
about  two  degrees  by  vigorous  muscular  contraction.  All  the  caloric 
generated  in  the  human  body  by  the  consumption  of  oxygen  —  all 
the  oxygen  is  capable  of  producing —  exists  in  the  body  as  caloric, 
until  it  is  lost  by  radiation,  conduction,  and  evaporation.  The  inge- 
nuity of  chemists  has  been  severely  taxed  to  discover  the  chemical 
processes  in  the  human  body  which  are  adequate  to  account  for  the 
amount  of  caloric  that  we  know  is  generated  and  discharged  ;  and  it 
is  not  entirely  certain  that  they  have  discovered  a  complete  explana- 
tion. Hence  there  is  no  possible  opportunity  for  discovering  chem- 
ical or  combustion  processes  to  manufacture  something  convertible 
into  contractile  force,  when  all  that  can  be  discovered  is  known  to  be 
devoted  to  the  production  of  sensible  caloric,  which  is  discharged 
without  doing  any  work  in  the  body,  precisely  as  it  is  from  the  fire 
that  warms  our  apartments,  having  performed  its  sole  office  of  main- 
taining the  warmth  which  is  a  necessary  condition  for  the  control  of 
matter  by  spirit  and  for  all  physiological  processes.  I  would  not 
think  it  worth  while  to  discuss  seriously  this  physiological  sciolism  but 
for  the  fact  that  it  has  been  flourishing  for  near  thirty  years  and  still 
contaminates  our  whole  physiological  literature. 

As,  according  to  the  fashionable  physiology,  vitality  is  a  result  of 
chemical  processes  in  the  body,  to  which  the  convoluted  brain  contrib- 
utes nothing,  and  from  which  it  expends  a  great  deal,  we  have  been 
warned  against  the  effects  of  cerebral  excitement,  of  mental  cultiva- 
tion and  of  precocity,  as  though  the  action  of  the  brain  were  both 
exhausting  and  dangerous. 

All  of  these  theories  were  erroneous,  and  based  upon  inaccurate  or 
incomplete  knowledge.     Education  and  mental  excitement  are  injur- 

*  Salmon  and  other  fishes  display  wonderful  muscular  power  in  leaping  out  of  the 
water  ten  or  fifteen  feet,  ascending  waterfalls. 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  29 

ious  only  when  they  exercise,  excite,  or  fatigue  the  anterior,  intellec- 
tual and  sensitive  portions  of  the  brain,  instead  of  giving  normal  exer- 
cise to  the  whole  brain,  which  is  in  the  highest  degree  invigorating, 
and  far  more  beneficial  than  muscular  exercise. 

Among  medical  authors,  ignorance  of  the  brain  has  been  too  pro- 
found to  discriminate  between  or  understand  its  functions,  and  to 
know  that  the  frontal  region  alone  is  exhaustive  to  the  vital  forces, 
while  the  occipital  half  is  the  very  seat  and  source  of  vital  power. 

Not  understanding  this,  the  world  has  adopted  an  educational  sys- 
tem which  attempts  to  exercise  the  frontal  brain  alone,  which 
exhausts  the  physical  and  moral  energies,  undermines  the  health, 
injures  the  eyes  and  shortens  life.  Then,  attributing  these  evils  to 
education  and  cerebral  activity,  it  regards  the  latter  as  unfriendly  to 
health,  and  unsuitable  for  woman,  when,  in  reality,  a  normal  or  com- 
plete education  is  an  evolution  of  health  and  vigor,  and  the  cerebral 
activity  which  embraces  the  emotions  and  energies  is  a  grand  reno- 
vator of  health  and  invigorator  of  the  constitution. 

Influenced  at  first  by  the  old  theories  universally  taught  in  the  col- 
leges, it  was  difficult  for  me  to  understand  the  true  relations  of  the 
brain  to  vitality,  until  by  many  experiments  and  prolonged  study  it 
became  apparent  that  vitality  was  not  the  product  of  organization, 
but  organization  was  the  product  of  vitality,  which  is  the  organizing 
and  sustaining  power,  the  dominant  power  in  our  complex  constitu- 
tion. This  vitality  has  ever  eluded  and  baffled  the  medical  profes- 
sion, because  they  have  regarded  biology  as  one  of  the  physical 
sciences,  and  thus,  reversing  the  plan  of  nature,  have  regarded  com 
binations  of  matter  as  the  source  of  life  (although  they  have  been 
unable  to  produce  life  by  any  chemical  combination),  and  hence  have 
fixed  their  attention  on  matter  alone,  ignoring  life  —  treating  it  as  a 
phenomenon  or  a  fact  —  of  no  substantial  existence  or  power,  and 
entirely  refusing  to  follow  or  witness  the  evidence  of  its  continued 
existence  after  its  separation  from  matter,  because  such  evidence 
annihilates  dogmatic  theories. 

That  this  gross  materialism  has  usurped  the  control  of  biological 
science  is  sufficiently  evident  when  we  find  that  a  President  of  the 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science  could  give  a 
public  lecture  in  New  York,  denying  vitality  as  a  power,  and  assum- 
ing its  origin  from  mechanical  and  chemical  causes,  without  a  word 
of  protest  from  scientists,  clergy,  and  literati.  Such  scientists  expect 
by  tbermometric  observation  to^find  the  calorific  and  mechanical 
equivalents  of  thought  and  emotion,  as  Joule  determined  the  mechan- 
ical equivalent  of  caloric  !  They  are  altogether  too  serious  and  posi- 
tive to  see  anything  ludicrous  in  such  speculations,  which  have  been 


SO  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER. 

sanctioned  by  Huxley,  who  says  he  believes  "we  shall  arrive  at  the 
mechanical  equivalent  of  consciousness,^/^  as  we  have  arrived  at  the 
mechanical  equivalent  of  heat."  Of  course  then  we  shall  know  just 
how  many  grains,  ounces,  or  pounds  a  poem  or  a  philosophical  theory 
weighs.  Positive  dogmatism  never  knows  when  its  extravagance 
has  become  ludicrous,  and  Prof.  Huxley  afforded  a  good  illustration 
when  he  revamped  the  theory  of  Des  Cartes  that  animals  were 
machines  as  much  as  clocks,  moved  by  certain  physical  forces  with- 
out consciousness.  But  as  there  are  many  animals  with  which  he 
could  not  compete  in  the  knowledge  and  memory  of  localities  person- 
ally observed,  or  in  strength  of  parental  affection,  or  in  the  skill  and 
courage  of  a  combat  for  life,  his  logic  would  be  just  as  good  to  prove 
himself  an  unconscious  machine  ;  and  in  fact  a  dogmatic  philosophi- 
zer  who  cannot  or  will  not  reason  fairly  has  a  much  closer  resem- 
blance to  a  machine  than  he  would  suspect. 

Prof.  Huxley  is  a  brilliant  illustration  of  the  power  of  self-confident, 
undiscriminating,  and  reckless  assertion  in  imposing  upon  a  public, 
well  prepared  by  its  ignorance  of  the  subject  to  accept  him  as  an 
oracle.  He  asserts  "  protoplasm  "  to  be  the  basis  of  life  ;  but,  with  a 
slipshod  looseness  unworthy  of  a  scientist,  he  applies  that  term,  not 
to  the  true  bioplasm,  the  living  matter  which  displays  a  formative 
power  and  ail  the  endowments  of  life,  but  indiscriminately  to  dead 
and  living  matter,  to  muscular  and  nervous  structures,  solid  sub- 
stances ;  while  the  true  bioplasm  is  never  either  a  solid  or  a  structure 
of  completed  organization.  His  loose  expression  covers  all  albumin- 
oid materials,  and  in  fact  amounts  to  nothing  more  than  a  jumble  of 
all  substances  which  are  substantially  composed  of  something  near 
the  old  formula,  Carbon  51.8,  Oxygen  21.3,  Nitrogen  15,  Ash  4.25. 
Instead  of  calling  this  "the  physical  basis  of  life,"  he  should  have 
c  died  it  the  chemical  basis  of  the  animal  body.  In  his  loose  phrase- 
ology, roast  mutton  is  protoplasm. 

Such  language  reads  more  like  the  rattling  talk  of  a  physiological 
demagogue  {ad  captandnm)  than  the  accurate  expression  of  a  scien- 
tific mind.  To  this  mongrel  protoplasm,  dead  or  living  alike,  he 
ascribes  the  vital  capacities  which  are  never  found  except  in  the  liv- 
ing unorganized  bioplasm,  deriving  its  properties  from  a  prior  bio- 
plasm as  far  back  as  we  can  trace  its  ancestry.  But  Prof.  Huxley 
would  have  his  blind  followers  believe  that  whenever  the  carbon, 
oxygen,  nitrogen,  and  hydrogen,  etc.,  are  well  combined  in  due  pro- 
portion life  will  be  produced.  Nature  demands  a  prior  life,  but  he 
ignores  that  fact.  But  the  absurdities  of  Huxley's  assertions  are 
too  numerous  to  be  criticised  further.  The  Huxley  doctrine  of  the 
"Physical   Basis  of  Life"  has  been  refuted  by  J.  H.  Stirling,  LL.D., 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  5 1 

in  bis  work,  "  As  regards  Protoplasm,  in  relation  to  Prof.  Huxley's 
Essay  on  the  Physical  Basis  of  Life,"  and  this  refutation  has  been 
pronounced  "complete  and  final"  by  Sir  John  Herschel. 

We  are  compelled  to  choose  between  this  gross  scientific  material- 
ism—  which  annihilates  Pneumatology  and  Religion  — and  the  true 
science  of  life,  which  recognizes  its  potentiality  in  the  living  body, 
and,  accepting  the  irrefutable  and  superabundant  evidence  of  its  con- 
tinued existence  after  separation,  enters  with  pleasure  upon  the  pro- 
found and  sublime  study  of  pneumatology,  in  which  science  enters 
the  sphere  of  wisdom  and  love. 

If  life  is  a  reality,  a  power,  a  cause,  and  not  a  mere  phenomenon 
or  effect,  the  question  arises  where  it  is  located,  whence  it  comes, 
and  how  it  is  fed  or  sustained.  These  questions  must  be  answered 
before  we  can  determine  the  relation  of  vitality  to  the  brain. 

If  life  is  a  distinct  element  of  permanent  existence  —  as  permanent 
and  as  distinct  as  the  oxygen  which  constitutes  the  major  part  of  the 
human  body,  —  it  must  be,  like  other  elements,  derived  from  some 
abundant  supply  of  the  same  element,  and  if  it  increases,  it  must 
increase  by  influx  from  its  source,  as  do  the  ponderable  elements 
which  are  supplied  by  influx  of  food. 

The  ponderable  elements  do  not  supply  life,  but  only  an  apparatus 
for  its  use.  When  their  supply  ceases,  the  physical  apparatus  of  life 
is  lacking,  and  we  die  of  inanition  —  i.  e.,  life  leaves  a  structure  which 
is  incompetent  to  hold  it,  or,  rather,  to  which  it  cannot  hold. 

As  bodily  structure  comes  from  material  influx,  it  is  equally  true 
that  all  life  is  from  influx.  There  is  no  such  thing'as  life  inherent 
in  structure,  all  life  being  influx,  and  this  becomes  evident  by 
a  brief  and  simple  course  of  reasoning. 

The  life  of  any  limb,  or  other  part  of  the  body,  depends  immedi- 
ately upon  the  influx  of  blood,  and  its  death  follows  the  entire  loss  or 
removal  of  the  blood.  When  the  blood  is  excluded  from  a  muscle  it 
is  benumbed,  and  if  the  exclusion  continues  it  produces  gangrene  (total 
death).  The  increased  development  of  vitality  which  comes  from  an 
increased  supply  of  blood  is  seen  when  the  circulation  of  the  face  is 
increased  by  section  of  the  cervical  ganglionic  nerves.  In  these 
cases  the  evolution  of  heat  is  greater,  the  sensibility  longer  resists 
the  influence  of  chloroform,  the  rigor  mortis  is  later  in  its  appear- 
ance, and  putrefaction  does  not  begin  so  soon.  But  the  blood  has 
no  more  inherent  vitality  than  the  limb.  If  it  stagnated  in  the  limb, 
the  limb  and  the  blood  would  die  together.  It  obtains  the  condi- 
tions  of  vitality  in  the  lungs,  and  dies  when  deprived  of  those  condi- 
tions. But  it  is  not  the  structure  of  the  lungs  that  imparts  the 
conditions  ;  it  is  the  air  that  enters  the  lungs,  without  which  influx 


3-  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

lungs,  blood,  and  organs  all  die.  Thus  there  appears  to  be  an  influx 
through  the  head,  by  the  trachea,  of  a  vitalizing  element,  which  we 
call  oxygen,  which  is  a  magazine  of  the  conditions  necessary  to  vital- 
ity, but  not  of  vitality  itself.  Food  supplies  the  physical  elements, 
and  the  continued  influx  of  both  is  essential  to  life,  but  does  not 
make  life.  The  limb  that  is  supplied  by  alimentation  and  respira- 
tion with  good  blood  is  not  thereby  kept  alive,  but  only  in  a  viable 
condition. 

The  material  element  capable  of  forming  the  structures  that  mani- 
fest life  is  a  substance  similar  to  albumen,  in  which  carbon  is  a  little 
more  than  half.  The  solid  elements  of  flesh  and  blood  are  compounds 
of  which  the  average  composition  is  very  near  this  formula  :  Carbon 
51.9,  Oxygen  21.3,  Nitrogen  15,  Hydrogen  7.6,  Mineral  elements  4.3. 
In  fibrin  there  is  three  per  cent,  more  of  carbon  and  a  trifle  less  of 
hydrogen.  In  the  nervous  system  this  albuminous  or  protein  ele- 
ment is  associated  with  a  quantity  of  phosphorized  fat  of  variable 
amount,  sometimes  an  equal  quantity  or  even  a  trifle  more,  sometimes 
only  half  as  much.  In  the  albumen  of  the  blood,  which  corresponds 
nearly  with  muscular  substance,  Mulder  found  400  atoms  of  carbon, 
310  of  hydrogen,  120  of  oxygen,  50  of  nitrogen,  2  of  sulphur,  and  1 
of  phosphorus.  In  the  nervous  matter  of  the  brain  and  nerves  the 
chemical  character  is  materially  different,  as  the  fatty  matter,  which 
is  often  one  half  of  its  substance  (excluding  water),  contains  almost 
exactly  the  same  number  of  atoms  of  hydrogen  as  of  carbon.  The 
brain,  therefore,  is  distinguished  from  the  rest  of  the  body  by  its 
greater  amount  of  hydrogen,  in  which  it  differs  from  the  protein 
basis  of  bodily  structures,  or  what  Huxley  has  called  protoplasm,  "the 
physical  basis  of  life."  Thus,  as  we  see,  vitality  has  its  Jiome  in  a 
structure  which  differs  so  much  from  the  so-called  protoplasm  that  it 
is  apparent  that  Prof.  Huxley  has  generalized  in  a  very  hasty  and 
unscientific  as  well  as  dogmatic  manner.  He  would  not  have  been 
much  farther  from  the  truth  if  he  had  maintained  that  fat  was  an 
essential  "  physical  basis  of  life,  "  for  it  is  as  necessary  as  protein  or 
protoplasm  (which  are  synonymous  with  Huxley).  Materialists  can- 
not discuss  the  mysteries  of  biology  without  running  into  absurdities  ; 
such,  for  example,  as  Dr.  Hammond's  theory  that  we  need  not  die  if 
we  could  keep  up  an  exact  balance  between  the  waste  of  the  body  and 
its  supply  by  food.  In  addition  to  this  combination  of  albuminoid 
and  oleaginous  matter,  as  the  receptive  substance,  life  requires  the 
presence  or  environment  of  oxygen.  This  is  essential  to  all  vital  pro- 
cesses. Seeds  which  are  entirely  deprived  of  air  will  not  germinate, 
and  an  excessive  supply  of  oxygen  accelerates  the  germination.  In 
animals  the  demand  for  oxygen  is  proportional  to  the  activity  of  life. 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  33 

That  the  kingdom  of  vitality  or  vital  force  is  as  widely  distinct 
from  that  of  mere  physical  force  as  electricity  is  distinct  from  gravity 
or  hydrogen  distinct  from  gold,  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  it  is  impos- 
sible to  construct  bioplasm  by  any  physical  or  chemical  forces,  no 
matter  how  well  the  materials  are  brought  together.  Sir  H.  Roscoe 
says  very  truly  :  "  Protoplasm,  with  which  the  simplest  manifestations 
of  life  are  associated,  is  not  a  compound  but  a  structure  built  up  of 
compounds.  The  chemist  may  successfully  synthetize  any  of  its 
component  molecules,  but  he  has  no  more  reason  to  look  forward  to 
the  synthetic  production  of  the  structure  than  to  imagine  that  the 
synthesis  of  gallic  acid  leads  to  the  production  of  gall-nuts." 

But  an  influx  from  the  nervous  system  is  necessary  to  give  the  vital 
capacity  for  sensation  and  motion  ;  and  influx  through  the  nervous 
system  is  necessary  to  give  motion  to  the  heart  and  the  proper  con- 
ditons  to  the  blood-vessels  for  circulating  the  blood.  Hence  without 
the  nervous  system  there  can  be  neither  conscious  active  life  in 
man,  nor  the  circulation  of  blood  and  respiration  of  air  which  give 
the  conditions  of  vitality,  nor  the  consumption  of  food  which  supplies 
material. 

In  recognizing  the  nervous  centres  as  the  seat  of  life  we  are  sim- 
ply recognizing  the  universal  law  of  the  animal  kingdom,  in  which 
we  see  that  the  rank  and  character  of  every  animal  is  determined  by 
its  nervous  system,  of  which  the  brain  is  the  principal  portion. 
Even  when  we  descend  to  the  smallest  micro-organisms,  with  a 
nucleus,  that  can  be  investigated,  we  find  that  their  life  and  psychic 
endowments  belong  to  a  small  central  structure,  the  nucleus,  from 
which  the  power,  action,  growth,  and  reproduction  are. imparted  to  the 
protoplasm  that  constitutes  their  bulk. 

The  experiments  on  micro-organisms,  ciliated  infusoria,  such  as 
the  Stentor  and  Cyrtostomum,  by  Gruber  and  Balbiani  have  demon- 
strated that  the  life  of  these  minute  animals  (the  cyrtostomum  meas- 
ures three  thousandths  of  an  inch)  depends  upon  their  central  nuclei, 
and  that,  if  they  are  divided  into  two  or  more  parts,  any  part  which 
contains  a  nucleus  will  grow  until  it  reproduces  a  complete  animal, 
but  that  parts  which  have  no  nucleus,  being  merely  protoplasm,  can- 
not grow  into  a  complete  animal  but  die  in  from  four  to  eight  days, 
although  they  move  about  with  freedom  while  they  live,  as  a  decapi- 
tated chicken  will  flutter  for  a  time  without  its  brain,  and  cold-blooded 
animals  have  their  lives  prolonged  after  the  loss  of  the  brain. 

As  life  is  manifested  by  sensation,  motion,  circulation  (and  conse- 
quent nourishment),  and  as  all  three  are  dependent  on  influx  from  the 
nervous  system,  it  is  obvious  that  life  really  comes  into  all  parts  from 
its  seat  in  the  nervous  system.     And  although  the  digestive  organs 


34  L1FE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

supply  material  and  the  lungs  supply  by  means  of  oxygen  the  impon- 
derables, their  actions  depend  on  the  nervous  system,  and  are  but 
subordinate  contributions  incapable  of  evolving  life,  which  comes 
entirely  by  the  nervous  system,  and  takes  its  departure  therefrom 
when  it  leaves  the  body,  first  abandoning  its  outposts  in  the  lower 
limbs,  concentrating  to  the  upper  end  of  the  spinal  cord,  lingering  in 
the  chest,  then  in  the  base  of  the  brain,  and  finally  leaving  from  the 
upper  portions  of  the  brain,  in  accordance  with  pathognomic  laws, 
and  as  has  been  observed  by  clairvoyants.  After  death,  the  muscles 
of  the  limbs,  as  shown  by  Onimus,  lose  their  contractility  much 
sooner  than  the  muscles  of  the  trunk,  and  the  extensors  before  the 
flexors.  A  similar  order  of  succession  is  observed  in  general  palsies. 
In  the  application  of  electricity  we  find  the  excitability  of  the  nerves 
greater  as  we  approach  their  origin  at  the  spinal  cord. 

That  death  occurs  from  below  upwards  was  illustrated  by  the  cele 
brated  physiologist  Claude  Bernard,  in  experiments  on  the  nerves 
and  muscles  of  frogs.  When  the  animal  dies  from  loss  of  blood  or 
from  woorara  poisoning,  the  filaments  of  nerves  nearest  the  muscle 
first  lose  their  vitality,  the  nerves  die  from  the  periphery  to  the  cen- 
tre, and  the  muscles  that  have  ceased  to  obey  their  nerves  may  be 
roused  by  induction  currents  applied  nearer  the  spine  or  upon  the 
spinal  cord  at  the  roots  of  the  nerves  The  death  of  the  nerves,  as 
shown  by  Von  Bezolcl,  begins  in  the  filaments  which  are  distributed 
in  the  muscles,  which  gradually  lose  their  power,  and  progresses 
through  the  trunk  of  the  nerve  to  the  spinal  cord.  The  convulsions 
produced  in  rabbits  by  excluding  the  blood  from  the  brain  are  most 
marked  and  prolonged  in  the  hind  legs,  and  they  also  soonest  pass 
into  cadaveric  rigidity. 

If  then  life  emanates  from  the  nervous  system  which  actuates  the 
muscles,  the  lungs,  the  digestive  organs,  and  the  circulation,  and 
which  also  controls  nutrition  —  it  is  evidently  a  vital  neurological 
influx,  which  through  the  nervous  system  controls  the  material  influx 
of  food,  water,  and  oxygen  and  their  assimilation,  and  the  seat  or 
channel  of  this  influx  must  be  sought  in  the  controlling  portions  of 
the  nervous  system,  which  we  know  are  in  the  cranium. 

In  discovering  this  truth  we  are  led  to  important  practical  conclu- 
sions for  hygiene  and  for  virtue.  We  learn  that  it  is  far  more  impor- 
tant to  cultivate  and  energize  the  brain  and  the  soul  than  to  confine 
our  attention  to  purely  physical  matters.  We  learn  that  with  proper 
spiritual  energy  man's  life  may  be  efficient  and  successful,  but  with- 
out that  higher  energy,  an  abundant  nourishment  may  develop  only 
a  gross  and  degraded  humanity. 

The  knowledge  of  the  vital  power  of  the  brain  enables  us  to  pro- 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  35 

ceed  with  great  confidence  when  by  the  nervauric  methods  we  treat 
the  entire  constitution  through  the  brain.  We  know  that  a  current 
of  dark  blood  through  the  brain  will  suddenly  deaden  all  the  powers 
of  life,  or  a  current  of  watery  blood  will  enfeeble  them.  A  sudden 
pressure  on  the  brain  makes  a  blank  in  our  conscious  existence,  and 
even  a  current  of  water  on  the  head  may  subdue  the  vital  energies. 
Prof.  Stokes,  recommending  Dr.  Abercrombie's  method  of  shaving 
the  scalp  and  pouring  upon  the  head,  held  over  a  basin,  the  contents 
of  a  jug  of  cold  water  from  a  height  above,  says  :  "  So  great  and  instan- 
taneous is  the  depression  of  the  vital  power  produced  by  this  mode, 
that  it  must  be  used  with  caution.  There  are  numerous  cases  of  per- 
sons in  the  highest  state  of  maniacal  excitement,  reduced  in  a  few 
moments  to  a  low  and  weak  state  by  this  powerful  remedy.  There 
are  also  instances  of  its  rapidly  depressing  effect  in  the  early  stages 
of  acute  hydrocephalus." 

The  depressing  power  was  of  course  chiefly  produced  upon  the 
upper  surface  of  the  brain,  which  was  most  exposed  to  the  action  of 
the  cold  water,  and  which  is  so  important  as  a  source  of  vitality. 
Life  retreats  from  below  upwards  toward  its  citadel  —  from  the  limbs 
toward  the  spinal  cord,  from  the  cord  to  the  brain,  and  from  the  base 
of  the  brain  to  its  summit,  where  severe  injuries  are  fatal.  Valentin 
says :  "  If  one  removes  the  two  hemispheres  of  a  mammal  by  slices  the 
mental  activity  sinks  the  lower,  the  further  the  loss  of  substance 
proceeds.  When  the  ventricles  of  the  brain  are  reached,  complete 
unconsciousness  is  wont  to  appear." 

In  asserting  life  to  be  an  influx  we  do  not  assert  that  the  influx  is 
exclusively  into  the  brain.  The  brain  being  the  supreme  seat  of  life 
and  associated  with  influx  leads  to  the  inference  that  nervous  life 
elsewhere  may  in  like  manner  be  associated  with  influx.  There  is  a 
vigorous  life  in  fishes,  in  which  the  cerebrum  is  very  small  and  the 
entire  brain  very  small  in  proportion  to  the  spinal  system. 

The  ganglia  of  insects,  which  correspond  to  our  cerebro-spinal  sys- 
tem, are  the  seat  of  a  very  active  influx,  producing  greater  psychic 
manifestations  in  proportion  to  their  size  than  we  have  in' the  human 
brain.  In  cold-blooded  animals  (reptiles  and  fishes)  the  heart  con- 
tinues to  beat  many  hours  after  decapitation,  and  even  after  it  has 
been  taken  out  of  the  body,  if  its  ganglia  are  not  destroyed.  Even 
in  warm-blooded  animals  (as  the  rabbit)  the  heart  continues  many 
minutes  after  death  produced  by  stopping  the  cerebral  circulation. 

Hence  there  is  probably  an  influx  of  life,  capable  of  sustaining 
muscular  and  visceral  action,  distinct  from  that  which  comes  into  the 
brain.  I  say  probably,  for  when  we  consider  the  complete  analogy 
between  the  brain  and  body,  the  assertion  of  an  influx  to  the  brain 


6  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.     II. 


renders  the  influx  to  the  nervous  system  of  the  body  probable,  as  it 
maintains  for  a  time  its  vitality  after  decapitation  and  for  a  consider- 
able time  in  the  acephalous  foetus,  as  well  as  cases  in  which,  by  con- 
cussion, hemorrhage,  or  ramollissement,  the  influence  of  the  brain  is 
more  or  less  excluded.  The  body,  according  to  analogy,  must  have  a 
region  of  influx  as  well  as  the  brain,  and  this  region  must  be  inte- 
riorly on  or  near  the  median  line,  which  would  be  along  the  bronchi, 
the  pulmonic  and  cardiac  plexuses,  and  the  solar  and  semilunar  gan- 
glia. 

This  is  further  confirmed  by  the  fact  that  in  somniloquent  condi- 
tions intelligence  and  the  external  senses  have  been  transferred  to 
the  epigastric  region.  Although  the  primary  function  of  this  corpo- 
real region  may  relate  to  atmospheric  and  chylopoietic  absorption,  the 
transferability  of  the  spiritual  faculties  to  the  body  would  indicate 
spiritual  capacities  in  the  trunk,  and  probably  capacities  for  spiritual 
influx,  for  the  bodily  region  acts  in  concert  with  the  cerebral,  and  it 
is  not  extravagant  to  assume  that  the  soul  does  in  a  certain  sense 
occupy  the  entire  body,  which  may  be  regarded  as  an  essential 
appendage  of  the  soul.  The  influx  of  thought  and  emotion  to  the 
brain  is  greater  when  the  life  and  action  of  the  central  region  of  the 
body  is  greater,  and  while  the  energetic  action  of  the  limbs  and  mus- 
cular system  generally  exhausts  the  brain,  that  of  the  heart  and  chest 
(and  I  may  add  stomach)  greatly  increases  its  power.  What  is  the 
nature  of  this  influx  is  as  yet  unknown.  It  probably  comes  in  with  the 
air,  without  which  it  cannot  occur,  and  we  may  suppose  the  lungs  to 
maintain  the  same  relation  to  the  atmosphere  as  the  brain  to  an 
ethereal  or  spiritual  atmosphere.  This  view  is  illustrated  by  the 
recent  experiments  of  Dr.  B.  W.  Richardson,  showing  that  air  which 
has  been  respired  loses  its  life-supporting  quality,  independent  of  any 
change  by  loss  of  oxygen  or  acquisition  of  carbonic  acid.  Indeed,  we 
know  that  the  life  supporting  quality  of  the  atmosphere  is  continually 
varied  as  it  comes  from  dry  and  sunny  regions  or  from  dark  and  damp 
localities,  there  being  some  element  or  condition  in  it  which  chemists 
have  not  detected. 

This  influx  to  the  thoracic  ganglia  and  that  to  the  solar  plexus  cor- 
respond with  what  we  believe  occurs  in  the  brain.  The  pineal  gland 
is  the  organ  of  the  chief  cerebral  influx,  and  our  Sarcognomy  recog- 
nizes the  solar  plexus  as  the  correspondent  of  the  pineal  gland,  enjoy- 
ing the  same  influx  on  a  lower  plane. 

The  cardiac  plexuses  and  ganglia,  which  alone  can  sustain  the 
heart  when  it  is  removed  from  the  body,  and  in  cold-blooded  animals 
for  many  hours,  have  in  man  a  connection  with  and  partial  depend- 
ence upon  the  three  ganglia  in  the  neck ;  of  these  the  superior  cer- 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  37 

vical  controls  the  anterior  circulation  and  consequent  development  of 
the  brain,  while  the  vertebral  controls  its  posterior  circulation  and 
development. 

Thus  it  appears  that  the  cardiac  nervous  system  which  sustains- 
the  circulation  that  animates  the  entire  person,  is  intimately  asso- 
ciated with  the  brain  as  a  centre  of  life,  supplying  blood  to  the  brain 
in  return  for  vital  influence,  each  being  essential  to  the  other. 

If  we  should  follow  the  theory  suggested  by  analogy,  of  the  priority 
of  the  inferior  structures,  we  might  suppose  the  ganglionic  system  to- 
be  the  primitive  seat  of  life  in  the  human  body,  and  the  brain  its 
latest  evolution,  but  such  a  theory  is  not  verified  by  the  microscope,, 
as  the  cerebro-spinal  nervous  system  is  the  first  distinct  nervous 
organization  seen  when  the  ganglionic  system  is  entirely  imperceptible. 
The  first  thing  distinctly  seen  is  the  primitive  streak  of  nervous  mat- 
ter formed  in  the  serous  membrane  (which  soon  overlaps  it  and  forms 
the  spinal  column),  one  end  of  which  is  manifestly  enlarged  as  the 
beginning  of  the  brain.  The  brain  is  therefore  an  original  structure, 
and  not  an  outgrowth  from  an  inferior  apparatus,  though  very 
incomplete  in  its  germinal  condition.  In  human  ova  three  or  four 
weeks  old  we  find  the  embryo  (according  to  Todd  and  Bowman)  not 
more  than  two  lines  in  length.  At  this  very  early  stage  they  say 
"the  anterior  cerebral  vesicles  are  well  marked,  and  immediately 
behind  them  are  the  very  large  corpora  quadrigemina."  The  heart  is 
not  yet  fully  formed,  and  projects  from  the  anterior  surface  of  the 
body  as  a  bent  tube,  "consisting  of  a  simple  auricle  and  ventricle.'* 
"  Behind  the  heart  is  seen  the  liver." 

Thus  does  the  brain  originate  by  the  laws  of  germinal  growth, 
before  a  complete  vascular  system  has  appeared,  hence  it  does  not 
appear  to  be  built  up  in  the  first  instance  by  the  ganglionic  system 
and  their  subordinate  vessels,  but  appears  to  be  organized  at  the 
beginning  of  the  human  structure. 

This  statement  of  Todd  and  Bowman,  however,  appears  to  be  incor- 
rect as  to  the  time  of  development,  for  the  very  careful  observations 
of  Tiedemann  and  his  predecessors  did  not  find  so  advanced  a  devel- 
opment in  the  first  month  of  the  human  embryo,  in  which  he  found 
only  a  translucent  and  fluid  condition,  without  a  trace  of  organization  ; 
the  same  being  true  of  animals  in  a  corresponding  though  earlier 
stage.  The  writings  of  Harvey  and  Haller  contain  the  same  state- 
ment. 

In  the  fifth  and  sixth  weeks  from  conception,  when  the  embryo  is 
four  or  five  lines  long,  it  is  still  nearly  transparent  and  the  germ  of 
the  brain  is  still  fluid,  though  disposed  to  subdivide  into  different 
structures,  the  development  of  which  he  regards  as  controlled  by  the 


38  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.     II. 

serous  membrane,  the  pia  mater,  in  which  blood-vessels  first  appear. 
In  this  stage  the  head  is  relatively  large,  presenting  a  slight  appear- 
ance of  mouth  and  eyes,  while  the  limbs  are  indicated  only  by  slight 
projections  ;  a  condition  which  illustrates  the  priority  of  the  brain. 
In  the  fluid  states  at  the  origin  of  life  vitality  has  a  perfect  organ, 
izing  power  without  machinery.  In  the  seventh  and  eighth  week, 
the  embryo  being  seven  or  eight  lines  long,  with  some  indication  of 
nose  and  ears,  the  transparency  is  greatly  diminished.  Bones  and 
muscles  are  not  yet  apparent,  and  the  brain  has  the  consistence  of 
the  white  of  an  egg  and  may  be  examined  after  hardening  with  alco- 
hol. It  then  exhibits  the  essential  elements  of  a  brain — the  rudi- 
ments of  the  cerebellum  curving  out  from  the  medulla  oblongata  on 
each  side,  but  not  yet  united  on  the  median  line,  above  which  are  the 
quadrigemina,  thalami,  striata,  and  germinal  beginning  of  the  hemi- 
spheres of  the  cerebrum.  The  quadrigemina,  like  the  cerebellum  in 
this  stage,  are  but  leaflets  turning  in  to  the  median  line  but  not  yet 
united,  and  measuring  one  line.  The  thalami  measure  two  thirds  of 
a  line,  and  the  striata  one  line,  on  the  margin  of  which  is  a  small 
leaflet  or  membraniform  structure  destined  to  form  the  hemispheres. 

It  is  thus  clear  that  the  cerebro-spinal  nervous  system  has  a  prior- 
ity of  organization  starting  from  a  single  cell,  advancing  into  a  homo- 
geneous fluid  condition,  becoming  gelatinous  and  ultimately  fibrous 
and  cellular,  the  muscular  and  osseous  system  following  at  a  long 
interval.  At  what  stage  the  ganglionic  system  becomes  organized 
and  active  the  microscope  has  not  revealed,  as  it  is  too  minute  for 
observation. 

In  the  full  development  of  man,  the  brain  becomes  the  central  con- 
trol and  channel  of  influx.  To  what  extent  the  ganglia  of  the  abdo- 
men and  thorax  participate  in  this  influx  is  a  question  for  future 
investigation.  The  pre-eminence  of  the  brain  in  vitality  cannot  be 
doubted,  as  gifted  individuals,  in  exalted  religious  and  spiritual  condi- 
tions of  the  brain,  become  so  highly  charged  with  vitality  as  to  expel 
formidable  diseases  by  laying  on  hands  or  even  by  coming  near  the 
patient,  and  directing  their  mental  energy  to  him,  thus  showing  that 
they  have  in  their  brain  and  spiritual  life  an  excess  of  power  which 
may  be  transferred  to  another.  But  when  the  brain  is  suddenly 
paralyzed  by  concussion,  crushing,  or  lightning  stroke,  there  is  an 
instantaneous  and  complete  death  through  the  body,  —  the  heart  as 
well  as  the  muscles  suddenly  ceasing,  and  the  blood  being  so  thor- 
oughly killed  as  not  to  coagulate. 

The  influence  of  a  regimen  which  stimulates  the  brain  was  shown 
by  the  report  of  M.  Gasparin  to  the  French  Academy  upon  the  diet 
of   the  working    population.     He  ascertained    the  usual   amount   of 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  39 

nitrogenous  food  in  the  diet  of  the  laboring  population  of  France, 
and  ascertained  that  Belgian  miners  performed  the  most  vigorous 
labor,  beyond  the  average  of  French  miners,  with  much  less  food  — 
less  even  than  the  inmates  of  workhouses  and  the  monks  of  La 
Trappe.  "  The  mining  population  of  the  environs  of  Charleroi  "  (says 
M.  Gasparin)  "  have  resolved  this  problem  to  nourish  themselves  com- 
pletely, preserve  health  and  great  vigor  of  muscular  strength,  upon  a 
diet  with  less  than  half  of  the  nutritive  principles  of  that  indicated 
by  observation  in  Europe." 

The  distinctive  peculiarity  of  the  diet  of  the  Belgian  miners  is  the 
use  of  a  potent  cerebral  stimulant.  They  use  three  times  a  day  half 
a  pint  or  more  of  coffee,  using  no  other  beverage,  —  coffee,  bread  and 
butter  being  the  major  part  of  their  diet.  This  gives  a  stimulus  to 
vitality  which  resists  the  rapid  disintegration  of  the  tissues,  and  by 
diminishing  the  amount  of  excretion  diminishes  the  necessity  for 
food  in  proportion.  In  the  same  way  the  demand  for  food  diminishes 
in  those  who  live  under  high  heroic  excitement,  like  Kossuth,  who  in 
the  Hungarian  war  was  accustomed  to  take  but  one  meal  a  day. 
"We  know,"  says  M.  Gasparin,  "  how  sober  people  are  who  drink 
coffee.  The  prodigious  abstinence  of  the  caravans,  the  slightly  nutri- 
tive regimen  of  the  Arabs,  come  with  all  the  authority  of  experience 
in  support  of  the  effects  attributed  to  this  beverage ;  and  the  distri- 
bution of  coffee  to  the  French  troops  during  their  fatiguing  marches 
through  Algeria  is  regarded  by  the  officers  as  one  of  the  best  means 
of  enabling  the  troops  to  support  them."  Physicians  are  well  aware 
of  the  sustaining  effects  of  Erythroxylon  coca,  so  long  used  by  South 
American  Indians  for  protection  against  fatigue  and  hunger,  being  a 
powerful  cerebral  stimulant. 

There  is  much  truth  in  the  conclusions  of  M.  Gasparin,  but  he 
overlooks  the  fact  that  human  constitutions  are  not  all  alike,  and 
that  some  are  naturally  able  to  live  on  a  smaller  quantity  of  food  than 
others  from  having  greater  tenacity  of  constitution  and  greater  power 
of  appropriation  of  nourishment. 

Food  must  give  us  something  else  in  addition  to  the  chemical  con- 
stituents of  the  body  — ■  something  that  sustains  our  spiritual  energy > 
without  which  health  declines.  The  fibrin  of  the  blood  is,  chemically 
speaking,  a  complete  embodiment  of  nutriment,  but  dogs  fed  upon  it 
will  starve  in  about  a  month,  according  to  Majendie,  for  it  is  lacking 
in  something  not  yet  understood.  Human  beings  need  spiritual  food 
—  something  addressed  to  the  emotions  —  sympathy,  respect,  love, 
gayety,  hope,  emulation,  and  something  to  encourage  ambition.  The 
hopelessness  and  dreariness  of  the  situation  paralyze  every  energy, 
accelerate  disease,  and  shorten  life.      Hahnemann  well  said  in  his 


40  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

"  Organon :  "  "  Spiritual  sufferings  greatly  undermine  the  state  of 
health,  and  even  the  most  skilful  physician  will  find  it  impossible  to  pro- 
cure the  patient  relief  under  those  unfavorable  circumstances.  Grief 
and  sorrow  are  the  principal  causes  which  either  develop  latent  psora 
or  aggravate  an  already  existing  secondary  psoric  affection.  Excessive 
fatigue,  working  in  marshy  regions,  great  injuries  and  wounds,  exces- 
sive heat  and  cold,  starvation,  poverty,  not  wholesome  food,  unhappy 
marriage,  and  a  gnawing  conscience,  etc.,  which  are  causes  that 
exhaust  the  brain,  bring  on  disease." 

It  is  easy  to  verify  the  transmission  of  life  from  the  brain  to  each 
and  every  organ  of  the  body  by  interrupting  the  channels  of  its 
transmission,  and  finding  that  life  is  impaired  or  destroyed  in  propor- 
tion to  the  interruption,  as  a  stream  is  diminished  when  its  fountain 
is  obstructed,  and  disappears  when  it  is  closed. 

The  spinal  cord  through  which  the  brain  power  is  transmitted  is  so 
strongly  protected  by  the  bones  of  the  spinal  column  that  it  is  only  in 
severe  injuries  that  we  discover  its  importance.  In  the  nervauric  ex- 
periments which  I  have  introduced,  we  are  exempted  from  the  neces- 
sity of  studying  the  records  of  surgery  or  engaging  in  the  tedious 
cruelties  of  vivisection,  as  the  human  hand  can  evolve  any  local  func- 
tion regardless  of  the  hindrance  offered  by  bones  and  integuments. 

Injuries  of  the  spinal  cord  operate  with  terrible  effect  upon  all 
parts  which  lose  their  connection  with  the  brain  by  the  injury,  or  have 
their  connection  impaired. 

Brodie  says  that  "  wounds  which  penetrate  through  the  external 
parts  into  the  spinal  cord  are  almost  invariably  fatal  at  a  very  early 
period,  the  examples  of  recovery  from  them  being  very  few  in  num- 
ber." "  The  effect  of  a  violent  concussion  is  at  once  to  impair,  and 
even  to  destroy,  the  functions  of  the  spinal  cord,  sometimes  even 
causing  the  patient's  death  in  the  course  of  a  few  hours." 

It  is  well  known  that  when  the  cord  is  divided  or  severely  injured 
by  compression,  all  sensation  and  voluntary  motion  are  lost  below  the 
point  of  injury.  The  inferior  parts  are  beyond  our  consciousness  and 
beyond  our  control,  as  if  they  belonged  to  another  individual.  Surely 
such  facts  should  have  fixed  in  the  minds  of  biologists  the  truth  that 
life  belongs  to  the  brain  and  to  other  parts  in  proportion  as  it  is  bor- 
rowed from  the  cerebro-spinal  system,  of  which  the  brain  is  the  com- 
manding centre. 

Injuries  of  the  spinal  cord  seldom  amount  to  an  absolute  isolation 
of  the  parts  below  the  injury,  as  the  physical  connection  exists  not- 
withstanding the  laceration  or  compression.  But  if  the  injury  be 
sufficiently  severe  and  sufficiently  high  on  the  cord,  then  death  is 
speedy.     The  quickest  way  to  kill  an  animal  (except  crushing  the 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  41 

brain)  is  to  sever  the  cord  just  below  the  cranium.  "  A  case  of  sud- 
den death  from  dislocation  of  the  second  vertebra  is  recorded  by 
Petit,  and  other  similar  cases  are  described  by  Sir  Charles  Bell  and 
Mr.  Stafford.  The  latter  author  mentions  two  cases  of  death  taking 
place  immediately  from  fracture  of  the  second  and  third  cervical  ver- 
tebrae. "  I  attended  a  young  gentleman  who  labored  under  symptoms 
of  caries  of  the  superior  cervical  vertebra,  and  who,  having  eaten  a 
hearty  dinner,  suddenly  expired  while  altering  his  position  in  bed." 
(Brodie.)  Evidently,  as  all  life  in  the  body  proceeds  from  the  brain, 
the  severance  of  the  spinal  cord  immediately  below  the  cranium,  or 
its  severe  compression,  must  be  immediately  fatal,  and  all  surgical 
records  confirm  this  statement. 

A  remarkable  illustration  of  this  is  mentioned  by  Sir  Charles  Bell 
in  his  "Anatomy  :"  "A  young  man  was  brought  into  the  Middlesex 
Hospital,  who  had  fallen  upon  his  head.  He  soon  recovered,  and  lay 
prostrate  for  some  time  without  exhibiting  a  symptom  to  raise  alarm. 
He  had  given  thanks  to  the  assembled  governors  of  the  hospital,  and 
had  returned  into  the  ward  for  his  bundle,  when,  on  turning  around  to 
bid  adieu  to  the  other  patients,  he  fell and  in  the  instant  expired.  Upon 
examining  his  head,  it  was  found  that  the  margins  of  the  occipital 
hole  had  been  broken :  no  doubt  it  had  happened  that  in  turning  his 
head  the  pieces  were  displaced,  and  closed  and  crushed  the  medulla 
oblongata  as  it  passes  from  the  skull." 

But  as  spinal  injuries  commonly  amount  only  to  a  slight  laceration 
or  a  slight  compression,  life  though  greatly  impaired  may  in  some 
cases  continue  until  the  injury  has  been  repaired. 

In  these  cases,  however,  organic  life  is  gradually  impaired  to  a  great 
extent  —  an  extent  proportional  to  the  injury.  Thus  the  bladder 
becomes  paralyzed  and  incapable  of  expelling  its  contents.  The 
secretion  of  urine  is  either  entirely  suspended  or  becomes  quite  morbid, 
having  a  disgusting  odor,  an  unnatural  color,  and  amorphous  sediment. 
It  is  most  commonly  ammoniacal  (corresponding  to  its  decay  when 
outside  of  the  body),  turbid,  and  full  of  unnatural  mucus  derived  from 
the  bladder  and  frequently  containing  blood.  In  other  cases  the  qual- 
ity of  the  urine  changes  from  day  to  day.  The  bladder,  by  impair- 
ment of  its  vitality,  is  in  a  congested  condition,  with  adhesive  mucus 
and  phosphate  of  lime  in  its  interior. 

The  bowels  become  torpid  and  require  the  most  powerful  purgatives 
to  move  them ;  the  abdomen  becomes  tympanitic.  Evacuations 
sometimes  take  place  unconsciously  and  involuntarily.  Vomiting 
occurs  in  other  cases,  ejecting  large  quantities  of  dark-colored  fluid. 
The  alvine  evacuations  are  sometimes  of  a  black  tarry  character  and 
highly  offensive  odor. 


42  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

The  external  parts  show  an  equal  loss  of  vitality,  and  sloughs  are 
formed,  and  gangrene  developed  from  the  mere  pressure  of  lying  on 
the  bed.  Sloughs  often  appear  on  the  sacrum,  nates  and  ankles  as 
early  as  the  second  day.  The  sloughing  is  more  severe  when  the 
injury  is  higher  up,  and  consequently  vitality  more  completely 
excluded,  and  all  the  surgeon  can  do  is  to  endeavor  to  diffuse  and 
moderate  the  pressure. 

Notwithstanding  the  severe  consequences  to  the  body,  the  brain  is 
not  usually  affected  unless  the  injury  be  above  the  cephalic  and  pul- 
monic regions  of  the  cord,  with  which  the  brain  maintains  a  close 
sympathy.  "  I  have  seldom  observed,"  says  Brodie,  "  the  sensorium 
to  be  materially  affected,  except  where  the  injury  was  in  the  cervical 
portion  of  the  spinal  cord." 

The  heart  is  not  directly  dependent  on  the  spinal  cord,  but  indi- 
rectly through  the  ganglionic  system,  and  consequently  is  not  liable 
to  the  same  sudden  paralysis  as  the  voluntary  muscles  ;  nevertheless 
"  the  first  effect  which  a  severe  injury  of  the  spinal  cord  produces  on 
the  circulation  is  to  lessen  the  force  of  the  heart's  action  and  to  cause 
a  state  of  general  depression  and  collapse,  the  pulse  being  very  feeble, 
contracted,  and  sometimes  scarcely  perceptible.  When  the  injury  is 
in  the  lower  part  of,  the  neck,  the  patient  not  infrequently  dies  before 
complete  reaction  is  established,  the  pulse  remaining  feeble  to  the  last. 
In  the  majority  of  cases,  after  the  first  twenty-four  hours  the  pulse  rises 
to  96  or  100  a  minute  ;  but  still  it  is  feeble  and  contracted,  indicating 
a  state  of  great  general  debility.  The  appearance  of  the  tongue  cor- 
responds to  the  character  of  the  pulse  ;  it  is  not  unusual  at  the  end 
of  twenty-four  hours  to  find  it  dry  and  parched,  covered  with  a  brown 
fur,  which  is  soon  converted  into  a  black  crust,  resembling  what  we 
observe  in  the  last  stage  of  a  continued  fever." 

The  blood  also  has  the  characteristics  of  fever,  the  coagulum  being 
large  and  loose,  or  soft  as  when  its  vitality  is  reduced  by  miasmatic 
poison. 

The  analogy  of  the  conditions  produced  by  obstructing  the  action 
of  the  brain  on  the  body  to  those  produced  by  the  devitalizing  power 
of  malaria  and  the  consequent  fever  is  quite  striking ;  and  it  is  a  curi- 
ous coincidence  that  in  a  case  described  by  Sir  Charles  Bell,  in  which 
there  was  a  fracture  of  the  eleventh  dorsal  vertebra,  death  took  place 
on  the  fifth  day,  preceded  by  typhoid  symptoms — symptoms  which 
indicate  inflammation  of  the  ileum,  which  is  controlled  by  the  lower 
dorsal  portion  of  the  cord  —  the  portion  injured  in  this  case. 

Injuries  and  morbid  conditions  of  the  brain  produce  a  great 
variety  of  morbid  conditions  in  the  body  ;  and  Dr.  Brigham  remarks 
that  "  after  death  from  injury  of   the  brain,  putrefaction    of   other 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  43 

parts  of  the  body  takes  place  much  more  rapidly  than  after  death 
from  the  injury  of  other  organs."  Decomposition  is  very  rapid 
after  death  by  sunstroke,  by  lightning,  or  by  suddenly  fatal  poisons, 
as  these  causes  attack  the  brain  and  nervous  system. 

The  direct  injury  of  the  brain  by  miasmatic  poison,  which  is  the 
cause  of  typhus  fever,  develops  a  group  of  symptoms  singularly 
analogous  to  those  which  follow  the  impairment  of  its  influence  by 
injury  of  the  spinal  cord.  After  the  death  of  150  from  sunstroke, 
at  Chicago,  in  July,  1887,  the  authorities  were  urgently  called  on 
for  immediate  examination,  as  the  bodies  were  decaying.  "After 
no  disease  "  (said  the  coroner)  "  does  a  body  decompose  so  quickly  as 
after  sunstroke." 

"Most  of  the  fatal  cases  of  typhus  "  (said  Prof.  Graves)  "at  present 
die  of  cerebral  disease."  "In  the  genuine  typhus  fever"  (says  Dr. 
Gerhard)  "  this  is  almost  always  the  case  :  very  few  patients  die  of 
this  disease  without  strongly  marked  cerebral  symptoms."  And  yet 
there  is  seldom  any  appearance  of  inflammation  of  the  brain  in  such 
cases.  The  functional  impairment  of  the  brain  alone  is  enough  to 
destroy  life,  and  even  the  act  of  rising  from  the  bed  and  standing 
erect,  so  as  to  draw  the  blood  by  gravitation  from  the  brain,  is 
sufficient  in  cases  of  exhaustion,  especially  cholera  and  typhoid 
fever,  to  produce  the  death  of  patients,  who  but  for  that  imprudence 
might  have  been  saved. 

Traumatic  injuries  of  the  brain  are  liable  to  result  in  general 
impairment  of  health  or  tuberculization, .  even  when  there  is  no 
immediate  appearance  of  serious  damage.  Dr.  R.  H.  Reed,  of 
Mansfield,  Ohio  (in  a  paper  before  the  National  Association  of 
Railroad  Surgeons,  at  St.  Louis,  May  2,  1889),  detailed  six  cases  of 
wounds  of  the  head,  from  which  he  drew  the  conclusion  "  that  grave 
injuries  of  the  brain  are  liable  to  be  followed  with  such  a  degree  of 
devitalization  of  the  economy  as  to  favor  general  tubercular  degen- 
eration," and  that  an  embolus  may  cut  off  the  blood  supply  of  a 
certain  arterial  territory,  and  so  devitalize  that  portion  of  the  brain 
and  result  in  an  abscess  and  death."  The  brain  degeneration  in  these 
cases  was  generally  indicated  by  the  presence  of  phosphates  and 
indican  in  the  urine. 

When  we  experiment  upon  the  brain  directly  we  are  vividly 
impressed  with  the  control  of  all  life.  A  fracture  of  the  skull,  leaving 
a  broken  piece  of  bone  compressing  the  brain,  arrests  the  conscious 
life  in  the  midst  of  its  ideas  of  the  moment,  which  are  resumed  as 
the  pressure  is  removed.  The  paralysis  and  the  numerous  forms  of 
disease  produced  by  affections  of  the  brain,  the  convulsions,  fevers, 
hemiplegia,  insanity  and  diseases  of  many  varieties  demonstrate  the 


-14  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

brain  to  be  the  most  important  organ.  Every  change  in  the  circu- 
lation of  the  brain  produces  corresponding  changes  in  mental  activity 
and  vital  power. 

Bichat  made  some  instructive  experiments  on  dogs  to  illustrate  the 
effects  of  blood  upon  the  brain.  In  his  work  on  "  Life  and  Death," 
page  247,  he  says:  "I  opened  the  carotid  and  the  jugular  vein  of 
another  dog,  and  after  tying  the  extremity  of  the  carotid  next  the 
heart,  received  the  blood  of  the  jugular  into  a  warm  syringe  and 
injected  it  into  the  brain.  The  creature  appeared  immediately  to  be 
agitated,  breathed  quickly,  and  seemed  to  be  in  a  state  of  suffocation 
similar  to  that  of  asphyxia.  Its  animal  life  became  entirely  extinct ; 
the  heart,  however,  continued  to  beat  and  the  circulation  to  go  on 
for  half  an  hour  afterwards,  at  the  end  of  which  time  the  organic 
life  was  terminated  also.  This  dog  was  of  middle  size,  and  about  six 
ounces  of  blood  were  injected  with  a  gentle  impulse,  for  fear  of  that 
being  attributed  to  shock  which  ought  to  have  been  the  result  of 
the  nature  and  composition  of  the  fluid.  I  repeated  this  experiment 
upon  three  dogs  the  same  day,  and  afterwards  at  different  times 
upon  others.  The  result  was  invariable,  not  only  as  to  the  asphyxia 
of  the  animal,  but  as  to  the  concomitant  appearances. 

"I  have  killed  animals  in  this  way  with  ink,  oil,  wine,  and  water 
colored  with  indigo.  The  greater  number  of  the  excrementitious 
fluids,  such  as  urine,  bile,  the  mucus  of  catarrhs,  occasion  death  by 
their  simple  presence  on  the  brain.  The  serosity  of  the  blood  is 
fatal,  but  not  so  quickly.  I  have  injected  them  all  into  the  crural 
artery.  In  this  way  they  are  none  of  them  mortal,  but  occasion 
always  a  torpor  amounting  even  to  paralysis  at  times." 

Majendie  found  that  injecting  a  considerable  quantity  of  water 
into  the  veins  of  an  animal  produced  a  kind  of  stupidity  which 
indicated  a  want  of  action  in  the  brain. 

Physiological  anatomy  alone  indicates  plainly  that  the  brain  must 
be  the  most  important  organ  in  the  body,  since  it  receives,  as  com- 
monly estimated,  six  times  as  much  blood  in  proportion  to  its  size  as 
other  portions  of  the  body ;  hence  it  must  perform  far  more 
active  and  important  functions  than  the  other  organs. 

Without  looking  farther,  we  have  facts  enough  to  establish  clearly 
that  all  life  depends  upon  the  brain,  and  that  just  in  proportion  as 
the  influx  from  the  brain  is  hindered  by  any  injury  to  its  well-pro- 
tected channels,  every  vital  process  is  deranged  or  suspended.  If 
the  hindrance  be  absolute  and  complete,  death  is  immediate,  for  the 
death  of  the  body  deprives  the  brain  of  the  conditions  and  elements 
necessary  to  retain  vitality. 

Injuries  of  the  nerves,  also,  by  cutting  off  their  dependent  parts 


CHAP.    II.]  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  45 

from  the  spinal  cord,  show  similar  results,  in  loss  of  vitality  and 
predisposition  to  disease.  It  is  stated  in  the  Medico-Chimrgical 
Review,  vol.  22d,  that  Mr.  Earle  cut  the  ulnar  nerve  behind  the 
elbow,  and  that  in  consequence  the  fore-arm  became  disposed  to 
constant  attacks  of  inflammation,  and  the  temperature  of  the  little 
finger  was  four  degrees  lower  than  that  of  the  other. 

According  to  Demarquay  ("  De  la  Regeneration  des  Organes  et 
des  Tissus ")  when  a  nerve  has  been  cut,  the  central  end  in 
connection  with  the  nervous  system  does  not  degenerate,  but  the 
exterior  end  does,  rapidly  undergoing  a  fatty  degeneration,  com- 
pleted in  six  or  eight  weeks.  The  muscles  begin  to  degenerate 
in  about  three  weeks.  But  with  regard  to  paralyzed  nerves  and 
muscles  which  retain  their  connection  with  the  central  system,  it 
is  remarkable  how  well  they  are  preserved  for  a  long  time.  "  It  is  a 
common  observation  "  (says  Dr.  Poore)  "  that  after  a  hemiplegia  has 
endured  for  many  months,  the  wasting  of  the  muscles  is  often 
trifling  in  the  extreme,  and  as  often  as  not  the  electric  irritability 
to  both  forms  of  the  current  remains  the  same  as  on  the  healthy 
side.  If,  however,  a  man  injures  a  peripheral  nerve  —  say  his  ulnar, 
or  one  of  the  branches  of  the  external  popliteal  —  it  is  astonishing 
with  what  rapidity  the  muscles  supplied  by  the  injured  nerve  waste, 
and  how  soon  the  electric  irritability  becomes  altered."  The 
muscles  cut  off  from  their  nerves  would  not  only  waste  away  and 
lose  all  irritability,  but  would  also  die  and  rot,  if  it  were  not  for  the 
vascular  connection  which  brings  them  living  blood,  and  also  the 
influence  of  the  ganglionic  nerves,  which  are  coextensive  with  these 
blood-vessels.  Claude  Bernard  claims  that  the  growth  and  changes 
of  all  the  organs  are  affected  through  the  nervous  system  only  by 
the  control  of  the  blood-vessels,  but  in  this  case  we  see  the  blood 
vessels  and  their  nerves  uninjured  and  the  blood  supplied,  but 
atrophy  occurs  because  the  vitality  from  the  brain  and  spinal  cord 
has  been  cut  off,  except  so  far  as  it  may  be  supplied  by  the  blood 
and  the  vasomotor  nerves.  If  the  theory  of  Bernard  were  true,  there 
could  be  no  atrophy  after  the  section  of  a  muscular  nerve.  Yet 
Bernard  is  one  of  the  most  eminent  modern  physiologists,  and  in 
trying  to  locate  vitality  in  the  tissues  instead  of  the  central  nervous 
system,  he  is  merely  following  the  mechanical  an  ti- vital  drift  of  the 
profession,  which  he  has  carried  to  the  redttctio  ad  absurdum. 

There  is  a  great  wasting  of  the  muscles  even  when  they  are  not 
cut  off  from  the  cord  and  brain  by  section  of  their  nerves,  in  cases 
of  hysterical  paralysis.  In  these  cases  there  is  a  loss  of  sensibility 
as  well  as  motion,  and  consequently  the  muscles  can  have  no  reflex 
influence  from  the  cord,  and  it  no  longer  sustains  them. 


46  LIFE    AS    A    SPIRITUAL    POWER.  [CHAP.    II. 

The  ganglionic  system  extending  along  the  spinal  column,  and 
sending  its  ramifications  along  all  blood-vessels,  has  been  regarded 
as  an  independent  seat  of  life,  but  in  man,  at  least,  its  action  soon 
ceases  when  the  influx  from  the  brain  is  cut  off. 

The  spinal  and  ganglionic  systems  are  connected  along  the  whole 
sninal   column  ;    and   Bernard  has  shown  the  ganglionic  (vasomotor) 

-  s  of  the  upper  extremities  arise  from  the  roots  of  the  dorsal 
1  nerves  from  the  third  to  the  seventh  pair,  and  those  for  the 

.v  :  extremities  from  the  lower  dorsal  and  lumbar  roots.  Hence 
Li  upper  dorsal  region  of  the  spine  has  an  influence  upon  the  arms 
as  w  -11  as  the  cervical  region  which  originates  the  brachial  plexus. 

That  the  ganglionic  or  sympathetic  system  which  supplies  and 
governs  the  heart  and  all  the  blood-vessels  is  under  cerebral  control 
is  shown  in  the  facility  with  which  mental  conditions  agitate  the 
heart,  disturb  the  stomach,  or  derange  the  bowels,  even  producing 
f  anting,  convulsive  action  of  the  heart,  vomiting,  or  an  attack  of 
cholera,  and  in  impressible  hypnotic  subjects  producing  actual  disease 
of  the  nature  of  what  is  impressed  on  the  mind.  None  of  these 
experiments  are  more  remarkable  than  the  production  in  St.  Francis, 
in  1224,  and  a  number  of  Catholic  devotees  of  both  sexes  since,  of 
the  stigmata  or  imitation  of  the  wounds  of  Jesus,  which  sometimes- 
even  bleed.  The  same  pervasive  power  of  the  brain  controls  and 
modifies  the  life  and  growth  in  the  womb.  In  short,  there  is  nothing 
in  man  beyond  its  control. 


CHAPTER  III. 

CRITICAL  DISCUSSION  AND  EXPOSITION  OF 
ERRORS. 

Tenacity  of  the  old  ideas  —  Centralization  of  life  in  higher  developments  — ■  Inca- 
pacity to  realize  the  functions  of  the  heart  and  the  brain  —  Disregard  of  Gall  and 
indifference  to  experiments  —  Prof.  Mitchell's  experiments  —  Defective  reasoning 
capacity  —  Origin  of  life  by  influx — Sanative  power  of  the  brain  —  Philosophy  of 
life  —  Huxley's  admissions  as  to  the  vital  power — Opposition  to  psychic  science  — 
Importance  of  psychic  co-operation  —  If  life  is  but  the  forces  of  matter  the  largest 
animals  must  have  the  most  —  Superiority  of  the  small  —  Psychic  truth  demands 
our  support  —  Vague  ideas  of  physiologists:  Todd  and  Bowman,  Bennett,  Flint, 
Bain — Doctrines  of  John  Hunter,  Dr.  Prout,  Muller,  Beclard,  Bichat,  Carpenter  — 
Life  is  not  transformed  heat — Carpenter's  absurdities  —  Beale's  statements  as  to  the 
nerves  —  Chemical  action  not  the  source  of  life  —  Life  always  comes  from  life,  as 
matter  comes  from  matter. 

Ultimate  seat  of  life  in  the  tissues,  in  fluids  and  imponderables  —  Living  substances 
in  the  air — How  to  obtain  amoebae  —  Vital  actions  of  minute  bodies  —  Their  psy- 
chic life  —  Character  and  action  of  bioplasm  —  How  it  forms  the  body  —  Passage 
of  vital  forces  by  contact,  in  and  out  of  the  body  —  Nerve  organization  beyond  the 
microscope. 

How  clearly  does  it  appear,  when  we  consider  ail  the  facts,  that 
life  in  the  body  is  an  influx  from  the  brain,  not  only  in  its  voluntary 
but  in  its  involuntary  processes,  all  of  which  are  controlled  by  the 
action  of  the  brain  and  responsive  to  its  emotional  conditions,  which 
not  only  control  every  secretion,  every  movement  of  fluids  and  every 
vital  change,*  but  transmit  a  similar  life  with  all  its  psychic  and  phy- 
siological peculiarities  to  a  new  being  in  the  womb. 

And  yet  so  strong  is  the  domination  of  habit  and  of  world-wide 
opinions,  that  I  retained  the  old  biological  ideas  on  this  subject 
longer  than  I  am  willing  to  confess,  without  comparing  them  with 
facts.     Like  other  physiologists,  I  regarded  the  brain  as  an  addition 

*The  most  perfect  demonstration  of  this  is  found  in  the  famous  stigmata  of  relig- 
ious fanatics,  in  whom  the  power  of  imagination  has  reproduced  the  appearances  of 
the  crucified  body  of  Jesus.  This  has  assumed  a  more  scientific  shape  in  the  recert 
experiments  of  several  cultivators  of  hypnotism  at  Pans,  who  have  succeeded  in  pro- 
ducing blisters  by  mental  suggestion.  It  is  nearly  half  a  century  since  experiment- 
ers in  America  have  shown  that  their  subjects  can  be  made  instantlv  to  show  the 
symptoms  of  any  disease.  A  fact  neglected  by  the  profession,  because  the  operators 
were  not  physicians.  These  facts  place  beyond  any  doubt  the  truth  that  every  func- 
tion in  the  body  is  subject  to  mental  or  cerebral  control.  Hypnotizers  have  recently 
shown  the  control  in  this  manner  of  the  heart  and  the  pulse. 


48  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.    III. 

to  a  solid  system  of  life  developed  at  a  lower  stage  of  living  in  the 
body  and  the  nerves,  —  not  perceiving  that  as  life  is  in  all  cases  an 
affair  of  the  nervous  system,  it  must  necessarily  centralize  in  the 
highest  development  or  controlling  structure  of  the  nervous  system, 
instead  of  remaining  in  its  subordinate  parts,  as  it  is  a  law  of  the 
animal  kingdom  that  with  advancing  development  the  functions  dif- 
fused through  the  body  shall  become  centralized  in  organs  of  greater 
power  and  superior  organization.  Thus  the  heart  becomes  the  chief 
reliance  for  circulation,  instead  of  the  diffused  capillary  system,  and 
the  brain  instead  of  the  spinal  and  ganglionic  systems,  which  still 
remain  in  a  subordinate  position,  as  do  the  capillaries  in  the  circula- 
tion of  the  blood.  To  ignore  the  brain  as  the  chief  seat  of  life  would 
be  as  unscientific  as  to  ignore  the  heart  as  the  cause  of  the  circula- 
tion. 

The  materialistic  physiologists  who  ignore  the  concentration  of  life 
in  the  brain,  and  suppose  the  spinal  cord  and  adjacent  ganglia  to  be 
the  entire  sources  of  the  organic  functions  to  which  they  hold  an  im- 
mediate executive  relation,  have  reflected  but  little  upon  the  absolute 
dependence  of  all  upon  the  brain,  and  the  speedy  suspension  of  all 
when  the  influx  from  the  brain  is  interrupted. 

It  is  characteristic  of  animals  to  scan  phenomena  closely  without 
dwelling  upon  or  even  discovering  their  causes,  and  it  shows  how  lit- 
tle the  general  intelligence  of  the  human  race  has  advanced  beyond 
the  stage  of  animal  life,  to  observe  that  in  the  days  of  Harvey  almost 
the  entire  medical  profession  could  look  at  the  passage  of  red  blood 
from  the  heart  and  the  return  of  the  venous  blood  toward  the  heart, 
the  arrangements  of  its  valves  and  its  forcible  action,  without  realiz- 
ing that  the  heart  was  the  active  agent  of  the  circulation,  but  stolidly 
rejecting  the  idea,  and  treating  with  coarse  derision  this  simple  and 
manifest  discovery. 

Is  it  not  the  same  intellectual  incapacity  to-day  which  hinders  the 
recognition  of  the  paramount  power  of  the  brain  as  the  seat  of  vital- 
ity, and  prevents  the  consequent  direction  of  investigations  to  dis- 
cover the  locations,  the  laws,  and  the  philosophy  of  life  in  the  seat  of 
its  existence,  by  comparative  development  as  illustrated  by  Gall;  by 
accurate  pathological  investigations  of  psychic  as  well  as  physical, 
functions  ;  by  the  study  of  the  marvellous  facts  developed  by  the 
cultivators  of  animal  magnetism  ;  or  by  my  own  method  of  vital  excit- 
ation of  the  brain  and  psychometric  exploration  of  its  functions. 

The  method  of  Gall  (studying  comparative  development  in  men 
and  animals)  was  eminently  rational,  and  no  one  has  ever  followed 
that  method  as  a  student  of  nature  without  realizing  that  Gall  had 
made  many  important  discoveries.     But  his  method  was  abandoned 


CHAP.    III.  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  AO 

■i  •  • 

by  the  profession  generally,  for  no  reason,  apparently,  but  its  aversion 
to  psychic  studies.  His  inaccuracies  were  treated  as  falsehoods,  and 
a  host  of  frivolous  objections  were  brought  forward,  the  majority  of 
which  were  based  on  ignorance  of  the  subject  and  ignorance  of  the 
doctrines  of  Gall  —  and  under  such  influences  the  present  generation 
of  physicians  has  become  confirmed  in  the  prejudices  of  ignorance 
against  a  science  of  which  they  have  no  valuable  knowledge. 

Hence  it  was  that  my  demonstrations  of  the  brain,  before  the  Bos- 
ton committee  of  physicians,  before  the  Faculty  of  the  Indiana  State 
University,  and  on  many  other  occasions  in  collegiate  institutions, 
have  produced  no  impression  on  the  profession  beyond  the  sphere  of 
my  personal  presence,  and  the  repetition  of  my  experiments  by  the 
famous  Prof.  J.  K.  Mitchell,  of  the  Jefferson  Medical  College  of  Phil- 
adelphia, produced  no  more  impression  than  a  sky-rocket  would  make 
on  the  darkness  of  the  night. 

Prof.  Mitchell  was  a  man  of  genius,  but  not  of  the  moral  courage 
which  appreciates,  upholds,  and  diffuses  truth.  He  could  not  realize 
the  splendor  and  the  power  of  a  revelation  of  the  functions  of  the 
brain,  which  he  knew  would  make  even  less  impression  upon  the 
well-organized  and  consolidated  mass  of  the  medical  profession  than 
did  the  discovery  of  Harvey,  which  was  so  simple  and  so  easily 
within  the  grasp  of  the  humblest  intelligence.  Hence  he  ceased  to 
speak  of  the  subject  or  manifest  any  further  interest  in  it,  and  for 
these  forty  years  past,  physiological  instruction  has  gone  on,  blind  to 
the  greatest  and  most  fundamental  truths,  the  ignorance  of  which 
has  had  far  more  serious  and  disastrous  effects  than  the  ignorance  of 
the  circulation,  for  it  was  an  ignorance  of  the  basis  of  all  medical 
philosophy,  ignorance  of  the  basis  of  insanity,  ignorance  of  the  phil- 
osophy of  animal  magnetism,  and  ignorance  of  the  greatest  powers  of 
the  human  mind,  through  which  all  rapid  intellectual  progress  will 
hereafter  be  made. 

The  state  of  intellectual  hebetude  which  permits  the  cultivation  of 
physiology,  in  the  study  of  its  minor  phenomena,  to  the  neglect  of 
the  brain,  with  a  vague  and  dreamy  notion  that  the  brain,  as  to  its 
convoluted  structure,  maintains  some  vague  relation  to  psychic  phe- 
nomena in  their  aggregate,  without  having,  as  all  other  nervous  struct- 
ures are  known  to  have,  specific  functions  in  special  structures,  and 
without  realizing  that  its  wonderful  psychic  powers  are  anything  more 
than  results  of  chemical  and  mechanical  processes,  is  partly  the 
result  of  our  miserably  defective  education,  and  partly  the  result  of 
imperfect  development  of  the  higher  faculties  which  seek  and  appre- 
ciate the  highest  truths,  and  cannot  therefore  be  overcome  until  a 
higher  ethical  condition  shall  place  society,  or  at  least  its  teachers,  ort 
the  plane  of  philosophy,  which  is  far  above  the  animal  nature. 


SO  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.    III. 

When  we  understand  clearly  that  life  is  located  in  the  brain  and 
its  subordinate  spinal  and  ganglionic  structures,  we  may  inquire 
whether  it  originates  there,  or  comes  by  influx  and  is  replenished 
from  the  limitless  ocean  of  unembodied  life  which  is  invisible  — 
whether  the  over-soul  of  the  universe  does  by  any  intelligible  species 
of  influx  sustain  and  develop  the  life  of  individuals,  which  seems  to 
be  a  fragment  of  the  Divine  nature  —  will,  wisdom,  and  love. 

That  there  is  such  an  influx  I  believe,  for  as  life  is  the  potential 
element  that  survives  the  body,  and  is  therefore  distinct  from  all 
material  structures,  and  capable  of  growth  and  development  while  in 
the  body,  it  must  have  an  influx  distinct  from  the  influx  of  food,  and 
that  influx  must  come  from  other  life,  or  vital  elements  which  are 
also  distinct  from  matter. 

Whether  and  to  what  extent  this  influx  is  a  direct,  immediate  influx 
from  the  spirit  world,  or  is  an  indirect  influx  by  coming  in  as  an 
influx  of  ideas  and  emotions  from  the  wise  organization,  order, 
beauty,  and  benevolence  of  the  visible  world,  or  coming  in  with  organ- 
ized matter,  and  developing  from  food  and  air,  is  a  profound  question. 
To  me  it  appears  that  we  have  both  the  direct  and  the  indirect  influx, 
and  that  there  are  potentialities  in  food  and  air  which  are  received 
into  the  body,  and  combined  with,  as  subordinate  to,  the  higher  influx 
which  is  purely  spiritual.  The  discussion  of  this  would  be  out  of 
place  here,  further  than  to  say  that  the  healer  may  often  use  this 
spiritual  influx  for  his  own  benefit  and  for  that  of  his  patient.  The 
great  positive  life  must  be  the  source  of  all  other  life,  controlling  all 
evolution  of  life  on  this  globe,  inflowing  to  man  before  birth,  and  con- 
tinuing through  life,  which  influx  controls  the  subordinate  influx  of 
light,  oxygen,  and  food.  After  this  subordinate  influx  has  ceased, 
and  the  body  has  become  unfitted  for  farther  influx  of  life  through 
the  nervous  system,  the  vitality  or  soul  which  takes  its  departure 
becomes  in  a  far  higher  degree  the  recipient  of  a  continued  influx. 
The  non-perception  and  non-recognition  of  this  influx  by  scientists  is 
no  objection  to  its  reality.  The  chief  stars  of  the  stellar  universe  are 
unknown  and  unrecognized  —  by  the  common  mind,  by  those  who 
have  not  used  the  telescope ;  and  no  matter  how  many  hundred  mil- 
lions ignore  or  disbelieve  the  invisible  influx,  its  distinct  perception 
by  a  single  telescopic  mind  establishes  its  reality. 

When  the  laws  of  divine  influx  are  studied  and  obeyed,  there  will 
be  men  and  women  with  nobler  physical  forms,  far  less  liable  to  dis- 
ease, or  to  early  decay  and  death.  The  study  of  the  brain  and  soul  will 
lead  to  that  noble  result. 

With  this  hasty  glance  it  will  be  apparent  that  I  regard  the  brain 
as  the  source  and  not  the  consumer  of  life,  and  that  we  may,  advan- 


CHAP.    III.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  5  I 

tageously,  stimulate  the  brain  for  sanative  effects,  when  we  under- 
stand its  organology.  The  natural  stimulus  of  the  brain,  as  our 
spiritual  energies  are  roused  in  conquering  obstacles,  pursuing  our 
pleasures  and  enjoying  society,  develops  our  entire  being,  physical 
and  mental.  Force  of  character,  arising  from  the  occipital  brain,  not 
only  leads  to  success,  but  energizes  and  develops  the  body.  Men 
degenerate  when  confined  for  twelve  or  fourteen  hours  to  quiet,  hum- 
ble work,  and  deprived  of  the  exercise  of  the  active  ambitious  facul- 
ties of  the  occipital  region.  Cerebral  energy  is  therefore  an  essential 
condition  of  health,  and  the  treatment  of  the  brain,  which  requires 
accurate  knowledge,  is  an  important  part  of  nervauric  treatment. 

Having  thus  shown  that  life  is  ever  an  influx,  let  us  look  to  the  ori- 
gin of  this  influx.  Does  life  from  the  celestial  world  of  life  come  to 
earth  and  summon  from  the  elements  the  matter  that  it  needs  for  an 
animal  or  vegetable  being  ? 

It  does,  and  yet  apparently  does  not.  If  life  and  matter  stand 
apart,  one  must  approach  the  other  —  life  must  approach,  for  matter 
cannot.  But  we  are  not  accustomed  to  witness  the  process.  We 
simply  observe  that  life  enters  a  small  portion  of  bioplasm  which  is 
adapted  to  life  by  its  properties  and  which  has  previously  been  organ- 
ized by  life.  The  life  that  enters  is  a  part  of  the  organizing  life  of 
parents  which  evolved  both  the  matter  and  the  spirit. 

It  is  beyond  the  range  of  our  present  science  to  speak  of  the  time 
when  life  was  not  on  earth,  and  when  it  began  to  organize  a  proto- 
plasm for  the  reception  of  the  lowest  forms  of  life,  and  to  have  the 
continuous  influx  by  which  the  lower  were  elevated  to  the  higher 
forms.  This  will  all  be  understood  in  time,  but  at  present  we  simply 
perceive  that  life  occupies,  at  its  origin,  a  speck  of  protoplasm,  and 
that  from  this  speck,  holding  in  itself  the  invisible  and  incomprehen- 
sible life,  all  forms  of  life  originate.  The  physical  organism  is  noth- 
ing but  a  nidus,  a  startin  <  point  from  which  the  creative  power  of 
the  life  proceeds  to  the  production  of  the  man,  the  animal,  or  the 
plant.  And  thus  it  becomes  self-evident  that  an  invisible  spiritual 
power  contains  the  potentiality  of  every  possible  living  being.  It 
builds  up  the  structure,  grows  with  its  growth,  fills  it  at  maturity 
with  all  the  powers  of  life,  and  within  a  limited  period  abandons  its 
home,  fully  developed  to  seek  another  sphere  of  existence  where  the 
vision  of  the  materialist  refuses  to  follow  it.  He  will  follow  the  cal- 
oric which  gives  to  steam  its  enormous  power,  when  it  has  left  the 
steam  as  powerless  water,  and  find  that  it  still  exists  as  caloric  in  a 
different  environment,  but  he  will  not  follow  the  vital  forces  when 
they  leave  the  body,  nor  will  he  listen  to  any  testimony  that  they 
have  been  perceived,  felt,  heard,  and  understood  after  this  departure. 


52  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.    III. 

He  is  willing  to  perceive  that  caloric,  after  its  departure  from  steam 
or  iron,  may  again  appear  and  enter  other  water  or  iron,  but  that 
human  vitality  can  return  to  impress  other  human  forms  he  will  not 
admit,  though,  so  far  as  it  can  be  established  by  scientific  testimony, 
it  is  as  well  established  as  any  fact  in  chemistry. 

Even  when  standing  before  the  facts  which  demonstrate  the  nature 
and  power  of  life,  the  stubborn  sceptic  refuses  to  use  his  reason  and 
surrender  his  prejudice.  Huxley,  the  prince  of  sceptics,  states  the 
case  thus :  Speaking  of  the  speck  of  protoplasm  in  which  life  begins 
its  operations,  he  says  :  "  Strange  possibilities  lie  dormant  in  that 
semi-fluid  globule.  Let  a  moderate  supply  of  warmth  reach  its 
watery  cradle,  and  the  plastic  matter  undergoes  changes  so  rapid,  and 
yet  so  steady  and  purpose-like  in  their  succession,  that  one  can  only 
compare  them  to  those  operated  by  a  skilled  modeller  upon  a  formless 
lump  of  clay.  As  with  an  invisible  trowel,  the  mass  is  divided  and 
subdivided  into  smaller  and  smaller  portions,  until  it  is  reduced  to  an 
aggregation  of  granules  not  too  large  to  build  withal  the  finest 
fabrics  of  the  nascent  organism.  And  then,  it  is  as  if  a  delicate  fin- 
ger traced  out  the  line  to  be  occupied  by  the  spinal  column  and 
moulded  the  contour  of  the  body, —  pinching  up  the  head  at  one  end, 
the  tail  at  the  other,  and  fashioning  flank  and  limb  into  due  propor- 
tions in  so  artistic  a  way,  that  after  watching  the  process  hour  by 
hour,  one  is  almost  involuntarily  possessed  by  the  notion  that  some 
more  subtle  aid  to  vision  than  an  achromatic  would  show  the  hidden 
artist,  with  his  plan  before  him,  striving  with  skilful  manipulation  to 
perfect  his  work." 

But  this  involuntary  suggestion  of  reason  that  there  is  a  "  hidden 
artist,"  a  hidden  power  working  to  a  certain  end,  the  professor  of 
materialism  suppresses  as  easily  as  a  dogmatic  theologian  suppresses 
any  involuntary  suggestion  of  reason  which  would  disturb  his  dog- 
matic faith.  He  can  recognize  invisible  caloric,  invisible  electricity, 
invisible  actinism,  invisible  affinity,  but  invisible  life  he  will  not  rec- 
ognize, for  it  is  against  his  dogmatic  creed,  and  when  it  comes  back  to 
demand  recognition  in  other  forms  he  will  not  look,  as  Horky  would 
not  look  through  Galileo's  telescope,  and  Huxley  said  the  investiga- 
tion was  of  no  interest  to  him  and  treated  it  with  contempt. 

The  arrogant  mind  which  refuses  to  recognize  the  returning  spirit, 
or  listen  to  any  evidence  of  its  return  when  it  enters  a  human  body, 
giving  to  its  subject  while  present  a  marvellous  intelligence  far 
beyond  his  normal  powers,  and  giving  to  the  ministrations  of  his 
hand  a  healing  power  over  disease  which  cannot  be  rivalled,  becomes 
an  almost  criminal  indifference  to  human  welfare  and  progress.  To 
burn  a  library  and  thus  deprive  its  readers  of  ready  access  to  the 


CHAP.    III.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  53 

wisdom  of  the  past  is  not  so  great  a  crime  as  to  make  war  upon  the 
influx  of  the  vast  stores  of  knowledge  which  humanity  is  realizing  as 
it  advances  to  the  future. 

These  suggestions  are  not  foreign  to  this  volume,  for  the  co-opera- 
tion of  the  spirit  world  is  the  most  powerful  agency  for  increasing 
the  controlling  power  of  the  human  hand:and  the  penetrating  power 
of  the  clairvoyant  and  psychometric  faculties.  Operators  who  have 
thus  been  sustained  and  guided  have  often  told  me  that  the  prin- 
ciples of  Sarcognomy  corresponded  with  the  instructions  they  had 
received  from  spiritual  sources. 

Finally,  I  would  suggest  that  if  life  is  but  "  a  collocation  of  the 
forces  of  inorganic  matter,"  the  larger  the  collocation  the  grander 
and  more  brilliant  must  be  the  result.  The  whale,  the  mastodon, 
and  megalosaurus  should  be  the  grandest  types  of  life.  But  if  life  be 
something  entirely  different  from  matter  —  a  power  by  which  matter 
is  wielded,  the  larger  the  amount  of  matter  the  more  difficult  it  must 
be  for  the  inspiring  vitality  to  wield  it  effectively  and  display  its  high- 
est powers.  The  largest  and  most  corpulent  men  and  women  would 
show  less  inspiration  or  mental  and  physical  ability  than  persons  of 
medium  size.  The  man  of  four  or  five  hundred  pounds  is  never  an 
influential  element  in  society.  The  lion,  the  tiger,  the  fox,  and  the 
squirrel  show  vastly  more  vital  energy  than  the  hippopotamus  and 
rhinoceros.  The  smallest  fish  excels  the  monsters  of  the  sea  in 
locomotive  energy,  and  the  little  birds  that  soar  in  the  air  where  man 
cannot  follow  them  exhibit  a  vital  power  and  brilliance  in  inverse  pro- 
portion to  size,  its  maximum  being  attained  in  the  little  humming 
birds  ;  and  still  the  power  of  the  living  organism  increases  as  we  go 
down  to  insects.  If  an  elephant  had  the  same  proportional  power  it 
could  leap  over  mountains  or  fly  like  a  shot  from  continent  to  conti- 
nent. Even  among  insects  the  smaller  excel  the  larger  in  vital  en- 
dowments, and,  according  to  M.  Felix  Plateau,  in  the  same  group  of 
insects  the  force  varies  inversely  as  the  weight,  both  in  power  of 
traction  and  power  of  flight.  Nor  do  the  mental  endowments  decline 
with  the  diminishing  size  ;  on  the  contrary,  the  largest  animals  that 
exist  on  land  or  in  the  sea,  or  that  ever  have  existed,  are  far  inferior 
in  psychic  endowments  and  capacity  for  intelligent  combined  action 
to  the  little  colonies  of  ants,  and  the  eagle  or  lion  shows  less  skill  in 
predatory  warfare  than  the  humble  little  spider.  It  was  a  small  man, 
five  feet  three  inches  high  and  weighing  about  a  hundred  pounds, 
when  he  began,  whose  armies  changed  the  map  of  Europe.    . 

Spirit  perpetually  struggles  with  matter  to  which  it  is  bound  :  the 
struggle  of  ages  is  in  progress  to-day  ;  and  we  have  reason  to  believe 
that  in  the  progress  of  evolution  the  mastery  of  spirit  over  the  condi- 


54  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.    III. 

tions  of  the  material  world  will  be  far  greater  ;  but  at  present  we  can 
look  for  our  entire  development  only  to  that  higher  stage  of  life 
which  is  unencumbered  by  matter. 

The  discussion  of  spiritual  life  in  this  chapter  would  be  regarded 
by  the  majority  of  scientists  to-day  as  out  of  place  in  a  work  of  prac- 
tical science,  but  truth  is  always  practical  —  always  leads  to  better 
conditions  in  human  life;  and  this  especial  truth  is  destined  to 
become  more  and  more  important,  more  and  more  prominent  in  the 
healing  art  and  in  all  social  relations,  as  civilization  advances  ;  and  it 
pre-eminently  needs  the  attention  and  support  of  honorable  scientific 
teachers  at  the  present  time,  when  it  is  so  little  known  to  the  leaders 
of  society.  No  one  is  worthy  to  be  a  teacher  who  looks  solely  to 
present  popularity  and  profit,  which  are  gained  by  coinciding  with  the 
educated  masses,  colleges,  and  sects.  Nothing  is  more  urgently 
needed  for  human  progress  than  an  honest,  unselfish  devotion  to 
truth. 

In  signal  contrast  with  the  intelligible  explanations  of  life  just 
presented,  let  us  see  how  physiologists  have  been  groping  in  the  dark, 
and  either  evaded  this  question  entirely  by  unmeaning  expressions 
or  confessed  their  absolute  ignorance,  like  Todd  and  Bowman,  who 
were  unable  to  arrive  at  any  conclusion  in  their  "  Physiological  Anat- 
omy and  Physiology  of  Man." 

The  most  prevalent  doctrine  of  the  schools  is  that  life  is  the 
product  of  the  chemical  energies  of  matter  in  its  organized  condition, 
or,  as  expressed  by  Bennett,  "  Our  modern  view  of  life  is,  not  that  it 
is  independent  of  matter,  but  a  condition  of  matter  ;  in  other 
words,  that  material  substances  found  in  the  atmosphere  and  in  plants 
and  animals,  influenced  by  certain  forces,  have  peculiar  properties 
communicated  to  them.  These  properties  are  the  power  of  growth 
in  certain  directions,  contractility,  sensibility,  and  mental  acts  ;  the 
exercise  of  any  one  of  which  constitutes  life."  "We  are  as  ignorant 
of  the  true  nature  of  physical  as  we  are  of  vital  properties." 

Notwithstanding  the  confession  of  ignorance,  this  is  a  positive 
assertion,  that  "  mental  acts  "  are  produced  by  organized  matter,  a 
doctrine  most  unequivocally  expressed  by  the  American  physiological 
author,  Flint,  in  saying  that  the  brain  secretes  thought  as  the  liver 
secretes  bile.  Physiologists  simply  stare  at  the  fact  that  vital  func- 
tions are  manifested,  and  that  the  manifestation  comes  from  organ- 
ized matter,  and  there  they  rest,  in  the  assumption  that  the  power 
belongs  to  the  matter  in  consequence  of  organization.  Prof.  Bain, 
who  has  been  regarded  as  a  philosophic  writer,  speaks  of  life  in  his 
work  on  the  "  Senses  and  Intellect,"  page  60,  as  "  a  collocation  of  the 
forces  of  inorganic  matter"  !  ! 


CHAP.    III.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  55 

John  Hunter,  however,  recognized  the  truth  that  "mere  composi- 
tion of  matter  does  not  give  life,"  and  therefore  inferred  that  there 
must  be  a  distinct  vital  substance  which  he  called  materia  vita?  (mat- 
ter of  life)  diffused  through  the  body,  which  Dr.  Abernethy  supposed 
to  be  similar  to  electricity.    . 

Dr.  Prout,  author  of  one  of  the  Bridgewater  Treatises,  went  a  lit- 
tle farther,  and  supposed  that  the  phenomena  of  life  must  be  due  to 
certain  organic  agents  of  great  variety  among  animals  and  plants,  "  an 
ultimate  principle  endowed  by  the  Creator  with  a  faculty  little  short 
of  intelligence,  by  means  of  which  it  is  enabled  to  construct  such  a 
mechanism  from  natural  elements,  and  by  the  aid  of  natural  agencies, 
as  to  render  it  capable  of  taking  further  advantage  of. their  properties 
and  of  making  them  subservient  to  its  use." 

This  was  a  rational  inference  from  the  facts,  but  why  could  not  Dr. 
Prout  go  a  little  farther  and  recognize  the  fact  that  this  organic  agent 
was  nothing  else  but  the  spiritual  element  inherited  from  a  prior  life, 
the  departure  of  which  at  death  left  the  organized  body  without  a 
single  vital  power.  When  we  recognize  that  spiritual  element  and 
trace  its  action  through  the  brain  and  nervous  system  the  explanation 
of  life  is  complete. 

But  the  suggestions  of  Prout  were  rejected  as  fanciful,  though 
Muller,  the  German  physiologist,  ventured  to  assert  almost  the  same 
thing  —  that  there  was  an  "organic  force"  in  the  whole  constitution 
which  generated  the  organs.  fc'  This  rational  creative  force  "  (said  he) 
"  is  exerted  in  every  animal  strictly  in  accordance  with  what  the  nature 
of  each  requires  :  it  exists  already  in  the  germ,  and  creates  in  it  the 
essential  parts  of  the  future  animal."  This  is  very  true,  but  what 
rational  creative  force  is  there  in  man  but  that  which  the  parent  gives 
to  the  germ  and  which  when  it  is  withdrawn  leaves  the  body  without 
any  vital  power.  The  materialism  which  refuses  to  recognize  the 
soul,  and  neglects  the  psychic  study  of  the  brain,  is  what  has  obscured 
the  intelligence  of  physiologists,  and  left  them  to  fall  back  on  such 
vague  expressions  of  ignorance  as  where  Beclard  calls  life  "  the 
special  activity  of  organized  bodies/'  Lawrence  calls  it  "  an  assem- 
blage of  all  the  functions,"  and  Bichat  "  the  sum  total  of  the  func- 
tions which  resist  death  "  —  in  which  there  is  no  explanation  of  any- 
thing. 

The  learned  Prof.  Carpenter,  though  not  a  strict  materialist, 
makes  a  still  more  blind  and  confused  statement  in  his  "  Principles  of 
Human  Physiology,"  in  which  he  says:  "  The  source  of  this  Vital  Power 
is  to  be  found,  not  in  the  organization  of  the  being  itself,  but  in  the 
forces  which  operate  upon  it  ab  extemo ;  and  that  it  has  the  same 
close   and    intimate  relation    with   the    Heat,   Electricity,   Chemical 


56  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.    III. 

Affinity,  and  other  agencies  of  the  Inorganic  world,  which  they  have 
been  proved  to  have  with  each  other:  so  that  just  as  Heat  acting 
upon  water  generates  Mechanical  Force,  or  when  applied  to  a  certain 
combination  of  metals  excites  Electricity,  so  when  brought  to  bear 
upon  a  torpid  animal  or  upon  a  seed  (in  which  the  material  conditions 
of  this  activity  are  present)  it  manifests  itself  as  Vital  Force."  In 
other  words,  vitality  is  transformed  Heat. 

It  is  true  that  caloric  is  necessary  to  vital  operations,  but  there  is 
not  the  slightest  evidence  of  its  being  transformed  in  the  body.  The 
food  which  comes  in  ab  externo  is  equally  necessary  and  is  really 
transformed  in  the  body  :  hence  he  might  more  rationally  have  made 
food  the  source  of  vitality.  The  same  might  be  said  of  water,  with- 
out which  there  is  no  life.  The  Rotifer  when  dried  appears  quite 
dead,  but,  water  supplied,  it  manifests  life  :  so  we  might  in  Dr.  Car- 
penter's fashion  call  water  the  source  of  life,  as  there  is  no  life  with- 
out it.  With  still  better  reason  he  might  have  called  oxygen  the 
source  of  life. 

Dr.  Carpenter,  though  a  very  learned  physiologist,  was  not  a  pro- 
found or  acute  thinker,  but  was  capable  of  following  a  speculation  to 
very  absurd  results,  as  when  in  following  up  the  chemical  theory  of 
the  value  of  food  and  its  calorific  power  he  asserted  that  starch  would 
be  a  better  diet  than  animal  food  for  the  Polar  regions  with  the  ther- 
mometer forty  or  fifty  degrees  below  zero.  His  language  was  :  '  A 
savage  with  one  carcass  and  an  equal  weight  of  starch  would  sup- 
port life  for  the  same  length  of  time  during  which  another  restricted 
to  animal  food  would  require  five  such  carcasses." 

No  savage  or  scientist  was  ever  silly  enough  to  act  on  this  theory 
that  a  hundred  pounds  of  starch  would  support  life  and  warmth  as 
well  as  four  hundred  pounds  of  meat,  for  meat  is  indispensable  in 
arctic  climates.  The  blunder  of  Dr.  Carpenter  was  owing  to  a  mis- 
take in  his  chemical  calculations,  which,  however,  has  not  been 
observed  or  corrected  by  his  cotemporaries. 

His  error  in  placing  the  source  of  life  in  external  agents  was  owing 
to  that  very  common  obtuseness  among  physiologists  which  leads 
them  to  turn  away  from  the  brain  and  soul,  of  which  they  know  so 
little,  and  try  to  explain  life  without  them,  which  of  course  results  in 
failure  and  absurdity. 

The  chemico-mechanical  theory  which  ignores  life  leads  to  the  gen- 
eral reception  of  that  most  baseless  theory  that  the  combustion  of 
carbon  in  the  body  produces  muscular  power,  although  the  most 
extreme  combustion  of  carbon,  producing  feverish  heat,  is  accom- 
panied by  the  total  destruction  of  muscular  power. 

The  same  theory  requires  the  assumption  that  chemical  action  in 


CHAP.    III.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  57 

the  brain  and  nerves  is  the  source  of  mental  and  nervous  energy. 
Of  this  Dr.  Lionel  Beale,  who  has  no  superior  in  England  in  micro- 
scopic physiology,  says  :  "The  view  that  nerve  energy  is  stored  up  in 
chemical  compounds  which  undergo  change  during  nerve  action  is 
still  taught.  That  such  an  idea  should  be  stated  at  all  betrays  igno- 
rance of  the  character  of  the  axis  cylinder  of  the  nerve  itself.  If  we 
examine  the  axis  cylinder,  say  of  the  sciatic  nerve  of  a  frog,  what  do 
we  find  ?  A  firm,  tough,  fibrous-like,  flattened  band,  not  easily  torn, 
and  evidently  consisting  of  a  tissue  of  slow  growth  —  in  fact,  the 
very  last  characters  we  should  expect  to  meet  with  in  a  tissue  prone 
to  rapid  chemical  change.  Neither  is  a  structure  surrounded  by  ten 
times  its  thickness  of  oily  matter  (myelin)  favorably  situated  for  tak- 
ing up  new  materials  and  quickly  getting  rid  of  products  of  decay. 
One  of  the  least  permeable  substances  in  the  body  is  the  myelin  of 
the  nerve  fibre,  and  yet  through  this  must  pass  all  the  material  from 
the  blood  to  renovate  the  disintegrated  axis  cylinder,  if  nerve  action 
is  due  to  such  chemical  change  in  the  nerve  fibre  itself." 

When  we  ignore  the  power  of  the  soul  and  the  brain  we  are  com- 
pelled to  make  many  such  baseless  assertions. 

It  is  utterly  impossible  to  trace  vital  phenomena  to  chemical  action/) 
The  chief  chemical  action,  combustion,  produces  neither  muscular, 
mental,  nervous,  nor  nutritive  power.  It  is  positively  antagonistic 
both  to  muscularity  and  to  nutrition.  The  most  complete  formative 
nutrition  occurs  before  birth,  when  the  chemical  process  of  combus- 
tion has  not  yet  commenced.  Combustion  simply  produces  heat, 
which  is  a  necessary  condition  for  vital  processes,  and  when  that  heat 
is  furnished  in  warm  climates  by  the  atmosphere,  less  combustion 
occurs  and  less  food  is  needed  ;  the  demand  for  food  is  to  supply  the 
waste  of  the  tissues,  as  they  wear  out,  and  an  excessive  supply  might 
result  in  fever.  And  yet  both  mental  and  muscular  vigor  are  main- 
tained when  the  chemical  generation  of  heat  is  so  nearly  suspended. 
If  under  such  conditions  the  spiritual  vitality  be  sufficient  to  check 
the  ordinary  decomposition,  life  may  be  maintained  without  food  for 
very  long  periods,  and  the  entire  suspension  of  life  in  the  well- 
attested  cases  in  which  Hindoos  have  been  buried  for  months  becomes 
credible. 

The  characteristic  of  vitality  is  that  it  is  utterly  inexplicable  by 
any  known  chemical  or  mechanical  cause.  It  is  an  original  independ- 
ent power,  as  much  as  our  own  will  power,  making  matter  move, 
grow,  and  pass  through  many  changes  to  produce  a  definite,  complex, 
and  valuable  result  which  never  has  been  and  never  can  be  imitated 
by  any  other  power. 

This  vital  power  has  never  come  from  any  organization  of  matter, 


58  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.    Ill 

either  accidental  or  designedly  produced,  but  has  always  come 
from  a  preceding  vitality  of  which  it  is  the  continuation,  which  vital- 
ity has  existed  solely  in  a  delicate,  fluid,  self-moving  material,  in  the 
interior  of  living  bodies,  which  has  the  power  of  taking  hold  of  other 
matter  and  transforming  it  in  a  manner  peculiar  to  life. 

Thus  are  all  living  bodies  formed,  and  their  form  is  due  to  the 
character  of  the  original  vitality,  for  the  source  of  which  we  are  com- 
pelled to  look  along  the  endless  line  of  prior  life ;  and  finding  that  it 
has  never  originated  from  dead  matter,  we  are  compelled  to  seek  its 
origin  in  the  life  which  exists  independent  of  matter,  one  form  of 
which,  after  dwelling  in  matter,  returns  to  the  immaterial  mode  of 
existence  as  the  spiritual  man. 

Life,  being  immaterial  or  spiritual,  must  evidently  have  entered  mat- 
ter from  the  spiritual  world  —  the  infinity  of  which  we  call  Divine. 
How,  when,  and  where  this  incarnation  of  the  Divine  has  occurred  is 
a  question  which  is  not  beyond  human  capacity.  The  future  will 
reveal. 

THE    ULTIMATE    SEAT    OF    LIFE    IN    THE    TISSUES. 

Life  is  an  element  of  infinite  freedom  and  versatility  of  action  — 
the  very  antithesis  of  dead  matter,  and  consequently  can  associate 
with  matter  only  in  its  refined  and  mobile  forms.  Its  most  congenial 
home  is  in  association  with  imponderable  elements.  In  material  organ- 
isms it  locates  exclusively  in  fluid  substance,  and  not  in  compact  solid 
material. 

If  the  moisture  of  the  air  be  condensed  on  a  glass  vessel  containing 
ice,  we  obtain  evidence  of  the  vast  diffusion  of  the  minute  forms  of 
life  inherent  in  fluids.  A  good  magnifying  power  will  exhibit  soft 
amorphous  transparent  particles  suspended  in  the  fluid,  very  difficult 
to  detect  by  the  microscope,  and  another  class  of  oval  or  spherical 
particles  consisting  of  the  soft  transparent  substance  in  a  firmer  mem- 
brane. The  mass  of  structureless  bioplasm  constituting  the  amoebae 
may  be  obtained  by  putting  in  water  a  small  fragment  of  animal  or 
vegetable  matter  and  leaving  it  a  few  days  in  the  light.  The  amoebae 
may  be  seen  actively  moving  without  apparent  organs  of  motion,  and 
taking  in  food  without  apparent  digestive  organs.  Though  less  than 
the  hundred  thousandth  of  an  inch,  they  show  active  movements  and 
change  of  form.  The  same  continual  movements  and  change  of  form 
are  seen  in  the  human  mucus  corpuscles  or  white  blood  corpuscles, 
movements  originating  in  their  substance  without  external  cause. 

The  living  matter  of  animal  bodies  consists  of  free  transparent  sub- 
stance, or  of  such  substance  enclosed  in  a  capsule.  This  transparent, 
structureless  fluid  is  the  peculiar  substance  or  bioplasm  possessing 


CHAP.    I 


II.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  59 


life,  and  has  the  capacity  for  vital  movements,  differing  from  all  other 
substances.  Not  merely  in  the  amoebae  or  any  other  definite  forms 
do  these  powers  exist,  but  wherever  this  transparent  structureless  bio- 
plasm exists  it  manifests  this  mysterious  self-acting  power,  and  a  still 
more  mysterious  control  over  adjacent  matter,  changing  it  from  dead  to 
living  matter  with  new  properties  as  the  adult  animal  assimilates  food. 
Moreover,  it  has  in  miniature  all  the  properties  of  life  —  not  only 
locomotion,  digestion,  and  growth,  but  choice  in  the  selection  of  its 
food,  and  even  the  power  of  preying  upon  small  organisms  as  one 
animal  preys  upon  another  —  as  the  snake  swallows  a  frog  —  and  pur- 
suing and  uniting  with  another  organism  as  if  attracted  by  love.  The 
white  corpuscles  of  the  blood  can  devour  bacilli,  and  the  male  sper- 
matozoa rush  on  with  persevering,  active,  and  diversified  movements  of 
their  tails,  circular  or  undulatory,  to  seek  and  enter  the  female  ovule, 
their  eager  conjunction  being  a  repetition,  on  a  smaller  scale,  of  the 
affectionate  union  of  the  male  and  female  to  whom  they  belong.  The 
"  psychic  life  of  micro-organisms,"  so  clearly  shown  by  A.  Binet,  is 
just  as  real  in  those  simple  bioplasmic  elements  in  man,  the  white  cor- 
puscles and  the  spermatozoa.  Thus  life,  which  is  fully  developed  in 
man,  is  everywhere  in  the  animal  kingdom  essentially  the  same,  even 
in  the  smallest  bioplasmic  element.  In  the  spermatozoon  it  partakes 
of  the  energy  or  debility  of  the  man,  and  carries  in  itself  a  micro- 
scopic embodiment  of  all  his  characteristics,  as  the  acorn  embodies  the 
characteristics  of  the  oak,  and  hence  it  acts  with  the  characteristics 
of  its  parent  in  its  microscopic  existence  as  well  as  when  that  existence 
has  been  enlarged  to  the  human  type  in  the  infant.  Wonderful  is 
the  perfection  with  which  the  spermatozoon  represents  the  man. 

Bioplasm  has  everywhere  the  power  which  we  see  in  the  amoebae, 
of  continually  absorbing  and  vitalizing  other  matter,  and  also  of  form- 
ing from  itself  solid  substances,  or  throwing  off  liquid  or  gaseous 
matter,  and  it  is  the  essential  element  of  all  living  bodies  from  which 
all  structures  of  animals  and  plants  are  formed,  owing  its  origin,  so 
far  as  we  can  trace,  to  prior  bioplasm,  since  it  never  originates  from 
dead  matter.  Each  species  of  bioplasm  has  different  vital  properties 
and  capacity  for  forming  different  substances.  How  the  life  resid- 
ing in  bioplasm  determines  the  formation  of  muscle,  bone,  integu- 
ment, nerve,  etc.,  is  still  an  unfathomed  mystery,  infinitely  beyond  the 
reach  of  physical  science.  We  can  learn  only  that  life  is  organized 
power,  working  with  a  certain  intelligence  toward  its  own  manifestation 
in  matter.  Our  best  conception  of  its  nature  is  that  which  we  derive 
from  consciousness,  as  we  are  living  beings.  But  when  we  examine 
the  bioplasm  with  the  highest  microscopic  powers,  enlarging  diame- 
ters 5000  times,  we  get  an  objective  view  of  the  working  of  this 


60  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.     III. 

power  (of  which  we  are  conscious  in  our  own  voluntary  movements) 
as  it  displays  itself  in  the  bioplasm.  Dr.  Beale  says  :  "The  compo- 
nent particles  of  the  bioplasm  evidently  alter  their  positions  in  a 
most  remarkable  manner.  One  particle  really  moves  in  advance  of 
another  or  around  another.  A  portion  may  move  into  or  round 
another  portion.  A  bulging  may  occur  at  one  point  of  the  circumfer- 
ence, or  at  ten  or  twenty  different  points  at  the  same  moment.  The 
moving  power  resides  in  every  particle  of  the  very  transparent,  invari- 
ably colorless  and  structureless  material,  for  by  the  very  highest  powers 
only  an  indication  of  minute  spherical  particles  can  be  discerned. 
Because  molecules  have  been  seen  in  some  of  the  masses  of  moving 
bioplasm,  the  motion  has  been  attributed  to  these.  It  is  true  the 
molecules  actually  move,  but  the  living  transparent  material  in  which 
they  are  situated  moves  first,  and  the  molecules  are  carried  by  the  cur- 
rents into  the  extended  portion.  .  .  The  movements  of  bioplasm  are 
totally  distinct  from  contractility,  as  manifested  by  any  form  of  muscu- 
lar tissue,  since  they  take  place  in  every  direction  and  every  movement 
differs  from  the  rest."  Thus  its  vitality  belongs  not  to  an  organism,  but 
to  all  its  particles,  molecules,  or  atoms  independently.  The  psychic 
capacities  of  ants  and  of  many  minute  insects  show  that  infinitesimal 
particles  of  living  matter  may  have  high  psychic  capacities. 

How  this  active  bioplasm  produces  the  structures  of  the  body  is 
explained  by  Dr.  Beale  as  follows  :  "  Men  and  animals,  all  their 
tissues  and  organs,  their  forms  and  structures,  result  from  series  of 
changes  which  commence  in  a  portion  of  matter  too  minute  to  be 
weighed,  which  is  perfectly  colorless,  and  which  appears  perfectly 
structureless.  Even  if  the  particle  of  bioplasm  be  magnified  5000 
diameters,  not  the  faintest  indication  of  fibres  or  particles  exhibiting 
any  special  arrangement — in  fact,  not  a  trace  of  anything  having 
structure  —  can  be  discerned." 

"  The  speck  of  living  matter,  however,  absorbs  certain  substances, 
and  increases  by  assimilating  matter  it  selects,  and  changing  it  into 
matter  like  itself.  Thus  it  gradually  grows,  and  where  it  has  attained 
a  certain  size,  perhaps  one  two-thousandth  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  it 
divides ;  or  small  portions  are  detached  from  it,  each  of  which  grows 
like  the  primary  particle,  and  in  the  same  way  gives  origin  to  succes- 
sors from  which  tissues  are  at  length  produced.  Form  and  structure 
result  from  the  death  of  the  bioplasm,  and  no  matter  that  is  alive 
possesses  either."     (Protoplasm,  p.  302.) 

Thus  the  solid  tissues  of  the  body  are,  as  it  were,  the  apparatus 
vitalized  by  the  unseen  bioplasm,  which  is  itself  but  fluid  matter 
inhabited  by  life,  itself  a  power  as  intangible  and  mysterious  as  grav- 
ity.   The  structures  which  it  forms  by  developing  cells,  and  the  glob- 


CHAP.     III.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  6l 

ules  and  fibrillae  of  the  nervous  system,  through  which  it  controls 
our  voluntary  movements,  are  illustrated  in  the  following  sketches. 
(See  Plate  of  bioplasm  and  nerves.) 

In  these  we  see  that  the  ultimate  relation  of  nerve  to  muscle  is 
simply  that  of  contact,  and  consequently  that  the  transmission  of  the 
vital  force  of  volition,  which  moves  the  muscle,  is  simply  the  passage 
of  that  force  or  influence  from  one  fibril  to  another  —  substantially 
the  same  fact  as  that  against  which  medical  dogmatism  battles  —  the 
passage  of  human  nervauric  influence  from  the  hand  of  the  operator 
to  the  subject,  by  which  so  many  vital  influences  are  produced,  and 
muscles  are  contracted.  The  same  thing  is  seen  in  the  brain,  the 
spinal  cord,  and  the  ganglia.  A  great  number  of  the  ganglion  globules 
or  cells  of  various  degrees  of  maturity,  which  abound  where  large  ner- 
vous masses  are  found,  have  no  fibrous  or  tubular  connections,  and 
consequently  exert  their  influence  only  by  contact  with  the  delicate 
fibrillae  and  nerve  tubes  among  them.*  "It  is  most  probable  "  (says 
Solly)  "  that  the  nucleated  cells  of  vesicular  neurine  are  the  active 
agents  in  the  production  of  nervous  power."  Yet,  if  these  produce 
a  nervous  power  to  be  transmitted  to  the  body,  it  must  pass  by  con- 
tact, as  they  are  isolated  from  the  nerve  channels  which  connect 
with  the  caudate  vesicles  and  maybe  traced  in  their  downward  course. 
I  think  it  quite  certain  that  influences  are  continually  passing  through 
the  body  for  which  we  cannot  trace  definite  routes  ;  and  the  power 
transmitted  by  the  nerves  traverses  a  homogeneous  semifluid  sub- 
stance, not  as  a  liquid  or  gas,  but  as  an  indefinable  power  trans- 
mitted by  contact  or  continuity  of  substance.  What  right  have  we  to 
suppose  that  this  transmission  of  power  is  abruptly  arrested  at  the 
surface  of  the  body  ?  All  sensitive  persons  know  by  their  personal 
experience  that  it  is  not. 

As  the  search  for  life  ends  in  the  mystery  of  a  bioplasmic  fluid,  so 
does  the  search  for  its  principal  seat  in  the  nervous  system  end  in  a 
delicacy  of  structure  which  is  beyond  the  reach  of  the  microscope. 
In  the  lowest  organisms  the  nerve  substance  is  beyond  discovery  — 
even  leading  some  physiologists  to  suppose  that  it  is  diffused  through 
the  substance  of  the  body. 

*  These  detached  cells  are  an  exception  to  the  general  structure  of  the  nervous 
system,  and  are  supposed  to  be  germinating  cells  not  yet  sufficiently  developed  to 
display  fibrous  connections. 


FlG  7  ^_s:; 

The  production  of  formed  material  from  bioplasm. in  epithelial  cells 

fWffli 


Disfribution  of  finest  nerve  fibres  which  result  from  the  division  of  dark-bordered  nerve  fibres  to 
the  elementary  muscular  fibres  of  the  thin  mylo-hyold  muscle  of  the  hylaorgreen  tree  frog.  Tba 
diameter  of  each  muscular  fibie  is  Jess  than  tHat  Qf  a  human  red  blood  corpuscle. 


FlG.lo 


PLATE  I 
BIOPLASM 

AND 

NERVES 


CHAP.    III.]  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  63 

DESCRIPTION    OF    THE    PLATE BIOPLASM    AND    NERVES. 

In  Fig.  1  we  see  minute  living  amoebae  magnified  five  thousand  times,  pictured 
in  one  of  their  momentary  forms.  If  photographed  every  minute  no  two  photo- 
graphs would  be  the  same,  for  every  portion  of  their  substance  moves  independently, 
like  the  individuals  of  an  army;  and  this  internal  living  motion  belongs  in  like  man- 
ner to  the  white  blood  globules  of  man,  the  pus  corpuscles  and  the  mucus  corpuscles, 
so  long  as  they  are  alive,  showing  that  vitality  is  intimately  combined  with  every  por- 
tion of  living  matter. 

In  Fig.  2,  A  and  B  show  the  mysterious  structure  of  the  cerebellum.  In  A 
the  letter  a  indicates  a  round  ganglion  globule  containing  a  little  nucleus,  and  b 
refers  to  the  delicate  nerve-tubes.  These  structures  lie  in  a  bed  of  fine  granular 
matter,  containing  many  nuclei.  These  are  from  the  interior  of  the  cerebellum. 
The  surface  structure  of  the  cerebellum  is  shown  in  B.  a  refers  to  a  ganglion  globule 
not  30  large  as  that  in  A,  for  the  structures  at  the  surface  of  the  cerebrum  and  cere- 
bellum are  much  finer  than  those  in  the  interior,  which  connect  with  the  muscular 
system  of  the  body.  The  granular  matter  with  nuclei  appear  as  in  A.  Coarseness 
of  structure  in  the  nervous  system  is  found  in  the  muscular  nerves  and  the  central 
portions  with  which  they  connect.  Sensitive  structures  are  finer,  the  emotional  and 
intellectual  finest  of  all. 

In  Fig.  3  we  have  a  ganglion  cell  of  the  green  tree-frog,  from  its  sympathetic  or 
involuntary  system,  showing  a  complex  organism,  acting  like  a  little  brain  upon  the 
straight  fibre  and  the  spiral  fibre  which  it  gives  off.  This  little  cell  controls  and 
sustains  the  parts  that  it  supplies  more  wisely  than  it  could  be  done  by  voluntary, 
action.  Life  would  be  impossible  if  its  processes  were  not  sustained  by  involuntary 
action, —  but  what  does  science  know  to-day  of  these  involuntary  processes. 

In  Fig.  4  we  observe  the  origin  of  life  as  near  as  we  can  approach  it, —  the  devel- 
opment of  a  spermatozoon,  a  possible  future  animal  (after  Wagner),  occurringin  the 
vesicle  of  evolution,  but  we  learn  nothing  of  the  power  that  forms  it.  Life  remains 
a  mystery. 

In  Fig.  5  Dr.  Beale  shows  the  origin  of  tendon  from  the  central  bioplasmic  sub- 
stance that  forms  it.  We  know  the  process  exists,  but  we  do  not  understand  it.  We 
simply  know  that  a  certain  soft  or  fluid  material  has  organizing  power. 

In  Fig.  6  we  have  a  nerve  vesicle,  called  caudate,  because  it  has  many  branch- 
ing processes  running  off  to  minute  filaments  which  are  like  the  interior  portion  of 
larger  tubular  nerve  fibres,  one  of  which  is  seen  in  the  figure.  This  vesicle  is  from 
the  posterior  horn  of  the  gray  substance  of  the  spinal  cord.  It  shows  the  complex 
radiations  and  connections  of  nervous  matter,  which  are  still  more  numerous  and 
much  finer  in  the  brain. 

In  Fig.  7  we  see,  as  in  Fig.  5,  the  formative  element  or  bioplasm  existing  and 
operating  in  epithelial  cells,  the  formed  material  increasing  as  the  central  bioplasm 
is  consumed  in  making  it. 

In  Fig.  8  we  learn  something  of  the  origin  of  our  own  lives.  In  the  germinal 
membrane  appears  a  roundish  spot,  where  two  membranes  are  in  contact,  a  serous 
and  a  mucous  layer,  the  former  to  develop  the  nervous  and  muscular  systems,  the 
latter  the  digestive  organs.  The  central  portion  of  the  geiminal  area  becomes  a 
pellucid  area,  in  which  appears  a  delicate  line,  the  primitive  groove,  appearing  in 
the  serous  layer.  This  is  the  beginning,  and  at  this  beginning  we  find  one  end 
wider  than  the  other;  at  this  end  the  head  is  formed.  Cells  are  developed  on  each 
side  of  the  primitive  groove,  making  what  are  called  the  dorsal  laminae.  They 
form  a  tube  for  the  head,  in  which  appear  its  three  essential  parts,  or  germs  of 
cerebrum,  cerebellum,  and  optic  lobes. 

The  first  appearance  of  the  nervous  system,  the  "  primitive  trace  "  in  the  serous 
membrane,  is  a"  delicate  and  pale-white  line  rising  somewhat  above  the  general  sur- 
face of  the  germinal  area;  the  thicker  portion  is  destined  to  become  the  head  of  the 
embryo."  The  spinal  cord  and  rudimentary  brain  are  thus  developed  at  the  beginning 
of  life,  the  origin  of  the  brain  being  at  three  positions,  the  medulla  oblongata  from 
which  comes  the  cerebellum,  the  inferior  ganglion  which  originates  the  cerebrum, 
and  retains  the  name  of  optic  thalamus  and  corpus  striatum,  and  the  intermediate 
body,  the  optic  lobes  or  corpora  quadrigemina  which  are  the  largest  part  of  the  brain 
of  a  fish,  but  decline  to  a  very  small  size  in  man. 

The  figure  which  is  here  presented  as  giving  the  origin  01  the  nervous  system  is 
taken  from  Bischoff,  and  shows  the  parts  magnified  eight  times.  We  learn  from  this 
the  dominating  priority  of  the  central  nervous  system,  the  structure  in  which  con- 
scious life  resides.  The  letter  B  refers  to  the  brain  and  L  to  the  lumbar  enlargement 
of  the  cord.     The  spinal  cord  is  first  completed  at  the  middle  of  its  length. 

In  Fig.  9  Dr.  Beale  has  shown  the  wonderfully  minute  distribution  of  fine  nerve 
filaments  among  the  muscular  fibres  of  the  frog,  which  are  less    than    the    three 


64  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  [CHAP.     III. 

thousandth  of  an  inch  in  diameter.  The  fine  nerve  filaments  would  appear  less  than 
the  twenty  thousandth  of  an  inch.  There  is  no  union  or  plunging  of  nerve  fila- 
ments into  the  muscular  fibre,  and  consequently,  when  we  consider  the  nervous  in- 
fluence that  produces  muscular  action,  it  is  proven  by  minute  anatomy  that  this 
influence  is  something  that  passes  from  the  nerve  fibre  to  the  muscle  fibre.  This 
passage  of  nerve  currents,  like  currents  of  electricity  in  the  nerves  and  beyond  them, 
is  an  important  principle  in  physiology,  which  is  the  basis  of  the  revolution  in  phy- 
siology that  ray  experiments  establish,  and  the  wilful  ignoring  of  this  truth  is* what 
has  paralyzed  the  progress  of  biology  in  its  higher  realms. 

In  Fig.  10  we  have  Dr.  Beale's  explanation  of  the  fundamental  fact  of  life  and 
growth.  A  formed  cell  is  displayed  with  its  centre  of  living  matter  or  bioplasm. 
Toward  this  centre  of  life  the  liquid  pabulum  flows  in  as  indicated  by  the  arrows, 
and  becomes  vitalized  ;  a  refers  to  the  bioplasm,  c  to  the  fresh-formed  material, 
and  c  *  to  the  exterior  material  of  older  growth.  This  is  the  philosophy  and 
mechanism  of  all  growth.  But  science  has  yet  to  reveal  why  we  grow  at  all,  and 
why  we  cease  to  grow.  That  is  a  matter  of  vitality,  and  the  world's  scientists  stop  at 
the  margin  of  vitality,  either  resting  in  contented  ignorance  or  indulging  in  stupid 
mechanical  conjectures.  I  am  not  content  with  this  ignorance,  but  having 
approached  the  citadel  of  life,  I  affirm  that  it  can  be  entered  by  the  path  of  Psycho- 
metry.  We  can  but  say  at  present  that  dead  matter  is  vitalized  by  contact  with  the 
bioplasm,  and  the  same  principle  is  illustrated,  on  a  large  scale,  by  the  manner  in 
which  a  healthy  living  person  imparts  vitality  by  contact  to  an  invalid. 

In  Fig.  ii  is  presented  another  illustration  of  vital  mysteries,  the  cilia,  which 
by  their  ceaseless  movement  defy  all  explanation.  Dr.  Beale  traces  their  connection 
with  a  bioplasm  at  their  base,  thus  showing  that  their  motion  is  but  another  illustra- 
tion of  the  well-known  property  of  bioplasm,  voluntary  or  self-originated  action. 
Life  is  the  moving  power  of  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms,  and  the  inscrutable 
divine  life  of  the  universe  is  the  supposed  source  of  all  its  movements. 


The  wonderful  forms  assumed  by  the  nervous  substance,  and  the  vast  variety  of 
structures  produced  by  the  bioplasm,  evince  its  possession  of  a  creative  or  rather 
organizing  power  which  implies  independent  action  or  motion  in  itself,  a  perfect 
autonomy  inherent  in  its  nature.  Dr.  Beale  says  :  "  It  must,  I  think,  be  admitted  that 
there  is  a  great  accumulation  of  evidence  in  favor  of  the  general  conclusion  that  all 
living1  matter  possesses  a  pozver  of  movement.  It  seems  to  me  that  not  one  step  in 
growth  can  be  explained  unless  the  particles  of  living  matter  move  by  virtue  of  some 
inherent  force  or  power,  which  acts  independently  of,  and  is  capable  of  overcoming, 
the  force  of  gravitation.  The  movements  of  living  matter  have  been  observed  in 
many  of  the  lower  forms  of  living  structures.  I  have  described  the  phenomenon  as  it 
may  be  seen  in  the  mucous  corpuscles  and  young  epithelial  cells  of  the  nasal  and 
bronchial  mucous  membranes,  and  although  I  have  not  seen  the  movements  in  the 
living  matter  of  the  tissues  generally,  there  seems  to  me  the  strongest  evidence 
that  such  movements  actually  occur." 

The  mysteries  of  life  recede  as  we  approach.  When  we  look  at  the  minutest  ner- 
vous structures,  the  microscope  reveals  a  complexity  of  structure  which  still  excites 
greater  wonder.  A  fully  formed  ganglion-cell  from  a  ganglion  in  the  sympathetic 
system  of  the  common  frog  (see  Fig.  3),  looks  as  mysterious  and  inscrutable  in  struc- 
ture and  operation  as  the  human  brain.  The  spiral  fibre  comes  from  the  circum- 
ference of  the  cell  and  has  its  own  destination.  The  straight  fibre  comes  rrom  the 
interior  of  the  cell,  and  proceeds  to  an  opposite  destination.  The  straight  fibres 
that  pass  through  cells  are  not  merged  in  their  substance,  but  pass  through  the  soft 
bioplasm  which  surrounds  and  vitalizes  them. 

These  mysteries  lie  beyond  the  present  instrumentalities  of  science,  but  not 
beyond  the  reach  of  Psychometry:  and  could  my  life  be  prolonged  for  another  half 
century  of  investigation,  I  might  safely  promise  a  solution  of  many  of  these  mys- 
teries which  the  microscope  cannot  solve,  for  structure  does  not  reveal  function. 

The  ganglion,  with  its  extension  of  fibres,  reminds  us  of  the  relation  of  the  brain 
and  spinal  cord.  There  are  myriads  of  these  microscopic  brains  throughout  the  body. 


CHAP.     IIJ.J  CRITICAL    DISCUSSION.  65 

sending  their  commands  through  their  dependent  fibres,  and  Dr.  Beale  informs  us 
that  "  every  nerve-cell,  central  or  peripheral,  has  at  least  two  fibres  in  connection 
with  it."     By  them  it  maintains  its  central  and  peripheral  connections. 

The  mystery  of  vital  action  lies  in  the  influence  carried  by  the  infinitesimal  fibrils 
from  the  ganglion.  There  has  been  great  obscurity  as  to  the  relative  powers  and 
participation  in  the  processes  of  life  of  the  spinal  and  ganglionic  systems.  They  have 
been  regarded  as  essentially  distinct,  one  voluntary  and  the  other  involuntary; 
but  that  distinction  is  not  absolute,  as  the  mind  controls  organic  life  in  a  slower 
manner,  producing  conditions  of  disease  in  health  (even  producing  in  some  cases 
stigmata). 

Moreover,  their  fibres  are  inextricably  commingled,  so  that  we  cannot  determine 
how  the  partnership  is  conducted,  and  one  class  appears  to  be  capable  of  substitu- 
ting the  other,  as  in  serpents  the  alimentary  canal,  instead  of  depending  solely  on 
the  ganglionic  system,  is  supplied  from  the  spinal  cord  in  its  lower,  and  from  the 
pneumogastric  in  its  upper  portion.  Dr.  Beale  has  made  the  most  minute  observa- 
tions, describing  fibres  not  exceeding  the  sixty  thousandth  of  an  inch  in  diameter, 
claiming  that  others  exist  too  fine  to  be  detected  by  the  microscope,  and  showing  the 
distribution  of  nervous  filaments  around  arteries  as  small  as  the  eight  hundredth  of 
an  inch.  Dr.  Beale  has  seen  in  the  frog  the  same  nerve  supplying  both  the  artery 
and  the  voluntary  muscle.  That  these  fibrillar  were  in  any  way  different  he  did 
not  discover;  they  appeared  the  same.  In  short,  we  can  only  say  at  present  that  the 
nervous  system  presents  varieties  of  perfect  and  imperfect  conductors  for  our  spirit- 
ual energy,  none  excluding-  it  entirely. 

When  we  consider  the  power  of  life  as  demonstrated  in  bioplasm,  and  trace  that 
power  to  the  brain  and  soul,  we  are  prepared  to  recognize  the  importance  of  the 
vital  power  as  the  most  important  agency  known  in  therapeutics,  the  proper  intro- 
duction of  which  will  be  the  most  benignant  innovation  ever  made,  incomparably 
more  valuable  than  anything  that  has  been  done  heretofore. 


CHAPTER    IV. 
SARCOGNOMY  — GENERAL  VIEW. 

Definition  of  Sarcognomy —  Its  origin  —  Why  do  we  recognize  psychic  influences 
in  the  body  —  Contrary  to  prevalent  medical  doctrines  — The  misdirected  energy  of 
the  medical  profession  —  Incapacity  of  the  colleges  for  psychic  investigations  —  The 
body  has  no  psychic  functions  in  man  —  Conscious  life  in  the  brain,  physiological 
processes  in  the  body — Soul  controls  both — The  triple  reaction  is  the  process  of 
life  —  Vagary  of  Leibnitz  —  Failure  down  to  the  present  age  to  investigate  these 
problems — The  five  great  reasons  for  the  failure  —  Ruskin's  view  of  it  —  Gall  and 
Swedenborg  —  Purpose  of  this  work  —  Necessity  for  Sarcognomy  —  Its  bases,  phil- 
osophical, physiological,  pathological  and  experimental  —  The  triune  sympathies  — 
Illustrations  of  Sarcognomy  —  To  be  treated  only  as  a  basis  for  healing — The  three 
methods  —  Indications  of  impressibility  —  Psychic  treatment  —  Manual  treatment 
on  brain  and  body  —  Correspondence  of  soul,  brain  and  body — General  statement 
and  directions  for  operating  —  Laws  of  location  of  the  organs. 


The  word  Sarcognomy  was  coined  in  1842,  as  the  name  of  the 
new  science  which  arises  from  the  discovery  of  the  compound  psychic 
and  physiological  character  of  the  human  body,  revealed  in  the  experi- 
ments in  which  I  ascertained  that  the  same  psychic  and  physiological 
effects  which  I  produced  on  the  head  could  be  produced  on  the  body. 

Derived  from  Sarx  or  Sarcos,  flesh,  and  Glioma,  an  opinion,  it 
means  etymologically  a  knowledge  of  the  flesh,  or  recognition  of  its 
character  and  relations.  Practically,  as  the  name  of  a  new  science, 
it  means  a  knowledge  of  the  physiological  and  psychological  powers 
which  belong  to  each  part  of  the  body  in  health,  in  excitement,  and  in 
disease,  and  consequently  an  understanding  of  the  correlation  of  soul, 
brain  and  body. 

I  had  discovered  in  the  human  body  its  pervading  and  controlling 
influences  exercised  through  the  nervous  system,  and  recognized  at 
its  surface  as  physiological  and  psychological,  by  experiments  made 
in  1842,  and  published  by  my  lectures,  by  the  Journal  of  Man  and 
"  System  of  Anthropology" — and  applied  by  myself  and  pupils  in 
the  treatment  of  disease. 

But  why  do  we  recognize  psychological  influences  at  the  surface  of 
the  body  ?  The  life  forces  of  the  body  as  heretofore  understood  are 
solely  physiological  ;  and  physiological  powers  are  regarded  by  the 
materialistic  school,  which  predominates  in  the  medical  profession 
to-day,  as  mechanical,  chemical,  and  electrical  —  resulting  from  the 
same  elementary  forces  which  belong  to  the  mineral  kingdom,  which 
is  void  of  life.     Hence  there  can  be  nothing  psychic  in  the  body,  nor 


CHAP.    IV.]  SARCOGNOMY  GENERAL    VIEW.  6j 

anything  which  (according  to  the  leaders  of  the  old-fashioned  portion 
of  the  medical  profession)  will  not  ultimately  be  resolved  into  chem- 
ical processes.* 

We  do  not  affirm  that  the  human  body  per  se  performs  any  psychic 
function,  although  the  voluntary  action  of  the  body  of  an  alligator 
after  decapitation  would  seem  to  indicate  the  presence  of  a  psychic 
or  conscious  element,  which,  as  we  descend  in  the  animal  kingdom, 
is  less  concentrated  in  the  brain. 

In  man  is  verified  the  general  law  of  the  animal  kingdom,  that 
functions  are  more  centralized  and  separated  as  we  ascend  in  the 
scale.  The  psychic  faculties  are  concentrated  in  the  brain,  and  there 
is  no  conscious  sensation  or  perception  in  any  part  of  the  body,  until 
the  impression  originating  there  has  been  conveyed  along  some  nerve 
to  the  brain.  As  sensation  and  perception  are  thus  realized  in  the 
brain,  and  never  without  its  co-operation,  it  would  appear  erroneous 
to  locate  them  in  the  body  at  all.  The  body,  however,  is  the  seat  of 
physiological  processes,  and  the  brain  of  conscious  life,  which  operates 
upon  and  through  the  body,  and  the  soul  is  life  itself,  which  operates 

*  Hence  the  physiological  zeal  of  the  medical  profession  to-day  is  directed  mainly 
to  the  chemical  processes  and  laws  which  are  manifested  in  living  bodies  —  the  con- 
sequences of  which  will  continue  to  be,  as  they  have  been,  an  immense  addition  to 
our  stock  of  chemical  knowledge,  accompanied  by  an  immense  neglect  of  the  science 
of  life,  and  an  increasing  intensity  of  ignorance  of  true  vital  science,  which  is  sadly 
impressive  to  one  who  understands  the  psychical  elements  of  humanity.  In  look- 
ing at  a  trained  pugilist,  athlete,  gladiator,  or  acrobat,  we  are  impressed  with 
admiration  of  their  superior  physical  powers,  but  when  we  come  to  know  them  as 
men  and  look  for  something  more  than  skilful  muscularity  we  feel  a  great  disap- 
pointment. So  when  we  look  at  the  achievements  of  the  medical  profession  in  the 
physical  sciences  connected  with  man  —  their  vast  accumulations  in  anatomy,  min- 
ute histology,  chemistry,  pathology,  mechanical  and  chemical  physiology  and  com- 
parative biology,  we  are  profoundly  impressed  with  the  greatness  of  their  extremely 
laborious  investigations  and  achievements  in  the  physical  sphere;  but  when  we 
come  to  the  ethical  sphere,  to  the  achievements  of  the  science  as  a  benefactor  of 
humanity,  we  are  painfully  impressed  with  the  slowness  of  progress  and  the  stolid 
neglect  or  active  hostility  which  have  been  displayed  toward  the  noblest  work  of 
medical  philanthropy — the  healing  of  the  sick  by  new  remedies  and  new  methods; 
and  although  this  barbaric  insensibility  has  greatly  diminished  within  fifty  years, 
there  is  still  enough  to  maintain  a  fierce  hostility  against  the  only  method  of  medi- 
cal practice  ever  discovered  which  is  incapable  of  doing  any  harm  by  its  own  cura- 
tive agency.  This  digression  naturally  comes  before  us  when  we  realize  that  the 
preoccupation  of  the  mind  by  exclusive  physical  science  and  by  the  dogmatic  con- 
viction enforced  by  all  surrounding  authority,  that  nothing  but  physical  science  has 
any  reality,  establishes  a  mental  condition  totally  unfitted  for  the  study  of  life  which 
is  not  physical,  and  of  its  laws,  which  are  widely  distinct  from  those  of  the  labora- 
tory, as  much  as  a  life  of  pugilism  would  unfit  one  to  cultivate  and  practise  the 
Christian  virtues.  Thus,  as  national  wars  have  prevented  the  growth  of  true  relig- 
ion, so  does  a  dogmatic  and  intolerant  materialism,  pervading  every  department  of 
scientific  education,  disqualify  for  vital  and  psychic  studies,  although  physical 
science  fer  se,  in  its  proper  place,  and  unaccompanied  by  dogmatism  which  sneers  at 
evidence,  is  entirely  harmonious  with  and  beneficial  to  the  cultivation  of  the  higher 
departments  of  science.  I  do  not,  therefore,  anticipate  any  proper  investigation  of 
my  own  scientific  discoveries  by  the  scientific  societies  or  universities  generally 
until  they  have  undergone  such  a  change  in  their  dominant  spirit  as  will  probably 
require  a  century  for  its  accomplishment.  When  that  time  arrives  —  when  thou- 
sands of  investigators,  in  a  philosophical  spirit,  shall  carry  on  those  investigations 
which  adverse  circumstances  have  not  permitted  to  myself — the  brilliance  of  that 
era  will  contrast  with  this  century  as  it  contrasts  with  the  middle  ages  of  Europe. 


68  SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW.  [CHAP.    IV. 

through  the  brain,  and  through  the  brain  reaches  the  body,  in  which  its 
impulse  and  influence  are  manifested,  as  when  an  emotion  or  passion 
of  the  soul,  such  as  love  or  anger,  working  through  the  brain,  makes 
its  expression  in  the  body,  by  the  voice,  the  actions,  and  the  circula- 
tion of  the  blood. 

The  process  of  life,  however,  is  not  merely  action  of  the  soul  on 
brain  and  body,  for  the  conditions  of  the  body  in  health  and  disease 
continually  react  on  the  brain  and  soul,  and  under  the  influence  of 
alcohol,  or  of  fever,  the  psychic  action  is  entirely  changed.  The 
mind  and  character  are  thus  modified  by  the  conditions  of  the  body, 
and  all  life  is  the  reaction  between  soul  and  body,  through  the  brain, 
the  grand  centre  in  which  we  find  and  interpret  all  the  powers  and 
principles  of  Psychology  and  Physiology.  Hence  no  physiological 
processor  condition  exists  in  the  body  without  something  correspond- 
ing thereto  in  the  brain.* 

Familiar  as  this  reaction  or  sympathy  has  been  to  all  mankind,  and 
forcibly  as  it  has  been  exemplified  in  the  processes  of  disease,  under 
the  daily  observation  of  many  thousand  physicians  for  many  thousand 
years,  I  know  of  no  systematic  attempt  to  bring  this  chaotic  mass 
of  phenomena  under  the  jurisdiction  of  science.  It  has  always 
appeared  to  me  very  remarkable  that  men  of  scientific  and  literary 
pursuits  should  be  so  entirely  and  passively  content  in  ignorance  of 
the  boundless  worlds  of  surrounding  truth  yet  unexplored,  even  when 
these  truths  are  a  part  of  their  daily  and  hourly  experience.  For 
this  there  appear  to  be  four  evident  reasons.  The  engrossing  neces- 
sities of  subsistence,  of  labor,  business,  pleasure,  and  ambition  leave 
the  multitude  little  time  for  even  serious  thought  upon  the  mysteries 
of  life. 

Secondly.  The  engrossment  of  ambitious  minds  in  their  imme 
diate  environment,  and  the  consciousness  of  their  own  energetic 
capacities  and  success,  give  them  a  feeling  of  self-sufficiency,  an 
exalted  idea  of  their  own  attainments,  and  a  habitual  unconscious- 
ness of  the  infinite  realm  of  the  unknown  upon  which  we  have  made 
so  small  an  encroachment.  Thus  arises  a  tacit  notion,  expressed  in 
acts  but  seldom  in  words,  that  we  have  nearly  attained  the  bound- 
aries of  the  knowable,  and  that  attempts  to  explore  new  regions  origi- 
nate fanciful  delusions,  scarcely  worthy  of  serious  attention,  as  there 
is  nothing  very  important  to  be  discovered. 

Thirdly.     As   the  engrossing    pursuits  and  delusive  ambitions  of 

*  Of  all  the  baseless  speculations  of  metaphysical  philosophizers,  the  greatest 
departure  from  the  truth  was  the  doctrine  of  Leibnitz  that  there  was  no  reciprocal 
influence  between  the  soul  and  body:  "  Everything"  (said  Leibnitz)  4<  takes  place  in 
the  soul  as  though  there  were  no  body,  and  in  the  body  everything  takes  place  as 
if  there  "were  no  soul." 


CHAP.    IV.]  SARCOGNOMY  GENERAL    VIEW.  69 

our  leading  people  produce  a  state  of  mind  unfitted  for  the  explora- 
tion of  the  unknown,  this  disability  is  vastly  increased  by  our  systems 
of  education,  which  utterly  fail  to  develop  invention,  originality,  and 
power  of  independent  reasoning.  Hence  the  few  fitful  efforts  to 
investigate  and  explore  are  generally  profitless,  and  productive  of 
crudities  or  delusions,  and  the  feeling  is  fostered  that  the  unknown  is 
chiefly  the  unknowable. 

Fourthly.  A  dominating  love  of  scientific  and  philosophic  truth 
for  its  own  sake  is  a  rare  quality,  and  seldom  strong  enough  to  induce 
any  one  to  devote  himself  to  the  unknown,  when  the  result  of  suc- 
cess is  the  development  of  existing  error  and  ignorance,  offending 
the  vanity  of  the  entire  class  of  teachers  and  leaders,  and  isolating 
the  discoverer  from  the  sympathy  and  fellowship  which  are  essential 
to  success  in  all  pursuits.  In  all  professions  and  classes  the  existing 
state  of  opinions  is  maintained  not  only  by  that  immense  power,  the 
inertia  of  fixed  habit,  but  by  an  unyielding  hostility  to  innovation. 
The  medical,  clerical,  and  legal  professions,  and  the  business  classes 
also,  furnish  so  many  illustrations  of  this,  that  a  very  instructive 
volume  might  be  made  by  a  periscopic  view  of  the  steady  war- 
fare against  truth  and  its  discoverers  throughout  all  the  historic 
ages  —  a  warfare  still  maintained  with  energy,  though  the  battle-fields 
are  changed,  and  the  soldier,  jailer,  and  executioner  have  little  to  do 
m  the  modern  processes  of  freezing  and  drowning  unwelcome  arrivals 
from  the  Divine  sphere  of  wisdom. 

Fifthly.  In  all  ages  the  spirit  of  dogmatism  has  made  men  unfair 
and  intolerant  towards  all  opinions  but  those  into  which  they  have 
been  educated,  or  have  been  led  by  passion  and  prejudice.  At  the 
present  time  materialism  rules,  and  the  scientific  classes  imbibe  it  in 
their  education  unconsciously.  Hence  there  is  a  prevailing  disposi- 
tion to  ignore  everything  that  is  not  materialistic,  and  to  meet  the 
profoundest  truths  with  that  supercilious  contempt  which  prevents 
all  candid  investigation.  Biological  questions  are  studied  in  so  one- 
sided a  manner  as  to  justify  in  some  cases  the  sarcasm  of  Ruskin 
that  scientific  men  have  so  contracted  modes  of  thought  that  "  if 
beyond  this  safe  and  beneficial  business  they  ever  try  and  explain 
anything  to  you,  you  may  be  confident  of  one  of  two  things,  either 
that  they  know  nothing  (to  speak  of)  about  it,  or  that  they  have  only 
seen  one  side  of  it,  and  not  only  have  not  seen,  but  usually  have  710 
mind  to  see  the  other." 

Such  are  most  apparent  explanations  of  the  remarkable  fact  that 
now,  near  the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century,  no  one  has  yet  attempted 
to  explore  and  describe  the  triune  constitution  of  man  —  the  union  of 
soul,  brain,  and  body,  and  the  laws  of  their  vast  and  various  sympa- 


70  SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW.  [CHAP.    IV. 

thies  and  interactions,  which  are  of  so  grand  importance  not  only  in 
Medical  Philosophy  and  Therapeutics,  but  in  Hygiene,  Education, 
Mental  Philosophy,  Ethics,  ^Esthetics,  Sculpture,  Painting,  Forensic 
and  Dramatic  Eloquence,  and  last,  not  least,  Pneumatology.  These 
remarks  apply  of  course  to  the  prevailing  doctrines  of  science  and 
philosophy  —  to  what  is  recognized  in  the  Universities.  I  do  not 
refer  to  the  bold  exploration  of  the  brain  and  its  psychic  functions  by 
Gall,  nor  to  the  still  more  extraordinary  scientific  doctrines  and  specu- 
lations of  Swedenborg,  both  of  which  the  colleges  have  laid  aside 
without  investigation,  and  neither  of  which  has  grasped  the  entire 
problem  of  the  triune  constitution  of  man. 

The  warfare  of  theologians  against  scientific  progress  has  been 
grandly  illustrated  by  Andrew  D.  White,  late  president  of  Cornell 
University,  in  his  essays  on  the  "Warfare  of  Science."  That  hostil- 
ity still  exists,  and  works  in  co-operation  (strange  to  say)  with  the 
dogmatism  of  the  most  resolute  opponents  of  both  theology  and  relig- 
ion. The  narrowness  of  theologians  and  the  narrowness  of  physical 
scientists  (arising  from  the  ignorance  of  both)  makes  them  equally 
hostile  to  the  profound  philosophy  which  deprives  both  parties  of 
their  bigotry,  bringing  science  and  religion,  and  consequently  scientists 
and  theologians,  into  harmonious  accord. 

Why  do  the  representatives  of  theism  and  of  atheism  unite  in  hos- 
tility to  new  truth  and  almost  forget  their  own  antagonism  ?  If  the 
truth  must  be  spoken,  the  one  party  is  not  truly  religious  and  the 
other  is  not  truly  scientific,  for  both  religion  and  science  demand  the 
pursuit  and  the  eager  acceptance  of  truth.  The  profound  physiolo- 
gist Dr.  Lionel  Beale  expresses  his  views  as  follows:  "Those  who 
have  started  upon  the  scientific  pilgrimage,  and  have  made  up  their 
minds  to  encounter  the  well-known  hardships  and  disappointments, 
and  have  determined  to  bear  the  poverty  of  their  lifelong  journey,  have 
not  received  the  blessings  of  any  church  to  encourage  their  hopes  or 
to  lighten  their  burthens.  No  miracles  have  been  performed  for 
them.  No  shrine  has  been  pointed  out  where  they  may  place  their 
offerings  and  then  return  home  to  rest  in  peace.  They  must  work  on 
as  long  as  power  remains  to  them  to  work,  and  patiently  endure  to 
the  end.  No  church  is  interested  in  their  trials  or  takes  any  account 
of  their  virtues.  And  this  must  be,  since  science  can  never  bow  to 
authority,  submit  to  the  arbitrary  dictates  of  any  earthly  power,  or 
consent  to  be  governed  in  her  progress  by  any  time-honored  rules. 
Science  asks  only  to  be  permitted  to  work  on.  She  longs  neither  for 
honors,  nor  wages,  nor  power." 

"  Happily  the  interrogators  of  nature  may  henceforward,  pursue 
their  work  without  fear  of  being  interfered  with  by  religious  societies 


CHAP.    IV.]  SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW.  7 1 

or  teachers.  I  wish  it  were  equally  certain  that  scientific  men  would 
never  have  to  suffer  injustice  and  tyranny  at  the  hands  of  arbitrary 
and  arrogant  representatives  of  science.  It  is  in  writings  called 
scientific  that  the  true  spirit  of  intolerance  is  occasionally  observed 
to  breathe,  nowadays,  and  scientific  individuals  and  scientific  minori- 
ties have  occasionally  suffered  injustice  at  the  hands  of  fellow-work- 
ers."    (Beale  on  Protoplasm,  Matter,  and  Life,  p.  335.) 

The  largest  and  most  thoroughly  organized  body  of  scientific  men 
is  that  which  belongs  to  the  medical  profession  and  is  controlled  by 
the  medical  colleges,  which  sustain  the  relation  of  Alma  Mater. 
These  are  organized  in  the  American  Medical  Association,  upon  as 
rigidly  proscriptive  principles  as  ever  animated  the  theologians.  The 
most  forcible  expression  of  this  intolerance  was  that  made  by  a  surgi- 
cal professor  in  Kentucky  when  he  claimed  that  the  clergy  were  fully 
equal  to  the  doctors  in  liberality,  for  the  latter  believed  that  Homoe- 
opathic physicians  should  be  allowed  to  practise  only  in  the  peniten- 
tiary and  upon  each  other. 

So  notorious  and  so  pragmatically  bitter  has  been  this  collegiate 
hostility  to  innovation  and  innovators,  that  I  have  never,  except  in  one 
instance,  attempted  to  interest  a  collegiate  faculty  in  scientific  dem- 
onstrations. That  attempt,  made  in  my  twenty-seventh  year,  though 
sustained  by  the  Board  of  Trustees  and  the  professor  of  Physiology, 
at  Louisville,  succeeded  only  in  proving  that  there  was  but  one  mem- 
ber of  the  Faculty  who  could  be  induced  to  give  the  subject  any 
attention.* 

As  this  attempt  was  nearly  half  a  century  ago,  it  is  possible  that  there 
may  be  to-day  in  the  colleges  a  small  percentage  of  men  who  have  a 
share  of  the  spirit  of  progress.  But  little  is  to  be  hoped  from  a  body 
of  men  so  profoundly  miseducated,  and  associated  together  upon 
false  principles,  sustaining  the  so-called  professional  ethics  (?)  of  the 
code  of  the  National  Medical  Association.  There  could  be  no  clearer 
statement  of  its  essential  spirit  than  the  frank  declaration  of  Dr.  W. 
A.  Hammond,  of  New  York,  in  the  form  of  a  novel,!  that  the  motives 
of  physicians  in  the  practice  of  their  profession  were  entirely  selfish 

*  A  member  of  this  Faculty,  Professor  Gross,  was  subsequently  generally  recog- 
nized as  standing  at  the  head  of  the  profession  in  America,  and  in  that  position 
politely  assured  me  that  the  Association  would  never  take  any  steps  to  investigate 
anything  that  I  might  discover,  because  they  were  governed  by  their  code  and  I 
was  not. 

t  A  character  in  the  novel  is  made  to  say :  "  It  is  my  deliberate  opinion,  based  on 
a  very  careful  study  of  doctors,  that  they  don't  care  any  more  for  the  poor  or  for 
humanity  in  general  than  I  do,  and  that'is  not  much,  I  assure  you.  As  to  Dr.  Arn- 
dell,  I  believe  that  for  humanity  in  the  abstract  he  has  the  most  supreme  contempt. 
He  and  others  like  him  are  willing  to  help  humanity,  but  they  do  it  for  the  sake  of 
their  science,  not  from  any  love  of  the  human  species.  Of  course,  the  race  is  bene- 
fited, for  whatever  advances  medical  science  helps  mankind,  but  that  is  not  the 
primary  object  of  the  doctors." 


J2  SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW.  [CHAP.    IV. 

—  a  confession  which  justly  represents  the  large  class  who  sympa- 
thize with  him,  but  which  a  better  class  would  indignantly  repudiate. 
The  power  of  such  a  class,  in  presiding  over  medical  instruction,  to 
debase  or  demoralize  the  incoming  members  of  the  profession  is  self- 
evident,  and  its  results  are  widely  seen. 

In  this  book  I  propose  to  present  but  one  of  the  many  aspects  of 
Sarcognomy,  viz.,  its  therapeutic  utility,  and  the  instruction  which  it 
gives  us  in  reference  to  healing  the  human  constitution  by  the  hand, 
the  electric  poles,  and  the  various  external  applications  which  produce 
different  effects  as  they  are  applied  to  different  parts  of  the  body, 
for  every  physiological  as  well  as  every  psychic  function  has  a 
special  portion  of  the  surface  through  which  it  may  be  reached  and 
excited. 

A  knowledge  of  the  physiological  and  psychic  forces  or  influences 
connected  with  each  part  of  the  body  is  as  necessary  to  judicious 
treatment  by  Electricity  as  Anatomy  is  to  surgery  ;  and  the  present 
state  of  Electric  Therapeutics  may  be  compared  to  the  condition  of 
surgery  at  the  siege  of  Troy,  anterior  to  anatomical  dissections. 

Equally  necessary  is  it  as  a  scientific  basis  for  Nervauric  practice 
of  what  has  been  called  Magnetic  Therapeutics  or  treatment  by 
Animal  Magnetism,  and  for  the  blind,  clumsy  processes  called  Mas- 
sage, which  have  arisen  from  a  sense  of  the  necessity  of  manual  treat- 
ment, and  have  been  adopted  in  ignorance  of  the  neurological  laws  of 
vitality,  as  well  as  disregard  of  the  extensive  experience  of  magnet- 
izers  during  the  last  hundred  years. 

The  philosophical  basis  of  Sarcognomy  is  the  threefold  constitu- 
tion of  man,  and  the  very  intimate  sympathy  and  parallelism  of  soul, 
brain,  and  body,  which  enable  us,  through  either  of  the  three,  to 
affect  the  other  two  in  a  corresponding  manner. 

Its  practical  physiological  basis  is  the  fact  that  the  exercise  of 
every  psychic  faculty,  emotion,  or  impulse  produces  a  characteristic 
and  definite  effect  on  the  body,  as  well  as  in  the  brain,  while  the 
exercise  of  any  portion  of  the  body  produces  a  characteristic  effect 
on  the  brain  and  mind,  the  locality  of  which  can  be  specified  on  the 
brain. 

The  pathological  basis  is  the  fact  that  every  disease  of  the  body 
affects  the  brain  and  produces  a  particular  and  distinct  effect  on  the 
mind,  so  that  diseases  have  a  mental  as  well  as  a  physical  symptoma- 
tology, which  has  been  especially  observed  by  Homoeopathic  physi- 
cians. 

The  experimental  basis  is  the  fact  that  in  applying  the  hands  or 
fingers  upon  the  head  of  an  impressible  person,  under  proper  condi- 
tions, we  stimulate  the  subjacent  portion  of  the  brain,  and  rouse  it  to 


CHAP.    IV.]  SARCOGNOMY — GENERAL    VIEW.  73 

the  manifestations  of  its  functions  with  a  vigor  proportioned  to  the 
impressibility,  the  physiological  and  psychological  results  being  a 
complete  development  of  the  cerebral  functions  (the  discovery  of 
which  I  made  in  1841)  —  and  that  the  application  of  the  hands  on  the 
body  produces  the  same  evolution  of  the  physiological  and  psychic 
functions  as  the  application  to  the  head  at  the  corresponding  locality 
—  the  discovery  of  1842. 

Thus  the  entire  surface  of  the  brain  corresponds  to  the  entire  sur- 
face of  tne  body,  maintaining  therewith  an  active  sympathy  in  our 
experiments,  precisely  as  it  occurs  in  the  progress  of  diseases  and 
local  excitements.  The  facts  of  disease  sustain  the  localization  of 
Sarcognomy,  and  the  map  of  Sarcognomy  explains  the  philosophy  of 
disease. 

Sarcognomy  is  also  illustrated  by  the  laws  of  development,  by  nat- 
ural language  or  gesture,  and  by  the  intuitive  judgment  which  arises 
in  our  minds  on  seeing  different  forms  which  express  different  charac- 
ters —  the  whole  person  being  as  expressive  as  the  face  to  close  observ- 
ers. When  we  contrast  Venus  and  Hercules,  Jove  and  Apollo,  or 
Washington  and  a  degraded  sot,  a  lion  and  a  lamb,  or  greyhound  and 
hog,  we  realize  that  the  entire  form  is  an  embodiment  of  character. 

Putting  aside  the  pathological,  philosophical,  and  physiognomic 
aspects  of  the  subject,  I  propose  to  treat  Sarcognomy  only  as  the 
basis  of  the  practical  art  of  healing. 

In  acting  upon  the  triple  combination  of  soul,  brain,  and  body  we 
may  fix  our  attention  as  appears  best  on  either  one  or  all  three. 

If  the  constitution  is  highly  impressional  (manifested  usually  by 
breadth  and  height  of  the  front  head)  mental  influence  will  be  efficient, 
and  the  nervous  system  will  respond  readily  to  nervauric  treatment. 
This  impressibility  is  greater  among  the  natives  of  warm  climates, 
greater  in  summer  than  winter,  and  generally  greater  in  females  than 
in  males  Breadth  of  the  temples  from  right  to  left  and  largeness  of 
the  pupils  of  the  eyes,  with  fullness  of  the  upper  part  of  the  face, 
are  favorable  indications. 

A  simple  method  of  testing  this  impressibility  is  to  pass  the  ends 
of  the  fingers  close  to  the  open  extended  hand  of  the  patient,  who, 
if  impressible,  will  feel  a  slight  coolness  at  each  passage  of  our  fingers. 
When  this  occurs,  we  may  be  sure  that  the  application  of  the  hands 
on  the  body  or  head  will  be  effective.  When  the  fingers  are  thus 
passed  slowly,  no  breeze  is  produced,  and  simple  sensibility  would 
feel  the  warmth  radiated  from  the  hand.  A  feeling  of  coolness  is 
produced  only  by  an  impression  on  the  nervous  impressibility. 

I  recommend  the  application  of  the  hands  on  the  body  for  the  pur- 
pose of  healing,  because,  the  disease  being  located  in  the  body  and 


74  SARCOGNOMY  — GENERAL    VIEW.  [CHAP.    IV. 

the  vital  forces  emanating  from  the  spinal  column,  it  is  desirable  to 
approach  as  near  as  possible  to  the  difficulty  that  is  to  be  removed 
and  the  seat  of  the  vital  force  on  which  we  operate. 

It  is  true  that  diseases  may  be  treated  by  the  soul  power  alone, 
without  any  contact  —  the  health,  benevolence,  and  will  power  of  the 
operator  being  effective  without  contact  upon  the  patient,  who  sits 
near  him  or  in  some  cases  at  a  distance,  if  the  proper  rapport  exists  ; 
but  in  the  present  condition  of  society  in  northern  climates  it  is  only 
a  small  minority  who  can  be  treated  in  this  way. 

Contact  is  generally  necessary  to  efficient  treatment,  as  it  is  to 
efficient  contagion,  and  it  is  too  evident  for  argument  that  the  farther 
apart  two  persons  are  placed,  the  less  effect  they  can  have  upon  each 
other. 

The  contact  of  the  hand  with  the  skin  is  therefore  desirable  for  the 
most  complete  effect,  and  the  fewer  the  garments  between  the  hand 
and  the  patient,  the  better.  Nevertheless  patients  are  successfully 
treated  without  removing  any  of  their  clothing.  The  vital  influences 
emanating  from  an  operator  are  more  diffusive  in  proportion  to  their 
subtlety,  and  while  caloric  and  electricity  are  resisted  by  clothing,  the 
subtler  forces,  which  reach  to  great  distances,  are  not  hindered. 
Operators  in  whom  these  subtler  forces  are  abundant,  and  who  pro- 
duce effects  without  contact,  are  not  hindered  by  clothing  ;  and  static 
electricity,  which  like  the  nervous  forces  plays  upon  the  surface,  also 
produces  its  effects  through  the  clothing.  There  is  a  class  of  patients 
who  realize  the  effects  of  the  hand  when  it  is  not  even  in  contact 
with  the  clothing,  and  a  class  who  feel  the  influence,  not  only  of  per- 
sons at  a  distance,  but  of  their  departed  friends,  and  even  the  ancient 
inhabitants  of  the  spirit  world.  If  such  facts  are  unknown  to  physi- 
cal scientists  generally  it  is  because  they  shun  psychic  phenomena. 

In  operating  upon  the  body,  we  have  the  advantage  that  we  may 
use  percussion,  friction,  and  dispersive  passes  —  the  friction  and  per- 
cussion not  being  appropriate  upon  the  head. 

Effects  produced  on  the  body  are  local  and  physiological,  but 
become  psychic  in  proportion  as  the  brain  sympathizes  with  the  spot. 
In  persons  of  a  low  grade  of  susceptibility  there  is  less  sympathy 
between  the  mind  and  body,  and  operations  on  the  body  do  not  pro- 
duce the  distinct  psychic  effects  which  occur  in  the  impressible. 

Effects  produced  on  the  brain  are  mental  and  become  physiologi- 
cal only  as  the  cerebral  influence  extends  to  the  body.  But  as  the 
brain  is  the  controlling  organ,  it  is  obvious  that  it  may  produce  any 
amount  of  physiological  action  ;  and  forty  years  ago  I  operated  chiefly 
through  the  brain,  being  interested  in  demonstrating  its  physiological 
powers.     When  we  wish  to  do  all  that  is  possible,  we  should  operate 


CHAP.  IV.]  SARCOGNOMY  GENERAL  VIEW.  75 

on  body,  brain,  and  soul,  treating  the  latter  by  our  own  psychic  force 
of  will  and  emotion,  with  a  resolute  desire  to  cure,  and  rendering  the 
individual  as  passive  as  possible  by  the  methods  I  shall  explain.  The 
desire  to  heal,  born  of  love,  is  the  healing  agency,  and  the  force  of 
will  or  occipital  energy  is  the  power  that  subdues  the  patient  to  pas- 
siveness  —  a  power  which  may  exist  without  a  high  degree  of  healing 
capacity. 

Correspondence  of  Soul,  Brain,  and  Body. 

When  we  make  a  map  of  the  cerebral  organs  and  understand  their 
relative  positions,  we  are  well  prepared  to  understand  their  corre- 
spondences on  the  body,  which  are  very  simply  arranged. 

The  superior  part  of  the  brain  corresponds  to  the  superior  part  of 
the  body,  the  basilar  portion  of  the  brain  corresponding  to  the  lower 
half  of  the  body  —  the  lateral  ventricles  of  the  brain  corresponding 
nearly  with  the  upper  part  of  the  waist.  The  lower  end  of  the  trunk 
corresponds  with  the  base  of  the  brain,  as  externally  indicated  at  the 
junction  of  the  head  and  neck. 

The  limbs  are  a  departure  from  the  compact  form  which  would 
most  easily  coincide  with  the  head.  The  lower  limbs  correspond 
with  the  basilar  region,  represented  or  covered  by  the  neck  and 
marked  Crural.  The  upper  limbs  correspond  with  the  Brachial 
region  of  the  occiput,  which  starts  from  Firmness  and  extends  down 
the  middle  of  the  occiput,  embracing  the  regions  appropriated  to 
Ambition,  Ostentation,  Self-Esteem,  Self-Confidence,  Domestic 
Affection,  Love  of  Power,  Arrogance,  and  Hostility. 

The  superior  anterior  fourth  of  the  head  corresponds  to  the  ante- 
rior surface  of  the  thorax,  and  is  marked  Anterior  Thoracic.  The 
face  corresponds  to  the  abdominal  region.  The  entire  occipital  region 
above  the  Crural,  and  exclusive  of  the  Brachial,  corresponds  to  the 
back,  and  is  called  Dorsal. 

The  spinal  column  being  the  source  of  the  nerves  that  vitalize  and 
sustain  the  trunk,  it  follows  that  the  anterior  regions  of  the  body  are 
related  to  and  dependent  upon  the  posterior  regions  in  the  manner 
indicated  by  anatomy,  and  as  the  brain  corresponds  with  the  body  we 
must  infer  that  the  posterior  regions  of  the  brain  have  a  like  domi- 
nant influence  over  the  anterior.  This  was  explained  in  the  "  Outlines 
of  Anthropology,"  and  especially  or  minutely  under  the  head  of  Path- 
ognomy,  showing  that  each  organ  of  the  brain  had  by  the  law  of  its 
action  a  specific  relation  to  a  certain  anterior  organ.  The  compari- 
son of  the  head  with  the  anatomy  of  the  body  shows  something  sim- 
ilar, for  the  distribution  of  the  spinal  nerves  anteriorly,  if  illustrated 
by  a  similar  distribution   on   the  head  from   its  dorsal  (and  spinal) 


76 


SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW. 


[criAP.  IV. 


region  would  appear  as  in  the  annexed  engraving  ;  and  if  the  condi- 
tions of  the  head  correspond  to  those  of  the  body  the  anterior  organs 
must  be  the  excitants  of  the  posterior,  while  the  posterior  sustain  the 
vital  force  of  the  whole,  bearing  in  mind,  however,  that  the  superior 
sustain  the  inferior  organs,  as  vitality  descends  from  higher  to 
lower  organs. 

When  we  trace  these  lines 
of  co  mection  and  corres- 
pondence, which  we  transfer 
from  the  body  upon  the  head, 
we  are  struck  with  their  close 
analogy  to  the  lines  of  corre- 
lation established  with  exact- 
ness for  the  brain  by  Path- 
ognomy,  and  if  the  reader 
has  been  familiar  with  Patbog- 
nomy,  which  is  an  exact  and 
positive  psycho-geometric 
science,  he  may  be  as  much 
interested  as  myself  in  ob- 
serving this  unexpected  illus- 
tration derived  from  the  correlation  of  organs  in  the  body.  In  this 
case  two  independent  lines  of  research,  Pathognomy  having  preceded 
Sarcognomy  seven  years,  arrive  at  a  common  conclusion  and  mutual 
corroboration. 

To  this  mutual  corroboration  of  Pathognomy  and  Sarcognomy  may 
now  be  added  an  additional  confirmation  from  the  more  recent  dis- 
coveries of  vivisection  and  pathology.  We  learn  from  Pathognomy 
(what  is  verified  by  common  observation)  that  the  lower  occipital 
organs  give  great  energy  to  the  eye,  as  is  seen  in  the  penetrating- 
glance  of  courage  and  arrogance.  It  has  been  shown  by  vivisection 
and  pathology  that  there  are  two  lower  occipital  regions,  the  injury 
or  disease  of  which  injures  vision.  The  partisans  of  these  two 
regions  contend  each  for  his  own,  but  both  are  right,  for  the  two 
regions  are  shown  by  Pathognomy  and  Psychology  to  coincide  or  co- 
operate. In  like  manner  the  upper  regions  of  the  occiput  co-operate 
with  and  invigorate  the  rational  understanding  and  the  friendly  senti- 
ments, as  the  upper  region  of  the  spinal  cord  sustains  the  upper  ante- 
rior thoracic  regions. 

A  thorough  understanding  of  cerebral  science  shows  that  the  pos- 
terior regions  sustain  the  anterior  in  the  brair\  as  the  posterior  region 
of  the  body  sustains  the  anterior ;  and  that  the  superior  region  of  the 
brain  sustains  the  inferior,  as  the  superior  half  of  the  body  sustains 


CHAP.    IV.]  SARCOGNOMY —  GENERAL    VIEW.  77 

its  inferior  half.     This  sustaining  power  of  the  superior  region  of  the 
brain  has  been  fully  shown  by  vivisection  and  pathology. 

From  this  description  we  learn  that  the  posterior  half  of  the  brain 
controls  and  sympathizes  with  the  forces  of  life  which  belong  to  the 
spinal  column  and  the  entire  back  and  limbs,  while  the  lovely  and  in- 
tellectual elements  associate  with  the  breast,  and  the  sensitive, 
impressional,  relaxing  elements  coincide  with  the  abdomen.  Hence, 
to  invigorate  the  vital  forces,  the  hand  should  be  applied  to  the  back 
of  the  head,  or  the  posterior  surface  of  the  body.  , 

If  applied  upon  the  neck,  it  invigorates  the  lower  limbs,  sending 
the  circulation  and  vital  forces  downwards,  warming  the  feet  and  sus 
taining  physical  vitality.  The  organ  of  vitality,  or  rather  Vital  Force, 
is  at  the  base  of  the  occiput,  and  its  correspondence  at  the  posterior 
summit  of  the  thigh.  Hence  the  application  of  the  hand  on  the  back 
of  the  neck  is  an  excellent  method  of  renovating  exhausted  vitality, 
invigorating  locomotion,  and  relieving  determination  of  blood  to  the 
head  and  chest  —  effects  which  may  be  enhanced  by  applying  the 
hand  at  the  summit  of  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  thigh,  on  the  region 
of  Vital  Force. 

When  one  hand  is  applied  upon  the  occipital  base  and  the  neck, 
and  the  other  upon  the  upper  half  of  the  occiput,  we  produce  a  pow- 
erful and  health-giving  effect,  as  the  upper  part  of  the  occiput  (cor- 
responding with  the  upper  half  of  the  back)  contains  the  most  perfect 
sanative  energy  of  the  constitution  in  the  organ  of  Health  and  its 
surrounding  group.  The  application  of  the  hands  upon  the  upper 
part  of  the  occiput  and  upon  its  base  or  junction  with  the  neck  cor- 
responds with  their  application  on  the  shoulder  blades  and  the  sum- 
mit of  the  thighs  and  base  of  the  trunk  —  with  this  difference,  that  a 
relatively  larger  space  may  be  covered  on  the  head,  and  if,  instead  of 
touching  Health  and  Vitality  with  the  fingers,  we  apply  the  whole 
hands,  covering  nearly  the  whole  occiput,  we  cover  a  space  corre- 
sponding to  the  entire  back  and  arms,  and  thus  produce  a  very  exten- 
sive effect,  rousing  the  entire  will  power  and  physiological  energy. 
This  can  be  conveniently  done  while  the  patient  is  lying  on  his  back 
in  bed.  My  statements  on  this  subject  rest  upon  innumerable  experi- 
ments during  forty-seven  years,  and  their  successful  repetition  by  my 
students  in  investigations  and  in  the  treatment  of  diseases. 

In  applying  the  hands  upon  the  superior  anterior  region  of  the 
head,  which  corresponds  with  the  anterior  part  of  the  thorax,  we  pro- 
duce the  amiable  and  soothing  influences  which  belong  to  the  gentler 
emotions.  We  may  proceed  now  in  this  consideration  of  the  differ- 
ent regions  of  the  head,  which  the  unskilled  may  cover  with  the  hand, 
and    hereafter  will  proceed  with  the  specialization  of  organs  which 


?S  SARCOGNOMY  —  GENERAL    VIEW.  [CHAP.    IV. 

the  skilled  operator,  understanding  localities,  may  touch  with  the  ends 
of  the  ringers,  when  a  more  special  and  limited  influence  is  desired. 

The  influence  of  the  anterior  superior  region  of  the  brain  is 
remarkably  soothing  and  happy,  rendering  the  patient  entirely  amia- 
ble, good  natured,  patient,  obedient,  cheerful  and  more  impressible  to 
the  nervauric  treatment.  Hence  it  is  often  desirable  to  impress  this 
region,  to  establish  the  best  relations  between  the  physician  and 
patient.  ■  But  we  should  be  careful  not  to  carry  it  too  far,  in  very 
impressible  persons,  for  it  antagonizes  the  base  of  the  occiput,  in 
which  the  strong  physical  energies  and  impulses  reside.  These  it 
reduces  to  tranquillity  by  a  quieting  and  anodyne  influence,  but  when 
the  vital  forces  are  very  feeble,  they  would  become  too  quiescent  and 
weak  under  continued  excitement  of  the  anterior  coronal  region,  the 
tendency  of  which  is  toward  trance,  or  complete  suspension  of  physi- 
cal activity.  The  special  locality  in  which  this  tendency  to  trance 
exists  in  the  highest  degree,  is  about  an  inch  and  a  half  at  each  side 
from  the  sagittal  suture,  nearly  at  the  posterior  corners  of  the  rect- 
angular space  assigned  by  Gall  and  Spurzheim  to  Veneration. 

While  the  foregoing  caution  is  necessary  in  reference  to  those  deli- 
cate, impressible  constitutions  in  which  excitement  of  one  portion  of 
the  brain  may  go  so  far  as  to  overpower  and  suppress  the  opposite 
region,  it  is  not  necessary  in  reference  to  constitutions  of  greater 
intesrritv,  in  which  the  brain  does  not  become  unbalanced.  In  such 
persons  the  stimulation  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain  produces 
the  happiest  effects,  for  it  draws  the  vitality  upwards,  invigorates  the 
brain,  and  renovates  life  at  its  fountain. 

Of  the  superior  organs,  or  upper  surface  of  the  brain,  the  anterior 
are  correlative  with  the  posterior,  so  that  each  in  a  normal  brain  tends 
to  excite  the  other,  as  explained  in  the  "Outlines  of  Anthropology" 
(chapters  19  and  20).  Hence,  the  general  normal  effect  of  exciting 
the  higher  organs  is  not  only  to  increase  the  virtuous  and  amiable 
sentiments,  but  to  increase  the  general  power  of  the  brain,  enjoyment 
of  life,  and  the  abundance  of  health.  We  know  this  by  a  threefold 
demonstration.  1.  The  cheerful  sentiments,  the  enthusiasm,  hope, 
firmness,  and  energy  of  the  higher  organs  are  known  by  all  mankind 
to  be  the  sustaining  and  invigorating  elements  of  character.  2.  The 
effect  of  stimulating  the  higher  organs  is  felt  by  every  subject  as 
highly  agreeable,  invigorating  and  healthful.  3.  The  effects  of  dis- 
ease in  the  upper  region  of  the  brain  are  destructive  to  health  and 
energy  —  paralysis  being  one  of  its  common  effects,  as  reported  from 
hospitals,  preceded,  of  course,  by  general  prostration. 

Hence,  in  the  treatment  of  invalids  the  most  pleasant  and  satisfac- 
tory results  are  attained  by  treating  the  superior  surfaces  of  the  brain 


CHAP.    IV.]  SARCOGNOMY  — GENERAL    VIEW.  79 

and  of  the  body,  and  a  great  number  of  cures  have  been  effected  by 
treating  the  higher  emotions  of  the  soul  without  contact  with  the 
body,  or  any  medicinal  methods.  Religious  emotions  are  highly 
curative,  and  the  "  divine  healing  "  of  prayer,  song,  faith,  and  other 
religious  processes  has  produced  many  marvellous  cures,  for  the 
emotions  of  the  upper  brain  may  be  stimulated  by  mental  or  spiritual 
influences  as  powerfully  as  by  direct  action  on  the  impressible  brain. 
It  is  therefore  the  duty  of  the  practitioner  so  far  as  possible  to  stim- 
ulate the  higher  powers  by  spiritual  as  well  as  manual  means  —  in 
other  words,  to  rouse  the  faith,  hope,  love,  and  devotion  of  his 
patient.  To  do  this  he  should  not  rely  upon  any  form  of  words,  but 
should  carry  that  faith,  hope,  love,  enthusiasm,  and  resolution  in  his 
own  person,  from  which  by  contagion  it  should  go  to  his  patients 
whenever  he  approaches  them,  even  if  he  is  not  in  contact. 

This  is  the  secret  of  the  success  of  many  physicians  neither  very 
learned  nor  very  skilful.  Their  love  is  their  healing  power.  Hence 
it  was  that  Dr.  Jennings,  of  Derby,  Conn.,  near  half  a  century  ago, 
finding  that  his  medicines  did  not  accomplish  much  good,  ceased  to 
give  anything  but  bread  pills,  colored  powders  and  liquids,  but 
retained  his  patients  even  after  he  had  told  them  of  the  deception. 

In  addition  to  this  personal  potency  which  the  physician  should 
develop  in  his  own  moral  nature,  he  may  do  much  by  vocal  music. 
Songs  of  a  cheering  and  inspiring  character,  adapted  to  the  feelings 
of  the  patient,  and  skilful  instrumental  music,  are  very  important  aids 
in  healing.  But  I  must  protest  against  any  music  which  is  merely 
technical,  and  not  full  of  emotion,  not  calculated  to  rouse  our  senti- 
ments. A  great  deal  of  our  common  music,  including  even  the  most 
pretentious,  is  utterly  worthless  for  any  good  purpose.  To  listen  to  it 
is  a  waste  of  time. 

These  principles  are  not  new.  Physicians  and  friends  generally 
realize  the  necessity  of  sustaining  hope  in  a  patient,  and  surrounding 
him  with  pleasant  influences.  What  better  influence  can  we  have 
than  faith  in  a  Divine  Providence,  conviction  that  an  immense  love 
broods  over  and  sustains  humanity,  and  that  even  if  our  career  be 
shortened  on  earth  it  is  thereby  extended  into  a  more  glorious  and 
happy  realm.  The  physician  should  cherish  and  diffuse  such  senti- 
ments. 

The  fashion  of  mental  healing  by  resolutely  ignoring  disease,  fixing 
the  mind  upon  the  conception  of  perfect  health,  and  the  all-pervading 
benignity  of  the  Deity,  is  not  at  all  irrational  in  essence,  though 
mingled  with  so  much  metaphysical  nonsense  in  the  denial  of  the 
existence  of  matter  and  existence  of  disease.  These  crazy  theories, 
however,  do  not  diminish  the  potency  with  which  the  intense  optim- 


SO  SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW.  [CHAP.    IV. 

ism  acts  as  a  curative  power  when  the  spiritual  energy  of  the  opera- 
tor meets  with  impressible  receptivity  in  the  patient.  Absurdity  is 
not  physically  injurious,  and  nonsense  of  a  lively  character  is  rather 
invigorating. 

Effects  do  not  occur  without  causes  and  conditions.  A  feeble 
spirit  would  produce  no  effect  upon  a  hard,  resisting  nature,  but  one 
who  has  a  strong  spirit  capable  of  transcorporeal  action  will  affect 
many,  and  will  produce  miraculous  results  when  meeting  passively 
impressible  natures.  Such  is  in  fact  the  experience  of  this  class  of 
healers.  One  of  the  most  prominent  confessed  that  not  more  than 
one  in  twenty  of  her  pupils  would  be  successful. 

The  ready  smile,  the  cheerful  words,  the  sprightly  anecdote,  the 
affectionate  manner,  and  the  inspiring  promises  of  the  physician, 
based  upon  knowledge  and  experience,  are  appreciated  by  all  as  a 
healing  power,  and  Sarcognomy  shows  how  by  special  local  treatment 
to  produce  additional  effects  beyond  all  that  spiritual  influences  pro- 
duce upon  the  mind. 

In  operating  on  the  superior  surface  of  the  brain  we  should  under- 
stand, that  by  the  general  law  of  organology  we  find  stronger  influ- 
ences as  we  go  back,  and  gentler  toward  the  front. 

If  we  understand  the  general  laws  of  organology,  we  are  less 
dependent  upon  the  memory  of  special  localities.  The  controlling 
principles  are  quite  simple.  The  energy  of  any  organ  may  be  deter 
mined  by  its  anterior  or  posterior  position.  The  intellectual  and 
sensitive  organs  of  the  extreme  anterior  portion  of  the  head  are' not 
only  void  of  physiological  power,  but  tend  to  check  and  exhaust  it 
when  acting  alone.  Hence,  severe  injuries  of  the  anterior  end  of  the 
brain  produce  little  or  no  physiological  injury  unless  an  inflammation 
should  be  produced.  In  the  case  of  Phineas  Gage,  of  Vermont,  an 
iron  crowbar  shot  through  the  head  from  the  cheek  bone  upwards 
produced  but  little  immediate  effect,  and  was  soon  recovered  from. 
(See  my  "Outlines  of  Anthropology,"  chapters  17  and  18.) 

The  back  of  the  head,  the  extreme  occipital  portion,  gives  power 
and  ambitious  impulse.  Between  the  posterior  pole  of  power  and  the 
anterior  pole  of  weakness,  position  determines  the  power,  and  when 
we  think  of  any  faculty,  emotion,  or  impulse,  we  can  determine  its 
longitude  on  the  head  by  a  consideration  of  its  energy.  Thus  Mod- 
esty would  be  anterior,  as  Vanity  would  be  posterior.  Liberality  and 
generosity  would  be  anterior  —  avarice  posterior  —  sympathy  anterior, 
stubbornness  posterior,  etc. 

The  latitude  or  height  can  be  determined  with  equal  ease  by  the 
proper  rule,  as  it  corresponds  to  the  moral  elevation,  and  thus  I  have 
taught  an  intelligent  class  in  an  hour  to  locate  any  faculty  in  its 
proper  organ  with  approximate  correctness. 


CHAP. 


IV.]  SARCOGNOMY GENERAL    VIEW.  8 1 


Organs  are  higher  in  the  brain  as  they  are  of  a  more  kind,  loving, 
spiritual  nature,  and  lower  as  they  are  more  animal,  selfish,  and  vio- 
lent. Love  and  tenderness  are  at  the  summit — hate  and  cruelty  at 
the  base.  These  principles  have  been  established  by  innumerable 
experiments  upon  the  brain  in  intelligent  persons  in  their  most  nor- 
mal and  intelligent  condition. 

A  similar  law  applies  to  the  body.  The  vital  forces  are  at  the 
back.  The  spinal  column  is  the  commanding  region.  The  upper 
portion  of  the  back  is  the  seat  of  those  normal  powers  which  happily 
combine  the  moral  and  physical  influences,  and  in  their  greatest 
development  produce  the  best  results.  A  large  development  of 
the  shoulder  is  the  best  conformation  for  a  superior  constitution, 
while  the  development  of  the  thighs  and  lower  part  of  the  back 
gives  the  greatest  vital  force,  but  with  less  moral  power  and  equable, 
healthful  action.  The  passions  and  appetites  are  below — the  nobler 
impulses  above. 

Anteriorly,  above  the  diaphragm,  we  find  the  gentle  and  refining 
influences ;  below  the  diaphragm  the  sensual,  sensitive,  and  morbific. 

This  general  survey  indicates  the  obvious  principles  of  nervauric 
treatment.  The  entire  posterior  half  of  the  surfaces  of  the  head  and 
body  constitutes  the  tonic  or  invigorating  region,  the  region  of  vital 
power,  upon  which  the  nervauric  healer  will  chiefly  expend  his  ener- 
gies—  the  treatment  being  applied  higher  or  lower  according  to  the 
location  of  the  disease.  In  the  majority  of  cases,  both  upper  and 
lower  energies  require  to  be  roused,  but  in  all  cases  the  upper  pos- 
terior region  of  the  head  and  body  requires  special  attention. 

In  the  application  of  electric  currents,  the  backward  direction 
(towards  the  spine)  is  the  most  generally  beneficial,  and  the  upward 
currents  are  more  extensively  beneficial  than  the  downward.  In  the 
application  of  massage  or  rubbing,  the  posterior  surfaces  of  the  body 
are  most  beneficially  treated  and  are  more  capable  of  enduring  vigor- 
ous treatment. 


CHAPTER   V. 

THE  SPINAL  REGION  — ITS  ANATOMICAL,  NEURO- 
LOGICAL, AND   THERAPEUTIC   RELATIONS. 

Duty  of  the  healer —  Necessary  predominance  of  the  upper  and  posterior  regions 

—  Their  antagonism  to  the  abdominal  region  —  Upward  passes  —  Morbid  tendencies 
and  vital  relations  of  the  abdominal  region  —  Dispersive  passes  — Medical  applica- 
tions—  Spinal  region  :  demonstration  of  its  importance — Treatment  of  intermittent 
fever  by  M.  Gondret  on  the  spine  —  Counter-irritation  at  the  origins  of  nerves  — 
Special  endowments  and  increased  development  of  different  parts  of  the  spinal 
cord  —  Flexor  muscles  governed  by  upper,  and  extensor  by  lower  portion  of  the 
cord  —  Importance  of  the  cephalic  region  of  the  spine — Its  brachial  plexus  and 
phrenic  nerve  —  its  extensive  distribution — The  vertebral  ganglia  and  arteries  — 
Their  control  over  vital  powers  explained  anatomically  —  Electric  experience  of  Dr. 
Rockwell  —  Resuscitation  of  a  moribund  patient  through  the  cephalic  region  — Im- 
portance of  the  cephalic  region  in  fevers  — Testimony  of  Drs.  Gerhard  and  Beard  — ' 
The  upper  dorsal  nerves  and  cilio-spinal  region  at  the  second  dorsal  nerve  —  Con- 
nection of  the  cuneics  and  angular  gyrus  in  the  brain  with  vision  —  Testimony  of 
Onimus  and  Legros  as  to  the  cephalic  region  — Thoracic  and  abdominal  divisions 
of  the  dorsal  region  —  Pulmonic  influence  of  the  dorsal  region  —  Cardiac  region  of 
the  cord — Caries  of  the  spinal  vertebrae,  as  reported  by  Brodie,  showing  the  functions 
of  the  cord  —  Pathological  observations  of  Dr.  Little  —  Anatomical  connections  of 
the  upper  dorsal  region — Treatment  of  hooping-cough  through  the  upper  spinal 
region  —  Differences  of  the  upper  and  lower  dorsal  region  explained —  Illustrations 
in  consumption,  pneumonia —  Sympathies  of  the  chest  with  the  upper  region  of  the 
brain — Influence  of  the  affections  —  Illustrations  in  sunstroke,  typhus,  and  insanity 

—  Connection  of  pneumonia  and  delirium. 

Relation  of  the  heart  to  the  dorsal  and  cervical  regions — Illustrations  of  the 
lower  dorsal  region  —  Connection  of  the  cephalic  region  with  respiration  and  circu- 
lation, through  the  phrenic  nerve,  ganglia,  and  plexuses  —  Relations  of  dorsal  region 
to  respiration — Experiment  of  Onimus  and  Legros — Relation  of  the  diaphragm  to  the 
spine  —  Explanation  of  coughs — The  most  effective  current  for  stimulating  the 
diaphragm  —  Control  of  the  lower  dorsal  region  over  the  abdominal  functions  —  The 
respiratory  tract  on  the  abdomen  —  Experiments  of  Valentine  and  observations  of 
Sherwood — Backache  from  constipation  —  Opposite  tendencies  of  the  upper  and 
lower  portions  of  the  spinal  cord  —  Power  of  the  lumbar  region — Experiments  of 
Brachet  on  the  lumbar  region—  Experiments  of  Budge  —  Anatomical  description  01 
the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves  —  Seats  of  sexual  functions —  Observations  of  Longet, 
Breschet,  and  Brachet—  Sacral  and  hypogastric  plexuses  — Budge's  sexual  centre  — 
Connection  of  the  sexual  and  muscular  —  Antagonism  to  brain  in  pelvic  region  and 
lower  limbs  —General  view  of  the  spine  and  its  nervous  control. 

Correlation  and  combination  of f mictions — Van  Kempen's  experiment —  Roots  ot 
the  nerves  —  Complex  relations  of  the  heart  with  ganglia,  phrenic  nerve,  and  spine 

—  Relations  of  the  thoracic  part  of  the  cord  — Cervical  ganglia  and  pneumogastric 

—  Relations  of  splanchnic  nerves—  Combination  of  brain,  lungs  and  stomach  — 
Connection  of  cardiac  and  pulmonary  nerve  forces  —  Importance  of  the  ganglionic 
system. 

The  enlightened  healer  understands  that  he  must  not  merely 
remove  the  existing-  disease  and  the  morbid  elements  in  the  body, 
which  was  the  general  aim  of  the  drug  practice  (operating  very  often 
with  remedies  very  imperfectly  understood),  but  that  he  must,  by 
that  direct  and  congenial  aid  which  drugs  seldom  give,  rouse  each 
organ  to  a  more  vigorous  performance  of  duty,  and  rouse  the  whole 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  8$ 

constitution  from  its  depression,  to  assist  by  the  general  vital  force 
each  special  organ,  and  then,  if  possible,  so  invigorate  the  psycho- 
dynamic  health  region  as  to  place  the  whole  being  on  a  higher  plane 
of  life. 

There  are  certain  general  principles  to  be  continually  borne  in 
mind.  Health,  happiness,  and  efficiency  depend  on  the  predominance 
of  the  upper  half  of  the  back  and  the  upper  half  of  the  occiput  —  over 
the  abdominal  region  of  the  body,  and  the  anterior  inferior  region  of 
the  brain  covered  by  the  face.* 

Upward  and  backward  passes  over  the  front  of  the  body,  but  espe- 
cially over  the  abdomen,  are  of  great  benefit  in  nine  tenths  of  the 
cases  of  disease.  When  you  find  one  fatigued,  debilitated,  feverish, 
melancholic,  or  depressed  in  any  way,  the  brisk  upward  passes  over 
the  abdomen,  either  upon  the  clothes  or  upon  the  uncovered  person, 
are  always  felt  as  restorative,  refreshing,  and  strengthening.  The 
abdomen  is  the  castle  and  battle-ground  of  disease,  where  life  is 
busily  engaged  in  conquering,  to  assimilate  the  dead  matter  intro- 
duced, and  where  the  portal  vessels  gather  the  most  degenerate  and 
devitalized  blood  of  the  whole  body.  There  are  the  abundant  nerves, 
the  acute  sensibilities,  and  the  atonic  relaxation  which  invite  disease. 
There  is  the  continual  gathering  of  all  the  foul,  dead,  and  morbid 
matter  of  the  body,  prior  to  its  expulsion;  there  is  the  open  thorough- 
fare of  dead  matter,  coming  in  to  be  vitalized,  and  taxing  the  re- 
sources of  vitality  to  lift  it  to  a  higher  condition.  If  it  is  not  at  once 
controlled  and  partially  dissolved  by  the  healthy  energy  of  the  secre- 
tions, it  becomes  an  immediate  oppression  and  cause  of  debility,  dis- 
ease, or  suffering.  The  abdominal  organs  are  therefore  a  continual 
tax  upon  the  constitution,  to  assist  their  battle  with  dead  and  decay- 
ing matter,  and  its  accumulation  either  as  undigested  food  or  as 
unexpelled  decomposition,  lowers  the  general  vitality,  which  gains  its 
maximum  vigor  only  after  the  expulsion  of  the  waste  and  the  diges- 
tion of  the  food  supply.  There  is  a  sensible  increase  of  vigor  after 
every  act  of  digestion  and  every  act  of  expulsion.  The  vigor  of 
these  acts  depends  upon  the  spinal  column,  extended  along  which 
we  find  the  spinal  cord  and  sympathetic  ganglia. 

♦This  does  not  imply  that  the  abdominal  region  is  the  seat  of  injurious  influ- 
ences, or  that  it  is  not  absolutely  necessary  to  human  life  and  harmonious  develop- 
ment, but  simply  that  the  abdominal  region  has  not  the  vitalizing,  elevating,  and 
protective  power  which  belongs  to  the  chest,  and  that  if  it  were  the  ruling  element 
of  the  constitution  there  would  not  be  sufficient  vital  force  to  animate  and  perfect 
the  crude  material  which  it  introduces  but  does  not  fully  vitalize,  and  to  resist  the 
malign  impressions  to  which  the  nervous  system  of  the  abdomen  is  continually 
liable.  The  vitality  which  enters  by  the  brain  and  chest  elevates  the  constitution 
from  abdominal  helplessness,  and  as  soon  as  the  thorax  ceases  to  act  in  respiration 
the  fatal  decline  of  life  begins.  A  low  grade  of  life,  such  as  that  of  the  oyster,  may 
exist  when  the  digestive  apparatus  is  the  chief  element  of  the  constitution  and  the 
respiration  is  reduced  to  a  minimum. 


84  THE    SPINAL    REGION,  [CHAP.    V. 

Morbid  and  excessive  concentration  of  excitement  to  the  abdomen 
is  lowering,  and  its  dispersion  is  invigorating — hence,  in  addition  to 
the  upward  and  backward  passes,  dispersive  passes  from  the  lower 
region  of  the  abdomen  down  the  thighs  are  highly  beneficial,  trans- 
ferring the  excitement  from  the  hypogastric  region  of  depression  to 
that  of  physical  force  —  the  thighs  and  legs  —  as  the  upward  passes 
carry  it  to  the  shoulders. 

[The  doctrine  that  the  relaxing  influences  belong  to  the  abdominal 
region,  and  the  energetic  influences  to  other  portions  of  the  constitu- 
tion, is  illustrated  by  many  familiar  facts,  beside  the  terribly  debilita- 
ting and  prostrating  effects  of  abdominal  diseases.  Whenever  we 
make  a  vigorous  exertion,  calling  forth  our  maximum  energy,  the 
abdomen  is  powerfully  compressed  by  the  abdominal  muscles  and 
diaphragm,  the  descent  of  the  latter  being  sustained  or  aided  by  the 
closure  of  the  larynx  retaining  the  air  in  the  chest,  the  compression 
of  which  assists  the  downward  pressure.  Without  this  compression 
of  the  trunk,  driving  out  the  abdominal  blood  into  the  muscular  sys- 
term  brain,  and  spine,  our  maximum  energy  cannot  be  attained.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  congestion  of  the  blood  in  the  abdominal  region 
from  any  cause  is  extremely  depressing  and  dangerous,  as  we  see  in 
congestive  chills  and  the  collapse  of  cholera.] 

In  a  great  many  cases  a  single  treatment  in  this  way  by  an  efficient 
healer  will  break  up  a  commencing  fever,  or  arrest  the  progress  of 
one  which  is  more  advanced.  It  will  also  relieve  cases  of  diarrhoea 
and  cholera  morbus,  menstrual  disorders,  hysteria,  and  melancholy. 

Following  this  operation,  the  hands  should  be  placed  on  the  region 
of  Health  on  the  shoulder  blades,  the  perfect  vitality  of  which  has 
already  been  explained,  and  a  gentle  or  vigorous  percussion  applied 
over  the  whole  upper  part  of  the  back,  from  the  neck  ten  or  twelve 
inches  down. 

A  gentle  stimulant  or  mild  capsicum  plaster,  six  or  eight  by  ten  or 
twelve  inches,  according  to  the  size  of  the  person,  may  be  placed 
across  the  shoulders,  to  maintain  the  impression  thus  produced,  and 
left  upon  the  patient  for  a  few  hours. 

If  any  particular  remedy  is  plainly  and  positively  indicated,  it  may 
be  applied  upon  the  skin  as  an  embrocation  under  the  plaster,  in  the 
form  of  a  tincture  or  strong  decoction,  and  its  constitutional  effects 
produced  without  introducing  it  in  the  stomach.  The  most  sensitive 
locality  for  the  external  application  of  medicines  is  on  the  median  line 
between  the  sternum  (breast  bone)  and  umbilicus. 

As  the  physician  should  combat  not  only  the  prostration  of  the 
vital  powers  generally,  but  the  special  debility,  disorder,  and  disease 
of  each  organ,  he  will  go  to  the  basis  of  the  vital  forces  in  the  spinal 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.        '  85 

column  to  ieinforce  the  dilapidated  energies.  The  vital  forces  and 
positive  elements  are  in  the  posterior  half  of  the  brain  and  the  body 
—  the  sensitive  and  negative  in  the  anterior.  This  is  the  general 
plan  of  the  animal  kingdom.  In  the  torpedo,  for  example,  the  spinal 
side  of  the  body  is  positive  and  the  abdominal  surface  negative. 
The  current  is  from  the  spinal  toward  the  abdominal  surface. 

The  commanding  importance  of  the  spinal  region  has  not  escaped 
the  observation  of  the  most  enlightened  practitioners  of  electro- 
therapeutics. Dr.  Beard  says :  "  In  the  employment  of  general  fara- 
dization particular  attention  should  be  given  to  the  spine,  even  at  the 
expense  of  neglecting  other  portions  of  the  body  ;"  and  he  recog- 
nizes the  upper  dorsal  region  as  the  most  important  portion  of  the 
spine. 

M.  Gondret  in  1850  (in  "  Encyclographie  Medicale  ")  published  his 
method  of  treating  intermittent  fever,  which  he  stated  had  in  his 
hands  never  failed  to  cure.  He  applied  eight  or  ten  cupping  glasses  on 
each  side  of  the  spinal  column  from  the  neck  downwards,  letting  them 
remain  about  thirty  or  forty  minutes.  This  was  simply  dry  cupping, 
as  no  scarification  was  used.  The  application  was  made  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  cold  stage,  or  preferably  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before. 
This  he  stated  not  only  prevented  the  attack  but  overcame  the  sub- 
sequent fever.  One  application  of  the  cups,  he  stated,  was  sufficient, 
except  in  long-standing  cases,  which  might  require  three  or  four. 
This  method,  he  stated,  had  never  failed  in  his  practice  of  twenty- 
seven  years. 

He  stated  that  when  there  was  headache,  giddiness,  heat  and 
heaviness  of  the  head,  "  I  apply  cups  to  the  back  of  the  neck,  and 
sometimes  take  away  an  ounce  or  an  ounce  and  a  half  of  blood* 
which  immediately  relieves  ;  if  there  is  cough,  difficulty  of  breathing, 
palpitation,  etc.,  I  apply  them  between  the  shoulders  and  draw  two  or 
three  ounces  of  blood,  and  so  on.  By  following  this  plan  I  always 
find  the  symptoms  disappear  in  a  short  time." 

M.  Gondret  certainly  found  the  correct  locations,  and  his  practice 
was  rational,  but  in  the  medical  profession  the  most  valuable  ideas 
which  do  not  emanate  from  a  college  or  a  high  authority  easily  fall 
into  oblivion.     Authority  is  more  influential  than  truth. 

As  another  illustration  of  the  same  principle,  rheumatic  pains  in 
the  arms  may  often  be  controlled  by  cupping  at  the  origin  of  the 
brachial  plexus  on  the  back  of  the  neck,  and  pain  of  the  jaws  and 
teeth  in  dental  operations  may  be  controlled  by  the  application  of 
ether  in  front  of  the  ear  at  the  origin  of  the  trifacial  nerve.  Facial 
neuralgias  may  also  be  treated  on  the  same  principle.  They  were 
cured  by  my  colleague  Prof.  T.  V.  Morrow  by  counter-irritation  near 


86  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

the  origin  of  the  trifacial  nerve  (in  front  of  the  ear)  with  the  eclectic 
irritating  plaster. 

The  seats  of  the  various  energies  which  may  be  roused  through 
the  spinal  column  are  arranged  in  a  very  simple  and  intelligible  way 
along  the  spine.  In  all  animals  the  different  portions  of  the  spinal 
cord,  instead  of  being  a  simple  uniform  channel  from  the  brain  to  the 
muscles,  vary  in  size  according  to  the  development  of  spinal  nerves 
for  the  different  parts  of  the  body. 

That  the  spinal  cord  is  not  a  mere  channel  to  and  from  the  brain,  but  has  special 
endowments  in  every  part,  is  shown  by  its  varying  size  in  different  portions.  Volk- 
mann,  by  weighing  four  portions  of  the  spinal  cord  of  the  horse,  found  them  to 
differ  greatly.  That  below  the  second  pair  of  nerves  weighed  219,  that  below  the 
eighth  293,  that  below  the  nineteenth,  163,  and  that  below  the  thirtieth  2S1  grains. 
In  all  animals  the  cord  is  larger  where  important  nerves  are  given  off. 

Volkmann  has  shown  also  that  each  pair  of  the  lymphatic  hearts  of  frogs  depends 
for  nervous  influence  upon  a  small  section  of  the  cord,  destruction  of  which  arrests 
its  movements,  but  destruction  of  no  other  part  has  this  effect,  if  the  special  portion 
is  not  disturbed. 

The  interesting  experiments  of  Dr.  F.  Harless  on  frogs,  corroborated  by  those  of 
Engelhardt  and  Potelli,  show  that  in  them  the  upper  part  of  the  cord  governs  the 
flexor  and  the  lower  the  extensor  muscles.  For  the  upper  limbs  the  division  between 
the  flexor  and  extensor  portions  was  at  the  fourth  vertebra ;  for  the  lower,  the  divi- 
sion was  at  the  fifth.  There  is  something  analogous  to  this  in  man;  for  the  emo- 
tions and  impulses  connected  with  the  upper  part  of  the  spine  and  the  corre- 
sponding upper  region  of  the  brain  tend  to  acts  of  a  more  gentle  character,  in  which 
flexion  is  employed,  while  acts  of  violence,  which  employ  the  extensors,  proceed 
from  the  inferior  region  of  the  brain  and  the  corresponding  inferior  region  of  the 
spine.  As  the  flexor  functions  are  located  higher,  they  survive  extension  in  paraly- 
sis and  in  death. 

The  dorsal  summit  of  the  spinal  column  is  the  region  that  invigo- 
rates the  brain,  and  may  therefore  be  called  Cephalic.  The  stimula- 
tion of  that  region  gives  strength  of  will,  dignity  of  character,  self- 
reliance,  and  all  that  belongs  to  conscious  strength  of  character. 

The  three  upper  dorsal  and  four  lower  cervical  vertebrae  are  the 
location  of  the  channels  of  the  power  which  invigorates  the  brain 
and  the  entire  character.  The  elevation  of  this  part  in  a  proud, 
manly  erect  attitude  expresses  the  strength  of  the  character,  and  its 
depression  in  a  drooping  attitude  characterizes  humility,  timidity, 
feebleness,  and  disease.  There  may,  however,  be  a  large  amount  of 
the  coarser  energies  from  the  lower  part  of  the  spine  when  the  nobler 
energies  of  this  region  are  defective,  as  we  see  in  misers  and  men  of 
bad,  coarse  character,  whose  shoulders  droop  while  the  back  projects. 
It  is  from  this  region  that  the  nerves  proceed  which  supply  the  arms 
by  which  man  exercises  his  intelligent  vigor  and  enforces  his  author- 
ity. The  arms  are  physiologically  associated  with  the  occipital  organs 
near  the  median  line,  in  which  are  situated  the  commanding  and  ambi- 
tious faculties.  The  capacity  of  the  cephalic  region  of  the  body  to 
sustain  the  brain  power  makes  it  important,  not  only  to  success  in 
life,  but  in  overcoming  the  irresolute  feebleness  of  ill-health  and  pros- 
tration of  severe  diseases.     Hence,  when  the  patient  is  failing  in  for- 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  8? 

titude,  stability,  self-control,  power  of  attention  and  self-reliance, 
this  is  the  region  to  be  roused,  while  we  should  disperse  from  the 
hypochondriac  regions  —  the  margin  of  the  ribs,  in  which  the 
enfeebling,  depressing  elements  are  seated. 

I  do  not  mean  by  these  remarks  that  the  power  of  the  spine  over- 
rules that  of  the  brain,  but  that  it  is  a  co-operative  instrument,  as  the 
entire  body,  by  the  laws  of  Sarcognomy,  responds  to  the  entire  brain 
in  sympathetic  co-operation.  Each  portion  of  the  body  co-operates 
with  and  strengthens  the  portion  of  the  brain  with  which  it  is  in 
sympathy.  As  the  eye  is  the  necessary  instrument  of  the  perceptive 
organs,  and  the  muscles  the  necessary  instrument  of  combativeness, 
it  is  obvious  that  the  loss  or  decay  of  these  instruments  would  dimin- 
ish the  perceptive  and  the  combative  powers. 

The  upper  region  of  the  spinal  cord,  which  I  designate  as  Ceph- 
alic, is  by  far  the  most  important,  as  it  is  also  the  largest  portion. 
Even  the  great  muscular  power  of  the  lower  limbs,  sustained  by  an 
enlargement  of  the  cord  at  the  beginning  of  the  lumbar  region,  does 
not  require  so  large  a  development.  The  posterior  or  sensory  roots 
of  the  spinal  nerves  show  a  more  marked  predominance  over  the 
anterior  or  motor  in  the  cephalic  region,  corresponding  to  the  refined 
sensibility  of  the  upper  part  of  the  body.  These  sensitive  fibres  are 
softer  and  finer  than  those  of  the  anterior  motor  nerves. 

The  cephalic  region  embraces  the  four  lower  cervical  and  three 
superior  dorsal  nerves,  which  hold  under  their  jurisdiction  the  arms, 
shoulders,  and  upper  part  of  the  chest.  By  these  muscles  are  exe- 
cuted all  the  movements  of  the  arms,  hands,  and  shoulders,  while  they 
erect  the  head  as  well  as  the  shoulders,  and  produce  all  the  command- 
ing dignity  of  human  attitudes.  The  region  of  the  body  to  which 
the  nerves  of  the  cephalic  region  are  distributed  may  be  called  the 
cephalic  region  or  zone  —  the  region  which  sympathizes  with  the 
brain  and  sustains  its  functions.  This  I  state,  not  from  anatomical 
inferences  or  theories,  but  from  experimental  facts  —  the  production 
of  similar  conditions  by  the  brain  and  by  the  body. 

The  largest  nervous  emission  from  the  cephalic  region  is  the 
brachial  plexus,  devoted  to  the  arms,  formed  from  the  fifth,  sixth, 
seventh  and  eighth  cervical  nerves,  and  first  dorsal.  The  anterior 
branches  of  these  nerves  form  the  brachial  plexus,  and  the  poste- 
rior go  to  the  muscles  and  the  integuments  of  the  lower  part  of  the 
neck,  corresponding  externally  with  the  cephalic  region. 

In  addition  to  the  nerves  of  the  arm,  the  brachial  plexus  and  its  spinal  roots  give 
off  nerves  for  the  upper  thoracic  region —  the  anterior  and  posterior  thoracic,  the 
supra-scapular,  sub-scapular,  and  superior  muscular,  and  supply  the  major  and 
minor  psctoralis  at  the  lateral  front  of  the  chest,  theserratus  magnus  on  its  lateral 
surface,  and  in  the  neck  and  shoulder  supply  the  longus  colli,  complexus,  spinatis 
cervicis,  multifidus  spina?,  scaleni,  rhomboidei,  supra  and  infra  spinatus,  shoulder 


88  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

joint,  terres  major,  subscapularis,  subclavius,  levator  anguli  scapulae — and  latissi- 
mus  dorsi  at  the  back  of  the  chest.  There  are  also  two  large  nerves  from  the  fourth 
cervical  (acromialis  and  clavicularis),  which  pass  to  the  surface  of  the  front  of  the 
chest,  between  the  sternum  and  acromion  process.  From  the  lower  part  of  the 
cephalic  region  —  the  first,  second,  and  third  dorsal  nerves  —  proceed  the  intercosto- 
humeral  nerves,  which  supply  the  posterior  inner  part  of  the  arm,  the  lower  part  of 
the  scapula,  and  the  surface  in  the  axilla.  This  location  corresponds  closely  in  its 
character  with  the  cephalic  region  at  the  spine.  The  upper  dorsal  nerves  in  their 
anterior  or  intercostal  distribution  correspond  with  the  course  of  the  ribs,  and  there- 
fore relate  to  the  upper  part  of  the  chest  —the  third  and  fourth  supplying  the  mam- 
mary gland.  Hence  the  region  above  the  mammary  gland  may  be  properly  included 
in  the  cephalic  zone,  with  which  it  is  also  identified  by  its  functional  sympathies 
with  the  highest  elements  of  humanity,  connected  with  the  upper  portion  of  the 
brain,  the  region  of  Love,  Philanthropy,  Hope,  Religion,  and  Integrity.  The  con- 
nection of  the  upper  dorsal  region  with  the  mammas,  the  seat  of  Love,  illustrates 
the  correlation  of  Love  and  Health  in  the  brain,  which  correspond  to  the  mammae 
and  upper  dorsal  region. 

The  fact  that  the  cephalic  region  of  the  trunk  is  also  a  brachial 
region,  being  the  origin  of  the  brachial  plexus,  indicates  an  important 
relation  of  the  arms  to  the  brain,  and  hence  the  importance  of  exercises 
of  the  arms  and  shoulders  to prornote  the  energy  of  tlie  brain. 

This  intimate  association  is  illustrated  by  anatomy,  as  the  arms 
and  the  head  receive  their  common  supply  of  red  blood  through  the 
same  arteries,  the  subsclavian,  and  return  it  likewise  through  the  sub- 
clavian veins.  Hence  the  increase  of  the  subclavian  flow  brings  a 
simultaneous  increase  of  energy  to  the  arms  and  the  brain.  We 
may  suppose  that  any  organs  dependent  on  a  common  vascular  trunk 
for  their  supply  may  be  associated  in  action.  The  arms  are  the 
agent  by  which  our  intelligent  plans  and  purposes  are  executed. 
They  are  the  chief  instruments  of  the  brain,  all  skill  being  mani- 
fested by  the  fingers  and  the  play  of  our  emotions  and  energies  being 
expressed  by  gesticulation  of  the  arms. 

There  is  another  striking  illustration  of  this  correlation.  The  arms 
(including  hands,  of  course)  attain  their  highest  development  in  man. 
So  does  the  occipital  brachial  region,  in  which  man  excels  very  far  all 
animals.  This  occipital  region  gives  the  ambitious  impulse,  the  spirit 
of  command  and  dignity  of  character  which  are  so  pre-eminent  in 
man,  and  which  are  sustained  by  his  superior  brain  and  his  efficient 
arms,  which  make  arts  and  manufactures  possible.  If  his  hands 
were  reduced  to  paws  or  hoofs,  his  pre-eminence  would  be  lost,  his 
civilization  undeveloped,  and,  his  ambition  and  self-respect  having  no 
adequate  foundation,  the  organs  would  fail,  and  his  occiput  be  re- 
duced to  the  animal  type. 

Another  very  important  relation  of  the  cephalic  region,  illustrating 
its  commanding  position,  is  found  in  the  phrenic  nerve,  commonly 
regarded  merely  as  the  nerve  of  the  diaphragm,  but  really  one  of  the 
most  important  and  extensively  related  nerves,  comparable  to  the 
pneumogastric  and  sympathetic,  and  similar  to  the  sympathetic  in 
some  of  its  functions,  but  going  more  freely  to  the  diaphragm  than 
the  heart. 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  89 

The  phrenic  originates  from  the  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  cervical, 
also  communicating  with  the  vertebral  ganglion,  and  thus  associates 
the  cephalic  region  with  its  very  extensive  and  important  functions, 
as  the  vertebral  is  the  commanding  centre  of  the  vital  energy  of  the 
occipital  brain  and  spine.  Through  its  branches  to  the  lower  vena 
cava,  pericardium,  and  right  auricle,  it  has  an  important  influence  on 
the  heart,  assisting  its  action.  This  is  probably  the  reason  that  the 
right  heart,  being  thus  more  intimately  associated  with  the  brain  than 
the  left  heart,  is  the  last  to  die,  as  shown  in  experiments  on  animals. 

Through  its  distribution  to  the  diaphragm  it  becomes  an  important 
vital  nerve,  and  connects  the  cephalic  region,  from  which  it  comes, 
with  the  act  of  inspiration  as  well  as  with  the  action  of  the  heart, 
with  which  it  is  connected  by  the  direct  branches  just  mentioned, 
and  by  its  association  with  the  vertebral  ganglion,  which  is  one  of  the 
sources  of  power  to  the  heart.  This  arrangement  illustrates  the 
character  of  the  cephalic  zone  as  the  source  of  life,  in  which  it  corre- 
sponds with  the  brain,  which  is  the  primal  source. 

As  the  sensitive  nerve  of  the  pleura  costalis,  the  sensibility  of 
which  is  very  acute  in  pleurisy,  it  represents  a  region  that  sym- 
pathizes with  the  upper  cerebral  surface  and  connects  also  with  pul- 
monic regions  of  the  spine. 

Finally,  by  its  distribution  to  the  peritoneum,  liver,  small  intestines, 
and  supra-renal  capsules,  it  brings  these  regions  into  a  close  relation 
with  the  brain  and  lungs,  such  as  we  see  illustrated  in  the  coughs 
and  convulsions  produced  by  the  intestinal  irritation  of  worms. 

This  latter  distribution  is  an  important  fact  in  Sarcognomy,  as 
without  it  there  would  be  no  anatomical  explanation  of  the  functions  I 
have  found  at  the  abdominal  surface  (the  regions  of  Respiration  and 
emotional  expression  for  the  entire  brain).  But  even  this  anatomical 
illustration  is  hardly  an  adequate  explanation  of  my  discovery,  which 
requires  some  additional  knowledge  for  its  full  comprehension. 

The  cephalic  region  of  the  spine  is  closely  connected  with  the  ver- 
tebral ganglia  (lying  at  the  junction  of  the  cervical  and  dorsal  verte- 
brae, or  between  the  last  cervical  vertebra  and  the  first  rib).  They 
are  under  the  immediate  control  of  the  cephalic  region,  as  all  the 
ganglia  communicate  with  and  are  controlled  by  the  adjacent  regions 
of  the  cord.  Branches  may  be  traced  from  the  seventh  and  eighth 
cervical  nerves  to  this  ganglion.  The  vertebral  ganglia  are  the  gov- 
ernors of  the  entire  circulation  of  the  posterior  half  of  the  brain  and 
its  downward  extension,  the  spinal  cord.  They  lie  on  the  vertebral 
arteries  which  give  the  supply  of  the  posterior  part  of  the  brain  and 
the  spinal  cord,  and  send  a  plexus  along  the  course  of  these  arteries, 
which    accompanies    their   ramifications    (after   forming   the    basilar 


90  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

artery)  with  minute  branches,  which  finally  connect  with  the  analo- 
gous branches  coming  from  the  carotid  plexus  along  the  carotid  arte- 
ries and  branches  for  the  anterior  half  of  the  brain. 

When  the  operator's  hand  is  placed  on  the  cephalic  region,  it  covers 
the  subclavian  artery  (for  the  brain  and  the  arm)  adjacent  to  the  last 
cervical  vertebra,  the  vertebral  arteries  which  supply  the  brain  and 
spine,  and  the  vertebral  ganglia  which  not  only  control  the  circulation 
of  the  energetic  portion  of  the  nervous  system,  but  contribute  to  sus- 
tain the  action  of  the  heart. 

The  superior  regions  of  the  brain  sympathize  with  the  superior 
region  of  the  chest,  as  is  shown  by  Pathology  (and  as  I  have  often 
felt  in  my  own  person),  in  accordance  with  which  fact  the  vertebral 
ganglia  (belonging  to  the  cephalic  region)  send  some  branches  down 
to  unite  in  the  pulmonary  plexus  (which  is  supplied  from  the  third 
and  fourth  ganglia  in  the  dorsal  region)  with  the  pneumogastric,  the 
sensitive  nerves  of  the  lungs  and  heart. 

They  also  co-operate  with  nerves  from  the  cephalic  region,  viz.,  the 
seventh  and  eighth  cervical  and  first  dorsal,  in  forming  the  axillary 
or  brachial  plexus,  which  controls  the  arms  and  shoulders.  Moreover, 
they  send  down  one  of  the  principal  nerves  of  the  heart.  Probably 
this  nervous  connection  may  explain  the  pain  felt  in  the  left  arm  as 
far  down  as  the  elbow  in  cases  of  cardiac  disease. 

From  the  first  three  dorsal  vertebras  proceed  the  anterior  spinal 
nerves,  called  intercosto-humeral,  which  supply  the  inner  and  pos- 
terior surfaces  of  the  arm,  the  axillary  region,  and  a  portion  of  the 
upper  frontal  surface  of  the  chest.  These  surfaces,  according  to  Sar- 
cognomy,  correspond  with  the  regions  of  dignity,  cheerfulness,  author- 
ity and  affection  in  the  brain,  and  a  portion  of  the  emotional  and 
intellectual  region  sympathizes  with  the  frontal  distribution  of  the 
first  dorsal :  the  first  three  nerves  are  therefore  strictly  cephalic  in 
their  distribution. 

Thus  we  see  the  cephalic  region  is  a  great  centre  of  power,  sustain- 
ing through  its  subordinate  ganglionic  nerves  the  posterior  cerebral 
lobes,  cerebellum,  and  spinal  cord,  while  it  controls  the  upper  limbs, 
sustains  the  action  of  the  heart,  and  contributes  to  the  organic  life  of 
the  summit  of  the  lungs,  which  sympathizes  with  the  upper  part  of 
the  brain.  At  the  same  time  the  posterior  nerves  from  the  cephalic 
region  of  the  cord  supply  the  integuments  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
back,  which  Sarcognomy  shows  to  sympathize  with  the.  upper  occipital 
region  of  the  brain.  In  short,  we  have  here  the  vital  knot,  the  com- 
bination of  the  executive  power  of  the  arms  as  well  as  the  cerebro- 
spinal and  cardiac  power,  with  the  pulmonic  region,  which  is  at  once 
the  sympathetic  support  of  the  brain  and  the  inlet  of  life  conditions 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  91 

to  the  body  —  spirit  life,  blood  life,  action,  and  inspiration  being  here 
inextricably  combined.  Hence,  in  exciting  this  region  in  the  impres- 
sible, they  feel  a  great  sense  of  additional  strength  and  manhood,  or 
force  of  character,  for  it  commands  the  entire  forces  of  the  body. 
Any  one  who  wishes  to  realize  its  influence,  if  not  impressible  by  the 
hand,  may  realize  it  by  placing  upon  it  a  gently  stimulating  plaster, 
and  if  the  plaster  should  also  extend  down  as  far  as  the  sixth  dorsal 
vertebra,  the  stimulation  of  the  lungs  and  heart  will  greatly  increase 
the  effect  and  enhance  the  capacities  for  social  or  oratorical  exertion. 

In  looking  over  the  experience  of  electric  therapeutists,  I  cannot 
but  wonder  that  they  should  have  so  generally  failed  to  recognize  the 
local  influences  revealed  by  Sarcognomy,  when  they  are  clearly  indi- 
cated by  the  history  of  diseases. 

The  cephalic  region  of  the  cord,  however,  has  not  entirely  escaped 
observation.  Dr.  Rockwell,  in  "Lectures  on  Electricity,"  says:  "The 
back  part  of  the  head  and  tipper  portion  of  the  spine  (cilio-spinal  centre) 
will  usually  bear  powerful  applications  ;  and  it  is  an  interesting  and 
important  fact  that  applications  to  this  centre  will  produce  far  greater 
tonic  effects  than  when  the  pole  is  applied  to  any  other  one  portion  of 
the  body."  No  doubt  much  of  his  success  in  electric  treatment  was 
due  to  his  discovery  of  this  fact.*  Dr.  Rockwell  is  a  stronger 
advocate  of  faradization  than  the  majority,  and  superficial  faradic 
currents  might  be  used  with  great  benefit  on  the  two  regions  he 
mentions. 

That  the  cephalic  region  sustains  the  power  of  the  brain  was  illus- 
trated in  a  case  reported  in  the  London  "  Lancet,"  by  Joseph  Ewart. 
In  this  case  a  married  woman  of  twenty-nine,  after  undergoing  an 
amputation  of  one  of  the  metacarpal  bones  of  the  hand,  under  chloro- 
form, fell  into  a  state  of  insensibility,  with  contracted  pupils  and  very 
feeble,  laboring  respiration.  After  efforts  at  her  resuscitation  for  two 
hours  and  a  half  there  was  no  recuperation,  but  diminishing  respira- 
tion and  increasing  coldness.  In  this  dangerous  condition  galvanism 
was  applied  for  two  or  three  minutes  over  the  chest  and  "  top  of  the 
spine,"  and  through  the  brachial  plexus.  This  was  exactly  the  proper 
application  to  rouse  the  brain,  and  it  produced  immediate  recovery. 

*An  additional  illustration  of  the  character  of  the  cephalic  region  of  the  body 
may  be  found  in  the  muscles  which  it  contains.  The  trapezius,  rhomboideus  major 
and  minor,  upper  serratus,  splenius  colli,  semi-spinales  colli  and  dorsi,  spinalis  cer- 
vicis,  upper  interspinales  and  multifidus  spinae,  all  contribute  to  maintain  the  firm, 
erect  attitude  of  head  and  shoulders  which  is  pathognomic  of  strong  character  and 
sustained  energy.  These  are  adjacent  to  the  spinal  cephalic  region.  The  muscles 
further  off,  controlled  from  the  cephalic  spine,  in  the  shoulders  and  arms,  with  the 
serratus  magnus  and  pectoralis,  On  the  chest,  are  the  muscles  of  intelligent  action 
and  expression,  by  which  mainly  the  conceptions  and  purposes  of  the  brain  are 
carried  out;  while  the  inspiration  that  vitalizes  the  brain  is  obtained  through  the 
fourth  and  fifth  cervical  andThe  upper  intercostal  nerves  and  muscles,  aided  by  the 
upper  serratus,  serratus  magnus,  and  upper  levatores  costarum. 


92  THE    SPTNAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

She  rose  from  the  bed,  sighed  frequently  and  profoundly,  opened  her 
eyes,  and  was  able  to  answer  questions. 

A  knowledge  of  the  character  of  the  cephalic  region  may  be  of 
great  value  in  diseases  which,  like  typhus,  affect  the  brain.  Dr. 
Gerhard,  of  Philadelphia,  discovered  the  value  of  the  cephalic  region 
in  the  treatment  of  typhus  fever. 

Scarified  or  dry  cups,  applied  to  the  nuchae  or  along  the  spine 
between  the  shoulders,  have  been  found  of  great  efficacy  in  removing 
or  diminishing  the  suffusion  of  the  eyes,  the  injection  of  the  face,  the 
headache,  the  delirium,  and  other  symptoms.  They  constitute  in 
nearly  all  the  cases  a  part  of  the  treatment  pursued  by  Dr.  Gerhard 
at  Philadelphia  in  1836.  Speaking  generally  of  dry  cups,  he  says: 
"  Applied  in  considerable  numbers,  and  left  upon  the  nape  of  the 
neck  and  between  the  shoulders  for  twenty  minutes  or  half  an  hour, 
they  always  seemed  to  me  more  powerful  in  nervous  functional 
derangement,  not  attended  with  inflammation,  than  scarified  cups.  I 
have  used  them  largely  in  the  treatment  of  the  apoplectic  symptoms 
of  malignant  intermittent  with  the  best  effects,  and  resort  to  them 
with  confidence  as  one  of  the  most  poiverful  means  of  controlling  dis- 
cordant nervous  action."     (Bartlett  on  Typhoid  and  Typhus.) 

Dr.  Beard,  by  his  experience  in  electrical  treatment,  discovered  the 
great  importance  and  controlling  power  of  the  upper  dorsal  region,  of 
which  he  says  (page  391):  "  There  is  no  other  single  place  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  body  where  the  electrical  influence  can  be  communicated 
to  so  many  important  nerves  as  at  the  cilio-spinal  centre."  "  This 
application  is  a  very  important  factor  in  general  faradization,  and 
will  achieve  decided  tonic  effects  on  the  system  even  when  no  other 
portion  of  the  body  is  touched  by  the  current."  The  anatomical 
reasons  which  he  gives,  however,  are  entirely  inadequate  to  explain 
its  importance. 

The  stimulation  of  organs  by  nervauric  influence  is  not  limited  to 
any  exact  lines,  but  is  always  diffusive.  Hence  I  shall  not  assign  any 
exact  boundaries  to  the  localities  to  be  acted  on,  but  allow  them  to 
overlap.  I  speak  of  the  second  and  third  dorsal  vertebrae  in  the 
cephalic  group,  although  their  adjacent  ganglia  are  tributary  to  the 
upper  portion  of  the  lungs.  The  second  and  third  dorsal  spinal 
nerves  supply  the  posterior  aspect  of  the  arm,  and  inner  aspect  of 
arm  and  fore-arm,  which  associates  them  practically  with  the  brachial 
plexus  that  springs  from  the  cephalic  region.  The  region  these  two 
nerves  supply  corresponds  with  the  posterior  lobes  of  the  brain  along 
the  median  line  and  turning  in  between  the  hemispheres. 

There  is  another  curious  fact,  illustrating  the  cephalic  influence 
of  the  upper  part  of  the  spinal  cord,  viz.,  that  the  second  dorsal  nerve 


CHAP.    V.J  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  93 

originates  the  expansion  of  the  pupil  of  the  eye.  Yet  such  is  the 
diffusive  tendency  of  impressions  on  the  nervous  system  that  this 
influence  may  be  excited  anywhere  from  the  first  cervical  to  the 
sixth  dorsal  nerve ;  hence  this  space  has  been  called  the  cilio-spinal 
region.  But  exact  experiment  has  shown  that  the  second  dorsal 
nerve  is  the  sole  seat  of  this  spinal  power.  It  is,  however,  exercised 
or  transmitted  through  the  sympathetic  ganglia  and  nerves  of  the 
neck,  the  section  of  which  deprives  the  pupil  of  the  power  of  dilation 
by  cutting  off  communication  with  the  cord  at  the  second  dorsal , 
nerve. 

Why  there  should  be  such  a  control  of  the  iris  at  the  second  dorsal 
nerve  is  a  mystery,  but  when  we  find  it  identified  with  the  brachial 
region,  supplying  the  posterior  surface  of  the  arm,  we  recollect  that 
the  posterior  surface  of  the  arm  corresponds  in  Sarcognomy  with  the 
occipital  region  on  the  median  line,  to  which  anatomists  give  the 
name  of  the  cuneus,  and  in  this  cuneus  they  find  so  close  an  associa- 
tion with  the  optic  nerve  in  its  diseases  as  to  induce  them  to  infer 
that  it  is  the  seat  of  vision.  Moreover,  the  same  claim  is  made  for 
the  angular  gyrus,  in  consequence  of  the  experiments  of  Ferrier  on 
pigeons,  in  which  its  injury  produces  blindness.  There  is  a  good 
pathognomic  reason  for  both  locations,  for  they  are  coinciding  or 
co-operative  organs  ;  the  cuneus  of  one  hemisphere  co-operates  with 
the  angular  gyrus  of  the  other.  That  both  are  associated  with  vision 
and  give  power  to  the  eye  agrees  with  my  experiments,  though  I  do 
not  believe  that  vision  is  independent  of  the  perceptive  intellectual 
organs.  Another  reason  in  favor  of  the  cuneus,  in  connection  with 
the  cilio-spinal  region,  is  that  its  influence  is  expansive. 

Onimus  and  Legros  have  ascertained  by  their  electric  investiga- 
tions the  value  of  the  cephalic  and  upper  dorsal  region  as  to  its  con- 
trolling influence  in  the  head,  not  knowing  the  neurological  relations 
of  the  parts,  but  guided  by  the  cilio-spinal  phenomena.  "  In  peri- 
pheric lesions"  (they  say)  "it  is  advantageous  to  electrize  only  the 
nervous  centres."  "  Hence,  to  act  on  the  circulation  of  the  head  and 
especially  of  the  eyes  it  is  preferable  to  electrize  the  cilio-spinal  cen- 
tre, rather  than  to  place  the  electrodes  directly  on  the  face  or  near 
the  eyes,"  which  is  very  true,  as  applications  on  the  face  would  be 
rather  injurious  to  the  cerebral  circulation. 

The  upper  half  of  the  dorsal  region  of  the  spinal  column  may  be 
regarded  as  its  thoracic  portion  and  the  lower  half  as  abdominal. 
Hence,  in  treating  affections  of  the  lungs  and  heart,  we  act  upon  the 
upper  half,  reaching  the  nerves  emitted  at  the  first  six  vertebrae.  If 
the  first  three  are  accessary  to  cephalic  action,  they  are  none  the  less 
pulmonic,  as  the  upper  pulmonic  region  is  directly  tributary  to  the 
brain  by  sympathy  and  correspondence. 


94  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

The  application  of  the  hand  on  the  upper  dorsal  region,  between 
the  shoulder  blades,  produces  a  wholesome,  invigorating  effect  on  the 
lungs,  and  a  similar  effect  is  produced  by  any  other  stimulating 
application.  Anatomy  illustrates  the  relation  of  this  region  to  the 
lungs  through  the  blood-vessels.  The  aorta  from  the  third  to  the 
sixth  dorsal  vertebrae  sends  off  the  bronchial  arteries,  which  are  the 
arteries  of  the  bronchial  region  and  the  lungs.  The  posterior  pul- 
monary plexus  and  the  root  of  the  lungs  through  which  they  are 
supplied  with  air  are  on  the  level  of  the  three  upper  dorsal  vertebrae. 
To  speak  exactly,  the  bifurcation  of  the  trachea  is  opposite  the  third 
and  fourth  dorsal  vertebrae. 

The  heart,  too,  is  invigorated  from  this  region,  and  we  cannot 
entirely  isolate  the  cardiac  and  pulmonic  influences.  The  five  upper 
ganglia  in  the  dorsal  region  send  branches  to  the  cardiac  plexuses 
formed  by  the  union  of  the  pneumogastric  nerves  with  those  of  the 
three  cervical  and  upper  dorsal  ganglia.  These  plexuses  sustain  the 
heart. 

Hence  diseases  in  this  locality  affect  the  heart.  Sometimes  the 
symptoms  of  an  acute  affection  of  the  heart  have  manifested  them- 
selves, when  the  irritation  was  seated  in  the  dorsal  region.  M.  Serres 
relates  a  case  of  meningeal  inflammation  and  ramollissement  of  the 
cord,  in  which  the  heart's  action  and  impulse  were  of  such  a  nature 
that  the  disease  was  pronounced  to  be  dilation  with  hypertrophy  of 
the  left  side  of  the  heart,  which  notwithstanding  proved  to  be  per- 
fectly sound. 

Below  the  first  dorsal  nerve  (which  goes  to  the  arm)  the  next  seven 
spinal  nerves,  going  anteriorly,  supply  the  muscles  and  integuments 
attached  to  the  ribs,  and  thus,  although  they  do  not  supply  the  lungs, 
they  are  associated  therewith  in  action,  giving  inspiratory  power  to 
the  intercostal  muscles,  and  sensibility  to  the  chest.  The  interior 
and  exterior  of  the  thorax  are  thus  connected  with  the  upper  region 
of  the  cord,  which  may  be  strictly  called  thoracic,  as  it  governs  the 
thorax  both  internally  and  externally,  and  the  posterior  dorsal  nerves 
supply  the  muscles  and  integument  of  the  back — the  upper  half  of 
them  supplying  the  thoracic  region. 

As  we  find  the  maximum  excitability  (which  is  intermediate 
between  power  and  sensibility  —  between  impression  and  reaction) 
on  the  lateral  surface  of  the  head  and  body,  we  are  not  surprised  to 
discover  that  the  corporeal  region  of  Inspiration  is  on  the  lateral  sur- 
face of  the  thorax  (see  map)  behind  the  mammae,  running  down  to 
the  seventh  rib  and  thus  corresponding  with  the  anterior  distribution 
of  the  intercostal  nerves  and  muscles,  the  agents  of  costal  inspiration, 
and  associates  of   the  phrenic    nerve   in  diaphragmatic   inspiration. 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPTNAL    REGION.  95 

The  costal  inspiration  is  more  cephalic  and  spiritual  in  its  associa- 
tions with  the  brain;  and  diaphragmatic  inspiration  which  belongs  to 
a  lower  position  on  the  head  and  body  is  associated  with  the  basilar 
region  and  impulsive  energies  and  passions. 

According  to  Drs.  Griffin,  when  the  dorsal  region  exhibits  tender- 
ness, we  find  pains  about  the  chest  or  in  the  side,  weight  and  con- 
striction of  the  chest,  cough  and  fits  of  syncope,  sense  of  sinking, 
loss  of  appetite,  gastrodynia,  pain  in  the  region  of  the  liver,  and  hic- 
cough "  —  all  of  which  is  explained  by  the  functions  of  the  dorsal 
region. 

If  physicians  had  been  accustomed  to  report  the  pathological  effects 
of  irritation  of  the  spinal  cord,  we  should  have  had  a  fine  illustration 
of  its  functions. 

Dr.  Robert  Little,  in  the  "Southern  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal," 
described  the  effect  of  spinal  irritation  as  follows  :  "  Irritation  of  the 
cervical  division  is  indicated  by  pains  in  the  face,  temples,  and  scalp, 
accompanied  frequently  by  rigidity  of  the  muscles  of  the  jaw,  when 
confined  to  the  superior  part.  When  the  irritation  is  lower  down, 
there  is  pain  in  the  region  of  the  clavicle,  scapula,  and  chest,  extend- 
ing along  the  arm,  giving  rise  to  great  lassitude,  sighing,  spasmodic 
twitchings  of  the  muscles,  etc.  When  the  dorsal  division  is  affected, 
we  have,  in  addition  to  a  few  of  the  foregoing,  stricture  across  the 
chest,  difficult  breathing,  palpitation  of  tJie  heart,  a?zgina  pectoris,  dart- 
ing pains  in  the  intercostal  muscles,  edges  of  the  ribs  and  the  epigas- 
trium.  Lower  down  still  in  the  dorsal  division  pains  in  the  stomach 
and  abdomen  are  felt.  In  addition  to  these,  a  burning  sensation  in 
the  sternum  and  ensiform  cartilage  is  said  to  be  always  present  in 
decided  cases  of  irritation  of  the  dorsal  nerves.  When  the  lumbar 
and  sacral  division  are  in  a  state  of  irritation  we  have  pains  of  an 
acute  lancinating  character,  soreness  in  the  skin  and  muscles  over  the 
genital  organs,  spasmodic  twitchings  along  the  course  of  the  crural 
nerves,  together  with  an  unsteady  carriage  in  walking,  the  patient 
having  no  confidence  in  his  ability  to  retain  an  erect  position,  and 
exhibiting  the  reeling  appearance  of  a  drunken  man."  He  ascribes 
also  to  the  superior  spinal  nerves  "throbbing  of  the  carotid  and  tem- 
poral arteries,  acute  pains  in  the  head,  violent  palpitation  and  painful 
sensation  of  the  heart,  and  a  feeling  of  inability  to  expel  the  air  from 
the  lungs." 

The  influence  of  the  various  portions  of  the  spinal  cord  was  imper- 
fectly illustrated  by  Sir  B.  C.  Brodie  in  his  work  on  diseases  of  the 
joints.  His  reference  to  the  constitutional  symptoms,  though  limited, 
shows  several  important  facts,  such  as  the  following:  — 

In  caries  of  the  cervical  vertebrae  there  is  pain  in  the  neck,  some- 


g6  THE    SPINAL    REGION,  [CHAP.    V. 

times  quite  severe.  Pains  in  the  arms  and  shoulders  seem  followed 
by  paralysis.  "  In  all  cases  there  is  pain  in  the  occiput  and  temples* 
which  is,  however,  most  severe  when  the  disease  is  situated  in  the 
two  or  three  superior  vertebrae."  In  some  advanced  cases,  the  cord 
being  irritated  by  pressure,  "  the  patient  complains  of  increased  pain 
in  the  head,  followed  by  convulsions,  stupor,  dilated  pupils,  and  other 
symptoms  of  effusion  of  fluid  on  the  brain  ;  and  on  examining  the 
body  after  death,  we  find  that  such  effusion  has  actually  taken  place, 
there  being  a  collection  of  fluid  in  the  ventricles  or  in  the  base  of  the 
cranium,  or  in  both  of  these  situations." 

This  is  the  location  which  my  experiments  prove  to  be  associated 
with  cerebral  disorder,  and  on  which  counter-irritation  has  the  best 
effect  on  the  brain,  as  many  physicians  have  realized. 

"In  caries  of  the  superior  dorsal  vertebrae,  besides  the  usual 
pain  and  tenderness  of  the  affected  parts,  the  patient  complains  of 
pain  and  a  sense  of  constriction  in  the  chest  \  and  when  the  disease  is 
in  the  inferior  dorsal  vertebrae  there  is  a  similar  sensation  in  the 
epigasrtium,  pain  in  the  abdomen  generally,  and  a  disturbed  state  of 
the  functions  of  the  alimentary  canal.  Occasionally  the  urine  is  alka- 
line, or  contains  albumen,  from  which  circumstance,  in  connection 
with  the  existence  of  pain  in  or  near  the  region  of  the  kidney,  it  is 
sometimes  difficult  to  determine,  in  the  first  instance,  whether  the 
patient  labors  under  caries  of  the  spine  or  disease  of  the  kidney." 

Of  course  the  progress  of  the  disease  downwards  involves  the 
lower  part  of  the  body. 

"  As  the  disease  advances  the  patient  in  some  instances  complains 
of  pains  which  are  referred  to  one  groin  or  hip.  This  circumstance 
not  infrequently  occasions  an  error  in  diagnosis  on  the  part  of  even 
practical  surgeons.  Afterwards  pains  and  a  sense  of  constriction  are 
felt  in  the  legs  and  thighs.  Then  the  muscles  are  found  to  be  not 
properly  under  the  dominion  of  the  will,  so  that  the  patient  occasion- 
ally loses  a  step  or  trips  in  walking.  This  is  probably  followed  by  a 
complete  loss  of  voluntary  power.  Paralysis  of  the  bladder  and  incon- 
tinence of  the  urine  and  faeces  sometimes  accompany  paralysis  of 
the  lower  limbs." 

Abscesses  are  formed,  which  appear  on  the  chest  or  the  abdomen, 
sometimes  occupying  the  space  between  the  ribs  and  groin.  Caries 
of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  produces  pains  in  the  loins,  abdomen,  and 
groin.  In  cases  of  lumbar  abscess,  he  has  always  found  caries  of  the 
vertebrae  its  cause. 

Thus  it  is  anatomically  and  neurologically  certain  that  the  upper 
half  of  the  dorsal  region  is  thoracic,  and  is  the  region  on  which  to 
treat  all  thoracic  affections. 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  97 

The  close  relation  of  the  upper  dorsal  region  to  the  functions  of 
the  lungs  is  illustrated  by  their  anatomy.  Cruveilhier  says  :  "  The 
pulmonary  plexuses  which  are  completed  by  filaments  from  the  great 
sympathetic  are  situated  behind  the  root  of  each  lung,  or,  to  speak 
more  exactly,  behind  the  bronchi."  These  nerves  "may  be  traced  as 
far  as  the  ultimate  ramifications  of  the  air-cells."  In  large  animals 
they  can  easily  be  seen  entering  the  circular  muscular  fibres  which 
surround  the  bronchial  tubes.  Hence  we  perceive  that  when  the 
hand  is  placed  upon  the  upper  dorsal  region,  it  is  in  close  relation  to 
the  ganglionic  and  pneumogastric  plexuses  which  control  the  lungs. 

Dr.  J.  L.  Pidduck,  in  the  "  Lancet,"  speaking  of  the  treatment  of 
hooping  cough,  recommended  counter-irritation  at  the  summit  of 
the  spine,  and  said  :  "  Leeching  the  upper  part  of  the  spine  and 
blistering  between  the  shoulders,  by  arresting  the  violence  of  the 
cough,  speedily  remove  the  congested  and  inflammatory  states  of  the 
brain  which  the  hooping-cough  frequently  occasions." 

The  thoracic  region  has  widely  different  characteristics  in  its  upper 
and  lower  regions.  The  lower  portion  of  the  chest,  brought  into 
play  by  the  diaphragm,  is  associated  with  vigorous,  active  life,  and  is 
most  readily  brought  into  play  by  the  active  exertion  of  the  lower 
limbs.  Its  tendencies  in  disease  are  chiefly  inflammatory.  The 
upper  portion  of  the  lungs  is  the  part  used  in  quiet  sedentary  occupa- 
tions, and  is  therefore  more  nearly  associated  with  the  intellectual 
and  moral  faculties.  It  is  the  chief  location  of  consumption,  a  dis- 
ease arising  from  imperfect  physical  development  and  blood-supply^ 
The  superior  portion  of  the  chest  is  associated  with  the  delicate, 
refined  sentiments  which  are  antagonistic  to  animal  force.  The 
organ  of  Mortality  or  ecstatic  trance,  belonging  to  the  upper  surface 
of  the  brain,  has  its  correspondence  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  chest, 
above  the  nipple.  Hence  diseases  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  lungs 
tend  strongly  to  death  ;  and  this  was  the  cause  of  the  invariably  fatal 
character  of  pulmonary  consumption  until  within  the  last  forty  years 
more  correct  ideas  of  its  treatment  have  been  slowly  gaining  ground 
against  dogmatic  opposition.  Pneumonia,  belonging  chiefly  to  the 
lower  or  more  vitally  energetic  portion  of  the  lungs,  would  never 
have  been  considered  a  very  dangerous  disease  but  for  the  absurd 
and  injurious  methods  of  its  treatment.  But  pneumonia,  too,  becomes 
a  very  dangerous  disease  when  it  seizes  the  upper  portion  of  the 
lungs.  Prof.  Boling  says  that  pneumonia,  "commencing  at  the  apex 
of  the  lung,  is  in  proportion  to  the  number  of  cases  the  most  fre- 
quently fatal  form  of  the  disease."  He  had  met  with  about  six  cases 
of  this  affection ;  they  all  proved  fatal  —  the  deaths  occurring  from 
less  extensive  alteration  than  usual.     Prof.  Eberle  used  to  speak  of 


98  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

suddenly  fatal  cases  of  relapsing  pneumonia  from  congestion  of  the 
superior  portion  of  the  lungs,  with  so  little  disturbance  that  they  had 
what  he  called  a  "morbidly  natural  pulse."  These  fatal  upper-lung 
cases  of  pneumonia  are  accompanied  by  a  persistent  mucous  or  crepi- 
tant rhoncus,  that  should  warn  us  of  the  Janger,  which  is  also  found 
in  fatal  consumptive  conditions. 

Costal  respiration,  which  develops  the  upper  part  of  the  chest,  the 
seat  of  refined  sentiments,  is  more  characteristic  of  women,  as  dia- 
phragmatic respiration,  which  develops  more  vital  impulse,  is  charac- 
teristic of  men.  Hence,  women  have  smaller  waists,  and  are  more 
willing  to  undergo  tight  lacing. 

The  upper  part  of  the  chest,  corresponding  with  the  upper  surface 
of  the  brain,  co-operates  in  determining  the  vital  forces  upwards  or 
toward  the  head.  The  upper  part  of  the  chest,  therefore,  is  the  region 
of  cephalic  tendencies,  and  there  are  a  great  number  of  pathological 
facts  that  illustrate  this  proposition,  which  I  may  present  when  I 
undertake  a  full  exposition  of  Sarcognomy. 

We  may  say  that  the  entire  chest  above  the  waist,  being  the  upper 
portion  of  the  body,  corresponds  with  the  upper  portion  of  the  head, 
above  a  line  running  back  horizontally  from  the  brow.  The  absolute 
summit  or  upper  surface  of  the  head  corresponds  to  a  region  occupy- 
ing the  upper  surface  of  the  shoulders  and  summit  of  the  spine  and 
extending  low  enough  in  front  to  include  the  mammae. 

The  upper  surface  of  the  brain  manifests  functions,  according  to 
the  law  of  pathognomy,  which  are  associated  with  the  happy  and 
benevolent  upward  tendencies,  and  the  same  remark  is,  of  course, 
applicable  to  the  corresponding  upper  surface  of  the  chest.  The 
mammae  are  associated  with  the  function  of  love  in  its  physiological 
and  psychic  operation,  and  hence  their  development  brings  on  the  age 
of  love  and  the  fitness  for  its  duties.  The  same  loving  and  happy 
influence  is  associated  with  the  upward  development  of  the  womb, 
and  the  opposite  condition  with  its  drooping  and  prolapsing  tendency. 
Hence  the  womb  and  the  mammae,  as  well  as  the  upper  surface  of 
the  brain  (the  seat  of  loving  emotions),  are  in  close  sympathy  from 
the  similarity  of  their  tendency.  The  elevation  of  the  womb  in 
pregnancy  brings  on  the  development  of  the  mammae,  and  the  love 
and  caresses  of  the  child  have  a  similar  influence  to  produce  and 
sustain  it. 

Cazeaux,  in  his  work  on  midwifery  (p.  1064),  relates  the  case  of  a 
woman,  Angeline  Chaupfaille,  sixty-two  years  of  age,  who  undertook 
to  nurse  her  grand-daughter  and  occasionally  presented  her  nipple  to 
the  child.  Although  it  was  twenty-seven  years  since  she  had  borne 
children,  this  emotional  influence  brought  on  a  full  supply  of  milk, 
and  she  nursed  the  child  a  whole  year  till  it  was  weaned. 


CHAP.  V.]  THE  SPINAL  REGION.  99 

A  striking  illustration  of  this  sympathy  is  afforded  by  cases  of  sun- 
stroke, which  are  supposed  to  be  simply  affections  of  the  brain.  In 
three  fatal  cases  of  sunstroke,  which  occurred  in  the  Sixty-eighth 
regiment,  at  Madras,  India,  autopsies  were  made  by  Surgeon  Russell, 
who  found  in  all  alike  no  material  disorder  in  the  brain,  "but  in  all 
three  the  lungs  were  congested  even  to  blackness,  through  their 
entire  extent." 

In  a  violent  outbreak  of  typhus  fever  among  the  British  troops  in 
Spain,  as  reported  by  Surgeon  Bacot,  the  patients  came  to  the  hospi- 
tal very  much  depressed,  sad,  and  melancholy;  " giddiness  of  the 
head  was  a  frequent  complaint,  and  deep  and  constant  sighing  zuas  a 
universal  symptom"  This  sighing  inspiration  is  an  effect  of  the 
upper  region  of  the  brain,  especially  under  depressing  influences  —  a 
common  effect  of  the  amiable  emotions  which  elevate  the  chest  and 
the  feeling  of  depression  which  acts  on  the  diaphragm  anteriorly. 

Dr.  Bartlett  says  "  the  morbid  alterations  which  are  found  within 
the  cavity  of  the  chest  seem  to  be  more  constant  and  more  important 
in  typhus  than  in  typhoid  fever.  The  lungs  were  more  or  less 
changed  from  their  healthy  condition  in  all  the  cases  reported  by  Dr. 
Gerhard.  This  change  generally  consisted  in  a  somewhat  peculiar 
condensation  of  a  portion  of  one  or  both  lungs.  .  .  Of  forty-three 
cases  examined  by  Dr.  Reid,  there  was  more  or  less  lesion  of  the  lungs 
in  all."  It  appears  from  a  careful  comparison  that  extensive  engorge- 
ment and  congestion  of  the  lungs  were  more  frequently  associated 
with  those  cases  in  which  there  was  increased  serous  effusion  within 
the  cranium,  than  with  those  where  this  condition  did  not  exist. 
Nearly  all  these  patients  exhibited  more  or  less  prominent  cerebral 
symptoms.  Dr.  John  Cheyne,  who  made  a  number  of  dissections  in 
Dublin,  said  "  our  expectations  were  never  disappointed  as  to  the 
state  of  the  brain.  .  .  The  vessels  of  the  head  were  turgid  ;  there 
was  increased  vascularity  of  the  brain,  especially  on  its  surface." 

Thus  it  appears  that  the  state  of  the  cephalic  circulation,  whether 
hyperemic,  irritated,  or  congested,  is  responded  to  by  similar  condi- 
tions in  the  lungs,  and  I  have  often  personally  experienced  that  a 
determination  to  the  upper  region  of  the  brain,  stimulating  the  amia- 
ble and  intellectual  faculties,  is  produced  by  the  partial  hyperemia  of 
the  lungs  in  a  cold  affecting  their  upper  portion. 

The  power  of  the  lungs  to  affect  the  brain  is  familiar  to  physicians. 
M.  Grisolle,  in  a  clinical  lecture,  said  "  delirium  is  one  of  the  most  fre- 
quent and  most  severe  cerebral  accidents  by  which  pneumonia  can  be 
complicated.  One  third  of  the  cases  in  which  this  complication  is 
observed  refer  to  habitual  drunkards.  When  both  lungs  are  affected 
delirium  is  more  frequent.     Drs.  Hourman  and  Dechambre  state  that 


IOO  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

delirium  usually  accompanies  pneumonia  in  the  aged  pensioners  of 
La  Salpetriere.  The  delirium  makes  its  appearance  at  the  end  of  the 
first  week  or  beginning  of  the  second,  and  varies  in  its  intensity  from 
quiet  divagations  to  the  most  violent  sort  of  furious  raving.  The 
appearance  of  delirium  during  the  progress  of  pneumonia  increases 
the  severity  of  the  prognosis." 

Dr.  H.  W.  Ranking,  editor  of  the  Half-Yearly  Abstract,  says  of 
the  foregoing  statement :  "  Delirium  is  a  more  common  accompaniment 
of  pneumonia  than  is  here  represented.  In  children  it  is  frequently 
one  of  the  first  symptoms.  We  have  seen  it  before  crepitation  was 
fairly  established." 

The  history  of  insanity  furnishes  another  illustration  of  cephalic 
and  pulmonic,  sympathy.  The  leading  cause  of  death  among  the  in- 
sane, according  to  Dr.  Thurnam's  tables,  is  disease  of  tJie  respiratory 
organs ;  the  fatality  of  which  excels  that  of  epidemic,  endemic,  and 
contagious  diseases,  apoplexy,  paralysis,  and  epilepsy  combined. 
Dr.  Fischel,  of  Prague,  reported  that  in  that  city  seven  per  cent,  of 
the  deaths  of  the  insane  were  caused  by  gangrene  of  the  lungs.  Dr. 
Webster,  in  the  third  volume  of  Medico-Chirurgical  Transactions, 
made  a  report  upon  the  lunatics  of  Bethlem  Hospital  for  six  years 
(1798  in  number),  and  reported  the  dissection  of  sixty-seven,  in  all  of 
which  morbid  conditions  (chiefly  serous  effusion)  were  found  in  the 
brain.  Of  the  sixty-seven  the  organs  of  the  chest  were  more  or  less 
diseased  in  sixty-two.  In  the  abdominal  viscera  morbid  changes  were 
found  in  but  thirty. 

Dr.  Vierordt,  of  Carlsruhe,  in  examining  fifty-one  cases  of  typhus 
fever,  states  that  the  lungs  were  never  healthy.  They  exhibited  a 
wrinkling  and  dark  red  color  of  the  bronchial  membrane,  with  ademic 
and  hypostatic  congestion,  carnification,  hepatization,  and  in  two 
cases,  gangrene. 

(An  interesting  anatomical  illustration  of  this  blending  is  observa- 
ble in  the  location  and  action  of  the  serratus  posticus  superior,  which 
rises  from  the  cephalic  region  and  runs  in  the  cephalic  and  pulmonic 
zones,  to  act  as  an  inspiratory  muscle".  It  proceeds  from  the  sixth, 
seventh,  and  eighth  cervical,  and  first  and  second  dorsal  to  the  second 
third,  fourth,  and  fifth  ribs,  beyond  their  angles,  and  therefore  acts  as 
inspiratory  muscles  for  the  upper  part  of  the  chest.) 

That  the  lower  part  of  this  thoracic  region  holds  a  close  relation 
with  the  heart  can  easily  be  shown  by  experiment  with  the  hand. 
Its  effect  is  not  exciting  or  agitating,  but  strengthening  to  the  heart, 
and  thereby  rousing  and  invigorating  to  the  whole  constitution,  but 
with  rather  less  composure  and  tranquillity  than  by  the  pulmonic  and 
cephalic  regions.     Sedative  applications  to  this  region  will  diminish 


CHAP.    V.]  .THE    SPINAL    REGION.  IOI 

the  activity  of  the  heart.  A  galvanic  current  down  the  dorsal  region 
will  diminish  its  excitability  and  retard  its  pulsation,  according  to 
Althaus  ;  the  current  he  used  was  that  of  from  forty  to  sixty  cells. 
The  heart  responds  to  influences  from  all  parts  of  the  brain  and  all 
parts  of  the  body.  In  my  experiments  on  the  brain  I  have  been  able 
to  produce  all  varieties  of  the  pulse. 

The  heart  is  not  dependent  on  the  thoracic  region  alone,  for  its 
chief  ganglionic  nerves  come  from  the  sympathetic  ganglia  in  the 
neck,  which  are  connected  with  the  cervical  region  of  the  cord,  and 
it  is  also  influenced  by  the  pneumogastric  nerve  (which  serves  to 
exercise  a  restraining  power).  Thus  it  seems  that  both  cervical  and 
upper  dorsal  regions  sustain  the  heart  —  in  other  words,  it  is  asso- 
ciated closely  with  our  whole  vital  brain  force,  through  the  ganglia 
which  simultaneously  sustain  the  brain  and  the  heart,  thus  making 
the  neck  pre-eminently  a  vital  region  —  a  region  that  links  the  cere- 
bral with  the  corporeal  seat  of  life. 

A  similar  close  association  occurs  in  the  spine,  in  which  the  ceph- 
alic and  thoracic  regions  are  adjacent — the  latter  combining  the  pul- 
monic and  cardiac  influences  in  close  association.  The  five  or  six 
upper  dorsal  ganglia,  forming  a  sort  of  plexus,  supply  filaments  which 
run  to  the  aorta  and  join  the  great  mass  of  ganglionic  nerves  that 
sustain  the  heart,  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  ganglia  supplying  fila- 
ments to  the  posterior  pulmonary  plexus.  The  thoracic  and  abdomi- 
nal regions  divide  the  spine  between  them  nearly  equally,  the  lower 
ganglia  being  abdominal. 

The  ganglia  and  their  nerves  are  the  sources  of  the  power  that  sus- 
tains the  heart,  and  they  have  close  associations  with  the  cord  from 
the  base  of  the  cranium  to  the  middle  of  the  dorsal  region.  They 
are  also  the  sustaining  power  of  the  pulmonic  region,  although  the 
pneumogastric  is  the  chief  source  of  the  pulmonary  plexuses,  which 
also  receive  branches  from  the  vertebral  ganglion. 

But  whatever  the  anatomical  arrangement,  the  fact  that  the  hand 
applied  about  the  sixth  dorsal  vertebra  energizes  the  heart  is  sufficient 
for  therapeutic  purposes.  Dr.  Steiner,  of  Vienna,  has  in  several 
cases  succeeded  in  resuscitating  animals  whose  hearts  had  ceased  to 
beat,  by  applying  the  positive  pole  to  a  needle  at  the  heart,  and  the 
negative  to  the  seventh  intercostal  space.  This  was  in  accordance 
with  Sarcognomy. 

The  lower  dorsal  region,  which  by  its  spinal  nerves  gives  rigidity  to 
the  trunk,  and  by  its  ganglionic  nerves  sustains  the  chylopoietic 
organs,  receives  the  name  of  Business  Energy  in  our  chart,  as  the  ex- 
pression of  its  effect  on  character.  Its  impairment  greatly  diminishes 
the  force  of  character.     "  In  a  case  described  by  Dr.  and  Mr.  Griffin, 


102  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

sudden  insensibility  was  always  induced  by  even  slight  pressure  on 
the  seventh  or  eighth  dorsal  vertebra.  In  another  case  a  sense  of  faint- 
ness  was  engendered  in  the  same  way  :  "  On  examining  the  spinal 
cord,  although  there  did  not  appear  to  be  any  tenderness,  the  sensa- 
tion of  pain  was  excessively  disagreeable  to  him  throughout  its  whole 
course.  When  the  finger  rested  on  one  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae  he 
grew  pale  and  terrified,  and  would  have  fainted  had  the  pressure  been 
continued.  He  felt  no  pain,  but  a  sudden  indescribable  sensation  or 
thrill  through  every  nerve  in  his  frame,  which  was  inconceivably  hor- 
rid."    (Murrell  on  Massage.) 

At  the  upper  margin  of  the  cephalic  region  the  fifth  cervical  nerve 
sends  off  a  branch  to  unite  with  the  fourth  in  forming  the  phrenic, 
the  great  inspiratory  nerve  of  the  diaphragm  (and  auxiliary  nerve  of 
the  heart  and  abdominal  viscera),  which  is  thus  brought  into  con- 
nection with  the  brain,  associating  the  action  of  the  brain  with  phy- 
sical as  well  as  spiritual  inspiration  — the  association  being  completed 
by  nerves  from  the  vertebral  ganglion  to  the  phrenic,  and  branches 
from  the  seventh  cervical,  which  go  to  the  vertebral  ganglion  and  also 
(according  to  Bell)  generally  supply  filaments  in  company  with  the 
sixth  to  form  the  phrenic.  Thus  we  perceive  how  closely  the  func- 
tional life  of  the  brain  is  associated  with  the  transmission  of  both  life 
and  oxygen  to  the  body.  Let  us  look  closely  again  at  the  distribu- 
tion and  relations  of  the  phrenic  nerve. 

In  the  interior  of  the  chest,  the  phrenic  nerve  not  only  supplies 
the  pleura  costalis  (with  some  help  from  the  pneumogastric  in  the 
internal  lamina),  but  supplies  the  mediastinum  or  most  interior  region 
which  sympathizes  with  the  interior  and  more  spiritual  region  of  the 
brain,  near  the  falx,  between  the  hemispheres,  the  activity  of  which 
stimulates  inspiratory  action.  Our  highest  faculties  invariably  stimu- 
late inspiration  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  chest.  Thus  the  most 
superior  part  of  the  cephalic  region  of  the  spine  seems  to  associate 
with  inspiration  and  with  the  superior  and  interior  regions  of  the 
brain,  while  its  most  inferior  portion  (according  to  the  general  laws  of 
the  nervous  system)  has  an  inferior  function,  as  it  sends  off  the  first 
dorsal  and  last  cervical  nerves,  by  which  the  muscles  and  integuments 
of  the  hand  are  supplied.  It  is  a  beautiful  illustration  of  the  wise 
and  ingenious  plan  of  the  human  constitution  that  the  cephalic  power 
in  the  cord  which  is  in  relation  to  the  high  and  interior  regions  of  the 
brain  — the  channel  of  this  higher  influx  of  life,  is  also  in  relation 
with  the  inspiration  vhich  gives  an  influx  of  vital  conditions  to  the 
body,  making  our  compound  life  a  possibility. 

The  phrenic  nerve  also  participates  in  the  cardiac  power.  Oppo- 
site the  third  rib,  it  sends  branches  to  the  pericardium.     It  also  sup- 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  103 

plies  the  right  auricle  of  the  heart  and  inferior  vena  cava ;  and  ex- 
periments on  dogs  and  rabbits  show  that  irritation  of  the  phrenic 
puts  the  right  auricle  into  contractile  movement. 

Thus  we  see  how  closely  the  brain  power  and  cephalic  region  of 
the  cord  are  associated1  with  both  circulation  and  respiration,  and,  in 
fact,  with  all  the  viscera,  for  the  phrenic  and  pneumogastric  nerves, 
the  former  from  the  middle  cervical  region,  and  the  latter  from  the 
medulla  oblongata  in  the  cranium,  convey  to  the  brain  the  sensations 
of  the  abdominal  as  well  as  thoracic  organs,  and  of  their  serous  mem- 
branes, which  are  supplied  by  the  phrenic.  Thus  we  perceive  a  direct 
anatomical  channel  for  the  sympathies  which  we  know  to  exist. 

The  brain  belongs  not  to  the  locomotive  or  active,  but  to  the  vis- 
ceral system,  and  it  sympathizes  with  all  the  thoracic  and  abdominal 
viscera.  Upon  the  lungs  it  depends  for  the  vitalizing  influence  of 
red  blood.  Upon  the  abdominal  organs  it  depends  for  the  existence  of 
the  red  blood,  since  they  supply,  through  the  thoracic  duct,  the  digested 
material  of  the  blood,  and  by  their  excretions  they  maintain  its  purity. 
Upon  the  kidneys  it  depends  for  the  removal  of  narcotic  and  disturb- 
ing elements. 

The  intercostal  spinal  nerves,  which  are  from  the  dorsal  tract,  are 
combined  with  the  ganglionic  filaments  in  their  distribution  to  the 
walls  of  the  chest,  and  also  to  the  diaphragm.  (The  latter  distribu- 
tion is  not  usually  mentioned  in  text-books  of  anatomy,  and  their 
description  of  the  phrenic  nerve  is  also  defective.)  Thus  although  the 
upper  dorsal  is  the  special  pulmonic  region,  there  is  a  respiratory 
influence  through  the  whole  dorsal  tract,  operating  above  through  the 
intercostal  or  rib-lifting  muscles,  and  below  through  the  diaphragm 
and  abdominal  muscles,  which  latter  are  supplied  from  the  lower  dor- 
sal region  and  constitute  the  apparatus  of  expiration.  The  pulmonic, 
cardiac,  cephalic  and  abdominal  influences  of  the  dorsal  region  are  so 
important  as  to  make  it  a  dangerous  location  for  disease.  The 
"Cyclopedia  of  Practical  Medicine  "  says :  "It  has  been  observed 
that  the  fatal  termination  is  much  more  rapid  when  the  dorsal  region 
is  the  seat  of  disease." 

Let  us  then  understand  that  while  the  upper  dorsal  region  is  the 
pulmonic  and  cardiac  tract,  the  entire  dorsal  region  is  a  respiratory 
tract,  acting  above  by  the  ribs,  and  below  by  the  abdominal  muscles 
and  diaphragm.  And  although  the  lungs  and  heart  should  be  treated 
directly  on  the  upper  dorsal  region,  a  cough,  which  involves  the 
irritation  of  the  expiratory  abdominal  muscles,  has  its  immediate  seat 
in  the  lower  dorsal  region,  which  controls  the  expiratory  coughing 
muscles,  and  they  depend  much  upon  the  irritability  of  that  part  of 
the  cord.     Hence,  an  embrocation  or  manipulation  designed  for  the 


104  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.     V. 

relief  of  a  cough  may  be  very  properly  applied  on  the  lower  dorsal 
region,  for  injuries  or  irritations  of  that  region  may  produce  a  spinal 
irritability  shown  by  coughing.  In  a  case  of  fracture  of  the  eleventh 
dorsal  vertebra,  and  softening  of  that  portion  of  the  cord  (reported  by 
Brodie)  a  cough  would  be  brought  on  by  any  slight  change  of  posi- 
tion. 

It  is  quite  interesting  to  find  that  the  physiology  of  the  dorsal 
region  of  the  cord  has  been  well  illustrated  in  the  electric  experi- 
ments of  Onimus  arid  Legros.  In  their  forty-seventh  experiment, 
the  spinal  cord  of  a  dog  was  exposed  at  the  third  and  fourth  dorsal 
vertebrae,  and  divided.  In  the  superior  part  of  the  divided  cord  an 
upper  current  increased  the  blood  pressure  as  it  stimulated  the  por- 
tion of  the  cord  connected  with  the  cervical  ganglia,  and  the  respira- 
tion became  very  deep. 

On  the  lower  part  of  the  divided  cord  a  current  from  the  cut  end 
downward  raised  the  pressure  higher  than  the  current  through  the 
upper  part.  A  farad ic  current  through  this  lower  part  produced  at 
once  a  rapid  elevation  of  the  blood  pressure  and  a  considerable  fall 
as  the  excitability  was  exhausted,  when  the  action  of  the  heart  sud- 
denly ceased.  This  appears  to  be  a  fair  demonstration  of  the  connec- 
tion of  the  lungs  with  the  region  above  the  fourth  dorsal  vertebrae 
and  of  the  heart  with  the  region  just  below. 

In  a  case  of  dislocation  between  the  sixth  and  seventh  vertebrae 
reported  by  M.  Carassus  in  the  "  Gazette  Medicale,"  it  is  stated  that 
the  pulse  was  feeble  and  frequent.  The  cord  in  this  case  was  com- 
pressed by  the  sixth  vertebra,  and  its  posterior  part  at  the  junction 
was  softened.  There  was  complete  paralysis  below  the  injury.  The 
mental  faculties  were  clear ;   death  ensued  in  twenty-four  hours. 

Injuries  at  the  lower  cervical  vertebrae,  below  the  sixth  cervical, 
destroy  all  power  either  of  inspiration  or  expiration,  except  by  the 
diaphragm,  controlled  by  the  phrenic  nerve,  and  by  such  assistance  as 
mav  be  given  bv  the  trapezius,  serratus  magnus  anticus,  and  sterno- 
cleido-mastoid,  in  lifting  the  ribs— an  assistance  which  is  not  very 
important  and  would  not  sustain  life  long. 

The  diaphragm  is  not  entirely  disconnected  from  the  spinal  sys- 
tem, as  it  may  be  excited  from  the  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth  inter- 
costal spaces,  by  the  hand  and  by  electric  currents.  At  the  sixth, 
seventh,  and  eighth  vertebrae,  electric  or  nervaufic  stimulation  gives 
vigor  to  its  action,  but  not  the  restless  excitement  which  is  produced 
at  the  lateral  surface  of  the  trunk.  Its  connection  with  the  spine  is 
through  branches  of  the  intercostal  nerves,  as  described  by  Luschka, 
and  indirectly  through  the  ganglia  and  splanchnic  nerves  and  the 
solar  plexus.     The  dorsal  ganglia  are  the  vasomotor  control  of  the 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  105 

intercostal  arteries,  which  anastomose  with  the  phrenic  arteries,  and 
they  have  direct  communication  with  the  phrenic  nerve,  through  the 
great  splanchnic  and  the  ganglion  diaphragmaticum,  as  well  as  a 
controlling  influence  on  the  diaphragm  through  the  great  splanchnic, 
solar  plexus  and  phrenic  plexus,  the  immediate  agent  of  its  organic  life. 
The  diaphragm,  therefore,  has  a  close  relation  to  the  spinal  and  gan- 
glionic regions  between  the  sixth  and  tenth  vertebrae,  and  we  may 
therefore  recognize  a  phrenic  zone,  extending  as  low  as  the  solar  plexus. 

The  lower  dorsal  region  has  some  other  relations  to  the  diaphragm, 
as  the  latter  co-operates  with  the  expiratory  abdominal  muscles, 
when  it  is  necessary  to  compress  the  abdominal  viscera,  but  not  the 
lungs,  as  in  vomiting  or  defecation,  or  if  we  wish  to  speak  while 
engaged  in  laborious  efforts.  The  great  solar  plexus,  connected  with 
the  lower  dorsal  region,  originates  superiorly  the  phrenic  plexus 
which  goes  to  the  diaphragm  and  phrenic  artery,  and  communicates 
with  the  phrenic  nerve. 

As  the  lower  dorsal  region  contains  the  ganglia  which  emit  the 
splanchnic  nerves  that  pass  down  through  the  diaphragm  and  govern 
all  the  abdominal  viscera,  we  perceive  how  abdominal  irritations  in 
any  of  the  organs  may  disturb  the  lower  dorsal  region  and  become 
the  cause  of  a  cough  or  its  aggravation,  as  is  seen  in  a  liver  cough  or 
stomach  cough.  Most  generally,  however,  coughs  begin  in  an  irrita- 
tion of  the  lungs,  which  is  conveyed  by  their  sensitive  nerve,  the 
pneumogastric,  to  the  medulla  oblongata  within  the  cranium,  and  if 
the  irritation  be  sufficient,  it  is  propagated  downwards  to  the  lower 
dorsal  region,  and  produces  the  convulsive  expiration  which  is  called 
a  cough.  But  before  reaching  that  region  it  starts  the  phrenic  nerve 
in  the  middle  of  the  cervical  region,  and  produces  by  it  an  act  of 
inspiration  by  the  diaphragm,  and  then  in  the  upper  dorsal  region 
it  starts  the  intercostal  muscles,  lifting  the  ribs,  and  as  the  chest 
expands,  the  irritation  reaches  the  lower  dorsal  region  and  the  cough 
or  sneeze  explodes  by  means  of  the  abdominal  muscles. 

Quieting  anodynes,  either  by  inhalation,  by  swallowing  medicine, 
or  by  manipulation,  diminish  the  irritability  of  the  pneumogastric  and 
the  spine,  and  thus  relieve  the  cough.  As  secretion  generally  dimin- 
ishes irritability  and  soothes  the  surfaces,  expectorant  remedies  are 
in  that  way  beneficial. 

The  diaphragm,  lying  between  the  thoracic  and  abdominal  cavities, 
must  be  in  sympathy  with  the  middle  dorsal  region.  It  is  also  in 
sympathy  with  the  lumbar  region,  for  the  exercise  of  the  latter  in 
violent  locomotion  compels  deep  respiration.  Respiration  will  there- 
fore be  invigorated  by  faradic  currents  through  the  length  of  the  spine. 
It  may  also  be  excited  into  greater  activity  by  faradic  currents  from  side 


106  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.     V. 

to  side  at  the  lower  margin  of  the  ribs,  while  the  same  currents  higher 
on  the  ribs  will  produce  a  more  pleasant  costal  respiration.  The 
lower  level  of  the  ribs  produces  the  respiration  of  excitement  and 
irritation.  Currents  through  the  phrenic  zone  or  level  of  the  dia- 
phragm stimulate  respiration,  but  not  in  the  most  satisfactory  or 
effective  manner. 

The  most  effective  way  of  forcing  deep  respiration  —  the  one  most  to 
be  relied  on  in  cases  of  drowning,  is  by  using  the  Sarcognomic  organ  of 
Respiration  on  the  abdomen,  placing  an  electrode  about  two  inches 
below  the  umbilicus ;  this  will  produce  deep  respiration  by  the 
diaphragm.  If  the  negative  pole  on  the  hypogastric  region  produces 
too  much  local  disturbance  of  the  muscles,  the  positive  may  be  sub- 
stituted, or  the  current  may  be  sent  through  the  hand  as  an  elec- 
trode. One  pole  should  be  on  the  hypogastric  region  and  the  other 
on  the  lower  cervical  or  junction  of  cervical  and  dorsal.  The  cur- 
rent in  this  case  will  correspond  with  the  course  of  the  phrenic 
nerve,  and  this  is  better  than  trying  to  reach  the  phrenic  nerve  at  the 
side  of  the  neck,  or  to  stimulate  through  the  phrenic  zone.* 

As  the  brachial  region  or  cervico-dorsal  junction  is  the  command- 
ing centre  from  which  the  respiratory  impulse  is  sent,  and  gives  it 
more  force  than  any  other  location,  the  same  principle  is  applicable 
to  other  functions,  and  the  combination  of  this  region  of  will  power 
with  any  other  seat  of  local  functions  will  enhance  the  result,  just  as 
an  energetic  determination  invigorates  every  act.  A  current  from 
the  cervico-dorsal  centre  enlists  the  full  power  of  the  spinal  cord,  and 
thus  develops  a  maximum  energy.  It  is  true  that  a  current  from 
powerful  central  organs,  if  continued,  will  exhaust  them  and  make  it 
necessary  to  reinforce  by  a  centripetal,  hence  for  efficient  action  an 
alternating  current  which  stimulates  at  both  ends  is  best.  The  fara- 
dic  is  an  alternating  current,  but  its  poles  are  not  exactly  equivalent, 
as  they  have  in  some  degree  a  positive  and  negative  character  or 
influence.  The  alternating  current  of  commutation,  with  the  primary 
or  magneto-galvanic  current,  is  the  most  appropriate  for  vigorous 
stimulation.  This  I  call  the  reciprocal  current.  Its  application  in 
cases  of  suspended  animation,  from  the  cervico-dorsal  region  to  the 
region  of  vital  force  on  the  thigh,  is  very  effective. 

The  abdominal   region  on  which  I  have   located    the   respiratory 

impulse  is  the    active    agent    in    diaphragmatic    respiration.     Every 

inspiration,  by  descent  of  the  diaphragm,  throws  out  the  Respiratory 

tract,  and  every  expiration  is  performed  by  means  of  the  abdominal 

muscles  and  an  inward  movement  of  the  Respiratory  region. 

*  I  have  sometimes  misled  my  pupils  by  a  little  absence  of  mind,  diverting  their 
attention  locally  and  forgetting  to  impress  the  importance  of  the  cervico-dorsal 
region,  especially  in  reference  to  respiration. 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  107 

That  the  inspiratory  tract  should  be  exterior  to  the  expiratory  cor- 
responds to  the  fact  that  in  diaphragmatic  or  abdominal  respiration 
the  exterior  portion  of  the  abdomen  is  projected  in  inspiration,  and 
withdrawn  or  depressed  in  expiration,  while  the  central  portion  is 
relatively  prominent  in  expiration. 

Leaving  the  upper  dorsal  half  as  the  thoracic  region  (for  lungs  and 
heart)  we  should  presume  that  the  lower  half  must  maintain  relations 
with  the  regions  below  the  diaphragm  ;  accordingly,  we  find  that  the 
spinal  nerves  of  the  lower  half  pass  down  over  the  ribs  and  distribute 
to  the  muscles  and  integuments  of  the  abdominal  walls,  including 
the  diaphragm,  while  the  adjacent  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  system, 
sixth,  seventh,  eighth,  ninth,  and  tenth,  send  down  through  the  dia- 
phragm the  splanchnic  nerves,  which  form  the  solar  plexus,  control- 
ling the  abdominal  viscera.  The  solar  plexus  comprises  not  only  the 
ganglionic  nerves,  but  branches  from  the  pneumogastric  and  phrenic, 
especially  of  the  right  side. 

Hence,  we  apply  the  hand  on  the  lower  dorsal  region  for  the 
invigoration  of  liver,  pancreas,  stomach,  bowels,  and  kidneys.  It  is 
the  most  inferior  of  the  dorsal  ganglia  (tenth,  eleventh,  and  twelfth, 
or  twelfth  alone)  which  form  the  lesser  splanchnic  (ganglionic)  nerve 
which  supplies  the  kidneys  (which  are  located  at  the  bottom  of  the 
dorsal  region)  by  forming  the  usual  plexus. 

We  understand  the  power  of  the  solar  plexus,  formed  by  branches 
from  the  lower  dorsal  ganglia,  when  we  look  to  its  extensive  ramifica- 
tions. It  sends  branches  along  the  abdominal  aorta  and  forms  the 
subordinate  controlling  plexuses  of  the  abdomen,  viz.,  the  phrenic, 
caeliac,  gastric,  hepatic,  splenic,  renal,  supra-renal,  superior  and  infe- 
rior mesenteric  and  spermatic  plexuses,  which  supply  the  stomach, 
liver,  spleen,  pancreas,  duodenum,  intestines,  testes,  and  ovaries. 

At  the  last  vertebra  of  the  dorsal  region  we  find  the  ganglionic 
origin  of  the  nerves  of  the  kidneys  and  the  kidneys  themselves  at 
the  junction  of  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  vertebrae 

Thus  the  anatomical  structure  directs  us  to  the  lower  half  of  the 
dorsal  region  for  the  treatment  of  the  abdominal  viscera  generally  — 
the  kidneys  being  reached  at  the  lower,  and  the  liver  at  the  upper 
vertebrae  of  this  tract,  their  functions  being  also  modified  through 
the  lumbar  region. 

Although  the  locations  of  the  ganglia  and  spinal  nerves  are  a  cor- 
rect guidance  to  locations  of  functions  and  methods  of  treatment,  it 
is  quite  possible  that  the  origins  of  functions  in  the  spinal  cord  are 
materially  higher  than  the  nerves  and  ganglia  by  which  they  are 
manifested.  Thus,  according  to  Valentin,  who  has  made  the  best 
illustrative  experiments,  contractions  of  the  alimentary  canal  may  be 


ioS 


THE    SPINAL    REGION. 


[CHAP. 


Corneal  rertebrtz. 


produced  by  irritations  of  the  roots  of  the  dorsal,  lumbar,  and  sacral 
nerves,  or  by  the  lower  half  of  the  thoracic  ganglia,  the  lumbar  and 
sacral  ganglia,  also  by  the  splanchnic  nerves  and  gastric  plexus. 

However,  muscular  contractions  of  the  stomach  have  been  pro- 
duced by  irritating  the  roots  of  the  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh 
cervical  nerves,  and  first  dorsal,  in  the  rabbit.  The  seventh  nerve 
appeared  to  act  on  the  pyloric  end  of  the  stomach.  A  similar  effect 
was  produced  by  irritating  the  first  thoracic  ganglia  of  the  sympa- 
thetic. The  first  three  cervical  nerves  and  the  adjacent  ganglia 
acted  on  the  oesophagus.  We  know  also  that  the  functions  of  the 
stomach  are  largely  dependent  on  the  origin  of  the  pneumogastric  in 
the  medulla  oblongata,  as  the  pneumogastric  controls  the  movements 
of  the  stomach,  and  has  a  controlling  influence  on  the  secretion  of 
the  gastric  juice. 

In  an  ingenious  work  by  Dr.  Sherwood  on  the  "  Motive  Power  of 

Organic  Life," 
published  at  New 
York  in  1841,  a 
chart  was  given  il- 
lustrating a  method 
of  diagnosis  by 
pressure  along  the 
spinal  column,  find- 
ing a  tenderness  at 
various  points  cor- 
responding to  mor- 
bid conditions  of 
organs.  This  chart 
would  indicate  that 
the  sensitive  points 
along  the  spinal 
column  are  some- 
what h  i  gh  e  r  in 
location  than  the  nervous  origins  to  which  I  have  referred  as  a  guide 
in  Sarcosnomy.  The  explanation  probably  is  that  nerves  are  affected 
bv  irritations  above  their  origins.  Their  connections  may  extend 
higher  than  they  can  be  traced.  Dr.  T.  F.  Beck  has  traced  the 
splanchnic  nerves  as  far  up  as  the  first  dorsal  ganglia. 
The  above  is  Dr.  Sherwood's  drawing. 

Experiments  in  vivisection  illustrate  the  physiology  of  the  abdom- 
inal region.  After  section  of  the  splanchnic  nerves,  a  gentle  faradic 
current  applied  to  their  peripheral  end  has  caused  increased  action 
of  the  intestines. 


Dorsal  V6rtebrte. 


<h  coccyx. 


Her*  to  find  them  of 
ibe  kidneys. 


Aod  here  to  fiod 
them  of  the  gemul 
organs. 


Valentine  found  that  the  galvanization  of   the 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  I(X) 

superior  thoracic  ganglia  revived  the  pulsation  of  the  heart  after  it 
had  ceased,  and  increased  the  frequency  of  the  beats  when  already 
in  action.  Mild  galvanization  of  the  splanchnic  nerves  that  arise 
from  the  six  lower  dorsal  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  increases,  while 
strong  galvanization  diminishes,  the  peristaltic  action." 

It  was  formerly  believed,  and  even  supposed  to  be  proved  by 
experiments,  that  gastric  digestion  depends  entirely  on  the  pneumo- 
gastric  nerve,  although  it  is  well  known  to  be  almost  wholly  a  sen- 
sory nerve  at  its  origin,  and  the  digestive  function  has  reappeared  in 
the  stomach  after  section  of  the  pneumogastric,  when  time  has  been 
allowed  to  recover  from  the  immediate  effects  of  the  injury.  More- 
over, the  irritated  secretions  produced  in  the  stomach  by  a  poison 
appeared  the  same  when  the  pneumogastric  nerves  had  been  divided 
as  when  they  were  whole.  This  was  evidently  under  the  control  of 
the  sympathetic  or  ganglionic  nerves,  which  proceed  from  the  lower 
dorsal  ganglia  to  the  solar  plexus,  and  are  combined  with  spinal  fila- 
ments. Hence  it  is  through  that  route  we  reach  the  stomach  —  the 
nerve  tracts  in  which  electric  experiments  demonstrate  the  control 
of  intestinal  movements. 

The  relation  of  the  lower  dorsal  region  to  the  abdominal  organs 
was  illustrated  in  a  fact  mentioned  by  Sir  James  Sawyer,  in  the 
"  Lancet"  (January  I,  1887),  that  a  certain  variety  of  backache  is 
attributable  to  the  condition  of  the  colon.  It  is  "a  pain,  aching  dull 
and  heavy,"  "  extending  right  across  the  back,"  "  in  a  transverse  line 
about  half-way  between  the  inferior  angles  of  the  scapulae  and  the 
renal  region."  "This  pain  I  venture  to  attribute  to  a  loaded  colon," 
"faecal  accumulation  in  the  large  intestine,"  "I  have  found  it  disap- 
pear after  the  exhibition  of  an  efficient  cathartic,"  "this  form  of  back- 
ache is  a  concomitant  of  habitual  constipation."  He  found  it 
relieved  by  a  pill  containing  one,  two,  or  three  grains  of  Socotrine 
aloes,  combined  with  one  fourth  grain  of  sulphate  of  iron  and  one 
grain  of  extract  of  hyosciamus.  (I  would  remark  that  belladonna 
would  be  even  better  than  hyosciamus  as  an  adjuvant  and  corrigent 
of  aloes,  assisting  evacuation  but  preventing  irritation.  A  fourth  of 
a  grain  would  be  a  sufficient  dose.) 

In  treating  the  lower  section  of  the  dorsal  region  for  the  viscera 
we  influence  also  the  regions  supplied  by  its  spinal  nerves,  viz.,  the 
muscles  and  integuments  of  the  abdomen — the  transverse  oblique 
and  rectus  muscles,  by  which  the  abdominal  viscera  are  kept  in 
motion  and  their  contents  compressed,  and  by  which  the  actions  of 
coughing,  vomiting  and  defecation  are  performed.  Sir  Benjamin 
Brodie  relates  that  in  a  case  of  injury  of  the  spinal  column  at  the 
sixth  dorsal  vertebra,  the  muscles  of   the  abdomen  were  paralyzed 


110  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

and  unable  to  co-operate  in  expiration  ;  hence  coughing  was  impos- 
sible. 

As  the  lower  dorsal  region  for  the  abdomen  supplies  muscular 
power  for  its  motion,  so  the  upper  dorsal  region  for  the  thorax  sup- 
plies power  for  its  action  by  the  intercostal  inspiratory  muscles,  and 
also  moves  the  pectoralis  major. 

From  this  review  it  is  apparent  that  the  upper  portion  of  the  spinal 
cord  tends  to  sustain  the  growth  of  the  head  and  chest,  and  to  expand 
the  lungs,  while  the  lower  portion,  developing  the  abdominal  viscera 
and  the  lower  part  of  the  body,  tends  also  by  expiration  to  contract 
the  development  of  the  lungs  and  chest,  and  co-operates  with  the 
basilar  organs.  In  all  great  muscular  struggles  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles are  strongly  contracted.  In  emotional  character  the  thoracic 
region  co-operates  with  the  higher  impulses  and  principles,  and  in 
growth  it  co-operates  with  the  brain.  Hence  we  draw  the  practical 
conclusion  that  increase  of  thoracic  development  is  of  the  greatest 
importance  in  hygienic  and  moral  culture,  and  that  mountain  regions 
or  elevated  plains  produce  a  higher  and  more  intellectual  develop- 
ment of  humanity  as  they  cause  a  greater  expansion  of  the  chest. 

In  the  lumbar  region,  the  ganglia  go  to  supply  the  lumbar  plexus 
of  the  spinal  system  and  also  to  the  aortic  plexus,  which  controls 
important  arteries  and  plexuses  and  brings  them  into  connection  with 
the  solar  plexus. 

The  spinal  lumbar  plexus,  formed  by  the  lumbar  nerves  and  the 
last  dorsal,  constitutes  the  chief  motor  power  of  the  thighs,  and  by 
its  lowest  nerve,  the  lumbo-sacral,  exercises  an  important  control  over 
the  reproductive  organs. 

Thus  it  appears  that  the  lumbar  region  has,  through  plexuses,  an 
important  control  of  the  inferior  portion  of  the  alimentary  canal,  and 
the  abdominal  region  of  the  spinal  column  extends  from  the  middle 
of  the  dorsal  region  to  the  sacrum.  Its  lower  portion  is  called  the 
cauda  eqznna  (horse  tail),  as  the  trunk  of  the  spinal  cord  does  not 
usually  extend  below  the  second  lumbar  vertebra. 

These  propositions  are  illustrated  by  pathological  and  experimental 
facts.  Brachet  divided  the  spinal  column  of  a  dog  between  the  third 
and  fourth  lumbar  vertebrae.  He  kept  him  two  days  and  fed  him. 
Neither  faeces  nor  urine  was  discharged  —  they  accumulated  in  large 
quantity.  He  kept  a  young  cat  seven  days  after  severing  the  spinal 
cord  between  the  third  and  fourth  lumbar  vertebrae,  and  fed  it  as 
usual.  The  rectum  and  bladder  became  enormously  distended,  and 
a  small  portion  only  of  faeces  and  urine  escaped.  In  the  case  of  a 
man  whose  spinal  column  had  been  fractured  by  a  fall  from  a  high 
tree,  the  lower  limbs,  rectum,  and  bladder  were  paralyzed  and  had  to 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  Ill 

be  relieved  mechanically,  while  he  had  no  feeling  of  the  necessity  for 
evacuation. 

Division  of  the  spinal  cord  of  the  dog  below  the  fifth  lumbar  verte- 
bra destroys  the  power  of  the  sphincter  of  the  bladder,  producing 
incontinence  of  urine.  According  to  Budge,  division  at  the  fourth 
lumbar  in  the  dog  causes  the  bladder  to  become  filled  and  distended, 
but  does  not  affect  the  sphincter.  He  locates  the  genito-spinal  cen- 
tre in  the  dog  at  the  fourth  lumbar.  The  ano-spinal  centre  is  located 
by  Masius  at  the  lower  third  of  the  fifth  lumbar  vertebra.  Excita- 
tion of  the  third  and  fourth  sacral  nerves  causes  contraction  of  the 
sphincter,  while  section  of  the  roots  of  the  third,  fourth,  and  fifth 
sacral  nerves  produced  incontinence.  After  section  of  the  third  and 
fourth  sacral  the  bladder  could  not  be  made  to  act  by  irritating 
either  sympathetic  or  the  upper  portion  of  the  cord.  The  lumbar 
region  of  the  cord  controls  the  relaxation  of  the  sphincter  of  the 
bladder. 

The  relation  of  the  lumbar  region  to  the  vital  forces  may  be  illustrated  by  refer- 
ence to  the  anatomy  of  the  lumbar  nerves,  of  which  the  posterior  branches  supply 
the  lumbar  and  gluteal  regions  as  far  as  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone  (trochanter) 
and  the  erector  spinae  and  interosseous  muscles. 

The  anterior  or  principal  branches  are  five,  increasing  in  importance  as  we 
descend.  The  second  is  about  twice  as  large  as  the  first,  and  the  third  twice  as 
large  as  the  second.  The  fourth  is  larger  than  the  third,  and  the  fifth  larger  than 
the  fourth,  from  which,  with  the  aid  of  the  fourth,  originates  the  important  lumbo- 
sacral nerve. 

The  lumbar  region  is  accessible  to  treatment  from  the  dorsal  region,  or  ribs,  to 
the  sacral  region,  or  hips;  the  anterior  nerves  just  mentioned  form  the  lumbar 
plexus,  which  by  its  spinal  nerves  and  its  ganglionic  connections  supplies  the 
lower  abdominal  region  externally,  and  internally  the  genital  region,  thighs,  and  a 
portion  of  the  legs. 

i.  The  first  nerve  gives  off  the  ilio-hypogastric  and  ilio-inguinal  (sometimes  the 
ilio-hypogastric  alone).  Their  names  indicate  their  distribution.  They  pass  over 
the  ilium  (hip-bone),  the  ilio-hypogastric  going  to  the  buttocks  (the  skin  over  the 
glutei  muscles),  and  the  hypogastric  branch  to  the  integuments  of  the  hypogastric 
region  (the  lower  part  of  the  abdomen).  It  also  gives  muscular  filaments  to  the 
lower  part  of  the  abdominal  muscles  and  to  the  iliacus,  situated  interiorly,  which 
lifts  the  thigh  or  lowers  the  trunk.  The  ilio-inguinal  passes  through  the  trans- 
versalis  muscle  of  the  abdomen,  through  inguinal  region  and  external  abdominal 
ring,  to  the  integuments  of  the  scrotum,  the  spermatic  cord,  the  pubic  and  labial 
surfaces,  and  the  upper,  inner  surface  of  the  thighs.  Thus  we  perceive  that  the 
first  lumbar  nerve  has  some  association  with  the  sexual  region. 

2.  The  second  lumbar  nerve  gives  off  the  genito-crural  or  external pudic,  assisted 
by  a  branch  from  the  first.  This  genital  branch  supplies  the  spermatic  cord,  the 
cremaster  muscle  and  investments  of  the  testis,  and  in  the  female  the  round  liga- 
ment and  external  labium.  It  supplies  also  the  integuments  of  the  groin  and  the 
lower  border  of  two  of  the  abdominal  muscles.  This  illustrates  the  association  of 
the  groin  and  the  sexual  functions. 

The  crural  branches  of  the  genito-crural,  passing  down  with  the  external  iliac 
artery,  go  to  the  integument  of  the  front  of  the  thigh,  half-way  to  the  knee.  Thus 
through  the  genito-crural  and  ilio-inguinal,  which  are  close  neighbors  in  distribu- 
tion, the  upper  anterior  and  inner  surface  of  the  thigh  is  associated  with  the  sexual 
functions,  and  this  group  of  sexual  and  upper  crural  influences  belongs  to  the  space 
corresponding  to  the  upper  half  of  the  lumbar  region,  where  we  find  also  the  sensi- 
bility of  the  posterior  surfaces. 

The  second  nerve,  with  some  assistance  from  the  third,  also  gives  branches  to 
the  psoas  muscle  and  originates  the  external  cutaneous,  which  sometimes  comes 
from  the  third  and  fourth.  It  passes  out  under  Poupart's  ligament  in  front  of  the 
ilium,  to  distribute  along  the  outer  and  exterior  posterior  aspect  of  the  thigh  as  far 


fI2  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

as  the  knee,  passing  over  the  tensor  vaginae  and  vastus  externus  muscles  —  a  region 
associated  with  great  muscular  energy. 

The  external  cutaneous  also  sends  a  posterior  branch  to  the  buttock  and  upper 
part  of  the  thigh. 

3.  From  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  in  combination  originates  the  chief  nerve 
of  the  lumbar  plexus,  the  a?iterior  crural  or  femoral  nerve,  the  chief  muscular  nerve 
of  the  thigh,  supplying  the  muscles  and  integuments  of  its  anterior  and  inner  side. 
It  supplies  the  vastus  externus,  vastus  internus,  rectus  and  crureus,  pectineus  and 
sartorius,  and  sends  the  long  saphenous  nerve  (which  accompanies  the  femoral 
artery  and  then  the  saphena  vein),  supplies  the  knee  joint,  and  below  the  knee  the 
anterior  and  inner  border  of  the  tibia  and  dorsum  of  the  foot.  In  other  words,  it 
supplies  the  large  muscles  of  the  fore  part  of  the  thigh,  which  are  much  larger  than 
the  posterior  muscles  (excepting  the  tensor  vaginae  and  sometimes  the  pectineus), 
and  gives  nerves  to  the  psoas  magnus  and  iliacus  internus.  (The  psoas  muscle 
bends  the  trunk  upon  the  pelvis.) 

From  the  third  and  fourth  descends  the  obturator  nerve,  which  belongs  chiefly 
to  the  adductor  muscles  that  bring  the  thighs  together.  It  supplies  the  adductors 
magnus  longus  and  brevis,  gracilis,  external  obturator,  and  sometimes  the  pecti- 
neus.    It  also  supplies  the  hip  joint  and  posteriorly  the  knee. 

From  this  review  it  appears  that  the  sexual  region  has  some  association  with  the 
upper  lumbar  nerves,  but  that  their  functions  become  more  simply  muscular  and 
sensitive  in  the  lower  lumbar  region  until  we  reach  the  last,  the  lumbosacral  nerve, 
where  the  sexual  functions  reappear  in  force  and  continue  into  the  sacral  region. 

The  lumbar  plexus  gives  the  nerve-power  for  the  muscles  and 
integuments  of  the  thigh,  with  only  a  slight  influence  on  the  abdomi- 
nal muscles  at  their  lower  margin,  from  the  nerves  nearest  the  dorsal 
region,  which  have  some  connection  with  the  sexual  integuments 
and  functions.  There  is,  however,  in  the  whole  lumbar  zone  of  the 
trunk,  the  vascular  nerve-power  (vaso-motor)  of  the  whole  alimentary 
canal,  and  when  we  operate  on  the  lumbar  region  we  influence  all 
the  abdominal  viscera.  We  know  this  experimentally,  and  when  we 
look  for  the  anatomical  reasons  they  are  very  apparent  in  the  gan- 
glionic nerves,  as  the  upper  lumbar  vertebra  is  opposite  the  solar 
plexus,  which  governs  through  the  blood-vessels  by  its  subordinate 
plexuses  the  whole  abdominal  and  pelvic  apparatus.  Hence  the  hand 
applied  at  the  junction  of  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  vertebrae,  adjacent 
to  the  solar  plexus  and  the  end  of  the  trunk  of  the  spinal  cord  from 
which  the  lumbar  and  sacral  nerves  descend,  covers  a  great  centre  of 
power  for  both  the  voluntary  animal  and  the  involuntary  organic  life. 
The  lumbar  enlargement  of  the  cord  extends  through  the  twelfth 
and  eleventh  dorsal  vertebras.  The  lumbar  region  also  sends  out 
four  or  five  lumbar  arteries  at  each  side,  which  curve  around  the  ver- 
tebrae and  supply  the  walls  of  the  abdomen,  as  the  intercostal  arteries 
from  the  dorsal  region  supply  the  walls  of  the  chest.  The  lumbar 
arteries  also  supply  the  adjacent  portion  of  the  back  and  spinal 
column,  including  the  spinal  cord. 

The  entire  vascular  circulating  power  of  the  abdomen  is  adjacent 
to  the  lumbar  vertebrae.  The  iliac  arteries  for  the  lower  limbs  and 
pelvis  bifurcate  opposite  the  fourth  lumbar  vertebra,  and  from  that 
locality  to  the  upper  end  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  we  find,  first,  the 
caeliac  plexus  and  artery  supplying  the  stomach,  liver,  and  spleen,  by 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  I  1 3 

its  three  branches, —  the  superior  mesenteric  plexus  and  artery  sup- 
plying the  small  intestines  and  half  the  colon,  the  inferior  mesenteric 
plexus  and  artery  supplying  the  remainder  of  the  colon  and  the  rec- 
tum, and  between  the  two  mesenteric  arteries,  the  spermatic. 

The  lumbar  ganglia  send  branches  to  the  aortic  plexus  (a  continua- 
tion of  the  solar),  which  originates  the  inferior  mesenteric  and  part  of 
spermatic,  and  terminates  in  the  hypogastric,  to  which  the  lumbar 
ganglia  also  send  branches.  The  hypogastric  is  especially  the  plexus 
of  the  sexual  organs. 

Hence,  although  the  nerve  power  of  the  abdomen  connects  with 
the  lower  dorsal  region,  the  lumbar  region  is  equally  important,  as 
influences  applied  to  the  lumbar  region  affect  everything  from  the 
diaphragm  to  the  end  of  the  rectum  (the  diaphragm  included), 
through  the  arteries,  and  the  ganglia  and  plexuses  which  control  the 
circulation  and  organic  life  of  all  the  abdominal  organs.  Moreover, 
the  organs  themselves  are  opposite  the  lumbar  region,  the  stomach 
being  opposite  the  first  two  lumbar  vertebrae,  the  duodenum  opposite 
the  third,  and  the  mesentery  and  umbilicus  opposite  the  fourth.  On 
the  same  level  we  find  the  mesenteric  glands  tributary  to  nutrition, 
and  the  receptaculum  chyli  adjacent  to  the  second  lumbar.  The 
liver  alone  has  a  higher  location,  being  opposite  the  last  two  dorsal 
vertebras.  Hence  we  reach  the  liver,  stomach,  spleen  and  pancreas 
at  the  junction  of  the  dorsal  and  lumbar  vertebrae,  and  hold  the 
nutrient  absorption  between  our  hands  when  one  is  applied  above  the 
umbilicus  and  the  other  at  the  two  upper  lumbar  vertebrae.  As  the 
lumbar  region  contains  the  chief  motor  power  of  the  lower  limbs, 
there  must  be  a  close  connection  of  the  bowels  and  the  muscles  of 
the  thigh,  which  is  evinced  in  the  tendency  of  sedentary  pursuits  to 
promote  constipation,  and  the  prompt  effect  of  walking  in  renewing 
a  diarrhoea  or  cholera  which  has  been  arrested  and  which  can  be  kept 
in  check  only  by  lying  down. 

The  lumbo- sacral,  much  the  largest  of  the  lumbar  nerves,  comes 
from  the  fifth  nerve  and  a  branch  of  the  fourth.  It  enters  the  pelvis, 
and,  joining  the  first  sacral  nerve,  it  becomes  a  part  of  the  sacral 
plexus,  which  is  thus  constituted  by  the  last  two  lumbar  and  four 
sacral  nerves.  The  lumbo-sacral,  being  an  important  nerve,  its  origin 
is  probably  a  chief  source  of  the  sexual  energy  coming  from  the  sacral 
plexus.  Near  the  lumbo-sacral  nerve  we  find  the  internal  iliac  artery, 
which  supplies  the  sexual  region,  by  pubic,  pudic,  uterine,  vaginal, 
vesical,  and  hemorrhoidal  branches. 

The  third  and  fourth  sacral  nerves,  by  their  anterior  branches, 
combine  with  the  adjacent  ganglionic  nerves,  and  go  to  the  hypo- 
gastric plexus  of  the  sympathetic  system,  which  controls  the  sexual 
functions.  ■ 


114  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

As  my  external  nervauric  experiments  showed  the  junction  of  the 
lumbar  vertebras  and  sacrum  to  be  the  chief  seat  of  the  sexual  func- 
tion, it  is  interesting  to  observe  that  the  sexual  functions  have 
sources  above  and  below  the  lumbo-sacral  junction  (the  lumbar  nerves 
above  this  point  have  a  connection  with  the  sexual  apparatus,  the 
external  pudic  or  genito-crural  arising  from  the  second  lumbar  nerve), 
-  and  that  anatomy  evidently  indicates  the  lumbo-sacral  region  as  the 
chief  source  of  the  sexual  functions,  the  derangements  of  which, 
it  is  well  known,  are  commonly  manifested  by  pain  or  tenderness  at 
the  lumbo-sacral  junction. 

Longet  and  Breschet  regard  the  lumbar  portion  of  the  spinal  cord 
as  the  nervous  centre  of  control  for  uterine  action,  but  it  is  not  cer- 
tain whether  the  major  portion  of  the  sexual  functions  depends  on  the 
spinal  or  on  the  adjacent  ganglionic  structure,  as  the  division  of  the  cord 
in  the  middle  of  the  lumbar  region  of  a  bitch  by  Brachet  did  not  prevent 
an  impregnation  soon  after,  and  he  also  states  that  impregnation 
occurred  in  a  woman  in  whom  paraplegia  was  so  complete  that  she  had 
no  sensation  in  the  sexual  act.  This,  however,  would  make  no  mate- 
rial difference  in  nervauric  treatment,  as  the  operations  on  the  spine 
affect  the  adjacent  sympathetic  region. 

The  lumbo-sacral  sends  off  a  branch  to  the  glutei  muscles,  which 
have  in  consequence  an  association  with  the  sexual  function,  known 
to  voluptuaries  ;  and  the  lower  lumbar  ganglia,  by  their  connection 
with  the  aortic  and  hypogastric  plexuses,  are  in  close  relation  to  the 
sexual  functions.  Moreover,  the  lumbo-sacral  junction  is  adjacent 
to  the  origin  of  the  internal  iliac  artery,  which  supplies  the  whole 
pelvic  viscera,  and  faradization  of  the  lower  lumbar  region  acts  most 
efficiently  upon  the  bladder. 

The  sacral  plexus  thus,  by  its  downward  extension,  brings  the  leg 
and  foot  and  posterior  region  of  the  thigh  into  close  association  with 
the  pelvic  viscera  (especially  the  sexual  organs),  which  are  supplied 
by  its  anterior  or  internal  branches.  These  internal  branches  are  the 
hemorrhoidal,  vesical,  vaginal,  uterine,  and  pudic,  going  to  the  pelvis 
and  perineum,  their  names  indicating  their  destinations  —  the  regions 
of  the  rectum,  bladder,  and  sexual  organs.  The  vesical  or  bladder 
nerves  supply  filaments  also  to  the  vesiculae  seminales,  prostate  gland, 
and  female  urethra.  The  pudic  nerve  is  the  chief  nerve  of  the  geni- 
tal organs,  and  comes  chiefly  from  the  third  sacral.  The  continuation 
of  the  lumbo-sacral  in  the  first  sacral  nerve  produces  under  stimula- 
tion the  flexion  of  the  leg,  foot,  and  toes.* 

*  The  sacral  nerves  give  branches  posteriorly  to  the  sacro-lumbalis  muscles  and 
integuments  of  the  nates  and  anal  region.  The  lumbo-sacral  and  first  four  sacral 
nerves  unite  in  forming  the  sacral  plexus,  which  is  rather  a  large  nerve  than  a 
plexus.    This  plexus,  adjacent  to  the  rectum,  sends  off  two  great  nerves  —  the  greater 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  I  I  5 

The  last  lumbar  and  the  third  and  fourth  sacral  nerves  send 
branches  to  the  Jiypogastric  plexus,  which  is  the  chief  immediate  con- 
trol of  the  sexual  apparatus.  The  external  sexual  locality  therefore 
for  Sarcognomy  should  be  the  lumbo-sacral  junction  and  space 
extending  above  and  below  it,  and  the  entire  lumbar  and  sacral 
regions  may  be  regarded  as  having  sexual  influences,  through  the 
surfaces  at  and  around  the  sexual  organs,  and  by  connections  with 
the  hypogastric  plexuses.  Moreover,  we  find  opposite  the  superior 
lumbar  vertebrae  the  spermatic  arteries,  a  source  of  sexual  power,  as 
they  supply  the  male  testes  and  the  female  ovaries.  (In  birds,  the 
kidneys  and  supra-renal  capsules  lie  in  contact  with  the  testes  and 
the  ovaries,  and  in  man  the  testes  in  the  embryonic  condition  are  near 
the  kidneys.) 

The  hypogastric  plexus  is  formed  from  the  sacral  ganglia,  aided  by 
the  third  and  fourth  sacral  spinal  nerves,  and  the  inferior  mesenteric 
plexuses  with  which  it  connects.  This  is  especially  the  sexual  plexus, 
as  it  follows  and  controls  the  arterial  supply  of  blood  to  the  sexual 
organs. 

It  is  difficult  in  such  a  commingling  of  nerves,  where  the  sexual 
powers  are  reinforced  from  different  sources  —  from  the  upper  and 
■lower  lumbar  and  sacral  regions,  to  fix  upon  its  chief  centre  anatomi- 
cally ;  but  nervauric  experiments  and  the  principles  of  Pathognomy 
direct  us  to  the  lumbo-sacral  location  as  its  commanding  centre  at  the 
spine,  as  the  sexual  organs  themselves  are  the  immediate  seat  of  the 
functional  energy  and  excitement.  In  this  matter,  as  in  all  other 
developments  of  Sarcognomy,  I  have  followed  experiment  without 
regard  to  anatomy  —  only  looking  to  it  afterwards  to  see  that  it  gave 
no  incompatible  facts.  As  to  the  lumbo-sacral  junction,  anatomy  and 
physiological  experiments  confirm  the  nervauric  discovery,  showing 
the  lumbo-sacral  junction  to  be  the  sexual  centre,  although  the  dis- 
tribution of  nerves  might  have  led  to  a  different  opinion. 

Budge,  who  discovered  the  cilio-spinal  centre  (governing  the  iris), 
"  has  discovered  a  similar  centre  in  that  portion  of  the  spinal  cord 
which  corresponds  to  the  fourth  lumbar  vertebra.      By  faradization  of 

and  lesser  sciatic  nerves.  The  great  sciatic,  the  largest  nerve  in  the  body,  is  the  con- 
tinuation of  the  sacral  plexus,  deriving  filaments  from  all  the  nerves  that  supply  the 
plexus.  The  great  sciatic  supplies  the  obturator  internus,  the  gluteus,  and  the  flexor 
muscles  of  the  thigh,  the  adductor  magnus,  biceps,  and  external  rotators  and  exter- 
nal surface  of  the  ham,  and  sends  down  an  important  continuation,  the  popliteal  or 
posterior  tibial,  which  ends  in  the  external  and  internal  plantar,  and  becomes  the 
chief  nerve  of  the  muscles  and  integuments  of  the  leg  and  foot.  It  supplies  the  in- 
teguments of  the  leg,  and  the  gastrocnemius,  plantaris,  popliteus,  and  soleus  mus- 
cles, also  the  tibialis  posticus  and  long  flexors,  and  the  ankle  and  the  sole  of  the 
foot.     The  plantar  nerves  supply  the  muscles  of  the  foot. 

The  smaller  sciatic  nerve  supplies  the  gluteus  maximus  and  gracilis,  and  the  in- 
teguments of  the  upper  and  posterior  aspect  of  the  thigh  to  the  knee,  and  supplies 
some  filaments  to  the  flexor  muscles. 


Il6  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

the  same,  powerful  contractions  of  the  vasa  deferentia,  the  bladder, 
and  the  lower  portion  of  the  rectum  are  caused.  The  same  effects 
are  produced  by  stimulating  a  small  ganglion,  situated  in  the  neighbor- 
hood of  the  fifth  lumbar  vertebra,  and  which  receives  branches  from 
the  third  and  fourth  lumbar  nerves.  This  ganglion  Budge  has  called 
the  genito-spinal  ganglion" 

Dr.  Beard  has  also  observed  the  influence  of  this  region.  He  says  : 
"If  a  strong  current  can  be  applied  over  the  lower  portion  of  the 
spine,  between  the  upper  borders  of  the  ossa  innominata,  a  slight  sen- 
sation is  sometimes,  though  by  no  means  uniformly,  communicated  to 
the  rectum  and  the  male  genital  apparatus,  the  penis  and  the  testicles, 
through  the  spinal  nerve-supply." 

Still  more  remarkable  is  the  mingling  of  the  locomotive  and  sexual 
powers  in  the  spinal  system.  The  lumbar  region,  chiefly  for  the  thigh, 
and  the  sacral  region,  chiefly  for  the  leg  (and  posterior  of  the  thigh), 
are  the  sources  of  the  sexual  powers,  which  thus  arise  from  the  midst 
of  the  greatest  physical  force.  Hence,  in  their  maturity,  they  develop 
or  sustain  the  greatest  energy,  as  we  see  in  the  contrast  between 
the  sound  and  the  emasculated  animal.  The  active  life,  which  develops 
the  greatest  muscular  energy,  also  develops  the  greatest  virile  force, 
and  hence  population  is  not  checked  by  the  struggles  of  poverty  so 
much  as  by  the  indolence  of  wealth. 

The  consociation  of  virility  and  the  more  turbulent  energies  cor- 
responds with  the  usual  course  of  nature.  The  season  of  sexual  love 
among  most  animals  is  a  season  of  restless  energy  and  often  of  fierce 
combat.  Among  men  it  is  the  source  not  onfy  of  social  animation 
but  of  a  great  deal  of  turbulent  lawlessness,  jealousy,  and  violence. 
The  impetuous  lover  fights  all  rivals  or  obstacles,  and  sometimes  when 
disappointed  is  ready  to  murder  the  woman  who  has  rejected  him  and 
terminate  his  own  life  in  his  blind  fury.  The  sacral  region  is  a  region 
of  insane  tendencies  and  of  great  force. 

The  sexual  power  which  belongs  to  the  spinal  system,  and  which  is 
an  aggressive  impulse,  is  distinct  from  the  sexual  sensibility  and 
excitability  which  belong  to  the  sexual  organs,  the  influence  of  which, 
intemperately  used,  tends  to  debility  and  exhaustion.  Both  belong  to 
the  lower  end  of  the  trunk,  which  antagonizes  the  head  and  summit 
of  the  chest,  according  to  the  law  of  antagonism  which  is  a  fundamen- 
tal principle  of  Biology. 

The  lower  limbs  are  especially  antipodal  to  the  brain,  and  in  this 
they  coincide  with  the  excretions  of  the  pelvis. 

The  foot  is  the  most  thoroughly  anti-cephalic  region,  with  the 
strongest  tendency  toward  sleep  or  coma,  and  it  is  dependent  upon 
the   sacral  plexus  through  its  continuation,  the  great  sciatic  nerve. 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  11/ 

The  sacral  plexus  is  in  close  relation  with  the  fecal  and  urinary  matters 
which  depress  the  nervous  system.  The  foot,  under  the  influence  of 
warmth,  is  effective  in  subduing  the  brain  to  sleep,  and  under  the 
influence  of  fatigue  from  prolonged  walking  lowers  all  the  cerebral 
powers. 

It  would  then  seem  probable  that  the  pelvic  distributions  of  nerves 
from  the  sacral  plexus  should  have  a  similar  anti-cephalic  and  lethargic 
character,  and  in  fact  we  find  in  the  pelvis  the  influences  most  hos- 
tile to  cephalic  integrity,  tending  to  develop  every  form  of  hysteria, 
coma,  paralysis,  dementia,  and  insanity. 

The  pelvic  region  receives  the  dead  substance  rejected  from  all  the 
organs  —  devitalized,  benumbing,  debilitating.  The  solid  waste  of 
the  body  comes  to  the  colon  and  rectum,  the  fluid  waste  comes  by  the 
kidneys  and  ureters  to  the  bladder.  The  urea  thus  discharged  is  a 
narcotic  element,  torpefying  to  the  brain,  and  we  find  in  the  pelvic 
region  at  the  mons  veneris  a  tendency  to  lethargy  and  coma  similar 
to  that  which,  on  the  head,  appears  under  the  jaw  just  above  the 
larynx  —  a  quality  manifested  not  only  in  cerebral  disorders,  but  in 
the  manner,  when  largely  developed,  as  was  seen  in  Mr.  Webster,  in 
whom,  notwithstanding  his  great  development  of  brain,  there  was  an 
extreme  dullness  and  slowness  of  mental  action,  quite  a  contrast  to 
that  of  Mr.  Clay  and  Mr.  Calhoun. 

The  explanation  of  this  lethargic  tendency  at  the  mons  veneris, 
which  quite  surprised  me  when  I  discovered  it,  is  found  in  the  narco- 
tic character  of  the  contents  of  the  bladder  behind  the  mons.  It  is  a 
curious  coincidence  that  the  pubic  region  in  question  receives  nerves 
(the  ilio-scrotal  or  ilio-inguinal  branch)  from  the  musculo-cutaneous,  a 
branch  of  the  first  lumbar  nerve,  which  is  in  close  proximity  to  the 
kidney  from  which  the  narcotic  element  takes  its  departure.  The 
ilio-scrotal  supplies  the  skin  of  the  pubis,  penis,  scrotum,  and  female 
labia.  The  nerve  is  thus  at  each  end  in  relation  with  narcotic 
impressions. 

The  lower  pelvic  region  is  the  region  of  insanity  and  all  forms  of 
mental  and  cerebral  degeneracy  —  that  is,  predominant  irritations 
and  excitements  in  that  region  produce  all  forms  of  cerebral  derange- 
ment. 

How  nearly  parallel  these  forms  of  cerebral  disorder  of  pelvic  ori- 
gin are  to  the  forms  of  mental  degradation  produced  in  connection 
with  parts  below  the  knee  I  will  not  discuss  at  present. 

We  have  now  hastily  surveyed  the  spinal  column,  the  repository  of 
vital  forces  of  the  body  energized  by  an  influx  from  the  brain  above. 
We  perceive  that  from  its  summit,  which  co-operates  with  the  brain 
and  summit  of  the  lungs,  to  its  lower  end  devoted  to  the  legs,  it  is  a 


I  iS  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

collocation  of  unitized  forces,  acting  on  the  different  segments  of  the 
body  by  its  voluntary  spinal  nerves,  by  the  adjacent  ganglia,  and  by 
the  blood-vessels  those  ganglia  control,  thus  determining  all  activity 
and  all  growth. 

The  nervauric  healer,  with  these  principles  impressed  on  his  mind, 
will  give  more  attention  to  the  spinal  region  than  to  any  other  portion 
of  the  body. 

The  instant  control  of  the  spinal  cord  over  all  parts  of  the  body 
renders  it  the  channel  of  all  sympathies,  as  we  perceive  when  the 
cooling  of  one  hand  or  foot  has  a  cooling  influence  on  the  other, 
which  was  illustrated  by  the  experiment  of  Dr.  James  J.  Putnam  on 
frogs,  in  which  electrization  of  one  foot  produced  contractions  of  the 
blood-vessels  of  the  web  of  the  opposite  foot,  and  by  the  experiment 
in  which  Brown-Sequard  showed  that  pinching  one  arm  caused  a  fall 
of  temperature  in  the  opposite  arm  through  its  effect  on  the  cervical 
spine. 

Correlation  and  Combination  of  Functions. 

Notwithstanding  the  distinct  specification  of  the  several  regions 
of  the  spinal  cord  which  has  been  shown,  we  cannot  speak  of  these 
as  distinctly  separate  and  isolated  regions,  for  every  organ  is  in  some 
way  related  to  other  portions  of  the  cord  than  the  region  of  its  spinal 
control,  and  all  inferior  organs  depend  upon  the  immediate  superior 
tract,  through  which  communication  is  maintained  with  the  brain 
and  its  continuations.  Van  Kempen  found  that  a  longitudinal  sec- 
tion in  the  middle  of  the  spinal  cord,  along  the  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh 
cervical  vertebrae,  in  dogs  and  rabbits  produced  a  partial  paralysis  in 
the  posterior  limbs,  seeming  to  indicate  that  nervous  fibres  for  the 
lower  limbs  decussated  in  the  cervical  region.  (This  experiment 
illustrates  the  galvano-tonic  contractions  of  Remak,  who  excited  con- 
tractions in  the  anterior  limbs  by  galvanizing  the  posterior. ) 

It  is  an  interesting  coincidence  that  the  region  of  the  brain,  at  the 
posterior  part  of  the  sagittal  suture,  which  corresponds- to  the  cervico- 
dorsal  region,  is  recognized  by  recent  experimenters  in  vivisection 
as  the  seat  of  controlling  power  for  the  posterior  limbs. 

Pathologists  might  be  puzzled  to  account  for  paralysis  in  the  lower 
limbs  by  affections  in  the  cervical  region,  which  this  experiment 
would  explain.  It  also  adds  to  our  knowledge  of  the  commanding- 
importance  of  the  cephalic  region  in  controlling  everything  below  it. 
The  regions  of  the  neck  through  which  we  excite  the  lower  limbs  in 
acting  on  the  brain,  are  closely  associated  with  the  cervical  region 
that  controls  the  upper  limbs.  The  crural  region  of  the  brain  is 
marked  on  the  neck,  through  which  we  reach  it,  close  to  the  brachial 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  I  IQ 

region  of  the  spine,  the  source  of  the  brachial  plexus,  and  the  upper 
and  lower  limbs  are  curiously  parallel  in  their  psychic  relations,  but 
in  higher  and  lower  spheres. 

Anatomy  further  illustrates  the  commingling  of  functions  by  the 
fact  that  spinal  nerves  are  not  limited  in  their  connection  to  the  spot 
where  they  appear  to  unite  with  the  cord.  wSensory  nerves,  when 
they  unite  with  the  cord,  run  a  little  way  up  or  down,  or  in  both 
directions,  and  then  cross  to  connect  with  the  opposite  side  and  carry 
out  the  general  law  of  decussation.  We  know  not  how  far  the  fila- 
ments pass  before  effecting  their  connection  with  some  ganglion-like 
substance  as  their  origin. 

The  heart  not  only  responds  to  the  upper  dorsal  region,  but  by  its 
intimate  dependence  on  the  three  cervical  ganglia  is  brought  into 
close  relation  with  the  brain  and  the  cervical  region  of  the  cord,  which 
associates  with  these  ganglia.  Moreover,  it  has  close  relations  with 
the  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  cervical  nerves,  the  origin  of  the  phrenic, 
by  the  phrenic  distributions  which  supply  the  pericardium  and  the 
vena  cava.  The  right  phrenic  goes  to  the  lower  vena  cava  and  the 
adjacent  portion  of  the  right  auricle,  while  the  lower  vena  cava  and 
contiguous  portion  of  the  right  auricle  are  supplied  from  the  mixed 
phrenic  and  ganglionic  nerves  of  the  diaphragmatic  plexus.  Irritations 
of  the  phrenic  nerve  have  produced  contractions  of  the  right  auricle 
and  diaphragm  in  dogs.  It  is  clear,  therefore,  that  both  inspiration 
and  circulation  depend  upon  the  cervical  region,  and  are  not  so  much 
centralized  in  the  medulla  oblongata  as  commonly  supposed.  The 
phrenic  nerve  communicates  extensively  with  the  branches  of  the 
middle  and  inferior  cervical  ganglia,  the  motor  ganglia  of  the  heart, 
and  supplies  the  pericardium  from  its  branches  opposite  the  third  rib, 
and  also  from  its  ramifications  at  the  diaphragm.  Moreover,  the 
costal  pleura  (a  portion  of  which  is  in  the  precordia  over  the  heart) 
is  supplied  with  its  sensibility  by  the  phrenic  nerve,  and  thus  con- 
nected with  the  middle  cervical  region.  This  region  was  intimately 
concerned,  as  well  as  the  pericardium,  in  the  faradization  by  which 
Duchenne  roused  the  action  of  the  heart. 

Again,  the  heart  has  some  connections  with  the  lower  dorsal  region, 
for  the  solar  plexus,  originated  by  the  splanchnic  nerves  coming  from 
the  sixth  to  the  tenth  dorsal  ganglia,  sends  up  branches  through  the 
diaphragm  to  the  pericardium,  by  the  diaphragmatic  plexus. 

The  pulmonic  and  cardiac  regions  lie  together  in  the  cord,  and  the 
lungs  are  supplied  largely  by  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  which  also 
supplies  the  pulmonary  pleura,  and  is  the  great  sensitive  nerve  of  the 
thoracic  cavity,  the  sensitive  excitation  of  which  is  so  subduing  to  the 
heart.     Thus  the  heart  is  in  relation  to  pulmonic  sensibility  and  the 


120  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

origin  of  the  pneumogastric  at  the  medulla  oblongata,  as  the  moder- 
ator of  its  action.  The  influence  of  the  viscera  is  subduing  or  soft- 
ening, while  that  of  the  spinal  column  is  invigorating.  The  anterior 
central  portion  of  the  chest,  corresponding  with  the  anterior  portion 
of  the  cerebrum  and  identified  with  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  has  the 
subduing  influence  which  is  shown  in  our  experiments  on  the  brain, 
and  in  the  stimulation  of  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  while  the  spinal 
column,  like  its  associate  posterior  region  of  the  brain,  gives  to  tlie 
heart  its  various  forms  of  energetic  action. 

Adjacent  to  the  four  upper  dorsal  vertebrae  we  find  the  recurrent 
laryngeal  nerves — the  left  rising  lower  than  the  right,  —  beneath  the 
aortic  arch,  which  ascend  to  the  larynx,  and  are  associated  with  the 
cervical  ganglionic  nerves.  Hence,  through  this  region  comes  the 
power  of  the  voice,  and  the  power  of  closing  the  larynx  firmly,  which 
comes  into  play  when  we  exert  our  maximum  strength.  The  voice 
is  the  most  spiritual  of  all  the  physical  powers  of  the  body,  and  it 
comes  through  the  cephalic  region,  as  it  comes  through  the  power  of 
the  spinal  accessory  nerve  to  the  recurrent  laryngeal,  and  the  spinal 
accessory  rises  by  several  roots  above  the  seventh  cervical,  and  partly 
from  the  medulla  oblongata,  which  is  probably  the  real  source  of  the 
vocal  power.  In  this  region  also,  we  have  the  descending  branches 
of  the  pneumogastric,  which  join  the  cardiac  plexus  and  give  sensi- 
bility and  sedative  relaxing  influences  to  the  heart,  as  well  as  the 
anterior  and  posterior  pulmonary  plexuses,  the  latter  joined  by  the 
nerves  from  the  third  and  fourth  dorsal  ganglia,  and  going  to  supply 
the  substance  of  the  lungs,  which  are  partly  supplied  from  the  cardiac 
as  well  as  the  pulmonary  plexuses  ;  in  which  we  see  a  further  illustra- 
tion of  the  combination  of  cardiac  and  pulmonary  energies,  and  their 
joint  relation  to  the  pneumogastric  nerves  and  the  upper  section  of 
the  cord. 

Again,  the  cervical  ganglia  which  control  and  sustain  the  heart  are 
at  the  same  time  the  regulators  of  the  brain,  determining  the  amount 
of  circulation  in  its  anterior  and  posterior  regions  and  in  the  spinal 
cord  ;  and,  as  the  brain  demands  a  larger  supply  of  blood,  or  the 
muscles  demand  more  power,  they  start  an  increased  cardiac  energy 
to  supply  the  demands  created  by  the  passions  ;  but  when  the  gentler 
emotions  demand  peace,  their  responsive  region  (the  upper  pulmon- 
ary) rouses  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  tranquillizing  and  relaxing  the 
heart. 

The  heart  is  closely  related  to  the  diaphragm,  to  which  it  is  so 
closely  situated,  and  their  controlling  regions  in  the  brain  and  cord 
are  so  closely  connected  as  to  insure  their  co-operation.  The  same 
exertion  or  passion  which  accelerates  the  pulse  also  increases  the 
action  of  the  diaphragm. 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  121 

The  entire  study  of  this  subject  illustrates  the  supreme  location 
of  life  in  the  brain  and  the  cephalic  portion  of  the  spine  and  trunk 
which  control  and  contain  the  heart.  The  location  of  life  in  our 
supreme  psychic  organ  enables  us  to  understand  how  easily  it  may 
be  sustained  or  reinforced  by  psychic  power. 

The  lack  of  definite  limitation  in  the  nerve-supply  of  organs  is 
apparent  in  all  parts  of  the  cord.  The  splanchnic  nerves  for  the 
abdomen  are  connected  no  higher  than  the  sixth  dorsal  ganglia,  but 
their  fibres  may  be  traced  up  as  high  as  the  third  or  the  first,  thus 
giving  the  abdominal  region  a  nervous  association  with  the  lungs, 
heart,  and  brain.  In  the  sexual  apparatus  not  only  do  we  trace  a  definite 
anatomical  connection  (verified  by  nervauric  experiment)  between 
the  sexual  organs  and  the  sacral  region  and  lumbo-sacral  junction, 
but  we  find  an  important  influence  in  the  lumbar  region,  as  the 
genito-crural  nerve  arises  from  the  second  lumbar,  and  the  lumbar 
ganglia  go  to  form  the  lumbar,  aortic,  and  hypogastric  plexuses, 
which  control  the  pelvic  viscera ;  and  we  observe  that  the  spermatic 
arteries  which  supply  the  testes  and  ovaries  originate  at  the  head  of 
the  lumbar  region,  controlled  by  the  spermatic  plexus,  which,  derived 
chiefly  from  the  renal,  is  thus  connected  with  the  lowest  dorsal 
region,  which  originates  the  minor  splanchnic  nerve,  the  source  of 
the  renal  plexuses.  Hence  we  speak  of  the  genito-urinary  organs, 
which  are  anatomically  connected. 

Thus  in  the  intricate  machinery  of  life  there  are  so  many  forces 
brought  to  bear  upon  every  organ,  to  stimulate,  to  modify,  or  to 
arrest  its  action,  that  if  we  were  not  guided  by  a  comprehensive  phil- 
osophy and  an  exact  knowledge  of  the  dominant  laws,  we  might  fall 
into  serious  mistakes. 

In  localizing  the  source  of  any  function  we  locate  the  more  impor- 
tant source  of  action  and  not  an  isolated  concentration  of  the  entire 
power.  The  nervauric  physician  should  understand  the  relation  of 
each  organ  to  the  entire  nervous  system. 

Finally,  it  may  be  asked,  how  do  the  facts  of  anatomy  coincide  with 
the  localities  of  Sarcognomy  ?  There  must  be  a  coincidence,  as  two 
classes  of  facts  cannot  be  in  collision.  Sarcognomy  does  not  affirm 
an  isolation  or  separation  of  influences.  Every  location  on  the  brain 
or  body,  though  it  may  influence  one  function  in  a  greater  degree 
than  others,  is  not  limited  thereby,  but  exerts  in  various  degrees 
modifying  influences  on  other  functions,  assisting  the  neighboring 
and  checking  the  most  remote. 

The  nerve  forces  of  the  heart  and  lungs  are  inextricably  mingled 
with  each  other,  both  in  the  ganglia  and  plexuses  near  the  heart  and 
in  those  along  the  spine,  and  even  the  lower  dorsal  region  has  rela- 


122 


THE    SPINAL    REGION. 


[CHAP.    V. 


tions  to  the  heart.  The  heart  and  aorta  confront  the  entire  tract 
from  the  second  to  the  tenth  dorsal  vertebra,  the  body  of  the  heart 
occupying  the  space  from  the  fourth  to  the  tenth  vertebra,  and  the 
arch  of  the  aorta  corresponding  to  the  second  and  third  vertebra. 
The  trunk  of  the  aorta  extends  down  to  the  fourth  lumbar  vertebra, 
dividing  then  into  the  iliac  arteries  that  supply  the  pelvis  and  lower 
limbs.  Hence  the  nervauric  influence  of  the  hand  may  reach  the 
heart  at  any  point  from  the  third  to  the  tenth  vertebra  in  conse- 
quence of  its  proximity,  and  that  influence  would  be  specially  effect- 
ive from  the  third  to  the  sixth  vertebra,  because  it  would  reach  the 
cardiac  plexuses  and  ganglia,  the  immediate  source  of  its  action. 
The  sixth  vertebra  may  be  considered  the  central  locality  for  cardiac 
influence.  The  fourth  vertebra  is  on  the  level  of  the  origin  of  the 
aorta.  Anteriorly,  the  heart  corresponds  to  the  space  between  the 
second  and  sixth  ribs  (the  aorta  rising  to  the  first),  and  its  lower  end 
touches  the  wall  of  the  chest  two  inches  below  the  nipple  and  one  inch 
nearer  the  median  line.  (The  base  of  the  sixth  rib  in  front  corre- 
sponds with  the  tenth  dorsal  vertebra  behind.)  The  heart  may  be 
reached  in  front,  but  the  frontal  influence  is  feeble  compared  to  the 
dorsal,  and  the  left  side,  which  is  the  more  muscular  side  of  the  heart, 
is  toward  the  back.  The  intercostal  nerves  and  arteries,  which  sup- 
ply the  chest  around  the  heart,  proceed  from  the  space  between  the 
second  and  sixth  dorsal  vertebrae.  The  sympathetic  psychic  connec- 
tion of  the  sixth  dorsal  region  with  the  brain  shows  that  it  is  adapted 
to  sustain  healthy  and  vigorous  cardiac  action.  A  calm  and  firm 
action  of  the  heart  is  produced  by  the  influence  of  the  cephalic  region 
of  the  cord,  which  is  best  adapted  to  sustaining  the  action  of  the 
brain. 

As  the  facts  of  Sarcognomy  thus  locate  the  best  cardiac  power  in 

the  upper  dorsal  region,  which  is 
free  from  the  exhausting  violence  of 
the  neck  and  of  the  lower  part  of 
the  body,  we  shall  find  the  corres- 
ponding beneficent  cardiac  influence 
of  the  brain  in  the  upper  occiput,  on 
a  line  from  the  cavity  of  the  ear  to 
the  centre  of  power  on  the  median 
line  (usually  indicated  by  the  central 
radiation  of  the  hair.) 

The   hand    stimulating    this    spot 
produces    a    tonic    effect  —  a    just 
medium  between  the  opposite  influ- 
ences of  the  gentle  anterior  superior  region  and  the  violent  force  of 


CHAP.    V.]  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  12$ 

the  posterior  inferior.  This  tonic  power  for  the  heart  is  near  the 
centre  of  power,  which  modern  anatomists  have  confirmed,  calling  it 
the  superior  parietal  lobule  and  giving  it  the  command  of  the  locomo- 
tive power  of  the  lower  limbs. 

The  vigor  given  to  the  heart  by  this  location  is  shown  in  a  strong 
but  normal  pulse.  In  passing  forward  upon  the  brain,  the  pulse 
gradually  softens  —  in  passing  back  downwards  it  becomes  harder  or 
stronger,  indicating  an  increased  blood  pressure. 

There  is  no  more  decisive  way  of  showing  the  impressibility  of  the 
brain  and  its  physiological  control  of  the  body,  than  thus  to  stimulate 
and  modify  the  action  of  the  heart  by  applying  the  hands  on  different 
parts  of  the  head.  No  psychic  effects  are  quite  convincing  to  those 
who  have  been  thoroughly  educated  into  collegiate  scepticism,  for 
they  are  well  armed  with  fanciful  hypotheses  and  shrewd  suspicions 
against  anything  that  is  not  physical ;  but  the  silent  testimony  of 
the  pulse  is  unanswerable  ;  and  when  given  to  a  Boston  committee  in 
1843,  Doctor  Flint,  who  felt  the  pulse,  said  to  me,  "  Your  experi- 
ments are  too  perfect." 

A  powerful  and  tumultuous  action  of  the  heart  is  produced  by  the 
three  cervical  ganglia  which  co-operate  with  the  basilar  region  of  the 
brain,  the  seat  of  the  turbulent  impulses  and  animal  force  which  we 
rouse  by  placing  the  hands  on  the  neck  near  the  cranium.  The  large 
neck  is  a  well-known  indication  of  strong  circulation  and  strong  pas- 
sions. The  cervical  ganglia  are  equally  cephalic  and  corporeal  in 
their  functions,  and  sustain  the  brain  and  heart  in  scenes  of  the  wild- 
est violence. 

The  anatomical  commingling  of  nervous  forces  which  we  find 
serves  as  an  additional  illustration  not  only  of  the  sympathies  of 
organs,  but  of  that  intimate  correlation  and  blending  of  functions 
which  is  revealed  in  the  study  of  the  brain,  in  which  we  find  no  organ 
which  has  not  a  diffusive  influence,  extending  beyond  its  own  juris- 
diction into  the  sphere  of  other  functions. 

The  intimate  and  powerful  sympathies  of  the  stomach  with  the 
brain  and  lungs,  and  its  controlling  influence  over  the  vital  energies 
generally  are  explained  by  its  relation  to  the  pneumogastric  and 
phrenic  nerves,  the  solar  plexus  and  the  lower  dorsal  region  of  the 
spinal  column  as  well  as  the  gastric  region  at  the  base  of  the  middle 
lobe  of  the  brain. 

The  solar  plexus  exercises  a  dominant  influence  over  all  below  it. 
The  lower  dorsal  region  and  its  correspondence  in  the  brain,  the 
region  of  Business  Energy,  give  a  general  capacity  for  the  active 
duties  of  life.  Hence,  when  they  are  enfeebled  or  oppressed  by  the 
condition  of  the  stomach,  with  which  they  are  associated  —  by  its 


124  THE    SPINAL    REGION.  [CHAP.    V. 

load  of  undigested  food,  its  morbid  contents,  or  oppressive,  nauseating 
medicines,  there  is  a  general  unfitness,  incapacity,  and  aversion  for 
our  daily  duties,  and  inability  to  make  any  great  exertion,  whether 
physical  or  intellectual,  especially  anything  requiring  skill. 

As  the  gastric  region  of  the  brain  (in  front  of  the  ear)  is  antagonis- 
tic to  fortitude  and  energy,  any  very  strong  impression  on  the 
stomach  enfeebles  the  nervous  energies,  but  as  it  is  a  region  of  great 
sensibility  (the  epigastric  region  corresponding  to  Sensibility  in  the 
brain)  the  medical  or  hygienic  influence  of  everything  it  receives  is 
so  strongly  felt  as  to  affect  the  whole  constitution,  and  medicines 
swallowed  may  affect  the  system  instantaneously,  prior  to  any  absorp- 
tion. 

The  best  condition  of  our  energies  is  after  the  process  of  digestion 
has  ceased  and  the  nourishment  been  absorbed,  the  stomach  remain- 
ing quiescent.  Although  the  abdominal  organs  support  the  constitu- 
tion by  their  contributions  through  the  thoracic  duct,  they  tax  the 
constitution  to  the  extent  of  the  nervous  energy  they  require.  Hence 
the  highest  nervous  and  psychic  conditions  may  be  attained  in  cli- 
mates which  require  but  little  food. 

I  would  remark  in  conclusion,  that  in  nervauric  and  electric  treat 
ment  we  are  not  to  confine  our  attention,  as  has  been  the  fashion,  to 
the  cerebro- spinal  system,  overlooking  the  immediate  agents  of  vital 
functions,  for  it  is  well  established  that  the  immediate  agents  of  all  vital 
processes  are  the  ganglionic  nerves  or  ganglia.  Animals  may  exist 
without  a  cerebro-spinal  system,  and  the  human  fetus  may  be  developed 
without  either  brain  or  spinal  cord.  To  the  ganglionic  or  subordinate 
system  nature  adds  a  controlling  spinal  system,  and  to  this  adds  a 
controlling  brain.  But  the  ganglionic  system,  thus  overruled,  carries 
on  the  machinery  of  life ;  and  when  we  treat  the  spinal  column  we 
control  the  adjacent  ganglia  as  well  as  spinal  nerves,  thus  controlling 
circulation,  sensation,  and  unconscious  action  in  the  viscera.  Physi- 
ologists have  not  given  sufficient  thought  to  this  commanding  relation 
of  the  spinal  cord  to  the  viscera,  and  none  to  the  corresponding  defi- 
nite relations  of  the  brain,  nor  have  the  ganglionic  functions  been 
studied  in  a  practical  manner  for  local  treatment. 


CHAPTER   VI. 

PRACTICAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  THERAPEUTIC  SPINAL 

TREATMENT. 

Understanding  the  foregoing  exposition  of  the  spinal  powers,  the 
operator  will  have  little  difficulty  in  treating  the  spinal  column  —  the 
most  important  region  of  tJie  body  for  the  healing  art  —  according  to 
the  following  directions,  recollecting  that  we  stimulate  the  impressi- 
ble temperament  by  the  application  of  the  hand,  by  gentle  percussion, 
or  by  the  negative  pole  of  a  gentle  electric  current,  and  that  what- 
ever we  do  upon  the  body  may  be  aided  by  treating  the  corresponding 
region  of  the  brain. 

i.  To  invigorate  the  brain  and  all  our  energies,  stimulate  the 
junction  of  the  cervical  and  dorsal  vertebrae,  or  union  of  the  neck  and 
the  trunk. 

2.  To  reinforce  this  region,  stimulate  the  region  of  Sanity,  just 
below  the  arms.  The  union  of  the  two  functions  produces  a  greater 
effect  as  they  are  analogous  or  correspondent.     The  region  marked 

»  Sanity  produces  psychic  or  moral  firmness  and  self-control,  and  sup- 
presses all  disorders  of  the  nervous  system. 

3.  For  the  more  complete  invigoration  of  the  brain  and  the  entire 
constitution,  the  treatment  may  be  applied  not  only  to  the  cephalic 
region  of  the  spine,  but  upon  the  entire  shoulders,  and  the  arms 
down  to  the  elbow. 

4.  While  stimulating  the  cephalic  region,  the  effect  may  be  assisted 
by  dispersive  upward  passes  from  the  margin  of  the  ribs  in  front 
(region  of  Disease).  If  a  galvanic  current  is  used,  the  positive  pole 
applied  by  broad  rheophores  below  the  margin  of  the  ribs  anteriorly 
and  the  negative  on  the  cephalic  region,  will  produce  a  great  concen- 
tration to  the  cephalic  locality, —  a  very  tonic,  sustaining  influence. 
The  entire  upper  portion  of  the  back  has  a  tonic,  sustaining  character. 

5.  If  it  be  desired  to  use  the  brain  power  for  intellectual  purposes, 
we  should  also  stimulate  along  the  course  of  the  sternum,  in  conjunc- 
tion with  the  cephalic  spinal  region  and  Sanity,  by  the  hands,  by  gentle 
faradic  currents,  or  by  the  reciprocal  galvanic. 

Across  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum,  between  the  mammae,  it  could 
be    directed    to   impressional,  psychometric  and  clairvoyant  investi- 


126  THERAPEUTIC  SPINAL  TREATMENT.        [CHAP. 

gations.  If  the  object  should  be  a  general  mental  elevation  to  a  lofty 
plane  of  thought,  opening  the  mind  to  spiritual  influx,  we  may 
stimulate  the  region  of  Inspiration,  on  the  side,  parallel  to  the  anterior 
line  of  the  arm,  which  corresponds  to  the  temples  —  the  region  of 
Ideality,  Modesty,  Reverence,  and  Sublimity. 

6.  If  we  wish  to  use  the  mental  energy  in  speech  (conversation  or 
oratory)  we  should  combine  with  the  Cephalic  the  Pulmonic  region, 
just  below  it  (marked  Oratory),  which  would  co-operate  admirably 
with  the  region  of  Inspiration.  For  mediumistic  speech  we  need  both 
Inspiration  and  Idealism  —  the  latter  being  easily  covered  by  the  hand 
across  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum.  The  term  Idealism  is  used  for 
the  whole  Ideal  region,  including  Imagination,  Spirituality,  Marvel- 
lousness,  and  Somnolence. 

7.  If  we  would  use  our  mental  energy  for  physical  achievement,  we 
should  combine  with  the  Cephalic  region  that  of  Vital  Force  and  the 
entire  thigh ;  also  the  lumbar  region  and  the  organ  of  Force 
behind  the  lower  part  of  the  humerus  on  the  trunk. 

8.  If  we  would  use  it  for  an  ambitious  career,  we  should  excite  the 
energies  of  the  arms  —  especially  the  regions  of  Ambition  and  Love 
of  Power,  on  the  upper  arm,  and  the  whole  space  across  from  tip  to 
tip  of  the  shoulders.  On  the  brain  place  one  hand  across  the  upper 
occiput,  behind  the  organ  of  Firmness. 

9.  If  we  would  use  it  for  the  attainment  of  moral  excellence  and  per- 
fection, we  should  extend  the  stimulation  from  the  cephalic  region, 
over  the  shoulder,  on  the  front  of  the  chest,  as  far  as  the  nipples. 
The  corresponding  stimulation  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain  in 
the  middle  region  (across  Religion,  Hope  and  Love)  is  in  many 
cases  highly  important.  The  bright,  calm,  and  happy  feeling  pro- 
duced by  this  region  subdues  restless  and  unpleasant  passions,  and 
sustains  the  activity  of  the  brain,  giving  a  capacity  for  pleasant 
intellectual  and  social  intercourse,  and  bright  intellection.  Hence 
the  region  of  Love  and  Hope  may  be  beneficially  stimulated  in 
connection  with  Health  and  the  occipital  energies  generally.  A 
happy  influence  may  be  produced  by  combining  the  coronal  and  basilar 
regions  of  the  brain  —  one  hand  being  across  the  region  of  Love  and 
the  other  around  the  base  of  the  cerebellum,  thus  giving  physical  and 
psychic  vitality  in  harmonious  combination.  This  harmony  is  nec- 
essary to  high  health.  Paralysis  may  be  due  to  a  decided  predomi- 
nance of  the  basilar  organs  and  the  failure  of  the  higher  sentiments 
to  maintain  the  cheerful  activity  of  the  brain.  Over  exertion  prompted 
by  unbalanced  selfish  impulses  is  one  of  the  main  causes  of  brain 
exhaustion  and  consequent  prostration  of  health.  The  cultivation  of 
the  affections  in  family  life  is  the  principal  means  of  maintaining  a 


CHAP.    VI.]  THERAPEUTIC    SPINAL    TREATMENT.  \2J 

healthy  balance  and  supporting  the  normal  condition  of  the  brain  — 
hence  the  greater  longevity  of  a  married  than  a  celibate  life,  which  is 
always  the  effect  of  a  happy  marriage.  There  is  a  considerable  class 
in  whom  it  is  important  to  stimulate  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain 
and  the  region  including  the  mammae  and  upper  surface  of  the 
shoulder. 

There  is  an  obvious  reason  for  this  in  the  principle  that  all  unbal- 
anced action  is  injurious.  The  basilar  forces  leading  to  physical 
exertion  continually  tend  to  brain  exhaustion,  carrying  its  vitality 
into  the  body,  as  we  see  in  the  complete  nervous  prostration  after 
violent  efforts  and  the  stultified  dullness  produced  by  a  life  of  exces- 
sive labor.  On  the  other  hand,  a  life  in  which  the  activity  of  the 
higher  emotions  is  greater  than  that  of  the  animal  forces  is  accom- 
panied by  a  superior  condition  of  the  brain.  Thus  do  love  and 
religion  become  conservators  of  health,  while  excessive  culture  of  the 
muscular  system  is  at  the  expense  of  the  brain ;  and  athletes  in 
training  sometimes  diminish  their  power  by  this  reduction  of  the 
vitality  of  the  brain.  Excessive  exertion  may  result  also  in  that 
hypertrophy  of  the  heart  which  is  so  injurious  and  destructive  to 
the  brain. 

The  importance,  and  indeed  the  absolute  necessity,  of  cultivating 
the  higher  sentiments  for  the  maintenance  of  health  is  demonstrated  by 
the  frequent  occurrence  of  paralysis  and  death  from  diseases  of  the 
upper  surface  of  the  brain  ;  and  the  wonderful  power  of  enduring 
fatigue  and  privation  produced  by  the  sentiments  of  hope  and 
courage,  which  belong  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain.  Hence 
in  the  treatment  of  patients  it  is  often  necessary  to  stimulate  the 
upper  surface  of  the  brain  for  its  calm,  cheerful,  and  sustaining- 
influence.  The  best  results  are  produced  when  the  operator  can  give 
that  aid  from  the  energy  of  his  own  higher  faculties.  Indeed  no  one 
is  really  fit  for  the  duties  of  a  physician  who  has  not  strong  senti- 
ments of  love,  hope,  and  firmness. 

10.  If  our  chief  object  is  to  encounter  enemies  and  difficulties,  we 
may  also  stimulate  the  lower  posterior  half  of  the  body,  especially 
the  region  on  the  level  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  and  below.  If  our 
object  is  to  gain  social  influence  and  ascendency,  we  may  stimulate 
the  whole  of  the  upper  posterior  surface  of  the  crunk  and  the  entire 
arms,  or  at  least  to  the  elbow.  From  the  top  of  the  shoulders  down- 
ward for  a  space  of  ten  or  twelve  inches  may  be  regarded  as  the  social 
region. 

1 1.  To  stimulate  the  Cephalic  region  in  the  head,  we  may  touch  the 
regions  of  Firmness  and  Dignity  (marked  Self-respect).  To  produce 
a  strong  and  harmonious  combination  of  cephalic  energies,  we  may 


128  THERAPEUTIC  SPINAL  TREATMENT.         [CHAP.  VI. 

extend  the  hand  across  Firmness  and  Dignity,  so  far  as  to  include  the 
regions  of  Sanity  and  Magnanimity  (at  the  prominent  centre  of  the 
parietal  bone)  thus  covering  the  posterior  part  of  the  cephalic  region 
of  the  brain.  In  all  cases  we  improve  the  sustaining  faculties  by 
passes  upward  and  backward  from  Disease  and  Insanity  (the  cheek- 
bone and  the  under-jaw  regions)  towards  the  crown  of  the  head,  the 
capillary  centre.  The  pass  is  a  light  brushing  movement  with  the  fin- 
gers. 

12.  To  invigorate  the  lungs  in  any  condition  whatever,  we  may 
stimulate  the  upper  half  of  the  dorsal  region  (the  six  upper  vertebrae). 
Precision  in  confining  the  hand  to  one  locality  is  not  desirable  in 
therapeutic  treatment,  for  adjacent  localities  are  always  co-operative- 
The  pulmonic  zone  extends  around  the  chest  in  the  direction  of  the 
ribs,  nerves,  and  blood-vessels  ;  but  on  the  frontal,  sternal  surface  we 
have  not  the  elements  of  vigor.  Hence  we  do  not  usually  extend  our 
manual  treatment,  except  at  the  summit,  much  beyond  the  side,  in 
which  we  find  a  region  of  Inspiration  (near  the  ends  of  the  intercostal 
arteries)  (see  map)  corresponding  with  the  organs  of  Sublimity  and 
Reverence  —  a  region  which  animates  the  lungs,  and  prompts  a  fuller 
breathing  by  the  ribs,  but  does  not  impart  permanent  vigor  or  tonicity, 
and  would,  therefore,  not  be  beneficial  in  inflammatory  conditions* 
which  should  be  counteracted  on  the  tibial  surface  of  the  leg.  Never- 
theless the  upper  frontal  surface  of  the  chest  promotes  the  fulness 
and  circulation  of  the  lungs  (in  connection  with  pleasing  emotions) 
and  may  therefore  be  used  when  we  wish  to  increase  their  circulation, 
especially  in  asthmatic  conditions  and  irritable  states  of  the  system. 
Moreover,  any  operator  of  a  benevolent,  sympathetic  temperament  and 
strong  vitality  may  do  good,  however  ignorant,  by  placing  his  hands 
upon  the  patient,  though  without  producing  the  speedy  and  thorough 
cure  to  which  he  would  be  guided  by  Sarcognomy.  A  state  of  irrita- 
tion in  the  lungs  may  be  soothed  by  the  anodyne  influence  of  the 
region  of  Patience,  at  the  top  of  the  shoulders.  Bronchial  irritation 
and  congestion  may  be  overcome  by  the  regions  of  Repose  and  Cool- 
ness, which  operate  much  like  a  combination  of  quinine  and  hyoscia- 
mus  or  opium.  The  hyperemic  conditions  of  pneumonia  may  be  best 
counteracted  by  the  tibial  region  of  the  leg  and  the  foot,  on  which  we 
apply  the  hands,  or  to  which  we  send  an  electric  current  from  the  ante- 
rior surface  of  the  chest.  In  those  who  are  less  impressible,  a  similar 
effect  may  be  produced  by  hemastasis,  by  inserting  the  lower  limbs  in 
hollow  vessels  (the  pneumatic  boot)  from  which  the  air  has  been  par- 
tially extracted  by  an  air-pump,  so  as  to  draw  the  blood  with  great 
force  into  the  limbs,  giving  prompt  relief  to  the  congestion  of  the 
lungs.      (See  chapter  on  Hemastasis.)     If  such  apparatus  is  not  in 


CHAP.    VI.]  THERAPEUTIC    SPINAL    TREATMENT.  1 29 

reach,  ligatures  around  the  thighs  to  produce  an  accumulation  of  blood 
in  the  limbs  for  a  few  hours  will  answer  the  same  purpose,  though  less 
efficiently. 

In  speaking  of  the  frontal  region  of  the  chest  and  the  brain  as  defi- 
cient in  vital  force,  I  do  not  mean  that  their  influence  is  objectionable. 
On  the  contrary,  though  deficient  in  vital  force  they  contribute  to  the 
general  activity  of  the  brain,  and  serve  to  call  out  the  occipital  ener- 
gies by  their  laws  of  association.  This  is  especially  true  of  the  sum-' 
mit  of  the  chest,  from  the  shoulders  to  the  mammae  inclusive.  This 
region  is  correlative  with  that  of  Health — that  is,  it  uniformly  co- 
operates with  it.  Hence  there  is  great  propriety  in  combining  the 
anterior  and  posterior  stimulation  of  the  upper  part  of  the  chest, 
which  develops  the  noblest  and  most  hygienic  elements  of  the  consti- 
tution. 

13.  To  treat  the  lungs  through  the  head,  we  operate  on  the  corre- 
sponding regions  to  those  we  treat  on  the  body,  giving  vigor  by  the 
upper  occiput,  anodyne  influence  by  Patience,  Heroism,  and  Repose, 
full  inspiration  by  the  temples,  bronchial  relief  by  Sleep  and  Coolness, 
and  deep  diaphragmatic  respiration  by  the  respiratory  region  below 
the  mouth.  As  the  exercise  of  the  thighs  by  running,  leaping,  or 
ascending  heights  promotes  deep  diaphragmatic  respiration,  so  does 
the  stimulation  of  the  thigh  (or  of  the  crural  region)  or  their  expan- 
sion by  hemastasis.  The  sedative  and  cooling  effect  of  the  tibial 
region  cannot  be  distinctly  produced  through  the  neck  on  the  brain, 
owing  to  the  variable  position  of  the  head,  but  may  be  approximated 
on  the  lower  part  of  the  neck. 

14.  In  treating  pulmonary  diseases  it  is  always  beneficial  to  reinforce 
the  pulmonary  vitality  by  stimulating  the  pulmonic  region  of  the 
spine,  but  not  so  beneficial  to  stimulate  the  region  of  Inspiration, 
except  when  respiration  is  imperfect,  the  lungs  being  dry,  constricted, 
or  asthmatic.  Congestive  conditions  of  the  lungs,  such  as  pneumonia, 
or  irritated  conditions  approximating  pneumonia,  are  benefited  by 
stimulating  not  only  the  pulmonic  region,  but  the  whole  posterior 
thoracic  surface,  which  includes  Firmness,  Health,  Coolness,  and 
Repose.  The  cephalic  region,  which  energizes  the  arms,  is  also  bene- 
ficial. Both  upper  and  lower  limbs,  when  stimulated  by  the  hands, 
by  hot  applications,  or  stimulating  plasters,  divert  from  the  lungs  and 
relieve  their  congestions  and  irritations  on  the  same  principle  as 
haemastasis.  The  most  prompt  and  effective  method  of  relieving 
any  congestion  of  the  lungs  is  to  retain  a  large  amount  of  blood  in 
the  limbs  by  ligatures  at  the  thighs  and  shoulders,  tight  enough  to 
check  the  return  of  venous  blood,  but  not  to  hinder  the  entrance  of 
the  arterial.     It  is  more  efficient  than  the  greater  part  of  the  medical 


130  THERAPEUTIC    SPINAL    TREATMENT.  [CHAP.    VI. 

treatment  which  has  been  in  vogue,  but  has  been  signally  neglected 
by  the  medical  profession.  Haemastasis  is  more  effective  when 
following  evacuations  by  the  kidneys  and  bowels,  reducing  the 
volume  of  the  blood,  and  when  the  limbs  are  kept  warm. 

15.  To  rouse  the  diaphragm  for  forced  respiration  in  asphyxia  or 
drowning,  it  is  necessary  to  use  powerful  stimulation.  Faradic  cur- 
rents may  be  sent  from  the  cephalic  to  the  lumbo-sacral  region  or  to 
the  seat  of  vital  force  at  the  summit  of  the  thigh,  or  preferably  the 
reciprocal  galvanic  current.  This  I  think  effective  for  rousing  the 
vital  forces,  but  similar  currents  between  the  cervical  or  upper 
dorsal  and  the  respiratory  region,  just  below  the  umbilicus,  are  more 
efficient  and  stimulating  to  respiration.  The  current  from  the  cervi- 
cal region  passes  along  the  course  of  the  phrenic  nerve.  But  before 
such  means  can  generally  be  attained,  respiration  may  be  restored 
by  manual  force.  The  patient  being  placed  in  a  reclining  position 
(say  an  angle  of  forty-five  to  sixty  degrees  above  the  horizontal)  and 
vigorous  compression  applied  rapidly  to  the  abdomen  and  lower  part 
of  the  chest  by  two  or  more  persons,  to  expel  the  air,  which  will  be 
brought  into  the  lungs  by  the  reaction  when  the  ribs  expand  by  their 
elasticity,  and  the  bowels  descend  by  their  gravity.  The  reaction  of 
the  ribs  may  be  assisted  by  jerking  the  shoulders  upwards  at  the 
moment. 

The  continued  repetition  of  these  movements  may  recover  from 
apparent  death,  and  the  recovery  will  be  assisted  by  the  primary 
current  from  the  hypochondriac  region  of  the  body  to  the  cephalic 
region  of  the  spine,  and  by  alternating  currents  across  the  neck  and 
the  base  of  the  brain  posteriorly,  as  well  as  the  currents  recom- 
mended for  the  diaphragm. 

16.  To  rouse  the  liver,  we  stimulate  along  the  sixth  to  the  eighth 
vertebrae,  and  the  corresponding  ribs.  It  is  not  desirable  to  carry 
this  beyond  the  middle  of  the  lateral  surface,  as  it  becomes  a  depress- 
ing influence  anteriorly.  When  we  would  rouse  from  a  torpid  state, 
the  liver  being  small  or  contracted,  we  may  treat  on  the  side,  but  in 
congested,  hyperemic,  irritated  or  inflammatory  conditions,  the  treat- 
ment should  be  on  the  back  —  one  hand  on  the  hepatic  location  and 
the  other  on  Health,  with  dispersive  passes  from  the  hypochondriac 
region. 

Morbid  states  of  the  liver  are  benefited  by  currents  from  the 
hypochondria  (especially  of  the  right  side)  toward  the  upper  dorsal 
region  and  region  of  Health.  The  best  influences  are  produced  when 
currents  sent  into  the  person  are  passed  through  the  person  of  the 
operator,  and  applied  by  his  hand. 

17.  From  the  seventh  to  the  twelfth  dorsal  vertebrae  inclusive,  we 


CHAP.    VI.]  THERAPEUTIC    SPINAL    TREATMENT.  I3I 

stimulate  the  stomach  and  the  organs  immediately  below  it.*  The 
gastric  zone  extends  along  the  direction  of  the  ribs,  and  the  specific 
anterior  location  for  exciting  hunger,  thirst,  and  love  of  stimulus, 
corresponding  to  the  organ  just  in  front  of  the  ear,  is  on  the  abdo- 
men below  the  ribs  about  six  inches  from  the  umbilicus,  and  three  or 
four  inches  higher.  At  this  locality,  we  may  not  only  stimulate 
digestion,  co-operating  with  the  spinal  location,  but  may  control  the 
drunkards  thirst  by  dispersive  passes  on  the  sensitive, —  stimulating 
at  the  same  time  the  power  of  fortitude  and  temperance,  which  are 
roused  on  the  top  of  the  shoulder.  This  may  be  achieved  by  electric 
treatment,  placing  the  positive  pole  at  the  gastric  location  just  men- 
tioned, and  the.  negative  on  the  middle  of  the  upper  surface  of  the 
shoulder. 

18.  From  the  eighth  dorsal  to  the  last  lumbar  vertebrae  we  energize 
the  functions  of  the  bowels,  and  along  the  gastro-intestinal  location 
on  the  abdomen  we  may  assist  in  the  same  effect.  We  may  use  the 
hands,  or  the  faradic  and  primary  currents.  Upon  the  spine  we  ener- 
gize at  the  same  time  the  lower  limbs,  but  at  the  abdominal  locations  the 
tendency  is  more  relaxing  than  invigorating.  Hence,  the  positive 
pole  is  more  appropriate  to  the  abdomen  and  the  negative  to  the 
spine,  but  alternating  currents  produce  the  most  efficient  abdominal 
action. 

19.  On  the  lumbar  vertebrae,  especially  the  lower  half,  we  may 
invigorate  the  calorific  energies,  which  are  developed  by  the  organ  of 
Calorification,  located  on  the  abdomen,  with  the  difference  that  the 
latter  is  more  feverish  and  superficial  in  its  effect  and  the  former 
more  substantial  and  wholesome,  being  associated  with  general  vigor. 
An  alternating  current  from  the  lumbar  region  to  the  seat  of  Calori- 
fication in  front  is  the  best  calorific  proceeding. 

20.  At  the  upper  lumbar  vertebrae  we  may  excite  the  urinary  organs 
—  the  kidneys  being  adjacent  to  the  lumbo-dorsal  junction  and  deriving 
their  nerve  power  from  the  renal  plexus,  coming  from  the  tenth  and 
eleventh  dorsal  ganglia.  The  bladder  may  be  affected  through  the 
sacral  region. 

21.  At  the  lumbo-sacral  junction,  and  about  three  inches  below  it, 
we  may  excite  the  sexual  energies,  as  this  region  is  the  source  of  sexual 
functions  in  both  sexes.  The  influence  of  the  lumbo-sacral  region, 
like  the  upper  part  of  the  cerebellum,  tends  to  normal  amativeness 

*  Dr.  D.  Graham,  a  Boston  practitioner  of  massage  according  to  the  mechanical 
theory,  was  surprised  to  discover  this  effect  from  the  dorsal  region  in  a  case  he  was 
treating  for  writer's  cramp,  in  which  he  rubbed  the  back,  from  a  belief  that  it  had 
been  injured.  He  says  in  a  report  of  this  case:  "After  the  third  massage,  which 
included  the  back,  he  was  almost  faint  with  hunger,  though  he  had  just  had  dinner 
before  coming  to  me.  I  have  observed  the  same  effect  in  other  cases;  in  one  a 
physician,  from  percussion  alone,  a  few  minutes  on  the  back."  He  evidently  had 
very  good  subjects,  and  could  have  treated  them  more  effectually  if  he  had  under- 
stood Sarcognomy. 


132  THERAPEUTIC  SPINAL  TREATMENT.       [CHAP.  VI. 

and  love.  Stronger  sexual  desires  and  exhausting  excesses  are  promp- 
ted by  the  lower  part  of  the  median  cerebellum,  the  sacral  region,  and 
the  sexual  organs.  The  influence  of  the  sexual  organs  and  the  inguinal 
region  is  more  sensitive  and  relaxing  than  tonic  ;  illustrating  the  gen- 
eral law  that  anterior  organs  tend  to  debility  and  exhaustion.  To  dis- 
perse from  the  groin  and  energize  the  lumbo-sacral  region  is  the  general 
rule  in  disorders  of  the  sexual  organs,  unless  we  wish  to  suspend  all 
action  in  that  region,  in  which  case  we  also  stimulate  the  cephalic 
regions  on  the  spine,  and  region  of  chastity  below  the  axilla,  which  is  a 
proper  treatment  in  hysteria  —  a  treatment  which  is  sedative  and 
antaphrodisiac,  producing  the  beneficial  effects  of  the  bromides. 

22.  In  the  treatment  of  paralysis,  we  should  recollect  that  the 
upper  limbs  are  controlled  from  the  fifth,  sixth,  seventh,  and  eighth 
cervical  and  first  dorsal  vertebrae;  consequently,  this  is  the  locality 
at  which  the  arms  are  to  be  strengthened  by  stimulation  with  the 
hand,  or  by  an  electric  current  sent  to  this  locality  from  the  hypo- 
chondriac region,  or  by  moderate  faradic  currents  for  a  few  minutes 
through  this  part  of  the  spine,  or  between  this  part  and  the  hands. 
Dry  cupping  on  this  part  of  the  spine  and  a  few  inches  lower  gives 
relief  to  pains  in  the  arms  or  convulsive  affections.  Irritated  condi- 
tions of  this  part  of  the  spine  may  be  relieved  by  vigorous  dispersive 
passes,  by  dry  cupping,  or  by  the  positive  pole  sending  a  current 
toward  the  hands  or  the  feet,  or  by  currents  of  hot  water  and  hot 
fomentations. 

23.  Paralytic  affections  of  the  lower  limbs  involve  the  whole  region 
from  the  dorsal  vertebrae  to  the  end  of  the  spine,  and  require  treat- 
ment by  the  hand  and  by  primary  and  faradic  currents  on  the  entire 
space  —  on  the  lumbar  region  for  the  thighs  and  the  sacral  region 
for  the  legs.  Moderate  currents  to  the  spine  for  five,  ten,  or  fifteen 
minutes  are  beneficial  generally  in  paralysis.  Galvanism  and  the  mag- 
neto-galvanic or  primary  current  are  the  proper  excitants  for  paralyzed 
nerves  ;  and  the  alternation  of  currents  is  beneficial.  The  negative 
pole  too  long  applied  has  a  congestive  and  solvent  or  softening 
influence,  which  may  be  counteracted  by  the  positive.  After  the 
negative  pole  has  stimulated  the  cord  and  its  circulation  sufficiently, 
the  positive  pole  on  the  spine  may  be  used  to  send  some  of  the 
accumulated  energy  into  the  limbs.  In  stimulating  the  spine  with  the 
negative  pole  it  is  not  necessary  that  the  positive  pole  should  be 
placed  on  the  limbs  ;  on  the  contrary,  a  better  effect  may  often  be 
produced  by  placing  the  positive  pole  on  the  opposite  anterior  sur- 
faces of  the  body  —  as  a  backward-going  current  is  always  tonic  and 
invigorating.  The  upward  current  develops  the  spinal  cord  at  the 
expense  of  the  limbs.     As  a  general  method,  I  would  recommend  a 


CHAP.    VI.]  THERAPEUTIC    SPINAL    TREATMENT.  1 33 

current  from  the  frontal  surfaces  of  the  trunk  to  the  spine,  followed 
by  reciprocal  or  alternating  galvanic  and  primary  currents  between 
the  spine  and  the  limbs.  If  the  operator  has  not  a  commutator, 
which  is  the  best  means  of  producing  alternate  currents,  he  can 
change  the  position  of  the  electrodes,  or  shift  their  connections 
with  the  battery ;  but  the  rapid  reciprocal  current  automatically 
produced  is  the  most  efficient  treatment.  A  moderate  faradic 
current  between  the  spine  and  the  limbs  is  suitable  for  their 
invigoration,  but  not  so  appropriate  while  the  paralytic  condition 
continues,  which  is  benefited  chiefly  by  the  galvanic  or  primary 
current.  Local  faradism  upon  the  muscles  helps  to  stimulate 
their  growth  and  development.  The  reciprocating  galvanic  current 
automatically  produced  by  a  commutator  is  one  of  the  most 
important  applications  of  electricity,  but  one  which  has  been  greatly 
neglected.  The  commutator  is  the  most  efficient  method  of  pro- 
ducing the  uniform  electric  stimulation  without  different  polarities, 
in  the  electrodes  and  without  any  of  the  corroding  chemical  action 
of  the  current ;  hence  more  pleasant  as  well  as  more  effectual. 

24.  In  treating  the  various  portions  of  the  spinal  cord  for  their 
constitutional  effects,  there  are  six  different  methods. 

First.  Vital  manual  treatment,  by  touch  and  gentle  percussion  to 
stimulate,  and  by  dispersive  passes  with  the  hand,  for  removing  mor- 
bid conditions.  Moderate  friction  with  the  hand  serves  also  for 
stimulation.  Some  sensitives  are  favorably  affected  by  breathing 
upon  the  part  to  be  treated. 

Second.  Galvanic  currents  are  stimulant  by  the  negative,  and 
sedative,  but  tonic,  by  the  positive  pole. 

Third.  Faradic  currents  are  strongly  stimulant,  and  should  be 
used  with  moderation  either  on  the  spine,  or  on  the  spine  and  the 
affected  organ,  or  on  the  muscles,  or,  for  local  action,  on  the  dry  skin, 
which  hinders  the  current  from  passing  inwards.  The  current  should 
be  moderated  by  using  large  sponges  or  broad  carbon  plates  as  elec- 
trodes, and  weak  currents  when  the  electrodes  are  near  together. 
The  carbon  plate  electrode,  with  a  wet  cloth  on  its  surface,  ought  to 
supersede  the  metallic  electrodes  in  common  use. 

Fourth.  Mechanical  treatment  may  be  used  by  dry  cupping  to 
remove  irritation  and  pain  ;  by  hot  water  for  a  very  short  time,  for 
its  sedative  and  soothing  effects  ;  by  cold  water  or  ice  for  a  similar 
purpose,  which  must  be  continued  for  a  longer  time  to  prevent  reac- 
tion, and  which  requires  more  caution  in  its  use.  The  rubber  bag 
of  hot  water  or  of  ice  is  a  very  valuable  application. 

Fifth.  Stimulant  and  tonic  plasters  are  a  valuable  adjunct  in 
spinal  treatment,  and  may  be  made  more  efficient  by  combining  them 


134  THERAPEUTIC  SPINAL  TREATMENT.       [CHAP.  VI. 

with  suitable  remedies  or  by  applying  the  remedies  on  the  spine  and 
covering  them  with  the  plaster.  The  California  Laurel,  a  new 
remedy,  the  value  of  which  is  not  known  to  the  profession,  is  one  of 
the  most  efficient  of  all  agents  for  restoring  spinal  energy,  especially 
in  paralytic  conditions.  Scutellaria  combines  with  its  soothing 
properties  a  restorative  influence  on  the  lower  half  of  the  spine. 
Almost  any  medicine  may  be  applied  on  the  spine  in  the  form  of  an 
embrocation  or  an  ointment. 

Sixth.  Counter-irritation  on  the  spine,  when  obstinate  chronic 
difficulties  resist  all  other  measures,  is  effected  by  mustard  plasters, 
cantharides,  ammonia,  and  concentrated  acetic  acid  —  also  by  moxa 
and  the  momentary  application  of  the  hot  metallic  button,  heated  to 
the  temperature  of  boiling  water,  for  the  removal  of  pain.  One  of 
the  most  powerful  of  all  counter-irritants,  for  the  removal  of  morbid 
conditions,  is  the  compound  tar-plaster,  or  irritating  plaster  of  the 
Eclectic  Dispensatory  ;  its  effect  is  slow  and  very  unpleasant,  but 
efficient.     Conditions  less  chronic  are  met  by  dry  cupping. 

25.  Paralysis  due  to  the  brain  affects  that  side  of  the  body  which  is 
opposite  the  cerebral  hemisphere  that  is  affected.  Hence  it  requires 
treatment  on  the  brain  where  the  cause  (softening  or  hemorrhage) 
is  located.  Treated  by  the  hand  it  requires  a  strong  operator,  and 
he  should  stimulate  the  cephalic  regions  on  the  spine  and  under  the 
axilla,  also  the  superior  posterior  or  hygienic  region  of  the  head, 
using  at  the  same  time  dispersive  upward  passes  from  the  cheeks 
and  under  jaw  to  the  crown  of  the  head.  Downward  manipulations 
on  the  back  of  the  neck  and  along  the  jugular  veins  will  be  very 
beneficial.  The  site  of  the  hemorrhage  will  probably  be  at  the  base 
of  the  middle  lobe,  near  the  upper  frontal  line  of  the  ear.  Hence 
dispersive  downward  passes  on  that  region  will  tend  to  promote 
absorption  and  check  any  irritation  or  inflammation.  Manual  treat- 
ment is  safe,  and  after  a  week  from  the  attack  a  mild  galvanic 
current  through  large  carbon  electrodes  or  sponges  might  be  passed 
through  the  affected  hemisphere  to  the  opposite  hand  or  shoulder 
blade,  or  the  cephalic  region  of  the  spine,  to  disperse  morbid  con- 
ditions. Faradism  should  not  be  used  in  such  cases.  The  hand 
should  be  applied  to  the  occipital  base,  where  it  covers  the  cere- 
bellum, and  to  the  hygienic  region  at  the  same  time,  but  we  should 
avoid  exciting  any  part  of  the  regions  anterior  to  the  ears.  Treat- 
ment of  the  spine  in  these  cases,  by  manipulation  and  percussion,  is 
a  beneficial  auxiliary  to  the  brain  treatment.  Nervauric  and  electric 
treatment  are  appropriate  in  all  cases  of  paralysis,  and  the  best 
results  are  produced  when  the  operator  administers  the  positive 
current  through  his  own  hands,  thus  combining  the  nervauric  and 
electric  powers. 


CHAPTER     VII. 

RELATION  OF  THE  BRAIN  TO  VITALITY  IN  ITS 
DIFFERENT  REGIONS. 

Division  of  the  brain  by  the  vertical  and  horizontal  lines  —  Rational  illustration  — 
Plan  of  the  human  constitution,  front  and  back,  above  and  below  the  ventricles  — 
Fundamental  law  of  direction  —  Action  of  basilar  organs  — Their  effect  on  the  body 
—  Coronal  organs  antagonistic  to  the  basilar — Effects  of  each — How  the  paralysis 
of  either  becomes  fatal  —  Superior  vitality  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain  — Ante- 
rior and  posterior  basilar  organs  —  Seats  of  vital  force  at  the  base  of  the  brain  —  The 
anterior  basilar  region  and  its  subdivisions  —  The  gastric  region  —  Seat  of  appetite  — 
The  love  of  stimulus,  effect  of  its  development — How  to  control  intemperance  — 
Medical  remedies  — The  moral  and  religious  cure  —  Effects  of  malaria  and  of  ani- 
mal food — Treatment  of  the  digestive  organs  through  the  brain — General  character 
of  the  antero-basilar  region  —  Calorification,  how  to  excite  it;  how  to  protect  it  — 
Effect  of  its  overaction  —  The  respiratory  region—  Signs  of  pulmonic  disease  in  the 
mouth — Region  of  Sensibility — Its  confirmation  by  Ferrier — The  organ  of  Lan- 
guage—  Heating  and  cooling  the  temples  —  Region  of  Somnolence  and  its  mental 
phenomena — Anterior  coronal  region — Temporal  region. 


The  brain  may  be  divided  by  a  vertical  line  through  the  ear  and  a 
horizontal  line  running  back  from  the  middle  of  the  forehead. 

The  vertical  line  separates  the  occipital  from  the  frontal  half, 
leaving  the  impelling  forces  in  the  occipital  half,  which  constitute 
physical  and  moral  power,  by  which  we  succeed  and  conquer,  while 
the  frontal  half  contains  the  physical,  moral,  and  intellectual  sensibil- 
ities, which  yield  to  the  mental  influence  of  others  and  the  influence 
of  physical  objects,  obstacles,  and  injuries.  Thz  predominance  of  the 
frontal  results  in  physical  and  moral  weakness,  amiability,  and  refine- 
ment, without  power  to  resist  disease,  exposure,  or  hostility.  The 
occipital  makes  the  positive,  and  the  frontal  the  negative  character  — 
one  the  leader,  the  other  the  follower.  The  occipital  character  was 
illustrated  in  the  crania  and  martial  career  of  the  New  Zealanders 
(an  equal  match  for  European  troops)  and  the  frontal  in  the  gentle, 
harmless  Peruvians  —  victims  of  Spanish  slaughter.  The  New  Zea- 
land crania  are  as  remarkable  for  occipital  development  as  the  Peru- 
vians are  for  occipital  deficiency  and  frontal  predominance. 

The  general  plan  of  the  human  constitution  places  power  in  the 
rear  and  sensibility  in  front.  The  senses  are  exercised  in  front,  and 
the  maximum  degree  of  sensibility  is  at  the  epigastrium,  where  a 
severe  blow  may  give  a  fatal  shock.  The  skin  in  front  is  more  sensi- 
tive than  at  the  back,  and  the  muscles  in  front  respond  more  readily 


136  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  [CHAP.    VII. 

to  electrical  excitement.  The  muscles  of  the  face  and  front  of  the 
neck  are  very  sensitive  to  electric  excitement ;  the  muscles  of  the 
back  are  relatively  much  less  sensitive,  and  the  muscles  of  the  pos- 
terior aspect  of  the  upper  and  lower  limbs  are  less  sensitive  than 
those  of  the  anterior  and  inner  aspect.  Beard  and  Rockwell  say  of 
the  head  :  "  In  health  the  head  is  very  sensitive  both  to  galvanization 
and  to  faradization,  in  all  parts  except  the  posterior.  In  health  the 
spine  is  but  little  sensitive  to  the  current." 

The  horizontal  line  divides  the  regions  of  the  brain  (below  the 
great  ventricles)  which  are  in  close  communication  with  the  body  (by 
the  ramifications  of  the  ascending  fibres  of  the  spinal  cord,  outspread 
in  the  crura,  thalami,  striata  and  cerebellum)  from  the  regions  above 
the  ventricles,  which  are  not  in  close  communication  with  the  body, 
but  are  directly  connected  with  each  other,  and  unitized  by  the  great 
commissure,  the  corpus  callosum,  which  connects  the  right  and  left 
halves  or  hemispheres. 

The  fundamental  law  of  cerebral  action  (which  will  be  fully  devel- 
oped in  the  volume  devoted  to  Pathognomy)  is  that  all  organs  act  in 
accordance  with  their  line  of  direction.  The  basilar  organs  (below 
the  ventricles)  act  upon  the  body,  impelling  all  its  vital  energies  and 
voluntary  actions,  and  by  this  action  they  expend  the  cerebral  ener- 
gies, producing  exhausting  and  destructive  effects.  Hence  their 
tendency  per  se  is  not  healthy  and  beneficial  in  a  physiological  sense, 
while  morally  they  produce  the  unbridled  sensuality,  selfishness,  and 
restless  violence  which,  in  predominance,  are  criminal  and  degrading. 
Their  influence  is  beneficial  only  when  acting  harmoniously  in  con- 
junction with  the  higher  powers.  The  passions  and  appetites  are 
essential  in  their  subordinate  places,  but  fatal  as  rulers,  being  alike 
ruinous  by  their  exhaustive  violence,  their  sensual  excess,  their 
incessant  agitation,  and  their  hostile  relations  to  our  fellow-beings 
and  to  all  supernal  influences. 

Nevertheless,  the  basilar  organs  have  been  regarded  as  the  seat  of 
animal  life,  and  surgeons  have  found  injuries  of  the  brain  more  fatal 
in  proportion  as  they  are  located  further  back  from  the  forehead  to 
the  base  of  the  occiput.  The  reason  of  this  is  that  the  basilar  organs 
are  the  organs  of  manifestation  of  soul  life  in  the  body,  without 
which  all  power  of  manifesting  life  and  volition  would  be  lost.  The 
muscles  would  cease  to  contract,  the  heart  to  beat,  the  lungs  to 
respire.  The  tendency  of  the  coronal  organs  perse  is  to  withdraw 
life  from  the  body  to  the  spirit,  the  immediate  effect  being  self-con- 
trol and  tranquillity,  and  ultimate  effect,  in  abnormal  excess,  trance 
and  death  of  the  body,  but  their  normal  action  sustains  the  activity 
of  the  brain  and  the  power  of  vitality. 


CHAP.    VII.]  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  I37 

Injuries  to  the  basilar  organs  are  fatal  because  they  sever  the  con- 
nection of  soul  and  body  by  depriving  the  body  of  that  influx  of 
energy  which  comes  from  the  brain,  thus  suspending  every  physio- 
logical process.  The  suspension  of  digestion  terminates  life  in  a  few 
weeks  by  taking  away  the  material  necessary  to  the  blood  and  the 
structure  of  the  organs;  the  suspension  of  circulation  terminates  it 
in  a  few  hours,  or  perhaps  in  a  few  minutes,  by  suspending  the  influ- 
ence of  oxygenated  blood ;  and  the  suspension  of  respiration  termin- 
ates life  in  a  few  minutes. 

The  isolation,  paralysis,  or  destruction  of  the  basilar  forces  suspends 
all  these  processes,  and  thus  arrests  life  in  the  body,  but  leaves  it 
perfect  in  the  soul  as  it  separates  from  the  body.  For  the  same 
reasons  injuries  to  the  base  of  the  skull  are  peculiarly  dangerous. 
Dr.  T.  H.  Manly,  an  experienced  New  York  surgeon,  says  of  fractures 
of  the  skull :  "  When  we  are  reasonably  assured  that  the  base  of  the 
skull  is  involved,  death  is  inevitable,  and  treatment  is  out  of  the 
question."  "Next  to  the  base  of  the  skull,  probably  a  fracture 
through  the  temporal  bone  is  the  most  fatal." — [Dr.  T.  H.  Manly, 
surgeon  to  Harlem  Hospital. 

Thus  the  action  of  either  the  coronal  or  the  basilar  region  of  the 
brain  alone,  while  the  opposite  region  is  more  or  less  paralyzed,  is 
fatal.  The  impairment  of  the  upper  region  of  the  brain  leaves  the 
animal  forces,  passions,  and  sensibilities  in  riotous  excess,  without 
sustaining  power,  resulting  in  disease,  exhaustion,  insanity,  and  death. 
Disease  or  softening  of  the  superior  organs  of  the  brain  is  fatal  in 
another  way  which  has  been  amply  illustrated  by  the  records  of  path- 
ology :  it  impairs  the  vitality  of  the  brain  and  thus  tends  to  paralysis, 
disease,  and  death.  The  cephalic  or  superior  region  sustains  the  brain 
and  thereby  sustains  life. 

As  the  superior  region  of  the  brain  is  the  source  of  beneficent 
influences  that  elevate  the  character  and  sustain  the  nervous  system, 
its  emanations  are  therefore  the  most  beneficent  that  proceed  from 
any  portion  of  the  body,  and  the  upper  surface  of  the  head  is  far 
more  effective  than  the  hand  in  conveying  hygienic  benefits  to  others 
by  direct  application.  Its  influence  is  always  soothing  and  delightful. 
That  influence  is  consequently  realized  by  the  scalp,  which  is  natur- 
ally a  healthy  region,  and  rapidly  recovers  from  injuries.  Dr.  T.  H. 
Manly,  surgeon  at  Harlem  Hospital,  N.  Y.,  says  that  "scalp  tissue  is 
very  prone  to  heal ;  when  there  is  no  septic  infection,  more  quickly 
than  any  other  in  the  body.  I  once  saw  this  well  illustrated  in  a  luna- 
tic, who,  when  alone,  first  by  pounding  his  forehead  against  the  edge 
of  an  iron  sink,  detached  the  scalp  anteriorly  from  ear  to  ear,  and 
then  tore  the  whole  down  over  the  back  of  his  neck,  before  discov- 


133  RELATION    OF    THE    BRATN    TO    VITALITY.  [CHAP.    VII. 

ered,  when  he  was  very  faint  from  loss  of  blood.  The  parts  were 
promptly  replaced,  and  he  made  a  good  recovery."  Though  the  head 
contains  organs  vital  to  life,  it  will  stand  battering  and  bruising  with 
greater  Impunity  than  any  other  part  of  the  body." 

The  loss*  or  exhaustion  of  the  basilar  region  while  the  upper  region 
is  active,  leaves  the  soul  in  full  development,  but  unable  to  act  upon 
and  vitalize  the  body,  the  death  of  which  must  follow,  the  brain  being 
impaired  by  the  lack  of  healthy  blood. 

The  cultivation  of  both  coronal  and  basilar  regions  is  therefore 
necessary,  and  as  the  physician  is  mainly  occupied  in  restoring  the 
bodily  organs  which  have  lost  their  vigor  or  their  texture,  he  is 
required  to  sustain  the  higher  organs,  which  are  the  source  of  brain 
power,  and  also  to  invigorate  the  basilar  organs.  The  latter  is  a 
large  part  of  the  duty  of  the  nervauric  healer,  and  he  is  frequently 
required  to  place  his  hands  on  base  of  the  brain  behind  the  ears,  to 
supply  the  amount  of  vital  power  which  the  enfeebled  brain  has 
ceased  to  yield.  In  doing  this  a  correct  knowledge  of  cerebral  organ- 
ology is  highly  important. 

The  basilar  region,  like  the  coronal,  is  divided  by  the  vertical  line 
through  the  ears  into  anterior  and  posterior  regions  —  the  posterior 
being  the  region  of  vigor  and  the  anterior  of  sensitive  impressibility.* 
Hence  the  application  of  the  hands  to  the  base  is  chiefly  made  on 
the  posterior  region.  This  produces  an  increase  of  life,  strength, 
circulation,  and  nutrition  throughout  the  person.  The  comfortable 
warmth,  the  increased  strength,  and  the  gradual  improvement  of 
every  function  make  this  a  very  agreeable  operation  to  the  patient- 
In  those  who  are  extremely  impressible,  the  basilar  excitement  may 
go  too  far  and  stimulate  restlessness,  or  the  violent  passions,  but  this 
seldom  occurs  with  patients,  and  is  counteracted  by  the  operator's 
presence  and  the  diffusive  influence  of  his  vitality.  The  posterior 
basilar  co-operate  with  the  posterior  superior  organs,  and  the  anterior 
basilar  with  the  anterior  superior  organs  of  the  amiable  sentiments. 
Hence  the  amiable  sentiments  tend  to  sensitive  weakness  and  the 
heroic  impulses  to  violence. 

The  vital  force  sustaining  the  muscular  system  is  specifically 
reached  at  the  organ  of  Vital  Force,  at  the  base  of  the  skull,  half-way 
between  the  mastoid  processes  (just  behind  the  ears)  and  the  median 
line.  On  the  median  line,  in  the  depression  extending  two  inches 
below  the  occipital  knob,  we  stimulate  a  vitality  which  has  more 
influence  on  the  nervous  than  the  muscular  system,  which  invigorates 

*  To  this  remark  there  is  an  exception  at  the  lower  part  of  the  face,  from  the  nose 
to  the  bottom  of  the  chin  —  the  regions  of  Respiration  and  Calorification, —  the 
prominence  of  which  is  an  indication  of  a  vigorous  temperament.  The  organ* 
which  this  region  represents  are  rather  behind  than  before  the  middle  of  the  base. 


CHAP.    VII.]  RELATION    OF    THE    BRALN    TO    VITALITY.  1 39 

the  senses  and  the  sexual  system,  and  is  especially  beneficial  to  the 
eyes.  To  apply  the  fingers  of  one  hand  at  this  spot,  and  the  fingers 
of  the  other  across  the  brow  immediately  over  the  eyes,  overcomes 
weakness  of  the  eyes  and  resists  their  diseases.  (The  reader  will 
understand,  of  course,  that  such  remarks  apply  to  the  impressible 
temperament.) 

I  do  not  propose  tc  give  a  full  statement  of  the  physiological  organ- 
ology of  the  brain  at  present,  but  merely  to  give  certain  localities 
easily  learned,  and  often  used  in  nervauric  treatment,  through  the 
head. 

The  anterior  basilar  region  (antagonistic  to  the  upper  occipital)  has 
many  localities  that  should  be  understood.  Immediately  before  the 
cavity  of  the  ear  is  the  region  of  the  gastric  appetites  (marked  on  the 
phrenological  busts  as  the  organ  of  Alimentiveness,  and  erroneously 
extended  above  the  zygoma  or  cheek-bone),  corresponding  to  the 
place  where  the  upper  end  of  the  jawbone  works  in  its  glenoid  cavity. 
The  stimulation  of  this  locality  excites  a  feeling  of  hunger,  which 
becomes  at  length  debilitating  if  not  satisfied,  but  its  stimulation, 
when  the  stomach  is  occupied  by  undigested  food,  relieves  the  oppres- 
sion more  than  a  dose  of  pepsin,  and  even  relieves  flatulence.  We 
sometimes  hear  the  effect  in  a  few  moments.  In  my  early  experi- 
ments in  1841,  the  subject,  Mr.  V.,  was  made  hungry  enough  to  begin 
eating  a  tallow  candle. 

The  intensity  of  hunger,  however,  is  not  always  proportional  to  the 
desire  or  demand  for  food.  The  demand  is  sometimes  eager  when 
the  depressing  effect  of  hunger  is  not  felt,  and  the  depressing  effect 
is  sometimes  great  when  the  attraction  or  impulse  to  take  food  is 
small.  Hence  if  we  would  invigorate  the  stomach  most  effectively, 
it  may  be  necessary  to  stimulate  the  posterior  basilar  region  also, 
which  gives  the  impulses  and  desires.  What  I  have  been  teaching 
in  this  respect  has  been  strongly  corroborated  by  the  experiments  of 
Ferrier  on  the  brains  of  monkeys.  "  After  removal  or  disorganiza- 
tion of  the  occipital  lobes,  the  appetite  for  food  is  abolished  "  (says 
Ferrier),  "  the  animals  refusing  that  which  they  formerly  exhibited  a 
great  liking  for.  This  I  have  tested  in  various  animals  and  various 
ways." 

The  posterior  portion  of  the  Gastric  or  Alimentive  organ,  immedi- 
ately at  the  cavity  of  the  ear,  is  the  portion  which  makes  the  drunkard 
when  it  controls,  and  which  originates  the  craving  for  stimulants  in 
common  use,  such  as  tea  and  coffee,  mustard,  spices,  etc.  When  I 
stimulate  my  patients  in  this  region  they  desire  a  stimulus  stronger 
in  proportion  to  the  excitement,  until  even  a  delicate  lady  of  temper- 
ate  habits  will    delight  in    the  strongest   brandy  or  whiskey.     The 


140  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  [CHAP.    VII. 

depressing  influence  of  this  organ  is  counterbalanced  by  the 
stimulus  taken,  which  restores  equilibrium  and  does  not  intoxicate 
unless  it  exceeds  the  natural  demand.  Hence  old  topers  show  no 
intoxication  after  taking  their  half-pint  of  alcoholic  liquids,  for  the 
same  reason  that  the  man  depressed  by  the  bite  of  a  rattlesnake 
shows  no  stimulation  after  taking  a  pint  of  whiskey.  But  persons  in 
whom  this  organ  is  small,  or  who  are  ruled  by  a  great  preponderance 
of  the  coronal  region,  are  easily  intoxicated,  and  this  class  are  most 
rapidly  destroyed  by  intemperance.  When  one  is  already  under  the 
influence  of  alcoholic  liquids,  the  organ  of  Love  of  Stimulus  should 
be  excited  to  promote  sobriety,  by  counteracting  the  intoxication,  for 
the  same  reason  that  we  excite  the  gastric  organ  when  overloaded 
with  food. 

To  counteract  the  habit  of  intemperance,  the  opposite  region  of 
the  brain,  which  is  a  region  of  temperance,  cheerfulness,  and  forti- 
tude, should  be  stimulated.  In  the  impressible  subject  this  may  be 
done  by  the  hand,  and  the  stimulus  of  this  region  destroys  the  appe- 
tite for  alcoholic  stimulation.  If  this  be  done  by  any  method  which 
effectually  rouses  the  higher  moral  sentiments,  intemperance  will  be 
conquered ;  and  this  has  been  done  extensively  in  the  inebriate 
asylums  of  New  York  and  Philadelphia,  which  rely  upon  religious 
influence. 

Tonic  medicines  necessarily  overcome  this  depression  and  rouse 
the  moral  and  physical  energies,  taking  away  the  appetite  which 
originates  the  desire.  Hydrastis  is  one  of  the  most  efficient  and 
wholesome  tonics  for  this  purpose,  and  when  I  recommended  it 
forty  years  ago  I  heard  favorable  reports  of  its  effects  from  my 
pupils.  Quassia  has  also  been  successfully  used  ;  so  have  the 
sulphate  of  cinchona,  strychnia,  and  some  preparations  of  gold,  all  of 
which  are  powerful  tonics.  Berberis  vulgaris  (the  barberry)  is  also 
an  excellent  tonic  for  this  purpose,  and  very  wholesome:  Balmony 
and  cypripedium  may  also  be  used  with  benefit,  and  coca  is  also  useful 
in  sustaining  the  nervous  system. 

As  the  drunkard's  thirst  is  dependent  on  the  basilar  region,  and 
controlled  by  the  coronal,  it  seldom  appears  among  women,  and  it  is 
very  effectively  resisted  by  religious  influence.  The  restoration  of 
drunkards  in  religious  asylums  in  New  York  and  Philadelphia  has 
been  marvellous,  and  as  intemperance  is  associated  with  the  basilar 
organs,  its  effective  conquest  can  be  made  only  by  cultivating  the 
moral  nature.  As  long  as  men  indulge  the  violent  and  selfish 
passions  they  will  have  the  corresponding  appetites.  Moral  educa- 
tion alone  can  abolish  intemperance.  A  healthful  atmosphere  con- 
tributes to  temperance  as  a  malarious  one  contributes  to  intemper- 


CHAP.    VII.]  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  I4I 

ance.  Animal  food,  which  stimulates  the  base  of  the  brain,  favors 
intemperance,  while  a  vegetarian  diet,  and  especially  the  use  of  fruit, 
has  the  opposite  effect. 

The  stomach  and  bowels  may  be  treated  through  the  brain,  the 
gastric  and  abdominal  tract  being  located  along  the  course  of  the 
lower  jaw,  i.  e.,  we  reach  the  organs  through  this  external  locality. 
But  in  overcoming  dyspepsia,  constipation,  etc.,  I  prefer  the  treat- 
ment on  the  body  according  to  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy,  al- 
though the  head  treatment  is  highly  beneficial  when  the  impressi-* 
bility  is  marked. 

The  general  character  of  the  antero-basilar  region,  as  already 
stated,  is  sensibility  to  impressions  or  experiments,  and  a  tendency 
to  nervous  expenditure  of  vital  force.  This  sensitive  excitability  is 
antagonistic  to  the  vital  power,  and  renders  us  so  susceptible  of 
painful,  exhausting,  overpowering  impressions  as  to  become  the  great 
inlet  of  disease.  Extreme  sensibility  cannot  exist  without  extreme 
liability  to  injury.  Hence  the  anterior  inferior  region  is  the  region 
of  morbid  capacities,  and  requires  to  be  overbalanced  by  the  occipital 
half  of  the  brain  to  make  a  strong  and  hardy  constitution. 

But  this  region  is  not  necessarily  morbid.  It  gives  immense  capa- 
city for  enjoyment  by  the  physical  and  mental  sensibilities,  and  if 
no  injurious  impression  is  made  its  action  is  healthful,  though  sen- 
sual and  relaxing ;  but  no  one  can  pass  through  life  without  encoun- 
tering many  injurious  influences,  physical  and  moral,  and  realizing 
his  capacities  for  disorder  of  body  and  mind.  Irregularities  of  cli- 
mate, exposure,  malaria,  unsuitable  food,  excess  or  privation,  anxiety, 
anger,  disappointment,  etc.,  are  inevitable,  and  can  be  overcome  only 
by  the  occipital  energies.  Hence  we  perceive  that  the  habitual 
indulgence  in  luxury  and  sensual  pleasure  undermines  the  constitu- 
tion and  lays  the  foundation  of  disease. 

The  morbid  tendency  of  the  antero-basilar  region  culminates  at 
the  anterior  end  of  the  middle  lobe  —  against  the  sphenoid  bone, 
behind  the  malar  bone,  which  gives  prominence  to  the  cheeks  below 
and  behind  the  eyes.  This  is  the  locality  of  that  irritable  sensibility 
which  is  easily  injured,  and  gives  the  greatest  liability  to  disease  ; 
and  as  its  excessive  action  results  in  disease,  it  is  marked  "  Disease," 
and  its  stimulation  to  any  great  extent  is  debilitating  and  injurious. 
Hence  the  bracing  effect  of  the  cool  breeze  striking  the  face,  and  of 
manipulations  in  which  the  fingers  pass  rapidly  and  lightly  backward 
and  upward  over  this  region  toward  the  crown  of  the  head  —  the 
method  generally  adopted  in  relieving  debilitated  and  oppressed  con- 
ditions. Passes  made  in  the  opposite  direction  are  quieting,  relax- 
ing, debilitating,  and  somewhat  soporific  ;  sponging  the  cheeks  and 


142  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  [CHAP.    VIL 

temples  with  warm  or  hot  water  has  a  beneficial  effect  in  feverish, 
excitable,  nervous,  or  depressed  conditions. 

There  is  a  lower  grade  of  vitality  in  structures  adjacent  to  the 
sensitive  anterior  base  of  the  middle  lobe  and  the  corresponding 
location  of  the  body,  the  hypochondria  especially.  Hence  the  dia- 
phragm and  the  tongue  are  the  first  muscles  after  death  to  lose  their 
electric  contractility,  and  next  come  the  muscles  of  the  face.  For 
the  same  reason  diseases  in  the  throat,  such  as  diphtheria,  have  a 
very  prostrating  influence  over  the  whole  constitution. 

The  region  of  the  anterior  base,  which  we  reach  below  the  jaws, 
has  the  same  relation  to  the  mental  as  that  at  the  cheek-bones  to  the 
physical  health.  It  gives  that  degree  of  excitability  which  is  easily 
exhausted  and  easily  excited  to  frenzy. 

Hence  it  produces  liabilities  to  melancholy,  idiocy,  and  mania, 
the  excitement  running  beyond  the  control  of  the  will,  and  becoming 
injurious  to  the  brain  and  the  mind.  The  idiotic  tendency  is  located 
anteriorly,  the  violent  posteriorly,  and  the  melancholic  superiorly 
and  on  the  jaw.  The  position  of  the  insane  region  is  in  the  interior 
portion  of  the  base  of  the  brain,  near  the  median  line. 

The  location  of  the  insane  and  morbid  tendencies  at  the  base  of 
the  middle  lobe  is  probably  the  reason  that  the  morbid  conditions  of 
the  brain  substance  are  more  frequently  found  there  than  in  any 
other  part. 

A  temporary  dementia  or  mania  is  easily  produced  in  impressible 
subjects  by  stimulating  the  insane  region.  Conditions  of  mental 
depression  and  disorder  are  relieved  by  dispersive  manipulations, 
upward  and  backward,  over  this  region,  or  downward  to  the  shoul- 
ders. The  downward  manipulation  is  effective  in  clearing  the  frontal 
brain.  The  brain  being  supplied  by  two  great  arteries  and  veins,  the 
carotids  and  jugulars,  at  the  side  of  the  neck,  and  the  vertebral  arteries 
and  veins  at  the  back,  its  circulation  is  promptly  affected  by  down- 
ward manipulations  on  the  side  and  back  of  the  neck,  which  tend  to 
carry  off  venous  and  introduce  arterial  blood. 

Hence  I  usually  begin  the  treatment  of  headache  by  downward 
manipulations  on  the  back  of  the  neck,  followed  by  similar  manipula- 
tions on  the  side,  and  by  dispersive  passes,  generally  backward,  on 
the  spot  where  the  pain  is  located. 

The  upper  posterior  region,  including  the  crown  of  the  head,  extend- 
ing from  right  to  the  left  posterior  angle  of  the  parietal  bone  (marked 
on  the  old  phrenological  busts  as  Cautiousness),  is  the  region  antagonis- 
tic to  disease  and  insanity,  where  the  application  of  the  hand  produces 
the  most  beneficial  and  restorative  effects  on  body  and  mind. 

Through  the  chin  we  operate  on  the  medulla  oblongata  and  stimulate 
the  production  of  heat.     Hence  this  locality  is  marked  Calorification. 


CHAP.    VII.]  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  I43 

We  know  by  Chossat's  experiments  in  vivisection  that  the  pro- 
duction of  heat  in  the  body  depends  upon  the  transmission  of  innerva- 
tion, downwards  from  the  brain,  through  the  spinal  cord  to  the  gan- 
glionic nerves  of  the  abdomen. 

When  we  place  one  hand  around  the  chin,  and  the  other  around 
the  occipital  base,  the  circulation  and  evolution  of  heat  are  at  once 
increased  and  directed  downwards.  Thus  we  warm  the  lower  limbs 
and  break  up  chills. 

The  calorific  power  being  thus  located,  enables  us  to  understand 
why  a  little  woollen  clothing  around  the  chin  and  neck  is  more  pro- 
tective to  our  warmth  than  five  times  the  amount  elsewhere.  When 
this  region  is  left  unprotected,  and  cold  penetrates  the  base  of  the 
brain,  the  power  of  resistance  is  thus  overcome,  and  sleep  follows  which 
ends  in  death.  Calorification  is  one  of  the  exciting  and  wakeful 
faculties.  Hence  the  cold  weather  which  stimulates  our  heat-forming 
power  gives  greater  clearness  and  wakeful  energy  to  the  mind,  and  hot 
weather,  which  diminishes  calorification,  promotes  drowsiness.  The 
hottest  part  of  the  day  is  given  to  the  siesta  in  warm  climates.  For 
the  same  reason,  whenever  intense  cold  penetrates  the  base  of  the 
brain  and  diminihess  calorification,  the  drowsy  influence  is  felt,  which 
is  a  dangerous  condition,  as  it  shows  that  the  power  of  resistance  to 
cold  is  disappearing. 

The  overaction  of  Calorification  in  mental  ardor,  excitement,  and 
fever  is  exhausting,  like  that  of  all  other  antero-basilar  organs,  when- 
ever it  is  more  than  sufficient  to  counteract  the  effects  of  external 
cold  and  exalts  the  temperature  of  the  body.  For  the  same  reason 
hot  climates  produce  a  more  excitable  and  less  energetic  or  enduring 
constitution,  the  effect  of  heat  being  to  stimulate  the  anterior  sensi- 
tive region  of  the  brain,  developing  more  delicacy  and  refinement  than 
strength. 

If  the  hand,  in  covering  the  chin,  extends  up  and  around  the  mouth 
the  effect  is  seen  in  increased  respiration. 

The  external  indications  of  the  respiratory  tract  are  around  the 
mouth  and  nose,  through  which  respiration  occurs.  Prominence  of 
this  region  is  a  sign  of  greater  respiratory  power.  The  portion  just 
below  the  mouth  is  indicative  of  deep  respiration,  and  is  associated 
with  greater  force  of  impulse  and  violence  in  coughing.  The  sym- 
pathy of  the  lungs  with  this  region  is  shown  by  many  facts  —  such  as 
the  brick-red  line  along  the  front  teeth  and  gums  which  is  developed 
in  pneumonia,  and  the  facility  with  which  some  persons  catch  cold 
after  shaving  around  the  mouth.  I  have  been  told  by  some  that  they 
wear  their  beards  rather  than  shave,  for  the  sake  of  this  protection. 

The  application  of  the  hands  on  the  respiratory  region   stimulates 


^44  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  [CHAP.     VII. 

the  lungs  and  the  respiratory  processes.  Applied  just  below  the 
mouth  they  excite  depth  of  respiration.  The  depth  of  respiration  is 
usually  increased  in  exciting  Calorification. 

The  antero-basilar  region  also  contains,  just  above  Disease,  the 
organ  of  Sensibility,  which  gives  power  of  sensation  to  the  opposite 
side  of  the  body,  according  to  the  law  of  decussation  which  governs 
the  brain  in  its  connection  with  the  body. 

The  region  of  Sensibility  connects  anteriorly  with  the  organ  of 
Language,  discovered  by  Dr.  Gall  and  confirmed  by  the  observations 
of  pathologists,  who  neglected  his  discovery  until  confirmed  by 
numerous  dissections  of  morbid  brains. 

My  own  discovery  of  the  organ  of  Sensibility  fifty  years  ago  has 
been  confirmed  by  the  cruel  experiment  of  Dr.  Ferrier  upon  a 
monkey,  in  which,  by  injuring  the  base  of  the  middle  lobe,  he  de- 
stroyed the  sense  of  feeling  on  the  opposite  side.  The  location  in 
the  monkey,  however,  appeared  to  be  a  little  farther  back  than  in 
man. 

The  close  connection  of  Sensibility  and  Language  in  the  brain 
with  the  source  of  voluntary  muscular  action  in  the  corpoi'a  sti'iata 
explains  the  association  of  the  paralyses  of  motion,  sensibility,  and 
language  —  paralytics  often  losing  the  power  of  speech  or  command 
of  language. 

Dispersive  passes  upward  and  backward  over  the  temples  not  only 
relieve  morbid  conditions,  but  diminish  sensitiveness  and  tend  to 
remove  pain.  They  are  especially  beneficial  in  morbid  conditions  of 
the  eyes  and  intolerance  of  light.  Heat  and  excitement  accu- 
mulated in  this  region  produce  a  great  increase  of  sensibility  and 
impressibility,  and  sometimes  develop  the  mesmeric  somnambulism. 

The  tendency  to  dreamy,  somnolent  conditions,  somnambulism, 
somniloquence,  and  clairvoyant  trance  is  connected  with  the  locality 
about  an  inch  behind  the  brow,  marked  Somnolence,  by  touching 
which  a  few  minutes  in  the  impressible  we  cause  the  quivering  and 
closing  of  the  eyelids  which  precedes  a  dreamy  sleep  or  clairvoyant 
trance.  This  is  a  good  method  of  inviting  the  approach  of  sleep  or 
of  making  intellectual  experiments  on  the  intellectual  powers  and 
sympathies  developed  in  that  condition,  in  which  psychometric  per- 
ception and  intuition,  trance,  and  even  clairvoyance  may  occur. 

In  the  upper  half  of  the  brain,  the  anterior  portion  antagonizes  the 
occipito-basilar  region,  producing  a  gentle,  harmless,  unselfish  nature, 
and  moderating  the  violence  of  the  passions  and  vehemence  of  the 
desires.  In  nervauric  treatment,  this  region  is  chiefly  useful  for 
soothing  purposes,  brightening  the  intellect,  elevating  the  sentiments, 
and  promoting  contentment,  or  improving  the  moral  nature  and 
friendly  sentiments. 


CHAP.    VII.]  RELATION    OF    THE    BRAIN    TO    VITALITY.  I45 

The  lateral  portion,  along  the  temporal  arch,  is  the  proper  location 
for  placing  the  hands  to  subdue  restlessness,  loquacity,  and  sexual  im- 
pulses. The  most  posterior  portion  of  the  arch,  vertically  above  the 
ear,  is  the  location  for  resisting  insane  and  hysterical  conditions  — 
the  region  marked  Sanity. 

There  is  a  remarkable  coincidence  and  similarity  between  the 
organs  on  the  median  line  and  those  located  on  a  parallel  line, 
beginning  at  the  external  angle  of  the  brow,  and  running  along  the 
ridge  between  the  lateral  and  superior  surfaces  of  the  cranium. 
Hence  breadth  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain  compensates  for  the 
lack  of  height. 

The  lateral  aspect  of  each  hemisphere  corresponds  in  character 
and  coincides  in  action  with  the  lateral  aspect  of  the  other  hemi- 
sphere, which  looks  in  the  same  direction  —  the  right  coinciding  with 
the  right  and  the  left  with  the  left.  Thus  the  interior  or  median 
aspect  of  one  hemisphere  coincides  with  the  exterior  aspect  of  the 
other,  and  this  parallelism  or  similarity  assists  us  in  the  study  of  the 
median  convolutions. 


CHAPTER     VIII. 

ZONAL  ARRANGEMENT  AND  THERAPEUTIC  TREAT- 
MENT OF  THE  BRAIN. 

Explanation  of  Zonal  Arrangement,  with  illustrations  —  Its  indications  of  consti- 
tutional development  —  General  law  of  functions  —  Vertical  Zone  of  Excitability  — 
Treatment  on  the  cephalic  region  —  Treatment  of  the  heart — Of  the  thoracic 
region  and  of  the  liver  —  The  Gastric  and  Abdominal  region,  and  the  Crural  —  The 
Morbid  Zone  explained —  Hygienic  caution,  and  curious  illustrations  — Relation  of 
disease  to  the  brain  —  Treatment  of  the  Crural  region  —  The  Sexual  region  — Treat- 
ment of  special  functions  —  Health  and  disease — Sleep  and  wakefulness — The 
ideal  powers  —  General  vigor  —  Feverish  conditions — Mental  soundness  —  Warmth 
—  Mental  discipline  —  Nature  of  nervauric  treatment. 


The  zonal  arrangement  of  the  brain  is  a  necessary  consequence  of 
the  laws  of  Pathognomy.  Our  review  of  the  spinal  system  shows 
that  as  the  organs  of  the  body  occupy  successive  zones,  their  control- 
ling centres  in  the  spinal  system  are  necessarily  in  similar  successive 
order,  viz.,  the  cephalic,  pulmonic,  cardiac,  hepatic,  gastric,  abdomi- 
nal, pelvic,  and  crural  — the  lumbar  and  sacral  regions  being  at  the 
same  time  abdominal,  pelvic,  and  crural,  as  the  superior  region  is  at 
the  same  time  cephalic,  brachial,  and  thoracic  —  the  internal  visceral 
organs  being  associated  with  the  external  muscular,  in  the  spinal 
functions,  and  a  similar  arrangement  being  apparent  in  the  brain  — 
the  visceral  and  the  energetic  faculties  being  on  the  same  plane  or  in 
the  same  zone  —  as  in  the  spinal  column  they  occupy  the  same 
segments. 

The  arrangement  is  so  clearly  exhibited  on  the  map  that  we  need 
only  to  grow  familiar  with  the  locations  to  understand  their  treat- 
ment, guided  by  certain  general  principles. 

Each  cerebral  zone  indicated  on  the  map  tends  to  direct  the  vital 
forces  according  to  its  name,  and  gives  prominence  to  the  region  it 
represents.  This  is  its  direct  physiological  influence  on  the  constitu- 
tion. 

But  aside  from  this  direct  physiological  influence,  each  cerebral 
locality  has  its  psychic  function,  and  this  psychic  function  compels 
the  same  physiological  action  which  is  promoted  by  its  direct  influ- 
ence ;  and  this  wonderful  combination  of  psychic  and  physiological 
influences,  by  a  perfect  but  simple  and  intelligible  law,  is  one  of  the 
grandest  illustrations  of  divine  wisdom. 


CHAP.    VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  I47 

To  illustrate  this  remark,  all  the  functions  of  the  organs  in  the 
cephalic  zone  are  of  a  cephalic  tendency.  They  increase  the  vitality 
and  power  of  the  brain  by  the  exercise  of  their  functions  (such  as 
Spirituality,  Religion,  Integrity,  Love,  Hope,  Serenity,  Fortitude, 
Energy,  Health,  Sublimity,  Tranquillity,  Sanity,  Heroism,  Dignity, 
Firmness,  and  Moral  Ambition)  and  consequently  produce  a  more 
perfect  and  active  life.  In  the  Gastric  and  A bdominal  zones  we  have 
the  selfish,  restless,  violent,  and  gloomy  passions,  which  stimulate  the 
appetites  and  promote  intemperate  indulgence,  while  they  rouse  all 
the  muscular  energy  of  the  lower  limbs.  Thus  do  the  psychic  facul- 
ties concur  with  the  physiological  organs  they  stimulate  through  the 
brain.  The  unity  and  harmony  of  the  human  constitution  are  no- 
where more  clearly  perceived  than  when  we  study  the  psychic  powers 
in  all  their  phenomena,  and  trace  their  effects  on  the  constitution. 
But  this  is  a  vast  study,  which  can  be  illustrated  only  in  the  volume 
of  Anthropology. 

To  comprehend  the  zonal  arrangements  for  therapeutic  purposes, 
we  need  only  apply  the  general  laws  of  cerebral  science  —  under- 
standing that  each  zone  uses  and  stimulates  its  own  region  of  the 
body.  We  may  examine  the  development  of  the  head,  to  see  what 
organs  predominate  in  the  constitution  or  which  are  deficient.  Thus 
if  the  head  be  very  broad  and  high  at  the  cephalic  zone  and  very 
small  in  the  crural,  we  know  that  animal  life  and  muscular  energies 
are  below  par,  and  that  the  predominant  action  of  the  brain  in  its 
upper  and  anterior  regions  may  diminish  still  more  the  basilar 
energy.  Hence,  there  is  probably  a  failure  in  the  muscular  energy 
and  in  the  nutrition.  The  body  is  apt  to  be  imperfectly  developed 
or  lean,  and  the  muscular  powers  weak,  though  the  nervous  energies 
may  be  strong.  On  the  contrary,  when  the  crural  region  is  large  we 
have  a  robust  physical  development,  muscular  energy,  and  in  some 
cases  stoutness  or  corpulence.  If  the  cephalic  region  be  proportion- 
ally small  or  imperfectly  developed  —  there  is  less  mental  and  moral 
control,  and  a  greater  tendency  to  exhaustion  of  the  nervous  system 
and  all  forms  of  nervous  disorder,  as  well  as  moral  irregularities. 

If  the  Gastric  and  Abdominal  zones  are  defective  in  development, 
there  will  probably  be  great  feebleness  or  inactivity  in  the  digestive 
organs  —  with  appetites  feeble  and  easily  controlled,  and  constitu- 
tional temperance. 

If  there  be  great  narrowness  or  lack  of  development  at  the  Hepatic 
zone,  the  liver  will  be  found  inactive,  and  torpor  of  the  liver  is  a 
probable  consequence. 

If  the  Cardiac  zone  be  largely  developed  we  shall  have  a  strong  cir- 
culation with  the  consequent  excitability  and  energy  of  temperament, 


14^  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  [CHAP.    VIII. 

and  a  greater  passional  energy  than  is  desirable,  which  will  be  absent 
when  the  Cardiac  zone  is  moderate. 

If  the  Thoracic  zone  be  large,  it  will  give  the  temperament  a  bright- 
ness and  activity,  less  restless  and  turbulent  than  that  which  comes 
from  the  lower  organs,  but  less  calm  and  self-controlled  than  the 
cephalic  temperament.  A  deep  cerebellum  and  full  development  at 
the  cephalic  region  of  the  spine  or  across  the  shoulders,  would  indi- 
cate great  and  sustained  muscular  strength. 

These  remarks  are  not  sufficient  to  guide  one  in  a  physiological 
examination  which  requires  a  knowledge  of  all  the  organs,  but  will 
serve  to  explain  the  significance  of  the  zones.  The  subject  is  so 
complicated  as  to  require  a  complete  exposition  of  the  brain  for  its 
proper  understanding,  but  an  approximate  conception  may  be  realized 
by  dividing  the  occiput  into  three  regions,  corresponding  to  the  upper 
dorsal,  the  lower  dorsal,  and  the  lumbar  and  sacral  regions  of  the 
spinal  column.  Each  of  these  regions  has  its  correlative  and  co- 
operative region  before  it,  which  it  sustains  in  action.  (See  pages  76 
and  159.) 

The  general  law  of  the  brain  is  that  organs  have  a  more  refined, 
delicate,  intellectual  character  as  they  approach  the  front,  and  a  more 
energetic,  reactive  character  toward  the  back ;  also  that  they  have  a 
more  refined,  lovely,  pleasing,  spiritual  character  as  they  ascend,  and 
a  more  gross,  selfish,  repulsive,  and  violent  character  as  they  descend. 

Hence,  when  we  look  at  the  zones,  we  find  the  energy  of  each 
organ  indicated  by  the  posterior,  and  the  delicacy  by  the  anterior 
part  of  the  zone  ;  while  on  the  side  of  the  head,  between  the  front 
and  back,  there  is  an  excitability  which  gives  activity  without  perma- 
nent power,  and  in  front  there  is  a  capacity  for  manifestation  that 
only  exhausts,  and  requires  to  be  compensated  by  the  repose  of  sleep. 

Looking  along  the  side  head,  from  the  ear  up,  we  easily  recognize 
the  excitable  activity  of  each  organ,  but  we  must  look  further  back 
for  its  vital  force.  Thus  along  the  whole  side  of  the  head  and  body 
we  have  a  longitudinal  and  vertical  segment  of  excitability  for  all  the 
organs,  intermediate  between  the  exhaustive  delicacy  of  the  front 
and  the  enduring  power  of  the  back,  upon  which  latter,  as  already 
stated,  the  curative  processes  of  nervauric  healing  are  chiefly  effec- 
tive, and  to  which  galvanic  currents  carry  the  energy  that  develops 
life  and  strength  ;  as  has  been  shown  by  Onimus  and  Legros. 

There  is  so  little  physiological  utility  for  the  healer  in  the  anterior 
regions,  that  I  generally  present  the  zonal  arrangement  of  the  head 
only  to  the  line  of  activity  or  excitability,  without  carrying  forward 
the  zones  to  the  regions  of  exhaustion,  of  which  the  most  complete 
and  pernicious  is  at  the  anterior  end  of  the  middle  lobe,  at  which  we 
locate  the  organ  of  Disease. 


CHAP.    VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  I49 

When  the  nervauric  physician  would  treat  the  brain  he  applies  his 
hands  upon  each  of  these  zones  to  invigorate  corresponding  organs, 
as  he  might,  if  he  had  control  of  circumstances,  invigorate  them  by 
the  exercise  of  the  organs  in  the  natural  way;  for  example,  he  might 
invigorate  the  heart,  not  by  stimulating  with  the  hands  the  cardiac 
regions  of  physical  courage,  but  by  placing  the  patient  in  a  position 
which  would  require  the  exercise  of  physical  courage.  He  might 
invigorate  the  refined  action  of  the  brain,  not  by  placing  his  hands- 
on  the  region  of  Reverence  and  Sublimity,  but  by  placing  him  in 
grand  scenery  or  cathedral  scenes  which  would  rouse  those  faculties.. 

I  present  the  zonal  treatment  of  the  constitution  through  the  brain 
as  an  important  adjunct  to  healing  on  the  body,  but  not  as  a  complete 
statement  of  cephalic  healing,  which  requires  minute  knowledge  of 
the  cerebral  organs,  nor  as  an  exact  exposition  of  Anthropology. 

Proceeding  upon  the  proposition  that  energy  is  a  posterior  quality 
—  a  quality  of  the  occiput, —  the  healer  would  place  his  hands  on  the 
anterior  part  of  the  cephalic  zone,  above  and  a  trifle  in  front  of  the 
ear,  when  he  wishes  to  give  a  stimulus  to  cerebral  activity  without 
calling  forth  its  strongest  capacity.  The  calm,  emotional  thought 
thus  elicited  at  Reverence,  Sublimity,  and  Tranquillity  is  a  pleasant 
condition,  but  is  not  the  strongest  display  of  brain  power.  Moving 
his  hands  further  back,  he  elicits  the  influence  of  Sanity,  which  is 
closely  analogous  to  that  of  Firmness.  This  faculty  gives  a  strength 
of  mind  and  stability  of  brain,  tenacity  of  will  and  power  of  concen- 
tration which  resist  all  the  exciting,  depressing,  and  deranging  influ- 
ences from  which  insanity  comes.  Magnanimity,  a  little  further 
back,  gives  still  greater  positive  strength  of  mind,  and  from  these 
two  organs  across  to  the  median  line  we  find  still  more  active  sources 
of  cerebral  power  in  Cheerfulness,  Energy,  Heroism,  Firmness, 
Sense  of  Honor,  Approbativeness,  Oratory,  Ambition,  Self-Suffi- 
ciency, Dignity,  and  Self-Reliance  or  Self-Confidence. 

Under  the  influence  of  these  organs  he  is  not  a  passive,  calm 
thinker  or  listener,  but  feels  a  disposition  and  has  the  power  to 
impress  others  with  his  own  thoughts,  and  thinks  with  an  energy 
and  brilliance  which  is  impressive. 

As  in  the  cephalic  zone,  so  in  each  zone  activity  is  frontal  and 
power  occipital.  Each  organ  of  the  body  may  be  roused  by  its  cere- 
bral zone  ;  and  hence  the  entire  occipital  region  furnishes  a  rousing 
energy  for  the  whole  person,  whether  stimulated  by  the  nervauric 
hand  or  by  the  natural  circumstances  that  rouse  our  energy,  ambi- 
tion, courage,  passions,  and  appetites. 

When  the  healer  is  familiar  with  the  zones,  he  has  a  simple  task  in 
cerebral  treatment  to  give  the  organs  excitement  or  stimulation,  if 


I50  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  [CHAP.     VI J  I. 

torpid,  through  the  lateral  section,  the  vertical  zone  of  excitability, 
and  to  reinforce  them,  if  lacking  in  power,  by  the  occipital  portion  of 
their  zone. 

The  heart,  for  example,  may  be  roused  by  the  excitability  in  the 
vertical  zone,  just  in  front  of  the  ear  (Cardiac  zone);  but  it  is  very 
seldom  indeed  that  any  such  excitement  is  desirable.  The  increased 
rapidity  and  force  of  its  action  produced  in  that  way  is  like  that  pro- 
duced by  alarming  or  exciting  scenes  or  dangers,  and  would,  as  a 
general  rule,  be  quite  exhausting  if  carried  far.  But  the  increased 
vigor  of  action  produced  in  the  occipital  part  of  the  zone  by  Business 
Energy,  Adhesiveness,  Aggressiveness,  Combativeness,  and  Love  of 
Power,  is  not  of  that  exhausting  character,  and,  if  not  carried  to 
excess,  would  be  very  beneficial  in  a  debilitated  state  of  the  heart, 
which  is  very  common  —  a  state  of  dilation  in  which  it  is  expanded 
and  its  muscular  coat  thinned  (especially  on  the  right  side), —  a  con- 
dition especially  frequent  among  females,  and  recognized  by  the 
sonorous  action  of  the  heart,  its  beats  being  heard  throughout  the 
chest  and  distinctly  recognized  at  the  back. 

The  best  locality  for  cardiac  stimulation  is  not  Combativeness, 
which  is  too  exciting  or  forcible,  and  extends  below  the  cardiac  zone 
proper,  but  posterior  to  Adhesiveness  in  the  organs  of  Business 
Energy  and  Oratory.  This  corresponds  with  the  cardiac  location  on 
the  spinal  column,  and  if  the  two  localities  were  simultaneously 
excited  the  effect  would  be  enhanced.* 

The  region  of  cardiac  excitability  sometimes  needs  tranquillizing, 
and  its  antagonist  is  the  region  of  Firmness,  which  gives  stability 
and  tranquil  regularity.  The  organ  of  Health  gives  the  same  stabil- 
ity, with  a  little  more  of  agreeable  activity.  These  localities  should 
be  firmly  fixed  in  the  mind  of  the  physician — Firmness  on  the 
median  line  vertically  above  the  cavity  of  the  ear,  and  running  back 
about  two  inches  to  the  organ  of  Dignity ;  Health,  parallel  to  Dig- 
nity, midway  between  the  median  line  and  temporal  arch  (which 
forms  the  ridge  between  the  lateral  and  superior  surfaces  of  the 
head). 

The  organ  of  Calorification,  reached  through  the  chin,  co-operates 
with  that  of  cardiac  excitability,  and  adds  to  the  rapidity  of  the 
heart's  action  (which  is  illustrated  in  fever),  and  consequently  the 
organ  of  Coolness,  in  the  thoracic  zone  (on  the  middle  of  the  side  head 
immediately  behind  a  vertical  line  from  the  posterior  portion  of 
the  ear)  is  one  of  sustaining  and  strengthening  influences  for  the 

*  It  was  by  these  and  the  anterior  organs  that  I  controlled  the  pulse  of  Dr.  Lane 
before  a  committee  of  Boston  physicians  in  1S43,  anc*  produced  an  enfeebled  action 
of  the  heart  similar  to  a  low  stage  of  fever,  as  described  by  Dr.  Flint  and  reported  by 
Dr.  Bowditch,  when  I  excited  organs  anterior  to  the  ear. 


CHAP.    VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  •  1 5  I 

heart.  In  a  case  of  pericarditis,  or  any  inflammatory  affection  of  the 
heart,  we  need  the  influences  of  Firmness,  Health,  and  Coolness, 
with  dispersive  passes  by  the  hands  or  the  sponge  of  warmj*vater  (or 
hot  water)  on  the  cheek  and  temples,  passing  over  Disease  and 
Cardiac  Excitability  backward  and  upward.*  In  angina  pectoris  we 
should  place  our  hand  on  the  middle  of  the  dorsal  region,  and  with 
the  other  make  dispersive  passes  upward  and  backward  over  the 
heart,  and  especially  over  the  region  of  Cardiac  Excitability  on  the 
body,  below  and  behind  the  nipple. 

The  Thoracic  region  at  the  temples  produces  a  nervous  and 
sanguineous  determination  to  the  lungs,  prompting  expansion  by  the 
ribs,  or  costal  inspiration.  This  inspiration,  as  a  physical  act, 
promotes  spiritual  inspiration,  which  will  be  found  in  those  who  have 
a  full  development  along  the  line  from  pulmonic  excitability  to  the 
external  angle  of  the  brow. 

In  dry,  asthmatic,  or  constricted  conditions  of  the  lungs  this  pul- 
monic excitement  may  be  beneficial,  but  it  would  be  objectionable  in 
pneumonia,  or  any  inflammatory  irritation  in  the  chest,  in  which  we 
need  the  invigorating  influence  of  the  pulmonic  energy  at  the  back 
part  of  the  pulmonic  zone  of  the  brain,  one  and  a  half  inches  from  the 
median  line,  where  we  find  the  same  influence  as  on  the  back 
between  the  shoulders  for  four  or  five  inches  below  the  neck,  the 
best  locality  for  the  invigoration  of  the  lungs.  But  all  severe  irrita- 
tions or  inflammations  of  the  lungs  are  best  treated  by  tranquillizing 
derivation  —  by  stimulating  the  anterior  tibial  surface  of  the  leg. 

The  Thoracic  region  on  the  side  head  assumes  a  more  exciting 
character  as  it  descends,  and  rouses  the  heart  and  lower  portion  of 
the  lungs  ;  passing  then  into  the  Phrenic  zone  it  rouses  the  dia- 
phragm and  developes  a  more  extensive  and  exciting  respiration. 
Hence  we  may  say  that  the  entire  side  head  below  the  Cephalic  zone 
tends  to  increase  the  activity  of  respiration  —  the  lower  portion 
increasing  its  depth  by  action  of  the  diaphragm. 

The  liver  may  be  stimulated  by  applying  the  fingers  on  the  hepatic 
region,  adjacent  to  the  meatus  auditorius  (cavity  of  the  ear)  ;  but  in 
proportion  as  we  extend  our  application  backward  on  the  same  level, 
we  give  it  a  greater  amount  of  vital  energy. 

The  fact  that  the  cerebral  organs  are  the  organs  of  psychic  im- 
pulses does  not  modify  the  truth  of  this  doctrine  of  therapeutic  treat- 

*The  first  important  application  of  my  discoveries  to  the  treatment  of  a  serious 
case  of  disease,  in  1841,  was  in  the  case  of  a  young  man  at  Louisville,  dangerously 
ill  of  pericarditis,  in  whom  I  had  perfect  control  of  the  heart,  through  the  brain, 
and  taught  his  attendants  to  soothe  the  action  of  the  heart  by  sponging  with  warm 
water  the  cardiac  region  on  the  side  head,  which  was  more  effective  than  any 
medical  treatment  that  he  had  received.  On  his  recovery  he  ascribed  his  cure  to 
the  treatment  I  administered  and  directed,  which  was  entirely  through  the  brain. 


I52  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  [CHAP.    VIII. 

merit,  for  the  psychic  impulses  in  each  zone  are  precisely  those  which 
affect  the  physiological  organs  to  which  they  correspond,  and  with 
which  they  effect  their  purposes.  When  we  study  their  functions 
we  perceive  that  each  organ  in  the  Cephalic  zone  requires  the  use 
of  the  brain  ;  that  each  in  the  Pulmonic  gives  greater  energy 
and  activity  to  normal  respiration  ;  that  each  in  the  Cardiac  zone  is 
associated  in  its  action  with  greater  activity  of  the  heart ;  that  each 
in  the  Hepatic  zone  tends  to  increase  the  energy  of  the  liver ;  and 
that  all  below  the  Hepatic  zone  promote  the  energy  of  digestion  and 
consumption  of  food  by  their  restless  impulses  and  animal  force. 

The  Gastric  and  Abdominal  region,  lying  in  front  of  the  ear,  along 
the  jawbone,  is  the  cerebral  source  of  that  activity  in  the  stomach 
and  alimentary  canal  which  creates  the  exhaustion  of  hunger,  and  is 
therefore  an  important  region  to  treat  in  cases  of  inactivity  or  disease 
of  the  stomach.  A  predominant  action  in  this  locality  would  not  be 
the  best  thing  for  gastric  health,  but  in  touching  this  region  the 
vital '  influence  of  the  operator  adds  an  element  of  health,  and  I 
frequently  place  the  thumbs  on  Health,  while  the  fingers  stimulate 
the  Gastric  organ. 

The  most  effective  energy  for  the  Gastric-abdominal  region  in 
treating  the  brain  will  be  given  by  placing  both  hands  on  the  occiput, 
covering  the  base  of  the  cranium,  while  the  fingers  rest  upon  the 
Gastric  organ  just  before  the  ear,  or  if  standing  before  the  patient, 
to  place  the  thumbs  on  the  Gastric  organ,  and  the  hands  around  the 
base  of  the  cranium. 

Immediately  below  the  Gastric  and  Abdominal  zone  comes  the 
Crural,  which  we  cover  with  the  hands  on  the  neck.  In  the  psychic 
sense  it  is  a  region  of  turbulence  and  restless  animality  ;  in  a 
physiological  sense  the  stimulation  of  the  lower  limbs  to  action  and 
development.  The  demand  for  food,  and  the  ability  to  dispose  of  it 
when  swallowed,  depend  mainly  upon  the  lateral  portion  of  the 
occiput,  and  we  have  an  interesting  confirmation  of  this  in  an  experi- 
ment of  Dr.  Ferrier,  in  which  the  desire  for  food  in  a  monkey  was 
destroyed  by  an  injury  of  the  posterior  part  of  the  brain. 

The  depressing  influence  of  hunger  and  of  gastric  irritations  may 
be  diminished  by  the  antagonists  of  the  Gastric  organ,  which  pro- 
duce a  feeling  of  buoyant  energy  and  fortitude,  which  destroys  the 
feeling  of  hunger.  The  South  American  medicine  Erythroxylon  Coca 
produces  a  similar  effect.  The  organ  of  Fortitude,  which  resists  the 
weakness  and  depression  of  hunger  and  other  gloomy  influences,  is 
in  front  of  the  organ  of  Health,  and  exterior  to  the  organ  of  Firm- 
ness. This  does  not  produce  entire  indifference  to  food  or  incapacity 
to    enjoy   it,    but    relieves    the   gnawing   and    depressing  feeling    of 


CHAP.    VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  1 53 

hunger.  To  produce  entire  indifference  to  food,  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  rouse  the  emotions  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  brain,  which 
lies  in  front  of  the  vertical  line.  It  is  quite  a  familiar  fact  that  love 
produces  indifference  to  food.  The  greater  activity  of  the  superior 
conditions  in  women  is  the  cause  of  their  moderate  appetites,  which 
do  not  run  into  intemperance  and  gluttony. 

K  morbid  ox  irritable  zone  may  be  recognized  at  the  junction  of 
the  Hepatic  and  Gastric  zones,  each  of  which  partakes  largely  of 
morbific  capacities.  Anteriorly,  on  the  body,  the  morbific  zone  pre-  ? 
sents  the  epigastric  and  hypochondriac  regions.  The  hypochondriac 
is  so  sensitive  to  all  injurious  influences  as  to  become  the  chief  inlet 
of  disease,  and  is  therefore  marked  as  the  region  of  Disease,  while 
the  epigastric  is  a  region  of  extreme  sensibility.  The  morbid  zone 
of  the  body  contains  the  most  degenerate  blood,  the  maximum  con- 
gestive tendency,  and  the  greatest  sensibility  to  injury.  A  blow  on 
this  region  anteriorly  is  the  most  prostrating  and  fatal  that  can  be 
inflicted,  and  irritations  in  this  region  have  the  most  depressing 
effect  on  the  vital  and  moral  energies.  In  Claude  Bernard's  experi- 
ments on  the  stomach  of  living  dogs  it  was  found  that  the  introduc- 
tion of  a  little  boiling  water  threw  the  animal  at  once  into  a  kind  of 
adynamic  state,  which  was  followed  by  death  in  three  or  four  hours. 
The  mucous  membrane  of  the  stomach  was  found  red  and  swollen, 
whilst  an  abundant  exudation  of  blackish  blood  had  taken  place  into 
the  cavity  of  the  organ.  Like  injurious  effects,  to  a  greater  or  less 
degree,  followed  an  introduction  of  other  irritants,  such  as  nitrate 
of  silver  or  ammonia.  There  is  no  other  portion  of  the  body  where 
such  prostrating  effects  could  be  produced  by  so  small  an  amount  of 
injury.  Entire  limbs  may  be  destroyed  by  inflammation  or  suppur- 
ation, and  large  portions  of  the  lungs  may  be  destroyed  by  ulceration, 
without  fatal  consequences.  The  destruction  of  life  by  hot  water  in 
the  stomach  should  warn  us  against  the  dangerous  effects  of  con- 
tinual drugging  by  harsh  remedies,  against  which  nature  revolts. 
Medicines  should  be  made  so  agreeable  in  their  taste  and  other  pro- 
perties that  they  could  not  offend  the  stomach  or  the  senses.  It  is 
difficult  to  accept  the  man  as  a  friend,  who  insults  us  at  his  first 
approach,  or  who  gives  us  a  painful  blow;  and  it  may  be  as  difficult 
to  reconcile  the  stomach  to  the  offensive  agents  that  we  thrust  upon 
it,  while  it  readily  yields  to  the  beneficent  influence  of  mineral  waters 
and  of  homoeopathic  medicines  which  are  inoffensive. 

Warm  clothing  around  the  waist,  especially  in  front,  is  very  debili- 
tating and  even  prostrating,  especially  in  warm  weather,  and  the  cool- 
ing of  the  waist  by  a  wet  cloth,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  a  wet  pack, 
is  often  very  wholesome  and  bracing.     The  anterior  half  of  the  morbid 


154  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  [CHAP.    VIII. 

zone  is  a  region  from  which  dispersive  passes  are  very  often  required, 
and  upon  which  we  may  often  with  great  benefit  apply  the  positive  pole 
for  currents  to  any  part  of  the  posterior  surfaces  of  the  body. 

A  curious  illustration  of  the  character  of  the  morbid  zone  was  fur- 
nished in  the  experiments  of  Brown-Sequard,  who  found  that  in  divid- 
ing one  half  of  the  spinal  cord,  between  the  seventh  dorsal  and  third 
lumbar  nerves  in  the  guinea  pig,  the  animal  in  from  three  to  five 
weeks  became  epileptic ;  also,  that  on  the  injured  side  there  was  a 
space  one  and  one  half  inches  long  by  one  inch  wide,  just  below  the 
ear,  where  irritations  or  pinching  would  produce  the  epileptic  fit.  This 
cerebral  influence  corresponds  to  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy. 

The  experiment  of  cauterizing  the  lower  lobe  of  the  ear  for  sciatica, 
which  is  said  to  have  been  successfully  performed  in  France,  is  another 
illustration  of  the  same  principle,  as  it  acts  through  the  crural  region. 

A  citizen  of  a  Massachusetts  village  was  lately  arrested  for  boring, 
his  children's  ears  with  a  red-hot  iron.  He  said  that  he  did  it  to  cure 
the  toothache,  and  that  he  had  often  treated  toothache  in  that 
manner. 

Another  illustration  of  the  morbid  zone  was  furnished  in  vivisec- 
tions to  destroy  the  supra-renal  capsules,  an  operation  of  no  formid- 
able character,  but  in  which  the  animals  would  die  from  injury  of  the 
solar  plexus,  unless  great  skill  were  exercised. 

Morbidness  or  tendency  to  disease  consists  in  an  extreme  capacity 
for  feeling  and  being  affected  by  injurious  influences.  Hence  it  can 
be  developed  fully  only  in  the  frontal  regions.  Farther  back,  as 
reactive  energy  appears,  it  assumes  the  character  of  irritability  and 
quarrelsome  or  domineering  aggressiveness  —  a  condition  morally 
morbid,  which  propagates  moral  and  physical  disease  among  its- 
victims.  This  zone  extends  along  the  base  of  the  brain,  just  over  the 
meatus  auditorius  (cavity  of  the  ear),  and  embraces  a  group  of  impulses 
which  are  discordant  and  wretched  when  they  predominate,  leading  to 
a  miserable  life. 

The  reader  will  bear  in  mind  that  we  do  not  regard  disease  as  the 
primitive  or  normal  function  of  any  organ,  but  as  the  result  of  malign 
impressions  on  the  sensitive  and  irritable  condition  which  belongs  to 
certain  organs.  The  morbific  faculties  are  those  which  are  most  easily 
disturbed  and  which  have  the  least  reactive  power,  and  the  morbid 
results  occur  when  their  irritation  overpowers  the  sustaining  vital 
energies  which  belong  to  the  opposite  class  of  faculties.  Hence  if  the 
morbific  faculties  predominate  in  the  constitution,  morbid  effects 
inevitably  occur  under  the  ordinary  circumstances  of  home  life. 

As  the  Crural  region  (the  source  of  the  energy  of  the  lower  limbs) 
is  located  in  the  spinal  cord  and  in  the  brain  near  the  Gastro-abdom- 


CHAP.    VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  1 55 

inal,  it  follows  that  active  locomotion  is  an  efficient  invigorator  for  the 
digestive  organs,  and  that  the  exercise  of  the  cephalic  zone-  giving 
predominance  to  the  higher  organs  of  the  brain  would  diminish  the 
activity  of  stomach  and  bowels,  which  is  usually  the  effect  of  sedentary 
intellectual  pursuits.  The  organs  below  the  diaphragm  all  require  an 
active  life  to  give  them  energy,  and  in  nervauric  treatment  they 
require  the  hands  to  be  placed  around  the  basis  of  the  cranium. 

In  addition  to  the  Morbid  zone  at  the  waist,  which  affects  the  phy- 
siological functions  directly,  there  is  another  at  the  base  of  the  pelvis 
which  tends  strongly  to  the  disorder  and  prostration  of  the  nervous 
system  in  mania,  idiocy,  and  paralysis.  It  corresponds  to  a  cephalic 
region  at  the  base  of  the  cranium,  the  anterior  portion  of  which  is  the 
region  of  insanity.  Even  when  the  morbid  region  of  the  pelvis  does 
not  fully  develop  its  sympathetic  effects  on  the  brain,  it  shows  a  sim- 
ilar deranging  effect  on  the  nervous  system  of  the  body,  producing 
many  derangements  and  diseases  which  are  curable  only  when  the 
pelvic  irritation  is  removed,  as  has  been  fully  demonstrated  in  Dr. 
Pratt's  Treatise  on  Orificial  Surgery. 

When  the  hands  are  applied  around  the  neck  they  are  on  the  crural 
region,  and  send  a  stimulation  into  the  lower  limbs,  giving  them 
warmth  and  strength,  and  reinforcing  animal  life  generally. 

Although  strictly  speaking  the  organs  developing  through  the  neck 
(or  reached  through  the  neck)  are  those  that  correspond  with  the  lower 
limbs  and  rouse  their  muscular  energy,  they  are  associated  with  organs 
a  little  higher,  as  the  lower  limbs  are  associated  with  the  lumbar  and 
sacral  regions  of  the  spine,  the  source  of  their  impulses.  Hence  the 
base  of  the  occiput,  including  Combativeness,  should  be  impressed 
as  well  as  the  cervical  region,  when  we  would  make  the  strongest  im- 
pression on  the  lower  limbs. 

On  the  median  line,  on  the  level  of  the  crural  region,  just  below 
the  occipital  knob,  corresponding  to  the  middle  region  of  the  cere- 
bellum and  posterior  to  the  medulla  oblongata,  is  the  region  of  Sex- 
ual Energy,  corresponding  with  the  lumbo-sacral  junction  of  the 
spinal  column,  which  vitalizes  the  sexual  organs,  adds  much  to  the 
general  vigor  of  the  constitution,  and  gives  a  great  stimulus  to  the 
nervous  system,  corresponding  to  the  normal  effects  of  sexual 
development,  and  therefore  highly  important  in  reanimating  impaired 
constitutions.  I  have  been  especially  struck  with  its  value  in  reno- 
vating feeble  or  diseased  eyes.  The  fingers  of  one  hand  being  placed 
in  the  median  fossa  just  mentioned,  and  the  other  in  front,  on  the 
central  organ  of  vision,  just  above  the  centre  of  the  eyeball,  gives  a 
restorative,  brightening  influence  to  the  eyes,  more  effective  than  any 
other  mode  of  cerebral  treatment.     In  giving  this  treatment  the  optic 


I56  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  [CHAP.    VIII. 

nerves  and  their  origin  in  the  tubercula  quadrigemina  (optic  lobes) 
are  between  the  two  localities  treated. 

The  Sexual  functions  respond  to  two  localities,  the  cerebellic  fossa, 
already  mentioned,  a  seat  of  physical  energy,  and  the  prominence  of 
the  larynx  on  the  front  of  the  neck,  which  coincides  with  the  an- 
terior surface  of  the  spinal  cord,  near  the  foramen  magnum.  The 
doctrines  of  Gall,  in  reference  to  the  cerebellum,  were  an  approxi- 
mation to  the  truth,  as  its  sexual  functions  occupy  a  small  portion  on 
the  median  line. 

Finally,  while  I  regard  the  zonal  arrangement  as  valuable,  both  in 
a  philosophic  sense  and  for  therapeutic  uses,  I  do  not  regard  it  as  at 
all  exempt  from  the  intricate  blending  and  co-operation  which  we  find 
in  the  spinal  region.  Each  organ  has  secondary  relations  or  co-opera- 
tions above  and  below  its  own  zone,  especially  when  influenced  by 
the  action  of  others. 

Thus  Alimentiveness,  in  its  common  action  developing  hunger, 
excites  the  reckless,  combative,  domineering  energies  of  its  own  zone, 
which  demand  "  bread  or  blood,"  and  which  in  carnivorous  animals 
drive  them  to  attack  their  prey.  But  when  fully  satisfied  it  co- 
operates with  the  Cheerfulness  and  Serenity  of  the  moral  region, 
and  then  stimulates  Adhesiveness,  desiring  society,  the  physical  in- 
fluence of  which  promotes  nourishment  and  assimilation.  Hence 
the  pleasures  of  the  table  are  best  enjoyed  socially,  and  few  would 
desire  to  be  solitary  at  their  meals. 

The  region  of  Adhesiveness  on  the  body  is  on  the  line  of  the  in- 
tercostal nerves  that  surround  the  stomach,  and  the  line  of  the 
splanchnic  nerves  that  supply  the  stomach  through  the  ganglia  of  the 
solar  plexus.  Hence  we  should  expect  it  to  co-operate  as  it  does  with 
the  digestive  functions. 

Similar  remarks  may  be  made  of  the  other  zones,  but  they  are  not 
necessary  in  this  brief  exposition. 

Special  Functions  for  Cerebral  Treatment. 

Health  and  Disease.  —  When  the  fingers  are  placed  on  Health 
it  gives  a  delightful  recuperative  influence  to  the  whole  system,  and 
when  passes  or  gentle  frictions  are  made,  upward  and  backward 
toward  Health,  from  the  region  of  Disease  (at  the  cheek-bone,  occupy- 
ing the  anterior  end  of  the  middle  lobe,  just  behind  the  eyes)  it  adds 
materially  to  the  effect.  The  influence  of  the  organ  of  Health  is 
heightened  by  placing  the  entire  hand  across  the  superior  posterior 
region,  covering  Health  and  its  neighbors.  The  hygienic  region  is 
the  posterior  part  of  the  cerebral  zone  of  the  brain  and  a  part  of 
the  cephalic  zone  of  the  body,  which  illustrates  the  proposition  that 


CHAP.     VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN-  1 57 

health  is  a  high  spiritual  function  depending  mainly  on  the  soul  and 
brain. 

Sleep  and  Wakefulness.  —  The  wakeful  faculties  are  the  in- 
tellectual, energetic,  and  restless.  The  centre  of  wakefulness  is  the 
intellectual  organ  of  Consciousness,  located  in  the  centre  of  the  fore- 
head. Its  antagonist  is  located  on  a  line  running  back  from  it  hori- 
zontally, about  three  fourths  of  an  inch  behind  a  vertical  line  corre- 
sponding to  the  back  of  the  ear.  This  may  be  called  the  organ  of 
Repose,  and  it  is  only  when  excited  into  absolute  predominance  oven 
the  frontal  organ  that  it  manifests  the  sleepy  influence.  Its  normal 
influence  when  we  are  awake  is  to  invigorate  the  automatic  life  of 
the  body,  and  counteract  the  exhaustive  influence  of  the  intellect  ; 
also,  to  restrain  its  discursiveness  and  confine  its  action  to  objects 
nearer,  more  easily  understood,  and  of  more  practical  value  ;  and, 
when  the  intellectual  organs  are  fatigued,  to  bring  on  sleep  and  sustain 
the  unconscious  processes  of   interior  life. 

I  have  often  produced  sleep  by  this  organ,  and  I  find  it  best  to  use 
the  organ  of  Somnolence,  an  inch  behind  the  brow,  to  facilitate  the 
process.  The  region  of  Somnolence  greatly  increases  the  impressi- 
bility; after  the  fingers  rest  upon  it  a  few  minutes,  a  calm,  dreamy 
feeling  is  developed  and  the  eyes  wink  or  close.  A  dreamy  sleep  is 
produced  in  the  very  impressible,  and  sometimes  runs  into  completely 
unconscious  sleep.  When  the  two  organs  are  touched  at  once,  a 
sound  sleep  is  the  usual  result,  which  may  be  assisted  or  retarded  by 
other  influences.  The  amiable  organs  of  the  upper  surface  of  the 
brain  produce  a  contented  quietness  which  favors  sleep.  Patience 
and  Tranquillity  (see  map)  assist,  as  Irritability  and  Turbulence  hinder. 
The  most  efficient  co-operation  is  the  organ  of  Lethargy,  which  we 
reach  just  above  the  larynx  (see  map),  which  promotes  a  dull  drowsi- 
ness. In  removing  sleep  we  disperse  from  Somnolence,  Lethargy, 
and  Sleep,  upward  and  backward,  touch  the  organ  of  Consciousness, 
the  organ  of  Light  (or  vision),  and  any  of  the  energetic  organs,  such 
as  Health,  Energy,  Ambition,  and  Turbulence. 

The  Ideal  Powers.  — For  the  display  of  intellectual  and  spiritual 
phenomena,  we  may  excite  the  Somnolent  region  to  increase  im- 
pressibility and  intuition.  By  the  organ  of  Spirituality  (see  map)  we 
may  excite  the  capacity  for  feeling  and  perceiving  spiritual  influences, 
which  may  be  brought  to  the  mind  by  holding  on  the  forehead  a 
letter  of  some  deceased  friend,  or  a  picture— the  psychometric  im- 
pression from  which  may  bring  a  consciousness  of  the  present  condi- 
tion of  the  departed.  To  give  more  varied  perceptions  we  may  touch 
the  region  of  Clairvoyance,  lying  at  the  root  of  the  nose  (occupying 
the  internal  base  of  the  front  lobe). 


1 5S  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  [CHAP.     VIII. 

General  Vigor  may  be  promoted  by  placing  one  hand  across  the 
region  surrounding  Healtn  —  the  superior  posterior  part  of  the  occi- 
put,—  and  the  other  around  the  lower  part  of  the  occiput,  or  by  plac- 
ing the  fingers  upon  Health,  Vital  Force,  and  the  sexual  region  in 
the  fossa  below  the  occipital  knob. 

Feverish  Conditions  may  best  be  treated  on  the  body,  but  may 
be  assisted  by  treatment  on  the  head,  making  dispersive  passes  from 
Calorification  and  Disease  to  Health,  and  stimulating  the  organ  of 
Coolness,  which  lies  on  a  vertical  line  corresponding  with  the  poste- 
rior margin  of  the  ear,  extending  two  or  three  inches  upward  from  the 
level  of  the  top  of  the  ear. 

Mental  Soundness.  —  The  region  of  Sanity  is  the  seat  of  those 
energies  which  resist  every  form  of  mental  disorder,  whether  In- 
sanity, Dementia,  Melancholia,  Monomania,  Lethargy,  Idiocy,  Child 
ishness,  Hysteria,  Delirium  Tremens,  Rage,  Homicidal  Mania,  Sui- 
cide, or  Kleptomania.  The  insane  tendencies  are  reached  under  the 
jaw  ;  hence  passes  from  the  junction  of  the  neck  and  the  jaw  toward 
Sanity  would  have  a  good  effect.  Melancholy  has  a  somewhat  higher 
location  (on  the  lower  angle  of  the  jaw),  and  the  special  antagonist  of 
Melancholy  —  the  region  of  Cheerfulness  —  is  situated  just  above 
Sanity,  being  above  the  parietal  ridge  and  on  the  superior  aspect  of 
the  head.  The  excitement  of  the  organ  of  Cheerfulness  produces  a 
delightfully  cheering  effect,  removing  all  mental  depression.  The 
special  locations  of  Idiocy,  Childishness,  Hysteria,  Melancholy,  and 
Lethargy  are  shown  on  the  map. 

Warmth.  —  The  region  of  warmth  in  the  head  is  the  anterior 
aspect  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  and  its  external  surface  is  at  the 
chin.  The  hand  placed  around  the  chin  stimulates  Calorification,, 
and  the  effect  is  enhanced  by  placing  the  other  hand  on  the  occipital, 
base,  which  is  a  co-operative  region.  If  the  hand  also  extends  down 
the  neck  in  the  crural  region  it  tends  to  throw  the  warmth  to  the 
lower  limbs.  There  is  a  secondary  region  of  warmth  in  the  centre 
of  the  temples,  which  operates  more  interiorly  and  has  more  of  a 
psychic  character. 

Mental  Discipline  and  Concentration  are  best  promoted  by 
the  region  of  Sanity,  especially  its  anterior  portion,  in  which  we  find 
that  power  of  quiet  concentration,  as  well  as  the  disposition  to  local 
attachment  and  fixedness  of  residence  which  phrenologists  have 
ascribed  to  the  space  just  behind  Dignity  or  Self-Esteem  on  the 
median  line  —  a  location  which  I  find  entirely  erroneous.  It  is  the 
regions  of  Insanity  and  Turbulence  which  destroy  mental  concen- 
tration. 

Nature   of  Nervauric   Treatment.  —  The  reader  understands 


CHAP.    VIII.]  ZONAL    ARRANGEMENT    OF    THE    BRAIN.  1 59 

that  the  application  of  the  fingers  or  hands  to  any  part  of  the  head 
or  body  of  an  impressible  individual  stimulates  the  functions  of  that 
locality.  But  much  depends  upon  the  character  of  the  hand  that  is 
applied.  If  it  belongs  to  a  person  of  feeble  vitality,  far  inferior  to 
the  person  touched,  it  will  not  have  a  stimulating  effect.  The  con- 
tact of  a  very  inferior  constitution  is  of  no  benefit  to  the  superior 
person  ;  and  on  the  other  hand  a  person  of  very  superior  vital  endow- 
ments imparts  a  stimulating  effect  to  every  one  that  he  touches, 
bringing  out  strong  local  manifestations.  In  addition  to  this  the 
diffusive  influence  of  his  own  constitution  is  imparted  to  the  subject, 
so  that  there  will  be  health  and  restoration  in  every  touch,  and  a 
strong  healing  power  exerted  whenever  he  approaches  the  patient. 
Persons  of  such. endowments  are  capable  of  making  cures  by  merely 
coming  into  the  presence  of  the  patient,  and  may  cure  great  numbers 
with  extreme  rapidity. 

Again,  there  are  those  whose  psychic  power  occupies  so  large  a 
sphere  that  they  sympathize  with  patients  at  a  distance,  and  by 
means  of  this  rapport  are  able  to  relieve  or  cure  them  as  if  personally 
present.  I  know  physicians  who  have  this  sympathy  with  distant 
patients,  and  I  have  even  sometimes  felt  the  influence  of  a  morbid 
condition  in  friends  at  a  distance,  so  as  to  know  the  exact  time  of 
their  suffering  and  its  termination.  There  are  many  well-attested 
cases  in  which  patients  at  a  distance  were  healed  by  the  late  Dr.  J. 
R.  Newton. 

The  psychic  power  that  goes'  with  fixed  attention  or  with  the  touch 
of  the  hand  may  be  conveyed  to  those  of  psy- 
chometric sensitiveness  by  a  letter  or  by  a  piece 
of  paper  which  has  received  the  nervaura  of  the 
operator.  The  healing  of  patients  by  what  is 
called  magnetized  paper  has  been  carried  on 
extensively,  and  is  abundantly  attested  by  the 
patients. 

The  correspondence  of  the  occiput  with  the 
spinal  cplumn  is  shown  in  this  engraving  ;  and 
the  correlation  of  the  occipito-spinal  region 
with  the  anterior  organs  of  the  brain  is  shown  on  page  j6. 


CHAPTER.  IX. 

HEALTH,  AND  ITS  RESTORATION. 

Definition  of  Health  as  an  organ  and  faculty  —  Why  that  name  is  used  —  Effects 
of  the  organ  of  Health  —  Animation  —  Health  associated  with  happiness,  virtue, 
and  activity  —  Position  and  influence  of  the  organ  —  Its  ethical  and  spiritual  rela- 
tions—  Vital  power  and  animation,  disease  and  death  —  Function  of  the  shoulders 
and  crown  of  the  head  —  Relations  of  Health  to  ethics  and  religion — Its  position  in 
the  brain  between  the  moral  and  physical  —  The  spiritual  as  the  support  of  physical 
health — Deficiency  of  Language  for  nomenclature  —  Bia,  Zoe,  Anima,  Animus, 
Psyche,  Psychobiosis,  and  Psychodynamia  as  names  —  Animation  and  Health  — 
Difficulty  of  expressing  psychic  and  physical  life  in  conjunction  —  Their  combina- 
tion in  the  superior  posterior  region  of  the  brain  and  body  —  Healthful  physical 
and  moral  exercises  —  Cultivation  of  the  sentiments  qualifies  for  healing  —  Love 
and  Health  correlative  —  Experience  of  Dr.  Jennings  —  Personal  healing  by  Newton 
and  others  — The  religious  and  spiritual  elements  — Necessity  of  scientific  prepara- 
tion for  healing. 

Psychic  Treatment. — Permanent  or  constitutional  health  should  be  estab- 
lished—  This  requires  moral  power,  not  passive  or  negative,  but  active  virtues  — 
Power  the  element  of  success  —  Pursuit  of  duty  the  only  satisfactory  success — The 
higher  virtues,  heroic  —  Happiness  may  be  brought  to  families  and  a  perfect 
education  to  youth  —  Psychic  treatment  an  indispensable  part  of  education  — 
Health  and  Virtue  twin  brothers  —  Special  directions  for  treatment  by  the  hand 
and  the  battery. 

The  object  of  all  treatment  is  the  restoration  of  health,  and  it  is 
necessary  to  understand  in  what  that  consists.  '  Health,  in  the 
negative  sense,  is  freedom  from  all  disturbing  injurious  influence, 
leaving  us  to  enjoy  all  the  pleasures  of  life  as  we  obtain  them. 

In  this  sense  health  is  obtained  by  removing  from  the  blood  all 
noxious  or  imperfectly  vitalized  elements,  and  promoting  the  absorp- 
tion and  removal  of  all  objectionable  structures,  such  as  the  tubercle 
of  consumption  or  the  cells  of  cancerous  matter,  leaving  the  vital 
force  to  act  unincumbered. 

To  effect  this,  we  must  rouse  all  the  secreting  organs  to  the  full 
performance  of  their  duty;  for  the  purity  of  the  blood  depends  on 
the  perfection  of  the  secretions.  This  must  be  done  either  by 
medical  or  nervauric  treatment.  We  must  find  the  organ,  or  organs, 
which  are  diseased  or  sluggish,  and  rouse  them  into  proper  action, 
at  the  same  time  strengthening  the  vital  force  to  assist. 

But  health  in  the  positive  sense  means  much  more  than  this.  It 
means  a  healthy  or  disease-resisting  constitution  — the  predominance 
of  vital  power,  resisting  injuries,  over  Sensibility  and  Excitability 
which  succumb.  Hence,  after  the  restoration  of  morbid  organs  and 
relief  from  morbid  conditions,  we  should  energize  the  faculties  and 
onrans  which  give  the  highest  conditions  of  health. 


CHAP.  IX.]         HEALTH,  AND  ITS  RESTORATION.  l6l 

Perfect  health  is  a  condition  in  which  there  is  a  large  amount  of 
physical  and  moral  energy,  and  in  which  the  sensibility,  excitability, 
and  irritability,  though  sufficient  for  all  necessary  purposes,  are  small 
in  comparison  with  the  vital  forces,  which  endure  and  resist  the 
attacks  upon  our  sensibility. 

The  revolutionary  discovery  of  the  new  Anthropology  is,  that  all 
forces  and  faculties  belonging  to  man  have  their  special  seats  in  the 
brain,  and  corresponding  positions  in  the  body.  Every  elementary 
power  or  tendency  culminates  to  a  certain  locality.  Health  culmin- 
ates to  its  locality  in  the  brain,  on  each  side  of  Self-Respect  or 
Dignity,  and  in  the  body  to  the  middle  of  each  shoulder  blade.  The 
development  of  these  two  localities  insures  a  healthy  constitution. 
But  I  must  protest  in  the  beginning  against  the  phraseology  which 
I  am  compelled  to  use  by  the  poverty  of  the  English  language.  The 
word  Health  does  not  adequately  represent  the  function  of  the 
cephalic  and  corporeal  organs  to  which  I  have  applied  it,  for  the 
word  has  merely  a  negative  meaning,  signifying  an  agreeable 
freedom  from  the  influences  which  cause  disease,  and  their  results. 
No  cerebral  organ  can  give  us  freedom  from  the  causes  of  disease, 
and  thus  compel  health,  but  as  the  organ  in  question  gives  us  the 
vital  force  which  resists  disease,  and  thereby  sustains  a  vigorous 
health,  I  have  hence  been  induced  to  use  the  word  health  to  express 
its  function,  as  it  generally  produces  health  when  sufficiently- 
developed,  as  the  opposite  sensitive  region  is  sure  to  result  in  disease 
if  sufficiently  predominant.  The  word  health,  therefore,  as  it  ex- 
presses the  tendency  of  the  organ,  has  been  used  for  physiological 
and  hygienic  instruction.  It  is  not  deceptive,  for  the  influence  of 
the  region  of  Health,  either  in  the  brain  or  in  the  body,  whenever 
excited,  is  to  produce  an  immediate  improvement  of  the  physical  and 
mental  condition.  The  lungs  expand  more  freely  and  pleasantly,  the 
brain  becomes  clearer  and  more  active,  the  emotions  more  vivid,  the 
impulses  stronger,  the  muscles  more  ready  for  action,  the  counte- 
nance more  inclined  to  smile,  and  all  the  viscera,  lungs,  stomach,  liver, 
kidneys,  etc  ,  begin  to  feel  better,  and,  if  troubled  with  any  disorder, 
to  diminish  or  remove  it.  It  is  the  general  renovator  of  disturbed 
functions,  and  the  power  that  resists  the  encroachment  of  all  malign 
influences  on  either  mind  or  body.  But  health  is  only  one  aspect 
of  its  effects  —  the  negative  aspect.  Its  positive  character  is  vital 
power  and  harmony  —  normal  life.  It  animates  alike  the  physical 
and  the  moral  constitution.  It  is  cheerful,  energetic,  strong,  pleas- 
ing, attractive.  It  gives  perfect  and  exuberant  activity  to  the  entire 
physical,  social,  moral,  and  intellectual  faculties.  It  animates  every 
nerve,  function,  and  faculty  to  normal    action,    and    if   required  to 


1 62  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  [CHAP.     IX. 

select  the  word  which  comes  nearest  to  expressing  its  efficient  and 
ubiquitous  influence,  as  I  have  habitually  witnessed  it  in  the  impres- 
sible and  felt  it  in  myself,  I  should  select  the  word  animation.  But 
the  word  animation  must  be  understood  in  its  largest  sense,  as  anima- 
tion of  the  entire  being  in  its  perfect  action  and  sustained  power 
and  virtue.  Indeed  the  word  virtue  is  almost  as  good  a  name  as 
animation. 

"  Happiness  is  health,"  said  Dr.  Geo.  Moore  in  his  essay  on  the 
Body  and  Mind,  and  this  is  near  the  truth.  Happiness,  which  is 
synonymous  with  the  best  activity  of  the  coronal  region  of  the  brain 
(and  the  summit  of  the  chest),  in  which  the  faculties  of  love  and  hope 
reside,  may  be  regarded  as  spiritual  health,  for  it  is  a  condition  of 
harmonious  activity  of  our  higher  powers  —  the  whole  upper  half  of 
the  brain. 

But  while  this  admirably  adapts  man  to  the  celestial  life  in  which 
just  such  a  character  is  found,  it  is  not  so  well  adapted  to  the  strug- 
gling, warring  condition  of  life  on  earth,  as  a  faculty  of  more  physical 
energy.  This  faculty  we  may  find  in  the  region  to  which  I  have 
given  the  name  of  '  Health,'  which  is  associated  with  the  upper  pos- 
terior region  of  the  brain  and  the  posterior  surface  of  the  shoulder. 

Health  as  thus  located  is  between  the  amiable  spiritual  energies  of 
the  upper  surface  of  the  brain  and  the  more  physical  energies  of  the 
occiput,  which  location  enables  it  to  combine  them  happily,  produc- 
ing a  vigorous  combination  of  spiritual  and  physical  energies,  and 
restraining  more  effectively  than  Hope  that  extreme  sensibility 
which  produces  liability  to  disease,  and  that  extreme  sympathy  with 
others  which  is  not  expedient  in  earth  life. 

Health  in  this  vigorous  form  may  be  called  happiness,  but  it  is  not 
that  intense  or  ecstatic  happiness  which  belongs  to  the  celestial 
region  of  the  brain. 

The  faculty  of  the  organ  of  Health  leads  to  a  constant  activity  of 
mind  and  body  and  to  all  things  that  promote  health.  This  activity 
is  the  indispensable  condition  of  health,  and  it  was  well  expressed 
by  the  elder  Cato  :  "  Let  a  man  be  but  constantly  exercised  in  labors 
like  these,  and  he  will  not  so  soon  find  the  breaches  of  age.  Years 
will  steal  upon  him  insensibly  ;  he  will  grow  old  without  feeling  it  ; 
nay,  when  he  comes  to  break  at  last,  the  house  will  crumble  gently 
and  fall  down  so  slowly  as  not  to  give  him  any  pain." 

It  is  an  obvious  truth  in  reference  to  all  human  faculties  that  they 
are  developed  to  their  highest  power  by  regular  vigorous  exercise 
and  by  enjoying  that  which  is  congenial  to  their  nature  —  avoiding 
what  is  depressing.  The  exercise  and  culture  of  any  faculty  is  found 
in  that  which  it  spontaneously  does—  as  the  faculty  of  love  is  culti- 


CHAP.    IX.]  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  163 

vat  eel  by  loving,  and  the  propensity  to  murder  by  committing  murder. 
The  faculty  of  Health  prompts  to  an  active,  gay,  and  cheerful  life, 
industrious,  social,  friendly,  graceful,  courteous,  and  interesting  in 
manners  —  a  life  of  useful  activity,  not  much  affected  or  hindered  by 
any  little  discomforts  or  social  discords — a  life  which  diffuses  a 
pleasant  influence.  This  is  quite  different  from  the  life  of  the 
solitary  student  and  the  solitary  workman  or  the  ascetic  religious 
recluse.  It  is  realized  only  in  social  and  conjugal  life.  Hence 
friendly  social  intercourse  is  essential  to  health,  as  well  as  cheerful 
employment  ;  and  the  social  amusements  which  a  false  and  gloomy 
theology  has  discouraged  are  of  great  importance  to  health  and 
virtue  ;  and  of  all  social  amusements  I  know  of  none  entitled  to  rank 
higher  than  dancing,  associated  as  it  is  with  that  other  inspiring  in- 
fluence—  music.  Hence  I  insist  that  the  cultivation  of  congenial 
society  and  amusements  should  be  a  part  of  the  regimen  prescribed 
for  health,  and  that  with  these  should  be  associated  active  industry. 

Animation,  as  developed  by  this  organ,  vitalizes  and  perfects  the 
entire  being ;  and  its  antagonist  in  the  region  of  disease,  uncontrolled, 
reduces  both  soul  and  body  to  worthlessness — the  body  going  into 
the  decomposition  of  death,  and  the  soul  being  often  reduced  also  to 
helplessness  until  released  from  the  body  ;  for  the  capacity  to  suffer 
and  not  to  act  is  a  fatal  condition. 

Perfect  health,  that  is,  abundant  vital  power  capable  of  resisting 
all  causes  of  disease  or  depression,  and  sustaining  by  sympathy  and 
nervauric  action  the  health,  energy,  and  spirits  of  others  —  depends 
upon  the  large  development  and  cultivation  of  this  region  of  Health 
and  Animation  ;  it  requires  a  large  development  of  the  shoulders  and 
the  crown  of  the  head,  and  the  position  of  this  function  in  the  con- 
stitution is  such  as  to  give  by  its  connections  (being  in  the  upper 
half  of  the  brain)  a  decided  predominance  of  the  coronal  or  moral 
elements,  while  by  its  posterior  location  it  gives  all  the  necessary 
energy  to' the  occipito-basilar  organs,  in  which  we  have  a  vital  force, 
unregulated  by  the  moral,  needing  the  control  of  the  intermediate 
organ  of  Health,  which  sustains  both. 

The  organ  of  Health,  by  sustaining  the  higher  faculties,  not  only 
controls  the  excesses  of  the  lower,  but  places  man  in  harmony  with 
the  supernal  powers,  and  the  influx  which  is  the  interior  of  his 
life.  Thus  the  true  science  of  health  is  connected  with  ethical  or 
religious  science  and  the  performance  of  duties  ;  and  all  hygienic 
science  which  rests  in  the  physical  alone  will  fall  short  of  human 
needs.  The  emotional  or  spiritual  part  of  man's  nature  is  as  im- 
portant as  the  physical,  and  this  is  being  continually  demonstrated 
by  the  vast  number  of  cures  made  by  spiritual  and  religious  methods, 
without  any  drug  agency. 


164  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  [CHAP.    IX. 

The  fact  that  the  organ  of  Health  stands  intermediate  between  the 
moral  and  physical  agencies  of  the  constitution,  so  as  to  give  to  each 
its  own  just  proportional  activity,  explains  the  great  necessity  for 
both  soul  culture  and  physical  culture  in  any  proper  system  of 
hygiene  and  education,  and  gives  us  an  entirely  new  view  of  the 
philosophy  of  human  development  and  of  the  intimate  relations  of 
health  with  virtue  and  religion,  whereby  we  learn  the  importance  of 
the  cultivation  and  exaltation  of  health  as  a  religious  duty,  and  the 
criminality  of  its  neglect  or  abuse.  True  and  complete  Godliness 
brings  with  it  physical  perfection  and  power  —  power  to  encounter 
exposure,  danger,  and  toil,  triumphantly,  as  did  the  Apostles.  But 
the  purblind  theologies,  which  have  been  in  fashion,  take  little  ac- 
count of  the  body,  though  saintly  and  apostolic  history  shows  how 
gloriously  the  body  has  been  sustained  by  the  spirit,  not  only  in  such 
as  Joan  of  Arc,  but  in  many  thousand  earnest  seekers  of  divine  life. 

We  cannot  say  too  much  of  this  philosophy  of  man's  nobler  life, 
which  has  been  so  little  understood  ;  we  have  not  even  language 
fitting  for  its  expression.  Language  must  advance,  both  in  its 
concepts  and  its  combinations,  to  keep  pace  with  science  and 
philosophy. 

The  Bia  and  Bios  of  the  Greeks,  whence  our  Biology,  belongs  to 
material  life  alone.  They  express  only  the  lower  life,  that  which  lies 
behind  the  mastoid  process,  which  occupies  the  cerebellum  and  med- 
ulla oblongata,  which  ceases  with  their  decomposition,  and  which  is  not 
true  life,  the  characteristic  of  which  is  its  indestructible  permanence. 

Psyche,  the  soul,  comes  nearer  to  our  conception  of  the  central 
power,  but  it  has  been  used  in  a  mental  and  spiritual  sense,  which  iso- 
lates it  from  the  bodily  life  and  would  carry  us  into  the  high  realms  of 
spirit  life.  But  the  unspiritual  genius  of  European  races  continually 
tends  to  the  degeneration  of  language.  It  has  degraded  Biology  into 
a  purely  physical  science,  and  it  has  nearly  expurgated  the  soul  essence 
of  Psychology,  reducing  it  to  a  little  more  than  a  speculation  on  mun- 
dane mentality  —  confounding  Psyche  and  Mens — Psychology  and  a 
barren  Metaphysics. 

We  might  be  tempted  to  unite  the  spiritual  and  physical  in  such  a 
compound  as  Psycho-biosis,  but  that  would  be  a  clumsy  patchwork  of 
elements,  each  of  which  is  withered  and  degenerated  in  literature. 

We  need  a  single  word  containing  in  itself  the  ideas  partially  rep- 
resented by  the  words  Manhood,  Life,  Health,  Virtue,  and  Animation, 
with  an  intimation  of  the  exuberance  of  a  happy  nature,  but  there  is 
no  such  word    to  express  a  happy  and  efficient  Psycho-zoic  existence. 

Our  verbal  difficulty  arises  from  the  fact  that  soul  and  body,  object- 
ively (and  not  subjectively)  considered,  are  so  far  apart  and  distinct 


CHAP.  IX.]  HEALTH,  AND  ITS  RESTORATION.  165 

in  the  common  mind,  which  dwells  on  material  things,  that  they  are 
seldom  unitized  in  thought.  A  different  set  of  words  applies  to  each, 
yet  such  is  their  parallelism  that  a  single  word  is  often  applicable  to 
them  both  —  as,  for  example,  Firmness,  Energy,  Excitement,  Rest- 
lessness, Tranquillity,  Languor,  Depression,  Weakness,  etc. 

Psycho-dynamia,  or  psycho-dynamy,  expresses  much  of  the  compound 
idea,  but  conveys  more  of  the  power  and  less  of  the  happy,  normal  com- 
pleteness of  life  than  belongs  to  the  health  region  of  the  brain.  It 
expresses  mainly  the  firmness  and  dignity  which  are  found  at  the  pos- 
terior part  of  the  sagittal  suture  and  at  the  summit  of  the  dorsal  region 
of  the  spinal  column. 

The  Greek  Pneuma  is  closely  analogous  to  Psyche  and  has  not  been 
desecrated  by  metaphysical  speculation.  P  neonatology  has  been  left 
to  represent  the  real  and  substantial  science  of  the  soul,  apart  from 
the  body,  but  as  it  represents  the  separated  soul,  it  cannot  represent 
the  embodied  soul,  with  its  armament  of  physical  power.  Pneuma 
represents,  by  its  double  sense,  the  air  or  breath  which  is  the  influx 
of  the  body  and  the  analogous  aura  or  soul  which  is  the  influx  of  the 
brain.  Hence,  Pneumatics  is  the  science  of  the  atmosphere,  and 
Pneumatology  the  science  of  the  ethereal  realm  of  the  soul. 

Nearly  equivalent  for  the  Biological  is  the  Zoic  group  of  words  — 
Zoon,  a  living  creature  (whence  Zoology,  the  science  of  animals); 
Zoos,  living  ;  Zoe,  life  ;  Zoeros,  vivacious  or  full  of  life  ;  and  Zootes, 
the  animal  nature  as  opposed  to  the  divine  nature.  The  life  thus 
expressed  is  like  the  biological,  and  lacks  the  psychic  or  pneumatic 
element. 

In  the  Latin,  too,  we  find  that  words  representing  air  or  breath  rep- 
resent also  the  spiritual  element,  as  if  it  had  been  intuitively  perceived 
that  our  spiritual  life  is  like  our  breath,  an  influx  of  the  invisible. 

Anima  signifies  alike  the  air  or  breeze,  the  breath,  and  the  vital  prin- 
ciple or  life.  Thus  it  represents  animal  life,  though  sometimes  poeti- 
cally extended  to  the  departed  spirit.  Animus  is  a  word  of  more  vital 
and  energetic  meaning;  it  suggests  the  thinking,  feeling,  willing, 
emotional  soul.  It  suggests  all  the  strong  emotions,  impulses,  and 
determinations  of  the  departed  spirit,  and  is  not  void  of  courage,  hope, 
and  pleasure.  It  is,  therefore,  the  most  expressive  word  for  the  full 
normal  life  which  comes  from  the  superior  posterior  region  of  the 
brain.  Anglicised  in  Animation,  k  expresses  better  than  any  other 
term  the  central  element  of  life  and  character,  which  I  find  the  su- 
premely beneficent  and  dominant  quality  of  perfect  life.  Possibly  some 
other  ancient  language  may  have  a  better  expression,  but  the  Romans, 
whose  powerful  animus  ruled  the  world,  have  given  us  the  best  word 
extant  in  our  language  for  our  present  purposes;  but  even  this  has  not 


l66  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  [CHAP.    IX. 

as  much  of  the  pleasing,  attractive,  persuasive,  charming,  ethical  ele- 
ment as  nature  has  given  us  in  the  supreme  faculty  which  wins  as  well 
as  commands,  which  gives  to  life  its  best  enjoyment  and  highest  suc- 
cess. We  need  four  words,  such  as  health,  energy,  happiness,  and 
cheerfulness,  to  express  its  full  influence  and  power ;  though  anima- 
tion may  correctly  express  its  influence  when  the  moral  element  is  not 
prominent,  and  therefore  may  often  be  an  adequate  expression.  It 
gives  animation  alike  to  the  intellectual,  moral,  and  animal  faculties, 
and  tends  to  give  them  a  symmetrical  development  —  making  a  char- 
acter decidedly  attractive. 

Speaking  of  this  supreme  faculty,  as  I  have  done,  for  therapeutic 
effects,  I  have  called  it  Health,  because  perfect,  active  health  is  the 
condition  which  it  produces  ;  when  in  predominance  it  develops  act- 
ive, exuberant,  attractive,  and  pleasing  animation  ;  it  gives  a  feeling 
of  purity  and  brightness  in  the  entire  person,  and  a  glow  of  kindly, 
social  feeling,  with  a  desire  to  be  loved,  fitting  one  for  every  social 
duty.  I  am  almost  induced  to  coin  a  word  to  express  this  admirable 
faculty,  but  for  the  present  let  the  word  Health  answer,  with  a  rich 
and  abundant  significance,  including  animation. 

Understanding,  then,  that  the  superior  posterior  region  of  the  brain 
and  the  superior  posterior  region  of  the  body  are  the  harmonic  cen- 
tres of  perfect  life,  whatever  they  may  be  called  (this  perfect  life 
being  concentred  at  the  location  provisionally  named  Health)  to  give 
this  nobler  portion  of  the  constitution  absolute  predominance  in  our- 
selves and  in  our  patients  is  what  we  should  seek  as  healers,  and  any 
system  of  bodily  exercises  which  strongly  develops  the  shoulders, 
especially  such  as  the  health-lift  and  rowing,  will  be  an  important  ad- 
dition to  curative  resources,  not  only  for  the  patient  but  for  the  healer 
himself,  who  should  frequently  use  such  exercises,  and  will  find  them 
beneficial,  especially  just  before  going  to  heal  his  patients. 

In  addition  to  these  physical  exercises  there  are  certain  moral 
exercises  by  which  the  healer  sustains  himself  in  his  duties.  These 
moral  exercises  consist  chiefly  in  making  friends  and  followers,  by 
attractive  and  impressive  manners,  in  associating  with  friends  and 
gaining  the  strength  which  comes  from  their  admiration,  love,  and 
sympathy.  He  should,  therefore,  as  a  truly  religious  man,  cultivate 
the  most  affectionate  and  hospitable  sentiments  towards  all,  and  should 
endeavor,  not  rudely  or  boldly,  but  in  the  most  pleasing  manner,  to 
take  the  lead  in  society  and  make  himself  an  object  of  interest.  If 
he  can  take  the  position  of  a  public  teacher  or  lecturer  it  will  make 
an  important  addition  to  his  moral  force,  and  if  he  can  so  cultivate 
his  nobler  nature  as  to  become  the  centre,  the  reservoir,  or  the  chan- 
nel of  that  purest  health,  life,  and  love  which  belong  to  the  spirit  world, 
he  is  then  admirably  equipped  for  his  mission. 


CHAP.     IX.]  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION  l6/ 

The  sustained  strength  of  his  own  perfect  life  enables  him  to  dif- 
fuse a  similar  sustaining  energy,  while  his  love  gives  him  a  pleasure 
in  uplifting  others,  and  a  power  to  benefit  them  by  his  mere  presence 
and  everything  that  emanates  from  him. 

Love  and  life  are  correlative.  Love  is  that  which  energizes  and 
sustains  life.  Love  in  each  member  of  a  family  sustains  life  in  all 
the  others.  Wives  pine  in  health  when  the  husband's  love  declines  ; 
men  decline  in  their  whole  nature  when  not  sustained  by  love  at 
home.  The  patients  of  a  loving  physician  delight  in  his  presence 
and  live  upon  his  influence,  sometimes  regardless  of  his  drugs,  as  was 
shown  in  the  somewhat  famous  case  of  the  honest  Dr.  Jennings,  of 
Derby,  Conn.,  who,  over  forty  years  ago,  becoming  convinced  that 
his  medicines  produced  little  good  effect,  gradually  reduced  his  doses, 
and  finally  gave  them  up  entirely,  substituting  bread  pills  and  colored 
powders  and  liquids,  and  continued  a  practice  so  successful  that  after 
he  had  publicly  confessed  that  he  used  no  medicine  the  people  adhered 
to  him  and  could  not  be  persuaded  to  patronize  another  physician, 
even  when  recommended  by  Dr.  J.  himself. 

To  what  extent  the  mere  presence  of  the  healer  may  be  a  substitute 
for  all  other  healing  agencies  depends  upon  his  personal  endowments. 
Dr.  J.  R.  Newton,  Dr.  G.  Swan,  and  many  others,  have  cured  success- 
fully without  contact,  and  at  a  distance,  and  it  is  presumable  (but  not 
inevitably  necessary)  that  these  remarkable  cures  were  made  with 
the  co-operation  of  attendant  spirits.  Prayer,  which  brings  in  spiritual 
co-operation,  has  cured  so  many  hundreds  in  a  public  and  very  mar- 
vellous manner  that  no  candid  student  acquainted  with  the  facts  can 
doubt  that  the  religious  element  is  a  large  part  of  the  healing  power 
—  operating  not  only  by  the  loving  and  curative  energy  developed  in 
the  constitution  of  the  healer,  but  by  the  abundant  spiritual  influence 
which  he  attracts  to  himself  spontaneously,  as  well  as  by  prayers. 

Armed  with  health,  vigor,  buoyant  energy,  and  love,  guarded  by 
the  precautions  I  have  fully  explained,  and  reinforced  by  the  invisible 
power  which  aids  the  spiritual-minded  man,  the  healer  must  be  suc- 
cessful, and  in  proportion  to  his  power  may  achieve  those  results 
which  the  world  calls  miraculous. 

But  to  achieve  any  results  wisely  and  well  he  must  thoroughly 
understand  that  in  which  he  is  engaged.  He  must  thoroughly 
understand  the  human  constitution,  and  the  laws  of  its  operation 
which  are  developed  by  Sarcognomy.  Even  when  he  acts  as  the 
passive  instrument  of  spirit  power,  the  same  knowledge  is  important, 
for  the  ability  of  the  spirit  to  produce  results  depends  largely  upon 
the  character,  the  natural  capacities,  and  acquired  skill  and  knowl- 
edge of   the   medium.     The  highest    manifestation    that  spirits  can 


l68  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  [CHAP.    IX. 

make  of  artistic,  musical,  literary,  or  philosophic  power  depends 
upon  the  natural  capacity  and  acquired  skill  of  the  medium.  Through 
a  medium  of  artistic  ability  fine  works  of  art  are  produced  which 
would  be  impossible  under  other  conditions  ;  wise  utterances  come 
through  mediums  of  superior  intuitive  intellectual  power  ;  and  the 
very  best  medical  results  will  be  produced  only  through  mediums  of 
good  intellectual  power,  well  educated  in  the  sciences  of  life,  disease, 
and  therapeutics. 

It  is  evident  that  a  spirit  operating  through  any  medium  must  be 
hampered  by  the  limited  powers  and  ideas  of  the  medium's  brain, 
even  if  the  mediumship  be  complete  and  passive.  The  wisdom  and 
moral  power  of  a  man  cannot  come  through  the  brain  of  a  child  or 
a  horse.  An  ignorant  an  unscientific  medium  cannot  do  full  justice 
to  the  healing  art.  Moreover,  the  spirits  who  come  to  aid  in  treat- 
ment are  in  many  cases  themselves  too  ignorant  and  unscientific  to 
compensate  for  the  deficiencies  of  the  medium. 

The  healer  who  is  neither  gifted  with  psychometric  intuition,  nor 
sustained  by  spirit  power,  nor  instructed  in  Sarcognomy,  must  oper- 
ate in  a  blind  and  often  erroneous  manner  in  nervauric  and  electric 
treatment. 

The  noblest  embodiment  of  the  healing  art,  the  most  worthy 
of  public  esteem,  is  the  physician  who  has  been  drawn  into  the  pro- 
fession by  his  active  benevolence  and  psychometric  skill  in  under- 
standing diseases,  who  after  going  through  the  usual  studies  of  the 
colleges  has  perceived  the  inadequacy  of  their  remedies,  and  devoted 
himself  to  the  investigation  of  the  materia  medica ;  who  has  felt  the 
inadequacy  of  their  physiology  and  philosophy,  made  himself  ac- 
quainted with  the  power  of  what  is  called  animal  magnetism,  and  then, 
recognizing  its  destitution  of  a  scientific  basis,  has  found  in  Sarcog- 
nomy the  laws  of  nervauric  and  electric  healing  which  he  applies 
under  the  guidance  of  his  intuitions,  while  using  remedies  selected 
with  similar  skill  adapted  to  the  varying  conditions  of  patients,  in- 
stead of  the  mere  names  of  diseases. 

Psycho-Hygienic  Treatment. 

The  enlightened  healer  will  not  limit  himself  to  treating  the  de- 
rangements of  the  body  ;  for  so  close  is  the  parallelism  of  physiologi- 
cal and  psychological  processes  that  one  cannot  be  treated  without 
producing  an  influence  upon  the  other.  When  we  restore  the  body 
to  health  we  improve  the  functions  of  the  brain  and  assist  the  moral 
nature. 

But  actual  health,  or  relief  from  the  conditions  of  disease  produced 
by  injurious  causes,  is  merely  a  state,  and  is  not  fundamental  or  con- 


CHAP.    IX.]  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  169 

stitutional  health  —  the  possession  of  a  health  power  to  resist  dis- 
ease and  to  sustain  every  function  of  life.  One  may  be  relieved  from 
disease  and  yet  be  extremely  liable  to  falling  again  into  depraved 
conditions.  Hence  the  permanent  improvement  of  the  constitution 
is  more  important  than  the  immediate  relief  of  morbid  conditions, 
and  it  is  a  characteristic  doctrine  of  the  new  physiology  that  this  im- 
provement and  elevation  of  the  type  of  the  constitution  requires  an 
increase  of  the  moral  power  —  an  increase  of  those  calm  energies 
which  belong  to  the  soul  and  to  the  superior  regions  of  the  brain  and 
the  body  ;  hence  all  hygienic  treatment  should  be  ethical  in  tendency, 
and  the  healer  should  aim  to  leave  his  patient,  if  possible,  with  an 
exalted  energy  in  his  higher  nature,  which  would  tend  to  lead  him 
into  a  better  and  healthier  life. 

But  in  cultivating  this  noble  manhood  and  womanhood  it  is  impor- 
tant not  to  mistake  the  passive  negative  virtues  for  the  divinely  sus- 
taining elements  of  life.  All  conceptions  of  duty  are  relatively 
worthless  which  do  not  lead  to  action. 

The  amiable  sentiments  must  exist  in  sufficient  force  to  control 
all  selfish  and  misanthropic  feelings  ;  but  mere  amiability  with  un- 
selfishness is  not  the  condition  or  character  to  which  the  laws  of  the 
universe  accord  success  and  the  happiness  of  robust  health  ;  and 
thousands  of  good  people  with  this  false  ideal  in  their  minds  have 
met  with  misfortunes,  both  physical  and  spiritual,  from  acting  on  this 
erroneous  view,  and  have  found  fault  with  the  world  and  its  Creator 
because  they  have  been  unfortunate  when  they  have  not  conformed 
to  the  conditions  of  success,  which  demand  active  power  as  well  as 
unselfishness. 

The  survey  of  the  world  in  any  department,  with  a  spirit  of  candid 
search  for  truth,  will  teach  us  that  power  is  the  chief  element  of 
success,  but  that  the  only  satisfactory  and  happy  success  is  that 
which  is  attained  by  noble  means.  The  success  of  the  carnivorous 
animal,  the  despot,  the  soldier,  the  miser,  or  the  knave  is  a  physical 
success  in  which  there  is  very  little  happiness  and  often  very  little 
health.  But  that  success  which  is  gained  by  heroic  energy  in  the 
pursuit  of  noble  aims,  with  pleasing  manners  that  win  the  love  of  all, 
is  the  only  true  and  satisfactory  success.  This  comes  from  the  upper 
occipital  region  in  which  the  higher  energies  reside,  and  which  is 
associated  with  the  upper  posterior  portion  of  the  trunk. 

Our  conception  of  virtue  should  be  that  of  a  positive  power,  acting 
with  that  broad  sympathy  and  intuitive  understanding  which  realize 
that  happiness  cannot  be  an  isolated  condition,  and  that  he  who 
would  enter  the  sphere  of  true  happiness  must  make  a  sphere  of 
happiness  around  him  in  human  beings,  and  should  never  relax  in  the 


I/O  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  [CHAP.    IX. 

pursuit  of  the  noble  aims  to  which  his  life  is  devoted.  Firmness  and 
energy  are  the  virtues  that  command  success,  and  he  who  fails  to 
exercise  them  should  blame  himself  and  not  the  world  for  his  failure. 
Godliness,  a  God-likeness  which  brings  success,  is  not  the  sentimen- 
tal and  egotistic  quality  cultivated  by  the  Pharisee,  but  that  nobler 
quality  which  achieves  grand  results  in  thought,  in  action,  in  society, 
in  government,  and  in  the  triumphs  of  civilization  —  a  quality  which 
in  Patrick  Henry  moved  multitudes,  in  Washington  ruled  a  nation,  in 
Jefferson  led  the  progress  of  liberal  thought,  a  quality  that  insures 
noble  aims  and  noble  action. 

To  cultivate  these  virtues  as  accessory  to  health,  the  healer  should 
keep  his  patient  under  the  influence  of  the  upper  zone  of  the  body 
and  of  the  brain,  in  a  cheerful,  energetic  mental  condition.  The 
tranquil  amiability  of  the  upper  frontal  surface  of  the  chest  should 
be  combined  with  the  amiable  but  positive  energy  of  the  summit  of 
the  back,  on  and  between  the  shoulders,  and  of  the  arms.  The 
gentler  virtues  should  never  be  separated  from  the  energies. 

By  these  manipulations  discontented  and  discordant  husbands  and 
wives  might  sometimes  be  restored  to  harmony,  as  the  causes  of 
quarrels  which  seemed  so  important  while  they  were  under  the  influ- 
ence of  irritation  and  gloom  would  appear  very  unimportant  when 
good-humor  was  restored.  The  restoration  of  harmony  would  con- 
tribute greatly  to  the  restoration  of  health,  for  there  are  thousands 
whose  health  is  depressed  by  domestic  inharmony. 

In  the  management  of  children  psychic  manipulation  is  very  im- 
portant, for  there  are  few  that  might  not  be  favorably  affected.  The 
more  impressible  class  are  creatures  of  circumstances.  In  a  turbulent 
school  they  speedily  absorb  all  the  depravity  they  mingle  with  ;  but 
the  gentle  manipulation  of  parents  may  remove  many  evil  influences, 
conquer  ill-temper  and  confirm  habits  of  application.  This  treatment 
will  hereafter  claim  an  important  part  in  systems  of  education,  and 
no  one  will  be  considered  qualified  as  a  teacher  who  cannot  with  his 
hands  exert  a  soothing  and  refining  influence. 

»  The  evil  tendencies  of  the  animal  nature  will  be  subdued  in  body 
and  in  brain  by  dispersive  passes  and  by  electric  currents,  while  the 
virtues  will  be  energized  at  their  source  in  the  upper  regions  of  the 
brain  and  body,  as  indicated  by  Anthropology. 

Psychic  or  moral  treatment  is  not  within  the  scope  of  this  volume, 
but  it  becomes  incidentally  a  part  of  the  therapeutic  treatment,  and 
it  certainly  comes  within  the  duties  of  the  true  physician,  the  com- 
petent healer,  for  health  and  virtue  are  twin  brothers. 

To  carry  out  the  doctrines  of  this  chapter,  the  physician  should 
aim  to  establish  the  predominance  of  the  shoulders  and  the  upper 
occipital  region  of  the  brain. 


CHAP.  IX.]        HEALTH,  AND  ITS  RESTORATION.  IJl 

1.  First,  he  should  use  the  refreshing'  dispersive  passes  from  the 
lower  margin  of  the  abdomen  toward  the  shoulders.  This  disperses 
morbid  and  debilitating  nervous  conditions.  A  similar  influence 
may  be  produced  on  the  head  by  brisk  dispersive  passes  from  the 
cheek-bones  toward  the  crown  of  the  head  —  the  centre  of  the  scalp, 
which  is  near  the  posterior  end  of  the  sagittal  suture. 

2.  He  should  stimulate  the  shoulders  and  the  whole  upper  dorsal 
region,  for  a  space  of  six  by  twelve  or  fifteen  inches  across  the  back, 
by  the  application  of  his  hands  and  by  a  gentle  percussion,  using 
vigor  in  his  muscles  but  gentleness  of  touch  in  contact,  unless  in  a 
robust  person. 

3.  When  the  hands  are  resting  on  the  back  they  snould  be  in  the 
centre  of  each  shoulder  blade.  If  the  operator  is  a  sensitive  percip- 
ient he  will  recognize,  while  his  hands  are  in  this  position,  the 
increasing  comfort  and  brightness  in  the  patient's  condition,  and  if 
he  is  left  in  that  condition,  its  beneficial  influences  will  in  many  cases 
continue  for  hours. 

4.  The  effect  may  be  enhanced  by  placing  one  hand  across  the 
upper  occiput  from  right  to  left,  covering  the  region  of  Health,  while 
the  other  is  on  the  Health  region  of  the  shoulder. 

5.  If  the  patient  is  nervous,  restless,  or  melancholic,  one  hand  may 
be  placed  in  the  armpit  at  the  region  of  Cheerfulness,  while  the  other 
is  on  Health,  or  both  may  be  applied  at  Cheerfulness. 

6.  If  the  patient  has  any  selfish,  morose,  or  gloomy  qualities,  or  is 
lacking  in  the  enjoyment  of  kindly  emotions  and  elevated  views  of 
duty,  the  hands  should  be  applied  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  shoul- 
der and  the  chest  as  far  down  as  the  nipple,  the  effect  of  which  will 
be  soothing  and  pleasant  as  well  as  beneficial  to  his  moral  nature, 
and  will  assist  in  the  restoration  of  health.  This  is  the  remedy  for 
bad  temper,  selfishness,  gloom,  and  domestic  discord. 

7.  While  the  hand  is  kept  on  the  shoulder  or  the  healthful  region 
of  the  head,  special  treatment  may  be  given  with  the  other  hand  in 
application  to  the  various  localities  that  need  attention,  the  effect 
being  greatly  enhanced  by  the  hand  on  the  shoulder. 

8.  If  treatment  be  administered  by  the  battery,  the  hygienic  cur- 
rent should  be  administered  by  applying  the  positive  pole  with  a 
broad  electrode  (a  carbon  plate  or  large  sponge  wet  with  warm  salt 
water)  at  the  hypochondria,  the  spot  marked  as  the  region  of  disease, 
and  the  negative  with  a  large  electrode  on  the  health  region  of  the 
shoulder.  For  the  best  effect  there  should  be  two  electrodes  or 
rather  rheophores  to  each  pole,  that  the  right  and  left  sides  may  be 
treated  simultaneously.  The  current  may  be  given  from  five,  ten,  or 
twenty  cells,  according  to  the  sensibility  of  the  patient,  and  continued 


\J2  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  [CHAP.    IX. 

from  five  to  twenty  minutes.  If  small  rheophores  are  applied  to  the 
skin  they  should  be  moved  about.  This  is  less  important  with  large 
rheophores. 

With  the  common  portable  battery  the  primary  or  magneto-gal- 
vanic current  is  generally  appropriate. 

In  using  static  electricity  the  application  of  the  negative  elec- 
trodes near  the  shoulders  and  the  spinal  column  generally,  drawing  a 
gentle  current  or  sparks,  is  the  most  valuable  method. 

9.  If  the  patient  needs  the  influence  of  any  special  medicine,  it 
may  be  administered  by  dipping  the  positive  sponges  in  a  solution  so 
as  to  have  the  current  pass  through  it,  or  a  slighter  influence  may  be 
imparted  by  applying  a  strong  solution  on  the  skin  and  passing  the 
current  through  it.  The  epigastrium  is  the  most  effective  place  for 
medical  application.  In  using  the  faradic  current  the  medical  appli- 
cations may  be  made  at  each  pole. 

10.  If  the  faradic  current  be  used,  it  may  be  applied  as  a  local 
stimulus  by  applying  one  pole  on  each  shoulder  at  the  site  of  Health, 
or  by  applying  two  poles  near  each  other  at  any  position  needing 
stimulus.  In  doing  this,  however,  a  broad  carbon  rheophore  is  best, 
covered  with  wet  cloth  or  leather;  a  broad  sponge  will  answer  the 
same  purpose.  A  broad  soothing  rheophore  is  necessary  when  the 
poles  are  near  each  other ;  the  best  material  for  which  is  carbon. 
The  alternating  galvanic  currents  may  be  used  in  the  same  way  as  a 
local  stimulus  by  applying  them  near  together  with  frequent  inter- 
ruptions. One  of  the  rheophores  may  be  used  for  this  purpose  by 
a  rapid  tapping  or  a  gliding  over  the  surface  which  produces  the 
broken  current  that  stimulates. 

11.  There  is  no  current  in  electro-therapeutics  at  all  comparable 
to  the  hygienic  current  from  the  hypochondria  to  the  shoulder,  and 
in  applying  this  current  the  negative  pole  may  be  applied  not  only 
to  the  site  of  Health,  but  over  the  entire  upper  half  of  the  surface  of 
the  back,  thus  producing  a  great  variety  of  tonic  and  restorative 
effects,  as  shown  by  the  map  of  Sarcognomy.  Thus  we  may  invigorate 
the  brain,  lungs,  heart,  liver,  and  stomach,  or  administer  general 
tonics,  as  will  be  explained. 

12.  The  hygienic  region  or  upper  portion  of  the  back  and  of  the 
occiput  will  generally  restore  pleasant  and  amiable  feelings,  especially 
in  conjunction  with  the  cheerfulness  of  the  axilla,  but  whenever  a 
positively  amiable  influence  is  needed  we  should  treat  the  whole 
upper  frontal  surface  of  the  chest,  on  which  we  develop  the  warmest 
sentiments  of  affection,  duty,  and  religion. 

13.  The  reader  will  bear  in  mind  that  the  effect  of  nervauric  opera 
tions  is  materially  enhanced  by  previously  exciting  impressibility  at 


CHAP.    IX.]  HEALTH,    AND    ITS    RESTORATION.  1 73 

the  lower  end  of  the  sternum,  or  in  the  temples  an   inch  behind  the 
brow. 

14.  Alternating  galvanic  currents  through  the  upper  portion  of  the 
chest,  antero-posteriorly,  rouse  the  best  elements  of  the  physical  and 
moral  constitution.  The  anterior  organs  being  correlative  (or  frater- 
nally associated)  with  the  posterior,  their  simultaneous  stimulation 
corresponds  with  normal  life.  Hence,  we  may  establish  rules  for  the 
conjoint  stimulation  of  the  correlative  anterior  and  posterior  organs 
throughout  the  body.  The  treatment  of  consumptive  patients  by , 
currents  through  the  chest  was  an  approximation  to  this  principle 
made  by  a  Belgian  physician,  whose  reports  of  his  success  were  so 
extraordinary  as  to  be  considered  incredible  by  Dr.  Beard,  the  author 
of  a  standard  work  on  electro-therapeutics. 

For  a   fuller  exposition   of   electric   treatment,  I    must  refer  the 
reader  to  the  chapter  on  electro-therapeutics. 


CHAPTER    X. 

OPERATIVE    METHODS. 

Transmission  of  vital  power  —  Proof  by  experiments  on  frogs  and  by  anatomy  — 
Failure  of  electrical  experiments  by  eminent  physiologists  —  Functions  of  the  con- 
volutions which  they  could  not  reach  —  My  reasons  for  neglecting  galvanism  — 
Medical  opposition  —  Psycho-vital  influences  most  appropriate  to  the  brain  —  Dis- 
cussion of  the  experiments  of  Fritzch  and  Hitzig — How  to  begin  experiments  — 
Use  of  plasters  and  other  agents  —  Familiar  illustrations  of  Sarcognomy  —  Patho- 
logical illustrations  —  Initiating  experiments — Vital  emanations  —  Positive  and 
negative  poles — Evils  and  dangers  of  electricity  —  Relations  of  operator  and  patient 
—  Necessary  influences  for  the  operator —  Spiritual  inspiration  ;  its  philosophy  and 
power —  Power  of  diagnosis  —  Prof.  Draper's  testimony  as  to  the  spirit  —  Conduct 
in  the  sick  chamber;  hygienic  precautions  —  Dispersive  manipulations- — Non-con- 
ductors—  Effect  of  passes  —  Quackery  of  massage  —  Activity  in  healing — Precau- 
tions for  maintenance  of  health  —  Dangers  of  contagion. 


In  nervauric  therapeutics  we  use  every  region  of  the  brain  and 
body  for  the  production  of  physiological  and  therapeutic  effects,  and 
we  rouse  these  regions  by  the  application  of  the  hand,  which  is  their 
proper  and  congenial  stimulus  in  the  impressible  constitution. 

That  the  vital  force  and  vital  processes  of  one  constitution  should 
rouse  similar  processes  in  another  is  a  proposition  strongly  resisted 
by  most  physiologists,  notwithstanding  their  familiar  knowledge  of 
the  transmission  of  pathological  processes  which  reproduce  exactly 
the  same  disease  by  their  emanations. 

There  is  an  experiment  on  the  limbs  of  frogs  which  might  assist 
these  sceptics  to  realize  such  transmission.  If  the  frog  galvanoscope 
is  used  by  placing  the  nerve  of  the  leg  across  the  muscles  of  another 
frog's  leg  and  then  passing  a  feeble  electric  current  through  the 
nerves  of  the  latter,  sufficient  to  convulse  its  muscles,  the  convulsive 
movement  will  also  appear  in  the  leg  which  has  its  nerve  resting 
upon  the  convulsed  muscle.  This  is  not  simply  due  to  a  passage  of 
electricity,  for  if  a  non-conductor,  such  as  a  thin  plate  of  mica,  be 
interposed  between  the  second  nerve  and  the  first  muscle,  it  does 
not  prevent  the  convulsion,  which  shows  that  a  convulsion  in  one 
muscle  may  transmit  an  influence  which  will  convulse  another  mus- 
cle—  an  influence  which  is  distinct  from  electricity,  as  it  is  not  hin- 
dered   by    electric    non-conductors    (see    Philos.   Transactions,    1847, 

P-  231). 

But  it  is  not  necessary  to  employ  electricity  at  all ;  the  muscles  of 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  1 75 

a  frog,  a  dog,  or  a  rabbit  may  be  convulsed  by  irritating  the  spinal 
cord  mechanically,  and  the  frog  nerve,  if  in  contact  with  the  con- 
vulsed muscle,  will  transfer -the  convulsive  action  to  its  own  muscle, 
and  it  may  be  transmitted  still  further,  so  that  a  series  of  five  or  six 
nerves  may  be  started  into  action  by  the  first. 

The  same  principle  may  be  illustrated  in  man.  If  we  contract 
firmly  the  flexor  muscles  which  close  the  hand  and  bring  our  muscles 
into  contact  with  those  of  a  sensitive  or  impressible  person  who  is 
passive,  the  emanating  influence  will  gradually  cause  a  contraction  in 
the  same  muscles,  which,  not  being  voluntary,  will  not  obey  the  will, 
but  will  pass  off  gradually. 

This  experiment  illustrates  the  general  law  which  has  long  been 
applied  to  healing,  and  which  I  have  applied  to  experimental  investi- 
gation —  that  all  vital  and  psychic  processes  are  transferable,  as  well 
as  the  pathological  and  the  muscular. 

That  there  are  nervauric  currents  in  the  body  would  seem  self- 
evident  when  we  know  that  compression  of  a  motor  nerve  paralyzes 
its  muscle.  Evidently  something  passes  which  pressure  interrupts. 
Moreover,  how  can  we  conceive  voluntary  muscular  action  without 
believing  that  the  current  which  is  allowed  to  pass  down  the  un- 
impeded nerve  passes  from  the  nerve  to  the  muscular  fibre.  The 
picture  of  nerve  filaments  passing  among  the  muscular  fibres  of  the 
Hyla  (green  tree  frog),  given  by  that  admirable  microscopist,  Dr. 
Lionel  Beale,  shows  the  nervous  and  muscular  filaments  entirely 
distinct.  (See  plate  of  Bioplasm  and  Nerves,  fig.  9,  page  62.)  We 
cannot  understand  how  the  nerve  filaments  put  the  muscular  into 
action  unless  something  passes  between  them. 

It  would  seem  a  necessary  consequence  that  any  agents  passing 
from  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  to  the  muscles  or  any  other  struc- 
tures might  pass  into  any  other  structures  that  were  in  contact  or 
proximity. 

In  the  European  experiments  on  the  brain,  with  electricity,  the 
results  have  been  extremely  barren,  not  only  because  electricity  is 
not  the  proper  stimulant  for  psychic  functions,  but  because  the  inves- 
tigation was  not  conducted  in  a  psychic  spirit.  As  Althaus  says, 
"Although  the  induced  current  may  penetrate  to  the  brain,  it  seems  to 
exert  only  little  influence  on  it,  just  as  on  the  retina  and  other  organs 
of  special  sense." 

Longet  entirely  failed  to  produce  muscular  action  by  operating  on 
either  the  white  or  the  gray  substance  of  the  cerebral  hemispheres  by 
galvanism  or  by  mechanical  and  chemical  irritation. 

Weber,  Majendie,  Budge,  Schiff,  Matteucci,  and  Van  Deen  all 
failed  to  produce  any  physical  results  in  the  body  by  galvanic  and 


l?6  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

farad ic  electricity  applied  to  the  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum  and 
the  cerebellum  in  an  enormous  number  of  experiments  and  the 
sacrifice  of  a  vast  number  of  animals.  The  muscular  system  was 
reached  in  such  experiments  only  by  the  motor  nerves,  the  spinal 
cord  and  its  commanding  summit  in  the  brain  before  its  expansion  is 
lost  in  the  hemispheres,  that  is  to  say,  in  the  medulla  oblongata,  the 
crura  cerebri,  and  the  tubercula  quadrigemina,  which  in  animals  are 
called  the  optic  lobes,  and  which  thus  appear  to  be  the  summit  of 
the  muscular  tract  that  responds  by  electricity  ;  although  we  know 
that  in  vital  action  the  volitionary  power  that  commands  the  muscles 
proceeds  from  the  corpora  striata,  and  that  these  are  controlled  by 
the  higher  organs  of  the  brain.  But  electricity  is  so  ill-adapted  to 
the  higher  processes  of  life  that  it  produced  no  muscular  response  to 
these  laborious  and  skilful  experimenters  above  the  tubercula  quadri- 
gemina. 

What  then  were  the  functions  in  the  hemispheres  which  would  not 
respond  to  electricity?  To  this  the  answer  of  vivisection  was  by 
ablation.  Flourens,  in  an  extensive  series  of  operations  on  birds  as 
well  as  mammalia,  found  that  the  functions  in  the  hemispheres  were 
those  of  psychic  life  —  consciousness  and  volition;  for  consciousness, 
volition,  and  all  psychic  operations  whatever  were  completely  abolished 
after  ablation  of  the  hemispheres,  while  animal  life  remained  com- 
plete, and  the  animals  remained  in  a  state  of  unconsciousness  as  if 
asleep,  although  capable  of  swallowing  food  by  reflex  action  through 
the  nerves,  when  food  was  put  in  their  mouths. 

In  these  functions  of  conscious  psychic  life  which  modern  physiolo- 
gists with  their  rude  mechanical  conceptions  have  been  unable  to 
reach  or  evolve,  lie  the  great  majority  of  the  operations  which  are 
interesting  to  humanity  as  the  source  of  our  weal  or  woe,  and  not 
only  the  source  of  joy  or  misery,  but  the  source  of  physiological  and 
pathological  changes  by  an  indirect  influence  on  the  body. 

It  is  pitiable  to  see  all  the  talent  and  learning  of  the  present  cen- 
tury failing,  after  labors  so  prolonged  and  costly,  and  often  cruel,  to 
tell  us  much  that  is  important  of  the  functions  of  the  convoluted 
brain,  in  which  lies  the  science  of  man  —  a  vast  magazine  of  knowl- 
edge, destined  hereafter  to  fill  libraries  with  elaborate  illustrations  of 
that  which  collegiate  science  cannot  even  approach,  because  it  dis- 
dains all  psychic  methods  of  investigation. 

The  failure  of  all  investigations  by  electricity  was  due  to  the  false 
philosophy  which  disqualified  the  inquirers.  I  have  not  found  it  im- 
possible to  excite  and  to  reveal  the  functions  of  the  brain  by  electri- 
cal methods.  My  first  thought  in  this  matter  was  to  demonstrate 
the  functions  of  the  brain  by  galvanism,  but  after  a  few  such  expert- 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  I  77 

ments  I  found  the  psychic  and  nervauric  influences  of  the  human 
hand  so  far  superior  that,  looking  only  to  truth  and  to  science,  I 
hastily  laid  aside  the  electric  method  as  inferior  (a  mistaken  policy) 
and  never  returned  to  its  use  until  recently,  presuming  in  my 
optimism  that  intelligent  men  would  not  fail  to  appreciate  nervauric 
experiments  with  the  hand.  But  a  gross  mind  does  not  appreciate 
simple,  unpretending  truth.  My  experiments  before  committees 
were  entirely  successful,  but  no  sympathetic  chord  responded  in  the 
minds  of  spectators.  A  materialistic  age  demands  materialistic 
methods,  and  if  I  had  appealed,  not  to  the  reason  but  to  the  senses, 
by  an  array  of  galvanic  batteries  and  harsh  experiments  on  hospital 
patients,  the  demonstrations  would  have  resounded  through  the 
literature  of  the  world,  instead  of  meeting  with  immediate  suppres- 
sion. When  the  learned  Dr.  Samuel  L.  Forry  announced  at  New 
York  that  my  experiments  were  in  their  importance  vastly  superior 
to  all  that  had  been  achieved  by  the  most  eminent  physiologists,  and 
the  "  New  York  Medical  and  Surgical  Journal  "  which  he  established 
was  ready  to  do  justice  to  the  subject,  the  peremptory  threats  of  emi- 
nent physicians  forbade  its  mention,  and  the  death  soon  after  of  Dr. 
Forry  deprived  the  truth  of  a  champion  —  a  position  which  Prof. 
Mitchell,  after  repeating  my  experiments  successfully,  was  not  dis- 
posed to  assume. 

I  declined  the  use  of  the  electric  method,  because  that  method  is 
liable  to  evils  and  dangers  from  which  the  nervauric  method  is  free, 
and  because  electricity  is  not  commensurate  with  the  psychic  func- 
tions of  life,  although  like  other  gross  stimulants  it  may  affect  them, 
since  it  acts  on  the  vasomotor  nerves  and  secretions,  and  by  chang- 
ing the  blood-supply  affects  the  organs  of  the  brain  and  is  still  better 
calculated  to  affect  the  brain,  when  in  application  to  the  body  it 
stimulates  regions  to  which  the  brain  responds  in  sympathy. 

The  higher  functions  of  the  brain,  which  are  not  in  direct  correla- 
tion with  electricity,  are  yet  in  close  correlation  with  spiritual  or  ideal 
influences.  A  thought,  or  an  external  object  which  rouses  a  thought, 
will  produce  intense  emotional  action,  which  may  produce  violent 
excitement  of  the  heart  and  muscles,  and  either  greatly  exalt  or 
greatly  depress  the  powers  of  life,  or  originate  various  forms  .of 
disease. 

Psycho-vital  power  must  be  influenced  by  psycho-vital  causes,  and 
these  are  found  in  human  beings  whose  psycho-vital  force  emanates 
from  contact  of  the  hand  and  from  their  entire  personality.  Hence 
the  nervauric  and  psychic  power  must  occupy  a  higher  position  in 
our  therapeutics  than  the  electric,  and  the  scientific  manual  or 
psychic  healer  will  occupy  a  more  and  more  honorable  position  as 
society  advances. 


I78  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

The  psycho-physiological  influence  of  the  hand  is  of  universal 
application,  and  the  hand  is  therefore  the  chief  agent  in  Therapeutic 
Sarcognomy,  although  in  many  cases  the  psychic  energy  of  the  oper- 
ator may  reach  and  powerfully  affect  the  patient  with  therapeutic  in- 
fluences, independent  of  physical  contact. 

I  do  not  deny  that  delicate  electric  influences  may  safely  modify 
the  action  of  the  organs  of  the  brain,  for  these  influences,  like 
caloric,  affect  the  circulation  and  nervauric  conditions,  and  through 
these  means  the  organic  action  may  be  modified,  but  not  in  the 
prompt,  wholesome,  and  natural  manner  which  belongs  to  the  hand, 
and  which  would  authorize  the  general  use  or  substitution  of  elec- 
tricity in  cerebral  therapeutics. 

The  nervauric  operator  who  aims  to  be  a  well-qualified,  scientific 
practitioner  should  understand  well  the  use  of  electricity  as  an  im- 
portant adjunct;  and  when  in  addition  to  this  he  understands  the  use 
of  the  materia  medica,  he  may  take  rank  as  a  complete  physician  and 
something  more  than  a  specialist. 

Before  proceeding  further,  I  would  ask,  Is  there  any  doubt  thrown 
over  my  discoveries,  of  over  forty  years'  standing,  by  the  more  recent 
experiments  of  European  vivisectors,  of  whose  immense  labors  it 
would  not  be  improper  to  say  that  as  to  psychological  discoveries  the 
mountain  in  labor  has  brought  forth  a  mouse  ? 

I  refer  more  especially  to  the  experiments  of  Fritzch  and  Hitzig, 
who  suppose  they  have  discovered  in  the  front  lobes  of  dogs,  mus- 
cular functions,  although  those  functions  are  not  in  any  degree 
affected  by  the  loss  of  the  front  lobe. 

Such  investigations  must  be  accepted  in  subordination  to  the  well- 
established  and  undeniable  truth  that  the  functions  of  the  hemi- 
spheres are  psychic,  and  that  muscular  excitability  cannot  be  com- 
manded above  the  tubercula  quadrigemina.  Fritzch  and  Hitzig's 
experiments  are  supposed  to  show  that  muscular  powers  are  associ- 
ated with  the  frontal  portion  of  the  brain,  as  they  claim  to  have 
excited  certain  muscles  of  the  neck  and  limbs  by  applying  the 
electrodes  at  certain  positions  of  the  frontal  convolutions  —  the 
details  of  which  need  not  be  discussed  at  present.  Taking  the  ex- 
periments as  stated  by  them,  they  do  not  imply  that  any  muscular 
power  exists  in  the  frontal  convolutions,  for  all  direct  nerve  motors 
are  capable  of  rousing  the  muscles  under  galvanism  after  death,  but 
the  influence  of  the  frontal  convolutions  ceased  at  death  in  their 
experiments. 

As  the  frontal  convolutions  are  known  to  be  entirely  psychic,  and 
their  excision  does  not  in  the  slightest  degree  impair  the  muscular 
power,  nor  do  their  injuries  affect  it,  it  is  evident  that  Fritzch  and 


CHAP.    X.J  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  1 79 

Hitzig  only  stimulated  certain  psychic  functions,  which  are  associated 
with  the  control  of  the  muscular  system.  But  we  knew  before  that 
volitionary  impulses  to  certain  muscles  oi-igi?iate  in  the  frontal  or 
intellectual  portion  of  the  brain,  and  pass  by  the  corpora  striata  to 
their  destination.  It  is  probable  that  the  electric  currents  in  their 
experiments  affected  the  corpora  striata  by  impinging  upon  the 
anterior  expansion  of  the  fibres  of  the  striata,  which  would  explain 
the  different  muscular  effects  they  produced  at  different  points, 
while  the  animal  was  alive,  and  their  failure  to  produce  any  effects 
when  they  operated  on  posterior  portions  of  the  brain,  not  belonging 
to  the  radical  expansion  of  the  corpora  striata.  Their  experiments 
are  curious,  but  they  do  not  disturb  anything  that  we  have  hereto- 
fore known  of  the  physiological  and  psychological  functions  of  the 
brain. 

I  see  nothing  in  the  modern  experiments  of  Fritzch  and  Hitzig, 
Ferrier  and  others,  which  is  at  all  contradictory  to  my  own  experi- 
ments. On  the  contrary,  I  shall  quote  them  as  illustrative  confir- 
mations of  my  own  experiments  and  discoveries.  The  movements 
produced  by  Dr.  Ferrier  were  little  else  but  the  gestures  of  natural 
expression  of  the  psychic  faculties,  easily  explained  by  the  laws  of 
Pathognomy.  These  movements  were  easily  produced,  as  all  psychic 
action  in  animal  brains  is  associated  with  muscular  action  much 
more  closely  than  in  man.  For  muscular  effects  the  brains  of 
animals  are  suitable,  but  for  psychic  effects  we  need  the  brain  of 
man. 

The  nervauric  healer  should  study  very  carefully  his  map  of  Sar- 
cognomy,  becoming  familiar  with  the  various  localities,  and  should 
take  every  opportunity  to  verify  them  in  the  treatment  of  patients 
and  in  experiments  on  the  well.  A  single  person  of  highly  impres- 
sible constitution  would  enable  him  to  verify  every  locality  and 
derive  a  large  amount  of  instruction  and  entertainment  from  his 
experiments. 

A  faithful  inquirer  will  have  no  difficulty  in  finding  all  I  have 
found,  and  much  more  than  has  been  stated  in  this  volume. 

To  conduct  the  experiments  properly,  he  should  not  select  one 
accustomed  to  act  as  a  passive  mesmeric  subject  or  capable  of  being 
controlled  by  an  assertion  so  as  to  believe  himself  whatever  he  is  told. 
The  subject  of  experiment  for  scientific  investigation  should  be  in 
the  best  mental  condition  of  clearness  of  perception,  correctness  of 
judgment,  and  independence  of  mind. 

A  very  satisfactory  mode  of  experimenting  is  to  develop  the  local 
results  independent  of  the  personality  of  the  operator,  which  may  be 
done    by  heat  and  cold,  by  electricity,  or  by   stimulating   plasters. 


ISO  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

Mild,  gently  stimulating  capsicum  plasters  may  be  used  —  two  inches 
by  four,  or  three  by  six,  or  varied  according  to  the  object  —  and 
applied  to  the  localities  on  each  side  of  the  body  correspondingly. 
The  effects  may  appear  in  five,  ten,  or  twenty  minutes,  and  the 
application  may  be  continued  for  an  hour  or  hours,  which  will  make 
the  results  more  distinct  and  positive.  A  valuable  method  of  apply- 
ing galvanism  is  by  what  has  been  called  a  Humboldt  battery  —  two 
plates,  such  as  silver  and  zinc,  applied  upon  two  localities  of  the  skin 
and  connected  by  a  wire. 

The  continuous  application  of  moderate  warmth  or  of  warm  cloth- 
ing upon  any  locality  develops  the  local  function,  as  the  continuous 
application  of  cold  depresses  it. 

All  the  effects  which  I  thus  produce  by  the  hand,  by  local  stimula- 
tion, by  heat,  or  by  electricity,  have  been  experienced  millions  of 
times  by  intelligent  people  without  attempting  to  look  into  their 
causation.  They  have  been  produced,  also,  millions  of  times  in  the 
practice  of  medicine  without  prompting  physicians  to  look  into  the 
law  of  their  occurrence,  and  every  intelligent  physician  who  reads 
these  pages  will  find  upon  reflection  that  he  has  encountered  many 
facts  which  illustrate  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy. 

For  example,  who  has  not  observed  that  antagonism  between  the 
head  and  feet  which  Sarcognomy  explains  — how  coldness  of  the  feet 
increases  the  determination  to  the  brain,  and  excites  wakefulness  at 
night ;  how  the  warm  bath  to  the  feet  relieves  the  brain  and  moder- 
ates fever ;  and  how  the  heat  and  fatigue  of  the  feet  from  overwork  or 
prolonged  walking  deadens  the  action  of  the  brain  and  reduces  the 
mental  power? 

Who  has  not  observed  the  dangerous  effects  of  drafts  of  cold  air 
striking  the  upper  part  of  the  back,  depressing  all  the  powers  of  life 
and  endangering  pneumonia  or  fever? 

What  physician  is  not  familiar  with  the  association  between 
tenderness  or  pain  at  the  lower  end  of  the  spinal  vertebrae  and  the 
pelvic  diseases  of  women  ;  or  the  prostrating  influence  of  abdominal 
affections  ;  and  the  hopeful  influence  of  affections  in  the  upper  part  of 
the  chest,  and  the  alarming  anxiety  and  fear  caused  by  affections  of 
the  heart  ? 

The  stimulation  of  the  brain  by  a  slight  hyperemia  of  the  lungs,  or 
of  the  bronchial  region,  which  I  have  often  experienced,  was  utilized 
by  a  British  member  of  Parliament  (Mr.  Dunscomb),  by  putting  a 
stimulating  plaster  on  his  chest  when  he  had  to  address  the   House. 

Who  has  not  observed  the  substantial  energy  of  the  whole  con- 
stitution produced  by  warmly  covering  the  lower  limbs,  and  the 
debilitating,  injurious  effects  of  allowing  them  to  be  chilled  ? 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  l8l 

What  woman  does  not  know  how  closely  her  bosom  is  associated 
with  her  affections,  so  as  to  compel  her  to  exclude  from  familiarity 
therewith  all  but  her  child,  her  lover,  and  husband  ?  and  what 
physician  does  not  know  the  very  intimate  sympathy  between  the 
womb  and  the  female  breast  ? 

All  these  sympathies  and  associations,  as  well  as  others  less 
familiarly  known,  are  explained  by  Sarcognomy  as  illustrations  of  a 
general  law  which  applies  to  every  part  of  the  body,  and  shows 
exactly  the  psychic  and  physiological  association  of  every  organ  and. 
every  portion  of  the  surface. 

The  full,  exposition  of  this  subject  is  not  designed  in  this  manual* 
as  it  would  require  an  investigation  of  the  history  of  all  diseases,, 
showing  the  parallelism  between  the  phenomena  or  symptoms  of  all 
diseases  and  the  laws  of  Sarcognomy  —  such  as  we  see  illustrated  in 
affections  of  the  brain  produced  by  pelvic  disorders,  and  in  the 
peculiar  hopefulness  of  consumptive  patients,  while  the  disease  is 
doing  its  fatal  work  in  the  upper  portion  of  the  lungs.  But  an  out- 
line of  the  leading  pathological  illustrations  of  Sarcognomy  will  be 
given  in  the  latter  portion  of  this  volume. 

Nervauric  treatment  by  the  hand  proceeds  upon  the  principle  that 
the  hand  whenever  applied  has  an  adhesive  or  attractive  and  stim- 
ulating influence  upon  the  spot,  developing  and  exalting  its  vital 
powers.  Thus  the  constitution  of  the  patient  is  roused  to  effect  its 
own  renovation  instead  of  passively  receiving  the  vital  force  im- 
parted by  the  healer,  as  in  the  ordinary  treatment,  in  which  the 
patient  merely  receives  what  the  operator  gives,  and  the  latter  is 
often  exhausted. 

The  hand  of  the  operator  has  an  attractive  power,  which  is  both 
psychic  and  physiological,  and  consequently  attracts  to  the  spot 
where  it  is  applied  the  vital  forces  of  the  patient. 

The  psychic  attraction  of  the  hand  is  easily  ascertained  upon 
sensitives.  If  the  sensitive  subject  stands  before  you  erect  and  at 
ease,  the  application  of  the  hands  for  a  moment  on  the  forehead, 
followed  by  gently  withdrawing  them,  will  produce  a  tendency  in  the 
head  to  follow  the  retiring  hand.  I  do  not  consider  it  any  objection 
to  such  facts  that  imagination  may  produce  similar  effects.  The 
potentiality  of  tartar  emetic  is  not  refuted  when  we  produce  a  similar 
nausea  by  imagination.  In  the  majority  of  persons  this  would  be 
imperceptible,  but  in  the  sensitives  it  is  marked,  and  some  will  be  so 
strongly  attracted  as  to  be  unable  to  hold  their  place  and  compelled 
to  advance.  The  most  passive  subjects  will  be  entirely  controlled, 
and  may  be  drawn  down  upon  the  floor. 

The  psychic  attraction  of  the  hand  is  also  realized  in  our  friendly 


l$2  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

salutations  —  the  grasp  of  the  hand  being  the  expression  of  personal 
attraction  or  friendship.  Mechanically  the  hand  is  also  the  instru- 
ment of  adhesion,  retention,  or  holding- 

At  the  foundation  of  such  phenomena  lies  the  fact  that  the  vital 
forces,  emanating  from  the  brain  and  chest  in  voluntary  actions  and 
unconscious  influences,  both  physiological  and  psychic,  must  emanate 
from  the  surface  of  the  body,  if  like  caloric  and  electricity  they  have 
a  real  existence.  Of  these  emanations  all  can  recognize  caloric,  and 
sensitive  persons  recognize  electricity  and  psychic  influences.  For 
these  psychic  influences  we  have  at  present  no  instrument  of  detec- 
tion but  the  nerves  of  the  sensitive,  and  for  electric  emanations  of  a 
delicate  character  there  was  formerly  no  test  but  the  nerves  and 
muscles  of  the  galvanoscopic  frog.  But  the  skill  of  Dubois  Reymond 
and  others  has  furnished  instruments  of  sufficient  delicacy  to  detect 
the  delicate  electric  currents  of  living  beings  and  ascertain  that  there 
are  not  only  electric  currents  in  motor  nerves  and  muscles,  but  cer- 
tain permanent  currents  in  the  body  proceeding  from  its  superior 
portions  downwards,  as  they  do  in  great  quantity  and  power  in  the 
Gymnotus  or  electric  eel,  and  Malapterurus  or  electric  shad.  These 
currents  are  the  product  of  vitality,  changing  according  to  the  degree 
of  health  and  vigor,  and  cease  at  death. 

These  "  strong  and  constant  currents,"  as  they  are  called,  are  not 
thermo-electric  but  vital,  proceeding  from  the  positive  head  and  chest 
to  the  negative  extremities —  the  palms  of  the  hand  and  the  soles  of 
the  feet. 

The  negative  character  of  the  palms  of  the  hands  qualifies  them  to 
perform  the  part  which  they  have  always  performed  in  my  experi- 
ments—  that  of  attracting  and  concentrating  the  vital  forces  and 
emanations  of  the  subject,  in  which  they  coincide  with  the  negative 
pole  of  the  galvanic  battery.  Wherever  I  direct  the  hands  to  be 
applied  for  any  purpose  upon  the  body,  the  sponge  of  the  negative 
pole  of  a  weak  galvanic  or  magneto-galvanic  current  may  be  applied 
with  similar  results  —  in  some  respects  coarser  and  more  powerful 
and  dangerous*  as  a  concentrative  stimulus,  but  substantially  similar. 

*  The  powerful  and  even  dangerous  character  of  electric  treatment,  unskilfully 
applied,  may  be  inferred  from  its  effects  as  stated  by  the  best  authors.  Althaus 
says  :  ''The  sparks  from  the  common  electrical  machine,  applied  to  the  skin  of  any 
part  of  the  body,  produce  a  sensation  of  pricking  and  pain;  if  they  are  large  the 
skin  becomes  red  and  a  papular  eruption,  resembling  lichen  urticatus,  is  produced. 
If  a  continuous  current  be  made  to  act  upon  the  skin,  a  sensation  of  pricking  and 
heat,  redness,  inflammation,  and  sloughing  of  the  skin  and  subjacent  structures 
may  be  caused,  provided  the  current  be  powerful  and  the  application  prolonged.  A 
volta-faradic  current  may  produce  sensations  varying,  according  to  its  intensity, 
from  a  slight  pricking  to  an  acute  burning  pain;  but  although  the  tension  of  the 
current  maybe  very  high,  it  will  not  cause  nutritive  disturbances  like  the  continuous 
current." 

"  If  a  continuous  current  of  moderate  power  be  directed  to  the  skin  for  a  short 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  1 83 

In  vital  treatment  there  is  more  than  the  mere  concentration  of  func- 
tions produced  by  negative  electricity.  There  are  emanations  from 
the  operator  and  absorptions  of  influence  or  general  sympathy  as  in 
the  old  practice  of  animal  magnetism. 

It  is  true  that  in  treating  under  the  guidance  of  Sarcognomy  the 
operator  must  part  with  a  portion  of  his  vital  force  to  a  constitution 
which  is  in  a  morbid  state,  but  as  he  stimulates  the  healthy  energies 
of  the  patient,  the  latter  co-operates  in  the  cure,  and  his  co-operation 
relieves  the  operator.  Thus  if  one  by  his  combativeness  rouses  the 
hostility  of  one  assailed,  their  mutual  violence  stimulates  each  to  the 
highest  energy  ;  or  if  one  diffuses  humor  and  boisterous  mirth  in  a 
company,  the  mirthful  response  assists  his  own  gayety,  and  he  feels 
very  differently  from  what  he  should  if  he  addressed  a  solemn  group 
without  a  smile  in  response. 

To  pour  forth  hope,  joy,  love,  or  zeal  to  cold,  unresponsive  souls 
is  an  exhausting  experiment,  and  to  sit  sympathetically  in  company 
with  them  produces  more  depression  in  ourselves  than  exaltation  in 
them.  The  only  way  in  which  we  can  affect  them  beneficially  with- 
out being  injured  is  to  go  as  a  teacher  or  healer  in  the  utmost  ten- 
sion of  our  powers,  suppressing  our  impressible  sympathy,  while  they 
are  kept  in  a  passive,  receptive  condition. 

The  patient,  to  be  passive,  should  be  in  a  sitting  or  lying  position, 

time,  it  dilates  the  blood-vessels  and  promotes  circulation,  but  if  it  be  applied  for 
several  hours  successively  (as  is  often  done  with  Pulvermacher's  chains  and  gal- 
vanic belt),  the  blood-vessels  become  paralyzed,  and  sloughs  are  produced.  An  in- 
duced current  conveyed  for  a  short  time  to  the  motor  nerves  and  muscles  rouses 
their  vital  energy;  but,  if  its  action  be  prolonged  for  an  hour  or  more,  the  motor 
power  of  those  organs  becomes  exhausted,  and  temporary  paralysis  may  be  the 
result/' 

"  Static  electricity,  electro-magnetism,  and  magneto-electricity  only  affect  that 
organ  if  applied  so  powerfully  as  to  interfere  with  health  and  perhaps  life:  but  a 
gentle,  continuous  current,  directed  to  the  face,  scalp,  or  neck,  and  which  causes  no 
or  scarcely  any  sensation  of  pain,  is  readily  transmitted  from  those  parts  to  the 
cerebral  substance.  .  .  .  Sensations  are  caused  by  an  application  of  the  cur- 
rent to  the  head,  which  can  only  be  owing  t)  a  direct  action  of  it  on  the  cerebral 
matter,  viz.,  dizziness,  giddiness,  sleepiness,  sickness,  faintness,  vomiting,  and  even 
convulsions.  The  latter  phenomena  are  only  noticed  if  the  current  be  one  of  con- 
siderable power;  but  giddiness  and  faintness  are  often  felt,  even  when  a  gentle  cur- 
rent is  used." 

That  electricity  may  be  used  in  a  safer  and  more  congenial  manner  I  do  not 
doubt;  but  it  needs  important  changes,  both  in  electrical  instruments  and  in  the 
knowledge  of  the  application  of  currents,  to  render  it  entirely  satisfactory. 

Unfavorable  experience  in  the  use  of  electricity  from  imperfect  apparatus  unskil- 
fully applied,  has  led  to  such  cautions  as  the  following,  given  in  Lincoln's  '•  Electro- 
therapeutics :"  "The  duration  of  a  single  application  should  be  rather  carefully 
restricted,  when  one  is  using  batteries  of  the  usual  strength.  As  a  general  rule, 
three  minutes  is  long  enough  for  application  to  a  nerve,  from  three  to  five  minutes 
to  the  spinal  cord,  from  one  to  three  minutes  to  the  organs  of  sight  and  hearing. 
When  muscles  are  to  be  stimulated,  the  time  allotted  to  each  will,  of  course,  varv; 
if,  for  example,  a  whole  limb  has  to  be  worked  upon,  it  is  necessary  to  shorten  the 
time  for  each  muscle,  but  for  a  single  large  muscle  two  minutes  should  be  the 
utmost  allowed;  and  for  a  group  of  muscles  five  minutes  should  suffice." 

On  the  other  hand,  with  the  new  apparatus  and  methods  given  to  my  pupils, 
no  such  limitations  of  time  are  required.  Treatment  may  be  continued  for  an  hour 
or  more,  with  effects  entirely  beneficial  and  unobjectionable. 


I $4  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

the  latter  being  better,  and  in  the  respectful,  friendly,  confiding  state 
of  mind  which  is  necessary  to  his  passive  receptivity.  The  greater 
his  reverence,  love,  and  faith  toward  his  operator  the  better  the 
result. 

The  operator  should  be  in  the  full  tension  of  his  powers  —  in  high 
health,  full  of  courage,  hope,  zeal,  and  joy.  But  he  cannot  main- 
tain this  state  of  mind,  which  develops  his  highest  powers,  under  the 
most  prevalent  earthly  influences.  There  is  too  much  of  difficulty, 
anxiety,  and  doubt  ;  too  much  of  jealousy,  selfishness,  and  conten- 
tion ;  too  much  of  gloom,  and  moral  as  well  as  physical  malaria,  in 
the  common  experience  of  life  to  sustain  the  bright,  joyous  energy 
which  should  belong  to  the  healer  and  the  teacher. 

True,  he  may  go  forth  on  some  beautiful  day  when  the  atmosphere 
woos  him  with  the  bland  warmth  of  its  zephyrs  and  its  well-vitalized 
purity ;  when  the  flying  clouds,  the  waving  trees,  and  the  rich-tinted 
flowers  pour  into  his  soul  a  sense  of  the  Divine  beneficence  flowing 
around  him,  and  thus  feel  his  better  nature  inspired  and  strengthened 
by  an  influx  of  joy;  and  hence  I  think  the  best  triumphs  of  nervauric 
healing  are  in  warm  climates  or  in  summer  weather,  and  in  pure, 
well-warmed  apartments,  where  the  moral  warmth  of  the  society  is 
equal  to  the  physical  warmth  of  the  atmosphere. 

But  the  limited  amount  of  such  inspiring  environment,  and  the 
large  amount  of  gloom  and  of  cold,  moral  apathy,  as  well  as  malari- 
ous and  negative*  atmosphere,  in  many  places,  render  it  necessary  to 
have  some  other  source  of  supply  than  the  prevalent  physical  and 
moral  conditions  in  which  civilized  society  exists  to-day. 

We  need  a  grand  and  continuous  inspiration  ;  and  although  I  am 
speaking  now  of  the  healer,  what  I  say  is  equally  applicable  to  every 
reader,  for  all  need  to  be  sustained  in  health  and  moral  power  for  the 
performance  of  duty  and  enjoyment  of  life. 

We  need  an  unfailing,  ever-present  inspiration. 

WHENCE    CAN    IT    COME? 

and  from  what  can  it  come  ?     It  must  come  from  something  which 

*  The  atmosphere  has  positive  inspiring  conditions  which  vitalize  the  nervous 
system  and  invigorate  all  the  secretions,  and  negative  conditions  which  exhau:-t 
and  depress  vitality,  injure  the  nervous  system,  check  the  secretions,  and  aggravate 
every  disease  Electricity  and  actinism  are  concerned  in  these  conditions,  but 
scientists  have  not  investigated  this  subject.  They  have  not  been  studied  in  their 
atmospheric  relations  to  the  human  constitution,  and  my  own  duties  have  not 
allowed  me  time  to  give  this  subject  a  proper  investigation.  The  healing  and  re- 
storative influences  come  from  the  sun.  Hence  they  are  more  abundant  in  southern 
breezes,  but  are  also  found  in  the  north  winds  which  blow  over  a  dry  and  frozen 
but  sunshiny  region.  They  are  deficient  wherever  the  solar  emanations  are 
absorbed  by  thawing  or  by  evaporation,  and  abundant  when  restored  to  the  atmos- 
phere by  freezing  or  precipitation.  The  deadliest  conditions  exist  in  the  absence 
of  sunshine  and  in  prolonged  evaporation  and  thawing.  These  varying  atmos- 
pheric conditions  affect  not  only  the  human  constitution  but  the  action  of  electric 
and  telegraphic  apparatus,  the  manufacture  of  sulphuric  acid,  the  oxidation  of 
phosphorus,  and  the  decay  of  organic  substances. 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  l8$ 

can  inspire  our  hope,  love,  courage,  and  heroism.  That  which  is  to 
inspire  our  love  must  be  supremely  lovely  and 'noble  —  that  which  is 
to  inspire  hope  must  be  the  landscape  of  futurity,  bright  with  the 
sunshine  of  joy  —  that  which  is  to  inspire  courage  is  the  certainty  of 
ultimate  conquest  over  all  evils  and  opposition.  Where  can  all  this 
be  found  but  in  heaven  ?  In  the  boundless  spirit  world  we  have  an 
eternity  of  life  triumphant  over  all  evil  conditions  —  not  a  far-off 
realm,  dimly  perceived  by  a  hoodwinked  faith,  hoped  for  against 
doubt,  grasped  at  with  the  energy  of  dying  despair,  or  enjoyed  in 
passive  melancholy,  in  the  spirit  of  the  poet  who  sings  that 

"  Love  and  hope  and  beauty's  bloom 
Are  blossoms  gathered  for  the  tomb." 

The  heaven  to  which  we  look  for  inspiration  is  neither  remote  nor 
shadowy  nor  doubtful.  Our  friends  and  relatives  and  ancestors  are 
there  ;  he  who  is  now  writing  these  lines  may  be  there  in  less  than 
a  score  of  years,  and  some  that  read  them  will  be  there  still  sooner, 
and  if  you  would  look  upon  life,  dear  reader,  with  a  large  conception 
of  its  realities,  you  would  realize  how  short,  how  very  short,  the  dis- 
tance between  your  present  condition  and  the  immortal  hosts  of 
higher  spheres,  who  are  soon  to  be  your  companions  and  who  are  your 
companions  now  when  your  finer,  interior  senses  can  feel  and  realize 
their  presence. 

The  healer  should  be  inspired — as  Jesus  was  inspired,  and  prom- 
ised his  followers  they  should  attain  a  similar  inspiration  and  do  similar 
works.  Anthropology  shows  that  they  who  live  the  heavenly  life  on 
earth  do  become  inspired,  and  become  healers,  teachers,  reformers, 
uplifters  for  humanity,  by  their  moral  power  and  enthusiasm. 

How  does  this  inspiration  reach  us  ?  The  method  is  simple  and 
intelligible.  The  object  that  is  capable  of  inspiring  our  love,  uplifts, 
energizes,  and  beautifies  our  whole  nature. 

Men  and  women  are  never  so  happy,  so  bright,  so  generous,  so 
heroic  as  when  inspired  by  mutual  love,  and  happy  are  they  who  can 
find  an  enduring,  faultless  earthly  love  to  be  an  inspiration  through 
life.  The  bright  and  faultless  objects  of  perfect  love  are  to  most  of 
us  discoverable  only  beyond  the  river.  If  we  look  among  the  angels 
we  find  a  perfect  love  — either  some  one  whom  we  loved  on  earth,  or 
some  one  who  has  risen  to  the  sublime  heights  of  love  and  wisdom 
by  centuries  of  progress.  Christendom  finds  its  saints  for  love  and 
adoration  in  the  Bible,  and  some  are  well  worthy  of  Divine  love.  But 
whether  our  love,  or  our  adoration,  which  is  the  intensity  of  love,  be 
given  to  Jesus,  or  St.  John,  or  Mary  the  mother,  or  any  of  the  army  of 
saints  from  Moses  to  Joan  of  Arc,  or  from  Joan  of  Arc  to  Washington, 
the  profound  conviction  of  the  nobility  and  loveliness  of  that  which  we 


1 86  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

adore  is  wliat  calls  out  our  love  and  gives  us  inspiration.  Even  if  Jesus 
and  Mary  had  been  myths,  the  faith  in  their  reality  would  have  made 
them  the  inspiring  power  of  Christendom  ;  but,  being  realities,  there 
was  not  only  this  inspiring  power,  but  the  inspiring  influence  of  their 
actual  spiritual  existence.  He  whose  best  conceptions  and  spiritual 
capacities  have  been  depressed  by  the  physical  wants  and  struggles 
of  human  life  to  a  stern  materialism,  below  the  plane  of  being  on 
which  we  can  realize  the  supernal,  should  endeavor  to  substitute  for 
confiding  faith  the  power  of  a  vivid  imagination,  forming  grand  ideals 
in  his  own  mind,  or  allowing  them  to  be  evolved  by  romantic  fic- 
tion and  poetry,  or  by  history  and  biography. 

The  worship  of  Jesus  was  not  absurd  ;  it  was  an  adoring  love  for 
the  qualities  represented  by  him.  The  worship  of  Mary  and  of  all  the 
true  saints  was  not  absurd  ;  it  was  a  wholesome  and  inspiring  love 
of  virtues  idealized  in  them.  Worship  often  begins  for  men  with  the 
adoration  of  some  true,  noble,  and  gifted  woman,  whose  worship 
deepens  as  she  rises  in  the  spheres,  and  this  was  the  worship  enjoyed 
by  Auguste  Comte  after  he  had  lost  sight  of  supernal  truth.  Wor- 
ship is  but  the  most  exalted  love. 

Beyond  all  these  is  the  love  and  worship  of  the  ineffable  Divine, 
which  no  more  interferes  with  or  affects  other  loves  than  the  love  for 
the  mother  forbids  love  for  her  child.  On  the  contrary,  saintly  love 
is  the  complement  of  Divine  love,  and  both  are  the  inspiration  of  that 
earthly  love  which  extends  to  every  brother,  however  unworthy  he 
may  be.  Love  on  the  earth  plane  is  too  often  an  unsatisfactory  and 
thankless  love,  and  is  in  danger  of  perishing  in  the  cold,  unless  sus- 
tained by  the  warmth  of  Divine  and  saintly  love,  in  which  we  approach 
something  higher  than  self  and  are  strengthened  and  ennobled  thereby. 
For  want  of  this  how  many  a  soul  of  noble  powers,  blind  to  the  eternal 
beauty,  has  sunk  into  bitter  misanthropy  and  scorn  of  all  mankind. 

It  is  evident  then  that  the  supernal  world  calls  forth  our  love  by  its 

loveliness,  our  reverence  by  its  grandeur,  our  hope  by  its  assurance  of 

happy  immortality,  and  our  courage  by  the  assurance  that  we  are  not 

.  perishing  worms  of  the  dust,  but  partakers  of  a  Divine  immortal  nature 

which  cannot  be  crushed. 

Inspired  thus  with  the  nobler  emotions,  the  healer  is  brought  into 
sympathy  with  the  supernal  love,  and  as  identity  of  condition  implies 
sympathetic  zmion,  he  becomes  actually  inspired  by  the  grand  spiritual 
presence  which  from  higher  spheres  flows  into  all  who  ascend  to 
meet  it.  It  may  not  be  consciously,  it  may  be  simply  an  unconscious 
portion  of  his  spiritual  life,  as  all  inspired  sentiments  are  —  as  Ole 
Bull  said  that  his  music  was  inspired  by  the  mountains  of  Norway, 
and  Byron  said  "  high  mountains  are  to  me  a  feeling." 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  187 

But  when  the  nervous  temperament  is  favorable,  when  certain  an- 
terior interior  parts  of  the  brain  are  well  developed,  the  spiritual  power 
is  not  merely  an  unperceived  support,  but  becomes  an  actual 
presence,  and  the  attending-,  inspiring,  or  controlling  spirit  adds  his 
power  to  that  of  a  healing  medium  so  generously  as  to  relieve  the 
latter  of  the  burden,  to  give  the  intuitive  diagnosis  of  disease,  and  to 
perform  the  healing  work  in  giving  spiritual  vitality,  which  is  so 
much  more  perfect,  enduring,  and  inexhaustible  in  the  spiritual 
spheres  —  the  infinite  sea  of  life. 

Aided  in  this  manner,  the  healer  does  marvellous  works  both  in 
diagnosis  and  in  healing  ;  and  the  advent  of  this  form  of  practice  now, 
when  materialistic  philosophy  has  built  up  a  mass  of  physical  science 
concerning  living  bodies  which  rises  like  a  Tower  of  Babel  vainly 
seeking  the  skies,  but  which  ever  fails  in  exact  diagnosis  *  and  truth- 
ful prognosis  in  difficult  cases  and  fails  so  often  in  therapeutic 
practice,  —  the  advent,  I  say,  of  a  higher  form  of  practice  in  which 
spiritual  power  is  concerned,  demonstrates  the  blundering  folly  and 
laborious  disappointment  of  human  life  in  the  scientific  as  well  as  the 
practical,  when  alienated  from  the  supernal  and  spiritual,  and  the 
glorious  elevation  of  every  department  of  life  when  man  is  brought 
into  nearer  relations  to  the  Divine. 

The  learned  and  eloquent  Prof.  Draper  was  the  only  physiologist  of 
eminence  who  realized  the  necessity  of  rising  above  physical  science 
into  the  spiritual  sphere  for  that  of  which  the  colleges  know  nothing, 
which  he  expressed  as  follows,  in  his  able  text-book  of  human 
physiology:  "We  have  precisely  the  same  reason  for  believing  the 
existence  of  the  immortal  spirit  that  we  have  for  knowing  that  there 
is  an  external  world.  The  two  facts  are  of  the  same  order.  Of  the 
future  continuance  of  that  external  world  irrespective  of  ourselves  we 
entertain  no  doubt ;  indeed,  in  certain  cases,  as  in  those  presented  by 
astronomy,  we  are  able  to  tell  its  state  a  thousand  years  hence.  So 
long  as  our  attention  was  confined  to  statical  pliysiology  everything 
connected  with  the  subject  now  under  consideration  was  enveloped 
in  darkness,  but  it  will  be  very  different  when  dynamical  physiology 
begins  to  be  cultivated  —  dynamical  physiology  which  speaks  of  the 
course  of  life,  of  organs,  individuals,  and  races,  .  .  .  and 
then  it  will  appear  that  the  universal  opinion  of  the  ages  and  nations 
is  not  a  vulgar  illusion,  but  a  solemn  philosophical  fact."  It  is  to 
this  dynamical  physiology  that  I  have  given  my  life,  and  in  which  I 

*Dr.  Taft,  who  recently  died  at  Hartford,  Conn.,  was  pronounced  at  the  begin- 
ning of  his  professional  life,  by  Dr.  Willard  Parker,  incapable  of  living  over  six 
months,  because  one  of  his  lungs  was  about  gone;  which  opinion,  being  confirmed 
by  a  leading  Boston  physician,  was  universally  accepted.  Nevertheless,  he  lived  to 
the  age  of  sixty-four,  and  the  autopsy  astonished  the  doctors  by  revealing  a  pair  of 
sound  lungs. 


l88  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

have  found  the  philosophy  of  the  healing  art.  In  a  coming  century 
the  colleges  will  begin  to  learn  its  importance  and  know  that  the  ex- 
istence and  operation  of  the  soul  are  "not  a  vulgar  illusion." 

Hoping  that  the  healer  has  attained  the  plane  of  true  life  and  over- 
flowing health  which  is  beneficial  to  all  who  approach  him,  I  would 
then  caution  him  so  to  maintain  his  powers  as  to  preserve  his  own 
health  and  efficiency. 

In  the  first  place,  he  should  never  enter  the  sick  chamber  in  a 
hungry,  thirsty,  or  enfeebled  condition,  or  when  exhausted  by  treat- 
ing patients  or  the  cares  of  business,  for  in  such  conditions  he  is  pre- 
disposed to  absorb  the  malaria  of  the  sick  chamber  and  the  nervauric 
emanations  of  the  patient,  and  has  less  power  a;s  a  healer. 

He  should  not  expose  himself  to  the  physical  emanations  of  the 
patient,  no  matter  what  his  condition,  for  it  will  require  all  his 
energy  to  resist  the  vital  pathological  emanations  that  impress  his 
sympathetic  faculties.  He  should  not  breathe  the  air  charged  with 
the  respiration  and  cutaneous  emanations  of  the  sick,  but  should 
have  the  chamber  thoroughly  ventilated  before  he  enters  it  or  have 
the  patient  brought  into  another  apartment,  and,  if  there  is  a  current 
of  air,  should  be  on  the  windward  side  of  the  patient. 

The  best  precaution  for  both  patient  and  healer  is  to  destroy  the 
malaria  of  human  transpiration  and  household  emanations  of  various 
kinds  by  ozone.  No  costly  apparatus  is  necessary.  A  small  piece 
of  phosphorus  placed  in  a  soup  plate  or  saucer  of  water  will  slowly 
generate  ozone  enough  to  purify  the  air  of  an  apartment.  When  we 
wish  to  increase  the  amount  of  ozone,  we  expose  the  phosphorus  by 
tilting  the  plate  or  diminishing  the  amount  of  water,  and  when  we 
wish  to  diminish  the  ozone  we  cover  the  phosphorus  with  water. 
The  emanations  of  mint,  thyme,  cedar,  and  pine,  and  most  of  the 
odorous  oils,  have  in  some  degree  a  similar  purifying  influence  upon 
the  air — none  perhaps  better  than  thymol.  When  a  very  impure 
condition  is  present,  the  diffusion  of  sulphurous  acid  gas  by  burning- 
sulphur  is  an  efficient  disinfectant.  Condy's  fluid  has  been  highly 
recommended  by  the  medical  profession  as  a  purifying  disinfectant. 

In  malarious  localities,  or  in  houses  of  imperfect  plumbing  and 
drainage,  these  precautions  are  very  important.  The  best  labors  of 
the  healer  may  be  defeated  by  the  insidious  influence  of  impure  air. 
Iron  and  its  salts  are  the  best  convenient  and  harmless  antiseptics  to 
check  the  development  of  malaria,  by  sprinkling  on  the  ground  or  in 
places  where  decaying  substances  are  present.  Sulphate  of  iron, 
chloride  of  iron,  and  iron  rust  are  ail  valuable  for  this  purpose. 

Ozone  is  the  natural  purifier  of  the  atmosphere,  to  which  it  owes 
its  freshness  in  the  forest  and  mountain  heights.     It  is  generated  by 


CHAP.  X.]  OPERATIVE  METHODS.  1 89 

atmospheric  electricity,  and  may  be  produced  in  our  apartments  by 
machines  for  frictional  electricity.  It  may  also  be  generated  exten- 
sively by  a  mixture  of  three  parts  of  sulphuric  acid  and  two  of  the 
permanganate  of  potash. 

A  plethoric  condition  of  blood-vessels  is  one  of  the  essential  con- 
ditions of  health  for  all  human  beings  and  for  animals.  The  less 
blood  we  have  the  more  easily  is  our  vital  power  exhausted,  the 
more  feeble  and  irritable  are  the  nerves,  and  the  more  liable  are  we 
to  inflammations,  colds,  fevers,  and  every  other  form  of  disease.  | 

Abundant  nourishment  is  especially  necessary  to  the  healer,  and 
when  attending  feeble,  emaciated  patients  he  finds  it  necessary  to 
eat  much  more  than  his  ordinary  allowance  to  generate  vital  con- 
ditions for  his  patients  as  well  as  himself.  It  would  seem  myste- 
rious or  incredible  to  the  disciples  of  the  materialistic  physiology 
which  prevails  to-day,  that  without  muscular  fatigue  or  any  special 
evacuation,  the  mere  contact  of  the  hands  of  the  healer  with  his 
patient  sometimes  produces  an  exhaustion  which  requires  to  be  sup- 
plied with  food,  and  enables  him  to  eat  and  drink  more  freely,  as  if 
he  had  been  engaged  in  severe  labor.  But  such  is  the  fact,  as  I 
have  personally  experienced  ;  and  it  proves  that  food  is  the  means  of 
supplying  something  more  than  mere  organized  matter  —  something 
which  may  be  lost  by  vital  transmission  and  radiation. 

In  the  hungry  condition,  just  before  meals,  the  healer  should 
abstain  from  treating  his  patients.  His  diet  should  be  liberal  and 
nourishing  (adapted  to  his  own  constitution),  and  a  cup  of  tea  or 
coffee  will  often  add  much  to  his  operative  power  and  resistance  to 
disease.  In  any  difficult  case  he  should  use  some  congenial  stimulus 
to  exalt  his  powers  and  resist  contagion.  Absorption  does  not  occur 
to  any  material  extent  when  the  blood-vessels  are  very  plethoric  ; 
hence  the  free  use  of  liquids,  especially  such  as  are  of  stimulating 
and  tonic  qualities,  gives  great  protection  against  morbid  contagions. 

When  any  particular  form  of  disease  is  prevalent,  the  healer  would 
find  it  beneficial  to  use  for  himself  as  a  prophylactic  the  remedies 
which  that  disease  requires.  In  a  malarious  atmosphere,  for  example, 
two  or  three  grains  of  dextro- quinine  taken  daily  would  give  him  a 
protection.  In  some  cases  he  would  even  find  it  expedient  to  take 
himself  the  remedy  the  patient  needs,  for  his  own  protection,  or 
even  to  take  enough  to  charge  his  constitution  with  its  influence  and 
give  the  influence  to  the  patient  by  contact.* 

Patients  may  be  treated  to  any  extent  by  external  application  on 
the  skin  of  the  remedies  which   they   require,  and   if  the  operator 

♦There  is  nothing  more  efficient  as  a  general  antagonist  to  morbid  atmospheric 
influences  and  contagions  than  the  cimicifuga  or  Macrotys  racemosa  (common 
name  Black  Cohosh).     It  has  been  found  efficient  in  resisting  variolous  infection. 


I9O  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

should  apply  the  required  remedies  on  his  hands,  he  would  also  find 
that  a  pleasant  mode  of  making  the  required  medical  impression. 
The  advantages  of  this  course,  in  swallowing  the  remedies  or  using 
them  on  the  hands,  is  the  protection  it  gives  the  healer  and  its  genial 
influence  on  the  patient. 

The  healer  should  avoid  the  atmosphere  of  disease.  His  office 
should  be  very  freely  ventilated,  and  in  visiting  the  sick  chamber  he 
should  have  it  ventilated  before  he  enters,  and  should  not  remain  too 
long;  but,  above  all,  he  sJiould  not  remain  in  a  passive  condition,  but 
should  remain  on  his  feet,  either  engaged  in  conversation  and  giving 
directions  or  in  active  manipulations  upon  the  patient. 

The  first  thing  to  be  done  in  almost  all  cases  is  to  make  dispersive 
manipulations  on  the  seat  of  pain  or  disease.  The  nervaura  of  the 
human  body  is  not  an  imaginary  thing ;  it  is  radiated  and  conducted 
in  every  direction ;  and  when  the  clothing  and  atmosphere  are  in  a 
very  conductive  condition,  exhaustion  is  produced  as  in  a  moist 
atmosphere.  The  bracing  effect  of  a  dry,  non-conductive  atmosphere 
is  well  known.  Metals  are  good  conductors,  and  many  a  poor 
sewing  woman  has  had  her  health  seriously  impaired  by  the  metallic 
foot-piece  with  which  she  works  her  machine  ;  many  a  writer  has 
had  his  fingers  and  writing  capacity  impaired  by  the  metal  instru- 
ment used  in  writing,  which  would  not  have  occurred  if  he  had  used 
the  goose-quill,  or  a  rubber,  gutta  percha,  cork,  or  wooden  pen- 
holder. 

Non-conductors  are  necessary  for  our  protection.  Woollen  and  silk 
garments  retain  the  vital  conditions  and  produce  a  happy  effect,  dif- 
ferent from  that  of  cotton.  Linen,  as  the  best  conductor,  is  objec- 
tionable in  personal  clothing  on  account  of  its  conductivity. 

The  retention  of  nervaura  in  the  brain  by  a  silk  cap  has  proved 
very  beneficial  in  impairment  of  brain  power,  and  the  use  of  silk  and 
woollen  clothing  is  very  beneficial  to  the  nervauric  healer. 

That  the  nervaura  may  be  beneficially  retained  or  wastefully  lost  by 
our  clothing  is  an  evidence  of  its  substantial  reality,  and  every  sensi- 
tive can  feel  its  emanation  from  the  hands  and  the  various  emanations 
from  different  parts  of  the  body,  or  from  the  clothing. 

In  disease  and  pain  we  may  proceed  upon  the  theory  that  the  nerv- 
aura of  the  morbid  part  is  morbid,  and  should  be  removed.  We 
frequently  find  that  in  manipulating  upon  the  seat  of  pain,  the  pain 
seems  to  be  propelled  in  the  direction  of  our  passes,  and  if  not  dis- 
persed or  scattered,  moves  along  the  limb,  until  at  the  extremity  it 
departs.  The  first  thing  to  be  done,  then,  is  to  make  dispersive 
passes  lightly  and  rapidly  to  remove  the  morbid  aura,  after  which  the 
application  of  the  hand  produces  a  wholesome  effect. 


CHAP.    X.]  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  igi 

The  nervaura  of  the  operator's  hand  applied  to  the  passive  patient, 
all  over  the  person,  by  gentle  passes,  or  by  gentle  percussion,  is  a 
soothing,  restorative  influence,  tending  to  resist  the  waste  of  tissues 
and  vital  forces,  to  diminish  fever  and  excitement,  and  to  promote 
nutrition  and  sleep. 

In  addition  to  these  effects,  it  imparts  the  vital  qualities  of  the 
operator's  constitution,  and,  if  he  be  well  supplied  with  health,  benev- 
olence, and  vital  force,  gives  an  increment  of  these  to  the  patient. 
Hence  a  great  deal  of  good  has  been  done  in  this  way  in  the  practice 
of  what  is  called  animal  magnetism,  and  the  perception  of  the  bene- 
fits produced  by  magnetizers  has  led  the  materialistic  medical  profes- 
sion to  attempt  an  imitation  in  their  own  clumsy,  mechanical  way, 
which  they  call  massage. 

If  the  blundering  and  ignorant  practice  of  any  art  in  disregard  of 
accumulated  knowledge  is  entitled  to  be  called  quackery,  massage  is 
a  conspicuous  example  of  quackery,  or  half-developed  knowledge. 

Ignoring  all  the  wonderful  cures  made  by  magnetic  healers  ;  ignor- 
ing their  experimental  knowledge  and  practical  directions,  which 
have  been  so  long  published  and  so  successfully  acted  on  ;  ignoring 
the  very  existence  of  psycho-nervous  influences  and  emanations,  physi- 
cians demand  a  class  of  ignorant  subordinates,  mechanical  rubbers, 
who  operate  blindly  and  often  injuriously  as  well  as  inefficiently, 
Ignorance  in  the  massage  is  not  compensated  by  intelligence  in  the 
physician,  for  the  latter,  if  faithful  to  the  dicta  and  prejudices  of  his 
college  and  clique,  has  kept  himself  in  wilful  ignorance.  Neverthe- 
less the  rubber,  if  intelligent,  will  soon  find  that  he  produces  effects 
which  physicians  do  not  understand,  and  if  honest  in  attempting  to 
comprehend  the  treatment,  he  will  learn  something  of  what  has  been 
known  as  animal  magnetism,  and  borrow  from  that  something  to 
render  massage  more  beneficial.  His  healing  skill  will  then  be 
acceptable,  cloaked  under  the  name  of  massage.  But  I  should  be 
sorry  to  see  any  magnetic  healer,  for  the  sake  of  physicians'  patronage, 
concealing  his  artistic  skill  under  the  delusive  and  vulgar  title  of 
massage. 

Manual  treatment  consists  in,  first,  dispersive  passes  on  morbid 
parts  ;  second,  charging  the  system  with  the  nervaura  of  the  opera- 
tor;  third,  stimulating  organs  by  contact  and  percussion;  fourth, 
changing  the  vitaL  balance  of  functions  by  dispersing  from  one  spot 
to  accumulate  at  another. 

Excitement  accumulated  at  one  spot  maybe  dispersed  by  dispersive 
passes  with  the  hand,  by  positive  currents  of  electricity,  and  by  spong- 
ing the  surface  with  warm_orJiot  water. 

Excitement  may  be  concentrated  to  any  spot  by  the  application  of 


192  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

the  hands,  by  the  negative  pole  of  the  battery,  by  the  application  of 
dry  heat,  and  by  stimulating  plasters. 

By  these  simple  measures  we  call  forth  and  regulate  all  the  vital 
forces,  rousing  lungs,  liver,  stomach,  bowels,  kidneys,  and  the  mus- 
cular system,  and  producing  all  the  mental  conditions  necessary  to 
co-operate  in  the  treatment,  when  we  understand  the  locations  pre. 
sented  by  Sarcognomy. 

The  advantage  of  treating  the  constitution  locally  according  to 
Sarcognomy  is  that  by  this  method  the  energies  of  the  patient  are 
specifically  roused  to  aid  in  the  treatment.  There  are  certain  con- 
trolling forces  which  when  roused  improve  the  condition  of  the  entire 
constitution  and  respond  to  the  purpose  of  the  healer. 

Thus  as  the  operator  stimulates  each  organ  he  rouses  a  beneficial 
response,  and  is  not  exhausted.  If  he  stimulates  the  region  of  Health, 
he  finds  a  healthful  influence  returning,  which  he  enjoys  and  per- 
ceives in  most  cases  by  his  sympathy. 

To  call  out  this  reaction  and  stimulate  the  constitution  of  the 
patient  to  recovery,  as  it  is  stimulated  by  appropriate  medicines,  with- 
out exhausting  the  operator,  he  should  not  only  know  exactly  what 
faculties  and  organs  to  rouse,  but  should  rouse  them  actively,  instead 
of  passively.  If  he  places  himself  in  an  entirely  passive  and  sym- 
pathetic condition,  with  his  hands  resting  on  his  patient,  he  absorbs 
the  emanations  of  the  latter,  and  becomes  to  some  extent  the  victim 
of  the  contagion,  so  that  his  health  is  gradually  undermined.  Instead 
of  the  operator  diffusing  health,  it  is  sometimes  the  patient  diffusing 
disease. 

By  the  active  methods  which  I  have  recommended  the  operator 
repels  the  influence  of  disease,  and  by  the  knowledge  of  Sarcognomy 
he  is  enabled  to  produce  the  exact  effect  that  is  desired,  which  might 
be  utterly  impossible  by  any  general  operation,  as  when,  for  example, 
in  a  patient  suffering  from  melancholy  and  hysteric  conditions,  cheer- 
fulness and  tranquillity  are  restored  by  placing  the  hands  immediately 
under  the  arms. 

But  with  all  these  precautions  a  sensitive  healer  will  gradually 
absorb  morbific  influences  from  contact,  sympathy,  emanations,  and 
the  breath  of  his  patient,  and  needs  to  be  continually  guarded.  The 
experiments  of  Dr.  B.  W.  Richardson  and  Brown-Sequard  show  that 
air  which  has  been  breathed  is  deprived  of  something  necessary  to 
life,  and  supplied  with  an  unwholesome  substance  that  is  poisonous 
to  animals  when  injected  in  their  blood-vessels.  I  hope. these  warn- 
ings will  not  be  neglected,  but  I  know  that  physicians  and  healers 
habitually  neglect  themselves,  and  the  approach  of  morbid  conditions 
is  so  gentle  and  insidious  that  they  take  no  alarm  and  find  themselves 


CHAP.    X.J  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  193 

ill  unawares.  The  only  safe  rule  is  to  demand  for  ourselves  complete, 
exuberant  health  at  all  times,  and  if  there  is  any  decline  from  that,  to 
look  into  the  cause  at  once,  and  remove  it. 

The  precaution  of  washing  the  hands  immediately  after  a  treat- 
ment is  a  great  safeguard,  but  where  there  is  not  much  of  the  mor- 
bid influence  each  hand  may  be  rapidly  brushed  by  the  other.  If  any 
medical  or  morbific  influence  enters  by  the  arms,  passes  down  the 
arms  and  hands  may  remove  it,  and  after  treating  a  patient  a  friend 
may  remove  from  our  constitution  the  deleterious  influence  by  such 
passes,  or  we  may  make  them  ourselves.  The  devotees  of  rigid 
materialism  may  think  this  fanciful,  but  ample  personal  experience  is 
a  better  guide  than  theoretic  dogmatism. 

A  still  more  complete  method  is,  after  brushing  the  hands  that 
have  been  on  the  sick,  to  place  them  on  the  well.  Select  some 
vigorous,  healthy  person,  and  place  the  hands  for  a  few  minutes  on 
his  shoulders,  about  the  middle  of  the  shoulder  blade.  This  is  the 
centre  of  health,  and,  if  such  a  precaution  were  regularly  observed, 
the  healer,  instead  of  losing  health  by  treatment,  might  actually  gain. 
This  is  the  method  which  should  be  adopted  in  the  prolonged  treat- 
ment of  a  difficult  case.  The  operator  should  have  magazines  of 
health  at  hand,  and  draw  upon  them  freely.  We  may  derive  a  still 
better  influence  from  the  top  of  the  head  or  from  the  upper  part  of 
the  chest  from  the  neck  to  the  mammae.  But  there  are  some  born 
healers  who  for  many  hours  increase  in  power  as  they  relieve  the  sick, 
developing  their  own  vitality  or  drawing  from  their  inspiration.  If 
society  were  ruled  by  providential  wisdom,  such  individuals  would  be 
consecrated  to  the  healinsr  art. 

Another  method  which  may  be  adopted  in  treating  difficult  cases  is 
to  have  a  healthful  and  vigorous  person  co-operate  by  placing  his 
hands  on  our  shoulders  on  the  region  of  Health,  and  thus  giving  a 
sustaining  power  to  resist  and  conquer  morbid  conditions. 

I  cannot  impress  too  strongly  on  persons  of  a  sensitive  tempera- 
ment the  necessity  of  protecting  themselves  from  morbid  emanations. 
True,  there  are  some  whose  vital  energy  and  will  enable  them  to  repel 
morbid  influences,  but  there  are  millions  who  are  unconsciously 
injured;  and  the  medical  profession  has  greatly  increased  the  disease 
and  mortality  from  such  causes  by  its  stolid  materialism,  and  unwill- 
ingness to  recognize  contagion  through  the  nervous  system.  My 
own  experience  has  been  quite  decisive,  as  my  most  serious  distur- 
bances of  health  have  come  from  contact  with  the  sick,  and  I  have 
on  that  account  never  been  able  to  devote  much  time  to  the  practice 
of  medicine.  In  Italy  contagion  is  so  fully  realized  by  the  people 
that  it  is  not  uncommon  to  destroy  everything  in  the  room  in  which 


194  OPERATIVE    METHODS.  [CHAP.    X. 

a  consumptive  has  died.  In  England  and  America  contagion  is  not 
understood.  A  family  in  Ohio,  twenty-five  years  ago,  were  impor- 
tuned by  a  consumptive  in  the  last  stages  of  life  to  take  him  into 
their  house  to  die,  and  complied  with  his  wishes,  unconscious  of 
danger.  Their  daughter  waited  on  him  until  she  became  so  sick  she 
was  forced  to  go  away,  and  became  a  patient  with  similar  symptoms. 
She  had  a  strong  constitution,  but  gradually  emaciated,  losing  nearly 
forty  pounds,  under  the  consumptive  cough,  which  has  continued 
twenty-five  years  in  spite  of  all  that  could  be  done,  until  in  despair 
she  called  upon  me,  emaciated  and  feeble,  for  medical  treatment. 
Had  the  family  known  the  transmissibility  of  disease  this  misfortune 
might  have  been  avoided. 

The  most  permanent  morbid  impression  on  my  own  constitution 
was  produced  by  attending,  over  thirty  years  ago,  a  severe  case  of 
fever  and  hepatic  disease. 


CHAPTER    XI. 

NERVAURIC  THERAPEUTICS. 

Impressibility  the  first  question;  its  various  external  indications  and  causes  — 
Influence  of  love  —  Improvement  at  the  critical  period  of  life  —  Test  by  the  hand  — 
Test  by  the  eye  —  The  receptive  or  impressible  condition  —  The  use  of  medicines  — 
Impressible  region  of  body  —  Passive  and  active  methods  —  Influence  of  warmth, 
food,  and  medicine  —  Virtue  the  best  foundation  —  Four  conti-olling  powers:  health, 
brain  power,  vital  force,  sexual  development  —  The  shoulder  —  Plan  of  the  human 
constitution — Parallelism  of  the  spiritual  faculties  operating  through  the  brain,  and 
the  physical  powers  displayed  in  the  body  —  The  psycho-dynamic  health  power; 
why  at  the  shoulder;  its  proximity  to  the  life  centres;  its  connection  with  the 
spinal  centre  of  power  and  ethical  region  of  chest;  its  approbative  character;  rela- 
tion to  intercostal  nerves  —  The  foundation  of  Sarcognomy  —  Importance  of  shoul- 
der exercises  —  The  shoulder  as  a  regulating  region  and  centre  —  Treatment  on  the 
back  —  Narrow  and  exclusive  views  deprecated  — Back  to  back  practice  —  Fantastic 
theories  and  unscientific  methods  —  Narrowness  and  prejudice — Importance  of 
protecting  the  shoulders  and  back  —  Nature  protects  the  vital  regions  of  head  and 
body.  

In  approaching  a  new  patient  the  first  question  is  whether  his 
impressibility  is  sufficient  to  give  a  satisfactory  response  to  our 
efforts,  or  whether  he  has  the  coarse,  immovable  temperament  on 
which  refined  influences  are  wasted,  and  which  we  should  willingly 
resign  to  the  heroic  treatment  of  cathartics,  emetics,  stimulants,  nar- 
cotics, epispastics,  and  sudorifics. 

The  general  appearance  will  usually  be  sufficient  for  those  who 
have  intuitive  perceptions,  but  there  are  distinct  indications  in  the 
delicacy  of  the  skin,  and  the  general  refinement  and  softness  of  the 
person,  no  less  than  in  the  cranial  configuration.  The  predominance 
of  the  brain  in  front  of  the  ear  assures  us  that  its  faculties  are  better 
adapted  to  receiving  and  appreciating  impressions  than  to  reaction 
and  resistance. 

All  the  anterior  organs  promote  impressibility,  as  all  the  posterior 
resist  it,  but  we  are  specially  interested  now  in  only  one  kind  of 
impressibility,  not  the  impressibility  of  the  intellectual  organs  of  the 
forehead,  which  receive  knowledge  through  the  senses  and  are  there- 
fore influenced  by  ideas,  nor  that  of  the  genial  and  benevolent 
sentiments  which  respond  to  human  worth  and  energy,  but  the 
impressibility  which  yields  to  subtle  influences,  to  the  subtle  emana- 
tions of  the  nervous  system. 

This  impressibility  is  associated  with  the  breadth  of  the  head  at 
the  temples,  especially  at  the  anterior  part  of  that  region  of  sensi- 


I96  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XI. 

bility  which  I  discovered  in  1837-38,  and  which  has  been  forcibly 
illustrated  by  Prof.  Ferrier  in  the  cruel  experiment  on  the  brain  of  a 
monkey. 

This  region  of  Sensibility,  at  the  basis  of  the  middle  lobe  (now 
called  the  temporo-sphenoidal),  extends  from  the  back  of -.the  eye 
sockets  along  and  above  the  cheek-bone  to  about  an  inch  in  front  of 
the  cavity  of  the  ear.  Its  large  development  gives  us  acute  sensi- 
bility to  everything  that  can  affect  our  senses,  and  the  more  anterior 
portion  of  the  organ,  possessing  the  more  delicate  and  refined  sensi- 
bilities, feels  the  influences  that  emanate  from  vital  processes,  and 
therefore  is  affected  by  them  ;  hence  it  may  be  properly  called  the 
organ  of  impressibility,  above  and  anterior  to  which  is  the  region  of 
Dreaming  and  Somnambulism,  an  inch  behind  the  external  angle  of 
the  brow. 

Breadth  of  this  region  is  the  best  indication  of  impressibility,  but 
delicate  impressibility  may  exist  without  the  breadth,  for  the  organs 
which  give  breadth  to  the  temples  are  concurrents  or  coincidents  of 
analogous  organs  at  the  median  line,  on  the  same  level,  adjacent  to 
the  falx  (separating  the  hemispheres),  which  may  produce  delicate 
forms  of  impressibility  and  intuition  without  giving  breadth. 

Moreover,  impressibility  may  arise  from  a  frontal  temperament, 
produced,  not  by  large  frontal  organs,  but  by  the  predominance  of  the 
front  over  a  feeble  occiput,  and  by  a  frontal  life.  As  the  predom- 
inance of  the  animal  impulses  in  the  mind  and  temperament  may  be 
produced  by  living  a  turbulent  animal  life  among  coarse  associates, 
so  a  predominance  of  frontal  qualities  and  frontal  temperament  may 
be  produced  by  living  according  to  the  inclinations  of  the  frontal 
organs  —  a  quiet,  amiable,  indolent,  but  unselfish  life,  a  sedentary 
life  of  delicacy,  refinement,  and  social  harmony- — the  effect  of  which 
we  recognize  in  the  general  appearance. 

The  proud,  heroic,  and  combative  elements  of  character  are  antag- 
onistic to  this  impressibility  and  tend  to  destroy  it.  Hence  we  do 
not  find  a  great  deal  of  it  among  the  avaricious  and  jealous  competi- 
tors for  the  highest  rank  and  power.  There  is  far  more  among  the 
humbler  classes,  whose  selfish  passions  have  not  grown  strong  by 
indulgence,  and  whose  self-esteem  does  not  interfere  with  a  reveren- 
tial esteem  for  superiority.  It  is  far  more  abundant,  too,  among 
women,  in  whom  the  hostile,  combative  elements  are  generally  kept 
in  check,  and  who  live  generally  under  the  refining  (frontal)  influ- 
ences of  home. 

Moreover,  Impressibility  is  especially  favored  by  love,  the  exalted 
emotion  which  dominates  over  the  life  of  woman  as  it  does  not  over 
the  life  of  man  ;  for  love  tends  strongly  to  that  intimate  sympathy, 


CHAP.    XI.]  NERVAUR1C    THERAPEUTICS.  I97 

unity,  and  responsiveness  which  occur  through  Impressibility.  (The 
modus  operandi  of  this  belongs  to  the  psychic  study  of  the  organs  of 
the  brain.) 

Hence  the  most  perfect  and  interesting  exhibitions  of  Impressi- 
bility occur  among  the  most  lovely  and  charming  people.  It  is  per- 
haps never  absent  when  the  sexual  development  first  matures  in 
young  women.  The  period  of  refinement,  romance,  beauty,  and 
poetic  sentiment,  when  girlhood  verges  into  womanhood,  is  the  period 
of  great  impressibility,  during  which  the  magnetic  touch  of  a  mother 
or  friend  is  competent  to  regulate  all  the  delicate  machinery  of  life, 
to  ward  off  incipient  disease,  and  guide  the  normal  development  of 
body  and  soul.  But,  alas,  it  is  too  often  a  period  of  mismanagement 
by  the  ignorance  of  the  family  and  sometimes  by  the  coarse  blunder- 
ing of  drug  practitioners,  ignorant  alike  of  the  soul  and  the  lawTs  of 
its  tenement  —  knowing  only  a  scanty  number  of  coarse  medicaments, 
and  reluctant  to  increase  their  number. 

It  is  here  that  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  will  show  its  vast  and 
beneficent  power  by  making  this  transitional  period  not  one  of  ner- 
vous disorder,  habitual  languor,  and  general  inefficiency,  or  the  initial 
period  of  grave  and  life -long  diseases,  but  a  period  of  mental  bright- 
ness, for  activity  and  development  into  permanent  health  and  useful- 
ness, whence  a  long  line  of  noble  posterity. 

It  must  not  be  supposed  that  the  strong  and  hardy  elements  of 
character  are  incompatible  with  impressibility  because  they  antag- 
onize it.  The  first  individual  in  whom  I  discovered  the  extreme 
range  of  the  sensitive  faculties,  Bishop  Polk,  was  a  man  of  strong 
character,  and  became  a  general  in  the  Confederate  army,  in  which 
he  lost  his  life. 

In  addition  to  the  indications  of  impressibility  in  temperament, 
sex,  habits,  education,  and  cranial  development,  we  may  observe  in- 
dications in  the  face.  A  large  eye  with  a  large  pupil,  and  a  fulness 
or  prominence  of  the  cheeks  around  the  eyes,  with  a  rosy  tint,  are 
valuable  indications,  to  which  we  may  add  a  fulness  of  the  upper 
chest,  of  the  female  bosom,  and  of  the  region  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
sternum. 

But  we  may  easily  make  a  satisfactory  test  with  the  hands.  Let 
the  patient  extend  his  hand  horizontally,  with  the  palm  up,  while  we 
make  a  pass  over  it,  the  tips  of  our  fingers  coming  within  an  inch  of 
the  surface  of  his  hand.  If  merely  sensitive,  he  will  recognize  the 
warmth  of  our  hands  and  possibly  a  slight,  very  slight  tingling  or 
pricking  effect.  But  if  impressible,  the  nervauric  emanation  from 
the  fingers  will  produce  a  slightly  cooling  sensation,  similar  to  that 
from  a  very  gentle  breeze. 


I98  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XI. 

The  individual  in  whom  this  occurs  will  prove  impressible  to  the 
influence  of  the  hand,  and  in  many  cases  will  yield  so  readily  to 
nervauric  treatment  as  to  make  the  cure  of  his  diseases  a  pleasure. 

To  illustrate  further  the  degree  of  impressibility,  we  may  touch  the 
locality  in  the  temples  an  inch  behind  the  external  angle  of  the  brow, 
where  we  find  Impressibility  and  Somnolence.  While  touching  this 
locality  on  each  side,  a  calm,  dreamy  feeling  is  produced  in  the  sub- 
ject, making  him  indifferent  to  surrounding  objects,  and  presently 
producing  a  disposition  to  close  the  eyes.  The  upper  eyelids  droop, 
quiver,  and  wink,  and  gradually  incline  to  remain  closed.  In  the 
extremely  impressible  they  will  be  closed  so  firmly  as  to  resist  the 
effort  to  open  them. 

The  whole  constitution  is  now  in  its  most  ductile  or  receptive  con- 
dition, and  nervauric  treatment  is  sufficient  for  all  its  diseases.  Yet 
the  scientific  operator  who  is  familiar  with  the  real  value  of  medicines 
will  still  find  it  expedient  to  employ  their  assistance  in  accelerating 
and  perfecting  the  cure,  for  medicines  wisely  adapted  to  the  case  are 
as  congenial  and  wholesome  as  our  common  food.  There  is,  indeed, 
no  dividing  line  between  food  and  medicine.  What  is  commonly 
called  food  is  the  medicine  for  the  hunger,  thirst,  and  exhaustion 
caused  by  exertion  and  exposure.  What  is  called  medicine  is  the 
food  for  constitutions  more  than  exhausted  by  adverse  influences. 
Ferruginous  and  phosphoric  preparations  are  the  food  for  organs 
affected  by  degenerate  or  deglobulized  blood.  The  coffee  and  wine 
which  rouse  from  the  prostration  by  heat  and  unwholesome  air  are  as 
medical,  only  in  a  milder  degree,  as  the  quinine  that  resists  malaria 
and  the  whiskey  which  saves  the  prostrated  victim  from  the  effect  of 
the  rattlesnake's  venom. 

As  the  object  of  the  healer  is  success  in  controlling  the  consti- 
tution of  his  patient  to  remove  his  diseases,  it  is  proper  that  he 
should  aim  to  increase  and  maintain  the  impressibility  upon  which 
his  success  depends.  Hence,  if  he  initiates  his  operations  by  touch- 
ing the  temples  until  the  eyes  display  the  effect,  he  facilitates  his 
subsequent  labors. 

I  think  it  preferable,  however,  to  produce  the  impressible  con- 
dition on  the  corresponding  sensitive  and  somnolent  region  of  the 
body  by  placing  the  hand  on  the  lower  part  of  the  chest,  just  below 
the  sternum  (breast-bone). 

This  operation,  though  not  invigorating,  is  very  valuable,  as  it  pro- 
duces a  rather  pleasant,  passive  tranquillity,  especially  as  the  patient 
should  be  lying  down  when  it  is  attempted,  which  is  indeed  the  best 
position  for  all  therapeutic  operations. 

In  consequence  of  the  susceptibility  thus  established,  the  patient 


CHAP.    XI.]  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  I99 

feels  the  entire  influence  of  his  healer  by  coming  into  complete 
sympathy  with  him.  The  hand  conveys  his  entire  personality,  and 
this  operation  alone  would  in  many  cases  work  curative  results  by 
subordinating  the  morbid  constitution  of  the  patient  to  the  healthy 
constitution  of  the  healer  —  producing  by  this  simple  operation 
results  which  the  practitioners  of  animal  magnetism  aim  to  attain  by 
a  great  variety  of  passes. 

While  I  would  recommend  this  initial  process  for  the  subdual  of 
the  patient,  I  must  qualify  the  recommendation  by  the  suggestion 
that  it  may  sometimes  be  objectionable;  for  while  it  increases  the 
susceptibility  of  the  subject  it  tends  also  to  increase  that  of  the 
operator,  and  by  his  passive  condition  to  make  him  receptive  of 
the  morbid  influences  of  the  patient.  When  these  influences  from  a 
strong  or  extremely  morbid  constitution  are  too  strong,  the  operator 
should  not  assume  this  passive  condition.  He  may  conduct  the 
operation  more  actively,  as  by  a  gentle  patting  or  tapping  operation,* 
and  produce  the  same  effect  as  by  the  mere  application  of  the  hand. 

What  other  influences,  it  may  be  asked,  will  increase  the  suscepti- 
bility. Warmth  will  contribute  much  ;  it  draws  the  circulation  to 
the  surface,  increases  the  susceptibility,  and,  if  carried  far,  diminishes 
the  muscular  energy  (which  belongs  to  the  occipital  or  resisting 
region  and  antagonizes  the  amiable  elements).  Hence  warm  clim- 
ates have  more  than  twice  the  susceptibility  of  the  cold,  and  the 
nervauric  healer  who  would  win  the  greatest  and  most  pleasant 
triumphs  should  visit  the  tropical  regions,  in  which  he  will  find 
almost  the  entire  population  subject  to  his  power.  In  Mexico  and 
South  America  the  results  will  be  far  more  brilliant  than  in  the 
United  States,  and  in  India  he  will  find  the  maximum  impressibilitv, 
which  was  thoroughly  demonstrated  in  the  experience  of  Dr. 
Esdaile. 

For  this  reason  impressibility  is  greater  in  summer  than  in  winter, 
and  in  warm  apartments  than  in  cold  ones. 

But  the  moral  warmth  is  as  necessary  as  the  physical,  and  families 
ruled  by  love  and  harmony  will  not  fail  to  develop  susceptibility. 
Music  also  greatly  promotes  it,  especially  vocal  music  —  so  does  the 
contemplation  of  beauty  in  nature  or  art,  and  habits  of  contemplation. 
There  is  a  great  deal  of  difference  between  the  fashionable  music, 
which  is  a  mere  combination  of  force  and  skill,  and  the  music  of  feel- 
ing, like  that  of  the  Scotch,  which  has  the  best  influence. 

*  The  late  Dr.  W.  McDowell  (the  first  writer  upon  consumption  who  developed 
its  philosophy  and  rational  treatment,  as  far  back  as  1840)  told  me  that  an  overseer 
in  Virginia  was  accustomed  to  make  a  wager  that  he  could  put  any  one  to  sleep  by 
force.  To  do  this  he  would  have  the  man  seized  by  assistants  and  thrown  upon 
his  back  on  the  barn  floor,  where  he  was  held  while  the  operator,  by  a  steady  and 
gentle  patting  on  the  epigastric  region,  would  put  him  to  sleep. 


200  NERVAUR1C    THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XI. 

Diseases  of  an  acute,  active  character  generally  promote  sus- 
ceptibility, and  increase  the  sensitiveness  to  remedies,  which  explains 
the  success  of  the  infinitesimal  homoeopathic  remedies,  nicely 
adapted  to  the  disordered  organ.  Yet  many  chronic  diseases  in 
which  the  nervous  system  is  impaired  rather  diminish  the  suscepti- 
bility. 

The  influence  of  food  and  medicine  upon  susceptibility  is  worthy 
of  attention.  The  sensitiveness  and  irritability  of  the  nerves  is  in- 
creased by  a  low  diet.  Animal  food  tends  to  muscular  development, 
which  is  antagonistic  to  the  refining  elements  ;  vegetable  food  and 
fruits  are  more  appropriate  for  the  frontal  and  superior  regions  of  the 
brain.  Flesh  diet  and  articles  difficult  of  digestion  antagonize  im- 
pressibility, but  articles  which  gently  stimulate  the  frontal  organs 
favor  it. 

Coffee,  tea,  and  tobacco  promote  susceptibility,  although  their  ex- 
cessive use  impairs  the  health,  and  medicines  of  the  anodyne  or 
nervine  class  have  a  tendency  to  promote  it.  There  are  many 
articles,  such  as  coca,  lavender,  valerian,  cypripedium,  vanilla,  etc., 
which,  by  their  tonic  and  restorative  influence,  are  beneficial  to  the 
nervous  system,  and  thus  indirectly  promote  a  healthy  susceptibility. 

I  think  it  will  ultimately  be  realized  that  the  predominance  of 
virtue  and  refinement  is  the  best  foundation  for  impressibility,  and 
I  doubt  not  that  in  "  the  good  time  coming,"  when  humanity  shall 
have  attained  a  nobler  development,  our  entire  population,  even  in 
cold  climates,  will  become  amenable  to  nervauric  healing,  and  the 
aggregate  vital  power  of  society  will  sustain  each  individual  against 
infirmity  and  disease  by  an  all-embracing  sympathy  and  friendship. 

Four  Controlling  Powers. —  The  perfect  development  of  the 
constitution  into  health  and  efficiency  depends  mainly  upon  four 
localities,  in  which  the  vital  forces  are  concentred,  which  may  be  called 
the  regions  of 

PERFECT  HEALTH, 
BRAIN  POWER, 
•  VITAL  FORCE,  AND 
SEXUAL  DEVELOPMENT. 

The  region  of  perfect  health  or  normal  perfection  is  at  the  shoulder 
blades,  or  superior  posterior  region  of  the  chest. 

This  discovery  carries  us  far  away  from  all  the  crude  philosophies 
and  speculations  of  biologists.  It  is  so  great  a  departure  from  all 
pre-existing  conceptions  as  to  require  some  explanation  to  make  it 
clearly  intelligible  to  a  philosophic  inquirer. 

Through  long  familiarity,  the  new  philosophy  has  become  to  me  a 
familiar  and  simple  view  of  life,  but  in  sympathizing  with  one  who 


CHAP.    XI.]  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  201 

dwells  in  the  old  forms  of  scientific  thought,  I  perceive  the  necessity 
of  giving  an  explanation  of  this  new  view  of  the  constitution  of 
man.  I  do  not  wish  the  therapeutic  practitioner  to  know  only  the 
manual  of  treatment  and  the  localities  he  must  rouse,  without  under- 
standing as  well  as  practicable  the  plan  and  philosophy  of  the  human 
constitution,  which  control  his  operations. 

The  fundamental  plan  is  this,  that  every  function  of  human  life 
has  a  distinct  local  apparatus.  There  is  no  organ  without  a  function, 
and  no  function  without  an  organ.  If  we  could  determine  a  priori 
the  functions  of  life,  we  should  know  what  organs  must  exist.  But 
the  a  priori  method  has  always  been  a  failure  and  delusion.  We 
know  nothing  without  observation  and  experiment.  The  existence 
of  such  a  science  as  Sarcognomy  has  never  been  realized  or  ever 
imagined  in  human  speculation,  and  the  speculations  of  meta- 
physicians have  only  intensified  ignorance  of  the  constitution  of 
man. 

But  this  statement  of  functions  and  organs  gives  only  a  very 
limited  glimpse  of  the  truth  ;  we  find  in  the  body  a  great  many 
structures  for  the  special  purposes  of  physical  existence,  and  in  the 
brain  a  great  many  structures  for  the  purposes  of  our  spiritual  exis- 
tence. The  brain  powers  are  omni-relative  —  they  face  all  possible 
aspects  or  relations  of  life,  and  qualify  for  all  possible  duties.  They 
have  no  mechanical  or  limited  character,  and  do  not  resemble  the 
mechanical  and  limited  functions  of  the  body.  Nevertheless,  they 
control  and  inspire  the  body,  wielding  all  its  powers  for  their  own 
purposes,  and  although  there  is  so  wide  a  difference  between  the 
genial  and  spiritual  powers  connected  with  the  brain,  and  the  special 
physical  powers  of  the  body,  there  is  yet  established  by  Infinite 
Wisdom  a  wonderful  parallelism,  unity,  consociation,  and  co-operation, 
as  if  one  were  the  echo  of  the  other  —  not  by  any  arbitrary  decree 
and  inscrutable  fixedness  of  order,  but  by  a  marvellous  unity  of 
purpose  and  practical  co-operation  which  enables  us  to  find  for  every 
part  of  the  brain  a  corresponding  part  of  the  body  with  which  it 
sympathizes  and  co-operates  in  health  and  in  sickness,  the  details  of 
which  co-operation  are  revealed  in  Sarcognomy,  the  science  which 
shows  the  marvellous  adaptation  of  all  physical  structures  (apparently 
only  for  physical  purposes)  to  sustain,  obey,  and  unitize  with  the 
grand  spiritual  powers  which  in  man  typify  the  Supreme  Creator. 

The  spiritual  or  psycho-dynamic  power  or  faculty  which  we  do  not 
define  but  only  suggest  when  we  use  the  word  Health  is  in  the  psychic 
sense  the  centre  of  our  impulses,  energies,  and  affections,  so  related 
that  in  its  action  it  calls  forth  a  harmonious  combination  of  sustaining, 
impelling,  and  regulating  powers,  as  has  been  already  explained  in  the 
chapters  on  health  and  the  spinal  system. 


202  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XI. 

Why  is  this  power  manifested  in  the  shoulder,  and  why  is  the 
shoulder  a  suitable  location  for  a  response  to  the  spiritual  faculty  of 
Healthy  Animation? 

The  middle  of  the  shoulder  is  adjacent  to  the  great  life  centre  in 
the  chest,  where  the  influx  that  sustains  physical  life  by  oxygen  is  in 
continual  progress,  and  the  efflux  that  bears  vital  conditions  and 
nourishment  to  every  organ  of  the  body  from  the  heart  is  also  in  con- 
tinual progress,  and  the  extent  of  these  two  processes  is  nearly  a 
correct  measure  of  the  amount  of  physiological  life  evolved  in  the 
body.  The  large  development  of  that  region,  and  consequently  of 
the  posterior  part  of  the  chest,  necessarily  implies  an  abui dance  of 
vital  action.  Moreover,  the  shoulder,  as  distinguished  from  the  chests 
is  an  appanage  of  the  cephalic  region  of.  the  spinal  cord,  in  which,  as 
heretofore  explained,  is  found  the  maximum  vital  power,  and  it  covers 
the  distribution  of  nerves  from  the  cephalic  region  of  the  cord,  which 
forms  the  brachial  plexus,  and  gives  the  arms  all  their  power.  The 
shoulder  stands  between  the  spinal  origin  and  the  muscular  and  cuta- 
neous distribution  of  these  nerves,  and  the  posterior  or  scapular 
region  of  the  shoulder  receives  its  (sub-  and  supra-scapular)  nerves 
from  the  brachial  plexus. 

Thus  the  scapular  region  is  associated  with  the  highest  vital  ele- 
ments of  lungs,  heart,  spine  and  arms,  and  its  development  must  in- 
dicate both  power  and  activity.  But  in  addition  to  this,  the  shoulder 
has  an  ethical  character,  derived  from  its  proximity  to  and  connection 
with  the  summit  of  the  lungs  and  the  corresponding  portion  of  the 
spine.  The  summit  of  the  lungs  is  an  ethical  region,  the  region 
that  sympathizes  with  the  superior  aspect  of  the  brain,  the  region  of 
the  virtues,  and  gives  the  upward  determination  to  the  vital  forces. 
It  is  well  known  and  often  expressed  in  emotional  language  that  the 
bosom  responds  to  or  is  agitated  by  the  higher  emotions. 

Thus  the  shoulder,  in  addition  to  its  energies,  is  associated,  by  the 
law  of  correlation  explained  in  the  System  of  Anthropology,  with  the 
kindly  emotions,  and  responsive  to  the  love  which  belongs  to  the 
-mammary  region  of  the  chest.  The  faculty  of  healthy  animation, 
in  the  brain  region  to  which  the  shoulder  region  corresponds,  is  the 
faculty  which  attracts  affection  by  its  abundant  and  harmonious  ex- 
uberance of  life,  and  which  craves  and  wins  love,  which  it  seeks  with 
approbative  zeal.  The  word  approbativeness  is  indeed  almost  an 
appropriate  name  for  it,  for  it  desires  to  be  loved  and  continually 
seeks  friendship  and  affection. 

The  adjacent  organ,  however,  is  called  Approbativeness,  because  it 
especially  seeks  approval,  sympathy,  and  admiration. 

This  health  region  on  the  scapula  is  on  the  line  of  the  intercostal 


CHAP.    XI.]  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  2C>5 

nerves  which  from  the  upper  dorsal  region  (its  first  five  vertebrae) 
extend  around  the  summit  of  the  chest,  supplying'  its  integuments 
and  the  intercostal  muscles  —  the  integuments  of  the  amiable  region 
and  the  muscles  of  inspiration  for  the  expansion  of  the  upper  part  of 
the  chest.  As  the  anterior  part  of  the  trunk,  like  the  anterior  part 
of  the  brain,  is  distinguished  by  impressional  sensibility,  while  the 
spine  represents  reactive  energy,  the  middle  of  the  scapula  represents 
rather  more  of  the  impressional  capability  (which  is  necessary  to  the 
amiable  character)  than  the  spinal  region,  while  it  also  represents  the 
general  benevolent  or  virtuous  influence  of  the  summit  of  the  chest 
and  brain. 

Let  us  return  now  to  practical  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  ;  for  a 
complete  demonstration  of  the  rationale  and  modus  operandi  of  ':he 
functions  of  life  is  not  designed  in  this  volume,  and  this  partial  illus- 
tration of  one  function  is  designed  only  to  show  the  reader  that  Sar- 
cognomy stands  upon  solid  scientific  foundations  in  anatomy  as  well 
as  psychology,  and  is  neither  a  matter  of  analogy  and  correspondence 
suggested  by  ingenious  speculation,  nor  a  crude  result  of  careless  ex- 
periments, but  has  been  evolved  by  careful  experiments  guided  by 
philosophic  principles,  and  has  been  confirmed  still  farther  during  the 
last  forty  years  by  the  test  of  its  practical  success  in  guiding  the 
treatment  of  the  sick. 

As  we  find  the  centre  of  normal  life  or  healthy  energy  in  the 
shoulder — the  centre  which  happily  combines  the  pleasing,  honorable, 
and  attractive  elements  with  physical  efficiency,  longevity,  and  con- 
quest of  disease,  it  follows  that  shoulder  development  should  be  a 
part  of  our  hygiene,  and  that  lifting,  rowing,  fencing,  handling 
weights,  swinging  on  the  arms  and  other  suitable  exercises  should  be 
prescribed  as  an  aid  to  our  treatment,  and  that  in  the  treatment  the 
leading  prominence  should  be  given  to  shoulder  methods. 

Thus,  in  treating  the  various  organs,  we  may  keep  one  hand  on 
Health  while  stimulating  any  other  region,  which  will  give  a  normal 
direction  to  each  excitement  and  prevent  it  from  going  to  excess. 
Under  this  influence  from  Health,  medical  treatment  will  have  a 
genial  effect,  which  otherwise  might  prove  disturbing  and  irritating, 
and  the  little  disturbing  influences  from  lack  of  sympathy  or  congen- 
iality or  other  petty  annoyances  will  be  overlooked  or  unfelt. 

The  same  precaution  should  be  observed  in  operations  upon  the 
head.  One  hand  extended  upon  the  superior  posterior  region  which 
embraces  Health  will  continually  do  good  and  regulate  all  other 
operations. 

It  may  also  be  observed  that  manipulations  or  passes  toward  thr 
region  of  Health  will  have  a  better  effect  than  those  in  opposite  or  dii- 


204  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XL 

ferent  directions,  unless  there  be  some  special  reason  for  the  latter,  as 
when  downward  manipulations  are  used  to  accelerate  the  action  of  the 
bowels,  or  disperse  morbid  conditions. 

Invigorating  passes  should  be  made  backward  ;  soothing  and  regu- 
lative, upwards  ;  stimulating  or  exciting  may  sometimes  be  made  down- 
wards, but  these  if  continued  long  become  exhausting  and  injurious. 
Such  injurious  effects  frequently  occur  in  electrical  treatment.  The 
tendency  most  favorable  generally  is  backward  and  upward. 

If  the  healer  would  approach  a  number  of  his  patients,  either  stand- 
ing erect  or  lying  down,  and  administer  vigorous  passes  from  the 
hypochondriac  or  from  the  hypogastric  region  upwards  and  back- 
wards, he  would  find  that  they  all  feel  refreshed  and  invigorated,  and 
like  the  operation. 

I  do  not  perceive  any  possible  harm  to  arise  from  the  continued  and 
vigorous  exertion  of  the  health  region.  Yet  in  its  highest  energy  it 
creates  an  abundance  of  vital  and  moral  power  which  must  crave  a 
field  of  exertion  and  would  rebel  against  the  cramped  situations  in 
which  many  are  found.  It  is  here  to  be  observed  that  as  we  descend 
the  back  the  influence  becomes  more  active,  at  the  lower  margin  of 
the  scapula  assuming  the  character  of  Playfulness,  and  further  down 
the  self-reliant  and  gregarious  impulses  which  would  not  be  content 
with  a  quiet  life.  A  more  quiet  influence  is  found  higher  up — a 
healthful  serenity  and  fortitude  being  found  at  the  top  of  the  shoulder, 
as  we  find  it  at  the  summit  of  the  head,  vertically  above  the  cavity  of 
the  ear,  adjacent  to  the  median  line. 

The  sensitive,  depressing,  hypochondriac  influences  which  are  asso- 
ciated with  the  anterior  margin  of  the  liver  and  its  vicinity,  and  which 
in  diseases  of  this  region  display  themselves  in  gloomy  sensitiveness, 
are  antagonized  by  the  region  of  buoyant  Fortitude,  which  lies  between 
the  side  of  the  neck  and  the  exterior  aspect  of  the  shoulder.  Hence 
this  region  is  disturbed  by  all  affections  or  irritations  of  the  liver,  but 
not  by  its  inactivity,  And  as  this  is  the  locality  at  which  the  supra- 
scapular nerve  proceeds  from  the  superior  portion  of  the  brachial 
plexus  (the  portion  which  has  the  closest  sympathy  with  the  brain), 
this  fact  explains  the  pathological  mystery  that  affections  of  the  liver 
indicate  their  existence  in  many  cases  by  a  pain  in  the  shoulder  in  the 
region  supplied  by  the  suprascapular  nerve.  The  phrenic  nerve,  which 
communicates  with  the  liver  as  well  as  the  diaphragm,  has  commis- 
sural branches  which  connect  with  one  of  the  nerves  to  the  shoulder. 

If  the  region  of  health  be  so  important,  the  suggestion  might  arise 
that  treatment  through  this  region  alone  would  be  all-sufficient,  and 
no  doubt  a  successful  practice  might  be  conducted  in  that  way,  for 
the  public,  accustomed  to  the  delays  and  failures  of  old  medical  sys- 


CHAP.    XI.]  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  205 

terns,  does  not  know  enough  to  understand  how  much  ought  to  be 
expected  from  a  course  of  treatment,  or  how  to  distinguish  rational 
treatment  from  that  of  pedantic  ignorance. 

The  greater  importance  of  the  shoulder  region,  the  spinal  column, 
and  the  entire  back  should  not  lead  us  to  neglect  other  regions.  We 
should  carefully  avoid  that  common  fault  of  narrow  minds  —  concentra" 
tion  upon  one  idea  or  one  method  to  the  neglect  of  everything  else. 
A  successful  practice  might  be  conducted  solely  by  treating  the  back 
of  the  trunk  and  the  head,  or  applying  tonic  plasters  upon  these  pos- 
terior regions,  or  even  tonic  metals. 

In  Boston  some  psychological  healers  have  attempted  to  cure  their 
patients  by  sitting  back  to  back  with  the  patient  —  a  method  which 
might  have  some  effect  in  imparting  vitality  and  health  directly  from 
one  spinal  column  to  the  other.  This  method  was  associated  with 
the  theory  of  the  nonexistence  of  matter,  and  of  diseases  being 
entirely  imaginary.  The  absurdity  of  the  theory  is  its  greatest  fascin- 
ation. As  there  are  persons  who,  when  on  the  brink  of  a  great  preci- 
pice, are  strongly  impelled  to  throw  themselves  off,  so  there  are  many 
who,  in  the  presence  of  a  great  mystery,  or  what  seems  to  be  such,  are 
tempted  to  plunge  into  the  deepest  gulf  of  absurdity  that  is  visible, 
as  we  see  in  some  of  the  intensely  absurd  theological  dogmas  that 
have  ruled  the  civilized  world. 

The  upper  posterior  portion  of  the  trunk  —  the  shoulders  and  the 
space  between  them  —  being  the  tonic  region  of  the  constitution,  all 
processes  are  invigorating  which  concentrate  the  vital  forces  to  that 
part.  Stimulating  and  tonic  plasters  are  therefore  beneficial  on  this 
region,  and  warm  clothing  has  a  tonic  effect.  The  capes  of  the  over- 
coat formerly  in  fashion  were  really  useful ;  and  the  shawl  is  one  of 
the  most  valuable  of  female  garments,  the  use  of  which  has  been  of 
great  benefit  to  health  and  life.  On  the  other  hand,  the  chilling  of  the 
shoulder  region  is  peculiarly  prostrating  to  all  the  powers  of  life,  and 
it  has  been  maintained  by  some  intelligent  physicians  that  the  chills 
ascribed  to  malaria  were  more  properly  attributable  to  the  depressing 
influence  of  nocturnal  cold  operating  on  the  shoulders. 

When  riding  or  walking  on  a  clear  night  with  a  cloudless  sky,  the 
shoulders  are  exposed  to  the  intense  cold  of  the  planetary  interspaces 
(perhaps  4000  below  zero),  to  which  they  are  giving  radiation.  Unless 
protected  by  an  umbrella  or  heavy  shoulder  clothing,  this  is  a  danger- 
ous exposure  to  delicate  persons.  Still  more  dangerous  is  it  to  sit  at 
night  beyond  the  shelter  of  the  house  or  porch.  But  the  injury  is  far 
less  when  the  sky  is  covered  with  clouds,  which  reflect  the  warmth 
of  the  earth  and  shelter  from  the  stellar  region  of  cold,  so  that  the 
earth  surface  is  less  cooled  and  there  is  less  dew. 


206  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP. 


XI- 


In  accordance  with  these  principles  mankind  generally  understand 
that  the  back  must  be  well  clothed,  and  we  are  accustomed  to  speak 
of  clothing  as  for  the  back,  while  we  are  accustomed  to  leave  the 
coat  open  in  front.  A  similar  exposure  of  the  back  would  be  so 
injurious  it  is  never  attempted.  The  opening  of  the  vest  at  the  mid- 
dle of  the  breast,  even  when  facing  the  cold  wind,  is  harmless,  while 
the  very  same  exposure  between  the  shoulders  would  be  dangerous 
—  for  the  back  is  the  tonic  and  the  front  the  atonic  region.  The 
front  receives  impressions,  and  the  back  reacts  and  resists  by  its 
own  spontaneity,  sustaining  a  vital  force  which  the  front  tends  to 
expend. 

Nature  has  carefully  guarded  the  seats  of  vital  force.  It  is  the 
front  of  the  head,  as  well  as  the  front  of  the  body,  that  faces  the  cool 
breeze  without  injury.  The  top,  the  side,  and  the  back  of  the  head, 
which  are  the  seats  of  our  vital  forces,  are  well  protected  by  hair. 
The  front,  the  forehead,  the  seat  of  unvital  and  devitalizing  intellect, 
is  bare.  So  are  the  anterior  parts  of  the  temples  and  the  upper  part 
of  the  face,  in  which  all  the  functions  are  non-vital  or  exhausting. 
The  chilling  of  these  regions  may  retard  intelligence  and  pliability, 
but  never  injures  health  or  life;,  even  the  loss  of  a  considerable 
amount  of  brain  in  these  anterior  regions  is  not  a  serious  affair  for 
health  or  vitality.  While  the  passive,  sensitive,  and  yielding  func- 
tions of  organs  behind  the  upper  part  of  the  face  render  them  so 
unnecessary  to  vital  power  as  not  to  require  much  protection,  the 
organs  covered  by  the  lower  part  of  the  face  are  highly  necessary  to 
life,  embracing,  as  they  do,  calorific,  respiratory  muscular,  and  diges- 
tive capacities,  and  hence  the  beard  thickly  covers  precisely  the 
regions  which  need  protection  ;  and  when  an  intensely  cold  wind  ren- 
ders the  warmest  clothing  necessary,  a  woollen  wrapping  around  the 
lower  part  of  the  face  and  neck,  where  nature  has  placed  the  beard 
and  hair,  is  worth  more  than  five  times  the  amount  of  clothing 
applied  anywhere  else. 

Returning  to  our  subject  :  the  posterior  regions  of  body  and 
brain  are  protected  by  being  in  the  rear  and  thus  escaping  collisions. 
Their  life  power,  residing  in  the  brain  and  spinal  cord,  is  protected  by 
the  very  strong  bones  of  the  skull  and  the  spinal  column.  Hence 
the  position  instinctively  assumed  by  the  sick  and  infirm,  lying 
horizontally  on  the  back,  gives  great  preservative  and  recuperative 
power  by  the  warmth  which  it  gives  the  spinal  column,  and  the  pre- 
dominance it  gives  the  brain,  which  is  relieved  from  the  tax  of 
muscular  effort,  and  has  a  better  blood-supply  in  the  horizontal  than 
in  the  erect  position.  The  advantage  of  the  horizontal  position  is 
sometimes  lost  by  those  who,  after   lying  on  the  back,  turn  on  the/ 


CHAP.    XI.]  NERVAURIC    THERAPEUTICS.  2C»7 

side  without  bringing  warm  clothing  against  the  back  to  maintain  its 
warmth.  The  importance  of  the  spinal  column  is  illustrated  both  by 
heat  and  cold.  Very  injurious  and  debilitating  effects  are  experi- 
enced by  those  who  stand  in  such  a  position  that  the  back  is  con- 
tinually exposed  to  the  he^at  of  a  fire  or  stove.  The  cold  shower  bath 
and  the  ice  bag  on  the  spinal  column  are  among  the  most  powerful 
agenceis  known  in  therapeutics. 

The  shoulder  being  the  tonic  and  hygienic  region,  its  extension  in 
the  arm  necessarily  partakes  of  that  character;  and  the  exercise  and 
development  of  the  arms  must  rank  among  the  leading  measures  of 
hygienic  culture,  — a  truth  which  is  only  recently  beginning  to  be 
appreciated.  The  entire  arm  has  a  tonic  correlation  with  the  viscera 
of  the  trunk,  the  humeral  region  gives  a  fortifying  energy  to  the 
viscera  of  the  thorax,  and  the  forearm  to  those  of  the  abdomen. 
Hence  arm  exercises  strengthen  the  visceral  functions  better  than 
locomotion,  and  diseases  of  the  viscera  are  effectively  treated  by 
warming  and  stimulating  applications  to  the  arm  or  by  haemostasis 
or  haemospasia  on  the  arms,  which  is  of  marvellous  efficiency  ;  for 
haemospasia,  while  relieving  internal  congestions,  gives  such  a 
development  to  the  vital  force  of  the  arms  as  energizes  all  the  viscera. 
The  organs  in  the  brain  which  sympathize  with  the  arms  are  tonic 
correlations  of  those  which  sympathize  with  the  viscera,  —  a  proposi- 
tion, however,  which  is  intelligible  only  after  the  study  of  Anthro- 
pology. 

As  we  know  the  nervous  system  to  be  the  seat  of  life  and  the 
measure  of  its  development,  we  next  proceed  to  consider  the  brain 
power. 


CHAPTER    XII. 

THE  OCCIPITAL  ENERGIES. 

Brain  power  and  its  location  —  Prior  development  of  the  brain  —  False  doctrines 
corrected  —  Superior  organs  necessary  to  vital  power  in  man — Brain  power  com- 
pared to  Health  power — Connection  of  the  latter  with  Moral  Power  and  conduct 
—  Local  treatment — Vital  Force  and  sexual  vitality  —  Locations  of  Vital  Force  — 
Its  distinction  from  Health  —  Influence  of  Vital  Force  when  roused  —  Its  connection 
with  Nutrition  —  Location  of  the  latter  — Its  influence  on  the  constitution  —  Impor- 
tance to  invalids — Treatment  through  brain  —  Digestion  —  Its  connection  with  the 
spine  and  with  the  gastric  region — Organ  of  Alimentiveness  —  Its  depressing  influ- 
ence—  Buoyant  Fortitude —Its  moral  association — Fasting — Influence  of  Firm- 
ness pathognomically  explained  —  Hunger  and  appetite  —  Best  method  of  treating 
stomach  —  Physiological  influences  of  Firmness  and  the  shoulder  —  Gastric  irrita- 
tions and  emesis  —  Gastric  medicines — Proper  manipulations  —  Region  of  assim- 
ilative absorption  —  Moral  forces  concerned  —  How  to  promote  assimilation  — 
Spiritual  relations  of  this  region  —  Intellectual  and  occipital  influences  —  Retentive 
power  of  the  latter  —  Relaxing  power  of  the  former — Contrast  of  the  Adhesive  and 
intellectual  regions --Adhesiveness  on  the  occiput  and  on  the  back  —  Combative- 
ness,  its  location  and  influence  —  Importance  of  Adhesiveness  to  patients  —  Impor- 
tance in  society  and  business  —  Retentive  influence  of  the  back  —  Its  explanation  — 
Region  of  Business  Energy  —  Effect  of  spinal  injuries  —  Of  repletion  —  Co-opera- 
tion of  the  energies  —  Conservative  and  destructive  agencies  —  Upper  and  lower 
part  of  the  abdomen — Restorative  influence  of  Adhesive  region;  its  connection 
with  Coolness  and  Sleep  —  Philosophy  of  the  production  of  sleep,  and  the  organs 
concerned  in  sleep  and  wakefulness. 


Brain  Power  in  Sarcognomy  (co-operation  of  the  body  with  the 
brain)  belongs  to  the  cephalic  region  of  the  cord.  Why  it  is  located 
there  and  how  it  operates  were  fully  illustrated  in  the  chapter  on  the 
Spinal  Region. 

The  recognition  of  the  brain  and  its  co-operative  corporeal  region 
as  the  seat  of  life  is  a  great  step  in  the  transition  from  the  old  to  the 
new  physiology.  It  is  sustained,  not  only  by  the  clear  demonstration 
that  life  is  an  influx,  which  was  referred  to  in  the  second  chapter,  but 
also  by  the  priority  of  the  formation  of  the  brain  in  the  earliest  em- 
bryonic condition  of  vertebrate  animals.  In  the  earliest  changes  of 
the  vitelline  substance  of  the  chick,  the  blastoderm  exhibits  a  mucous 
and  a  serous  stratum,  or  hypoblast  and  epiblast  ;  from  this  latter  are 
evolved  the  cerebro-spinal  system  and  the  cutaneous  surface.  Ori- 
ginating thus  together  they  preserve  a  parallelism  and  sympathy 
which  are  illustrated  in  Sarcognomy.  In  the  development  of  the 
cerebro-spinal  system  two  dorsal  lamina?  rise  up  on  each  side  of  the 
primitive  groove  of  the  blastoderm  and  unite  so  as  to  enclose  a  chan- 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  2O9 

nel  for  the  cerebro-spinal  system  in  which  the  brain  and  spinal  cord 
are  developed.  In  this  development  the  cephalic  end  takes  prece- 
dence in  time,  and  is  much  the  largest  part,  which  shows  the  priority 
of  the  brain  in  development  in  connection  with  its  primitive  centres, 
the  pituitary  and  pineal  bodies. 

When  life  is  regarded  as  the  product  of  chemical  operations  taking 
place  all  over  the  body,  and  the  brain  as  merely  an  intellectual,  con- 
scious, and  volitional  centre,  it  appears  rather  as  an  organ  of  vital 
expenditure  and  source  of  weakness  than  as  the  seat  and  source  of 
vital  power.  Hence  we  have  been  abundantly  warned  against  ex- 
treme culture  and  mental  precocity  as  endangering  or  consuming 
vitality,  and  illustrative  examples  have  not  been  lacking.  Education 
was  thus  made  to  appear  a  burdensome  if  not  a  dangerous  affair  for 
delicate  constitutions. 

Yet  these  notions  were  all  scientific  errors  and  practical  mistakes- 
The  proper  cultivation  of  the  brain  is  the  most  efficient  method  of 
developing  true  life,  health,  and  longevity,  and  by  acting  upon  this 
principle  I  am  enabled  now  in  my  76th  year  to  enjoy  in  buoyant  health, 
vigor,  and  happiness  the  maximum  capacity  of  my  life. 

The  great  mistake  of  most  biological  theorists  has  arisen  from  their 
ignorance  of  the  true  character  of  the  brain,  in  which  they  recognize 
only  what  they  are  compelled  to  admit  —  intellection  and  the  volitionary 
guidance  of  muscular  motion,  both  of  which  are  exhaustive  operations 
expending  vitality,  while  they  perceive  nothing  of  the  great  energiz- 
ing powers  of  the  superior  and  posterior  regions.  The  mental  devel- 
opment and  excitement  which  are  injurious  to  the  young  are  solely 
intellectual,  and  when  education  is  confined  to  forcing  or  training: 
the  intellectual  faculties  it  is  necessarily  exhausting  and  injurious  in 
its  tendencies,  of  which  all  academic  colleges  and  universities  are  to- 
day examples. 

But  the  early  development  and  power  of  the  brain  in  its  higher 
vitalizing  regions,  so  far  from  being  exhaustive  or  injurious,  is  the  pre- 
cursor of  a  noble  and  powerful  manhood,  and  the  evils  just  mentioned 
result,  not  from  the  normal,  but  from  the  abnormal,  one-sided  growth 
or  culture,  the  premature  development  of  the  sensitive  and  debilitat- 
ing faculties  at  the  expense  of  the  vital  forces.  The  boy  whose  manly 
courage  enabled  him  to  play  the  part  of  a  man  in  assisting  his  family, 
taking  care  of  his  brothers,  managing  the  live  stock  on  a  farm  or 
transacting  business  for  his  father,  is  really  and  substantially  preco- 
cious by  a  normal  development  of  the  brain,  and  hence  displays  a 
manly  vigor  beyond  his  fellows,  ending  in  an  energetic  and  able  man- 
hood. 

Brain  power,  the  power  that  vitalizes  and  sustains  everything,  be- 


\ 

\ 


?IO  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

longs  to  the  region  protected  by  the  hair,  and  centralizes  to  the  cen- 
tre of  the  scalp,  from  which  the  hair  radiates.  It  manifests  itself  in 
the  strength  of  the  voice,  the  power  of  the  eye,  the  energy  and  im- 
pressiveness  of  the  bearing,  the  vigor  with  which  every  faculty  acts, 
and  the  power  of  endurance. 

The  action  of  the  spinal  cephalic  region  is  somewhat  more  powerful 
but  less  harmonious  than  that  of  the  Health  region,  and  commands 
more  respect  than  love  or  admiration.  The  Health  region  wins  by  a 
greater  degree  of  sweetness,  grace,  and  superiority  to  injury.  How 
pleasing  the  thought  that  the  most  perfect  enjoyment  of  life  and 
efficiency  are  associated  with  the  most  attractive  manners  and  the 
most  faithful  attention  to  our  social  duties. 

It  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  and  instructive  revelations  of  An- 
thropology that  every  departure  from  the  proper  line  of  conduct  is  a 
departure  from  perfect  health  and  enjoyment,  and  therefore  the  more 
Godlike  the  life,  the  greater  its  internal  rewards,  although  there  may 
be  suffering  inflicted  by  those  who,  living  on  a  lower  plane,  are  a 
cause  of  unhappiness  both  to  themselves  and  to  others. 

The  virtue  which  is  thus  rewarded,  and  which  is  associated  with  the 
superior  and  upper  posterior  region  of  the  head  and  trunk,  is  not  the 
passive  virtue  which  does  no  wrong  act  and  cultivates  unselfishness 
as  the  supreme  purpose,  but  the  active  virtue  which  is  ever  energetic 
in  discharging  duties,  in  giving  pleasure  to  all  around,  and  exerting  a 
wholesome,  attractive,  uplifting,  and  beneficent  influence  in  all  inter- 
course, while  devoted  and  zealous  in  industry. 

There  have  been  many  false  and  unnatural  ideas  of  virtue  derived 
from  ancient  superstition,  such  as  the  doctrines  of  Buddhism  and  the 
monastic  Christianity  of  the  dark  ages,  which  have  misled  and  are 
still  misleading  many  good  people  into  an  unnatural  and  inefficient 
life,  in  which  neither  the  practical  energies  nor  the  gay  and  cheerful 
social  sentiments  are  developed.  Such  a  life  is  not  virtuous,  but 
feeble  and  morbid. 

The  stimulation  of  the  Cephalic  and  Hygienic  regions  would  be 
enough  but  for  the  reason  that  the  departures  from  health,  being 
located  in  different  parts  of  the  body,  need  the  direct  assistance  of 
the  operator's  vitality  at  each  location  in  addition  to  the  influence 
transmitted  from  controlling  centres.  Still  it  is  a  well-established 
though  marvellous  fact  that  influences  may  be  transmitted  from  the 
soul  and  brain,  which  with  supreme  power  dissipate  the  most  calam- 
itous and  long-standing  chronic  diseases. 

Two  of  the  most  important  inferior  regions  for  local  treatment  are 
those  of  vital  force  and  sexual  vitality. 

Vital  Force,  situated  on  the  summit  of  the  posterior  aspect  of  the 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  ^2  11 

thigh,  is  not  the  perfect  and  satisfactory  vital  power  which  is  found 
in  the  shoulder,  but  a  similar  power  on  a  lower  plane —  a  power  dis- 
played in  the  muscular  system  and  shown  by  indomitable  energy  and 
restless  activity,  yet  not  so  restless  as  the  influence  of  the  lower  part 
of  the  thigh  and  the  knee. 

We  find  this  vital  force  on  the  head,  about  an  inch  behind  and  in- 
terior to  the  lower  end  of  the  mastoid  process  (behind  the  ear),  and  its 
influence  gives  us  a  consciousness  of  physical  power.  I  recollect  how 
distinctly  I  felt  it  sympathetically  about  forty-six  years  ago,  from 
contact  with  the  organ  in  the  head  of  an  impressible  subject  who 
was  a  good  walker  —  a  feeling  as  if  a  walk  of  ten  miles  would  be  a 
pleasure. 

The  difference  between  the  organs  of  Vitality,  or  Vital  Force,  and 
Health  is,  that  the  latter  gives  a  full,  harmonious  development  of 
character  or  personality,  including  physical  capacity  and  endurance; 
while  the  former  gives  physical  power  alone,  without  sustaining  health 
or  firmness,  and  without  moral  government  or  character.  Acting  in 
predominance,  it  would  give  the  desperate  and  hostile  energy  of  the 
outlaw,  whose  crimes  have  arrayed  the  world  against  him.  In  this 
predominance  it  destroys  the  moral  sense,  and  concentrates  all  the 
power  of  the  brain  and  soul  in  the  impulsion  of  the  muscular  system. 
Yet  in  the  normal  course  of  life  the  basilar  forces  of  the  brain  do  not 
run  into  such  evils.  On  the  contrary,  each  basilar  organ  seems  to 
act  as  a  radical  power,  sustaining  the  action  of  a  higher  faculty,  as 
will  be  explained  in  my  System  of  Anthropology.  This  vital  force  is 
antagonistic  to  the  humane  and  tender  sentiment  which  is  most  deeply 
interested  in  the  condition  of  others,  and  which  causes  some  persons 
to  faint  at  the  sight  of  great  suffering  or  bloodshed. 

In  the  invalid  this  power  needs  rousing,  unless  his  condition  be  one 
of  violence  and  passion,  tending  to  insanity.  The  body  being  in  an 
enfeebled  condition,  the  spinal  cord  is  not  acting  with  proper  vigor, 
and  needs  an  influence  descending  from  the  brain,  which  is  elicited 
by  the  organ  of  Vitality,  for  its  line  of  action  is  directly  downward. 
Under  this  influence  the  deadly  languor  of  disease  gives  place  to  more 
natural  feelings  ;  debility  is  diminished  ;  all  the  organs  begin  to  act  in 
a  more  normal  way,  as  if  they  had  received  their  appropriate  medi- 
cine. The  process  of  decay  and  dissolution  is  checked,  and  healthy 
nutrition  is  revived  ;  for  the  region  of  nutrition  is  adjacent  to  that  of 
Vital  Force,  and  goes  with  it  by  proximity.  In  applying  the  hand 
upon  Vitality  it  should  be  extended  so  as  to  cover  the  region  of  Nu- 
trition or  growth,  which  is  situated  a  little  more  anteriorly,  just  below 
the  head  of  the  thigh-bone. 

As  one  stands  erect  with  his  arms  hanging  by  his  side  the  wrist 


212^  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

falls  upon  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone  (femur)  ;  if  then  the  wrist  be 
moved  backward  just  behind  the  femur  the  palm  of  the  hand  would 
fall  upon  the  region  of  Nutrition,  the  influence  of  which  produces 
growth  and  improves  the  capillary  circulation.  This  region  being 
usually  more  developed  in  women  than  in  men  enables  them  to  main- 
tain their  proper  development  and  plumpness  with  a  smaller  amount 
of  food,  and  to  nourish  without  injury  or  loss  the  children  whom  they 
sustain  during  gestation  and  suckling. 

A  deficient  development  of  Nutrition  produces  a  tendency  to 
emaciation,  no  matter  how  ravenous  the  appetite.  Persons  inclined 
to  corpulence  or  embonpoint  are  often  small  eaters  (especially  females), 
their  power  of  nutrition  being  so  great  that  little  food  is  needed. 

A  large  development  of  the  thigh  (including  the  regions  of  Vital 
Force  and  Nutrition)  serves  to  fortify  against  pulmonary  consumption 
and  nervous  debility,  and  is  usually  associated  with  large  development 
of  the  corresponding  regions  in  the  brain.  Deficient  development  of 
this  region  produces  delicacy  of  constitution. 

The  stimulation  of  the  organ  of  Nutrition  is  very  important  in  all 
nervous  constitutions.  The  direct  influence  of  the  organ  is  soothing 
and  comfortable;  its  ultimate  effect  overcomes  the  nervous  condi- 
tion which  is  mainly  due  to  a  deficient  supply  of  blood,  a  deficiency 
which  may  be  overcome  by  the  organ  of  Nutrition,  with  the  aid  of 
good  food,  to  which  phosphates,  hypophosphites,  and  a  very  small 
quantity  of  iron  make  an  important  addition,  effecting  the  develop- 
ment of  blood. 

In  the  majority  of  invalids  both  Nutrition  and  Vitality  need  stimu- 
lation, and  the  hand  can  easily  be  applied  so  as  to  cover  both.  One 
may  stimulate  himself  in  these  regions  by  applying  the  hands,  and 
this  application  upon  retiring  at  night  or  before  rising  in  the  morn- 
ing will  have  an  appreciable  effect,  as  I  have  verified  in  my  own  per- 
son, although  one  is  too  much  accustomed  to  his  own  personal  aura 
to  be  as  strongly  affected  by  it  as  by  the  influence  of  another. 

These  localities  on  the  body  explain  the  very  injurious  effects  of  sit- 
ting on  a  cold  stone  or  the  cold,  wet  ground  ;  they  also  explain  the 
sedative  effects  of  a  very  warm  sitz  bath  and  the  energizing  effects 
of  a  cold  sitz  bath  so  conducted  as  to  promote  reaction. 

The  effects  produced  at  the  summit  of  the  thigh  are  satisfactorily 
produced  also  at  the  basis  of  the  brain.  Thus  when  the  hand  grasps 
the  junction  of  the  head  and  neck,  covering  the  base  of  the  cerebel- 
lum, a  most  beneficial,  vitalizing,  and  restorative  influence  is  diffused 
through  the  person,  which  is  increased  by  placing  the  hand  at  the 
summit  of  the  thigh. 

The  region  of  Nutrition  does  not  embrace  all  the  nutrient  func- 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  213 

tions  of  the  constitution.  There  are  three  other  influences  to  be  con- 
sidered—  those  of  digestion,  absorption,  and  tonic  retention  or  resis- 
tance to  dissolution. 

Digestion  depends  upon  the  energy  of  the  stomach,  which  is  sus- 
tained by  the  lower  half  of  the  dorsal  region  of  the  spine,  upon  which 
the  hand  should  be  placed  for  its  invigoration.  In  accordance  with 
the  general  principle  that  power  is  located  posteriorly,  but  excite- 
ment farther  forward,  midway  to  the  front  we  shall  find  the  hungry 
or  digestive  influence  at  the  margin  of  the  ribs  on  the  side,  a  little  in 
front  of  the  middle  line,  and  nearly  on  the  level  of  the  stomach.  This, 
corresponds  with  the  gastric  region  on  the  head,  in  front  of  the  cav- 
ity of  the  ear,  which  is  really  the  organ  of  Alimentiveness,  located 
by  phrenologists  heretofore  higher  than  it  should  be.  In  stimulating 
this  locality  we  assist  and  accelerate  digestion,  producing,  if  contin- 
ued sufficiently  long,  a  feeling  of  hunger.  This  feeling,  the  product 
of  the  Alimentive  organ,  is  more  depressing  than  stimulating,  if  pro- 
longed, and  tends  to  produce  gloomy,  selfish,  and  irritable  feelings. 
Hence  every  one  knows  that  it  is  not  judicious  to  seek  favors  from  any 
one  when  he  is  hungry.  The  explanation  is  that  the  Alimentive  organ 
is  in  the  midst  of  the  group  of  selfish,  gloomy,  and  indolent  feelings. 
Hence,  whenever  it  is  overactive,  whether  from  hunger,  dyspepsia, 
gluttony,  drunkenness,  or  noxious,  nauseous,  or  poisonous  ingesta,  it 
greatly  lowers  the  vital  forces  and  moral  energies.  One  attains  his 
maximum  energy  only  after  the  irritation  of  hunger  is  relieved  by  food, 
and  the  gastric  action  roused  by  the  food  has  subsided,  from  its  diges- 
tion, when  the  buoyant  energy  caused  by  the  addition  of  nourish- 
ment to  the  blood  antagonizes  gastric  action  and  the  stomach  ceases 
to  disturb  us. 

Buoyant  Fortitude  is  the  character  of  the  region  which  antagonizes 
Alimentiveness.  This  is  developed  by  a  state  of  repletion  which 
gives  nourishment  to  the  brain,  as  we  find  after  the  enjoyment  of 
good  food  and  drink.  But  it  is  developed  also  by  the  moral  causes 
which  energize  the  upper  region  of  the  brain.  The  resolute  pur- 
poses of  heroism  in  war  or  struggle  of  any  kind,  and  the  lofty  en- 
thusiasm generated  by  religious,  philanthropic,  patriotic,  loving,  and 
conscientious  emotions,  or  even  the  earnest  application  of  study,  will 
so  energize  the  firm  and  buoyant  regions  of  the  brain,  as  to  arrest 
gastric  action  and  destroy  entirely  the  desire  for  food.  Thus  many 
persons  in  the  zeal  of  study  or  labor  reduce  the  stomach  to  such  in- 
activity as  to  lay  the  foundation  for  dyspepsia. 

Under  great  moral  or  religious  excitement  fasting  is  natural  ;  but 
the  attempt  to  enforce  fasting  as  a  ceremony,  when  it  is  not  prompted 
or  sustained  by  any  religious  or  earnest  emotion,  is  only  another  mode 


214  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

of  irritating  the  stomach  and  increasing  the  amount  of  demoralizing 
animality.  Such  fasting,  however,  harmonizes  well  with  the  gloomy 
theology  which  dwells  upon  the  prospect  of  eternal  misery  for  our 
fellow-beings. 

The  influence  of  the  higher  emotions  in  controlling  the  hungry 
gloom  of  the  stomach  and  sustaining  our  buoyant  vigor  is  explained 
by  Pathognomy,  which  is  the  mathematical  key  to  Anthropology^ 
and  will  require  a  special  volume  for  its  elucidation. 

Pathognomy  illustrates  the  law  of  linear  direction  which  governs  all 
life  in  all  worlds. 

The  pathognomic  direction  of  the  region  of  Firmness,  in  which  it 
nearly  coincides  with  the  whole  moral  region,  is  upwards,  drawing 
vitality  and  circulation  toward  the  brain  and  the  shoulders. 

In  accordance  with  this  influence  the  red  blood  ascends  by  the 
aorta,  the  carotid  and  vertebral  arteries,  to  the  brain,  developing  its 
maximum  power  and  the  power  of  the  spinal  cord  ;  and  the  thoracic 
duct,  starting  from  the  level  of  the  second  lumbar  vertebra,  comes 
upward  for  about  twenty  inches,  carrying  nearly  ripe  blood,  the  chyle, 
to  the  subclavian  vein,  and  thus  removing  the  depression  which  is 
the  cause  of  hunger.  The  chyle  is  thus  carried  up  to  the  corporeal 
region  of  Firmness  and  Fortitude. 

This  strong  volitionary  influence  is  absolutely  essential  to  health. 
Whenever,  through  the  opposite  elements,  fear  and  despair,  this 
upward  influence  is  checked,  the  countenance  becomes  pallid,  the 
brain  has  less  circulation  and  loses  power,  the  features  droop,  the 
person  is  impoverished  in  spite  of  food,  the  thoracic  duct  carries  up 
little  nourishment,  life  withers  away,  and  sometimes  even  the  scalp  is 
so  paralyzed  and  changed  that  the  hair  turns  gray  or  white  from  a 
night  of  terror.  Life  declines  whenever  Firmness  and  Hope  are 
diminished. 

The  hunger  which  belongs  to  the  organ  of  Alimentiveness  is  not 
an  invigorating  impulse  per  se,  being  distinct  from  the  eager  desire 
and  impulse  to  take  food  which  belongs  to  the  posterior  portion  of 
the  brain  on  the  same  level,  and  above  and  on  the  body  is  found  far- 
ther back  and  higher  up.  Hence  in  treating  the  affections  of  the 
stomach,  the  hand  should  be  extended  upward  and  backward  in  the 
direction  of  the  ribs  to  the  lower  dorsal  region  —  the  Alimentive 
location  being  used  more  to  rouse  from  inactivity  than  to  give  vital 
power.  We  may  have  from  the  posterior  influence  a  vigorous 
appetite  without  any  of  the  depressing  feelings  of  hunger,  or  we  may 
have  from  Alimentiveness  the  depression  of  hunger  without  much 
appetite  or  efficient  digestive  capacity.  We  are  far  below  the 
standard  of  health  when  such  a  condition  can  arise,  or  when  any  loss 
of  a  meal  or  irregularity  of  diet  can  produce  much  depression. 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  215 

This  vigorous  desire  or  impulse  to  take  food,  which  our  cerebral 
science  locates  on  the  occiput,  corresponding  with  the  dorsal  region, 
was  detected  by  Ferrier  in  experimenting  on  the  monkey  and  finding 
that  the  ablation  of  the  occipital  region  left  the  animal  indifferent  to 
food. 

The  depression  from  hunger  is  resisted  in  the  region  of  Firmness 
and  Health,  which  should  ever  predominate  over  the  sensibilities  and 
appetites.  The  portion  of  the  firm  region  which  is  on  the  median 
line  (or  sagittal  suture),  vertically  above  the  ear,  and  on  the  shoulder 
adjoining  the  neck,  is  antagonistic  to  the  excitability  of  the  heart  and 
gives  a  feeling  of  fearlessness.  The  portion  about  an  inch  from  the 
median  line  is  antagonistic  to  the  excitability  of  the  liver  and 
stomach,  and  hence  resists  the  hypochondriac  gloom  of  the  hepatic 
region  and  the  debilitating  gloom  of  hunger.  This  buoyant  influence 
we  find  on  the  shoulder,  behind  the  middle  of  the  upper  surface, 
between  the  neck  and  the  acromion  process  or  prominent  angle  of 
the  shoulder.  Hence  this  is  the  region  to  antagonize  hunger  and  the 
gastric  irritation  of  dyspepsia,  which  produce  the  selfish  and  boorish 
ill-humor  so  conspicuous  in  Carlyle,  the  famous  representative  of  the 
moral  tendency  of  gastric  irritability.  But  Carlyle  is  not  the  only 
conspicuous  example  of  literature  empoisoned  by  the  unhealthy  in- 
fluences of  a  diseased  or  depraved  body. 

If  we  stimulate  the  region  of  buoyant  Fortitude  by  the  hand  or  by 
a  plaster,  we  relieve  the  gastric  irritation,  but  there  may  be  materials 
—  vitiated  secretions  or  undigested  food  —  which  maintain  the  irrita- 
tion, and  which,  to  facilitate  our  success,  should  be  overcome  medi- 
cally, as  by  an  emetic  or  a  peptic  anodyne.  A  simple  emetic  of 
warm  water,  which  may  be  made  more  effectual  by  adding  one  or  two 
teaspoonfuls  of  the  tincture  of  lobelia,  or  ipecac,  and  at  the  same 
time  more  soothing  by  stirring  in  enough  of  slippery  elm  to  make 
it  mucilaginous,  will  unload  the  stomach  in  a  healthy  manner.  Milk 
will  answer  for  the  same  purpose.  An  extemporaneous  emetic  is 
frequently  prepared  by  adding  mustard  and  salt  to  a  glass  of  warm 
water. 

Soothing  and  antiseptic  agencies  may  be  used  to  control  the  con- 
tents of  the  alimentary  canal,  or  to  soothe  and  protect  the  stomach 
after  they  are  ejected.  For  the  soothing  and  removal  of  irritation* 
one  of  the  best  articles  is  the  Scrophularia  nodosa,  or  fig-wort  —an 
article  the  U.  S.  Dispensatory  says  is  ''very  little  used,"  and  the 
gastric  virtue  of  which  seems  to  be  entirely  unknown  to  the  medical 
profession.  Half  a  teaspoonful  of  the  fluid  extract  may  be  repeated 
hourly  until  relief  is  given.  Ten  or  twenty  grains  of  the  bisulphite  of 
lime  or  bisulphite  of  soda  in  a  cup  of  water  will  counteract  decompos- 
ing or  fermenting  conditions. 


2l6  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

If  acid  be  present,  ten  or  twenty  grains  of  calcined  magnesia,  bi- 
carbonate of  potassa,  or  bicarbonate  of  soda  in  solution  will  serve  to 
neutralize  it,  or  it  may  be  neutralized  by  milk. 

It  will  be  expedient  to  accelerate  the  restoration  of  a  feeble  stom- 
ach by  twenty-drop  doses  of  the  fluid  extract  of  Alnus  rubra  (or  tag 
alder)  with  which  the  scrophularia  would  favorably  co-operate  in  con- 
trolling irritations.  Ten  or  fifteen  drops  of  the  tincture  of  angelica, 
repeated  if  necessary,  will  make  an  efficient  gastric  stimulant.  I  have 
made  a  preparation  of  the  flowers  of  the  dandelion  {Leoutodon  tarax- 
acuni)  which  I  find  an  admirable  assistant  to  digestion.  The  very 
pleasant  liquid  preparations  of  Lactopeptin  by  the  New  York  Pharma- 
cal  Company  make  an  admirable  assistant  to  feeble  digestive  powers. 
Medical  treatment  is  not  within  the  scope  of  this  volume,  but  I  think 
that  an  enlightened  healer  should  beware  of  the  narrowness  of  mind 
which  confines  itself  to  a  favorite  class  of  agencies,  and  should  master 
as  far  as  practicable  the  vast  and  powerful  resources  of  the  materia 
medica,  with  which  be  can  expedite  and  complete  his  cures,  and  do 
justice  to  a  class  of  patients  who  cannot  afford  to  pay  for  protracted 
nervauric  treatment.  Hence  I  make  a  few  suggestions  of  medical 
remedies. 

Gastric  troubles  may  be  truly  dyspeptic  from  the  irritation  of  the 
nerves  and  concentration  of  excitement  at  the  stomach,  or  they  may 
be  apeptic  from  the  lack  of  action  in  the  stomach.  In  the  latter  case 
the  Alimentive  region  may  be  excited  on  the  body  and  on  the 
head  ;  but  in  the  former  case  some  dispersive  passes  are  necessary  to 
remove  irritation,  and  the  regions  of  Fortitude  and  Health  should  be 
excited  to  suppress  the  gastric  trouble,  while  the  lower  dorsal  region 
is  used  to  give  gastric  vitality. 

In  addition  to  the  regions  of  nutrition  and  gastric  energy,  a  proper 
nourishment  requires  the  process  of  assimilative  absorption,  for  want 
of  which  digestion  fails  in  its  purpose  and  Nutrition  has  but  an  im- 
perfect supply  of  material.  The  region  of  Assimilative  Absorption 
on  the  body  is  immediately  around  and  above  the  umbilicus.  The 
application  of  the  hand  at  this  locality  produces  the  tranquil  feeling, 
favorable  to  rest  and  sleep,  which  belongs  to  assimilation.  In  apply- 
in0"  the  hand  here  we  cover  the  absorbent  region  or  mesenterv  and 
the  course  of  the  absorbents  to  the  origin  of  the  thoracic  duct,  the 
common  receptacle  of  chyle  at  the  second  lumbar  vertebra  ;  also  the 
jejunum,  the  chief  source  of  the  digestive  supply  of  chyle,  the  duode- 
num, pancreas,  colon,  and  lower  portion  of  the  stomach.  The  energy 
of  this  region,  with  its  hundred  and  fifty  mesenteric  or  absorbent 
glands,  effects  the  final  preparation  of  the  chyle  and  its  propulsion  on 
its  upward  course  to  join  the  mass  of  our  blood  through  the  subcla- 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  217 

vian  veins  which  convey  it  to  the  right  side  of  the  heart  to  pass 
through  the  lungs  before  it  mingles  in  the  general  circulation. 

It  is  obvious  therefore  that  a  failure  in  assimilative  absorption 
would  interfere  with  the  results  of  digestion  and  nutrition.  In 
many  cases,  no  doubt,  this  failure  of  assimilation  is  due  to  the  failure 
in  the  moral  forces,  or  mental  depression.  There  is  a  tendency 
to  emaciation  and  degeneracy  in  inferior  characters.  Criminals  are 
generally  of  an  inferior  physique.  Dramatists  contrast  the  lean  and 
hungry  conspirator  with  the  good-natured,  plump,  and  contented 
citizen,  x^miability  promotes  nutrition  by  assimilation.  "  Laugh 
and  grow  fat  "  is  an  old  saying.  Amiable  and  contented  animals 
fatten  easily,  and  give  milk  abundantly,  while  the  fierce  carnivora  are 
remarkably  lean. 

Thus  we  see  there  is  a  close  association  between  the  amiable 
elements  which  cause  us  to  love  and  assimilate  with  all  nature,  and 
the  physiological  powers  which  assimilate  and  accept  the  material 
that  is  brought  us.  The  assimilative  is  in  fact  an  amiable  region,  and 
has  an  amiable  influence  upon  the  character  while  it  is  operative. 
The  upper  half  of  the  abdomen  is  an  amiable  region,  for  the  entire 
abdominal  surface  corresponds  with  that  of  the  face  —  the  region  of 
expression.  The  upper  half  corresponds  with  the  upper  portion  of 
the  face,  lying  above  the  angles  of  the  mouth,  and  the  lower  half 
corresponding  with  the  lower  half  of  the  face,  which  expresses  the 
lower  half  of  the  brain,  associated  with  lower  impulses.  The  region 
immediately  adjacent  to  and  above  Assimilation  is  one  of  amiable  im- 
pressibility and  yielding  sympathy,*  which  as  we  pass  upward  merges 
into  that  of  somnolent,  somnambulic,  sympathetic,  psychometric,  and 
clairvoyant  conditions,  of  which  there  is  abundant  evidence  in  the 
records  of  animal  magnetism,  which  prove  the  possibility  of  clairvoy- 
ance from  the  epigastric  region. 

The  region  of  Assimilation  therefore  must  not  be  overlooked  in 
treating  the  general  constitution  and  the  digestive  functions.  It  pro- 
motes impressibility,  amiability,  and  healthful  repose,  bringing  the 
subject  more  fully  under  control,  into  sympathy  with  the  operator, 
and  promoting  restoration  by  nourishment,  for  which  purpose  the 
patient  should  be  in  the  horizontal  position,  lying  on  his  back,  when 
this  region  is  exerted,  to  facilitate  the  progress  of  the  chyle  in  the 
thoracic  duct  by  a  horizontal  instead  of  a  vertical  course.  The  appli- 
cation of  the  hand  from  the  end  of  the  sternum  to  the  umbilicus  is 
one  of  our  most  soothing  and  beneficial  operations. 

*  This  is,  no  doubt,  the  foundation  of  the  old  scriptural  expression,  "bowels  of 
compassion."  The  seers  intuitively  felt  that  there  were  tender  feelings  in  the 
gastro  umbilical  region. 


2l8  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

The  assimilative  tract  is  one  of  healthful  tendencies.  The  ilium 
with  its  Peyer's  glands  is  frequently  involved  in  disease,  not  only  in 
fevers  but  in  consumption  and  in  cholera.  Disease  is  less  frequent 
in  the  duodenum  and  jejunum.  Brunner's  glands  in  the  jejunum  are 
remarkably  free  from  disease. 

Hence  the  absorbent  region  is  very  appropriate  for  stimulation,  and 
does  not  so  frequently  require  dispersive  manipulation  as  the  region 
below  the  umbilicus. 

It  is  probable  that  the  assimilative  or  umbilical  region  has  more 
extensive  relations  to  psychic  life  than  those  involved  in  the  absorp- 
tion of  chyle.  The  umbilical  region  is  the  seat  of  the  original  mys- 
terious influx  of  life  through  the  womb,  which  is  the  connection  with 
our  ancestry.  This  changes  after  birth  into  absorption  from  nature, 
instead  of  absorption  from  the  maternal  constitution.  It  is  along  the 
umbilical  chain  that  we  trace  the  continuity  of  the  human  race  back 
into  the  darkness  of  the  uncounted  ages,  in  which  by  influx  and  evo- 
lution man  has  been  brought  to  his  present  condition, —  the  process 
of  gestation  being  probably  a  surviving  type  or  analogue  of  the  crea- 
tive evolutionary  process  of  the  over  soul  of  the  universe. 

I  regard  the  umbilical  or  assimilative  region  as  having  in  the  brain 
and  soul  important  spiritual  functions  and  relations,  especially  as 
to  personal  sympathy,  attachment,  and  spiritual  influences,  but  at 
present  we  are  considering  merely  its  relations  to  nutrition,  develop- 
ment, and  health.  The  associative  faculties  which  establish  the  most 
intimate  sympathy  and  union  between  any  two  persons  lie  along  the 
median  line. 

The  mouth,  which  corresponds  to  the  umbilicus,  is,  like  the  latter,  a 
channel  for  the  influx  of  developing  nourishment  and  also  of  oxygen, 
and  as  the  umbilicus  is  the  link  of  intimate  union  between  mother 
and  child,  the  channel  of  absolute  sympathy  and  love,  the  strongest 
love  that  is  known,  so  is  the  mouth  the  organ  that  expresses  our 
attachment  in  the  kiss.  The  kiss  is  the  full  expression  of  conjugal 
love,  and  may  be  a  very  efficient  means  in  nervauric  healing.  Some 
are  accustomed  to  impart  their  healing  power  by  breathing  upon  the 
affected  part.  I  believe  they  are  not  mistaken,  as  the  breath  comes 
from  a  beneficent  region  of  the  body,  notwithstanding  the  assertion 
of  Brown-Sequard  that  it  conveys  an  element  which  is  toxic  in 
hypodermic  injection.  The  contact  of  the  lips  is  a  healing  agency. 
The  dog  for  a  similar  purpose  uses  his  tongue  ;  but  no  such  measures 
can  be  compared  for  beneficent  effect  to  the  influence  which  pro- 
ceeds from  the  top  of  the  head. 

Besides  Nutrition,  Digestion,  and  Assimilation,  there  is  yet  another 
important  influence  on  human  development — that  which  consolidates 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  219 

and  holds  together  the  materials  gathered  in  by  digestion  and  assimi- 
lation, and  precipitated  by  Nutrition.  That  influence  we  find  in  the 
back  —  in  the  region  antagonistic  to  the  intellect. 

To  understand  this  philosophically  we  must  know  that  the  intel- 
lectual faculties  tend  to  carry  man  out  of  himself  and  destroy  his  in- 
dividuality by  merging  his  consciousness  in  his  environment,  or  in 
the  thoughts  of  others.  When  they  plunge  his  mind  into  his  physi- 
cal environment  by  perception  and  sensation,  they  lower  his  nature 
more  effectually  than  when  they  carry  him  into  the  sphere  of  spirit- 
ual truth  and  philosophy.  But  they  necessarily  impair  his  physical 
energy,  weaken  his  desires,  unfit  him  for  achievement,  and  relax  both 
physical  and  mental  fibre,  in  proportion  to  their  predominance,  which 
has  very  different  effects  from  mere  activity.* 

The  impairment  of  vital  force  by  intellectual  predominance  renders 
the  tissues  softer  and  less  compact,  more  inclined  to  disintegration, 
and  less  capable  of  sustaining  a  robust  manhood  :  such  is  the  effect  of 
excessive  schooling. 

We  must,  then,  rely  upon  the  influences  antagonistic  to  intellect 
for  the  preservation  of  vital  force  and  compactness.  The  discovery 
of  these  influences  v.  as  a  revolution  in  Psychology.  They  belong  to 
that  portion  of  the  or  :iput  which  antagonizes  the  organs  of  the  fore- 
head, and,  as  to  the  body,  they  are  found  upon  the  middle  of  the 
back,  below  the  shoulder  blades.  They  may  be  distinguished  as  the 
Adhesive  Group  —  the  group  of  organs  of  which  Adhesiveness  is  the 
centre  —  organs  which  desire  to  keep  everything  fixed,  as  the  intel- 
lect desires  change  or  progress. 

The  Adhesive  region,  a  region  of  desire  and  impulse,  is  interested 
in  that  which  is  personal  to  ourselves,  local  and  limited  —  the  intel- 
lectual in  that  which  is  impersonal  and  unlimited.  The  intellectual 
region  is  interested  in  all  humanity  alike  —  the  Adhesive  region  in 
our  friends  alone.  The  intellectual  region  avoids  action,  enterprise, 
and  responsibility,  it  is  at  home  in  solitude  —  the  Adhesive  region 
seeks  to  be  actively  engaged  in  the  midst  of  society  and  exerting  an 
influence.  The  intellectual  region  produces  delicacy,  sensibility,  and 
inactivity  —  the  Adhesive  region  produces  impulsive  energy  and 
ability  to  interest  others.  The  one  is  passionless  and  feeble  —  the 
other  highly  emotional  and  strong.  One  is  exhausted  and  broken 
down  by  social  responsibility  —  the  other  is  spontaneously  energetic, 
will  not  endure  solitude,  and  continually  gains  power  or  influence  in 

#  *  Some  of  my  reflective  readers  may  doubt  whether  the  intellectual  organs  have 
this  debilitating  effect,  because  they  associate  intellectual  action  with  the  energies 
of  character  that  impel  it,  but  mere  intellectual  action  is  of  a  passive  nature,  as 
when  we  are  listening  to  a  teacher. 


220  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

society.  One  develops  in  solitude,  the  other  in  stirring  life.  One 
exhausts  and  emaciates  in  action,  the  other  grows  and  strengthens. 

The  latter  is  the  tonic  and  vitalizing  element  which  resists  the  dis- 
integration of  the  body  by  exertion  and  by  fever.  It  is  the  element 
to  which  quinine  and  other  cinchona  preparations  appeal,  in  opposing 
the  decomposition  of  fever,  in  doing  which  they  resist  the  intellec- 
tual element  so  effectually  as  sometimes  to  impair  the  hearing,  the 
memory,  and  the  vision. 

This  stirring,  active  power  holds  every  faculty  ready  for  social 
relations  and  thus  gives  an  attractive  vitality  to  the  whole  person  — 
a  tonicity  which  resists  exhaustive  and  malign  impressions.  The 
word  adhesiveness  expresses  the  physical  as  well  as  spiritual  char- 
acter of  the  faculty.  It  resists  the  waste  of  our  physiological  and 
spiritual  elements,  as  Acquisitiveness  resists  the  waste  of  our  prop- 
erty. Hence  it  gives  compactness  to  the  person,  and,  by  retaining 
the  organized  elements  longer  in  the  body,  brings  them  to  a  higher 
vitality  and  perfection.  Thus  it  becomes  the  tonic  supporter  of  the 
physical  development,  giving  to  the  character  and  the  person  the 
qualities  that  are  interesting  or  attractive. 

Hence  we  find  it  desirable  to  stimulate  the  Adhesive  region  to 
perfect  the  nutrient  processes  and  enhance  vitality.  This  region  we 
find  on  the  lateral  part  of  the  occiput,  above  and  behind  the  ear,  and 
on  the  body  below  the  shoulder  blades,  occupying  nearly  two  hand's 
breadths  downward.  Adhesiveness  is  the  social  or  gregarious  faculty, 
and  social  gatherings  prompt  to  feasting  and  drinking. 

Lower  upon  the  occiput  and  upon  the  back  we  find  the  still  more 
energetic  and  tonic  element  of  Combativeness,  which  gives  great 
energy  to  the  muscular  system,  but  which  tends  to  give  the  muscular 
system  a  predominance  over  the  cerebral,  and  the  evil  passions  over 
the  friendly  emotions.  From  Adhesiveness  upward  on  the  shoulder 
the  influence  becomes  more  pleasant,  tending  to  give  the  brain  and 
moral  nature  a  predominance  over  muscular  growth  and  physical 
force. 

Adhesiveness,  lying  between  the  two,  assists  both  the  moral  and 
physical  forces,  as  we  see  it  in  women  sustaining  the  family  relations 
and  in  men  sustaining  personal  attachments,  gregarious  life,  national 
unity,  and  co-operation  in  war,  as  well  as  sectarian  and  partisan  co- 
operation in  peace. 

The  many  important  influences  of  the  Adhesive  region  should 
teach  us  the  importance  of  rousing  it  in  our  patients,  not  only  by 
nervauric  treatment  but  by  social  enjoyment.  The  loss  of  society 
greatly  impairs  the  vigor  of  the  constitution,  especially  in  those  who 
are  very  adhesive.     Solitary  confinement  is  a  cruel  and  depressing 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  221 

punishment,  and  an  enforced  solitary  life,  or  life  without  friends, 
impairs  the  general  energy  and  even  the  vigor  of  the  digestive 
organs.  The  indulgence  of  the  social  impulses,  whether  in  amuse- 
ments or  otherwise,  is  the  restorative  power  which  many  need  to 
revive  their  health  ;  and  it  is  the  rupture  of  the  social  attachments 
which  so  often  breaks  down  the  vigor  and  usefulness  of  young  sol- 
diers, bringing  on  what  is  called  nostalgia  or  homesickness.  Disap- 
pointments in  love  leave  similar  effects  on  women,  lowering  vitality 
and  impairing  the  action  of  the  heart.  Grief  for  the  loss  of  friends 
and  members  of  the  family  circle  often  breaks  down  the  health  of 
mothers.  When  health  is  thus  impaired  we  should  offer  the  balm  of 
our  sympathetic  interest  and  seek  to  interest  the  sufferer  in  new 
social  attractions.  All  the  excitements  of  active  life  —  business, 
travel,  and  social  pleasure  —  address  Adhesiveness :  hence  their  restor- 
ative power.  The  relation  of  Adhesiveness  to  society  and  business  is 
that  of  a  steady  motor  power  and  tonic,  preventing  us  from  being 
discouraged  or  indifferent,  and  contributing  material  assistance  to 
the  unconscious  processes  of  organic  life.  It  is  a  great  fountain  of 
spontaneous  impulse. 

The  fulness  and  rotundity  of  the  back  are  important  to  the  strength 
and  retentiveness  of  the  constitution.  The  rounded  back,  which  is 
more  conspicuous  in  the  hog  than  the  ox,  and  which  reaches  its 
maximum  in  the  camel  and  dromedary,  is  associated  with  greater 
retentiveness  and  ability  to  sustain  life  upon  smaller  quantities  of 
food. 

The  location  of  Adhesiveness  on  the  back  is  on  the  lines  of 
nerve  distribution  from  the  lower  dorsal  region,  which,  as  already 
explained,  controls  the  digestion  and  assimilation  of  food  internally 
by  the  ganglionic  nerves,  while  it  braces  the  abdomen  by  the 
abdominal  muscles,  and  thus  not  only  assists  by  mechanical  pro- 
pulsion the  processes  of  digestion  and  assimilation,  but  braces  the 
trunk  by  the  action  of  these  muscles,  as  it  must  be  braced  for  any 
vigorous  exertion.  The  compression  of  the  abdominal  viscera  and 
expulsion  of  the  dark  venous  blood  contained  greatly  increase  the 
general  energy. 

Thus  does  the  Adhesive  region  carry  out  its  energizing  influ- 
ence and  its  attractive  and  assimilative  nature,  which  gives  to  the 
adhesive  the  power  of  attracting  and  interesting  friends  —  the 
quality  which  is  called  magnetism  from  its  analogy  to  the  action  of 
the  magnet. 

We  now  perceive  that  the  Adhesive  region  or  middle  of  the  back 
should  not  be  overlooked  in  nervauric  treatment.  It  extends  across 
the  back  behind  the  arms    on  the    level  of  the    lower    half   of   the 


222  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

humerus  (upper  arm),  or  in  other  words  below  the  shoulder  blade. 
Its  middle  portion,  along  the  spinal  column,  has  a  more  positively 
energetic  and  muscular  influence,  sustaining  general  activity,  and 
may  be  properly  called  the  region  of  Business  Energy,  which  sustains 
an  active  life.  These  explanations  make  it  apparent  that  affections 
of  the  lower  dorsal  region  must  impair  the  digestive  powers  and 
the  general  energy  —  the  blind  energies  of  the  animal  nature  opposed 
to  the  intellectual.  Hence  injuries  impairing  the  spinal  power,  which 
disqualify  for  active  life,  are  frequently  accompanied  by  a  predominance 
of  the  intellectual  faculties  — by  wakefulness,  clairvoyance,  somnam- 
bulism, and  spiritual  phenomena,  as  in  the  famous  case  of  Mollie 
Fancher,  of  Brooklyn  ;  while  on  the  other  hand  an  overload  of  food, 
which  taxes  the  dorsal  region,  interferes  very  seriously  with  intellec- 
tual action  and  energy,  and  the  soundest  sleep  is  obtained  by  resting 
on  the  back  so  as  to  keep  the  Adhesive  region  warm. 

It  is  now  apparent  that  the  Vital  Force  and  Nutrition  at  the 
posterior  summit  of  the  thigh  co-operate  with  Business  Energy,  Ad- 
hesiveness, Alimentiveness,  and  Assimilation  in  the  middle  of  the 
trunk,  and  that  all  are  needed  in  restoring  the  invalid. 

The  tonic  character  of  Adhesiveness  as  a  conservative  and  retentive 
power,  alike  in  physiology  and  psychology,  is  illustrated  by  its  imme- 
diate proximity  to  the  region  of  Coolness,  just  behind  the  arm  on  the 
side  of  the  chest.  Coolness  is  pre-eminently  the  conservative  influence 
which  forbids  decomposition  and  combustion.  Cold  is  antiseptic  as 
heat  is  putrefactive  in  tendency.  Coolness  produces  muscular  firm- 
ness, as  heat  produces  muscular  relaxation.  The  calorific  region  of 
the  body  is  that  of  dead,  decomposed  matter  —  the  hypogastric 
region. 

The  Adhesive,  associated  with  the  lower  dorsal  region,  presides 
over  the  inception  and  preservation  of  dead  substance,  for  vital  pur- 
poses, by  the  stomach  and  absorbents.  The  secretion  of  the  stomach 
is  acid  and  pre-eminently  antiseptic,  while  the  lower  intestines  have 
the  alkaline  condition  which  is  favorable  to  decomposition.  Their 
inflammation  produces  the  maximum  of  fever,  but  the  inflammation 
of  the  stomach  has  so  little  febrile  intensity  that  the  pulse  is  very 
feeble  and  the  limbs  dry  and  husky.  Thus  the  stomach  is  associated 
with  the  superior  half  of  the  brain,  which  is  cool  and  conservative, 
and  it  manifests  this  conservative  character  chiefly  when  Adhesive- 
ness is  well  developed. 

The  Adhesive  region  (at  the  waist),  which  we  have  considered  in 
its  conservative,  tonic,  and  anti-intellectual  character,  attains  its  maxi- 
mum antagonism  to  the  intellect  adjacent  to  Coolness,  behind  the 
arm,  where  it  antagonizes  Consciousness,  the  vital  centre  of  intelli- 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  223 

gence  (in  the  centre  of  the  forehead),  and  thus  suppresses  all  in- 
tellectual action  and  enables  us  to  recover  from  the  exhaustive 
influence  of  continued  consciousness  or  intense  thought. 

This  is  a  restorative  influence  needed  for  about  one  third  of  every 
twenty-four  hours,  and  is  therefore  of  the  highest  importance  to 
health  and  the  vigor  of  the  nervous  system.  Hence  the  production  of 
sleep  is  a  very  important  part  of  nervauric  treatment. 

To  produce  sleep  by  operations  upon  the  brain  and  body  we  should 
be  guided  by  a  correct  organology.  Sleep  is  a  condition  of  diminished 
circulation  and  activity  in  the  brain.  The  greater  portion  of  the 
cerebral  organs  and  faculties  tend  to  develop  increased  activity,  while 
other  organs  associated  with  animal  life  tend  to  diminish  mental 
activity  and  sustain  quiet  physiological  processes  The  superior- 
organs  give  predominance  to  the  action  of  the  brain,  and  the  basilar 
give  an  energy  to  the  body  which  causes  a  very  active  circulation  by 
increased  energy  of  the  heart  and  the  respiration  But  there  are 
special  functions,  not  related  to  the  active  muscular  system,  which 
moderate  all  these  activities,  and  it  is  as  necessary  that  we  should 
have  the  power  of  arresting  our  activities,  which  would  exhaust  and 
destroy,  as  to  have  the  power  of  using  them.  This  is  effected  by  the 
visceral  and  nutritive  system  of  the  body  and  its  controlling  organs 
in  the  brain. 

The  regions  of  Patience  and  Tranquillity  tend  to  arrest  all  active 
basilar  excitement,  producing  quietness  in  the  muscular  system,  cir- 
culation, and  respiration,  and  a  serene  but  not  somnolent  condition  of 
the  mind.  Hence,  to  touch  these  regions  on  the  head  or  body  is  an 
excellent  preparation  for  inducing  sleep,  as  it  quiets  the  muscular 
system.  On  the  body,  Patience  is  found  at  the  upper  surface  of  the 
shoulders,  at  their  junction  with  the  neck,  and  Tranquillity  on  the  chest, 
a  little  below  the  axilla.  The  comfortable  repose  produced  by  these 
faculties  is  not  sleep,  though  favorable  to  rest  and  restoration.  The 
activity  of  the  brain  needs  to  be  still  more  lowered,  and  this  is  accom- 
plished by  the  tibial  region  and  the  foot — the  former,  which  reduces 
respiration,  reducing  mentality  to  its  lowest  grade,  and  the  latter  to 
entire  extinction.  The  tibial  influence  (corresponding  to  the  life  of 
the  cold-blooded  animal)  is  favorable  to  nutrition  and  animal  life  and 
unfavorable  to  fever  and  inflammation.  Hence  it  is  peculiarly  valu- 
able when  feverish  or  inflammatory  conditions  exist.  The  cerebral 
activity  is  reduced  lower  by  the  upper  surface  of  the  foot,  and  to 
its  lowest  or  comatose  condition  by  the  bottom  of  the  foot.  Hence  the 
foot  is  very  effective  in  overcoming  the  most  excited  conditions  of 
the  brain,  and  the  warm  foot-bath  is  a  great  relief  to  the  head  in 
fever. 


224  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  [CHAP.    XII. 

But  the  hygienic  purpose  of  sleep  is  not  fully  accomplished  by 
these  measures.  Its  beneficial  effects  come  not  only  from  repose  and 
cessation  of  waste,  but  from  assimilation  and  excretion.  Hence  we 
need  for  perfect  sleep  a  faculty  that  will  sustain  the  assimilation  and 
excretion.  The  organ  for  this  is  the  true  central  organ  of  Sleep, 
lying  in  the  brain  above  and  behind  the  ear,  in  antagonism  to  Con- 
sciousness or  intellectual  wakefulness,  which  it  tends  to  suppress,  and 
on  the  chest  behind  the  middle  of  the  arm,  a  little  lower  than  the  tips 
of  the  shoulder  blades.  Its  action  in  the  brain  is  intelligible,  as  it 
tends  to  restrain  and  suspend  intellectual  action  (the  entire  suspen- 
sion of  which  is  sleep)  and  to  diminish  Calorification  and  Respira- 
tion, being  adjacent  to  Coolness.  Its  close  connection  with  Adhe- 
siveness and  proximity  to  the  cautious  region  indicate  quietness 
and  assimilation,  for  Adhesiveness  is  an  assimilative  faculty.  Its 
occipital  position  also  gives  it  a  moderately  tonic  character. 

On  the  body  this  is  more  clearly  illustrated,  as  it  is  located  on  the 
space  between  the  lower  dorsal  ganglia,  which  supply  by  their 
branches  the  abdominal  system,  and  the  great  solar  and  semilunar 
plexus  or  general  controller  of  the  abdominal  functions.  Hence  it 
tends  to  give  them  a  predominance  in  their  vital  character  of  absolute 
indolence,  in  which  the  visceral  system  is  opposed  to  the  muscular. 
In  this  condition,  the  muscular  system  of  animal  life  being  relaxed, 
the  action  of  the  heart  would  be  materially  reduced  and  the  circulation 
moderated.  Hence  digestion  and  assimilation  would  be  more  active 
than  other  functions,  but  would  proceed  slowly,  yet  in  the  absence  of 
wasteful  activities  would  restore  and  nourish  the  organs,  and  remove 
the  accumulation  of  waste  material,  thus  producing  the  sound,  normal 
condition  of  the  organs,  and  the  pure,  fresh  condition  of  the  blood, 
which  give  us  the  buoyant  condition  of  the  first  hours  of  the  morning. 
The  absorption  of  oxygen  during  sleep  being  greater  than  its  con- 
sumption by  vital  action  brings  the  blood  to  its  best  condition. 

These  are  the  essential  conditions  of  restorative  sleep  produced  by 
the  organ  of  Repose  and  assisted  by  Patience  and  Tranquillity,  which 
serve  to  remove  all  excitement,  and  by  the  leg  and  foot,  which  lower 
cerebral  activity  and  counteract  feverish  or  inflammatory  conditions 
even  more  effectively  than  Repose.  Warmth  and  circulation  in  the 
lower  limbs  are  necessary  to  Sleep. 

As  the  region  of  Repose  produces  its  effects  through  the  solar 
plexus  and  abdominal  action,  it  is  assisted  by  the  regions  of  Somno- 
lence and  Assimilation,  which  extend  on  the  abdomen  below  the 
sternum  and  thus  correspond  with  the  plexus.  Hence  the  application 
of  a  hand  on  the  abdomen,  extending  -jpward  from  the  umbilicus,  is 
valuable  as  an  adjunct  to  Repose,  especially  to  precede  it.     On  the 


CHAP.    XII.]  THE    OCCIPITAL    ENERGIES.  225 

head  we  may  easily  apply  the  thumb  on   Repose   and   the  fingers  on 
Somnolence. 

Sleep  also  depends  upon  the  relative  activity  of  Energy  and  Relaxa- 
tion. The  former  rouses  the  whole  brain  to  an  activity  incompatible 
with  sleep,  and  those  in  whom  it  predominates  greatly  are  naturally 
wakeful  and  require  less  sleep  than  others.  Relaxation,  the  source  of 
indolence,  makes  us  desire  rest  and  take  pleasure  in  the  couch.  Relax- 
ation is  a  central  abdominal  locality,  and  all  strong  abdominal  action 
such  as  follows  gluttonous  indulgence  produces  indolent  relaxation. 
Hence  a  substantial  supper  with  liberal  use  of  fluids  promotes  sleep. 
For  the  opposite  reason  a  dry,  cold,  bracing  atmosphere  makes  the 
nervous  system  too  active  for  sleep,  which  a  warm,  humid  atmosphere 
promotes. 

Finally,  the  functions  promotive  of  sleep  are  Somnolence,  Repose,  r 
Relaxation,  Lethargy,  Nutrition,  the  aquatic  influence  of  the  tibia,  and 
the  vegetal  and  mineral  influences  of  the  foot  (the  cephalic  control  of 
which  is  reached  through  the  neck)  — all  of  which  may  be  requisite 
in  cases  of  insomnia,  and  all  of  which  assist  the  predominance  of  vis- 
ceral organic  life  over  active  animal  life. 

These  soporific  influences  are  happily  imitated  by  the  new  remedy 
sulfonal,  the  least  objectionable  of  all  soporific  medicines.  When 
sleep  is  hindered  by  over-excitement  or  excitability,  the  most  efficient 
sedative  is  the  Xanthiiun  spinosum,  a  remedy  highly  successful  in 
hydrophobia.  Cochineal  and  the  extract  of  lettuce,  lactucariam,  are 
also  valuable  as  mild  hypnotics. 

There  is  a  restless  excitability  at  the  knee  which  often  interferes 
with  sleep,  which  should  be  allayed  by  dispersive  passes  toward  the 
foot.  A  similar  effect  may  be  attained  by  a  net  pack  around  the 
knee  or  including  the  leg  and  foot,  not  allowed  to  evaporate, 


/0 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

THE  ABDOMINAL  AND  CRURAL  REGIONS. 

The  Gastro-enteric  region,  its  locations  and  treatment  —  The  anti-abdominal  or 
tonic  (and  the  atonic)  region — Its  accurate  demonstration  and  location  by  Euro- 
pean physiologists  subsequent  to  my  discoveries  —  The  brain  convolutions  that  it 
occupies  shown  in  engraving — Its  psychic  functions  —  Debilitating  influences  of 
abdominal  region  —  Philosophy  of  Intemperance  —  Its  medical  and  electric 
treatment  —  Illustrative  experiments  —  Organ  of  intoxication  discovered  —  Remedies 
for  gastric  derangements  —  Philosophy  of  absorbent  and  repellent  functions  — 
Modes  of  treatment. 

Abdominal  Locations — i,  Epigastric  region  —  2,  Assimilation — 3,  Respira- 
tion—4,  Calorification  — 5,  Excitability  — 6,  Lethargy  — 7,  Sexuality— 8.  Melan- 
choly—9,  Selfishness  — 10,  Irritability" — 11,  Abdominal  functions  from  digestion 
to  defecation— 12,  Disease— 13,  Expression— Philosophy  of  Calorification  and  Cool- 
ness—The lower  limbs— The  thigh,  Locomotion.  Nutrition,  Turbulence  — The  leg, 
its  relation  to  evolution  —  Fanciful  notions  of  a  microcosm —  Range  of  forces  in  the 
genesis  of  man,  mineral,  vegetal,  animal,  radiata,  mollusca,  vertebrata,  aquatic, 
aerial,  mammalian  —  Locations  of  animal  life  on  leg,  its  application  to  physiologv 
and  therapeutics  —  Suppression  of  inflammation,  pneumonia,  and  fever,  and"  control 
of  all  vital  functions  by  Hsemospasia. 


The  Gastro-enteric  region,  controlling  the  alimentary  canal,  is 
located  in  the  brain  at  the  base  of  the  middle  lobe,  running  inward 
along  the  base  of  the  petrous  ridge  of  the  temporal  bone,  and  is 
reached  from  the  surface  along  the  course  of  the  lower  jaw,  from  its 
insertion  in  the  glenoid  cavity  downward  to  about  midway  between 
its  posterior  angle  and  the  centre  of  the  chin. 

The  corresponding  tract  on  the  body  extends  downward  and  for- 
ward from  the  margin  of  the  ribs  to  a  point  midway  between  the 
umbilicus  and  the  inguinal  depression  or  angle  between  the  thigh 
and  the  abdomen.  Along  this  tract  the  alimentary  canal  may  be 
controlled.  At  its  upper  end  wre  rouse  the  activity  of  the  stomach, 
and  as  we  descend  we  act  upon  lower  portions,  the  lowest  being  effi- 
cient in  promoting  evacuation  of  the  bowels.  Constipation  is  over- 
come on  this  tract  by  downward  manipulation  and  vigorous  action  at 
its  lower  extremity.  Hence  a  great  deal  of  the  massage  blindly 
applied  upon  the  bowels  has  been  successful.  The  most  effective 
manipulation  follows  the  course  of  the  colon,  ascending  on  the  right 
side,  crossing,  and  descending  on  the  left. 

In  irritations,  such  as  those  of  diarrhoea,  cholera,  dysentery,  and 
colic,  dispersive  passes  backward  and  upward  should  be  made  with 
energy,  and  a  general  stimulation   along   the  spine.     The  complete 


CHAP.    XIII.]        THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  227 

control  over  such  conditions  is  effected  on  the  top  of  the  shoulder, 
and  on  its  upper  posterior  aspect.  The  anti-abdominal  region,  which 
tends  most  strongly  to  suspend  all  abdominal  action,  lies  on  the  upper 
surface  of  the  head  immediately  behind,  adjacent,  and  parallel  to  the 
organ  of  Integrity,  in  a  line  from  the  anterior  part  of  Firmness,  ter- 
minating at  the  posterior  part  of  Sanity,  a  region  marked  on  the 
psychic  bust  as  Fortitude,  Energy,  and  Cheerfulness,  terminating  at 
the  prominent  centre  of  the  parietal  bone. 

The  tonic  or  anti-abdominal  region  of  the  brain,  which  rouses  the 
muscular  energies,  is  not  strictly  confined  to  the  space  just  mentioned, 
but  on  a  well-developed  head  occupies  a 
territory  about  two  inches  wide  on  the 
temporal  arch,  running  to  the  median  line, 
where  it  occupies  about  three  inches  an- 
tero-posteriorly.  In  the  engraving  this  is 
marked  T,  and  the  opposite  atonic  or 
abdominal  region  is  marked  A.  Thus  we 
understand  how  the  constitution  is  bal- 
anced between  the  tonic  power,  of  which 
the  will  is  the  centre,  which  rouses  the 
brain  and  muscles,  and  the  relaxing  influence  associated  with  the 
abdomen  (belonging  to  the  base  of  the  middle  lobe)  which  relaxes 
all  our  energies  for  rest  and  sleep.  This  tonic  region,  which  com 
mands  the  muscular  energies,  though  not  the  direct  organ  of  muscu. 
larity,  has  been  fully  demonstrated  in  accordance  with  my  principles 
by  French,  German,  and  English  physiologists  as  the  region  involved 
in  muscular  paralysis.  My  discovery,  however,  has  many  years' 
priority,  dating  from  1841,  but  for  its  exact  relation  to  the  convolu- 
tions I  am  indebted  to  the  foreign  physiologists  who  have  shown  that 
our  command  of  the  muscles  in  voluntary  action  depends  on  the  con- 
volutions which  occupy  the  space  I  have  described,  viz.  (in  the 
following  map  of  the  brain  referred  to  by  Prof.  Charcot),  the  ascend- 
ing frontal  and  ascending  parietal  convolutions  and  superior  parietal 
lobule.  The  inter-parietal  fissure  being  the  boundary  of  this  energetic 
region,  the  reader  will  perceive  its  breadth  increases  as  it  approaches 
the  median  line.  The  volitionary  muscular  energy  of  this  region 
depends  upon  the  development  of  the  coarser  elements  of  the  nervous 
system,  which  give  motor  power.  Charcot  says  :  "  According  to  the 
researches  of  Retz,  the  great  pyramidal  cells  exist  but  in'small  number 
with  very  young  infants  ;  it  is  only  later  that  their  number  increases, 
and  that  increase  is  effected,  according  to  all  appearances,  under  the 
influence  of  functional  exercise." 

The   anterior  superior  portion   of  this  region  has  been  shown  to 


228 


THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.         [CHAP.    XIII. 


sustain  the  movements  of  the  head  and  arms,  while  the  more  ener- 
getic posterior  portion  governs  the  movements  of  locomotion  by  the 
lower  limbs. 

But  this  entire  region  has  its  psychic  as  well  as  its  muscular  func- 
tions, which  increase  our  energy,  and  these  have  not  been  sought  by 

Sup.  pnctl  lobule. 


Fislof/Rolando. 
/ 


parietal  E 
fissure^  *« 

P4 


Fissure  ofjyivi 


TaralkVfissufe. 


Convex  surface  of  a  hemisphere  of  the  human  brain  (parietal  lobe  partly  schematic).     After  Charcot. 

European  physiologists,  and  will  not  be  recognized  as  long  as  con- 
servative opposition  can  defy  a  positive  science.  The  habit  of  ignor- 
ing the  psychic  has  become  chronic  and  hereditary.  But  as  all  know 
the  brain  has  psychic  functions,  the  knowledge  of  their  location  must 
be  of  great  value  in  diagnosis. 

In  the  above  engravings  the  reader  will  observe  the  remarkable 
coincidence  between  my  experiments  and  discoveries  (of  1841-42) 
and  the  results  of  human  pathology  and  vivisection  on  animals  of  the 
last  twenty  years  which  have  confirmed  them.  He  will  also  observe 
another  corroboration.  The  convolutions  labelled  Gyrus  angularis 
occupy  the  exact  position  which  I  give  to  the  occipital  organs  that 
co-operate  with  vision  and  give  power  to  the  eye  ;  and  this  is  the 
location  to  which  Dr.  Ferrier  ascribes  the  visual  power,  by  destroying 
which  in  the  pigeon  he  produced  blindness  of  the  opposite  eye.  A 
thorough  examination  of  the  results  of  pathology  and  vivisection 
will  show  how  remarkably,  as  far  as  they  go,  they  have  corroborated 
my  discoveries  made  thirty  years  earlier. 

The  abdominal  region  in  predominance  has  a  relaxing,  debilitating 
character,  whether  that  predominance  be  produced  by  excessive  food 
and  drink,  by  oppressive  undigested  materials,  or  by  irritations  and 
inflammations.     The  utter  prostration  of  ail  physical  and  mental  en- 


CHAP.    XIII.]       THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  229 

ergy  which  occurs  in  dysenteries,  fevers,  and  other  abdominal  irrita- 
tions attests  the  character  of  that  region.*  Its  antagonist  in  the 
shoulder  is  the  region  of  Energy,  which  brings  all  the  vital  forces 
into  active  play,  and  makes  us  intolerant  of  idleness.  This  region  of 
Energy,  corresponding  with  the  top  of  the  shoulder,  on  which  we 
bear  our  burdens,  directs  the  vital  forces,  according  to  the  pathog- 
nomic law,  to  the  brain  and  from  the  abdomen,  producing  thereby  the 
indifference  to  food  which  we  feel  when  our  interest  and  energy  are 
roused.  The  same  indifference  to  food  and  drink  is  produced  by  the 
tonics  and  nervines  which  rouse  our  energies,  whether  they  be  drugs 
or  moral  influences,  and  it  is  by  the  use  of  nervine  tonics  that  we 
increase  the  moral  energies  and  subdue  the  urgency  of  appetite,  so  as 
to  enable  one  who  wishes  to  reform  to  overcome  the  propensity  for 
intoxicating  drinks. 

Temperance  societies  have  relied  too  much  upon  an  energetic  war- 
fare against  alcohol,  but  intemperance  does  not  depend  entirely  upon 
the  temptation  offered  by  the  free  sale  of  alcoholic  drinks,  and  can- 
not be  entirely  controlled  by  limiting  the  sale.  It  depends  upon  a 
natural  appetite  which  exists  in  the  base  of  the  brain  in  the  posterior 
part  of  the  organ  of  Alimentiveness,  which  comes  into  play  under 
circumstances  of  nervous  depression  or  exhaustion,  just  as  thirst 
appears  when  there  has  been  an  exhaustion  of  fluids.  Hence  a 
demand  for  stimulation  of  some  sort  is  almost  as  universal  as  a 
demand  for  food  and  drink. 

This  nervous  depression,  or  lack  of  cheerfulness  and  buoyancy, 
arises  not  only  from  depressing  causes  but  from  the  predominance 
of  the  base  of  the  brain,  influenced  by  the  discordant  condition  of 
society  —  the  predominance  of  the  animal  over  the  moral,  which  is 
a  condition  more  or  less  gloomy  and  eager  for  enlivening  influences. 
Hence  the  present  development  of  the  human  race  has  the  conditions 
in  which  intemperance  must  flourish,  and  all  savage  races  become 
drunkards  when  they  have  the  opportunity.  But  women,  who  have  a 
decided  predominance  of  the  moral  over  the  basilar  region,  are  very 
seldom  addicted  to  intemperance,  and  when  men  are  equally  devel- 
oped they  will  become  equally  temperate. 

This  development  is  often  effected  by  powerful  religious  impres- 
sions, and  the  greatest  success  in  the  treatment  of  intemperance  has 
been  in  the  inebriate  homes  in  New  York  and  Philadelphia,  in  which 
religious  influence  is  relied  upon. 

There  is  not  sufficient  moral  energy  in  most  persons  to  resist  the 

*  This  prostration  of  strength  is  not  by  a  normal  concentration  upon  the  abdo- 
men, but  by  intense  abnormal  irritation,  which,  attracting  the  nervous  energies, 
paralyzes  the  antagonist  region.  Any  intense  action  in  the  abdomen  has  that 
effect,  as  every  organ  in  the  human  constitution  under  intense  excitement  paralyzes 
its  opposite. 


23°  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.        [CHAP.    XIII. 

discouraging  and  depressing  influence  of  the  struggles  for  a  livelihood, 
the  competition  of  rivals,  the  hostility  of  enemies,  the  uncertainty 
of  business,  the  lack  of  reliable  love  and  friendship,  and  the  moods 
of  ill-health.  From  such  depression  we  may  be  relieved  by  cheer- 
ful society  and  friendship,  by  the  moral  enthusiasm  of  any  great  and 
worthy  purpose,  or  by  fervent  religious  sentiments  ;  or  we  may  be 
placed  permanently  above  the  gloomy  level  of  intemperance  by  such 
a  moral  education  as  will  give  the  higher  sentiments  an  unchangeable 
control. 

I  see  no  hope  for  the  eradication  of  intemperance  by  law  until 
moral  education  shall  have  done  its  work.  But  in  the  meantime  every 
beneficent  influence,  every  happy  social  influence,  everything  which 
diminishes  the  burdens  and  calamities  of  human  life,  everything  which 
increases  the  influence  of  women,  everything  which  gives  cheerful 
and  innocent  amusement,  contributes  to  diminish  the  demand  for 
alcoholic  stimulants.  It  is  diminished  too  by  substituting  vegetable 
food  and  fruits  for  animal  food. 

The  purification  of  the  atmosphere,  the  removal  of  the  sources  of 
malaria,  and  all  that  improves  health,  contribute  to  temperance,  while 
malaria  and  misery  work  in  the  opposite  direction. 

I  think  it  not  impossible  to  prepare  medicines  which  will  so  effec- 
tually sustain  the  energies  of  the  nervous  system  as  to  check  intem- 
perance and  reduce  its  ravages  to  a  small  amount,  and  I  do  not 
hesitate  to  prescribe  such  remedies  in  any  case,  modified  to  suit  the 
temperament  or  condition  of  each  individual.  Intemperance  may  be 
based  upon  conditions  of  the  nervous  system,  the  liver,  or  the  diges- 
tive organs,  which  must  be  controlled  by  the  remedy.  I  have  long 
taught  my  students  the  value  of  the  tonic  hydrastis  to  fortify  the 
stomach  against  the  alcoholic  appetite,  and  have  had  some  favorable 
reports  of  its  success.  Quassia  has  also  shown  great  efficiency  in  the 
same  way.  I  have  successfully  recommended  a  combination  of  equal 
parts  of  tinctures  or  fluid  extracts  of  hydrastis,  quassia,  cypripedium, 
and  Erythroxylon  Coca,  the  latter  two  producing  a  sustaining  and 
tranquillizing  influence. 

A  diet  should  be  adopted  in  which  fruits,  cereals,  and  vegetables 
are  most  prominent,  the  greatest  benefit  being  derived  from  fruit,  and 
the  stimulation  desired  should  be  sought  in  tea  and  coffee.  Under 
such  regulations  the  alcoholic  appetite  is  much  more  easily  subdued. 
The  treatment  should  be  dispersive  from  the  gastric  region,  and  gen- 
erally upward  over  the  abdomen,  and  should  stimulate  the  entire 
upper  region  of  the  trunk,  front  and  back,  above  the  mammae,  to  pro- 
duce that  elevated,  happy,  amiable,  and  firm  condition  in  which  ardent 
spirits  are  repulsive. 


CHAP.    XIII.]        THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  23I 

They  are  extremely  repulsive  to  refined  women,  on  account  of  the 
influence  of  their  moral  nature,  which  pervades  every  fibre  and  repels 
all  gross  and  debasing  influence.  But  in  proportion  as  the  basilar 
forces  are  roused,  coarse  stimulants  and  gross  food  become  accep- 
table. I  have  found  in  my  experiments  that  when  the  organ  of  Love 
of  Stimulus  is  gently  roused  it  requires  mild  stimulants,  such  as  tea, 
coffee,  and  condiments,  ardent  spirits  being  disliked  ;  but  as  it  is 
further  excited,  malt  liquors  and  wines  are  desired,  first  diluted,  then 
pure  ;  and  a  delicate  female  whom  a  spoonful  of  brandy  would  almost 
intoxicate  may  be  made  under  this  basilar  influence  to  seek  the 
strongest  liquors  and  drink  them  like  an  old  toper  without  becoming 
intoxicated,  just  as  one  exhausted  by  hemorrhage  or  prostrated  by 
serpent  bites  may  take  a  pint  of  brandy  without  intoxication.  This 
impunity  depends  upon  the  depressant  influence  cf  the  Love  of  Stim- 
ulus, and  if  that  should  cease  to  act  extreme  intoxication  would  appear 
at  once.  Thus  when  the  very  impressible  Mr.  Inman  had  taken  a 
drink  of  brandy  under  the  influence  of  Love  of  Stimulus  without  show- 
ing any  effect,  I  supposed  the  impunity  would  continue,  but  when  I 
continued  my  experiments,  exciting  the  upper  region  of  the  brainy 
diverting  the  activity  from  the  Love  of  Stimulus  and  thus  destroy- 
ing his  capacity  for  enduring  it,  he  suddenly  sunk  to  the  floor  dead 
drunk,  to  my  astonishment,  and  could  be  relieved  only  by  re-exciting 
the  Love  of  Stimulus  and  base  of  the  brain.  For  a  similar  reason,  in 
convivial  assemblies  we  see  intoxication  much  sooner  reached  under 
the  influence  of  social  pleasure  than  when  men  are  sipping  their 
liquor  alone  or  taking  it  as  a  stimulus  under  the  pressure  of  business. 
Men  of  a  coarse  and  morose  nature  drink  large  quantities  with  impun- 
ity, while  the  more  amiable  class  speedily  succumb  in  intoxication, 
and  are  more  rapidly  destroyed,  as  women  would  be  if  forced  into 
drinking.  Hence  the  most  signal  examples  of  alcoholic  ruin  occur  in 
the  brightest  members  of  society,  who  are  seduced  by  the  influence 
of  bad  examples  and  local  fashion  from  their  natural  temperance,  or 
who  yield  in  moments  of  temporary  depression. 

The  appetites  for  food,  drink,  and  stimulation  being  at  the  base  of 
the  brain  are  necessarily  roused  by  basilar  action  —  by  a  stirring, 
active  life,  especially  when  such  a  life  is  associated  with  no  cheerful, 
pleasant  influences,  but  is  in  the  sphere  of  selfishness  and  rivalry. 
The  hunger  of  active  labor  is  much  more  urgent  than  that  of  seden- 
tary pursuits  and  lequires  a  freer  supply  of  nitrogenous  or  animal 
food.  Its  nervous  depression  (for  basilar  action  or  muscular  exer- 
tion consumes  the  vitality  of  the  brain)  creates  the  demand  for  stimu- 
lation which  leads  laborers  by  millions  to  the  shops  that  supply  them 
beer,  gin,  and  whiskey.     The  demand  for  these  will  not  cease  until 


232  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.         [CHAP.    XIII. 

labor  can  be  made  less  depressing.  When  the  circumstances  of  labor 
are  more  pleasant  and  social,  when  its  monotony  is  relieved  by  song, 
music,  and  conversation,  when  the  atmosphere  of  the  shop  is  made 
pure,  its  society  refined  and  polite  and  all  its  features  agreeable,  the 
laborer  will  be  relieved  from  the  intense  craving  for  stimulus. 

The  man  who  resolutely  desires  to  reform  may  find  it  a  desperate 
struggle  to  resist  the  unbalanced  action  of  his  brain,  producing  a  pas- 
sionate craving,  but  if  assisted  by  nervine  tonics  he  will  certainly  be 
able  to  conquer,  and  if  of  the  impressible  temperament,  a  little  nerv- 
auric  treatment  will  completely  banish  the  evil  influence.  In  ten 
minutes  the  appetite  of  the  sensitive  may  be  extinguished  and  alco- 
holic drinks  made  loathsome,  and  if  this  process  is  repeated,  as  often 
necessary  to  make  the  temperate  inclination  habitual,  all  danger  will 
be  banished. 

In  my  early  experiments  upon  the  brain  I  discovered  in 
the  region  marked  Relaxation  that  peculiar  disorderly  form  of 
relaxation  which  belongs  to  the  intoxicated,  occupying  a  very  small 
space.  As  conditions,  impulses,  and  faculties  are  developed  by  en- 
vironments, I  regarded  this  as  a  modification  of  the  relaxed  condition 
due  to  alcoholic  influence,  simple  relaxation  being  due  to  the  impres- 
sion of  a  very  large  quantity  of  food  —  a  relaxation  of  the  mental  as 
well  as  physical  powers.  This  relaxation  may  be  due  to  irritations 
of  the  abdominal  region  (which  are  very  debilitating)  as  well  as  to 
oppression  by  food.  The  alcoholic  relaxation  is  accompanied  by  a 
certain  disorderly  stimulation  as  well  as  debility  which  is  well  known 
as  a  state  of  intoxication.  When  this  locality  is  well  developed  there 
is  a  great  facility  in  assuming  the  intoxicated  condition. 

The  researches  of  Dr.  T.  D.  Crothers  have  thrown  additional  light 
on  this  subject,  by  showing  that  certain  persons  possess  this  intoxi- 
cating faculty  in  a  high  degree,  and  may  even  exercise  it  and  thus 
fall  into  intoxication  without  the  use  of  any  alcoholic  stimulant,  from 
the  influence  of  example  or  even  from  strong  mental  excitement  — 
thus  placing  beyond  doubt  the  existence  of  this  faculty,  the  discovery 
of  which  surprised  me. 

The  healer  will  most  readily  relieve  abdominal  irritations  and  dis- 
eases by  dispersive  passes  upwards  with  one  hand  while  the  other  is 
on  the  top  of  the  shoulder,  treating  each  side  alternately  ;  but  I 
should  mention  for  his  benefit  some  simple  remedies  which  he  will 
find  very  serviceable,  either  by  external  application  or  by  internal  ad- 
ministration. There  are  more  than  a  hundred  remedies  in  our  mate- 
ria medica  which  I  have  found  of  marked  value  in  their  direct  action 
on  the  stomach,  to  soothe,  invigorate,  or  relieve  it.  In  flatulent  con- 
ditions angelica  and  celery  seed  are  the  most  useful,  but  when  the 


CHAP.    XIII.]       THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  233 

disturbance  amounts  to  a  colic,  Dioscorea  villosa  is  a  sure  reliance. 
In  gastric  weakness  mild  tonics  such  as  camomile,  columba,  and 
coptis  (gold-thread)  are  very  beneficial,  but  a  more  efficient  tonic  re- 
storative influence,  extending  to  all  the  viscera,  is  found  in  the  balm- 
ony  (Chelone  o-labrd),  barberry  (Baberis  vulgaris)  and  the  Ptelea 
trifoliata  ;  the  balmony,  barberry,  Hydrastis,  and  mountain  ash  (Sor- 
bus  aucuparia  are  all  efficient  in  resisting  the  alcoholic  appetite  and 
repairing  its  ravages.  The  flow  of  gastric  juice  may  be  promoted  by 
Alnus  rubra  (tag  alder),  assisted  by  a  little  capsicum  and  inula  (ele-  . 
campane).  A  fluid  extract  of  the  flowers  of  dandelion  appears  more 
beneficial  to  the  stomach  than  anything  else  that  I  have  used. 

The  deranged  conditions  of  the  stomach  from  irritations  and  im- 
proper contents  are  generally  relieved  by  charcoal  and  the  presence 
of  acid  by  calcined  magnesia.  If  this  is  not  sufficient,  the  following 
prescription  may  be  relied  on  :  — 

Fluid  Extract  of  Scrophularia  nodosa, 
"  Cochineal, 

"  Triosteum  perfoliatum, 

"  Sambucus  Canadensis, 

each  one  ounce  —  mix.  Dose,  a  teaspoonf ul  every  two  hours  until 
relief.  In  most  cases,  however,  the  scrophularia  alone  is  sufficient. 
I  do  not  object,  however,  to  the  fashionable  subnitrate  of  bismuth. 

The  use  of  pepsin  or.lactopeptin  as  an  assistant  to  the  powers  of 
an  enfeebled  stomach  will  overcome  many  difficulties.  Pancrobilin 
appears  to  be  a  valuable  aid  when  the  liver  and  pancreas  are  at 
fault,  assisting  duodenal  action  and  digestion  of  fatty  foods. 

In  treating  the  abdominal  functions  the  hands  should  be  applied 
on  the  lumbar  as  well  as  the  lower  dorsal  region — the  dorsal  region 
having  more  to  do  with  the  digestive  and  assimilative  functions,  and 
the  lumbar  region  with  the  expulsive  functions  of  the  lower  intestines. 

Psychologically  speaking,  the  tendency  of  the  upper  half  of  the 
body  is  attractive  and  retentive  —  the  lower  half  hostile,  degrading, 
and  repellent.  Physiologically,  the  character  is  the  same :  the 
upper  half  of  the  body  tends  to  vitalize  and  retain  the  nutritive  ele- 
ments —  the  lower  half  to  degrade  and  expel  them  ;  fecal  material 
is  expelled  by  the  ileum,  nutrient  material  is  carried  up  by  the 
thoracic  duct.  The  exercise  of  the  lower  limbs  rouses  the  lumbar 
portion  of  the  cord,  strengthens  the  expellent  functions  and  over- 
comes constipation.  The  lower  half  of  the  alimentary  canal,  which 
sympathizes  with  the  violent  passions,  is  always  more  developed  in 
the  carnivora  than  in  the  herbivora. 

The  treatment  of  the  abdominal  functions  through  the  brain  in- 
volves their  stimulation  through    the   lower  jaw,  and  their  control 


234  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.         [CHAP.    XIII. 

through  the  region  behind  Integrity,  which  extends  from  Firmness, 
(behind  Integrity  and  Cheerfulness)  over  the  temporal  arch,  just 
behind  Sanity.  The  hand  upon  this  region  checks  the  abdominal 
irritation  like  an  anodyne  tonic.  Upon  the  jaw  before  the  ear,  the 
fmgers  produce  the  same  effect  as  applications  upon  the  alimentary 
tract  on  the  abdomen.  If  we  place  the  middle  finger  upon  Alimen- 
tiveness  before  the  ear  and  the  thumb  upon  the  organ  of  Health,  the 
effect  upon  the  sensitive  is  a  gradual  restoration  of  healthy  action  to 
the  stomach.  In  like  manner  we  may  rouse  the  healthy  action  of 
any  organ  by  placing  one  hand  upon  the  region  of  Health  in  the 
body  or  the  head,  and  the  other  where  we  would  direct  the  healthy 
action. 

The  Love  of  Stimulus,  occupying  the  posterior  portion  of  Alimen- 
tiveness,  immediately  at  the  cavity  of  the  ear,  I  have  found  no  diffi- 
culty in  exciting  separately  so  as  to  produce  a  desire  for  alcoholic 
stimulants  and  ability  to  bear  them. 

In  stimulating  the  digestive  organs  through  the  brain,  we  should 
recollect  that  the  whole  posterior  basilar  region  contributes  to  their 
energy,  and  therefore  we  may  reinforce  them  by  applying  the  hands 
around  the  base  of  the  brain  on  the  level  of  the  ear. 

Let  us  now  briefly  review  the  functions  accessible  through  the 
abdominal  surface,  to  imprint  them  on  the  memory. 

1.  At  and  below  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum,  which  would  be 
called  the  epigastric  region,  we  have  Sensibility,  Somnolence,  and  the 
region  of  Impressibility,  through  which  we  exert  a  tranquillizing, 
soporific  influence,  during  which  we  may  elicit  the  intellectual  phe- 
nomena of  trance,  psychometric  perception,  clairvoyance,  sympathy, 
and  develop  the  curability  of  diseases  by  nervauric  and  spiritual 
influences.  This  region  brings  the  patient  completely  under  the 
influence  of  the  operator.  The  corresponding  cerebral  region  extends 
from  the  root  of  the  nose  to  an  inch  behind  the  brow.  The  word 
Sympathy  conveys  a  correct  idea  of  the  general  tendency  of  this 
region.  The  sympathy  is  intellectual,  emotional,  and  physical,  and 
may  amount  to  an  entire  surrender  to  the  control  of  the  operator. 
Those  who  are  largely  developed  in  this  region  easily  become  mes- 
meric subjects  or  fall  into  the  class  that  are  controlled  by  a  word. 

2.  Just  below  the  epigastric  location,  extending  to  the  umbilicus 
and  about  two  inches  below,  we  find  the  region  of  assimilation  and 
absorption,  the  influence  of  which  is  pleasant  and  soothing,  harmon- 
izing well  with  the  soporific  influence  above,  while  promoting  nourish- 
ment and  digestion. 

The  influence  of  these  two  regions,  especially  the  upper,  is 
extremely   amiable.      The    spiritual,    psychometric,    and    clairvoyant 


CHAP.     XIII.]       THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  235 

faculties  are  closely  associated  in  the  brain  with  the  intellectual, 
amiable,  and  sympathetic  faculties.  Hence  there  is  generally  a 
remarkable  degree  of  refinement,  beauty  of  sentiment  and  language, 
and  kindly,  benevolent,  and  ethical  teaching  in  connection  with 
trance  speaking  and  psychometry. 

3.  Below  and  around  the  umbilicus,  exterior  to  the  region  of 
Assimilative  Absorption,  is  the  region  of  Respiration,  corresponding 
with  the  respiratory  organs  around  the  mouth  and  nose,  of  which  I 
shall  speak  in  connection  with  the  thoracic  organs. 

4.  Below  the  umbilicus,  half-way  to  the  pelvis,  is  the  region  of 
Calorification  by  which  we  develop  heat  —  which  is  actively  con- 
cerned in  all  fevers,  and  which  produces  an  ardent  temperament. 

5.  Below  Calorification  comes  the  uterine  region,  which  might  in  a 
psychic  sense  be  called  the  region  of  excitability.  This  gives  the 
tendency  to  hysteria. 

6.  Below  the  uterine  region  is  the  mons  veneris  or  pubic  region, 
which  is  associated  with  a  tendency  to  lethargy  and  sleep  and  corre- 
sponds with  the  position  of  the  urinary  bladder. 

7.  On  each  side  of  the  pubic  region  extends  the  groin  or  angle 
between  the  thigh  and  abdomen,  which  corresponds  with  the  sexual 
evacuations,  menstrual  and  seminal.  It  is  the  upper  part  of  the 
Sexual  region,  which  includes  the  sexual  organs,  which  correspond 
to  Amativeness,  located  on  the  bust  at  the  larynx  —  a  function  just 
below  the  medulla  oblongata.  The  lumbo-sacral  is  the  region  of 
virility,  located  on  the  head  just  below  the  occipital  knob. 

8.  ATtove  the  sexual  region  and  in  front  of  the  hips  (the  anterior 
margin  of  the  ilium)  is  the  region  of  Melancholy.  It  antagonizes  the 
region  of  Cheerfulness  at  the  armpits. 

Melancholy  is  an  abnormal  or  excessive  manifestation.  The  nor- 
mal action  produces  a  serious  frame  of  mind  which  recognizes  diffi- 
culties, obstacles,  or  hostility. 

9.  Above  Melancholy,  on  the  side  of  the  body,  between  the  hip 
and  ribs,  is  the  region  of  absolute  selfishness,  which  is  antagonistic 
to  every  conception  of  duty  to  others  and  to  all  moral  dignity.  Its 
physiological  influence  is  to  reinforce  the  appetites  and  animal  pas- 
sions, and  in  some  persons  it  needs  stimulation  to  revive  animal  life 
and  physiological  processes.  In  predominance  it  may  be  called 
Baseness. 

10.  Just  aoove  the  region  of  Selfishness,  on  the  side,  is  the  region 
of  Irritability  on  the  lower  margin  of  the  ribs,  the  effect  of  which  if 
strongly  excited  is  highly  exciting  and  irritating.  Dr.  Beard,  I  be- 
lieve, is  the  only  electrician  who  has  discovered  and  mentioned  the 
character  of  this  region.     He  says  (p.  343):  "This  sensitiveness  is,  of 


236  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.        [CHAP.    XIII. 

course,  more  in  the  thin  and  the  nervous  than  in  the  corpulent  and 
phlegmatic.  It  is  usually  most  marked  on  the  inferior  ribs  on  the 
right  and  left  side  of  the  body,  over  the  liver  and  spleen.  The  pecul- 
iar sensitiveness  of  the  ribs  at  these  points  is  sometimes  erroneously 
supposed  to  indicate  disease  of  the  organs  beneath  them."  It  is  a 
curious  fact  that  Dr.  Ferrier  once  struck  upon  the  corresponding 
location  in  the  brain  without  understanding  it,  when  he  enraged  a 
cat  by  exciting  the  basis  of  the  middle  lobe. 

11.  Anterior  to  Melancholy  and  Selfishness  is  the  region  of  the 
abdominal  functions,  controlling  the  alimentary  canal,  running  from 
the  margin  of  the  ribs  to  Defecation,  half-way  between  umbilicus  and 
groin.  The  upper  end,  relating  to  the  stomach,  corresponds  to 
Alimentiveness.    The  lower  location  is  marked  on  the  large  chart  Def. 

12.  Anterior  to  Alimentiveness  is  the  region  of  Disease,  located 
along  the  margins  of  the  ribs.  Scientifically  speaking  it  might  be 
called  the  centre  of  organic  sensibility,  but  practically  it  may  be 
properly  called  Disease,  as  the  tendency  or  liability  to  disease  is  pro- 
portioned to  its  predominance  over  the  health-sustaining  power  of 
the  upper  occiput  and  shoulders.  It  is  the  region  of  congestion  of 
blood  in  the  portal  veins  —  the  most  degenerate  blood  in  the  body. 

On  this  zone  of  the  trunk  is  found  anteriorly  the  maximum  sensi- 
tiveness and  maximum  liability  to  injury.  Brown-Sequard  found  that 
animals  killed  by  a  shock  through  the  diaphragm  were  killed  more 
quickly  and  surely  than  when  assailed  through  the  head.  In  such 
cases  the  blood  after  death  was  fluid,  the  abdominal  viscera  con- 
gested, and  the  thoracic  region  nearly  empty. 

13.  The  remaining  space  between  the  Alimentive,  Morbid,  Respi- 
ratory, and  Sympathetic  regions  is  a  region  of  emotional  impulse  or 
excitability,  corresponding  to  the  cerebral  region  of  Expression 
behind  the  face.  It  explains  the  sympathy  of  the  brain  with  abdom- 
inal conditions.  In  the  upper  portion  of  this  region  of  Expression, 
which  is  adjacent  to  the  sympathetic  region,  the  emotional  influ- 
ence is  of  the  amiable  and  soothing  character.  In  the  lower  portion 
it  is  exciting  and  stimulating,  partaking  of  the  character  of  deep 
Respiration  and  Ardor.  The  therapeutic  value  of  these  organs  con- 
sists in  the  soothing,  yielding  influence  which  is  found  on  the  sur- 
faces above  the  umbilicus,  and  the  more  exciting  or  stimulating 
influences  which  are  found  below  the  level  of  the  umbilicus,  produc- 
ing deeper  respiration  and  greater  warmth.  The  level  of  the  umbili- 
cus may  be  taken  as  the  division  between  the  soothing  and  exciting- 
influences  of  the  abdominal  surface. 

Of  the  organs  just  enumerated,  Calorification  requires  a  full 
exposition,  not  only  for  therapeutic  purposes,  but  as  an  illustration 


CHAP.    XIII.]        THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  2^J 

of  physiology  and  pathology.  For  the  present,  however,  I  shall 
speak  of  it  merely  for  therapeutic  purposes.  Briefly,  the  calorific 
function  is  located  as  to  its  origin  in  the  brain,  at  the  medulla  oblon- 
gata, which  we  reach  through  the  chin,  and  it  is  developed  in  the 
body  by  an  influence  passing  down  the  cord  and  proceeding  from  the 
dorsal  ganglia  to  the  abdomen,  in  which  it  is  developed  through  the 
ileum  and  is  reached  through  the  external  location,  between  the  os 
pubis  and  umbilicus.  Hence  warmth  is  developed  and  diffused  by 
covering  the  chin  with  one  hand  and  the  occipital  base  with  the 
other,  or  by  placing  one  hand  on  the  hypogastric  location  of  Calori- 
fication, and  the  other  at  the  lumbo-dorsal  junction.  The  anterior 
locations  develop  caloric,  but  the  posterior  assist  and  give  it  a  more 
healthy  diffusion. 

The  region  of  Coolness  is  on  the  side  head,  about  the  middle  of  the 
vertical  line  rising  from  the  posterior  region  of  the  external  ear,  and 
on  the  body  its  location  corresponds  nearly  with  the  middle  of  the 
posterior  line  of  the  arm. 

Hence  in  treating  a  chill  by  the  battery  we  pass  a  current  from 
Coolness  to  Calorification,  and  in  treating  a  fever  we  reverse  the  cur- 
rent. 

Fevers  may  also  be  treated  by  a  current  of  hot  water  poured  on  the 
lower  abdomen,  and  typhoid  fever  is  especially  benefited  by  this,  as 
it  involves  disease  of  the  small  intestines.  The  great  benefit  of 
plunging  the  feet  in  hot  water  at  the  beginning  of  a  fever  is  due  to 
the  influence  on  the  hypogastric  region  and  the  diversion  from  the 
brain,  as  well  as  the  sedative  influences  of  the  hot  water,  and  the  seda- 
tive, cooling  influence  of  the  tibial  region  and  the  foot. 

The  experiments  of  Brodie,  of  Chossat,  and  of  Heidenhain  have 
fully  proved  the  dependence  of  calorification  on  the  nervous  system, 
the  origin  of  the  power  in  the  brain,  and  the  capacity  of  the  nervous 
system  either  to  develop  or  to  depress  the  heat  of  any  part  of  the 
body ;  but  no  one  has  heretofore  discovered  this  corporeal  seat  of  cal- 
orification or  understood  its  relations  to  the  brain.  The  nearest  ap- 
proach was  in  the  much-neglected  experiments  of  Chossat,  who  showed 
that  calorification  was  interrupted  by  sections  of  the  splanchnic  nerves 
and  also  by  tying  the  abdominal  aorta.  Thus  he  came  near  complet- 
ing the  demonstration  that  calorification  is  chiefly  dependent  upon 
the  ileum,  in  which  fecalization  is  performed  —  the  locality  in  which 
irritations  and  inflammations  produce  the  most  intense  fevers.  Fevers 
.associated  with  abdominal  disease  at  other  locations  have  a  lower 
temperature  and  less  continuous  heat.  At  the  spleen  the  intermis- 
sions are  much  longer  than  the  fever.  At  the  liver  the  fever  is  remit- 
tent ;  at  the  stomach  the  temperature  is  lower  (as  in  yellow  fever)  ;  but 


238  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.         [CHAP.    XIII. 

when  the  hypogastric  region  is  involved  the  fevers  are  severe  and  con- 
tinuous and  the  influence  upon  the  brain  greater.  The  ileum  is  as- 
osciated  with  Calorification  consequentially,  as  the  effect  of  Calorifi- 
cation is  to  leave  the  incombustible  fecal  matter  for  discharge  by  the 
ileum.  Hence  this  discharge  continues  in  fevers  whether  food  is  taken 
or  not. 

In  nervauric  treatment,  chills  would  be  overcome  by  applying  the 
bands  on  the  chin  and  the  occipital  base,  or  on  the  hypogastric  region 
and  lumbo-dorsal  junction,  or  by  manipulations  from  Coolness  on  the 
side  to  the  hypogastric  region. 

Fevers  should  be  overcome  by  dispersive  passes  from  the  hypogas- 
tric and  hypochondriac  locations,  and  stimulating  the  regions  of  Cool- 
ness and  Health.  Great  assistance  may  be  given  by  the  aquatic  region 
of  the  tibial  surface,  especially  when  there  is  any  inflammation.  I 
think  the  tibial  surface  will  be  quite  a  valuable  resource  in  eruptive  dis- 
eases when  there  is  much  heat  of  the  skin.  Erysipelas  will  be  con- 
trolled by  the  tibial  region  as  well  as  by  jaborandi. . 

The  lower  limbs  sustain  important  relations  to  the  lungs,  the 
brain,  and  the  vital  force  and  development. 

The  thigh,  depending  on  the  lumbar  region,  is  the  seat  of  the 
strongest  animal  power,  and  is  the  region  through  which  to  reinforce 
the  muscular  system.  The  locomotion  and  labor  sustained  by  the 
frontal  surface  of  the  thigh  should  be  roused  by  vigorous  percussion 
whenever  we  wish  to  increase  the  physical  strength.  The  lateral  and 
posterior  surfaces  of  the  thigh  are  also  highly  invigorating,  but  much 
more  impulsive,  bold,  and  restless  in  their  moral  influence.  Hence 
they  are  specially  beneficial  to  those  who  are  quiet  and  timid.  The 
region  of  Vital  Force  at  the  summit  of  the  thigh  is  beneficial  in  all 
cases  of  weakness.  Its  best  effect  is  produced  in  combination 
with  the  health  region  of  the  shoulders,  or  the  region  of  Cheerfulness 
in  the  axilla.  It  also  forms  a  happy  combination  with  the  region  of 
Hope  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  breast,  above  the  nipple. 

As  we  approach  the  knees,  the  crural  influence  becomes  more 
decidedly  restless.  Hence  the  dispersive  manipulations  from  the 
knees  to  the  feet  have  an  especially  soothing  influence.  The  pos- 
terior aspect  of  the  thigh  has  the  general  character  expressed  by  the 
word  Turbulence,  and  hence  co-operates  with  the  criminal  impulses 
when  very  large.  The  internal  aspect  of  the  thighs  need  not  be 
stimulated  except  in  those  addicted  to  a  passive,  ascetic,  or  care- 
worn life.  Its  tendency  is  toward  dissipation,  sensuality,  and 
vagrancy. 

The  upper  posterior  lateral  surface  of  the  thighs,  the  region  of 
Nutrition,  is  almost  always  a  necessary  locality  for  the  treatment  of 


CHAP.    XIII.]        THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS,  239 

patients,  for  few  are  ever  out  of  health  without  a  deficient  supply  of 
red  blood.  Nutrition  develops  blood  and  flesh  and  moderates  ner- 
vous excitability.  It  is  quite  convenient  to  excite  Nutrition  and 
Vital  Force  at  the  same  time,  by  the  hand  or  by  the  negative  sponge. 
In  standing  erect  with  the  arms  hanging,  the  wrist  comes  upon  the 
head  of  the  thigh  bone.  Then  moving  the  hand  back  the  palm  would 
come  upon  the  region  of  Nutrition.  One  may  practise  upon  himself 
by  placing  the  hands  thus  upon  Nutrition  when  he  retires  at  night. 
I  practised  thus  upon  myself  in  1871  with  good  effect  until  I  thought 
it  better  to  check  than  increase  the  effect.  Mr.  C,  one  of  my  most 
intelligent  students,  informed  me  that  he  had  tried  the  experiment 
upon  himself  in  1888,  and  in  a  short  time  increased  his  weight  twenty 
pounds. 

Below  the  knee  we  find  in  the  leg  one  of  the  great  wonders  of 
Sarcognomy.  The  leg  corresponds  to  the  pre-natal  embryonic  de- 
velopment which  illustrates  the  law  of  evolution  and  the  microcosmal 
character  of  the  human  constitution.  It  corresponds  to  all  below 
the  grade  of  humanity  —  the  animal,  vegetable,  and  mineral  king- 
doms. 

In  the  fanciful  phraseology  of  imaginative  writers  we  are  often 
assured  that  man  is  a  microcosm,  without  a  single  definite  statement 
of  the  basis  of  this  conjecture.  He  certainly  does  not  contain  in  his 
constitution  all  the  chemical  elements,  nor  is  his  life  governed  like 
the  solar  system  by  gravitation  and  momentum.  No  resemblance  to 
the  universe  has  been  pointed  out,  and  his  ability  to  comprehend  im- 
perfectly the  universe  does  not  make  his  constitution  a  microcosm. 
The  statement  therefore  is  a  baseless  fancy  or  conjecture. 

But  it  was  discovered  by  my  experiments  in  1842  that  the  elemen- 
tary forces  of  nature  bear  a  wonderful  relation  to  the  genesis  of  man  ; 
that  he  retains  in  his  constitution  a  record  of  the  creative  or  evolving 
power  which  advances  to  the  height  of  humanity  through  all  the 
prior  steps  of  evolution,  and  thus  gives  man  a  microcosmal  relation 
to  evolutionary  forces. 

Humanity  proper  begins  at  the  knee  ;  all  below  corresponds  to  the 
animal,  vegetable,  and  mineral  kingdoms  and  reproduces  their  condi- 
tions in  our  experiments.  The  foot  which  stands  upon  the  earth  has 
a  mineral  character  in  the  surface  which  touches  the  earth  ;  above 
the  bottom  of  the  foot  the  character  is  vegetable  ;  and  above  the 
ankle  animal. 

It  is  easy  to  trace  upon  the  leg  the  development  of  the  higher 
kingdom,  the  Vertebrata,  which  occupy  the  space  between  the  knee 
and  the  ankle,  changing  near  the  ankle  to  the  mollusca,  articulata,  and 
radiata.     Upon  the  upper  surface  of  the  foot  we  have  the  vegetable 


24O  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.         [CHAP.    XIII. 

kingdom;  and  on  its  lower  surface  the  mineral  kingdom,  correspond- 
ing" to  the  entire  globe.  Each  animal  of  the  vertebrata  may  be  rec- 
ognized at  some  portion  of  the  vertebral  region  (from  the  knee  to 
the  foot),  and  we  might  locate  upon  the  leg,  if  it  were  of  any  impor- 
tance, the  dog,  the  horse,  the  shark,  the  whale,  the  eagle,  the  serpent^ 
etc.,  and  in  the  vegetative  region  the  trees  and  herbage.  However 
wonderful  or  incredible  this  may  seem  it  is  but  the  statement  of  the 
results  of  scientific  experiment,  which  any  competent  observer  can 
verify  for  himself,  if  he  follows  my  methods,  avoiding  mesmeric, 
hysteric,  or  imaginative  subjects  controllable  by  a  word  or  by  sym- 
pathy. I  believe  no  one  has  ever  adopted  my  methods  of  rational 
experiment  without  verifying  my  statements.  But,  laying  aside  the 
curious  and  wonderful,  for  practical  utility,  we  find  in  this  representa- 
tive microcosmal  region  some  of  the  most  important  functions  that 
modify  life  and  control  disease. 

The  vertebrata,  divided  into  fishes,  reptiles,  birds,  and  quadrupeds 
or  mammalia,  are  represented  in  corresponding  groups  on  the  leg. 
The  fishes  and  reptiles  occupy  the  anterior  or  tibial  surface  exterior 
to  the  edge  of  the  tibia  ;  the  next  vertical  section  of  the  leg,  extend- 
ing just  around  the  posterior  exterior  angle  of  the  muscular  promi- 
nence, is  devoted  to  the  birds,  and  the  remainder,  the  body  of  the 
calf,  is  devoted  to  the  mammalia. 

The  consequences  of  this  arrangement  are  very  important.  The 
anterior  or  aquatic  surface  corresponds  to  a  lower  grade  of  vitality 
and  sensibility  —  a  cold,  unintellectual,  unsensitive,  uninflammable 
temperament.  The  aerial  region  of  bird  life  is  associated  with  a 
more  active  temperament,  greater  warmth  and  activity  of  respira- 
tion, while  the  mammalian  region  is  associated  with  the  greatest 
development  of  animal  life  and  a  temperament  more  like  the  human, 
excepting  its  intellectual  inferiority. 

Hence,  in  stimulating  the  calf  of  the  leg  we  reinforce  animal  life, 
very  much  as  we  do  on  the  thighs.  In  stimulating  the  exterior 
aerial  region  we  favor  the  activity  and  vivacity  of  the  temperament ; 
but  in  stimulating  the  aquatic  region  of  the  front  we  make  an  entire 
change  of  temperament,  carrying  it  below  the  level  of  inflammatory 
and  febrile  diseases. 

Below  the  vertebrate  class  of  birds,  there  is  not  sufficient  nervous 
development  to  be  capable  of  inflammation.  The  reparative  power 
increases  as  the  inflammatory  capacity  declines,  so  that  wounds  are 
healed  and  parts  reproduced  without  inflammation. 

In  the  vegetable  kingdom,  without  a  nervous  system  or  intelli- 
gence, the  reparative  power  is  at  its  maximum,  and  inflammation  and 
fever  are  impossible.     Zoophytes  are  as  free  from    inflammation  as 


CHAP.     XIII.]         THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL     REGIONS.  24  I 

plants.  Polypi  may  be  cut  to  pieces  and  stuck  together  as  success- 
fully as  plants  may  be  grafted.  Worms,  too,  may  be  cut  to  pieces 
and  left  to  grow  as  separate  individuals  or  stuck  together  to  grow  as 
one.  Among  the  Articulata  and  Mollusca  the  reparative  power  is 
immense,  but  the  inflammatory  tendency  imperceptible.  Crabs, 
lobsters,  and  young  spiders  reproduce  their  legs  when  torn  off,  with- 
out anything  like  inflammation.  The  snail  reproduces  its  head  if  the 
upper  ganglion  has  not  been  destroyed.  In  the  oyster  and  mussel 
the  death  and  putrefaction  of  a  part  of  the  body  is  not  necessarily 
fatal  to  the  animal.  Fishes  reproduce  their  lost  fins  and  heal  all 
their  wounds  without  inflammation  or  suppuration.  Lizards,  serpents, 
salamanders,  frogs,  and  toads  have  great  reparative  power  without 
inflammation.  The  lizard  even  reproduces  its  tail.  Prof.  Macartney- 
removed  part  of  the  brain  and  skull  of  a  toad,  which  was  healed  with- 
out inflammation.  It  is  in  birds  that  we  first  find  the  nervous  system 
sufficiently  developed  to  be  capable  of  inflammation.  Quadrupeds 
are  still  more  liable  to  inflammation.  The  maximum  inflammatory 
and  febrile  capacity,  generally  with  the  least  restorative  power,  is 
found  in  man. 

But  as  man  in  his  embryonic  life  passes  through  the  lower  forms  of 
life,  it  is  only  after  the  second  month  that  he  attains  the  inflammable 
constitution,  but  the  lower  elements  which  existed  in  the  embryo  con- 
tinue to  exist  in  the  matured  form,  though  overlaid  and  concealed  by 
the  higher  powers,  and  the  mature  man  retains  in  his  constitution 
the  elements  which  sympathize  with  all  animal  life,  and  which  some- 
times come  to  the  surface,  as  in  the  barking  and  biting  of  hydrophobia 
and  the  imitations  of  animals  practised  under  a  species  of  religious 
insanity  at  camp  meetings  in  our  early  history. 

Sarcognomy  has  brought  out  these  buried  elements  of  embryonic 
life  and  given  them  a  definite  location  on  the  legs,  corresponding  per- 
haps to  the  summit  of  the  spinal  column  and  portions  of  the  base  of 
the  brain. 

#The  utility  of  the  discovery  is  this  :  If  the  impressible  subject  can 
be  carried  back  to  the  aquatic  form  of  cold-blooded  life  by  exciting 
these  organs  on  the  body  he  may  be  carried  below  the  stage  of  inflam- 
mation and  fever. 

This,  I  believe,  is  one  of  the  most  important  discoveries  ever  made 
in  pathology  and  therapeutics,  for  in  all  very  impressible  persons  the 
aquatic  location  may  be  excited  until  they  feel  the  mental  stupor  or 
vacancy  of  mind,  the  blunted  sensibility,  and  the  inclination  to  an 
aquatic  life.  They  say  they  feel  like  lying  down  or  floating  in  the 
water.  The  respiration  is  greatly  diminished  as  well  as  the  mental 
action.     The  lungs  not  only  become  quiet,  but  lose  their  irritability, 


-4-  THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.         [CHAP.    XIII. 

and   all    inflammatory  or   irritative    conditions    of    the  lungs   arc  sub- 
dued. 

The  aquatic  region  of  the  leg,  then,  is  the  region  to  which  we  must 
look  for  the  cure  of  pneumonia  and  bronchitis  and  the  alleviation,  if 
not  cure,  of  consumption,  by  stimulating  the  tibial  region  or  by  gal- 
vanic currents  with  negative  rheophores  on  the  tibia,  or  by  manipula- 
tion. 

The  tibial  surface  of  the  legs,  then,  is  the  counter-agent  of  the  lungs 
and  to  a  considerable  extent  of  the  brain.  As  we  go  down  the  leg, 
the  antagonism  to  the  brain  increases,  and  on  the  upper  surface  of  the 
foot  mentality  is  arrested  and  respiration  also,  in  proportion  to  the 
strength  of  the  local  influence.  Thus  does  the  diseased  organ  secure 
a  tranquil  rest  and  freedom  from  inflammatory  action.  I  would  be 
much  obliged  to  nervauric  healers  for  exact  accounts  of  cases  of  pneu- 
monia and  bronchitis  treated  on  these  principles,  as  evidence  of  the 
extent  to  which  they  are  applicable.  The  experience  of  my  pupils 
already  is  sufficient  to  authorize  me  to  speak  with  confidence. 

The  aquatic  influence  may  subdue  the  inflammatory  condition  in 
the  lungs,  but  we  need  a  more  active  process  to  disperse  the  conges- 
tion which  is  the  most  formidable  difficulty,  and  this  we  have  in  Haemo- 
stasis.  Ligatures  around  the  thighs  and  shoulders,  compelling  the 
limbs  to  swell  with  accumulated  blood,  will  infallibly  deplete  the  con- 
gested lungs. 

On  the  other  hand,  when  the  lungs,  instead  of  being  oppressed  with 
inflammatory  congestion,  are  feeble,  anemic,  and  lacking  in  depth  of 
respiration,  they  are  benefited  by  stimulating  the  thigh  and  calf  of 
leg,  as  well  as  the  pulmonic  locality  in  the  dorsal  region,  and  the 
inspiratory  region  on  the  side  of  the  chest,  parallel  to  the  front  of  the 
arm.  The  thigh  is  especially  antagonistic  to  consumptive  tendencies, 
the  Inspiratory  region  to  the  asthmatic,  and  the  tibial  region  to  pneu- 
monia. 

The  entire  foot  is  the  anti-cephalic  region — the  bottom  of  the  foot 
corresponding  with  the  mineral  region  and  producing  a  feeling  of  dul- 
ness  and  extreme  heaviness.  Hence  protracted  Galvanic  currents  to 
the  soles  of  the  feet  are  liable  to  produce  depressing  and  injurious 
influences.  A  current  from  the  soles  of  the  feet  to  the  shoulders 
would  be  of  much  greater  general  utility. 

The  haemostatic  method,  shamefully  neglected  by  the  medical  pro- 
fession, may  be  practised  by  any  one,  but  it  is  far  inferior  to  the 
pneumatic  treatment  by  diminishing  atmospheric  pressure  and 
attracting  the  circulation  to  the  regions  treated,  a  method  called  by 
Dr.  Junod  H^emospasia,  or  attracting  the  blood  {hamo,  blood,  spasm, 
from   spaoy   drawing).      This   method,  when   the  medical    profession 


CHAP.    XIII.]       THE    ABDOMINAL    AND    CRURAL    REGIONS.  243 

becomes  liberal  and  medical  practice  scientific,  will  be  the  most  con- 
spicuous feature  of  the  practice.  Its  neglect  by  medical  colleges 
after  the  absolute  demonstration  of  its  power  is  one  of  the  most 
disgraceful  facts  of  medical  history.  Its  value  and  applicability,  how. 
ever,  can  be  fully  understood  only  by  those  who  have  mastered  Sar- 
cognomy.  To  them  it  is  invaluable,  and  it  is  indispensable  that  I 
should  devote  a  chapter  to  its  exposition,  after  studying  which  the 
reader  will  find  that  it  is  an  indispensable  aid  to  a  practice  guided  by 
Sarcognomy. 

P.  S.  —  In  the  engraving  on  page  227  the  tonic  region  T  should 
have  been  made  a  little  larger.  The  statement  that  the  posterior  por- 
tion or  parietal  lobule  is  devoted  to  the  lower  limbs  and  the  anterior 
to  the  upper,  has  no  foundation  in  my  experiments,  except  that  the 
posterior  portion  has  a  greater  degree  of  energy  and  is  consequently 
called  upon  in  locomotion.  There  is  no  direct  connection  of  these 
parts  with  special  muscles,  and  Dr.  Brown-Sequard  refers  to  a  case  in 
which  the  paralysis  according  to  the  theory  should  have  been  in  the 
lower  limbs,  but  was  really  in  the  upper.*  It  is  impossible  to  reduce 
the  cerebrum  in  any  upper  portion  to  a  set  of  motor  functions,  for  the 
functions  are  emotional  and  volitionary  —  not  muscular  functions,  but 
functions  by  which  the  muscular  system  is  sustained,  in  sustaining 
the  energy  of  the  brain,  which  is  more  important  than  muscle  to  hu- 
man energy. 

*  The  language  of  Brown-S^quard  in  his  lecture  at  the  Bellevue  College  1877  was 
as  follows  : 

"  In  the  neighborhood  of  the  median  line  and  a  little  posterior  is  a  center  said  to 
be  that  of  movement  of  the  leg.  Now,  Charcot  himself  published,  in  a  French  Jour- 
nal, with  a  number  of  admirable  woodcuts,  a  case  in  which  destruction  of  the  whole 
of  this  latter  portion  produced  paralysis  of  the  arm  instead  of  the  leg,  and  conse- 
quently this  would  show  that  the  center  of  movement  for  the  arm  was  located 
farther  backward  than  in  other  cases.  In  another  place  we  find  the  report  of  a  case 
in  which  there  was  disease  of  this  region  with  destruction  only  of  that  portion  in 
which  was  situated  the  center  for  the  arm,  but  there  was  paralysis  of  both  arm  and 
leg  of  the  opposite  side.  Everything  behind  the  fissure  of  Rolando  was  destroyed, 
and  in  such  a  case  we  ought  to  have  paralysis  of  the  leg  but  not  of  the  arm ;  but 
there  was  complete  hemiplegia." 

At  a  scientific  congress  held  in  Strasburg,  Prof.  Goltz  exhibited  a  dog  in  which 
he  had  destroyed  completely  the  so-called  motor  centers  of  the  brain,  without  pro- 
ducing any  paralysis,  although  the  animal  was  in  a  demented  condition. 


CHAPTER   XIV. 
PNEUMATIC  SARCOGNOMY. 

Exposition  of  Haemostasis  and  Dr.  Bucklers  experiments  —  Dr.  Bevier's  practice 

—  Drs.  Keltie  and  Robonan  —  Superiority  of  Haemospasia — Junod  and  Hahne- 
mann's case  —  Rationale  of  Haemospasia  —  Balloons  and  caissons  —  Effects  of  light 
and  heavy  pressure  on  muscular  and  nervous  systems  —  Origin  and  reception  of 
Junod's  discoveries  in  Haemospasia  —  Effects  of  Haemospasia  —  Summary  of  293 
cases  —  Professional  neglect — Description  of  its  success  in  thirty-three  cases  — 
Success  of  others  —  Its  enlargement  by  Sarcognomy  —  Special  treatment  described 

—  Treatment  of  spine — Aids  to  diagnosis  —  Various  effects  of  pneumatic  treat- 
ment—  Description  of  pneumatic  apparatus. 


Our  marvellous  revelation  from  the  leg  of  man's  relation  to  all 
below  him  in  creation,  and  the  possibility  of  his  subsidence  back 
toward  aquatic,  vegetative  and  mineral  conditions,  carried  with  it  the 
possibility  of  thus  escaping  from  some  of  the  evils  of  his  exalted  sen- 
sibility, and  suspending  pathological  processes  —  especially  those  of 
his  most  exalted  organs,  the  lungs  and  brain  —  by  sinking  below  the 
sphere  of  their  activity,  and  even  suspending  all  febrile  and  inflam- 
matory diseases  by  the  same  method  —  even  aborting  suddenly  the 
fevers  which  are  commonly  supposed  to  have  a  predestined  course 
admitting  only  of  palliation. 

I  have  long  been  teaching  that  all  this  may  be  done  by  drawing 
the  vital  forces  below  the  knee  in  impressible  constitutions  by  the 
nervauric  hand,  the  electric  or  magnetic  current,  and  any  efficient 
mechanical  means. 

The  most  efficient  mechanical  means  operate  by  controlling  the 
circulation,  withdrawing  it  from  organs  we  would  reduce  to  quiescence 
and  taking  it  to  those  that  should  predominate.  It  is  well  known 
that  this  may  be  done  by  controlling  and  changing  the  atmospheric 
pressure  ;  consequently  I  may  appeal  to  Aerotherapia  for  a  corrobo- 
rating demonstration  of  what  nervauric  healers  do  by  the  hand,  in 
dissipating  fevers  suddenly,  controlling  inflammations  and  relieving 
pneumonia,  meningitis,  and  many  cases  of  cerebral  affections  which 
medicines  do  not  control. 

Over  forty  years  ago  I  endeavored  to  call  the  attention  of  my 
pupils  to  the  mechanical  control  of  the  circulation  by  ligatures  and 
atmospheric  agencies,  but  the  very  limited  attention  which  this  sub- 
ject has  received  in  this  country  —  its  shameful  neglect  by  the  medi- 
cal profession  for  so  many  years,  induces  me  to  renew  my  appeal' in 
behalf  of  Haemostasis  or  Haemospasia,  not  only  as  an  illustration  of 
Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  but  as  an  indispensable  measure  in  scientific 
therapeutics,  which  I  desire  especially  to  see  adopted  by  those  whose 
progressive  spirit  leads  them  to  the  study  of  Sarcognomy,  for  these 
mechanical  measures  are  a  most  natural  adjunct  to  manual  nervauric 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  245 

and  electric  treatment,  and  often  accomplish  quickly  or  even  suddenly 
what  no  other  agencies  can  do. 

For  the  most  ample  and  scientific  development  of  this  subject  we 
are  indebted  to  Dr.  V.  T.  Junod,  of  Paris,  whose  early  and  indefati- 
gable labors,  dating  back  sixty  years,  have  given  to  Haemospasia  its 
general  acceptance  in  France,  and  were  crowned  by  the  Academy 
with  the  Montyon  prize  in  medicine  and  surgery  in  1870. 

As  my  own  attention  to  this  subject  was  first  attracted  by  the 
experiments  of  Dr.  Buckler,  of  Baltimore,  in  producing  Hasmostasis 
by  the  use  of  ligatures,  I  would  offer  the  reader  first  my  essay  on 
Hasmostasis,  a  simple  measure  which  can  be  practised  by  any  one 
without  apparatus. 

H^EMOSTASIS. 

As  the  object  of  manipulations,  electric  currents  and  massage  is 
or  should  be  to  change  the  distribution  of  blood  and  nervous  forces 
as  well  as  to  vitalize  and  stimulate  the  organs,  it  is  proper  that  I 
should  show  how  completely  we  may  accomplish  similar  results  by 
mechanical  means,  which  have  been  greatly  neglected  by  the  medical 
profession. 

There  are  simple  mechanical  means  (the  use  of  ligatures  and  atmos- 
pheric pressure)  which  give  us  that  positive  control  of  the  distribu- 
tion of  the  blood  which  no  other  means  or  measures  can  even  approxi- 
mate. The  control  of  the  blood,  holding  it  in  one  part  of  the  body  to 
divert  it  from  other  parts,  has  been  called  H^emostasis,  and  the  pro- 
duction of  such  effects  by  atmospheric  means,  or  Haemospasia,  has 
been  popularly  called  vacuum  treatment.  It  has  been  neglected  by 
the  medical  profession,  which  seems  to  be  governed  by  varying  fash- 
ions and  the  example  of  authority,  and  has  been  effectively  practised 
in  this  country  only  by  specialists.  Being  many  years  ago  in  consul- 
tation with  two  physicians  upon  a  case  of  pneumonia,  one  of  whom 
had  been  president  of  the  National  Medical  Association  and  the  other 
generally  esteemed  the  leading  physician  of  the  city,  I  found  them 
entirely  unacquainted  with  H^emostasis  ;  and  I  believe  it  has  not 
been  formally  taught  in  any  medical  college  in  this  country.  Cer- 
tainly it  has  been  ignored  in  medical  journals,  though  its  efficient 
presentation  was  made  over  fifty  years  ago  by  M.  Junod  in  Paris,  and 
soon  after  by  Dr.  Buckler,  of  Baltimore,  in  this  country. 

The  utility  and  practicability  of  Hasmostasis  by  ligatures  were 
first  displayed  in  this  country  by  Dr.  T.  H.  Buckler,  of  Baltimore,  in 
1843.  His  experiments  demonstrated  its  entire  sufficiency  as  a  sub- 
stitute for  blood-letting  and  as  a  method  of  producing  results  which 
nothing  but  Hasmostasis  can  accomplish.  No  physician  is  fully  pre- 
pared to  meet  the  difficulties  of  congestive  and  inflammatory  dis- 
eases who  does  not  understand  Hasmostasis  and  Hasmospasia. 


246  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

Dr.  Buckler's  attention  was  attracted  to  this  subject  by  the  case 
of  a  man  who  had  been  superstitiously  relieved  from  attacks  of  ague 
by  tying  eelskins  round  his  arm  just  before  the  approach  of  the 
chill.  Seeing  that  the  man's  arms  were  swelled  in  consequence  of 
the  eelskins  being  tight  as  ligatures  —  he  drew  the  rational  infer- 
ence that  this  withdrawal  of  blood  from  the  central  circulation  might 
have  been  the  means  of  cure  by  preventing  congestion.  Dr.  Buckler 
deserves  credit  for  thus  looking  at  such  a  case  as  a  philosopher, 
instead  of  treating  it  with  the  silent  contempt  with  which  physi- 
cians usually  regard  singular  facts  and  extraordinary  cures  ;  and 
although  there  is  nothing  in  the  results  of  Haemostasis  but  what 
a  knowledge  of  hydraulics  would  indicate,  it  is  an  important  service 
to  mankind  to  demonstrate  these  results  by  experiment. 

When  ligatures  are  applied  round  the  limbs  near  the  body  with 
a  pressure  sufficient  to  check  the  return  of  venous  blood,  but  not 
to  prevent  the  entrance  of  arterial  blood  in  the  limb,  the  veins  become 
greatly  swollen,  there  is  some  tingling  or  unpleasant  sensation  from 
the  distension,  and  the  surface  of  the  limb  becomes  finally  of  a  livid 
red,  as  if  it  had  been  in  an  air-pump. 

When  the  limbs  are  all  subjected  to  this  process  at  once,  the 
amount  of  blood  detained  in  them,  withdrawn  from  the  general  cir- 
culation, leaves  a  smaller  supply  for  the  heart,  the  head,  and  trunk, 
and  the  circulation  is  thus  so  greatly  reduced  in  force,  that  the 
energy  of  the  pulse  is  diminished,  the  head  feels  light  from  loss  of 
blood,  and  not  only  general  weakness  (and  sometimes  sickness  of 
stomach)  result,  but  in  the  anemic  it  may  even  be  carried  to  fainting. 
Perspiration  generally  breaks  out  and  every  internal  or  external 
congestion  or  inflammation  is  immediately  relieved,  as  was  formerly 
experienced  when  patients  were  bled  to  fainting,  with  the  signal 
advantage  that  no  blood  is  lost. 

The  amount  of  blood  that  can  be  controlled  in  this  way  is  differ- 
ent in  different  constitutions,  but  it  is  much  more  than  would  be 
controlled  by  any  moderate  bleeding,  and  produces  a  more  bene- 
ficial impression  on  the  disease. 

If  we  estimate  the  total  amount  of  blood  of  an  average  adult  at 
twenty  pounds,  and  the  proper  share  of  the  limbs  at  only  three 
tenths  of  the  whole  (six  pounds),  which  is  a  moderate  estimate,  a 
vigorous  Haemostasis,  by  enlarging  the  average  diameter  of  each  blood- 
vessel four  tenths,  would  about  double  their  entire  contents.  This 
would  withdraw  from  the  fourteen  pounds  conceded  to  the  head  and 
trunk  about  six  pounds,  reducing  the  quantum  of  blood  in  circula- 
tion from  fourteen  pounds  to  eight,  or  from  sixteen  pounds  to  ten  — 
thus  taking  away  three  sevenths. 


CHAP.     XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  247 

Even  if  we  increase  the  blood  in  the  limbs  only  fifty  per  cent,  we 
should  reduce  the  general  circulation  from  fourteen  pounds  to  eleven 
or  from  sixteen  pounds  to  thirteen  ;  which  is  more  than  surgeons 
accomplish  by  bleeding  and  cupping.  Dr.  Junod,  from  his  experi- 
ments, estimates  the  controllable  amount  at  one  hundred  and  thir- 
teen ounces.  The  experiments  of  Dr.  Buckler  fully  proved  the 
power  of  Haemostasis  ;  and  some  of  them  are  worth  narrating. 

A.  M.,  a  stout  negro  man  aged  twenty-eight,  apparently  in  per- 
fect health,  came  into  the  doctor's  office  and  wished  to  be  bled.  His 
pulse  was  75  and  soft.  All  the  limbs  being  well  and  firmly  liga- 
tured close  to  the  body,  the  veins  became  distended,  with  tingling  in 
the  limbs,  and  in  ten  minutes  a  profuse  diaphoresis  was  developed. 
The  pulse  was  85  and  softer  than  previously,  he  felt  giddy  and  light- 
headed. After  twenty  minutes  he  was  in  a  profuse  sweat,  with 
slower  respiration  and  occasionally  a  deep  breath. 

He  was  then  bled  in  the  median  basilic  vein  of  the  left  arm. 
Three  ounces  ran  out,  and  the  ligatures,  which  were  too  tight,  were 
loosened  to  let  the  blood  flow,  and  after  about  five  ounces  altogether 
were  lost,  the  man  fainted.  The  ligatures  were  taken  off  and  the 
man  laid  horizontally  ;  in  about  twenty  minutes  he  recovered  and 
sat  up  in  a  chair  without  the  ligatures,  when  he  was  .bled  ten  or 
twelve  ounces  without  fainting.  The  orifice  was  closed  and  the 
ligatures  put  on  again  and  he  quickly  fainted.  After  the  ligatures 
were  taken  off  he  recovered  strength  in  a  short  time.  This  case 
proves  that  a  loss  of  five  ounces  under  ligatures  may  produce  a 
much  greater  impression  than  the  loss  of  fifteen  or  seventeen  with- 
out Haemostasis. 

In  the  case  of  S.  M.,  a  negro  man  of  thirty-five,  of  middle  stature, 
accustomed  to  being  bled,  there  was  acute  inflammation  of  the  con- 
junctiva of  the  left  eye.  The  conjunctiva  was  excessively  injected 
and  the  eye  closed,  with  pain  in  the  temple,  some  photophobia,  loss 
of  appetite,  and  pulse  100.  To  see  if  Hsemostasis  would  blanch  the 
inflamed  eye,  the  ligatures  were  applied  to  the  limbs.  On  the  lower 
extremities  handkerchiefs  were  used,  tightened  by  twisting  with  a 
stick,  as  the  thighs  were  very  muscular. 

The  ligatures  made  him  sick  and  light-headed.  He  did  not  faint, 
but  the  conjunctiva  was  very  considerably  blanched.  A  free  orifice 
was  then  made  in  one  arm,  and  by  the  time  three  or  four  ounces  had 
escaped  the  man  fainted.  The  conjunctiva  was  greatly  changed, 
but  of  course  not  as  pale  as  the  healthy  eye.  The  bandages  being 
removed  and  the  man  laid  on  his  back,  he  recovered,  and  was  then 
bled  without  ligatures — about  twenty  ounces,  without  syncope.  Then 
the  handkerchiefs  were  twisted  tight  on  the  thighs  and  he  fainted 


2-j.S  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

again.  His  eye  was  greatly  relieved,  and  with  a  mild  collyrium  was 
entirely  well  in  a  few  days.  This  shows  that  a  twenty-four  ounce 
bleeding  without  ligatures  is  far  inferior  to  a  four-ounce  bleeding 
with  ligatures. 

E.  Blake,  a  laborer  twenty-four  years  of  age,  over  six  feet  high 
and  muscular,  had  a  chill  at  work,  and  next  day  called  for  treatment 
with  "  headache,  slight  cough,  pain  in  the  back,  a  slight  catarrh, 
white  tongue,  some  heat  of  skin,  pulse  90  full  and  hard."  As  he 
sat  on  the  bed,  the  ligatures  were  applied  and  drawn  tight.  His 
veins  were  large,  which  made  him  a  good  subject.  In  three  min- 
utes after  the  ligatures  were  fastened  he  had  a  slight  hiccough, 
tried  to  vomit,  fainted,  and  fell  back  in  complete  unconsciousness 
for  fifteen  minutes.  The  ligatures  were  loosened,  he  recovered 
with  a  slight  convulsion,  opened  his  eyes  as  if  he  had  been  asleep, 
and  when  fully  restored  said,  "  I'd  rather  be  bled  twenty  times  than 
have  them  things  put  on  me  again." 

He  was  then  bled  from  the  arm  fifteen  ounces  without  the  liga- 
tures and.  felt  rather  faint  and  lay  down.  When  he  felt  recovered, 
the  ligatures  were  tightened  on  his  thighs  as  he  lay,  and  in  two 
minutes  he  fainted  and  was  left  for  ten  minutes  unconscious.  Then 
the  ligatures  were  loosened  and  he  recovered  with  a  twitch  and 
drank  some  water. 

This  case  shows  that  ligatures  alone  were  far  more  powerful  than 
a  fifteen-ounce  bleeding. 

The  best  illustration  of  the  power  of  Haemostasis  was  in  the  case 
of  C.  P.,  a  negro  chambermaid,  aged  twenty-three,  robust  and  tall, 
and  always  in  good  health  until  the  present  attack  of  pneumonia. 

Coming  from  a  hot,  crowded  room  through  a  cold  damp  atmos- 
phere, without  sufficient  clothing,  she  was  taken  with  an  icy  cold- 
ness of  the  whole  body  through  the  most  of  the  succeeding  day, 
followed  at  night  by  "  aching  and  soreness  in  all  her  limbs,  violent 
pain  in  the  back,  and  severe  headache."  Next  day  Dr.  Buckler  saw 
her  with  violent  headache,  soreness  of  limbs,  great  weakness  and 
slight  cough,  but  no  expectoration.  His  treatment  was  by  blood- 
letting and  antimony,  taking  on  the  first  day  fifteen  ounces,  on  the 
second  twelve  ounces,  on  the  third  ten  ounces,  with  a  little  calomel 
and  ipecac. 

The  symptoms  of  pneumonia  progressively  developed  and  went 
right  on  toward  a  fatal  result  without  the  slightest  benefit  from  his 
treatment.  She  had  no  sleep  from  the  beginning,  her  tongue  was 
white  and  dry,  pulse  120  and  corded,  countenance  exceedingly 
anxious,  blood  with  inflammatory  buff,  bronchophony  and  bron- 
chial   respiration    marked,    dulness    over    lower    half    of   left    lung 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY-  249 

behind  and  fine  crepitation  in  other  parts  of  it  ;  a  coarse  rhonchus 
is  heard,  and  the  vesicular  murmur  absent  in  lower  half  of  left  lung-. 

The  patient  being  unable  to  sit  up,  and  death  apparently  impending, 
the  ligatures  were  then  applied  on  the  upper  part  of  each  thigh. 

As  soon,  as  they  were  fastened,  she  complained  of  weakness  and 
sick  stomach.  The  pulse  became  softer  and  less  frequent,  the  skin 
relaxed. 

She  complained  of  numbness  in  the  legs  in  an  hour  after  the  liga- 
tures were  applied,  and  the  limbs  were  much  gorged. 

The  medicine  was  stopped  and  the  case  left  to  the  ligatures  alone. 
They  were  kept  on  twelve  hours,  and  during  that  time  she  got  three 
hours'  sleep,  the  first  sleep  since  her  attack.  The  pulse  was  100  and 
soft,  the  skin  soft  and  natural,  tongue  moist,  countenance  cheerful 
and  bright,  and  she  said  she  felt  much  better.  The  lungs  gave  better 
symptoms  to  auscultation. 

The  ligatures  were  renewed,  to  be  kept  on  until  painful.  Next 
day  she  was  better,  coughed  and  expectorated  freely.  The  treatment 
by  ligature  was  kept  up,  being  once  kept  on  fourteen  hours  at  a  time. 
They  kept  down  the  pulse  and  kept  the  skin  in  good  condition.  She 
steadily  improved  without  medicine,  using  only  barley  water,  and  was 
well  on  the  seventh  day  after  medicine  had  been  dropped  to  rely  on 
ligatures  alone. 

What,  then,  is  the  power  of  Haemostasis  by  ligature?  I  have  no 
doubt  there  are  a  great  many  congestions  and  inflammations  which 
Haemostasis  alone  will  cure  without  medicine.  It  is  properly  applic- 
able to  every  case  of  inflammation  and  congestion  which  is  not  in  the 
limbs,  and  pre-eminently  useful  in  pneumonia,  pleurisy,  erysipelas, 
inflammation  of  the  brain,  meningitis,  hepatitis,  peritonitis,  inflamma- 
tion of  the  bowels,  cerebro-spinal  meningitis,  and  other  affections  of 
the  brain. 

In  the  practice  of  surgery,  too,  it  is  of  immense  value,  for  it  enables 
us  to  hold  the  blood  under  control  and  reduce  haemorrhage  to  a  mere 
trifle. 

In  the  amputation  of  a  limb  it  is  the  duty  of  the  surgeon  to  drive 
out  the  blood  that  little  or  none  may  be  lost  by  the  amputation.  A 
bandage  firmly  applied  from  the  very  extremity  may  so  thoroughly 
expel  the  blood  that  we  may  almost  say  none  is  lost,  and  the  consti- 
tution will  therefore  be  more  plethoric  than  before  the  amputation. 

But  in  operations  which  do  not  admit  of  this  precaution,  Haemosta- 
sis efficiently  applied  will  so  effectually  reduce  the  force  of  the  circu- 
lation as  to  prevent  any  serious  haemorrhage  —  the  vessels  readily 
closing  when  the  impulse  of  the  blood  is  slight.  In  haemorrhage 
from  wounds  or  rupture  of  blood-vessels,  Haemostasis  by  ligature  is  a 
prompt  and  convenient  remedy. 


25O  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

Uterine  hemorrhage,  it  is  well  known,  can  be  promptly  controlled 
by  compressing  the  abdominal  aorta.  Baudelocque  was  honored  by 
the  French  Institute  for  the  suggestion  of  compressing  the  abdominal 
aorta  in  cases  of  uterine  hemorrhage,  an  operation  which  not  only 
suspends  the  hemorrhage  but  rouses  the  patient  by  restoring  blood  to 
the  general  circulation.  Uterine  hemorrhage  could  also  be  dimin- 
ished or  suppressed  by  Haemostasis  on  the  limbs  sufficient  to  reduce 
the  force  of  the  circulation. 

I  do  not  know  to  what  extent  my  pupils  have  practised  Haemostasis, 
but  the  following  statement  from  one  of  them  is  a  good  illustration  of 
its  value  :  — 

"  Having  heard  from  your  lectures  in  the  Institute  an  explanation 
of  the  principles  and  practice  of  Haemostasis,  I  have  since  endeavored 
in  my  practice  to  apply  that  measure  to  the  relief  of  my  patients, 
with  remarkably  satisfactory  results.  In  epilepsy,  puerperal  and 
other  convulsions,  and  especially  such  as  seemed  to  require  depletion 
and  were  not  in  a  condition  to  receive  anything  into  the  stomach,  I 
have  found  it  most  applicable.  In  such  cases  the  ligatures  appeared 
to  make  a  greater  impression  than  antispasmodics,  depletion,  or  any 
other  agency.  I  have  applied  the  ligatures  in  a  number  of  cases 
which  I  believe  would  have  proved  fatal  if  that  measure  had  not  been 
used.  I  have  employed  the  ligatures  until  the  convulsions  were 
arrested,  when  I  would  loosen  them,  and  if  there  were  any  symptoms 
of  returning  convulsions,  would  tighten  them  again.  In  this  way  I 
have  sometimes  retained  the  ligatures  on  the  limbs  for  twelve  or 
twenty-four  hours  without  intermission.  The  continuance  of  their 
use  for  this  length  of  time  did  not  appear  to  produce  any  bad  conse- 
quences whatever.  The  congestion  in  the  limbs  was  soon  relieved  by 
the  course  of  nature.  At  the  same  time  that  the  ligatures  were  used 
I  employed  cathartic  evacuants,  footbaths,  and  antispasmodics,  but 
found  the  ligatures  of  more  value  than  all  the  other  means. 

"  After  the  convulsions  were  arrested  by  the  ligatures  I  found  the 
continued  use  of  the  antispasmodics,  with  some  tonics,  successful  in 
*  preventing  their  tendency  to  return. 

"  In  the  case  of  a  girl  of  eighteen  with  epileptic  convulsions,  I  used 
as  antispasmodics  the  sulphuric  ether,  valerian,  castor,  macrotys, 
asafcetida  and  lobelia,  with  cathartics,  without  any  decided  success  in 
controlling  the  symptoms,  and  it  appeared  probable  that  the  result 
would  be  fatal,  when  I  resorted  to  the  use  of  the  ligatures,  which 
arrested  the  convulsions  at  once.  As  soon  as  the  ligatures  were  loos- 
ened the  convulsions  manifested  a  disposition  to  return,  and  they  were 
therefore  kept  upon  her  limbs  for  about  thirty-six  hours,  which  com- 
pletely arrested  the  convulsions.     After  this,  by  the  use  of  macrotys, 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  25 1 

valerian,  and  lobelia,  together  with  some  tonics,  she  was  effectively- 
cured. 

"  Since  I  have  adopted  the  practice  of  Haemostasis  I  have  resorted  to 
its  use  in  all  convulsive  cases  that  appeared  to  require  it,  and  invari- 
ably with  success.  I  have  also  used  it  with  satisfactory  results  in 
some  inflammatory  cases,  in  which  it  evidently  contributed  to  remove 
the  congestion  and  lessen  the  determination  of  blood  to  the  inflamed 
organ.  William  Bevier. 

"Salem,  Steuben  Co.,  Indiana,  June  21,  185 1 ." 

There  are  other  mechanical  means  of  controlling  the  circulation. 
Undue  determination  to  the  brain  may  be  easily  controlled  by  com- 
pressing the  carotids.  When  due  to  hypertrophied  conditions  of  the 
heart,  it  may  be  controlled  by  quieting  the  heart  through  the  brain  or 
the  shoulders,  if  sufficient  impressibility  exists,  or  by  a  sedative  medi- 
cine such  as  cereus. 

Acting  upon  the  jugular  veins  has  a  different  effect.  All  com- 
pression of  the  jugulars  is  oppressive,  producing  congestion  and 
inviting  apoplexy  by  the  congestion  and  the  softening  effect  of 
venous  blood.  Hence  the  injurious  effects  of  tight  cravats  and  collars. 
Compressing  one  jugular  vein  is  not  so  injurious,  as  it  tends  to  in- 
crease the  flow  through  the  other.  Rapid  manipulation  down  the 
jugulars  has  a  remarkably  fine  effect,  relieving  the  brain  of  oppres- 
sion, clearing  the  mind,  relieving  mental  oppression  and  headache. 

In  the  practice  of  Haemostasis  it  is  essential  that  the  blood-vessels 
should  be  in  a  distensible  condition,  and  that  the  volume  of  blood  should 
not  be  sufficient  to  distend  the  vessels  ;  for  if  the  vessels  are  already 
tightly  filled  with  blood,  and  their  structure  too  firm  to  yield,  but  little 
change  could  be  made  by  ligatures,  and  the  operation  would  be  inef- 
fectual. This  is  the  case  when  the  blood-vessels  of  the  limbs  are 
firmly  contracted  by  cold,  for  the  small  blood-vessels  require  but  little 
contractile  energy  to  resist  the  whole  force  of  the  cardiac  impulse.  It 
is  indispensable,  therefore,  that  the  limbs  should  be  thoroughly  warm; 
but  even  when  warm,  the  constitutions  of  some  subjects  are  so  firm 
that  the  blood-vessels  resist  expansion  more  than  is  desirable,  and 
sedative,  relaxing  treatment  may  be  required.  The  warm  bath  will 
be  valuable,  and  a  nauseating  dose  of  lobelia  or  ipecac  will  be  a  safe 
relaxant. 

The  facility  of  controlling  the  blood  is  greater  when  the  patient  is 
anemic,  and  if  he  combines  anemia  with  soft  distensible  tissues,  it 
will  not  be  difficult  to  cause  him  to  faint  by  the  ligatures.  It  will  be 
desirable,  if  the  patient  is  at  all  plethoric,  to  reduce  the  volume  of 
his  blood  by  diuretics  and  sudorifics  or  even  hydragogue  cathartics. 


252  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

When  the  volume  of  the  blood  is  thus  reduced  and  the  patient  in  a 
warm,  relaxed  condition,  Haemostasis  is  very  potent,  and  I  am  confi- 
dent that  if  all  other  remedies  had  been  abandoned  in  the  treatment 
of  pneumonia,  relying  upon  Haemostasis  alone,  the  mortality  would 
have  been  less  than  it  has  been. 

The  method  of  Dr.  Buckler  was  the  same  as  that  recommended  by 
Mr.  Kellie,'  a  naval  surgeon,  at  the  close  of  the  last  century,  as  a  pre- 
ventive of  intermittent  fever.  In  Duncan's  "  Medical  Commentaries  " 
for  1794  he  published  several  instances  in  which  he  had  used  it  with 
success.  "  He  applied  the  instrument  to  the  arm  of  one  side  and  the 
thigh  of  the  other."  Experiments  were  made  early  in  the  19th  cen- 
tury by  Dr.  Robonam  in  the  use  of  circular  ligatures  against  inter- 
mittent fevers,  with  a  favorable  result.  "  The  ligatures  were  applied  to 
the  arm,  and  made  sufficiently  tight  to  interrupt  the  superficial  circu- 
lation and  retard  that  of  the  more  deep-seated  vessels.  As  soon  as 
the  extremities  began  to  redden,  the  patient  felt  easier  and  the  symp- 
toms of  the  approaching  paroxysm  abated,  the  cold  and  trembling 
ceased,  the  pulse  became  more  free,  etc.  Nearly  in  all  the  cases  Dr. 
R.  found  two  or  three  applications  of  the  ligature  were  sufficient  to 
suppress  the  fever."  He  considered  the  beginning  of  the  cold  stage 
the  best  time  for  the  application,  when  they  were  nearly  sure  to  sup- 
press the  attack.  In  the  middle  of  the  paroxysm  they  had  much  less 
effect.  It  was  sometimes  necessary  to  loosen  the  ligatures  in  conse- 
quence of  producing  syncope. 

Notwithstanding  the  long-continued  neglect  of  Haemostasis  by  the 
profession,  Haemospasia  was  prominently  introduced  in  Paris  by  M. 
Junod,  beginning  in  1833,  who  used  the  pneumatic  method,  and  was 
twice  favorably  commended  by  the  Academy  and  the  Montyon  prize 
awarded  twice. 

PNEUMATIC  HAEMOSPASIA. 

While  mechanical  Haemostasis  is  so  convenient,  prompt  and  effec- 
tive, it  is  far  inferior  in  value  to  the  Haemospasia  by  modifying 
atmospheric  pressure.  This  has  long  been  practised  on  a  small  scale 
by  dry  cupping,  which  has  a  marvellous  efficiency  in  relieving  circum- 
scribed neuralgia,  pain,  or  inflammation,  wherever  there  is  a  surface 
suitable  for  capping. 

The  first  application  of  the  pneumatic  method  on  a  larger  scale 
was  by  Dr.  Junod,  of  Paris,  who,  a  few  years  before  the  experiments  of 
Dr.  Buckler,  constructed  a  metallic  boot  to  take  in  the  leg  and  draw 
the  blood  into  it  by  the  suction  of  an  air-pump  exhausting  the  air 
from  the  boot,  an  India-rubber  band  making  a  close  fit  between  the 
top  of  the  boot  and  the  leg. 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGXOMY.  253 

The  "  British  Journal  of  Homoeopathy  "  gave  an  account  of  Junod's 
operations  and  of  a  case  attended  by  Hahnemann,  who  had  tried 
homoeopathic  treatment  for  nearly  a  year  without  success,  and  finally 
called  in  Dr.  Junod  with  his  pneumatic  apparatus,  of  which  he  had  a 
high  opinion. 

The  patient  was  a  young  English  lady,  daughter  of  an  earl  formerly 
an  ambassador  at  a  European  court.     The  Journal  says  :  — 

"  This  lady  had  long  been  affected  with  a  most  curious  and  sad 
disease.  She  had  entirely  lost  the  use  of  her  limbs,  and  lay  constantly! 
on  a  couch,  her  head  generally  supported  by  an  attendant's  arms. 
She  seemed  to  be  entirely  destitute  of  any  power  of  volition,  never 
spoke  except  when  roused,  lay  constantly  in  a  half-comatose  state, 
the  face  being  very  much  flushed  and  the  head  very  hot.  Evidently  she 
labored  under  severe  congestion  of  the  brain.  She  was  under  Hahne- 
mann's treatment  ;  he  went  to  see  her  very  frequently,  in  fact  was  in 
almost  constant  attendance  upon  her,  but  was  unable  to  produce  any 
favorable  result  ;  and  after  nearly  a  year  of  ineffectual  homoeopathic 
treatment,  Hahnemann  called  in  Dr.  Junod  to  his  assistance.  When 
they  met  together  beside  the  patient,  Hahnemann  said,  "  Now,  Dr. 
Junod,  you  shall  operate  on  the  legs  and  I  on  the  stomach."  After 
the  first  application  of  the  boot  the  patient  roused  up,  addressed 
those  around  her,  and  chatted  familiarly  and  quite  sensibly  with  her 
friends  ;  her  face  assumed  a  natural  color,  and  to  the  surprise  of  all 
she  was  able  to  walk  about  the  room,  a  thing  which  she  had  not  done 
for  a  very  long  time.  After  ten  applications  of  the  boot,  in  ten  suc- 
cessive days,  the  patient  was  perfectly  cured  and  was  able  to  travel 
into  the  country,  where  she  remained  perfectly  free  from  all  symp- 
toms of  her  former  complaint  and  was  able  to  take  a  considerable 
amount  of  walking  exercise." 

In  my  medical  lectures  at  Cincinnati  I  continued  to  urge  the 
importance  and  practicability  of  pneumatic  Haemostasis  on  a  large 
scale,  and  at  length  two  physicians  at  Lexington  commenced  the 
construction  and  use  of  apparatus  calculated  to  take  in  not  only  a 
single  limb  but  the  entire  person,  and  every  separate  organ  or  por- 
tion of  the  surface. 

When  the  whole  person  is  taken  in,  leaving  out  the  head,  it  with- 
draws the  circulation  from  the  head  and  produces  an  invigorating 
influence  on  the  constitution,  which  has  been  highly  beneficial  in 
paralytic  conditions  and  in  intermittent  fever.  The  pneumatic 
treatment  has  been  introduced  successfully  in  several  cities  by  phy- 
sicians who  have  made  it  a  specialty,  and  its  beneficial  effects  have 
surpassed  all  expectation.  It  is  very  successful  in  neuralgia  or 
local  pain,  in  tumors,  and  in   paralytic  affections.     The  diversity  of 


254  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMV.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

its  successful  applications  is  so  great  that  we  are  compelled  to 
regard  it  as  a  general  stimulant  to  vitality,  operating  by  diminish- 
ing the  resistance  to  the  circulation  and  thus  increasing  the  vital 
energy  of  every  organ  to  which  it  is  applied  ;  consequently  restor- 
ing or  developing  organs  that  are  impaired,  and,  if  powerfully  con- 
centrated on  any  region  of  the  body,  giving  that  region  a 
predominance  in  the  vital  functions  ;  as,  when  applied  upon  the  leg, 
developing  functions  which  antagonize  inflammation  and  active  dis- 
eases. 

The  rationale  of  pneumatic  treatment,  either  for  relieving  conges- 
tion or  for  stimulation  and  invigoration,  is  not  mysterious.  By  dim- 
inishing the  atmospheric  pressure  we  diminish  the  friction  of  the 
circulating  blood,  and  thus  promote  the  circulation  through  the  part, 
while  we  also  draw  the  blood  from  other  parts.  The  cupping  glass 
applied  over  any  morbid  part  draws  the  blood  from  it  to  the  surface, 
and  thus  diminishes  the  congestion  of  inflamed  organs,  enabling 
them  to  recover  a  normal  condition. 

Diminishing  the  entire  pressure  of  the  atmosphere,  as  when  we 
ascend  a  mountain,  facilitates  the  circulation  throughout  the  body, 
thus  producing  the  feeling  of  exhilaration  that  most  persons  experi- 
ence on  mountain  heights  and  which  we  also  experience  in  the  dim- 
inished atmospheric  pressure  that  precedes  a  storm  ;  an  exhilaration 
that  is  shown  in  the  sprightly  movements  of  our  domestic  animals 
as  a  storm  approaches.  This  is  due  to  the  stimulation  of  the  ner- 
vous system,  especially  the  brain. 

According  to  the  laws'  of  Pathognomy  there  is  a  correspondence 
between  the  upper  regions  of  the  body  and  brain  and  the 
upper  regions  of  the  atmosphere.  The  same  correspondence 
exists  between  the  lower  regions  of  the  atmosphere  and  the 
lower  regions  of  the  brain  and  body.  That  is  to  say,  the  lighter 
condition  of  the  higher  atmosphere  is  congenial  to  the  brain  and 
lungs  but  not  to  the  muscles.  The  lungs  expand  greatly,  the  car- 
bonic acid  escapes  more  easily,  and  the  brain  has  a  clearer  and  brighter 
condition  —  a  condition  favorable  to  health  and  the  nobler  elements 
of  character.  The  heavier  pressure  of  the  lower  strata  is  favorable 
to  the  animal  functions  —  to  muscularity  and  digestion,  but  not  so 
favorable  to  the  brain.  This  effect  becomes  still  more  marked  as 
the  compression  increases,  and  the  opposite  effect  as  it  diminishes. 
Hence  we  may  go  so  high  in  the  air  as  to  prostrate  entirely  the 
physical  constitution  or  descend  so  low  as  to  oppress  the  brain.  At 
the  height  of  three  miles  the  atmosphere  loses  half  its  weight  or 
pressure,  and  human  beings  lose  nearly  all  their  strength.  A  bal- 
loon may  ascend   so  high  as  to  be  fatal  to  its  passengers  —  which 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SAKCOGNOMY.  255 

was  almost  realized  in  a  high  ascent  by  Mr.  Glaisher.  He  was  in 
a  state  of  paralytic  helplessness  at  a  height  of  37,000  feet. 

On  the  other  hand,  by  descending  under  the  water  in  diving-bells 
or  caissons  men  may  work  vigorously,  but  there  is  an  oppression  of 
the  brain  liable  to  result  in  paralysis,  as  was  proved  in  the  submar- 
ine work  when  the  St.  Louis  bridge  over  the  Mississippi  was  con- 
structed. The  supervising  physician  himself  had  a  brief  attack  of 
paralysis  from  entering  the  caisson.*  We  may  therefore  produce 
important  effects  by  either  condensed  or  rarefied  air. 

The  extensive  submarine  constructions  in  France,  England  and 
the  United  States  have  furnished  abundant  facts  confirmatory  of  the 
principles  of  pathognomic  science  —  the  law  that  elevation  in  the 
atmosphere  (with  diminished  pressure)  corresponds  to  the  nature  of 
the  brain  and  nervous  system,  depression  (with  increased  pressure) 
to  the  nature  of  the  muscular  and  abdominal  functions.  Thus  the 
men  in  the  caisson  structures  worked  with  ease,  and  could  ascend 
the  ladders  or  stairways  with  ease  under  the  increased  pressure,  but, 
when  the  ascent  was  made,  after  they  had  gotten  out  of  the  con- 
densed air  it  was  very  fatiguing  and  injurious. 

The  damaging  effects  upon  the  nervous  system  produced  by  exces- 
sive pressure  may  serve  to  indicate  by  antithesis  the  beneficial  effects 
of  a  lighter  atmosphere.  These  were  oppressive  congestions  of  the 
brain  and  spinal  cord,  paralysis  of  sensation  and  motion,  and  severe 
neuralgias,  chiefly  of  the  lower  limbs  and  lower  part  of  spine,  but 
sometimes  including  the  upper  limbs,  the  nasal  and  maxillary  regions. 
These  are  affections  in  which  pneumatic  treatment  has  proved 
especially  beneficial.  Mental  dulness,  incoherence  of  speech,  stam- 
mering, a  tottering  gait,  impairment  of  taste,  smell,  and  touch,  are 
among  the  symptoms  reported  in  France  ;  fifteen  per  cent,  of  the 
patients  at  New  York  were  paralyzed,  and  61  per  cent,  under  the 
heavier  pressure  at  the   St.   Louis   bridge. 

Whatever  antagonizes  the  brain  must  also  antagonize  the  surface,  as 
I  have  shown  in  the  pathological  illustrations.  Accordingly  we  find 
the  enormous  pressure  of  the  caissons  —  thirty,  forty,  or  more  pounds 
to  the  inch  —  produces  a  pale,  bloodless  condition  of  the  surface.  The 
face  shows  its  pallidness  for  at  least  fifteen  minutes  after  coming  out  of 

♦The  effects  of  heavy  air  pressure  were  tested  at  the  construction  of  the  St.  Louis 
bridge,  the  caissons  being  sunk  until  a  pressure  of  fifty  pounds  to  the  inch  was  pro- 
duced. Thirty  out  of  352  workmen  were  seriously  affected.  ;;nd  twelve  of  these 
died.  Half  of  these,  however,  were  persons  not  fit  to  undergo  the  exposure.  The 
effect  of  the  pressure,  when  too  long  continued,  was  debility  ending  in  paralysis. 
Paralysis  of  the  lower  limbs  appeared  in  some  on  reaching  a  depth  of  sixty  feet; 
the  paralysis  sometimes  affected  the  arms  also,  and  sometimes  the  bowels  and 
sphincters.  The  superintending  physician,  Dr.  Jaminet,  descended  over  ninety 
feet,  remaining  two  hours  and  three  quarters,  and  was  dangerously  attacked  soon 
after  reaching  home.  Experience  showed  the  necessity  of  reducing  the  time  the 
men  were  under  pressure,  and  it  was  finally  reduced  to  one  hour. 


256  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

the  pressure.  The  hands  have  a  shrivelled  appearance,  the  veins  dis- 
appearing. A  very  troublesome  itching  of  the  skin  has  been  fre- 
quently mentioned  as  a  common  complaint. 

Young  men  of  strong,  compact  constitutions  have  endured  the 
heavy  pressure  of  the  caisson  with  very  little  injury,  by  going  in 
and  coming  out  slowly,  but  those  more  advanced  in  life  have  suffered 
much  more,  and  those  of  a  stout;  corpulent  habit  have  suffered  far 
more  than  those  of  a  spare  habit,  in  whom  the  nervous  system  has  a 
relatively  greater  control  of  the  constitution. 

That  the  "caisson  disease,"  as  it  has  been  called,  was  due  to  the 
injury  of  the  nervous  system  by  enormous  pressure  was  shown  not 
only  by  the  cerebral  and  spinal  congestions  observed,  in  the  autop- 
sies, but  by  the  character  of  the  remedies.  Hot  coffee  and  nourish- 
ing food  were  recommended  to  the  laborers.  Strong  stimulants 
were  used  at  St.  Louis,  and  morphine  was  relied  upon  at  New  York, 
though  ergot  was  also  used  on  account  of  its  power  over  the  brain 
and  spinal  cord,  to  relieve  their  congestions. 

The  moral  to  be  derived  from  these  observations  is  that  while  the 
low  valleys  and  the  seaside  or  sea-voyage  may  favor  the  digestive 
and  muscular  system,  the  highest  tone  of  health  and  best  condition 
of  the  nervous  system  and  lungs  will  be  attained  on  the  highest 
inland  elevations,  and  a  plateau  elevated  from  two  to  five  thousand 
feet  above  the  ocean  will  prove  the  most  desirable  residence. 

Those  in  whom  the  nervous  system  has  been  active,  but  the  mus- 
cular and  digestive  at  fault,  may  be  benefited  in  lowland  situations 
on  the  sea-shore  and  by  sea-voyages  ;  but  those  in  whom  the  nervous 
system  alone  is  exhausted  and  oppressed,  will  find  restoration  in 
the  mountains,  which  are  generally  beneficial  to  those  in  whom  the 
upper  portion  of  the  brain  is  large. 

Working  under  the  heavy  pressure  of  thirty  to  sixty  pounds  to 
the  inch,  a  great  increase  of  appetite  and  digestion  was  experienced, 
and  the  urinary  secretion  was  notably  increased.  Cases  of  dyspep- 
sia were  benefited,  and  the  pulse  was  made  slower.  But  the  ner- 
vous system  suffered  as  much  as  the  animal  functions  were 
stimulated.  A  pressure  of  about  a  hundred  pounds  to  the  inch 
proves  fatal  to  small  animals,  and  the  pressure  in  the  caissons  at  the 
St.  Louis  and  New  York  bridges  was  fatal  in  a  number  of  cases. 
The  damaging  effects  were  realized  in  the  nervous  system,  in  con- 
gestions of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord,  severe  neuralgias,  and  paralysis. 
In  some  cases  there  was  congestion  of  the  lungs,  one  of  which  was 
suddenly  fatal. 

The  pulse,  which  corresponds  with  nervous  excitability,  is  some- 
times checked  by  the  pressure.     M.  Pol,  in  descending  into  a  mine 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  257 

at  Douchy,  found  his  pulse  sink  from  70  to  55  per  minute,  and  on 
coming  out  to  rise  again  to  85.  But  as  a  general  rule  the  increased 
resistance  or  friction  of  the  circulation  under  a  heavy  pressure  pro- 
duces an  embarrassment  which  compels  a  more  forcible  action  and 
a  hardening  of  the  pulse  almost  to  a  wiry  character  which  corre- 
sponds to  muscular  action.  Under  the  diminished  pressure  of  higher 
altitudes,  the  pulse  loses  its  muscular  character  and  becomes  softer 
and  more  frequent,  while  the  heart  freed  from  obstruction  propels 
the  blood  with  greater  ease,  animating  each  organ,  until  the  pressure 
is  reduced  too  low. 

That  increased  atmospheric  pressure  promotes  the  energy  of  the 
muscular  system,  but  reduces  that  of  its  antagonist  the  nervous  system 
is  demonstrable  in  the  ordinary  phenomena  of  life.  Intense  muscu- 
lar action  produces  great  pressure  of  blood  and  energy  of  cardiac  action 
under  which  the  brain  receives  an  increased  pressure,  but  is  also  ex- 
hausted by  the  muscular  action.  The  best  action  of  the  brain  is  when 
it  is  relieved  from  this  pressure  by  a  state  of  tranquillity  which  suits 
its  higher  powers,  while  a  state  of  pressure  is  suitable  to  the  passions 
and  to  muscular  exertion.  Tiedemann  made  a  very  perfect  demonstra- 
tion of  this  by  experiment  on  the  hearts  of -frogs.  He  placed  the 
heart  of  a  frog,  freshly  cut  out  of  the  body,  under  the  receiver  of  an 
air-pump,  withdrawing  the  air  ;  the  pulsations  became  weaker  and 
slower,  and  in  thirty  seconds  ceased.  (For  the  same  reason  the 
vigor  of  the  heart  fails  when  we  ascend  two  and  a  half  or  three  miles.) 
Five  minutes  later,  air  being  admitted,  the  pulsations  were  renewed. 
This  experiment  was  several  times  repeated,  with  the  same  result. 
A  heart  suspended  in  the  air  continued  in  motion  for  an  hour. 
Under  pressure  from  the  air-pump,  the  action  of  the  heart  became 
stronger  and  quicker.  "  Under  three  atmospheres  it  beat  strongly 
for  twenty  mnutes,  and  continued  to  beat  for  more  than  an  hour 
when  removed  from  the  air-pump." 

Since  my  attention  has  been  given  to  the  labors  of  Junod,  whose 
apparatus  for  Haemospasia  does  not  arrest  the  circulation,  I  find  in  his 
practice  not  only  a  grand  therapeutic  method,  but  a  very  successful 
demonstration  of  what  I  have  claimed  for  the  subhuman  power  of 
the  extremities  as  a  refuge  from  fever  and  inflammation  —  from 
cephalic  and  pulmonary  diseases.  His  achievements  certainly  entitle 
him  to  rank  among  the  greatest  benefactors  of  therapeutic  science, 
and  they  have  been  duly  honored,  his  method  having  been  recom- 
mended to  all  hospital  establishments  of  France  by  a  ministerial 
decree  in  1843  — a  fact  which  renders  its  neglect  in  the  United  States 
highly  discreditable.  His  methods  embraced  not  only  Hrcmospasia, 
Vbnt  baths   of  compressed  and  rarefied  air.     He  began  experiments 


258  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

in  1829  with  a  chamber  for  applying  compressed  and  rarefied  air. 
His  experiments  indicated  that  a  rarefaction  reducing  the  pressure 
of  the  air  one  fourth  was  generally  the  best  application,  as  beyond 
this  it  produced  the  debility  of  high  mountain  locations. 

In  treating  a  case  of  meningitis,  considered  hopeless,  which  had  been 
sent  to  him  by  a  physician,  it  occurred  to  him  to  try  the  reduced  pres- 
sure locally  on  the  leg.  Two  treatments  wrought  a  cure,  and  thus  he 
was  introduced  to  the  wonders  of  Haemospasia.  With  this  new  idea 
he  visited  many  hospitals  and  colleges  for  its  introduction,  meeting 
with  great  success.  His  views  were  presented  to  the  Academie  des 
Sciences  in  six  valuable  papers,  in  which  he  showed  the  superiority  of 
Haemospasia  to  bloodletting  and  some  other  fashionable  measures. 
"Finally,"  he  says,  "I  showed  how  to  produce  abundant  perspiration  by 
lowering  the  internal  and  external  temperature  of  the  body,  instead 
of  raising  it  — a  resource  hitherto  unknown  in  therapeutics."  In  1854 
a  favorable  report  was  made  on  the  use  of  his  method  in  cholera,  and 
a  gold  medal  awarded  him.  In  1851  he  visited  Great  Britain  and 
successfully  introduced  his  methods  in  the  hospitals.  He  was  active 
at  London  and  Constantinople  in  introducing  his  measures  during 
the  prevalence  of  cholera,  and  in  1870  his  second  Montyon  Prize,  the 
grand  prize  of  medicine  and  surgery,  was  awarded.  This  imperfect 
statement  of  the  recognition  of  his  modest  labors  is  sufficient  to  show 
that  we  may  trust  implicitly  his  reports  of  their  success.  He  is  the 
very  opposite  of  a  boastful  pretender,  and  has  received  the  most  em- 
phatic commendation  from  the  eminent  members  of  the  profession  at 
Paris.  We  find  among  those  who  have  given  him  their  compli- 
mentary indorsement  the  names  of  Andral,  Bouillaud,  Velpeau,  Nela- 
ton,  Rostan,  Ricord,  Malgaigne,  Royer,  Louis,  Bricheteau,  Berard, 
Dubois,  Baudelocque,  Leuret,  Cruveilhier,  Trousseau,  Piorry,  Caze- 
nave,  Boyer,  Voisin,  Solon,  Baron,  Girardin,  Labrie,  Piedagnel,  Chas- 
saignac,  Legroux,  Gibert,  Hortiloup,  Honore*,  Blandin,  Gerdy,Guersant, 
Devergie,  Sandras,  Robert,  Jobert  de  Lamballe,  Blache,  Richer,  Rayer, 
Nonat,  Briquet,  Barth,  Monod,  and  Fouquier.  The  majority  of  these 
names  are  familar  to  English  as  well  as  French  physicians. 

We  may  therefore  recognize  the  reports  of  the  application  of 
Hsemospasia  as  a  matter  of  science  which  is  no  longer  under  any 
degree  of  doubt,  and  upon  which  we  may  act  with  the  utmost  confi- 
dence, and  I  take  great  pleasure  in  quoting  this  experience  ;  for  what 
I  have  discovered  and  taught  as  Sarcognomy,  though  it  may  be  demon- 
strated science,  has  not  yet  passed  beyond  the  circle  of  my  pupils 
to  receive  the  indorsement  of  professional  authority,  because  I  have 
not  engaged  in  its  propagation  ;  hence  the  confirmation  of  my  doc- 
trines by  pneumo-therapia  will  be  interesting  to  my  readers. 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  259 

Sarcognomy  affirms  that  below  the  knees  we  have  a  concentration 
of  cooling,  sedative,  antiphlogistic  and  soporific  power,  calculated  to 
diminish  the  activity  of  the  brain  and  nervous  system,  the  respira- 
tion, circulation,  calorification,  and  all  inflammatory  or  febrile  pro- 
cesses, and  that  whenever  the  vital  force  or  the  circulation  is  drawn 
below  the  knee,  all  inflammatory  or  febrile  conditions  must  be 
reduced  and  all  active  processes  of  brain,  lungs  or  heart.  The 
pulse  must  be  reduced  and  the  temperature  of  the  skin  ;  and  the 
relaxation  of  the  brain  must  produce  a  relaxation  of  the  skin,  since 
it  corresponds  in  its  conditions  with  the  brain. 

All  this  has  been  very  thoroughly  demonstrated  by  Junod  with 
his  haemospasic  boot,  which  operates  below  the  knee,  concentrating 
an  extreme  hyperemia  of  normal  blood  in  the  leg  and  thus  develop- 
ing its  predominance  in  the  functions  of  life. 

He  claims  to  be  able  to  introduce  113  ounces  of  additional  blood 
in  the  legs  by  applying  his  boot  on  both,  and  describes  an  enormous 
increase  in  the  size  of  the  leg  under  the  cupping  process,  though  it 
is  usually  limited  to  reducing  the  pressure  one  fourth.  What  is  the 
effect  of  this  reduced  pressure  and  hyperemia  ?  He  thus  describes  the 
effect  of  the  application  of  one  boot  on  a  healthy  subject:  "The 
face  becomes  pale,  the  temperature  lower,  especially  in  the  upper  parts 
of  the  body,  the  breath  is  cooler,  the  inspirations  deeper,  the  voice 
weaker."  Next  "the  volume  of  the  pulse  is  diminished  by  one  half." 
The  leg  is  greatly  swelled  and  red,  with  "a  sensation  of  local  heat 
and  itching."  The  pulse  becomes  thready,  the  voice  weaker,  "the 
chest  gives  out  a  hollow  sound  on  percussion,"  "constant  yawning." 
There  is  a  slight  perspiration,  the  pupil  is  dilated,  "the  eyes  dim, 
taste  and  smell  nearly  gone ;  sense  of  touch  dulled ;  the  hearing 
confused  by  ringing  in  the  ears."  The  ears  are  extremely  cold, 
"the  tongue  is  colder  and  clammy,"  the  axilla  reduced  two  degrees 
in  temperature.  "  He  feels  so  feeble  that  he  can  scarcely  raise  his 
arm."  At  length  the  "  pulse  can  no  longer  be  felt,  but  the  beating  of 
the  temporal  artery  is  still  to  be  distinguished."  Then  "the  pulsa- 
tion of  the  temporal  arteries  has  become  imperceptible,  and  fainting 
ensues."  But  he  is  readily  restored  by  allowing  the  return  of  the 
air.  From  the  beginning  to  the  fainting  occupied  an  hour  and  forty 
minutes,  the  last  twenty-five  minutes  both  limbs  being  operated  on. 
The  swelling  of  the  legs  is  accompanied  by  a  sensible  diminution  in 
the  upper  part  of  the  body  measured  at  the  waist.  There  was  still 
some  increase  of  the  legs  perceptible  the  next  day. 

That  in  this  case  there  was  a  development  of  vitality  in  connec- 
tion with  the  hyperemia  of  the  legs,  such  as  always  goes  with 
increased  circulation,  was  distinctly  stated  thus  :  "  There  is  a  great 


260  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

increase  of  vitality  in  the  extremities  submitted  to  the  action  of 
Haemospasia.  The  skin  reddens  in  the  capillaries."  The  blood 
which  accumulates  in  parts  submitted  to  the  action  of  Haemospasia 
is  chiefly  arterial.  If  rarefaction  is  carried  to  a  high  degree,  the 
principal  veins  will  gradually  disappear  and  give  place  to  the  capil- 
laries, which  press  upon  them  on  all  sides."  It  is  for  this  reason  that 
Haemospasia  has  the  remarkable  property  of  acting  favorably  on  vari- 
cose veins ! 

Thus  does  Haemospasia  give  for  the  time  being  to  the  vitality  of 
the  leg  a  control  over  the  general  vitality  ;  as  any  organ  in  the  brain 
or  elsewhere  becomes,  in  a  hyperemic  condition,  dominant  over 
anemic  organs.  And  as  Haemostasis  does  this  much  less  effectively, 
since  it  obstructs  the  circulation,  it  is  evident  that  Haemospasia  is 
greatly  preferable,  for  it  is  not  abnormal,  but  nourishes  and 
strengthens  the  parts  to  which  it  is  applied,  and  is  consequently  use- 
ful in  producing  a  full  development  of  organs  that  have  declined  or 
atrophied,  though  Junod  does  not  refer  to  this  important  fact. 

He  gives  an  ample  statement  of  cases  in  practice,  which  is  so 
important  and  interesting  that  I  am  almost  tempted  to  copy  the 
whole  293  cases,  which  occupy  160  pages  of  his  book,  as  the  most 
triumphant  illustration  of  Sarcognomy  which  could  be  presented. 
But  for  want  of  space  I  shall  confine  myself  to  the  descriptive  titles 
and  a  few  specimen  cases  as  illustrations,  hoping  thereby  to  interest 
the  students  and  practitioners  of  Sarcognomy  in  the  practice  of 
Haemospasia  and  perhaps  in  the  reading  of  his  book  or  calling  for 
an  American  edition,  as  it  was  printed  for  private  circulation.  It 
was  entitled  "  A  Theoretical  and  Practical  Treatise  on  Haemospasia, 
by  V.  T.  Junod,  Docteur  en  Medecine  de  la  Faculte  de  Paris  ; 
Deux  fois  Laureat  de  lTnstitut  de  France  ;  Premier  prix  Montyon 
en  1836;  Grand  prix  de  medecine  et  de  chirurgie  en  1870;  Membre 
correspondant  de  la  Societe  medicale  de  Londres,  etc.  ;  Prix  Barbier 
1,500  francs  en  1876.  Translated  from  the  French  by  Mrs.  E.  Harley 
Palmer.     London  :  Printed  for  private  circulation  only,  1879." 

I  trust  the  reader  will  not  fail  to  read  carefully  this  catalogue  of 
cases  successfully  treated  by  the  haemospasic  method,  which  reduces 
the  human  constitution  to  its  subhuman  conditions,  in  which  the 
capacity  for  active  disease  is  lost,  and  in  which  a  method  is  presented 
which  Sarcognomv  authorizes  and  will  modify  and  enlarge  in  its 
application.* 

*    GLOSSARY  OF    THE  MEDICAL  TERMS  FOR  THE  BENEFIT  OF 
NON-PROFESSIONAL  READERS. 

Amaurosis.  —  Loss  of  vision  from  impairment  Angina.  —  A  disease  with  sore  throat  or  sense 

of  the  optic  nerves.  of  suffocation. 

Amblyopia. —  Incomplete  amaurosis.  Angina  pectoris.  —  Severe  pain  and  suffoca- 

Amenorrhcea.  —  Deficiency  of  the  menses.  tive  feeling  in  the  region  of  the  heart. 


chap.  xiv.]  pneumatic  sarcognomy.  26l 

Catalogue  of  Successful  HvEmospasic  Practice. 

Maladies  of  the  Cerebro-Spinal  System.  —  5  cases  of  apoplexy ;  17  of  cere- 
bral congestion;  2  of  aphasia;  7  of  paralysis  ;  2  of  spinal  disease;  5  of  meningitis  ; 
1  of  softening  of  the  brain;    1  of  cephalalgia. 

Nervous  and  Neuralgic  Affections.  —  Convulsions,  8  cases;  hysteria,  3 
cases  ;  epilepsy,  4  cases  ;  loss  of  memory,  1  case  ;  hypochondriasis,  1  case  ;  mania, 
8 cases;  sciaticas  and  neuralgias,  9  cases. 

Affections  of  Eyes  and  Ears.  —  Ophthalmia,  6  cases  ;  iritis,  1  ca6e  ;  keratitis, 
1  case;  blepharitis,  1  case;  falling  of  the  right  eyelid,  1  case;  congestive  ambly- 
opia, 1  case;  amaurosis,  11  cases;  otitis,  3  cases;  deafness  from  fever,  2  cases; 
deafness  of  long  standing  treated  by  hasmospasia  and  baths  of  alternately  com- 
pressed and  rarefied  air,  1  case. 

Affections  of  the  Respiratory  Organs. — Epistaxis,  2  cases;  angina  of  the 
tonsils,  3  cases;  oedema  of  the  glottis,  1  case;  diphtheria  of  the  pharynx,  1  case; 
croup,  1  case;  laryngitis  and  alteration  of  voice,  2  cases;  bronchitis,  5  cases;  acute 
catarrh  and  emphysema,  1  case;  pleurodynia,  1  case;  pleurisy,  7  cases;  pneumonia, 
15  cases:  pulmonary  congestion,  3  cases;  haemoptysis,  16  cases;  consumption,  5, 
cases. 

Affections  of  the  Heart.  —  Hypertrophy,  5  cases;  heart  disease  and  asthma,. 
5  cases;  endocarditis  and  hydro-pericarditis,  4  cases;  angina  pectoris,  1  case;  pal- 
pitation and  nose-bleeding,  1  case. 

Affections  of  the  Digestive  Organs. — Gastralgia,  2  cases;  hsematemesis,  r 
case ;  intestinal  occlusion,  1  case ;  peritonitis  after  confinement,  1  case. 

Uterine  Affections.  —  Metrorrhagia,  2  cases;  uterine  hemorrhage,  1  case;: 
dysmenorrhea,  1   case;  suppression  of  the  menses,  2  cases;  amenorrhoea,  2  cases. 

Urinary  Affections. — Nephritis,  1  case;  cystitis,  2  cases. 

Fevers  and  Cholera.  —  Cholera,  incipient,  2  cases,  advanced,  10  cases;  typhoid 
fever,  11  cases;  small-pox,  2  cases;  scarlet,  quotidian,  and  intermittent  fevers,  4 
cases. 

Rheumatism  and  Gout.  — Rheumatism,  8  cases;  gout,  2  cases. 
Surgical  and  other  Affections.  —  Severe  falls,  5  cases. 

Head  Injuries.  — Kick  on  the  head  by  a  horse;  gunshot  wound;  gunshot  and 
meningitis;  delirium  from  a  burn  ;  erysipelas,  3  cases;  brain  affection  from  amputa- 
tion ;  traumatic  ophthalmia ;  traumatic  amaurosis ;  cataract,  2  cases ;  glaucoma ; 
caries  of  orbit  and  chorea;  disease  of  the  face  ;  asphyxia,  2  cases  ;  atropine  poison- 
ing; wry  neck;  anthrax;  pain  in  shoulder  for  two  years;  dislocation  of  arm 
(assisted  by  haemospasia) ;  dislocation  and  sleeplessness;  blood  poisoning; 
phlebitis;  whitlow;  gunshot  wound  of  right  hand ;  scirrhus  of  right  breast;  con- 
Aphasia.  —  Loss  of  speech.  Inguinal.  —  Relating  to  the  groin. 

Anthrax. — An    inflamed   tumor    called  a  car-  Keratitis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  cornea  of  the 

buncle.  eye. 

Arthritic.  — Relating  to  gout  or  the  joints.  Laryngitis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  larynx. 

Blepharitis. —  Inflammation  of  the  eyelids.  Meningitis. —  Inflammation  of  the  membranes 

Bronchitis.  —  Inflammation   of    the    bronchia,        of  the  brain, 
the  air-tubes  that  enter  the  lungs.  Metrorrhagia.  —  Hemorrhage  or  flow  from  the 

Caries.  —  Decay  of  the  bones.  womb. 

Cephalalgia.  —  Pain  in  the  head.  Nephritis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  kidneys. 

Chorea. —  irregular  movements;  St.  Vitus'  dance.  CEdema. — Swelling  of  the  surface  from  dropsical 

Cystitis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  bladder.  effusion. 

Dysmenorrhea. — Difficult,  disordered  or  pain-  Pneumonia.  —  Inflammation  of  the  lungs, 

ful  menstruation.  Paraplegia.  —  Paralysis  of  the   lower  portion 

Emphysema.  —  Collection   of  air  in  the  chest        of  the  body, 
or  under  the  skin.  Peritonitis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  peritoneum, 

Endocarditis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  walls  of  a  membrane  enveloping  the  viscera  of  the  abdomen, 
the  heart.  Pharynx. —The  passage   at    the   back   of    the 

Epistaxis.  —  Bleeding  at  the  nose.  mouth  and  entrance  of  the  throat. 

Gastralgia.  —  Pain  in  the  stomach.  Phlebitis.  —  Inflammation  of  the  veins. 

Glaucoma.  —  Impaired  vision  from  the  vitreous  Pleurodynia.  —  Pain  in  the  walls  of  the  chest. 

humor  of  the  eye.  Prostatitis.  —  Inflammation     of     the     prostate 

Glottis.— The  aperture  of  the  larvnx.  gland,  below  the  urethra. 

Hsematemesis.  —  Vomiting  blood.  Quotidian.— Daily;  a  fever  recurring  every  day. 

Hemiplegia.  —  Paralysis  of  one  side.  Scirrhus.  —  A  hard  tumor. 

Hamioptysis.  —  Spitting    of    blood    from   the  Strangury.  —  An  obstruction  in  urinating. 

lun£s',  .         ..x.  ,  Traumatic.  —  Produced  bv  a  wound. 

Hydro-pericarditis.  —  Dropsy  and  inflamma-  Urethra.  —  The   channel   for    the   discharge  of 

tion  at  the  heart  in  the  pericardium.  urine. 

Hypertrophy.  —  Excessive  growth.  Varicocele Swelling    of    the    veins    of   the 

Hypochondriasis.  —  Low    spirits    and    great        scrotum  or  spermatic  cord, 
anxiety  about  health.  Whitlow.  -  A   painful    abscess  in  a  finger;   a 

Icterus.  —  Jaundice.  felon. 


262  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

gestion  of  the  breasts ;  contusion  of  thorax,  2  cases ;  spinal  affection  with  abscess  ; 
gunshot  wound  in  lumbar  region  and  paraplegia;  traumatic  paraplegia;  traumatic 
peritonitis;  strangury  from  tumor;  abdominal  tumors,  2  cases ;  chronic  prostatic 
disease ;  spasm  of  urethra ;  irreducible  crural  hernia ;  strangulated  inguinal  hernia ; 
varicocele;  contusion  of  knee;  traumatic  arthritis;  gunshot  wound  of  leg;  ulcer  of 
leg;  contusion  of  leg;  sprained  ankle  ;    frostbite  of  foot. 

It  would  be  impossible  to  find  in  the  annals  of  medical  science 
from  the  earliest  ages  any  single  measure  to  compare  for  a  moment 
with  the  vast  variety  and  energy  of  therapeutic  powers  which  have 
been  developed  by  Haemospasia,  even  if  we  were  confined  to  the 
above  catalogue.  But  this  remark  applies  only  to  the  orthodox  or 
fashionable  science,  which  has  been  sanctioned  by  colleges.  Vital 
nervauric  treatment  alone  (commonly  called  magnetic)  can  show  an 
equally  diversified  illustration  of  sovereign  power  over  disease,  reach- 
ing to  many  cases  and  to  instantaneous  results  which  are  beyond 
the  power  of  Haemospasia.  But  this  has  been  resisted  and  walled 
out  from  the  colleges  by  the  invincible  powers  of  mental  inertia  and 
professional  jealousy  ;  and  even  Haemospasia  meets  the  same  opposi- 
tion of  inertia,  —  neglected  in  America,  and  even  in  France,  though 
sanctioned  by  authority,  and  collegiate  jealousy  pacified  by  the  tact 
of  the  modest  Junod.  He  has  to  complain  of  this  neglect,  and 
resorts  to  the  subterfuge  of  printing  his  book  "for  private  circula- 
tion only,"  to  escape  the  hostility  of  professional  jealousy,  which, 
under  the  false  pretence  of  professional  ethics,  forbids  a  physician  to 
give  his  successful  experience  to  the  public. 

"  How  is  it  (says  Junod  in  this  book)  that  a  method  offering  such 
advantages,  which  has  fixed  the  attention  of  the  learned  profession, 
obtained  for  its  author  honorable  approbation  and  reward,  and  has 
been  made  the  subject  of  several  important  works,  —  how  is  it  that  this 
method,  known  for  forty  years,  is  not  more  generally  adopted  by  the 
medical  profession  ?  [To-day  it  is  fifty-seven  years  since  the  formal 
presentation  in  Paris  of  Junod's  discoveries.] 

"Such  is  unfortunately  the  tendency  of  the  human  race,  which 
refuses  to  acknowledge  the  efficacy  of  a  method  which  addresses 
itself  to  common  sense  alone,  and  is  divested  of  all  romance  or 
imagination.  It  is  sad.  The  method  is  praised  and  neglected.  Its 
progressive  action  is  acknowledged  and  it  remains  in  a  groove.  It  is 
considered  desirable  that  science  should  move  onwards  and  attain 
perfection,  and  yet  every  new  experiment  is  received  with  suspicion, 
and  every  serious  inquiry  is  rejected.  Men  prefer  to  remain  station- 
ary, and  follow  in  the  old  ruts  traced  by  centuries,  and  from  which 
they  will  not  emancipate  themselves.  They  will  neither  accept  nor 
reject  that  which  may  change  the  ancient  usage,  or  introduce  a  new 
element  in  therapeutics.  It  has  been  thus  with  other  inventions. 
Valuable  discoveries  have  been  forgotten  or  indefinitely  postponed. 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  263 

It  is  easier  to  make  a  discovery  and  to  bring  an  apparatus  to  perfection 
than  to  get  it  adopted  in  a  lifetime." 

Such  language  as  this  reminds  us  of  the  experience  of  Harvey  and 
other  great  scientific  benefactors  ;  but  how  much  more  valuable, 
practically,  is  Haemospasia  than  Harvey's  discovery  of  the  circula- 
tion ! 

As  the  foregoing  catalogue,  by  name,  of  293  cases  is  very  unsatis- 
fying from  the  lack  of  minute  description,  justice  requires  that  we 
should  look  at  a  few  specimen  cases  to  see  what  they  teach. 

We  observe  there  are  65  cases  of  relief  to  the  cerebro-spinal  system  ;. 
9  of  neuralgias  ;  30  of  affections  of  eyes  and  ears  ;  of  respiratory 
organs,  58  cases  ;  of  the  heart,  16  cases  ;  digestive  organs,  5  ;  uter- 
ine, 8  ;  urinary,  3  ;  rheumatism  and  gout,  10 ;  fevers  and  cholera, 
29 ;   surgical  and  miscellaneous,  54. 

If  this  is  a  criterion  of  the  availability  of  Haemospasia,  it  would 
seem  that  its  power  was  greatest  over  affections  of  the  head  and 
nervous  system,  which  were  controlled  in  104  cases,  next  of  the 
thorax,  which  were  controlled  in  74  cases.  Of  fevers  and  inflamma- 
tions,—  there  were  17  fevers  and  inflammations  (counting  the  rheu- 
matic, urinary,  and  surgical,  which  were  nearly  all  strictly  inflamma- 
tory) 67,  — making  84  febrile  and  inflammatory. 

This  sustains  my  claim  that  Haemospasia  below  the  knee  is  the 
most  powerful  agent  known  for  the  control  of  active  or  inflammatory 
diseases  of  the  head  and  chest,  for  no  manual  or  electric  treatment 
can  produce  so  great  a  change  in  the  balance  of  the  circulation,  nor 
can  any  combination  of  drugs  approach  it  in  effectiveness.  Neither 
is  there  anything  in  common  use  that  so  promptly  controls  fever  and 
inflammations  wherever  located,  except  where  great  nervauric  power 
operates  on  impressible  constitutions. 

Haemospasia  accomplishes  its  results  by  controlling  the  distribution 
of  the  blood, — nervauric  treatment  by  controlling  that  of  the  nervous 
forces.  These  two  are  the  most  successful  agents  known  in  thera- 
peutics, and  he  who  handles  both  is  a  social  benefactor.  What  the 
latter  can  do  my  pupils  are  demonstrating  ;  what  the  former  has  done 
may  be  learned  by  referring  to  a  few  of  Junod's  cases,  which  are  here 
given.  But  Junod's  cases  fall  far  short  of  showing  the  power  of 
Pneumatic  Sarcognomy,  for  they  illustrate  chiefly  derivation  by 
Haemospasia  to  the  sub-human  region,  while  it  is  applicable  to  all 
parts  of  the  body. 

"  Apoplectic  congestion.  —  A  princess  of  the  royal  family  in  Italy, 
aged  60,  was  seized  with  apoplexy,  accompanied  by  unconsciousness, 
loss  of  movement  and  sensation,  dilated  pupils  and  insensibility  to 
light.     For  the  first  six  days  the  doctors  (amongst  them   Cabarrus) 


264  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

had  recourse  without  success  to  the  usual  treatment  —  bleeding,  purg- 
ing, and  revulsives.  Under  this  difficulty  I  was  sent  for.  A  single 
derivation  brought  back  consciousness,  sight,  movement,  and  sensa- 
tion. Soon  after  this  the  Marquis  de  Brignolles,  the  Italian 
ambassador,  paid  me  a  visit  to  say  that  his  Majesty,  pleased  with  this 
unexpected  result,  desired  to  have  four  apparatuses  made  under  my 
directions  for  use  in  the  military  hospitals. 

"  Cerebral  congestion.  —  Count ,  aged  34,  receveur  des  finances, 

was  affected  with  cerebral  congestion  in  consequence  of  too  close  appli- 
cation to  business.  He  had  been  unconscious  for  three  days,  when 
MM.  Royer  and  Fauconneau-Dufresne  decided  to  have  recourse  to 
Haemospasia.  He  regained  consciousness  under  one  derivation,  and 
was  able  to  return  to  his  post. 

"  Cerebral  congestion  in  a  new-born  infant.  —  A  child  seized  with 
this  affection  at  its  birth  was  submitted  to  the  application  in  the 
presence  of  M.  Monod,  who  sent  for  me.  In  15  minutes  the  child 
recovered,  and  all  danger  disappeared. 

"  Apoplectic  congestion.  —  Mad. ,  aged  45,  was  seized  with  apo- 
plexy, with  complete  loss  of  power  and  consciousness.  She  was  bled 
without  result,  and  M.  Thierry-Mieg  decided  to  try  Haemospasia.  Sent 
for  in  the  night,  I  reduced  the  pulse  to  a  thread,  which  brought 
back  consciousness  and  removed  the  paralysis.  A  second  Haemospasia 
the  following  day  completed  the  recovery. 

"  Apoplectic  congestion.  —  An  old  soldier,  aged  76,  was  seized  for  the 
second  time  with  apoplexy,  and  was  brought  home  unconscious.  A 
doctor  at  Vincennes,  where  he  lived,  prescribed  blisters  and  purga- 
tives, which  had  no  effect.  M.  Alphonse  Sanson,  who  was  called  in 
for  consultation,  proposed  Haemospasia.  After  a  derivation  which 
lasted  half  an  hour,  the  pulse  became  small,  the  breathing  labored,, 
and  a  sweat  broke  out  on  the  forehead.  I  ceased  to  act,  and  allowed 
this  semi-fainting  condition  to  subside.  He  soon  regained  speech 
and  consciousness.      This  one  application  sufficed  for  recovery. 

"  Apoplectic  congestion.  —  A  doctor,  aged  60,  was  suddenly  seized 
with  cerebral  congestion,  having  been  quite  well  on  the  morning  of 
his  seizure,  Sept.  3d,  1859.  He  lost  consciousness  and  movement. 
M.  Valerand  bled  him,  with  no  result.  The  following  day,  after  a 
consultation  with  M.  Sanson,  I  was  called  in.  After  a  Haemospasia 
of  45  minutes  he  was  able  to  walk  into  the  next  room.  The  paralysis 
was  cured. 

"  Cerebral  congestion  with  delirium. — A  young  man  of  25,  of 
sanguine  temperament  and  strong  constitution,  was  admitted  to  the 
hospital  at  Nice  for  a  cerebral  congestion  of  six  days'  standing. 
Notwithstanding  general  and  local  bleeding,  delirium  had  supervened 
for  48  hours.  Called  in  by  M.  Deporta,  I  applied  the  apparatus  so  as 
to  reduce  the  pulse  to  a  thread.  In  fifty  minutes  consciousness 
returned,  and  in  a  few  days  the  patient  recovered. 

"  Apoplectic  congestion  with  paralysis  of  the  optic  nerve. —  Mad. , 

aged  48,  being  quite  well  the  previous  day,  was  seized  with  conges- 
tion of  the  brain  in  the  night.  Loss  of  mental  faculties,  loss  of  sight, 
affection  of  the  right  eyelid,  strabismus,  and  stupor.  MM.  Goupil  and 
Dagama  called  me  in.     The  stupor  yielded  to  the  first  Haemospasia. 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  265 

A  daily  application  re-established  the  sight  in  four  days,  the  stupor 
and  strabismus  disappeared,  the  eyelids  resumed  their  normal  condi- 
tion, and  the  patient  recovered. 

"Chronic  cerebral  congestion.  —  M. ,   aged  51,  corrector  of  the 

Union  Medicate  press,  was  seized  with  apoplectic  congestion.  The 
hemiplegia  only  lasted  a  few  hours,  but  he  was  unable  to  resume  his 
occupation  for  a  whole  year,  owing  to  the  excessive  congestion  of  the 
brain  which  supervened  on  the  smallest  intellectual  exertion. 

"After  undergoing  various  treatments  without  result,  and  trying 
even  hydropathy,  he  consulted  M.  Monod,  who  sent  him  to  me. 
After  sixteen  days  of  haemospasic  treatment,  equilibrium  was  re- 
established in  the  circulation  and  he  resumed  his  work,  and  is  now 
corrector  in  one  of  the  principal  printing-offices  in  Paris.  He  con- 
tinues in  perfect  health. 

"Aphasia.  —  A  doctor,  aged  58,  had  suffered  for  several  years  with 
valvular  disease  of  the  heart  grafted  upon  an  arthritic  diathesis  of 
a  very  pronounced  kind.  On  the  3d  of  January,  1868,  he  was 
seized  with  giddiness,  lancinating  pain  in  the  forehead  and  temples, 
and  cephalalgia  supervening  upon  the  smallest  mental  exertion.  On 
the  16th  of  February  he  was  seized  with  aphasia,  the  recollection  of 
words  failing,  without  disturbance  of  any  other  function.  He  was 
bled  without  result,  and  his  physician  was  recommended  by  M. 
Shuster  to  send  for  me.  Ten  haemospasic  applications  were  crowned 
with  perfect  success,  and  this  recovery  has  since  proved  lasting. 

"  Apoplexy,  loss  of  speech,  mouth  drawn  to  one  side.  —  A  soldier  in 
the  infantry,  aged  34,  was  seized  in  the  night  with  apoplexy  and  loss 
of  speech,  the  mouth  drawn  to  one  side.  He  was  removed  to  the 
military  hospital  at  Chatham.  The  clinical  professor,  whose  office 
it  was  to  report  upon  Haemospasia  to  the  War  Office,  profited  by  this 
occasion  to  study  its.  effects.  The  operation  lasted  half'  an  hour. 
The  mouth  could  be  seen  minute  by  minute  regaining  its  normal 
condition,  and  his  speech  was  restored,  to  the  great  astonishment  of 
the  surrounding  doctors  and  students.  This  recovery  was  main- 
tained. 

"Acute  meningitis. — Chaix,  a  wood-carver,  aged  36,  of  nervous 
temperament,  had  reached  the  eighth  day  of  acute  meningitis  when  I 
was  called  in.  I  found  him  in  a  state  of  coma,  the  head  thrown  back, 
pulse  weak  and  quick,  face  animated,  skin  hot  and  dry.  One  Haemo- 
spasia brought  back  consciousness,  the  second  sufficed  to  place  him  in 
the  way  of  sure  recovery. 

"Meningitis  from  sunstroke.  —  Mile.  B.,  aged  15,  after  sunstroke 
from  exposure  of  the  head  (Sept.  3,  1836),  had  fever,  vomiting,  and 
convulsions,  for  which  her  two  physicians  bled  her  twice.  Getting 
worse  for  three  days  she  was  bled  three  times  in  the  arm  and  once  in 
the  foot.  Thirty  leeches  and  two  blisters  were  applied  to  the  lower 
extremities  and  ice  on  the  head.  Five  days  from  the  beginning,  there 
was  great  prostration  and  frequent  convulsions,  cold  feet,  and  great 
heat  at  the  occiput.  On  the  9th,  Dr.  Junod  being  called  in  reduced 
the  atmospheric  pressure  at  ten  o'clock  on  the  lower  extremities  a 
twelfth,  and  then  a  ninth.  In  eight  minutes  there  was  a  slight  con- 
vulsion of  the  upper  extremities.     At  10.15  the  reduction  of  pressure 


266  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

was  increased  to  a  seventh.  At  10.20  the  ice  was  removed.  The  pain 
was  nearly  gone,  and  disappeared  entirely  at  10.25.  The  pressure 
was  reduced  a  ninth.  A  faint  and  drowsy  condition  existed,  and  the 
Haemospasia  was  discontinued.  The  improved  condition  continued 
through  the  day  and  night,  and  next  morning  a  few  moments  of 
Haemospasia  prevented  a  return  of  the  headache.  Three  days  later 
she  went  to  her  sister's  wedding  in  church,  and  continued  well. 

"  Epilepsy  for  ten  years. —  Clemence  Caron,  at  the  age  of  12,  was 
frightened  into  an  attack  of  epilepsy,  and  for  this  was  admitted  to 
the  Salpetriere,  *  where  for  ten  years  the  fits  returned  every  evening  at 
the  same  time.'  '  At  the  age  of  22  she  was  seized  with  typhoid,  for 
which  she  entered  the  Hotel  Dieu.  The  epileptic  fits,  which  ceased 
during  the  fever,  returned  upon  her  recovery.  M.  Sandras,  learning 
that  menstruation  had  never  appeared  with  this  patient,  and  remem- 
bering the  special  action  of  Haemospasia  in  this,  sent  for  me.  At 
four  o'clock,  with  the  double  purpose  of  preventing  the  attack  and 
establishing  menstruation,  I  acted  upon  both  lower  extremities  at 
once.  This  first  derivation  succeeded  in  preventing  the  fit.  The 
following  day,  same  result.  The  third  was  followed  by  the  appear- 
ance of  menstruation.  From  that  moment  the  patient  was  delivered 
from  the  fits,  and  regained  perfect  health.  Two  years  later,  on  receiv- 
ing intelligence  of  the  death  of  her  brother,  the  epilepsy  returned  with 
the  same  violence  and  the  same  periodical  character.  Clemence  was 
received  at  the  Hopital  de  la  Charite,  and  I  was  called  in  by  M. 
Fouquier.  At  four  o'clock  I  reduced  the  pulse  to  a  thread  and  main- 
tained it  in  that  state  till  half-past  six  o'clock.  No  paroxysm.  The 
following  day,  same  derivation,  same  result.  The  next  day  an 
assistant  who  took  my  place  did  not  act  with  sufficient  energy,  and 
allowed  the  attack  to  get  ahead  of  him ;  nevertheless  a  hyper- 
haemospasia  assured  the  recovery.  Clemence  Caron  was  subse- 
quently employed  for  six  months  as  an  assistant  nurse,  which  allowed 
the  stability  of  her  recovery  to  be  attested.  An  epilepsy  of  ten 
years'  standing,  with  daily  attacks,  is  generally  considered  to  be 
beyond  the  resources  of  medical  art.'  " 

In  a  case  of  epilepsy  of  four  years'  standing,  in  a  girl  of  18  at  La 
Charite,  accompanied  by  amenorrhcea,  twenty-one  applications  of 
Haemospasia  restored  menstruation  and  cured  the  epilepsy. 

Pneumonia. —  In  four  cases  of  pneumonia  "no  other  means  save 
Haemospasia  were  employed,  and  recovery  took  place  in  a  few  days." 
They  were  as  follows  :  — 

"  Cecile  Benoit,  aged  23,  of  sanguine  temperament  and  good  consti- 
tution, was  admitted  to  the  Hopital  de  la  Charite.  She  presented 
the  following  symptoms  :  anxious  respiration,  frequent  cough,  rusty 
expectoration,  dulness  on  percussion  under  the  shoulder-blade,  distinct 
crepitating  sound  at  the  point  affected,  hot  skin,  strong  bounding 
pulse,  120.  The  superintendent  having  ordered  Haemospasia  before 
all  other  treatment,  I  brought  on  artificial  anemia  in  fifty  minutes. 
The  skin,  which  had  been  burning  and  dry,  became  moist.  On  being 
questioned  as  to  her  sensations,  the  patient  said,  'I  feel  my  skin  is 
stretching.'  Perspiration  was  established,  the  breathing,  completely 
freed,  gave  no  pain,  and  the  patient,  who  did  not  know  how  to  express 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  26j 

the  relief  she  experienced,  shortly  fell  asleep.  A  second  derivation 
was  made  the  same  evening,  to  induce  sweating  and  for  the  comple- 
tion of  the  cure.  In  a  few  days  this  patient  left  the  hospital  com- 
pletely recovered,  having  had  no  other  treatment. 

"Louis  Corot,  aged  25,  of  sanguine  temperament,  was  seized  with 
rigors,  headache,  difficulty  of  breathing  and  pain  in  the  side,  pulse 
120,  skin  burning,  expectoration  rusty  and  viscid.  The  first  deriva- 
tion took  place  in  the  presence  of  [several  distinguished  physicians], 
and  from  the  commencement  the  respiration  became  freer.  In  50 
minutes  the  headache  and  pain  in  the  side  had  yielded  and  the  pulse 
became  thready.  Profuse  perspiration  set  in,  followed  by  deep  sleep. 
The  derivator  having  been  removed,  the  patient  was  quite  astonished, 
on  awaking  three  hours  later,  at  the  amelioration  that  had  taken 
place  in  his  condition.  Perspiration  was  kept  up  without  interrup- 
tion, by  derivations,  which  were  renewed  whenever  the  skin  showed 
any  tendency  to  dryness.    In  three  days  the  patient  was  convalescent. 

"  A  man  aged  31,  in  delicate  health,  was  seized  with  pneumonia  of 
the  right  lung.  M.  Godier  called  me  in  at  once.  Three  derivations 
pushed  to  anemia,  brought  on  a  salutary  crisis  ;  on  the  fifth  day  the 
patient  was  convalescent. 

"  A  man  aged  54,  was  seized  on  the  17th  day  of  December  1858, 
with  pneumonia  of  the  left  side,  incessant  coughs,  rusty  colored 
expectoration,  dyspnoea  and  delirium.  MM.  Despaulx  Ader  and 
Caffe  decided  in  consultation  to  send  for  me.  A  first  derivation  pro- 
longed for  55  minutes  calmed  the  delirium  and  the  cough.  After 
the  third,  the  character  of  the  expectoration  improved,  and  on  the 
fifth  day  the  patient  was  out  of  danger. 

"  Pneumonia  in  an  aged  person.  —  Anna  Dupont,  aged  74,  was 
admitted  to  the  hospital  of  Geneva  on  the  fifth  day  of  pneumonia, 
when  M.  Lombard,  considering  her  case  a  grave  one,  and  finding 
that  it  had  not  been  relieved  by  other  treatment,  sent  for  me.  M. 
Fauconnet  was  present  during  the  derivation.  The  stitch  in  the 
side  gave  way  in  forty  minutes.  The  pulse  fell  from  130  to  120. 
Profuse  perspiration  ensued.  The  following  day  a  second  Haemos- 
pasia  was  followed  by  convalescence." 

Hemoptysis.  —  Nothing  is  more  promptly  controlled  than 
haemoptysis.  Of  fourteen  cases  of  its  successful  treatment  the  fol- 
lowing is  a  fair  sample  : — 

"  M. ,  aged   57,  an  ex-Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs,  was  seized 

with  haemoptysis  which  resisted  all  general  and  local  bleedings,  cup- 
pings and  iced  drinks,  in  fact  all  haemostatics.  In  a  consultation 
between  MM.  Andral,  Roan  and  Charran,  Haemospasia  was-  pre- 
scribed. The  hemorrhage  yielded  to  the  first  derivation  and  the 
patient  recovered." 

"  M. ,  aged   18,  had  in  three  weeks  17  attacks  of  blood-spitting 

when  M.  Thierry  Mieg  prescribed  Haemospasia.  After  the  second 
derivation  the  bleeding  which  had  brought  the  patient  to  death's 
door  ceased,  and  he  recovered." 

Cardiac  diseases.  —  "  Asthma  with  organic  disease  of  the  heart.  — 
A  well  known  doctor  in  London,  a°;ed  60,  was  affected   with  asthma* 


268  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

connected  with  organic  disease  of  the  heart.  The  paroxysms  suc- 
ceeding each  other  rapidly  and  resisting  all  remedies,  he  decided  to 
try  Haemospasia  and  summoned  me  by  telegram.  On  my  arrival  I 
found  him  in  an  alarming  state  ;  he  had  not  been  able  to  get  into 
bed  for  a  fortnight,  and  extreme  lassitude  was  therefore  added  to 
his  sufferings.  From  the  beginning  of  the  first  Haemospasia  the 
breathing  became  freer,  and  in  35  minutes  he  was  sufficiently 
relieved  to  go  to  bed,  though  I  had  him  carried  there  in  order  to 
save  all  exertion.  The  derivations  were  renewed  for  three  days  to 
prevent  a  return  of  the  attacks,  which  they  effectually  dispersed." 

"  Acute  rheumatism  and  endocarditis.  —  A  young  man,  aged  22, 
was  affected  with  acute  rheumatism,  when  suddenly  symptoms  of 
endocarditis  supervened,  characterized  by  great  oppression  and 
increase  of  the  beating  of  the  heart.  Pulse  small,  rapid,  irregular, 
with  very  little  reaction.  Other  treatment  having  failed,  Haemos- 
pasia was  tried,  without  going  so  far  as  fainting.  I  made  an  ener- 
getic derivation  which  restored  calm  in  45  minutes.  I  renewed  the 
derivation  in  the  evening,  so  as  to  assure  repose  for  the  night,  and 
to  prevent  a  return  of  the  complication.  The  next  day  a  fresh  deri- 
vation relieved  the  joints  of  the  upper  extremities,  and  the  patient 
recovered."  Speaking  of  rheumatism,  Junod  says:  "I  have  seen 
rheumatism  of  the  shoulder  yield  completely  to  a  single  Haemospasia 
on  the  affected  part,  though  it   had  resisted  all   other  treatment." 

"Hypertrophy  of  heart. — The  preceding  case  decided  M.  Beau- 
grand  to  send  a  young  man  aged  21  to  me,  who  was  suffering  from 
hypertrophy  of  the  heart.  He  was  a  harness-maker  by  trade,  which 
was  greatly  against  him,  owing  to  the  strength  of  arm  required. 
After  35  days  of  continued  treatment  he  recovered. 

"  Endocarditis. — A  voung  girl  of  17,  admitted  to  University  Col- 
lege Hospital,  London,  had  been  suffering  for  some  days  from  articu- 
lar rheumatism  which  involved  the  heart.  Leeches  had  produced  no 
effect.  Dr.  Walsh  begged  me  to  try  Haemospasia  in  her  case,  which 
at  once  freed  the  heart  and  brought  her  recovery.  Dr.  Walsh  was 
the  means  of  introducing  the  apparatus  into  the  London  University 
College  Hospital." 

Cholera.  —  "Cholera,  cold  stage.  —  Being  on  duty  on  the  12th 
June,  1848,  at  the  cholera  station  belonging  to  the  parish  Rue  de 
V  Union,  I  was  called  in  to  a  patient  who  had  been  seized  in  the  street 
with  giddiness.  The  next  day  after  suffering  from  colic  during  the 
night,  with  liquid  evacuations,  she  was  attacked  with  the  usual  vomit- 
ing and  the  stools  became  white.  The  pulse  was  almost  impercep- 
tible, pulsations  90,  seltzer  water  given  as  a  drink  was  almost  imme- 
diately rejected,  and  the  same  thing  happened  with  all  the  medicines 
given.  The  voice  was  becoming  weak,  the  tongue  cold,  and  the 
extremities  were  gradually  taking  a  blue  tinge.  Shortly  after,  cramps 
set  in,  and  the  patient  exclaimed,  'Take  away  this  pain  which  is  kill- 
ing me  !  '  I  made  a  derivation  on  the  lower  limbs.  The  pulse, 
already  feeble,  decreased.  Notwithstanding  this,  I  persisted  with 
the  derivation  until  calm  was  established.  The  derivation  lasted 
two  hours.  The  leg  on  which  the  boot  was  applied  became  nearly 
black.     The    sweat,    at     first     cold,    gradually    became    warm,    and 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  269 

extended  over  the  whole  body.  The  patient  recovered.  At  the 
beginning  of  the  derivation  I  placed  two  hot  bottles  close  to  the 
recipient;  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  caloric  is  of  use  in  the  treat- 
ment of  cholera." 

[The  leading  feature  of  the  Eclectic  treatment  of  cholera  in  1,500 
patients  at  Cincinnati  in  1849,  was  wrapping  the  patient  in  blankets 
wrung  out  of  water  as  hot  as  could  be  handled.  The  mortality  was 
less  than  six  per  cent.] 

"Cholera,  blue  stage.  —  A  woman,  aged  44,  seized  with  the  epi- 
demic, was  admitted  on  the  21st  of  August,  1854,  to  the  hospital  of 
St.  Dizier.  The  pulse,  102,  was  scarcely  to  be  felt.  Evacuations 
characteristic  and  frequent.  The  whole  body  was  blue,  or  rather  of 
a  coppery  red,  the  eyes  deeply  sunken,  and  the  voice  feeble.  The 
patient  begged  for  air,  Haemospasia  was  suggested  by  the  head  sur- 
geon and  applied  in  his  presence.  The  patient's  countenance 
improved,  the  breathing  became  free,  the  headache  and  stupor  dis- 
appeared, and  perspiration  being  established,  the  derivation  was 
completed  in  45  minutes.  On  the  22nd  the  leg  which  had  been  sub- 
jected to  derivation  slowly  returned  to  its  natural  condition,  the  per- 
spiration became  established  and  the  evacuations  finally  ceased." 

Fevers.  —  "A  soldier,  aged  27,  had  suffered  from  intermittent 
fever  in  Africa,  with  engorgement  of  the  spleen.  He  was  sent  back 
to  France  and  entered  the  hospital  at  Chaumont  the  20th  of  Septem- 
ber, 1854,  for  typhoid  accompanied  by  intense  dyspnoea,  strong  reac- 
tion and  brain  affection.  The  head  surgeon  applied  to  me.  A  sin- 
gle Haemospasia  sufficed  to  relieve  the  breathing  and  the  brain 
symptoms,  and  to  reduce  the  vertical  diameter  of  the  spleen  by 
3. 14  inches,  and  the  transverse  diameter  1.57  inches.  No  fresh  compli- 
cation rose. 

"Case  221. — A  patient,  aged  19,  was  affected  with  typhoid  on 
the  3rd  o£  May,  1857.  At  first  it  was  slight,  but  at  the  end  of  a  fort- 
night grave  symptoms  sat  in.  On  the  17th  the  expression  altered, 
the  patient  complained  of  suffocation  ;  respirations  34  ;  cough  dry 
and  fatiguing;  dulness  on  left  side;  pulse  125;  temperature  105 
degrees.  The  tongue  dry  and  bright  red  at  the  tip  ;  heavy  sleep  and 
delirium  at  night,  picking  of  the  bed-clothes.  On  the  back  of  the 
legs  were  dangerous  ulcers  produced  by  mustard  plasters.  M.  Monod 
being  called  in  advised  Haemospasia  and  I  was  sent  for.  I  placed  a 
band  round  the  leg,  so  as  not  to  hurt  the  sores,  and  applied  the  deri- 
vation on  one  of  the  lower  extremities.  After  45  minutes  the  res- 
pirations fell  from  34  to  21  ;  the  oppression  yielded;  temperature 
102.2  degrees.  In  the  evening  at  8,  fresh  Haemospasia  was  made  on 
the  opposite  leg.  On  the  18th,  the  breathing  remained  free  and 
there  was  no  return  of  delirium.  Another  Haemospasia  that  evening. 
On  the  19th  convalescence  set  in. 

"Case  212. — A  young  person  in  a  school  at  Geneva  was  seized 
with  typhoid,  and  was  attended  by  M.  Coindet.  For  eight  days  both 
cold  affusions  and  other  means  had  been  employed  to  subdue  the 
delirium,  but  in  vain.  My  colleague  hearing  I  was  in  town  sent  for 
me.  The  derivation  removed  the  delirium  in  50  minutes,  and  the 
patient  was  out  of  danger.     M.  Coindet  being  struck  with  the  power- 


270  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

ful  effects  of  this  method,  had  an  apparatus  supplied  to  the  asylum 
of  which  he  had  charge. 

"Case  213.  — Typhoid  fever.     Mile. -,  aged  15,  was  seized  with 

delirium  on  the  fifth  day  of  fever  when  in  a  warm  bath.  M.  Chomel 
being  called  in,  proposed  Haemospasia.  A  single  derivation  sufficed 
to  restore  consciousness,  and  the  fever  followed  its  regular  course 
towards  recovery. 

"  Case  214. — While  at  Lausanne,  I  was  consulted  for  a  young 
school  girl,  aged  19,  suffering  from  typhoid  ;  M.  Delaharpe  acted  with 
me.  Haemospasia  was  the  foundation  of  our  treatment.  The  first 
derivation  dispersed  the  delirium,  though  we  used  others  to  prevent 
a  return.  On  the  6th  day  all  active  measures  were  dispensed  with 
and  the  patient  became  convalescent. 

"  In  intermittent  fevers  (says  Junod)  the  return  of  an  attack  can 
often  be  prevented  by  a  Haemospasia  applied  an  hour  before  the 
attack."  He  observes  that  in  all  eruptive  fevers,  when  the  eruption 
fails  to  appear  or  having  appeared  disappears,  the  pulse  becomes 
small  and  rapid,  the  skin  dry  and  the  nervous  system  greatly 
oppressed.  "  Such  a  state  alarms  even  the  cleverest  doctors.  They 
use  emetics,  sudorifics,  or  stimulating  applications  to  draw  the  circula- 
tion back  to  the  surface,  some  even  resort  to  bleeding,  and  cold  water 
douches  or  compresses,  but  all  in  vain.  In  such  circumstances 
Haemospasia  shows  its  efficacy.  It  frees  the  nervous  centres,  relieves 
the  organic  depression,  causes  a  flow  of  blood  through  the  tissues 
and  brings  back  the  rash  with  surprising  facility.  In  erysipelas  it  is 
not  necessary  to  wait  until  it  has  fully  manifested  itself,  for  it  can  be 
prevented  from  running  its  course  by  anticipatory  applications  of 
Haemospasia." 

We  must  pass  by  the  numerous  illustrations  of  the  power  of 
Haemospasia  in  surgical  cases  and  various  inflammations,  for  it  is 
unnecessary  to  continue  these  quotations  further  to  show  the  great 
power  of  Haemospasia.  It  is  a  magnificent  illustration  of  the  laws 
of  Sarcognomy,  and  ought  to  be  familiar  to  every  student. 

Cases  still  more  remarkable  than  those  quoted  from  Junod  can  be 
furnished  by  other  practitioners  of  the  pneumatic  treatment.  Dr.  C. 
M.  Newell  of  1074  Washington  St.,  Boston,  has  been  actively  engaged 
for  twenty  years  in  this  pneumatic  practice  and  has  performed  more 
remarkable  cures  than  any  I  have  quoted  from  Junod,  some  of  which 
are  stated  in  his  pamphlet  on  Pneumatic  Therapia.  But  finding  the 
medical  profession  indifferent  to  Pneumatic  Therapia,  he  has  not 
attempted  to  force  his  knowledge  on  those  unwilling  to  learn.,  I 
have  quoted  from  Junod  because  he  has  so  stable  a  reputation,  so 
ample  an  indorsement  by  the  most  conservative  and  distinguished 
physicians.  But  every  energetic  practitioner  of  pneumatic  treatment 
in  an  enlightened  manner  will  be  able,  like  Dr.  Newell,  to  surpass  in 
some  respects  the  record  of  Junod  ;  and  the  votary  of  Sarcognomy 
who  applies    its    principles  will    show  himself  very  inefficient  if  he 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  2*]  \ 

does  not  in  a  few  years  accumulate  a  more  brilliant  record  than  that 
of  the  distinguished  Frenchman,  who  knew  not  the  whole  power  of 
pneumatic  treatment. 

Sarcognomy  shows  that  what  has  been  done  on  the  sub-human 
region  of  the  human  body  can  be  done  on  all  other  parts  with  the 
same  logical  result  —  the  development  of  the  local  function  already 
determined  by  Sarcognomy.  Consequently  the  pneumatic  treatment 
can  play  upon  every  key  of  the  human  instrument  through  the  circu- 
lation as  it  is  played  upon  by  electric  and  nervauric  practice,  though 
it  is  incapable  of  the  same  specific  minuteness  of  application 
because  it  requires  a  larger  space  and  is  also  resisted  by  the  bones  of 
the  cranium.  Had  Junod  understood  the  basic  principle  of  Sarcog- 
nomy, he  might  have  made  a  satisfactory  demonstration  of  the 
science  by  pneumatic  experiments  to  develop  local  functions. 

Whoever  is  determined  to  excel  in  the  relief  of  disease  should 
have  at  his  command  the  nervauric,  electric  and  pneumatic  thera- 
peutics, each  of  which  can  accomplish  something  peculiar  which  the 
other  methods  cannot,  and  the  whole  of  which  guided  by  Sarcognomy 
may  accomplish  more  than  the  therapeutics  of  the  old  colleges.  Let 
us  consider  now  the  various  applications  of  pneumatic  Sarcognomy. 

Leaving  the  sub-human  region  below  the  knee,  we  shall  find  not 
a  sedative  but  an  invigorating  region  from  the  knee  to  the  trunk, 
which  is  one  of  the  most  powerful  tonic  invigorators  we  can  bring  to 
bear  to  develop  muscular  energy  and  vital  force.  It  is  desirable  that 
the  cupping  should  be  extended  above  the  head  of  the  thigh-bone,  so 
as  to  fully  include  nutrition  and  vital  force  on  the  thigh,  but  it 
should  keep  a  few  inches  above  the  knee  to  avoid  its  restless  in- 
fluence unless  we  desire  that  peculiar  stimulation.  When  the  entire 
limb  (thigh  and  leg)  is  included,  we  gain  great  vital  force  in  combina- 
tion with  the  sedative  anti-inflammatory  character  of  the  leg  and  foot 
by  a  moderate  derivation :  for  the  larger  the  territory  included,  the 
more  moderate  should  be  the  suction.  This  whole  limb  treatment 
therefore  is  valuable  in  consumption,  which  needs  both  reaction  and 
invigoration.  But  where  there  is  little  active  disease,  the  thigh 
alone  will  give  the  needed  invigoration. 

This  crural  stimulation  has  a  wide  range  of  application  to  all 
cases  of  reduced  vitality  and  emaciation,  consumption,  anemia, 
paralysis,  convalescence  from  severe  disease,  neurasthenia,  etc.,  and 
co-operates  admirably  with  spinal  treatment. 

Having  shown  in  the  fifth  chapter  that  the  vital  forces  emanate  from 
the  spinal  column,  and  having  now  shown  the  power  of  the  pneumatic 
method  to  strengthen  and  develop  any  local  function  by  producing 
hyperemia  through  atmospheric  attraction,  it  is  obvious  that  when 


272  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  j_CHAP.    XIV- 

we  treat  the  spinal  column  by  Haemospasia,  we  may  rouse  and 
renovate  every  debilitated  organ  in  the  body  by  the  attraction  of  a 
slightly  diminished  pressure  on  the  different  portions  of  the  spine, 
which  draws  the  circulation  to  the  spinal  column,  forces  the  blood 
more  freely  through  the  spinal  cord,  its  nerves  and  the  adjacent 
ganglia,  and  thus  removes  spinal  disease  and  debility,  whether  from 
softening  caused  by  a  deficient  blood  supply  or  from  any  species  of 
irritation. 

It  has  long  been  known  that  cupping  is  of  great  value  in  spinal 
diseases,  but  it  was  not  applied  in  the  efficient  manner  of  Haemos- 
pasia, and  it  has  been  shown  that  Haemospasia  is  a  true  vitalizer  and 
not  a  mere  derivative  or  cause  of  hyperaemic  congestion  like  Haemos- 
tasis,  for  it  overcomes  tumors  and  varicose  veins,  which  would  be 
greatly  aggravated  if  Haemospasia  merely  produced  a  blood  conges- 
tion. 

Inflammation  is  a  haemostatic  condition,  a  blood  congestion,  from 
the  exhaustion  of  the  vital  force  in  the  parts,  which  maintains  the 
circulation,  hence  Haemospasia  relieves  it  by  diminishing  pressure, 
assisting  the  flow  and  vitalizing  the  surrounding  tissues,  the  healthy 
expansion  of  which  assists  the  relaxed  capillaries  in  the  inflamed 
portion. 

Thus  does  Haemospasia  give  us  not  only  the  power  of  quenching 
local  disease  by  flooding  it  with  good  blood,  but  the  power  of  sending 
the  vital  forces  where  we  please,  and  also  withdrawing  congestion 
whenever  it  is  oppressive,  as  when  we  relieve  the  congestion  of 
cholera  and  the  congestion  of  the  chill  of  intermittent  fever.  These 
congestions  are  deadly  because  they  are  venous  congestions,  and 
venous  congestion  is  an  attack  on  life  by  diminishing  the  supply  of 
arterial  blood,  while  lowering  the  vitality  and  softening  the  structure 
of  the  congested  organs. 

Haemospasia,  by  relieving  atmospheric  pressure  to  the  amount  of 
one  or  two  thousand  pounds  (for  the  entire  atmospheric  pressure  on 
an  adult  lias  been  computed  at  30,000  pounds),  greatly  increases  the 
facility  of  the  circulation,  and  increases  the  rapidity  of  the  pulse, 
making  the  blood  more  arterial  and  raising  the  temperature.  Thus 
does  it  relieve  pernicious  congestion  and  exalt  all  the  powers  of  life 
in  proportion  to  its  application,  and  as  Sarcognomy  shows  where  to 
apply  it  in  a  scientific  manner,  instead  of  relying  on  the  empirical 
but  fortunate  methods  heretofore  in  use,  it  would  seem  that  Pneu- 
matic Sarcognomy  should  stand  in  the  very  front  rank  of  thera- 
peutics, to  exalt  or  depress  the  force  and  rate  of  the  pulse. 

Its  most  obvious  suggestion  is  that  we  should  adapt  our  cups  to 
the  whole  or  any  portion  of  the  spinal  column  and  administer  our 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  273 

treatment  with  the  pneumatic  cup  as  we  do  with  the  hand  or  with 
the  negative  pole  of  an  electric  current  for  which  I  have  given  full 
directions.  Upon  many  persons  the  hand  is  ineffective  and  electri- 
city very  limited  in  its  power,  but  no  human  being  can  resist  the 
pneumatic  power. 

What  an  enormous  power  we  acquire  by  combining  these  three 
agencies  to  snatch  the  victim  from  the  brink  of  the  grave  to  which 
physicians  and  friends  have  resigned  him  !  After  a  few  dispersive 
passes  (and  if  there  be  a  venous  or  inflammatory  congestion,  a  deri- 
vation to  the  lower  or  upper  limbs),  nervauric  treatment  may  be 
applied  on  the  part  of  the  spine  most  involved,  to  concentrate  the 
nervous  forces,  followed  by  a  gentle  and  prolonged  Haemospasia  at 
the  same  spot,  to  concentrate  the  circulation,  and  if  necessary  com- 
pleted by  our  electric  current  charged  with  magnetic  or  medical 
virtues  or  with  the  nervaura  of  the  operator.  No  such  concentration 
of  therapeutic  power  has  heretofore  been  possible,  because  unknown. 

Special  Treatment.  —  A  cup  from  three  inches  wide  and  six  or 
eight  inches  long  may  be  applied  on  the  upper  dorsal  and  three  lower 
cervical  vertebrae  for  the  benefit  of  the  thorax  and  head  in  all  affections 
of  those  organs.  It  is  one  of  the  most  effective  tonics  that  we  can 
use,  and  for  simple  invigoration  may  well  be  combined  with  the  cru- 
ral treatment  which  has  been  described.  But  there  is  no  necessity 
for  narrowing  the  cup,  unless  for  a  special  spinal  diagnosis  by  its 
effects.  Cups  six  inches  wide  may  be  recommended ;  and  a  cup 
devised  to  cover  the  whole  space  from  shoulder  to  shoulder,  including 
as  much  of  the  shoulders  as  possible,  would  have  so  powerful  a  tonic 
and  hygienic  effect  as  to  be  justly  considered  a  leading  remedial 
agent. 

This  is  what  was  lacking  in  Junod's  derivation  by  the  boot  on  the 
leg,  which  reduced  congestion  by  derivation,  and  lowered  the  capacity 
for  inflammatory  and  nervous  affections,  but  did  not  at  the  same 
time  actively  rouse  the  hygienic  energies  or  "vis  medicatrix  natures" 
which  is  developed  at  the  shoulder. 

In  the  treatment  of  fevers,  the  sub-human  derivation  should  be 
used  to  overcome  congestive  febrile  and  inflammatory  conditions,  but 
it  should  be  associated  with  antiphlogistic  treatment  on  the  side  and 
the  shoulder —  on  the  shoulder  to  antagonize  disease  and  on  the  body 
behind  the  humerus  (region  of  Coolness)  for  a  more  perfect,  cooling, 
soothing  restorative  and  hypnotic  influence  than  could  be  derived 
from  the  le^,  for  it  better  supports  the  energy  of  the  brain. 

The  treatment  of  fevers,  then,  is  very  simple.  Cups  across  the 
shoulders,  cups  behind  the  arm  and  sub-human  derivation,  effusion  of 


2/4  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

warm  water  or  wet  packs  on  the  hypogastric  region,  and  the  medicine 
on  which  we  should  rely  if  there  were  no  mechanical  treatment 
(such,  for  example,  as  baptisia  in  typhoid  fever,  and  quinine,  salicin 
or  syrup  of  phenic  acid  in  other  fevers);  but  the  result  of  the  latter 
will  be  found  so  satisfactory  that  many  would  become  indifferent  to 
the  aid  of  medicine. 

The  treatment  of  Pneumatic  Sarcognomy  requires  that  the  practi- 
tioner should  make  himself,  as  soon  as  possible,  thoroughly  familiar 
with  the  chart  of  locations  on  the  body. 

If  already  familiar  with  that,  he  will  know  that  all  affec- 
tions of  the  abdominal  organs  are  to  be  treated  by  invigorating  the 
lower  dorsal  region,  all  pelvic  disorders,  and  all  affections  of  the  lower 
limbs  on  the  lumbo-sacral  region  and  a  few  inches  above  and  below  it. 

In  short,  there  are  not  many  diseases  in  which  it  is  not  important 
to  go  to  the  controlling  center  at  the  spine,  which  is  often  not  only 
the  controlling  power  but  the  seat  of  the  disease.  It  must  always 
be  in  a  more  or  less  morbid  condition  from  its  sympathy  with  the 
morbid  organs. 

That  which  Sarcognomy  shows  to  be  the  true  practice  has  already 
been  largely  verified  by  Dr.  Newell.  This  skilful  homeopathic  phy- 
sician in  his  extensive  pneumatic  practice  has  found  himself  com- 
pelled to  treat  the  spine  in  all  important  cases. 

The  old-fashioned  dry  cupping  and  bloody  cupping  never  expanded 
into  a  philosophic  practice,  because  it  was  based  on  an  incorrect  idea 
of  relief  by  derivation,  either  by  bleeding  after  scarification  or  by  a 
congestion  of  blood  at  the  surface.  Hsemospasia,  on  the  contrary, 
produces  not  congestion,  but  an  active  hyperemic  circulation,  a 
true  vitalizing  process,  which  also  brings  the  blood  to  the  surface 
where  it  is  oxygenated  and  where  it  throws  off  with  increased  facility 
its  perspirable  impurities  through  the  skin. 

This  process  also  becomes  an  invaluable  addition  to  our  means  of 
diagnosis,  by  showing  the  condition  of  the  parts  through  the  appear- 
ance of  the  blood  brought  to  the  surface.  On  healthy  structures, 
Haemospasia  brings  out  a  fine,  healthy,  florid  color,  but  on  all  morbid 
parts  the  color  is  unhealthy.  It  maybe  pallid  or  dead-looking,  or  of 
various  dark  hues  approaching  absolute  blackness.  This  tells  where 
the  disease  is  located,  and  often  corrects  the  errors  of  medical  diag- 
nosis, as  in  the  case  of  Mr.  S.,of  Boston,  treated  by  Dr.  B.,  who  was 
eminent*  as  to  diseases  of  the  chest,  for  dangerous  disease  of  the 
lungs,  without  giving  him  any  relief.  The  pneumatic  test  showed 
that  his  lungs  expanded  freely,  thoroughly  and  pleasantly,  but  that 
on  the  right  side  of  the  walls  of  his  chest  there  was  evidence  of 
severe  pleurisy  having  existed,  leaving  adhesions,  which  was  the  fact, 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  275 

and  the  corrected  diagnosis  made  the  basis  of  a  successful  treatment. 

In  the  case  of  Judge  S.,  pronounced  by  seven  eminent  physicians 
a  paralysis  from  cerebral  embolism,  the  pneumatic  test  showed,  instead 
of  almost  hopeless  cerebral  embolism,  definite  spinal  lesions,  which 
were  cured  by  pneumatic  treatment. 

In  the  case  of  Mr.  S„  the  soundness  of  the  lungs  was  shown  by  the 
pneumatic  test,  which  will  be  explained  when  we  consider  the  pneu- 
matic treatment  of  the  entire  surface.  The  soundness  of  the  lungs 
is  shown  by  their  free  expansion  under  pressure,  and  the  soundness  of 
all  parts  of  the  body  is  shown  by  the  healthy  florid  color  developed 
under  Haemospasia.  Guided  by  such  a  test,  surgeons  would  not  com- 
mit the  mistake  of  cutting  into  the  body  to  remove  morbid  organs, 
when  they  were  in  a  sound  condition,  of  which  many  horrid  examples 
are  recorded,  the  latest  published  being  operations  on  two  women 
for  uterine  tumors  which  proved  to  be  nothing  else  but  uterine 
expansions  by  pregnancy,  one  of  five  months,  the  other  of  seven 
months.  Of  course  the  operation  was  not  completed,  but  both  died  in 
from  one  to  three  days,  and  it  proved  very  unfortunate  for  the  doctors 
who  resided  in  Nebraska.  (See  Medical  Bulletin)  The  pneumatic 
diagnosis  is  mentioned  by  Junod  as  follows :  "  The  color  of  the  sur- 
face which  has  been  subjected  to  Haemospasia  will  serve  as  a  diagno- 
sis. Thus  in  the  commencement  of  typhoid,  the  surface  would  assume 
a  bluish  tint,  while  on  the  approach  of  convalescence,  the  derivation 
reddens  the  tint,  according  to  physiological  laws.  The  same  results 
may  be  observed  in  the  treatment  of  other  adynamic  affections.  If 
the  surface  subjected  to  Haemospasia  becomes  firm,  it  may  be  sup- 
posed that  the  blood  is  fibrinous.  Finally  at  the  beginning  of  certain 
eruptive  maladies,  Haemospasia  can  throw  light  on  diagnosis  by  accel- 
erating or  quickening  the  exanthema  on  the  part  where  it  has  been 
applied.  The  same  means  serve  equally  well  in  icterus."  This  treat- 
ment implies  that  his  treatments  were  made  chiefly  on  the  limbs,  but 
he  seems  to  have  no  clear  idea  of  the  effects  of  different  localities, 
or  of  the  paramount  importance  of  the  spine  which  he  appears  to 
neglect.  He  describes  his  treatment  simply  as  Haemospasia  or  deri- 
vation, not  stating  whether  upper  or  lower  limbs  or  any  other  part  was 
the  locality,  as  if  the  whole  treatment  was  nothing  but  derivation, 
the  false  idea  which  guided  the  old  method  of  cupping.  This  con- 
tracted view  renders  his  success  still  more  marvellous,  but  it  falls  far 
short  of  the  success  obtained  by  Dr.  Newell  in  paying  more  atten- 
tion to  the  spine  in  all  cases,  and  also  in  treating  immediately  over 
the  morbid  organs,  as  well  as  on  the  spine,  thus  accelerating  the 
treatment  and  aiding  the  diagnosis.  Junod's  idea  was  derivation 
instead  of  bleeding,  leeching  and    cupping,  and   he    says    by   these 


276  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

derivations  the  physician  "  can  divert  the  blood  from  the  general 
system  for  a  sufficient  space  of  time  —  several  days  if  necessary? 
This  is  its  great  advantage  over  Haemostasis  by  ligature  which  cannot 
be  kept  on  many  hours  without  some  injury.  But  the  leading  benefit 
of  Haemospasia,  the  increased  vitality  of  the  parts  to  which  it  is 
applied,  and  the  consequent  revolution  in  the  balance  of  functions  he 
seems  not  to  have  understood,  nor  could  he  have  appreciated  its  im- 
portance, if  he  had  studied  it  without  the  knowledge  of  Sarcognomy. 

If  Haemospasia  had  no  other  utility  than  its  power  to  aid  diagnosis, 
it  should  rank  high  among  the  contributions  to  practical  therapeu- 
tics. It  is  not  to  be  understood,  however,  that  discoloration  of  the 
skin  always  implies  merely  disease  of  the  subjacent  structures.  The 
morbid  blood  is  attracted  to  the  surfaces  under  pneumatic  treatment, 
and  diseases  in  the  abdomen  may  be  indicated  by  discoloration  of  the 
legs.  Junot  mentions  this  in  his  experience.  For  example,  in  a  case 
of  cholera  accompanied  by  cholic  and  pain,  derivation  was  continued 
for  two  hours,  and  he  says :  "  The  leg  on  which  the  boot  was  applied 
became  nearly  black."  In  a  case  of  painful  cholera  reported  by  Dr. 
A.  Catel,  he  says:  "The  color  of  the  leg  was  peculiar,  and  quite 
different  from  that  which  usually  follows  Haemospasia.  It  had  the 
blueness  peculiar  to  this  malady,  showing  that  even  in  convalescence 
the  blood  is  slow  to  recover  its  normal  color."  The  application  was 
for  35  minutes.  In  a  case  of  approaching  small-pox  he  says:  "The 
appearance  of  the  limb  acted  upon  showed  by  the  characteristic  dis- 
coloration the  approach  of  an  eruptive  malady.  On  the  following 
day  the  whole  body  was  covered  with  small-pox  ;  the  patient  rapidly 
recovered." 

Junod,  however,  seems  not  to  have  appreciated  the  importance  of 
the  color  of  skin  as  an  indication,  and  seldom  mentions  it  in  these 
reports.  I  would  add  that  it  does  not  require  a  powerful  pneumatic 
derivation  to  bring  a  morbid  color  to  the  leg.  One  of  my  students, 
Mr.  C,  applied  a  cup  on  the  leg  in  a  case  of  peritonitis,  and  made  an 
excellent  illustration  of  the  derivative  power  of  cupping  in  relieving 
internal  diseases.  The  cup  was  applied  on  the  calf  of  the  leg,  not 
much  over  five  minutes,  and  gave  immediate  relief  to  the  pain  of  per- 
itonitis, appearing  to  subdue  the  inflammation,  which  it  attracted  into 
the  leg  —  making  the  leg  as  painful  and  tender  as  if  suffering  from 
severe  rheumatic  inflammation,  so  that  it  was  more  than  a  week  be- 
fore he  could  stand  upon  it,  notwithstanding  careful  treatment. 
This  was  in  accordance  with  a  law  of  correlation,  which  may  be  pre- 
sented here,  as  it  has  been  overlooked  in  preceding  chapters. 

The  law  of  correlation,  which  is  similar  to  that  between  cerebral 
organs,  operates  between  the  limbs  and  the  trunk.     The  upper  and 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  277 

lower  limbs  are  parallel  and  analogous,  in  higher  and  lower  spheres. 
The  humerus  or  arm  above  the  elbow  correlates  with  the  thorax,  and 
the  forearm  (below  the  elbow)  with  the  abdomen.  In  like  manner, 
the  thigh  correlates  with  the  thorax,  and  the  leg  with  the  abdominal 
region  — the  lower  part  of  the  leg  and  foot  correlating  with  the  pel- 
vic region.  Hence  operations  on  the  leg  and  foot,  or  the  forearm  and 
hand,  affect  the  abdominal  region,  which  operations  on  the  upper  arm. 
and  thigh  affect  the  thorax.  The  cupping  of  the  calf  was  therefore- 
the  proper  thing  in  a  case  of  peritonitis,  as  foot  and  leg  baths  are. 
appropriate  in  fever. 

We  return  to  our  special  treatment.  It  may  be  stated  broadly  that: 
wherever  disease  exists  the  tendency  of  Haemospasia  applied  upon 
the  morbid  locality  is  to  dispel  the  morbid  blood,  bring  in  a  fresh: 
wholesome  circulation,  promote  absorption  of  improper  depositions, 
and  restore  all  the  conditions  of  health ;  for  I  have  shown  that  every 
part  of  the  body  lives  only  by  influx  —  the  influx  of  arterial  blood 
and  nervaura  or  nervous  energy,  and  hence  it  must  be  that  the 
adequate  influx  of  these  two  will  restore  any  morbid  organs  to  a. 
sound  condition.  It  is  difficult  to  say  how  far  any  part  must  be. 
advanced  in  destruction  to  resist  the  combined  power  of  nervauric 
and  pneumatic  treatment.  There  is  nothing  in  pathology  more 
formidable  than  cancers,  yet  they  have  often  been  conquered  by 
nervauric  treatment  alone,  though  I  have  forgotten  to  record  the 
cases  reported.  I  do  not  know  that  pneumatic  treatment  has  ever 
been  applied  to  them,  but  Dr.  Newell  has  often  applied  it  successfully 
in  Bright's  Disease. 

It  is  therefore  the  physcian's  duty  to  apply  Haemospasia  as  a  restora- 
tive agent  over  all  sorts  of  disease  as  often  as  required,  and  to  apply 
it  chiefly  to  the  spinal  column  as  a  center  and  source  of  vital  action- 
Its  application  over  the  abdominal  surfaces  must  be  restrained  by  the 
laws  already  fully  stated,  which  lead  us  to  prefer  the  posterior  sur- 
faces of  the  body.  There  is  no  objection  to  a  moderate  application 
of  the  nervauric  hand,  the  negative  pole  or  the  pneumatic  cup  upon 
the  abdomen  to  relieve  morbid  parts  or  assist  enfeebled  organs,  if  it 
be  cautiously  done ;  but  there  must  not  be  much  vital  concentration 
upon  the  abdomen,  and  when  it  is  treated,  the  spine  should  generally 
be  treated  at  the  same  time.  Even  Junod  obtained  a  glimpse  of  this, 
and  he  says:  "This  method  is  not  so  available  in  maladies  of  the 
abdomen.  It  has  been  therefore  less  frequently  used,  and  there  are 
not  many  clinical  observations  to  report  with  regard  to  it.  This 
might  be  foreseen  as  reaction  is  generally  less  efficacious  when 
applied  to  the  abdomen  than  when  acting  upon  regions  above  the 
diaphragm.     It  is  not  astonishing  therefore  that  Haemospasia,  the 


2?8  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

most  powerful  of  all,  should  bow  to  the  general  law."  Nevertheless, 
when  we  understand  all  the  functions,  we  may  produce  very  impor- 
tant results  by  treating  the  abdomen  in  connection  with  the  posterior 
surfaces. 

The  neck  and  basis  of  the  brain  behind  the  ear  will  occur  to  any 
one  who  understands  locations  as  a  seat  of  commanding  power  over 
the  whole  body.  The  neck  in  its  relation  to  the  brain  at  its  basis  is 
called  the  crural  region,  because  it  controls  the  lower  limbs,  and  all 
the  physiological  and  psychic  energies  with  which  they  are  associated. 
It  offers  us  Vital  Force  at  the  basis  of  the  cerebellum,  and  in  the 
lower  cervical  region  it  gives  control  of  the  arms,  while  its  three 
ganglia  supply  power  to  the  heart.  Hence  it  is  that  the  most  power- 
ful stimulus  we  can  give  with  electricity  is  upon  the  neck  and  basis 
of  the  cranium.  Haemospasia  in  this  location,  which  is  practicable 
with  cups  of  the  proper  shape  and  size,  will  realize  similar  results  to 
those  which  we  produce  by  the  hand  and  the  battery. 

The  tonic  region  (or  shoulders)  being  specially  antagonistic  to  the 
relaxing  abdominal  region,  or  we  may  say,  to  the  viscera  generally,  is 
the  proper  place  for  antagonizing  visceral  diseases  and  irritations. 
The  entire  shoulder  —  by  its  inferior,  exterior  and  posterior  surfaces 
—  antagonizes  the  hypochondriac  and  abdominal  surfaces,  the  liver, 
stomach  and  bowels.  Extending  under  the  shoulder  into  the  axilla, 
we  find  antagonism  to  the  pelvic  organs  and  lower  bowels,  also  an- 
tagonism to  melancholy,  insanity  and  hysteria. 

Hence  upon  the  shoulder  region  we  tranquillize  abdominal  disorders, 
while  we  invigorate  abdominal  functions  upon  the  lower  dorsal  spine 
and  the  abdominal  surfaces.  Mental  disorders  of  every  grade  are 
relieved  just  under  the  arms,  with  the  co-operation  of  the  cephalic 
region  or  cervico-dorsal  junction.  Many  insane  patients  might  be 
relieved  if  this  were  acted  on. 

The  arms  maintain  a  direct  (not  antagonistic)  sympathy  with  the 
parallel  region  of  the  body  as  they  hang.  The  influence  of  the  hum- 
erus invigorates  the  thorax,  and  that  of  the  forearm  the  abdominal 
organs.  Hence  treatment  below  the  elbow  is  valuable  in  abdominal 
affections,  and  above  the  elbow  in  affections  of  the  lungs  and  heart. 
Diseases  of  the  heart  sometimes  prove  this  by  the  pain  in  the 
shoulder  extending  to  the  elbow.  In  a  case  reported  a  week  ago  of 
death  from  heart-disease,  the  first  thing  noticed  was  severe  pain  in 
the  arm.  Junod  has  observed  some  of  these  things  ;  he  says:  "The 
brachial  derivation  is  very  effective  in  affections  of  the  heart  and 
lungs ;"  and  again,  "The  double  application  to  the  arms  offers  in 
certain  cases  resources  that  one  might  look  for  in  vain  from  other 
means,  especially  when  it  is  a  question  of  chronic  or  acute  affections 


c;:ap.  x:v.]  pneumatic  sarcognomy.  279 

of  the  abdomen."  "In  uterine  hemorrhages  it  is  best  to  confine 
oneself  to  a  double  application  :  on  the  arms."  That  is  certainly  a 
good  application  ;  but  it  would  be  much  better  if  extended  to  the 
shoulder  and  the  surface  of  the  chest  below  the  arms,  which  is  more 
tranquillizing.  Of  course,  hemorrhages  should  also  be  treated  by 
derivation  to  the  lower  limbs,  which  will  greatly  reduce  the  force  of 
the  circulation,  and  this  he  advises  to  the  extent  of  "  reducing  the 
pulse  to  a  thread."  Though  Junod  did  not  understand  the  vital 
relation  of  the  shoulder  and  the  adjacent  surfaces,  he  approximated 
the  truth  as  near  as  he  could  in  what  he  says  of  the  arms  —  that 
Hasmospasia  "  is  especially  beneficial  if  applied  to  the  arm  when  there 
are  signs  of  miscarriage,"  and  also  that  it  should  not  be  so  applied 
when  menstruation  is  approaching. 

In  amenorrhcea  he  appears  to  have  used,  instead  of  a  simple 
spinal  treatment,  an  apparatus  including  the  whole  pelvis,  and  also 
Hasmospasia  to  the  lower  limbs,  with  which  he  says  he  was  very 
successful.  Such  cases  may  be  well  treated  by  an  8-inch  cup  on  the 
lum bo-sacral  region,  aided  if  necessary  by  a  cup  from  groin  to  groin, 
or  on  the  groins  alone.  A  gentle  treatment  on  the  lower  limbs  will 
assist.  In  dysmenorrhcea  and  menorrhagia,  as  well  as  hysteria,  the 
sedative  treatment  below  the  arms  is  important,  covering  the  regions 
of  Sanity,  Tranquillity  and  Chastity.  In  parturition,  the  lumbar  and 
lower  dorsal  regions  will  give  material  aid. 

The  lower  dorsal  region  should  be  invigorated  by  pneumatic  treat- 
ment in  all  abdominal  affections,  and  the  lumbar  region  should  be 
included  in  cases  of  constipation.  The  forearm  yields  assistance  of 
great  value  in  all  dyspeptic  affections.  Of  course,  disorders  which 
are  congestive  require  the  aid  of  Hasmospasic  derivation,  and  the 
abdominal  region  is  happily  relieved  on  both  upper  and  lower  limbs. 
The  former  have  less  derivative  power,  but  a  more  congenial  in- 
fluence. 

In  the  less  active  conditions  of  disease,  such  as  old  tumors, 
deposits  and  dropsies,  we  should  rely  on  spinal  and  local  treatment, 
as  the  increased  circulation  produces  great  power  of  absorption. 
Junod  and  Newell  have  both  recognized  this,  though  the  former  has 
relied  too  much  on  general  derivation  and  too  little  on  spinal  co-oper- 
ation.    Junod  says  :  — 

"  In  dropsies  or  collections  of  fluids  it  is  most  successful,  as  the 
vessels  absorb  the  fluids  in  order  to  supply  the  vacuum  caused  by 
mechanical  displacement  of  the  blood  in  the  system.  This  absorp- 
tion is  so  rapid  that  in  many  cases  it  astonishes  even  the  operator. 
Dropsies  of  the  pleura  and  of  the  pericardium  diminish  in  a  few 
hours,  and  the  intestinal  and  renal  secretions  are  increased,  some- 
times as  much  as  by  the  action  of  purgatives  and  diuretics.     Where 


2S0  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMV.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

there  is  oedema,  absorption  is  facilitated  in  the  same  manner  by  a 
direct  application  on  the  parts  affected.  .  .  .  When  sanguineous 
congestions  have  resolved  themselves  into  parts  disposed  to  hemorr- 
hage, Haemospasia  not  only  favors  the  reabsorption  of  the  effused 
blood  in  the  same  way  that  it  acts  on  the  liquids  arrested  in  the 
serous  cavities,  but  it  can  diminish  the  general  disturbance  and  swell- 
ing around  the  parts  subjected  to  the  hemorrhage."  He  says  further  : 
°  I  have  been  successful  in  combating  ascites  when  it  proceeded  from 
impeded  circulation  caused  by  an  engorged  state  of  the  abdominal 
viscera.  I  have  dispersed  with  one  application  the  congestions  and 
swellings  caused  by  neuralgia,  tooth-ache  or  cold.  Sometimes  I  have 
been  able  to  arrest  ptyalism,  watering  of  the  eyes,  coryza  and 
excessive  alvine  secretions." 

It  is  obvious,  therefore,  that  pneumatic  treatment,  which  so  power- 
fully promotes  absorption,  may  excel  all  other  means  in  cases  of 
hemorrhage  in  the  brain  producing  apoplexy  and  paralysis,  in  which 
it  is  important  to  control  the  cephalic  circulation  and  to  favor  absorp- 
tion. Certainly  its  brilliant  results  in  apoplexy,  paralysis,  cerebral 
congestion  and  epilepsy  sustain  this  view. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  write  a  volume  of  special  directions  :  for  I 
presume  my  reader  to  understand  the  principles  and  locations  of 
Sarcognomy,  and  to  realize  that  in  Haemospasia  he  has  another  and 
very  powerful  agent  to  operate  on  these  locations. 

I  think  he  will  find  in  lumbar  and  sacral  or  lumbo-spinal  Haemos- 
pasia, a  powerful  control  over  the  sexual  region  and  all  its  diseases 
and  infirmities. 

Haemospasia  is  not  limited  to  diseases,  but  applies  with  equal 
success  to  all  defective  development,  whether  in  the  sexual  system, 
the  muscular  system,  the  nervous  system,  or  the  viscera.  By  increas- 
ing the  circulation  of  organs  and  of  their  control  in  the  spine,  it 
insures  their  growth  and  normal  development,  and  it  does  not  seem 
absurd  to  hope  that  we  may  thus  remodel  defective  constitutions 
both  pliysically  and  morally. 

A  pneumatic  jacket,  which  would  attract  the  circulation  into  the 
upper  part  of  the  thorax,  would  not  only  produce  important  soothing, 
tonic  and  healthful  effects  ;  but,  from  the  sympathy  of  the  upper 
thoracic  region  with  the  brain  and  the  ethical  sentiments,  it  might  be 
a  powerful  aid  in  elevating  the  character  and  reforming  the  vicious. 
But  for  the  elevation  of  the  human  race  we  need  a  more  decisive 
measure,  which  has  been  kept  out  of  sight  by  a  morbid  moralism. 
The  criminal  population  should  not  be  allowed  to  propagate.  Castra- 
tion of  criminals  is  the  duty  of  society. 

It  is  highly  probable  that  the  pneumatic  treatment  by  rarefied  air 
(or  air-bath)  would  assist  in  this  object  ;  an  ascent  about  three  miles, 
which    takes    off   half   the   atmospheric    pressure,  produces   a  great 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  28 1 

reduction  of  animal  force,  leaving  the  higher  faculties  in  full  activity. 
Penal  institutions  ought  therefore  to  be  located  in  high  mountain 
localities  for  the  sake  of  this  refining  influence,  and  it  would  be 
worth  while  to  try  the  rarefied-air  chamber  upon  criminals  of  great 
animal  force,  as  the  condensed-air  chamber  is  used  to  strengthen  the 
animal  forces.  De  Saussure  stated  that  when  less  than  twelve 
thousand  feet  high  (11,273)  on  the  Col  du  Geant,  he  and  his  com- 
panions were  in  a  feverish  condition  with  great  thirst  and  a  horror 
of  stimulants  or  food,  showing  that  the  appetites  were  suppressed. 
At  the  height  of  13,124  feet  on  Mount  Blanc  he  could  not  take  a 
dozen  steps  without  feeling  a  degree  of  faintness  that  forced  him  to 
sit  down.  Fatigue  at  that  elevation  was  "completely  exhausting," 
compelling  one  to  stop. 

Thus  elevated  situations  subdue  the  inferior,  while  they  sustain  the 
higher  elements  of  humanity,  and  at  a  certain  height  the  lungs  are 
more  developed  and  are  protected  from  consumption.  History  shows 
the  superiority  of  mountaineers,  and  cretinism  is  produced  in  the 
valleys  of  the  Alps.  A  chamber  to  hold  the  patient  in  condensed  or 
rarefied  air  must,  according  to  the  principles  already  stated,  be 
valuable  for  stimulating  the  lower  or  the  higher  powers  of  the  con- 
stitution. 

If  the  head  of  the  patient  be. exposed  while  his  body  is  subjected 
to  sKghtly  diminished  pressure,  the  effect  must  be  the  universal 
stimulation  of  the  body  and  relief  of  any  congestion  of  the  head. 
On  so  large  surface  the  change  of  pressure  should  be  slight.  The 
air  that  is  breathed  being  of  full  pressure  would  be  forced  into  the 
lungs  and  its  absorption  greatly  accelerated — the  expansion  of  the 
lungs  being  promoted  and  at  the  same  time  their  condition  tested, 
for  the  morbid  part  will  reveal  its  location  by  the  sensations  of  the 
patient.  This  measure  however  is  of  limited  utility  because  depress- 
ing to  the  brain  and  lungs.     Another  method  is  better. 

In  a  taller  chamber,  the  whole  body  may  be  taken  in  and  the  out- 
side air  breathed  from  a  tube.  This  has  a  more  uniform  effect  and 
promotes  the  expansion  of  the  lungs,  the  absorption  of  oxygen  and 
its  diffusion  through  the  body,  as  well  as  mvigoration  of  the  circula- 
tion and  relief  of   congestions  and  deposits  in  the  chest. 

Nothing  has  ever  been  discovered  which  has  so  vast  and  varied 
powers  as  pneumatic  therapeia  when  guided  by  Sarcognomy.  Even 
where  none  would  suppose  it  beneficial  in  advance,  as  in  direct  appli- 
cation to  tumors,  varicose  veins  and  oedema,  its  results  are  successful. 
The  report  of  Junod's  experiments  in  the  military  hospital  at  Chat- 
ham, England,  published  in  the  "  Medical  Times  "  and  "  Gazette " 
of   Sept.   10,   1853,  mentions  a  very  remarkable  case,  —  "an   inter- 


2$2  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

mitten t  cerebral  neuralgia  of  several  months'  standing  ;  the  patient 
aged  60.  This  affection,  after  having  resisted  all  known  measures, 
yielded  to  one  application  of  Hczmospasia" 

"In  the  treatment  of  chronic  maladies,"  says  Junod,  "the  applica- 
tion of  Hasmospasia  is  generally  for  one  hour  and  once  a  day."  In 
acute  cases  there  is  no  uniform  rule,  as  the  state  of  the  disease  and 
strength  of  the  patient  must  determine.  In  grave  cases,  he  says,  it  is 
necessary  "to  reduce  the  pulse  to  a  thread  and  to  keep  it  in  that  state 
for  some  hours."  When  serious  inflammation  is  to  be  arrested,  or 
when  it  is  necessary  to  bring'  the  patient  near  to  fainting,  stronger 
derivation  must  be  made,  and  both  lower  limbs  may  be  acted  on  at 
once. 

A  reduction  of  one  or  two  pounds  is  sufficient  in  most  cases,  but  in 
some  as  much  as  five  or  six  may  be  taken  off.  A  soft,  relaxed  tem- 
perament yields  readily ;  but  a  dry,  firm,  tough  constitution  requires 
greater  power  and  warmth  or  a  warm  bath  to  promote  relaxation. 
This  has  already  been  explained  in  speaking  of  Haemostasis. 

Our  final  question  is,  By  what  apparatus  shall  we  apply  pneumatic 
treatment  ?  a  very  important  question,  as  one  of  the  hindrances  to  its 
general  adoption  by  physicians  has  been  the  expensiveness  of  any 
apparatus  and  the  difficulty  of  finding  any  already  manufactured. 
Physicians  have  been  told  that  the  cost  would  be  $300.  This,  with 
the  silence  of  the  colleges  and  the  general  unfamiliarity  with  the 
mechanical  and  physiological  principles  involved,  has  nearly  prevented 
any  thought  of  pneumatic  treatment  by  gentlemen  who  prefer  their 
literary  and  professional  dignity  as  prescribers  to  troublesome  mechan- 
ical operations.     But  the  expense  has  been  very  much  over-rated. 

We  need  first  an  air-pump,  costing  anywhere  from  five  to  twenty- 
five  dollars,  and  a  gauge  connected  with  it,  to  show  the  reduction  of 
pressure.  The  five-dollar  pump,  though  slower  in  operation,  will  be 
sufficient  if  we  do  not  attempt  to  treat  the  whole  body  in  a  pneu- 
matic chamber.  Next  we  need  three  or  four  cups  to  apply  to  the 
whole  spine,  though  we  do  not  often  need  more  than  two.  They 
may  be  four  inches  wide  and  eight  inches  long ;  or  four  of  six  inches 
or  three  of  seven,  eight  and  nine  inches  long.  They  may  be  two  or 
three  inches  deep  :  the  shallower  they  are,  the  quicker  they  may  be 
exhausted.  They  must  have  a  stop-cock  or  a  valve  by  which  they 
communicate  with  the  tube  from  the  pump,  and  when  exhaustion  is 
produced,  the  valve  or  the  cock  may  shut  off  the  communication  and 
the  cup  be  left  sticking  on  the  surface  with  its  rarefied  air,  until  we 
open  the  valve  and  admit  the  atmosphere.  Thus  we  have  as  many 
cups  as  we  wish,  drawing  at  once.  These  cups  will  of  course  be 
applicable  on  any  other  surfaces  they  will  fit.     A  pair  of  round  cups 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  283 

four  or  five  inches  in  diameter  would  be  of  general  utility.  These 
cups  should  all  have  a  layer  of  soft-gum  elastic  (India  rubber)  on  the 
edges  applied  to  the  body  to  procure  a  more  perfect  fit  and  pleasant 
application.  They  may  be  made  of  glass  or  of  metal.  If  of  metal 
a  glass  plate  may  be  inserted  to  give  a  view  of  the  cupped  surface. 

In  addition  to  cups  we  need  a  pair  of  pneumatic  boxes  to  receive 
the  arms,  a  pair  for  the  lower  limbs  reaching  the  summit  of  the 
thigh,  and  a  pair  for  the  legs  reaching  the  knees.  Junod  used  also  a 
pelvic  box,  through  which  the  lower  limbs  passed,  which  fastened 
around  the  body  and  the  thighs,  and  a  half-body  box  (hemi-somatic 
he  called  it)  which  took  in  the  lower  limbs  and  the  body  to  above  the 
hips.  But  there  is  no  absolute  necessity  for  these.  I  think  a  good 
outfit  for  practice  might  be  obtained  for  ^50  if  a  competent  me- 
chanic would  undertake  the  manufacture.  A  very  important  part  of 
the  work  is  the  construction  of  the  rubber  cups  that  fit  the  limbs 
tightly  so  as  to  exclude  the  air.  I  am  at  present  devising  an 
apparatus  that  may  be  furnished  at  a  reasonable  cost. 

To  promote  the  introduction  of  the  pneumatic  apparatus,  I  present 
the  desirable  forms,  including  those  that  have  been  used  by  Junod, 
on  which  the  reader  will  observe  the  tubes  connecting  the  pneumatic 
boxes  or  recipients,  with  the  air-pumps,  which  he  represents  as  small 
affairs,  not  more  than  six  to  ten  inches  long,  and  therefore  not  expen- 
sive. Junod  coins  names  from  the  Greek,  calling  treatment  on  the 
leg  Scelic  Haemospasia,  and  treatment  including  the  thigh  by  a  much 
longer  word,  meroscelic  Haemospasia.  We  have  no  need  for  these 
terms.  For  the  spine  he  constructed  a  series  of  small  cups,  a  very 
inadequate  method,  and  hence  he  accomplished  no  great  results  in 
spinal  treatment,  and  had  a  very  incorrect  idea  of  it.  His  whole 
conception  of  pneumatic  treatment  was  essentially  incorrect;  he 
regarded  it  as  mere  derivation,  whereas  its  value  lies  in  increased 
circulation  and  development  of  functions.  This  requires  for  the 
spine  large  cups,  three  or  four  of  which  would  cover  its  whole  length. 

Fig.  1  shows  the  glass  box  or  recipient  for  the  leg.  Fig.  2  shows 
a  metallic  leg-box  more  generally  used  by  Dr.  Newell  and  others. 
Metallic  boxes  (generally  made  of  tin)  sometimes  have  one  or  more 
glass  plates  inserted  to  make  the  limb  visible  under  treatment.  Fig.  3 
shows  the  leg  recipient  in  detached  pieces,  which  may  be  telescoped 
together,  making  a  convenient  portable  box,  P  B.  Fig.  4  shows  an 
arm-box  of  glass,  and  Fig.  5  a  similar  box  of  metal.  iMg.  6  shows  a 
glass  box  on  the  arm.  Fig.  7  a  metal  box  for  the  lower  half  of  the 
body  and  limbs,  very  seldom  used.  Fig.  8  presents  the  pneumatic 
chamber  or  body-box  as  used  by  Dr.  Newell,  with  the  patient  in  it, 
and  Fig.  9,  Junod's  application  for  the  head  and  neck,  which  he  calls 


CHAP.    XIV.]  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  285 

a  perideric  derivator  (perideric,  around  the  neck).  He  does  not 
clearly  explain  its  structure,  but  it  obviously  requires  an  India-rubber 
exterior  and  a  wire  frame-work  underneath  it.  I  have  seen  no  report 
of  its  use ;  but  properly  constructed,  it  could  be  a  powerful  stimulant 
for  the  brain,  which  would  be  of  great  value  for  the  insane  and  for 
impairment  of  the  nervous  system.  I  would  however  suggest  a 
modification,  leaving  out  the  basilar  region  or  neck,  and  simply  in- 
closing the  cranial  surface  as  shown  in  this  engraving.  A  sufficient 
amount  of  soft  rubber,  in  a  band  at  least  half  an  inch  thick,  should 
be  drawn  around  the  head  from  forehead  to  the  neck,  and  over  this 
should  be  placed  a  cap  of  rubber  or  oiled  silk,  with  a  rubber  band  at 
its  edge  to  clasp  the  soft  mass  in  contact  with  the  skin,  the  cap  being 
sustained  by  a  fabric  of  wire  or  elastic  springs  to  prevent  its  pressure 
upon  the  head.  This  I  believe  would  be  sufficient  generally,  as  all 
the  surfaces  concerned  are  normally 
convex ;  but  if,  owing  to  irregular  sur- 
faces, there  is  a  lack  of  adaptation, 
the  difficulty  may  be  overcome  by 
a  leather  strap  buckled  around  it 
firmly,  between  which  and  the  cap 
band  any  suitable  wedges  of  wood  or 
paper  may  be  squeezed  in  to  produce 
pressure  at  the  proper  spots.  The 
exhausting  tube  connected  with  the 
air-pump  may  be  attached  at  any 
convenient  spot. 

This  cranial  cap  would  co-operate  well  with  cupping  on  the  cephalic 
region  of  the  spine  and  on  the  shoulders. 

The  somatic  or  whole-body  treatment  (soma,  the  body)  by  the 
pneumatic  chamber  is  one  of  our  most  valuable  resources,  for  it  is  a 
treatment  of  the  entire  person,  addressed  especially  to  the  skin  and 
therefore  rousing  by  the  law  of  sympathy  the  whole  brain,  and  thus 
animating  the  whole  constitution.  In  some  respects  it  resembles  the 
pneumatic  treatment  of  the  head,  but  it  has  this  advantage  that  it 
includes  the  head  and  also  covers  the  entire  person,  diffusing  life 
everywhere.  Hence  I  am  sure  that  this  will  also  be  a  measure  of  the 
highest  rank  of  importance  in  lunatic  asylums,  while  it  has  a  vast 
range  of  power  in  the  treatment  of  all  diseases. 

The  box  for  body  treatment  used  by  Dr.  Newell  is  shown  in  Fig.  8. 
Junod's  box  is  shown  in  Fig.  10  with  the  patient  in  it  and  the  head 
included  by  a  cap.  The  figure  below  shows  another  box  for  the 
whole  person,  to  be  used  when  the  patient  is  lying  in  bed,  which  may 
also  have  a  cap  adjustment.     There  is  but  little  occasion  to  use  a 


2$6  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

box  without  including  the  head,  and  the  attempt  to  include  the  head 
by  means  of  a  cap  as  proposed  by  Junod  is  evidently  far  inferior  to 
the  inclusion  of  the  whole  head  in  the  box.  These  boxes  separate 
at  a  joint  in  the  upper  part. 

A  cheap  and  simple  arrangement  may  be  made  by  constructing  a 
simple  oblong  box,  large  enough  to 
hold  the  entire  person. 

It  should  be  pierced  by  a  tube  for 
respiration  of  the  exterior  air.  This 
may  be  placed  in  any  convenient 
slope  for  the  comfort  of  the  patient, 
and  a  glass  plate  fixed  at  the  head 
for  communication.  The  breathing-tube  must  be  supplied  with  an 
interior  cock  to  shut  out  the  air,  as  without  that  the  air  would  rush 
in  whenever  the  patient  takes  his  mouth  from  the  tube  to  speak  or 
relaxes  his  hold  upon  it. 

This  method,  the  wmole  body  being  included,  has  the  merit  of 
stimulating  the  head  as  well  as  the  whole  body,  while  the  relatively 
greater  pressure  in  the  lungs  promotes  their  expansion  and  forces 
the  oxygen  into  the  blood. 

It  may  be  very  advantageously  combined  with  the  use  of  oxygen  or 
nitrous  oxide  gas.  A  compound  gas  one  half  atmospheric  or  ten 
parts,  with  four  of  oxygen  and  one  of  nitrous  oxide,  has  a  delightful 
restorative  influence.  Ozone  also  is  valuable  in  many  cases,  and  a 
variety  of  evaporating  fluids  for  inhalation  in  this  manner  would  give 
additional  variety  and  power  to  the  treatment.  A  coffin-shaped  box, 
having  less  spare  room  in  it  would  require  less  activity  in  the  pumps. 
The  reclining  position  of  the  patient  would  be  comfortable  for  treat- 
ment. A  simple  oblong  box  (avoiding  the  coffin  shape,  with  a  flat 
lid)  would  be  equally  appropriate,  but  would  require  a  little  more 
exhaustion  of  air.  Its  cheapness  and  great  practical  value  should 
recommend  it  to  all.  It  may  be  made  large  enough  to  accommodate 
the  corpulent  and,  partly  filled  by  mattress  and  quilts  when  occupied 
by  smaller  persons,  to  diminish  the  amount  of  air  to  be  handled,  and 
a  block  of  wood  might  be  placed  at  the  foot  when  persons  of  short 
statue  were  treated.  The  box  might  also  be  converted  into  a  warm 
bath,  salt  bath  or  bath  of  medical  vapors,  and  thus  a  great  variety  of 
treatment  combined. 

Treatment  by  reduced  pressure  in  the  pneumatic  box  for  the  body 
produces  a  feeling  of  general  glow  and  tendency  to  perspiration. 
The  nervous  system  is  exhilarated  and  all  uncomfortable  conditions 
of  the  brain  are  removed  or  greatly  diminished.  The  pressure  of  air 
in  the  lungs  expands  the  chest  and  promotes  the  absorption  of    mor- 


CHAP.    XIV.] 


PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY. 


287 


bid  deposits,  thereby  giving  great  relief  to  pulmonary  diseases.  Thus 
it  accomplishes  an  amount  of  general  benefit  to  the  patient  which 
cannot  be  successfully  imitated  by  any  combination  of  medicines. 

The  entire  pneumatic  treatment,  whether  by  the  large  receivers 
or  the  cups,  requires  to  be  guided  by  observation  of  the  changes  of 
pressure.  It  is  possible,  but  seldom  advisable,  to  reduce  the  atmo- 
spheric pressure  one  half,  which  is  the  reduction  of  pressure  that  oc- 
curs at  the  height  of  about  three  and  a  half  miles,  and  reduces  greatly 
the  strength  of  those  who  endure  it.  The  difference  of  pressure  is 
astonishing  when  we  first  learn  its  amount.  Being  nearly  fifteen 
pounds  to  the  square  inch,  a  well-developed  man  is  generally  estimated 
to  live  unber  a  pressure  of  thirty  thousand  pounds.  Hence  every  re- 
duction of  pressure  to  the  amount  of  one  pound  relieves  him  from  a 
weight  of  two  thousand  pounds.  In  reducing  pressure  from  one  to 
five  pounds,  he  is  successively  relieved  of  two,  four,  six,  eight  and  ten 
thousand  pounds  of  weight  or  pressure,  and  by  this  diminution  of 
pressure  the  friction  of  the  circulating  blood  is  so  greatly  reduced 
as  to  make  a  hyperaemic  circulation  wherever  we  give  this  relief. 

The  Manometer. — A  pressure  gauge  (called  a  manometer)  is 
necessary  for  scientific  practice,  and  not  knowing  of  any  simple  con- 
struction in  use  I  have  devised  a  manometer  as  follows  : 

Many  plans  may  be  devised  ;  but  I  think  a  perpendicular  or  a  hori- 
zontal manometer  will  be  most  convenient  and  satisfactory.  The 
perpendicular  manometer  I  would  construct  like  a  barometric  tube  — 
sufficiently  long  to  mark,  by  the  ascent  of  the  mercury  in  it,  the 
diminution  of  pressure.  If  the  pressure  were  entirely  removed  by  a 
vacuum,  the  mercury  would  ascend  about  thirty  inches,  varying  a 
little  with  the  weather.  If  half  the  pressure  were  removed,  it  would 
ascend  about  fifteen  inches,  and  this  would  be  sufficient  as  a  measure 
for  pneumatic  practice. 

If  the  neck  of  the  tube  T  be  connected  with  the  air- 
pump  or  cups  by  the  rubber  tube  P  and  its  lower  end  in- 
serted in  a  bottle  or  elongated  tube  B  B  with  mercury  at 
the  bottom,  the  mercury  will  ascend  in  the  tube  about  two 
inches  for  every  pound  of  pressure  removed  by  the  air- 
pump  from  the  tube,  and  if  graded  in  inches  it  would  be 
a  sufficient  exponent  of  the  reduction  of  pressure.  A 
length  of  fifteen  to  eighteen  inches  would  be  sufficient 
for  utility.  The  whole  might  be  fastened  to  a  wooden 
bar  and  inserted  in  a  block  of  wood  as  a  base  to  stand  on, 
or  might  be  suspended  by  a  hole  in  the  top  of  the  bar. 

On  the  horizontal  plan  we  may  have  a  manometer  of  great 
delicacy  by  the  expansion  of  air  in  a  long  tube  against  a  globule  of 


288  PNEUMATIC    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIV. 

mercury  as  it  is  relieved  from  pressure.  The  horizontal  tube  may  be 
three  feet  or  longer,  and  capable  of  containing  more  than  the  bulb  at 
its  end.  If  of  equal  capacity,  it  would  express  a  double  expansion  or 
loss  of  half  the  pressure  ;  safely  fastened  on  a  long  bar  of  wood,  it  could 
be  handled  with  facility.  Each  instrument  would  require  to  be 
graded  upon  trial,  as  the  rate  of  expansion  increases  while  the  pres- 
sure is  diminishing. 

P.  S. —  I  am  not  able  as  yet,  to  announce  any  manufacture  of  the 
pneumatic  apparatus,  but  will  make  <he  announcement  when  a  manu- 
facturer shall  be  found  whom  I  can  recommend.  The  selfish  policy 
of  Dr.  N.  and  others,  in  endeavoring  to  hold  a  monopoly  of  pneu- 
matic treatment,  to  exaggerate  its  cost  and  conceal  the  manufacture 
of  apparatus  as  something  mysterious  and  difficult,  has  been  an 
efficient  cause  in  connection  with  the  indolent  illiberality  of  the 
colleges  in  depriving  our  country  of  this  revolutionary  benefaction. 
If  those  who  wish  the  apparatus  will  send  me  their  requests,  it  may 
help  me  to  stimulate  some  manufacturer  to  supply  the  demand.  My 
personal  exertion  and  supervision  will  probably  be  necessary  to  the 
proper  result. 


CHAPTER    XV. 

PELVIC  FUNCTIONS  AND  ORGANS. 

Lumbo-sacral  region — Importance  of  sexual  development  —  Its  effects  —  Injury 
by  deficiency  —  Its  influence  for  health  and  development  —  Conjugal  relations  — 
Centres  of  Love,  spiritual  and  physical  —  Difference  of  the  sexes — Sensibility 
of  the  womb  —  Pelvic  disorders  —  Value  of  treatment  on  the  back  —  Use  of 
Helonias — Medical  quackery  —  Inguinal  region  —  Uterine  region  —  Region  of 
Sanity  and  Chastity  —  Sexual  excitement,  its  control  and  its  seat  in  the  brain  — 
Pathological  cases  illustrating  its  location  —  Influence  of  virility  on  Health  and 
Vigor — Health  as  a  co-operative  —  Centre  of  cerebellum  as  a  reinforcement  of 
Vitality  —  Treatment  of  the  eyes  —  Anatomical  references  and  correlative  organs 
that  sustain  vision — Pathological  relations  to  insanity  and  nausea  — Morbid 
tendencies  of  the  basilar  and  pelvic  organs  —  The  true  nature  of  insanity  —  Its  loca- 
tion in  the  brain  and  the  body  —  How  insanity  is  to  be  cured  by  treatment  on  the 
body  and  the  brain  —  Counter-irritation  on  the  back  of  the  neck — The  hypochon- 
driac region  concerned  —  Location  of  nausea  on  the  body  —  The  colon,  cholic, 
nausea,  vomiting  and  diarrhoea  —  Nausea  of  pregnancy  —  Influence  of  nausea  — 
Method  of  its  treatment. 

Next  to  the  region  of  Vital  Force  at  the  posterior  summit  of  the 
thigh,  we  should  consider  the  region  of  sexual  life  and  development 
at  the  junction  of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  with  the  pelvis  in  the  portion 
called  the  sacrum — at  the  lower  end  of  the  backbone,  to  which  the 
hips  are  united. 

Sexual  development  is  essential  to  the  completeness  of  every 
being.  Sexual  and  parental  relations  require  a  higher  development 
of  the  faculties,  virtues  and  energies  than  a  non-sexual  existence. 
They  require  Adhesiveness,  Familiarity,  Love  and  delicate  sympa- 
thies between  two  persons  —  consequently  a  higher  development  of 
refinement  and  virtue,  to  make  the  relation  attractive,  pleasant  and 
permanent.  The  parental  relation  which  follows  sexual  love  demands 
an  additional  development  of  the  virtues  and  energies  to  meet  its 
requirements  properly.  Hence  the  mammalia  or  animals  that 
nourish  their  young  by  the  maternal  milk  and  give  them  prolonged 
care  stand  at  the  head  of  the  animal  kingdom. 

It  is,  therefore,  wisely  ordered  that  sexual  development  in  both 
man  and  woman,  but  more  especially  in  woman,  shall  produce  an 
increase  of  Vital  Force,  Adhesiveness,  Love  and  Health  according 
to  pathognomic  laws  explained  in  my  system  of  Anthropology. 

Such  being  the  case,  sexual  development  is  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant incidents  of  human  life.  It  develops  in  both  sexes  refinement, 
poetic  thought,  imagination,  amiability,  social  attraction,  desire  to 


29O  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    IV. 

please,  health,  animation  and  courage,  which  qualities  produce  a 
more  perfect  development  of  the  person,  a  more  vivid  expression  of 
the  countenance,  improvement  in  the  voice,  in  the  eye  and  in  the 
manners. 

A  retarded  or  unhealthy  development  of  puberty  is  a  great  injury 
to  the  female  constitution,  and  throughout  life  woman's  health  and 
happiness  depend  greatly  on  the  sexual  system. 

The  sexual  functions,  therefore,  cannot  be  neglected  in  nervauric 
treatment  or  in  the  conduct  of  life.  The  man  or  "woman  who  has 
not  attained  full  sexual  development  is  a  barren  object,  like  a  plant 
which  has  never  bloomed,  which  has  neither  the  beauty  and  fragrance 
of  flowers,  nor  the  benevolence  of  fruit,  nor  the  possibility  of  a  new 
life  springing  from  its  own.  It  is  a  meagre  and  unripe  condition  of 
humanity  in  which  the  sexual  evolution  is  hindered,  as  we  see  illus- 
trated in  the  difference  between  castrated  and  natural  animals. 

Sexual  development  is  the  last  and  highest  stage  of  growth,  which 
helps  to  change  the  rude  boy  into  the  attractive  and  dignified  gentle- 
man by  perfecting  the  physical  constitution  and  adding  thereto  the 
moral  energy  and  warmth  which  fit  him  for  society  by  attractive 
manners,  and  for  the  more  important  duties  of  life  by  an  exaltation 
of  the  kindly  emotions  and  the  sense  of  duty  and  responsibility.  It 
is  true  that  mere  sexuality  as  a  controlling  power  becomes  a  vicious 
impulse  in  its  abnormal  action,  but  I  speak  of  its  normal  action, 
according  to  the  law  by  which  the  inferior  sustain  the  higher  faculties, 
as  when  Vital  Force  sustains  Firmness  and  Heroism. 

In  repressing  sexual  evolution,  whether  by  castration  or  by  rigid 
authority  and  ascetic  manners,  we  exert  a  degrading  influence,  impair- 
ing social  harmony  and  happiness,  and  bringing  life  nearer  to  a  basis 
of  absolute  selfishness.  We  are  marring  the  Divine  image  in  man, 
and  assuming  superiority  to  the  Divine  wisdom,  which  has  associated 
sexual  attraction  and  pleasure  with  the  most  admirable  sentiments  of 
sympathy  and  love,  so  closely  that  when  the  former  are  suppressed 
the  latter  are  greatly  injured,  as  the  sexual  portion  of  the  cerebellum 
and  spinal  cord  exerts  a  powerful  influence  upon  the  circulation, 
growth  and  development  of  the  brain,  especially  of  its  superior  por- 
tion which  contributes  most  to  its  activity  and  growth.  Animals 
under  the  influence  of  sexual  passion  show  great  energy  and  courage 
(especially  deer  and  horses).  Human  beings  show  not  only  energy 
and  courage,  but  love,  tenderness,  refinement,  imagination,  intelli- 
gence, gaiety,  grace,  liberality,  ambition  and  sense  of  honor. 

If  the  sexual  element  were  expelled  from  the  human  constitution, 
society  would  lose  its  charm,  and  through  selfishness  and  brutality 
would   sink  toward   barbarism.     Castration  of    animals    produces   a 


CHAP.  XV.]        PELVIC  FUNCTIONS  AND  ORGANS.  20,1 

signal  degeneration,  as  shown  in  the  comparative  measurement  by 
Leuret  and  Lassaigne  of  the  brains  of  stallions  and  geldings.  The 
cerebrum  which  in  ten  stallions  averaged  433  grammes  measured 
only  419  grammes  as  the  average  of  21  geldings.  The  moral  and 
physical  inferiority  of  the  human  eunuch  are  well  known. 

The  superior  development  of  the  cerebrum  and  the  superior  evolu- 
tion of  the  higher  sentiments  are  due  to  the  superior  and  central  por- 
tion of  the  cerebellum  and  upper  portion  of  the  spinal  cord  (the  seats 
of  the  sexual  faculty) ;  and  as  the  development  of  the  sexual  faculty 
has  so  happy  an  influence,  it  follows  that  its  normal  cultivation  must 
increase  the  effect,  while  its  abnormal  repression  must  tend  to  pro- 
duce in  some  degree  the  effect  of  its  destruction  by  castration.  In 
the  early  portion  of  the  century  the  vigorous  ascetic  superstition  of 
Americans  (under  the  name  of  Christianity)  in  New  England  had  a 
very  injurious  effect  upon  the  young  in  checking  the  normal  develop- 
ment of  their  emotions  and  manners,  impairing  the  health  and  beauty 
•of  both  sexes  —  while  the  rebound  of  nature  in  those  who  escaped 
from  the  tyranny  led  them  into  the  most  destructive  excesses. 

The  normal  influence  of  sexuality  is  shown  in  the  superior  lon- 
gevity and  virtue  of  the  married  over  the  unmarried  classes.  This, 
however,  does  not  lead  to  the  inference  that  unlimited  or  intemperate 
sexual  indulgence  is  harmless  far  from  it.  The  general  law  of  the 
brain  and  body  is  that  the  lower  faculties,  which  are  the  radicals  or 
physical  supports  of  the  higher,  though  indispensable  to  normal 
development,  require  to  be  strictly  governed  by  the  higher.  But  they 
cannot  be  repressed  with  impunity.  As  the  repression  of  the  mus- 
cular system  impairs  the  force  of  character,  the  repression  of  the 
sexual  system  impairs  the  cerebral  development  and  the  nobler 
elements  of  character ;  for  without  the  sexual  system  that  vivid  daily 
exchange  of  love  which  sustains  both  health  and  virtue  would  be 
much  feebler. 

Love  is  the  world's  saving,  uplifting  and  perpetuating  power,  and 
in  the  sexual  plan  of  humanity  the  Divine  wisdom  has  secured  its 
permanent  presence  and  power.  All  attempts  to  amend  or  control 
the  Divine  plan  arise  from  a  lack  of  true  religion, —  a  lack  of  the 
reverence,  love  and  faith  which  appreciate  the  Divine  plan  of  nature, 
allowing  the  entrance  of  censorious  disgust  where  admiration  of  the 
Divine  plan  should  exist.  Actuated  by  this  disgust,  religious  sects 
have  assumed  to  crush  human  sexuality  as  a  noxious  weed,  and  com- 
pensate for  its  absence  by  extra  cultivation  of  religious  sentiments. 
The  sincerity  and  fervor  of  their  efforts  cannot  be  denied;  but  they 
have  fallen  short  of  the  physical,  social  and  moral  development  to 
which  they  aspire,  for  they  are  thwarting  a  plan  that  is  wiser  than 


292  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    XV. 

human  inventions.  It  is  impossible  that  eunuchs  or  ascetic  celibates 
should  embody  the  highest  type  of  humanity,  either  physically  or 
morally,  which  is  developed  only  through  the  predestined  plan  of  love 
and  parentage. 

These  considerations  are  not  foreign  to  the  subject  of  nervauric 
treatment,  for  it  includes  the  sexual  functions,  and  they  are  a  very 
important  part  of  the  vital  forces  that  maintain  health  and  happiness. 
Love  is  correlative  with  health  and  perfection  ;  it  is  attracted  by 
physical  and  moral  perfection  in  another,  and  it  is  the  most  powerful 
means  of  developing  that  perfection  in  its  object.  All  the  virtue  of 
which  man  is  capable  is  developed  in  the  home  in  which  he  enjoys 
the  sunshine  of  a  woman's  love ;  and  all  the  happy  energies,  virtues 
and  health  of  which  a  woman  is  capable  are  developed  in  the  warmth 
of  a  devoted  husband's  love.  This  love,  like  all  that  constitutes 
humanity,  has  both  its  physical  and  its  spiritual  operation,  and  is 
beneficial  and  necessary  alike  in  both.  Perfection  is  not  attainable 
without  the  full  development,  and  the  normal  life  of  the  fully 
developed,  in  a  perfectly  harmonious  conjugal  relation.  Such  rela- 
tions as  the  world  goes  are  seldom  entirely  harmonious,  but  a  full 
development  of  the  love  nature  in  either  party  goes  far  to  overcome 
all  evils  and  secure  contentment  and  health,  where,  otherwise,  there 
might  be  gloom  and  misery.  The  refined  and  tender  gallantry 
developed  in  man  by  sexual  love  is  necessary  to  the  happiness  of 
woman,  and  the  all-yielding,  all-devoted  sentiment  which  it  develops  in 
woman,  not  only  gives  to  her  husband  the  cheerful  content  which  is 
necessary  to  perfect  health,  but  develops  in  herself  a  happiness  and 
a  moral  strength  which  sustain  the  physical  constitution  and  resist 
the  decay  of  age. 

Love  is  the  cause  of  the  conjugal  union,  and  such  unions  are 
happy  whenever  a  sufficient  amount  of  love  exists  in  the  parties, 
even  though  they  are  not  exactly  adapted  to  each  other.  The  adapta- 
tion which  makes  the  union  perfectly  happy  depends  upon  the  law 
of  correlation,  which  is  explained  in  my  system  of  Anthropology, 
especially  by  Pathognomy.  The  simplest  statement  of  the  law  is 
that  each  faculty  of  one  must  find  its  gratification  in  the  other. 
Pathognomy  enables  us  to  determine  the  adaptation  with  great 
accuracy.  The  fanciful  doctrines  of  Dr.  W.  Byrd  Powell  on  this 
subject  had  some  foundation  in  fact,  but  were  highly  exaggerated  and 
distorted  views  of  the  human  constitution,  like  most  of  his  specula- 
tions. They  were  based  upon  crude  and  unscientific  conceptions  of 
human  temperaments. 

Sexual  love  has  two  controlling  centres  :  the  lumbo-sacral,  which 
controls  and   sustains  the   sexual  organs  ;  and   the   mammae,  on  the 


CHAP.  XV.]        PELVIC  FUNCTIONS  AND  ORGANS.  293 

front  of  the  chest,  which  correspond  to  the  organ  of  Love  in  the 
brain  (just  behind  the  coronal  suture).  The  lower  organ  inspires  the 
energy  of  passion,  the  upper  produces  admiration,  sympathy,  tender- 
ness, devotion,  service  and  fidelity,  which  in  their  highest  degree 
might  be  called  worship.  The  familiarity  and  the  devotion  are  not 
exclusively  sexual,  but  their  chief  manifestations  are  found  between 
those  of  opposite  sex.  In  parental  love  the  difference  in  sex  has  less 
influence,  though  certainly  not  absent. 

The  superior  love  has  an  animating,  inspiring  influence  over  the 
whole  moral  nature ;  for  love  heightened  to  adoration  is  the  essence 
of  all  religion,  and  the  inferior  faculty  has  a  similar  energizing  in- 
fluence on  the  whole  physical  constitution,  and  these  two  elements. 
are  so  closely  linked  by  the  Creator  as  to  make  their  joint  develop- 
ment a  necessity,  for  neither  can  attain  its  maximum  power  without 
the  full  development  of  both. 

The  larger  development  of  the  mammae  in  women  corresponds  to 
their  higher  development  in  love  and  their  consequent  superior  con- 
trol by  the  moral  nature,  which  is  too  obvious  to  require  illustration. 
It  is  so  very  marked  that  the  same  exterior  configuration  of  the  head 
will  produce  better  results  in  women  than  in  men,  because  in  woman 
there  is  a  greater  activity  in  the  coronal  region  of  the  brain  than  in 
man.  The  same  external  form  of  skull  which  in  a  male  would 
authorize  me  to  pronounce  him  most  probably  a  criminal  would  not 
authorize  such  an  opinion  if  it  were  that  of  a  female. 

The  sexual  organs  in  a  woman  are  very  closely  associated  with  the 
development  of  the  mammae,  and  the  loving  emotions  of  which  they 
are  the  corporeal  seat.  Pregnancy  brings  on  the  development  of  the 
mammae  and  the  secretion  of  milk,  and  stimulation  of  the  mammae 
promotes  the  development  of  menstruation. 

The  sexual  conformation  is  different  in  man,  and  it  has  a  less  inti- 
mate association  with  the  higher  love  (which  is  explained  by  the  laws 
of  Pathognomy).  Hence,  in  woman  love  is  more  spiritual  and  de- 
voted —  in  man  more  physical,  passionate  and  impulsive.  But  in 
each  sex  its  intimate  relation  to  Vital  Force  is  apparent,  since  the 
sexual  apparatus  is  in  various  degrees  associated  by  its  nerves  with 
the  whole  lumbar  and  sacral  regions  upon  which  the  lower  limbs 
depend.  Hence  in  the  sexual  derangements  of  women  (and  such 
derangements  are  pretty  sure  to  follow  unnatural  repression  or  inhar- 
monious life)  great  weakness  of  the  limbs  results,  and  sedentary 
habits  (if  not  absolute  repose)  become  necessary,  while  the  entire 
nervous  system  is  greatly  deranged. 

Irritation,  inflammation  or  any  form  of  active  disease  develops  the 
constitutional  influence  of  the  locality  in  which  it  occurs,  drawing 


294  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    XV. 

the  vital  forces  in  that  direction  and  exhausting  opposite  regions. 
Pelvic  diseases  in  women,  affections  of  the  womb,  are  accompanied 
by  great  impairment  of  the  nervous  system,  producing  a  state  of 
extreme  excitability,  impairment  of  memory,  intellectual  power,  force 
of  will  and  general  brain  power  —  thus  increasing  the  tendency  to 
melancholy  and  insanity.  In  this  impaired  state  of  the  nervous  sys- 
tem, slight  causes  produce  great  disturbances,  and  every  function  has 
more  or  less  disturbance,  producing  apparent  or  quasi  disease  when 
there  is  really  no  organic  affection,  and  the  diseases  often  have  sudden 
or  magical  cures. 

The  lower  limbs  being  dependent  on  the  same  portion  of  the 
spinal  cord  always  show  weakness,  and  severe  exertion  of  the  lower 
limbs  especially  in  walking  up  stairs  is  seldom  well  borne  by  women. 
The  calorific  function,  which  is  so  near  the  womb,  is  disturbed  in 
various  ways,  but  especially  in  irregularity.  Flashes  of  alternate 
heat  and  coldness  are  common,  especially  at  the  menopause  (cessa- 
tion of  menstruation).  Respiration  is  also  much  affected,  which  is 
located  next  to  Calorification,  and  pelvic  excitability  is  shown  in  the 
young  by  laughter  and  screaming.  Flashes  of  heat,  difficulty  of 
breathing  and  a  frantic  eagerness  for  fresh  air  are  often  seen. 

These  phenomena  are  explained  according  to  Sarcognomy  by  the 
location  of  the  womb  in  the  body,  and  by  reference  to  the  head  we 
find  the  uterine  region  located  near  Ardor,  Respiration,  Childishness, 
Idiocy,  Insanity,  Amativeness  and  the  tendency  to  dissipation.  The 
medical  antagonist  that  quiets  the  uterine  region  is  the  Bromide  of 
Ammonium,  which  is#  far  superior  to  Bromide  of  Potassium. 

The  womb  is  such  a  centre  of  excitability,  sympathy  and  sensitive- 
ness that  it  is  easily  affected  by  a  thousand  physical  and  moral 
causes,  and  hence  there  are  very  few  women  who  have  positive 
sexual  health.  The  great  majority  of  females  need  treatment  for 
some  form  of  sexual  derangement.  Even  many  who  think  them- 
selves in  health  (because  they  do  not  know  what  perfect  health  is) 
need  this  nervauric  treatment,  which  produces  far  better  results  than 
the  common  drug  practice.  The  old  style  of  drug  practice  on  women 
was  so  crude,  so  barbarous  and  so  wretchedly  meagre  in  its  resources 
as  to  be  responsible  for  a  vast  amount  of  human  suffering,  and  its 
consequences  transmitted  to  this  generation. 

In  the  majority  of  females,  whether  married  or  single,  five  or  ten 
minutes  of  dispersive  passes  on  the  Jumbo-sacral. region  will  help  to 
remove  morbid  conditions.  Following  this,  the  application  of  the 
hand  to  vitalize  that  region  will  have  an  admirable  restorative  effect. 
Nature  has  furnished  us,  in  the  Helontas  dioica,  a  nearly  specific 
tonic   for  this  region,  and  the  fluid  extract  if  applied  as  an  embroca- 


CHAP.  XV.]        PELVIC  FUNCTIONS  AND  ORGANS.  295 

tion  on  the  skin  of  the  lumbosacral  region  or  used  as  a  vaginal  in- 
jection diluted  with  thirty  or  forty  parts  of  tepid  water  will  power- 
fully aid  the  restoration  of  health  to  the  sexual  apparatus  of  woman. 
It  has,  moreover,  a  fine  influence  on  the  brain,  the  stomach  and  the 
entire  constitution,  and  ten  or  twenty  drop  doses  by  the  stomach  will 
produce  its  constitutional  effects  on  all  parts  if  used  from  one  to  four 
times  daily.  A  popular  knowledge  and  a  general  use  of  this  remedy 
would  have  clone  more  for  the  health  of  women  than  all  that  has  been 

1         done   by  the  medical  profession,  with   the  exception   of  the  modern 
treatment  of  enlightened  and  liberal  physicians. 

In  addition  to  invigorating  the  lumbo-sacral  region,  it    is  almost 

s^  always  quite  necessary  to  use  dispersive  manipulations  on  the  in- 
guinal region  or  seat  of  sexual  profluvia.  This  is  especially  necessary 
in  cases  of  menorrhagia  and  dysmenorrhcea ;  and  in  males,  in  cases  of 
spermatorrhoea  or  sexual  weakness  and  relaxation.  I  know  of  no 
cases  in  which  I  have  deemed  the  stimulation  of  the  inguinal  region 
\S  necessary,  except  in  amenorrhcea,  in  which  it  might  be  roused  with 
the  lumbo-sacral  region,  but  not  alone.  The  trouble  from  clysmen- 
'*■  orrhoea_atj:he  catamenial  periods  is  in  general  easily  relieved  by  one 
r  more  doses  of  Hayden's  Viburnum  Compound,  which  should  be 
kept  on  hand  by  women  who  need  it.* 

The  uterine  region  above  the  pubes  and  below  the  umbilicus  also 
needs  stimulation  only  in  cases  of  retarded  development  or  amenor- 
rhoea.  In  the  majority  of  cases  it  needs  dispersive  treatment  to  pro- 
cure nervous  tranquillity  —  as  it  is  the  seat  of  that  excitability  which 
causes  excessive  emotional  activity  and  at  length  appears  as  hysteria. 
Hysteria  will  be  readily  controlled  by  dispersive  passes  from  the 
uterine  region  upward  and  backward,  for  it  is  a  condition  of  Impressi- 
bility which  readily  responds  to  nervauric  treatment.  I  do  not  deny 
however  that  the  uterine  region  may  receive  an  increment  of  health 
from  the  hand  of  a  good  healer,  especially  if  the  other  hand  be  kept 
on  the  region  of  Health  on  the  shoulder  blade. 

In  tranquillizing  the  sexual  system  the  best  treatment  is  by  disper- 
sive passes  over  the  uterine  and  inguinal  regions  upward  and  back- 
ward toward  the  armpits  —  then  placing  the  hands  just  below  the 
arms,  on  the  side  of  the  chest  which  covers  the  region  of  Mental 
Soundness  and  Tranquillity,  which  has  been  marked  on  the  bust  as  the 
region  of  Sanity, — a  region  antagonistic  to  all  abnormal  excitement 
and  nervous  depression.  The  posterior  part  of  this  region  running 
into  Coolness   may  properly  be  called   the  region  of   Chastity,  as  it 

*  In  the  same  group  with  Helonias  may  be  placed  Caulophyllum,  Cimicifuga^ 
or  Macrotys,  Aletris  farinosa,  Mitchella  repens,  and  Viburnum  prunifolium  (black  \ 
haw), —  all  of  which  are  valuable  uterine  tonics. 


296  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    XV. 

antagonizes  sexual  excitement.  In  cases  of  inordinate  sexual  desire 
with  nymphomania  or  priapism,  the  region  of  Chastity  should  be 
excited,  and  dispersive  means  used  at  the  uterine  inguinal  and  lumbo- 
sacral regions.  The  dispersive  treatment  may  always  be  reinforced 
by  bathing  or  sponging  with  hot  water.  This  sexual  excitement  has 
its  cerebral  seat  at  and  below  the  occipital  knob,  in  the  superior  and 
central  portions  of  the  cerebellum,  at  which  location  the  sexual 
power  may  be  reinforced  by  stimulation,  as  the  sexual  excitement 
may  be  subdued  by  the  application  of  hot  water  or  by  the  pi'olonged 
application  of  ice  or  of  ether,  which  produces  great  coldness  by  its 
evaporated. 

Sexual  functions  are  certainly  performed  by  the  sexual  organs,  as 
forcible  motion  is  effected  by  muscles,  but  in  each  case  the  controll- 
ing power  is  in  the  nervous  system.  The  sexual  parts  depend  upon 
their  nerves,  they  upon  the  spinal  cord,  and  the  spinal  cord  upon  the 
brain.  Hence  strong  sexual  excitement  may  be  produced  by  a 
thought,  but  congested  or  hyperemic  conditions  of  the  sexual  organs, 
even  to  priapism,  may  fail  to  excite  any  sexual  passion,  as  its  seat  is 
really  cephalic.  On  the  other  hand,  the  most  morbid  or  destructive 
conditions  of  the  sexual  organs  do  not  destroy  the  sexual  inclinations. 
They  have  been  manifested  by  women  (according  to  Richerand  and 
Gall)  in  whom  the  womb  was  entirely  absent,  and  others  in  whom  the 
womb  and  vagina  were  in  the  last  stages  of  disease.  Prof.  Caillot 
relates  one  of  these  cases  in  which  the  womb  was  entirely  absent.* 

*  M.  Serres  reports  a  case  of  apoplexy  with  priapism,  in  which  the  autopsy 
revealed  inflammation  of  the  central  superior  portion  of  the  cerebellum,  extending 
along  the  connecting  fibres  to  the  quadrigeminal  bodies. 

In  another  case  (of  a  robust  day-laborer)  of  apoplexy  and  satyriasis,  with 
repeated  emissions,  the  cerebrum  was  natural,  but  the  cerebellum  exhibited  the 
most  extreme  inflammation  in  the  central  superior  portion  (looking  as  if  it  had  been 
macerated  in  blood),  and  there  was  a  small  cavity  in  the  right  hemisphere. 

In  a  third  case  of  apoplexy  (of  a  man  forty-six  years  of  age),  accompanied  by 
convulsive  movements  and  satyriasis,  with  heat  and  swelling  of  the  genitals,  the 
cerebellum  was  large  and  its  upper  surface  of  a  lively  red,  indicating  inflammation, 
which  extended  along  the  process  to  the  quadrigeminal  bodies,  which  were  also 
inflamed.  This  inflammation  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  cerebellum  was  highly- 
advanced  along  its  superior  central  portion,  in  which  cavities  were  just  beginning 
to  be  formed. 

In  the  fourth  case,  of  a  man  named  Gambier,  apoplectic  and  unconscious,  the 
limbs  of  the  right  side  were  entirely  paralyzed,  and  this  was  explained  in  the 
autopsy  by  the  effusion  three  inches  long  and  one  inch  wide  in  the  left  corpus 
striatum.  The  limbs  of  the  right  side  presented  spasmodic  contractions,  and 
priapism  continued  to  death.  The  latter  was  explained  by  the  condition  of  the 
cerebellum,  "the  cerebellum,  and  especially  the  superior  vermicular  process,  pre- 
sented numerous  little  effusions  of  the  size  of  a  grain  of  hemp-seed." 

These  and  other  similar  cases  show  as  clearly  as  Pathology  can  that  the  central 
and  superior  portions  of  the  cerebellum  are  concerned  in  the  sexual  functions,  and 
the  seat  of  inflammation  in  priapism  or  satyriasis.  Inflammation  and  destruction 
of  other  portions  of  the  cerebellum  proceed  most  commonly  to  paralysis,  but  with- 
out sexual  disturbance. 

After  I  had  located  the  sexual  function  by  experiments  below  the  occipital 
knob,  it  was  very  satisfactory  to  find  that  Pathology  so  clearly  confirmed  what  I 
had  discovered. 


CHAP.  XV.]       PELVIC  FUNCTIONS  AND  ORGANS.  297 

It  is  not  merely  in  reference  to  the  sexual  organs  themselves  that 
we  are  interested  in  the  lumbo-sacral  region  of  virility,  but  in  refer- 
ence to  general  health  and  development  also. 

When  we  are  stimulating  the  region  of  Health  on  the  shoulders  or 
on  the  head,  we  add  a  large  amount  of  physical  power  by  acting  on 
the  region  of  Vital  Force  on  the  thigh,  or  on  the  base  of  the  brain 
behind  the  mastoid  process  —  an  addition  which  may  be  very  impor- 
tant to  those  exhausted  by  disease  or  those  naturally  deficient  in  vital 
force. 

In  like  manner  the  lumbo-sacral  region  may  be  used  for  the  rein- 
forcement of  vitality  as  a  controlling  centre  for  the  pelvis  and  lower 
limbs.  Its  influence  is  not  like  the  region  of  Vital  Force,  concentred 
on  the  muscular  and  locomotive  energies,  but  extends  to  the  entire 
nervous  system,  like  the  developing  influence  of  puberty,  which  in 
man  is  probably  effected  through  the  seminal  secretion.  Sexually 
speaking,  its  influence  develops  not  voluptuousness,  but  virility. 
Therapeutically,  it  is  reanimating  alike  to  the  nervous  and  muscular 
systems.  Hence  the  combination  of  lumbo-sacral  virility  with  the 
animating  Health  of  the  shoulders  —  either  on  the  body  or  on  the 
head  —  is  often  the  very  best  thing  that  can  be  done  to  develop 
normal  and  useful  life. 

In  rousing  the  various  organs  which  need  restoration,  it  is  expe- 
dient to  develop  simultaneously  the  influence  of  Health  which  always 
makes  a  beneficial  regulative  influence.  Thus  in  stimulating  the 
gastric  region  with  one  hand,  if  the  other  be  located  on  Health,  the 
resulting  effect  on  the  stomach  is  very  beneficial  —  the  restorative 
influence  of  Health  being  sent  to  it  as  the  soothing  influence  of 
morphine  goes  to  the  organ  that  is  in  pain. 

When  organs  are  languid  or  lifeless  from  weakness  or  exhaustion, 
the  lumbo-sacral  or  cerebellic  influence  may  be  used  to  assist  in  their 
restoration.  Thus  in  almost  all  cases  of  weakness  of  the  eyes  they 
may  be  invigorated  or  reanimated  by  placing  the  fingers  of  one  hand 
above  and  below  the  occipital  knob,  on  the  centre  of  the  cerebellum, 
and  the  other  across  the  brows. 

The  precise  central  seat  of  the  sense  of  vision  is  at  the  base  of 
the  front  lobe  just  above  the  pupil  of  the  eye,  and  if  the  fingers  or 
thumb  and  fingers  are  applied  to  this  spot  it  will  stimulate  the  visual 
power,  while  the  animation  derived  from  the  centre  of  the  cerebellum 


In  a  case  of  extreme  nymphomania  in  a  woman,  Josephine  Dubourg,  lasting 
through  many  years,  and  accompanied  by  insatiable  excesses,  the  autopsy  showed 
what  might  have  been  expected, — chronic  induration  of  the  central  portion  of  the 
cerebellum,  with  some  small  incipient  ulcerations;  all  around  this  central  portion 
the  cerebellum  was  inflamed  and  harder  than  natural,  and  the  arteries  of  the 
cerebellum  were  unusually  developed,  as  well  as  the  arteries  of  the  pelvis. 


298  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    XV. 

will  greatly  increase  the  effect.  But  as  all  the  convolutions  of  the 
brows  contribute  to  aid  the  sense  of  vision,  it  is  well  to  extend  the 
outer  margin  of  the  hand  across  the  brows. 

Perhaps  the  anatomical  arrangement  may  help  to  illustrate  this 
result.  The  sexual  portion  of  the  cerebellum  is  connected  by  con- 
tinuous fibres  called  the  processus  e  cerebello  with  the  quadrigeminal 
bodies  which  are  the  origin  of  the  optic  nerve,  and  are  called  the 
optic  lobes,  and  in  applying  the  fingers  as  above  described  this  whole 
tract  from  the  cerebellum  to  the  retinas  is  included  between  them. 

The  visual  power  is  also  directly  aided  by  the  correlative  organs  of 
the  perceptive  convolutions,  which  occupy  a  space  at  the  junction  of 
Adhesiveness  and  Combativeness,  which  I  have  marked  Aggressive- 
ness. All  anterior  organs  are  dependent  upon  their  correlative 
posterior  organs  for  vigor,  without  which  they  are  passive  and  defi- 
cient in  strength.  When  Aggressiveness  is  excited,  it  produces  a 
disposition  to  use  the  eyes,  a  curiosity  to  look  and  energy  to  stare, 
giving  great  power  to  impress  and  great  vigor  to  the  eyes.  The 
region  marked  Aggressiveness  on  my  bust  is  that  portion  of  the 
brain  called  the  gyrus  angularis,  which  Ferrier  claims  to  be  the  seat 
of  vision  as  determined  by  experiments  on  birds.  I  cannot  recognize 
it  as  the  seat  of  vision  in  man,  for  I  control  vision  by  experiments  on 
the  brow  and  find  it  there  psychometrically,  in  the  only  region  of  the 
brain  which  can  be  called  intellectual ;  but  that  the  support  of  the 
visual  power  requires  the  co-operation  of  its  correlative  in  the  occiput, 
and  that  without  this  support  the  visual  power  might  fail,  in  accord- 
ance with  a  general  law,  I  believe  true.  The  power  of  the  eye  has 
its  highest  development  in  adhesive  or  attractive  persons,  and  the 
courageous  or  combative  men,  who  with  these  powers  may  either 
attract  or  control  and  overawe  by  a  glance  ;  and  animals  feel  their 
power  as  well  as  human  beings.  A  feeble  and  timid  character  can- 
not reciprocate  an  earnest  gaze.  A  strong  character  enforces  his 
personality  by  a  look.  When  Col.  H.  attempted  a  slight  familiarity 
with  Gen.  Washington,  he    was  abashed  by  a  look. 

To  strengthen  the  eyes  by  the  Aggressive  region,  we  place  the 
fingers  on  the  occiput,  on  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  ear  about  two 
inches  behind  it.  The  eyes  may  also  be  invigorated  by  the  lower 
occipital  region  at  the  median  line  (the  region  of  Arrogance)  which 
coincides  with  Aggressiveness.  Hence  in  treating  the  eyes  from 
the  occiput,  the  fingers  should  extend  from  the  centre  of  the  cere- 
bellum above  the  occipital  knob.  This  portion  of  the  lower  occiput 
called  the  Cuneus  has  been  claimed  by  some  pathologists  as  more 
truly  the  seat  of  vision  than  the  gyrus  angularis.  Both  are  right. 
These  are  coinciding  convolutions  as  explained  by  Pathognomy,  and 


CHAP.    XV.]  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  299 

both  contribute  to  the  strength  of  the  eyes.  The  operator  should 
give  attention  to  both.  But  that  they  are  the  absolute  and  entire 
seat  of  vision  was,  I  think,  refuted  by  Goltz  when  he  exhibited  a  dog 
in  which  these  convolutions  were  destroyed,  but  the  dog  was  not 
blind. 

Let  us  now  consider  the  pelvic  region  in  its  pathological  relations, 
which  are  of  great  importance. 

The  lower  margin  of  the  pelvis  has  pathological  tendencies  as 
strongly  marked  as  the  hypochondriac  regions  —  the  hypochondriac 
influence  being  adverse  to  physical  health  and  vigor,  the  pelvic  to 
mental  soundness  and  the  strength  of  the  nervous  system.  I  must 
repeat  again  to  avoid  misconception  that  no  organ  is  to  be  regarded 
as  an  unhealthy  or  injurious  element  of  the  constitution  —  all  organs 
being  constructed  for  necessary  purposes.  But  such  tendencies 
arise  from  negative  causes  —  from  the  absence  of  the  controlling 
forces  which  keep  the  organs  in  their  proper  sphere.  The  evil  in- 
fluence connected  with  any  organ  is  that  which  arises  from  its  un- 
controlled predominance  in  the  constitution,  and  they  arise  whenever 
its  development  is  excessive  or  its  antagonists  are  deficient. 

The  sexual  organs,  for  example,  produce  in  their  excesses  an  utter 
prostration  of  the  nervous  system,  of  which  we  may  see  a  terrible 
picture  in  medical  writings  upon  masturbation,  licentiousness,  sper- 
matorrhoea and  sexual  diseases.  The  mental  and  physical  prostra- 
tion that  arise  from  such  causes  are  due  partly  to  the  intense  sensi- 
bility in  the  pelvis  and  hypochondria,  partly  to  the  character  of  the 
secretions,  which  are  extremely  exhaustive,  and  partly  to  the  in- 
fluence of  the  excretions  of  the  rectum  and  bladder  —  partly,  also, 
to  the  anti-cephalic  character  of  the  leg  and  foot  in  association  with 
the  sacral  region  of  the  spinal  column. 

Mental  derangement,  shown  as  monomania,  idiocy,  melancholy, 
peevishness,  ill  temper,  childishness,  hallucination,  etc.,  depends 
primarily  upon  the  failure  of  blood  supply  and  circulation  in  the 
brain,  which  becomes  enfeebled  like  all  other  organs  under  such 
failure,  and  becomes  softened  in  structure  so  as  to  be  incapable  of 
any  vigorous  action.  The  tendency  of  all  the  basilar  organs  in  pre- 
dominance is  in  some  degree  insane,  as  they  divert  the  circulation 
from  the  brain,  and  the  majority  of  the  human  race  are  and  ever 
have  been  very  far  from  Sanity.  It  is  but  a  few  years  since  the  most 
enlightened  and  advanced  nation  on  earth  was  engaged  in  the  horrible 
insanity  of  civil  war,  and  this  homicidal  insanity  still  prevails  among 
all  the  great  nations. 

While  all  the  basilar  forces  in  predominance  are  insane  in  various 
degrees,  the   maximum  insane   tendency  is   in  front  of  the   vertical 


300  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    XV. 

line  between  the  front  and  back,  where  the  sensitive  excitability 
attains  its  maximum,  and  where  we  apply  the  term  Insanity,  because 
that  is  its  effect  in  predominance.  Stimulating  the  base  of  the  tem- 
poro-sphenoidal  region  through  this  location  under  the  jaw  enables 
an  impressible  individual  to  realize  the  conditions  of  idiocy  and 
insanity. 

The  excessive  excitability  and  irritability  of  this  region,  operating 
on  an  enfeebled  circulation,  causes  the  most  extreme  irregularities  in 
different  parts  of  the  brain,  —  congestion,  hyperemia,  anemia,  etc.,  — 
destroying  the  mental  balance  and  soundness  of  judgment,  as  when 
one  is  under  the  influence  of  extreme  despondency,  hallucination  or 
rage.  The  slightest  influences  overpower  the  mental  energy  of  any 
organ  in  this  condition,  or  excite  other  organs  to  wild  excess,  and 
under  the  influence  of  unbalanced  feelings  the  judgment  loses  all 
correctness. 

The  development  from  which  this  excitability  comes  is  in  the  basis 
of  the  brain,  at  the  entrance  of  the  carotid  arteries,  and  its  external 
indication  is  under  the  jaw,  where  the  carotids  and  jugulars  pass,  and 
where  the  superior  cervical  ganglion  controls  the  anterior  cerebral 
circulation.  The  corresponding  location  on  the  body  is  at  the  peri- 
neum between  the  thighs  —  a  centre  of  depraving  influences.  Here 
we  have  the  passional  force  and  the  turbulence  of  the  thighs  ;  the 
hostile  passions  of  the  buttocks  ;  the  stupefying  influence  of  urine 
and  faeces  ;  the  brutality  of  the  leg  and  the  mental  torpor  of  the  foot, 
which  belong  to  the  sacral  region,  with  the  passional  excitability  of 
the  sexual  organs,  which  is  most  conspicuous  in  hysteria  —  all  of 
which  are  intensified  in  effect  by  conditions  a  little  higher  up  —  the 
prostrating  melancholy  of  the  upper  inguinal  region,  and  the  intense 
nausea  of  the  sacro-iliac  junction.  Under  these  combined  influences 
we  have  every  degree  of  mental  prostration,  — dementia,  gloom,  rage, 
idiocy  and  incapacity  to  entertain  a  rational  conception. 

The  therapeutic  consequences  of  this  discovery  are  immense,  and  I 
earnestly  entreat  the  superintendents  of  insane  asylums  to  test  the 
discovery  in  their  treatment  of  the  insane. 

The  therapeutic  indication  is,  that  when  we  can  transfer  the  vital 
action  from  the  base  of  the  pelvis,  or  insane  region,  to  the  region  of 
sanity  on  the  thorax  under  the  arms,  or  on  the  spine  at  the  dorsal 
summit,  Insanity  will  be  cured  if  the  transfer  is  maintained,  whether 
by  nervauric,  electric  or  pneumatic  power. 

The  cure  may  be  effected  by  restoring  the  pelvic  organs  to  health 
—  securing  free  and  healthy  action  of  the  bowels  by  soothing,  altera- 
tive aperients  ;  restoring  the  womb  chiefly  by  Helonias  and  Cimici- 
fuga,  and  the  urinary  organs  by  Hydrangea  and  Epigea  (to  which 


CHAP.    XV.]  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  3OI 

flowers  of  Lavender  make  a  good  addition),  and  sending  vitality 
from  the  perineum  to  the  region  of  Sanity  by  electric  currents,  the 
patient  sitting,  as  on  a  saddle,  on  the  positive  sponge,  or  a  metallic 
tube  or  rod,  or  a  seat  with  a  metallic  centre-piece  like  a  saddle,  while 
negative  sponges  of  large"  size  are  applied  in  the  axilla,  and  occasion- 
ally on  the  summit  of  the  dorsal  region.  Of  course,  no  one  would 
expect  a  chronic  condition  to  be  removed  by  a  single  application,  or 
by  anything  less  than  a  protracted  treatment.  In  some  few  cases 
the  effects  would  be  prompt  and  marvellous  —  in  the  majority  they 
would  come  slowly,  at  least  as  long  as  any  organic  derangement  in 
the  body  remained. 

In  giving  the  nervauric  treatment,  passes  should  be  made  from  the 
coccyx  to  the  summit  of  the  spine,  and  from  the  groin  and  inside 
of  the  thighs  to  the  axilla.  At  the  same  time  the  Hygienic  current 
should  be  used,  for  general  health  is  needed  to  sustain  the  health  of 
the  brain.  That  is  given  by  a  current  from  the  hypochondria  to  the 
centre  of  the  shoulder-blade,  or  by  passes  in  that  direction.  The 
positive  pole  should  be  applied  at  and  behind  the  location  marked 
Disease. 

But  may  not  Insanity  be  treated  directly  at  the  brain  ?  Assuredly 
it  may.  Gentle  currents  may  be  passed  from  the  under-jaw  space, 
just  in  front  of  the  carotids  and  jugulars,  to  two  corresponding  points 
—  one  on  the  sagittal  suture,  where  the  organ  of  Firmness  is  located  ; 
and  the  other  parallel  thereto,  on  the  temporal  arch  in  the  middle  of 
the  parietal  bone,  its  central  point  of  ossification  in  the  fetus  and 
infant,  marked  on  the  bust  as  Sanity.  To  produce  the  best  effect,  the 
current  should  be  passed  through  the  hand  of  the  operator. 

The  current  may  be  from  a  battery  of  five  to  ten  cells,  applied  on 
both  sides  of  the  head  simultaneously  by  large  sponge  rheophores,  or 
may  be  the  primary  current  of  the  common  portable  battery  moder- 
ated by  large  sponges  or  by  passing  through  a  strip  of  wet  cloth  long 
enough  to  supply  the  electric  resistance  and  moderate  the  current. 
The  magnetic  current  from  my  new  electro-magnetic  apparatus  will 
produce  the  most  satisfactory  effects. 

In  nervauric  treatment,  passes  from  the  region  of  Insanity  to  the 
crown  of  the  head,  and  the  application  of  the  hand  on  the  hygienic 
region  would  be  proper.  At  the  same  time  dispersive  passes  down- 
ward on  the  neck  over  the  insane  region  along  the  jugular  vein  and 
similar  downward  passes  on  the  back  of  the  neck  would  be  proper. 

There  is  an  insane  region,  externally  located  on  the  back  of  the 
neck,  on  the  median  line  just  below  the  basis  of  the  cranium,  on 
which  dispersive  passes  are  beneficial,  and  on  which  physicians  have 
often    found    counter-irritation    very    useful    in    cerebral    disorders. 


3<D2  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  [CHAP.    XV. 

Setons.  blisters  and  irritating  plasters  on  this  location  withdraw 
diseased  conditions  from  the  brain.  The  brain  may  be  greatly 
soothed  and  benefited  in  morbid  conditions  by  applying  the  positive 
sponge  on  the  insane  location  at  the  lower  angle  of  the  jaw  just  in 
front  of  the  lower  part  of  the  ear,  or  on  the  cervical  location  just 
mentioned  (which  affects  its  posterior  half),  the  negative  being 
applied  at  the  shoulder  or  axilla,  or  in  the  hand,  or,  if  there  is  an 
inflammatory  condition,  on  the  tibial  surface  of  the  leg.  I  have 
observed  in  a  recent  book  by  Dr.  Thos.  Dowse  of  Edinburgh,  that 
he  has  discovered  the  advantage  of  applying  the  positive  sponge  on 
the  location  mentioned  on  the  back  of  the  neck. 

The  hypochondriac  region  co-operates  efficiently  with  the  lower 
pelvic  in  producing  insane  conditions.  Hence  it  is  highly  important 
to  rectify  the  conditions  of  the  liver  and  stomach.  The  liver,  espe- 
cially, has  much  to  do  with  mental  depression  and  mania. 

There  is  another  pelvic  influence  or  function  which  has  been  up  to 
the  present  time  almost  as  much  of  a  mystery  as  Insanity.  I  refer 
to  Nausea,  —  a  condition  which  has  never  been  located  or  explained. 
Sarcognomy  shows  its  location  at  the  sacro-iliac  symphysis  externally, 
which  corresponds  internally  with  the  two  ends  of  the  colon,  its 
origin  from  the  ileum  on  the  right  side  and  its  sigmoid  flexure,  con- 
necting with  the  rectum  on  the  left.  The  colon  is  the  chief  seat  of 
nausea.  Its  disorders,  called  colics,  are  characterized  chiefly  by 
nausea  and  vomiting,  as  well  as  great  mental  depression,  which  is 
explained  by  the  location  of  melancholy  just  in  front  of  the  ileum. 

Lead  cholic,  which  is  accompanied  by  an  irritated  and  contracted 
condition  of  the  colon,  develops  the  functions  shown  by  Sarcognomy, 
melancholy  and  defecation,  or  desire  to  empty  the  bowels,  being  in 
front  of  the  colon  and  nausea  behind  it.  Hence  the  attack  comes 
on  with  desponding  wretchednesss  and  mental  prostration,  and  a 
nausea  which  increases  till  it  produces  vomiting,  while  the  desire  to 
evacuate  the  bowels  is  tormenting.  The  nervous  depression  is  so 
great  as  sometimes  to  result  in  paralysis  of  the  upper  or  lower  limbs 
or  tongue,  or  of  the  forearm.  The  whole  pelvic  region  has  this 
paralyzing  tendency,  which  is  at  its  maximum  in  the  anterior  part  of 
the  insane  region.  The  pain  extends  to  the  small  of  the  back,  and 
produces  great  restlessness.  Vomiting  gives  only  a  momentary 
relief — -the  depression  and  weakness  continue. 

Bilious  colic  is  also  accompanied  by  nausea  and  vomiting.  In 
both  affections  there  is  no  elevation  of  temperature,  but  rather  a 
coldness,  as  this  irritation  diverts  from  the  calorific  region,  whereas 
the  irritations  of  the  ileum,  which  is  in  the  calorific  region,  are 
accompanied   by   high   fever.     The   existence    of    feverish  heat  and 


CHAP.    XV.  PELVIC    FUNCTIONS    AND    ORGANS.  303 

thirst  distinguishes  inflammations  of  the  small  intestines  from  colic 
or  affection  of  the  colon.  Diarrhoea  and  cholera,  which  are  affections 
chiefly  of  the  colon,  are  also  accompanied  by  nausea  and  vomiting  — 
sometimes  quite  protracted. 

Nausea  and  vomiting  arise  from  all  severe  affections  of  the  colon, 
and  may  even  be  caused  by  harsh  purgatives.  Obstruction  of  the 
colon  by  irritating  fecal  matter  or  by  strangulated  hernia  necessarily 
results  in  nausea  and  vomiting,  and  even  an  adjacent  irritation  may 
extend  to  the  colon  and  produce  nausea,  as  we  observe  in  the  early 
stages  of  pregnancy.  The  external  location  of  Nausea,  the  sacro- 
iliac symphysis,  corresponds  to  the  internal  iliac  artery  for  the  pelvic 
region,  from  which  the  pudic  artery  proceeds,  supplying  the  repro- 
ductive organs,  and  establishing  a  vascular  as  well  as  nervous  con- 
nection, and  connection  of  proximity  wich  the  colon  and  rectum. 

With  this  location  of  nausea,  what  are  its  physiological  and  thera- 
peutic bearings  ?  Physiologically,  its  influence  is  prostrating  to  the 
brain,  but  not  to  physical  life.  Emetics  are  depressing,  but  not 
dangerous. 

Animal  life  of  a  gloomy  character  is  promoted  by  nausea,  and  as 
everything  in  the  sacral  region  has  a  relation  to  the  lower  limbs, 
especially  the  legs,  nausea  is  a  powerful  means  of  subduing  inflam- 
matory and  irritated  conditions  of  the  brain  and  chest,  though  not 
so  comfortable  as  the  tibial  region  of  the  leg.  Hence  it  is  that 
nausea  is  a  familiar  reliance  in  treating  the  lungs  to  take  down  in- 
flammatory conditions  and  promote  expectoration:  —  most  expector- 
ants are  nauseants. 

Therapeutically,  we  learn  that  nausea  is  to  be  treated  on  the  lower 
part  of  the  back  by  vigorous  dispersive  passes  which  may  be  assisted 
by  upward  dispersive  passes  in  front  from  the  same  level  —  from  the 
hypogastric  and  hypochondriac  regions. 

When  this  principle  is  understood,  sea-sickness  will  be  conquered 
by  positive  currents  from  the  region  of  Nausea  to  Health  —  to  the 
top  of  the  shoulder  and  to  the  upper  frontal  surface  of  the  chest  as 
low  as  the  nipple,  if  the  immediate  cause  be  removed. 

As  the  philosophy  of  Insanity  and  Nausea  has  never  before  been 
known  or  suspected,  I  would  request  those  who  verify  these  principles 
in  treatment  to  send  me  a  report  of  their  results. 

The  medical  treatment  of  nausea  should  be  by  the  sedative  agents 
which  diminish  the  sensibility  of  the  lower  abdominal  region.  This 
is  the  character  of  the  bromides,  which  have  been  found  most  useful. 
The  stimulation  of  the  brain  is  also  important,  and  belladonna  has 
been  made  accessory.  Champagne,  coffee  and  tea  are  beneficial,  and 
I  have  no  doubt  bromo-caffein  would  be  serviceable. 


3O4  PELVIC  FUNCTIONS  AND  ORGANS.         [CHAP.  XV. 

In  sea-sickness,  or  the  nausea  produced  in  a  swing,  we  have  the 
violent  disturbance  of  the  pelvic  region  by  the  momentum  of  the 
bowels  continually  changing  as  by  a  churning  motion,  which  is  of 
course  diminished  by  lying  flat  on  the  back  without  elevating  the 
head.  It  is  this  impact  by  a  churning  motion  on  the  pelvic  organs 
which  I  regard  as  the  cause  of  sea-sickness. 

As  the  cerebral  location  of  Nausea  is  at  the  upper  part  of  the 
cerebellum  on  each  side  of  Virility,  I  would  recommend  its  treatment 
by  dispersive  passes  from  this  location,  or  by  cooling  applications 
such  as  a  current  of  hot  water,  which  leaves  coolness  as  a  conse- 
quence, or  evaporating  ether,  which  is  very  efficient,  or  pounded  ice, 
which  is  certainly  effective.  I  have  not  tried  the  local  applications, 
but  from  my  knowledge  of  the  functions  I  am  quite  sure  they  will 
be  effectual. 

It  may  be  that  cooling  applications  to  the  back  of  the  pelvis 
would  be  equally  effective. 


CHAPTER    XVI. 

ANIMAL  MAGNETISM  REVIEWED  AND  RECTIFIED. 

Deleuze  and  Esdaile's  Works. 

Its  marvellous  phenomena  — Opposition  of  materialism  — Its  unscientific  character 

—  Its  neglect  by  the  medical  profession  and  cultivation  by  Egyptian  priests  —  Sar- 
cognomy  —  Deleuze's  "Practical  Instruction"  —  His  erroneous  theories  corrected  — 
His  formula  for  magnetizing —  The  scientific  method  of  producing  the  results  —  The 
localities  on  the  head  and  the  body  —  The  evil  effects  of  the  unscientific  method  — 
Effects  of  the  downward  passes —  Superiority  of  the  upward  —  Nature  of  the  mag- 
netic seance  —  Blind  empiricism  —  The  improper  method  of  removing  pain  or 
disease  —  Prevalence  of  contagion  —  Use  of  the  breath  and  of  water  —  Method  of 
waking  —  Use  of  magnetized  water  —  The  baquet  —  Exalted  powers  of  Somnam- 
bulism—  Their  source  and  philosophy  —  Explanation  of  the  power  of  operators 
and  best  methods  —  Blind  routine  of  magnetizers  —  Failure  of  the  medical  profes- 
sion—  Hartshorn's  translation,  its  valuable  testimony  —  Mechanical  ideas  of  the 
medical  profession  —  How  to  produce  insensibility  —  Testimony  of  Cuvier,  La  Place 
and  Georget  —  Corroboration  by  Psychometry  —  Treatment  of  Dr.  Elliotson  in 
London  —  Cloquet's  operation  in  the  magnetic  state  —  Clairvoyance  of  Miss 
Brackett  —  Duty  of  the  disciples  of  truth. 

Value  of  Dr.  Esdaile's  "Mesmerism  in  India"  —  His  numerous  cases  and  liberal 
sentiments  —  Facility  of  the  practice  in  India  —  A  mesmeric  magician  —  Testimony 
of  the  Catholic  Church  to  the  truth  of  animal  magnetism  and  prohibition  of  its 
practice  —  Dr.  Esdaile's  first  experiments  on  a  criminal  patient  described  —  Great 
increase  of  impressibility  —  Therapeutic  benefit  of  the  trance — Description  and 
explanation  of  the  processes  used  in  magnetizing  —  Of  catalepsy  and  its  removal  — 
Intellectual  and  unintellectual  methods  —  Demonstrations  made  upon  a  blind  man. 

—  Controlling  his  subjects  in  court — Practical  value  of  Sarcognomy  in  India. 

The  nervauric  treatment  of  disease,  heretofore  practised  under 
the  name  of  Animal  Magnetism,  which  was  so  famously  illustrated 
by  Mesmer  as  to  cause  many  to  give  it  the  name  of  Mesmerism,  has 
achieved  a  vast  amount  of  curative  results  in  disease,  and  marvellous 
phenomena  in  the  development  of  human  intuition  through  Clair- 
voyance and  Somniloquence.  The  vast  amount  of  its  benevolence 
and  the  jealous  hostility  of  the  great  mass  of  the  medical  profession, 
notwithstanding  its  well  attested  cures  and  the  numerous  learned 
and  brilliant  volumes  in  which  its  claims  have  been  set  forth,  are  a 
sad  illustration  of  the  moral  condition  of  the  present  century. 

A  great  part  of  this  opposition  has  been  owing  to  the  resolute,  un- 
yielding spirit  of  materialism  which  has  dominated  in  all  scientific 
circles  ;  but  a  considerable  part,  also,  has  been  due  to  the  fact  that 
Animal  Magnetism,  as  taught  and  practised,  has  been  purely  empiri- 
cal and  has  never  attained  the  status  of  a  science  or  been  cultivated 
in  a  thoroughly  scientific  manner.  But  the  medical  profession  has 
done  almost  nothing  to  remedy  the  defect  and  trace  the  phenomena 


306  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

produced  to  their  causes.  They  have  shamefully  neglected  and  dis- 
couraged therapeutic  magnetism,  because  it  could  be  practised  by 
persons  without  a  medical  education,  whom  they  regarded  as  ignoble 
rivals,  and  confined  their  attention  to  the  easy  and  simple  processes 
for  producing  somnambulism,  carefully  avoiding  the  production  of 
clairvoyance  and  the  wonderful  cures  that  are  effected  with  the 
operator's  hand.  Since  the  revival  of  hypnotism  at  Paris,  their  sole 
purpose  appears  to  be,  not  to  treat  rational  beings  in  a  rational  and 
benevolent  manner,  but  to  degrade  their  patients  into  the  passive  and 
credencive  condition  in  which  they  are  controlled  by  a  word,  —  a 
process  which  I  have  never  adopted  because  it  destroys  the  scientific 
value  of  our  experiments  and  degrades  the  subject,  and  certainly  does 
not  elevate  the  operator. 

The  marvellous  effects  produced  on  the  human  constitution  were 
never  traced  to  their  source  in  the  brain  and  the  body ;  and  as  when 
the  causes  of  the  phenomena  are  unknown  and  unsought,  science 
does  not  exist,  the  whole  subject  becomes  puzzling,  embarrassing 
and  repellent  to  minds  accustomed  to  the  mastery  of  positive 
science. 

If  the  rationale  of  clairvoyance  and  somniloquence  had  been  dis- 
covered, if  the  philosophy  of  magnetic  cures  had  been  made  clear, 
and  if  the  marvellous  powers  exercised  over  the  magnetic  subject 
had  been  used  to  unfold  the  mysteries  and  localities  of  the  vital 
forces,  so  as  to  give  command  of  all  vital  functions,  —  philosophic 
thinkers  would  have  found  in  the  science  an  irresistible  attraction. 

To  me  it  appears  really  a  marvellous  degree  of  thoughtlessness  or 
stupidity  that  the  cultivators  of  Animal  Magnetism,  having  under 
their  manipulation  the  most  sensitive  individuals  in  society,  should 
never,  even  by  accident,  have  found  any  difference  in  the  vital 
functional  relations  of  the  different  parts  of  the  body.  It  is  also 
marvellous  that  electro-therapeutists  should  have  been  equally  dull. 
It  is  apparent  in  both  cases  that  the  average  cultivator  of  science  is 
entirely  preoccupied  with  what  he  has  been  taught,  and  very  rarely 
disposed  to  look  for  any  new  truth  or  even  conscious  of  the  vast 
extent  of  undeveloped  science  that  demands  our  attention. 

Even  the  ancient  Egyptians,  encumbered  as  they  were  by  supersti- 
tion, were  more  observant  in  this  matter  than  the  moderns  encum- 
bered by  college  dogmas. 

A  memorial  tablet  of  stone  (as  stated  by  Franz  Lambert)  in  the 
National  Library  at  Paris  tells  in  beautiful  hieroglyphics  the  story  of 
the  healing  of  Bentrosch,  the  sister-in-law  of  Ramses  XII,  an 
Egyptian  king.  Being  taken  very  ill  in  Buchtan,  and  the  local 
physicians  unable  to  relieve  her,  the  king  ordered  his  physicians  to 


CHAP. 


XVI.] 


REVIEWED  AND    RECTIFIED. 


307 


send  a  man  who  was  "master  of  his  will  and  master  of  his  fingers," 
a  very  good  direction.  Thotemhebi  was  sent,  and  when  he  arrived, 
pronounced  Bentrosch  obsessed,  and  endeavored  to  conquer  the 
obsession  but  failed.  After  eleven  years  more  without  relief,  a 
request  was  sent  to  Egypt  for  a  god,  and  the  king  went  to  the 
temple  of  the  deity,  "  Chonso-nofer-hotef,"  asking  him  to  give  his 
agent  his  blessing  or  power.  This  was  done  by  the  blessing  passes 
in  the  following  form,  four  times.  The  physician,  thus  prepared, 
went  to  Buchtan  and  healed  the  possessed  Bentrosch  by 
the  blessing  passes  in  the  following  form,  called  SA.  The 
pass  is  made  over  the  backhead  tow- 
ards the  shoulders,  as  shown  by  the 
lines,  repeatedly  with  both  hands. 
Li .  rw  In  a  work  by  Lepsius,  Vol.  Ill,  it 
is  shown  that  the  female  deity  Muth  says  to 
Ramses  III  —  "I  hold  out  both  of  my  arms  to 
make  the  sa  passes  behind  your  head."  The 
nodes  indicated  on  the  head  and  neck  indicate  no 
doubt  the  places  where  the  hands  are  to  rest  on 
the  spot  with  some  pressure. 

Great  importance  seems  to  have  been  attached 
to  the  spot  on  the  neck.  The  Hebrew  Cabbalists 
taught  that  a  small  bone  of  the  neck  (one  of  the  cervical  vertebrae) 
which  they  called  Luz  was  imperishable ;  and  this  is  no  doubt 
identical  with  the  Uls  of  the  Egyptians,  which  lies  where  the  spinal 
column  makes  a  turn  from  the  backhead  towards  the  shoulders.  The 
two  words  are  considered  synonymous.  The  language  of  statement 
implies  that  the  intention  of  the  sa  pass  was  to  wake  the  interior  life. 
As  there  is  a  slight  backward  curvature  where  cervical  and  dorsal 
vertebrae  join,  this  shows  the  location  of  Luz  or  Uls,  and  proves  that 
the  Egyptians  had  learned  the  commanding  importance  of  that 
location  as  a  head  centre  of  the  Vital  Forces,  which  had  not  been 
suspected  in  modern  times  until  the  revelation  of  Sarcognomy  which 
demonstrates  its  supreme  power  and  gives  the  anatomical  and  psychic 
reasons. 

Sarcognomy  is  the  result  of  the  scientific  method  applied  to  this 
investigation,  and  enables  us  to  review  the  operations  and  correct  the 
errors  of  the  cultivators  of  Animal  Magnetism.  To  perform  this 
task  briefly  and  bring  the  chaos  of  benevolent  empiricism  under  the 
jurisdiction  of  science,  let  us  look  at  the  instructions  of  Deleuze,  the 
learned  and  benevolent  expounder  of  Animal  Magnetism. 

His  volume  of  "Practical  Instruction"  opens  with  the  statements 
of  principles  which  he  pronounces  essential  and  invariable,  viz.  :  that 


308  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

man  exercises  a  salutary  influence  over  his  fellow-beings  by  his  will, 
which  is  called  magnetism  ;  that  the  first  condition  of  the  operation 
"is  to  exercise  the  will ;"  that  this  will  operates  through  something 
called  the  magnetic  fluid  ;  and  that  "  the  direct  action  of  magnetism 
ceases  when  the  magnetizer ^ceases  to  will  ;  "  and  that  "magnetism 
generally  exercises  no  influence  upon  persons  in  health." 

This  is  but  a  collection  of  errors.  The  vital  emanation  or  nerv- 
aura, which  has  been  called  Animal  Magnetism,  proceeds  continually 
and  unconsciously  from  every  human  being  and  tends  to  impress  his 
influence,  his  mental  and  physical  characteristics  on  all  with  whom 
he  is  in  contact  or  approximation.  We  see  this  in  the  diffusion  of 
smallpox  and  virulent  fevers,  in  the  contagious  influences  that  rule 
public  assemblies,  and  in  the  assimilation  of  those  who  associate 
together.  We  see  it  especially  in  the  power  of  the  healing  presence 
of  a  benevolent  physician,  who  cures  without  medicine  and  without 
contact,  which  has  been  the  method  of  some  of  our  best  healers. 
It  is  realized  whenever  the  hands  are  placed  upon  the  patient, 
whether  there  be  any  purpose  or  not ;  and  in  all  my  experiments  for 
developing  the  faculties,  passions  and  vital  forces  in  which  the  nature 
of  the  sensitive  is  for  the  time  being  revolutionized  or  subjected  to- 
the  domination  of  various  passions,  such  as  pride,  religion,  sympathy, 
fear  or  anger,  I  have  always  carefully  avoided  any  exercise  of  will 
or  any  desire  to  influence  the  results,  and  have  instructed  my  pupils 
accordingly.  The  influence  of  the  hand  is  sufficient  apart  from  will. 
And  yet  a  determined  influence  of  the  will  must  influence  a  passive 
sensitive,  and  therefore  may  add  materially  to  the  result.  But  that 
the  nervaura  exerts  no  influence  on  persons  in  health,  is  an  astonish- 
ing  statement  to  come  from  so  intelligent  and  respectable  a  source. 
All  mankind  are  susceptible  in  various  degrees  to  the  influence  of 
the  nervaura  and  the  will ;  and  I  have  often  found  a  higher  suscep- 
tibility during  health  than  in  disease.  Some  diseases  enhance  and 
others  diminish  the  susceptibility. 

Deleuze  next  describes  his  process  of  magnetizing,  which  is  little 
more  than  the  general  or  extensive  application  of  the  operator's 
hands  to  the  person  of  the  subject,  by  gentle  touches  and  passes, 
while  the  patient  sits  in  a  passive  condition  with  nothing  to  attract 
his  attention  but  these  manipulations,  while  he  rests  in  the  state  of 
self-surrender  which  is  enjoined.  His  first  direction  is  quite  trivial 
and  unimportant  :  "Take  his  thumbs  between  your  two  fingers  so  that 
the  inside  of  your  thumbs  may  touch  the  inside  of  his.  Remain  in 
this  situation  from  two  to  five  minutes,  or  until  you  perceive  there  is 
an  equal  degree  of  heat  between  your  thumbs  and  his."  This  is  a 
puerile  formula.     The  impression  to  be  made  by  the  operator's  hands 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  3O9 

can  be  much  better  made  by  applying  his  whole  hands  to  the^jnner 
surface  of  the  patient's,  the  tendency  of  which  would  be  to  establish 
sympathetic  connection  and  influence.  But  the  whole  magnetizing 
procedure,  thumbing,  passes,  hand-shaking,  etc.,  is  a  crude,  partial, 
unscientific  method.  The  application  of  the  operator's  hands  upon 
any  portion  of  the  anterior  surface  of  the  chest  would  have  a  better 
effect.  Still  better  would  be  the  application  of  the  hands  on  the  top- 
of  the  head,  anteriorly  and  laterally,  which  would  -produce  an  amiable 
and  submissive  feeling.  If  magnetism  were  merely,  as  Deleuze  says, 
producing  an  effect  by  the  will,  the  whole  process  that  he  recommends 
would  be  useless  and  absurd.  Operators  who  rely  on  the  will  alone. 
do  not  use  it. 

The  whole  object  of  the  magnetic  seance  of  half  an  hour  or  an 
hour  is  to  produce  the  passive,  sensitive  condition  which  yields  to 
all  influences,  and  may  gradually  pass  into  a  state  of  somniloquent 
trance,  and  it  is  a  practicable,  though  tedious  way  of  effecting  it. 
Deleuze  recommends  the  first  seance  to  be  for  an  hour,  and  if  no- 
effect  is  experienced,  to  continue  treatment  for  a  month.  But  the 
object  desired  may  be  attained  frequently  in  a  few  minutes.  It  is 
the  evolution  of  functions  which  belong  to  the  region  behind  the 
eyes,  where  the  frontal  and  middle  lobes  of  the  brain  come 'together, 
—  the  regions  of  Sensibility,  Impressibility  and  Somnolence.  If  the 
patient  is  sufficiently  sensitive  to  be  materially  affected  by  the  passes 
of  the  operator,  he  can  certainly  be  affected  by  the  direct  application 
of  the  hands  to  the  organs  to  be  roused.  The  application  of  the 
fingers  upon  the  temples,  an  inch  behind  the  brow,  will  produce  in  a 
few  minutes  the  same  effects  which  the  magnetizer  seeks  by  the 
tedious  formula  of  magnetic  passes  which  Deleuze  minutely  de- 
scribes. If  the  fingers  are  accurately  placed  upon  Somnolence,  the 
effect  is  revealed  in  a  few  minutes  by  the  winking  of  the  eyes  and 
disposition  to  close  them.  A  thorough  sensitive  will  in  a  few  min- 
utes be  brought  into  the  somniloquent  trance  —  others  may  only 
realize  the  soothing  effect.  If  the  fingers  are  placed  a  little  further 
back,  the  effect  will  be  a  development  of  Sensibility  and  Impressi- 
bility which  will  render  the  subject  more  amenable  to  local  treatment 
and  to  the  action  of  delicate  remedies.  It  will  also  bring  him  sym- 
pathetically under  the  influence  of  the  operator's  constitution  or  will 
if  need  be,  as  well  as  the  tedious  processes  of  Deleuze.  \  Without 
touching  the  head,  however,  the  whole  results  of  the  magnetic 
seance  may  be  developed  by  placing  the  hand  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
sternum,  extending  down  on  the  median  line  from  four  to  five  inches. 
The  entire  space  between  the  umbilicus  and  sternum  is  a  region  of 
soothing,  sympathetic,  somnolent    influences  which   the  magnetizer 


310  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

endeavors  to  develop,  not  by  operating  directly  upon  their  seat,  but  by 
applying  a  general  treatment.  He  who  would  attempt  to  develop  a 
particular  note  in  the  piano  by  pounding  the  framework  instead  of 
touching  the  proper  key  would  commit  a  similar  error. 

In  the  Deleuze  process  the  hands  are  moved  to  the  level  of  the 
head,  placed  on  the  shoulders  about  a  minute  and  drawn  lightly  down 
to  the  tips  of  the  fingers,  "  touching  lightly ; "  then  placed  on  the 
head  a  moment,  brought  down  before  the  face  at  a  distance  of  one  or 
two  inches,  as  far  as  the  pit  of  the  stomach ;  then  slowly  down  to 
the  ends  of  the  feet.  Then  repeat  without  touching  the  head,  but 
"shaking  the  fingers"  at  the  end  of  each  pass,  and  end  by  making 
transverse  passes  at  a  distance  of  three  or  four  inches  before  the  face 
and  before  the  chest.  Passes  may  also  be  made  from  the  shoulders 
down  the  back,  hips  and  thighs. 

Much  of  these  directions  is  arbitrary  and  fanciful.  Passes  along 
the  median  line  down  to  the  epigastrium  are,  however,  appropriate 
to  the  purpose,  and  in  the  most  sensitive  may  be  effective,  but  not  so 
prompt  and  efficient  as  the  direct  application  of  the  hands  to  the 
epigastrium.  In  these  passes  mistakes  are  frequently  made  by 
applying  an  influence  to  the  hypochondria.  Deleuze  himself  says  : 
"  Sometimes  the  patient  experiences  pain  at  the  stomach  and  nausea 
which  is  even  followed  by  vomiting  ;  at  other  times  he  experiences 
cholic  pains,  and  sometimes  desires  the  sitting  suspended  because  he 
feels  a  species  of  irritation,"  —  all  of  which  shows  the  injurious  effects 
of  downward  passes  to  the  hypochondria  and  the  abdomen  generally, 
prompted  by  the  mistaken  dogma  that  the  downward  are  the  only 
magnetic  passes.  It  is  very  remarkable  that  this  was  never  dis- 
covered, and  that  neither  electricians  nor  magnetizers  had  any  con- 
ception of  the  pathological  tendency  of  the  hypochondria,  although 
they  often  brought  out  its  pathological  influence  ;  and  electricians,  as 
Althaus  and  others,  have  been  compelled  to  desist  from  operations 
in  the  hypochondriac  region,  yet  there  was  never  enough  of  the 
spirit  of  investigation  to  discover  the  local  cause  of  the  injurious 
results  produced, —  the  fact  that  the  hypochondria  are  the  regions  of 
morbid  tendencies. 

Deleuze  says  that  the  patient  must  "not  be  in  the  least  alarmed 
at  any  crisis  or  transient  indisposition."  Magnetism  "frequently 
brings  on  very  sharp  pains.  These  pains  prove  that  it  acts  power- 
fully ;  they  are  necessary  to  subdue  the  disease.  If,  then,  you  expe- 
rience sufferings,  you  will  have  the  fortitude  to  bear  them  without 
speaking  of  them  to  any  one.  You  will  not  even  ask  your  mag- 
netizer  to  cnlm  them.  If  you  have  not  beforehand  taken  the  firm 
resolution  of  resisting  the  first  pains  that  it  causes  you  to  feel  ;  if 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  31I 

your  magnetizer  has  not  confidence  and  force  of  character  enough 
not  to  be  alarmed  about  them,  —  it  would  be  better  for  you  not  to 
commence.  I  acknowledge  that  magnetism  has  been  known  to  excite 
a  nervous  irritation  and  an  uneasiness  which  continue  after  the 
sittings  without  being  followed  by  any  crisis. " 

These  frank  admissions  are  just  what  we  should  expect  from  his 
adhering  to  the  dogma  that  downward  passes  alone  are  beneficial 
(which  is  entirely  false),  and  prosecuting  blindly  his  regular  routine 
without  inquiring  or  wishing  to  inquire  into  the  causes  of  the  results. 
The  notion  that  some  injury  to  the  patient  is  a  necessary  part  of  the 
curative  process  is  parallel  to  a  similar  notion  that  has  tacitly  per- 
vaded the  old  harsh  and  heroic  practice  of  medicine.  It  is  utterly 
false.  A  beneficent  agency  never  does  harm,  except  by  the  blind 
ignorance  of  those  who  apply  it. 

So  far  from  downward  passes  being  the  only  beneficial  or  magnetic 
ones,  their  gene7'al  tendency  is  decidedly  injurious  when  they  carry 
the  vital  forces  from  the  thorax  to  the  abdomen  ;  pre-eminently 
injurious  when  they  carry  the  influence  no  lower  than  the  hypo- 
chondria ;  relaxing,  debilitating,  depressing  and  nervous  when  they 
extend  to  the  hypogastric  region,  where  we  find  nervousness  and 
melancholy,  from  which  evil  effects  the  magnetizer  escapes  only  by 
continuing  the  passes  down  the  limbs,  producing  physical  vigor  at 
the  thighs  and  mental  dulness  or  quietude  upon  the  legs  and  feet. 
Onimus  and  Legros,  in  the  practice  of  electro-therapeutics,  acted 
upon  a  similar  notion  current  among  electricians,  and  in  treating  a 
case  of  chorea  they  passed  the  electric  current  from  the  hands  to  the 
feet,  expecting  to  cure  disease  in  the  lower  limbs  by  the  descending 
current.  They  found  to  their  surprise,  however,  that  the  arms  in 
four  seances  were  cured  by  the  ascending  current  they  received. 
They  continued  the  downward  current  from  the  spine  for  six  seances 
without  any  benefit  to  the  lower  limbs,  and  then  tried  an  ascending 
current  to  the  spine,  which  completed  the  cure  in  two  seances. 

The  result  of  the  long  passes  is  to  diminish  mentality  and  all  the 
energetic  impulses  and  emotions  which  sustain  health,  and  to  pro- 
mote a  state  of  purely  animal  life,  subject,  however,  to  the  danger  of 
producing  very  morbid,  irritating,  sickening  and  depressing  influences, 
unless  the  impression  be  thoroughly  removed  from  the  abdomen  to 
the  limbs. 

Upon  the  front  of  the  body  passes  from  the  abdomen  up  the 
thorax  are  as  beneficial  as  the  reverse  are  injurious.  Let  any  one 
who  wishes  to  realize  this  try  a  number  of  individuals  in  succession 
with  brisk  and  energetic  passes,  with  a  light  friction  on  the  clothing 
(or  still  lighter  if  on  the  skin),  upward  from  the  hypochondria  to 


312  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAF.    XVI. 

the  shoulders  or  neck,  or  from  the  hypogastric  region  to  the 
shoulders,,  either  above  or  below  the  arms.  It  will  be  found  invari- 
ably that  these  passes  and  frictions  are  refreshing,  energizing  and 
delightful.  They  disperse  all  morbid,  debilitating  conditions,  rouse 
the  pleasant  emotions  and  promote  calmness  and  health. 

The  passes  down  to  the  feet  recommended  by  Deleuze  are  appro- 
priate for  reducing  the  activity  of  the  brain,  and  are  thus  favorable 
to  sleep. 

Deleuze  says  :  "  It  is  proper,  in  finishing,  to  make  several  passes 
along  the  legs,  from  the  knees  to  the  end  of  the  feet.  These  passes 
free  the  head."  This  is  a  correct  observation,  although  the  author 
had  no  conception  of  the  reason  involved.  Dismissing  the  formula 
of  passes,  the  application  of  the  hands  on  the  top  of  the  feet  is  the 
best  way  of  freeing  the  head,  and  the  application  on  the  front 
of  the  legs  relieves  both  head  and  chest,  as  Sarcognomy  explains. 

"  The  descending  passes  are  magnetic.  The  ascending  movements 
are  not,"  says  Deleuze.  This  is  incorrect,  all  passes  are  about 
equally  efficient  at  similar  distances.  The  terminus  of  the  pass 
determines  its  effect.  Prolonged  passes  terminating  at  the  hypo- 
chondria are  quite  injurious.  Any  function  of  life  may  be  developed 
by  passes  towards  its  locality,  whether  upward  or  downward.  Som- 
nolence may  be  promoted  by  passes  to  the  epigastrium,  whether 
downward,  upward  or  lateral.  The  Sarcognomist  makes  passes 
from  the  function  to  be  checked  toward  the  function  to  be  developed. 
The  electric  current  in  like  manner  develops  the  function  of  the 
part  to  which  it  is  sent. 

Deleuze  commends  magnetizing  by  the  long  pass  from  the  head 
to  the  feet  without  touching,  and  also  with  gentle  friction,  as  bene- 
ficial, which  is  true  in  many  cases  ;  but  in  general  he  prefers  to  keep 
the  hand  one  or  two  inches  from  the  body  and  sometimes  at  a 
distance  of  several  feet. 

This  is  not  idle  mummery.  An  influence  may  be  exerted  upon 
sensitives  without  contact,  and,  moreover,  passes  without  contact 
vividly  excite  the  imagination  and  sensitiveness  of  the  patient,  and 
thus  add  to  the  effect.  Neither  are  such  passes  inefficient  with 
those  in  health.  It  is  merely  a  question  of  impressibility  and 
imagination. 

The  true  effect  of  the  magnetic  seance  is  the  cultivation  of  sensi- 
bility by  a  passive  condition  with  the  attention  fixed  upon  the  faint 
impression  from  the  operator's  hands  ;  secondly,  the  surrender  of 
soul  and  body  to  the  influence  of  the  active  operator  in  close  prox- 
imity, as  an  auditor  surrenders  to  the  influence  of  the  speaker ; 
thirdly,  the  promotion  of  Somnolence  by  fixed  attention  to  the  oper- 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  313 

ator  and  his  monotonous  passes.  The  latter  result,  however,  may  be 
more  simply  attained  by  fixed  attention  to  any  other  object  held  near 
the  eyes,  an  expedient  sometimes  employed  in  public  exhibitions  for 
selecting  impressible  subjects,  or  by  a  steady  gaze  into  the  patient's 
eyes.  Moreover,  Somnolence  is  strongly  promoted  by  the  nervauric 
emanations  in  proportion  as  they  are  recognized  and  felt  by  the 
subject.  The  whole  process  therefore  is  designed  to  produce  in- 
directly what  we  produce  directly  when  we  stimulate  the  region  in 
the  temples  or  on  the  epigastrium  ;  and  the  practicability  of  develop- 
ing the  latter  by  a  galvanic  current  renders  such  a  process  more  in- 
telligible and  satisfactory  to  a  scientific  mind. 

But  Deleuze  was  ignorantly  empirical.  He  gives  his  directions, 
predicts  the  results  and  then  says  :  "  It  is  tiseless  to  search  out  the 
causes  of  these  facts  ;  it  is  sufficient  that  experience  has  established 
them  ;  "  and  this  is  a  leading  reason  why  scientists  have  manifested  an 
aversion  to  the  subject  of  Animal  Magnetism. 

The  term  Animal  Magnetism  is  perhaps  allowable,  though  some- 
what fanciful.  Magnetism  is  an  attractive  force  inherent  in  min- 
erals. The  human  nervaura  is  not  simply  an  attractive  influence.  It 
has  every  conceivable  variety  of  influences,  —  attractive,  repulsive, 
wholesome,  injurious,  intellectual,  stupid,  elevating,  debasing,  excit- 
ing, calming,  —  and  Sarcognomy  enables  us  to  comprehend  all  these 
various  influences  and  their  local  sources  so  as  to  evoke  them  when 
needed  and  to  use  them  for  good  purposes. 

The  attractive  influences  which  have  some  analogy  to  Magnetism 
belong  to  the  upper  portion  of  the  back  and  to  the  upper  portion  of 
the  occiput.  An  operator  in  whom  the  occipital  organs  are  large  has 
a  commanding  force  and  is  said  to  have  a  strong  magnetism,  meaning 
thereby  attraction  and  controlling  power. 

In  his  directions  for  the  treatment  of  disease,  Deleuze  correctly 
states  that  pains  are  carried  off  by  passes  in  the  direction  in  which 
they  are  moved  ;  but  some  of  his  advice  is  not  quite  judicious.  He 
directs  the  application  of  the  hand  for  several  minutes  upon  the  seat 
of  pain  or  disease,  followed  by  a  descending  pass  toward  the  ex- 
tremities. This  may  be  well  for  the  patient,  but  not  for  the  operator. 
In  placing  his  hands  on  the  morbid  part,  the  operator  is  making  an 
exchange  of  vital  influences,  and  if  sensitive  himself  he  receives  the 
entire  morbid  emanation  into  his  hands,  and  in  a  few  such  operations 
receives  a  very  sensible  injurious  influence.  We  do  not  need  to 
refer  to  very  contagious  diseases  to  understand  this  matter, —  all 
conditions,  whether  pathological  or  physiological,  are  contagious  to 
the  sensitive,  and  this  perpetual  contagion  is  the  chief  objection  to 
the  nervauric  practice.     Hence  I  have  always  warned  my  pupils  with 


314  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

great  emphasis  to  protect  themselves  :  not  to  remain  passively  in 
contact  with  any  form  of  disease,  but  to  maintain  as  active  a  condi- 
tion as  possible,  — not  to  rest  in  contact  with  morbid  parts,  but  first 
energetically  remove  the  morbid  condition  and  aura  by  dispersive 
passes,  carrying  it  out  of  the  body  before  applying  the  sanative 
influence  of  the  healthy  hand, — not  applying  it  then  in  a  very 
passive  manner,  but  holding  the  muscles  firm  and  making  as  much 
active  manipulation  as  possible. 

Deleuze  recommends  another  process  which  is  beneficial ;  but 
instead  of  applying  it  at  first,  as  he  suggests,  it  should  be  applied 
after  dispersive  passes  or  frictions.  He  says  :  "  Place  a  piece  of  linen 
several  times  folded,  or  a  fragment  of  woollen  or  cotton  cloth,  upon 
the  suffering  part,  apply  the  mouth  above  it,  and  breathe  through 
it."  This  method  applies  a  very  general  and  wholesome  influence 
from  the  interior  of  the  chest  and  is  not  sufficiently  appreciated. 

Deleuze  also  mentions  a  case  in  which  water  was  used  for  carry- 
ing off  disease  :  M.  N.  filled  a  glass  with  water  and  covered  it  with  a 
linen  cloth  to  prevent  spilling,  then  applied  it  to  the  back  of  the 
head  of  a  patient,  making  passes  from  the  head  to  the  tumbler,  giv- 
ing decided  relief.  It  is  very  true  that  water  may  carry  off  patho- 
logical influences,  as  all  hydropathists  know,  and  this  is  further  illus- 
trated in  the  electric  bath.  Water  flowing  upon  a  diseased  part 
becomes  charged  with  a  morbid  aura  and  capable  of  conveying  it. 

Deleuze  directs  the  patient  whose  eyes  are  closed  to  be  roused  by 
"  passes  transversely  across  the  eyes."  It  is  far  more  effective  to 
stand  behind  the  patient  and  make  passes,  either  from  the  outer 
angle  of  the  eyes  or  from  the  inner  angles,  backward  and  upward 
towards  the  region  of  Firmness  and  Energy. 

Deleuze  relates  a  case  of  hysteria  with  convulsions  occurring  in 
his  practice,  which  alarmed  and  astonished  him,  but  speedily  passed 
off.  If  he  had  known  the  proper  hypogastric  treatment  it  would 
have  been  very  easily  controlled. 

The  instructions  of  Deleuze  in  reference  to  the  use  of  magnetized 
r~  water  for  healing  need  not  be  discussed  farther  than  to  say  that 
psychometry  fully  establishes  the  potential  influence  over  sensitives  of 
any  and  every  emanation  from  a  human  being  and  the  objects  to 
which  that  emanation  may  be  attached.  He  recommends  the  use  of 
magnetized  objects  to  apply  upon  the  seat  of  pain,  such  as  tissues  of 
cotton  or  silk,  and  plates  of  glass,  gold  or  steel.  Modern  magne- 
tizers  in  the  United  States  are  using  paper  with  success  for  sending 
out  magnetic  influences  to  patients.  Of  course,  the  success  of  such 
means  depends  on  a  high  degree  of  susceptibility  in  the  patient  and 
a  very  potent  vitality  in  the  operator. 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  3 1 5. 

In  the  magnetic  baquet,  composed  of  bottles  of  magnetized  water, 
communicating  by  wires  with  a  central  conductor  as  if  they  were 
Leyden  jars  charged  with  electricity,  —  Deleuze  passes  from  the 
sphere  of  tangible  science  into  that  of  imagination  and  ignorance ; 
for  imagination  skilfully  impressed  would  produce  far  greater  results 
than  his  baquet,  on  the  model  of  Mesmer,  the  unscientific  enthusiast. 

In  the  development  of  Somniloquence,  no  matter  by  what  process 
or  .by  the  course  of  nature,  there  is  a  great  exaltation  of  the  interior 
or  intuitive  faculties,  and  Deleuze  speaks  very  correctly  of  the  phe- 
nomena of  somniloquence  or  somnambulism.  He  says  :  "  In  the  state 
of  somnambulism  the  moral  sensibility  is  undeniably  much  more 
lively."  The  cause  of  this  is  developed  by  Sarcognomy.  "There  is 
in  most  somnambulists  a  development  of  sensibility  of  which  we  can 
have  no  conception.  They  are  susceptible  of  receiving  influence 
from  everything  that  surrounds  them,  and  principally  from  living 
beings.  They  are  not  only  affected  by  physical  emanations  or  the 
effluvia  of  living  bodies,  but  also  to  a  degree  much  more  surprising 
by  the  thoughts  and  sentiments  of  those  who  surround  them.  If 
you  are  alone  with  a  somnambulist  and  any  one  is  permitted  to  enter, 
the  somnambulist  generally  perceives  it.  Sometimes  the  person  who 
enters  is  indifferent  to  him ;  at  other  times  he  feels  for  him  either  a 
sympathy  or  an  antipathy."  If  the  stranger  is  incredulous  and 
suspects  the  sincerity  of  the  somnambulist,  or  makes  a  jest  of  what 
he  sees,  the  somnambulist  is  troubled  and  loses  his  lucidity.  **  If 
many  witnesses  surround  and  are  occupied  about  him,  the  fluid  of 
each  of  them  acts  upon  his  organization." 

This  sensitive  condition  is  merely  an  active  state  of  the  interior 
faculties,  which  exists  normally  in  those  who  have  a  large  develop- 
ment of  the  lateral  and  interior  regions  of  the  front  lobe,  and  who 
by  their  psychometric  perceptions  are  continually  in  rapport  with 
those  around  them,  or  those  at  a  distance  to  whom  their  minds  are 
directed. 

The  development  of  Intuition,  the  divinely  intelligent  element  in 
man,  under  the  name  of  Psychometry,  will  guide  mankind  hereafter 
into  more  profound  science  and  philosophy  than  has  ever  before 
been  conceived,  —  carrying  us  into  all  the  mysteries  of  physiology, 
pneumatology,  paleontology,  astronomy,  geology  and  antiquity.  This 
interior  faculty  has  been  apparent  in  the  somnambulism  of  magne- 
tizers,  but  has  not  been  guided  and  used  for  the  results  of  which  it 
is  capable. 

Deleuze  describes  the  somnambulistic  phenomena,  which  some- 
times appear  as  follows  :  "When  the  somnambulist  has  reached  this 
degree  of   exaltation,  his  manner  of  speaking  is  almost  always  d if- 


3 16  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

ferent  from  that  which  he  has  in  his  ordinary  state.  His  diction  is 
pure  and  simple,  elegant  and  precise ;  his  manner,  unimpatient  ; 
everything  announces  in  him  a  state  of  tranquillity,  a  distinct  view  of 
that  of  which  he  speaks,  and  an  entire  conviction  of  its  reality. 
You  perceive  in  his  discourse  not  the  least  of  what  is  called  excite- 
ment or  enthusiasm.  In  this  new  situation  the  mind  is  filled  with 
religious  ideas  with  which  perhaps  it  was  never  before  occupied. 
.  .  .  This  life  appears  to  him  only  a  journey,  during  which  we 
ought  to  collect  what  is  necessary  for  us  in  our  everlasting  man- 
sions .  .  .  Sometimes  the  prodigious  difference  he  perceives 
between  his  new  manner  of  viewing  objects  and  that  which  he  had 
in  his  ordinary  state,  the  new  lights  which  shine  for  him,  the  new 
faculties  with  which  he  finds  himself  endowed,  the  immensity  of  the 
horizon  which  is  spread  before  his  eyes  —  persuade  him  that  he  is 
inspired." 

In  that  mental  condition  supernal  intelligences  do  communicate 
and  influence  the  mind,  or  may  even  control  the  sensitive  and  make 
him  their  mouthpiece.  When  we  know  that  these  exalted  powers 
may  be  cultivated  by  stimulating  the  organs  behind  the  eyes  and 
behind  the  root  of  the  nose,  with  their  corresponding  locations  at 
the  lower  end  of  the  sternum  and  the  epigastrium,  we  have  added 
greatly  to  our  power  of  seeking  truth  and  wisdom,  and  advancing 
education.  The  boy,  the  girl,  or  the  uneducated  laborer,  may  become 
by  the  development  of  their  interior  faculties,  teachers  to  those 
most  advanced  in  education,  as  patients  have  often  been  enabled  to 
instruct  their  physicians  in  diagnoses,  prognoses  and  remedies. 

Of  marvellous  phenomena  Deleuze  is  but  a  modest  narrator,  with- 
out the  slightest  effort  at  investigation.  He  says  :  "There  exists  with 
some  individuals  a  magnetic  power,  truly  prodigious,  of  which  I  do 
not  pretend  to  know  the  cause.  Many  magnetizers  induce  som- 
nambulism with  very  great  facility  and  do  not  hope  for  success 
except  from  this  crisis,  while  others  can  scarcely  effect  it,  yet  do  not 
do  the  less  good.  Some  of  them  act  only  by  the  will,  without  any 
apparent  magnetic  process." 

The  explanation  of  this,  which  will  be  given  more  fully  in  my 
Anthropology,  is  found  in  the  occipital  energy  belonging  to  the 
region  on  the  head  just  back  of  Combativeness,  which  gives  this 
dominating,  entrancing  power.  The  coronal  region  of  the  amiable 
sentiments,  the  whole  upper  surface  of  the  head,  is  the  source  of 
the  benevolent  healing  power  which  does  not  aim  or  desire  to  subju- 
gate others.  This  benevolent  power  is  nowhere  so  effective  as  at  its 
origin  in  the  brain,  and  the  application  of  the  upper  surface  of  the 
head  to  the  patient  or  to  any  painful  or  diseased  part  is  the  most 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  317 

soothing  restorative  treatment  possible.  It  is  remarkable  that  with 
all  the  vast  amount  of  experience  in  Animal  Magnetism  nothing 
should  have  been  known  or  suspected  of  this.  The  whole  subject 
has  been  dominated  by  a  spirit  of  blind  routine,  more  monotonous 
than  that  of  the  medical  profession.  Deleuze  himself  says  :  "  Mag- 
netism, if  it  has  been  practised  empirically  from  a  high  antiquity, 
has  not  at  least  formed  a  particular  science,  except  for  a  small 
number  of  years.  Magnetism  cannot  take  its  rank  among  the 
sciences,  and  present  a  doctrine  of  which  application  may  in  all 
cases  be  made,  until  physicians  take  it  up  seriously."  But  the  hard, 
mechanical  character  which  the  medical  profession  has  assumed 
utterly  disqualifies  it  for  investigating  so  profound,  so  delicate,  so 
psychic  a  subject.  It  has  not  even  been  able  to  develop  the  rational 
principles  of  electric  practice. 

The  remark  that  some  magnetizers  act  by  the  will  alone  indicates 
that  in  them  the  region  of  Will  is  largely  developed,  —  the  region  of 
Firmness,  which  is  assisted  by  all  the  occipital  organs,  —  and  that 
they  have  the  psychic  temperament  derived  from  the  interior  regions 
of  the  brain,  which  brings  them  into  rapport  with  persons  at  a 
distance,  or  into  intimate  sympathy  with  those  who  are  near. 

But  little  more  need  be  said  of  Therapeutic  Magnetism  as  presented 
by  Deleuze.  There  is  very  little  of  it,  beyond  a  limited  formula,  or 
rules  of  proceeding,  which  might  be  fully  expressed  in  three  or  four 
pages,  and  which  certainly  has  no  claim  to  be  considered  a  science  or  a 
scientific  art.  But  the  volume  of  his  "  Practical  Instruction,"  repro- 
duced in  this  country  by  T.  C.  Hartshorn,  of  Providence,  R.I.,  is 
filled  with  gossipy  details,  good  advice  to  magnetizers,  descriptions  of 
cases  and  their  treatment,  which  certainly  show  success  in  the  prac- 
tice, and  numerous  illustrations  of  somnambulism  and  clairvoyance, 
mainly  added  by  Mr.  Hartshorn,  with  the  testimony  of  physicians, 
making  an  aggregate  of  documentary  evidence  so  weighty  and  con- 
vincing that  it  exhibits  in  a  clear  light  the  remarkable  stolidity  of 
medical  colleges  in  continuing  to  treat  facts  so  well  established  with 
silent  scorn  or  open  hostility,  and  at  last  endeavoring  to  reduce  the 
whole  subject  to  the  coarse,  mechanical  proceeding  which  they  call 
massage  or  rubbing. 

I  have  shown  that  the  somnambulic,  clairvoyant  and  entranced 
conditions  which  constitute  the  mass  of  the  phenomena  of  Animal 
Magnetism  are  the  results  of  the  predominance  of  certain  faculties 
with  which  all  mankind  are  endowed  in  various  degrees,  and  which 
may  be  elicited  by  direct  stimulation  of  their  organs  by  the  fingers 
or  hand,  and  by  galvanic  currents. 

To  produce  the  sleep  or  trance  of  insensibility,  the  organ  of  Somno- 


3 18  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

lence  in  the  temples  may  be  excited,  or  it  may  be  produced  by  placing 
one  hand  at  the  epigastrium  on  the  median  line,  just  below  the  sternum, 
and  the  other  on  the  back  just  behind  the  middle  of  the  humerus, 
and  below  the  shoulder-blade,  which  tends  to  a  deep  sleep.  The  in- 
sensibility to  pain  may  be  promoted  by  placing  the  hand  upon  the 
shoulder,  from  the  acromion  process  (the  external  and  upper  surface 
of  the  shoulder)  extending  three  or  four  inches  inward. 

Possibly  this  volume  may  do  something  to  overcome  medical  preju- 
dice by  showing  the  facility  with  which  the  neurological  laws  of  the 
human  constitution  may  be  demonstrated  by  Galvanism.  But  scien- 
tific testimony  seems  to  produce  very  little  effect  when  it  is  resisted 
by  materialistic  dogmatism.  In  addition  to  the  testimony  of  a  very 
large  number  of  physicians  as  to  the  reality  of  the  magnetic  phenom- 
ena, the  two  most  eminent  of  all  French  scientists,  Cuvier  and  La 
Place,  have  given  attestation  of  their  truth. 

Cuvier  says  in  his  Comparative  Anatomy  :  "  The  effects  produced 
upon  persons  who  before  the  operation  (of  mesmerizing)  was  begun 
were  in  a  state  of  insensibility ;  those  which  have  taken  place  upon 
other  persons  after  the  operation  itself  has  reduced  them  to  that 
state  ;  and  also  to  the  effects  produced  upon  brutes,  — no  longer  permit 
it  to  be  doubted  that  the  proximity  of  two  animated  bodies,  in  a  cer- 
tain position  and  with  the  help  of  certain  motions,  do  produce  a  real 
effect,  wholly  independent  of  the  imagination  of  either.  It  is  also  evi- 
dent that  these  effects  are  owing  to  a  communication  which  takes 
place  between  the  nervous  systems  of  the  two  parties."  The  testi- 
mony of  La  Place  in  his  great  Treatise  on  the  Calculation  of  Proba- 
bilities is  equally  positive  and  explicit. 

The  eminent  physiologist  Georget  said  :  "  I  have  seen,  positively 
seen,  a  great  many  times,  somnambulists  announce  several  hours, 
seveial  days,  twenty  days  beforehand,  the  hour,  the  minute  even,  of  the 
attack  of  epileptic  and  hysteric  fits,  and  of  the  menstrual  eruptions, 
and  indicate  the  duration  and  the  intensity  of  the  attacks,  —  things 
which  were  actually  verified." 

The  existence  of  these  intuitive  and  prophetic  powers  in  man  I 
have  demonstrated  in  developing  the  science  of  Psychometry,  and 
pointed  out  their  location  ;  and  in  Sarcognomy  I  place  the  entire 
modus  operandi  in  the  possession  of  the  public,  of  which  for  many 
years  probably  only  the  most  enlightened  will  avail  themselves. 

Let  us  not  forget  that  Dr.  Elliotson,  at  the  head  of  the  medical 
profession  in  London,  was  driven  into  retirement  for  attempting  to 
introduce  in  England  the  magnetic  anaesthesia  in  surgical  operations, 
after  the  Committee  of  the  Royal  Academy  of  Medicine  at  Paris  in 
1836  had  made  the  following  statement  of  the  success  of  Cloquet  in 


CHAP.    XVI. J  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  319 

operating  during  the  somnambulic  trance,  —  a  specimen  of  the  large 
class  of  facts  of  which  the  present  generation  of  physicians  have  been 
carefully  kept  in  ignorance  by  their  professors,  — an  ignorance  which 
they  are  most  faithfully  transmitting  to  their  successors. 

The  report  made  in  183 1  — signed  by  Bourdois  de  la  Motte,  presi- 
dent ;  Fouquier,  Gueneau  de  Mussy,  Guersent,  Itard,  J.  J.  Leroux, 
Marc,  Thillaye  and  Husson  —  says  :  — 

"  You  have  all  heard  of  a  fact  which  at  the  time  fixed  the  atten- 
tion of  the  Chirurgical  Section,  and  which  was  communicated  to  it  at 
the  session  of  April  16,  1829,  by  M.  Jules  Cloquet.  The  committee 
thought  it  their  duty  to  embody  it  in  this  report,  as  one  of  the  least 
equivocal  proofs  of  the  power  of  the  magnetic  sleep.  It  relates  to 
Madame  Plantin,  aged  sixty-four  years,  living  at  1 5 1  Rue  Saint-Denis, 
who  consulted  M.  Cloquet,  on  the  8th  of  April,  1829,  about  an  ulcer- 
ated cancer  on  her  right  breast,  which  she  had  had  many  years,  and 
which  was  complicated  with  a  considerable  enlargement  of  the  axillary 
ganglions.  M.  Chapelain,  the  physician  of  this  woman,  whom  he  had 
magnetized  for  some  months,  with  the  intention,  as  he  said,  of  reduc- 
ing the  enlargement  of  the  breast,  had  been  able  to  obtain  no  other 
result  than  a  very  profound  sleep,  during  which  her  sensibility 
appeared  annihilated,  but  the  ideas  preserved  all  their  lucidity.  He 
proposed  to  M.  Cloquet  that  he  should  operate  upon  it  while  she  was 
plunged  into  the  magnetic  sleep.  M.  Cloquet,  considering  the  opera- 
tion indispensable,  consented  to  do  it ;  and  it  was  agreed  that  it 
should  take  place  on  the  following  Sunday,  April  12.  The  two 
evenings  previous,  this  woman  was  magnetized  several  times  by  M. 
Chapelain,  who  disposed  her  when  in  somnambulism  to  support  the 
operation  without  fear,  and  even  led  her  to  speak  of  it  with  compo- 
sure, while  as  soon  as  she  waked  she  repelled  the  idea  with  horror. 

"  On  the  day  appointed  for  the  operation,  M.  Cloquet,  on  his  arrival 
at  half  past  ten  o'clock  in  the  morning,  found  the  patient  dressed, 
and  seated  in  an  arm-chair,  in  the  position  of  a  person  peacefully 
wrapped  in  a  natural  sleep.  It  was  nearly  an  hour  since  she  had 
returned  from  mass,  which  she  always  attended  at  the  same  hour. 
M.  Chapelain  had  put  her  into  the  magnetic  sleep  since  she  came 
back.  The  patient  spoke  with  great  calmness  of  the  operation  she 
was  about  to  undergo.  Every  arrangement  having  been  made  for 
the  operation,  she  undressed  herself  and  sat  down  upon  a  chair. 

"  M.  Chapelain  held  the  right  arm,  the  left  arm  being  suffered  to 
hang  by  her  side.  M.  Pailloux,  a  student  of  the  Saint-Louis  Hospital, 
was  charged  to  hand  the  instruments  and  to  make  the  ligatures. 
First  an  incision  was  made  from  the  armpit,  above  the  tumor,  to  the 
inner  side  of   the  breast.     The  second,    commencing   at    the    same 


320  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

point,  separated  the  tumor  below  and  passed  round  to  meet  the  first. 
M.  Cloquet  dissected  the  enlarged  ganglions  with  caution,  on  account 
of  their  proximity  to  the  axillary  artery,  and  took  off  the  tumor.  The 
time  consumed  in  the  operation  was  ten  or  twelve  minutes. 

"  During  all  this  time  the  patient  continued  to  converse  tranquilly 
with  the  operator  and  did  not  exhibit  the  slightest  sign  of  sensibility  : 
no  movement  of  the  limbs  or  of  the  features,  no  change  in  the 
respiration,  nor  in  the  voice,  no  emotion,  not  even  in  the  pulse,  were 
manifested  ;  the  patient  did  not  cease  to  be  in  the  state  of  self-forget- 
fulness  and  passive  insensibility  in  which  she  was  several  minutes 
before  the  operation.  They  were  not  obliged  to  hold  her  ;  they  merely 
sustained  her.  A  ligature  was  applied  to  the  lateral  thoracic  artery, 
which  was  exposed  during  the  extraction  of  the  ganglions.  The 
wound  was  closed  with  sticking  plaster  and  dressed  ;  the  patient  was 
put  on  the  bed,  still  in  the  state  of  somnambulism,  and  left  there 
forty-eight  hours.  An  hour  after  the  operation  a  slight  hemorrhage 
ensued,  which  did  not  continue.  The  first  dressing  was  removed  on 
the  succeeding  Tuesday,  April  14.  The  wound  was  cleansed  and 
dressed  anew  :  the  patient  manifested  no  sensibility  nor  pain.  The 
pulse  reserved  its  natural  beat. 

"After  the  dressing  had  been  put  on,  M.  Chapelain  awoke  the 
patient,  whose  somnambulic  sleep  had  lasted  ever  since  one  hour  be- 
fore the  operation,  that  is  to  say,  for  two  days.  This  woman  did  not 
appear  to  have  any  idea  or  any  impression  of  what  had  passed  ;  but, 
on  learning  that  she  had  been  operated  upon  and  seeing  her  children 
around  her,  she  experienced  a  very  lively  emotion,  which  the  magne- 
tizer  terminated  by  putting  her  asleep  immediately." 

The  report  of  the  commission  fully  confirmed  the  claims  of  the 
friends  of  Animal  Magnetism,  giving  some  interesting  illustrations  of 
clairvoyance  and  the  power  of  somnambulists  to  prescribe  successfully 
for  the  sick.  Two  centuries  previously,  in  France,  during  the  time 
of  Richelieu,  Grandier  was  condemned  and  burned  alive  for  the  exer- 
cise of  the  powers  which  this  commission  commended  as  a  matter  of 
science.  Unfortunately  the  medical  profession  during  the  last  half 
century  has  been  retrograding  in  this  matter  towards  seventeenth- 
century  ignorance. 

Notwithstanding  the  vast  number  of  public  and  private  exhibitions 
of  the  power  of  clairvoyance,  a  brutal  hostility  to  this  faculty  has  been 
exhibited  by  many  of  the  leaders  of  the  medical  profession,  and  I  think 
it  well  to  republish  here  one  of  the  best  illustrations  of  this  power. 

Rev.  E.  B.  Hall,  of  Providence  (Dec.  1,  1837),  stated  in  reference 
to  Miss  Brackett  :  "  I  have  seen  a  sealed  letter  containing  a  passage 
inclosed  in  lead,  which  letter  she  held   at  the  side  of  her  head  not 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  321 

more  than  a  moment,  all  in  sight,  then  gave  it  back  to  the  writer, 
and  afterward  wrote  what  she  had  read  in  it.  The  letter  was  opened 
in  my  presence,  and  the  two  writings  agreed  in  every  word,  there 
being  two  differences  in  spelling  only." 

In  another  instance  Mr.  S.  Covill  of  Troy,  being  skeptical,  wrote  a 
sentence  on  paper  without  any  one's  knowledge,  inclosed  it  between 
two  thick  cards,  folded  the  whole  up  in  deep-blue  paper,  sealed  it  with 
his  own  seal  and  a  number  of  wafers,  and  put  it  all  into  a  larger  sheet 
directed  to  Mr.  Isaac  Thorpe  ;  this  sealed  letter,  as  he  received  it,  was 
presented  by  Mr.  Thorpe  to  Miss  Brackett  in  the  presence  of  quite  a 
number  of  gentlemen,  requesting  her  to  read  it  without  breaking  the 
seals.  She  took  the  letter  with  her  on  retiring  for  the  night,  and 
in  the  morning  dictated  the  following  as  its  contents,  which  was 
written  down  by  Mr.  H.  Hopkins  :  — 

"  No  other  than  the  eye  of  Omnipotence  can  read  this  in  this 
envelopement.         *         *         *         *         l%?>7" 

The  stars  represented  a  portion  she  could  not  read.  The  letter 
was  returned  with  the  seals  undisturbed,  and  her  reading  was  pub- 
lished before  the  answer  was  received.  Mr.  Covill  stated  that  the 
reading  was  :  "  No  other  than  the  eye  of  Omnipotence  can  read  this 
sentence  in  this  envelope.  Troy,  New  York,  August,  1837."  Thus 
the  reading  was  correct  in  everything  but  the  local  date  and  the 
word  "sentence,"  which  was  omitted. 

These  marvellous  powers  of  the  soul  and  brain,  which  the  cultiva- 
tors of  Animal  Magnetism  have  demonstrated  so  many  thousand 
times  without  overcoming  that  hostility  which  springs  from  the 
coarser  elements  of  human  nature,  are  now  clearly  intelligible,  since 
I  have  traced  them  to  their  location  in  the  front  lobe  of  the  brain, 
and  shown  how  they  may  be  evoked. 

The  vast  number  of  illustrations  of  clairvoyance  and  of  the  power 
of  the  disembodied  soul  during  the  last  thirty  years,  and  the  vast  num- 
ber of  cures  effected  by  human  vitality  without  medicine  and  without 
learning,  would  have  wrought  an  entire  revolution  in  philosophy  and 
therapeutics  if  the  educated  classes  had  been  taught  to  reason. 

The  great  need  of  the  age  is  a  true  education,  which  will  enable 
all  classes  to  welcome  and  appreciate  new  truth. 

The  progress  of  the  higher  departments  of  science  and  philosophy 

liot  like  the  steady  growth  of  physical  science,  but  is  rather  a  matter 
of  accidental  impulse,  local  fashion  and  prejudice.  The  systematic 
cultivation  of  Animal  Magnetism  has  been  neglected.  The  study 
of  the  brain  by  comparative  developement  has  been  almost  forgotten, 
although  it  vastly  exceeds  in  interest  and  value  all  other  methods  in 
natural  history  and  ethnology. 


322  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

My  own  experimental  investigation,  which  organizes  a  positive 
and  complete  Anthropology,  has  not  been  sufficiently  urged  to  en- 
force its  proper  consideration.  The  marvellous  facts  of  spiritualism, 
and  the  diagnostic  and  healing  powers  which  it  has  developed,  are 
now  the  chief  objects  of  interest  with  progressive  minds,  and  our 
therapeutic  science  is  about  to  be  enriched  by  the  partisans  of  psychic 
methods,  who  discard  all  physical  means,  as  the  medical  profession 
has  discarded  the  psychic.  Every  step  in  that  direction  is  an  advance 
towards  higher  conditions.  The  marvellous  cures,  so  numerous  and 
well  attested,  achieved  by  prayer,  faith,  spirit  agency  and  what  has 
been  called  "  mind  cure,"  far  transcend  the  achievements  of  medical 
therapeutics,  and  the  question  is  being  determined  by  experience,  to 
what  extent  these  psychic  agencies  can  be  substituted  for  the  physi- 
cal means  upon  which  the  world  has  heretofore  relied. 

The  partisans  of  physical  science  have  confined  themselves 
rigorously  to  physical  methods,  forgetting  that  man  is  an  eternal 
spiritual  being,  even  while  dwelling  in  a  material  form.  If  the  par. 
tisans  of  psychic  science,  ignoring  physical  means,  treat  the  soul 
alone,  we  may  obtain  comparative  statistics  of  the  two  methods,  and 
the  true  philosopher,  comprehending  each,  will  avail  himself  of  both. 
The  student  of  Sarcognomy  should  be  prepared  to  avail  himself  of 
manual,  psychic,  electro-magnetic,  pneumatic,  medical,  solar,  hydro- 
therapic,  auto-therapeutic  and  all  other  possible  methods.  By  auto- 
therapeutics  I  refer  to  self-treatment  by  mental  power  and  hygienic 
exercises  which  appear  to  be  capable  of  remodelling  the  constitution. 
(See  Chapter  on  Hygiene.) 

How  widely  different  from  the  monotonous  imbecility  of  Deleuze  is 
the  practical  exposition  by  Dr.  James  Esdaile  of  his  medical  and 
surgical  application  of  Animal  Magnetism  in  India,  in  the  volume 
"Mesmerism  in  India,"  published  in  1846,  —  showing  his  observations 
during  six  years, —  a  work  which  no  candid  person  can  read  without  real- 
izing the  guilty  folly  of  the  medical  profession  in  ignoring  and  opposing 
so  valuable  a  portion  of  therapeutics !  It  was  his  intention  at  first  to 
communicate  his  observations  only  to  the  medical  profession,  but  he 
soon  felt  it  his  duty  to  give  them  to  the  public. 

Dr.  Esdaile's  report  embraces  seventy-three  surgical  operations  and 
eighteen  medical  cases  treated  by  Mesmerism  with  complete  success, 
and  shows  how  simple  is  the  practice  and  how  brilliant  are  its  results 
in  India.  A  student  of  Sarcognomy  in  that  climate,  even  if  he  dis- 
pensed with  medicine  entirely,  would  have  a  brilliantly  successful 
practice  that  might  astonish  the  adherents  of  the  old  regime.  Dr. 
Esdaile  regrets  that  the  public  should  wrait  for  a  professional  sanction  of 
Mesmerism  ;  for,  says  he,  "  medical  men  in  general  as  yet  know  nothing 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  2>23 

about  it ;  and  there  is  nothing  in  their  previous  knowledge,  however 
great  and  varied,  that  bears  upon  the  subject."  "I  fear  that  not 
many  of  this  generation  will  live  to  benefit  by  Mesmerism,  if  they 
wait  till  it  is  admitted  into  the  Pharmacopoeia."  He  speaks  of  the 
opprobrious  language  applied  to  those  who  succeed  in  curing  diseases 
without  medicine,  and  adds  "  in  my  estimation  the  genuine  medical 
quack  is  he,  who  professing  to  cure  disease,  yet  allows  his  patients  to 
suffer  and  perish  by  ignorantly  or  presumptuously  despising  any 
promising  or  possible  means  of  which  the  Father  of  Medicine  thought 
very  differently  from  his  degenerate  sons." 

As  to  producing  insensibility,  he  says:  "In  singularly  sensitive  per- 
sons, the  extreme  degree  of  coma,  so  intense  as  to  permit  the  per- 
formance of  surgical  operations  without  awaking  the  patient,  may 
sometimes  be  obtained  in  a  few  minutes,  but  in  general  it  takes  an 
hour  or  two,  and  the  process  often  does  not  succeed  till  the  second  or 
even  fourteenth  time."  Nevertheless  in  India  the  results  were  very 
promptly  produced,  and  he  says  :  "  Finding  it  impossible  after  the  first 
month  to  prosecute  the  subject  in  my  own  person,  owing  to  the  great 
bodily  and  mental  fatigue  it  caused  —  for  I  had  spared  neither  — 
I  set  to  work  my  hospital  attendants,  young  Hindoos  and  Mahome- 
dans,  and  such  has  been  my  success  that  every  one  I  have  taught 
lias  become  a  skilful  mesmerizer." 

Believing  that  Mesmerism  as  a  natural  mode  of  cure  must  have 
been  known  from  the  most  ancient  times,  though  disguised  as  magic 
or  mystery,  Dr.  E.  made  the  acquaintance  of  a  famous  magician  of 
Bengal,  and  professing  to  be  a  brother  magician  succeeded  in  persuad- 
ing him  to  show  his  process  for  relieving  pain.  The  magician  "  sent 
for  a  brass  pot  containing  water,  and  a  tray  with  two  or  three  leaves 
upon  it,  and  commenced  muttering  his  charms  at  arm's  length  from 
the  patient.  In  a  short  time  he  dipped  his  forefinger  into  the  water, 
and  with  the  help  of  his  thumb,  flirted  it  into  the  patient's  face  ;  he 
then  took  the  leaves,  and  commenced  stroking  the  person  from  the 
crown  of  the  head  to  the  toes,  with  a  slow,  drawing  motion.  The 
knuckles  almost  touched  the  body,  and  he  said  that  he  could  continue 
the  process  for  an  hour  or  longer  if  necessary,  and  it  convinced  me 
that  if  these  charmers  ever  do  good  by  such  means,  it  is  by  the  Mes- 
meric Jjifluence."  Dr.  E.  then  proposed  to  show  his  charm  by  oper- 
ating on  the 

"  After  some  difficulty  we  got  him  to  lie  down,  and  to  give  due 
solemnity  to  my  proceedings,  I  chanted  as  an  invocation  the  chorus 
of  the  "  King  of  the  Cannibal  Islands."  I  desired  him  to  shut  his 
eyes,  and  he  clenched  his  eyelids  firmly  that  I  might  find  no  entrance 
to  the  brain  by  that  inlet.     In  a  quarter  of  an  hour  he  jumped  up  and 


324  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

said  he  felt  something  disagreeable  coming  over  him  and  wished  to 
make  his  escape.  He  was  over-persuaded  to  lie  down  again,  however, 
and  I  soon  saw  the  muscles  around  the  eye  begin  to  relax,  and  his 
face  became  perfectly  smooth  and  calm.  I  was  sure  that  I  had  caught 
my  brother  magician  napping,  but  in  a  few  minutes  he  bolted  up  sud- 
denly, clapped  his  hands  to  his  head,  cried  he  felt  drunk,  and  nothing 
could  induce  him  to  lie  down  again."  He  quickly  escaped  and  con- 
fessed next  clay  that  he  was  overcome  by  the  sleepy  influence. 

The  process  of  the  magician  as  well  as  Dr.  Esdaile  was  simply  long 
passes  from  the  head  to  the  feet  —  a  natural  mode  of  producing  sleep 
as  has  already  been  explained. 

Dr.  Esdaile's  attention  had  been  directed  to  Animal  Magnetism 
not  only  by  the  manly  declarations  of  the  famous  Dr.  John  Elliotson 
of  London,  but  by  the  admissions  of  its  opponents  —  notably  those 
of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church.  The  action  of  this  body,  as  hostile 
to  psychic  science  as  it  was  once  to  astronomy,  is  worth  reproducing 
here,  as  a  statement  and  admission  of  facts  which  have  long  been 
familiar  to  the  intelligent. 

In  May,  1841,  the  Archbishop  of  Lausanne  and  Geneva  addressed 
to  the  Sacred  Penitentiary  at  Rome  the  following  remarkable  docu- 
ment. By  a  curious  coincidence  this  was  the  very  time  at  which  I 
had  discovered  and  announced  the  nervauric  impressibility  of  the 
brain,  the  time  at  which  Esdaile  began  his  operations  in  India  and  Dr. 
Braid  began  his  investigation  of  hypnotism  in  England  :  — 

"  Most  Eminent  Lord,  —  Since  that  which  has  been  hitherto 
answered  respecting  Animal  Magnetism  seems  by  no  means  to  suffice, 
and  it  is  much  to  be  wished  that  cases  not  unfrequently  occurring 
may  be  solved  more  and  more  uniformly,  the  undersigned  humbly 
lays  before  your  Eminence  that  which  follows  : 

"  A  magnetized  person,  who  is  generally  of  the  female  sex,  enters 
into  that  state  of  sleep  called  Magnetic  Somnambulism  so  deeply, 
that  not  even  the  greatest  noise  at  her  ears,  nor  any  violence  of  iron 
or  fire,  is  capable  of  raising  her  from  it.  She  is  brought  into  this 
kind  of  ecstasy  by  the  magnetizer  alone,  to  whom  she  has  given  con- 
sent (for  consent  is  necessary),  either  by  various  touches  or  gesticu- 
lations, when  he  is  present,  or  by  a  simple  command,  and  that,  too, 
an  internal  one,  when  he  is  at  a  distance  of  even  several  leagues. 

"Then,  being  interrogated,  aloud  or  mentally,  concerning  her  own 
disease,  or  those  of  absent  persons  entirely  unknown  to  her,  this  per- 
son, who  is  evidently  one  unlearned,  at  once  exhibits  great  superiority 
in  science  to  medical  men  ;  announces  most  accurately  anatomical 
matters  ;  indicates  the  cause,  seat,  and  nature  of  internal  diseases  in 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  325 

the  human  body,  which,  to  the  skilful,  are  most  difficult  of  under- 
standing, and  unravels  their  progress,  variation  and  complications  ; 
and  this  in  the  terms  proper  to  them,  and  prescribes  the  most  simple 
and  efficacious  remedies. 

"  If  the  person  concerning  whom  the  magnetized  woman  is  con- 
sulted is  present,  the  magnetizer  establishes  the  relation  between 
them  by  means  of  contact.  If,  however,  he  be  absent,  a  lock  of  his 
hair  supplies  his  place,  and  suffices  ;  for,  when  this  lock  of  hair  is 
brought  into  the  proximity  only  of  the  hand  of  the  magnetized  person, 
he  declares  what  it  is  (without  casting  his  eyes  on  it),  whose  hair  it  is 
where  the  person  is  actually  sojourning,  to  whom  the  hair  belongs, 
what  he  is  doing,  and  affords  the  above-mentioned  information  respect- 
ing his  disease  not  otherwise  than  if,  after  the  manner  of  medicaL 
men,  he  were  inspecting  the  interior  of  his  body. 

M  Lastly,  the  magnetized  person  does  not  see  with  the  eye.  The 
eyes  being  covered,  though  not  knowing  how  to  read,  he  will  read  off 
whatever  is  placed  on  his  head  or  stomach,  whether  a  book,  or  manu- 
script, open  or  shut.  His  words,  too,  seem  to  issue  from  this  region  : 
but  when  brought  out  of  this  state,  either  at  the  order,  even  internal, 
of  the  magnetizer,  or,  as  it  were,  spontaneously  at  the  moment  previ- 
ously announced  by  himself,  he  appears  to  be  not  at  all  conscious  of 
the  things  gone  through  by  him  in  the  paroxysm,  how  long  soever  it 
may  have  lasted  :  what  may  have  been  demanded  of  him  ;  what  he 
may  have  answered  ;  what  he  may  have  undergone;  all  these  things 
have  left  no  idea  in  his  understanding,  nor  the  least  vestige  in  his 
memory. 

"  Therefore,  the  undersigned  petitioner,  seeing  valid  reasons  for 
doubting  whether  such  effects,  the  occasional  cause  of  which  is  shown 
to  be  so  little  proportioned  to  them,  be  simply  natural,  earnestly  and 
most  fervently  prays  that  your  Eminence  in  your  wisdom,  for  the 
greater  glory  of  the  Omnipotent,  as  well  as  the  greater  good  of  souls, 
which  have  been  redeemed  by  the  Lord  at  so  great  a  price,  may  be 
pleased  to  decide,  whether,  admitting  the  truth  of  the  premises,  a  con- 
fessor or  curate  may  safely  permit  to  his  penitents  or  parishioners  : 

"  I.  That  they  practise  animal  magnetism,  endowed  with  such,  or 
other  like  characteristics,  as  an  art  auxiliary  and  supplementary  to 
medicine. 

"  2.  That  they  consent  to  be  thrown  into  such  a  state  of  magnetic 
somnambulism. 

"3.  That  they  consult  persons  magnetized  in  such  a  manner  either 
concerning  themselves  or  concerning  others. 

"  4.  Or  that  they  undertake  one  of  these  last-mentioned  three 
things,  having  first  taken  the  precaution  of  formally  renouncing  in 


326  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.     XVI. 

their  minds  every  diabolic  compact,  explicit  or  implicit,  as  well  as  all 
satanic  interventions,  since,  notwithstanding  such  precautions,  simi- 
lar effects  or  some  such  effects  have  been  obtained  by  some  persons. 
"  Most  Eminent  Lord,  by  command  of  the  Most  Rev.  the  Arch- 
bishop of  Lausanne  and  Geneva,  your  Eminence's  most  humble  and 
most  obedient  servant,  James    Xavier  Fontana, 

"  Chancellor  of  the  Episcopal  Chancery. 
"  Friburgh,  in  Switzerland,  Episcopal  Palace, 
the  19th  of  May,  1841." 

Response. 
"The  Sacred   Penitentiary,  the   premises    having  been  maturely 
weighed,  considers  that  these  should  be  answered  as  it  now  answers  : 
The  use  of  Magnetism  as  set  forth  in  the  case  is  not  permissible. 

"Given  at  Rome,  in  the  Sacred  Penitentiary,  the  1st  day  of  July, 
1841. 

"C.  Card.  Castracane,  M.  P. 

"  Ph.  Pomella,  of  the  S.  P.  Sec  y. 

"  Certified  as  a  copy  conformable  to  the  original.  —  Friburgh,  the 
26th  July,  1 841. 

"  By  order> — J.  Perroulaz,  Sec'y  of  the  Bishopric." 

"  It  will  be  observed  (says  Dr.  EsJaile)  that  though  the  subject  is 
held  in  dread  by  the  reporter,  as  probably  of  diabolical  origin,  yet  it  is 
treated  as  a  '  great  fact,'  known  to  and  believed  in  by  a  large  com- 
munity, so  that  Catholics  and  Protestants  are  found  alike  professing  a 
belief  in  Mesmerism.  If  the  twentieth  part  of  what  was  reported 
was  true,  it  well  deserved  careful  investigation  ;  and,  as  I  had  no  dread 
of  knowing  anything  that  God  has  permitted  to  be  known,  I  deter- 
mined to  try  to  find  out  the  truth  for  myself,  on  the  first  favorable 
opportunity.  In  choosing  a  proper  subject  to  experiment  upon,  I 
should  probably  have  selected  some  highly  sensitivefemale  of  a  ner- 
vous temperament  and  excitable  imagination  who  desired  to  submit 
to  the  supposed  influence.  But,  I  beg  it  to  be  particularly  remarked, 
my  first  essay  was  not  guided  by  theory  and  was  not  made  on  a  sub- 
ject supposed  to  be  favorable.  On  the  contrary,  the  very  worst 
specimen  of  humanity,  theoretically  considered,  was  the  person  des- 
tined to  be  my  first  mesmeric  victim  :  he  being  none  other  than  a 
Hindoo  felon  of  the  hangman  cast,  condemned  to  labor  on  the  roads 
in  irons.  Accident  alone  determined  my  choice  and  decided  the 
matter  for  me,  perhaps  much  better  than  theory  would  have  done; 
for  I  should  as  soon  have  thought  of  commencing  operations  on  the 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  327 

first  dog  or  pig  I  met  on  the  road,  as  of  selecting  this  man  for  his 
good  mesmeric  'materiel.' 

"First  Experiment.  —  Madhab  Kaura,  a  hog-dealer,  condemned  to 
seven  years'  imprisonment,  with  labor  on  roads,  in  irons,  for  wound- 
ing a  man  so  as  to  endanger  his  life,  has  got  a  double  Hydrocele. 
He  was  ordered  to  be  taken  from  the  jail  to  the  Charity  Hospital,  to 
be  operated  upon. 

"  April  4th.  —  The  water  was  drawn  off  one  side  of  the  scrotum,  and 
two  drachms  of  the  usual  cor.  sub.  injection  were  thrown  in.  On 
feeling  the  pain  from  the  injection,  he  threw  his  head  over  the 
back  of  the  chair,  and  pressed  his  hands  along  the  course  of  the 
spermatic  cords,  closing  his  eyelids  firmly,  and  making  the  grimaces 
of  a  man  in  pain.  Seeing  him  suffering  in  this  way,  I  turned  to  the 
native  sub-assistant  surgeon,  an  eleve  of  the  Medical  College,  and 
asked  him  if  he  had  ever  seen  Mesmerism.  He  said  that  he  had  seen 
it  tried  at  the  Medical  College,  but  without  effect.  Upon  which  I 
remarked,  '  I  have  a  great  mind  to  try  it  on  this  man  ;  but  as  I  never 
saw  it  practised,  and  know  it  only  from  reading,  I  shall  probably  not 
succeed.'  —  The  man  continuing  in  the  position  described,  I  placed 
his  knees  between  mine,  and  began  to  pass  my  hands  slowly  over  his 
face,  at  the  distance  of  an  inch,  and  carried  them  down  to  the  pit  of 
his  stomach.  This  was  continued  for  half  an  hour  before  he  was 
spoken  to,  and  when  questioned  at  the  end  of  this  time  his  answers 
were  quite  sensible  and  coherent. 

"  He  was  ordered  to  remain  quiet,  and  the  passes  were  continued  for 
a  quarter  of  an  hour  longer, —  still  no  sensible  effect.  Being  now 
tired  (thermometer  850),  I  gave  it  up  in  despair  and  declared  it  to  be 
a  failure.  While  I  rested  myself,  the  man  remained  quiet  and  made 
fewer  grimaces,  and  when  ordered  to  open  his  eyes,  he  said  there  was 
a  smoke  in  the  room.  This  roused  my  attention  and  tempted  me  to 
persevere.  I  now  breathed  on  his  head,  and  carried  my  hands  from 
the  back  of  his  head  over  his  face  and  down  to  the  epigastrium,  where 
I  pressed  them  united.  The  first  time  this  was  clone,  he  took  his 
hands  off  his  groins  and  pressed  them  both  firmly  down  upon  mine, 
drew  a  long  breath,  and  said,  '  I  was  his  father  and  mother  and  had 
given  him  life  again.'  The  same  process  was  persevered  in,  and  in 
about  an  hour  he  began  to  gape,  said  he  must  sleep,  that  his  senses 
were  gone  ;  and  his  replies  became  incoherent.  He  opened  his  eyes 
when  ordered,  but  said  he  only  saw  smoke,  and  could  distinguish  no 
one  :  his  eyes  were  quite  lustreless  and  the  lids  were  opened  heavily. 
All  appearance  of  pain  now  disappeared  ;  his  hands  were  crossed  on  his 
breast,  instead  of  being  pressed  on  the  groins,  and  his  countenance 
showed  the  most  perfect  repose.     He  now  took  no  notice  of  our  ques- 


$2S  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

tions,  and   I  called  loudly  on  him  by  name  without  attracting  any 
notice. 

"  I  now  pinched  him  without  disturbing  him,  and  then  asking  for  a 
pin  in  English,  I  desired  my  assistant  to  watch  him  narrowly,  and 
drove  it  into  the  small  of  his  back  ;  it  produced  no  effect  whatever ; 
and  my  assistant  repeated  it  at  intervals  in  different  places  as  use- 
lessly. His  back  had  continued  to  arch  more  backwards  latterly, 
and  he  now  was  in  a  state  of  '  opisthotonos  : '  the  nape  of  his  neck 
resting  on  the  sharp  back  of  the  chair  and  his  breech  on  the  edge 
of  it.  Being  now  satisfied  that  we  had  got  something  extraordinary, 
I  went  over  to  the  Kutcherry,  and  begged  Mr.  Russell,  the  judge, 
and  Mr.  Money,  the  collector,  to  come  and  see  what  had  been  done, 
as  I  wanted  the  presence  of  intelligent  witnesses  in  what  remained 
to  do.  We  found  him  in  the  position  I  had  left  him  in,  and  no 
hallooing  in  his  ears  could  attract  his  attention.  Fire  was  then 
applied  to  his  knee  without  his  shrinking  in  the  least  ;  and  liquor 
ammoniae,  that  brought  tears  into  our  eyes  in  a  moment,  was  inhaled 
for  some  minutes  without  causing  an  eyelid  to  quiver.  This  seemed 
to  have  revived  him  a  little,  as  he  moved  his  head  shortly  afterwards, 
and  I  asked  him  if  he  wanted  a  drink ;  he  only  gaped  in  reply,  and 
I  took  the  opportunity  to  give,  slowly,  a  mixture  of  ammonia  so 
strong  that  I  could  not  bear  to  taste  it  ;  this  he  drank  like  milk,  and 
gaped  for  more.  As  the  '  experimentum  cruris,'  I  lifted  his  head, 
and  placed  his  face,  which  was  directed  to  the  ceiling  all  this  time,  in 
front  of  a  full  light ;  opened  his  eyes,  one  after  the  other,  but  with- 
out producing  any  effect  upon  the  iris  ;  his  eyes  were  exactly  an 
amaurotic  person's,  and  all  noticed  their  lack-lustre  appearance.  We 
were  all  now  convinced  that  total  insensibility  of  all  the  senses 
existed,  and  I  ordered  him  to  be  placed  on  a  mattress  on  the  floor, 
and  not  to  be  disturbed  till  I  returned.  It  was  now  1  o'clock,  the 
process  having  commenced  at  11  a.m." 

In  the  afternoon,  Dr.  E.  being  absent,  the  man  was  carried  back  to 
jail.  He  was  visited  and  found  to  be  in  good  condition.  His 
diarrhoea  was  suspended,  tee  inflammation  greatly  reduced.  He 
recollected  nothing  after  being  put  to  sleep,  neither  the  pricking, 
the  burning,  nor  the  ammonia. 

"  Second  Experiment.  —  April  6th.  —  1 1  o'clock  a.m.  The  inflam- 
mation has  become  high  during  last  night ;  the  part  is  hot,  and 
excessively  tender  ;  the  lightest  touch  causes  great  pain.  Skin  hot  ; 
pulse  quick.  I  could  not  resist  the  temptation  of  satisfying  myself 
still  further  and  relieve  him  at  the  same  time.  So,  turning  to  the 
native  doctors,  I  said  that  I  would  again  try  the  'Belatee  Muntur ' 
(the  Europe  charm),  and  began  the  process  as  before  :  he  lying  in 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  329 

bed.  In  ten  minutes  the  mesmeric  haze  ( 'smoke'  he  always  calls  it) 
was  produced.  After  half  an  hour  he  still  complained  of  the  pain  in 
the  inflamed  part,  and  could  not  bear  its  being  touched  ;  in  three- 
quarters  of  an  hour  the  coma  was  established,  and  I  squeezed  the 
inflamed  part  with  no  more  effect  than  if  it  had  been  a  bladder. 
Having  business  to  attend  to  in  Chandernagore,  six  miles  off,  I 
called,  in  passing,  on  the  Rev.  Mr.  Fisher,  and  said  that  he  might 
now  satisfy  himself  by  going  to  the  hospital  in  my  absence  ;  and 
that,  except  mesmeric  means,  he  was  at  liberty  to  use  every  possible 
means  to  awake  him  or  make  him  feel." 

Mr.  Fisher  and  Mr.  D.  J.  Money  state  that  the  patient  was 
certainly  entirely  insensible,  and  they  believe  he  could  not  have  felt 
it  if  his  leg  had  been  cut  off.  At  3  p.m.  Dr.  E.  returned,  finding  the 
patient  as  he  left  him,  woke  him  up  by  reverse  passes,  blowing  in  his 
face  and  giving  him  water.  He  was  free  from  pain  and  desired  to 
sleep.  On  the  7th  he  complained  for  the  first  time  of  pain  in  the 
places  where  he  had  been  burned  and  pricked.  The  statements  of 
Dr.  E  are  attested  by  the  physicians  and  visitors. 

"  Third  Experiment. —  April  nth. — Took  the  sub-assistant  sur- 
geon with  me  to-day  to  the  jail  hospital,  and  desired  him  to  watch 
the  time  taken  to  produce  the  different  effects.  There  is  still  con- 
siderable pain  in  the  side  operated  upon.  Pulse  regular,  60  ;  skin 
warm.  At  n  o'clock  a.m.  I  seated  him  on  the  floor  with  his  back 
against  the  wall  ;  placed  myself  before  him  on  a  stool,  and  proceeded 
pretty  much  as  before.  The  process,  in  one  particular,  was  varied  ; 
I  leaned  my  elbows  upon  my  knees,  placed  my  mouth  over  the  back 
of  my  joined  hands,  and  breathed  along  their  upper  surface  :  the 
points  of  my  fingers  being  pointed  steadily  at  his  eyes,  nose  and 
forehead,  in  succession.  This  seemed  to  be  very  effectual,  and  was 
done  with  the  idea  of  concentrating  the  mesmeric  influence  of  the 
whole  body  into  one  conductor.  It  was  curious  to  observe  that  he 
had  begun  to  think  on  the  subject,  and  was  observing  the  effects  for 
himself,  and  testing  his  senses  as  we  proceeded.  After  manipulating 
for  a  few  minutes,  he  opened  his  eyes,  looked  sharply  and  minutely 
about  him,  and  being  asked  if  he  saw  quite  well,  he  said,  'Oh,  yes.' 
In  a  minute  or  two  he  repeated  his  inspection,  and  answered  again 
that  he  saw  quite  distinctly ;  in  seven  minutes  he  again  looked  about 
him,  seemed  surprised,  and  said  he  only  saw  '  smoke.' 

"  In  fifteen  minutes  he  was  pinched  ;  and  when  asked  if  any  one 
was  pinching  him,  he  replied  that  he  could  not  tell,  as  I  might  now 
cut  a  piece  out  of  his  body  without  his  feeling  it.  I  proceeded  to 
induce  the  mesmeric  coma  as  quickly  as  possible  ;  and  succeeded  in 
twenty  minutes  from   the  commencement.     I  then  said  to  the  sub- 


330  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

assistant  surgeon  that  I  would  operate  upon  him  in  this  state  if  I 
could  find  some  of  the  European  gentlemen  to  be  witnesses.  On 
going  to  Chinsurah,  two  miles  off,  I  fortunately  found  a  considerable 
party,  consisting  of  the  Baron  Law  de  Clapernou,  Governor  of 
Chandernagore ;  Mr.  Russell,  the  judge;  Mr.  Wauchope,  the  magis- 
trate; J.  St.  Pourcain,  Esq.;  Mr.  Clint,  Principal  of  Hooghly  Col- 
lege ;  and  Mr.  Clermont,  head-master  of  the  Lower  School :  who  all 
accompanied  me  back  to  the  hospital.  The  man  had  fallen  down 
and  was  lying  on  his  back.  The  large  gong  of  the  jail  was  brought 
and  struck  violently  within  a  few  inches  of  his  ear  with  no  effect.  I 
then  pierced  the  scrotum,  and  threw  in  the  injection,  without  any 
one  being  sensible  of  the  smallest  movement  in  his  face  or  body. 
His  limbs  were  quite  flexible  ;  but  on  holding  one  of  his  legs  in  my 
hand  for  a  few  seconds,  it  gradually  became  quite  rigid,  and  we  could 
not  bend  it  again ;  the  same  occurred  in  the  other  leg.  The  arms 
were  supple  and  lay  in  any  position  into  which  they  were  thrown ; 
and  when  the  fore-arm  was  bent  upon  the  humerus,  and  then  let  go, 
it  fell  upwards  or  downwards  instantly.  But  on  placing  my  united 
fingers  over  the  ends  of  his,  the  arm  remained  fixed  at  a  right  angle 
in  the  air,  and  swayed  to  and  fro,  according  to  my  movements.  The 
insensibility  of  the  iris  was  also  tested  and  proved. 

"6  o'clock  p.m.  — Still  sleeps  ;  most  complete  relaxation  of  all  the 
limbs  now  exists.  The  legs  and  arms  can  be  tossed  about  in  every 
direction,  and  where  they  fall  there  they  lie.  Being  curious  to 
ascertain  the  effect  of  the  artificial  state  on  the  natural  process  of 
inflammation,  I  did  not  awake  him,  but  saw  that  the  part  was  as 
flaccid  as  when  the  water  was  just  withdrawn. 

"April  1 2th.  — He  awoke  at  12  o'clock  last  night,  spontaneously. 
Recollects  nothing  after  going  to  sleep ;  sees  the  water  is  gone, 
knows  not  how ;  supposes  the  Dr.  Sahib  did  it.  The  testicle  is  con- 
siderably enlarged  to-day ;  there  is  little  pain,  and  it  did  not  swell 
till  after  he  awoke.  He  has  had  chronic  diarrhoea  for  some  time ; 
four  and  five  motions  a  day,  but  has  had  none  since  yesterday  fore- 
noon till  this  morning.  Natural,  artificial  and  diseased  actions  have 
therefore  been  all  equally  arrested  for  the  last  thirteen  hours,  —  a 
practical  fact  of  the  utmost  importance,  which  will  not  be  lost  sight 
of  by  myself  or  others,  I  hope.  What  a  blessed  prospect  this  opens 
to  sufferers  who  may  be  sensible  to  the  Mesmeric  influence !  " 

I  have  given  these  statements  fully,  as  they  show  how  easily  a 
neophyte  may  undertake  experiments  for  trance  and  anaesthesia  when 
a  good  subject  is  found.  Dr.  E.'s  method  was  in  accordance  with 
the   laws    of    Sarcognomy.     The  somnolent   trance   has  its    central 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  33 1 

locations  in  the  temples  just  behind  the  eyes  and  at  the  epigastrium. 
The  former  is  developed  by  passes  from  the  occiput  toward  the  eyes 
and  nose  —  the  latter  by  passes  to  the  epigastrium,  and  holding  the 
hands  upon  it. 

.  By  repeated  exercise  these  faculties  become  more  active,  like  all 
others.  As,  in  the  cultivation  of  psychometry,  persons  who  were  not 
aware  of  possessing  the  faculty  learn  in  time  to  exercise  it  in  a 
quick  and  penetrating  manner,  so  in  the  cultivation  of  impressibility 
and  somniloquence  the  power  is  increased.  The  subject  of  his  first 
experiment — Madhab  Kaura — became  so  sensitive  in  one  month  that 
Dr.  E.  says  he  "  can  be  catalepsed  in  less  than  a  minute,  and  the 
effects  are  passing  strange.  If,  when  he  is  standing,  I  point  my 
fingers  at  him  for  a  few  seconds,  his  eyelids  immediately  droop,  his 
arms  fall  by  their  mere  weight  to  his  sides,  his  whole  body  begins 
to  tremble,  owing  to  the  incipient  loss  of  command  over  the  muscular 
system  ;  and  if  not  supported  he  would  fall  down  in  a  heap.  But 
give  him  a  moment's  support,  and  he  becomes  as  rigid  as  a  statue, 
and  if  the  centre  of  gravity  is  well  poised,  he  will  remain  in  any 
posture  he  is  put  into,  and  that  for  a  longer  time  than  I  have  waited 
to  see.  The  muscles  must  be  dragged  out  of  the  fixed  position  they 
have  assumed,  and  allowed  a  moment  to  contract  in  a  new  attitude, 
out  of  the  perpendicular ;  for  if  suddenly  pushed,  he  goes  down  head 
foremost  like  a  statue  from  its  pedestal,  and  his  life  is  endangered. 
However  inconvenient  or  grotesque  the  position  may  be,  he  is  equally 
well  satisfied,  and  continues  to  sleep  quite  comfortably,  with  his 
heels  behind  his  neck  ;  and  if  his  forehead  is  placed  against  the  wall 
at  an  acute  angle,  he  remains  sticking  out  from  it,  like  a  buttress, 
longer  than  I  have  ascertained." 

This  is  an  illustration  like  thousands  of  similar  cases  in  the 
practice  of  animal  magnetism  of  the  condition  of  an  individual  in 
whom  the  organs  of  the  temples  (the  anterior  portion  of  the  middle 
lobe)  are  brought  into  predominance,  destroying  the  power  of  the 
will  and  making  the  body  a  plastic  subject  for  any  influence  that  may 
operate  on  the  nervous  system  and  assume  its  control. 

The  great  benefit  of  this  condition  lies  in  the  fact  that  the  whole 
constitution  is  thus  brought  under  the  control  of  the  operator  and 
in  sympathy  with  his  will  and  his  whole  condition.  Hence  miracu- 
lous cures  are  very  common  in  patients  who  are  placed  in  this  state, 
and  without  any  scientific  attempt  to  cure,  the  absolute  sympathy 
with  a  healthy  and  benevolent  operator  is  itself  curative,  and  the 
patient  finds  all  his  troubles  relieved  by  the  entranced  condition. 

The  reader,  understanding  that  this  condition  belongs  to  the 
temples   (above  the  cheekbone)  and   to  the   epigastric  region,   will 


332  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

perceive  the  necessity  of  concentrating  the  excitement  from  the 
opposite  regions  on  these  locations,  when  he  wishes  to  make  a 
passive  subject,  that  is,  from  the  upper  occiput  and  the  shoulders. 
There  are  persons  in  whom  this  anterior  predominance  is  natural, 
and  who  are  therefore  ready-made  subjects.  Others  more  normally 
balanced  may  be  subdued  by  the  influence  of  a  strong  psychic 
energy,  if  they  place  themselves  in  a  passive  state,  listening  to 
soothing  sounds  or  looking  intently  at  some  object  near  the  eyes, 
which  compels  them  to  turn  inward  in  the  pathognomic  line  of  Som- 
nolence.* 

With  a  natural  sensitive  but  little  effort  is  necessary,  a  steady 
gaze,  a  few  passes,  or  merely  placing  the  hand  at  the  epigastrium  or 
on  the  temples  or  front  of  the  head  is  sufficient  to  subdue  them. 
Dr.  Esdaile's  procedure  is  described  by  him  as  follows  : 

"  The  routine  followed  is  this.  A  person  presents  himself  before 
me  for  the  first  time,  and  I  see  he  has  a  disease  requiring  an  opera- 
tion for  its  removal ;  he  is  desired  to  go  into  another  room  (which  is 
dark)  and  repose  himself  after  his  journey,  not  a  word  being  said 
about  an  operation,  as  this  would  cause  a  mental  excitement,  destruc- 
tive to  the  mesmeric  influence.  One  of  my  assistants  follows  him, 
seats  himself  (if  unperceived,  so  much  the  better)  at  the  head  of  the 
bed,  and,  by  using  the  process  to  be  hereafter  described,  often 
reduces  the  patient  to  a  state  of  coma  by  the  end  of  my  visit ;  I  then 
do  what  is  necessary,  whether  it  be  to  take  off  or  to  straighten  a 
limb,  without  his  knowledge  or  consent." 

He  gives  many  illustrations  of  their  insensibility.  A  woman 
named  Gendo  was  mesmerized,  and  muriatic  acid  was  freely  applied 
by  Dr.  Finch  "  to  a  sore  covering  all  the  right  temple,  without  her 
showing  the  smallest  degree  of  consciousness  ;  and  it  was  with  great 
difficulty  that  I  woke  her  after  he  had  failed  to  do  so."  While  being 
cauterized  her  pulse  sunk  from  88  to  80.  A  few  days  afterwards,  a 
sceptical  Dr.  Bedford  touched  the  woman's  sore  on  the  temples, 
when  she  was  awake,  with  the  glass  stopper  of  the  muriatic  acid, 
and  as  she  did  not  immediately  cry  out  he  thought  he  had  proved 
that  her  insensibility  was  natural  and  not  mesmeric,  but  soon  she 
said  that  her  head  was  on  fire  and  walked  about  distractedly,  in  great 
agony,  until  Dr.  E.  bathed  her  head,  threw  her  into  the  trance  and 
cut  off  the  tubercles  round  the  sore  without  her  knowledge.  Waked 
up  after  half  an  hour,  she  had  even  forgotten  the  burning. 

The  labors  of  Dr.  E.  being  directed  entirely  to  overpowering  his 

*  I  have  not  been  disposed  to  practise  such  experiments,  because  they  place 
the  subject  in  a  passive,  controllable  condition,  and  my  scientific  aim  has  been  to 
practise  investigations  in  which  the  phenomena  would  be  unaffected  by  my  own 
opinions. 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  2>35 

subjects,  making  them  passive  and  unconscious  or  sometimes  imita- 
tive, he  never  developed  the  psychometric,  clairvoyant  and  prevoyant 
powers,  but  displayed  the  highest  degree  of  controlling  power.  He 
considered  his  patients  of  too  low  a  grade  for  intellectual  phenomena. 
The  process  he  used  is  worth  quoting,  as  he  found  it  successful  and 
it  accords  with  scientific  principles  : 

"  Desire  the  patient  to  lie  down  and  compose  himself  to  sleep, 
taking  care,  if  you  wish  to  operate,  that  he  does  not  know  your  inten- 
tion ;  this  object  may  be  gained  by  saying  that  it  is  only  a  trial,  for 
fear  and  expectation  are  destructive  to  the  physical  impression 
required.  [They  act  on  the  base  of  the  brain.]  Bring  the  crown  of 
the  patient's  head  to  the  end  of  the  bed,  and  seat  yourself  so  as  to 
be  able  to  bring  your  face  into  contact  with  his,  and  extend  your 
hands  to  the  pit  Of  the  stomach,  when  it  is  wished ;  make  the  room 
dark,  enjoin  quiet,  and  then  shutting  your  patient's  eyes,  begin  to 
pass  both  your  hands  in  the  shape  of  claws,  slowly  within  an  inch  of 
the  surface,  from  the  back  of  the  head  to  the  pit  of  the  stomach 
[this  is  very  appropriate]  ;  dwelling  for  several  minutes  over  the  eyes, 
nose  and  mouth,  and  then  passing  down  each  side  of  the  neck,  go 
downwards  to  the  pit  of  the  stomach,  keeping  your  hands  suspended 
there  for  some  time.  [This  is  proper :  the  region  of  the  eyes, 
nose  and  upper  part  of  the  face  is  highly  conducive  to  an  amiable 
and  intelligent  somnolence ;  but  the  impression  should  not  extend 
below  the  upper  lip,  as  the  lower  part  of  the  face  has  an  exciting 
influence.  A  strong  impression  at  the  epigastrium  is  proper  to 
deepen  the  impression  and  procure  a  profound  sleep.  A  more  in- 
tellectual somnolence  would  have  been  procured  if  he  had  concen- 
trated the  impression  .a  little  higher,  at  the  end  of  the  sternum.] 
Repeat  this  process  steadily  for  a  quarter  of  an  hour,  breathing 
gently  on  the  head  and  eyes  all  the  time.  [This  is  not  really 
necessary,  but  aids  the  effect  by  imposing  the  nervaura  of  the 
operator  on  the  subject.  For  the  same  reason,  it  is  often  sufficient 
merely  to  place  the  hand  on  the  forehead.  The  nervaura  of  a  strong 
brain  overpowers  a  weak  and  passive  one  in  contact  or  even  without 
it.  A  strong  operator  controls  the  passive  by  mere  presence  and 
force  of  character.  That  incongruous  medley  of  vague  assertion 
called  '  Christian  Science  '  was  imposed  upon  a  class  of  credulous 
persons  by  the  great  magnetic  energy  and  dominating  force  of  its 
first  propagandist.  The  aura  of  a  strong  brain  penetrating  a  passive 
one  brings  the  latter  not  only  into  sympathy  but  under  the  control 
of  the  will,  which  extends  its  dominion  beyond  the  nervous  system 
to  which  it  belongs  into  any  nervous  system  which  yields  to  it.] 
The  longitudinal  passes  may  then  be  advantageously  terminated,  by 


334  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

placing  both  hands  gently  but  firmly  on  the  pit  of  the  stomach  and 
sides.  The  perspiration  and  saliva  seem  also  to  aid  the  effect  on  the 
system.  [Whatever  he  may  mean  by  '  sides,'  it  is  not  appropriate  to 
place  the  hands  on  any  part  that  could  be  called  sides,  unless  it  be 
the  sides  of  the  chest,  in  its  upper  part.  On  the  sides  of  the 
abdomen  distinctly  below  the  ribs,  the  influence  would  be  subduing 
and  relaxing,  and  this  influence  appears  in  his  reports.] 

"  It  is  better  not  to  test  the  patient's  condition  by  speaking  to 
him,  but  by  gently  trying  if  the  cataleptic  tendency  exists  in  the 
arms.  [This  is  giving  up  the  intellectual  for  the  passive  phenomena. 
Somniloquence  (sleep-talking)  should  be  encouraged  if  we  want 
intellectual  phenomena,  and  the  impression  should  be  made  at  the 
lower  end  of  the  sternum,  instead  of  the  abdomen.]  If  the  arms 
remain  fixed  in  any  position  they  are  left  in,  and  require  some  force 
to  move  them  out  of  every  new  position,  the  process  has  been  suc- 
cessful;  the  patient  may  soon  after  be  called  upon  by  name,  and 
pricked,  and  if  he  does  not  awake,  the  operation  may  be  proceeded 
with.  It  is  impossible  to  say  to  what  precise  extent  the  insensibility 
will  befriend  us.  The  trance  is  sometimes  completely  broken  by  the 
knife,  but  it  can  occasionally  be  reproduced  by  continuing  the 
process,  and  then  the  sleeper  remembers  nothing ;  he  has  only  been 
disturbed  by  a  nightmare,  of  which  on  waking  he  retains  no  recollec- 
tion." 

Catalepsy  is  an  abnormal  state  in  which  I  perceive  no  benefit  and 
have  avoided  its  production ;  but  it  is  a  prominent  matter  among 
some  of  the  medical  dabblers  in  magnetism  who  are  not  seeking 
curative  or  beneficial  effects. 

Dr.  Esdaile  had  to  seek  efficient  means  for  removing  the  profound 
cataleptic  trances  that  he  produced,  and  not  understanding  the  prin- 
ciples of  Sarcognomy,  which  would  suggest  passes  from  the  abdomen 
to  the  shoulders  and  the  crown  of  the  head,  he  resorted  to  currents 
of  air  and  water  which  have  a  cooling  and  dispersive  effect.  "  Blow- 
ing in  the  eyes  "  and  "  pouring  water  from  a  height "  were  used  to 
release  the  brain.  One  of  his  patients  being  helplessly  cataleptic 
and  rigid,  "  I  then  blew  on  his  neck,  thereby  immediately  releasing 
it."  "  One  arm  was  freed  in  the  same  way  ;  then  the  other."  "I 
also  showed  that  my  breath  had  no  specific  effect,  by  doing  the  same 
thing  with  a  fan ;  a  current  of  air  being  all  that  was  required  to 
dissolve  the  rigidity  of  the  muscles."  Dispersive  passes  are  the 
controlling  agents  ;  and  a  breeze  would  not  have  had  the  same  effect 
independent  of  the  operator. 

Cold  is  also  potent  to  resist  the  magnetic  influence,  being  a  tonic 
and    an    antagonist    to    impressibility    and    sensibility.      This    he 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  335 

observed,  and  states  as  follows  :  "  On  several  occasions  I  have 
entranced  persons  standing,  stripped  them  naked,  and  catalepsed  them 
in  the  most  painful  postures  imaginable,  and  in  these  they  would 
remain  an  incredible  length  of  time  ;  but  let  a  little  cold  water  be 
squirted  from  a  distance  on  any  member,  and  it  became  instantly 
relaxed.  If  both  arms  were  fixed  perpendicularly  in  the  air,  one 
after  the  other  was  shot  down  instantly  by  a  slight  stream  of  water  ; 
and  if  it  was  directed  to  the  calf  of  the  leg,  the  person  fell  as  if  he 
had  been  hamstrung ;  or  if  the  body  was  catalepsed  out  of  the  per- 
pendicular, squirting  water  on  the  loins  would  send  the  patient  head 
foremost  against  the  ground.  Blowing  on  or  rubbing  any  part  had 
the  same  effect  ;  but  the  general  torpor  is  often  too  deep  to  exhibit 
those  sensibilities,  and  such  persons  are  awaked  with  great  difficulty 
by  the  use  of  all  the  demesmerizing  agents." 

If  we  would  avoid  this  extreme  mesmeric  prostration,  we  should 
not  suppress  entirely  the  functions  of  the  shoulders  and  upper 
occiput,  but,  by  applying  the  hands  there  occasionally,  sustain  the 
vital  stamina. 

Our  knowledge  of  the  effects  of  cold  teaches  us  that  for  all 
nervauric  and  psychic  experiments  there  should  be  a  warm  atmos- 
phere in  the  apartment,  and  I  would  add,  there  must  be  moral  warmth 
as  well  as  physical. 

The  most  remarkable  claim  for  animal  magnetism,  the  power  of 
impregnating  water  with  a  vital  influence,  was  verified  by  Dr.  Esdaile 
with  a  female  patient  named  Abunga,  as  follows:  "In  the  presence 
of  my  hospital  attendants,  I  to-day  took  an  ounce  of  water  from  the 
common  reservoir  and  mesmerized  it,  putting  the  like  quantity  of 
plain  water  into  another  glass.  We  then  went  into  the  woman's 
ward,  and  I  gave  the  plain  water,  at  first  very  slowly,  asking  her  if  it 
had  any  taste  ?  '  It  was  only  plain  water/  she  said  ;  I  then  gave  her 
the  other  ;  after  waiting  some  time,  she  said  it  was  different  from 
the  first,  that  it  was  sharp  to  the  tongue  and  created  a  warmth  in 
the  stomach.  Almost  immediately  her  countenance  began  to 
change  ;  she  insisted  upon  getting  up  to  walk,  and  I  immediately 
saw  that  she  was  a  somnambulist ;  after  taking  a  few  staggering 
steps,  she  would  have  fallen,  but  was  prevented  and  taken  back  to 
bed,  where  she  instantly  sank  into  the  mesmeric  coma,  and  remained 
so  for  hours."  Next  day  he  repeated  the  experiment  with  similar 
results,  to  gratify  a  clergyman,  and  on  the  following  day  varied  it  by 
sending  a  gentleman  who  knew  nothing  of  mesmerism  to  give  the 
woman  a  vial  of  mesmerized  water  and  report  the  effects.  In  both 
cases  she  was  thoroughly  mesmerized  by  the  water  and  had  fantastic 
visions.       He    reports    seven    other    similar    experiments,    those    on 


33^  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

patients  proving  very  beneficial,  and  adds  that  it  would  be  tedious  to 
report  his  numerous  other  cases.  Such  experiments  are  very  familar 
to  magnetic  practitioners,  and  in  this  country  a  great  number  of 
patients  have  been  successfully  treated  by  magnetized  paper. 

Space  forbids  any  extensive  quotations  from  Dr.  Esdaile's  interest- 
ing work,  which  faithfully  records  his  experience  with  91  surgical 
and  medical  cases. 

To  satisfy  himself  that  there  was  a  personal  magnetic  influence  in 
his  experiments,  independent  of  imagination  or  the  impression  made 
by  seeing  him,  he  obtained  a  blind  man  for  a  subject,  and  operated 
upon  him  by  passes,  and  also  by  a  steady  gaze  at  a  distance  of 
twenty  yards,  producing  in  each  case  the  cataleptic  unconsciousness. 
To  complete  the  demonstration,  he  operated  upon  the  man  at  the 
hospital  while  he  was  sitting,  engaged  in  conversation,  there  being  a 
wall  between  them.  In  seventeen  minutes  the  man  ceased  to  speak, 
"  and  burst  into  a  fit  of  convulsive  crying ;  I  now  pulled  him  by  the 
hair,  and  he  fell  back  like  a  person  just  dead,  and  slept  for  three 
hours." 

This  power  of  control  was  once  displayed  by  Dr.  E.  in  court,  when 
a  man  was  on  trial  at  Hooghly,  for  kidnapping  a  boy  by  magnetic 
influence.  To  show  the  possibility  of  this,  three  subjects  were 
brought  into  the  court,  and  he  showed  that  he  could  magnetize  and 
lead  them  anywhere  unconsciously,  but  when  brought  back  they 
would  deny  that  anything  had  occurred  when  he  woke  them.  Of 
one  of  them  he  says  :  — 

"  Madhab  was  put  in  the  dark,  and  he  did  not  see  me  in  entering. 
The  judge  and  Moularies  engaged  him  in  conversation,  and  while  he 
was  speaking  with  animation  and  intelligence,  I  catalepsed  him  from 
behind  while  in  the  usual  praying  attitude  of  a  prisoner  at  the  bar, 
and  in  a  moment  he  ceased  to  speak  or  hear.  I  was  told  by  those  in 
front  that  his  lips  moved  as  if  in  the  act  of  speaking  after  he  ceased 
to  be  heard.  He  was  so  deeply  affected  that  all  motive  power  was 
nearly  extinguished,  and  I  had  to  push  him  from  behind  with  my 
finger  to  make  him  walk  ;  he  walked  a  few  yards  with  difficulty,  and 
then  becoming  suddenly  rigid  from  head  to  foot,  a  slight  push  sent 
him  headlong  down  upon  the  floor,  in  a  most  alarming  manner  ;  the 
fit  of  rigidity  was  so  instantaneous  that  I  was  not  aware  of  it.  He 
was  revived  with  some  difficulty  and  fortunately  was  not  injured  by 
his  fall." 

This  exposition  of  animal  magnetism  in  India  will  be  instructive 
to  those  who  wish  to  experiment  in  abnormal  phenomena ;  but  a" 
master  of  Sarcognomy  will  readily  perceive  how  much  more  might 
have  been  accomplished  by  science  in  the  treatment  of  diseases. 


CHAP.    XVI.]  REVIEWED    AND    RECTIFIED.  33/ 

There  has  been  but  little  of  the  scientific  spirit  in  the  cultivation 
of  animal  magnetism  ;  and  its  cultivation  by  the  Faculty  under  the 
name  of  hypnotism  has  not  been  in  the  scientific  spirit  of  developing 
truth,  but  rather  in  the  spirit  of  dogmatism,  endeavoring  to  suppress 
all  the  facts  outside  of  a  rigid  materialism,  and  thus  ignoring  its 
wonderful  power  in  healing  diseases  that  defy  medicine,  and  develop- 
ing a  wonderful  intellectual  power. 

The  rationale  of  the  mesmeric  somnolence  and  the  suggestible 
condition  cultivated  as  hypnotism  has  not  been  developed  either  by 
the  scientific  or  the  unscientific  students  of  this  subject. 

Mesmeric  somnolence  is  mainly  produced  by  the  faculty  of  Fasci- 
nation in  the  operator  (which  belongs  to  the  lower  occiput,  in  which 
all  the  dominating  faculties  are  located),  —  a  faculty  manifested  with 
great  power  by  serpents.  This  faculty  is  correlative  with  that  of 
Somnolence,  upon  which  it  operates  to  elicit  its  action  as  dignity 
elicits  reverence.  Those  with  a  large  occiput  have  great  mesmeric 
power  or  capacity  for  control. 

The  medical  faculty,  to  avoid  recognizing  psychic  powers,  have 
confined  themselves  to  operating  through  vision  to  break  down  the 
independent  self-protective  energies  of  the  subject,  without  under- 
standing the  philosophy  of  their  method.  The  faculty  of  vision, 
exercised  by  the  eyes  and  the  perceptive  convolutions  of  the  brow, 
is  correlative  with  the  energetic  faculties  of  the  lower  occiput,  and 
so  closely  associated  with  them  as  to  have  led  Ferrier  to  believe 
that  vision  was  actually  located  in  the  lower  occiput,  in  the  gyrus 
angularis.  Vision  rouses  our  energies  and  vice  versa,  our  energies 
give  power  and  activity  to  vision.  The  law  of  vision  is  incessant 
change.  The  monotony  of  a  fixed  impression  destroys  the  power  of 
every  sensitive  and  perceptive  faculty.  Hence  the  fixation  of  the 
eyes  upon  any  object  deadens  the  perceptive  power  and  tends  to 
suspend  all  intellectual  action  by  paralyzing  its  basis,  while  at  the 
same  time  it  greatly  enfeebles  or  nearly  paralyzes  the  lower  occipital 
region,  of  which  the  gyms  angularis  is  a  centre.  This  occipital 
paralysis  makes  a  passive  character  unable  to  resist  fascination, 
authority  or  command  ;  and  when  there  is  not  much  natural  inde- 
pendence or  force  of  character,  the  subject  is  reduced  to  entire 
passiveness.  The  credencive  impressibility  or  credulity  (accepting 
whatever  is  asserted)  belongs  to  the  ideal  region  extending  from 
Sensibility  to  Imagination,  Marvellousness  and  Spirituality.  The 
antagonism  to  this,  which  protects  from  credulity,  is  in  the  skeptical 
region  just  posterior  to  Combativeness,  and  when  the  lower  occiput 
is  paralyzed  there  is  no  protection  against  an  unlimited  credulity. 
If  the  upper  occiput  is  also  paralyzed  there  is  no  protection  against 
an  unlimited  impressibility. 


33$  ANIMAL    MAGNETISM  [CHAP.    XVI. 

Thus  we  see  the  suggestive  conditions  of  the  fashionable  hypno- 
tism are  due  to  an  impairment  of  the  normal  strength  and  dignity 
of  character,  —  a  demoralizing  process,  which  is  the  very  opposite  of 
true  education  and  moral  improvement.  Hence  I  have  avoided  the 
use  of  such  processes.  I  do  not  deny,  however,  that  the  practitioner 
of  Sarcognomy  may  be  justified  in  using  this  paralyzing  process  as 
an  accessory,  in  cases  of  disease,  to  bring  the  patient  more  com- 
pletely under  his  power.  The  fixed  gaze  at  an  object  near  his  nose 
will  greatly  increase  the  passive  impressibility  of  a  patient. 

P.  S.  The  history  of  Mesmerism  is  one  of  the  saddest  illustra- 
tions of  the  power  of  bigotry,  aided  by  college  authority,  to  interrupt, 
discourage  and  suppress  the  cultivation  of  Sciences  which  are  not  on 
the  animal  plane  of  strict  materialism.  No  amount  of  scientific 
proof,  of  philosophic  exposition,  or  of  practical  success  can  overcome 
this  organized  stolidity,  the  basis  of  which  is  the  strength  of  the 
lower  animal  nature.  The  unfailing  and  benevolent  demonstrations 
of  animal  magnetism  from  the  early  ages  of  Egypt  and  Greece  to 
the  present  time  have  not  induced  the  medical  colleges  to  investi- 
gate its  cures  and  seek  their  philosophy.  German  and  French  litera- 
ture give  ample  illustration  of  its  merits,  and  in  England  we  have 
the  writings  of  Gregory,  Elliotson,  Esdaile,  Colquhoun,  Ashburner, 
Engledon,  Townshend,  Sandby  and  many  others,  with  the  moral 
support  of  such  men  as  Sir  Bulwer  Lytton,  Sir  Wm.  Hamilton, 
Archbishop  Whateley,  Miss  Martineau,  Sir  Thos.  Brisbane  (President 
of  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh)  and  many  others,  but  the  attitude 
of  the  colleges  has  not  been  changed.  It  would  seem  as  thousfh  a 
college  corporation  is  a  remnant  of  the  dark  ages,  impenetrable  to 
modern  civilization. 

Enlightened  citizens,  however,  will  see  that,  crude  and  unscientific 
as  it  is,  the  healing  power  of  magnetic  practitioners  often  transcends 
very  far  the  power  of  collegiate  medicine.  The  change  from  un- 
scientific magnetism  to  Scientific  Sarcognomy  will  make  a  still 
greater  contrast  to  the  limited  resources  of  the  old  colleges.  Every 
practitioner  of  magnetic  treatment  can  furnish  a  list  of  cures  which 
could  not  be  effected  by  the  old  faculty,  and  of  lives  saved  which 
collegiate  practice  had  abandoned  in  despair. 

In  Davey's  little  manual,  the  "  Practical  Mesmerist,"  we  find  his 
authenticated  cures  of  six  cases  of  dumbness  beyond  the  power  of 
the  faculty  (one  deaf  and  dumb),  one  of  deafness  of  twelve  years, 
one  of  painless  amputation  of  the  arm,  seven  of  painless  extraction 
of  teeth,  one  of  sciatica,  two  of  rheumatism,  one  of  neuralgia  of  the 
leg,  and  one  of  paralysis,  —  all  of  which  the  faculty  had  failed  to  re- 
lieve,—  two  of  tic  douleureux,  one  of  epilepsy,  one  of  nervous  debility 
incurable  by  the  faculty,  one  of  hopeless  insanity,  one  of  a  diseased 
knee  pronounced  incurable,  one  of  locked  jaw,  one  of  rheumatism 
of  twenty-five  years  (Sir  T.  M.  Brisbane)  incurable  by  the  faculty, 
one  of  Archbishop  Whateley  (rheumatism)  after  the  doctors  had  failed. 
A  very  large  number  of  cures  are  reported  by  the  Scottish  Mesmeric 
Association,  the  Dublin  Mesmeric  Association  and  the  London 
Mesmeric  Infirmary. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

MECHANO-THERAPY  —  INCLUDING    MASSAGE. 

Mechanotherapy  a  quackery  —  Works  of  Schreiber  and  Murrell  —  French 
names  for  massage  —  Pedantic  trivialities — Superiority  of  methods  of  barbarians, 
Sandwich  Islanders,  Chinese,  Egyptians — Painful  processes  of  mechano-therapy  — 
Superiority  of  those  not  taught  by  the  colleges  —  Old  practice  of  Drs.  Balfour  of 
Edinburgh,  Grosvenor  and  Cleobury  of  Oxford  —  Greatrakes'  cures  in  1662  — 
Collegiate  opposition  —  Liberal  sentiments  of  Hoffmann  —  Professional  prejudice  — 
Mechanical  benefits  of  massage  —  Pretentious  pedantry  of  the  books  —  Ignorance 
of  Ling,  the  author  of  Swedish  movement-cure  —  Practice  recommended  by 
Schreiber — Mechanical  treatment  of  narcotic  poisoning — Transfer  of  vital  force 
—  Treatment  of  sprains  —  Mechanical  treatment  of  the  tonsils,  the  womb,  tumors, 
oedema  and  diseases  of  the  eye  —  Miscellaneous  imperfect  treatment  —  Superiority 
of  the  nervauric  —  Professional  treatment  of  sprains — Concussion  with  the  hands 
— Japanese  shampooing  —  Summary  estimate  of  mechano-therapy. 


The  treatment  of  disease  by  vital  power  applied  with  the  hand 
appears  to  a  mind  afflicted  with  mental  amaurosis  a  mere  mechanical 
proceeding.  Such  is  the  condition  of  mind  in  the  old  medical  colleges. 
That  the  patient  is  affected  without  contact  does  not  enlighten  them, 
for  the  patient  may  be  controlled  by  imagination.  That  blind  men 
are  successfully  treated  without  contact ;  that  patients  are  affected 
through  walls  by  an  unseen  operator,  or  by  an  operator  at  a  great 
distance ;  and  finally  that  the  vital  emanation  (which  they  deny)  will 
produce  the  same  effects  when  lodged  in  water,  so  as  to  mesmerize 
the  subject, —  these  decisive  facts  they  simply  evade,  ignore,  and  refuse 
their  publication,  holding  fast  to  their  ignorance.  The  very  decisive 
fact  that  a  piece  of  writing  will  convey  all  the  psychic,  physiological  and 
pathological  conditions  of  the  writer  to  one  experienced  in  psychom- 
etry  is  also  ignored,  notwithstanding  my  extensive  publication  and  its 
acceptance  among  the  enlightened. 

A  natural  consequence  of  this  mental  amaurosis  is  that  the  gentle- 
men who  see  nothing  but  mechanical  forces  in  manual  treatment  have 
made  a. vigorous  attempt,  with  no  little  industry,  to  show  what  mechan- 
ical treatment  will  do,  and  to  impose  their  mechanical  notions  on  the 
public  as  a  complete  development  of  science. 

Hence  we  have  Meckano-Tkerapy,  of  which  massage  is  nearly  the 
sum  total,  and  though  comparatively  a  meagre  affair,  it  deserves  some 
attention,  as  it  has  been  cultivated  so  vigorously  and  all  its  possibilities 
developed  by  about  two  hundred  medical  authors,  —  not  one  of  whom 
I  believe  has  had  sufficient  sagacity  and  independence  to  study  nature 


340  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  [CHAP.    XVII. 

in  a  candid  manner  and  get  rid  of  the  collegiate  amaurosis,  so  as  to 
recognize  physiological  effects  produced  without  mechanical  contact. 

The  best  and  most  original  work  that  I  have  seen  on  Mechano- 
Therapy,  that  of  Dr.  Schreiber,*  proprietor  of  a  sanitarium  at  Alpen- 
heim,  Austria,  is  worthy  of  a  review  to  show  the  best  results  of  med- 
ical experience  in  mechanical  treatment  in  Europe. 

Massage,  derived  from  the  French  masser,  to  knead,  is  not  suffi- 
ciently comprehensive  to  include  Mechanical  Therapia  in  general, 
but  is  used  as  a  popular  expression  for  the  manual  treatment  to  which 
many  physicians  have  endeavored  to  give  an  undue  importance.  Con- 
sidering-the  false  principle  which  pervades  it,  and  its  false  assumption 
of  being  all  that  science  can  recognize  in  manual  treatment,  I  think  it 
not  unjust  to  call  it  a  system  of  Mechanical  Quackery,  well  contrived 
to  deceive  the  public  and  to  hinder  the  progress  of  science.  Quack- 
ery is  a  proper  term  for  false  principles,  combined  with  pedantic  tech- 
nicalities and  a  disregard  of  demonstrated  science.  The  benefit  of 
massage  or  rubbing  was  at  least  as  well  understood  by  Hippocrates  as 
by  the  two  hundred  verbose  recent  writers  on  the  subject.  He  says  : 
"  Rubbing  can  bind  and  loosen,  can  make  flesh  and  cause  parts  to 
waste.  Hard  rubbing  binds,  soft  rubbing  loosens,  much  rubbing 
causes  parts  to  waste,  moderate  rubbing  makes  them  grow." 

Massage  —  according  to  Prof.  Wm.  Murrell,  F.R.C.P.  of  London, 
who  follows  Prof.  Von  Mosengeil,  and  refers  also  to  Mesger,  Reibmayr, 
Estradere,  Norstrom,  Gopadge,  Zabludowski,  Lee  and  Graham  —  is 
a  very  scientific  process,  which  requires  two  years  to  leant  it  well,  and 
which,  zmless  controlled  by  the  physicians,  will  degenerate  into  "  arrant 
quackery"  He  is  evidently  utterly  and  wilfully  ignorant  of  the  bril- 
liant cures  by  hand-treatment,  which  occur  without  the  aid  of  the 
regular  physician  ;  and  his  assertion  that  two  years'  training  is  neces- 
sary is  in  ludicrous  contrast  to  his  own  statement  of  what  massage  is, 
—  viz.  I.  "  Effleurage, —  a  stroking  movement  with  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  passing  with  various  degrees  of  force  over  the  surface  centrip- 
etally.  It  is  of  little  value  in  itself,  but  produces  good  results  when 
combined  in  various  ways  with  other  procedures." 

2.  "  Next  comes  petrissage,  which  is  more  important."  "It  consists 
essentially  in  picking  up  a  portion  of  muscle  or  other  tissue  with  both 
hands,  or  the  fingers  of  one  hand,  and  subjecting  it  to  firm  pressure, 
rolling  it  at  the  same  time  between  the  fingers  and  the  subjacent 
tissues.  The  hands  must  move  simultaneously  and  in  opposite  direc- 
tions. The  thumb  and  fingers  are  wide  apart,  and  the  whole  muscle 
is  taken  up  between  the  fingers  and  firmly  pressed  and  rolled.     The 

*"  A  Manual  of  Treatment  by  Massage  and  Methodical  Muscular  Exercise,  by 
Joseph  Schreiber,  M.D.  [member  of  many  societies  omitted].  Translated  by  Walter 
Mendelson,  M.D.,  of  New  York.     Philadelphia:  Lea  Brothers  &  Co.,  1S87." 


CHAP.    XVII.]  MECHANOTHERAPY  34 1 

movement  is  made  from  below  upwards,  and  the  parts  are  squeezed 
in  much  the  same  way  that  one  would  squeeze  out  the  contents  of  a 
sausage.  Prof.  Von  Mosengeil  always  impresses  on  his  pupils  the 
necessity  for  '  working  upstairs,'  that  is,  from  the  extremities  towards 
the  centre  of  the  body.  The  skin  must  move  with  the  hands,  or  the 
operation  is  a  painful  one  for  the  patient.  What  one  hand  misses  the 
other  takes  up,  so  that  all  the  tissues  are  subjected  to  the  influence. 
It  is  of  importance  to  proceed  uniformly  and  not  to  jump  from  spot 
to  spot." 

3.  "The  next  process  \s  friction  or  massage  a  frictions  which  is  per- 
formed with  the  tips  of  the  fingers,  and  is  employed  chiefly  in  the 
treatment  of  affections  of  the  joints.  It  has  nothing  to  do  with  what 
we  ordinarily  understand  by  friction.  It  is  always  associated  with 
ejflenrage,  and  it  must  be  performed  quickly  and  with  considerable 
facility  or  it  is  well-nigh  useless. 

"  Tapotement  is  a  kind  of  percussion  which  may  be  made  with  the 
tips  of  the  fingers,  their  palmar  aspects,  the  palms  of  the  hands,  the 
back  of  the  half-closed  hand,  the  ulnar  or  radial  border  of  the  hand, 
or  with  the  hand  flexed,  so  as  to  contain,  when  brought  into  contact 
with  the  surface  of  the  body,  a  cushion  of  air." 

In  all  this  there  is  nothing  that  could  not  be  imparted  to  an  intelli- 
gent person  in  an  hour.  To  demand  two  years'  instruction  for  these 
simple  operations  is  a  piece  of  pompous  assumption,  and  the  whole 
statement  aims  at  nothing  but  mechanical  movement  of  the  fluids,  and 
shows  a  profound  ignorance  of  the  true  principles  and  philosophy  of 
manual  treatment.  In  fact,  most  of  the  treatises  on  massage  that  I 
have  seen  seem  to  be  a  matter  of  technical  pedantry,  showing  an 
utter  ignorance  of  the  best  effects  of  manual  treatment,  the  rapid  re- 
lief of  pain,  the  increase  of  vitality  and  the  transfer  of  curative  energy 
from  the  operator,  —  in  comparison  with  which  the  multiplied  insig- 
nificant petty  details  of  modes  of  manipulation  appear  as  childish  as 
pedantic.  One  of  our  most  sensible  writers  on  massage,  Rossbach, 
expresses  his  contempt  for  "  all  those  ingenious  inventions  of  trivial 
subdivisions,"  and  Schreiber  says :  "  Every  one  who  has  devoted  any 
time  to  mechano-therapy  will  gladly  subscribe  to  Rossbach's  senti- 
ments." 

It  must  have  been  pedantic  trivialities  indeed  which  disgusted 
Schreiber  and  Rossbach  :  for  Schreiber  himself  indulges  habitually 
in  the  most  trivial  details,  as  if  instructing  a  dull  ignoramus.  He 
begins  his  instruction  thus  :  "  Pressure  may  be  performed  in  a  variety 
of  ways  :  one,  two  or  three  fingers  being  used,  according  to  the  size 
of  the  part  to  be  treated  and  the  force  which  it  is  intended  to  use. 
The  participation  of  the  little  finger  is  only  apparent:  for,  being  two 


342  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

centimetres  shorter  than  the  ring  finger,  it  cannot  touch  the  part  to  be 
manipulated  simultaneously  with' the  others  ;  its  feebleness,  too,  would 
render  it  at  least  of  little  use.  The  index  finger,  to  be  sure,  is  also 
shorter  than  the  middle  finger,  but  only  by  one  centimetre,  and  it 
therefore  more  readily  adapts  itself  to  the  middle  and  ring  fingers  ; " 
and  so  on  ad  infinitum, —  all  illustrated  by  numerous  engravings  to  show 
the  pressing,  tapping,  thrusting,  hacking,  pinching,  squeezing,  rubbing, 
stroking,  etc.,  etc.,  and  at  the  end  of  his  work,  the  bibliography  refers 
to  187  works  on  this  subject.  Alas,  we  may  say  that,  with  one  twen- 
tieth of  all  this  industry,  guided  by  original  and  rational  thinking, 
we  might  have  had  splendid  results. 

Very  few  lessons  are  necessary  to  show  an  intelligent  person  how 
to  disperse  pain  and  inflammation  by  nervauric  passes  and  gentle 
manipulation,  or  to  invigorate  the  languid  circulation  and  enfeebled 
vitality  of  organs.  In  all  of  these  processes  the  vitality  imparted  by 
the  hand  of  the  operator  is  vastly  more  important  than  the  mechani- 
cal effects  of  pressure  and  motion.  Under  the  best  conditions  of 
operation  the  most  beneficent  and  brilliant  effects  are  produced  with- 
out any  contact.  Dr.  Schreiber,  a  much  more  intelligent  author, 
maintains  that  a  person  of  good  understanding  can  acquire  massage 
by  himself  if  he  studies  the  physiological  effects,  while  mere  imita- 
tions of  methods  of  procedure  will  never  lead  to  success.  He  thinks 
therefore  that  every  physician  should  be  ready  to  practise  massage, 
especially  as  "  the  mechanical  treatment  of  acute  muscular  rheumatism 
or  of  a  recent  neuralgia  takes  decidedly  less  time  than  any  otJiermetJiod ; 
for,  while  many  days  and  even  weeks  are  often  consumed  trying  all 
sorts  of  medicines,  a  cure  might  have  been  effected  in  these  cases  by 
mechanical  means  at  a  single  sitting."  This  is  very  true  as  to 
the  results  ;  but  it  is  not  mechano-therapy  which  is  so  prompt,  —  it  is 
the  vital  influence  which  is  smuggled  in  under  that  name.  The  hand 
accomplishes  what  a  block  of  leather-covered  wood  cannot,  and  this 
every  intelligent  friend  of  massage  knows.  Dr.  Schreiber  distinctly 
states  it  thus  :  "  Many  devices  have  been  invented  for  saving  the 
manipulator's  strength,  such  as  Klemm's  muscle-beater,  the  elastic 
rods  with  rubber  balls  of  Graham,  and  the  machines  run  by  steam  of 
Zander.  All  these  are  well  enough  in  their  way  for  treating  certain 
phases  of  disease,  but  in  general  they  may  be  said  to  be  wholly  inade- 
quate to  our  needs,  and  are  quite  apt  to  degenerate  into  mere  play- 
things." The  hand,  he  says,  "  surpasses  the  best  of  instruments,  and 
the  skilled  operator  needs  no  other  aid,  no  matter  what  kind  of  manip- 
ulations he  may  wish  to  perform." 

But,  in  their  ignorance  of  vital  laws,  physicians  endeavor  to  believe 
that    the  superiority  of  the  hand  in  massage  is  due  to  mechanical 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  343 

reasons,  and  with  equal  blindness  they  think  the  superiority  of  the 
hand  as  an  electrode  is  due  to  its  mechanical  structure. 

The  processes  recommended  by  Dr.  Murrell  as  massage  are  far 
inferior  in  effect  to  those  of  barbarous  races  —  the  lomi-lomi  of  the 
Sandwich  Islanders — which,  as  Nordhoff  says,  relieves  all  soreness  and 
weariness,  and  produces  a  healthful,  refreshing  sleep.  The  untaught 
skill  and  vital  sympathy  of  these  people  is  vastly  superior  to  the 
technical  stupidities  of  European  massage.  The  toogi-toogi  and  fota 
of  the  natives  of  the  Island  of  Tonga  are  stated  to  produce  the  same 
pleasant  effects  as  the  Sandwich  lomi-lomi.  In  fact,  a  sympathetic 
benevolent  temperament  in  the  operator,  acting  in  accordance  with 
benevolent  common-sense  or  intuition,  is  far  superior  to  the  mechani- 
cal processes  dictated  by  the  dogmatism  which  is  superciliously  blind  to 
the  whole  nature  of  the  processes  of  healing  and  their  vital  philosophy. 

To  relieve  the  suffering  by  kind  manipulations  is  the  instinctive 
impulse  of  benevolence,  and  has  been  practised  by  all  nations. 
Chinese  manuscripts  near  five  thousand  years  ago  contained  direc- 
tions for  manual  treatment,  and  I  do  not  believe  that  the  profuse  litera- 
ture of  massage  of  the  last  twenty-five  years  has  made  any  very  im- 
portant advance  beyond  the  knowledge  of  the  old  barbarians.  What 
I  have  read  on  the  subject  has  been  in  some  cases  so  uniformly  and 
pedantically  stupid,  that  I  have  not  felt  that  I  could  afford  to  spend 
much  time  on  such  literature. 

The  delightful  effects  of  manipulation  in  baths  have  been  described 
by  many  writers  in  glowing  colors.  Nordhoff,  describing  the  lomi-lomi, 
says  :  "  To  you  thereupon  comes  a  stout  native  with  soft,  fleshy  hands, 
but  a  strong  grip,  and,  beginning  with  your  head  and  working  down 
slowly  over  the  whole  body,  seizes  and  squeezes  with  a  quite  peculiar  art 
every  tired  muscle,  working  and  kneading  with  indefatigable  patience, 
until  in  half  an  hour,  whereas  you  were  weary  and  -worn  out,  you  find 
yourself  fresh, —  all  soreness  and  weariness  absolutely  gone,  and  mind 
and  body  soothed  to  a  healthy  and  refreshing  sleep."  This,  accord- 
ing to  Murrell,  has  nothing  in  common  with  massage.  So  much  the 
worse  for  the  latter,  if  it  is  eclipsed  by  the  methods  of  barbarian 
races  ! 

Schreiber,  too,  confesses  as  follows,  that  massage  is  an  unpleasant 
affair  in  comparison  with  Egyptian  baths  :  — 

"  Savary  in  his  letters  from  Egypt,  in  describing  a  bath  taken  by 
him  there,  speaks  of  the  delightful  feelings  produced  by  passing 
through  a  series  of  apartments  of  graded  temperatures,  of  being  sur- 
rounded by  scented  vapors,  of  having  his  body  scoured,  pressed  and 
kneaded,  and  his  limbs  stretched  and  his  joints  cracked,  of  being 
enveloped  in  clean  linen,  laid  upon  a  soft  couch,  and  having  all  parts 


344  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

of  his  body  dried  by  the  tender  hands  of  children.  When  finally  he 
mentions  the  coffee  and  tobacco  which  contribute  to  the  pleasure  of 
the  massage  ;  when  he  breaks  forth  in  hymns  of  praise  on  the  delicious 
feeling  of  sensuous  ease  produced  by  massage  ;  when  he  speaks  of  the 
ease  with  which  the  blood  seems  to  circulate,  of  the  feeling  of  refresh- 
ment that  ensues,  and  of  the  sweet  sensations  and  delightful  ideas 
that  arise  in  the  mind  ;  and  when  finally  he  allows  himself  to  declare 
that  in  fancy  one  overlooks  the  whole  world,  which  seems  to  be  at 
one's  feet,  and  to  grow  more  bright  and  refulgent  under  the  observer's 
eye,  and  that  everywhere  only  the  laughing  face  of  fortune  is  seen,  — 
all  I  can  say  is,  that  unfortunately  mechano-therapy  has  nothing  in 
common  with  these  beautiful  impressions  and  delightful  sensations. 
It  usually  causes  a  good  deal  of  pain,  and  it  is  only  in  the  popular  ac- 
ceptation of  the  term  that  the  patient  'sees  stars.'  After  his  daily 
manipulation  the  patient  generally  feels  exhausted,  often  experiencing 
pain  for  twenty  minutes  or  half  an  hour,  which  gradually  disappears. 
The  time  for  the  repetition  of  his  treatment  is  anticipated  with  fear 
and  trembling,  and  only  the  conviction  of  its  efficacy,  or  the  fact  that 
the  cure  has  already  begun  and  is  visibly  progressing,  gives  him  cour- 
age and  endurance  to  stand  the  torture  imposed.  In  certain  diseases, 
as  constipation,  neurasthenia  and  choera,  it  is  true  there  is  no  pain, 
or  none  worth  mentioning,  connected  with  the  cure  ;  in  other  cases, 
however,  the  patients  cry  out  aloitd,  shed  tears  and  even  vigorously 
resist  the  physician,  with  arms  and  legs,  —  a  proceeding  which  must 
not,  however,  be  considered  as  sufficient  ground  on  which  to  base  a 
charge  of  assault  and  battery." 

Is  this  benevolent  and  skilful  treatment  ?  Is  the  painful  nature  of 
a  process  or  the  disgusting  character  of  a  medicine  any  proof  of  its 
superior  merit  ?  Have  the  magnetic  healers  any  such  confessions  to 
make  ?  On  the  contrary,  it  is  the  charming  and  prompt  relief  they 
give  which  has  enabled  them  to  overcome  the  consolidated  mass  of 
prejudice  nourished  by  pedantic  colleges,  flourishing  in  the  universal 
ignorance  of  psychic  science  and  the  higher  departments  of  biology, 
and  enforced  by  the  jealous  animosity  of  their  medical  competitors. 

That  massage  processes  mechanically  assist  the  circulation  as  effi- 
ciently as  active  exercise  is  quite  apparent,  and  that  improvement  of 
local  and  general  health  should  follow  even  if  the  operator  had  no 
superior  endowments  is  obvious  enough,  and  has  been  verified  by 
careful  experiments  in  massage.  The  investigators  however,  fail  to 
see  that  there  is  any  cause  but  the  mechanical.  They  have  shown 
that  when  a  muscle  has  been  exhausted  of  contractility  by  Faradic 
currents,  a  few  minutes'  massage  restores  its  contractility,  and  Zablud- 
owski  has  proven  this  also. upon  the  muscles  of  a  frog.     The  vigor  of 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  345 

muscles  which  have  not  been  exhausted  is  increased  by  massage,  sur- 
passing in  this  respect  the  effect  of  electric  currents,  and  hence  pugi- 
lists in  training  undergo  considerable  rubbing ;  and  rubbing  has  been 
extensively  associated  with  bathing,  as  an  invigorating  luxury.  Man- 
kind for  ages  have  extensively  used  this  natural  treatment  while  it 
has  been  neglected  by  the  profession. 

In  many  cases  in  which  electricity  has  failed  to  be  of  any  value, 
massage  is  a  most  efficient  agent,  but  the  writers  are  not  aware  of  the 
great  value  of  the  touch  or  mere  contact  independent  of  mechanical 
action.  Those  who  understand  the  vital  influence  and  know  how  to 
give  it  have  not  acquired  such  knowledge  from  the  colleges,  and  are 
therefore  jealously  denounced  as  charlatans  for  performing  cures 
where  the  faculty  have  failed.  Dr.  S.  Weir  Mitchell  of  Philadelphia 
says  :  "  It  is  many  years  since  I  first  saw  in  this  city  general  massage 
used  by  a  charlatan  in  a  case  of  progressive  paralysis.  The  tempo- 
rary results  he  obtained  were  so  remarkable  that  I  began  soon  after 
to  employ  it  in  locomotor  ataxy,  in  which  it  sometimes  proved  of 
signal  value,  as  in  other  forms  of  spinal  and  local  disease."  If  Dr. 
Mitchell  should  become  acquainted  with  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  he 
would  make  a  still  greater  gain. 

That  massage  of  the  abdomen  should  be  beneficial,  as  claimed  in 
constipation  and  dyspepsia,  is  reasonable,  as  such  manipulations  accord 
with  Sarcognomy  ;  but  in  treatment  guided  by  Sarcognomy  the  abdom- 
inal surface  does  not  absorb  all  attention  while  the  spinal  region,  the 
source  of  its  power,  is  neglected. 

The  annals  of  what  is  called  Magnetic  Treatment  are  full  of  the 
most  marvellous  cures  of  rheumatism,  neuralgia  and  every  variety  of 
acute  and  of  lingering  diseases,  which  sometimes  vanish  in  a  few 
hours  or  a  few  minutes.  All  this  experience  has  been  contemp- 
tuously ignored  by  the  old  colleges,  even  when  coming  from  such  dis- 
tinguished physicians  as  Dr.  Elliotson  and  Dr.  Esdaile,  because  it  was 
not  in  their  curriculum,  and  they  have  brought  forward  in  opposition 
their  mechanical  ideas  of  massage  in  which  they  unconsciously  enjoy 
the  benefit  of  vital  forces  and  sympathies,  and  thus  take  to  themselves 
more  credit  than  mechanical  action  deserves.  The  persons  whom 
they  employ  for  massage  are  sometimes  skilled  in  animal  magnetism 
and  accomplish  much  more  than  is  expected  ;  but  if  they  perform 
any  marvellous  cures  they  must  conceal  them  from  the  faculty  or  be 
punished  for  their  temerity.  A  patient  in  a  Boston  hospital,  suffering 
from  pneumonia  with  a  very  high  temperature,  fell  under  the  care  of 
an  intelligent  attendant  who  had  attended  a  course  of  my  lectures. 
Benevolence  prompted  him  to  do  what  he  could,  and  he  gave  great 
relief,  lowering  the  temperature  remarkably.     The  next  morning  the 


346  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVIL 

physician  was  astonished  and  commented  on  the  case  emphatically  to 
his  pupils  as  presenting  a  most  marvellous,  unprecedented  change, 
for  which  he  could  not  account.  The  guilty  healer  was  wise  enough 
to  conceal  his  agency. 

Dr.  Wm.  Balfour  of  Edinburgh,  in  1 8 16,  published  "  Observations 
with  Cases  illustrative  of  a  New  and  Simple  and  Expeditious  Mode 
of  curing  Rheumatism  and  Sprains  without  in  the  least  debilitating 
the  System  : "  which  was  really  a  very  good  treatise  on  what  is  now 
called  Massage,  but  was  neglected  for  half  a  century  by  the  profes- 
sion. One  of  his  cases  is  worth  mentioning,  though  less  remarkable 
than  many  contemporary  cures  made  outside  of  professional  ranks. 
It  is  the  case  of  a  French  lady  of  Edinburgh,  Madame  Rey  De  La 
Ruaz,  a  hereditary  sufferer  from  gout  from  her  childhood.  When 
first  seen  by  Dr.  Balfour,  he  says :  "  All  her  fingers  were  extremely 
weak,  some  of  them  swelled,  others  so  exquisitely  painful  that  she 
could  not  suffer  them  to  be  touched ;  she  could  not  lift  a  wine-glass 
with  one  hand,  but  she  contrived  to  do  it  with  both,  by  turning  their 
backs  to  each  other.  Both  wrist  joints  were  stiff  and  painful,  but 
the  left  could  not  be  moved  without  the  greatest  suffering.  Both 
elbow-joints  were  greatly  affected ;  the  left  did  not  possess  half  the 
natural  range  of  flexion  and  extension.  On  each  humerus  above  the 
inner  condyle,  a  large  tumor  was  situated,  so  painful  that  it  could  not 
be  touched  without  making  the  patient  cry  out.  All  the  muscles 
covering  the  humeri  were,  from  origin  to  insertion,  rigid,  knotted, 
thickened.  The  deltoid  muscle  felt  like  two  boards  ;  the  connections 
of  the  clavicles  with  the  shoulders,  and  the  joints  at  their  flexures, 
the  patient  could  not  suffer  to  be  touched  ;  she  could  not  lift  her  hand 
to  her  head Her  head  and  a  small  part  of  the  anterior  por- 
tion of  the  trunk  of  her  body  were  indeed  the  only  parts  free  from 
disease,  and  she  had  not  walked  a  step  for  eight  years." 

Dr.  Balfour  restored  her  to  health  in  five  months  by  his  processes 
of  compression,  percussion  and  friction,  without  using  any  medicine 
but  a  few  laxative  pills  and  "a  saline  julep  when  she  was  feverish." 
In  his  enthusiasm  he  said :  "  I  congratulate  all  mankind  that  a  cure 
is  at  last  discovered  for  one  of  the  most  harassing  and  painful 
diseases  to  which  human  nature  is  liable,  —  a  disease  in  its  nature  so 
obstinate  as  to  have  hitherto  set  at  defiance  the  utmost  efforts  of  the 
healing  art."  But  Balfour's  cures  received  no  more  attention  than 
those  of  the  magnetic  healers ;  yet  now,  after  seventy  years,  rheu- 
matism, neuralgia,  neurasthenia,  hypochondria,  hysteria,  anaesthesia, 
hyperaesthesia,  chorea,  palsy,  sprains,  glandular  enlargements,  stiff 
joints,  diseases  of  the  eye,  cerebral  congestion,  hemorrhoids,  chlor- 
osis, mellituria,  metritis,  dyspepsia,  constipation,  phthisis   and   some 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  347 

forms  of  poisoning  are  claimed  to  be  "  suited  to  mechano-therapy  " 
by  Dr.  Schreiber.  Murrell  claims  for  it  immense  value  in  spinal 
irritations,  in  relaxed  corpulence,  in  anaemia,  in  convalescence  gen- 
erally, and  in  certain  stages  of  syphilis,  especially  in  women  who 
have  been  much  reduced  by  the  disease.  In  sciatica,  Max  Schuller 
of  Berlin  claims  its  superiority  over  all  agents  commonly  employed, 
making  cures  in  less  than  three  weeks.  Its  great  value  in  diseases 
of  the  joints  has  been  illustrated  by  Prof.  Von  Mosengeil  and  others, 
and  was  forcibly  illustrated  in  a  work  published,  as  far  back  as  1825, 
by  Surgeons  Grosvenor  and  Cleobury  of  Oxford,  England,  which  at 
that  time  attracted  many  patients. 

After  recommending  massage  for  uterine  diseases,  Dr.  Murrell 
concludes  with  a  protest  against  any  manual  treatment  not  performed 
by  an  operator  under  the  absolute  control  of  a  physician,  ignoring 
entirely  the  fact  that  the  most  brilliant  cures  by  manual  treatment 
have  been  in  cases  in  which  physicians  had  nothing  to  do  with  the 
treatment,  such  as  those  of  Greatrakes,  published  in  1666,  which  he 
Has  read  without  apparently  learning  anything  from  a  treatment  more 
remarkable  in  its  results  than  anything  he  refers  to.  To  his  mechanical 
modes  of  thought,  the  operations  of  Greatrakes  were  a  mystery. 

Greatrakes,  a  Protestant  gentleman  holding  official  positions  in 
Ireland,  began  in  1662  to  cure  cases  of  scrofula,  which  he  continued 
for  three  years  ;  then  began  to  cure  agues,  in  which  he  was  surprised 
at  his  own  success,  and  afterward  engaged  in  the  treatment  of  all 
kinds  of  diseases,  not  only  in  Ireland,  but  in  England,  to  which  he 
was  called  by  the  Earl  of  Orrery.  He  simply  placed  his  hands 
upon  the  patients,  using  prayer,  and  healed  them  rapidly,  never 
receiving  any  compensation.  Eminent  persons  of  the  nobility, 
divines,  physicians  and  scientists  attested  his  marvellous  cures.  The 
philosopher  Robert  Boyle,  the  astronomer  Flamstead,  bishops  and 
mayors  proclaimed  his  marvellous  success.  Among  other  instances, 
Dean  Rust  mentions  that  he  had  seen  him  cure  "  cases  of  scrofula 
which  had  for  years  set  at  defiance  all  the  doctors  ;  cancerous  swell- 
ings in  women's  breasts;  disperse  lumps  and  hard  tumors  at  once; 
heal  ulcerous  sores  of  long  standing ;  cure  deafness,  lameness,  dim- 
ness of  sight ;  banish  epilepsy ;  and  cause  scabs  which  covered  the 
whole  body,  and  which  for  many  years  had  been  counted  incurable, 
to  peel  off  and  disappear,  leaving  the  skin  sound  and  healthy." 

Nothing  to  compare  with  this  has  ever  been  reported  of  the  me- 
chano-therapy called  Massage.  Yet  the  colleges  have  never  inves- 
tigated these  unquestionable  facts  or  brought  them  before  their  pupils, 
who  have  been  kept  in  profound  ignorance  of  what  the  colleges  did 
not  understand  and  could  not  teach  because  they  proscribed  it. 


34§  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

Anthropology  clears  up  the  mystery  of  marvellous  cures  by  ex- 
plaining the  power  of  the  vital  nervaura  and  the  psychic  elements 
which  medical  scientists  have  ignored,  —  psychic  faculties  which  in 
their  full  development  surpass  all  other  curative  agencies. 

How  different  has  been  the  spirit  of  the  colleges  generally  from 
that  of  the  most  eminent  physician  of  his  day,  F.  Hoffmann, 
medical  professor  for  48  years  at  the  end  of  the  17th  and  beginning 
of  the  1 8th  century,  who  said  in  his  "  System  of  Rational  Medicine  "  : 
"  An  imponderable  but  material  agent,  aether  (the  active  moving 
force),  animates  all  tissues  of  the  body  and  presides  over  physical 
phenomena  in  every  domain  of  creation.  .  .  .  The  living  organism 
exercises  the  functions  peculiar  to  itself  in  consequence  of  qualities 
inherent  in  all  animal  matter,  which  qualities  are  animated  by  a 
motive  force  emanating  in  the  form  of  a  certain  peculiar  material 
which  is  secreted  by  the  brain  and  carried  into  the  body,  and  is 
under  the  regulation  of  a  complicated  organic  apparatus.  This 
aether  is  the  fundamental  cause  of  all  vital  motion."  This  aether  he 
regarded  as  the  soul  presiding  over  organic  life  and  determining 
man's  whole  existence,  and  he  further  said :  "  Medicine  will  never 
progress  until  we  closely  examine  the  nature  of  this  form  of  motion 
originating  in  the  sentient  soul,  and  until  we  apply  to  medicine  the 
laws  of  mechanics  and  hydraulics." 

But  what  college  or  what  scientific  author  has  ever  attempted  to 
investigate  these  basic  forces  of  life  coming  from  the  brain  ?  The 
only  important  effort  in  that  direction  is  found  in  the  much-neglected 
writings  of  Reichenbach.  To  attempt  such  an  investigation  has 
been  to  forfeit  the  sympathy  and  respect  of  the  medical  profession. 
The  colleges  defend  their  ignorance  far  more  zealously  than  their 
knowledge,  which  instead  of  upholding  they  discredit.  More  than  a 
score  of  the  most  eminent  physicians  and  surgeons  have  denounced 
the  therapeutics  of  the  colleges  in  language  so  extravagant  as  to 
be  slanderous,  while  at  the  same  time  the  ignorance  of  the  colleges 
is  vigorously  and  almost  unanimously  upheld  by  denunciation  and 
ridicule  of  those  who  present  them  important  discoveries  and  un- 
questionable cures.  The  leaders  of  the  profession  have  been 
pessimistic  and  faithless  alike  in  what  they  teach  and  what  they 
ignore.* 

So  vigorously  have  they  resisted  the  approaches  of  electricity  and 
of  animal  magnetism  that  even  simple  mechano-therapy  or  massage 
has    fallen    under    the    ban    of   prejudice    in    France    (according  to 

*  Among  these  may  be  named  Sir  Astley  Cooper;  Dr,  James  Johnson,  editor 
of  the  leading  "  Medical  Review  of  England  ; "  Dr.  Forbes,  editor  of  the  "  British 
and  Foreign  and  Quarterly;"  Majendie;  Rush;  and  twenty  others  of  the  highest 
rank. 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  349 

Schreiber)  because,  it  bears  a  resemblance  to  animal  magnetism, 
against  which  they  have  warred  so  long.  Its  recent  introduction 
under  the  name  of  hypnotism  has  carefully  excluded  all  its  therapeu- 
tic uses  except  by  suggestion. 

The  Faculty  will  not  forgive  Gassner,  Greatrakes,  Geo.  Fox, 
Mesmer  and  his  followers,  Madame  St.  Armour,  Newton  and  the 
Zouave  Jacob,  and  many  others,  for  showing  that  without  the  aid  of 
medical  science  more  wonderful  cures  can  be  made  than  all  that 
colleges  have  accomplished,  by  using  a  power  which  they  have, 
ignored. 

The  most  striking  effect  of  massage  or  mechano-therapy  is  the 
promotion  of  absorption  and  assistance  of  the  circulation  by  stroking 
in  the  direction  of  the  veins  and  lymphatics.  Health  is  greatly 
benefited  by  this  removal  of  effete  matter,  absorption  of  effusion 
or  deposits,  and  increase  of  circulation  and  consequent  nutrition, 
warmth  and  vital  energy.  This  cannot  be  done  by  the  hand  without 
at  the  same  time  imparting  vitality  by  the  nervaura.  It  requires  no 
experiments  to  demonstrate  such  effects  ;  but  it  is  interesting  to 
know  that  Von  Mosengeil  injected  a  hypodermic  syringe  full  of  India 
ink  four  times  into  the  leg  of  a  rabbit  during  eleven  hours,  and  by 
systematic  manipulation  so  completely  removed  it  that  none  was 
found  in  the  lymphatic  vessels  or  glands.  In  this  respect  rubbing 
bears  some  resemblance  to  pneumatic  treatment,  but  does  not  draw 
in  so  large  a  supply  of  blood. 

The  fact  that  while  fluid  materials  are  thus  removed  there  is  also 
a  removal  of  pain  and  irritation  more  prompt  than  the  removal  of 
substance  and  not  dependent  upon  pressure  is  of  course  ignored  by 
mechano-therapists.  Mechanical  effects  alone  are  thought  of  and 
mechanical  procedures  described  in  a  way  to  tax  the  memory ;  the 
massage  too  is  combined  with  an  equally  pedantic  movement-cure, 
of  which  Schreiber  judiciously  says  :  "Several  authors  have  published 
bulky  volumes  on  '  kinesipathy,'  'kinesiatrics,'  'cinesiologie,'  which, 
notwithstanding  their  merits,  have  through  size  and  prolixity  deterred 
the  busy  practitioner  from  consulting  them.  In  works  on  the 
Swedish  movement-cure  we  encounter  a  most  absurdly  difficult  and 
complicated  nomenclature,  often  quite  sufficient  to  deter  the  average 
physician  from  ever  attempting  to  engage  in  this  line  of  practice. 
....  It  is  my  firm  conviction  that  the  general  practitioner  will  be 
able  to  employ  this  or  any  other  form  of  mechano-therapy  with  the 
best  results,  without  a  previous  knowledge  of  even  one  of  the  jaw- 
breaking  terms  applied  to  many  of  the  procedures  used." 

As  for  the  apparatus  of  mechano-therapy,  Schreiber  says:  "A  skil- 
ful operator  can  with  his  hands  perform  everything  for  which  another 


350  MECHANOTHERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

will   need   apparatus,"    but    that    the    resistance-movements    of   the 
Swedish  system  can  be  better  realized  by  apparatus  than  without  it. 

The  Swedish  movement-cure  of  Ling  is  a  system  of  exercises, 
pedantically  described,  for  the  development  of  muscles,  of  which  the 
translator  of  Schreiber  says  :  "  The  Anglo-Saxon  mind  is  happily 
unable  to  conceive  the  absurdities  of  Ling's  nomenclature,"  and  the 
English  language  is  not  "adapted  for  the  expression  of  its  terms." 

Dubois-Reymond  says  of  Ling's  writings  on  his  movement- 
system  :  "His  arbitrary  constructions,  his  empty-sounding  symbolism, 
his  meaningless  schematizations  and  pedantic  terminology  no  doubt 
impose  on  such  semi-educated  minds  which,  unable  to  detect  the 
nonsense,  accept  a  few  scraps  of  anatomy  and  physiology  as  evi- 
dences of  profound  learning.  Nothing  whatever  in  Ling's  writings 
indicates  a  truly  physiologically  conceived  explanation  of  the  under- 
lying facts."  He  also  compares  the  work  of  Rothstein,  a  pupil  of 
Ling,  to  "  a  great,  flowing,  full-bottomed  wig  of  a  thousand  ambrosial 
curls,  placed  upon  a  puppet's  empty  head." 

Schreiber  says  that  the  pompous  claims  made  for  the  "  Swedish 
gymnastics  to  be  a  universal  remedy  deserve  the  severest  casti- 
gation  ;  "  nevertheless  he  gives  Ling  great  credit  for  directing  the 
attention  of  physicians  to  gymnastics.  "  Ling's  gymnastics,"  he 
says,  "  have  an  even  greater  and  more  certain  effect  upon  innerva- 
tion and  nutrition  than  the  common  form  of  gymnastic  exercises." 

Surely  it  needed  no  ultra-enthusiast  to  enable  the  intelligent  to 
understand  that  muscular  exercise  increases  muscular  strength,  in- 
creases respiration,  circulation,  absorption,  digestion  and  appetite ; 
diminishes  fat  and  abnormal  products,  increases  the  energy  of  the 
entire  constitution  and  develops  the  particular  muscles  that  are  used. 
What  special  effects  this  may  have  is  shown  by  Sarcognomy.  It  \ 
shows  that  vital  stamina  and  health  are  promoted  mainly  by  shoulder 
exercise,  and  vital  force  by  exercise  of  the  thighs. 

For  the  effects   of  all  habits  and   exercises  we  need  only  look  to  "-^ 
the  map  of  Sarcognomy.     It  teaches  us  that  whatever  increases  the 
action  of  the  diaphragm,  increases  the  animal  energies  ;  but  whatever 
increases   the    upward  expansion   of    the  chest   ennobles   the  moral 
nature  and  establishes  a  firmer  health. 

Active  exertion  generally,  as  it  proceeds  from  the  shoulders,  back 
and  thighs,  develops  force  of  character,  and  by  muscular  compression 
diminishes  abdominal  fulness,  —  thus  overcoming  the  indolent,  sensi- 
tive and  morbid  elements. 

The  truth  which  mechano-therapists  neglect  is,  —  that  physical 
power  comes  from  nervous  more  than  from  the  muscular  system,  and 
that  consequently  no  exercise  produces  the  best  effect  unless  asso- 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  35 1 

ciated  with  pleasure  or  earnest  interest  that  may  call  out  the  stronger 
faculties  of  the  brain.  Mere  muscle-culture  is  not  a  culture  of 
health,  as  has  been  proved  by  athletes  of  all  sorts,  prize-fighters, 
rowers,  runners,  lifters,  etc.,  some  of  whom  shorten  their  lives  ;  and 
it  was  proved  by  Ling  himself,  who  died  of  consumption. 

Mechano-therapists  not  only  take  these  narrow  views  of  Physiology, 
but  degrade  the  matter  still  farther  into  the  prevalent  chemico-me- 
chanical  theory  of  vital  processes.  Even  Schreiber  says  of  the 
muscles  :  "  Each  fibre  may  be  supposed  to  contain  a  substance  ready  to 
undergo  combustion  under  the  influence  of  a  nerve  impulse  :  that  the 
heat  so  produced  is  in  part  used  for  the  production  of  work"  etc.  This 
is  the  purely  imaginary  theory  of  the  schools.  Heat  never  produced 
muscular  force,  but  always  counteracts  or  diminishes  it  when  beyond 
the  normal  standard. 

Schreiber,  from  the  careful  study  of  the  results  of  experience, 
ascribes  great  value  to  "  mechanotherapy,  vulgo  massage,"  in 
neuralgia  and  muscular  rheumatism,  in  the  absence  of  inflammation, 
which  contra-indicates  such  treatment.  In  this  it  is  decidedly 
inferior  to  the  nervauric  or  psycho-manual  treatment,  the  practi- 
tioners of  which  never  regard  inflammation  as  an  obstacle,  but  treat 
it  as  something  to  be  controlled. 

For  severe  sciaticas,  Schreiber  prescribes  a  course  of  exercise  for 
the  muscles  around  the  hip  joint,  accompanied  by  manual  treatment 
sometimes  severe  enough  to  produce  ecchymosis  from  hacking  and 
kneading  the  muscles  of  thighs  and  buttocks,  and  gives  the  details 
of  such  treatment  for  32  days.  It  is  six  to  twelve  days  before  any 
amelioration  is  realized.  The  whole  course  is  painful  and  laborious, 
and  the  cures  (which  he  claims  are  sure)  require  from  ten  days  to 
eight  weeks.  His  reported  cases  demonstrate  the  cures  in  various 
lengths  of  treatment,  but  do  not  show  how  much  is  pue  to  the 
passive  and  active  exercises,  and  how  much  to  the  vigorous  handling 
of  the  parts. 

He  claims,  however,  that  lumbago  and  stiff  neck  may  be  cured  in 
fifteen  minutes,  and  that  "  all  recent  neuralgias  are  equally  curable," 
if  vigorous  treatment  is  used,  disregarding  the  patient's  cries  and 
resistance.  "  It  should  be  our  object  to  affect  the  muscles  in  their 
very  deepest  parts  (always  carefully  regarding  the  bones),  to  stretch 
and  concuss  the  nerves,  and  to  cause  an  evolution  of  heat  and  to 
stimulate  the  circulation  in  the  tissues  involved."  In  all  this  his 
mind  is  concentrated  upon  the  mechanical  forces  without  a  thought 
of  the  vital  influences  which  often  effect  prompt  cures  without  the 
use  of  any  mechanical  force  ;  and  he  acts  on  the  theory  that  "  neu- 
ralgia in  general  is  to  be  cured  by  stretching  the  affected  nerve." 


352  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

I  lis  manipulation  is  rational,  beginning  with  gentle  processes  with 
the  fingers  and  proceeding  to  firm  pressure. 

In  all  human  progress  it  seems  to  be  necessary  to  have  men  of 
one  idea  neglecting  everything  else  to  develop  the  value  of  any 
method  and  call  public  attention  to  it  by  their  fanatical  zeal. 

Hacking  the  muscles,  which  is  a  favorite  measure,  is  intended  to 
penetrate  the  deep-lying  parts  by  its  force  and  is  done  by  striking 
with  the  side  of  the  hand,  from  the  wrist  to  the  end  of  the  little 
finger,  with  considerable  force,  which  sometimes  produces  ecchymosis. 
He  describes  in  detail  three  weeks  of  daily  treatment  by  exercises 
and  manipulation  for  cervico-brachial  neuralgia.  He  describes  a 
patient  cured  by  four  weeks  of  treatment,  who,  whenever  any 
symptoms  returned,  could  cure  himself  by  going  through  the  pre- 
scribed exercises. 

But  though  neuralgias  of  nerves  associated  with  muscles  yield  to 
such  treatment,  he  confesses  that  his  treatment  of  nerves  "  between 
the  skin  and  an  underlying  bone  "  is  inefficient  ;  trigeminal  neuralgia 
was  especially  intractable.  Hence  his  conclusion  that  "it  is  in  the 
muscles  that  the  true  field  of  mechano-therapy  lies."  These  cases, 
however,  which  he  finds  entirely  intractable  are  not  so  to  those  who 
understand  vital  treatment.  On  the  contrary,  in  the  impressible 
temperament  they  yield  most  readily  to  manual  treatment.  But  he 
seems  not  to  have  observed  the  vast  differences  of  constitutions  in 
the  degree  of  obstinacy  and  intractability  of  their  diseases.  It  is  to 
be  understood,  too,  that  all  diseases  produce  by  their  continuance 
organic  tissue  changes  which  destroy  the  recuperative  power  and 
thus  in  time  make  them  incurable  unless  the  nervous  system  has 
preserved  its  controlling  power.  He  has  also  failed  to  understand 
the  effects  of  different  directions  of  gentle  manipulation  and  strok- 
ing, and  attached  altogether  too  much  importance  to  mechanical 
force  exerted  in  a  painful  manner.  The  cases  in  which  his  very 
painful  manipulations  wrought  cures  might  have  been  cured  as  well 
or  better  without  inflicting  any  pain.  He  treated  his  colleague  for 
spinal  neuralgia  in  so  violent  and  painful  a  manner  that  "  he  made  a 
most  lively  resistance."  All  American  experience,  I  believe,  shows 
the  impropriety  of  such  painful  operations. 

The  value  of  mechanical  treatment  where  the  muscles  are  con- 
cerned is  illustrated  by  the  well  known  value  of  muscular  exercise 
in  conquering  rheumatism.  Men  who  feel  utterly  helpless  may  be 
frightened  by  a  fire  or  by  the  guns  of  the  enemy  into  sudden  exertion 
and  running,  to  the  destruction  of  their  rheumatism.  Schreiber  refers 
to  a  case  reported  by  Busch  in  which  a  country  doctor  attacked  with 
"intense  muscular  pain  in  all  parts  of  his  body  "  was  advised  by  an 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING  MASSAGE.  353 

old  peasant  to  mount  his  horse,  and  being  lifted  to  the  saddle  by 
several  men  rode  off  in  great  suffering.  A  thunder-storm  made 
him  ride  at  full  speed,  and  he  arrived  at  home  in  great  perspiration 
entirely  relieved. 

The  co-existence  of  fever  does  not,  according  to  Schreiber,  contra- 
indicate  the  use  of  mechano-therapy  which  conquers  such  cases  of 
myalgia  and  neuralgia  in  from  12  to  36  hours,  with  beneficial  effects 
on  the  associate  fever. 

"  In  both  anaesthesia  and  hyperaesthesia  (he  says)  the  areas 
involved  must  be  pressed,  kneaded,  pinched,  and  finally  mildly 
hacked.  Even  where  the  trouble  depends  on  some  central  disease, 
much  good  may  still  be  obtained,  as  was  shown  by  a  case  reported 
by  me  elsewhere."  "  Turck  was  the  first  to  show  that  anaesthesia 
of  a  mild  degree  could  be  removed  by  the  use  of  friction  alone,"  — 
a  truth,  however,  long  known  among  magnetizers. 

In  arthritic  neurosis  involving  the  knee  and  hip,  which  generally 
depends  on  a  neurotic  condition,  no  anatomical  change  has  been 
found  where  the  severity  of  pain  has  caused  amputation  to  be  used. 
Such  suffering  is  rather  accompanied  by  lack  of  circulation  than  by 
any  hyperaemic  state.  Anaemia  is  often  productive  of  neuralgia  ;  and 
"sudden  embolism  of  the  large  arteries,"  says  Billroth,  "produces 
severe  pain  in  the  parts  below  the  obstruction."  He  reports  suc- 
cesses in  such  cases,  but  says  that  "  a  large  amount  of  moral  influence 
must  be  added  to  the  mechanical  treatment."  He  uses  gentle  mani- 
pulations, increasing  their  force,  using  passive  and  active  motions  of 
the  limb  and  the  corresponding  members.  But  it  is  self-evident  that 
all  such  measures  are  vastly  inferior  to  pneumatic  treatment,  which 
produces  a  full  circulation. 

In  palsies  amenable  to  treatment, —  that  is,, paresis,  —  Schreiber  rec- 
ognizes mechano-therapy,  electricity  and  hydro-therapy  as  the  avail- 
able measures,  conjoined  with,  passive  and  active  movements  of  the 
limbs.  Alas,  half  a  century  of  successful  demonstration  of  the  power 
of  pneumatic  treatment  seems  not  to  have  interested  the  medical 
profession.  Schreiber  makes  no  reference  to  it,  and  the  fashionable 
authors  are  silent. 

In  opium,  morphine  and  chloral  poisoning,  he  says,  "  we  possess  no 
readier  or  more  efficient  means  than  the  mechanical,  whether  applied 
in  the  shape  of  beating,  pinching  or  hacking  of  the  muscles,  over 
the  whole  body,  or  of  repeated  strokes  on  the  palms  and  soles.  We 
read  of  cases  where  these  procedures  have  been  kept  up  for  many 
minutes  and  even  for  hours,  resulting,  in  the  end,  in  the  resuscitation 
of  the  poisoned  individual." 

Death    occurs    speedily    in    chloroform    poisoning   unless    prompt 


354  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

relief  is  given,  but  in  the  poisoning  of  morphine  and  of  carbonic 
acid  gas  there  is  much  less  danger.  Mechano-therapy  in  these  cases 
he  considers  much  more  valuable  than  electricity,  ammonia  and 
sinapisms.  A  young  woman  who  seemed  dying  from  the  hypodermic 
injection  of  from  a  third  to  a  half  a  grain  of  morphine  was  revived 
by  severe  flagellation  with  rods  on  the  palms  and  soles  of  the  feet. 
She  sat  up  in  bed  and  the  flagellation  being  suspended  the  coma 
returned,  but  being  flagellated  again  for  an  hour,  she  recovered  and 
without  any  ecchymosis  from  the  severe  beating.  Sarcognomy 
shows  that  the  feet  are  the  most  efficient  antagonists  of  the  brain  and 
consequently  the  best  location  for  directing  excitement  from  the  head. 

The  same  immunity  from  the  effects  of  beating  was  observed  in 
the  case  of  a  Mr.  Wright  Harris,  reported  by  Dr.  Barrett  of  Middle- 
town,  Conn.,  over  sixty  years  ago,  who  had  taken  an  ounce  and  a  half 
of  laudanum  for  suicide  and  was  revived  by  switching  the  palms  and 
soles  with  willow  switches.  After  he  woke  and  objected  to  the 
treatment  he  fell  back  into  coma  and  had  to  be  switched  into  con- 
sciousness several  hours.  It  was  eight  hours  before  this  treatment 
ended,  but  no  ecchymoses  were  produced,  which  shows  that  insensi- 
bility prevents  inflammatory  irritation  and  congestion.  There  could 
be  no  better  evidence  of  the  value  of  anodynes  in  therapeutics. 

The  merit  of  the  treatment  was  not  so  much  in  the  pain  as  in  its 
location,  which  was  most  appropriate  as  an  antagonist  to  cerebral 
oppression. 

"  Dr.  Bullar  of  Southampton  claims  to  have  saved  every  case  in 
which  there  was  suspension  of  respiration  following  chloroform 
narcosis,  by  himself  and  his  assistants  vigorously  slapping  the 
patient's  body  with  the  palms  of  their  hands.  This  was  kept  up 
until  pulse  and  respiration  were  again  perceptible,  which  sometimes 
did  not  happen  until  as  much  as  ten  minutes  had  elapsed.  In  many 
cases  the  application  proved  to  have  been  so  vigorous  that  the  lower 
extremities  particularly  were  covered  with  ecchymoses.  Bullar  insists 
that  no  time  should  be  lost  in  trying  electricity  and  other  useless 
measures,  but  that  the  mechanical  treatment  should  be  at  once 
resorted  to  with  full  confidence  as  to  its  efficacy.  He  states  that  in 
several  of  his  cases  the  action  of  the  heart  and  lungs  had  ceased 
completely  and  beyond  a  doubt,  but  that  by  mechanical  treatment 
life  was  once  more  recalled." 

This  is  a  more  efficient  treatment  than  the  switching,  because  it 
covers  a  larger  surface  and  brings  into  play  the  vital  forces  of  the 
operators.  Such  measures  should  also  be  used  in  cases  of  drowning. 
Physicians  who  are  governed  by  the  dominant  materialism  of  the 
colleges  keep  themselves  utterly  blind  to  the  transmission  of  vital 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  355 

force  in  the  treatment  of  disease.  Occasionally  a  physician  has 
liberality  of  mind  enough  to  break  away  from  scholastic  dogmatism, 
like  Dr.  A.  Mueller  of  Victoria,  Australia,  who,  in  the  "Australasian 
Medical  Journal  "  (March,  '89),  speaking  of  this  transferable  vital 
force,  as  shown  in  a  case  in  which  the  victim  of  deadly  snake-bite 
was  cured  by  a  fakir,  says  :  — 

"  To  the  next  question  that  suggests  itself,  whether  there  is  at  the 
disposal  of  these  fakirs  or  of  any  human  being  a  force  or  power 
capable  of  rousing  the  torpid  nerve-cells  into  action,  a  decidedly 
affirmative  answer  may  be  given.  So-called  '  exact '  science  has 
until  very  lately  ignored  the  existence  of  this  force,  and  I  should 
not  have  ventured  to  mention  it  even  in  your  columns  if  modern 
psychological  research,  both  in  Europe  and  America,  had  not  at  last 
enforced  a  tardy  recognition  of  its  existence,  thus  opening  up  vast 
fields  of  research  hitherto  not  dreamt  of  in  our  materialistic  philos- 
ophy. Thousands  of  years  before  our  Christian  era,  it  was  known 
to  our  Aryan  ancestors  under  the  Sanskrit  name  of  akasa,  or  the 
life-principle, — the  life-giving  fluid  or  medium;  and  early  in  this 
century  Baron  von  Reichenbach  demonstrated  its  existence  by  a 
series  of  most  interesting  experiments.  In  a  room  from  which  the 
faintest  ray  of  light  had  been  excluded,  his  sensitives  or  clairvoyants 
described  it  as  issuing  from  the  tips  of  his  fingers  and  from  his  eyes 
in  the  form  of  bluish  or  yellowish  flame-like  emanations,  and  as 
enveloping  his  body  in  a  cloud  or  aura  of  the  same  color.  These 
emanations  were  further  described  as  differing  both  in  color  and 
intensity  with  different  individuals  introduced  into  the  room.  Von 
Reichenbach  also  ascertained  from  these  sensitives  that  emanations 
similar  in  appearance  were  issuing  constantly  from  magnets  he  pre- 
sented before  them  ;  hence  the  name  of  vital  or  animal  magnetism 
has  been  given  to  this  force,  although  Reichenbach  himself  proposed 
to  call  it  '  Od,'  a  name  occurring  in  ancient  books  of  the  Kabala. 
To  this  force,  which  numberless  experiments  have  proven  to  be 
communicable  without  contact,  the  recovery  in  the  case  of  snake- 
bite cited  by  Dr.  Reid  must  be  ascribed.  [Such  snake-bites  were 
invariably  fatal.]  In  paralysis  not  resulting  from  organic  disease 
and  structural  change  of  the  nerve-tissue,  it  is  now,  under  the  name 
of  massage,  a  recognized  and  effective  remedial  agent  ;  but  this 
coarse  method  of  employing  it  is  typical  of  the  imperfect  and 
merely  rudimentary  knowledge  we  possess  of  its  vast  potencies  that 
will,  no  doubt,  cause  it  hereafter  to  become  one  of  the  most  powerful 
means  of  alleviating  and  curing  disease  in  the  hands  of  the  skilful 
physician  when  he  has  become  a  true  healer."  * 

*  That  vitality  is  actually  transferred  from  the  operator  to  his  patient,  to  the  great 


35^  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

The  switching  plan  was  successfully  tried  in  the  case  of  Dr.  De 
Angelo,  near  Venice,  who  was  poisoned  by  a  dose  supposed  to 
contain  strychnine.  Nausea,  vomiting,  delirium,  epileptic  convvl- 
sions,  unconsciousness  and  suspension  of  heart  and  lungs  made 
death  imminent.  After  trying  "  friction,  strong  sinapisms,  douching 
with  cold  water,  as  well  as  the  external  and  subcutaneous  application 
of  strong  ammonia  water,"  in  vain,  the  four  persons  in  attendance 
procured  switches  from  a  tree  and  switched  the  palms  and  soles, 
producing  restoration  in  about  half  an  hour,  the  first  signs  of  move- 
ment appearing  after  fifteen  minutes. 

The  success  of  flagellation  administered  several  hours  after  chloral 
poisoning  was  reported  by  Dr.  Meyer  in  the  "  Chicago  Medical  Jour- 
nal" for  November,  1876.  But  the  speediest  relief  in  chloroform 
poisoning  is  by  the  circulation,  —  restoring  the  blood  to  the  bram  by 
position, —  placing  the  patient  with  his  head  downwards,  or  lifting  him 
by  the  feet  and  legs.  Junod  found  this  the  quickest  method  when 
his  pneumatic  treatment  produced  fainting,  — raising  the  lower  limbs 
higher  than  the  head. 

Sprains,  according  to  Schreiber,  should  be  treated  (if  there  is  no 
serious  laceration)  by  centripetal  rubbing  followed  by  a  flannel 
bandage  and  exercise  when  the  pain  is  relieved.  A  suitable  position 
and  apparatus  are  also  necessary.  "  According  to  Phillippeaux, 
recent  slight  sprains  are  nearly  always  curable  at  a  single  sitting, 
and  even  in  severer  cases  (provided,  of  course,  there  is  no  fracture) 
four  to  five  sittings  suffice  to  put  the  patient  on  his  feet  again.  The 
sooner  the  treatment  is  begun  the  quicker  will  be  the  cure."  "  All 
authorities  agree  on  one  thing,  and  that  is  that  the  time  consumed 
in  treating  a  sprain  mechanically  is  far  less  than  by  the  old  method 


benefit  of  the  latter  and  loss  of  the  former,  is  very  familiar  to  all  who  engage  in  manual 
practice.  Dr.  M.  of  Washington  City  who  attended  my  lectures,  recently  related  his 
own  experience  as  follows  :  He  was  called  to  attend  Mrs.  M.  L.  apparently  in  the 
last  stage  of  consumption  contracted  from  her  husband  who  had  died  of  it.  Physi- 
cians said  that  her  lungs  were  gone  and  beyond  hope.  She  had  been  lying  speech- 
less and  unconscious  for  two  weeks,  taking  no  food  at  all  and  looking  like  an  ema- 
ciated corpse.  He  went  by  urgent  request,  expecting  only  to  soothe  her  dying 
moments.  He  placed  his  hands  on  the  front  and  back  of  her  chest  for  fifteen  minutes 
and  felt  that  his  vital  force  suddenly  went  out  to  the  patient.  In  about  five  minutes 
consciousness  returned,  and  she  opened  her  eyes  and  spoke  to  him  by  his  name.  He 
was  so  exhausted  and  oppressed  that  she  perceived  it  and  told  him  to  discontinue 
his  efforts  as  it  was  too  much  for  him  to  bear.  He  feebly  stepped  to  the  bowl, 
bathed  his  forehead  and  returned  in  a  state  of  great  debility  to  his  home,  where  he 
was  kindly  received,  bathed  and  put  to  bed,  rested  twenty-four  hours  and  was  re- 
stored. 

The  patient  immediately  called  for  food  and  ate  heartily.  She  rose  from  the  bed 
and  sat  up  for  a  longer  period  each  succeeding  day,  until,  at  the  end  of  two  weeks, 
she  called  on  the  doctor,  expressing  her  unlimited"  gratitude  and  readiness  to  go  to 
work.  She  waited  two  weeks  longer  bv  his  advice,  then  engaged  in  active  business, 
married  and  bore  six  healthy  children,  and  continued  in  good  health.  Could  there 
be  a  better  illustration  of  the  sudden  and  complete  trausfer  of  a  great  amount  of 
vitality  ? 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  35/ 

of  immobilization  and  cold  applications,"  which  is  a  very  absurd 
treatment,  and  requires,  on  an  average  (according  to  statistics),  over 
25  days,  while  9  days  were  sufficient  by  massage.  It  is  remarkable 
that  nothing  is  said  of  treatment  by  hot  water,  which  is  always  bene'- 
flcial. 

Dr.  Hueter  makes  a  naive  confession,  saying  :  "  If,  as  often 
happens,  the  natural  bone-setters  meet  with  more  success  in  the  treat- 
ment of  joint-troubles  than  regular  practitioners,  it  is  simply  because 
the  latter  are  ignorant  of  the  rational  means  for  curing  these  cases," — 
which  is  self- evidently  true !  Their  cold-water  treatment  is  a  good, 
illustration. 

Schreiber,  in  directing  upward  manipulation  for  sprains,  admits 
that  the  direction  is  not  important  in  neuralgia  and  myalgia,  which 
is  a  virtual  confession  that  the  cure  in  such  cases  is  not  mechanical. 

Glandular  swellings  have  been  successfully  treated  by  manipula- 
tion ;  as  indeed  all  deposits,  accumulations  or  swellings  may  be  thus 
mechanically  relieved,  as  well  as  helped  by  the  vital  force  employed. 
Schreiber,  Bergham  and  Nichaus  report  success  in  this  treatment  of 
mastitis,  the  inflammation  or  swelling  of  the  breast. 

Swelled  tonsils  are  treated  in  the  same  way,  as  well  as  hypertrophy 
of  the  parotid  and  submaxillary  glands,  though  with  less  certainty  in 
the  latter.  "  Ruinart  directs  that  the  finger  previously  dipped  in 
powdered  alum  be  pressed  against  the  tonsils  from  the  inside,  at 
first  gently  and  then  with  considerable  force.  This  treatment  is 
followed  by  an  emollient  gargle.  The  whole  procedure  is  so  simple 
that  the  patient  can  readily  perform  it  upon  himself  after  a  few 
trials. 

.  Even  diseases  and  engorgements  of  the  womb  have  been  treated 
with  considerable  success  by  mechano-therapy  —  two  fingers  being 
inserted  in  its  cavity  while  the  other  hand  is  applied  externally, 
pressure  and  motion  being  gradually  increased.  It  is  claimed  that 
adhesions  have  thus  been  broken  up.  We  have  the  testimony  on 
this  subject  of  Cazeau,  Norstrom,  Asp  (who  treated  72  cases,  em- 
bracing "  chronic  metritis,  ulceration,  ovaritis,  chronic  catarrhal 
troubles,  perimetritis  and  displacements  of  various  kinds),  and  A.  R. 
Jackson  of  Chicago.     In  some  cases  the  treatment  is  external. 

CEdema  of  the  lower   limbs  is  treated  by  upward    manipulation 
Ovarian   cysts   and   other  abdominal   tumors  have   been   treated  by 
abdominal   manipulation  with    benefit.     The  fluids  thus  moved  are 
discharged  in  the  urine. 

"  In  manipulating  the  ©edematous  abdominal  walls  (says  Schreiber) 

the    motions    should    be    made   from    above    and    outward,    in    a 

direction   downward    and    inward,  toward   the  inguinal    region,    for 


358  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XVII. 

the  lymphatics  of  the  anterior  and  lateral  portions  of  the  skin  of 
the  abdomen  empty  into  the  plexus  of  lymph  nodes  lying  within 
the  pelvis  and  upon  the  internal  iliac  muscle.  This  plexus  empties 
its  contents  into  the  superior  lumbar  nodes,  and  these  again  into  the 
thoracic  duct." 

For  stiff  joints,  massage  with  movement  is  recommended  as  a 
very  slow  process,  sometimes  unsuccessful,  and  liable,  if  hurried  too 
vigorously,  to  produce  inflammation. 

For  the  eye.  —  "  According  to  the  unanimous  opinion  of  the  most 
eminent  oculists,  the  application  of  mechano-therapy  is  suited  to  the 
following  diseases  of  the  eye  :  I,  conjunctivitis  pustulosa  ;  2,  conjunc- 
tivitis marginalis  ;  3,  episcleritis,  subacute  and  chronic  ;  4,  all  varieties 
of  corneal  opacities  capable  of  being  cleared,  as  those  following 
pannus,  and  scrofulous  and  parenchymatous  keratitis."  "The  rub- 
bing should  not  last  longer  than  from  one  to  five  minutes,  nor  should 
it  be  performed  oftener  than  once  daily,  except  in  such  cases  where 
rapidity  of  cure  is  specially  called  for."  "The  best  results  of 
ocular  massage  are  obtained  in  cases  of  long-standing  corneal 
opacities."  "  Pagenstecher  asserts  to  have  seen  good  results  in  old, 
long-standing  cases,  and  records  cures  of  opacities  that  had  lasted 
for  thirty  years  or  more.  He  always  uses  an  ointment  of  yellow 
oxide  of  mercury,"  but  others  practise  without  any  ointment. 
"  Latterly  the  mechanical  treatment  of  glaucoma  has  been  advocated." 

"  Klein  was  the  first  to  attempt  the  mechanical  treatment  of 
keratitis  in  its  acute  stage,  and  in  one  instance  he  succeeded  in 
abating  the  inflammation  after  three  days'  treatment  in  a  case  in 
which  the  ether  eye,  similarly  affected,  had  required  six  weeks'  treat- 
ment by  the  old  methods."  Of  course  treatment  of  the  eyes  would 
be  far  more  successful  among  those  who  understand  vital  science. 
Dr.  Mack  of  Boston  and  London  has  been  very  successful  in  the 
treatment  of  the  eyes  in  cases  in  which  the  medical  profession  had 
failed. 

In  "  chlorosis,  §  chronic  catarrhal  gastritis,  pulmonary  phthisis, 
hysteria,  hypochondria  and  diabetes  mellitus,"  Schreiber  says,  "  the 
tiselessness  of  all  mddication  in  these  diseases  has  long  been  recog- 
nized,"—  a  remark  which  shows  the  limited  character  of  his  own 
knowledge  of  therapeutics,  and  the  generally  skeptical  character  of 
the  profession.  Nevertheless  he  may  be  a  competent  witness  as  to 
the  effects  of  mechanical 'therapy.  He  says  that  in  neurasthenia, 
hysteria  and  hypochondria  "sometimes  a  great  deal  may  be  accom- 
plished, in  others  very  little."  Yet  in  such  cases  magnetic  healers 
produce  wonderful  results,  especially  in  hysteria,  which  promptly 
yields    to    treatment.     His    confession    of   the   failure   of    mechano- 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  359 

therapy  is  instructive,  showing,  as  it  does,  the  effects  of  professional 
ignorance  in  relying  entirely  on  mechanical  force.  What  ne  says 
upon  the  treatment  of  these  cases  is  hardly  worth  mentioning. 

When  we  compare  with  the  results  of  mechano-therapy  or  massage 
those  of  the  vital  treatment,  in  which  the  nervauric  influence  is  the 
chief  reliance,  the  contrast  is  as  great  as  in  passing  from  a  desert  to 
a  tropical  garden.  We  leave  the  slow,  dull  labors  and  the  dreary 
delays  and  frequent  failures,  to  find,  in  many  cases,  a  restoration  of 
health  so  speedy  and  surprising  as  sometimes  to  excite  a  suspicion 
that,  after  all,  a  disease  so  easily  conquered  was  not  as  formidable 
as  it  seemed.  The  difficulty  in  many  cases  is  to  induce  the  members 
of  a  profession  of  which  so  many  are  stultified  in  their  education 
by  the  dogmatic  ignorance  of  the  colleges  to  admit  the  possibility 
of  marvellous  cures  when  not  witnessed  by  themselves. 

When  the  impressible  temperament  exists  in  the  patient,  and  the 
operator,  with  high  vitality,  is  guided  by  correct  principles  and 
psychometric  intuition,  the  cures  are  so  marvellous  and  speedy  as 
to  be  really  miraculous,  in  the  proper  sense  of  the  word  miracle,  which 
means  not  as  Hume  defined  it  a  violation  of  the  laws  of  nature, 
which  is  of  course  an  impossibility,  but  a  very  wonderful  thing, 
transcending  common  experience. 

Having  given  so  much  space  to  the  claims  of  massage,  I  think  it 
necessary  to  state  the  results  that  may  be  expected  from  truly 
scientific  treatment,  and  therefore  introduce  a  few  statements  from 
my  pupils,  before  presenting  which  I  would  mention  that  manipula- 
tion of  morbid  parts,  if  not  controlled  by  the  mechanical  massage 
theories  which  attribute  everything  to  physical  force,  will  not  fail, 
with  intelligent  and  humane  persons,  to  make  many  cures  and  give 
great  relief  by  the  vital  power  which  inevitably  operates  when  it  has 
the  opportunity. 

An  excellent  illustration  is  afforded  by  sprains,  in  the  treatment  of 
which  the  supercilious  prejudices  of  the  profession  have,  had  very 
disastrous  effects.  The  superiority  of  manipulation  over  all  other 
measures  in  the  treatment  of  sprains,  though  generally  neglected  by 
physicians,  was  well  established  by  experience  among  the  French. 
A  work  on  manipulation  published  at  Paris  in  1863  saos  :  "Indeed, 
according  to  the  opinion  of  MM.  Bagin,  Bonnet,  Brulet,  Elleaume, 
Girard,  Labataud,  Magne,  Mery,  Quesnoy  and  Ribes,  who  have  recently 
published  their  observations  upon  sprains  cured  by  manipulation,  these 
affections  should  be  treated  from  the  commencement  by  this  procedure. 
The  pain,  ecchymosis  and  swelling  disappear  as  if  by  enchantment. " 
"  As  M.  Bizet  says  in  his  monograph  upon  the  treatment  of  recent 
sprains  by  manipulation,  impressed  by  M.   Baudin's    remark  at  the 


360  MECHANO-THERAPY  [CHAP.    XV1L 

Academy  of  Sciences  that  in  78  amputations  of  the  leg  or  foot  per- 
formed by  army  surgeons  sixty  arose  from  sprains  as  their  starting 
point,  we  ought  to  seize  with  eagerness  each  opportunity  to  try  a 
means  which  will  give  an  unlooked-for  success."  "  The  cure  by  manip- 
ulation (says  M.  Bizet)  is  more  prompt  and  certain  in  proportion  as  the 
remedy  follows,  so  to  speak,  upon  the  accident."  "  Of  all  means  which 
are  recommended  for  sprains,  manipulation  is  the  simplest,  the  easiest 
in  application  and  the  most  efficacious,  for  it  cures  a  simple  sprain  at 
the  fist  sitting,  and  seldom  is  its  frequent  repetition  necessary." 

"  Pouteau  had  already  recognized  this  when  he  said  :  "  Sprains  may 
be  instantaneously  cured  by  this  means  (manipulation),  and  I  cannot 
understand  why  our  surgeons  ordinarily  are  unsuccessful  with  this 
little  procedure,  which  they  give  up  to  uneducated  persons." 

"  At  the  present  day  those  physicians  who  have  it  in  their  power 
to  bring  this  method  into  use  are  unwilling  even  to  make  a  trial  of  it, 
or  to  do  as  much  as  those  of  Pouteau's  time."  "But  we  ought  not,''  as 
M.  Nelaton  says,  "  systematically  to  reject  a  useful  means  because 
it  lias  been  discovered  and  employed  by  men  who  are  unskilled  in  medi- 
cal art."  In  this  remark  Nelaton  alludes  to  a  crime  against  humanity 
which  would  not  be  so  common  in  the  profession  if  it  had  any  proper 
teaching  of  medical  ethics.  The  professional  warfare  against  vital 
treatment  and  psychic  diagnosis,  refusing  to  give  them  attention  or 
justice,  with  the  most  calamitous  results  to  patients,  is  one  of  the 
crimes  concerning  which  we  may  well  say  :  "  Father,  forgive  them, — 
they  know  not  what  they  do."  How  vastly  superior  is  treatment 
which  brings  the  vitality  of  the  operator  (sometimes  a  marvellous 
power  indeed)  into  contact  with  the  patient. 

Dr.  H.  Frank  at  a  recent  meeting  of  German  Scientists  claimed 
that  for  the  revival  of  the  apparently  dead  there  were  two  effi- 
cient means,  —  electricity  and  manual  concussion.  His  method  was 
vigorous  strokes  with  the  hands  on  the  ileo-caecal  region  in  an  upward 
direction,  which  affects  the  respiration  and  the  heart.  After  fifteen 
or  twenty  such  strokes,  he  strikes  over  the  heart  repeatedly  with  the 
palm  of  his  hand.  He  keeps  up  such  operations  for  an  hour  or  more 
even  after  resuscitation  and  claims  the  recovery  of  life  in  fourteen  cases 
—  hanging,  drowning  and  carbonic-oxide  asphyxia,  —  and  in  one  case 
of  croup.  One  of  the  cases  was  of  apparent  death  by  chloroform. 
Aside  from  vital  influence  there  is  no  doubt  of  the  manipulations 
which  force  up  the  diaphragm  and  thus  imitate  respiration. 

All  methods  of  treatment  have  value  which  bring  a  vigorous  and 
benevolent  operator  into  contact  with  the  patient.  Vigorous  exercises, 
in  which  the  operator  holds  the  patient's  hands  while  they  struggle 
against  each  other,  have  been  used  with  much  benefit. 


CHAP.    XVII.]  INXLUDING    MASSAGE.  361 

Among  the  Japanese  manipulation  is  performed  by  a  class  of  oper- 
ators called  ammas.  "  His  art  (says  W.  J.  Holland)  consists  in 
kneading  all  the  muscles  of  the  body  and  bringing  them  into  play, 
and  he  is  regarded  as  a  useful  functionary,  second  only  in  importance 
to  the  physician  as  a  healer  of  physical  disorders.  The  art  is  prac- 
tised not  only  by  men,  but  also  by  women,  and  at  almost  every  inn 
where  I  have  stopped  among  the  first  persons  to  proffer  their  services 
have  been  the  ammas. 

"  In  the  operation  of  shampooing,  as  practised  by  the  amma,  the 
patient  lies  upon  a  futon,  or  rug,  while  the  amma  kneels  beside  him. 
The  first  act  in  the  drama  deals  with  the  abdominal  cavity.  Placing 
the  hand  on  either  side  of  the  abdomen,  above  the  hips,  the  amma 
compresses  the  body  laterally  a  number  of  times  ;  then  drawing  up 
the  loose  folds  of  the  flesh,  he  kneads  and  pinches  them,  at  the  same 
time  making  passes  which  correspond  in  their  direction  with  that  of 
the  colon.  This  portion  of  the  treatment  ended,  each  leg  is  attacked 
and  vigorously  rubbed  and  kneaded,  the  process  terminating  by  a 
smart  bastinado  administered  to  the  soles  of  the  feet. 

"  In  rubbing  and  kneading  the  muscles  use  is  made  of  a  round  ball 
of  box-wood.  The  arms  and  chest  are  treated  as  the  legs,  and  then 
the  patient  is  turned  over,  face  downward,  and  the  shoulders  and 
back  are  punched  and  kneaded  until  the  breath  almost  forsakes  the 
body.  The  entire  performance  ends  with  a  vigorous  rubbing  of  the 
neck,  which,  in  my  case,  seemed  to  threaten  the  dislocation  of  the 
cervical  vertebrae.  The  amount  of  strength  in  fingers  and  wrists  dis- 
played by  the  amma  is  quite  remarkable. " 

In  this  rude  operation  the  benefit  lies  in  forcing  the  circulation  of 
manipulated  parts,  and  in  receiving  the  vital  influence  of  the  operator. 

In  conclusion,  what  is  the  sum  total  of  the  mechano-therapy  which 
has  filled  so  large  a  space  in  professional  literature  and  practice  ? 

1.  Mechanical  pressure  on  the  course  of  the  bloodvessels  and  lym- 
phatics promotes  circulation  and  nutrition,  and  causes  absorption  of 
effusions,  deposits  and  morbid  growths. 

This  being  nearly  self-evident  to  any  good  phsyiologist,  it  may 
well  be  asked  what  has  mechano-therapy  added  to  our  knowledge  ? 
Its  most  distinct  contribution  is  in  showing  the  applicability  of 
manual  pressure  to  the  tonsils  and  the  womb,  and  to  diseases  of  the 
eye.  Its  mechanical  value,  however,  is  indefinite,  for  in  all  cases  it  is 
associated  with  the  vital  influence. 

2.  Active  manipulation  of  muscles  with  active  and  passive  move- 
ments are  found  to  be  efficient  in  the  cure  of  neuralgia  and  rheuma- 
tism when  there  is  no  inflammation  present.  Dr.  Schreiber  deserves 
credit    for   showing   the  success  of   long-continued   movements  and 


362  INCLUDING    MASSAGE.  [CHAP.    XVII. 

forcible  manipulations  in  such  cases.  Still  they  are  not  as  efficient  as 
active  movements  performed  under  strong  mental  excitement.  The 
painful  severity  of  this  treatment  might  have  been  entirely  overcome 
by  medical  electricity. 

3.  The  importance  of  flagellation  and  blows  in  cases  of  narcotic 
poisoning  and  drowning  has  been  fully  shown. 

The  sum  total  of  mechano-therapy  as  a  contribution  to  therapeutics 
and  the  range  of  its  power  is  scarcely  equal  to  that  of  any  one  leading 
drug.  It  is  incomparably  inferior  to  that  of  electricity  and  adds  very 
little  to  the  vast  range  of  therapeutic  power  which  belongs  to  the 
vital  treatment  guided  by  Sarcognomy. 

Moreover  as  a  blind,  unscientific  treatment  it  is  often  injurious  from 
itsinappropriatenessand  from  the  coarse,  uncongenial  influence  of  the 
person  employed  as  a  rubber.  Hence  Dr.  Landon  Gray  said  at  the 
Academy  of  Medicine  (New  York,  October,  1888)  that  "massage  was 
an  uncertain  remedy,  often  irritating  to  the  patient,  and  was  only  to 
be  used  in  connection  with  the  treatment  mentioned." 


CHAPTER    XVIII. 

RATIONAL  PRACTICE  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY. 

The  proper  philosophic  view  of  medical  science,  sects  and  prejudices  —  False 
ideas  of  poisons  —  Rational  practice — Statements  of  Dr.  Grosvenor  Swan,  Dr. 
J.  P.  Chamberlin,  Dr.  Wm.  E.  Wheelock,  Dr.  A.J.  Symes,  Dr.  Z.  L.  Baldwin,  Dr. 
Orrin  Robertson  and  L.  A.  Hulse,  Esq.,  concerning  their  practice,  guided  by  Sarcog- 
nomy  and  Psychometry. 

The  introduction  of  a  true  therapeutic  revolution  should  be 
guided,  not  by  a  destructive  and  intolerant  iconoclasm,  but  by  the 
genial  conservatism  which  holds  on  to  all  the  knowledge  already 
attained,  gives  due  credit  to  the  pioneers  of  science  (whose  in- 
complete discoveries  the  multitude  are  blindly  following),  and  har- 
moniously blends  the  old  with  the  new. 

Far  be  it  from  the  writer  to  discredit  the  vast  attainments,  the 
elaborate  research,  the  minute  knowledge,  the  pathological  and 
physiological  accumulations  and  triumphant  achievements  of  the 
medical  profession  during  the  last  three  centuries,  which  are  pre- 
served in  medical  literature  (and  much  more  imperfectly  in  medical 
colleges),  because  the  profession  generally,  with  the  inherited  instincts 
of  warlike,  barbarian  ages  (which  it  will  require  centuries  to  over- 
come), has  been,  and  still  is,  gregariously  devoted  to  authority  and 
jealous  against  innovation  and  progress:  still  more  lamentably  it  has 
been  devoted  to  professional  dignity,  reputation  and  pedantic  learn- 
ing, instead  of  looking  solely  to  curative  means  and  measures,  from 
whatever  source  they  come. 

The  champions  of  medical  orthodoxy  might  justly  speak  with 
eloquence  of  the  progress  of  anatomy,  surgery  and  pathology  ;  but 
when  they  look  for  therapeutic  results,  the  confession  must  be  made 
that  comparatively  little  effort  has  been  made  to  discover  the  innu- 
merable agencies  in  which  nature  offers  an  antidote  for  every  possible 
disease, —  a  negligence  which  induced  Prof.  Stille  of  Philadelphia  to 
confess  in  his  "  Materia  Medica  "  that  :  "  Truly,  nearly  every  medicine 
has  become  a  popular  remedy  before  being  adopted  or  even  tried  by 
physicians."  Another  author  on  the  materia  medica,  Dr.  Pereira, 
says,  "  Nux  vomica  is  one  of  the  few  remedies  the  discovery  of  which 
is  not  the  effect  of  mere  chance." 


364  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

The  last  twenty  years  have  done  something  to  remove  this  oppro- 
brium, especially  through  the  action  of  druggists  whose  mercantile 
enterprise  has  placed  them  in  the  front  rank  of  progress.  But  still  a 
profound  and  sullen  lethargy  exists  in  reference  to  the  experience 
and  discoveries  of  American  physicians  (classed  as  Eclectic)  and  the 
wonderful  experience  of  the  followers  of  Hahnemann. 

Narrow  and  dogmatic  minds  think  there  must  be  an  irreconcilable 
antagonism  between  the  contributions  of  Hahnemann  and  all  prior 
therapeutic  knowledge,  requiring  us,  if  we  recognize  the  one,  to  treat 
the  other  with  absolute  contempt.  Even  many  Homoeopaths  share 
in  the'  bigotry  and  intolerance  of  their  rivals.  This  incompatibility 
is  entirely  imaginary,  and  there  is  no  reason  why  an  enlightened 
physician,  educated  in  either  school,  should  not  avail  himself  of  the 
resources  of  both,  with  the  eclectic  liberality  which  demands  that 
he  should  neglect  no  agency  that  can  help  his  patient  and  disregard 
no  experience  of  his  intelligent  brethren. 

Is  it  not  obvious  or  self-evident  that,  if  a  remedy  acts  upon  any 
organ  stimulating  or  rousing  its  action  for  the  time  being,  the 
same  remedy  used  in  excess  or  continued  too  long  will  overpower  and 
destroy  the  organ  which  in  judicious  use  it  helps  ?  as  cold,  which, 
moderately  administered,  by  a  cold  bath  briefly  given,  or  by  a  cold 
atmosphere,  is  a  powerful  and  grateful  tonic,  but,  in  excess,  over- 
powers all  the  functions  of  life,  producing  torpor  and  death. 

I  believe  there  is  no  important  exception  to  this  law  that  the 
primary  physiological  effect  of  any  remedy  corresponds  to  its  ulti- 
mate pathogenetic  effect,  operating  on  the  same  organ,  building  up 
health  in  one  case  and  creating  disease  in  the  other.  Hence  there 
is  no  reason  why  we  should  not  be  equally  instructed  by  the  old- 
fashioned,  simple  method  of  observing  the  beneficial  primary  effects 
of  a  moderate  dose  of  any  remedy,  and  the  Hahnemannian  method 
of  seeking  its  destructive  or  pathogenetic  effects,  —  the  two  evi- 
dently coinciding,  and  both  being  necessary  to  a  perfect  under- 
standing and  a  practical  guidance.  I  hope,  therefore,  that  every 
reader  of  this  volume  will  utterly  ignore  and  discredit  the  old  and 
stupid  Homoeopathic  and  Allopathic  contention  and  quarrel. 

I  may  suggest  to  both  parties  that  the  old  method  of  studying  the 
materia  medica  (so  absurdly  christened  Allopathic)  is  just  as  rational 
as  the  new  method,  and  consequently  that  it  is  not  indispensable  to 
study  every  remedy  in  its  pathogenesis  alone  (a  tedious  and  dis- 
agreeable method),  for  the  speedy  and  delightful  method  of  Psychom- 
etry  enables  us  in  a  few  minutes  to  ascertain  the  character  of  any 
remedy  as  truly  as  by  tracing  its  pathogenesis  ;  and,  consequently,  if 
time    permits,   I  may  be   able   to    give   the  world    a   psychometric 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  365 

materia  medica,  which  will  be  far  more  accurate  and  comprehensive 
than  the  results  of  the  old-fashioned  clinical  experience,  though  it 
may  not  overwhelm  us  with  the  bewildering  details  of  pathogenesis 
and  the  contradictory  results  of  clinical  experience. 

Meantime  I  would  urge  every  physician  to  cultivate  his  own 
psychometric  capacity,  and  study  the  materia  medica  by  experiments 
on  himself,  if  possible  ;  but  if,  unfortunately,  his  psychometric  power 
is  limited,  he  may  investigate  through  the  numerous  natural  psy- 
chometers  who  may  be  found  in  any  community.  When  by  the 
psychometric  method  he  obtains  a  sympathetic  perception  of  the 
condition  of  his  patient,  the  same  psychometric  perception  will 
enable  him  to  trace  the  relation  between  the  pathological  condition 
and  the  remedy.  He  may  hold  the  remedy  with  one  hand,  and  the 
patient  with  the  other,  and  recognize  their  adaptation.  This  is 
rational  practice,  for  it  is  eminently  successful. 

The  unfortunate  narrowness  of  the  human  mind,  and  the  ignorant 
credulity  of  many,  which  yields  to  the  dictation  of  bigotry,  are  the 
source  of  the  contentious  dogmatism  at  present.  The  larger  class 
look  exclusively  to  drugs  administered  with  very  little  scientific 
accuracy  and  a  deplorable  limitation  in  number, — not  one-tenth  of 
what  every  physician  ought  to  know,  —  while  minorities  adhere  to 
the  exclusive  use  of  infinitesimal  preparations,  the  exclusive  use  of 
water,  the  exclusive  use  of  vegetable  remedies,  the  exclusive  use  of 
what  they  are  pleased  to  call  non-poisonous  or  hygienic  agents,  the 
exclusive  use  of  mental  influence,  or  the  exclusive  use  of  animal 
magnetism,  all  of  which  are  valuable  in  their  places,  but  the  exclu- 
sive use  of  any  one  of  these  shows  a  lack  of  knowledge  and  lack  of 
the  disposition  to  investigate  candidly ;  and  the  gentleman  who 
recommended  the  use  of  nothing  but  Brandreth's  pills  was  but 
another  example  of  the  prevailing  narrowness  of  mind. 

The  prejudice  against  drugs  as  poisons  results  from  a  superficial 
mode  of  thought,  influenced  by  the  gross  or  poisonous  use  of  medi- 
cines by  narrow-minded  or  reckless  physicians.  Those  who  have 
fallen  into  this  prejudice  do  not  understand  the  action  of  medicine 
and  the  meaning  of  poison.  The  poison  of  their  imagination  does 
not  exist  in  nature,  for  there  is  no  distinct  line  of  separation  between 
food,  medicine  and  poison.  The  same  substance  may  be  at  once  a 
food,  a  medicine  or  a  poison,  according  to  the  method  of  its  use.  A 
food  nourishes  or  sustains  the  body,  a  medicine  makes  a  modifying 
impression  on  the  vital  functions,  and  a  poison  makes  an  impression 
so  forcible  as  to  be  injurious.  Salt  as  commonly  used  is  a  necessary 
food,  more  freely  used  it  becomes  a  medicine,  and  in  large  quantity 
a  poison.      Coffee  and  tea  are  medical  foods,  which  may  be  concen- 


366  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

trated  until  a  moderate  dose  becomes  poisonous,  — as  in  caffeine  and 
theine.  Acids  generally  are  medical  foods,  which  become  poisons 
in  excess.  Alkalies  though  necessary  elements  of  our  foods  would 
be  poisonous  if  used  in  large  quantities.  Oats  though  a  good  ex- 
ample of  food  contain  elements  which  separately  used  are  medicines 
or  poisons  according  to  the  dose  given.  Lettuce  though  recognized 
as  a  food  contains  a  valuable  medicine.  Vanilla,  nutmeg  and  the 
peppers  used  as  foods  are  actively  medical.  Dandelion,  a  common 
food,  contains  a  valuable  medicine  ;  so  does  asparagus  ;  and  I  am  quite 
sure  as  valuable  a  medicine  might  be  obtained  from  the  turnip  tops 
which  are  used  similarly.  All  foods  modify  vital  action  in  some 
degree  and  thus  have  a  medical  character,  so  that  a  profound  study 
of  dietetics  would  enable  us  to  substitute  foods  very  largely  for  medi- 
cines. Buttermilk  is  a  good  food,  but  its  lactic  acid  is  medical ;  and 
peach  leaves,  which  yield  a  decoction  sometimes  used  harmlessly  in 
domestic  practice,  contain  prussic  acid,  one  of  the  most  powerful 
poisons  known.  Thus  all  foods  are  medical  in  various  degrees,  and 
a  few  are  poisons  if  freely  used  ;  while  a  few  medicines  —  such  as 
phosphates,  iron,  maltine  and  cod-liver  oil —  are  decidedly  foods. 

But  whenever  any  substance  by  concentration  becomes  unsafe  to 
use  in  doses  above  a  few  grains  it  is  called  poison,  to  signify  the 
danger  of  using  it.  But  how  small  a  fatal  or  very  injurious  dose 
should  be  to  deserve  the  name  of  poison  no  one  can  say,  for  the 
word  poison  is  more  an  epithet  of  abhorrence  than  a  scientific  term. 
Whatever  is  medicinal  may  be  used  in  a  poisonous  dose,  and  a  few  of 
our  foods  are  active  enough  to  become  poisons  in  large  doses.  The 
word  poison,  therefore,  simply  means  an  article  of  great  power  which 
needs  to  be  handled  carefully.  There  is  no  such  thing  as  a  distinct 
class  of  poisons  as  vulgarly  understood,  —  a  class  of  substances  in- 
imical to  life,  which  have  no  other  effect,  even  in  small  quantity, 
than  to  injure  or  poison.  There  is  no  substance  in  nature  which  may 
not  be  beneficial  to  man,  rightly  applied,  or  which  is  dangerous  in  an 
infinitesimal  preparation,  unless  it  be  the  morbid  elements  from  the 
animal  body  in  a  state  of  disease.  Yet  even  these,  which  come 
nearer  to  the  definition  of  a  poison,  are  shown  by  Homoeopathic 
research  to  be  capable  of  a  beneficial  use.  The  word  poison,  there- 
fore, does  not  define  any  class  of  bodies,  but  means  something  which 
under  the  circumstances  and  mode  of  application  is  extremely  injuri- 
ous to  a  human  being.  Hence  no  judicious  application  of  any  medi- 
cine whatever  can  be  properly  called  a  poison,  no  matter  how  potent 
it  may  be.  The  venom  of  the  rattlesnake,  in  an  infinitesimal  prepara- 
tion called  Lachesis,  may  be  used  as  a  valuable  medicine.  And  the 
highly  corrosive  poison,  muriatic  acid,  may  be  used  in  sufficient  dilu- 


CHAP.    XVII  I.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  .    367 

tion  as  a  medicinal  food;  and,  indeed,  combined  with  the  corrosive 
caustic  soda,  it  becomes  a  necessary  food,  —  common  salt.  These  re- 
marks are  necessary  to  counteract  the  tendency  of  those  who  become 
acquainted  with  nervauric  therapeutics  to  neglect  and  discard  medi- 
cines, the  cheapest  and  most  convenient  of  all  therapeutic  measures. 
As  well  might  we  reject  everything  but  bread  from  our  daily  food. 

My  pupils  are  instructed  not  only  to  use  their  own  vital  power  and 
electric  currents  guided  by  Sarcognomy,  but  to  study  remedies  care- 
fully and  use  them  as  required,  both  medical  and  mechanical,  under 
the  guidance  of  Psychometry.  Their  practice  in  accordance  with  my 
directions  is,  therefore,  the  true  type  of  the  rational  practice  of  the 
future.  That  they  are  very  successful  in  doing  this  —  curing  cases 
abandoned  as  incurable  under  the  old  practice — is  shown  by  their 
letters  and  statements,  a  few  of  which  I  here  introduce,  riot  as 
examples  of  perfect  therapeutics,  but  as  illustrations  of  what  may  be 
realized  by  all  well  qualified  students  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy.  In 
the  following  statements  the  full  names  of  the  patients  were  given, 
and  they  are  at  the  service  of  any  who  wish  to  inquire,  but  I  have 
preferred  to  follow  the  usual  custom,  giving  only  the  initials,  except 
in  the  report  of  Dr.  Swan. 

Many  of  the  cures  performed  by  my  students  are  of  the  class 
called  marvellous,  and  generally  considered  incredible ;  but  similar 
cures  by  thousands  have  been  made  by  those  who  have  by  accident 
or  intuition  followed  the  laws  of  Sarcognomy.  It  is  nearly  a  century 
since  an  American  physician,  Dr.  T.  Gale  of  the  State  of  New  York, 
with  a  rude  electrical  instrument,  was  led  by  his  benevolent  spirit 
into  the  extensive  application  of  electricity  in  all  varieties  of 
diseases.  He  followed  the  promptings  of  benevolent  common- 
sense,  and  in  doing  so  closely  approximated  the  principles  of  Sar- 
cognomy. His  results,  published  in  a  small  volume  in  1802  at  Troy, 
far  surpassed  those  of  any  medical  practice  then  known,  and  in  fact 
were  far  beyond  the  electro-therapeutic  practice  of  to-day.  But  his 
book  produced  no  impression  on  the  dogmatism  of  the  colleges.  To 
me  it  was  deeply  interesting  as  a  demonstration,  a  century  in  advance, 
of  the  truth  of  much  that  I  am  teaching.  He  proved  by  his  practice 
that  static  electricity,  applied  according  to  correct  principles,  approxi- 
mated the  character  of  a  panacea,  conquering  fevers,  inflammations 
and  the  entire  range  of  diseases  met  in  common  practice,  curing 
every  case  in  epidemics  of  the  most  malignant  character. 

STATEMENT    OF    DR.  GROSVENOR    SWAN    OF    HARTFORD,    CONN., 
A    GRADUATE    OF    1 849. 

At  the  time  of  his  graduation  I  taught  Dr.  Swan  to  exercise  his 
psychometric  powers,  but  it  was  not  until  after  he  had  established  a 


63  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 


solid  professional  reputation  in  medicine,  surgery  and  obstetrics  that 
he  was  induced  to  try  his  personal  powers  in  healing,  in  which  he 
has  had  very  remarkable  success. 

The  following  cases,  stated  at  my  request,  are  fair  examples  of  his 
practice  :  — 

"  Since  you  have  so  kindly  urged  me  to  give  you  some  of  my  most 
remarkable  cases,  in  which  I  have  been  aided  by  my  knowledge  of 
your  Science  of  Sarcognomy,  I  give  you  —  with  some  degree  of 
reluctance,  I  must  confess  — the  following.  I  have  hesitated  only  for 
the  reason  that  the  cases  are  so  wonderful,  I  fear  that  they  may  too 
seriously  challenge  the  belief  of  the  reader. 

"  I  do  not  send  you  any  affidavits,  or  certificates  of  i  remarkable 
cures,'  for  if  I  should  you  might  conclude  that  I  may  have  reasons 
for  thinking  that  my  own  veracity  might  not  be  accepted  as  sufficient 
authority  in  the  case  of  such  extraordinary  facts  as  I  am  about  to 
communicate. 

"  For  my  success  in  the  cases  that  I  shall  now  relate  to  you,  I  can- 
not say  how  much  I  am  indebted  to  my  knowledge  of  your  Science 
of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy,  nor  how  much  to  what  you  were  once 
pleased  to  term  my  'personal  potency!  I  can  only  say  that  in  all 
these  cases  I  have  not  failed  to  assert  my  confidence  in  the  science, 
by  applying  its  principles.  Not  with  the  thought  and  feeling  of  an 
investigator,  but  the  feeling  that  it  was  my  duty  to  make  use  of  all 
the  means  within  my  knowledge  by  which  I  might  hope  to  restore 
my  patient." 

First  Case:  Hon.  Thurlow  Weed. —  "In  the  spring  of  1872  I  was 
called  to  see  the  Hon.  Thurlow  Weed,  who  then  resided  on  12th 
Street  in  New  York  City.  I  found  that  he  had  been  suffering  for 
about  four  years  from  a  paralysis  that  rendered  him  incapable  of 
raising  his  chin  from  his  chest.  He  had  been  to  Europe  in  search 
of  relief,  but  he  had  failed  to  obtain  any  benefit  from  the  best  medi- 
cal skill  that  he  was  there  able  to  find,  and  he  returned  to  his  home, 
fully  believing  that  during  the  rest  of  his  life  he  was  doomed  to  go 
about  looking  downward.  From  the  time  of  my  first  treatment  Mr. 
Weed  was  enabled  to  look  up  and  rejoice. 

"  When  I  was  first  called  to  Mr.  Weed  he  was  sick  in  bed  and 
could  only  rest  in  one  position.  He  was  soon  relieved,  so  that  he 
could  rest  in  any  position,  and  in  two  or  three  clays  his  tall  figure 
was  again  seen  on  the  streets.  Mr.  Weed  was  cured  and  I  returned 
to  Chicago. 

"  Soon  after  this  Mr.  Weed  made  a  visit  to  Albany,  where  he  had 
spent  his  best  years  in  the  most  active  struggles  of  his  life.  While 
on  this  visit  he  met  Frederick  Seward,  who  was  greatly  surprised  at 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  369 

his  appearance,  and  after  learning  all  the  particulars  he  returned  to 
Auburn,  N.  Y.,  and  informed  his  father,  Ex-Go  v.  W.  H.  Seward. 
This  information  induced  his  father  to  send  for  me  to  see  what  I 
might  be  able  to  do  in  his  case.  He  not  only  dictated  a  letter  him- 
self, but  had  his  physician  write.  When  these  letters  reached  me  I 
was  in  Madison,  Wis.,  where  I  had  been  called  by  Prof.  Carpenter,  a 
teacher  in  the  Law  Department  of  the  Madison  University." 

Hon.  IV.  H.  Seward.  —  "I  immediately  responded  to  Mr.  Seward's 
message,  and  when  I  arrived  at  his  home  I  found  him  almost  entirely 
helpless.  He  could  not  get  out  of  his  chair  without  assistance,  and 
he  had  no  more  use  of  his  arms  than  he  could  have  had  if  they  had 
been  whittled  out  of  wood  and  tied  to  his  shoulders  with  strings. 
Here  was  a  good  opportunity  for  applying  the  principles  of  Sarcog- 
nomy. 

"  In  the  first  treatment  I  enabled  him  to  rise  from  his  chair  un- 
assisted, and  walk  wherever  he  might  choose,  about  the  premises. 
After  one  more  treatment  I  put  life  and  action  into  his  left  arm,  so 
that  he  was  able  to  feed  himself  with  it.  I  remained  with  Mr. 
Seward  for  two  weeks ;  his  general  health  was  improved,  but  I  did 
not  better  the  paralysis  much  after  a  few  of  my  first  treatments. 

"  From  Auburn  I  came  to  New  York,  where  I  remained  until  the 
1st  of  October,  ,rj2\  and  I  then  came  to  this  city,  and  have  made 
Hartford  my  home  ever  since." 

Samuel  Rogers.  — "  Soon  after  I  came  here  a  young  man  was 
brought  to  me  from  Utica,  N.  Y.,  by  the  name  of  Rogers.  (Well- 
known  in  Utica,  by  the  name  of  Sam  Rogers.)  He  was  suffering 
from  paraplegia.  When  sitting  in  a  chair  he  could  not  raise  a  foot 
from  the  floor,  nor  could  he  scarcely  move  a  toe.  One  evening  I 
invited  in,  to  see  my  patient,  a  couple  of  gentlemen  who  were 
supposed  to  possess  rather  strong  magnetic  powers,  and  I  had  them 
try  the  effect  of  their  treatment  in  this  case.  They  failed  to  pro- 
duce the  least  perceptible  effect.  It  then  came  my  turn  to  see  what 
I  could  do.  Instead  of  treating  the  limbs  below  the  knees  I  gave 
my  attention  to  the  region  of  Muscularity  >  and  treated  along  the  line 
of  Locomotion.  The  result  was  that  he  was  instantly  able  to  raise  his 
feet  from  the  floor.  The  people  present  thought  that  it  was  owing 
to  the  superior  power  of  my  magnetism,  but  I  endeavored  to  explain 
to  them  that  it  might  be,  in  a  great  measure,  owing  to  my  knowledge 
of  a  Science  of  which,  I  think,  they  had  not  then  heard.  Mr. 
Rogers  had,  in  a  few  weeks,  the  use  of  his  limbs  restored  to  him, 
and  it  is  not  long  since  I  heard  of  him  as  being  engaged  in  editing 
and  publishing  a  newspaper  in  some  town  in  the  western  part  of  the 
State  of  New  York." 


37°  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

Tumors :  Mrs.  Barnes.  —  "  About  this  time  I  was  called  on  by  a 
Mrs.  Loren  W.  Barnes,  who  was  suffering  from  a  well-defined 
scirrhous  tumor,  located  in  the  left  breast.  She  informed  me  that 
her  physicians  pronounced  it  cancerous,  and  that  she  had  been  under 
treatment  for  it  for  the  past  six  months.  She  was  perfectly  cured, 
without  medicine  or  any  local  application  except  my  hands,  in  less 
than  six  weeks'  time.  She  is  now  living  at  No.  18  Florence  Street, 
in  this  city,  and  she  has  never  had  any  trouble  from  it  since. 

"  Another  remarkable  case  which  occurred  sometime  after  this  was 
that  of  Miss  Cora  Parkhurst,  No.  50  Summer  Street,  this  city.  She 
had  been  under  treatment  for  about  a  year  for  an  encysted  tumor 
with  a  bony  shell,  which  was  attached  to  left  side  of  the  inferior 
maxillary,  and  near  the  root  of  the  first  molar,  which  I  think  had 
been  extracted.  I  was  two  or  three  months  in  treating  this  case, 
during  which  time  the  ossific  matter  of  the  shell  was  completely 
absorbed,  and  the  tumor  entirely  disappeared.  This  tumor  was  near 
the  size  of  a  hen's  egg,  and,  as  I  was  informed,  was  increasing  rapidly 
in  size  at  the  time  that  I  commenced  treating  it.  In  this  case  no 
medicine  was  given,  and  no  external  application  was  made  use  of 
except  my  hands.  There  is  not  a  vestige  of  the  tumor  left,  so  that 
it  would  be  impossible  to  tell  which  side  of  the  face  it  had  occupied 
by  the  most  careful  examination. 

"  It  has  been  said  that  there  is  '  nothing  new  under  the  sun  ; '  so 
in  these  cases  you  must  know  that  I  am  giving  you  nothing  new, 
for  in  1666  there  was  a  man  in  London  by  the  name  of  Greatrakes, 
who,  according  to  the  published  Transactions  of  the  Royal  Society  of 
London,  when  Sir  Robert  Boyle  was  president,  cured  cancers  and 
tumors  in  the  same  way." 

Case  of  Mrs.  Griffin  of  Granby,  Conn.  —  "Some  time  in  the  month 
of  July  or  August,  in  1876  or  'jj,  I  was  called  into  the  town  of 
Granby  to  see  a  Mrs.  Griffin  (I  cannot  give  you  the  exact  date,  as  I 
took  no  note  of  the  case  at  the  time),  who  had  been  prostrated,  I 
think,  with  what  the  doctors  called  childbed  fever.  When  I  saw 
her  she  had  been  under  the  care  of  the  doctor  in  town,  and  of  a  con- 
sulting physician,  who  had  been  brought  from  Granville,  Mass.,  for 
about  six  weeks.  For  the  past  week  she  had  not  been  expected  to 
live  from  one  day  to  another.  Her  physicians  had  declared  her  case 
hopeless.  Her  husband  and  friends  were  in  despair.  She  had 
heard  of  me  at  some  time,  and  feebly  expressed  the  wish  that  I 
should  be  sent  for,  and  with  all  possible  despatch  I  was  sent  for. 
The  messenger  was  the  father  of  the  young  man,  the  husband  of  the 
sick  woman.  He  said  that  he  had  not  come  for  me  expecting  that  I 
could  cure  her,  as  it  was  now  past  the  time  when  anything  could  be 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  371 

done,  and  he  did  not  think  it  at  all  likely  that  she  would  be  living 
when  we  should  get  there.  The  husband,  he  told  me,  had  no  more 
hopes  than  he  had,  but  he  felt  that  he  could  not  endure  the  thought, 
when  she  was  gone,  that  he  had  not  done  everything  in  his  power  to 
gratify  her  in  her  last  dying  wish. 

"When  I  reached  the  place  I  found  that  several  of  the  neighboring 
women  had  assembled,  expecting,  no  doubt,  that  they  would  soon 
have  to  do  for  her  and  the  family  what  our  undertakers  under  such 
circumstances  do  for  us  here  in  the  city. 

"  When  I  was  taken  into  the  room  where  she  lay  (the  square 
room  of  an  old  fashioned  farm-house),  she  was  perfectly  helpless 
and  appeared  almost  lifeless.  She  could  not  move  her  head  on  her 
pillow,  and  her  husband  had  to  move  her  into  position  so  that  I 
could  get  my  hand  to  the  upper  dorsal  region.  I  then  stimulated  the 
region  of  muscular  power,  and  worked  along  the  line  of  Locomotion. 
I  soon  discovered  that  I  was  producing  some  effect  upon  her.  I 
then  requested  the  husband  (who  was  perfectly  exhausted  through 
his  long  and  continued  watching)  to  retire  to  another  room,  and  to 
send  in  a  lady  whom  I  noticed,  and  described,  as  sitting  in  a  corner 
of  the  room  that  I  passed  through  when  I  came  in  where  the  sick 
woman  lay.  I  then  took  my  seat  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  room 
from  where  my  patient  lay,  and  I  requested  the  lady  sent  to  me  to 
take  a  seat  on  the  same  side  of  the  room  and  not  far  from  where  I 
sat.  (This  lady  was  an  entire  stranger  to  me,  and  I  had  never  before 
seen  a  person  that  was  there.)  I  then  said  to  my  patient  that  if  a 
feeling  of  strength  should  come  to  her,  and  she  should  feel  that  she 
could  do  so,  she  might  raise  herself  up  in  bed.  I  can  hardly  imagine 
why  such  an  announcement  by  me  could  be  considered  as  anything 
but  a  mockery  (as  reasonably  it  would  seem)  of  a  poor  dying  woman. 
In  less  than  three  minutes  she  rose  up  in  bed  ;  I  then  said,  '  Put  your 
feet  out  on  the  floor.'  She  did  so,  and  I  proposed  having  some  stock- 
ings put  on  her  feet ;  but  as  the  weather  was  very  warm,  and  the 
floor  was  carpeted,  she  thought  that  she  did  not  need  them.  I  then 
said  to  her,  '  Stand  up  on  your  feet,'  and  she  immediately  stood  up.  I 
then  requested  her  to  come  to  me,  and  she  walked  from  her  bed 
across  the  room  to  me  and  after  remaining  for  a  few  moments  I  told 
her  that  she  might  return  to  her  bed.  She  walked  back  and  jumped 
into  bed  with  the  sprightliness  of  a  little  girl. 

"  I  then  sent  for  Mr.  Griffin,  and  had  him  come  to  the  hall  door.  I 
did  not  admit  him  into  the  room,  for  I  dare  not  risk  my  patient  under 
the  influence  of  his  exhausted  and  negative  condition.  When  Mr. 
Griffin  came  to  the  hall  door  I  said  to  him,  '  Perhaps  it  would  be  a 
gratification  to  you  to  know  that  your  wife  is  so  far  restored  that  she 


372  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

can  get  off  from  that  bed  and  walk  across  this  room  ? '  He  ex- 
claimed in  great  astonishment,  '  My  wife  has  not  borne  a  pound's 
weight  on  her  feet  in  the  last  six  weeks.'  I  then  turned  to  her  and 
said,  '  He  evidently  does  not  believe  that  you  can  walk,  will  you  show 
him  that  you  can  ?  '  She  arose  from  her  bed  and  came  to  the  door, 
and  I  introduced  her  to  her  husband,  saying  that  I  thought  that  she 
would  hereafter  get  along  without  the  aid  of  doctors.  The  last  that 
I  heard  of  her  was  that  she  is  well,  and  able  to  attend  to  all  her 
domestic  duties." 

Mrs.  O.  D.  Seymour.  —  "  On  the  13th  of  April,  1881  (I  can  give  you 
dates  now),  I  was  summoned  to  the  bedside  of  the  wife  of  O.  D.  Sey- 
mour. Mrs.  Seymour  had  been  for  several  years  an  invalid,  and  for  the 
last  two  or  three  years  almost  entirely  helpless,  and  for  the  last  year  or 
two  unable  to  be  bolstered  up  so  as  to  enjoy  a  sitting  position  in  her 
bed.  The  moment  such  a  thing  was  attempted,  she  would  be  taken 
with  nervous  rigors  (she  called  them  chills),  and  would  have  to 
assume  at  once  a  horizontal  position  in  her  bed.  I  made  my  usual 
examination,  following  down  carefully  the  spinal  column  to  see  if  I 
could  detect  any  tenderness  along  the  interosseous  spaces,  but  all 
the  while  keeping  one  hand  applied  to  the  upper  part  of  the  dorsal 
region.  I  also  gave  proper  attention  to  the  region  of  Muscularity. 
After  this  examination  I  took  my  seat  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
room,  and  in  less  than  ten  minutes  she  arose  from  her  bed,  without 
any  apparent  assistance,  and  walked  across  the  room  to  where  I  was 
sitting.  I  then  assisted  her  back  to  her  bed,  and  she  has  been  able 
to  walk  from  that  day  to  this." 

Mrs.  F.  L.  Burr.  —  "  On  the  26th  of  July,  1881,  I  received  a  mes- 
sage from  Mr.  F.  L.  Burr  of  the  '  Hartford  Daily  Times,'  requesting 
me  to  return  to  Hartford  on  the  first  train. 

"  I  found  Mrs.  Burr  to  be  in  what  the  physician  that  was  called  in 
my  absence  ccnsidered  a  critical  situation. 

"  She  had  been  taken  with  a  violent  attack  of  cholera  morbus.  She 
also  had  a  chronic  difficulty  of  the  heart,  and  it  seemed  as  though  in 
her  prostration  there  must  be  complete  heart  failure.  I  quieted  the 
stomach  with  medicinal  remedies,  and  I  restored  the  heart's  action 
through  my  personal  potency,  applied  according  to  the  rules  of  Sar- 
:ognomy.  After  she  had  revived  sufficiently  to  begin  to  realize 
her  situation,  which  was  a  few  days  after  I  was  called,  she  thought 
that  her  lower  extremities  had  been  paralyzed,  as  she  had  not  the 
strength  to  move  them.  I  assured  her  that  as  soon  as  we  could 
get  her  stomach  in  a  condition  to  admit  of  her  taking  a  little  more 
nourishment  I  should  be  able  to  satisfy  her  that  her  limbs  were  all 
right. 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  U$ 

"A  few  mornings  after  this  I  told  her  that  I  was  ready  to  convince 
her  that  she  had  not  lost  the  use  of  her  limbs,  and  in  less  than 
ten  minutes  she  was  enabled  to  rise  from  her  bed  and  walk  to  where 
I  was  sitting  in  a  chair,  a  distance  of  several  feet  from  the  foot  of 
her  bed ;  and  I  may  say  that  I  have  not  known  of  any  time  since 
that  she  has  not  been  able  to  walk." 

Mrs.  Thomas.  —  "In  February,  1874,  I  was  called  from  Hartford 
to  Chicago  to  see  the  wife  of  Gen.  H.  H.  Thomas,  who  had  been 
under  the  care  of  the  first  physicians  in  Chicago,  including,  I  beiieve,, 
Prof.  Byford  of  the  Rush  Medical  College.  The  foundation  of  her 
sickness  was  a  uterine  trouble,  that  her  physicians  seemed  to  have 
no  power  or  skill  to  relieve  her  of.  She  had  become  so  prostrated 
that  her  head  could  not  be  raised  from  her  pillow  by  placing  the 
hands  under  her  shoulders  and  raising  her  body  up  in  her  bed ;  her 
head  would  fall  back  on  her  pillow.  If  you  attempted  to  raise  her  up 
in  bed  you  would  have  to  put  one  hand  under  her  head  to  support  that. 

"The  third  day  after  I  was  called  to  her  she  walked  with  me  on 
the  street  the  distance  of  a  block." 

Mrs.  Holmes. — "After  my  return  to  Hartford,  in  the  month  of 
May,  I  was  called  to  Gouverneur,  St.  Lawrence  County,  N.  Y.,, 
where  I  had  formerly  practised,  to  see  the  wife  of  Charles  P. 
Holmes,  who  had  been  given  up  by  her  physicians  and  was  not 
expected  to  live  from  one  day  to  another.  She  had  been  confined  to 
her  bed  for  six  weeks  with  typhoid  fever.  The  message  from  Mr. 
Holmes,  and  which  I  promptly  obeyed,  was,  '  Take  the  first  train  and 
come :  wife  not  expected  to  live.'  In  three  days  the  friends  became 
satisfied  that  she  was  out  of  danger,  and  I  returned  to  Hartford. 

"  This  is  what  Mr.  Holmes  says,  in  a  letter  that  he  wrote  me  after 
my  return  :  — 

" '  I  do  not  believe  in  miracles It  is  owing   to  our 

ignorance  of  the  working  of  natural  laws,  that  govern  and  control 
all  things,  that  causes  us  to  call  things  enshrouded  in  mystery  a 
miracle.  Did  I  believe  in  miracles-  I  should  say  that  this  snatching 
my  wife  from  the  very  jaws  of  death  was  a  miracle  of  the  highest 
order.  You  can  scarcely  imagine  the  change  that  we  have  experi- 
enced. A  little  over  a  week  ago  we  were  standing  around  what  we 
then  thought  to  be  the  dying  bed  of  my  wife,  thinking  that  she 
could  not  survive  but  a  few  hours  at  most.  Her  physician  had  given 
her  up,  and  so  had  all  of  our  friends.  Now  she  is  sitting  up  and 
recovering  rapidly  her  lost  strength.' 

"Mrs.  Holmes  is  living  to-day,  at  Gouverneur." 
Mrs.  Foster  (of    Rossie,  St.  Lawrence  County,  N.  Y.).  — "In  the 
winter  of  '84  and  '85    I  was  in   Gouverneur,  St.  Lawrence   Count", 


3/4  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

N.  Y.,  and  as  remarkable  a  case  as  ever  yet  went  cm  record,  in  almost 
any  period  of  the  world's  history,  was  that  of  a  Mrs.  Foster,  at  that 
time  living  in  the  town  of  Rossie,  and  a  patient  of  Dr.  G.  E.  Bald- 
win of  Gouverneur.  She  had  been  prostrated  with  severe  sickness, 
and  had  been  under  the  care  of  several  distinguished  physicians, 
who  had  failed  to  benefit  her  and  had  given  up  the  case  as  incurable. 
The  friends,  as  a  last  resort,  wished  to  try  the  effect  of  the  homoeo- 
pathic treatment  and  Dr.  Baldwin  was  reluctantly  induced  to  give 
the  case  a  trial,  and  he  soon  became  convinced  that  there  had  not 
been  vitality  enough  left  in  her  system  to  respond  to  his  remedies. 
As  there  were  differences  of  opinion,  and  considerable  doubt  as  to 
the  cause  of  her  sickness,  Dr.  B.  took  me  on  the  morning  of  Feb- 
ruary ist  to  see  his  patient,  being  anxious  to  know  what  my  opinion 
might  be.  We  went  by  cars,  and  arrived  at  the  house  early  in  the 
morning.  The  house  was  a  sad  one  when  we  arrived.  We  were 
told  that  she  was  still  alive,  and  that  was  about  all  that  could  be  said. 
When  I  was  admitted  to  the  bedside  of  the  sick  woman  she 
appeared  to  be  in  a  semi-comatose  state,  and  seemed  too  far  gone  to 
recognize  any  one.  Twelve  days  after  this  Dr.  Baldwin  wrote  up  the 
facts  in  this  case  with  the  intention  of  having  them  published  in  one 
of  the  papers  in  Gouverneur,  but  I  induced  him  to  let  me  have  his 
letter  to  send  to  the  'Hartford  Daily  Times,'  which  I  did,  and  Mr. 
Burr  published  it.  I  will  here  give  you  the  concluding  remarks  of 
Dr.  B.'s  letter :  '  As  Dr.  Swan  approached  the  bed  of  the  sick 
woman  I  stepped  out  of  the  room,  after  which  the  doctor  requested 
all  but  the  husband  to  leave  the  room.  Not  knowing  this,  within 
five  or  six  minutes  I  returned,  when  to  my  surprise  I  saw  my  patient, 
who  but  a  few  moments  before  was  thought  to  be  dying,  out  of  her 
bed  and  walking,  without  any  apparent  assistance,  to  the  doctor,  who 
was  seated  in  a  chair  several  feet  from  the  foot  of  the  bed.  She 
stood  for  a  few  moments,  and  then  the  doctor  arose  and  took  her  by 
the  hand  and  walked  back  with  her  and  placed  her  in  her  bed.  The 
husband  was  all  this  time  sitting  in  a  remote  corner  of  the  room. 
How  such  a  thing  could  be  accomplished  by  any  mortal  means  is  a 
mystery  to  me.  In  an  earlier  period  of  the  world's  history  it  would 
be  called  a  miracle.  What  shall  we  call  it  now  ?  I  know  that  there 
is  not  the  least  exaggeration  in  this  statement,  and  yet  I  confess  that 
I  could  not  have  believed  it,  had  I  not  seen  it,  if  told  me  by  my 
dearest  friend.  Instead  of  the  patient  being  exhausted  by  the  effort 
she  appeared  to  rally,  and  after  a  refreshing  sleep  she  called  for 
refreshments.' 

"  I  would  say  that  my  success  in  manual  healing  I  attributed,  in  a 
great  measure,  to  my  knowledge  of  your  system  of  Sarcognomy." 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  375 

Mrs.  Ward.  —  "  When  in  Albany,  a  few  years  ago,  I  was  called  to 
see  the  wife  of  Deacon  John  Ward,  whom  I  found  suffering  the  most 
excruciating  agony  from  what  is  known  as  dysmenorrhcea. 

"She  had  been  to  Philadelphia,  and  had  been  subjected  to  a  very 
serious  surgical  operation,  but  with  no  relief ;  she  had  also  been 
under  treatment  by  the  most  celebrated  New  York  physicians,  but 
had  not  been  able  to  obtain  the  least  relief  from  them,  or  anything 
that  she  had  ever  tried.  Her  agony  was  indescribable  :  no  suffering 
that  I  had  ever  witnessed  in  the  most  fearful  cases  of  parturition 
that  I  had  ever  known  in  an  extensive  practice  could  be  considered 
as  any  comparison  to  it ;  and  she  would  always  be  confined  to  her 
bed  for  two  weeks  as  the  result  of  this  sickness.  No  opiates,  not 
even  morphine  or  chloroform,  appeared  to  have  the  least  effect  in 
relieving  the  pain. 

"  In  less  than  ten  minutes  after  I  laid  my  hands  on  her  she  was 
perfectly  easy,  and  she  has  had  no  return  of  the  suffering  to  this 
day. 

"  In  four  weeks  from  that  time  I  was  in  Rochester,  and  Mr.  Ward 
brought  his  wife  up  there,  and  she  remained  during  her  period  at  the 
Osborn  House,  where  I  was  stopping  at  the  time  ;  but  she  had  no 
symptom  of  the  trouble  with  which  she  had  been  afflicted  all  her 
life,  never  before  having  passed  that  period  without  suffering  pains 
that  had  so  prostrated  her  that  she  was  confined  to  her  bed  for  the 
subsequent  two  weeks.  According  to  my  best  information  she  has 
never  had  anything  of  the  kind  since.  I  could  give  you  several 
cases  of  a  similar  character,  but  one  is  as  good  as  more. 

"I  have  not  deemed  it  necessary  to  ask  permission  of  any  of  the 
parties  above  named,  to  publish  the  facts  describing  the  surprising 
results  that  have  occurred  in  my  treatment.  I  have  not  considered 
myself  under  any  particular  obligation  to  do  so.  They  are  truths  to 
which  the  world  is  entitled,  and  since  you  have  kindly  requested  me 
to  furnish  you  with  them,  you  are  at  liberty  to  make  such  use  of 
them  as  you  may  think  proper,  for  the  interest  of  your  readers  and 
the  benefit  of  humanity. 

"G.  Swan,  M.D." 

CASES    REPORTED    BY  DR.  J.   P.   CHAMBERLIN,    PRESIDENT  OF  BUCHANAN 
ANTHROPOLOGICAL    SOCIETY,    BOSTON. 

In  reply  to  your  inquiries  in  the  matter  of  my  experience  as  to 
the  advantages  of  Sarcognomy  and  the  utility  of  Psychometry,  I  would 
say  that  it  has  been  highly  satisfactory  to  me,  and  my  patients  have 
been  more  than  pleased  with  my  success.  Of  the  many  hundreds  of 
cases  which  I  diagnosed  and  treated,  I  have  not  lost  a  single  case  ; 


37^  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

nor  has  a  death  occurred  save  in  two  cases,  and  these  were  cases  that 
had  been  treated  (and  in  one  case  I  believe  maltreated)  by  the  regulars 
and  given  up  as  hopeless.  Although  several  cases  had  been  pro- 
nounced by  the  regulars  as  incurable  they  are  now  in  good  health 
and  attending  to  business.  I  also  wish  to  add  that  in  all  my  cases  I 
have  used  the  remedies  recommended  by  you  in  the  course  of  in- 
struction given  at  the  College  of  Therapeutics. 

As  you  request  me  to  give  fuller  details  in  relation  to  some  cases 
of  my  experience  in  the  practice  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy,  I  may 
mention  two  in  Buffalo,  N.Y.,  out  of  the  many  successfully  treated. 

Miss  H.  G.,  Franklin  Street  (about  twenty  years  of  age). —  I  found 
her  in  a  prostrated  condition,  having  been  in  bed  about  ten  days,  and 
no  sleep  the  last  three  days.  She  had  high  fever  and  feebleness  of 
limbs.  Acute  burning  pains  along  the  spine  and  very  sensitive  to 
pressure  along  the  spinal  column.  Tetanic  contraction  of  muscles  of 
neck  and  back,  the  head  drawn  backward,  with  suffocating  sensations. 
The  symptoms  showed  clearly  a  case  of  Spinal  Meningitis. 

IreatmenU  —  I  seated  myself  in  a  chair  by  the  bedside  for  about 
two  minutes,  then  with  my  right  took  her  left  hand,  placed  my  left 
hand  on  the  anterior  side  of  the  head,  the  heel  of  the  hand  covering 
the  region  of  sensibility,  then  moved  it  slowly  backward  to  the  region 
of  Health.  I  then  applied  my  right  hand  to  the  region  of  vital  force 
and  immediately  the  contracted  muscles  of  the  neck  began  to  relax. 
I  moved  her  head  forward,  then  moved  my  hand  slowly  downward  to 
the  third  or  fourth  dorsal  vertebrae,  and  all  her  pains  ceased  immedi- 
ately. I  said  to  her,  "  In  the  morning  you  may  arise  and  dress  as 
usual,"  —  but  as  I  looked  she  was  asleep  ;  she  had  not  heard  what  I 
said  to  her.  I  then  left  the  room  and  beckoned  her  parents  out  of 
the  room  and  forbade  any  one  entering  the  room  again  that  night  unless 
she  awoke.  She  slept  till  about  eight  o'clock  the  next  morning,  or 
about  ten  hours  continuously.  When  she  awoke  she  arose  and  dressed 
herself,  sat  down  to  a  good  breakfast,  then  went  about  her  daily 
work  as  usual.     She  was  cured  ;  I  gave  no  medicine. 

Mrs.  D.  S.  —  I  was  requested  by  a  friend  of  theirs  to  call  with  him  to 
see  if  anything  could  be  done  for  her,  as  she  was  very  sick.  We  were 
met  at  the  door  by  the  nurse  and  doctor  and  told  that  Mrs.  S. 
was  dying  and  no  one  could  be  admitted.  We  asked  to  see  Mr. 
S.  and  were  told  that  he  was  at  the  bedside  of  his  wife,  who  was 
already  unconscious,  and  they  did  not  like  to  speak  to  nor  disturb  him. 
The  door  was  about  closing  on  us,  when  Mr.  S.  came  forward 
and  bade  us  come  in.  In  deep  grief  he  told  us  we  were  too  late.  I 
said  to  him,  "  Go  to  her  and  she  will  open  her  eyes ;  then  tell  her  that 
I  am  in  the  house  ;  then  come  to  me  and  tell  me  just  what  she  says  or 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  377 

does."  He  replied,  "It  is  too  late,  but  I  will  do  as  you  desire,"  and  as 
he  approached  her  she  opened  her  eyes  and  he  said  to  her  what  I  re- 
quested him  to.  She  pointed  to  the  door  and  said,  "  Come."  He  called 
me  in,  then  retired  himself,  and  I  was  alone  with  her  and  her  doctor. 
As  I  approached  her  I  placed  my  hand  upon  her  cold,  damp  forehead. 
I  took  her  by  the  hand,  then  placed  the  other  on  the  region  of  vital 
force,  holding  it  there  for  about  two  minutes,  during  which  time  I,  too, 
was  watched  over  by  the  "  regular."  Mrs.  S.  says,  "  How  strange  !  " 
The  doctor  leaves  the  room,  seeks  Mr.  S.,  and  protests  against  quackery 
and  the  cruel  and  wicked  treatment  and  the  suffering  I  was  inflicting 
upon  the  poor  dying  woman.  And  just  what  else  occurred  outside  for 
the  next  five  minutes  I  never  knew,  but  I  was  not  interfered  with  ;  I 
was  doing  my  work,  life  was  returning,  her  pain  was  ceasing,  and 
she  was  thanking  me  with  her  whole  soul  as  Mr.  S.  entered  the 
room.  I  left  Buffalo  early  next  morning  and  returned  the  day  follow- 
ing to  hear  of  a  " miracle"  performed.  I  was  told  that  Mrs.  S. 
was  a  well  woman, —  I  could  not  believe  it.  I  called  on  her  and  found 
her  in  bed.  In  reply  to  my  question  she  said  she  felt  no  pain  ;  felt  as 
well  as  ever,  but  weak.  In  a  short  time  she  fully  recovered  her 
strength  and  was  regularly  attending  to  her  household  affairs.  I 
gave  her  no  medicine. 

Miss  L.  W.,  ii  Nassau  Street,  Boston  (diagnosis,  without  ques- 
tions, Bright's  Disease  inherited  from  father  :  was  then  told  that  her 
father  had  died  of  that  disease).  —  The  first  two  treatments  con- 
sisted of  dispersive  passes  on  head  from  Disease  to  Health  and  stim- 
ulating from  Health  to  Vital  Force,  then  down  the  spinal  column  to 
the  region  of  the  kidneys, — then  gave  sulphate  of  soda  and  one 
grain  phosphate  of  iron  two  or  three  times  a  day  for  one  week,  then 
changed  medicine  and  gave  lavender  and  hydrangea;  also  gave  mag- 
netic treatments  once  a  week.  Cured  in  ten  weeks.  No  pain  or  dis- 
tress in  region  of  kidneys  since.    Cured  two  years  ago. 

G.  A.  C,  North  Abington  (case  of  inflammation  of  liver).  —  Pros- 
trated by  pain  and  tenderness  also  fulness  on  the  right  side  at  margin 
of  and  little  below  the  ribs,  pain  increased  by  pressure  or  deep  breath- 
ing, unable  to  lie  on  left  side,  pains  extending  to  right  shoulder, 
feeling  of  heavy  weight  on  liver. 

Treatment.  —  Gave  him  a  head,  neck  and  shoulder  treatment,  then 
put  very  hot  water  over  region  of  liver.  I  then  left.  An  hour  later  he 
sent  for  me  to  come  again ;  and  as  I  entered  his  house,  just  two  hours 
from  the  time  I  first  entered  it  and  found  him  in  agony  of  pain,  I 
now  found  him  up  and  dressed,  eating  his  broiled  beefsteak.  When 
he  sent  for  me  he  wanted  to  know  what  he  might  eat,  but  as  I  de- 
layed coming  he  said  he  feared  he  might  starve  before  I  would  come 


3/8  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

and  so  ordered  his  own  meal.     He  was  cured,  and  I  scored  one  for 
hot  water. 

E.  C.  W.  (case  of  nervous  prostration  and  peritonitis).  —  Found  him 
in  a  very  critical  condition  ;  he  had  been  sick  six  days,  with  some 
fever.  Pain  and  extreme  tenderness  extending  over  the  whole  abdo- 
men and  increased  by  the  slightest  pressure.  Abdomen  hot  and 
motionless.  His  countenance  showed  great  suffering  and  anxiety. 
Face  dark  and  shrunken,  particularly  so  about  the  eyes  and  nose,  cold 
and  clammy.     Also  acute  pain  in  the  left  side  just  above  the  stomach. 

Treatment.  —  First  on  head,  dispersed  from  Disease  to  Health,  then 
stimulated  Health  and  Vital  Force,  then  downward  to  the  back  region 
of  Health.  Gave  him  a  dose  of  lavender  and  Scutellaria  and  contin- 
ued magnetic  treatment  fifteen  minutes  to  half  an  hour,  then  gave 
dose  of  salicylate  of  soda  and  bathed  his  bowels  with  same  ;  I  then 
applied  hot  water  to  the  bowels,  as  hot  as  he  could  possibly  bear  it  (on 
a  towel),  then  proceeded  at  once  to  dry-cupping  the  left  leg  from  hip 
to  knee,  then  on  calf  of  leg.  I  did  this  very  thoroughly,  continuing 
it  for  over  an  hour.  I  did  this  to  draw  the  pain  from  the  body.  It 
worked  like  a  charm  so  far  as  the  body  was  concerned ;  all  the  pain 
left  it  and  went  to  the  leg.  I  left  him  fairly  comfortable  at  1 1  o'clock 
p.m.,  and  marked  him,  — "  one  chance  in  four  for  recovery."  The  next 
morning  found  him  better  bodily,  but  his  leg  suffered  severely  ;  it  was 
in  a  high  state  of  inflammation  and  the  slightest  movement  or  touch 
was  torturing.  I  applied  salicylate  of  soda  to  leg  and  gave  magnetic 
treatment  to  the  whole  body,  frequently  during  the  day, — gave  him 
but  very  little  medicine.  This  treatment  was  continued  seven  days, 
and  his  pains  were  gone  and  I  pronounced  him  entirely  out  of  danger. 
He  recovered.  One  other  very  important  factor  which  I  must  men- 
tion is,  I  had  the  assistance  of  one  of  the  best  magnetists  I  ever  met 
—  Jonathan  Arnold  of  North  Abington. 

Mrs.  A.  O.  W.,  the  well-known  clairvoyant  and  physician,  Bryan t- 
ville,  Mass.  (case  of  severe  shock  to  nervous  system  occasioned  by  a 
fall).  —  I  was  accompanied  by  Mr.  Jonathan  Arnold  of  North  Abing- 
ton, who  rendered  most  valuable  assistance  by  his  superior  magnetic 
power.  As  we  entered  the  sick-room  it  was  so  darkened  we  could 
not  see  where  to  go,  and  we  were  directed  to  the  bedside  where  she 
lay.  The  least  ray  of  light  caused  intense  pain  to  her  eyes.  I  placed 
fy  right  hand  over  her  eyes  and  two  fingers  of  my  left  immediately 
back  of  her  left  ear,  letting  them  remain  for  about  five  minutes,  then 
gave  the  back  of  the  right  ear  the  same  treatment.  I  then  said, 
"  Now  let  the  curtains  be  raised  so  that  the  sun  may  come  in."  They 
were  raised  to  their  full  height,  and  the  full  light  of  day  streamed  into 
the  room,  causing  not  the  slightest  pain  to  her  eyes,  though  they  were 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  379 

quite  red  and  inflamed.  Her  general  appearance  was  somewhat 
startling.  Below  a  line  from  nose  to  ear  the  face  looked  as  though  it 
had  been  in  black  dye,  and  appeared  to  be  nearly  paralyzed  ;  the  whole 
body  and  limbs  were  badly  bloated  ;  indeed,  it  seemed  almost  like  try- 
ing to  raise  the  dead  to  life,  to  attempt  to  restore  her  to  health.  Now 
I  don't  know  whether  we  had  faith  or  not.  We  went  to  work.  Mr. 
Arnold  placed  his  hands  upon  her  feet  ;  my  hands  were  upon  her 
head.  In  a  few  minutes  she  said,  "  Oh,  what  a  strange  feeling  !  "  A 
peculiar  sensation  permeated  her  whole  being,  and  then  a  profuse 
perspiration  set  in,  great  beads  of  sweat  started  from  her  forehead  and 
over  the  face,  and  body,  and  within  ten  minutes  her  entire  clothing 
was  as  wet  as  though  it  had  been  dipped  in  a  tub  of  water.  Her 
pains  were  gone. 

Three  days  later  we  found  her  in  a  comfortable  condition,  and  al- 
most her  first  words  were,  "  Look  at  my  head  back  of  the  ears  ;  you 
raised  two  great  blisters  there."  I  looked  and  sure  enough  a  blister 
over  one  inch  in  width  and  more  than  two  inches  long  had  been 
raised  behind  each  ear.  Nothing  had  been  applied  to  raise  those 
blisters  and  nothing  was  on  my  fingers.  Moreover  I  had  just  washed 
my  hands  in  hot  water  immediately  before  I  applied  them  to  her. 
The  question  now  comes,  Whence  those  blisters  ?  I  don't  know. 
Who  does  ?  Three  days  later  we  gave  her  another  treatment  similar 
to  the  previous  one,  and  with  like  results  ;  her  eyes,  however,  were 
well  and  needed  no  further  treatment.  She  recovered  rapidly  from 
this  time  until  entirely  cured.  I  gave  her  but  little  medicine.  After 
the  fourth  treatment  she  measured  eight  inches  less  around  the  waist 
than  she  did  at  the  first  time  we  called  and  the  bloat  of  the  limbs  had 
greatly  subsided. 

These  and  similar  cases  lead  me  to  more  appreciate  the  great  utility 
of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy,  for  by  following  its  simple  teachings  we 
make  no  mistakes,  nor  are  we  at  a  loss  to  know  just  where  and  how 
to  apply  treatments. 

I  will  now  name  several  persons  who  may  be  referred  to,  who  no 
doubt  would  respond  to  letters  of  inquiry,  all  of  whom  were  treated 
and  cured  in  strict  accordance  with  .the  laws  of  Sarcognomy. 

Mrs.  J.  D.,  Brockton,  Mass.  —  A  case  of  peritonitis.  Was  very 
much  emaciated.  Supposed  to  be  an  incurable  case  by  her  physi- 
cian. Gained  strength  the  moment  I  entered  the  room,  regained  her 
health  rapidly,  and  within  three  weeks  was  out  of  doors. 

Mr.  J.  P.  B.,  Boston.  —  A  case  of  distended  stomach,  accompanied 
with  convulsions.  A  case  of  long  standing.  Cured  in  two  weeks 
(little  medicine  used). 

Miss  L.  G.  B.,  South  Weymouth.  —  Severe  case  of  neuralgia  in 
face  and  head.     Cured  in  three  minutes. 


380  RATIONAL    PRACTICE.  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

Mrs.  C.  H.  K.,  Findley,  Ohio.  —  A  case  of  chronic  neuralgia. 
Cured  in  one  minute. 

Mrs.  M.  J.,  South  Weymouth.  —  A  case  of  chronic  rheumatism. 
Cured  in  a  few  days  (little  medicine  used). 

Miss  B.  of  Bath,  Me.  — Inflammation  of  nerves  of  eyes.  A  case 
of  eight  years'  standing.  Had  been  treated  several  weeks  at  the 
Boston  Eye  and  Ear  Infirmary  without  any  benefit.  Cured  by  one 
treatment. 

I  might  give  a  large  number  of  cases  similar  to  the  above,  but 
these  few  cases  show  something  of  a  range  of  diseases  which  yield 
readily  under  proper  treatment  as  taught  by  you. 

I  may  add  that,  with  me,  rheumatism  and  diseases  of  the  nervous 
system  yield  more  readily  than  most  other  diseases. 

Yours  truly, 

J.  P.  Chamberlin. 

statement  of  ebenezer  day. 

Boston,  Nov.  26,  1886. 
While  in  California  from  1850  to  1876  by  hardships  and  exposure 
I  contracted  a  complication  of  diseases  from  which  I  have  since 
remained  a  confirmed  invalid.  I  have  suffered  exceedingly  from 
insomnia;  for  many  years  I  have  not  slept  during  any  twenty-four 
hours  above  five  minutes  altogether.  Early  this  season  rheumatic 
pains  together  with  my  old  complaints  completely  prostrated  me,  and 
although  the  best  medical  attendance  which  money  could  command 
was  summoned,  their  skill  was  without  any  good  results,  as  I  grew 
worse  and  worse  and  was  given  up  as  incurable.  About  the  first  of 
September  I  was  rapidly  sinking,  all  my  friends  present  supposing  I 
was  already  struck  with  death.  My  limbs  had  become  cold  and 
damp ;  I  felt  that  my  end  had  come.  At  this  time,  about  1 1  a.m.,  Mr. 
J.  P.  Chamberlin  came  with  my  attendant,  who  had  told  him  of  my 
case  and  asked  him  in  to  see  me.  He  spoke  to  me  several  times  and 
it  was  by  the  greatest  effort  that  I  could  reply.  He  took  me  by  the 
hand  and  asked  my  attendant  to  assist  in  raising  me.  I  was  raised  to 
a  sitting  posture,  when  he  applied  his  hand  to  the  back  of  my  head. 
Instantly  the  strangest  sensation  was  experienced.  I  said  to  him, 
"  What  are  you  doing  ?  You  are  knocking  all  the  teeth  out  of  my 
head," — though  the  sensation  was  not  at  all  painful  or  unpleasant. 
But  at  once  all  my  pains  ceased  and  I  felt  life  returning ;  a  warm  and 
peculiar  thrill  spread  through  my  whole  body,  even  to  the  ends  of  my 
fingers  and  toes.  I  was  cured.  He  then  ordered  a  good  breakfast, 
of  which  I  partook  heartily.  I  felt  well.  I  wanted  to  rise  from  my  bed 
and  dress  myself,  but  was  not  allowed  to  attempt  it  then.     The  next 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  38 1 

morning,  however,  I  dressed  myself  without  assistance.  I  regained 
my  strength  rapidly,  and  up  to  this  time  that  glow  of  warmth  which 
he  imparted  to  me  has  not  for  one  moment  left  me,  although  pre- 
vious to  his  treatment  I  had  not  passed  a  day  the  past  summer  with- 
out suffering  from  being  cold  and  chilly.  I  now  sleep  well;  often 
five  to  six  hours  without  once  awaking.  He  gave  me  no  medicine. 
By  what  means  my  life  was  saved  I  know  not,  but  do  know  the  fact. 
I  cannot  explain  how  I  was  cured,  but  am  most  profoundly  thankful 
to  Him  from  whom  all  blessings  flow.  Ebenezer  Day. 

Boston,  Sept.  10,  1887. 
J.  P.  Chamberlin  : 

My  Dear  Sir,  —  It  is  now  one  year  since  you  imparted  to  me 
wonderful  vitality  by  placing  your  hands  upon  my  head,  and  raised 
me  from  an  extremely  low  physical  condition  to  comparative  health. 
It  was  then  a  question  whether  the  effect  would  be  permanent.  I  am 
able  to  answer  that  question  in  the  affirmative.  Though  I  am  not  in 
perfect  health  now,  and  never  expect  to  be  again,  yet  that  life  power 
which  I  then  received  from  you  has  not  yet  left  me,  and  I  daily  feel 
its  glow  and  strength,  not  only  in  body,  but  my  mental  faculties  were 
never  before  as  good  as  to-day.  And  I  take  this  opportunity  to 
again  thank  you  for  the  great  benefit  you  so  kindly  bestowed  upon 
me.  Most  gratefully  yours, 

Ebenezer  Day. 

cases  reported  by  dr.  wm.  e.  wheelock  of  boston. 

Case  1.  — A  young  man  of  twenty  came  to  our  office  at  San  Anto- 
nio very  much  emaciated  ;  was  unable  to  get  around  very  much ;  said  he 
had  been  troubled  with  chills  and  what  the  doctors  called  continued 
fever.  This  was  November.  During  the  summer  he  had  spent  four 
months  in  the  hospital  and  received  some  benefit,  but  upon  leaving 
there  he  had  a  relapse  and  was  discouraged.  Thinking  there  was  no 
help  for  him,  he  came  to  our  office  seven  times  and  we  treated  him 
according  to  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy,  but  in  addition  to  the 
nervauric  treatments  gave  him  three  or  four  vapor  baths.  He  never 
had  a  chill  after  the  last  treatment  and  within  two  months  weighed 
160  pounds  and  was  to  all  appearance  a  perfectly  healthy  man. 

Case  2.  — A  woman  40  years  of  age  was  diagnosed  and  treated  by 
other  physicians  for  dropsy.  By  placing  the  hand  at  one  side  of  the 
abdomen  and  striking  the  other  side  with  the  ends  of  the  fingers 
there  was  a  sound  and  an  action  like  water  moving  inwardly.  I  gave 
her  a  little  medicine  to  regulate  the  system  and  nervauric  treatments 
with  electricity.     I  treated  twice  a  week  for  a  month  and  reduced  her 


3$2  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVI II. 

in  girth  around  the  waist  so  that  she  had  to  take  up  her  clothes  in 
order  to  wear  them.  Her  fears  of  dropsy  were  dispelled.  Her  means 
being  limited  she  then  stopped  the  treatments. 

Case  3.  —  A  German  50  years  of  age,  a  tailor  by  trade,  had  been 
unable  to  follow  his  occupation  for  three  months,  was  broken  of  his 
rest  at  nights  and  in  fact  was  a  continual  sufferer  from  rheumatism. 
One  treatment  not  to  exceed  twenty-five  minutes  completely  cured 
him.  This  was  quite  a  remarkable  case,  as  he  had  been  treated  by 
quite  eminent  M.D.'s  with  no  benefit. 

Case  4.  —  Weak  eyes.  A  commission  merchant  45  years  of  age 
had  been  unable  to  do  any  business  for  a  number  of  years  without 
spectacles,  in  fact  wore  them  all  the  time.  He  had  twenty-one  treat- 
ments as  taught  in  your  classes  for  that  trouble  and  he  laid  off  his 
spectacles  and  can  do  his  business  without  them.  I  saw  him  some 
time  after,  and  he  remarked  to  me  that  he  would  not  be  placed  in  the 
condition  he  was  in  again  for  one  thousand  dollars. 

Case  5.  —  Falling  sickness  or  epilepsy,  as  I  diagnosed  it.  A  lady 
42  years  of  age,  mother  of  a  family,  would  drop  down  without  any 
warning  and  lav  apparently  dead  for  twenty  to  thirty  minutes.  She 
was  having  the  spells  on  an  average  of  twice  a  week  when  I  first  met 
her.  I  treated  her  fifteen  or  twenty  times  and  she  wrote  me  three 
months  after  that  she  had  but  one  bad  spell  since. 

Case  6.  —  I  was  called  to  the  bedside  of  a  lady  suffering  with  neu- 
ralgia. An  M.D.  sat  by  the  bed,  holding  her,  as  she  was  wild  with 
pain,  had  been  in  that  condition  for  eight  hours,  and  he  had  exhausted 
his  skill  and  the  patient  was  getting  worse.  With  dispersive  passes 
I  stopped  the  pain  within  less  than  five  minutes  after  entering  the 
house,  and  it  never  returned. 

Case  7.  —  A  man  of  middle  age  called  upon  me  but  a  few  days 
since  with  an  enlarged  liver  which  was  causing  him  some  suffering 
and  anxiety.  I  gave  him  a  thorough  treatment  and  entirely  removed 
it,  and  he  tells  me  that  he  has  experienced  no  difficulty  since. 

Case  8.  —  I  was  called  a  week  ago  to-day  to  a  case  of  diphtheria. 
It  was  not  of  the  worst  type,  but  was  fast  tending  that  way.  I  had 
supplied  myself  with  sulpho-calcine,  as  you  had  recommended  it  when 
I  was  with  you.  I  diluted  it  one-half  and  ordered  it  applied  with  a 
camel's-hair  brush  every  half  hour.  It  worked  like  a  charm  and  in 
twelve  hours  the  danger  was  past.     She  is  now  up  and  about. 

I  have  thus  given  you  a  sample  of  the  cases  I  have  handled. 

CASES  REPORTED  BY  DR.  A.  J.  SYMES  OF  CLEVELAND. 

Case  1.  —  Sciatica  of  nine  months'  standing.  Cured  in  twelve  treat- 
ments ;  treated  according  to  Sarcognomy.  This  case  was  under  the 
care  of  two  homceopathists,  but  without  results. 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  383 

Case  2.  —  Inflammatory  rheumatism,  two  weeks'  standing.  Cured 
in  eight  treatments  ;    treated  according  to  Sarcognomy. 

Case  3. —  Asthma.  This  case  was  in  charge  of  an  ailopathist.  I 
was  called  in  by  a  friend  of  the  sufferer.  I  found  him  unable  to  lie 
down ;  was  compelled  to  sit  up  all  the  time.  One  treatment  enabled 
him  to  lie  on  his  back,  which  position  he  was  able  to  retain  until  he 
died  two  weeks  later  of  heart  disease  so  called.  This  also  was  treated 
according  to  Sarcognomy. 

Case  4.  —  Lumbago.  Cured  in  five  treatments.  This  case  was  very 
severe,  but  yielded  after  the  fifth  treatment,  and  has  not  returned  as 
yet  and  it  is  now  eleven  months  since  the  last  treatment  was  admin- 
istered.     This  also  was  treated  according  to  Sarcognomy. 

Case  5.  —  This  case  was  a  determination  of  blood  to  the  head,  which 
caused  a  great  deal  of  suffering.  On  examination  I  found  his  legs 
and  feet  were  cold.  He  told  me  that  he  had  been  troubled  in  this  way 
for  over  twenty  years  ;  there  was  no  capillary  action  in  the  lower  ex- 
tremities. Ten  treatments  restored  the  capillary  action  and  the  head 
was  relieved.  He  claims  to  feel  better  now  than  for  the  past  twenty- 
five  years.    This,  too,  was  treated  according  to  Sarcognomy. 

I  could  fill  pages  in  describing  cases  similar  to  the  above,  but  think 
these  five  cases  will  suffice.  However,  I  will  mention  one  more  case 
that  is  under  treatment. 

A  Case  of  Insanity. —  She  has  had  fifteen  treatments  and  has  im- 
proved very  much.  I  have  a  great  deal  to  contend  with  in  this  case 
owing  to  brutal  treatment  from  the  husband  ;  but,  notwithstanding,  she 
has  improved  very  much,  and  if  I  am  allowed  to  keep  on  with  the 
treatment  have  not  the  least  doubt  but  that  she  will  be  restored  to 
mental  and  physical  health.  This  patient  is  being  treated  magnet* 
ically  and  electrically  according  to  Sarcognomy. 

dr.  z.  l.  Baldwin's  experience. 

Dr.  Z.  L.  Baldwin  of  Lawrence,  Michigan,  speaks  as  follows  of  his 
experience  after  finishing  his  college  course  :  — 

"  Regarding  the  value  of  Sarcognomy  and  Psychometry  in  this  my 
first  year's  practice,  — 

"  Sarcognomy  has  aided  me  much  in  applying  massage  and  electri- 
city successfully,  as  is  attested  by  the  number  of  chronic  cases  that 
come  to  me  ;  while  Psychometry  aids  me  in  determining  obscure 
pathological  conditions  that  a  physical  or  oral  examination  would  not 
reveal,  also  it  gives  me  a  knowledge  of  the  patient  that  enables  me  to 
inspire  the  needed  hope  and  confidence." 


3^4  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

CASES    REPORTED    BY    DR.    ORRIN    ROBERTSON    OF    TEXAS. 

Chronic  Cough.  —  Mrs.  E.  G.  of  Athens,  Tenn.,  came  to  me  in  1888. 
She  was  74  years  old  and  had  a  cough  ten  years.  She  had  tried  vari- 
ous remedies  but  all  failed.  It  was  called  asthma,  whooping-cough, 
consumption,  etc.,  before  my  diagnosis.  I  found  the  respiratory  mus- 
cles were  irritated.  I  placed  one  hand  on  the  lower  dorsal  region  and 
held  it  there  fifteen  minutes  and  then  held  both  hands  on  Health 
fifteen  minutes.  Two  treatments  twenty-four  hours  apart,  and  the 
cough  was  no  more. 

Mrs.  O.  C.  L.  of  San  Antonio,  Texas,  aged  47,  had  a  very  bad  cough 
which  had  continued  twenty-one  years.  She  had  doctored  all  the  time 
but  with  no  benefit.  Doctors  said  there  was  incurable  consumption. 
Expectoration  was  free ;  some  blood.  The  skin  was  dry,  but  with 
night  sweats.  I  was  led  to  believe  the  original  cause  was  a  fracture 
of  the  lower  dorsal  and  perhaps  softening  of  the  cord  at  the  eleventh 
dorsal  vertebra,  but  now  there  was  an  irritation  in  the  lungs  and  the 
stomach  was  involved  ;  consequently  eating,  breathing  or  moving 
made  the  cough  worse.  And  as  the  lower  dorsal  region  contains  the 
ganglia  which  emit  the  splanchnic  nerves  that  govern  all  the  abdomi- 
nal viscera,  and  as  the  stomach  was  affected  from  so  much  medicine, 
constipation  was  also  a  trouble.  The  cough  now  starts  in  the  lungs 
by  irritation  and  is  conveyed  by  the  pneumogastric  nerve  to  the  me- 
dulla oblongata,  and  as  the  stomach  and  lung  irritation  is  so  great  it  is 
sent  downwards  to  the  lower  dorsal  region  and  the  convulsive  expira- 
tion is  produced.  The  phrenic  nerve,  in  the  middle  of  the  cervical 
region,  is  started  and  it  produces  an  act  of  inspiration  by  the  dia- 
phragm. The  upper  dorsal  region  starts  the  intercostal  muscles 
lifting  the  ribs  and  the  irritation  passes  down  to  the  abdominal  mus- 
cles. As  the  whole  system  was  involved,  both  nerves  and  muscles,  I 
gave  hot-air  baths  —  alcohol  as  the  excitant,  with  California  laurel 
(Umbellaria  Cal.)  and  damiana  in  the  alcohol,  following  up  each  bath 
with  cold  salt-water  shower  bath.  Then  as  an  embrocation  I  used 
the  above  medicines  with  helonias  dioica,  equal  parts.  I  used  this 
freely  up  and  down  the  spine,  holding  one  hand  on  the  eleventh  dor- 
sal vertebra  fifteen  minutes  at  a  time.  I  held  one  hand  on  Absorp- 
tion and  the  other  on  Adhesiveness,  to  assist  digestion.  Made  rapid 
manipulations  downward  from  Defecation  for  constipation  ;  then 
passing  galvanic  currents  from  the  lumbo-sacral  junction  to  Health  and 
from  the  stomach  to  Health,  holding  one  hand  on  the  cephalic  region 
on  the  back  and  the  other  in  front.  This  process  was  continued  six 
times  every  other  day,  and  after  twelve  days  she  was  free  from  cough 
and  was  again  a  sound  woman.  I  might  cite  other  cases,  but  this  will 
suffice. 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  385 

Uterine  Cases.  —  Mrs.  J.  L.,  age  32,  had  for  years  inflammation  of 
uterus  and  ovaries.  She  had  spent  one  year  at  Hot  Springs,  Ark. 
Came  home  disgusted,  as  she  was  unable  to  work  and  not  able  to  doc- 
tor, and  saw  no  sign  of  improvement.  I  gave  her  the  hot-air  bath, 
following  with  cold  water  every  day.  Then  I  made  rapid  passes  up 
and  back  from  mons  veneris  toward  the  cilio-spinal  centre,  and  held 
my  hands  on  Sanity  and  Health.  I  passed  light  galvanic  currents, 
with  aconite  and  macrotys  on  the  electrode,  from  the  ovaries  to  Health. 
She  used  a  wash  of  fluid  extract  helonias  1  part,  warm  water  40  parts, 
twice  a  day.  Internally:  tincture  aconite  5  drops,  macrotys  10  drops, 
Pulsatilla  20  drops,  water,  2  oz.,  —  one  teaspoonful  every  three  hours. 
And  in  thirteen  days  she  was  a  sound  woman,  able  to  do  all  of  her 
work  — washing,  ironing,  etc. 

Mrs.  L.  R.,  age  37  years.  Five  children.  Had  shortness  of  breath, 
lower  limbs  weak,  melancholy,  muscular  system  weak,  inflammation 
of  ovaries,  skin  dry,  pains  in  back  at  lumbo-sacral  junction,  pains  in 
back  top  of  head,  eyes  growing  weaker  and  burning,  prolapsus  uteri, 
inflammation  of  stomach  and  hemorrhage  from  womb.  Doctors  said 
the  womb  was  lacerated  and  the  only  remedy  was  an  operation.  She 
had  for  fourteen  years  been  in  this  condition  and  gradually  growing 
worse  ;  now  pains  in  the  chest  with  a  dry,  hacking  cough,  —  melan- 
choly. I  passed  galvanic  currents  from  Melancholy,  in  front  of  the 
anterior  margin  of  the  ilium,  to  Cheerfulness  at  the  arm  pits,  also  made 
passes  with  the  hands.  I  gave  tincture  pulsatilla,  twenty  drops  a  day  • 
hot  sitz  baths,  twice  a  day  ;  and  cold  water,  once  a  day  ;  with  enemas 
of  fluid  extract  helonias  one  part,  water  forty  parts. 

The  muscular  system  was  weak  ;  therefore  I  stimulated  Vital  Force 
on  the  summit  of  the  thighs  and  on  the  head,  and  Power  on  the  top  of 
the  shoulders,  also  stimulated  Locomotion  by  gentle  percussions  ;  then 
holding  the  hands  and  also  calf  of  the  legs,  and  used  on  my  hands  as 
an  embrocation  damiana  and  laurel,  equal  parts. 

There  was  prolapsus  uteri.  For  this  I  gave  very  light  galvanic  cur- 
rents for  sixty  minutes  a  day  and  dispersive  passes  from  the  mouth  of 
the  vagina  to  Health  and  Sanity,  and  vitalized  by  the  lower  dorsal  and 
lumbar  regions  with  fluid  extract  helonias  on  the  hands.  I  also  ap- 
plied the  positive  pole  to  the  cervex  and  negative  on  lumbo-sacral 
junction  to  vitalize  back.  I  gave  hot-air  baths  at  13 50  every  other 
day,  finishing  with  cold  water,  leaving  her  to  walk  all  she  could.  In- 
ternally she  took  fifteen  drops  of  helonias  three  times  a  day. 

For  shortness  of  breath,  I  held  my  hands  on  Inspiration  on  the  ribs^ 
thoracic  or  pulmonic  regions  on  head  and  body,  and  stimulated  Health 
by  gentle  percussions  and  holding  my  hands  on  the  same  to  give  a 
healthy  tone.  I  also  stimulated  Respiration  on  head  and  body  to 
deepen  breathing. 


386  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

The  hemorrhage  from  womb  I  stopped  by  gentle  percussions  on 
palms  of  hands  and  bottom  of  feet,  and  on  shoulders,  to  draw  the  blood 
from  that  centre.  I  also  made  passes  from  the  lower  limbs  and  from 
the  womb  up  and  back  to  the  cilio-spinal  centre.  All  these  troubles 
gradually  disappeared,  and  after  one  year  she  is  a  strong,  healthy 
woman  and  can  do  all  of  her  own  work. 

Mrs.  L.  T.,  26  years  old  ;  had  one  child;  an  operation  performed  — 
uterus  scraped  —  and  had  three  regular  M.D.'s  ;  and  for  three  weeks 
was  flat  on  her  back,,  and  they  said  she  would  die  from  the  hemor- 
rhage. I  was  called.  I  gave  gentle  percussions  on  palms  of  hands 
and  feet  and  shoulders,  made  passes  from  the  womb  to  the  shoulders, 
gave  her  a  cold  salt-water  bath,  and  the  flow  stopped.  That  day  she 
walked  the  floor,  and  the  fourth  day  was  down  in  town  and  riding  on 
street  cars.  This  was  one  year  ago  and  her  health  has  been  good  all 
the  time,  and  now  the  regulars  say  she  only  had  the  hysterics. 

The  proper  application  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  will  cure  almost 
any  female  disease  at  once  ;  and  as  to  hemorrhages,  it  will  not  fail.  I 
believe  I  could  stop  the  menstrual  flow  eight  times  in  ten  cases  with 
the  hands. 

Natural  Sight  Restored.  —  The  employment  of  eyeglasses  to  im- 
prove the  vision  has  long  been  practised,  but  the  proper  application 
of  the  finer  forces  will  do  away  with  glasses  in  a  majority  of  cases. 
To  prove  this  position  I  here  cite  two  cases  in  San  Antonio  :  — 

Mr.  J.  H.,  82  years  old,  had  worn  glasses  twenty-five  years  all  the 
time,  even  in  eating  and  walking  about.  His  eyes  were  sound,  but 
weak  ;  the  pupil  was  contracted,  the  cornea  and  lens  were  flattened. 

Distant  objects  were  distinctly  seen  ;  while  those  near  could  not 
be  distinguished,  —  presbyopia.  His  general  health  was  fair.  I  used 
warm  water  on  my  hands  and  made  passes  with  the  finger  tips  from 
the  nose  outwardly  over  the  lids  thirty  minutes,  as  the  lids  were  dry 
and  stiff  or  hard.  I  then  placed  one  hand  across  the  forehead,  over 
the  eyes  and  superciliary  ridge,  and  the  other  on  the  second  dorsal 
nerve,  to  expand  the  pupil  of  the  eyes.  Held  my  hand  there  fifteen 
minutes.  I  then  placed  one  hand  on  the  median  fossa  (below  the 
occipital  knob)  and  the  other  on  the  forehead,  as  above  mentioned, 
to  strengthen  the  optic  nerves  (as  their  origin  is  in  the  tubercula 
quadrigemina)  which  are  between  these  localities,  and  in  three  days 
his  eyes  were  perfect.  He  could  read  any  kind  of  print  at  a  distance 
of  twelve  inches. 

Mrs.  M.  C,  83  years  of  age,  had  not  seen  her  children  in  three  years 
to  distinguish  them  apart.  Had  not  seen  the  moon,  stars,  etc.,  and 
had  long  since  quit  glasses  as  they  were  of  no  benefit.  Her  eyes 
were  good  once,  but  now  worn  out.     I  treated  the  eyes  as  in  the  above 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  387 

case,  and  also  held  the  tips  of  my  fingers  over  the  organs  of  Shade  and 
Light,  and  in  seven  days,  thirty  minutes  each  day,  she  could  see  the 
stars  and  moon,  and  tell  her  children  apart  and  read  large  print.  Both 
of  these  persons  lived  twelve  months  after  treatment  and  their  eyes 
remained  the  same  ;  therefore  is  it  not  probably  true  that  spectacles 
are  unnecessary  at  any  age,  as  we  can  have  perfect  sight  without  spec- 
tacles till  death  ?  "  Old  eyes  made  new,"  not  by  massage,  glasses, 
cutting  or  burning  or  drugs,  but  by  the  application  of  the  principles 
of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy.  I  will  not  cite  other  cases  here,  although 
I  have  made  just  as  radical  cures  on  those  suffering  many  years  with 
the  same  defects ;  and  I  have  cured  cases  of  nyctalopia,  hemeralopia, 
granulated  lids,  scrofulous  inflammation,  ophthalmia  tarsi,  conjunctiv- 
itis, astigmatism  and  myopia,  and  removed  two  cataracts,  by  this 
science.  In  view  of  the  very  rapid  increase  in  optical  defects  in  each 
succeeding  generation  the  time  is  at  hand  when  all  should  ignore  the 
harsh  material  treatment  and  turn  to  this  science  as  the  only  safe  and 
sure  means  of  correcting  these  evils. 

Deafness.  — Mr.  J.  A.  M.,  62  years  old,  had  been  entirely  deaf  in  one 
ear  for  twenty  years.  I  made  gentle  passes  up  and  back  from  Disease 
to  Health  and  from  Insanity  to  Sanity,  on  the  head.  Held  my  finger 
tips  on  the  front  part  of  Sensibility,  on  Sound,  and  also  on  Sense  of 
Force,  at  the  outer  contours  of  the  eyes.  This  was  continued  fifteen 
minutes  at  a  time,  and  in  three  treatments  he  could  hear  a  watch  tick  ; 
hearing  was  perfect. 

Mrs.  E.  S.,  31  years  old,  became  perfectly  deaf  from  drinking  blueing, 
trying  to  cure  some  blood  disease.  This  was  eight  years  ago  and  the 
ears  remained  the  same.  She  could  not  hear  thunder.  I  treated  her 
ears  as  in  the  above  case,  and  used  a  little  almond  oil,  and  she  could 
hear  ordinary  conversation  and  hear  a  clock  tick. 

Mrs.  H.  C.  had  not  heard  out  of  her  right  ear  for  seven  or  eight 
years,  and  only  partially  for  twelve  years.  It  gradually  grew  worse 
for  four  years,  and  for  eight  years  she  had  kept  it  stopped,  as  she  had 
given  up  all  hope  of  its  restoration.  I  treated  her  only  three  times 
with  my  hands,  as  in  the  above  cases,  and  she  could  hear  distinctly 
with  that  ear. 

Mr.  C.  H.,  15  years  of  age,  had  trouble  with  his  ears  from  birth. 
Could  never  hear  distinctly,  but  had  a  roaring  all  the  time.  Colds 
made  them  so  he  could  scarcely  hear  at  all.  There  was  great  pain 
most  of  the  time.  I  washed  the  ears  out  with  water  and  held  my  fin- 
gers on  Sound  and  Sense  of  Force,  and  made  passes  up  and  back 
from  Disease  to  Health  and  from  Insanity  to  Sanity,  and  in  eight 
treatments,  thirty  minutes  at  a  time,  his  ears  were  sound  and  hearing 
perfect,  and  have  remained  so,  although  fifteen  months  ago. 


388  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [.CHAP.    XVIil. 

Mr.  J.  G.,  age  47,  had  trouble  with  his  ears  when  he  was  15  years  of 
age.  Could  not  hear  at  all  when  he  had  colds.  Had  risings  and 
roaring  all  the  time.  During  the  war  he  had  camp  fever,  and  doctors 
claimed  it  settled  in  his  ears.  He  had  taken  a  great  deal  of  quinine. 
He  had  not  heard  out  of  his  left  ear  for  twenty  years,  and  but  little 
out  of  the  right  for  eighteen  years.  His  general  health  was  fair.  I 
treated  him  nineteen  times  as  in  the  above  cases,  except  dry  cupping 
on  the  back  of  his  neck,  and  he  gradually  improved.  He  got  so  he 
could  hear  ordinary  conversation,  dishes,  knives  and  forks  rattle,  fire 
sparkle,  shoes  creaking,  rap  on  door  and  chickens  cackling,  which 
he  had  not  done  for  twenty  years.  His  hearing  remained  the  same 
until  his  death,  some  nine  months  later. 

Mrs.  E.  G.,  74  years  old,  had  been  deaf  fifty  years,  and  in  six  treat- 
ments with  my  hands,  as  above,  she  could  hear  the  clock  tick,  and 
knives,  forks,  etc.,  rattle.  This  was  fifteen  months  ago,  and  hearing 
is  yet  perfect.  With  such  evidence  before  me,  and  a  number  of  others 
I  could  cite,  I  am  led  to  say,  in  the  light  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy. 
"he  that  hath  ears  to  hear  let  him  hear." 


STATEMENT    OF    A    MEMBER    OF    THE    LEGAL    PROFESSION,    WHO    HAD 
BEEN   INSTRUCTED    IN    THERAPEUTIC  SARCOGNOMY. 

In  applying  your  instructions  in  Psychometry  and  Sarcognomy 
my  success  as  an  amateur  has  been  very  encouraging.  I  frequently 
succeed  in  getting  impressions  and  describing  cases  on  my  first 
interview,  before  coming  in  contact  with  the  patient,  and  whenever  I 
apply  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy  in  treatment  the  patients  are 
often  surprised  at  the  unexpectedly  favorable  results. 

In  January,  1889,  I  was  called  on  by  my  friend  Dr.  F.  of  Lowell,  a 
regular  M.D.  and  LL.D.  (having  practised  law  in  his  earlier  years), 
to  tell  him  truly  his  condition,  as  two  or  three  physicians  had  said 
he  could  not  live  over  six  days,  that  he  had  a  cancer  on  the  left  side 
of  his  face,  and  that  his  heart  difficulty  was  alarming  as  he  was 
liable  to  drop  off  instantly.  He  wanted  to  arrange  his  business  so 
that  his  wife  would  have  no  need  of  an  administration  upon  his 
decease. 

He  was  about  fifty  years  of  age,  of  a  mental-motive  and  impres- 
sible temperament,  so  that  I  could  remove  the  pain  from  his  face 
instantly. 

His  so-called  cancer  has  been  cured  under  my  treatment,  without 
medicine  ;  and  I  might  claim  it  as  a  cancer  cure  according  to  medical 
opinions,  but  in  fact  I  do  not  believe  that  it  was  a  cancer,  and  found 
that  it  was  better  or  worse  as  his  general  health  was  modified. 

I  might  also  claim  the  cure  of  his  heart  disease ;  but,  from  the  ease 


CHAP.    XVIII. J  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY. 

with    which    I    controlled    it,   I  am  satisfied    that  it  was  a  nervous 
affection. 

He  had  been  suffering  from  malaria  for  twenty-seven  years  and  his 
nervous  system  was  thoroughly  deranged.  I  was  with  him  in  some  of 
his  worst  attacks,  which  I  need  not  describe,  and  gave  him  prompt 
relief.  He  soon  resumed  his  labors  in  comparative  health,  which 
was  very  gratifying,  considering  that  he  had  been  unsuccessfully 
treated  with  digitalis  for  his  heart  and  cocaine  for  the  pains  of  his 
face,  and  many  other  remedies,  and  enjoyed  or  endured  the  regular 
practice  for  twenty-seven  years  with  no  success.  At  present  he  is 
in  improved  health  and  entering  active  employment. 

In  April  I  saw  Mrs.  M.  of  Lowell,  aged  52,  suffering  from  the 
removal  of  two  cancers  from  her  right  breast  by  the  knife,  and  then 
undergoing  treatment  by  plasters.  Her  last  regular  physician  gave 
her  morphine,  and  she  was  obliged  to  continue  it  hypodermically 
several  times  a  day.  Her  appetite  was  variable,  her  right  arm  was 
nearly  useless,  and  she  suffered  mentally  from  the  condition  of  her 
daughter,  a  teacher,  who  had  a  cancer  on  the  right  side  of  the  body 
(so  recognized  by  several  experienced  physicians)  and  under  the 
treatment  of  three  physicians  had  received  no  help.  Her  menstrua- 
tion was  nearly  suppressed  for  six  months,  and  her  right  arm  was  so 
affected  she  could  not  use  it  in  her  school  duties. 

I  perceived  on  the  first  visit  that  the  mother  could  not  recover 
from  the  cancer,  but  told  her  she  could  be  relieved  from  the  necessity 
of  using  morphine  (in  which  I  succeeded)  and  that  her  daughter 
could  be  cured.  I  relieved  the  daughter's  severe  headaches  and 
restored  her  menstruation  in  the  first  month,  and  in  less  than  four 
months  the  cancer  was  dispersed  and  her  school  labors  resumed. 
These  results  were  effected  by  brief  treatments,  usually  not  exceed- 
ing three  minutes  each  time,  and  without  removing  her  clothing. 

In  July,  '89,  I  saw  Mrs.  Y.  of  Lowell,  who  was  suffering  from 
nervous  prostration  and  general  debility,  and,  though  she  had  been 
under  the  care  of  three  regular  physicians,  had  received  little  or  no 
benefit. 

I  diagnosed  her  case,  discovering  symptoms  quite  common  at  her 
age,  and  informed  her  that  in  two  weeks  she  could  visit  the  beach,  as 
she  wished.  I  treated  her  according  to  Sarcognomy,  corrected  her 
diet  and  gave  her  the  tea  of  red  and  white  clover  blossoms  which 
you  recommended,  and  in  two  weeks  she  was  off  visiting,  fully 
restored. 

This  patient  was  called  upon  by  a  Mrs.  H.,  aged  about  thirty, 
fleshy  and  jolly  in  appearance,  whom  no  one  would  suspect  of  much 
suffering,  and    I  surprised  myself    with  the  correctness  of    my  off- 


390  RATIONAL    PRACTICE  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

hand  diagnosis.  She  asked  if  I  could  tell  her  what  ailed  her,  and 
without  moving  my  chair,  being  about  ten  feet  from  her,  I  told  her 
without  asking  a  question  that  she  had  injured  her  spine  and  pro- 
duced a  congestion  in  the  cervical  region  ;  that  she  was  suffering 
much,  that  her  lower  limbs  were  weak  and  becoming  paralyzed  on 
her  left  side,  that  she  suffered  from  constipation  and  uterine  displace- 
ment and  had  some  water  about  the  heart,  though  not  generally 
dropsical.  "Who  told  you  all  this?"  was  her  natural  question.  I 
replied  that  as  I  had  never  seen  her  before  and  did  not  know  her 
name  I  discovered  it  only  by  psychometry.  "  Well  (said  she)  I  did 
hurt  my  spine,  and  I  do  suffer  just  as  you  describe.  I  am  consti- 
pated and  my  left  limb  is  numb  up  to  my  knee.  I  had  three  physi- 
cians for  nearly  three  days  before  the  delivery  of  my  last  child,  and 
I  do  fear  dropsy  and  my  doctors  have  failed  to  relieve  me."  Her 
physician,  however,  ranks  deservedly  high  in  his  profession. 

Mrs.  H.  E.  M.,  aged  60  years,  a  resident  of  Boston,  was  suddenly 
attacked  with  rheumatism  on  the  eve  of  February  9,  proximo,  and 
on  the  following  morning  her  right  shoulder,  arm,  wrist,  little  finger, 
hip,  knee  and  foot  were  swollen  with  inflammation  and  very  painful. 
She  was  helpless  ;  could  not  turn  herself  in  bed  without  assistance. 
Her  right  shoulder,  arm  and  wrist,  hip,  knee  and  foot  (ankle)  were 
stiff  and  useless. 

The  writer  being  her  agent  in  Lowell,  she  had  her  landlady  write 
him  to  come  to  Boston  at  once.  I  saw  her  the  following  day,  and 
found  her  sick  in  mind  and  body,  with  high  fever,  and  under  the 
medical  care  of  Dr.  H.,  Park  Square,  Boston.  Still  she  desired  me 
to  diagnose  her  condition  Psychometrically.  I  did  so  and  found  her 
impressional,  and  that  Psychological  treatment  was  the  remedy  and 
method  for  her  recovery ;  by  using  which  in  about  two  minutes  she 
could  use  her  right  arm  and  hand  so  she  could  dress  herself ;  and  the 
tenderness  of  head  left  her,  so  that  she  combed  her  hair ;  and  she 
could  turn  herself  in  bed  without  assistance. 

After  receiving  this  relief  she  continued  under  treatment  of  Dr. 
H.  until  about  March  20,  when  Dr.  G.  came,  in  consultation,  and 
the  writer  is  informed  that  they  decided  that  her  foot  must  be  ampu- 
tated and  advised  that  she  be  sent  to  the  hospital  immediately. 
Thereupon  she  wrote  me  again.  I  saw  her  about  March  22  and 
found  that  her  foot  had  been  lanced  on  both  sides  and  that  her  case 
was  critical.  I  treated  her  then,  relieving  her  pain  and  enabling  her 
to  sleep,  but  did  not  take  full  charge  of  her  case,  not  being  in  Boston, 
and  under  the  influence  of  her  nurse  and  physician  she  was  per- 
suaded to  go  to  the  hospital  and  was  sent  there  about  April  8, 
proximo,  and    remained    there   forty-four  days,  when    she    was    dis- 


CHAP.    XVIII.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  391 

charged  as  incurable,  with  a  plaster  cast  about  the  ankle  and  foot, 
which  had  been  there  about  two  weeks.  The  pains  were  unbearable, 
allowing  no  sound  sleep  or  rest  in  body  or  mind.  I  saw  her  in 
Boston  about  May  27  at  the  Hotel  Johnson,  237  Shawmut  Avenue, 
and  found  her  in  a  sad  condition.  She  couid  not  put  her  foot  to  the 
carpet  without  severe  pains.  I  examined  her  condition  and  treated 
her  again.  I  took  her  cane  and  bade  her  to  rise  and  stand  upon  her 
feet  and  then  walk  about  the  room.  She  did  so  with  astonishment, 
for  she  had  ordered  crutches.  I  told  her  "  No  ; "  that  I  was  sure  that 
she  could  be  cured,  and  that  I  would  secure  new  lodgings.  The  next 
day  I  called  for  her  and  she  walked  three  blocks  and  took  cars  for 
Allston,  some  four  miles  away,  and  before  I  could  secure  a  carriage 
she  walked  some  five  blocks  to  65  Braintree  Street  without  assistance 
save  her  light  cane.  I  treated  her  before  leaving  for  Lowell  and  told 
her  to  use  her  cane  as  little  as  possible  and  in  one  month  she  would 
not  need  it.  To  the  surprise  of  herself  and  her  landlady,  on  the  10th 
of  June  (thirteen  days)  she  was  able  to  ride  into  Boston  alone,  make 
several  visits,  and  walk  from  Shawmut  Avenue  and  Dover  Street  to 
the  Providence  Depot  and  to  the  Public  Garden,  and,  after  resting,  take 
the  electric  cars  for  Allston  ;  nevertheless  she  rested  nicely  that  night, 
and  at  this  writing  she  can  walk  a  mile  and  return  without  resting,  and 
intends  to  commence  her  usual  avocations  about  the  first  of  July,  '90. 

[Mr.  H.  states  that  in  this  case  he  assisted  his  treatment  by  some 
medical  agents,  —  a  little  cascara,  clover  and  hydrastis  and  some 
small  blisters  applied  twice  on  the  foot.] 

I  have  not  made  use  of  electricity  in  my  amateur  practice,  but 
have  been  familiar  with  electric  treatment  for  twenty  years,  though 
not  attracted  to  its  use.  I  was  much  gratified  by  your  discovery  of 
uniting  electricity  and  magnetism  and  your  experiments  on  my- 
self. I  think  your  electro-magnetic  current  far  excels  anything 
known  in  that  line,  and  I  observed  that  whereas  the  negative  pole  of 
the  common  current  is  most  powerfully  felt,  your  electro-magnetic 
current  was  far  more  powerful  in  the  positive  pole,  because  charged 
with  magnetism  from  a  strong  magnet,  and  yet  was  far  more  agree- 
able than  any  electric  current.  It  affected  favorably  the  back  brain 
and  the  kidneys,  and  I  slept  very  soundly  after  the  treatment  in  the 
evening,  whereas  heretofore  the  electric  current  alone  has  caused 
wakefulness  and  irritation.  I  would  suppose  that  any  one  would 
enjoy  the  application  of  the  electro-magnetic  current,  from  its  whole- 
some, soothing  influence.  Lester  A.  Hulse. 

The  foregoing  statements  do  not  convey  a  complete  idea  of 
rational  practice,  as  they  do  not  develop  the  medical,  pneumatic  and 


392  RATIONAL    PRACTICE.  [CHAP.    XVIII. 

electric  methods,  the  results  of  which  may  be  as  marvellous  when 
guided  by  Sarcognomy  as  those  of  the  nervauric  practice  that  has 
been  described. 

The  power  of  pneumatic  treatment,  as  shown  in  the  chapter  on  that 
subject,  is  far  short  of  what  it  may  be  when  guided  by  Sarcognomy. 

Medical  treatment,  when  guided  by  psychometric  exploration  of 
diseases  and  remedies,  has  a  marvellous  power  and  is  continually  rein- 
forced by  new  discoveries  of  therapeutic  potencies  and  the  power  of 
intuition  to  lead  beyond  the  acquisitions  of  science. 

Electric  treatment  by  the  new  methods  combines  with  the  nerv- 
aura  and  the  medical  potencies,  and  not  only  changes  the  balance  of 
functions,  guided  by  Sarcognomy,  but  disperses  morbid  conditions 
and  fills  the  patient  with  a  combination  of  healing  influences,  hereto- 
fore unknown.  Moreover  in  the  new  combination  of  static  electricity 
and  magnetism  demonstrated  in  1890,  it  furnishes  that  desideratum,  a 
reviving  stimulus  for  the  entire  nervous  system,  and  a  soothing  tonic 
for  all  the  tissues  which  sustain  organic  life,  thus  building  up  the 
constitution  in  a  genial  manner,  which  has  heretofore  been  possible 
only  by  means  of  that  nervauric  treatment  which  is  far  from  being 
universal  in  its  application  and  success,  while  the  electro-magnetic 
treatment  has  a  potency  which  none  can  resist. 

When  asked  for  the  proper  name  to  designate  the  new  system  of 
practice,  which  introduces  Sarcognomy,  I  speak  of  it  as  the  anthro- 
pological system  of  practice,  for  it  is  based  upon  the  entire 
science  of  anthropology  —  all  the  truths  of  which  contribute  to  its 
completeness.  This  is  its  distinction  from  all  other  systems,  which 
are  based  upon  very  limited  conceptions  of  the  constitution  of  man 
and  the  resources  of  therapeutics.  The  conception  of  the  healing 
art  has  been  so  limited  as  to  be  expressed  by  the  phrase,  "  the  Science 
of  Medicine^  instead  of  the  proper  word  Therapeutics,  as  if  the 
healing  art  consisted  entirely  of  using  medicines.  The  colleges  of 
the  Anthropological  system  will  be  known  as  colleges  of  Therapeutics. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

THE    HYGIENE   OF   SARCOGNOMY. 

Cultivation  of  the  higher  organs  indispensable  —  The  various  methods  illustrated 

—  Effects  of  high  altitudes  on  the  lungs  —  Importance  of  costal  respiration  —  Illus- 
tration of  the  subject  by  the  Georgia  Eclectic  Medical  Joijrnal — Relation  of  the 
upper  thoracic  region  to  the  ethical  —  Exercises  of  the  limbs  —  Influence  of  altitudes 

—  Importance  of  nutrition  to  the  brain  —  False  theories  of  a  medical  author  —  The 
principles  that  should  guide  our  exercises  —  Evil  effects  of  excessive  muscular 
culture  and  passional  excitement  —  Plan  of  culture  proposed  —  Cultivation  of  the 
soul  and  religious  sentiments  as  the  basis  of  health  —  Of  social  intercourse  and 
smiles  —  Importance  of  activity,  energy  and  sport  —  Causes  of  exhaustion  —  Of 
vocal  culture  and  oratory  —  System  of  culture  devised  by  Mr.  Checkley  — Treatment 
of  the  skin — Tight  lacing  —  Thoracic  hygiene  and  atmospheric  conditions. 


There  are  certain  obvious  hygienic  laws,  indicated  by  the  principles 
of  Sarcognomy,  which  should  be  understood  by  all  as  well  as  by  the 
medical  profession. 

The  most  important  principle  is  found  in  the  superiority  of  the 
higher  portions  of  the  body,  morally  and  intellectually,  and  their 
generation  and  conservation  of  vital  force.  This  makes  it  absolutely 
necessary  to  our  happiness  and  success  to  practise  the  superior  cult- 
ure —  the  culture  of  all  the  higher  powers,  as  illustrated  in  the 
chapter  on  Health. 

First  and  pre-eminently  we  should  cultivate  the  brain,  and  espe- 
cially cultivate  its  higher  powers,  — love,  hope,  energy,  duty  and  per- 
severing firmness,  — for  the  higher  the  culture  the  nobler  and  longer 
will  be  the  life.  These  qualities  sustain  all  the  powers  of  life  and 
fill  the  body  with  healthy  and  joyous  efficiency.  They  defy  disease, 
despair  and  insanity.  Consequently,  the  first  lesson  of  true  hygiene 
is  love,  the  second  is  work  or  energy,  and  the  third  is  aspiration 
or  self-respecting  ambition.  (This  is  true  brain  culture.  The 
common  idea  of  brain  culture  is  intellectual  effort,  either  in  connec- 
tion with  sedentary  life,  which  impairs  all  the  energies,  or  with  active 
employments,  which  fatigue.  This  is  not  brain  culture  but  brain 
exhaustion.  The  intellect  and  the  physical  energies  are  both  ex- 
haustive.) 

There  is  no  permanent  and  solid  foundation  of  health  and  success 
without  these  higher  qualities.  Hence,  our  hygienic  law  is :  incessant 
industry  in  the   society  of  our  fellows   and  the  continual  making  of 


394  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

friends,  which  is  the  test  of  our  active  virtues.  If  we  do  not  win  love 
and  friendship  our  moral  capital  is  not  in  active  use,  and  if  we  have 
not  accomplished  anything  of  value  we  are  moral  paupers.  A  life  with- 
out enthusiasm  and  energy  is  a  poor  affair.  Greatness  of  soul  is  the 
only  great  success,  and  soul  culture  takes  precedence  of  all  other 
culture.  The  brain  should  be  warm  ;  a  cold-brained  man  is  the  one 
commonly  called  cold  hearted. 

The  glowing  condition  of  the  brain  is  accompanied  by  a  similar 
glowing  condition  of  the  chest,  and  from  these  two  comes  the  life 
that  animates  the  entire  person. 

Looking  at  the  body  we  find  the  normal  superiority  of  the  chest, 
which  in  its  upper  portion  corresponds  to  the  upper  half  of  the  brain. 
From  the  thorax  proceed  the  currents  of  richly  vitalized  blood,  which 
supply  all  parts  of  the  body  with  vitality.  Hence,  if  we  would 
increase  the  stock  of  vitality,  we  must  increase  the  development  and 
activity  of  the  chest,  which  can  be  done  only  by  a  life  of  action. 
The  idle  man  degenerates,  the  busy  man  develops.  Degeneracy  of 
the  thorax  implies  degeneracy  of  the  whole  constitution.  In  the 
Prussian  army  narrow-chested  recruits,  whose  chest  circumference  is 
less  than  half  the  length  of  the  body,  are  dismissed  as  predisposed 
to  consumption. 

The  action  should  be  symmetrically  normal,  not  manual  labor 
alone,  —  especially  not  manual  labor  performed  as  a  repulsive  and  tire- 
some task,  —  but  exertion  in  which  we  are  interested,  which  calls  forth 
our  ambition,  energy  and  enthusiasm.  Some  such  exertion  every 
day  is  essential  to  normal  development,  essential  to  the  expansion  of 
the  lungs. 

The  thoracic  development  which  does  so  much  for  life,  health  and 
energy  may  be  cultivated  also  by  conversation,  declamation  and 
singing.  By  engaging  in  these  daily  we  increase  our  stock  of 
normal  life  and  health.  They  expand  as  well  as  vitalize  the  chest. 
There  is  no  labor  performed  so  easily  and  with  so  little  fatigue  as 
that  which  is  accompanied  by  singing.  A  citizen  of  New  Orleans 
named  McDonough  many  years  before  the  war  gave  to  his  negroes 
an  opportunity  of  emancipation  by  extra  work  to  buy  their  time 
piecemeal.  They  would  buy  one  hour  a  day  to  begin,  and  with  that 
advantage  buy  the  remaining  hours  with  increasing  rapidity.  Ani- 
mated by  such  hopes,  they  astonished  spectators  by  the  zeal  with 
which  they  worked,  early  and  late,  singing  at  their  work. 

The  practice  of  singing,  it  is  well  known,  promotes  the  health  and 
the  development  of  the  chest. 

The  expansion  of  the  chest  indicates  the  expansion  or  develop- 
ment of  the  noblest  elements  of  humanity,  for  the  higher  organs  of 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  39$ 

the  brain  are  in  so  close  a  relation  to  the  chest  that  its  development 
becomes  to  them  an  invigorating  co-operation. 

Thoracic  expansion  should  therefore  be  steadily  sought  by  all,  and 
when  it  is  not  obtained  by  active  exertion,  which  is  the  normal 
method,  it  may  be  sought  by  the  expansion  of  the  chest  in  forced 
respiration.  We  should,  five  or  ten  times  in  the  day,  inflate  the  chest 
to  its  fullest  capacity  for  several  minutes,  and  in  walking  we  should 
make  it  a  practice  to  inflate  the  chest  and  firmly  hold  the  breath  for 
a  fourth  of  a  minute.  ("A  late  account  of  the  gypsies,"  says 
Dr.  E.  Cutter,  "  states  that  every  morning  they  go  out  early  and 
inhale  full  breaths,  hold  them,  pound  their  chests  hard  in  expiration, 
and  then  inhale  deeply  again,  and  so  on.") 

The  inflation  of  which  I  speak  is  by  the  ascent  of  the  ribs  instead 
of  the  descent  of  the  diaphragm,  and  its  tendency  is  to  develop  the 
thorax  and  diminish  the  prominence  of  the  abdomen,  thus  giving  a 
desirable  form,  promoting  the  growth  of  the  lungs  and  improving 
the  quality  of  the  voice  as  well  as  the  aeration  of  the  blood.  I  regard 
these  systematic  exercises  in  full  breathing  as  of  great  hygienic 
value  and  highly  beneficial  to  the  nervous  system  and  the  higher 
sentiments.  In  expanding  the  upper  portion  of  the  chest  and 
restraining  the  lower,  the  abdomen  being  drawn  in  as  the  chest  is 
elevated,  we  produce  an  amiable  and  womanly  sentiment.  One  who 
wishes  to  imitate  a  woman  would  find  this  the  most  natural  way  to 
do  it. 

The  very  great  benefit  of  high  altitudes  and  mountain  ranges 
from  two  to  four  thousand  feet  high  in  developing  higher  health  and 
a  more  spiritual  temperament  is  produced  chiefly  through  the  expan- 
sion of  the  chest  required  by  a  rarer  atmosphere  and  the  more  active 
exhalation  of  the  lungs.  This  beneficent  influence  has  been  amply 
realized  in  the  elevated  portions  of  Colorado,  California  and  Northern 
Georgia  and  the  Carolinas. 

There  is  abundant  evidence  of  the  protective  influence  of  high 
locations  against  consumption.  According  to  Dr.  Valenzuela  of 
Madrid  (in  L' Union  Medicate)  the  deaths  from  consumption  in  Spain 
corresponded  inversely  with  the  altitude,  being  twenty  per  cent,  of 
the  patients  in  locations  less  than  a  hundred  metres  above  the  sea 
level,  ten  to  twelve  per  cent,  at  an  elevation  of  from  one  hundred  to 
five  hundred  metres,  while  above  twelve  hundred  metres  phthisis  did 
not  exist.  Mr.  Geo.  Foy  states  in  the  Medical  Press  and  Circular, 
of  July  10,  1889,  that  he  found  phthisis  entirely  absent  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  two  thousand  metres. 

Dr.  Valenzuela  appears  to  have  shown  that  the  benefit  of  high 
locations  in  resisting  consumption  is  due  to  increased  respiration,  by 


39^  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.     XIX. 

producing  this  increased  respiration  artifically,  which  he  did  by  plac-"" 
ing  the  patients  in  pneumatic  chambers,  in  which  the  air  had  less  of 
oxygen  and  more  of  carbonic  acid,  so  as  to  compel  additional  respira- 
tion. He  reports  the  successful  treatment  of  five  hundred  cases  in 
the  early  stages.  The  patients  increased  in  weight  and  in  thoracic 
measurement. 

Patients  have  often  cured  themselves  by  an  active  out-door  life 
which  greatly  increased  the  respiration.  As  Prof.  Mays  expresses  it : 
"  The  question  of  curing  the  disease  does  not  depend  on  the  purity 
or  freshness  of  the  air,  or  upon  the  number  of  bacilli  which  the 
atmosphere  may  contain,  or  upon  the  amount  of  oxygen  which  may 
be  introduced  into  the  body,  for  these  are  all  secondary  considera- 
tions, but  it  is  simply  a  mechanical  question,  a  question  as  to  the 
best  mode  of  expanding  the  lungs,  and  especially  the  apices  of  our 
round-shouldered  and  flat-chested  patients,  of  removing  the  infiltrated 
products  already  existing,  and  of  enhancing  the  constitutional  resist- 
ance." 

The  elevated  regions  from  the  Rocky  Mountains  eastward  to 
Kansas,  with  an  elevation  above  the  ocean  from  two  to  seven  thou- 
sand feet,  have  a  dry  atmosphere,  free  from  malaria,  extreme  varia- 
tions of  temperature,  and  a  low  barometric  pressure  proportioned  to 
the  height. 

The  whole  region,  extending  into  New  Mexico,  is  marked  by  the 
superior  health  of  the  inhabitants  and  a  general  improvement  of 
health  in  those  who  settle  there.  Fevers  and  consumption  are  ex- 
tremely rare,  but  owing  to  the  greater  activity  of  the  lungs  and  skin, 
and  the  great  variations  of  temperature,  pneumonia  and  erysipelas 
are  the  most  prominent  diseases,  next  to  which  may  be  mentioned 
bronchitis,  rheumatism  and  uterine  hemorrhage. 

"  Consumption,"  says  Prof,  F.  Donaldson,  "is  most  prevalent  at 
the  level  of  the  sea,  and  seems  to  decrease  with  increase  of  elevation, 
according  to  Fuch,  Von  Tschudi  and  Mackey.  At  Marseilles,  on 
the  seaboard,  the  mortality  from  that  cause  was  25  per  cent. ;  at 
Hamburg,  48  feet  above  the  sea,  it  is  23  per  cent. ;  while  at  Eschwege, 
496  feet  above  the  sea,  it  is  only  12  per  cent.  At  Brotterdale,  1,800 
feet  above  the  sea,  the  mortality  is  reduced  to  0.9  per  cent.  Dr. 
Glutsman  has  published  a  number  of  interesting  facts  in  regard  to 
the  immunity  from  consumption  in  very  high  localities,  such  as  on 
the  Andes  of  Peru,  table-lands  of  the  Rocky  Mountains,  in  the  towns 
of  Santa  Fe  de  Bogota,  at  an  elevation  of  8, 100  feet,  Potosi,  about 
12,000,  and  the  Puna  region  of  the  Andes,  at  11,000;  in  Europe, 
many  places  on  the  Alps,  as  in  Styria,  Carniola  and  on  the  western 
section  of  the  Pyrenees.     In  Africa  immunity  is  said  to  exist  on  the 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  397 

plateaus  of  Abyssinia.  In  Mexico,  at  8,000  feet  above  the  level'of  the 
sea,  it  is  but  rarely  met  with  ;  and  in  Asia,  on  the  high  plateaus  of 
Armenia  and  Persia. 

A  retreat  for  consumptives  has  been  established  in  the  cool  cli- 
mate of  Davos  in  the  Swiss  Alps,  a  mile  above  the  ocean  level,  and 
the  experience  of  twenty  years  is  highly  favorable. 

As  an  exercise  for  the  promotion  of  health  I  would  recommend 
the  exercise  of  lung  expansion,  to  be  continued  until  an  expanded 
chest  becomes  habitual  and  permanent. 

An  ingenious  student  of  the  principles  of  self-culture  (Mr. 
Edward  Checkley  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.),  having  developed  a  delicate 
constitution  into  extraordinary  vigor,  is  very  enthusiastic  and  con- 
fident as  to  the  value  of  thoracic  expansion,  especially  of  the  upper 
portion  of  the  chest.  Mr.  C.  says  that  he  observed  in  mismanage- 
ment of  respiration  a  principal  cause  of  disease.  One  class,  with 
round  shoulders  and  a  stooping  gait,  with  drooping  heads,  having 
more  of  abdominal  than  costal  respiration,  he  found  inclined  to  con- 
sumption, heart  disease,  paralysis  and  dyspepsia.  In  another  class, 
which  used  the  base  of  the  lungs  to  the  neglect  of  the  upper 
portion,  throwing  the  body  backwards  and  projecting  the  abdomen, 
he  found  tendencies  to  dropsy,  rupture,  apoplexy,  paralysis  and 
kidney  diseases.  When  the  body  is  held  erect,  the  muscles  of  the 
abdomen  well  braced,  and  respiration  effected  chiefly  by  the  upper 
portion  of  the  lungs,  he  anticipates  great  increase  of  health  and 
strength,  with  freedom  alike  from  consumption  and  obesity.  Hence 
he  believes  that  for  proper  physical  culture  we  should  seek  the 
development  of  the  lungs,  especially  upwards,  rather  than  develop- 
ment of  muscles.  Mere  muscular  exercise  he  considers  of  very 
little  importance  in  physical  culture,  but  exercise  of  the  brain  in 
prompt  and  accurate  use  of  the  muscles  he  considers  important. 

He  maintains  that  the  sternum  should  be  flexible  (composed  of 
three  parts),  and  in  breathing  the  upper  part  should  be  strongly  pro- 
jected, rising  and  falling  as  in  a  woman.  By  teaching  this  method 
he  claims  to  have  greatly  improved  the  health  of  many  persons. 

The  doctrines  and  observations  of  Mr.  Checkley  are  a  strong  con- 
firmation of  Sarcognomy,  which  shows  that  the  upper  half  of  the 
brain  and  upper  half  of  the  chest  are  the  great  sources  of  normal 
healthy  life  and  development. 

Mr.  C.  deserves  much  credit  for  his  original  observations  and 
hygienic  suggestions,  which  are  certainly  of  practical  value,  but  we 
must  not  forget  that,  although  the  upper  portion  of  the  chest  is  the 
most  important,  the  entire  chest  is  necessary  to  the  greatest  vigor, 
and  any  mode  of  life  which  restricts  the  development  of  the  lower 


39$  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

portion  impairs  the  vital  force.  Sedentary  employment  does  this. 
For  a  full  development  of  the  chest  we  should  have,  every  day,  the 
exercise  of  running,  or  something  equivalent,  compelling  the  deepest 
respiration. 

The  Georgia  Eclectic  Medical  Journal  has  advocated  full  breathing 
as  follows  :  — 

"  Full  breathing  a  therapeutic  agent,  restorative  and  curative.  — 
Frequently  has  attention  been  called  in  these  pages  to  the  great 
value  of  cultivating  the  habit  and  practice  of  filling  the  lungs  to 
their  fullest  capacity  as  a  curative  measure  in  all  scrofulous  and 
other  constitutional  diseases.  Recently  a  case  of  confirmed  sleep- 
lessness, that  had  existed  for  nearly  a  month,  and  had  resisted  the 
treatment  of  two  judicious  physicians,  was  rapidly  cured  by  making 
the  patient  fill  his  lungs  to  their  fullest  capacity  by  forced  and  power- 
ful efforts,  and  to  hold  the  lungs  full  for  various  lengths  of  time,  — 
IO  seconds  up  to  30  and  finally  up  to  45  seconds,  —  then  expel  the  air, 
and  after  a  rest  at  tranquil  breathing  for  five,  return  again  to  this 
forced  effort  at  filling  the  lungs,  which  was  repeated  at  intervals  of 
an  hour  or  two  during  the  day.  At  first  the  effort  was  as  exhausting 
and  trying  as  any  hard  manual  labor  or  violent  exercise.  After  a 
few  hours'  practice,  and  screwing  up  a  heavy  force  of  courage  and 
will-power,  the  patient  could  hold  the  lungs  full  for  20  seconds  at  a 
time  the  first  day,  and  repeat  the  act  several  times  during  the  wak- 
ing hours.  At  night  his  chest  muscles  felt  sore,  but  he  was  much 
refreshed,  felt  tired  and  went  to  bed  at  10  o'clock  p.m.,  and  soon  fell 
into  a  refreshing  and  calm  sleep,  which  lasted  till  3  o'clock  a.m.,  the 
first  he  had  to  call  sleep  for  several  weeks. 

"  In  constitutional  diseases  dependent  on  mal-nutrition,  and  asso- 
ciated with  impaired  assimilation  of  the  kind  that  is  belonging  to  the 
deeper  tissue  renovation  and  repair,  this  practice  of  breathing  in 
oxygen  to  the  fullest  extent  is  of  remarkable  curative  powers.  At 
first  the  effort  is  very  trying  and  exhausting,  but,  by  plucky  effort 
and  a  full  use  of  will,  all  the  other  difficulties  to  its  use  can  be  over- 
come. Children  can  be  taught  the  art  as  well  as  adults  when  proper 
care  and  attention  is  given  to  imparting  instruction  and  superintend- 
ing these  respiratory  efforts.  It  requires  patience,  persistence,  and 
a  full  measure  of  persuasive  address  to  manage  children  and  young 
people  successfully.  We  have  seen  thin-chested  children,  seemingly 
as  frail  as  a  cracker,  pale,  emaciated,  with  deficient  digestive  powers, 
and  physically  like  infants  in  strength  and  endurance,  brought  out 
and  raised  up  to  robustness  of  constitution  in  a  few  weeks'  practice 
of  this  most  valuable  therapeutic  measure.  Teach  people  to  fill  the 
lungs  completely,  not  half  full ;  they  must  draw  in  the  breath  to  fill 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  399 

the  whole  of  the  lungs,  from  apex  to  base.  This  is  hard  work  at 
first,  but  trial  and  stick  will  remove  all  the  trouble  in  the  way. 
Feeble  people  have  not,  perhaps,  had  the  full  physiological  power  of 
their  thoracic  muscles.  The  lungs  have  never  been  filled,  and  the 
quantity  of  oxygen  necessary  to  vitalize  the  tissues  and  animate  the 
nervous  centres  has  not  been  provided  ;  hence,  these  people  go  on  in 
life  half  dead  and  die  early.  A  full-breathing  pair  of  lungs  are  a  full 
measure  of  life-giving  and  life-supporting  organs.  Endurance  means 
the  quantity  of  oxygen  the  lungs  can  take  in  and  the  quantity  the 
tissues  can  store  in  their  recesses.  This  storing  of  oxygen  is  a 
mystic  force,  and  the  one  we  are  trying  to  know  more  of.  The 
power  to  store  is  the  energy  of  the  system  to  take  and  use.  All 
these  functions  can  be  cultivated  and  enlarged  by  proper  practice. 

"  There  is  a  man  here  whose  age  is  86.  He  says  he  would  have  died 
50  years  ago  but  for  his  practice  of  filling  his  lungs  as  full  as  he 
could  three  or  more  times  a  day.  He  has  been  a  feeble  man  all  his 
life  ;  was  never  stout  —  always  dyspeptic.  At  one  time  he  believes 
he  had  consumption,  which  he  cured  by  this  practice. 

"  A  number  of  scrofulous  and  feeble,  puny,  pale  and  cadaveric-ap- 
pearing children  in  this  town,  who  have  grown  much  more  healthy 
and  are  now  vigorous  and  rugged,  were  made  so  by  nothing  else 
than  practising  this  lung-filling  exercise.  Prof.  Goss  says  he  is  now 
50  per  cent,  better  off,  physically,  since  he  commenced  this  practice. 

"  The  point  is  to  teach  people  to  fill  the  lungs  and  to  cultivate  the 
power  to  hold  the  lungs  inflated  as  long  as  possible.  This  will 
strengthen  the  respiratory  muscles  and  deepen  the  chest  capacity. 
The  nervous  system  will  be  strengthened  and  made  firm  ;  the  blood 
and  tissues  will  be  enriched  and  the  liability  to  take  cold  or  take 
disease  very  much  diminished.  Nothing  restores  a  man  after  a  hard 
day's  work  so  much  as  to  fill  his  lungs  to  their  fullest  capacity  in  the 
open  air  several  times  during  an  hour. 

"People  in  whom  the  respiratory  murmur  over  the  apex  of  the 
lungs  is  weak,  often  hardly  perceptible,  the  upper  portion  of  the  chest 
walls  on  both  sides  flat,  health  and  digestion  feeble  —  such  ones  are 
frequently  transformed  into  strong  and  rugged  persons  by  practising 
lung-filling  systematically,  making  daily  exercises.  Then  the  respir- 
atory murmur  over  the  apex  becomes  loud,  full,  soft ;  the  chest  wall 
expands  in  all  directions  and  the  vital  capacity  is  considerably 
increased. 

"  There  is  more  in  this  practice  than  the  average  doctor  is  able  to 
perceive ;  but  resort  to  it,  using  judgment  in  teaching  it,  and  being 
persuasive  and  encouraging  in  your  address.  The  confidence  and 
courage  of  your  patients  will  be  enlarged,  and  success  will  attend 
your  efforts." 


400  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

The  higher  emotions  are  known  to  be  inspiring.  Love  produces 
that  full  inspiration  which  is  called  a  sigh.  "  The  emotions  that 
swell  my  bosom  "  is  a  common  oratorical  expression.  The  depress- 
ing feelings  lower  the  chest  and  mental  agony  or  physical  pain 
produce  its  compression,  forcing  out  the  air  in  a  groan,  a  cry  of  pain 
or  a  scream.  The  violent  passions  are  expressed  by  the  diaphragm 
rather  than  the  ribs.  Expressions  of  disgust,  scorn  and  hate  are 
made  with  depressed  ribs. 

The  exhausting  efforts  of  the  student  are  accompanied  by  unex- 
panded  lungs  and  consequently  a  great  lowering  of  vital  power, 
which  unfits  him  for  efficiency  in  society.  All  active  pursuits  give 
that  expansion  and  consequently  development  of  character  and 
power,  with  this  difference,  that  when  the  pursuits  are  those  of  the 
selfish  forces  they  develop  the  lungs  downward,  which  gives  force 
and  activity  but  not  sustaining  power  ;  but  when  the  activity  is  less 
selfish,  when  it  brings  out  the  warm,  friendly  emotions  combined 
with  heroic  firmness,  then  there  is  a  harmonious  expansion  which 
tends  away  from  fatigue  and  depression,  giving  to  the  brain  and  upper 
chest  a  fountain  of  power  and  delight  in  action,  —  a  steady,  calm, 
sustaining  energy. 

This  condition  may  not  be  readily  forced  by  pulmonary  exercises, 
but  pulmonary  elevation  does  greatly  assist  emotional  elevation,  and 
with  a  confirmed  habit  of  such  expansion  it  will  be  much  easier  to 
develop  the  faculties  that  make  health  and  happiness.  Hence  I 
would  urge  upon  all  the  practice  of  pulmonary  expansion  by  eleva- 
tion as  a  powerful  adjunct  to  moral  culture  and  hygienic  culture,  to 
the  resistance  and  conquest  of  disease.  How  much  it  will  accom- 
plish I  cannot  say,  but,  having  entire  confidence  in  the  laws  of  Sar- 
cognomy,  I  venture  to  assure  my  readers  that  they  will  be  well 
repaid  for  such  exercises  in  themselves,  and  physicians  will  find  it 
profitable  to  prescribe  them  for  their  patients,  especially  if  they  are 
combined  with  rousing,  spirit-stirring  songs,  such  as  the  Marseilles 
Hymn,  Star  Spangled  Banner,  John  Brown's  Body,  Nearer  My  God 
to  Thee,  Exile  of  Erin,  and  spirited  hymns. 

Such  songs,  sung  four  or  five  times  daily,  make  a  great  addition  to 
the  moral  power,  as  they  bring  out  the  emotions.  If  we  do  not  sing 
we  may  bring  in  the  moral  power,  though  perhaps  less  effectively,  by 
direct  evocation  of  the  emotions.  Let  us  think  intensely,  as  we 
expand  the  chest,  of  the  Divine  power,  to  which  we  aspire  with 
devotional  feelings,  or  of  the  loved  and  lost,  the  dear  beings  whom 
we  behold  no  longer,  who  are  waiting  our  arrival  in  the  better  world. 
If  we  love  them  deeply,  this  loving  thought  will  inspire  us  and  make 
our  pulmonary  inspirations  effective. 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  4OI 

That  ethical  culture  is  one  of  the  most  powerful  means  of  main- 
taining superior  health  is  one  of  the  most  important  lessons  of 
Anthropology.  But  what  I  mean  is  poorly  represented  by  the  words 
ethical  culture,  which  generally  suggest  a  meditation  or  a  disquisition 
upon  the  proper  rules  of  life.  True  ethical  culture  is  the  active 
exercise  of  the  higher  emotions, — the  love  of  the  mother  for  her 
child  and  her  husband,  and  the  active  service  that  she  gives;  the 
happiness  of  a  joyous  family  circle,  where  each  contributes  to  its 
harmony  and  mirth  ;  the  patient  labor  and  watchful  devotion  which 
sustain  the  family;  the  struggle  to  perform  every  duty;  and  the 
charming,  sympathetic  manners,  springing  from  an  unselfish  nature, 
which  continually  win  friends.  Indeed  ethical  culture  might  be 
defined  as  winning  friends  and  making  all  happy  around  us,  while  not 
neglecting  to  defend  the  right  and  uphold  the  truth. 

As  to  physical  exertion,  Sarcognomy  suggests  that  the  lower  limbs 
should  have  regular  but  not  excessive  exercise  to  sustain  the  activity 
of  the  lower  half  of  the  abdomen,  with  which  they  are  associated  by 
the  spinal  system,  and  to  promote  animal  warmth,  depth  of  respira- 
tion and  active  circulation. 

The  basilar  organs  and  passions,  with  which  the  lower  limbs  are 
associated,  although  they  antagonize  and  in  excessive  action  over- 
power all  the  higher  qualities,  do  nevertheless  in  their  normal  action 
sustain  the  upper  occipital  region  (as  combativeness  supports  firmness 
or  vitality  supports  love)  and  invigorate  the  whole  brain  by  increas- 
ing the  force  of  the  circulation. 

The  activity  of  the  brain  cannot  be  maintained  in  a  one-sided 
manner,  but  requires  the  radiation  of  its  energies  to  the  body  to 
maintain  the  blood-making  and  blood-circulating  power.  Hence,  the 
exercise  of  the  lower  limbs,  which  is  a  basilar  exercise,  is  necessary 
to  increase  the  active  manifestation  of  brain  power,  and  thus  give  a 
more  vigorous  health.  The  stirring  hunter  or  the  man  of  any  active 
pursuits  has  a  much  more  active  brain  than  the  scholar  who  confines 
himself  to  a  sedentary  life  ;  but  if  this  activity  be  carried  too  far,  it 
greatly  diminishes  the  capacity  for  calm  and  correct  thinking  and 
the  control  of  the  passions. 

The  exercise  of  the  upper  limbs  is  associated  with  the  energy  of 
the  upper  half  of  the  body  and  the  superior  posterior  regions  of  the 
brain.  Hence,  exercises  of  the  shoulders  and  arms  are  more  tonic 
and  less  exciting  than  exercise  of  the  lower  limbs,  and  have  more  sus- 
taining, tranquil  influence  over  the  nervous  system,  — an  effect  which 
is  said  to  have  been  recognized  by  the  faculty  of  Johns  Hopkins  Uni- 
versity. The  health-lift  has  been  highly  appreciated  by  those  who 
have  used  it,  and  rowing  is  a  more  beneficial  exercise  than   running?. 


402  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

Systematic  exercises  which  develop  chiefly  the  shoulders  are  mani- 
festly, according  to  Sarcognomy,  the  most  effective  for  strengthening 
the  constitution  and  building  up  the  health.  While  the  arm  above 
the  elbow  has  the  more  tonic  relation  to  the  thorax,  the  arm  below 
the  elbow  has  a  close  relation  with  the  upper  abdomen,  and  its 
warmth  materially  assists  digestion  and  assimilation. 

The  exercises  of  the  arms  also  have  a  tendency  to  develop  a  moral 
force  of  character  of  a  higher  grade  than  that  which  is  promoted  by 
the  lower  limbs,  —  an  energetic  ambition,  free  from  violence. 

Sarcognomy  also  explains  the  influence  of  attitudes.  The  erect 
attitude  gives  the  influence  of  the  gravity  of  a  column  of  blood  about 
five  feet  high,  exerting  a  pressure  of  rather  more  than  two  pounds 
to  the  square  inch,  withdrawing  the  blood  from  the  head  to  the  body, 
and  from  the  upper-  to  the  lower  regions  of  the  brain.  The  erect 
attitude  is  therefore  the  attitude  of  physical  force  and  restlessness,  of 
animal  passion  apd  appetitite. 

A  standing  audience  is  in  the  proper  condition  for  eloquent,  inflam- 
matory harangues,  but  not  for  calm,  philosophic  thought  and  scientific 
understanding.  These  require  a  sedentary  attitude  in  the  listeners 
to  be  appreciated.  The  sedentary  position  is  the  necessary  attitude 
for  calm,  well-governed  or  ethical  thought,  the  quietude  of  the 
lower  part  of  the  body  producing  quietude  of  the  lower  part  of  the 
brain. 

The  horizontal  position  removes  the  two-pound  depressing  or  ani- 
malizing  influence,  and  gives  the  superior  regions  of  the  brain  and 
the  trunk  their  proper  ascendency.  Hence,  on  the  pillow  men  have 
their  best  thoughts,  make  the  best  resolutions,  feel  the  most  affection, 
and  are  more  capable  of  regretting  their  errors.  They  have  also 
more  of  calm  enjoyment,  and  the  brain  in  its  higher  powers  regains 
its  controlling  influence  and  becomes  capable  of  renovating  the  body. 
Whenever  health  fails  entirely,  we  are  compelled  to  keep  the  pros- 
trate attitude,  in  which  the  "vis  medicatrix  nature?"  asserts  its  reno- 
vating power,  especially  when  friendly  and  hopeful  emotions  are  called 
out.  Every  effort  to  assume  the  erect  position  by  the  prostrate  inva- 
lid endangers  his  recovery  by  diminishing  the  superior  cerebral  circu- 
lation, and  taxing  the  brain  for  bodily  exertion  which  it  cannot  sus- 
tain. 

In  the  horizontal  position  the  heart  acts  more  normally  ;  the  pul- 
sation is  less  frequent  and  the  circulation  more  efficient.  Hence, 
horizontal  repose  for  the  restoration  of  and  nourishment  of  the  brain 
is  very  important  to  all  who  have  exhausting  labors.  It  should  be 
taken  whenever  needed,  and  a  prolonged  rest  after  fatiguing  labor. 
The  brain  requires  abundant  nourishment,  and  is  greatly  injured  by 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  403 

any  exhausting  evacuations  from  skin,  kidneys  or  bowels,  or  by  the 
waste  from  excessive  labor.  Hence,  athletes  who  train  to  reduce 
flesh  often  impair  the  nervous  system.  A  condition  of  moderate 
embonpoint,  such  as  we  often  see  in  handsome  women,  is  the  best  con- 
dition for  the  brain,*  and  this  is  promoted  by  the  free  use  of  fluids, 
while  abstinence  from  fluids  reduces  obesity. 

The  most  signal  proof  of  the  relation  of  nutrition  to  the  integrity 
of  the  brain  is  the  restorative  effect  of  generous  feeding  of  the  insane 
in  the  Pennsylvania  Hospital  under  Dr.  John  B.  Chapin.  Although  16 
to  20  ounces  of  solid  food  are  said  to  sustain  the  health  of  a  workman, 
Dr.  C.  administered  in  one  case  137  ounces  daily,  making  a  gain  of 
29  pounds  weight ;  in  another,  172  ounces,  making  a  gain  of  58  pounds; 
in  another,  154  ounces,  with  a  gain  of  42  pounds;  and,  in  another, 
188  ounces,  with  a  gain  of  20  pounds.     All  made  good  recoveries. 

The  ultra  advocates  of  temperance  and  abstinence,  who  would 
restrict  the  pleasures  of  the  table  and  make  the  diet  monotonous  and 
unattractive  until  the  appetite  fails,  act  on  erroneous  principles.  A 
blood  well  enriched  by  good  nourishment  is  essential  to  health  ;  or,  in 
other  words,  it  is  essential  to  a  vigorous  brain. 

The  growth  of  the  brain  when  well  nourished,  and  its  decline  and 
absorption  when  poorly  nourished  by  the  blood,  are  most  fully  shown 
by  the  observations  of  Malgaigne  upon  the  serous  condition  of  the 
brain  in  badly  nourished  rabbits.  Kussmail  and  Tenner  confirm  his 
statement,  and  say  that  "  in  very  thin  rabbits,  the  exterior  part  of 
whose  skull  was  opened  during  life,  we  found  very  great  quantities  of 
serum,  and  but  little  blood,  whilst  the  opposite  condition  was  ob- 
served to  hold  in  well-fed  animals." 

In  the  prostrate  attitude  on  the  back,  the  vital  forces  are  also 
assisted  by  the  warmth  given  to  the  spinal  column.  This  is  especially 
observable  when  we  lie  on  the  back  after  dinner  to  assist  the  process 
of  digestion.  Exposure  of  the  back  to  be  unduly  cooled  is  very  inju- 
rious, and  this  is  apt  to  occur  when  patients  turn  upon  the  side,  ex- 
posing the  back,  which  has  been  accustomed  to  the  great  warmth  of 
the  bed.  The  back  must  be  protected  from  cold  winds  and  cold,  wet 
conditions,  and  it  is  the  region  to  which  the  vitalizing  nervaura  of 
another  constitution  is  most  efficiently  applied. 

With  a  full  knowledge  of  Sarcognomy  a  complete  code  of  culture 
and  development  might  be  prepared,  to  guide  in  the  attainment  of 

*  Dr.  Meisner  investigated  the  defective  vision  which  occurred  in  a  large  body 
of  Russian  troops,  and  ascertained  that  it  was  due  to  defective  nutrition,  owing  to 
the  observance  of  a  Greek  fast,  and  passed  away  soon  after  the  end  of  the  fast, 
Nursing  women,  insufficiently  fed,  are  oftentimes  affected  in  the  same  way.  In 
starvation  the  brain  power  is  impaired  before  the  emaciation  of  the  body  appears. 
The  gayety  of  the  active  brain  is  most  conspicuous  in  feasting,  and  social  pleasures 
do  not  develop  in  company  with  hunger. 


404  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

health  and  virtue,  for  which  this  chapter  merely  gives  the  leading 
ideas. 

A  French  writer,  Fernand  Lagrange,  has  discussed  the  subject  of 
bodily  exercise  from  the  common  physiological  data  without  arriving 
at  the  original  views  of  Mr.  Checkley.  The  writings  of  the  medical 
profession  upon  such  subjects  are  sometimes  meagre  and  barren 
from  their  narrowness  of  view,  which  is  only  made  more  unsatisfactory 
by  their  pedantic  technicality,  of  which  the  work  of  Lagrange  is  an 
example.  By  theoretical  reasoning  he  reaches  the  conclusion  that  we 
should  seek  relief  from  mental  fatigue  only  by  exercises  of  an  auto- 
matic character,  which  do  not  exercise  the  will,  because  the  use  of  the 
will  taxes  the  brain. 

This  is  entirely  erroneous.  Mental  fatigue  is  not  best  relieved  by 
mere  muscular  exercise,  in  which  the  brain  is  passive.  Such  exercise 
adds  to  the  fatigue  of  both  body  and  brain.  Exercise  is  beneficial 
only  when  it  is  well  sustained  by  the  brain,  and  therefore  pleasant. 
The  exertion  of  a  hunter  in  pursuit  of  his  game  is  delightful  to  him, 
because  sustained  by  his  brain.  All  exercises  sustained  by  strong 
impulses,  that  is,  action  of  the  brain,  are  pleasant  and  invigorating, 
but  whatever  is  done  without  the  co-operation  of  mental  impulses 
becomes  fatiguing  and  unpleasant.  If  the  hunter  were  required  to 
saw  a  load  of  wood  or  to  walk  on  a  treadmill,  which  would  not  require 
much  mental  action,  he  would  be  fatigued  by  less  than  half  the  effort 
which  he  would  enjoy  as  a  hunter. 

The  relief  of  the  mental  fatigue  of  the  student  and  business  man 
is  effected  by  bringing  into  action  the  portion  of  the  brain  opposite  or 
antagonistic  to  that  which  has  been  fatigued.  This  is  the  social 
region.  Pleasant,  sportive,  unintellectual  company  is  just  what  he 
needs.  If  his  occupation  has  been  sedentary,  active  games,  sports  or 
dancing  is  what  he  requires,  and  the  more  his  brain  is  roused  by  the 
excitement  of  his  amusements,  and  the  more  vigorously  he  engages  in 
them,  the  better  the  result.  Hence  it  appears  the  doctrine  to  which 
Dr.  Lagrange's  book  is  devoted  is  absolutely  false. 

Active  exertion  accompanied  by  vigorous  exercise  of  the  whole 
brain,  as  when  the  feelings  and  courage  are  intensely  active,  instead 
)f  being  debilitating,  is  the  most  efficient  method  of  cultivating  and 
leveloping  all  our  powers,  and  the  gymnasium  in  which  there  is  the 
stimulus  of  social  sentiment,  rivalry  and  ambition  to  excel,  is  far  more 
beneficial  than  one  in  which  solitary  exercises  alone  are   practised. 

The  essential  principle  for  all  exercises  for  the  improvement  of 
health  and  character  is  that  they  should  be  animating,  and  produce  a 
cheerful,  happy  state  of  mind.  Moreover,  they  should  be  sufficiently 
vigorous    to    compel  active  respiration  and  expansion  of  the  chest. 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  405 

They  should  also  bring  a  glow  to  the  surface,  and  those  who  do  not 
procure  that  by  exercise  should  resort  to  friction  with  a  crash  towel 
or  use  an  occasional  Turkish  bath. 

The  principle  that  exercises  for  personal  improvement  must  not  be 
merely  physical  but  must  include  symmetrical  activity  of  the  whole 
brain,  especially  of  its  upper  posterior  part,  which  is  the  true  hygienic 
region,  is  absolutely  imperative,  and  this  necessarily  includes  the 
action  of  the  upper  portion  of  the  chest,  which  Mr.  Checkley  has  cul- 
tivated so  successfully.  For  these  reasons  I  am  not  partial  to  the 
gymnasium,  or  any  arrangement  formally  designed  for  exercise  on 
which  mere  muscular  strength  may  be  wasted.  For  youth  the  gym- 
nasium is  far  inferior  to  the  playground,  which  develops  the  emo- 
tions. We  live  in  a  world  which  requires  all  the  labor  of  all  the 
people,  at  least  eight  hours  a  day,  to  make  it  prosperous ;  and  useful 
occupation  is  the  normal  method  of  cultivating  muscle  and  brain,  — 
useful  occupation  in  company  and  for  some  important  purpose,  which 
is  obedience  to  our  higher  nature,  and  gives  us  the  interest  and 
pleasure  which  belong  to  good  acts.  Normal  industry  is  better  than 
the  gymnasium,  and  heroic  exertion  is  still  better.  Many  a  rheu- 
matic has  been  suddenly  cured  by  the  approach  of  danger  which 
compelled  him  to  fly  for  his  life. 

Heroic  energy  is  superior  far  to  all  calm  and  passionless  exercise. 
The  performance  of  some  highly  important  duty,  such  as  the  saving  of 
life,  elevates  our  own  life.  If  we  can  find  anything  to  call  out  our 
enthusiasm,  that  is  the  best  thing  to  do.  A  great  aim  in  life  is  a  sus- 
taining power  ;  and,  whatever  our  position,  if  we  go  into  the  battle  of 
life  with  an  earnest  determination- to  conquer  difficulties  and  perform 
every  duty,  that  determination  will  sustain  us.  We  should  learn  to 
bring  our  full  will  power  into  whatever  we  do.  By  this,  invalids  have 
cured  diseases  that  defied  medicine,  in  themselves,  and  the  contagion 
of  a  strong  will  has  cured  many  an  invalid. 

Excessive  muscular  culture  is  not  hygienic.  The  trained  athletes 
who  prepare  for  boxing  and  running  frequently  exhaust  the  nervous 
system,  for  the  brain  and  the  muscles  are  antipodal.  Impaired  vital- 
ity and  a  shortened  life  are  consequences  that  result  from  over-training 
the  muscular  system.  The  champion  athlete,  R.  A.  Pennell,  who 
held  out  two  hundred  pounds  with  one  arm,  soon  became  a  physical 
wreck,  and  died  when  he  should  have  been  in  his  prime.  The  exhaus- 
tion of  the  athlete  appears  in  his  brain  and  lungs  —  failure  of  vitality 
and  pulmonary  disease  —  and  frequently  in  heart  disease. 

The  passional  region  of  the  base  of  the  brain  is  especially  unfavor- 
able to  health  and  life,  when  it  gets  into  predominance, — human 
beings  have  often  died  in  fits  of  passion,  and  Dr.  F.  L.  Oswald  de- 


406  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCUGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

scribes  the  death  of  a  grizzly  bear  from  rage.  The  bear  was  caught 
by  Governor  Pacheco  of  California  in  a  hunting  expedition.  It  was 
seized  by  the  hunters,  held  by  two  lariats,  and  dragged  by  the  horse- 
men, in  spite  of  its  resistance,  to  a  barn,  where,  being  bitten  by  a  wolf- 
dog,  it  turned  upon  him  in  fury,  but,  finding  himself  checked  by  the 
double  lariats  around  his  body,  immediately  fell  dead. 

Evidently  the  basilar  organs  and  the  muscular  system  are  not  the 
most  essential  to  vitality,  and  women,  who  are  inferior  to  men  in 
muscle,  are  superior  in  longevity,  because  they  maintain  a  more  com- 
plete and  symmetrical  activity  of  the  brain. 

Our  colleges  are  beginning  to  recognize  the  importance  of  physical 
culture,  but  have  scarcely  attained  the  true  philosophic  conceptions. 
Neither  laborious  gymnastics  nor  trivial  varieties  of  calisthenics  are 
what  human  development  requires.  Our  leading  idea  should  be  the 
culture  of  the  brain,  meaning  thereby  its  upper  region,  which  sus- 
tains the  brain  power  and  energy  of  the  soul  ;  and,  secondly,  the  cult- 
ure of  the  thorax,  giving  predominance  to  its  upper  half.  From  these 
regions  life  flows  out  to  the  entire  body  and  perfects  every  organ. 

What  exercises,  then,  will  be  most  effective  for  this  purpose  ?  Sing- 
ing emotional  songs  is,  as  I  have  shown  in  the  "  New  Education," 
the  most  efficient  of  all  means  for  ethical  culture  and  thoracic  as 
well  as  cerebral  development,  and  hence  this  should  occupy  the  first 
rank  in  a  system  of  complete  culture.  It  is  the  very  opposite  of 
the  system  of  culture  by  mere  muscular  exertion  practised  by  athletes 
and  gymnasts,  — a  system  which  does  not  elevate  the  character  or 
efficiently  promote  health  and  longevity. 

Muscular  exertion  which  does  not  come  from  the  spontaneous 
overflow  of  cerebral  energy  is  a  tax  upon  the  brain  and  lowers  rather 
than  elevates  the  constitution.  Brain  and  muscle  should  act  in 
unison. 

As  the  exercise  just  mentioned  —  spirited  song — gives  the 
highest  activity  to  the  brain  and  upper  thorax,  it  is  manifest  that  it 
produces  a  surplus  energy  that  would  delight  in  physical  exertion  and 
therefore  should  be  indulged  in  action. 

I  would  therefore  prescribe  for  a  school  of  thorough  culture  an 
exercise  of  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  three  times  a  day,  consisting  of 
spirited  songs  associated  with  spirited  action.  The  arms  should  be 
thrown  aloft  in  graceful  gestures  in  various  directions,  but  chiefly  the 
arms  and  palms  being  held  aloft  and  thrown  up  with  energy  ;  then 
there  should  be  movement  of  the  lower  limbs,  marking  time  with 
the  feet  and  shifting  their  positions  ;  then  marching  with  varying 
rapidity,  keeping  up  the  song  ;  finally  a  systematic  dance,  song  being- 
still  maintained,  ending  with  a  dance  to  instrumental  music.     This 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  407 

wouid  produce  the  most  perfect  and  harmonious  development  of  the 
entire  constitution.  The  superiority  of  the  results  of  harmonious  and 
ethical  culture  over  that  of  the  merely  muscular  is  illustrated  in 
the  advantage  the  ethical  nature  gives  to  women  in  making  them 
superior  fencers  and  dancers,  though  inferior  to  men  in  physical  de- 
velopment. Mr.  Checkley  says  that  at  the  ballet  school  the  girls 
were  superior  to  the  boys.  Women  who  are  trained  to  work  instead 
of  effeminacy  are  as  efficient  as  men  in  labor  and  often  superior  in 
endurance.  The  King  of  Dahomey  has  shown  that  they  may  be 
made  good  soldiers. 

Arm  gestures  are  prescribed  in  calisthenic  training,  and  are  made 
prominent  in  training  cadets  at  West  Point.  They  are  all  beneficial, 
but  the  gesture  without  the  voice  is  comparatively  a  feeble,  spiritless 
affair.  All  other  gestures  are  unimportant,  compared  with  the  up- 
ward. This  expands  the  chest,  throwing  the  vital  energies  upward, 
and  is  therefore  of  a  rousing,  hygienic  nature. 

In  using  the  arms  we  should  have  a  light  weight  in  the  hands,  of 
two  to  four  pounds,  for  brisk  movements  ;  and  should  also  have  heavy 
weights,  of  from  six  to  ten  pounds,  for  the  exercise  of  the  shoulders. 

Fencing,  boxing,  rowing,  leaping,  running,  swinging,  and  a  great 
variety  of  exercises  with  ropes,  ladders,  bars,  weights,  leaping  poles, 
roller  skates,  etc.,  all  have  their  value  ;  but  that  value  is  greatly  in- 
creased when  associated  with  vocal  exercises  or  with  music. 

Walking  with  a  proper  attitude  is  a  very  important  part  of  our 
self-culture.  We  are  continually  gaining  when  we  walk  with  the  ab- 
domen held  in,  the  chest  prominent,  the  head  erect,  and  the  back  also 
erect,  in  a  line  nearly  straight. 

Mr.  Checkley  has  the  utmost  confidence  in  this,  as  sufficient  for  our 
development,  without  the  need  of  gymnastic  apparatus. 

To  review  the  whole  subject  at  the  risk  of  repetition  I  would  say 
that  the  fundamental  principle  of  hygienic  culture  is  the  develop- 
ment of  the  symmetry  of  a  normal  constitution,  or,  in  other  words, 
the  culture  into  activity  and  predominance  of  those  portions  of  the 
constitution  which  are  the  source  of  happiness,  health  and  vital 
power,  and  the  restraint  into  subordination  of  those  which  tend  to 
feebleness  and  disease  when  predominant ;  in  other  words,  to  live  in 
the  summit  of  the  brain  and  the  summit  of  the  body. 

The  regions  which  thus  need  special  cultivation  are  the  upper 
half  of  the  brain,  the  seat  of  happiness  and  moral  excellence,  the 
upper  half  of  the  body,  the  thorax  —  especially  its  upper  portion 
—  and  the  spinal  column,  the  abdominal  region  being  that  which 
needs  to  be  kept  within  bounds ;  the  muscular  system  also  being 
cultivated  within  judicious  limits  and  not  allowed  too  great  a  develop- 


408  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

ment.  If  we  seek  muscular  vigor  it  should  be  attained  rather  by 
developing  the  spinal  cord  or  nervous  energy  than  by  increasing  the 
size  of  muscles.  A  large  thorax  and  strong  spine  produce  the 
highest  efficiency. 

The  development  to  be  sought  is  that  which  comes  from  functional 
activity,  and  the  functional  activity  of  the  superior  organs  secures 
the  healthful  activity  of  the  whole  constitution.  Thus  we  attain  the 
cephalo-thoracic  temperament,  a  development  which  the  world 
admires;  which  was  seen  in  Washington,  Jackson  and  Clay,  and  im 
perfectly  displayed  in  the  Apollo  Belvidere. 

Pre-eminent  among  the  means  of  hygienic  culture  is  the  culture 
of  the  soul ;  or,  in  other  words,  of  the  upper  half  of  the  brain  —  th^ 
culture  of  a  noble  character  —  of  firmness,  energy,  industry  and  hope 
animated  and  directed  by  love,  benevolence,  devotion,  faith  and 
sympathy.  Perfection  of  character  develops  perfection  of  constitu- 
tion, and  hence  the  teacher  of  a  true  religion  develops  body  as  well 
as  soul,  and  the  two  functions,  religious  and  therapeutic,  should  be 
united  in  the  same  individual.  The  priest  should  be  a  physician, 
the  physician  should  be  as  far  as  possible  a  priest. 

It  is  the  characteristic  doctrine  of  Sarcognomy  that  religious 
excelleiice  of  character  is  the  best  basis  for  health  ;  and  I  say  religious, 
rather  than  moral,  because  the  word  moral  has,  from  the  ethical  per- 
version of  society,  acquired  so  cold,  cramped  and  petty  a  meaning  as 
to  be  inadequate  to  the  expression  of  a  complete  character.  It  is 
true  the  word  religion  has  been  equally  perverted,  so  that  it  fails  to 
express  the  fulness  and  completeness  of  the  soul,  and  does  not 
include  some  of  the  most  important  elements  of  character  (being 
compatible  with  austerity,  intolerance  and  asceticism),  but  it  includes, 
or  at  least  does  not  ignore,  a  lofty  reverence,  spirituality,  faith  and 
love,  which  morality  overlooks.  Hence  I  use  the  word  religion  as 
capable  of  being  understood  to  mean  a  Divine  perfection  of  char- 
acter, and  I  affirm  that  this  Divine  perfection  is  an  inspiring  force 
that  tends  to  make  the  body  perfect,  fitting  it  for  the  residence  of 
a  perfect  soul.  Hence  the  great  power  of  religious  enthusiasm  and 
faith  in  making  marvellous  cures  of  disease,  and  the  power  of 
mind-cure  healers  in  improving  health  by  keeping  before  the  mind  a 
grand  ideal  and  thus  bringing  our  spiritual  nature  into  correlation 
with  Divine  perfection. 

All  social  exercises,  and  amusements  in  which  the  social  affections 
are  called  out,  contribute  to  health,  and  a  life  of  active  labor  in 
the  zealous  performance  of  duties  gives  strength  to  the  nobler 
qualities  which  sustain  our  health.  At  the  same  time  it  is  important 
that  in  performing  these  laborious  duties  we  should   be  surrounded 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  4O9 

by  social  harmony  —  should  be  associated  with  friends.  The  contin- 
ual presence  of  persons  who  are  disagreeable,  for  whom  we  feel  con- 
tempt or  aversion,  is  a  continually  depressing  influence  to  our  higher 
nature  and  consequently  to  our  health.  Hence  the  great  value  of 
the  association  of  the  sexes  for  the  promotion  of  health  and  virtue. 
The  strict  separation  of  the  sexes  produces  a  decline  among  men  in 
refinement,  virtue  and  health,  as  well  as  an  enfeebling,  demoralizing 
influence  on  the  other  sex ;  coarseness  on  one  side,  feebleness  and 
imbecility  on  the  other.  The  conjugal  union  furnishes  the  essential 
condition  of  spiritual  and  physical  health,  in  the  serenity  and  love 
which  it  produces  when  it  is  a  normal  union.  But  in  the  abnormal 
union  —  the  union  of  those  who  have  little  mutual  respect  or  love  — 
each  becomes  an  injury  to  the  other,  and  the  injury  is  transmitted  to 
offspring.  The  dissolution  of  such  debasing  unions  is  therefore 
essential  to  health  and  virtue. 

The  mental  condition  which  is  truly  ethical  and  which  we  should 
ever  cultivate  is  that  expressed  by  a  smile.  The  smile  (according  to 
Pathognomy)  is  the  expression  of  the  superior  regions  of  the  brain, 
a  manifestation  of  amiability  and  happiness  which  instantly  rouses  a 
corresponding  feeling  in  the  beholder.  The  smile  illuminates  the 
face  and  changes  a  repulsive  to  an  attractive  expression.  The  fre- 
quent smiles  of  women  make  their  society  attractive  and  win  the 
love  of  men.  Smiles  have  many  varieties  and  degrees  of  merit,  but 
all  are  attractive  and  healthful. 

As  we  are  continually  liable  to  encountering  an  unpleasant  social 
as  well  as  physical  atmosphere,  the  cultivation  of  heroic  hardihood 
should  be  a  leading  aim  of  hygienic  culture.  He  who  cannot  en- 
counter the  exposures  incident  to  our  irregular  atmosphere  without 
contracting  colds,  pulmonary  inflammations,  rheumatism,  neuralgia 
and  impaired  health,  is  but  poorly  developed,  and  he  who  cannot 
meet  the  unsympathetic,  coarse,  selfish,  half -developed  humanity 
that  abounds  everywhere,  without  suffering  in  mind  and  realizing 
irritation,  depression,  melancholy  or  misanthropy,  is  poorly  devoloped 
and  needs  to  overcome  his  weakness  and  morbid  sensibility. 

This  heroic  hardihood  belongs  to  the  shoulders,  and  is  the  product 
of  an  active  life  with  exposure,  —  a  life  in  which  we  must  encounter 
difficulties  and  perhaps  dangers.  The  lesson  that  nature  teaches 
most  impressively  in  "  the  survival  of  the  fittest,"  is  the  importance 
of  cultivating  firmness  and  power.  Weakness  is  everywhere  victim- 
ized, and  power  everywhere  triumphant.  In  meeting  the  unpleasant 
influences  of  society,  the  weak  man  is  depressed,  discouraged  and 
defeated,  the  strong  man  is  not  affected,  and  by  his  superior  moral 
force  overcomes  the  unfriendly  influence  and  makes  it  subservient. 


4IO  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

The  saints  and  heroes  that  have  won  the  world's  admiration  have 
possessed  the  highest  moral  strength.. 

Strength  of  all  kinds  comes  from  exertion  of  the  faculties.  Hence 
incessant  activity  in  important  undertakings  should  be  the  rule  of 
those  who  seek  full  development,  and  this  incessant  energy  coincides, 
both  as  cause  and  effect,  with  development  of  the  shoulders  and 
upper  occiput,  and  their  predominance  over  the  abdominal  region 
and  the  anterior  base  of  the  middle  lobe  of  the  brain.  When  that 
development  is  attained  it  gives  the  organic  basis  of  a  superior 
character,  and  until  it  is  attained  we  should  seek  it  by  a  life  of 
honorable  activity  of  soul  and  body.  The  upper  region  of  the  brain 
furnishes  the  desires  or  impelling  motives  to  such  a  life,  and  will 
insure  such  a  career,  if  sufficiently  strong,  unless  thwarted  and 
repressed  in  youth.  Among  the  desires  that  it  gives  are  those 
which  seek  honor,  friendship,  love  and  distinction,  toward  which 
they  instinctively  lead  us,  and  in  doing  so  develop  our  constitution 
to  its  highest  conditions  of  health,  happiness  and  power,  if  their  im- 
pulses are  not  thwarted.  The  conjugal  union  is  one  of  their  aims, 
which  is  sometimes  defeated,  but  in  its  absence  the  frequent  associa- 
tion of  the  sexes  under  favorable  circumstances  of  good  society  may 
become  a  partial  substitute,  and  there  is  no  form  of  association  more 
favorable  to  cultivation  of  the  refining  and  healthful  sentiments  than 
dancing,  in  which  the  charm  of  music  is  associated  with  that  of 
grace  and  courtesy. 

The  indoor  and  outdoor  sports  of  boys  and  girls  are  of  the 
highest  importance  to  their  health,  happiness  and  development  when 
they  are  guided  and  inspired  by  good  humor,  the  malicious,  quarrel- 
some or  ill-disposed  being  excluded.  A  very  simple  rule  determines 
their  value,  for  that  which  promotes  enjoyment  at  the  time  and 
furnishes  pleasing  memories  is  just  what  is  required  for  health  and 
virtue,  as  it  develops  the  upper  region  of  the  brain.  In  youth  these 
enjoyments  are  of  a  more  playful  character,  and  even  mingled  with 
rivalry ;  but  in  mature  life  the  consciousness  of  duties  to  be  per- 
formed and  of  worthy  objects  being  realized  becomes  the  para- 
mount feeling,  social  pleasures,  games  and  sports  being  too  much 
neglected.     Daily  dancing  should  be  the  rule  at  health  resorts. 

It  is  essential  to  health  that  life  should  not  be  a  hopeless  struggle, 
and  that  faithful  exertion  should  be  rewarded  by  security  and  com- 
fort,—  that  life  should  not  be  a  matter  of  jealous  and  dangerous 
strife,  tending  to  anxiety,  despair  and  misanthropy.  Brain  and  body 
give  way  under  such  conditions,  which  almost  paralyze  the  upper 
region  of  the  brain.  Thackrak,  in  his  work  on  the  influence  of  trades 
and   professions,   refers    to   the   anxiety  and    mental    application   of 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  41  I 

merchants,  professional  men,  students,  etc.,  as  among  the  leading 
causes  that  shorten  life,  producing  disease  of  the  brain,  liver, 
stomach  and  heart. 

The  higher  regions  of  the  brain  are  exhausted  and  paralyzed  by 
many  causes,  — ■  chiefly  by  gloom,  by  hate,  by  exhaustion  and  by  toil. 
The  lower  class  of  European  laborers  in  the  past  have  had  only 
about  half  the  longevity  of  the  more  favored  classes.  Everywhere 
we  see  men  and  women  prematurely  old,  worn  out  at  fifty,  forty  or 
even  thirty,  from  extreme  toil  of  the  muscular  and  intellectual 
powers,  and  extreme  discouragement,  continually  exhausting  the 
fountains  of  life  without  any  proportional  action  of  the  upper  regions 
of  the  brain  to  enable  them  to  bear  such  toils,  —  women  bearing  the 
strain  better  than  men  because  they  have  constitutionally  more 
activity  of  the  upper  brain  than  men. 

The  intellectual  strain  requires  to  be  balanced  by  social  enjoyment 
and  sleep;  the  physical  strain  by  the  higher  region  of  the  brain,  — the 
strong,  delightful  emotions  and  energies  which  sustain  us  in  toil  and 
give  us  prompt  recuperation  when  it  is  over.  These  higher  faculties 
give  to  the  whole  constitution  an  elastic  energy  and  inspiration 
which  constitute  personal  superiority  and  physiological  perfection, 
the  superiority  of  the  men  who  lead  in  every  department.  I  do  not 
mean  that  the  leaders  of  society  are  always  the  best  men,  for  leader- 
ship is  often  a  matter  of  wealth  or  accident  or  animal  force;  but  that 
their  superiority  depends  on  that  portion  of  the  upper  brain  which 
corresponds  with  the  shoulders  and  arms  and  upper  portion  of  the 
chest. 

If,  therefore,  any  system  of  exercises  can  be  arranged  which  shall 
develop  the  brain,  the  shoulders  and  upper  portion  of  the  chest,  such 
a  system  should  be  faithfully  cultivated. 

Pre-eminent  among  these  exercises  is  vocal  culture.  Even  the 
use  of  the  lungs  in  blowing  musical  instruments  has  proved  very 
beneficial  to  health  and  pulmonary  development,  and  the  exercise  of 
newsboys  in  crying  their  papers  cultivates  their  manhood  most  effi- 
ciently. Singing  ranks  highest  as  a  hygienic  and  ethical  exercise, 
but  declamation  takes  the  lead  of  all  set  exercises  for  general  in- 
vigoration  and  shows  its  happy  effects  in  leading  actors.  Lecturing 
may  be  made  a  very  superior  exercise  if  rightly  conducted,  but  if 
made  a  mere  exercise  of  intellect  and  animal  force  it  becomes 
fatiguing,  like  business  affairs,  as  it  uses  the  anterior  and  the  basi- 
lar regions  of  the  brain.  But  true  oratory,  which  uses  the  whole 
brain,  and  especially  its  superior  regions,  to  charm,  to  elevate  and  to 
win,  is  the  noblest  exercise  possible,  developing  everything  admirable 
in  the  orator,  perfecting  his  manly  power,  health  and  happiness,  and 


412 


THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY. 


[CHAP.    XIX. 


leaving  an  ennobling  influence  upon  his  hearers.  There,  is  however, 
an  inferior  style  of  oratory,  based  upon  loquacity,  animal  force  and 
animal  magnetism,  which  is  not  ennobling  either  to  speaker  or 
hearer,  as  it  does  not  use  the  higher  powers.  It  may  invigorate  or 
stimulate  the  animal  force  of  the  speaker,  but  it  does  little  good  to 
the  hearer. 

To  attain  the  best  results  of  oratory  there  must  not  be  any  in- 
tellectual toil,  or  an  extreme  intellectual  profundity  and  discussion  of 
abstract  themes,  which  would  give  it  the  character  of  lecturing.  The 
theme  should  be  as  familiar  as  possible,  or  else  the  language  fully 
committed  to  memory,  and  the  subjects  of  a  strongly  emotional 
character — themes  that  call  forth  deep  feeling  and  a  profound  sense 
of  duty.  When  the  orator  rises  to  heroism,  as  in  the  appeals  of 
Patrick  Henry  or  the  discourse  of  a  religious  apostle  willing  to  lose 
his  life  to  save  his  fellow  men,  we  have  the  noblest  influence  to  which 
human  nature  can  be  subjected. 

A  lecturer  who  understands  these  principles  and  applies  them  will 
continually  improve  himself  by  lecturing,  while  another  may  exhaust 
himself,  impair  his  health,  and  find  it  necessary  to  suspend  his  duties. 

The  same  principles  apply  to  the  regulation  of  our  conversation. 
It  may  be  so  conducted  as  to  exhaust  or  to  refresh  our  vital  forces. 

The  hygienic  principles  of  Sarcognomy  (especially  the  proper  pre- 
dominance of  thoracic  over  abdominal  development)  have  been  so 
forcibly  and  practically  illustrated  by  Mr.  E.  Checkley,  who  has  just 
published  a  work  on  the  subject,  that  I  addressed  him  the  following 
note,  to  which  his  reply  is  quite  instructive. 

6  James  Street,  Boston,  March  20. 
Mr.  Checkley  : 

Dear  Sir,  —  The  matters  on  which  I  would  like  to  hear  from  you 
are  :  — 

1.  What  evidence  can  you  present  of  the  inferiority  and  morbid 
tendencies  of  persons  in  whom  the  abdominal  is  developed  more 
than  the  thoracic  ? 

2.  What  are  the  morbid  tendencies  produced  by  drooping  shoulders 
and  narrow  chest  ? 

3.  What  evidence  of  the  evil  effects  of  too  much  diaphragmatic 
breathing  in  place  of  costal  ? 

4.  What  improvement  in  the  brain  power,  moral  nature,  health, 
muscular  vigor,  symmetry  of  person  and  longevity  have  been  attained 
by  cultivating  the  upper  part  of  the  thorax,  and  what  change  of 
conformation  can  be  produced  by  one  or  two  months  of  hygienic 
practice.  Yours  cordially, 

J.  R.  Buchanan. 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  413 

in  Rutledge  Street,  Brooklyn,  March,  1890. 
Dr.  J.  R.  Buchanan  : 

Dear  Sir,  —  In  answer  to  your  questions  of  the  2d  March,  I  can 
only  give  you  my  impressions  gained  from  practieal  experience  and 
observations  carried  on  for  more  than  ten  years.  In  relation  to  the 
abdominal  versus  the  thoracic  regions,  my  verdict  must  always  be  in 
favor  of  the  thoracic.  In  my  practice  and  teachings  I  repress  the 
one  and  bring  out  the  other  ;  but  I  will  state  that,  in  so  far  as  I  can 
at  present  prove,  I  find  two  extremes  of  abdominal  culturists  that 
present  two  totally  different  characteristics.  The  first  are  those 
who  have  large  abdomens,  with  flat  and  usually  hollow  chests,  and 
heads  seeming  to  protrude  outwards  and  forwards  from  the  body 
instead  of  upwards ;  muscles  soft  and  small,  with  adipose  tissue 
flabby ;  and  limbs  thin  in  proportion  to  what  one  would  expect  to  see 
in  a  person  with  such  a  large  waist. 

The  second  have  the  adipose  tissue  firmer  and  more  evenly  distrib- 
uted, with,  of  course,  a  large  abdomen  ;  thick,  firm  necks  ;  head  seems 
to  be  thrown  back  as  well  as  the  body.  While  I  am  at  present  not 
well  able  to  state  certainties,  my  knowledge  up  to  the  present  time 
points  to  the  following  characteristics  as  belonging  to  the  different 
extremes  of  abdominal  culturists.  The  former  I  find  of  sedentary 
habits,  of  a  physically  lazy  disposition,  philosophic  ideas,  morbid 
fancies  that  tend  toward  suicidal  mania,  and  generally  of  weak  and 
cowardly  natures.  The  latter  are  generally  of  a  strong  animal 
nature,  with  all  that  that  implies  ;  practical  in  the  extreme  (in  fact, 
I  have  never  seen  what  I  would  term  an  idealist  in  mind  among 
them)  ;  of  a  firm,  forceful  will  and  dominant  disposition  ;  and  fond  of 
the  table. 

These  are,  of  course,  two  extreme  types  ;  but  the  many  grades 
between  them  one  can  readily  judge  who  has  had  any  experience. 
This  I  can  state  of  a  certainty,  that  those  whom  I  have  met  with 
who  were  possessed  of  a  large  costal  development  are  proud, 
idealistic,  brave,  energetic,  and  of  a  high  moral  nature. 

The  more  I  have  seen  that  part  developed,  the  more  these  charac- 
teristics are  shown  ;  the  very  position  and  carriage  of  the  body  makes 
them  so. 

Of  the  second  question,  I  find  they  are  what  I  call  general  hypochon- 
driacs, who  always  think  they  have  some  disease  ;  suspicious,  irritable 
and  cowardly,  as  well  as  physically  weak. 

Of  the  third  question,  diaphragmatic  breathing  I  believe  to  be  one 
of  the  worst  evils  of  so-called  physical  educators.  It  weakens  the 
diaphragm  instead  of  strengthening  it,  makes  the  muscles  of  the 
abdomen  weak,  and  leaves  the  person  liable  to  rupture.      I   call  this 


4M  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

muscle  the  girder  of  the  lower  ribs.  The  evidence  of  those  I  have 
had  under  my  care  who  previously  had  practised  it  proves  that  they 
were  subject  to  constipation,  and  I  noticed  all  who  claim  to  have 
practised  this  method  of  breathing  were  physically  weak,  circulation 
poor,  subject  to  giddiness,  and  in  some  cases  to  palpitation  of  the 
heart. 

The  abdomen  should  never  be  expanded  in  any  action,  it  should 
always  contract.  I  do  not  believe  it  has  anything  directly  to  do  with 
breathing,  its  movement  is  purely  sympathetic.  I  never  use  it  in 
any  action,  breathing  or  otherwise,  only,  of  course,  to  contract  it. 

The  lower  ribs  should  be  the  smallest  diameter  of  the  chest.  I 
strongly  condemn  the  practice  of  diaphragmatic  breathing. 

Of  question  four.  —  In  answer  to  the  first  part  I  cannot  help  but  make 
this  assertion  about  myself :  I  do  not  believe  that  I  should  ever 
have  been  even  of  ordinary  intelligence  only  for  my  physical  powers. 
And  all  of  those  who  practise  under  my  tuition  say  that  they  think 
clearer  and  feel  more  sure  of  themselves  in  what  they  undertake  to 
do;  and,  as  far  as  health  is  concerned,  one  patient,  a  gentleman  51 
years  of  age,  after  two  months'  treatment  of  one  hour  a  week,  said, 
in  answer  to  a  query  as  to  how  he  felt  about  his  work :  "  Work " 
(he  made  answer),  "  I  don't  do  any  work  ;  it's  all  pleasure."  "  Why, 
how  is  that  ?  "  remarked  his  friend.  "  Well,"  he  said,  "  I  go  and  see 
Mr.  Checkley  every  week,  and  this  feeling  is  the  result  of  his  treat- 
ment." He  was  refused  insurance  on  his  life;  they  said  he  had 
Bright's  disease  of  the  kidneys.  He  has  not  got  it  now,  I  am 
positive,  as  his  urine  has  been  examined  by  the  best  expert  in  the 
country.  He  came  to  me  only  as  a  last  resort,  for  he  said  he  had 
tried  everything. 

Muscular  vigor  and  symmetry  I  shall  write  of  in  citing  cases. 
Longevity  I  cannot  speak  of,  as  I  have  not  either  practised  or  lived 
long  enough  to  know  ;  but,  from  the  way  I  feel  myself,  at  the  age 
of  36  years,  I  feel  as  though  I  would  live  forever.  I  enjoy  life  ; 
I  firmly  believe,  barring  accidents,  that  I  shall  live  till  I  reach 
100  years  easily.  Old  Dr.  Gross  once  examined  me,  and  he  said 
that  if  I  kept  on  the  way  I  was  then  I  ought  not  to  retire  from  work 
till  I  reached  90  years.  The  rest  you  must  judge  from  measure- 
ments and  cases  cited  below.  The  moral  nature  I  cannot  speak  of, 
only  in  a  general  way.  I  believe  it  improves  under  true  thoracic 
development. 

Case  A.  —  Male,  aged  54,  American,  height  five  feet  five  and  a  half 
inches,  chest  around  line  of  nipples  thirty-five  inches,  normal  expan- 
sion of  waist  thirty-seven  inches,  no  contraction,  slight  palsy  of  facial 
muscles,  physically  weak,  palpitation  of  the  heart,  inclined  to  paralysis 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  415 

and  suffering  with  chronic  liver  complaint  and  catarrh  of  stomach, 
could  not  ride  in  elevated  train,  subject  to  slight  lateral  curvature  of 
spine,  left  shoulder  an  inch  and  a  half  higher  than  the  right  and 
curved  forward,  breath  of  foul  odor. 

In  two  months  :  height  five  feet  six  inches,  chest  thirty-six  inches, 
expansion  to  thirty-eight  inches,  abdomen  thirty-four  inches,  con- 
tracted to  thirty-one  inches,  no  palpitation,  no  facial  palsy,  gave  up 
medicine,  shoulders  nearly  even,  spine  nearly  straight,  walked  eight 
miles,  breath  greatly  changed,  no  need  of  purgatives,  strength  more 
than  doubled. 

This  patient  now  is  five  feet  six  and  a  half  inches  high,  chest 
thirty-eight  inches,  expansion  forty-one  inches,  waist  thirty-one 
inches,  contracts  to  twenty-eight  inches,  rides  in  elevated  cars  with- 
out discomfort,  can  put  hands  on  floor  without  bending  legs,  odor  in 
breath  all  gone,  flesh  is  fairly  firm,  can  pull  himself  up  on  a  bar  to 
chin  eight  times.  Mind,  he  does  not  practise  these  things,  they  are 
only  a  result  of  treatment. 

Case  B.  —  Age  51,  American,  male;  complaint,  obesity  and 
Bright's  disease  of  kidneys  ;  height  about  five  feet  seven  inches, 
chest  forty-three  and  three-fourths  inches,  waist  forty-four  and  a 
half  inches,  no  contraction. 

In  six  weeks :  chest  forty-one  inches,  expansion  to  forty-three 
inches,  waist  thirty-nine  inches,  contracts  to  thirty-seven  inches. 
Loss  in  hips  and  waist  was  nine  inches. 

This  case  is  noticeable  in  that  the  disease  of  the  kidneys  has 
entirely  disappeared,  and  for  the  first  time  in  three  years  he  can  put 
on  his  own  shoes.  His  measurements  after  four  months'  practice  are: 
chest  forty  inches,  expansion  forty-three  inches,  waist  thirty-seven 
inches,  contracts  to  thirty-one  inches.  And  suffers  with  no  constipa- 
tion ;  was  greatly  troubled  with  that  before.     Occupation  sedentary. 

Another  case  is  that  of  a  female  aged  22;  American;  of  a  weak, 
nervous  disposition;  no  physical  strength  whatever;  in  fact,  had  to 
give  up  occupation ;  suffered  with  great  lassitude ;  no  mammae  ;  chest 
flat  and  hollow.  In  two  months  she  had  increased  the  bust  measure- 
ment five  inches.  I  was  astonished.  The  expansion  is  three  and  a 
half  inches.  The  mammae  grew  rapidly.  She  took  no  exercise  except 
the  respiratory  ones  and  carrying  the  body  properly  on  the  hips.  The 
change  was  wonderful,  both  mentally  and  physically.  She  told  me, 
the  last  time  I  saw  her,  that  she  had  walked  five  miles  the  day  before 
and  did  not  feel  the  slightest  fatigue. 

Another  contrast  is  that  the  patients  represented  two  extremes  : 
one  was  stout,  obese  and  heavy,  and  the  other  was  emaciated,  weak 
and  thin.     Both  commenced  treatment  at  the  same  time  and  took 


4*6  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

the  same  course.  The  thin  man  was  a  mechanic  ;  and  the  stout  man 
a  merchant,  doing  no  laborious  work.  In  three  weeks  the  obese  man 
lost  six  inches  around  the  hips  and  waist,  one  inch  around  the  chest, 
four  inches  around  the  waist,  one  inch  around  each  thigh,  two  inches 
around  the  hips,  and  had  lost  five  pounds  in  weight.  The  thin  man 
gained  an  inch  around  the  chest,  one  inch  in  neck,  one  inch  around 
shoulders,  one  and  a  half  inches  around  hips,  half  an  inch  around 
upper  right  arm,  three-fourths  of  an  inch  around  the  upper  left  arm 
and  gained  seven  pounds  in  weight.  The  color  in  his  face  had 
changed  noticeably. 

I  could  send  you  many  more  of  such  cases,  but  I  think  that  these 
will  convince  you  that  what  I  asserted  to  you  when  I  last  saw  you, 
that  physical  ignorance  is  the  cause  of  more  disease,  more  crime, 
than  even  whiskey,  rum,  or,  in  fact,  all  of  the  vices  human  nature  is 
prone  to  commit.  Drunkenness  and  immorality,  in  my  opinion,  are 
not  causes  ;  they  are  but  effects.  The  cause  lies  principally  in  the 
want  of  an  education  that  even  children  can  learn  as  well  as  the 
most  ignorant,  —  one  which  will  teach  us  how  to  know  ourselves  in  a 
simple  practical  way,  so  that  the  sense  of  smell  becomes  more  acute 
as  well  as  that  of  sight  and  hearing  and  the  power  to  intuitively 
know  what  is  good  for  us  grows,  the  more  we  understand  ourselves. 
In  fact,  a  person  physically  perfect  has  no  pernicious  habit.  To  leave 
off  smoking  is  no  effort ;  dram-drinking  is  the  same.  They  feel  no 
need  for  stimulants ;  in  fact,  their  life  flows  on  like  a  calm. 

Edwin  Checkley. 

To  a  reporter  of  the  New  Yo7'k  World  Mr.  Checkley  said  :  — 

"  'The  great  defect  in  modern  physical  training  is  that  most  of  the 
effort  is  directed  to  growing  large,  hard  muscles  on  a  man.  What 
good  does  that  do  him  ?  He  can  make  a  violent  effort  for  a  minute, 
say,  but  he  can't  sustain  a  long  trial  of  strength.  And  why  ?  Be- 
cause his  breathing  powers  have  not  been  properly  trained.  That 
sounds  revolutionary,  but  you'll  find  it's  true.  I  claim  that  if  a  man 
ever  masters  thoroughly  the  art  of  breathing  he  can  make  himself 
wonderfully  strong.  To  do  this  no  apparatus  is  needed  save  that 
which  nature  has  given  to  ail  of  us,  and  it  can  be  practised  at  home, 
on  the  street,  at  your  desk  —  anywhere.  You  have  seen  some 
hundreds  of  champion  athletes.  How  many  of  them  bear  any 
resemblance  to  the  Farnese  Hercules  ?  Even  the  champion  vaulters, 
weight-throwers,  runners,  swimmers  and  boxers  fall  far  short  of  that 
standard  of  strength  and  grace.' 

"  To  show  the  reporter  that  the  muscle  was  there  for  business  and 
not  for  play,  Mr.  Checkley  balanced  and  put  up  a  club  weighing  one 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  417 

hundred  pounds.  He  did  this  with  his  right  hand.  He  lay  on  the 
floor  and  spread  his  arms  so  that  the  hands,  palms  upward,  lay  far 
behind  and  on  each  side  of  his  head.  The  writer,  who  weighs  one 
hundred  and  seventy  pounds  in  his  shirt-sleeves,  stood  with  one  foot 
in  each  of  the  outstretched  hands,  and  Mr.  Checkley  lifted  him  high 
in  the  air  and  balanced  him  over  his  head.  If  anybody  thinks  this 
is  easy  let  him  try  it  with  one-sixth  as  much  weight,  and  he  will  soon 
change  his  mind. 

"'I  weigh  one  hundred  and  twenty  pounds,'  he  said,  'and  I  can 
get  down  to  one  hundred  and  sixteen.  Just  to  demonstrate  that  my 
strength  was  not  artificial  but  practical,  I  recently  quit  my  studies  in 
the  Long  Island  College  Hospital  and  went  to  work  for  eleven  days 
as  one  of  a  gang  of  'longshoremen.  A  friend  got  me  a  job  among- 
a  lot  of  big  hustlers  unloading  ships.  The  work  was  chiefly  drag- 
ging heavy  bags  of  stuff  out  of  a  hot,  foul-smelling  ship's  hold.  I 
had  done  no  especial  training  previous  to  taking  hold  of  the  work, 
but  I  found  it  didn't  bother  me. 

"  'In  fact,  just  to  test  my  staying  powers,  I  kept  at  work  eight 
hours  a  day,  while  the  trained  men  around  me  worked  only  three 
hours  at  a  time.  It  didn't  bother  me  a  bit.  And  yet  I  am  only  a 
sample  of  what  an  ordinary  little  man  can  do  if  he  will  follow  my 
system.  I  do  not  believe  in  the  old-fashioned  dieting  scheme  as  it 
used  to  be  applied  to  pugilists,  wrestlers  and  athletes  generally. 
Any  good,  wholesome  food,  not  fancifully  cooked  or  gluttonously- 
eaten,  will  do. 

" '  I  will  guarantee  that  any  young  man  in  ordinary  health  can  by 
practising  my  system  of  breathing  for  one  hour  a  day  increase  his 
chest  measurement  at  least  an  inch  the  first  month  and  keep  up  a 
proportionate  growth  afterwards.  By  this  system  alone  I  have  cured 
many  elderly  men  of  obesity,  increased  their  breathing  power  and 
strengthened  their  muscular  system  generally,  so  that  they  are  far 
better  men  physically  than  they  ever  were  before.  And  all  this 
without  using  a  dumb-bell  or  any  artificial  apparatus.'  " 

There  is  another  important  principle  in  Sarcognomy  to  guide  our 
hygienic  practice —  the  close  sympathy  of  the  entire  surface  of  the 
body  and  entire  surface  of  the  brain,  which  makes  the  treatment  of 
the  skin  a  matter  of  importance.  Warmth  and  circulation  in  the 
skin  of  any  part  of  the  surface  promotes  the  action  of  the  corre- 
sponding part  of  the  brain.  Hence  by  stimulating  the  skin  to 
healthy  action  we  promote  the  healthy  action  of  the  brain  and 
improve  our  entire  condition. 

What  may  be  done  by  baths  is  too  extensive  a  subject  for  discus- 
sion here,  but  friction  is  so  easily  applied  and  so  very  beneficial  as  to 


4l8  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  [CHAP.    XIX. 

require  notice.  With  two  yards  of  crash  towel  one  may  give  himself 
a  thorough  friction  over  the  whole  body  from  two  to  six  minutes 
when  going  to  bed  and  repeat  it  in  the  morning  when  he  rises.  He 
may  assist  the  process  by  going  over  the  body  with  a  wet  crash  towel 
or  mitten,  applying  dry  friction  to  each  part  immediately  after  the 
wet.     The  exercise  involved  will  also  be  very  beneficial. 

Next  to  this  refreshing  stimulus  must  be  regarded  the  stimulus  of 
clean,  pure  clothing  to  absorb  the  emanations  of  the  skin.  Cotton 
clothing  retains  too  much  of  the  exhalations,  and  ought  to  be 
changed  daily.  It  need  not  be  washed  as  often  as  changed,  but 
daily  change  is  a  great  promoter  to  health.  If  the  bed  sheets  are 
not  daily  changed  they  should  at  least  be  exposed  to  the  air  all  day 
instead  of  being  kept  on  the  bed.  Cotton  sheets  saturated  with 
human  transpiration  are  very  unwholesome. 

Woollen  does  not  retain  and  accumulate  transpiration  like  cotton 
and  may  therefore  be  used  longer.  It  gently  stimulates  the  skin, 
but  to  some  persons  the  stimulation  is  too  great.  It  gives  free 
passage  to  the  transpiration,  and  therefore  I  regard  the  German 
movement  for  woollen  underclothing  and  bedding  as  an  important 
hygienic  improvement. 

Tight  lacing  to  produce  a  narrow  waist  has  been  a  subject  of 
monotonous  denunciation  for  a  long  time.  The  hygienic  writers 
seem  to  ignore  the  difference  of  the  male  and  female  constitutions. 
The  selfish  and  irritable  elements  of  the  brain  are  represented  at  the 
waist.  These  are  so  much  larger  in  men,  and  the  waist  so  much 
more  conspicuous,  that  a  circumference  of  waist  belt  which  would  be 
agreeable  to  a  woman  would  be  very  oppressive  to  a  man,  being  a 
great  interference  with  his  natural  conformation.  A  masculine 
waist  of  thirty-six  inches  is  not  uncommon,  but  many  women  have 
waists  of  from  twenty  to  sixteen  inches,  and  some  are  even  less. 
They  are  entirely  comfortable  in  their  corsets,  with  waists  so  slender 
that  male  observers  suppose  them  to  be  greatly  compressed.  A  lady 
correspondent  of  a  medical  journal  speaks  of  wearing  corsets  very 
comfortably  which  measure  fourteen  inches  round,  while  her  bust 
measurement  is  thirty-seven  inches. 

The  region  compressed  in  tight  lacing  is  not  like  the  upper  part  of 
the  thorax,  the  seat  of  the  most  important  vital  powers  ;  on  the 
contrary,  its  influence  on  temperament  is  rather  lowering.  Com- 
pression of  any  part  of  the  abdomen  is  a  bracing  influence  to  the 
general  constitution,  and  the  strongest  objection  to  tight  lacing  is 
that  it  substitutes  a  mechanical  support  for  the  natural  action  of  the 
muscles  that  compress  the  abdomen,  and  thus  debilitates  the  muscles, 
besides  forcing  the  abdominal  viscera  downwards,  which  is  certainly 


CHAP.    XIX.]  THE    HYGIENE    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  419 

injurious.  No  doubt  corset  compression  is  injurious,  but  the  magni- 
tude of  the  evil  has  been  greatly  exaggerated.  In  compressing  the 
waist  it  exaggerates  the  peculiarity  of  the  female  constitution,  which 
does  not  need  exaggeration,  and  by  forcing  the  viscera  downward  it 
oppresses  the  pelvis  and  thus  greatly  increases  the  depression  and 
disease  from  which  women  suffer. 

Thoracic  Hygiene.  —  Sarcognomy,  by  showing  the  importance  of 
the  lungs  and  thorax,  enforces  the  importance  of  atmospheric  condi- 
tions, not  only  as  to  proper  lightness  of  the  atmosphere  but  as  to  its 
purity  and  electric  conditions,  and  teaches  us  to  exercise  the  utmost 
vigilance  in  observing  the  condition  of  the  air  that  we  breathe- 
Terrible  epidemics  are  continually  spread  by  atmospheric  conditions 
which  mankind  have  not  learned  to  observe  and  understand.  In 
fashionable  dwellings,  as  well  as  hospitals  and  malarious  localities,  I 
often  observe  conditions  of  the  air  which  are  highly  objectionable 
but  apparently  unnoticed  by  residents.  There  is  also  a  depressing 
negative  condition,  produced  by  the  absence  of  sunshine,  by  evapora- 
tion from  moist  surfaces,  and  by  the  thawing  of  ice  or  snow,  which  is 
oppressive  to  the  lungs.  This  is  realized  on  the  coast  of  New 
England,  from  the  influence  of  Atlantic  icebergs,  and  on  the  lake 
shores  when  the  ice  is  beginning  to  disappear. 

The  most  striking  illustration  of  the  effect  of  cold  evaporation 
from  sunless  surfaces  of  solids  is  in  the  fact  that  it  is  dangerous  to 
sleep  in  an  apartment  which  has  recently  been  plastered  and  is  not 
yet  dry.  Another  danger  to  the  lungs  is  from  a  heterogeneous  condi- 
tion of  the  air,  —  streaks  of  cold  air  being  mingled  with  the  warm,  as 
when  cold  air  blows  into  a  room  through  a  crack  or  narrow  space. 
This  often  results  in  what  is  called  catching  cold. 

The  lungs  have  an  important  relation  to  the  limbs.  Cold  applied 
to  the  limbs  tends  to  congest  and  debilitate  the  lungs,  for  the  limbs 
have  a  tonic  and  correlative  relation  with  the  lungs  like  that  of  the 
occipital  to  the  frontal  organs  of  the  brain.  It  is  easy  to  produce 
pulmonary  disease  by  a  current  of  cold  air  against  the  ankles  and 
legs.  The  entire  surfaces  of  the  limbs  therefore  need  protection  to 
protect  the  lungs,  and  the  same  remark  is  applicable  to  the  upper 
surface  of  the  back. 

The  stomach  has  heretofore  been  almost  the  sole  channel  for 
medication,  but  the  lungs  are  equally  available,  not  only  by  special 
inhalation  of  vapors  and  electrified  air,  but  by  remedies  evaporated 
by  heat  and  diffused  in  the  air  of  apartments. 


CHAPTER  XX. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  PRACTICAL  RULES  FOR  THERAPEUTIC 

TREATMENT. 

With  supplementary  suggestions  as  to  the  spinal  column,  ganglionic 
nerves,  anatomy  of  the  thorax,  and  relation  of  the  limbs  to  the  trunk. 


I  now  present,  in  very  concise  statement,  the  rules  to  be  observed 
in  nervauric  and  electric  therapeutics,  by  showing  what  localities  are 
to  be  stimulated  or  repressed  for  various  purposes.  The  organs 
mentioned  will  be  found  on  the  charts  of  the  head  and  body.  The 
reader  will  understand  that  stimulation  is  effected  by  the  application 
of  the  hands,  by  gentle  percussion,  by  the  negative  pole  of  a  primary, 
a  Galvanic,  or  a  Faradic  current,  by  stimulating  plasters  or  embroca- 
tions, by  heat  and  in  some  cases  by  friction. 

Repression  is  effected  by  dispersive  passes,  by  the  positive  pole, 
by  cold  steadily  applied  for  a  long  'time,  by  hot  water  briefly  applied, 
by  evaporating  liquids  and  by  medical  sedatives. 

The  localities  referred  to  and  the  directions  will  serve  to  guide  all 
external  treatment,  by  clothing,  by  plasters,  by  baths  and  by  the 
pneumatic  or  vacuum  treatment.  Warm  _clothing  applied  on  any 
part  of  the  body  develops  the  local  influence  according  to  Sarcog- 
nomy,  and  variations  of  the  clothing  produce  important  effects,  as 
cold  produces  repression. 

The  first  rule  of  practice  is  to  dissipate  the  existing  morbid  condi- 
tion before  we  do  anything  else. 

If  this  is  done  by  the  hands,  the  operator  should  be  in  a  pleasant, 
healthy,  vigorous  condition,  neither  fatigued,  hungry,  thirsty,  nor  de- 
pressed  in  spirits.  His  blood  should  be  in  a  plethoric  condition. 
Drinking  freely  of  nutritious  and  stimulating  liquids  assists  him  to 
operate  vigorously  and  to  repel  rather  than  absorb  disease.  He  should 
not  be  passive  in  his  intercourse  with  a  patient,  which  would  render 
him  impressible  by  morbid  conditions,  but  should  maintain  inces- 
sant activity  and  a  positive  state  of  mind. 

The  dispersion  of  morbid  conditions  is  effected  by  rapid  dispersive 
passes  with  the  hands,  as  if  we  were  brushing  out  a  fluid.  The  fluid 
exists,  which  we  call  nervaura,  which  is  morbid  in  morbid  parts.      It 


CHAP.  XX.]     RULES  FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  421 

is  moved  in  the  direction  of  our  manipulations.  We  may  thus  dis- 
perse a  pain  at  one  spot  and  find  it  reappear  at  the  part  to  which  we 
have  moved  it.  Thus  we  may  transfer  morbid  conditions  from  one 
part  to  another  in  contact,  and  from  one  patient  to  another,  or  to 
ourselves.  The  dispersive  manipulation  carries  the  morbid  condi- 
tion, and  an  electric  current  does  it  still  more  effectively. 

Hence  it  is  indispensable  that  the  current  of  morbific  influence 
should  not  be  conducted  into  ourselves,  and  that  it  should  be  carried 
out  of  the  body  of  the  patient.  The  dispersive  passes  should  drive 
it  entirely  out  of  the  patient  by  his  feet  and  hands,  especially  the 
former.  It  may  pass  into  the  atmosphere,  but  it  will  pass  more 
readily  into  water,  by  placing  the  feet  in  water  or  on  a  wet  sponge, 
or  by  manipulating  with  a  wet  sponge  or  cloth,  or  wet  .hands. 

The  relief  by  manipulation  with  the  hands  is  generally  prompt, 
constituting  a  large  part  of  the  cure,  and  sometimes  completing  it. 
It  is  also  effectually  given  by  an  electric  current  applied  by  a  large 
wet  sponge  on  the  morbid  part  and  passed  down  to  a  similar  sponge 
or  basin  of  water  under  the  feet.  Yet  even  this  should  be  preceded 
by  a  dispersive  movement  with  the  hands,  the  efficiency  of  which 
cannot  be  surpassed  by  anything  else. 

The  dispersive  current  may  be  either  the  galvanic,  the  primary  or 
the  static,  the  positive  pole  being  on  the  morbid  part. 

After  the  morbific  influence  has  been  dispersed,  the  morbid  part  is 
to  be  invigorated  by  the  application  of  the  hands  on  the  spot,  and  on 
those  parts  of  the  spine  and  the  head  from  which  its  vital  energy 
proceeds.  The  application  of  the  hands  on  the  body  is  made  more 
effective  by  a  gentle  percussion  for  a  few  minutes,  which  may  be 
made  vigorously  upon  robust  persons. 

As  the  vital  forces  belong  to  the  posterior  half  of  the  body  and 
the  brain,  the  greater  portion  of  our  treatment  is  applied  on  the  pos- 
terior surfaces,  and  the  currents  from  manipulation  and  electricity 
are  generally  directed  backwards.  As  vitality  proceeds  from  above 
downwards  electric  currents  and  manipulations  should  be  upward 
rather  than  downward.  The  common  notion  about  electro-therapeu- 
tics, that  currents  should  be  sent  in  the  directions  of  the  nerves  to 
their  extremities,  would  imply  that  we  should  stimulate  the  organs  at 
the  expense  of  the  central  nervous  power,  which  would  be  reduced 
by  centrifugal  currents  but  stimulated  by  the  centripetal.  While 
moderate  centripetal  currents  are  more  often  beneficial  than  the  oppo- 
site, reciprocating  currents,  which  operate  both  centripetally  and  cen- 
trifugally,  have  perhaps  a  wider  sphere  of  utility.  Let  us  now  con- 
sider the  various  methods  of  treatment  to  accomplish  special  purposes. 

I.    To  establish  health.     Stimulate  Health,   repress   Disease  on  the 


422  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

body  and  the  head.  Disperse  excitement  from  morbid  organs,  and 
reinforce  them  by  the  hands.  Rouse  all  inactive  functions  and 
repress  those  in  excess. 

2.  To  promote  mental  sozmdness.  Stimulate  Sanity  and  Cheerful- 
ness, and  the  entire  summit  of  the  trunk  —  the  shoulders  and  upper 
surface  of  the  chest.  Repress  Insanity,  Melancholy,  Disease,  Irrita- 
bility and  Excitability. 

3.  To  promote  mental  vigor.  Stimulate  the  cephalic  zone  of  head 
and  body.  For  the  psychometric  clairvoyant  and  spiritual  faculties, 
stimulate  at  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum  —  for  Oratory  at  the  five 
upper  dorsal  vertebrae  and  the  posterior  surface  of  the  shoulder  joints, 
also  the  region  of  Inspiration  on  the  lateral  surface  of  the  chest. 
On  the  head  —  Oratory  is  on  the  upper  occiput,  Clairvoyance  at  the 
root  of  the  nose,  Psychometry  in  the  sensitive  region  of  the  temples 
and  the  intuitive  region  at  the  part  of  the  front  lobe  which  is  behind 
the  root  of  the  nose. 

4.  To  produce  sleep.  Stimulate  from  the  sternum  to  the  umbilicus 
or  on  the  cerebral  organ  of  Somnolence  —  then  on  the  organ  of  Sleep 
on  the  body  and  head,  assisting  if  necessary  by  the  front  of  the  leg 
and  foot/  which  are  very  sedative.  Somnolence  and  Sleep  or  Repose 
may  be  stimulated  simultaneously  on  the  body  and  on  the  head. 

5.  To  promote  wakefulness.  Stimulate  the  middle  of  the  forehead, 
and  the  perceptive  organs  of  the  brow,  especially  Light  —  disperse 
upward  and  backward  from  the  temples.  Stimulate  upper  dorsal 
region,  upper  occiput,  shoulders  and  thighs  —  disperse  from  the 
whole  front  of  the  abdomen,  inguinal  and  pubic  regions,  and  from 
the  region  under  the  jaw. 

6.  To  relieve  headache.  Brush  rapidly  downward  along  the  jugular 
veins  and  the  back  of  the  neck  ;  brush  upward  and  backward  from 
the  temples,  and  backward  on  the  median  line.  Make  dispersive 
passes  at  the  seat  of  the  pain.  If  the  head  is  cool  stimulate  the 
cephalic  zone  —  if  hot,  the  front  of  the  leg  and  top  of  the  foot.  Also 
apply  hot  water  freely  to  the  head.  Manipulations  on  the  neck  alone 
usually  relieve  headache  in  five  minutes  or  less. 

7.  To  invigorate  the  lower  limbs.  Stimulate  occipital  base  of 
brain  and  neck,  lumbar  and  sacral  regions  of  back,  entire  thighs  and 
calves  of  legs. 

8.  To  overcome  pnezimonia  and  other  conditions  in  which  there  is 
hyperemia,  warmth,  irritation  or  congestion  in  the  chest.  Stimulate 
pulmonic  portion  of  dorsal  region  (between  the  shoulders)  and  tibial 
surface  of  the  leg  (aquatic  region)  including  top  of  foot.  Use  dis- 
persive passes  or  electric  currents  from  front  of  chest  toward  feet 
and  hands.     For  prompt  effects  use  hemastasis,  by  applying  ligatures 


CHAP.  XX.]        FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  423 

around  the  shoulders  and  thighs,  which  will  be  more  effective  if  the 
legs  and  forearms  are  inserted  in  warm  water  or  stimulated  with 
mustard.  Keep  the  limbs  distended  with  blood  several  hours.  Apply 
Haemospasia  as  directed  in  Chapter  14. 

9.  To  overcome  asthmatic,  or  dry  and  constricted  conditions  of  the 
lungs  —  stimulate  inspiration  on  the  chest  and  the  pulmonic  region 
on  the  back. 

10.  To  overcome  excitability  of  the  heart.  Stimulate  the  entire 
shoulder  and  the  middle  of  the  dorsal  region,  also  Firmness  and  the 
upper  occipital  region  of  the  head,  dispersing  from  the  temples. 

11.  To  deepen  respiration.  Stimulate  on  the  abdomen  below  the 
umbilicus,  and  on  the  face  below  the  mouth.  For  expansion  of  the 
chest  by  costal  respiration  —  stimulate  Inspiration  on  the  ribs,  the 
upper  dorsal  region,  and  the  thoracic  or  pulmonic  region  in  the 
temples.  Stimulate  Health  to  co-operate.  The  most  effective  im- 
pression on  the  diaphragm  is  made  by  an  electric  current  from  the 
lower  cervical  vertebrae  to  the  respiratory  location,  two  inches  below 
the  umbilicus. 

12.  To  promote  tlie  healthy  action  of  the  stomac/:.  Stimulate  the 
lower  dorsal  region  and  the  gastric  location  just  below  the  ribs  (Ali- 
mentiveness)  in  connection  with  Health.  The  region  of  Assimilation 
just  above  the  umbilicus  will  assist. 

13.  General  invigoration  is  produced  by  stimulating  the  base  of  the 
brain  through  the  neck,  the  summit  of  the  dorsal  region,  the  shoulders 
generally,  and  the  upper  occipital  region.  Stimulation  upon  the  back 
of  the  neck  not  only  rouses  the  base  of  the  brain  but  reaches  to  the 
three  cervical  ganglia  which  stimulate  the  heart  and  the  circulation 
of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord.  These  ganglia  are  opposite  the  third, 
fifth,  and  seventh  cervical  vertebras.  From  the  lower  portion  of  the 
neck  proceed  the  nerves  that  give  power  to  the  arms,  and  the  arms 
sympathize  with  the  invigorating  regions  of  the  occiput.  The  cen- 
tral location  for  producing  the  maximum  vigor  of  the  constitution  is 
at  the  summit  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae,  and  the  corresponding  spot  on 
the  head  is  at  the  posterior  margin  of  Firmness — a  locality  which 
recent  vivisecting  physiologists  consider  the  source  of  vigor  to  the 
lower  limbs  and  which  they  call  the  posterior  parietal  lobule,  or 
superior  parietal  lobule. 

14.  To  overcome  constipation.  Stimulate  the  region  of  Defecation 
on  the  abdomen  (lower  end  of  Gastro-enteric  region)  and  the  entire 
lumbar  region  ;  or  pass  mild  Faradic  currents  between  these  two 
locations,  or  alternating  primary  currents.  Currents  passed  through 
the  lower  lumbar  vertebrae  reach  the  aortic  and  hypogastric  plexuses 
which  send  nerves  to  the  descending  colon,  rectum,  bladder  and  sex- 
ual organs. 


424  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

15.  To  overcome  mcnorrliagia  and  dysmenorrhea.  Make  rapid  dis- 
persive passes  from  the  groin  upward  and  backward,  and  downward 
if  necessary  ;  stimulate  the  lumbo-sacral  junction,  and  the  location  of 
Cheerfulness,  Sanity  and  Chastity  near  the  axilla,  with  the  hand  or 
the  negative  pole,  the  positive  being  on  the  groin. 

16.  To  overcome  insanity,  in  any  of  its  forms  of  mania,  dementia, 
etc.,  the  pelvic  organs  should  be  restored  to  health  and  all  serious 
affections  in  the  region  of  the  liver  and  stomach  relieved  ;  then 
primary  or  Galvanic  currents  for  ten,  twenty  or  in  some  cases  even 
thirty  minutes,  should  be  passed  from  the  perineum  to  the  region  of 
Sanity  at  the  axillae,  on  each  side  —  also  to  Health  and  the  cephalic 
or  upper  dorsal  region.  Very  gentle  currents  may  also  be  passed 
from  the  under-jaw  region  of  Insanity  to  the  cerebral  locations  of 
Sanity  and  Firmness,  or  the  latter  may  be  stimulated  by  the  hand, 
and  the  former  subdued  by  dispersive  passes  on  the  side  and  back  of 
the  neck.  When  there  is  violent  excitement  and  over-active  circula- 
tion in  the  head,  a  stream  of  hot  water  applied  to  the  disturbing 
regions  on  the  side  and  back  of  the  neck,  along  the  carotid  and  ver- 
tebral arteries,  will  have  a  beneficial  influence.  Cerebral  excitement 
may  also  be  subdued  by  an  electric  current  from  the  under-jaw  region 
to  the  feet. 

17.  To  relieve  hysteria.  Use  dispersive  passes  or  electric  currents, 
from  the  location  of  the  womb  to  the  region  of  Sanity  at  the  axilla, 
and  stimulate  the  region  of  Health  at  the  top  of  the  shoulder  and  the 
summit  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae. 

18.  To  treat  organic  diseases  of  the  womb.  Remove  excitability  as 
in  hysteria;  use  suitable  medical  injections,  such  as  Helonias, 
Hydrastis,  White  Pond  Lily  (Nymphcea  odorata)  and  Bromide  of 
Ammonium,  and  apply  the  positive  pole  to  the  cervex,  sending  a  cur- 
rent to  the  lumbar  region  or  to  the  axilla.  In  the  first  treatment  a 
dispersive  current  may  be  sent  from  over  the  womb  to  the  feet. 

19.  To  control  nansea.  Nauseating  substances  sometimes  require 
to  be  removed  by  an  emetic  or  by  a  gentle,  soothing  cathartic.  Me- 
dicinally, nausea  has  been  resisted  by  soothing  aromatics  such  as  pep- 
permint water  and  minute  fractions  of  a  grain  of  morphine,  or  by 
ingluvin  and  lactopeptin,  which  assist  digestion,  or  by  minute  portions 
of  lobelia  or  ipecac,  which  act  homceopathically.  To  treat  nausea  and 
vomiting  according  to  Sarcognomy,  relief  should  be  given  bv  disper- 
sion from  the  seats  of  Nausea  and  Disease  on  the  body.  In  slight 
cases  vigorous  dispersive  upward  passes  from  Disease,  and  stimula- 
tion of  Health  and  the  lower  dorsal  region  will  restore  the  stomach 
to  a  comfortable  condition.  In  such  cases  a  primary  current  from 
Disease  to  Health  is  beneficial,  and  relief  has  sometimes  been  q;iven 


CHAP.  XX.]         FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  425 

by  a  Galvanic  current  at  the  locality  of  the  stomach  from  left  to  right, 
aided  by  the  application  of  atropia  or  of  belladonna  on  the  surface. 
Dr.  LeConiat  claims  to  have  relieved  seasickness  by  applying  the  neg- 
ative pole  near  the  pyloric  end  of  the  stomach,  and  passing  the 
positive  over  the  surface  from  the  cardiac  to  the  pyloric  end  after 
moistening  the  skin  with  a  solution  of  sulphate  of  atropia,  the  active 
element  of  belladonna.  But  this  treatment  is  rather  palliative  than 
radical.  The  radical  treatment  must  reach  the  sacro-iliac  region  of 
Nausea  or  Disgust,  though  it  may  be  assisted  by  hypochondriac  and 
epigastric  treatment.  Thorough  dispersive  treatment  should  be 
applied  at  Nausea,  and  the  electric  current  introduced  at  that  location 
and  conducted  to  the  shoulder,  where  the  negative  pole  may  be  applied 
on  the  top,  back  and  front  of  that  region,  over  the  entire  space  between 
the  lower  angle  of  the  scapula  and  the  nipple.  With  the  highly  sen- 
sitive, the  nervauric  manipulation  would  be  equally  effective  —  stimu- 
lating the  upper  region  just  mentioned,  and  dispersing  from  the  lower. 
The  horizontal  position  of  the  body  favors  the  predominance  of  the 
upper  region,  and  it  would  even  be  advantageous  if  the  head  of  the 
couch  were  a  little  lower  than  the  foot,  and  if  the  shoulders  and  arms 
were  kept  especially  warm.  The  application  of  hot  water  freely  to 
the  corporeal  seat  of  nausea,  or  to  its  cephalic  seat  (the  posterior  sur- 
face of  the  cerebellum),  is  very  beneficial,  and  a  similar  result  may 
be  attained  by  the  application  of  ice  or  by  the  coolness  resulting  from 
the  evaporation  of  ether.  Whatever  stimulates  the  upper  region  of 
the  brain  tends  to  overcome  nausea ;  hence  champagne,  coffee  and 
caffeine  (Bromo-caffeine)  have  been  beneficially  used.  Whatever 
diminishes  the  excitability  of  the  pelvic  region  is  beneficial  against 
nausea  ;  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that  the  bromides  have  been  effectual. 
The  neck  of  the  womb  appears  to  be  a  centre  of  nausea.  The 
development  of  a  uterine  tumor  has  been  known  to  produce  nausea 
and  vomiting.  The  nausea  of  early  pregnancy,  before  the  womb  has 
developed  sufficiently  to  rise  above  the  region  of  nausea,  is  a  familiar 
fact  and  is  treated  like  the  nausea  of  seasickness.  It  is  developed 
by  the  downward  pressure  on  rising  in  the  morning  (and  hence  called 
morning  sickness)  as  seasickness  is  developed  by  the  downward 
impulse  of  the  abdominal  viscera,  and  like  that  is  relieved  by  remedies 
which  send  the  vital  forces  upwards.  Prof.  E.  D.  Mayo  found  a  cup 
of  coffee  or  a  glass  of  champagne  taken  before  rising  a  relief  to  the 
morning  nausea.  Similar  relief  has  been  given  by  a  cup  of  tea  or  a 
bitter  infusion  or  effervescing  drinks  or  a  breakfast  taken  in  bed  a 
while  before  rising.  Relief  has  also  been  given  by  a  little  cocaine,  or 
by  a  little  veratrum  viride  applied  to  the  neck  of  the  womb.  Thus 
it  is  clear  that  a  region  opposite  the  sacro-iliac  symphysis  is  the  seat 


426 


SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES 


[CHAP.    XX. 


of  nausea,  and  that  it  must  be  treated  by  measures  which  divert  from 
the  pelvis  toward  the  thorax. 

20.  Phthisis  pulmonalis,  or  tuberculous  consumption,  is  a  disease 
dependent  on  inferiority  in  the  blood  and  the  vital  forces.  When  not 
too  far  advanced,  it  may  be  controlled  and  cured  in  the  very  impressi- 
ble with  very  little  use  of  medicine  ;  but  in  all  others  medical  treat- 
ment must  be  the  chief  reliance.  The  fundamental  rules  of  all  treat- 
ment are  to  diminish  the  irritation  of  the  lungs,  promote  a  healthy 
expectoration,  increase  the  muscular  energy,  increase  the  digestive 
and  assimilative  power,  and  develop  the  largest  possible,  amount  of 
healthy  red  blood.  Hence,  in  the  early  stages  an  active,  hardy,  out- 
door life,  developing  a  vigorous  appetite  and  satisfying  it  with  rich 
nitrogenous  food  (especially  flesh)  has  often  wrought  a  perfect  cure. 

In  the  nervauric  treatment,  the  irritation  of  the  lungs  must  be 
relieved  by  dispersive  passes  to  the  hands  and  feet,  and  by  stimula- 
ting the  aquatic  or  tibial  region,  which  overcomes  pulmonary  irritation. 
The  lower  dorsal  region  should  be  stimulated  to  promote  digestion  ; 
the  shoulders  or  Health  region,  and  the  space  between  them,  to 
invigorate  the  lungs  ;  Vital  Force  and  Nutrition  to  resist  debility  and 
emaciation,  and  the  upper  and  lower  limbs  should  be  stimulated  to 
assist  them  in  active  daily  exercise.  Treatment  should  be  given  to 
the  entire  posterior  surface  of  the  body.  An  active  life  in  the  open  air 
and  sunshine  and  the  most  generous  sustaining  diet  that  can  be 
digested  are  necessary. 

As  animal  food  nourishes  the  blood  more  rapidly  than  anything  else, 
cures  have  been  made  by  dieting  on  beef  largely  consumed.  A  little 
iron  especially  (the  phosphate  of  iron  and  phosphate  of  lime)  assists  in 
restoration  of  rich  blood,  which  is  indispensable  to  recovery.  Exer- 
cise of  the  upper  and  lower  limbs  to  promote  expansion  of  the  lungs  is 
necessary.  Electric  currents  through  the  lungs  to  the  posterior  sur- 
face of  the  chest  are  an  essential  part  of  the  treatment.  A  gentle 
reciprocating  current  between  the  mammae  and  the  region  of  Health 
will  be  of  great  benefit. 

21.  Pericarditis  and  other  inflammations  of  the  heart  require  the 
tranquillizing  and  tonic  influence  of  Firmness,  Patience,  Fortitude 
and  Heroism,  located  at  and  near  the  sagittal  suture  or  median  line 
of  the  head,  and  on  the  body  at  the  top  of  the  shoulder.  The  exte 
rior  and  upper  part  of  the  shoulder  gives  Heroism  or  Hardihood  and 
interiorly  at  the  base  of  the  neck  we  find  Patience  and  Serenity  which 
overcomes  all  excitability  and  irritation.  We  get  additional  vigor  for 
the  heart  as  we  descend  on  the  shoulder  blade  and  also  on  the  spinal 
column,  between  the  shoulders.  In  addition  to  these  quiet  tonic 
influences,  by  which  we  produce  a  slower  and  steadier  pulse,  we  need 


CHAP.  XX.]         FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  42/ 

the  antiphlogistic  influence  of  the  tibial  or  aquatic  region,  which  is 
the  proper  reliance  for  resisting  inflammatory  diseases.  Under  these 
two  influences  the  inflammation,  pain,  excitement  and  oppression  are 
relieved,  and  nature  displays  its  restorative  power.  As  there  is 
usually  considerable  heat  or  fever,  this  would  require  in  addition  to 
the  aquatic  influence  that  of  coolness,  on  the  side  of  the  body  and 
on  the  head,  which  directly  resists  the  fever. 

We  should  not  forget  that  the  first  thing  to  be  done  in  this,  as  in 
other  active  local  affections,  is  to  disperse  the  local  morbid  influence. 
Dispersive  passes  upward  and  backward  over  the  heart  toward  the 
shoulder  and  spine  should  be  our  first  ministration  and  should  be 
repeated  as  often  as  the  symptoms  indicate  the  need.  Dispersive 
passes  should  be  made  from  the  cheek-bone  and  the  temporal  region 
near  the  ear  toward  Health  and  Firmness.  By  such  passes  alone 
I  have  completely  relieved  the  heart  in  a  case  of  pericarditis. 

22.  Dilation  of  the  heart  —  a  condition  of  debility,  recognized  by 
the  feeble  circulation,  oppression  at  the  heart,  weakness  of  its  impulse 
and  the  increased  extent  of  its  sound  in  the  chest  —  requires  persever- 
ance in  a  tonic  treatment  through  the  shoulders,  the  upper  dorsal 
region  and  the  thighs  to  produce  the  same  results  attained  in  the 
medical  treatment  by  the  use  of  Cereus,  Convallaria  and  Digitalis 
which  are  necessary  in  such  cases.  The  Cereus  Grandiflora  or  Bon- 
plandii  and  the  Convallaria  I  should  consider  indispensable,  but  they 
do  not  supersede  the  necessity  of  nervauric  treatment  for  the  impres- 
sible. The  whole  posterior  surface  of  the  body  and  the  head  should 
be  treated. 

23.  Affections  of  the  liver  should  be  treated  adjacent  to  its  location, 
bearing  in  mind  that  we  impart  energy  through  the  posterior  surfaces. 
Hence  when  we  apply  the  hand  on  the  lower  dorsal  vertebrae  we 
energize  the  liver.  Passing  forward  on  the  side  of  the  trunk,  the  in- 
fluence becomes  more  exciting  and  less  tonic.  In  its  congested  and 
irritated  conditions,  dispersive  passes  from  the  front  to  the  back  are 
appropriate,  together  with  the  stimulation  of  the  lower  dorsal  region 
and  the  shoulders.  In  inflammatory  conditions,  the  region  of  Coolness 
and  the  tibial  region  have  a  good  influence.  We  stimulate  the  liver 
on  the  hepatic  zone  of  the  brain,  producing  the  most  energetic  effect 
about  two  inches  behind  the  ear. 

24.  Affections  of  the  stomach  are  treated  at  the  lower  dorsal  verte- 
brae and  at  the  gastric  location  on  the  abdomen  below  the  ribs 
—  also  on  the  assimilative  region  above  the  umbilicus  —  the  shoulders 
being  used  to  control  the  excitement  and  give  it  a  healthy  direction. 
From  the  lower  six  dorsal  vertebrae,  ganglionic  nerves  proceed  to  the 
solar  plexus  which  supplies    all  the   abdominal  viscera.     The    solar 


428  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

plexus  may  be  reached  directly  through  the  lower  dorsal  vertebrae. 
Dispersive  currents  from  the  front  relieve  morbid  conditions,  and 
reciprocating  currents  between  the  front  and  back  give  vigor  to  the 
stomach. 

25.  All  irritations  of  the  abdominal  organs  are  treated  with  disper- 
sive passes  backwards  and  upwards  —  the  lower  dorsal  and  lumbar 
regions  being  used  to  vitalize,  and  the  shoulders  to  control,  regulate 
and  moderate  the  action.  They  may  also  be  relieved  by  dispersive 
passes  downwards  to  the  feet  and  electric  currents  in  that  direction. 

26.  Fevers  require  efficient  dispersion  from  the  hypochondriac  and 
hypogastric  regions  (Disease  and  Calorification)  and  the  stimulation 
of  Health  and  Coolness  —  and  of  the  tibial  region  when  the  brain  and 
nervous  system  are  excited.  Currents  of  warm  or  hot  water  upon  the 
region  of  Calorification  are  an  efficient  febrifuge.  The  same  end 
might  be  attained,  but  I  think  less  beneficially,  by  currents  of  cold 
water  upon  the  hypogastric  region  of  Calorification.  The  practice 
has  been  successfully  tried  in  Germany  of  reducing  the  temperature 
in  typhoid  fever  by  free  and  prolonged  injections  of  water  into  the 
rectum,  fully  twenty  or  more  degrees  below  the  temperature  of  the 
patient.  Water  applied  to  the  legs  and  the  forearms  would  be  very 
efficient  in  reducing  the  temperature,  for  these  parts  have  a  very  close 
sympathy  with  the  abdominal  organs.  This  practice  is  much  more 
easy  and  pleasant. 

27.  Chills  require  the  excitement  of  Calorification,  Health,  the 
lumbar  region  and  the  thighs.  Reciprocal  currents  between  the  lum- 
bar and  hypogastric  regions  efficiently  raise  the  temperature. 

28.  Inflammations  or  inflammatory  diseases  require  the  influence 
of  Coolness,  the  tibial  region  and  the  top  of  the  shoulder.  The  first 
counteracts  inflammatory  heat  and  fever,  the  second  diminishes 
capacity  for  inflammation,  and  the  third  diminishes  sensitive  excita- 
bility and  sustains  the  vital  energy.  They  are  also  efficiently  treated 
locally  by  dispersive  passes  or  by  currents  of  positive  electricity  sent 
through  to  some  proper  location,  such  as  the  tibial  region  or  Coolness, 
or  Health.  Dr.  Gale  (1802),  in  treating  the  urinary  organs  by  electric 
currents,  was  asked  by  his  patients  if  they  did  not  produce  the  inter- 
nal fever  they  felt.  Such  currents  between  the  kidneys  and  bladder 
involve  the  region  of  Calorification. 

The  hypogastric  region,  in  which  the  calorific  and  sexual  functions 
reside,  is  one  of  intense  sensibility  and  great  control  over  vitality. 
We  have  a  case  recorded  of  immediate  death  in  a  married  woman 
produced  by  the  shock  of  an  injection  of  cold  water  against  the  mouth 
of  the  womb  with  the  intention  of  producing  abortion. 

Irritations  of   the  urethra  have  very   serious  consequences.     The 


CHAP.    XX. J  FOR    THERAPEUTIC    TREATMENT.  429 

Weekly  Medical  Review  says  :  "  About  middle  life  in  men  perfectly 
healthy,  or  with  no  discoverable  evidence  of  disease,  except  perhaps, 
and  even  that  not  always,  a  low  density  of  urine,  the  commencement 
of  habitual  use  of  the  catheter  is  sometimes  followed  by  fever  of  the 
remittent  type,  which  often  ends  in  death,  and  that  for  the  fatal  issue 
in  such  cases  no  adequate  structural  explanation  can  be  found.  It 
is  important  that  such  a  fever,  arising  in  the  midst  of  apparent  heaith 
from  such  a  seemingly  small  cause,  and  leading  so  often  (as  it  cer- 
tainly does)  to  a  fatal  issue,  should  be  well  and  widely  known,  lest 
death  should  take  the  friends  of  the  patient  by  surprise,  and  arrange- 
ments necessary  to  the  welfare  of  a  family  be  left  unmade.  Although 
it  is  well  known  that  in  persons  affected  with  renal  disease,  or  with 
chronic  gout,  or  with  grave  disorders  of  the  general  health,  the  com- 
mencement of  habitual  catheterism  is  attended  with  peril  to  life  from 
secondary  fever,  the  fact  that  this  fever  may  arise  in  what  seems  to 
be  good  health,  and,  without  the  mediation  of  any  visible  structural 
lesion,  issue  in  death,  is  not  well  known  —  or  at  least  well  known  only 
to  a  few  —  and  has,  I  repeat,  no  adequate  place  in  English  surgical 
literature  or  in  the  English  surgical  teaching." 

29.  Paralytic  affections  (if  the  brain  is  not  involved)  require  treat- 
ment through  the  spine  — -  dispersive  passes,  followed  by  the  vitaliz- 
ing application  of  the  hand  —  or  electric  currents  in  alternating  direc- 
tions through  the  spinal  region  affected  to  the  muscles,  for  about  ten 
minutes.  Descending  currents  are  commonly  used  from  a  point 
above  the  affected  portion  through  the  cord  to  the  muscles.  But 
ascending  currents  are  necessary  to  sustain  the  vigor  of  the  spine. 
Faradic  currents  may  be  applied  directly  to  the  muscles  concerned, 
as  well  as  to  the  spine  and  muscles. 

When  the  brain  is  involved,  dispersive  downward  manipulations 
may  be  used  over  the  affected  part  and  very  gentle  Galvanic  currents 
may  be  passed  downward  a  week  or  two  after  the  attack.  Such 
currents  are  much  more  beneficial  when  given  through  the  hand  of 
the  operator. 

30.  Local  affections  require  local  treatment  but  may  all  be  greatly 
aided  by  constitutional  treatment  according  to  Sarcognomy,  to  in- 
crease the  vital  power  and  modify  the  local  condition. 

31.  Kidney  diseases  require  local  treatment,  their  spinal  control 
being  just  above  the  kidneys.  The  antagonistic  functions  which 
produce  their  quiescence  being  located  around  the  shoulder  and 
especially  at  its  superior  anterior  aspect. 

32.  Sexual  Vitality.  The  sexual  force  which  belongs  to  the  region 
of  virility,  and  according  to  pathognomic  laws  is  associated  with  the 
upper  surface  of   the  brain,  has  very  important  relations  to  health 


430  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

and  normal  development  which  have  not  been  properly  realized  by 
physiologists  and  hygienists.  The  fact  that  sexual  development 
makes  a  great  change  in  the  constitution,  and  is  essential  to  the 
normal  development  of  every  animal,  should  teach  us  that  it  is  not  a 
transitory  adolescent  influence,  but  an  essential  part  of  the  perma- 
nent organization  of  life.  Hence  the  maintenance  of  sexual  vitality 
is  essential  to  the  full  development  of  normal  life  and  ethical  senti- 
ments. 

To  overcome  the  impairment  of  sexual  vitality,  reciprocal  electric 
currents  may  be  passed  from  the  first  lumbar  to  the  lower  sacral 
vertebras,  and  also  between  the  lumbo-sacral  junction  and  the 
mammas,  also  lumbo-sacral  and  genitals  or  inside  of  thigh.  The 
current  which  embraces  the  mammae  is  the  most  beneficial  and  may 
be  assisted  by  currents  between  the  mammae  and  Health,  also  by 
primary  currents  from  Melancholy  or  Disease  to  the  summit  of  the 
brain  in  the  region  of  Love. 

33.  Antagonism.  Antagonistic  organs  oppose  each  other,  each 
tending  in  high  excitement  to  suspend  or  suppress  the  action  of  the 
other,  as  courage  suppresses  fear,  and  benevolence  suppresses 
selfishness.  Hence  we  diminish  the  excitability  and  activity  of  any 
organ  by  exciting  its  antagonist.  In  a  very  impressible  temperament 
of  but  little  strength,  antagonism  by  one  organ  highly  excited  will 
suppress  its  opposite,  but  in  a  strong  temperament  this  will  not 
occur  ;  organs  will  be  restrained  by  antagonism  but  not  suppressed. 
Hence  in  such  persons  extreme  displays  of  organs  such  as  Insanity 
or  Disease  will  not  be  produced.  When  we  wish  to  make  an  organ 
predominate  entirely  over  its  opposite,  we  stimulate  it  with  the 
hand  and  make  dispersive  manipulations  over  the  opposite  ;  or  stimu- 
late by  the  negative  pole  and  apply  the  positive  to  the  opposite. 

The  antagonism  to  excitability  of  the  heart  is  on  the  upper  aspect 
of  the  shoulder  adjacent  to  the  neck.  The  antagonism  to  excita- 
bility of  the  lungs  occupies  the  arms  from  the  shoulder  to  the  elbow. 
This  antagonism  to  their  excitability  is  favorable  to  their  strength. 
The  more  sedative  antagonism  to  excitability  of  brain  and  lungs 
occupies  the  foot  and  the  tibial  surface  of  the  leg.  The  antagonism 
to  gastric  and  hepatic  excitability  is  on  the  shoulder  midway  between 
the  neck  and  the  acromion  prominence,  extending  backward  on  the 
upper  part  of  the  scapula.  The  excitability  of  the  alimentary  canal 
is  antagonized  from  the  top  of  the  shoulder  back  and  downwards  to 
near  the  axilla.  Uterine  and  sexual  excitability  are  antagonized  on 
the  side  of  the  head  (marked  Ch.)  and  below  the  axilla.  Locomotive 
or  restless  excitability  is  antagonized  on  the  side  of  the  chest  at  the 
anterior  line  of  the  arm,  and  on  the  temporal  arch  at  the  organ  of 
Tranquillity. 


CHAP.  XX.]         FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  43 1 

34.  Ethical  improvement.  To  counteract  and  correct  all  moral 
defects  or  vices  and  elevate  the  character,  our  manipulations  and 
electric  currents  should  ascend.  We  should  direct  our  action  toward 
the  summit  of  the  chest  and  of  the  head  and  upon  these  we  should 
place  the  hands  lightly.  Thus  we  may  totally  change  the  character 
in  impressible  youth,  eradicating  their  evil  inclinations  by  persever- 
ing treatment.  Husband  and  wife  in  many  cases  could  overcome 
their  inharmony  and  renew  their  love  by  this  method.  With  the 
hands  upon  the  organ  of  Love  or  upon  the  mammae,  sentiments  of 
affection  would  revive. 

To  overcome  ill  temper  and  moroseness  the  currents  should  be 
directed  to  the  axilla,  the  mammae  and  the  upper  surface  of  the  chest 
up  to  the  base  of  the  neck.  The  primary  chemical  current  may  be 
effective,  but  the  static  is  superior  for  this  purpose,  and  the  combina- 
tion of  the  two  gives  great  efficiency,  the  chemical  current  having 
greater  penetrative  power.  The  most  desirable  of  all  currents  is  the 
combination  of  static  and  magnetic  produced  by  my  recent  invention. 

To  overcome  indolence  and  moral  worthlessness,  the  currents 
should  be  directed  to  the  entire  upper  surface  of  the  shoulder  and 
the  upper  margin  of  the  back,  from  shoulder  to  shoulder — on  the 
head  to  the  organs  of  Firmness,  Fortitude,  Heroism,  Integrity, 
Energy,  Cheerfulness  and  Health. 

To  overcome  a  gloomy  tendency,  direct  the  excitement  to  Forti- 
tude, Cheerfulness,  Health  and  Playfulness,  on  the  head  and  body. 

SUPPLEMENTARY   SUGGESTIONS. 

In  the  treatment  of  constitutional  disorders,  especially  those  affect- 
ing the  nervous  system,  much  attention  should  be  given  to  the 
hypochondriac  region,  and  to  the  middle  dorsal  region  of  the  spine, 
between  its  thoracic  and  abdominal  portions,  about  the  junction  of 
the  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  dorsal  vertebrae,  a  region  of  the  spine 
often  found  sensitive  and  irritable,  sympathizing  as  it  does  with  the 
space  that  embraces  the  heart  and  solar  plexus,  and  thus  represent- 
ing a  large  amount  of  sensibility.  Dispersive  passes  or  dry  cupping 
at  this  point  will  often  have  an  important  effect,  especially  on  neu- 
ralgias. 

The  fourth  and  fifth  dorsal  nerves  supply  each  a  branch  to  the 
mammae  and  a  posterior  branch  which,  crossing  the  latissimus  dorsi, 
is  distributed  to  the  skin  over  the  scapula.  Thus  the  regions  of 
Health  and  Love,  which  are  correlative,  are  dependent  on  the  same 
spinal  nerves.  Reciprocating  currents  through  Health  and  Love  are 
of  unsurpassed  value  in  the  promotion  of  Health. 


432  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    KULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

Dry  cupping  on  the  spine  at  the  origin  of  the  nerves  of  a  morbid 
part  is  generally  beneficial,  For  the  arms  this  would  be  at  the  lower 
cervical  and  upper  dorsal  vertebras.  From  the  latter  proceed  not 
the  muscular  but  the  vaso-motor  nerves  of  the  arms. 

In  the  treatment  of  the  head  it  will  be  important  to  notice  the 
locations  of  spots  of  tenderness  or  other  peculiar  sensations  which 
may  indicate  a  morbid  condition  in  the  brain  beneath.  The  veins  of 
the  brain  and  the  scalp  have  a  communication  by  anastomosis  in  the 
diploe  between  the  outer  and  inner  tables  of  the  skull.  I  believe 
the  conditions  of  the  brain  are  also  often  indicated  by  the  appear- 
ance of  the  surface  of  the  face  and  neck.  Flushed  or  pale  condi- 
tions and  appearance  of  slight  tumors  generally  correspond  with 
some  condition  of  the  subjacent  brain. 

Ganglionic  Nerves.  In  the  manual  and  electric  treatment  of  the 
spinal  column  I  believe  that  the  effects  are  largely  produced  through 
the  adjacent  sympathetic  ganglia,  which  control  the  entire  circula- 
tion of  the  viscera,  and  thus  accelerate,  retard  or  modify  their  action. 
All  morbid  states  of  the  viscera  must  therefore  be  accompanied  by 
corresponding  morbidity  in  the  ganglionic  nerves.  That  they  do 
change  in  visceral  diseases,  losing  their  pearly  appearance  and 
assuming  the  inflammatory  condition  like  that  of  the  diseased  organs, 
was  shown  by  the  dissections  of  the  anatomist,  Joseph  Swan,  who 
found  these  ganglia  natural  in  one  who  was  suddenly  put  to  death 
without  disease,  but  much  inflamed  in  cases  of  disease.  In  a  case 
of  tetanus  nearly  all  the  ganglia  were  inflamed,  and  in  a  rabbit 
destroyed  by  nux  vomica  all  the  ganglia  of  the  sympathetic  nerves 
displayed  considerable  redness. 

As  the  ganglionic  nerves  are  more  nearly  vertical  in  their  course 
than  the  spinal  they  produce  their  effect  generally  lower,  and  the  in- 
fluences upon  the  viscera  may  be  traced  up  to  higher  portions  of  the 
ganglionic  system. 

Anatomical  Suggestions.  As  anatomical  works  do  not  always 
present  clearly  the  local  relations  of  organs  to  each  other,  I  would 
offer  a  few  suggestions  to  assist  the  reader,  in  reference  to  the 
thorax. 

The  sternum  is  the  most  convenient  landmark  for  reference. 
The  lower  extremity  of  the  sternum  reaches  nearly  to  the  lower 
border  of  the  right  lung  and  lower  edge  of  the  heart.  From  the 
level  of  the  extremity  of  the  sternum  a  depression  runs  across  the 
sixth  and  seventh  ribs,  which  corresponds  nearly  to  the  lower  border 
of  the  lungs.  The  cartilage  of  the  left  fourth  rib  corresponds  to  the 
upper  portion  of  the  uncovered  heart  above  which  the  lung  comes  to 
the  wall  of  the  chest. 


CHAP.  XX.]         FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  433 

Above  the  lower  end  of  the  sternum  the  heart  extends  on  the  left ; 
below,  the  liver  extends  on  the  right.  The  stomach  is  found  two  or 
three  inches  below  the  sternum,  and  its  entrance  or  cardiac  orifice 
extends  to  the  left.  The  cartilages  of  the  sixth,  seventh  and  eighth 
ribs  in  front  correspond  with  the  level  of  the  liver  and  stomach. 

The  right  and  left  lungs  unite  under  the  upper  part  of  the  ster- 
num, which  is  usually  more  prominent  than  the  ribs,  but  may  be 
flattened  if  the  lungs  at  this  spot  are  not  much  developed. 

The  right  ventricle  corresponds  immediately  with  the  lower  half 
of  the  sternum  and  cartilages  of  the  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  ribs 
of  the  left  side.  The  right  auricle  extends  a  trifle  to  the  right  of 
the  sternum.  The  left  ventricle  is  lower  than  the  right,  corre- 
sponding to  the  fourth  and  fifth  ribs.  It  is  covered  by  the  lung  more 
than  the  right  ventricle,  which  is  mainly  uncovered. 

The  aorta  rises  opposite  the  junction  of  the  cartilage  of  the  fourth 
rib  and  sternum  on  the  level  of  the  sixth  vertebra,  lying  behind  the 
sternum  and  a  portion  of  the  lung.  It  leans  slightly  to  the  left,  and 
arches  to  turn  down  at  the  level  of  the  second  costal  cartilage  and 
fourth  dorsal  vertebra.  The  pulmonary  artery  passes  under  the 
aorta,  conveying  the  blood  to  the  right  and  left  lungs.  The  vena  cava 
lies  to  the  right  of  the  aorta. 

The  trachea  lies  in  front  of  the  right  half  of  the  spinal  column 
and  the  aorta  of  the  left  half.  The  trachea  bifurcates  on  the  level 
of  the  fifth  dorsal  vertebra,  and  the  large  vessels  rise  from  the  aorta 
about  an  inch  higher.  The  left  ventricle  extends  to  the  diaphragm. 
As  the  ribs  in  front  fall  below  their  spinal  attachments,  we  shall  find 
that  the  heart,  corresponding  in  front  with  the  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth 
ribs,  corresponds  posteriorly  with  the  space  from  the  sixth  to  the 
tenth  vertebra.  The  whole  space  from  the  fourth  to  the  tenth 
vertebra  is  opposite  the  heart  and  aorta.  Examining  on  these  localities 
we  recognize  the  hypertrophied  heart  by  its  thumping  violence  of 
action,  while  the  feeble,  dilated  heart  is  recognized  by  a  weak  impulse 
but  a  greatly  increased  amount  of  sound,  which  may  sometimes  be 
heard  all  over  the  chest.  We  find  an  equally  important  indication  in 
the  jugular  vein, — a  gentle  murmur  which  we  can  interrupt  by  com- 
pressing the  vein  with  the  finger.  When  we  hear  this  sound  we 
know  that  the  blood  is  impaired,  that  it  has  lost  an  important  portion 
of  the  red  corpuscles  which  are  essential  to  health,  and  needs  to  be 
restored  to  a  better  condition  to  produce  substantial  health.  Im- 
paired blood  opens  the  door  to  all  diseases. 

For  disease  of  the  valves  of  the  heart  we  examine  between  the 
third  and  fourth  ribs  for  the  condition  of  the  semilunar  valves,  at  the 
entrance  to  the  aorta.     Morbid  growth  there  may  produce  a  blowing 


434  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

sound  at  the  systole  of  the  ventricles,  and  interfere  with  the  sharp 
click  of  the  valves,  which  follows  the  systole. 

The  tricuspid  and  bicuspid  valves  between  the  auricles  and  ven- 
tricles give  their  morbid  sounds  at  the  base  of  the  fourth  rib  just 
left  of  the  sternum.  When  through  disease  they  do  not  close  firmly, 
there  will  be  a  regurgitant  murmur  at  the  systole  of  the  ventricles 
from  the  blood  being  forced  back  into  the  auricles.  These  valves 
are  near  together,  the  tricuspid  of  the  right  ventricle  being  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  lower  than  the  bicuspid  or  mitral  valve  of  the  left  ven- 
tricle, and  under  the  sternum. 

The  various  forms  produced  by  disease  of  the  valves  produce 
many  varieties  of  sound,  which  are  minutely  described  by  pathologists. 
Obstruction  or  disease  of  the  valves  tends  to  produce  hypertrophy  of 
the  ventricles  to  overcome  it,  and  thus  increase  the  sound.  This  may 
just  balance  the  valvular  difficulty.  Sounds  which  are  scarcely 
perceptible  when  the  patient  is  quiet  become  conspicuous  from 
exertion  or  excitement. 

Obstructions  in  the  aorta  produce  hypertrophy  of  the  left  ven- 
tricle, as  obstructions  in  the  lungs  produce  dilatation  or  hypertrophy 
of  the  right  ventricle.  Hypertrophy  of  the  left  ventricle  is  injurious 
to  the  brain  by  the  violence  of  its  action.  Dilatation  of  the  right 
ventricle  is  a  condition  producing  great  debility,  and  dropsical  ten- 
dencies. 

The  most  important  suggestion,  however,  from  this  anatomical 
description  is  the  indication  of  impaired  vitality  from  impoverished 
blood  —  an  indication  unknown  until  the  time  of  Andral  and  too 
much  neglected  since — an  indication  which  would  have  warned 
against  bleeding  and  other  debilitating  treatment.  I  have  mentioned 
the  steady  murmur  of  the  internal  jugular  vein  which  we  may  hear 
near  the  trachea.  There  is  another  significant  sound  —  bruit  de  souffle 
or  bellows  sound  —  heard  along  the  space  between  the  junctions  of  the 
second  and  third  ribs  with  the  sternum.  This  bellows  sound  coin- 
cides with  the  systole  of  the  heart  and  is  heard  nowhere  else.  It  is 
the  infallible  sign  of  impaired  blood  and  demands  restorative  nourish- 
ing management,  for  while  this  condition  exists  there  is  a  continual 
tendency  to  nervous  disorders  and  impaired  health  which  may  end  in 
consumption.  Phosphate  of  iron,  fluid  extracts  of  white  and  red 
clover  blossoms,  buckeye,  triosteum,  saw  palmetto,  phosphates,  hypo- 
phosphites  and  various  tonics  may  be  beneficially  used. 

For  the  diseased  conditions  of  the  heart,  convallaria  (lily  of  the 
valley),  cereus  and  evening  primrose  are  the  most  valuable  reme- 
dies.     Digitalis  is  becoming  obsolete. 


THORAX   AND    HEART. 

The  engraving  shows  the  positions 
perhaps  a  trifle  too  high.  It  shows  the 
position  of  the  heart  (cor.)  — the  right 
auricle  (auric,  dext.) — above  which  is 
the  Aorta  —  to  the  right  is  the  left  auri- 
cle (aur.  sin.) — between  them  the  pul- 
monary artery  (A.  pulm.).  The  large  in- 
nominate veins  are  located  above,  V. 
I  anon.  sin.  and  V.  anon,  dext.,  covered  by 
the  clavicle  (clavicula),  which  also  cov- 
ers the  subclavian  artery  (A.  subclav.) 
and  subclavian  vein  ( V.  subclav.). 
Above  is  seen  the  common  carotid  artery 
(A.  carol,  comm.)  and  jugular  vein  (  V. 
jugul.).  The  Trachea  is  seen  in  the  mid- 
dle. The  right  lung  (Pulm.  dext.)  is 
seen  on  one  side,  and  the  left  (Pulm. 
sin.)  on  the  other.     The  outline  of  the 


LPcsftLMONARYVj 

Left  Auricle 

O.CofcONARYV- 

End  ofLAuricle 


L. Ventricle. 


Diaphragm 
^R  •  P©s.  Pulmonary  Ve  i  n 


a^cendinq 
Vena  Cava 


R.  Auricle 
BloodVessels 


R,Vec(tricle 


is  shown,  and  the  posi- 
tion of  the  liver  (Hepar) 
and  stomach  ( Ventricu- 
lus).  The  superior  vena 
cava  ( V.  cava  super.)  is 
shown,  entering  the  right 
auricle.  Reference  is  also 
made  to  the  anterior  medi- 
astinum (mediast.  ant.), 
in  which  the  folds  of  the 
pleura  meet  on  the  medi- 
an line. 

The  second  figure  gives  a 
posterior  view  of  the  heart 
in  a  vertical  position,  the 
left  ventricle  being  most 
conspicuous.  We  see  the 
ascending  vena  cava  con- 
necting with  the  right  au- 
ricle, while  the  left  auricle 
receives  the  right  and  left 
posterior  pulmonaryveins. 
The  great  coronary  vein 
and  other  bloodvessels  of 
the  heart  are  shown. 

The  third  figure  is  an 
anterior  view  of  the  heart 
raised  to  a  vertical  posi- 
tion, in  which  the  right 
ventricle  and  auricle 
appear  most  conspicuous. 
It  receives  the  descending 
vena  cava  and  sends  out 
pulmonary  arteries,  as  the 
eft  ventricle  sends  out  the  aorta,  subclavian  and  carotid  arteries,  and  arteria  innom- 
inata,  which  should  be  called  the  brachio-cephalic\  as  it  divides  and  supplies  the 
arm  and  head  on  the  right  side.  On  the  right  side  more  circulation,  comparatively, 
goes  to  the  muscles,  and  on  the  left  side  to  the  brain  —  the  left  brain  being  generally 
stronger  than  the  right.  r    ; :  .        • ; .         <  .  -;■  (Opp.  p-  434-) 


^VENTRICLE." 


pulmonary  art. 
•Auricle 
Rjlmonary  Artery 

Cardiac  Blood 
Vessels 


L. Ventricle 


.      TRIANSUUftRIS       S7tK 

Jut  aril  til Hun:  miry   Wssels 


tijtFhrinie  Kerra 


PI  turn  tiutmtmaUt 
ft  caret    CoAdliS 


■  _,    ,..  \  Surrtpathetio  Xrrve 

Nrtl.*tte,u:m    \     J    f 

I  V/mrucie  Ziucir 


The  horizontal  section  through  the  fifth  dorsal  vertebra  is  intro- 
duced to  show  that  on  this  level  we  find  the  pulmonary  artery  coming 
out  of  the  right  heart  and  the  venous  blood  returning  to  it  by  the 
superior  vena  cava  from  the  head  —  the  aorta  coming  out  from  the 
left  ventricle  of  the  heart,  behind  the  pulmonary  artery  —  the  right 
and  left  bronchi  passing  into  the  lungs  —  the  oesophagus,  which  carries 
down  the  food,  and  the  thoracic  duct,  which  brings  up  nourishment, 
adjacent  to  the  spinal  column  —  the  descending  aorta,  also  adjacent 
to  the  spine,  which  supplies  the  lower  part  of  the  body —  and  the  vena 
azygos,  which  goes  to  the  superior  vena  cava.     The  left  sympathetic 
and  left  phrenic  nerve  are  shown,  and  the  right  pneumogastric.     The 
phrenic  nerves,  which  pass  down  on  each  side  of  the  heart,  are  so 
closely  associated  with  the  pneumogastric  in  the  neck,  that  there  is 
danger  of  disturbing  the  heart  by  the  pneumogastric,  if  we  attempt 
to  act  on  the  diaphragm  by  exciting  the  phrenic  in  the  neck.     The 
pleura,  which  makes  a  double  investment  around  the  lungs,  with  an 
intervening    cavity  —  the  pericardium    around    the  heart  —  and  the 
middle  position  of  the  mediastinum  membrane  are  shown. 

(Opp.  p.  435-) 


CHAP.  XX.]         FOR  THERAPEUTIC  TREATMENT.  435 

RELATION  OF  THE  LIMBS  TO  THE  TRUNK. 

This  subject  has  been  neglected  in  the  previous  chapters.  But  it 
is  an  important  philosophic  discovery  which  it  is  necessary  the  reader 
should  understand. 

The  natural  position  of  the  arms  gives  us  a  hint  of  the  relations 
of  the  limbs  to  the  trunk,  but  such  hints  might  not  for  a  hundred 
thousand  years  lead  to  the  discovery,  unless  the  inquirer  were  explor- 
ing in  the  spirit  of  philosophic  discovery,  which  has  ever  been  very 
rare.  It  was  developed  to  me  by  the  study  of  the  functions  which 
Sarcognomic  experiments  reveal.  I  observed  in  my  personal  expe- 
rience the  sympathy  between  the  forearm  and  the  digestive  organs, 
especially  in  reference  to  assimilative  absorption,  which  the  warmth 
of  the  forearm  promotes.  I  observed  also  the  tendency  of  chilling 
the  forearms  by  cold  water  to  promote  the  access  of  a  chill.  Others 
had  observed  that  a  current  of  cold  water  on  the  wrists  had  a  remark- 
ably cooling  effect  on  the  whole  system,  but  this  method  has  not 
been  used  by  physicians  to  subdue  fever.  The  initial  treatment  of 
fever  by  bathing  the  lower  extremities  has  been  a  very  successful 
method,  though  not  appreciated  by  the  medical  profession. 

My  attention  being  thus  called  to  the  relation  of  the  trunk  and 
limbs  —  their  correlative  relation  was  easily  made  out.  Starting  with 
the  already  familiar  proposition  that  the  upper  and  lower  limbs  were 
absolutely  parallel  and  analogous  in  function,  though  in  a  higher  and 
lower  sphere,  the  ascertained  parallelism  of  the  arm  with  the 
trunk  in  a  correlative  way  involved  a  similar  parallelism  of  the  lower 
limbs  which  it  was  necessary  to  demonstrate. 

The  arm  to  the  elbow,  according  to  Sarcognomy,  corresponds  to 
the  brain  from  Dignity  and  Ambition,  inclusive,  to  the  lower  level  of 
Arrogance,  including  the  extension  of  the  same  within  the  median 
line.  This  occipital  tract  is  correlative  with  the  Modest,  Ideal  and 
Reverential  range  in  the  temples,  from  the  temporal  arch  to  the 
cheekbone,  which  is  a  pulmonic  or  thoracic  region.  The  arm  below 
the  elbow  corresponds  with  an  occipital  region,  running  in  on  the 
median  line,  which  is  correlative  with  the  digestive  tract  at  the  basis 
of  the  terrrporo-sphenoidal  lobe  (marked  on  the  jaws).  The  practical 
demonstration  of  this  pathognomy  is  that  warmth  of  the  forearm 
promotes  digestion  and  assimilation,  which  I  believe  are  hindered  by 
chilling  it,  and  that  temperature  responds  to  impressions  on  the 
wrists,  showing  that  they  sympathize  with  Calorification  on  the  lower 
bowels.  The  hands  also  have  a  close  sympathy  with  the  lower  pelvic 
region. 

The  therapeutic  inference  from  this  is  that  stimulant  applications 
on  the  humerus  (upper  arm)  will  greatly  invigorate  or  stimulate  the 


436  SYNOPSIS    OF    PRACTICAL    RULES  [CHAP.    XX. 

lungs,  tending  to  relieve  a  cold  or  congestion,  which  may  also  be  ac- 
complished pneumatically  or  by  electricity,  and  that  a  severe  chill  at 
the  humerus  will  be  dangerous  to  the  lungs,  —  a  warning  against  the 
exposure  of  the  arms.  Pneumatic  treatment  of  the  arms  should  there- 
fore be  considered  valuable  in  diseases  of  the  viscera.  Medicated 
plasters  for  the  arms  will  prove  efficient.  [At  a  meeting  of  the  New 
York  Clinical  Society,  May  25,  1883,  Dr.  E.  G.  Janeway  related  a 
case  of  cancer  of  the  stomach,  in  which  "  the  predominant  symp- 
toms were  neuralgic  pains  of  the  arms  and  legs."] 

In  reference  to  the  lower  limbs,  which  are  parallel  in  function  to 
the  upper,  nothing  can  be  more  decisive  than  the  act  of  running  or 
walking  up  several  flights  of  stairs.  This  exercise  of  the  thighs 
compels  the  most  violent  respiration.  Influences  below  the  knee 
are  responded  to  in  the  pelvic  and  abdominal  regions.  Foot  baths 
have  an  important  influence  on  the  menstrual  flux  and  a  foot  chill 
is  dangerous,  as  many  women  have  realized.  The  bowels  in  a  sensi- 
tive condition  are  promptly  affected  by  rising  from  the  bed  to  stand 
on  the  feet,  and  absolute  rest  of  the  lower  limbs  is  necessary  in 
abdominal  affections.  The  relief  of  a  case  of  peritonitis  (a  patient 
of  Mr.  C.)  by  cupping  on  the  leg  and  transferring  the  inflammation 
from  the  abdomen,  was  a  good  demonstration  of  this  relation  or 
sympathy. 

The  abdomen,  and  especially  its  lower  portion,  being  the  organic 
seat  of  fever,  treatment  on  the  leg  should  be  a  most  valuable 
febrifuge,  and  I  predict  that  the  pneumatic  boot  will  prove  one  of  our 
most  decisive  agents.  Experience  with  foot  and  leg  baths  in  fever 
proves  their  great  value. 

If  the  limbs  are  thus  parallel  with  the  trunk,  we  are  compelled  to 
ask  what  is  the  parallel  of  that  restless,  irritative  region  which  we 
find  at  the  knee  and  at  the  elbow  ?  We  find  this  on  the  side  of  the 
body  adjacent  to  the  elbow,  which  thus  completes  the  demonstration. 
This  is  the  region  of  Irritability,  on  which  the  application  of  stimu- 
lant electricity  proves  very  disagreeable,  so  much  as  to  have  attracted 
the  attention  of  Dr.  Beard  to  the  fact.  This  region  corresponds  with 
the  liver  and  the  diaphragm.  The  association  of  the  liver  with  the 
irritative  passions  is  well  known.  To  provoke  one's  anger  is  some- 
times expressed  as  stirring  up  his  bile.  The  exciting  influence  of 
this  region  over  the  whole  system  is  illustrated  by  the  action  of  the 
diaphragm,  which  produces  deep  respiration,  increasing  the  animal 
force.     It  is  kept  in  a  tense  condition  in  great  muscular  efforts. 

The  intense  and  passionate  restlessness  at  the  knee  is  the  outward 
expression  of  the  correlative  excitement  at  the  waist,  and  in  the 
basis  of  the  brain  just  over  the  ear,   which  is  responded   to  by  the 


CHAP.    XX.]  FOR    THERAPEUTIC    TREATMENT.  437 

turbulent  region  of  the  middle  of  the  neck  which  corresponds  to 
the  knee.  The  coincidence  of  these  two  regions  in  the  brain  proves 
a  similar  coincidence  in  the  body. 

The  great  vital  force  and  development  produced  by  the  upper  end 
of  the  thigh  corresponds  with  the  energetic  vitality  of  the  shoulder, 
where  Firmness  and  Health  make  a  strong  constitution,  and  the 
lively  Playfulness  at  the  lower  part  of  the  shoulder  blade  corresponds 
with  the  active  vivacity  of  broad  hips. 

The  lower  end  of  the  limbs  (feet  and  ankles),  in  their  total  unin- 
tellectuality  and  initial  animalism,  corresponds  with  the  base  of  the 
pelvis  which  tends  to  dementia,  and  a  little  higher  we  find  irrational 
animal  impulses  which  correspond  with  the  Insanity  of  the  pelvic 
region. 

The  relations  just  stated  show  how  important  to  the  lungs  is  the 
protection  of  the  lower  limbs.  Cold  applied  to  the  legs  and  feet 
tends  to  produce  a  hyperaemic  and  inflammatory  condition  of  the 
chest,  and  applied  to  the  thigh  it  aggravates  this  condition  by  paralyz- 
ing the  vital  force  of  the  chest. 

I  do  not  rely  upon  anatomy  for  the  demonstration  of  functions  and 
sympathies,  but  it  may  help  to  illustrate  the  relations  of  the  limbs 
and  trunk  to  refer  to  the  fact  said  to  have  been  demonstrated  by 
Claude  Bernard  that  the  vaso-motor  nerves  of  the  upper  limbs  arise 
from  the  dorsal  spinal  nerves,  from  the  third  to  the  seventh  pair, 
which  would  indicate  a  sympathy  of  the  arms  with  the  thorax  and 
upper  abdomen,  while  the  vaso-motor  nerves  of  the  lower  limbs 
come  from  the  lumbar  and  lower  dorsal  region,  which  would  give  the 
lower  limbs  more  sympathy  with  the  abdomen  generally  and  with  its 
respiratory  and  calorific  relations.  Certainly  they  are  more  effective 
in  developing  diaphragmatic  respiration  and  Calorification  than  the 
upper  limbs. 

The  practical  inference  to  which  this  leads  is  that  in  treating  the 
thoracic  region  we  may  associate  with  it  that  of  the  upper  arm  and 
thigh,  but  in  treating  the  abdominal  region  we  should  associate  the 
leg  and  forearm. 

That  the  analogy  of  the  upper  and  lower  limbs  may  produce  a 
sympathy  between  them  is  illustrated  by  a  remark  of  Dr.  Moritz 
Meyer,  in  his  work  on  electricity,  who  says  :  "  I  use  with  advantage 
this  method  of  irritation  in  apoplectic  paralysis  and  contractions  ; 
for  instance,  when  both  arm  and  leg  are  paralyzed,  the  former,  however, 
more  than  the  latter,  I  expect  simply  by  electrizing  the  muscles  of 
the  arm  that  the  paralyzed  muscles  of  the  leg  will  be  reached."  (P.  155.) 

An  important  practical  consequence  of  this  doctrine  of  the  limbs 
is  that  our  hygienic  authors  are  seriously  mistaken  in  their  views  of 


43$  RULES    FOR    THERAPEUTIC    TREATMENT.  [CHAP.    XX. 

pulmonic  development.  I  do  not  refer  to  the  common  error  of 
dwelling  entirely  upon  diaphragmatic  or  deep  breathing  to  the 
neglect  of  costal  or  upward  breathing,  but  the  common  error  of 
giving  nearly  all  the  attention  to  exercises  of  the  arms  for  chest 
development.  The  thighs  greatly  excel  the  arms  in  muscular 
development,  and  in  their  relation  to  vital  force.  Hence  exercise  of 
the  thighs  is  far  more  efficient  than  any  exercise  of  the  arms  in  com- 
pelling chest  expansion.  In  ascending  a  long  flight  of  stairs  we  are 
compelled  to  use  all  our  respiratory  power,  and  in  running  we  soon 
find  that  we  cannot  expand  the  lungs  sufficiently  to  sustain  our 
exertion.  Hence,  as  a  means  of  thoracic  development,  walking, 
running,  leaping  and  mountain  climbing  take  the  precedence  of  all 
other  exercises. 

The  great  vital  muscular  force  of  the  thigh  renders  injuries  of 
that  region  extremely  prostrating  and  dangerous.  Of  the  soldiers 
shot  through  the  knee  in  our  late  civil  war  few  if  any  recovered 
except  through  amputation. 

After  a  recent  fall  upon  the  knees,  I  found  the  vital  force  of  the 
entire  constitution  greatly  reduced. 


CHAPTER    XXI. 
ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

GENERAL    STATEMENT. 

Nine  methods  of  electrical  treatment:  galvanism,  primary,  secondary,  combined, 
static,  unilateral,  statico-chemical,  magnetic  and  electro-medical  —  Use  of  the 
commutator — Simple  stimulation  —  Rheostat — Use  of  the  alternating  current  and 
its  locations  —  Anterior  and  posterior,  superior  and  inferior  —  Method  of  using  the 
negative  pole — Method  of  manual  and  of  electro-medical  treatment  —  Nature  and 
use  of  the  positive  and  negative  in  electricity —  Static  electricity  and  magnetism. 


In  the  treatment  of  the  human  constitution  by  electricity  there  are 
the  following  nine  methods  :  — 

Chemical  electricity  generated  by  acids  and  metals. 

i.  Galvanism  produced  by  chemical  action  with  two  plates ;  one 
easily  corroded,  which  originates  the  current,  and  the  other,  more 
difficult  to  oxidate,  which  receives  the  current  from  the  first  and 
gives  it  off  by  a  wire  or  other  conductor  which  carries  it  back  (ex. 
teriorly  to  the  cell  or  the  battery  which  contains  the  acid)  to  the  first 
plate.  The  first  is  most  commonly  zinc  ;  the  second,  copper  or  carbon. 
The  wire  from  the  carbon  conveys  the  current  of  positive  electricity; 
the  wire  from  the  zinc  produces  a  negative  condition  or  current. 
The  half  of  the  wire  next  the  carbon  is  in  a  positive  condition,  the 
half  next  the  zinc  is  negative,  and  midway  between  the  two  the  con- 
dition is  neutral.  The  galvanic  current  from  a  single  cell  being  very 
feeble,  from  five  to  fifty  cells  are  used  for  a  medical  current. 
Chemical  electricity  modified  by  a  current. 

2.  The  Primary  or  interrupted  galvano-magnetic  current  produced 
by  reinforcing  the  galvanic  current  with  the  magnetism  of  a  rod  of 
iron,  magnetized  by  the  current  conducted  in  a  spiral  coil  around  the 
rod  (which  is  called  a  helix)  and  rapidly  interrupted  by  breaking  the 
connection  so  as  to  produce  a  succession  of  fine  shocks  with  great 
rapidity.  The  interruption,  which  renders  the  current  very  forcible, 
is  produced  by  the  magnetized  iron  attracting  a  spring  out  of  its 
position  so  as  to  break  the  connection  and  interrupt  the  current.  A 
good  helix  increases  the  power  of  the  current,  so  that  a  single  cell 
will  give  all  the  electric  force  a  patient  would  endure. 

The  primary  or  galvano-magnetic  current  is  like  the  galvanic  or  one- 


44°  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XXI. 

way  current,  which,  applied  to  the  human  body,  propels  the  fluids  and 
nervous  forces  in  the  direction  in  which  it  moves  and  produces  some 
chemical  action. 

3.  The  Secondary  or  Faradic  current  (named  after  Faraday) 
which  is  produced  by  the  primary  (interrupted  galvano-magnetic)  act- 
ing upon  a  coil  of  wire  exterior  to  the  primary  coil  and  not  connected 
with  it.  An  electric  current  in  one  wire  produces  an  opposite  current 
in  a  neighboring  wire,  and  hence  a  current  in  the  interior  coil  from 
left  to  right  would  produce  a  current  in  the  exterior  coil  from  right 
to  left,  and  the  moment  this  primary  current  is  interrupted,  the  sec- 
ondary current  reverses  itself,  flowing  back  in  the  same  direction  as 
that  of  the  primary.  This  reversed  action  (coinciding  with  the  pri- 
mary) is  considered  the  stronger  action  of  the  two,  and  hence  is  called 
positive  ;  but,  as  the  secondary  is  a  two-way  current,  the  distinction  of 
its  poles  is  not  so  great  as  in  the  primary.  The  positive  and  negative 
of  the  primary  will  decompose  water  into  oxygen  and  hydrogen,  but 
the  double  action  of  the  secondary  prevents  this  chemical  action. 
The  secondary  current  may  be  used  as  stimulus  at  both  poles,  but  the 
primary  stimulates  at  the  negative  and  has  a  sedative  influence  at 
the  positive.  The  stimulus  is  due  to  the  attraction  or  propulsion  of 
blood  and  nervous  influence  toward  the  negative  electrode.  The 
sedative  influence  of  the  primary  is  due  to  its  dispersive  effects  and 
tonic  character,  by  which  it  relieves  inflammation  and  congestion. 

4.  The  Combined  primary  and  secondary  currents  are  stronger 
than  either  separately,  and  have  a  clear  distinction  of  positive  and 
negative  poles. 

5.  The  current  of  Static  or  frictional  electricity,  usually  produced 
from  glass  by  motion  or  friction  without  chemical  action,  has  a  power- 
fully diffusive  tendency,  from  its  expansive  self-repulsion,  and  hence 
forces  its  way  with  great  facility,  and  tends  to  play  upon  the  surface 
of  bodies  and  to  escape  where  it  can  find  a  conductor.  Hence  it  acts 
chiefly  upon  the  surface  of  the  human  body,  stimulates  the  skin,  and 
by  this  universal  action  stimulates  the  entire  brain  and  nervous 
system.  Passing  with  greater  facility,  it  does  not,  like  the  chemical 
electricity,  require  contact  of  the  electrodes  with  the  body,  and  the 
use  of  fluids  on  the  skin,  to  facilitate  conduction,  but  may  be  applied 
freely  through  the  clothing,  if  in  sufficient  force,  and  by  conductors 
or  electrodes,  several  inches  from  the  surface  of  the  body,  negative 
electrodes   drawing  a  current  from  the  body,  and  positive   electrodes 

giving  it  a  current. 

The  static  electricity  may  also  be  administered  by  accumulating 
enough  to  give  a  shock,  either  from  a  Leyden  jar  or  a  well-charged 
electrode.     Treatment  by  gentle  shocks  is  not  so  pleasant  or  effective 


CHAP.    XXI.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  441 

as  by  currents,  but  in  the  practice  of  Dr.  Gale  of  New  York  at  the 
close  of  the  last  century  it  was  used  with  signal  success,  because  he 
applied  it  skilfully  to  a  great  variety  of  diseases. 

The  diffusiveness  of  static  electricity  is  so  great  that  the  patient  is 
commonly  insulated  upon  a  platform  with  glass  legs  ;  but  insulation 
is  not  absolutely  necessary  if  we  have  a  good  machine.  A  piece  of 
rubber  cloth  to  insulate  the  feet  and  chair  of  the  patient  is  usually 
sufficient. 

6.  The  unilateral  method  has  been  neglected  by  therapeutists. 
This  method  places  the  patient  entirely  under  the  influence  of  positive 
or  of  negative  electricity.  With  the  static  machine  he  is  insulated  and 
fully  charged  with  a  positive  or  negative  condition,  so  that  sparks  will 
pass  between  the  patient  and  one  who  touches  him  —  a  method  which 
has  been  advocated  by  Dr.  Radclyffe  of  England.  A  full  charge  of 
positive  electricity  is  a  valuable  and  genial  stimulus. 

I  have  however  seen  no  mention  or  recommendation  of  the  unilat- 
eral method  in  the  application  of  chemical  electricity  by  the  galvanic 
and  the  primary  current.*  In  the  administration  of  such  currents,  as 
usually  given,  the  positive  influence  predominates  in  that  half  of  the 
current  which  is  next  the  positive  electrode,  and  the  negative  on  the 
side  of  the  negative  electrode.  Thus,  in  passing  through  the  hands, 
they  would  meet  at  the  spinal  column,  where  the  influence  would  be 
equipoised  or  neutral.  The  neutral  point  depends  on  the  facility  of 
conduction,  and  may  easily  be  arranged  so  as  to  leave  the  entire  course 
of  the  current  in  the  body  either  positive  or  negative.  If,  for  example, 
we  apply  the  negative  electrode  to  a  part  of  the  surface  where  the  skin 
is  absolutely  dry,  while  the  positive  side  has  a  good  conductor  and  a 
moist  surface,  the  negative  electricity  will  be  nearly  excluded  and  the 
positive  will  occupy  the  entire  route  between  the  electrodes.  Thus 
the  patient  may  be  placed  under  positive  or  negative  influence  by 
obstructing  the  access  of  one  of  the  currents.  If  sponges  are  used  as 
electrodes  it  will  be  sufficient  to  have  one  of  them  well  charged  with 
salt  water  and  the  other  barely  moist.  With  metal  electrodes  one 
maybe  covered  with  cloth  or  leather  almost  dry,  or  may  be  connected 
with  the  body  only  by  strips  of  wet  cloth  several  inches  long.     It 

*  Since  the  above  was  in  type  I  have  seen  a  book  by  a  Western  physician  con- 
taining many  good  suggestions,  and  recommending  strongly  the  use  of  the 
unilateral  currents,  but  not  proposing  a  proper  method.  His  suggestion  of  using  a 
longer  conducting  cord  for  the  current  to  be  partially  excluded  would  be  quite  in- 
effective, as  the  difference  of  conductivity  between  three  feet  and  six  feet  of  copper 
wire  could  not  be  appreciated.  A  copper  wire  (1-20  of  an  inch)  one  hundred  miles 
long  would  offer  less  resistance  than  that  offered  by  the  human  body  to  a  current 
from  the  right  hand  to  the  left.  An  iron  wire  of  the  same  diameter  would  offer 
about  five  times  the  resistance  of  the  copper,  hence  a  small  iron  wire  might  be  used 
efficiently.  The  resistance  is  easily  established  where  the  electrode  touches  the 
body  by  interposing  a  sponge  or  wet  cloth.  It  may  also  be  made  with  scientific 
accuracy  by  a  rheostat  of  water  or  German  silver. 


442  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XXI. 

should  be  remembered,  when  we  wish  to  send  in  any  influence  with 
the  positive  current,  whether  that  of  medicine  or  of  the  human  aura, 
it  must  have  free  access,  and  the  negative  current  should  be 
obstructed. 

j.  The  statico-chemical  combination.  The  static  current  is  unequalled 
in  pleasant  and  beneficial  effects,  but  has  not  the  penetrative  power 
and  chemical  energy  of  galvanic  and  primary  currents.  Hence  I 
recommend  what  authors  have  neglected  as  unknown,  the  combina- 
tion of  the  static  with  the  primary  and  galvanic  currents  —  their 
wires  being  brought  together  to  the  same  electrode.  The  combina- 
tion of  the  static  and  primary  may  be  recommended  when  we  wish  to 
make  a  strong  as  well  as  restorative  impression,  less  harsh  and  more 
beneficial  than  the  combination  of  primary  and  secondary.  This 
combination  may  also  be  used  in  the  unilateral  manner,  and  the  com- 
bination of  the  two  positive  electricities,  thus  applied,  is  a  powerful 
tonic. 

8.  The  magnetic  current  is  the  complement  of  the  static,  and  the 
combination  of  the  two  as  statico-magnetic  is  the  most  perfect  and 
hygienic  current  ever  discovered.  Its  discovery  and  demonstration 
in  1888-89,  should,  I  think,  make  a  new  era  in  electro-therapeutics. 
My  prior  discovery  of  the  modifying  power  of  medicines  upon  electric 
currents  necessarily  led  to  the  inference  that  a  current  through  a 
magnet  would  carry  a  magnetic  influence.  The  well-established 
value  of  the  magnet  as  a  local  application  for  disease  and  the  fact 
that  very  few  could  feel  any  decided  influence  from  the  contact  of 
the  magnet,  and  consequently  that  its  agency  was  rejected  by  the 
medical  profession,  made  it  very  necessary  that  its  magnetic  energy 
should  be  conveyed  by  the  electric  current. 

The  magnet  is  the  opposite  and  therefore  the  complement  of 
electricity.  Electricity  is  repulsive,  magnetism  is  attractive  ;  elec- 
tricity is  heating,  magnetism  is  cooling;  electricity  disorganizes  and 
decomposes,  magnetism  is  constructive,  reparative,  organizing. 
Static  electricity  goes  to  the  surface  and  seeks  to  escape,  magnetism 
reaches  the  interior  and  makes  a  less  evanescent  impression.  Thus, 
while  static  electricity  animates  the  nervous  energies,  magnetism  sus- 
tains their  organic  basis,  and  promotes  all  reparative  processes. 

Magnetism,  therefore,  has  a  wide  application  in  fever,  inflammation 
and  all  exhausted  conditions,  and  becomes  the  proper  companion  of 
electricity  in  all  its  four  forms  —  static,  galvanic,  primary  and 
secondary. 

Magnetism  has  two  conditions  —  analogous  to  the  positive  and 
negative.  The  magnetism  of  the  north  pole  resembles  slightly  the 
influence  of  positive  galvanism  and  imparts  an  infinitesimal  taste  of 


CHAP.    XXI.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  443 

acidity  to  water,  while  the  magnetism  of  the  south  pole  is  less  tonic 
and  imparts  the  alkaline  taste.  Hence,  in  treatment,  we  use  the  north 
pole  as  a  tonic  or  positive,  and  expect  a  more  gentle  influence  from 
the  south  —  a  distinction  readily  recognized  by  the  sensitive.  We 
shall  have  ample  illustration  of  the  therapeutic  effects  of  magnetism 
in  a  great  variety  of  diseases,  and  of  the  difference  of  the  two  poles, 
when  electro-therapeutists  shall  have  adopted  this  improvement  ;  and 
I  would  be  grateful  to  those  who  first  engage  in  this  practice  if  they 
would  send  me  the  record  of  their  experience  in  the  combination  of 
magnetism  with  static,  primary,  secondary  and  galvanic  currents  and 
medical  potencies. 

9.  The  electro-medical  current.  For  many  years  (over  45)  I  have 
been  familiar  with  the  fact  that  medical  potencies  proceed  diffusively 
from  medicines,  without  their  being  received  into  the  body,  and  with- 
out their  being  even  in  contact  with  the  surface.  I  have  also  for 
many  years  known  that  an  electric  current  through  the  medicine 
would  carry  its  influence  into  the  constitution  and  even  into  that  of 
another  person  through  whom  the  current  was  made  to  pass.  Thus, 
in  a  group  of  ten  or  a  dozen  persons  who  joined  hands,  the  medicine 
through  which  a  positive  current  was  passed  at  one  end  of  the  group 
would  be  recognized  by  the  whole  group  though  which  the  current 
passed,  with  different  degrees  of  distinctness  according  to  their  im- 
pressibility. Some  would  be  incapable  of  feeling  such  currents  as  I 
used,  but  it  was  very  seldom  that  any  of  my  students  would  fail  to 
recognize  and  feel  them  distinctly,  so  as  to  be  able  to  state  their 
character.  Insensibility  does  not  prove  the  absence  of  influence,  as 
most  persons  are  unconscious  of  the  operation  of  medicines  of  which 
they  have  swallowed  a  moderate  dose. 

The  medical  profession  has  believed  that  medical  effects  could  be 
produced  only  when  the  substance  of  the  medicine  was  carried  into 
the  body  by  the  current,  and  the  possibility  of  this  was  long  denied. 
The  possibility  of  carrying  in  the  potency  of  a  medicine  without 
any  of  its  substance  by  a  current  which  traverses  metallic  con- 
ductors before  entering  the  body  would  be  universally  and  perhaps 
scornfully  denied  in  medical  colleges,*  though  I  have  for  some  years 
been  demonstrating  its  practicability  in  my  courses  of  lectures,  and 
sensitive  individuals  have  often  detected  the  character  and  given  the 
name  of  the  medicine  affecting  the  current,  when  it  was  one  with  the 
effect  of  which  they  were  familiar. 

The  reader  will  recognize  the  great  advantage  of  thus  saving  the 
stomach  from  medical  annoyance,  applying  the  remedy  just  where  it 

*A  patent-office  examiner  refused  to  entertain  an  application  for  a  patent  em- 
bodying this  principle,  because  he  considered  it  a  self-evident  impossibility. 


444  ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XXI. 

is  needed  and  discontinuing  the  impression  promptly  when  de- 
sired. 

In  treatment  by  electricity  we  need  to  acquire  a  clear  idea  of  the 
effects  of  positive  and  negative  conditions,  on  the  human  body,  and 
the  effects  of  the  electric  currents. 

Heretofore  positive  and  negative  conditions  have  been  studied  as 
local  influences,  with  little  thought  of  the  separate  pervading  in- 
fluence of  each  throughout  the  body. 

Nor  has  there  been  any  thorough  knowledge  of  the  effects  of 
electric  currents  on  the  body  and  mind,  for  which  we  are  indebted  to 
Sarcognomy.  Every  current  goes  from  one  locality  to  another ; 
hence,  as  a  general  rule,  it  diminishes  the  activity  and  influence  of 
the  part  at  which  it  enters  (the  anode)  and  increases  the  influence 
and  activity  of  the  part  to  which  it  goes,  (the  cathode)  unless  the 
cathode  be  too  far  from  the  neutral  point  between  the  poles. 

If  it  traverses  in  both  directions  alternately,  it  becomes  a  stimu- 
lus at  each  extremity,  as  when  the  current  is  reversed  by  commuta- 
tion. We  approximate  this  condition  of  reciprocal  stimulus  in  using 
the  Faradic  or  secondary  current.  In  the  common  battery  there  is 
no  arrangement  to  produce  a  reciprocal  current,  and  hence  the  com- 
mutator would  require  an  additional  operator,  while  the  electrician 
is  applying  the  electrodes.  To  overcome  this  difficulty  I  have  in- 
vented a  commutating  electrode,  by  means  of  which  the  operator  in 
handling:  the  electrodes  can  reverse  the  current  as  often  as  he  wishes. 
This  reversal  not  only  renders  the  current  a  stimulus  at  each  end, 
but  increases  its  effect  beyond  that  of  mere  interruption,  by  the 
extreme  variation  between  plus  and  minus  conditions,  —  the  effect 
of  electricity  being  proportional  to  the  amount  and  frequency  of  the 
changes.  A  smooth-flowing  current  is  unnoticed,  an  interrupted  one 
is  vividly  felt,  and  a  commuted  one  makes  a  still  stronger  impression. 

Simple  Stimulation.  —  The  simplest  form  of  treatment  is  by 
equilateral  stimulation  with  commuted  or  with  secondary  currents. 
The  secondary  currents  may  also  be  commuted  so  as  to  make  them 
perfectly  equilateral.  In  this  method  of  treatment,  we  apply  the 
electrodes  on  the  corresponding  spots  on  two  sides  of  the  body,  to 
stimulate  the  right  and  left  organs  of  any  function,  or  we  may  apply 
on  one  organ  on  one  side,  and  on  another  on  the  opposite  side,  if  we 
wish  to  stimulate  two  at  once  (such  as  Health  and  Vital  Force), 
changing  each  electrode  soon  to  the  opposite  side,  to  equalize  the 
effects.  With  bifurcated  electrodes  we  may  treat  both  sides  equally 
at  once. 

The  result,  simple  stimulation,  may  be  thus  attained  when  we 
have  free  access    to  the  person,  by  shifting  (alternating)    the  elec- 


CHAP.    XXI. J  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  445 

trodes,  but  it  is  not  convenient  to  do  this  with  the  frequency  required 
in  such  alternation  ;  and  as  in  the  great  majority  of  cases  it  is  not 
desirable  to  give  the  negative  influence  as  much  scope  in  the  body  as 
the  positive,  the  preferable  method  is  to  use  the  commutating  elec- 
trode, and  to  limit  the  accessibility  of  the  negative  influence,  which 
may  be  done  by  using  a  copper  wire  for  the  positive  current  and  a 
smaller  iron  or  steel  wire  for  the  negative,  in  connection  with  the 
helix.  By  this  method  we  insure  the  predominance  of  the  positive 
current  in  the  body,  and  without  excluding  the  negative  we  reduce 
its  influence  on  the  patient  as  low  as  we  may  desire  by  the  length 
and  fineness  of  the  iron  wire. 

In  those  cases  in  which,  from  the  torpor,  inactivity  and  lack  of  cir- 
culation in  any  organ,  the  negative  influence  is  more  desirable  to 
secure  the  afflux  of  increased  circulation  by  relaxing  the  blood- 
vessels, we  may  use  two  equal  copper  wires  for  the  positive  and 
negative,  but  in  all  other  cases  an  iron  wire  of  small  dimensions  for 
the  negative  will  be  preferable,  and  will  be  a  more  exact  method  than 
relying  upon  sponges  or  any  other  indefinite  mode  of  obstruction. 
Another  method,  better  and  more  exact,  and  almost  equally  simple,  is 
to  use  a  water  rheostat  for  negative  obstruction,  by  inserting  sharp 
pointed   wires   through  the   corks  of  a  small  glass  tube,  containing 

conductivity.     As   the  wires  J  [~" "====rz^-J_[| 

are  inserted  farther  or  with-  ^  B-=^=— -      ~= B 

drawn  in  this  simple  rheostat,  :-    B  =~:       IS^P 

the  conductivity  is  increased  or  diminished,  so  as  to  give  us  a  definite 

idea  of  its  amount. 

The  rheostat  is  especially  necessary  in  using  my  medical  electrode, 
to  overbalance  its  resistance  to  the  current  and  insure  the  entrance 
and  diffusion  of  the  positive  medicated  current,  without  yielding 
much  space  to  the  negative  influence. 

I  do  not  propose  to  exclude  negative  influences  entirely,  for  each 
influence  has  its  merit  and  these  merits  may  be  combined  by  alterna- 
tion in  such  proportions  as  each  case  seems  to  require.  The  negative 
condition  by  relaxing  the  vaso-motor  nerves  promotes  an  afflux  of 
blood,  and  by  attracting  the  positive  promotes  the  afnux  of  both 
blood  and  nervous  influence.  At  the  same  time  the  positive  condi- 
tion, while  moderating  this  influx,  imparts  a  wholesome  tonicity  to  the 
organs.  This  combined  and  equal  influence  is  similar  to  the  normal 
condition  of  organs  under  gentle  stimulation.  But  some  organs 
require  more  of  the  negative  influence  to  rouse  their  stagnant  vitality, 
and  others  require  more  of  the  positive  to  overcome  their  relaxed 
condition,  and  the  vaso-motor  debility,  so  as  to  relieve  congestion, 
which  must  be  ascertained  by  careful  diagnosis. 


44-6  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XXI. 

Hence  the  primary  current  may  fill  a  large  space  in  our  practice 
by  giving  equilateral  currents  on  the  right  and  left  sides,  or  by  stim- 
ulating two  different  organs  at  once  on  the  same  side,  or  by  treating 
two  opposite  antagonistic  organs  with  the  positive  and  the  negative 
condition  so  as  to  secure  the  predominance  of  either.  When 
this  is  done,  the  negative  electrode  in  the  great  majority  of  cases 
will  be  applied  on  the  posterior  and  superior  surfaces,  and  the  posi- 
tive on  the  anterior  inferior,  as  when  we  make  a  current  from 
Disease  to  Health,  or  from  Melancholy  to  Cheerfulness,  taking  care 
in  all  cases  that  the  access  of  the  negative  is  obstructed. 

The  alternating  or  commuted  current  may  be  thus  beneficially 
applied  between  the  anterior  organs  and  their  posterior  spinal 
sources  of  power.  As  it  is  not  beneficial  to  stimulate  any  anterior 
function  greatly  without  its  posterior  support,  the  alternating 
current  or  the  secondary  current  will  be  required  in  many  cases,  as 
when  we  stimulate  any  of  the  viscera  of  the  trunk  by  alternating 
currents  between  the  spine  and  a  proper  anterior  location  for  each  of 
the  viscera. 

Thus  for  the  abdominal  functions  we  may  cover  the  lower  half  of 
the  dorsal  region  with  a  broad  electrode  (or  moist  sponge)  and  place 
the  other  on  the  gastro-enteric  or  abdominal  tract  (Abdo.),  anywhere 
from  the  gastric  location  marked  as  Alimentiveness  (Al.)  to  that  of 
Defecation  (De.). 

Immediately  above  the  gastric  location  (corresponding  to  Alimen- 
tiveness) is  the  Hepatic  location  (H.)  corresponding 
to  the  liver.  These  locations  the  reader  will  observe 
are  nearer  the  side  than  the  front.  I  do  not  recom- 
mend operations  on  the  extreme  frontal  organs  of 
either  body  or  brain,  which  would  concentrate  excite- 
ment upon  them ;  for  the  tendency  of  the  frontal 
organs  is  to  sensibility,  impressibility  and  exhaustion, 
while  the  lateral  organs  are  exciting  or  stimulating, 
and  produce  generally  only  the  moderate  exhaustion 
of  fatigue.  The  excitability  of  the  heart  is  stimulated 
just  above  the  hepatic  location  (Ca.),  and  as  we  go 
back  along  the  ribs  excitement  is  gradually  modified 
into  power,  with  less  of  excitability.  Thus  we  find  just 
behind  the  arms,  below  the  middle  of  the  humerus, 
the  region  of  Force,  which  gives  tonic  strength  to  the 
*  heart  and  the  whole  constitution. 

Above  the  cardiac  region  we  find  along  the  ribs,  just  in  front  of 
the  arm,  the  pulmonic  region  of  Inspiration  (P.)>  which  gives  activ- 
ity to  the  lungs  in  costal  respiration. 


CHAP.    XXI.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  447 

Above  Inspiration  the  influence  is  cephalic  (Ce.),  giving  activity 
to  the  brain,  while  at  the  summit  of  the  back  it  gives  power  as  well 
as  activity.  Passing  back  under  the  arms,  we  find  mental  strength 
as  well  as  activity  in  the  region  of  Sanity  (S.).  Thus  from  the 
summit  of  the  chest  to  near  the  base  of  the  abdomen,  near  the  lateral 
surfaces,  we  have  the  tract  of  visceral  excitement  and  activity,  along 
which  one  of  the  electrodes  should  play  while  the  other  is  on  the 
spinal  column  or  near  it,  with  an  obstructed  negative  influence. 

This  tract  of  excitement  is  a  little  anterior  to  the  median  line  on 
the  side  of  the  body.  If  we  should  take  a  similar  or  parallel  column 
on  the  back  behind  the  arm,  from  the  shoulders  to  the  hips,  half 
way  between  the  column  of  active  excitement  just  described  and  the 
spinal  column  or  seat  of  power,  we  would  find  it  a  region  of  active, 
sustained  energy.  Thus  we  find  all  the  tonic  influences  on  the  back; 
and  advancing  to  the  front  we  find  excitement,  delicacy  and  exhaus- 
tion. Hence  our  electric  currents  should  advance  with  positive  force 
to  the  back,  meeting  the  negative  condition  near  the  posterior  sur- 
face, unless  in  cases  of  torpor  in  the  posterior  region  we  make  the 
neutral  meeting  point  an  inch  or  more  anterior  to  the  spine,  or  even 
midway  between  the  two  electrodes,  to  secure  a  negative  influence  at 
the  spine.  Beyond  this  I  would  not  go  in  any  case,  as  the  complete 
predominance  of  the  negative  would  be  quite  objectionable. 

The  tonic  influences  of  the  back  may  be  developed  by  alternating 
currents  on  the  same  level  of  the  back,  or  between  higher  and  lower 
locations,  as  the  case  requires.  The  reader  will  of  course  bear  in 
mind  that,  in  these  cross  currents  on  the  back,  less  electric  energy  is 
required  as  the  electrodes  approach  each  other,  and  the  more  as  they 
are  farther  apart.  The  very  normal  activity  on  the  level  of  the 
shoulders  gives  a  harmonious  combination  of  the  brain  and  the 
muscular  system,  but  as  we  descend,  there  is  less  of  the  brain  and 
more  of  the  muscular  force,  tending  to  exhaust  the  nervous  system 
if  prolonged. 

The  pathognomic  laws  of  life  not  only  give  the  superior  vital  char- 
acter to  that  which  is  posterior  over  the  anterior  and  that  which  is 
superior  over  the  inferior,  but  give  a  higher  vital  character  to  muscles 
which  act  in  such  directions.  Thus  it  was  shown  by  the  careful 
experiments  of  Onimus  on  the  muscles  after  decapitation  of  animals 
that  the  first  muscles  to  lose  their  contractility  are  the  diaphragm 
which  acts  downwards  and  the  tongue  which  acts  forwards.  The 
extensor  muscles,  which  throw  the  limbs  outward  and  downward, 
lose  their  contractility  an  hour  sooner  than  the  flexor  muscles, 
which  draw  upward  and  backward.  The  muscles  of  the  trunk  retain 
contractility  five  or  six  hours,  and  the  abdominal  muscles,  which  act 


44-8  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


[CHAP.    XXI. 


backward  and  upward,  retain  their  contractility  longer  than  any 
others,  —  more  than  six  hours  after  death.  The  same  principles  are 
illustrated  in  paralysis,  the  extensors  suffering  sooner  and  more 
severely  than  the  flexors,  and  the  abdominal  muscles  being  the  last 
to  suffer. 

The  superiority  of  the  central  regions  over  the  peripheral,  and  con- 
sequently of  ascending  over  descending  currents,  is  shown  by  the 
statement  of  Althaus  that  a  muscular  contraction  may  be  produced 
by  a  feebler  current  when  the  negative  electrode  is  applied  above 
than  when  the  positive  is  above.  The  muscular  contractility 
increases  in  such  experiments,  but  does  not  increase  under  Faradism. 
For  the  same  reason,  less  effect  is  produced  by  operating  on  the 
nerves  of  the  lower  limbs  than  when  we  include  the  lumbar  region 
of  the  cord,  and  still  greater  effect  occurs  when  one  of  the  electrodes 
is  carried  up  to  the  neck.  Prof.  Heidenhain  has  shown  that  in  the 
muscles  of  a  frog  which  had  lost  their  excitability  by  fatigue  or  ill- 
usage  a  continuous  current  for  half  a  minute,  or  more  would  restore 
them,  and  that  the  ascending  or  inverse  current  was  more  efficient  or 
complete  in  effect  than  the  descending  or  direct. 

The  motor  nerves  in  death,  as  shown  by  Bernard,  lose  their  excita- 
bility from  the  periphery  toward  the  centres,  and  when  the  nerves 
near  a  muscle  have  lost  their  excitability  they  are  still  excitable  near 
the  cord.  When  we  operate  on  the  muscles  directly  we  require  a 
stronger  current  than  when  operating  through  their  nerves. 

In  applying  electrodes  on  the  body  for  therapeutic  treatment, 
there  are  important  principles  which  have  been  overlooked,  the 
neglect  of  which  may  cause  a  failure  in  the  treatment.  I  have 
already  endeavored  to  make  it  clearly  intelligible,  but  it  will  bear 
further  illustration,  even  if  a  repetition. 

The  negative  pole  has  been  recommended  in  my  writings  as  the 
stimulating  pole  for  all  organs,  to  produce  the  beneficial  effects 
which  are  produced  by  the  hand.  But  the  negative  pole  is  not  a  stimu- 
lus ;  on  the  contrary,  its  influence  is  relaxing,  tending  to  debility  and 
congestion,  or  hemorrhage,  while  the  positive  is  the  strong  current, 
overcoming  congestion  and  hemorrhage. 

The  beneficial  effect  of  the  negative  pole  consists  largely  in 
attracting  the  positive  current  to  the  spot  where  it  is  applied,  thus 
producing  a  concentration  of  energy.  This  is  clue  to  the  positive 
current,  though  it  may  be  assisted  by  the  gentle  relaxation  produced 
by  the  negative  condition. 

In  the  ordinary  administration  of  the  current  under  equal  condi- 
tions, the  negative  and  positive  meet  midway  between  the  electrodes, 
one  half  of  the  channel  in   the   body  being  in   the  positive  and   the 


CHAP.    XXI.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  449 

other  half  in  the  negative  condition.  This  is  not  desirable,  for 
unless  the  positive  current  be  very,  strong  there  will  not  be  enough 
of  the  positive  influence  in  the  negative  half  of  the  circuit  to 
produce  the  amount  of  stimulation  that  is  desirable,  although  the 
effect  may  be  generally  good. 

If  the  positive  current  be  hindered  by  a  rheostat  or  by  dryness  of 
the  skin  or  any  other  cause,  the  neutral  point  will  be  near  or  at  the 
positive  electrode,  and  the  negative  influence  will  rule  in  the  circuit. 
This  will  defeat  our  purpose  of  using  the  negative  as  a  stimulant, 
and  the  stimulation  will  be  chiefly  at  the  positive  electrode,  reversing 
the  result  desired.  Thus  a  current  from  Disease  to  Health,  with  the 
positive  electrode  partially  shut  off,  would  be  depressing  and  debili- 
tating ;  whereas,  if  the  positive  electrode  be  a  good  conductor  (such 
as  a  broad  metal  surface)  and  the  negative  electrode  be  obstructed, 
the  body  will  be  occupied  by  the  positive  current  on  its  way  to  the 
negative  position  on  the  shoulders,  at  which  it  concentrates,  produc- 
ing a  strong  stimulation  of  that  spot. 

Hence,  if  we  propose  to  use  the  negative  electrode  as  a  stimulant, 
it  must  not,  as  already  stated,  have  too  free  access  to  the  person,  and 
the  positive  must  have  much  freer  access. 

If  I  put  a  metallic  electrode  on  the  shoulder  (the  skin  moist)  for 
the  negative  pole  and  a  slightly  moist  sponge  at  the  hypochondria 
for  the  positive  pole,  which  seriously  obstructs  the  current,  the 
entire  tract  in  the  body  may  be  occupied  by  the  negative  condition, 
which  meets  the  positive  in  the  sponge  or  at  the  margin  of  the 
trunk  near  it,  or  perhaps  in  the  liver ;  and  the  effect,  if  continued^ 
will  not  be  tonic  or  healthful ;  whereas,  if  we  place  the  metallic  elec- 
trode below,  with  a  positive  current,  and  the  sponge  on  the  shoulder, 
the  effect  will  be  tonic  and  healthful,  bringing  out  the  true  character 
of  the  shoulder,  by  its  reception  of  the  positive  current  from  below. 

Hence  we  deduce  the  important  rule  of  therapeutic  treatment, 
that  the  negative  electrode  when  used  as  a  stimulant  must  always 
have  its  access  to  the  body  obstructed 'in  comparison  with  the  access  of 
the  positive.  This  may  be  effected  by  the  dryness  of  the  skin  or  by 
a  certain  thickness  of  the  conducting  sponge  or  cloth,  or  in  a  more 
exact  method  by  using  a  water  rheostat  in  which  a  certain  length  of 
the  current  shall  pass  through  water,  or  by  some  other  form  of 
rheostat.  These  precautions  are  not  so  necessary  with  the  secondary 
current  as  with  the  primary  and  galvanic,  for  it  has  not  a  thoroughly 
negative  condition. 

In  using  static  electricity,  the  same  principle  is  carried  out  by 
treating  the  patient  with  a  negative  electrode  held  near  the  person 
or  upon  the  clothing,  the  body  being  filled  with  the  positive  current. 


450  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XXI. 

In  treating  with  static  electricity,  the  body  may  be  filled  with 
either  condition  from  one  pole,  the  other  pole  being  allowed  to 
communicate  with  the  earth  ;  but  in  using  the  dynamic  or  chemical 
electricity,  the  saturating  of  the  body  with  either  kind  of  electricity 
depends  on  the  partial  exclusion  of  the  other,  while  the  current  is 
uninterrupted. 

The  partial  exclusion  of  one  current  is  effected  by  giving  it  a 
longer  or  more  difficult  route.  This,  I  believe,  is  often  done  without 
reflecting  on  the  consequences,  as  when  the  operator  administers  the 
positive  current  through  himself.  (He  cannot  afford  to  hold  the 
negative  electrode,  as  it  would  bring  to  him  the  influence  of  the 
patient.) 

If  he  treats  with  the  right  hand,  holding  the  positive  electrode  in 
the  left,  he  gives  the  positive  current  the  obstruction  of  fully  five 
feet  of  his  own  person,  thus  placing  the  patient  under  the  influence 
of  the  negative  condition  entirely,  if  the  negative  electrode  has  free 
access,  and  even  introducing  the  negative  condition  into  his  own  arm. 
This  is  a  serious  and  very  injurious  mistake  for  the  patient.  To 
operate  in  that  way  it  would  be  necessary  to  place  the  negative 
current  under  still  greater  restriction  than  the  positive,  by  an 
obstruction  or  rheostat,  making  greater  resistance  than  his  arms  and 
body,  and  to  increase  the  strength  of  the  current  to  overcome  the 
great  resistance.  The  current  strength  should  always  be  adjusted  to 
the  amount  of  resistance  or  the  distance  traversed. 

If  the  operator  wishes  to  have  the  beneficial  effect  of  his  hand  as 
an  electrode,  he  can  effect  this  by  simply  tying  a  good  electrode  on 
the  wrist  of  the  hand  with  which  he  treats  the  patient,  the  obstruc- 
tive influence  of  which  may  easily  be  counterbalanced  on  the  nega- 
tive side.  A  bracelet  or  a  rubber  band  with  a  piece  of  metal  on  its 
inside  will  answer  for  this  purpose. 

In  passing  the  positive  current  through  a  medicinal  substance  for 
the  benefit  of  the  patient,  the  same  principle  must  be  borne  in  mind, 
and  an  amply  sufficient  obstruction  placed  at  the  negative  electrode 
to  insure  the  positive  current  freer  access. 

The  possibility  of  using  the  dynamic  or  chemical  electricity  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  static,  by  accumulating  in  the  patient  the  influence 
of  either  pole,  omitting  the  other,  has  not,  so  far  as  I  am  aware,  been 
recognized  by  the  profession.*     It  is  clear,  however,  from  what  has 

*  In  a  German  publication  of  1872,  the  unipolar  method  was  presented,  and  I  find 
the  following  statement  in  Lincoln's  Electro-Therapeutics.  "  Clemens  of  Frankfort 
has  a  method  called  the  '  unipolar, '  which  he  considers  possesses  a  power  to  quiet 
spasm  and  allay  pain,  and  in  general  to  exert  a  soothing  influence  upon  the  system, 
which  is  desirable  in  the  initial  stages  of  diseases  of  the  spinal  cord.  His  patient's 
feet  are  placed  on  a  thin  bit  of  wood,  resting  on  the  metal  plate  already  described, 
the  plate  being  in  connection  with  the  negative  pole  of  a  powerful  Faradic  apparatus. 


CHAP.    XXI.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  45 T 

already  been  stated,  that  the  patient  may  easily  be  saturated  with  the 
influence  of  either  pole,  by  partially  excluding  the  other.  It  is  also 
true  that  while  the  patient  is  under  the  influence  of  one  pole  exclu- 
sively, the  other  may  be  turned  loose,  like  the  pole  of  a  static  machine, 
to  communicate  with  the  earth,  making  what  is  called  an  earth  circuit, 
instead  of  returning  direct  by  wire  to  opposite  pole.  In  this  we  have 
an  apparent  analogy  to  the  unipolar  use  of  the  static,  but  the  dynamic 
electricity  depends  for  its  action  upon  a  definite  channel,  of  which  the 
earth  maybe  a  portion,  of  any  extent,  but  without  a  completion  of  the 
circuit  there  is  no  current  or  electric  effect.  There  must  be  one  wire 
going  out  with  the  current  reaching  the  moist  earth,  and  another  return- 
ing from  the  earth,  making  the  marvellous  connection  through  a  vast 
extent  of  earth.  But  the  static  has  so  great  a  diffusive  power  that  it 
sustains  the  current  of  two  polarities  without  any  apparently  satisfac- 
tory connection.  It  is  customary  to  connect  one  pole  with  the  earth, 
or  with  the  iron  pipes  of  the  house,  but  the  accumulation  of  the  pos- 
itive will  not  be  prevented  if  the  negative  wire  has  a  very  imperfect 
route  for  the  circuit. 

THE     NATURE     OF     POSITIVE     AND     NEGATIVE     IN     ELECTRICITY 

As  relates  to  human  life  has  not  yet  been  explained,  but  I  think  I 
have  found  the  explanation. 

As  positive  electricity  causes  the  contraction  of  muscles  and  the 
contraction  of  vaso-motor  nerves,  while  it  diminishes  nervous  sensibil- 
ity, it  is  clear  that  its  influence  corresponds  to  that  of  the  occipital  half 
of  the  brain,  and  rather  below  than  above  the  middle.  The  negative 
condition,  which  softens  and  relaxes,  increasing  nervous  sensibility, 
corresponds  in  its  influence  with  the  anterior  half  of  the  brain,  and 
especially  the  anterior  superior  region,  in  the  neighborhood  of  the 
coronal  suture  and  temporal  arch.     It  is  thus  felt  by  sensitives. 

Hence  it  is  by  the  positive  current  that  we  invigorate  life  in  all 
parts  of  the  constitution,  without  invigorating  the  more  delicate  func- 
tions of  the  nervous  system,  which  are  promoted  by  the  negative. 

The  combination  of  the  two  makes  nearly  a  complete  development 
of  function,  and  to  produce  this  complete  development  we  should  com- 
bine them  in  the  proportions  required  by  the  condition  of  each  organ, 
by  admitting  one  with  greater  or  less  facility  than  the  other. 

As  the  positive  current  is  the  great  energizing  power,  like  the  oc- 
cipital brain  and  the  posterior  half  of  the  body,  it  must  be  our  chief 

while  the  positive  is  applied  to  the  spine  in  the  neck.  He  says  that  the  whole  body 
thus  becomes  charged  with  electricity  of  high  tension."  This  statement,  which  the 
author  tries  to  discredit,  is  a  very  rational  one.  The  negative  influence  is  largely 
excluded,  and  the  spinal  column  placed  under  the  influence  of  a  strong  positive  de- 
scending current,  which  if  continued  would  be  a  powerful  sedative,  appropriate,  how- 
ever, only  when  spinal  inflammation  was  present  or  threatened. 


452  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  [CHAP.    XXI. 

reliance,  and  I  have  endeavored  to  show  that  the  negative  pole  may 
be  used  upon  posterior  surfaces  so  as  to  attract  to  them  the  positive 
condition. 

I  have  also  shown  that  the  negative  condition  cannot  be  rejected, 
as  it  increases  the  nervous  sensibility  and  the  afflux  of  blood,  soften- 
ing and  opening  the  tissues,  in  which  the  circulation  has  been  deficient. 

Of  course,  the  positive  condition  is  the  antagonist  of  inflammation, 
in  which  the  bloodvessels  and  tissues  are  relaxed;  and  also  in  fever, 
in  which  a  similar  relaxation  exists,  and  a  septic  tendency,  which  the 
positive  or  acid  condition  counteracts,  being  not  only  antiseptic  but 
destructive  to  morbid  germs. 

The  negative  or  alkaline  condition  should  not  predominate  in  fever, 
in  which  the  tendency  to  dissolution  and  decomposition  is  already  too 
active,  which  the  alkaline  condition  promotes.  Fever  demands  the 
antiseptic  energy  of  the  positive  condition,  but  it  demands  still  more 
the  antiseptic,  cooling  and  soothing  influence  of  magnetism,  which  is 
so  similar  to  that  of  the  human  nervaura.  Hence  the  positive  and 
magnetized  current  is  its  proper  treatment. 

The  negative  condition  is  a  grateful  influence  to  check  the  effects 
of  over-exertion  and  excitement,  and  hence  is  most  agreeable  to  many. 
It  tends  also  to  promote  secretion,  as  well  as  circulation,  and  thus  to 
remove  morbid  deposits  and  promote  absorption,  revitalizing  torpid 
and  obstructed  organs.  Hence  it  is  very  important  in  defectivi 
development,  atrophy,  and  paralysis.  It  is  for  this  reason  that,  in 
cases  of  advanced  paralysis,  the  galvanic  current  has  been  found  so 
useful  and  the  Faradicso  ineffectual,  for  the  latter  has  not  the  solvent 
and  alterative  power,  and  the  capacity  for  reviving  circulation  and 
sensibility  which  belongs  to  the  negative  condition.  These  virtues 
have  been  attributed  to  the  galvanic,  in  opposition  to  the  Faradic  cur- 
rent, but  they  belong  to  its  negative  portion,  and  if  the  patient  were 
confined  to  the  positive  galvanic,  it  would  not  be  found  so  widely 
different  from  the  Faradic  in  effects.  The  chemical  influence  of  the 
Faradic  is  neutralized  by  the  fact  that  each  pole  becomes  alternately 
positive  with  inconceivable  rapidity. 

In  treating  thus  with  the  negative  to  revive  impaired  organs,  its 
operation  must  of  course  be  judiciously  limited,  as  a  prolonged  action 
would  be  injurious ;  and  as  the  organ  recovers,  the  negative  influence 
should  be  more  and  more  obstructed.  When  circulation  and  nervous 
influence  are  restored,  the  alternate  current  of  the  commutator  and 
the  Faradic  current  become  appropriate,  and  in  using  the  Faradic 
current  a  frequent  reversal  is  desirable,  that  the  spinal  column  and  the 
dependent  organs  may  be  treated  equally. 

Although  the  negative  condition  is  of  little  use  in  advanced  fever,  it 


CHAP.    XXI.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  453 

is  not  so  inappropriate  in  inflammation.  Inflammation  is  counteracted 
by  secretion  which  the  negative  state  promotes,  and  by  alkaline  condi- 
tions which  dissolve  or  suppress  the  fibrin  of  the  blood,  which  is 
characteristic  of  inflammation.  The  negative  influence  corresponds, 
to  the  antiphlogistic  solvent  and  sorbefacient  influence  of  the  alkalies, 
an  influence  which  in  excess  may  result  in  dissolution  of  the  blood, 
hemorrhages  and  congestions,  but  which  in  judicious,  moderate  use 
checks  inflammation  and  promotes  the  removal  of  all  morbid  growths 
and  deposits.  Thus  alkalies  (especially  carbonate  of  ammonia)  are 
very  valuable  in  tuberculous  consumption  as  sorbefacients,  although 
their  excessive  use  would  be  destructive.  When  combined  with  a 
tonic  element,  as  in  the  muriate  of  soda  and  muriate  of  ammonia,  they 
are  very  valuable  preventives  and  curatives  for  the  tuberculous  consti- 
tution, the  value  of  which  has  not  been  properly  appreciated,  though 
established  by  experience.  In  like  manner  the  negative  condition, 
properly  limited  and  sustained  by  the  positive,  is  of  great  value,  and 
this  combination  is  happily  illustrated  by  the  two  muriates. 

The  foregoing  remarks  do  not  apply  to  static  electricity,  for  the 
static  positive  is  not  like  the  dynamic  or  chemical  positive  —  it  is  not 
an  occipital  influence  but  an  all-round  brain  power,  promoting  all  the 
phenomena  of  active  life  in  a  harmonious  manner,  without  the  seda- 
tive, relaxing  influence  of  the  dynamic  negative.  It  is  the  natural 
stimulus  of  animal  and  vegetative  life  supplied  by  the  sun  —  an  abso- 
lute necessity,  the  deficiency  of  which  characterizes  great  epidemics. 

But  in  promoting  active  life  it  does  not  complete. the  functions  of 
life,  which  include  the  restoration  that  is  accomplished  chiefly  in  re- 
pose. We  need  another  influence  for  this  purpose,  and  that  influence 
I  have  found  in  magnetism.  But  magnetism  is  not  an  aggressive, 
locomotive  energy.  It  is  a  static  condition,  resting  in  the  iron,  and 
having  little  influence  on  the  human  constitution  unless  its  nervous 
sensibilities  are  highly  developed  ;  hence  rejected  by  the  medical  pro- 
fession, which  recognizes  only  gross  powers  and  substances,  though 
used  among  those  who  cultivate  animal  magnetism,  and  the  makers  of 
magnetic  garments,  which  affect  the  sensitive. 

To  make  magnetism  an  important  therapeutic  agent,  it  must  be 
carried  into  the  human  body  by  an  electric  current.  And  as  the  pos- 
sibility of  carrying  potencies  by  means  of  electricity  is  not  yet  known 
in  medical  schools,  it  is  probable  that  it  will  be  very  positively  denied, 
as  there  are  many  who  feel  that  the  title  of  professor  or  even  doctor 
authorizes  them  to  deny  positively  the  existence  of  any  very  remarkable 
fact  in  science  with  which  they  are  not  acquainted.  It  is  to  be  hoped, 
however,  that  in  the  progress  of  evolution  the  human  brain  will  be 
sufficiently  developed  to  suppress  dogmatic  education  and  dogmatic 


454 


ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 


[chap. 


XXI 


institutions,  and  to  realize  the  incalculable  magnitude  of  the  unknown 
truths  which  are  yet  to  be  learned,  and  which  it  would  be  puerile 
folly  to  deny  or  ignore.  The  reader  will  pardon  my  frequent  reference 
to  these  obstructions,  for  they  are  a  mighty  barrier  to  human  prog- 
ress, and  discouragement  to  original  thought  and  investigation. 

Natural  Influences.  —  In  addition  to  these  artificial  agencies, 
we  have  a  similar  influx  from  Nature.  The  sun  is  a  continual  source 
of  the  varied  potencies  of  electricity,  light,  color  and  warmth,  while 
the  earth  is  a  vast  magazine  of  magnetism  destined  to  play  an  im- 
portant part  hereafter  in  therapeutics,  of  which  I  may  give  an  exposi- 
tion hereafter.  These  magnetic  currents  may  be  seized  as  they 
travel  round  the  earth  by  tapping  them  with  copper  wires  leading  to 
our  patient.  My  time  is  too  thoroughly  engrossed  with  other  duties 
at  present  for  the  elaboration  of  the  doctrines  of  terrestrial  mag- 
netism and  other  applications  of  electricity  which  are  possible  and 
which  I  now  have  in  view. 


CHAPTER    XXII. 

REVIEW    OF    THE    CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF 
ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The  galvanic  current,  the  Faradic  and  their  phenomena  —  their  taste — their 
action  on  muscles.  Negative  and  positive  currents.  Merits  of  galvanism,  Faradism, 
and  static  electricity.  Their  reception  by  the  profession.  Electricity  as  a  test  of 
death.  Heat  developed  by  the  current.  Sensations  from  currents.  Value  of  the 
Humboldt  battery.  Chemical  effects  and  prolonged  influences.  Use  of  the  two- 
plate  battery.  Action  of  galvanism  on  motor  nerves  and  production  of  increased 
strength.  Effects  of  direct,  inverse  and  alternating  currents.  Character  of  the  Fara- 
dic or  induced  current  in  comparison  with  the  galvanic.  Experiment  on  vibrating 
cilia.  Refreshing  and  strengthening  effects  of  galvanism.  Exhaustive  effects  of 
Faradism.  Anodyne  effects  of  galvanism,  and  cases  requiring  Faradism — how  its 
effects  are  produced.  Cure  of  locomotor  ataxy  and  neuralgia  by  galvanism — its 
catalytic  effects.  Cutaneous  Faradization.  Cure  of  contractions.  Treatment  of 
antagonistic  muscles.  Harsh  effects  of  Faradism.  Remarkable  physiological  errors 
of  Prof.  Claude  Bernard.  Antagonism  of  ihe  sensitive  and  muscular  systems. 
Relation  of  the  nervous  system  to  growth.  Danger  of  Faradization  on  the  front  of 
the  neck  Cures  by  galvanism  when  Faradism  had  failed.  Effect  of  the  interruptions. 
Comparison  continued.  Direct  action  on  the  muscles.  Penetrative  power  of  cur- 
rents. Stimulant  action  of  Faradism.  Medication  by  electric  currents.  Removal 
of  poisons  by  electricity.  Injurious  effects  of  the  common  batteries.  Advantage  of 
the  muriate  of  ammonia.  Action  of  galvanism  on  the  ganglionic  nerves.  Its  anti- 
spasmodic influence.  Distinction  of  voluntary  and  involuntary  strucures.  Galvanic 
current  down  the  bowels  for  constipation.  Failure  of  Faradism.  Differences  of 
electrodes.  Interruptions.  Delicate  currents.  Practical  value  of  the  primary  cur- 
rent, intermediate  between  the  galvanic  and  Faradic. 


In  the  use  of  electricity  the  galvanic  or  continuous  current 
develops  two  different  conditions,  the  positive  pole  introducing  an 
element  which  possesses  a  certain  amount  of  energizing  power,  but 
which  by  passing  in  a  current  tends  to  create  a  similar  current  in  the 
nerves  and  blood,  so  as  to  disperse  excitement  and  congestion  from 
the  place  where  it  enters,  and  to  concentrate  an  excitement  and 
hypersemia  to  the  negative  pole. 

While  the  current  is  passing  there  is  at  first  a  gentle  stimulus, 
acting  on  the  vaso-motor  nerves,  and  propelling  the  blood  and  nervous 
energy,  producing  at  length  a  diminution  of  excitement,  tending  to 
insensibility  in  its  course,  and  a  diminution  of  plethora  in  the  blood- 
vessels, very  beneficial  in  inflammation,  while  there  is  a  corresponding 
increase  near  the  negative  pole  in  sensibility  and  vascular  plethora, 
the  space  between  the  two  poles  being  usually  equally  divided 
between  the  positive  and  negative  conditions    on  each  side  of   the 


45^  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

neutral  point  or  space.  In  the  positive  region  an  acid  condition  is 
developed,  oxygen  appears  if  water  is  decomposed,  and  the  positive 
electrode  may  become  oxidated,  while  in  the  negative  region  an 
alkaline  condition  appears  and  hydrogen  is  developed.  Alkaline 
fluids  favor  solution  and  decomposition  as  well  as  sensibility.  The 
leg  of  a  frog  is  more  sensitive  after  being  dipped  in  an  alkaline 
liquid.  The  electric  organs  of  the  living  torpedo,  being  the  source  of 
positive  currents,  have  been  found  in  an  acid  condition. 

The  Faradic  or  induction  currents,  being  a  rapid  alternation, 
develop  instantaneous  positive  and  negative  conditions  at  each  pole, 
so  that  both  oxygen  and  hydrogen  are  evolved,  but  as  they  are  in  a 
nascent  state,  together,  they  combine  and  this  effect  disappears. 
This  alternate  action,  however,  produces  an  effect  on  platinum  plates, 
which  show  a  black  powder  of  finely  divided  platinum  in  conse- 
quence. 

The  Faradic  current  has  not  the  suppressing  or  the  developing 
power  of  the  galvanic,  but  simply  gives  us  the  stimulating  power  of 
electricity,  which  may  be  so  great  as  to  be  painful,  and  which  at 
length  exhausts  the  excitability  and  paralyzes  without  producing  the 
alterative,  sedative  and  developing  influences  of  the  galvanic  current 
and  its  chemical  action. 

As  this  chemical  action  is  so  strong  as  to  decompose  water  and 
other  compounds,  there  is  no  animal  tissue  that  can  long  withstand 
its  influence.  The  sreater  the  strength  of  the  current  and  the  softer 
or  more  vascular  the  tissues,  the  greater  is  the  effect,  and  it  is  more 
efficient  in  highly-organized,  warm-blooded  animals.  The  negative 
pole  produces  this  decomposing  effect,  much  like  the  action  of 
caustic  potash.  But  unless  the  current  be  very  powerful  or  pro- 
longed, there  is  no  scar  left,  and  the  parts  return  to  their  natural 
condition. 

The  action  upon  the  blood,  whether  in  or  out  of  the  body,  is  to 
form  a  small,  hard,  dark  clot  at  the  positive  pole  from  the  action  of 
acid,  and  a  bulky,  soft,  red  clot  at  the  negative.  Hence  electric 
currents  have  been  used  for  the  relief  of  aneurisms  by  forming  a 
clot  in  the  distended  artery  —  needles  being  inserted  as  electrodes. 

The  positive  pole  is  adapted  to  the  transmission  of  soluble 
materials  into  the  constitution,  and  it  has  been  shown  that  metallic 
substances  in  the  body  may  be  carried  out  at  the  negative  pole. 

Reuss  discovered  that  liquids  pass  through  porous  diaphragms  in 
the  direction  of  the  positive  current.  Where  small  particles  have 
been  observed  in  tubes,  it  was  seen  that  a  weak  galvanic  current 
carried  the  particles  in  the  centre  toward  the  negative  end,  the 
particles  at  the  side  being  disposed  at  the  same  time  to  move  back 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  457 

toward  the  positive,  but  that,  as  the  intensity  of  the  current  increased, 
it  by  degrees  carried  all  the  particles  to  the  negative  pole. 

When  we  apply  zinc  and  silver  plates  to  the  tongue,  or  any  other 
metals  distinctly  positive  and  negative,  there  is  an  acid  taste  at  the 
zinc  and  a  weak  alkaline  taste  at  the  silver,  with  a  slight  electric 
current.     Such  applications  sometimes  relieve  toothache. 

Althaus  speaks  of  sensitive  patients  recognizing  a  metallic  taste 
from  the  galvanic  current  applied  to  various  parts  of  the  body,  but 
he  was  not  acquainted  with  the  fact  that  sensitives  can  taste  metals 
in  the  hands  or  on  any  part  of  the  body,  independent  of  electricity. 
The  experience  of  Bishop  Polk,  when  I  met  him  in  1841,  who  tasted 
brass  whenever  he  touched  it,  led  me  into  the  experiments  which 
developed  Psychometry.  The  strong  metallic  taste  from  electric 
treatment  of  which  patients  often  complain  is  the  effect  of  the 
metals  through  which  the  current  has  passed  and  is  a  serious  objec- 
tion to  the  common  apparatus. 

The  acid  taste  of  electricity  is  independent  of  any  really  acid 
condition,  and  is  perceived  even  if  the  tongue  and  the  conductor  are 
covered  by  an  alkaline  fluid.  It  is  perceived  from  frictional  as  well 
as  galvanic  electricity.  Some  one  has  compared  the  acid  taste  of 
frictional  electricity  to  vinegar,  and  that  of  galvanism  to  dilute 
sulphuric  acid.  In  the  middle,  where  two  conditions  meet,  the  taste 
is  metallic,  —  due  to  metals. 

The  muscular  system  is  very  sensitive  to  galvanism  applied  either 
directly  to  the  muscles  or  to  their  nerves,  but  a  stronger  current  is 
required  for  acting  on  the  muscles.  Powerful  currents,  whether 
galvanic  or  Faradic,  produce  intense  convulsive  action  and  pain,  and 
one  who  has  hold  of  the  conductors  is  sometimes  for  this  reason 
entirely  unable  to  let  go. 

The  action  of  galvanism  upon  the  muscular  system  through  the 
motor  nerves  is  not  caused  by  their  conducting  galvanism  to  the 
muscles,  but  by  the  excitation  of  the  nerve  itself  by  a  current  pass- 
ing along  the  nerve.  Tying  the  nerve  will  not  prevent  the  passage 
of  electricity,  but  prevents  the  muscular  contraction  if  it  be  tied 
below  the  electrodes.  So  does  anything  that  benumbs  the  nerve 
between  the  galvanized  point  and  the  muscle,  such  as  either  chloro- 
form or  poisons.  A  feeble  current  may  maintain  muscular  contrac- 
tion, but  the  galvanic  current  is  not  a  constant  stimulus  in  proportion 
to  its  intensity  to  maintain  the  contractions  of  the  muscles  —  the 
nerves  become  exhausted  and  a  variation  is  required  to  make  the 
current  effective,  as  in  changing  the  flow  or  opening  or  closing  the 
circuit,  as  is  rapidly  done  in  the  primary  current.  Hence  the  induc- 
tion currents  of  Faradic  electricity  are  the  most  efficient  agent  for 


45$  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

the  muscles,  and  their  rapid  alternation  maintains  a  continuous  con- 
traction which  may  become  painful.  The  vibrator  may  be  arranged 
for  slower  interruptions,  which  are  often  preferable. 

The  relation  of  electricity  to  muscular  contraction  is  such  that 
with  very  moderate  continuous  (galvanic)  currents,  appropriate  for 
therapeutic  use,  the  muscular  contraction  usually  occurs  only  on  clos- 
ing the  direct  circuit,  and  not  in  opening  or  breaking  it.  If  this 
moderate  current  be  inverse  it  accumulates  excitability  in  the  nerve, 
and  hence  less  galvanic  power  is  necessary  in  some  instances  to 
move  a  muscle  by  the  inverse  than  by  the  direct  current.  The 
inverse  current  does  not  cause  contraction  by  its  passage,  for  it 
carries  excitability  up  the  nerve,  but  it  occurs  on  the  cessation,  by 
the  reaction  from  the  excited  portion  of  the  nerve  and  spinal  cord. 
This  is  not  invariable,  however,  as  in  experiments  on  the  legs  of 
frogs,  connected  with  the  body  only  by  the  nerves,  the  direct  current 
produces  convulsive  action  and  the  inverse  current  produces  no 
motion  whatever,  but  a  croak  indicating  pain.  The  nerve  in  this  case 
is  not  in  a  normal  condition.  This  local  increase  of  excitability  does 
not  appear  with  induction  currents,  as  they  act  in  an  alternating 
manner. 

As  it  appears  to  be  the  general  law  that  more  excitement  accumu- 
lates at  the  negative  than  at  the  positive  pole,  the  negative  must 
therefore  be  applied  to  any  region  which  we  wish  to  preponderate, 
as  we  apply  the  positive  to  any  region  which  needs  to  be  diminished 
in  action  or  accumulation.  The  patient  recognizes  a  much  more 
distinct  sensation  at  the  negative  pole,  and  long  continued  or  too 
strong  a  current  will  paralyze  that  portion  of  the  nerve  subjected  to 
the  negative  pole,  by  chemical  action. 

The  direct  current  would  soon  exhaust  the  central  excitability  and 
cease  to  manifest  any  effect  in  the  muscles,  were  it  not  that  the 
muscles  possess  an  intrinsic  property  of  contractility  independent 
of  the  nerves,  upon  which  electricity  acts.  When  the  current  is 
applied  to  the  nerve  the  muscle  acts  in  obedience  to  nervous  influ- 
ence, but  when  applied  directly  to  the  muscular  substance  the  con- 
traction occurs  only  where  the  current  passes,  or  where  it  affects  the 
nervous  filaments.  All  electric  action  exhausts  the  nerves  in  time  — 
a  mild  current  as  effectually  as  a  stronger  one,  if  continued  long 
enough. 

Galvanization  and  Faradization  have  been  placed  in  rivalry  by 
partisans.  Duchenne  in  France  insisted  on  Faradization  as  the  only 
valuable  treatment,  and  Remak  in  Germany  contended  as  exclusively 
for  galvanization,  which  he  ably  illustrated. 

Experience  shows  the  greater  therapeutic  value  of  mild  galvanic 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  459 

currents  of  very  moderate  strength.  Dr.  Bird  after  eight  years  of 
extensive  experience  said,  "  I  am  fully  convinced  that  a  feeble  current 
if  kept  up  for  a  long  time  in  certain  forms  of  paralysis  (care  being 
taken  that  the  positive  fluid  traverse  the  limb  in  the  direction  of  the 
ramifications  of  the  nerves)  would  prove  the  most  important  mode  of 
applying  this  remedy  with  success." 

Althaus  says  that  Faradization  "  has  little  or  no  therapeutic  influ- 
ence in  diseases  of  the  nervous  centres."  Beard  and  Rockwell  say, 
"for  the  average  constitution  and  with  the  exceptions  that  come  from 
certain  idiosyncracies,  and  certain  diseases,  such  as  anaesthesia,  the 
best  results  of  electrical  treatment  are  obtained  by  mild  currents. 
The  temptation  to  disregard  this  rule  and  use  painful  currents  is 
even  for  the  experienced  electro-therapeutist  very  great  and  some- 
times irresistible.  The  dogma  '  no  smart,  no  cure/  which  has 
wrought  so  much  misery  in  the  world,  still  lingers,  even  among  the 
intelligent." 

Static  or  frictional  electricity  when  passed  through  the  human 
body  shows  similar  effects  to  other  currents.  There  is  a  paleness 
produced  at  the  entrance  of  the  positive  current,  followed  by  the 
redness  and  warmth  resulting  from  reaction,  and  the  chief  effects 
are  seen  at  the  negative  pole,  where  the  sparks  are  drawn  from  the 
body. 

The  rational  practice,  according  to  Sarcognomy,  would  consist 
chiefly  in  drawing  sparks  from  the  back,  especially  along  the  spine 
and  on  the  shoulders. 

Frictional  or  static  electricity  has  been  too  much  neglected  for  the 
use  of  the  Faradic  form.  Dr.  Bird  thinks  the  shocks  from  the 
Leyden  jar  just  as  valuable  as  Faradization.  In  amenorrhoea  he 
passes  the  currents  between  the  poles  placed  at  the  lumbo-sacral 
junction  and  just  above  the  pubes  —  or  passes  electric  shocks.  He 
found  the  shocks  very  efficient  in  restoring  menstruation  when  it  was 
not  due  to  the  exhaustion  of  anaemia. 

Dr.  Bird  found  static  electricity  very  efficient  in  rousing  the  action 
of  the  skin,  and  even  exciting  diaphoresis,  when  the  patient  sits  on 
the  insulating  stool,  and  is  confident  he  has  produced  cholagogic 
effects  by  electric  shocks  through  the  liver.  "  I  do  not  think  I  have 
ever  known  it  to  fail  to  excite  menstruation  where  the  uterus  was 
capable  of  performing  the  function,"  but  he  is  not  positive  as  to 
any  such  effects  on  the  kidneys.  Sparks  drawn  from  rheumatic 
joints  with  recent  effusion,  until  the  skin  is  reddened  or  papulated, 
generally  effect  a  cure  and  absorption  of  the  effusion.  The  same 
treatment  by  sparks  from  the  throat  will  frequently  effect  a  rapid 
cure  of  inflammation  of  the  tonsils.     Neuralgic  rheumatic  pains  and 


460  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

pains  in  the  side  in  hysterical  or  chlorotic  females  are  successfully 
treated  by  drawing  sparks  from  the  affected  locality.  It  has  been 
found  useful  in  muscular  tremors,  in  facial  spasm,  facial  paralysis, 
and  hysterical  aphonia  and  hyperesthesia. 

Frictional  electricity  has  the  additional  merit  of  being  a  copious 
source  of  ozone,  when  the  machine  is  operating,  by  which  the  air  is 
purified. 

The  tendency  of  static  electricity  is  to  operate  chiefly  on  the 
surface,  increasing  the  sensibility  of  the  skin  and  the  tendency  to 
perspiration;  hence  it  is  important  in  using  it  to  avoid  exposure  to 
cold  after  a  treatment  of  any  part,  when  the  liability  to  catching  cold 
is  greatly  increased. 

The  medical  use  of  electricity  excited  great  interest  in  the  middle 
of  the  last  century,  when  static  electricity  alone  was  known.  Quite 
a  number  of  physicians  advocated  it  and  reported  their  success  in 
curing  many  diseases.  The  commission  of  the  Royal  Medical 
Society  in  France  even  reported  that  it  was  generally  successful  in 
the  cure  of  paralysis.  Nevertheless  it  fell  out  of  fashion,  probably 
from  universal  skepticism,  which  characterizes  the  profession,  and  the 
lack  of  wisdom  in  its  application.  It  is  difficult  to  believe  there  was 
any  reason  for  its  general  neglect  and  rejection,  when  its  ability  so 
strongly  impressed  the  honest  and  practical  mind  of  John  Wesley, 
the  founder  of  Methodism,  that  in  1759  he  published  a  small  treatise 
entitled,  "The  Desideratum;  or  Electricity  Made  Plain  and  Useful, 
by  a  Lover  of  Mankind  and  of  Common  Sense."  Wesley's  list  of 
diseases  in  which  frictional  electricity  was  useful  was  as  follows  : 

"Agues;  St.  Anthony's  fire;  blindness,  even  from  gutta  serena; 
blood  extravasated  ;  bronchocele  ;  chlorosis  ;  coldness  in  the  feet  ; 
consumption  ;  contraction  of  the  limbs  ;  cramps  ;  deafness  ;  dropsy  ; 
epilepsy;  feet  violently  disordered  ;  felons  ;  fistula  lachrymalis  ;  gout ; 
gravel;  headache;  hysterics;  inflammations;  king's  evil;  knots  in 
the  flesh  ;  lameness ;  leprosy ;  mortification  ;  pain  in  the  back,  in  the 
stomach ;  palpitations  of  the  heart ;  palsy  ;  pleurisy  ;  rheumatism  ; 
ringworms;  sciatica;  shingles;  sprain;  sore  feet;  swellings  of  ail 
kinds  ;  throat  sore  ;  toe  hurt  ;  toothache  ;  wen." 

But  it  certainly  did  fall  under  the  general  scorn  of  the  profession, 
as  many  other  valuable  discoveries  have  done,  and  those  who  toward 
the  middle  of  the  present  century  attempted  to  use  it  in  their 
practice  had  to  encounter  this  contemptuous  opposition,  as  has  been 
well  described  by  Dr.  Beard.  Its  revival  in  France  was  ascribed  by 
Duchenne  to  Sarlandiere's  introduction  of  electro-puncture  in  1825, 
which  as  a  method  of  practice  is  of  less  value  than  the  static  electricity 
which  preceded  it.    Such  is  medical  wisdom  !     It  is  certainly  inferior 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  461 

to  the  application  of  moist  electrodes  on  the  surface  except  in  severe 
neuralgia,  and  is  of  little  other  use  except  in  treating  tumors  and 
aneurisms.  As  late  as  1847,  Ranking's  Abstract  said  of  the  thera- 
peutic use  of  galvanism:  "The  subject  is  manifestly  in  its  infancy,  it 
has  met  with  comparatively  little  favor  either  in  this  country  or  in 
France  or  Germany.  .  .  To  the  Italians  we  are  mainly  indebted 
for  the  more  recent  experiments." 

Muscular  contractility  ceases  with  death,  beginning  to  decline  as 
the  heart  ceases  to  beat,  and  finally  disappearing  entirely,  always  in 
less  than  three  hours,  sometimes  in  half  an  hour,  so  that  Faradiza- 
tion of  the  muscles  is  a  reliable  test  for  death,  and  might  prevent 
interment  in  cases  of  trance,  or  relieve  all  doubt  in  cases  of  uncer- 
tainty. If  muscular  contractility  is  entirely  gone,  death  is  certain. 
The  experiments  of  Onimus  on  the  bodies  of  executed  criminals 
show  that  the  muscles  may  respond  to  galvanism  after  Faradic  con- 
tractility has  been  lost. 

Muscles  put  into  action  by  Faradic  currents  have  a  sensible 
increase  of  heat.  In  one  case  an  increase  of  over  seven  degrees  was 
reported  by  Althaus.  This  may  be  owing  to  the  same  consumption 
of  oxygen  and  destruction  of  tissue  which  takes  place  in  ordinary 
voluntary  action,  or  it  may  be  also  the  effect  of  the  resistance  of 
imperfect  conductors,  which  is  heating.  Frogs'  muscles  when  Fara- 
clized  consume  more  than  twice  as  much  oxygen  as  when  not  sub- 
jected to  electricity.  In  electric  practice  general  Faradization  is 
very  warming,  and  the  action  of  electricity  on  the  skin  also  elevates 
the  temperature. 

In  healthy  structures,  rather  more  heat  is  produced  by  the  direct 
than  by  the  inverse  current.  This  evolution  of  heat  is  caused  by  both 
the  electric  currents  and  the  nervous  action,  and  is  not  mechanically 
caused  by  the  friction  or  pressure  or  condensation  in  the  muscle 
contracting.  The  heat  developed  is  as  great  or  greater  when  the 
muscle  does  not  act.  It  is  due  to  the  stimulation  of  the  nerves 
which  control  calorification. 

Faradizing  the  spinal  cord  in  dogs  so  vigorously  as  to  produce 
tetanic  contractions  of  the  muscles,  produces  a  very  high  tempera- 
ture in  the  contracting  muscles,  and  Leyden  reports  so  great  an 
increase  in  this  way  that  the  temperature  of  the  blood  was  raised 
nearly  nine  degrees  Fahrenheit.  A  strong  current  as  from  fifty  to  one 
hundred  cells  produces  great  heat  of  the  skin  when  applied,  and  a 
burning  sensation  in  the  flesh,  which  is  intolerable.  There  is  a 
muscular  shock  at  the  moment  of  contact,  and  a  much  slighter  effect 
as  the  galvanic  current  ceases.  TL.ese  strong  currents  produce  a 
feeling  of  exhaustion  and  fatigue  in  the  limbs  through  which  they  pass. 


462  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

The  galvanic  current  produces  stimulation  which  varies  from  a 
gentle,  pleasant  warmth  to  a  severe,  burning  pain,  especially  when  dry 
electrodes  are  used.  The  moderate,  continuous  current  gradually 
diminishes  the  sensibility  of  nerves,  and  is  therefore  very  beneficial 
in  hyperaesthesia. 

The  Faradic  current  may  cause  a  slight  pricking  sensation  or  may 
be  increased  in  effect  to  severe  pain.  The  effect  is  increased  by  the 
velocity  of  the  intermittence  of  the  shocks.  A  moderate,  rapidly 
interrupted  Faradic  current  will  usually  produce  in  twenty  minutes 
or  less  a  decided  benumbing  effect. 

In  applying  zinc  and  silver  plates  (connected  together)  to  the  skin, 
it  has  been  found  that  a  negative  or  alkaline  condition  is  produced 
under  the  silver  plate,  and  soda  is  attracted  to  it,  while  at  the  zinc 
plate  an  acid  condition  arises,  chlorine  is  attracted,  chloride  of  zinc 
formed,  and  an  escharotic  action  produced  on  the  skin  These  results 
were  first  observed  by  Humboldt.  The  reapplication  of  the  plates 
renewed  the  blister  at  the  zinc  plate,  and  the  influence  of  the  silver 
plate  was  uniformly  healing.  The  subject  was  more  fully  illustrated 
by  Drs.  Golding  Bird  and  Spencer  Wells,  showing  the  chemical 
action  concerned,  and  the  value  of  the  galvanic  current  in  cases  of 
ulceration. 

When  metallic  conductors  have  a  prolonged  application  to  the  skin, 
a  small  blister  containing  alkaline  serum  appears  under  the  negative 
pole,  with  an  inflammatory  areola  round  it.  At  the  positive  pole  we 
find  a  papula  containing  acid  serum. 

The  effect  of  conductors  is  felt  in  the  skin  more  decidedly  if  it  be 
lightly  touched.  When  more  firmly  pressed  the  electricity  passes 
into  the  deeper  structures.  Faradism  acts  like  other  causes  of 
inflammation,  in  producing  first  a  constriction  of  the  bloodvessels  of 
the  skin  through  their  vaso-motor  ganglionic  nerves,  followed  by 
expansion  from  the  exhaustion  of  the  contractile  power;  erythema- 
tous redness  and  wheals  may  be  produced,  and  there  is  a  decided 
increase  of  heat. 

The  action  of  the  currents  between  two  plates  throws  much  light 
on  the  therapeutic  uses  of  electricity.  Dr.  Babington  placed  two 
slices  of  muscular  flesh  between  plates  of  copper  and  zinc,  which 
were  bound  together  with  wire.  The  weather  was  warm  and  another 
piece  placed  between  glass  plates  underwent  putrefaction  while  the 
piece  between  the  metallic  plates  was  preserved.  In  the  course  of 
a  few  days  the  decomposition  of  the  salt  in  the  flesh  (chloride  of 
sodium)  produced  a  remarkable  result.  The  soda  went  toward  the 
copper  plate  and  the  chlorine  or  hydrochloric  acid  toward  the  zinc 
plate.     The  part  next  the  zinc  plate  was  completely  hardened,  as  if 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  463 

it  had  been  dried,  and  the  part  next  the  copper  was  almost  dissolved 
by  the  alkaline  action,  and  covered  with  a  transparent,  jelly-like 
substance.  Such  is  the  action  of  these  substances  in  the  body  ;  the 
chlorine  or  hydrochloric  acid  is  a  consolidating,  antiseptic  tonic  and 
the  alkalies  are  the  solvent  elements  for  promoting  dissolution  and 
absorption.  The  chlorine  is  developed  in  the  sphere  of  positive 
electricity  and  the  alkali  in  the  negative,  for  the  resistance  of  the 
nerves  and  flesh  is  such  that  there  is  no  equilibrium  produced,  the 
portion  adjacent  to  the  positive  pole  being  positive  and  that  adjacent 
to  the  negative  being  negative. 

The  healing  of  the  blisters  under  the  silver  plate  induced  Mr. 
Hinton  to  try  the  effect  on  obstinate  sores  and  ulcers,  on  which  he 
found  it  had  a  healing  influence,  although  in  one  case  it  caused  too 
much  congestion  of  blood. 

Surgeon  Spencer  Wells  had  very  interesting  results  from  applying 
oval  plates  of  silver  and  zinc,  from  two  to  four  inches  long,  which 
were  connected  by  a  silver  wire  soldered  to  the  back  of  each  plate. 
The  experience  of  this  application  in  seventy  to  a  hundred  cases  led 
to  these  conclusions. 

The  plates  may  be  applied  to  the  naked  surface  of  the  skin  with- 
out blistering,  if  the  skin  be  moistened  with  an  acid  liquid.  But 
even  the  ordinary  moisture  of  perspiration  will  insure  a  moderate 
effect.  The  plate  of  zinc  was  always  placed  above  the  silver  plate 
as  to  its  location  on  the  body,  so  that  the  current  passed  in  the 
natural,  centrifugal  direction.  If  the  zinc  is  placed  on  an  excoriated 
surface  it  will  produce  an  eschar  in  two  days,  and  in  about  six  days 
it  will  penetrate  through  the  skin,  producing  an  appearance  resem- 
bling a  slough  produced  by  caustic  potash.  But  this  may  be  avoided 
by  placing  the  zinc  on  a  sound  surface.  If  the  sloughing  should  be 
produced  by  the  zinc  plate,  and  its  application  continued,  it  will 
develop  a  dark,  soft,  spongy  surface  discharging  a  fetid  serum.  The 
application  of  the  silver  plate,  however,  produces  a  more  rapid  and 
satisfactory  change  than  the  usual  methods  of  surgery.  Healthy 
granulations  are  produced  and  simple. water  dressing  completes  the 
cure.  The  most  tedious  and  intractable  ulcers  have  been  speedily 
healed  under  the  silver  plate.  But  after  healthy  granulations  have 
been  established  the  silver  plate  should  be  removed,  otherwise  the 
granulations  may  become  exuberant  and  flabby,  or  even  fungou  .. 
showing  an  undue  determination  to  the  spot.  The  beneficial  influ- 
ence depends  upon  the  actual  passage  of  the  current.  For  when  the 
current  passes  down  from  the  zinc  to  the  silver  location,  through  the 
flesh,  it  does  not  act  upon  a  portion  of  the  ulcer  below  the  silver, 
which  may  even  degenerate  while  the  upper  portion  is  healing.     But 


464  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

if  the  silver  be  applied  on  the  lower  portion  of  the  ulcer,  so  as  to 
bring  the  current  through  the  whole  of  it,  the  whole  is  improved  ; 
and  any  ulcers  situated  between  the  plates,  in  the  line  of  the  current, 
will  be  healed,  but  not  those  outside  of  the  line  of  the  current. 

This  mild  application  of  electricity  by  plates  was  found  beneficial 
by  Mr.  Wells  in  several  cases  of  paralysis,  and  he  commends  this 
method  decidedly  as  preferable  to  the  use  of  batteries.  I  entertain  a 
high  opinion  of  the  value  of  galvanic  plates,  and  for  several  years 
have  mentioned  and  explained  this  matter  to  my  students,  but  have 
not  taken  time  to  construct  and  bring  into  use  the  combination  of 
two  plates,  constituting  what  has  been  called  the  Humboldt  battery,- — 
the  application  of  which,  guided  by  Sarcognomy,  I  consider  of  great 
value. 

The  extreme  delicacy  of  the  human  constitution  shows  the  impor- 
tance of  delicate  currents  for  therapeutic  effects,  which  will  not  de- 
compose the  blood  or  promote  ulceration.  The  example  of  the  frog- 
should  teach  us  a  lesson.  Mr.  Wilkinson  estimated  that  the  nerves 
of  the  frog  were  more  than  fifty  thousand  times  as  delicate  in  their 
sensibility  as  the  most  delicate  electrometer.  Two  pieces  of  silver 
and  zinc  with  a  surface  each  less  than  the  hundredth  of  an  inch  pro- 
duced violent  convulsions  in  the  prepared  leg  of  a  frog.  This 
enabled  Matteucci  to  construct  the  most  delicate  galvanoscope  by 
placing  in  a  glass  tube  the  skinned  hind  leg  of  a  frog  with  a  piece  of 
the  sciatic  nerve  attached  hanging  out,  which,  when  touched  with  a 
current  of  the  most  delicate  nature,  such  as  that  between  the  inside 
and  outside  of  a  muscle,  will  throw  the  limb  into  convulsions. 
Even  the  Leyden  jar,  after  it  has  been  discharged  and  repeatedly 
touched  to  remove  all  electricity,  is  capable  of  exciting  convulsions 
in  the  frog  galvanoscope,  and  Dr.  Baconio  of  Milan  made  a  curious 
experiment  in  combining  alternate  slices  of  beet  root  and  walnut 
wood,  and  conducting  a  current  from  this  combination  by  a  leaf  of 
scurvy  grass  to  the  muscles  of  a  frog,  which  became  convulsed  by  the 
contact. 

The  facts  here  presented  enable  us  to  appreciate  the  value  of  the 
negative  pole  as  a  healing  agency  acting  by  concentration  of  circula- 
tion and  nerve  power  so  as  to  increase  the  vital  force  of  the  part  to 
which  it  is  applied,  yielding  an  aid  less  genial  than  that  of  the  human 
hand,  but  still  capable  of  being  a  valuable  therapeutic  help  in  its 
gentle  application,  though  liable  to  producing  chemical  changes  in 
the  blood  and  tissues  which  might  be  very  injurious  if  carried  far. 
These  decompositions  in  the  animal  body  are  not  like  decompositions 
of  mineral  substance,  which  cease  the  moment  the  current  ceases  to 
pass,  but  continue  for  some  hours  after  the  current  has  ceased.     The 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  465 

albumen  of  eggs,  the  structures  of  the  eye  and  muscular  flesh,  when 
subjected  to  electric  currents,  undergo  decomposition,  more  rapidly  in 
dead  than  in  living  structures  ;  which  develops  oxygen  gas  and  acids 
at  the  positive  pole,  hydrogen  gas  and  alkalies  at  the  negative,  —  caus- 
ing a  froth  in  the  egg  and  a  simmering  in  muscular  substance  which 
destroys  its  texture.  The  effects  upon  the  tissues  are  due  largely 
but  not  entirely  to  the  acids  and  alkalies  developed  ;  hence  they  may 
be  counteracted  to  a  considerable  extent  by  introducing  carbonate  of 
soda  or  potassa  at  the  positive  pole  and  tartaric  acid  at  the  negative 
to  combine  with  its  alkalies. 

The  escharotic  action  at  the  zinc  plate  is  mainly  due  to  the  forma- 
tion of  chloride  of  zinc,  which  is  a  powerful  escharotic,  and  would  not 
occur  with  a  different  electrode,  though  the  surface  might  be  blistered. 

The  reader  will  bear  in  mind  that  when  zinc  and  silver  or  zinc  and 
copper  plates  are  applied  to  the  human  body  and  connected  by  a  wire, 
the  current  flows  through  the  flesh  from  the  zinc  to  the  silver  or 
copper  as  it  does  in  the  cells  of  the  battery.  Thus  in  the  flesh  the 
zinc  acts  as  the  positive  pole  of  the  current,  but  in  the  wire  connect- 
ing them  the  current  flows  back  from  the  silver  to  the  zinc.  Thus  the 
silver  or  copper  is  the  positive  pole  as  regards  the  connecting  wires, 
and  in  the  battery  the  wire  connected  with  the  copper  furnishes  the 
positive  and  that  attached  to  the  zinc  the  negative.  In  all  cases  the 
metal  that  oxidizes  most  readily  becomes  the  negative  pole  of  the 
conducting  wires  and  the  other  the  positive,  but  when  the  oxidizing 
metal  is  applied  on  the  body  it  sends  a  positive  current  through  the 
flesh. 

To  apply  these  principles  to  the  treatment  of  disease  I  take  two 
plates  of  steel  (or  iron)  instead  of  zinc,  the  positive,  and  connect  each 
by  a  coiled  steel  insulated  wire  to  a  negative  plate  of  the  same  size 
composed  of  aluminum,  silver,  platinum  or  gold  —  thus  making  two. 
pairs  of  galvanic  plates,  one  for  the  right  and  one  for  the  left  side  — and 
fasten  them  on  the  surface  at  the  proper  localities,  moistening  the 
skin  if  it  be  dry  where  they  are  fastened.  They  are  of  course  to  be 
applied  to  antagonistic  organs,  as  we  reinforce  the  organ  under  the 
negative  pole  by  influence  of  the  positive  upon  its  antagonist.  Thus 
we  may  apply  the  steel  plate  upon  Disease,  Melancholy  and  Sensi. 
bility,  with  the  aluminum  on  Health,  Cheerfulness  and  Hardihood  or 
Heroism.  Every  physician  should  have  a  supply  of  these  plates, 
especially  for  sensitive  constitutions,  and  I  believe  they  may  occupy 
a  large  sphere  in  electric  practice.  They  will  control  a  great  many 
derangements  of  the  female  constitution,  and  maybe  used  in  all  cases 
where  such  a  galvanic  current  is  indicated. 

That    the    galvanic    current    is   a    stimulant  to    motor    nerves    is 


466  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

easily  shown  by  the  fact  that  a  current  applied  to  the  motor  nerves 
of  an  animal  just  killed  will  produce  contraction  of  the  associate  mus- 
cles whether  the  current  be  ascending  or  descending  (inverse  or 
direct).  But  when  the  vital  energy  of  the  nerves  has  been  suspended 
by  applying  ether  between  the  muscle  and  the  galvanized  portion, 
or  by  the  influence  of  woorara  poisoning,  no  muscular  contraction  is 
produced. 

Currents  are  produced  both  by  making  and  breaking  the  connection, 
or  in  other  words  by  the  electric  change,  when  the  current  has  a  cer- 
tain intensity.  But  a  strong  current  flowing  continuously  will  also 
maintain  muscular  contraction,  though  not  with  the  energy  of  an 
alternating  or  interrupted  current. 

But  as  the  current  is  a  stimulus,  its  power  must  have  a  just  propor- 
tion to  the  nervous  excitability.  An  excessive  strength  in  the  current 
will  soon  exhaust  the  excitability  or  paralyze  the  nerve.  Hence  the 
reports  of  observers  have  a  confused  and  contradictory  appearance, 
from  the  different  energies  and  different  directions  of  the  currents, 
which  may  be  stimulant  or  exhaustive,  and  which  also,  if  sufficiently 
strong,  concentrate  excitability  in  the  direction  to  which  the  positive 
current  passes,  and  either  exhaust  it  in  the  opposite  direction  or  pro- 
duce a  slight  increase  altogether  when  the  current  is  delicate.  We 
cannot  specify  what  degree  of  electric  energy  will  stimulate  and  what 
will  exhaust  any  more  than  we  can  tell  how  much  rum  will  stimulate 
and  how  much  will  stupefy,  as  the  result  depends  on  the  individual. 
A  current  down  the  arm  will  greatly  invigorate  its  muscles,  but  its 
increase  may  paralyze  them.  In  an  experiment  of  Dr.  Poore,  the  man 
who  could  only  hold  up  his  arm  with  a  weight  6  minutes  could  hold  it 
1 3-J-  minutes  with  the  aid  of  a  galvanic  current  down  the  arm.  With 
a  current  of  a  certain  strength,  difficult  to  specify,  decided  exhaustion 
is  produced  at  the  cathode  or  negative  pole,  so  that  this  portion  of 
the  nerve  will  not  respond,  though  the  nerve  may  still  be  active  below 
the  part  stimulated.  It  is  supposed  that  this  exhaustion  is  partly 
caused  by  the  negative  development  of  an  alkaline  condition,  but  it  is 
certainly  due  to  a  relaxing  influence  from  negative  predominance. 

The  motor  nerves  of  an  animal  just  dead  are  able  to  excite  the  mus- 
cles under  the  influence  of  moderate  currents,  either  direct  or  inverse, 
both  at  their  closing  and  opening.  When  the  excitability  has  had  time 
to  diminish  the  direct  current  produces  contractions  only  on  closing 
and  the  inverse  only  on  opening.  Where  excitability  is  further  dimin- 
ished, the  inverse  current  produces  no  effect  —  and  the  direct  only  on 
closing. 

This  is  explained  by  the  fact  that  inverse  currents  drive  the  nervous 
force  from  the    muscle    toward  the    spine,  which   reacts  when  they 


CHAP.     XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  467 

cease,  and  the  direct  currents  send  it  toward  the  muscle,  and  hence 
are  most  effective  where  the  excitability  is  feeble.  Inverse  currents 
of  sufficient  energy  send  a  stimulus  toward  the  spine  which  makes  it 
more  excitable,  and  direct  currents  of  a  certain  energy  exhaust  the 
spinal  power.  In  man  movements  are  produced  on  closing  the  circuit 
—  and  if  the  current  be  sufficiently  increased,  movements  also  occur 
on  opening,  and  with  a  greater  increase  a  constant  or  tetanic  con- 
traction is  produced. 

Beyond  these  general  principles,  the  details  of  experiments  do  not 
teach  us  much,  as  they  are  more  numerous  than  lucid,  and  it  is  not  very 
interesting  to  study  the  conflicting  reports  of  Nobili,  Pfluger,  Volta, 
Ritter,  Fick,  Rosenthal,  Dubois-Reymond,  Eckhard,  Heidenhain, 
Eulenberg,  Von  Bezold,  Cyon,  Rcmak,  Ziemssen,  Brenner  and 
others,  in  which  we  observe  the  effects  of  currents  of  various  inten- 
sity and  duration  and  of  the  reaction  following  in  various  degrees  of 
vital  energy  and  sensibility.  Althaus  recognizes  the  irregularity 
and  departure  from  general  rules  in  human  subjects,  both  in  healthy 
and  nervous  conditions. 

It  is  obvious  that  a  current  toward  a  muscle  must  tend  to  keep  up 
its  activity,  and  that  an  opposite  current  must  have  an  opposite  effect, 
unless  it  is  carried  to  the  spinal  cord  with  sufficient  force  to  stimulate 
it,  which  a  feeble  current  would  not. 

It  is  true,  however,  that  a  weak  inverse  current  generally  increases 
the  excitability  of  the  parts  above  it.  A  strong  current  toward  a 
muscle  increases  its  power  and  endurance,  and  may  prevent  fatigue 
or  overcome  it  when  it  has  arisen,  for  the  current  carries  blood  and 
nervous  energy  to  the  muscle,  but  when  the  muscle  is  completely 
under  a  prolonged  negative  influence  it  loses  its  power. 

A  strong  inverse  current,  which  would  excite  the  spinal  energy  if 
the  negative  pole  were  somewhat  obstructed  in  its  access,  would  not 
have  this  effect  if  the  negative  pole  had  better  access  than  the  posi- 
tive, so  as  to  establish  an  extreme  negative  condition. 

These  principles  explain  many  of  the  reports.  Matteucci  relieved 
frogs  whentetanized  by  strychnia,  by  an  inverse  current ;  for  the  neg- 
ative pole  had  free  access  to  the  spine.  The  direct  current  increased 
the  tetanus  because  it  brought  the  positive  to  the  spine  and  stimu- 
lated the  muscles,  yet  it  would  not  have  been  impossible  to  give  relief 
by  a  downward  current  confined  to  the  spine,  which  should  exhaust  it. 
M.  Farini  relieved  a  patient  from  tetanus  by  a  current  from  the 
sacrum  to  the  nape  of  the  neck. 

Where  the  sensibility  of  the  nerve  has  been  exhausted  by  a  direct 
or  inverse  current  it  is  more  sensitive  to  the  opposite.  Hence  the 
alternate  currents  produced  by  the  commutator  are  of  great  value. 


468  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII, 

Flowing  between  the  spinal  cord  and  muscles  it  sustains  both,  while 
the  direct  current,  might,  if  prolonged,  exhaust  the  spine,  and  the  in- 
verse might  throw  it  into  a  state  of  excitement  running  into  tetanus. 

The  induced  current  has  far  greater  energy  than  the  galvanic. 
An  induction  current  from  a  single  cell  would  be  a  much  more  dis- 
turbing element  than  a  galvanic  current  from  ten  or  fifteen.  More- 
over, being  a  reciprocating  current,  its  energy  as  a  stimulant  is  derived 
mainly  from  its  sudden  changes.  An  electric  current  makes  its  chief 
exciting  impression  at  the  opening  and  closing  of  the  circuit,  by  the 
suddenness  of  the  change.  The  impression  at  the  interruption  of  the 
current  is  weaker  than  at  the  beginning.  Duchenne  estimates  the 
interruption  of  the  current  from  120  cells  about  equal  in  effect  to  the 
beginning  of  a  current  from  20.  If  the  galvanic  current  is  designed 
to  produce  much  effect  in  muscular  contraction  it  should  be  frequently 
interrupted.  Hence  the  Faradic  current  acts  as  a  very  powerful  stim- 
ulus, which  may  over-excite  and  exhaust,  unless  applied  with  a  mod- 
eration that  is  not  always  observed,  but  it  has  very  little  chemical  and 
alterative  action.  The  sedative  influence  of  a  mild  continuous  gal- 
vanic current  (says  Onimus)  differs  from  the  stimulating  influence  of 
the  Faradic  as  much  as  a  warm  bath  differs  from  a  cold  douche. 

The  Faradic  current  applied  to  bloodvessels  causes  a  prompt  con- 
traction, diminishing  the  supply  of  blood  and  accelerating  the  flow, 
just  like  any  other  violent  stimulus  — or  rather  it  excites  the  contrac- 
tility of  the  vessels  so  as  to  accelerate  the  circulation,  but  soon  over- 
excites  the  contractile  tissue  so  as  to  reduce  the  calibre  of  the  arteries, 
and  by  over-exciting  so  exhausts  their  vital  energy  as  to  leave  the 
blood  vessels  in  the  same  paralytic  state  of  expansion  which  follows 
the  section  of  their  nerves  which  belong  to  the  ganglionic  system. 
In  this  it  entirely  resembles  other  violent  stimulants,  such  as  ammonia 
and  sulphuric  acid,  which  act  in  the  same  manner  when  applied 
directly  to  the  bloodvessels  or  to  their  nerves. 

Certain  experimenters  who  did  not  appreciate  the  excessive  energy 
of  Faraclism,  reported  that  its  effect  was  simply  the  contraction  and 
closing  of  bloodvessels,  but  more  cautious  investigation  has  shown 
that  it  has  some  power  of  accelerating  the  circulation,  like  the  galvanic 
current,  when  gradually  or  gently  applied. 

Rationally  we  may  presume  that  a  Faradic  current  being  analogous 
to  momentary  and  rapidly  alternating  galvanic  currents,  its  influence 
might  be  analyzed  and  understood  by  studying  the  action  of  the  gal- 
vanic and  the  effect  of  interruptions. 

As  the  Faradic  is  a  current  of  infinitesimal  duration,  often  repeated, 
its  effect  must  be  the  same  as  that  of  a  galvanic  current  of  similar 
interruptions,  if  the  duration  of  the  galvanic  could  be  made  as  brief 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  469 

by  a  suitable  apparatus  ;  but  as  it  is  a  current  of  continuity,  with  a  few 
interruptions  or  more  as  we  direct,  it  must  produce  those  effects 
which  belong  to  continued  impression  of  one  kind,  while  the  Faradic 
produces  only  the  impression  of  the  shocks.  Yet  machinery  might 
be  devised  which  would  prolong  the  Faradic  currents  to  the  galvanic 
character,  or  shorten  the  galvanic  current  to  the  Faradic  character, 
with  more  of  shock  than  continuity.  Yet  even  then  the  alternating 
character  of  the  Faradic  currents  would  deprive  them  of  the  chemical 
or  electrolytic  character  which  belongs  to  the  galvanic,  and  it  would 
require  a  nice  calculation  or  adjustment  to  reduce  their  electro-motive 
force  to  the  standard  of  the  continuous  current.  (Since  writing  this 
I  find  that  Dr.  Neumann  has  taken  exactly  the  same  view,  and  made 
the  experiments  with  suitable  apparatus,  which  give  the  most  perfect 
demonstration  possible,  for  which  he  is  entitled  to  the  honor  of  solv- 
ing a  neglected  problem.) 

Galvanic  currents  may  be  made  to  imitate  the  Faradic  by  what  is 
called  a  commutator  or  current  reverser,  of  which  several  forms  have 
been  manufactured.  With  the  galvanic  battery  and  a  commutator  we 
may  readily  change  from  the  continuous  to  the  interrupted  and  the 
alternating.  The  alternating  current  is  often  desirable.  The  feature 
of  reciprocity  or  alternation  which  distinguishes  the  Faradic  current 
is  not  entirely  absent  from  the  simple  galvanic,  for  the  passage  of  the 
galvanic  current  and  its  interruption  produce  a  reversed  current  in 
the  patient,  which  can  be  demonstrated  by  taking  a  galvanic  current 
through  the  hands  and  then  applying  the  hands  to  a  galvanometer. 

The  flow  of  galvanic  and  primary  currents  through  the  human  body 
is  never  confined  to  a  straight  line.  They  affect  parts  far  out  of  the 
direct  line,  —  farther  as  they  are  stronger,  —  and  produce  another  effect 
but  little  understood,  by  the  law  of  induction,  by  which  every  current 
passing  through  conductors  tends  to  produce  a  parallel  and  opposite 
current  in  its  immediate  vicinity. 

In  speaking  of  Faradic  currents,  for  comparison  we  refer  to  the 
pure  induction  current  of  the  second  coil,  for  the  current  of  the  first 
coil  or  primary  current  is  not  a  pure  induction  current,  but  a  com- 
pound of  galvanic,  magnetic,  and  inductive  influences  —  that  is  to  say, 
it  is  a  galvanic  current,  but  is  modified  by  its  position  in  a  coil,  and 
by  the  reaction  of  the  magnet.  Hence  it  differs  materially  from  the 
current  of  the  second  helix,  which  is  a  pure  induction  current,  with 
the  intensity  and  the  perfect  alternation  of  movement  which  we  asso- 
ciate with  the  idea  of  Faradism,  while  the  current  of  the  first  helix, 
with  less  intensity,  from  its  shorter,  coarser  wire,  has  also  no  recip- 
rocity of  effect,  being  a  one-way  current.  The  primary  o-alvanic  cur- 
rent, upon  which  all  depends,  would  be  scarcely  felt  at  all  by  the 


47°  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

patient,  —  it  is  only  the  magnetic  energy  and  the  breaking  which 
impresses  him.  There  is  also  an  induced  current  in  the  primary  wire, 
called  the  extra  current,  produced  by  the  action  of  the  primary  coils 
on  each  other,  and  flowing  in  the  direction  opposite  the  primary  cur- 
rent, but  what  part  this  bears  in  the  general  result  has  not  been 
clearly  explained. 

The  difference  in  the  currents  is  partly  due  to  the  first  helix  being 
composed  of  shorter  and  thicker  wire,  which  gives  it  a  greater  power 
of  transmission,  while  the  second  helix,  of  much  longer  and  finer  wire, 
transmits  less  electricity  with  greater  tension.  The  difference 
between  the  first  and  second  helix  currents  is,  according  to  Duchenne, 
as  great  as  that  between  warm  and  boiling  water.  Yet  writers  often 
neglect  to  mark  this  difference,  and  speak  of  Faradization  without 
mentioning  the  very  important  point,  whether  they  are  using  the 
primary  or  secondary  helix  current, — the  primary  being  mild  and 
analogous  to  the  galvanic,  while  the  secondary  is  the  harsh  and  over- 
powering current  which  requires  so  much  caution.  This  current 
makes  a  strong  impression  on  the  skin,  which  can  be  carried  to  the 
production  of  acute  pain,  but  produces  no  other  disturbance  than  a 
slight  erythema.  The  second  helix  current  is  very  powerful  in  this 
respect,  and  is  very  efficient  in  neuralgic  affections  and  cutaneous 
anaesthesia.  It  has  also  greater  power  of  penetrating  the  muscles 
than  the  first.  The  action  is  superficial  when  dry  electrodes  are 
applied  on  a  dry  skin,  —  more  penetrating  when  broad,  moist  elec- 
trodes are  applied  firmly  to  the  surface. 

The  character  of  galvanic  currents  and  their  relation  to  the  Faradic 
have  been  well  illustrated  by  Onimus  and  Legros.  They  have  shown 
by  numerous  experiments  that  a  moderate  galvanic  current  in  the 
centrifugal  direction,  that  is,  in  the  direction  of  the  flow  of  the  arterial 
blood  and  the  nerve  forces,  uniformly  accelerates  the  flow  of  blood, 
and  increases  the  action  of  the  bloodvessels,  so  as  to  cause  greater 
fulness  of  blood  and  greater  blood  pressure  in  the  parts  which  the 
arteries  supply,  but  that  the  reverse  or  centripetal  current,  against 
the  flow  of  blood  and  nerve  power,  diminishes  the  flow  of  blood  and 
the  blood  pressure,  though  not  as  much  as  the  centrifugal  current 
increases  it.  A  current  from  the  neck  of  a  dog  to  the  portion  of  the 
brain  exposed  by  trephining  the  cranium,  caused  such  an  increased 
flow  to  the  brain  as  to  make  it  project  beyond  the  limit  of  the  open- 
ing. 

The  galvanic  currents  are  both  more  gentle  and  more  permanent 
in  their  effects.  That  they  are  also  more  congenial  to  life  is  shown 
by  their  effect  on  the  ciliary  motions.  Onimus  and  Legros  placed 
on  a  glass  plate  the  vibratile  epitheliums  of  the  frog  and  subjected  them 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  471 

to  galvanic  currents.  The  ciliary  movements  were  notably  increased 
by  the  galvanic  currents.  When  they  had  become  slow,  they  were 
revived  when  the  current  started.  Induction  currents,  however  gen- 
tle, checked  the  movements  and  soon  abolished  them.  They  were, 
however,  gradually  revived  by  the  galvanic,  after  the  cessation.  Sim- 
ilar experiments  were  made  on  the  ciliary  bodies  from  mammalian 
animals.  Spermatozoid  bodies  subjected  to  the  same  experiment 
manifested  the  same  difference  of  effect  from  galvanic  and  Faradic 
currents,  but  not  to  the  same  extent. 

In  attempting  to  check  the  ciliary  movements  by  a  continuous  cur- 
rent in  the  opposite  direction  to  their  waving  motion  (which  might 
be  called  relatively  an  ascending  current),  they  found  that,  instead 
of  checking,  it  accelerated  the  motions. 

Gentle  galvanic  currents  have  the  characteristic  of  a  healthful  stim- 
ulus, in  the  fact  that  they  promote  normal  processes  and  make  an 
impression  which  does  not  exhaust  vitality  and  cause  an  immediate 
collapse,  but  continues  for  a  time  after  the  application.  The  increased 
salivation  caused  by  a  galvanic  current  applied  to  the  salivary  glands 
continues  for  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours.  Mantegazza  observed 
great  increase  of  digestion  in  the  stomachs  of  frogs  under  the  in- 
fluence of  galvanism,  and  a  similar  observation  was  made  by  Onimus 
and  Legros  in  the  stomachs  of  dogs,  which  they  inspected  through  a 
fistula.  These  effects  are  developed  at  the  negative  pole  of  the  gal- 
vanic current,  which  attracts  the  sanguineous  and  nervous  flow,  while 
the  positive  pole  diminishes  the  afflux  and  vital  activity. 

"The  influence  of  electricity  on  organic  bodies  is  prolonged  more 
or  less  beyond  the  direct  action.  It  is  not  the  electricity  that  cures, 
but  the  modifications  it  produces.  When  the  nerve  cells  are  excited, 
they  become  a  centre  of  activity.  It  is  an  error  to  believe  that  con- 
tinued currents  act  only  during  their  application." 

The  genial  influence  of  galvanic  currents  on  the  muscular  system 
enables  one  to  do  more  work,  and  when  already  fatigued  it  diminishes 
or  removes  the  fatigue. 

The  value  of  galvanism  for  the  muscles  was  well  illustrated  by  Dr. 
Poore  in  his  text  book  of  electricity.  He  says:  "  There  is  no  more 
important  effect  of  the  constant  current  than  what  may  be  called  its 
refreshing  effect.  Heidenhain  succeeded  in  restoring  the  excitability 
of  the  muscles  of  an  exhausted  frog,  bypassing  a  strong  galvanic  cur- 
rent through  them.  This  fact  has  long  remained  without  any  practi- 
cal application  of  it." 

"The  first  patient  in  whom  the  author  observed  the  refreshing 
effects  of  the  current  was  one  who  suffered  very  acutely  from  this 
feeling  of  fatigue,  and  always  expressed  great  satisfaction  during  the 


4/2  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

employment  o«f  the  current,  and  frequently  used  the  words  '  comfort- 
able1 and  'pleasant'  to  express  his  sensations.  He  also  often  said 
'that  seems  to  give  me  strength,  —  to  give  me  a  sense  of  power  in  the 
arm.'  The  number  of  elements  employed  was  sufficient  to  cause  an 
appreciable  but  not  painful  sensation  to  the  patient.  This  seemed  to 
help  the  supinators  over  their  difficulty,  and  the  patient  continued  to 
pronate  and  supinate  his  hand,  without  the  least  trouble,  saying  at 
the  time  that  'he  could  do  it  much  easier  when  the  current:  passed,' 
and  also  that  it  'seemed  to  <rive  him  strength.' 

"  The  author  found  another  (also  suffering  from  winter's  cramp) 
who  said  precisely  the  same  thing,  that  he  could  accomplish  repeated 
muscular  acts  with  far  greater  ease  during  the  passage  of  a  current, 
and  that  after  the  employment  of  the  current  he  had  a  feeling  of 
strength  and  power  in  the  arm.  He  was  a  medical  man  himself 
accustomed  to  the  employment  of  electricity." 

To  test  this  matter  by  experiment  he  asked  a  patient  to  hold  a 
weight  out  horizontally  with  his  left  arm.  In  four  minutes  he  had  to 
complain  on  account  of  the  fatigue  and  pain ;  then,  after  applying 
the  positive  rheophore  in  the  axilla  and  the  negative  on  the  painful 
muscles,  he  promptly  said  :  "All  the  fatigue  is  gone;  I  feel  just  as 
though  some  one  had  given  my  hand  a  support."  Subsequently  the 
same  patient  supported  a  weight  on  his  left  hand,  but  could  hold  it 
only  six  minutes.  The  next  day  the  arm  was  galvanized,  and  he  was 
asked  to  repeat  the  experiment.  While  it  was  in  progress,  a  galvanic 
current  was  occasionally  passed  down  through  the  fatigued  muscles, 
and  he  sustained  the  same  weight  thirteen  minutes  and  a  half. 

"  Similar  experiments  to  these  (says  Dr.  P.)  have  been  tried  on 
several  of  the  author's  friends,  and  they  all  tend  to  show  that  the  en- 
durance of  voluntary  muscular  action  is  enormously  increased  by  the 
passage  of  a  continuous  current,  and  that  the  feeling  of  fatigue  both 
during  and  after  the  prolonged  effort  is  mitigated  or  entirely  obviated. 
Experiments  have  also  been  made,  and  with  results  which  tend  to 
show  that  the  force  as  well  as  the  endurance  of  voluntary  muscular 
action  is  increased  by  employing  a  galvanic  current."  His  experi- 
ments on  himself  in  squeezing  a  dynamometer  with  the  hand,  with 
and  without  galvanism,  showed  an  aggregate  of  667  pounds  of  force 
without  galvanism  and  908  pounds  with  it. 

These  effects  are  explained  by  the  increased  afflux  of  blood  and 
nerve  force  caused  by  the  galvanic  current. 

The  action  of  Faradism  on  the  muscles  is  that  of  an  exhaustive 
stimulus.  Dr.  Poore  says  :  "Select  a  small  muscle,  *  *  Faradize  it, 
using  a  current  of  sufficient  strength  to  cause  a  contraction  which  is 
too  forcible  to  be  overcome  by  the  will,  and  it  will  be  found  that  after 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  473 

three  or  four  minutes  the  contraction  becomes  less  and  less  strong 
as  the  irritability  diminishes,  and  that  the  will  is  soon  able  to  over- 
come the  artificial  contraction,  while  the  same  current  applied  to  the 
corresponding  muscle  in  the  opposite  hand  causes  a  contraction 
against  which  the  will  is  absolutely  powerless.  Ultimately  the  Fara- 
dized  muscle  will  refuse  to  respond  either  to  mental  stimulation  or  to 
Faradism." 

"  M.  Vulpian  found  that  when  a  strong  Faradic  current  was  applied 
to  the  heart  of  a  dog,  rhythmic  contraction  at  once  ceased  ;  violent 
tremor  of  the  cardiac  walls  occurred  for  three  or  four  minutes, 
followed  by  a  slight  trembling  for  the  same  space  of  time,  and  then 
all  movement  ceased.  The  muscular  substance  became  pale.  When 
all  movement,  even  fibrillary,  had  ceased,  in  the  ventricles,  their  walls 
seemed  to  have  lost  almost  entirely  their  contractility.  When  touched 
again  with  the  rheophores,  there  was  not  the  slightest  contraction,  nor 
did  stimulation  by  rhythmical  impression  by  the  hand  reproduce  their 
movement."  This  result  was  entirely  independent  of  the  pneumo- 
gastric  nerve,  and  when  that  nerve  was  paralyzed  by  atropine  it  made 
no  difference.  It  would  be  well  for  every  practitioner  to  realize  the 
influence  of  each  current  on  himself  before  applying  it  to  a  patient. 

The  great  dispersive  power  of  electric  currents  where  they  enter 
the  body  necessarily  renders  it  possible  for  them  to  be  used  to  the 
extreme  interference  with,  and  suspension  of,  all  vital  processes. 
The  continuous  current  passed  for  a  sufficient  time  through  the  limbs 
of  an  animal,  or  through  the  nerves,  produces  even  paralysis,  and  its 
action  upon  sensitive  nerves  is  quite  benumbing. 

An  electric  current  carries  osmosis  with  it  so  effectively  that  when 
two  masses  of  liquid  are  separated  by  a  porous  membrane,  an  electric 
current  will  carry  the  fluids  from  the  compartment  which  receives 
the  positive  pole  to  that  which  receives  the  negative,  which  will  thus 
be  raised  above  the  level  of  the  other. 

The  action  of  the  positive  pole  being  dispersive  as  to  fluids  and 
nervaura,  is  at  the  same  time  consolidating  or  contractile  to  the  tissue, 
hardening  the  substance  as  if  by  the  influence  of  chlorine.  The 
negative  pole,  on  the  other  hand,  has  a  solvent  influence  on  solids, 
promoting  dissolution  by  alkaline  action.  Hence  the  advantage 
which  I  believe  electro-therapeutists  have  not  sufficiently  observed, 
of  alternating  currents  in  opposite  directions.  The  negative  pole, 
assisting  in  the  dissolution  of  morbid  structures,  and  bringing  into 
play  the  alkaline  action  which  is  nature's  great  agent  for  absorption, 
while  the  positive  pole  applied  to  the  collected  fluids  disperses  them. 
The  galvanic  action  is  so  powerful,  chemically,  that  in  an  experi- 
ment of  Sir  H.  Davy  with   150  pairs  for  five  days,  upon  muscular 


474  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

fibres,  all  the  alkaline  elements  were  carried  over  to  the  negative  pole 
and  all  the  acids  to  the  positive. 

When  the  object  is  simply  to  restore  a  healthy  action  and  disperse 
morbid  conditions,  as  in  treating  tumors,  the  dispersive  energy  of 
the  positive  pole  is  more  efficient  than  the  vitalizing  energy  of  the 
negative.  Onimus  passed  a  galvanic  current  through  two  tumors 
that  were  equal  in  size  and  large  as  an  egg  ;  the  one  to  which  the 
positive  pole  was  applied  made  greater  progress  in  healing  than  the 
other,  but  both  were  cured.  The  dispersive  action  of  the  positive 
pole  is  very  valuable  in  counteracting  inflammation  and  pain.  Dr. 
Reliquet  describes  a  case  in  which  a  very  painful  and  irritated 
bladder,  containing  a  large  calculus,  was  relieved  of  pain  and  spasm 
by  a  galvanic  current,  the  positive  pole  being  in  the  bladder  and  the 
negative  on  the  abdomen.  Electro-therapeutists  have  recorded  a 
great  number  of  similar  facts. 

As  to  overcoming  pain,  Dr.  Poore  says  :  "  It  would  almost  seem  to 
be  one  of  the  most  powerful  anodynes  which  we  possess,  and  its 
power  in  this  respect  is  hardly  as  yet  fully  appreciated  by  the  pro- 
fession. In  the  out-patient  room  we  have  been  accustomed  for  some 
time  past  to  try  the  effect  of  the  continuous  current  upon  pain  of  all 
kinds,  whether  depending  on  some  obvious  organic  cause  or  not.  In 
many  cases  we  have  found  that  the  pain  has  been  alleviated,  and  in  a 
large  proportion  of  these  it  has  been  absolutely  cured. 

"When  one  is  using  electricity  for  the  treatment  of  pain  and  other 
subjective  symptoms  it  is  often  a  good  plan  to  begin  with  a  mock 
application  of  it,  and  in  this  way  see  how  much  of  our  result  is  due 
to  the  patient's  imagination  and  how  much  to  electricity. 

"All  three  forms  of  electricity  are  employed  for  the  relief  of  pain, 
but  the  most  generally  useful  for  such  purposes  is  undoubtedly 
galvanism." 

The  positive  pole  is  most  generally  applicable  to  the  relief  of  pain, 
but  there  are  also  conditions  which  are  benefited  by  the  application 
of  the  negative,  when  there  is  no  hyperemia  or  active  irritation. 

Dr.  Anstie,  who  considered  Faradization  useless  in  neuralgia,  said  : 
"The  constant  current  is  a  remedy  for  neuralgia  unapproached  in 
power  by  any  other  save  only  blistering  and  hypodermic  morphia,  and 
even  the  latter  is  surpassed  by  it  in  permanence  of  effect." 

Evidently  the  enlightened  physician  who  knows  how  to  combine 
electric  and  medical  influences,  who  can  send  in  the  influence  or  the 
substance  of  cocaine,  theine  or  morphine  in  combination  with  the 
galvanic  currrent,  has  a  great  advantage  over  those  who  know  nothing 
of  this  combination.  They  can  apply  the  remedy  in  their  electrode 
by  passing  the  current  through  it,  or  they  can  apply  it  on  the  sponge 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ,     ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  475 

through   which    the   current   is   passing,    with  absolute  certainty   of 
relief. 

Dr.  A.  recommends  applications  of  five  to  ten  minutes,  never 
beyond  fifteen.  He  would  include  the  morbid  part  between  the 
poles  or  apply  the  negative  nearer  the  spine.  He  does  not  find  the 
electric  treatment  of  much  service  in  cervico-occipital  neuralgia,  yet 
some  cures  have  been  reported. 

On  the  other  hand  Dr.  A.  D.  Rockwell  says  :  "  There  can  be  no 
question  that  galvanism  has  a  far  wider  range  in  this  direction  than 
Farad  ism  ;  yet  in  consideration  of  the  fact  that  the  latter  has  been 
so  much  ignored,  it  seems  necessary  to  say  a  word  in  its  defence. 
My  experience  will  not  allow  me  to  doubt  that  Faradism  is  not  only 
invaluable  in  many  forms  of  pain,  but  in  certain  conditions  relieves 
where  galvanism  is  not  only  useless  but  worse  than  useless,  since  it 
serves  only  to  exaggerate  the  existing  distress.  True  neuralgia  as 
defined  by  Anstie  is  without  doubt  most  successfully  treated  by 
galvanism,  while  hysterical  neuralgia  and  the  so-called  pseudo- 
neuralgias  which  are  simply  forms  of  pain,  occupying  certain  areas, 
and  running  seemingly  in  the  direction  of  certain  nerves,  yield  most 
readily  to  Faradism.  ...  In  the  great  majority  of  cases  of 
neuralgia,  where  firm  pressure  over  the  affected  nerves  aggravates 
the  pain,  the  galvanic  current  is  indicated,  while  the  Faradic  current 
has  the  greatest  power  to  relieve,  when  such  pressure  does  not  cause 
an  increase  of  pain." 

"  General  Faradization  is  to  me  absolutely  indispensable  in  the 
practice  of  electro-therapeutics."  He  considers  the  constant  current 
of  more  extensive  application,  but  Faradization  is  used  in  one-third 
of  all  his  practice.  "  There  is  no  one  tonic  influence  in  medicine 
comparable  with  it  in  power,  none  to  which  can  be  accorded  such  a 
wide  range  of  application."  "  In  submitting  a  patient  to  general 
Faradization,  .  .  the  hair  being  thoroughly  wet,  the  hand  is 
passed  with  firm  pressure  over  the  entire  surface  of  the  head.  In 
treating  the  forehead,  which  is  far  more  sensitive  to  the  current  than 
any  other  portion  of  the  body,  the  operator  should  first  press  his 
moistened  hand  firmly  over  the  part,  and  then  make  the  connection 
with  his  other  hand  on  the  sponge  of  the  positive  pole.  The  strength 
of  the  current  can  be  sufficiently  regulated  by  increasing  or  decreas- 
ing the  grasp  of  the  positive  pole  held  in  the  right  hand." 

[These  are  excellent  suggestions,  but  Dr.  R.  seems  quite  uncon- 
scious that  he  was  using  as  much  animal  magnetism  or  nervaura  as 
electricity,  and  perhaps  in  some  cases  more.  There  are  great 
numbers  of  rational  practitioners  who  would  relieve  by  such  an 
application  of  the  hands  without  using  an  electrode,  and  in  using  the 


4/6  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

electrode,  Dr.  R.  pretty  effectively  limited  the  access  of  the  positive 
current  by  obstructing  it  with  over  five  feet  from  one  hand  to  the 
other,  thus  placing  the  patient  under  control  of  the  negative  pole, 
and  extending  the  negative  influence  into  his  right  arm,  while  he 
supposed  himself  to  be  giving  a  positive  current  to  the  patient.] 

"  An  application  of  the  Faradic  current  to  the  head  in  many  forms 
of  neuralgia,  nervous  headache  and  insomnia,  if  properly  given,  is 
capable  of  affording  instant  and  most  grateful  relief.  There  are 
very  few,  however,  who  administer  it  with  any  degree  of  precision 
and  skill,  and  as  a  consequence  we  witness  aggravation  instead  of 
relief  of  pain.  The  slightest  concentration  of  current  in  such  situa- 
tions as  the  forehead  is  capable  of  exciting  pain,  even  in  the  normal 
condition,  while  a  proper  diffusion  over  a  broad  surface,  with  equal 
and  gentle  pressure,  affords  a  sensation  as  agreeable  as  it  is  curative." 

Dr.  Rockwell  attaches  great  value  justly  to  the  use  of  the  hand 
as  the  electrode,  but  appreciates  it  only  for  mechanical  reasons,  not 
understanding  its  nervauric  value.  He  has  been  fortunate  in  dis- 
covering the  tonic  regions  indicated  by  Sarcognomy,  as  follows  :  — 

"The  back  part  of  the  head  and  upper  portion  of  the  spine  (cilio- 
spinal  centre)  will  usually  bear  powerful  applications,  and  it  is  an 
interesting  and  important  fact,  that  applications  to  this  centre  will 
produce  far  greater  tonic  effects  than  when  the  pole  is  applied  to  any 
one  other  portion  of  the  body.  Care  should  be  taken  to  avoid  all 
bony  prominences,  since  slight  currents  in  these  regions  give  great 
pain."  "  There  is  no  remedy  to  the  effects  of  which  there  is  such  a 
varying  degree  of  susceptibility  as  to  this.  Not  until  the  patient  is 
submitted  to  a  careful  electrical  test  can  we  be  sure  that  what  we 
might  consider  a  very  gentle  treatment  will  not  be  too  severe  for  the 
case  in  land." 

Dr.  Rockwell  is  almost  as  strong  an  advocate  of  Faradization  as 
Duchenne.  He  says  :  "  On  the  temperature,  the  effect  of  general 
Faradization  is  to  lower  it,  when  abnormally  high.  It  also  acts  as  an 
equalizer,  and  patients  who  suffer  from  cold  feet  and  creeping  chills 
over  the  body  become  sensible  of  a  feeling  of  warmth  even  in  the 
midst  of  a  seance.  General  Faradization  has  very  little  influence  on 
the  normal  pulse,  but  its  power  to  reduce  the  frequency  of  the  beats 
when  it  is  abnormally  high,  in  conditions  of  nervous  exhaustion,  is 
distinctly  marked.  In  the  treatment  of  such  cases  I.  have,  in  a  seance 
of  five  minutes,  frequently  tested  a  fall  in  the  pulse  beat  varying 
from  ten  to  thirty  to  the  minute.  At  the  same  time  the  heart's 
action  becomes  more  regular  and  stronger.  An  almost  invariable 
accompaniment  of  general  Faradization  and  central  galvanization  is 
an   improvement    in  sleep.     .     .     A   better   appetite   and   increased 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  477 

power  of  digestion,  although  not  observed  so  early  in  the  treatment, 
is  a  pretty  constant  symptom,  while  through  the  direct  mechanical 
effects  of  the  current  on  the  intestines,  and  its  influence  over  the 
secreting  processes,  more  or  less  temporary  and  permanent  relief  is 
afforded  in  constipation.  The  influence  of  general  Faradization  over 
nutrition  is  perhaps  in  no  way  more  marked  than  in  the  occasional 
increase  in  the  size  and  weight  of  the  body,  so  rapid  and  perceptible 
to  the  eye  that  it  need  not  be  confirmed  by  reference  to  the  scales. 
Finally,  through  tendencies,  both  direct  and  indirect,  to  im prove  t 
nutrition,  we  observe  increased  disposition  and  capacity  for  intellect- 
ual and  physical  labor."  Of  course  these  beneficial  effects  are  due 
to  moderate  and  prudent  use  of  Faradism,  especially  when  combined 
with  the  personal  influence  of  the  operator. 

But  such  treatment  is  a  very  blind  and  emphatically  empirical 
business.  The  operator  rambles  all  over  the  body  without  knowing 
just  where  the  several  effects  are  developed,  —  like  a  savage  thump- 
ing the  keys  of  a  piano  and  developing  accidental  melody.  The 
comfortable  repose  is  developed  just  behind  the  arms  ;  the  increased 
nutrition  is  developed  at  the  upper  exterior  part  of  the  thigh,  and  on 
the  dorsal  region  ;  the  relief  of  constipation  comes  through  the 
lower  dorsal  and  lumbar  regions ;  the  improved  appetite  through 
the  lower  dorsal  and  upper  abdominal  regions  ;  the  relief  of  the 
heart  through  the  shoulders  and  upper  dorsal  region  ;  the  lowering 
of  the  pulse  through  the  foot,  tibial  region,  Relaxation  and  Tran- 
quillity. 

Duchenne  says  :  "  In  progressive  muscular  atrophy,  muscular  Fara_ 
dization  will  sometimes  arrest  the  progress  of  the  wasting,  and  will 
even  develop  the  muscles  that  are  on  the  way  to  destruction.  In  glosso- 
labio-laryngeal  paralysis  it  improves  for  a  time  the  articulation  of 
words  and  the  deglutition.  In  locomotor  ataxy,  electro-cutaneous 
Faradization  often  cures  local  anaesthesia  and  consequently  much 
diminishes  the  functional  disorders  that  it  occasions  when  seated  in 
the  extremities.  It  sometimes  causes  the  disappearance  of  fixed 
cutaneous  hyperaesthesia.  Faradization  of  the  eye  may  arrest  atropliy 
of  the  papillae  of  the  optic  nerve  ;  and  lastly,  Faradization  sometimes 
cures  or  removes  paralysis  of  the  motor  muscles  of  the  bladder, 
rectum  and  other  viscera." 

Nevertheless  he  believes  that  in  spite  of  the  temporary  relief 
locomotor  ataxy  and  glosso-labio-laryngeal  paralysis  will  not  be 
permanently  cured.  Remak  and  other  advocates  of  galvanism,  how- 
ever, claim  the  absolute  cure  of  locomotor  ataxy  by  their  methods. 
In  writer's  palsy  he  has  had  no  success.  In  facial  neuralgia  he  believes 
galvanization  curative,  but  has  not  succeeded  with  Faradization.     In 


47$  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

rheumatic  contractions  continuous  currents  produced  improvement 
only,  and  cures  were  completed  by  Faradizing  the  antagonists. 

Galvanization  by  permanent,  continuous,  uninterrupted  currents  for 
a  period  of  half  an  hour  to  several  hours  he  has  found  very  valuable 
in  promoting  absorption,  "in  chronic  articular  affections  with  nodos- 
ities, ganglionic  tumors,  and  in  atrophy  of  the  deltoid,  produced  by 
rheumatism."  In  such  cases,  he  says,  <l  I  have  covered  the  greater 
part  of  the  cutaneous  surface  corresponding  to  the  diseased  organ  or 
region  with  a  moist  rheophore  (a  plate  of  platinized  copper  covered 
with  wet  leather),  and  I  have  placed  a  second  moist  rheophore  higher 
up,  at  a  point  as  near  as  possible  to  the  former;  then  for  half  an 
hour  or  an  hour,  according  to  the  tolerance  of  the  individual,  I 
caused  the  passage  of  a  permanent  continuous  current  from  ten, 
fifteen  or  twenty  elements.  I  have  had  no  occasion  but  to  praise,  in 
their  way,  the  catalytic  effects  of  this  mode  of  galvanization,  and 
although  they  are  usually  very  slowly  produced  I  have  obtained  a 
complete  cure  on  several  occasions." 

This  is  a  process  "which  Faradization  is  unable  to  replace." 

Cutaneous  galvanization  Duchenne  pronounces  very  inefficient,  but 
cutaneous  Faradization  highly  effective,  "  when  it  is  wished  to  pro- 
duce upon  the  skin,  either  for  a  moment  or  during  several  hours,  a 
more  or  less  powerful  revulsion  which  may  be  graduated  from  a  simple 
tingling  to  a  sensation  greater  than  that  produced  by  fire  without  pro- 
ducing the  least  electrolytic  or  calorific  alteration.  I  have  seen  it 
cure  angina  pectoris,  and  very  painful  sciatic  neuralgia,  which  had 
resisted  all  medication  ;  while  by  lesser  degrees  I  have  successfully 
treated  more  or  less  grave  neuroses  and  nervous  maladies."  This 
merely  illustrates  the  effects  of  counter-irritation,  by  any  strong 
application  to  the  skin,  in  relieving  subjacent  organs. 

In  overcoming  contractions  both  galvanism  and  Faradism  have 
succeeded.  In  the  case  of  Mad.  X.,  sixteen  years  of  age,  after  an 
injury  of  the  right  hand  producing  severe  pain  in  the  wrist  resulting 
in  contraction  of  the  muscles  of  the  forearm,  for  which  eminent 
physicians  were  unable  to  do  any  good,  the  pain  at  length  extending 
to  the  shoulder  and  dorsal  region  and  the  contractions  extending  up 
the  muscles  of  the  arm,  the  pain  producing  loss  of  sleep,  galvaniza- 
tion, extensively  tried,  enabled  her  to  open  and  shut  the  hand,  but 
could  make  no  further  improvement,  when  Duchenne  applied  local 
Faradization  to  the  antagonists  of  the  contracted  muscles,  with  vigor- 
ous currents  and  rapid  intermissions,  and  in  half  an  hour  all  contrac- 
tions were  gone  and  she  could  write  and  play  the  piano,  which  had 
been  impossible  for  two  years.  Twelve  seances  quadrupled  the 
strength    of   the   flexors    of   the   fingers.     In   a   subsequent   partial 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS,.  479 

attack,  which  all  medical  means  failed  to  relieve,  the  same  treatment 
overcame  the  contractions,  and  electro-cutaneous  excitation  over  the 
seat  of  the  spinal  pains  diminished  them,  but  the  spinal  pains 
returned  and  electricity  could  not  relieve  them.  This  case  illustrates 
the  necessity  of  not  relying  solely  on  either  current.  Meyer  reports 
that  contractions  are  cured  both  by  induction  and  by  constant 
currents,  "but  they  were  generally  removed  surprisingly  quickly  by 
the  latter,  even  after  they  had  existed  for  years." 

There  appears  to  be  a  sympathy  between  antagonistic  muscles 
through  their  nerves,  which  made  such  a  cure  possible,  and  which 
Remak  has  illustrated  by  producing  contractions  of  muscles  when  he 
galvanized  their  antagonists,  which  he  called  galvano-tonic  contrac- 
tions. Duchenne  recommends  the  alternate  use  of  galvanism  and 
Faradism  in   the  contraction  arising  from  cerebral  causes. 

The  harsher  character  of  Faradic  currents  sometimes  renders  it 
impossible  to  employ  them  at  all.  Duchenne,  the  chief  advocate  of 
Faradism,  says  :  "  I  could  mention  one  of  my  confreres  and  friends,  who 
cannot  submit  to  electrization  without  experiencing  vertigo,  dazzling, 
etc.,  however  feeble  may  be  the  electro-physiological  effects  produced 
in  him."  There  must  be  something  objectionable  in  its  nature,  when 
such  a  case  could  occur  as  appeared  in  the  clinique  of  Andral,  in 
which  a  girl  of  sixteen  with  a  spinal  disorder  "  was  so  sensible  of  the 
electric  influence  that  she  recognized  the  very  faintest  currents  when 
applied  to  the  diseased  side ;  although  the  phenomena  occasioned  by 
the  same  currents  when  applied  to  the  sound  side  were  scarcely 
appreciable.  Every  time  that  she  was  exposed  to  the  Faradic  current, 
however  feeble,  and  for  however  short  a  time,  she  suffered  for  a  long 
period  afterwards  from  pains  in  the  head,  disturbance  of  vision,  gene- 
ral malaise,  a  stitch  in  the  side,  and  a  redoubled  occurrence  of  vom- 
iting, to  which  she  had  long  been  subject."  After  referring  to  this 
case,  Duchenne  says  :  "  Faradization  is  a  two-edged  sword  ;  however, 
by  proper  circumspection  we  may  always  avoid  danger." 

The  harshness  of  its  action  is  illustrated  by  his  statement  :  "  It  is 
possible  to  apply  Faradization  at  once  to  the  upper  and  lower  limbs, 
and  in  a  more  general  manner,  by  placing  both  hands  in  a  basin  of 
water  communicating  with  one  of  the  poles,  and  both  feet  in  another 
basin  communicating  with  the  other.  This  method  excites  the  ner- 
vous centres,  and  especially  the  spinal  cord,  in  a  very  general  and  ener. 
getic  manner,  even  when  the  current  is  of  small  intensity.  If  the 
intermissions  are  rapid,  all  the  muscles  of  the  limbs  are  thrown  into 
tetanic  co7itraction,  and  the  accompanying  sensation,  which  is  felt 
chiefly  in  the  joints,  is  very  painful.  At  this  degree  of  inten- 
sity, this   method  of   electrization  is  followed  by  severe  lumbago." 


4SO  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

This  suggests  the  question  why  M.  Duchenne  is  so  devoted  to  Fara- 
dism. 

Duchenne  also  relates  the  case  of  a  medical  student  who  attempted 
to  follow  the  directions  given  in  his  writings,  and  Faradize  himself  to 
complete  his  restoration  from  an  attack  of  apoplexy  and  hemiplegia, 
a  year  previous,  as  his  movements  were  still  irregular.  "  Having  put 
in  action  an  induction  coil  with  intermittences  (by  a  trembler)  of  great 
rapidity,  he  took  one  of  the  metallic  cylinders  in  each  hand,  so  that 
the  current  passed  through  his  brachial  nerves  from  end  to  end. 
At  the  moment  when  it  began  to  pass,  his  hands  closed  with  great 
force  and  he  was  unable  to  relinquish  the  cylinders.  Feeling  then 
that  his  paralyzed  limb  was  contracting  very  painfully,  he  had  the 
presence  of  mind  to  overturn  the  Bunsen's  pile  with  his  foot.  The 
current  was  stopped  instantly,  but  it  was  too  late.  Its  action,  though 
continued  only  for  a  few  seconds,  had  already  occasioned  serious 
injury.  The  head  was  extremely  painful,  the  contraction  extended  to 
the  whole  side,  and  the  poor  fellow,  who  was  alone  in  his  room,  was 
found  an  hour  later  in  convulsions  upon  the  floor."  He  came  very 
near  dying  in  the  hospital,  and  when  he  left  was  in  much  worse  con- 
dition than  before  he  tried  this  Faradic  experiment  on  himself. 

Of  this  case  Duchenne  says :  "  I  have  come  to  the  conclusion  that 
localized  applications  are  in  such  cases  simply  useless,  but  not  danger- 
ous when  made  with  circumspection.  At  the  commencement  of  my 
researches  I  often  Faradized  by  reflex  action  the  antagonists  to  the 
contracted  muscles  of  hemiplegic  patients,  and  I  sometimes  had  occa- 
sion to  repent  doing  it,  so  that  it  is  necessary  to  be  cautious  in  the 
employment  of  a  method  that  has  proved  to  be  so  dangerous." 
"  Electro-dynamic  baths,  given  in  a  dose  so  feeble  as  not  to  provoke 
muscular  contraction,  produce  an  excitation  that  increases  muscular 
force  in  certain  forms  of  general  paralysis." 

That  such  effects  are  best  produced  by  the  galvanic  current  has 
been  shown  by  Onimus.  In  the  discussion  between  them  Duchenne 
says  :  "  There  is  certainly  no  need  of  experimental  medicine  to  inform 
us  that,  in  its  therapeutic  aspect,  localized  Faradization  is  a  two-edged 
weapon.  Empirical  clinical  observations  soon  convinced  me,  at  the 
beginning  of  my  elect ro-therepeutical  researches,  that  localized  Fara- 
dization, if  applied  to  a  muscle  or  nerve  in  too  full  a  dose  or  for  too 
long  a  time,  may  increase  or  even  produce  paralysis  or  atrophy,  instead 
of  curing  either." 

To  vindicate  his  idea  of  the  equal  safety  and  benefit  in  the  induced 
currents  to  which  he  is  partial,  Duchenne  reports  comparative  exper- 
iments which  he  thinks  satisfactory,  but  which  really  show  the  supe- 
rior mildness  of  the  galvanic. 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  48 1 

His  weakest  possible  Faradic  current,  after  being  reduced  still  fur- 
ther by  passing  through  about  eight  inches  of  water,  produced  greater 
exhaustion  of  the  nerves  of  a  rabbit  in  half  a  min7tte  than  the  strong 
galvanic  current  did  "during  the  whole  time  of  the  experiment,"  which 
did  not  exhaust  them  at  all. 

When  the  rabbit's  nerves  had  been  an  hour  previously  exhausted  by 
a  strong  induced  current,  but  had  recovered  tone,  and  brought  the 
vessels  into  a  normal  condition,  the  same  extremely  reduced  Faradic 
current  produced  immediate  exhaustion  or  paralysis  of  the  nerves,  and 
"dilatation  of  the  vessels,  which  rendered  their  finest  ramifications 
visible  for  three  minutes."  Hence  we  may  say  that  debilitated  nerves 
do  not  bear  well  the  mildest  possible  Faradic  currents. 

We  need  no  better  demonstration  of  the  superior  safety  and  health- 
fulness  of  the  galvanic  current  than  these  facts  from  the  champion  of 
Faradization.  The  ganglionic  nerves  on  which  these  experiments 
were  tried  run  to  the  finest  capillaries,  as  shown  by  Ordonez,  Gim- 
bert  and  Schweigger, — consequently  whatever  affects  them  affects 
the  entire  circulation  in  every  part  of  the  body  ;  and  it  has  been  shown 
by  Onimus  and  others  that  a  mild  galvanic  current  promotes  the  cir- 
culation in  a  normal  manner  when  it  follows  the  course  of  the  vessels, 
and  consequently  has  great  restorative  power. 

The  effect  of  Faradization  for  paralysis,  Duchenne  says,  is  an  in- 
crease of  redness,  warmth  and  sensibility,  and  gradually  the  enlarge- 
ment of  the  cutaneous  veins,  which  often  continues  after  Faradization, 
"  and  sometimes  increases,  so  as  to  resemble  an  irritation,  and  to 
require  the  suspension  of  treatment  and  the  use  of  emollients,  baths, 
poultices  and  the  like,"  which  proves  Faradization  a  powerful  irrita- 
tive stimulant. 

This  discussion  leads  into  profound  physiological  questions  as  to 
the  controlling  forces  of  the  circulation,  in  reference  to  which  some 
very  eminent  physiologists,  I  think,  have  shown  a  lack  of  the  defi- 
nite conceptions  of  physical  science. 

It  has  been  established  that  the  action  of  the  ganglionic  nerves, 
when  irritated,  so  contracts  the  bloodvessels  as  to  diminish  the  circu- 
lation, and  when  their  vital  power  is  exhausted,  the  bloodvessels,  una- 
ble to  contract,  yield  to  the  pressure  of  blood  which  is  always  present 
and  become  greatly  expanded,  —  also  that  the  parts  become  warmer 
with  this  additional  supply  of  blood,  uncontrolled  by  their  ganglionic 
nerves. 

In  all  this  there  is  nothing  to  modify  or  confuse  the  simple  physi- 
ological truth  that  the  involuntary  ganglionic  system  sustains  and 
regulates  the  entire  circulation.  It  maintains  the  contractions  of  the 
heart,  and  the  contractions  and  peristaltic  actions  of  bloodvessels,  which 


482  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

as  we  descend  in  the  animal  scale  become  more  and  more  capable  of 
assisting  the  heart,  or  even  dispensing  entirely  with  its  aid.  Wken 
we  feel  the  throbbing  of  bloodvessels  distinctly  localized  under  the  in- 
fluence of  emotion,  or  arising  in  very  small  arteries  without  apparent 
cause,  we  realize  the  absolute  control  by  which  the  ganglionic  system 
sends  out  and  distributes  the  blood. 

There  is  nothing  in  these  intelligible  and  simple  facts  to  require  or 
justify  the  hypothesis  (or  rather  assertion)  of  Claude  Bernard  that 
there  must  be  active  dilation  of  vessels,  as  well  as  an  active  contraction. 
Active  dilation  or  expansion  of  muscles  and  the  vessels  on  which  they 
operate  is  purely  imaginary.  No  one  has  ever  seen  or  measured  an 
expansive  force  in  muscles.  We  know  of  no  such  thing  in  physi- 
ology as  an  expansive  energy,  —  all  energy  is  contractile.  The  heart 
has  an  apparently  active  expansion  of  its  ventricles,  which  might  throw 
up  a  weight  resting  on  them,  but  it  is  due  entirely  to  the  systolic 
contraction  of  the  auricles,  the  ventricular  muscle  being  entirely  pas- 
sive in  the  diastole.  There  is  as  little  reason  for  supposing  an  active 
dilation  in  the  bloodvessels  as  in  the  heart,  — the  conditions  are  iden- 
tical. There  is  no  dilation  except  where  it  is  forced  by  the  pressure 
of  a  fluid  propelled  by  contraction.  The  climax  of  this  absurdity  is 
reached  when  Duchenne  says  that  the  normal  calibre  of  the  vessels 
depends  "upon  a  certain  equilibrium  between  the  tonic  force  of  the 
constrictors  and  that  of  the  dilatators."  The  tonic  force  of  dilation 
exists  only  in  an  unscientific  imagination,*  and  the  bastard  word 
dilatator  is  appropriate  to  such  a  conception. 

But  although  there  is  no  dilation  by  the  energy  of  dilating  or  relax- 
ing fibres,  there  is  a  dilation  by  nervous  influence,  and  when  Bernard 
says  "  I  have  proved  by  direct  experiment  that  there  are  two  orders 
of  vaso-motor  nerves,  acting  in  opposite  directions,  and  that  their  prop- 
erties are  in  the  majority  of  cases  called  into  play  by  reflex  influ- 
ence," he  states  his  facts  correctly  but  misunderstands  their  meaning. 
He  says:  "The  great  sympathetic  has  the  function  of  a  moderator 
of  the  vessels,  —  when  irritated  it  produces  a  more  or  less  consider- 
able contraction  of  them,  a  contraction  which  forms  a  certain  degree 
of  impediment  to  the  circulation,  and  hence  diminishes  its  speed." 
This  is  a  very  incomplete  statement.  Irritation  of  the  ganglionic 
nerves  to  a  moderate  extent  does  not  diminish  but  increases  the  cir- 
culation.    They   are  not  merely  a  "  moderator  of  the  vessels"  but  give 

*  The  small  longitudinal  and  oblique  fibres  which  M.  Gimbert  professes  to  have 
found  in  some  arteries,  and  which  Duchenne  professes  to  regard  as  a  confirmation  of 
his  theory,  are  quite  irrelevant.  Such  fibres  act  like  all  other  muscles  by  contraction, 
not  by  expansion,  and  while  thev  are  well  adapted  to  promote  the  peristaltic  action 
and  propulsion  of  blood,  they  can  contribute  nothing  to  dilation  unless  by  holding 
the  vessel  in  shape  as  the  blood  pressure  dilates  it. 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  483 

the  impelling  energy  of  the  vessels,  and  all  that  sustains  the  circula- 
tion, which  M.  Bernard  overlooks  in  this  statement.  "On  the  other 
hand  (he  continues)  by  exciting  the  filaments  of  the  ccrebro-spinal 
system  we  produce  a  dilatation  of  the  same  vessels.  Such  is  the 
whole  mechanism  of  the  nervous  influence.  With  these  two  modes  of 
action  alone —  contraction  and  dilatation  of  vessels  —  the  nervous  sys- 
tem governs  all  the  chemical  phenomena  of  the  ogranism."  !  !  ! 

It  was  said  that  sometimes  even  Jupiter  nods,  and  surely  in  this 
case  M.  Bernard  was  a  little  oblivious.  He  overlooked  the  fact  that 
besides  simple  contraction  and  expansion  there  is  a  peristaltic  action 
propelling  the  fluids  and  producing  an  increase  of  blood  pressure, 
well  shown  in  the  experiments  of  Onimus  and  Legros,  and  well  known 
otherwise  before  their  experiments.  The  active  throbbing  determina- 
tion of  high  inflammation  is  quite  beyond  M.  Bernard's  contracted 
theory. 

The  assertion  that  by  vaso-motor  contraction  and  expansion  "the 
nervous  system  governs  all  the  cliemical  phenomena  of  the  organism  " 
is  too  extragavant  to  be  noticed  if  it  did  not  come  from  so  eminent  a 
physiologist.  Brown-Sequard  adheres  more  faithfully  to  the  facts 
when  he  puts  aside  this  theory  and  says  "the  nervous  system  acts 
directly  and  originally  upon  the  parenchyma  of  the  tissues"  instead  of 
limiting  its  action  to  bloodvessels.  He  adds  that  when  a  nervous 
influence  produces  inflammation  the  principal  agency  is  not  the  in- 
crease of  blood  but  the  influence  on  the  tissues.  (Lectures  on  Cen- 
tral Nervous  System.) 

But  that  the  cerebro-spinal  system  is  concerned  in  dilation  is 
entirely  true.  This  is  in  consequence  of  the  general  law  which  places 
the  motor  and  the  sensitive  systems  in  antagonism  in  function  as  they 
are  in  position.  Sensitive  nerves  when  strongly  impressed  overcome 
the  motor  energy.  Pain  to  a  sufficient  extent  prostrates  every  mus- 
cular power.  The  pneumogastric,  being  a  sensitive  nerve  for  the 
interior,  shows  the  same  influence  upon  the  heart,  not  by  any  direct 
excitement  sent  to  the  heart,  expanding  its  substance,  according  to  the 
Bernard  conception  of  active  dilation,  but  by  its  central  end,  when 
disconnected  with  the  heart  by  section,  conveying  a  sensitive  impres- 
sion to  the  medulla,  which  causes  exhaustion,  and  if  sufficiently  potent 
may  cause  death.  To  carry  out  his  hypothesis,  for  it  is  nothing  more, 
Bernard  maintains  that  certain  small  ganglia  in  the  organs  have  the 
function  of  paralyzing  or  relaxing  the  vaso-motor  nerves.  If  so,  they 
must  be  sensitive  ganglia,  and  sensitive  structures  may  excite  as  well 
as  relax.  Nature  is  not  so  awkward  as  to  construct  one  organ  merely 
to  oppose  another. 

It  is  not  because  they  are  cerebro-spinal,  but  because  they  are  sen- 


484  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

sitive  nerves,  that  certain  nerves  cause  relaxation  of  the  bloodvessels, 
as  when  a  slap  reddens  the  surface.  For  the  cerebro-spinal  is  the 
dominant  system,  in  connection  with  the  seat  of  life,  and  by  its  sensi- 
tive capacity  receives  impressions  which  it  reflects  on  the  bloodvessels 
to  accelerate  or  retard  the  circulation,  which  fact  was  expressed  in  the 
old  physiological  principle  "  tibi  irritatio,  ibi  afflnxus."  The  spinal 
cord  is  the  centre  from  which  every  impression  is  reflected,  and  vital 
changes  produced,  not  merely,  as  Bernard  would  have  it,  by  active  con- 
traction and  active  dilation  (which  is  imaginary),  but  in  addition  by 
peristaltic  propulsion,  by  calorific  control,  suddenly  increasing  or 
diminishing  the  heat  at  any  point,  and  by  other  occult  influences  that 
increase,  diminish  or  prevent  nutrition  and  secretion,  which  will  never 
be  understood  until  medical  science  rises  out  of  the  low  mechanical 
rut  into  which  it  has  fallen,  so  that  it  can  comprehend  the  influence 
by  which  the  chorda  tympani  and  trifacial  excite  the  salivary  secretion, 
and  the  lachrymal  gland  responds  to  a  certain  frontal  convolution,  as 
I  have  proved. 

The  marvellous  powers  of  the  nervous  system  in  controlling 
growth  and  changes  are  so  far  beyond  anything  that  the  bloodvessels 
could  explain,  as  to  prompt  the  theory  that  there  are  special  trophic 
nerves  which,  though  they  have  never  been  discovered,  Duchenne, 
Samuel  and  a  few  others  believe  to  exist. 

Upon  this  speculative  question  I  would  respectfully  offer  my  own 
suggestions.  The  cerebellum  is  the  especial  organ  of  unconscious 
life,  —  the  trophic  centre  of  the  whole  person.  It  is  also  greatly  con- 
cerned in  muscular  action.  Hence  the  two  functions  are  associated 
closely,  and  Sarcognomy  shows  us  Vital  Force,  a  very  muscular 
energy,  situated  in  close  proximity  to  Nutrition  on  the  body.  We 
may  therefore  expect  to  find  the  trophic  power  associated  closely 
with  the  muscular. 

Again,  it  is  sensibility  that  makes  the  body  liable  to  injury,  waste, 
disease  and  death,  which  are  resisted  by  hardihood  and  other  occipital 
powers.  The  intellectual  and  sensitive  powers  are  anti-trophic  and 
wasteful  of  tissue. 

Again,  growth  is  a  vital  process,  not  a  passively  receptive  one.  It 
belongs  to  the  efferent,  centrifugal  energies,  not  the  afferent  centrip- 
etal. It  must  therefore  affiliate  with  the  muscular  rather  than  the 
sensitive  apparatus.  It  must  associate  with  nerves  that  carry  an 
influence  from  the  centre  to  the  organs,  not  with  those  which  carry 
inward  sensations.  Hence,  if  we  look  for  trophic  nerves,  we  should 
look  for  them  in  connection  with  the  motor  nerves  and  in  connection 
with  those  portions  of  the  cord  which  are  most  closely  connected 
with  the  cerebellum. 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  485 

This  would  explain  the  influence  of  muscular  exercise  on  growth 
and  the  beneficial  effects  of  muscular  Faradization  and  galvanization. 
Future  experiments  in  medical  practice  will  show  the  power  of 
growth  developed  by  currents  to  the  cerebellum  and  to  the  upper 
exterior  part  of  the  thigh. 

The  calorific  changes  and  the  nutritive  changes  are  not  at  all  pro- 
portional to  the  changes  in  the  bloodvessels,  and  M.  Duchenne 
though  a  partisan  of  Bernard's  most  erroneous  ideas,  states  some 
well-known  facts  which  entirely  refute  them.  He  says  that  to  accept 
a  certain  theory,  "it  would  be  necessary  to  forget  the  experiments 
which  show  that  this  kind  of  neuro-paralytic  hyperemia  is  passive, 
and  that  in  itself  it  is  powerless  to  affect  the  nutrition;  "  which  is  very 
true,  but  totally  refutes  Bernard's  idea  that  this  hyperemia  is  what 
controls  nutrition,  and  is  the  only  way,  as  it  increases  or  diminishes, 
by  which  the  nervous  system  "governs  all  the  chemical  phenomena  of 
the  organism  "  ! !  What  a  passion  our  great  mechanical  physiologists 
have  for  reducing  nature's  most  mysterious  operations  to  some  simple 
mechanical  arrangement.  Duchenne  states  some  facts  which  show 
that  mere  hyperaemia  does  not  produce  inflammation. 

Faradization  by  strong  currents  on  the  neck  is  not  free  from  danger, 
especially  on  account  of  the  sensitive  character  of  the  pneumo- 
gastric  nerve,  which  runs  in  company  with  the  carotid  arteries  and 
jugular  veins,  and  which,  when  excited  centrally,  tends  to  depress  the 
action  of  the  heart.  Duchenne  says  :  "The  procedure  is  not  always 
free  from  danger.  Whilst  moving  a  rheophore  over  the  lateral  and 
superior  parts  of  the  pharynx,  with  a  current  of  rapid  intermission 
but  moderate  intensity,  the  patient  fell  suddenly  into  syncope. 
When  restored,  he  said  that  he  had  experienced  a  kind  of  suffoca- 
tion, and  an  indefinable  sensation.  Since  then-,  having  Faradized 
the  pneumogastric  many  times  at  the  same  height,  with  one  inter- 
mission per  second,  and  with  a  very  moderate  current,  the  same 
accident  has  not  occurred,  but  the  precordial  sensation  has  been  felt 
every  time.  I  once  saw  the  necessary  caution  neglected  in  Faradizing 
the  pharynx  of  a  young  man,  in  whom  that  organ  and  the  velum 
palati  were  paralyzed,  consecutively  to  an  angina.  A  profound 
syncope  was  immediately  produced  by  the  operation,  and  in  this  case 
I  have  no  doubt  that  the  pneumogastric  had  been  irritated  by  the 
current.  Faradization  of  the  pneumogastric  at  the  lower  part  of 
the  oesophagus  may  be  practised  without  inconvenience."  It  is 
farther  from  the  region  under  the  jaw  which  disturbs  the  brain. 

The  location  of  the  organs  of  the  brain  shows  that  there  is  some- 
thing more  than  pneumogastric  excitation  in  such  cases.  The 
pharyngeal  region  cannot  receive  electric  stimulation  without  affect- 


4§6  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

ing  the  brain  unfavorably  if  prolonged,  and  the  medulla  oblongata,  as 
well  as  the  Pons  Varolii,  is  too  near  this  location  to  make  strong 
currents  judicious.  The  suffocative  effect  was  produced  through  the 
pons,  which  controls  respiration.  The  paralytic  tendency  of  this 
region  is  shown  in  diphtheria. 

Experience  has  abundantly  illustrated  the  comparative  value  of 
galvanizing  and  Faradizing  in  paralysis,  quite  differently  from  the 
doctrines  of  Duchenne.  In  a  case  reported  by  Baierlacher,  a  work- 
man in  a  factory,  aged  28,  had  a  paralysis  of  the  face  of  eight  weeks 
standing.  He  was  treated  with  strong  induction  currents  for  three 
weeks  without  any  change,  when  a  galvanic  current  from  fifteen 
elements  was  applied  and  "  produced  strong  contractions  in  all  the 
muscles."  "  After  only  three  applications  of  the  continuous  current 
to  the  nerve  trunk  and  muscles,  considerable  improvement  was  mani- 
fest, and  after  four  more  applications  the  paralysis  had  almost 
entirely  disappeared." 

Dr.  Neumann  reports  that  in  the  case  of  a  man  of  60  years,  with 
rheumatic  facial  paralysis,  accompanied  by  severe  pain,  the  induction 
currents  were  employed  for  six  weeks  every  day  for  half  an  hour 
without  any  success.  He  then  employed  the  continued  currents  and 
produced  very  great  amelioration. 

When  the  muscular  action  was  restored,  the  Faradic  currents  were 
capable  of  producing  light  contractions  in  the  paralyzed  muscles,  but 
much  more  feeble  than  in  the  sound  ones,  while  the  galvanic  currents 
produced  much  stronger  contractions  in  the  late  paralyzed  muscles 
than  in  the  sound  ones. 

Meyer  relates  the  case  of  a  woman  of  48  years,  the  left  side  of 
whose  face  had  been  paralyzed  fourteen  days  and  was  not  affected  in 
the  slightest  degree  by  induction  currents,  while  a  battery  of  six 
Bunsen  cells  produced  strong  contractions,  —  stronger  than  on  the 
sound  side.  The  excitability  to  electric  currents  diminished  as  the 
cure  advanced,  and  when  discharged  cured,  in  the  third  month,  "  the 
excitability  (of  the  left  side  of  the  face)  for  either  induced  or  contin- 
uous currents  was  wholly  wanting."  Two  years  later  the  electric 
excitability  was  partially  restored. 

Why  is  there  so  great  a  difference  in  the  effects  of  the  two  cur- 
rents? The  galvanic  currents  by  their  continuity  produce  an 
accumulated  effect,  due  to  quantity  and  duration.  The  Faradic 
currents  are  instantaneous  and  contradictory  or  alternating  in  course. 
Their  intensity  excites  and  disturbs,  but  their  brevity  forbids  the 
production  of  effects  that  result  from  prolonged  action,  hence  they 
fail  to  rouse  the  paralyzed  muscles,  which  are  slow  to  respond,  and 
will  not  respond  to  the  flash  of  an  induction  current.     But  nerves 


CHAP.   XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  487 

and  muscles  in  a  state  of  healthy  excitability  respond  promptly  to 
Faradism,  which  is  a  more  muscular  influence  than  galvanism.  "  On 
sound  muscles  in  the  normal  state  (say  Onimus  and  Legros)  the 
continued  current,  applied  directly  to  the  muscles,  produces  contrac- 
tions with  great  difficulty.  When  the  electrodes  are  placed  on  the 
course  of  the  motor  nerves,  the  contractions  are  stronger,  and  pro- 
duced by  a  weaker  current,  but  never  as  strong  as  with  induction 
currents." 

It  has  been  found  by  Neumann,  Bezold,  Bruckner  and  Fick,  that  a 
galvanic  current,  when  frequently  interrupted,  produced  less  and  less 
effect  on  the  impaired  muscles  as  the  interruptions  were  more  fre- 
quent. A  feeble  current,  sufficiently  prolonged,  surpasses  the  effects 
of  the  strong  interrupted  current.  Every  interruption  diminishes 
the  effect.  This  shows  that  the  galvanic  cannot  always  be  replaced 
by  the  primary  which  is  an  intermitted  current,  and  hence  I  have 
modified  the  common  portable  battery  to  allow  the  primary  to  be 
changed  into  the  galvanic. 

While  the  effect  of  interruptions  is  recognized  unanimously  as  an 
impairment  of  the  motor  effect,  in  paralytic  conditions,  that  does  not 
appear  to  be  the  sole  cause  of  the  difference ;  for  galvanic  currents, 
interrupted  even  more  frequently  than  the  Faradic,  will  produce  con- 
tractions when  the  Faradic  fail.  When  Faradic  currents  fail  to 
produce  any  contraction  in  consequence  of  ten  or  twelve  inter- 
ruptions per  second,  galvanic  currents  succeed  in  spite  of  twenty 
interruptions  per  second,  for  the  galvanic  currents  occupy  all  the 
space  of  time  between  the  interruptions,  while  the  Faradic  have  only 
a  momentary  duration. 

In  this  respect,  the  Faradic  current  is  far  more  objectionable  than 
the  magneto-electric,  which  approximates  the  interrupted  galvanic  in 
its  duration,  for  the  magneto-electric  current  is  passing  while  the 
magnet  is  near  the  iron,  and  if  the  revolution  be  made  very  slowly 
the  current  is  prolonged  in  proportion. 

In  a  case  of  paralysis  of  the  facial  nerve  (reported  by  Onimus 
and  Legros),  the  paralyzed  muscles  contracted  under  a  current  (from 
ten  to  sixteen  elements  Remak)  which  was  not  sufficient  to  produce 
any  contraction  in  the  sound  masseter  muscle.  The  effects  were 
more  apparent  when  applied  to  the  muscles  than  when  applied  to  the 
nerves.  But  the  Faradic  currents,  as  strong  as  they  could  be  borne, 
producing  very  energetic  contractions  in  the  sound  muscles,  entirely 
failed  to  produce  any  effect  on  the  paralyzed  muscles.  On  the  other 
hand,  it  required  nearly  twice  as  strong  a  galvanic  current  to  affect 
the  sound  as  the  paralyzed  muscles.  The  induction  currents  are 
therefore  unfit  for   application  to   paralyzed    muscles.     But    is  this 


488  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

unfitness  absolute  and  inherent  ?  Does  it  not  arise  from  the  small 
quantity  and  great  intensity  of  the  induction  currents,  as  well  as 
their  brief  duration  ?  An  apparatus  which  gives  a  large  quantity  of 
electricity  without  sudden  interruptions  would  approximate  the 
galvanic  in  its  influence.  For  this  purpose,  in  a  magneto-electric 
machine  the  wire  should  be  thick  and  short,  and  the  magnet  should 
be  strong  and  rotated  very  slowly.  But  even  thus  arranged  such  a 
current  is  of  very  little  value  for  paralyzed  muscles. 

Paralyzed  muscles  require  a  larger  quantity  of  electricity,  —  a  larger 
surface  of  the  cells  under  chemical  action  ;  sound  muscles  require 
intensity  or  number  of  plates  rather  than  quantity  of  surface.  As 
paralyzed  muscles  recover,  the  galvanic  current  has  less  effect,  and 
the  effect  of  the  Faradic  current  increases.  The  contractility  of 
paralyzed  muscles  under  galvanism  is  much  like  that  of  the  involun- 
tary fibres,  slow  and  progressive,  not  ceasing  quickly.  The  galvanic 
current  produces  additional  contraction  after  the  muscles  have  been 
fatigued  by  the  Faradic  current. 

The  continuous  current  is  efficient  for  paralyzed  muscles,  even  when 
interrupted.  Onimus  and  Legros,  with  fourteen  elements  of  Remak, 
produced  strong  contractions  in  paralyzed  muscles,  and  eighteen  days 
after  the  attack  even  sixty  interruptions  to  the  second  did  not  prevent 
them.  On  the  sound  side  of  the  face,  similar  currents  produced 
tetanic  contractions  of  the  muscles,  which  indicates  that  Faradic 
currents  fail,  not  so  much  by  the  number  of  interruptions  as  by 
their  lack  of  continuity,  lack  of  quantity  and  antagonistic  alterna- 
tion. 

In  the  above  case  a  feeble  galvanic  current  of  four  to  six  elements 
produced  contraction  of  the  paralyzed  muscles,  which  were  not 
affected  by  the  interrupted  current.  The  galvanic  is  especially 
adapted  to  exhausted  excitability,  and  is  more  effective  than  the 
Faradic  several  hours  after  death,  but  not  at  first.  It  acts  best  where 
there  is  but  slow  contractility,  as  in  paralyzed  or  dead  muscles,  or 
those  of  non-striated  fibre,  on  which  it  acts  efficiently,  where  the 
Faradic  generally  fails.  In  very  young  or  embryonic  animals,  galvanic 
currents  are  efficient,  but  the  Faradic  soon  lose  their  power. 

The  galvanic  currents  act  directly  on  the  muscular  fibre,  the 
Faradic  on  the  nerves.  The  action  on  the  muscle  is  strongest  at 
the  negative  pole,  where  alkalies  are  developed.  When  the  nerves 
are  paralyzed  by  poisons,  the  muscles  do  not  respond  to  Faradism 
but  do  to  continuous  currents,  and  appear  to  respond  more  readily 
when  isolated  from  the  influence  of  the  nerves.  In  fact,  the 
muscular  excitability  and  response  to  excitants  is  greater,  indepen- 
dent of  the  nerves,  than  when    associated   with   them.     A  muscle 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  489 

which  contracts  normally  from  the  current  proceeding  from  sixteen 
elements  will  (according  to  Onimus  and  Legros),  when  deprived  of  its 
nerves,  contract  from  four.  In  a  case  reported  by  Zeimssen,  in  which 
the  facial  nerve  had  been  completely  divided,  and  the  muscles  con- 
sequently paralyzed,  the  nerve  had  entirely  lost,  after  three  weeks, 
its  electric  excitability,  except  that  the  galvanic  excitability  lingered 
in  a  small  branch.  The  muscles  responded  to  a  continuous  current 
with  a  slow  contraction  passing  into  a  tetanic  condition. 

Those  cases  in  which  the  galvanic  current  alone  can  produce  con- 
tractions are  generally  farther  advanced  and  slower  in  recovery  than 
when  the  induction  current  can  produce  contractions. 

Muscular  irritibality,  which  may  be  considered  a  morbid  condition, 
as  seen  in  cramps,  increases  when  the  nerves  are  enfeebled  or  injured. 
Convulsions  are  a  mark  of  weakness  in  the  nervous  system.  In  the 
sound  nervous  condition  muscles  do  not  contract  when  struck,  but 
they  do  when  their  nerves  are  impaired  and  the  fibres  act  indepen- 
dently. 

In  regard  to  the  questions  we  have  just  considered,  Ziemssen  says  : 
"  This  difference  between  the  action  of  induced  and  continuous 
currents,  very  generally  stated  by  Remak,  has  since  become  the 
subject  of  numerous  and  searching  inquiries.  The  great  and  general 
result  of  these  inquiries  is  the  following :  in  completely  paralyzed 
muscles  and  nerves,  the  excitability  for  battery  currents  is  sometimes 
retained  or  even  increased,  while  the  excitability  for  induced  currents 
is  completely  lost.  In  such  cases  the  curative  action  of  the  continu- 
ous current  is  superior  to  that  of  the  induced.  With  the  return  of 
mobility  the  excitability  for  both  kinds  of  currents  commonly 
changes." 

The  reason  of  this  must  be  found  in  the  superior  vitality,  delicacy 
and  quickness  of  the  nervous  system,  compared  to  the  muscular. 
The  instantaneous  Faradic  impression  rouses  the  nerves,  but  the 
more  prolonged  galvanic  is  required  by  the  muscles.  The  ten-thou- 
sandth part  of  a  second  is  sufficient  for  a  current  to  stimulate  the 
muscular  nerves  of  a  frog,  according  to  Matteucci. 

A  very  important  difference  between  the  galvanic  and  Faradic 
currents  is  found  in  the  far  greater  penetrative  power  of  the 
galvanic. 

Helmholtz  says,  in  a  lecture  delivered  at  Heidelberg:  "Recent 
experiments  made  in  the  physiological  laboratory  on  the  transmission 
of  excitation  in  the  nerves  have  called  my  attention  to  the  fact  that 
the  intermittent  currents  of  electric  induction  produce  but  little 
effect  on  nerves  situated  at  a  certain  depth  in  the  human  body, 
although  it  is  easy,  with  a  battery  of  ten  or  twenty  elements  of  zinc 


49°  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

and  platina,  to  produce  in  the  same  nerves  excitements  even  of  a 
tetanic  character."  Experienced  electricians  find  no  difficulty  in 
impressing  the  spinal  cord  by  galvanic  currents  along  the  spine. 
Onimus  and  Legros  say  that  they  have  obtained  the  same  effects  by 
exterior  currents,  as  when  the  spinal  cord  was  exposed  in  animals. 

The  Faradic  currents,  with  their  greater  intensity  of  contractile 
energy,  do  not  promote  the  circulation  either  of  blood  or  of  nerve 
power  as  does  the  galvanic  current,  which  has  the  advantage  of 
flowing  in  one  direction  and,  when  centrifugally  applied,  assisting 
equally  the  flow  of  blood  and  of  nervous  force  from  the  centres  to 
the  circumference.  Hence  it  promotes  many  vital  processes  and 
increases  the  secretions  when  Faradism  fails.  Onimus  and  Legros 
caused  a  free  salivary  secretion  by  galvanism  applied  directly  to  the 
salivary  glands,  but  the  induction  current  had  no  such  effect. 

The  centripetal  galvanic  current,  on  the  contrary,  retards  the  flow 
of  blood,  counteracts  the  natural  peristaltic  action  of  the  bloodvessels 
and  diminishes  the  nerve  energy  of  the  periphery  or  destination  of 
the  nerve  force  and  blood. 

The  Faradic  resembles  a  combination  of  the  centrifugal  and  cen- 
tripetal galvanic  currents,  —  a  combination  of  stimulants  and  sedatives 
or  rather  accumulative  and  dispersive  currents  for  the  periphery,  and 
also  a  combination  of  cumulative  stimulants  and  dispersive  sedatives 
for  the  central  regions.  Hence  it  neither  propels  the  vital  force  out- 
wards to  tranquillize  the  centres,  nor  concentrates  the  vital  forces 
from  periphery  to  centre,  but  leaves  the  balance  undisturbed,  and 
simply  amounts  to  a  general  stimulus  along  the  line  of  the  current, 
which  increases  the  contractile  energy  of  the  bloodvessels  and  in- 
creases the  blood  pressure  until,  in  a  few  minutes,  the  exhaustion  of 
contractility  leaves  the  blood  pressure  to  fall,  as  was  shown  in  the 
forty-sixth  experiment  of  Onimus  and  Legros  on  a  dog. 

As  a  powerful  stimulus  wherever  applied,  when  not  carried  too  far, 
and  when  carefully  adjusted  to  the  conditions  of  the  organs,  Faradism 
is  surely  of  great  value.  When  applied  from  hand  to  hand,  from 
hands  to  feet,  from  shoulder  to  calf  or  to  thigh,  it  is  a  powerful 
renovator  of  energy,  and  when  applied  locally  on  muscles  it  stimulates 
and  warms  them  and  assists  their  development.  When  applied  from 
the  muscles  to  the  spine  or  their  spinal  nerves,  its  frequent  interrup- 
tions maintain  contractions  which  become  more  sustained  as  the 
shocks  are  more  frequent,  allowing  no  relaxation  until,  if  sufficiently 
frequent,  the  contractions  become  extremely  painful  and,  as  Duchenne 
says,  may  even  produce  shortening  when  the  shocks  are  sufficiently 
rapid  and  often- repeated.  The  effects  of  the  rapid  Faradic  shocks 
are  very  much  like  those  of  muscular  exercise  and  contribute  to  the 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  49I 

growth  of  the  muscles  and  to  their  habitual  tonicity.  The  effects  of 
cutaneous  Faradization  are  also  more  intense  upon  the  skin  in  pro- 
portion to  the  rapidity  rather  than  the  intensity,  and  such  currents 
are  the  most  efficient  in  cutaneous  anaesthesia.  There  is  also  an 
anaesthesia  in  which  the  muscular  sense'is  lost,  resistance  cannot  be 
felt,  and  it  is  difficult  to  regulate  the  movements  except  by  eyesight. 
Duchenne  speaks  of  a  patient  relieved  by  rapid  Faradism,  who  could 
not  feel  the  bed  on  which  she  was  lying,  and  felt  as  if  suspended  in 
air  unless  she  saw  the  bed. 

Our  repeated  cautions  against  heroic  Faradism  require  that  we 
should  look  on  the  other  side  of  the  question  and  remember  that 
currents  of  great  strength  may  be  required,  when  masses  of  cellular 
and  adipose  tissue  stand  in  the  way  of  the  current,  or  when  vitality 
is  at  so  low  an  ebb  as  to  require  the  utmost  power  of  stimulation. 
During  the  terrific  cholera  epidemic  through  which  we  passed  at 
Cincinnati  in  1849,  the  eclectic  physicians  saved  many  that  seemed 
to  be  in  a  hopeless  collapse  by  using  the  most  concentrated  and  fiery 
stimulants  known  in  the  materia  medica,  which  might  have  en- 
dangered the  life  of  a  man  of  health,  but  barely  roused  the  sluggish 
and  benumbed  sensibilities  of  the  moribund  patients.  In  similar 
conditions  a  Faradic  stimulus,  dangerous  under  ordinary  circum- 
tances,  may  become  necessary.  In  extreme  cases  of  paralysis,  where 
sensibility,  contractility  and  nutrition  seem  entirely  gone,  violent 
Faradization  makes  very  little  impression,  because  there  is  no  sensi- 
bility to  feel  it ;  and  Duchenne  properly  says  :  "  In  such  cases  it  has 
been  necessary  to  have  recourse  to  an  apparatus  of  enormous 
intensity,  and  I  have  even  had  to  regret  the  want  of  one  still  more 
powerful.  It  was  only  after  I  had  recalled  some  life  to  the  limbs 
that  I  was  able  to  diminish  the  intensity  of  the  current  and  that  an 
apparatus  of  medium  power  became  sufficient." 

Faradism  being  an  exciting  stimulus  at  the  point  of  its  application 
and  on  the  line  between  the  electrodes,  this  stimulation  along  the 
line  of  the  current  corroborates  the  impression  at  the  site  of  the 
electrodes ;  for  if  we  examine  the  cerebral  organology  we  shall  find 
that  organs  lying  intermediate  between  any  two  possess  an  inter- 
mediate character,  arid  resemble  respectively  the  organs  to  which 
they  lie  nearest.  Hence,  in  the  organology  of  the  body,  the  currents 
passing  between  the  locations  of  any  two  Faradic  electrodes  contrib- 
ute to  increase  the  effect  which  the  locations  of  the  electrodes 
would  produce. 

The  application  of  Faradism  or  induction  currents  to  the  human 
body  is  therefore  a  simple  matter.  It  merely  demands  that  the 
stimulating    electrodes    shall   be   placed    wherever  a  stimulus  is  re- 


492  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXil. 

quired,  and  that  it  shall  be  so  graduated  by  the  gentleness  of  the 
current,  by  the  breadth  of  the  electrodes,  and  by  the  medical  or 
carbonic  character  of  the  electrodes  themselves,  as  to  insure  that 
gentle  impression  which  will  assist  and  not  over-excite  the  vital 
Junctions.  The  simplest  precaution  which  can  be  adopted  against  the 
energy  of  the  current  is  the  use  of  large  sponge  electrodes,  well 
saturated  with  water  or  with  salt  water,  when  we  would  increase  the 
freedom  of  the  current.  I  would  recommend,  however,  as  better 
than  salt  for  the  medication  of  the  water,  the  use  of  muriate  of 
ammonia,  which  will  answer  the  same  purpose  in  increasing  the  con- 
ductivity, and  which  has  in  itself  much  virtue  as  a  vital  stimulant  and 
general  promoter  of  the  secretions.  Its  influence  is  so  wholesome 
that  it  would  not  in  any  case  be  objectionable.  An  additional  means 
of  moderating  and  refining  the  influence  of  Faradic  currents  will  be 
found  in  the  application  of  broad  carbon  plates  on  the  surface  under 
the  electrodes,  by  which  we  may  secure  any  degree  of  mildness. 

When  the  Faradic  or  galvanic  poles  are  placed  near  together,  the 
current  flows  with  great  energy  through  the  short  connecting  space. 
Hence  this  method  is  highly  available  for  strong  localized  excitement. 
When  they  are  placed  farther  apart  the  diffusion  of  the  currents  is 
much  greater  and  their  density  where  they  pass  much  less.  But  in 
all  cases  the  effect  of  any  current  is  determined  according  to  Sarcog- 
nomy  by  the  location  of  the  electrodes. 

The  medication  of  electric  currents,  which  the  medical  profession 
generally  have  ignored  or  derided,  is  an  important  part  of  a  rational 
practice,  whether  the  medical  substances  can  or  cannot  be  carried  into 
the  body  by  electric  currents.  Whether  metallic  poisons  can  be  re- 
moved from  the  body  by  a  current  that  may  be  safely  borne  is  a  dif- 
ferent question.  It  is  far  more  difficult  to  find  and  remove  from  the 
body  the  infinitesimal  quantities  of  metal  which  may  be  in  it  than  to 
carry  in  a  portion  of  the  substances  in  solution  through  which  a  cur- 
rent is  sent,  yet  metallic  substances  have  often  been  expelled.  Oni- 
mus  and  Legros  say  that  almost  immediately  after  a  few  drops  of 
a  solution  of  iodide  of  potassium  have  been  injected  under  the  skin 
of  a  rat,  iodine  can  be  evolved  at  any  part  of  the  body  by  the  applica- 
tion of  the  positive  pole  of  a  galvanic  current. 

It  is  desirable  that  electric  currents  should  resemble  as  much  as 
possible,  and  assist,  the  natural  influences  of  life.  To  do  this  they 
must  be  extremely  gentle,  for  the  more  delicate  galvanic  currents  pro- 
mote and  assist  peristaltic  action  in  the  bloodvessels  and  in  the  intes- 
tines, but  the  currents  usually  applied  do  not.  Even  Faradic  currents 
(from  the  second  helix)  may  be  made  sufficiently  gentle  by  using  a 
rheostat,  a  cylinder  of  water  or  a  large  carbon  electrode  or  large  sponge 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  493 

to  moderate  the  current  to  prevent  its  interference  with  the  peristaltic 
action. 

Electric  currents  altogether  wholesome  and  congenial  are  a  grand 
desideratum  in  electro-therapeutics.  Moderate  galvanic,  primary  and 
secondary  currents  through  proper  electrodes  (large  sponges  or  car- 
bons) are  desirable  ;  but  there  is  an  irritating  quality  in  the  currents 
commonly  used,  which  renders  them  after  a  time  intolerable,  and  fills 
the  patient  with  a  metallic  taste  and  feeling.  This  is  due  to  the  law 
—  not  yet  recognized  —  that  electricity  carries  with  it  the  potentiality  » 
of  all  the  substances  through  which  it  passes,  and  when  it  passes 
through  zinc  and  its  compounds,  sulphuric  acid  and  bichromate  of 
potassa,  its  influence  cannot  be  genial. 

Hence  I  have  been  accustomed  to  prefer  cells  that  rely  upon 
muriate  of  ammonia,  a  thoroughly  wholesome  substance,  and  one 
which  produces  less  active  chemical  influence  and  does  not  consume 
the  zinc  when  not  in  use.  The  ideal  cell,  however,  should  substitute 
iron  for  zinc,  though  it  may  have  less  electro-motive  force.  It  is  an 
easy  matter  to  give  a  larger  surface,  or  use  a  larger  cell,  or  increase 
the  number  of  our  cells.  Iron  does  not  appear  to  be  available,  as  it 
corrodes  too  rapidly. 

Moreover,  all  the  objectionable  influences  of  a  strong  electric  dy- 
namic current  can  be  overcome  by  medical  means.  Water  alone,  liber- 
ally used  in  the  sponges,  has  a  happy  effect.  The  fluid  extract  of 
Scutellaria  on  the  electrodes  will  neutralize  nearly  all  that  is  objection- 
able in  a  current  from  a  sal-ammoniac  cell,  and  for  sensitive,  irritable 
constitutions,  the  addition  of  a  little  hyoscyamus  to  the  Scutellaria  will 
make  it  pleasant.  Medicines  may  be  contained  in  a  properly  con- 
structed electrode  or  in  the  sponge,  or  may  saturate  a  cloth  upon 
the  skin,  under  the  electrode.  The  irritative  effects  are  still  further 
controlled  by  association  with  magnetism. 

Although  the  galvanic  currents  directly  applied  may  suspend  peri- 
staltic action,  their  application  to  the  nervous  system  promotes  it. 
Galvanism  of  the  splanchnic  nerves  produces  peristaltic  action,  but 
Faradism  does  not, —  showing  the  former  to  be  more  genial.  Faradism 
excites  contractions  of  the  stomach  when  applied  through  the  pneu- 
mogastric  nerve,  and  may  be  used  to  excite  vomiting.  Galvanism 
applied  in  the  same  way  diminishes  or  suspends  its  contractions, 
opposes  vomiting,  and  may  be  used  against  seasickness,  as  it  has 
been,  successfully,  when  applied  on  the  epigastrium,  by  Dr.  LeConiat. 

Galvanism  has  an  antispasmodic  influence.  Though  it  disturbs  at 
the  beginning  and  at  the  end  of  a  current,  it  promotes  tranquillity 
while  flowing ;  but  Faradism,  being  a  rapid  succession  of  beginnings 
and  endings,  is  essentially  disturbing.     The  chemical  influence  of  the 


494  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

galvanic  current  is  greater  when  it  flows  uninterruptedly ;  the  sensi- 
tive influence  is  greater  when  interrupted.  The  chemical  and  heat- 
ing effects  are  more  conspicuous  at  the  negative  pole,  which  is  gen- 
erally more  distinctly  felt. 

The  superior  value  of  galvanic  currents  is  owing  to  their  adaptation 
to  controlling  circulation,  excitement  and  nutrition.  As  Onimus  and 
Legros  express  it,  "the  interrupted  currents  and  the  static  electricity 
are  excitants,  and  never  can  be  anything  but  excitants  ;  but  the  con- 
tinuous currents,  according  to  the  mode  of  application,  may  act  as  a 
powerful  sedative  and  at  the  same  time  favor  the  interior  nutrition. 
They  are  calming,  as  they  maintain  the  nervous  system  in  the  same 
dynamic  condition  and  favor  the  normal  state  of  the  circulation,  and 
we  know  that  the  best  calmant  for  the  nervous  system  is  a  well-oxy- 
genated blood." 

This  statement  is  too  exclusive,  as  static  electricity,  in  which  they 
do  not  seem  to  have  had  much  experience,  is  much  more  than  a  mere 
excitant,  and  has  a  great  variety  of  effects,  according  to  the  mode  of 
application.  Farad ic  electricity  is  more  than  a  mere  excitant,  as  it 
has  shown  the  power  of  promoting  growth  in  puppies,  and  invigorat- 
ing feeble  constitutions.  But  we  cannot  repeat  too  often  that  the 
effect  of  every  current  is  determined  according  to  Sarcognomy  by  the 
location  to  which  it  is  applied. 

Galvanism  has  a  special  relation  to  the  most  tenaciously  vital  struct- 
ures. In  cold-blooded  animals,  especially  frogs,  we  find  the  most 
tenacious  vitality.  They  survive  centuries  of  underground  confine- 
ment in  rocks,  and  their  nerves  and  muscles  furnish  us  the  most 
perfect  and  delicate  of  galvanoscopes.  The  involuntary  contractile 
tissues  in  man  approximate  the  conditions  of  cold-blooded  vitality, 
having  a  tenacity  of  life  which  is  shown  by  action  after  the  voluntary 
system  is  entirely  lifeless.  After  death,  when  the  voluntary  muscles 
cannot  respond,  and  even  the  intestines  do  not  respond  to  direct  gal- 
vanizing, they  still  respond  to  galvanism  of  the  mesenteric  nerves. 

The  less  any  structure  is  under  the  influence  of  the  will,  the  more 
capable  it  is  of  post-mortem  action,  and  the  more  tenacious  of  its 
organization.  The  bones  are  the  most  durable  part  of  the  body,  and 
the  uterus  outlasts  all  other  soft  parts  under  circumstances  that  favor 
decay.  Atrophy  from  inaction  is  the  characteristic  of  the  voluntary- 
muscles.  Voluntary  structures  rapidly  decline  and  are  very  slow  to 
regenerate  or  repair  injuries,  which  the  involuntary  easily  repair,  as 
they  have  something  of  the  qualities  of  cold-blooded  animals,  with  an 
inferior  nervous  development.  Voluntary  structures  are  closely  asso- 
ciated with  the  central  nervous  system,  and  respond  more  promptly 
to  their  nerves  than  to  action  on  their  substance. 


CHAP.    XXII. J  ELEClkU-illEKAl'iiU  TICS.  495 

When  the  voluntary  muscular  system,  by  impairment  of  its  nerves 
in  paralysis,  approximates  the  condition  of  the  involuntary  non-striated 
fibre,  responding  but  slowly  to  its  nerves,  it  is  then  peculiarly  acces 
sible  to  the  galvanic  influence,  and  contracts  in  the  slow  and  pro- 
longed manner  characteristic  of  involuntary  tissue.  The  galvanic 
current  restores  from  paralytic  conditions  where  the  Faradic  is  useless. 

The  peristaltic  action  of  the  unstriated  fibre  of  the  intestines  is  pro- 
moted by  galvanizing  the  splanchnic  nerves  or  the  mesenteric  plexus, 
but  Faradization  of  the  splanchnic  nerves  does  not  promote  peristaltic 
action.  The  Faradic  current  when  applied  on  the  intestines  does  not 
produce  any  natural  peristaltic  action  between  the  poles  where  the 
current  is  passing,  nor  even  contraction,  but  simply  produces,  like  any 
irritant,  a  sharp  contraction  at  the  points  where  the  electrodes  are 
applied.  Hence,  when  applied  to  overcome  constipation,  the  elec- 
trodes should  glide  over  the  surface  in  the  direction  of  the  natural 
movement,  —  especially  on  the  descending  colon. 

According  to  Onimus  and  Legros  the  galvanic  current,  in  direct 
application  to  the  intestines,  promotes  contraction  or  tension  as  it 
ascends,  and  relaxation  as  it  descends.  The  relaxation,  however,  is 
favorable  to  evacuation.  The  best  action  of  the  galvanic  current  for 
constipation  is  on  the  spinal  cord  and  splanchnic  nerves.  Its  appli- 
cation between  the  mouth  and  rectum,  in  either  direction,  promotes 
peristaltic  action,  as  it  stimulates  the  ganglionic  and  spinal  nerves. 
Constipation  has  been  successfully  treated  by  introducing  one  metal 
in  the  mouth  and  the  other  in  the  rectum,  connecting  them  with  a 
wire.  Silver  or  copper  may  be  used  with  zinc.  The  well-known  ex- 
periment of  moving  the  bowels  by  a  galvanic  current  from  the  mouth 
to  the  anus  is  practicable  only  with  galvanism.  This  experiment  was 
successfully  performed  by  M.  Leroy  d'Etiolles  as  well  as  by  Aldini 
and  others.  With  the  Faradic  current  no  such  result  occurs. 
Duchenne  made  the  experiment  on  horses,  with  one  electrode  in  the 
mouth  and  the  other  in  the  anus,  and  produced  tetanic  contraction  in 
the  limbs  and  the  bowels,  but  no  evacuation.  In  one  case  the  body 
of  the  living  horse  was  laid  open  for  observation  at  Montfaucon,  but 
he  gained  nothing  by  the  cruel  experiment.  The  Faradic  current, 
applied  as  before,  did  not  produce  any  appreciable  contraction,  no 
matter  what  its  intensity,  even  when  violent  contractions,  amounting 
to  opisthotonos,  were  produced.  The  result  was  equally  nugatory  when 
the  same  experiment  was  tried  by  Duchenne  upon  a  patient.  It  was 
certainly  taking  a  great  liberty  with  the  patient  to  apply  a  method 
which  had  been  proved  fallacious. 

There  is  little  harmony  or  clearness  in  much  of  the  confused  mass 
of  experiments  by  electro-therapeutists,  and  our  views  become  clear 


496  CURRENT    DOCTRINES    OF  [CHAP.    XXII. 

only  by  adopting  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy,  which  show  that  a 
galvanic  current  may  be  useful  in  constipation  by  alternate  currents 
to  the  spine  and  the  gastro-intestinal  tract,  and  that  when  the  nega- 
tive pole  is  on  the  spine  it  accumulates  a  vital  force  which  overcomes 
any  derangement,  but  when  it  is  on  the  abdomen,  along  the  gastro- 
intestinal tract,  it  produces  a  more  active  manifestation,  which  gradu- 
ally exhausts  the  vital  power. 

Our  comparison  of  galvanism  and  Faradism  thus  far  develops  the 
superior  mildness  of  the  former,  and  its  more  general  harmony  with 
vitality.  The  valid  objections  to  therapeutic  Faradism  arise  from  its 
abrupt  harshness  and  ability  to  injure,  but  these  may  be  removed  by 
diminishing  the  force  and  increasing  the  softening  or  checking  influ- 
ences at  the  electrodes  by  water,  by  carbon  or  by  medicines,  and  by 
giving  them  greater  breadth  of  application  to  the  body.  There  is  a 
great  difference  between  small  metallic  electrodes  placed  near  together 
and  large  sponge  or  carbon  electrodes  placed  far  apart.  Meyer  regards 
the  current  as  most  curative  which  produces  contractions  with  the 
least  intensity. 

The  carbon  electrodes  are  much  the  best  in  common  use.  The 
greater  their  breadth  of  surface  the  less  the  intensity  of  the  current. 
The  dryness  of  the  skin  may  be  overcome  by  a  strip  of  wet  flannel  or 
of  wash-leather  tied  over  the  face  of  the  carbon,  which  answers  the 
purpose  without  the  inconvenience  of  a  wet  sponge.  When  it  is 
desired  to  concentrate  the  current  upon  a  small  space,  as  a  nerve  or 
a  muscle,  an  olive-shaped  electrode  is  used,  —  or  even  a  smaller  point, 
if  necessary.  For  applications  to  the  skin  alone,  dry  electrodes  are 
used,  and  a  metallic  brush  or  a  roller  is  the  most  efficient  channel. 
The  roller  covered  with  wet  cloth  or  leather  is  useful  for  labile  (mov- 
ing) currents.  The  interruption  of  galvanic  currents  may  be  made  by 
an  interrupting  electrode,  or  a  pedal  interrupter  worked  with  the  foot, 
—  or  the  operator  may  pass  the  current  through  his  person  and  touch 
a  suitable  electrode  with  his  finger  or  with  a  thimble  worn  on  it.  The 
interruption  may  be  conveniently  made  by  a  loop  of  wire  held  in  the 
hand  and  vibrated  against  the  conductor  of  the  battery,  included  in 
the  loop. 

The  very  delicate  electric  practice  which  is  appropriate  to  sensitives 
is  not  in  fashion  among  electro-therapeutists — Onimus  and  Legros 
say  :  "  Induction  currents  of  extremely  feeble  intensity  have  a  different 
influence  on  the  tissues  from  what  they  have  when  of  medium  inten- 
sity. In  employing  an  induction  current  which  is  barely  perceived 
by  the  tongue,  of  the  least  intensity  that  we  can  produce  with  our 
ordinary  apparatus,  and  which  is  transmitted  through  several  inches 
of  water,  we  attain  different  results.     We  can  observe  this  difference 


CHAP.    XXII.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.  497 

in  studying  the  movements  of  the  heart  ;  but  these  are  exceptional 
facts  and  this  mode  of  employing  electricity  occurs  only  in  laboratories, 
—  never  in  the  practice  of  medicine." 

Is  it  not  obvious  that  we  need  a  material  change  in  our  electrical 
appliances  ? 

Having  discussed  the  relative  merits  of  galvanism  and  Faradism,  or 
the  current  of  induction,  coming  from  the  exterior  coil,  let  us  now 
consider  the  intermediate  magneto-galvanic  or  primary  current,  which 
comes  from  the  interior  coil.  The  primary  and  secondary  currents 
are  frequently  spoken  of  as  being  both  Faradic,  and  their  distinction 
overlooked,   which  is  very  important. 

The  primary  or  magneto-galvanic  current  from  the  interior  coil  is 
intermediate  in  character  between  the  galvanic  and  Faradic,  and  if  I 
were  confined  to  one  current  alone,  I  should  select  the  primary.  It 
has  the  galvanic  character  in  being  a  one-way  current,  tending  toward 
sedative  effects  at  the  positive  and  developing  at  the  negative,  while 
it  has  the  stimulating  influence  of  the  Faradic  from  its  rapid  interrup- 
tions. It  is  usually  given  from  a  single  cell,  which  has  the  force  of 
one  or  two  volts.  The  cell  current  alone  would  be  of  little  value  and 
almost  imperceptible,  but  by  creating  magnetism  as  it  flows  in  a  coil 
round  an  iron  rod,  it  receives  the  impulsive  force  of  the  magnetized 
rod  (a  magnet  being  competent  to  start  an  electric  current),  and  by 
the  rapid  interruptions  of  the  flow  (as  the  magnetic  attraction  moves 
a  spring  and  interrupts  the  current)  it  acquires  the  stimulating  quality 
which  the  Faradic  owes  to  its  frequent  interruptions,  but  still  retains 
to  a  great  extent  the  peculiar  virtue  of  the  galvanic  current.  Hence 
it  has  a  more  general  availability  than  either  of  the  other  currents. 
By  commutation,  which  is  alternation,  it  becomes  a  double  stimulus 
like  the  Faradic,  with  somewhat  less  irritability,  and  by  slow  interrup- 
tions it  approaches  more  nearly  the  galvanic  character.  The  rapidity 
of  the  vibrations  is  usually  regulated  by  the  screw,  and  the  strength  of 
the  current  by  advancing  or  withdrawing  the  exterior  coil,  or  by  mov- 
ing the  metallic  cylinder  which  interrupts  the  inductive  action  of  the 
interior  on  the  exterior  coil,  or  upon  the  magnet. 

When  a  strong  resistance  is  to  be  overcome  it  is  sometimes  neces- 
sary to  use  more  than  one  cell  to  supply  the  galvanic  current,  but  one 
cell  generally  supplies  all  that  is  well  borne  in  passing  through  the 
human  body.  An  extra  cell  may  be  required  when  a  rheostat  is  used, 
or  when  the  current  is  used  to  convey  medical  potencies,  or  is  sent 
through  the  entire  length  of  the  body,  or  through  more  than  one 
person. 

The  primary  current  carefully  managed  is  available  for  the  treat- 
ment of  the  brain  as  well  as  the  body.     It  is  an  interesting  and  won- 


49$  DOCTRINES    OF    ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS.       [CHAP.    XXII. 

derful  course  of  experiments  which  I  have  been  accustomed  to  make 
on  impressible  constitutions,  and  which  most  of  my  students  have 
personally  realized,  by  stimulating  the  brain  with  the  negative  elec- 
trode. Even  while  this  page  was  being  written  I  received  a  call  from 
an  intelligent  gentleman  (J.  H.)  of  substantial  but  impressible  con- 
stitution, and  to  show  him  the  use  of  electricity  stimulated  five  organs 
of  his  brain  successively,  the  effects  of  which  he  described  as  satisfac- 
torily as  if  he  had  known  their  functions,  in  a  very  graphic  manner. 

In  the  next  chapter  I  shall  show  the  extreme  facility  with  which  in 
impressible  constitutions  we  may  illustrate  the  laws  of  Sarcognomy 
by  means  of  electric  currents,  which  modify  mind  and  body  at  the 
same  time.  There  is  every  grade  of  impressibility,  from  such  con- 
ditions to  that  of  those  in  whom  we  produce  physiological  effects  on 
the  body,  with  very  slight  apparent  effects  on  the  mind.  As  there  is 
no  human  being  who  can  resist  the  power  of  electricity,  there  is  no 
one  on  whom  we  cannot  demonstrate  Sarcognomy,  and  hence  I  think 
it  very  important  that  all  students  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy  should 
be  familiar  with  the  power  of  electricity. 

But  I  find  it  will  be  impossible  in  this  volume  to  give  a  full  develop- 
ment of  the  subject,  and  will  close  this  introductory  view  with  the 
remark  that  the  practitioner  should  have  the  galvanic,  primary  and 
secondary  currents  in  use, — and  our  portable  instruments  are  now 
supplied  with  another,  the  combined  primary  and  secondary,  which  is 
the  most  powerful  of  all,  and  combines  the  influences  of  primary  and 
secondary.  Notwithstanding  the  singular  assertions  of  Heidenhain 
as  to  the  superior  penetrative  power  of  the  galvanic,  it  is  easy  to 
demonstrate  the  superior  penetrative  power  of  the  primary,  secondary 
and  combined  currents,  which  (especially  the  latter)  will  play  effi- 
ciently upon  a  group  of  persons  who  would  not  feel  the  galvanic 
current.  Static  electricity  also  occupies  the  entire  field  of  practice 
with  superior  convenience  and  pleasantness,  and  it  is  sufficient  to  say, 
without  enumerating  the  diseases,  that  there  is  nothing  in  the  way 
of  human  disease  and  suffering  to  which  electricity  may  not  in  some 
form  be  an  important  aid  or  cure. 


CHAPTER    XXIII. 

THE   EXPERIMENTAL  INVESTIGATION   OF   MAN   AND 
DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY. 

BY  ILLUSTRATIVE  EXPERIMENTS. 

In  bringing  before  the  reader  the  solid  basis  of  the  new  Anthro- 
pology in  the  experimental  method,  which  is  destined  to  be  the 
future  basis  of  philosophy,  it  is  proper  to  show  its  superiority  over 
the  methods  of  the  myopic  investigators  whose  vast  and  multi- 
tudinous labors  heretofore  have  been  so  unsatisfactory  and  shown 
how  unprofitable  are  the  immense  labors  of  those  who  reject 
enlightened  methods  and,  with  a  jealousy  appropriate  only  to 
mediaeval  barbarism,  reject  the  testimony  of  honest  investigators  too 
scornfully  even  to  investigate  a  demonstrated  success. 

Optimistic  readers  may  think  it  wrong  to  comment  on  medical 
barbarism,  but  I  do  not  wish  to  convey  the  idea  that  this  medical 
barbarism  is  anything  peculiar  to  the  profession,  or  anything  more 
than  a  special  expression  of  the  general  inherited  barbarism  of  the 
century,  apparent  alike  in  all  classes,  in  governments,  universities 
and  churches,  which  require  centuries  to  outgrow  the  psychic  force 
of  the  dark  past. 

The  barbarian  form  of  thought  is  scornfully  jealous  of  human 
testimony  when  it  urges  any  essential  change  or  promises  any 
brilliant  progress,  —  especially  when  the  methods  are  not  physical 
but  psychic.  There  is  an  irreconcilable  hostility  between  barbarian 
and  psychic  thought.  The  barbarian  mind  enters  the  psychic  field 
only  to  devastate  it  into  the  barren  desolation  of  the  hopeless  meta- 
physics which  has  heretofore  been  called  philosophy,  as  it  enters  the 
physiological  field  to  cultivate  the  most  obscure  regions  of  pedantic 
research  without  regard  to  their  real  value,  —  preferring  the  dis- 
cussion of  some  unimportant  appearance  half  revealed  by  the  micro- 
scope to  a  discovery  of  the  fundamental  laws  of  life  and  principles 
of  therapeutics.  It  prefers  to  use  the  animal  intellect  of  the  senses 
rather  than  the  human  intellect  which  develops  philosophy,  and, 
having  no  ethical  inspiration,  it  is  utterly  reckless  in  the  infliction  of 
suffering. 

Hence,  instead  of  experimenting  upon  well-developed  man,  in  whom 


500  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

psycho-physiological  life  may  be  revealed,  it  prefers  to  torture  animals, 
seeking  pliysical  phenomena  alo7ie,  and  evolving  from  the  laboratory 
full  of  howling  animals  an  unprofitable  record  of  half-understood,  if 
not  delusive,  experiments.  The  world  must  decide  between  this 
barbarian  method  and  that  which  is  presented  in  my  discoveries. 

Vivisection  a  failure.  —  The  failure  of  barbarian  vivisection 
was  very  easily  and  happily  exposed  by  Caroline  E.  White  in  the 
Forum  of  March,  1890,  from  whose  trenchant  essay  I  make  a  few 
quotations  as  follows  :  — 

"  When  we  began  this  controversy,  some  eight  years  ago,  we  were 
met  by  our  opponents  with  an  astonishing  enumeration  of  immense 
benefits  gained  for  the  human  race  through  experiments  upon 
animals.  'How  can  you,'  they  said,  'object  to  vivisection,  when  to 
it  we  are  indebted  for  the  discovery  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood, 
of  the  double  function  of  the  spinal  nerves,  of  the  treatment  of 
popliteal  aneurism,  of  vaccination  and  of  the  anaesthetic  properties 
of  ether  and  chloroform.'  When  it  was  shown  that  not  one  of  these 
discoveries  was  due  to  experiments  upon  animals,  they  were  forced 
to  quit  the  field  for  the  nonce;  but  rallying  under  new  banners,  on 
which  are  inscribed  Pasteurism,  Listerism,  ovariotomy,  brain  localiza- 
tion, microbe  theory,  etc.,  they  seem  prepared  to  do  battle  on  new 
ground." 

But  both  Harvey  and  Sir  Charles  Bell  denied  that  their  dis- 
coveries were  due  to  experiments  on  animals,  and  Bell  says  that  he 
experimented  on  animals  only  to  convince  people  when  he  could  not 
convince  them  in  any  other  way.  The  treatment  of  popliteal 
aneurism  was  known  long  before  the  experiments  on  animals  by 
Hunter.  Jenner  discovered,  vaccination,  not  by  such  experiments, 
but  by  the  experience  of  milkmaids.  Anaesthetics  were  discovered 
by  American  experiments  on  living  human  beings.  Ovariotomy  was 
shown  by  Sir  Spencer  Wells  to  have  had  nothing  to  do  with  experi- 
ments on  animals,  and  in  reference  to  brain  localization  — in  which 
my  experiments  have  the  unanimous  corroboration  of  all  who  are 
much  acquainted  with  them  —  it  is  sufficient  to  say  that  the  vivi- 
sectors  have  utterly  failed  to  discover  the  chief  functions  of  the 
brain,  which  are  psychic,  and  have  sought  only  the  anatomical  and 
physiological  phenomena,  with  results  which  prove  their  fallacious 
method,  for  their  inferences  present  a  Babel  of  contradiction — in 
which  Ferrier,  Munk,  Goltz,  Scruff,  Hitzig,  Fritsch,  Nothnagel, 
Sottman,  Carville  and  Duret,  etc.,  are  in  irreconcilable  contradiction. 

As  a  specimen  of  the  results  of  this  blind  and  fallacious  method, 
to  which  it  may  be  said  the  entire  medical  profession  is  committed 
to-day  by  its  colleges,  let  me  quote  what  Prof.  Munk  says  in  "Die 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  501 

Functional  der  Grosshimrinde"  in  reference  to  Ferrier,  who  is  really 
the  ablest  and  most  successful  of  modern  vivisectors  of  the  brain, 
viz.  :  — 

"All  these  statements  and  what  depended  on  them  as  to  the 
character  of  the  disturbances  induced  by  the  operations,  and  recovery 
from  them,  were,  as  I  said  before,  worthless,  capricious  interpreta- 
tions of  the  phenomena,  for  the  animals  were  examined  by  Prof. 
Ferrier  in  a  quite  inadequate  manner,  and  scarcely  at  all  except  at 
the  time  of  general  depression  of  the  functions  of  the  brain.  If  I 
had  gone  too  far  in  making  this  declaration  when  I  had  only  glanced 
through  Ferrier's  work,  I  should  at  once  have  repaired  the  wrong. 
But  instead  of  that,  as  the  experiments  have  turned  out,  I  said  rather 
too  little  to  you  then,  for  Ferrrier  had  not  been  lucky  enough  in  his 
guesses  to  hit  the  mark  even  once,  and  all  his  statements  have  proved 
themselves  false." 

I  think  this  is  unjust  to  Prof.  Ferrier,  but  when  two  of  the  leading 
vivisectors  find  their  experiments  flatly  contradictory  what  is  such  a 
method  worth  ?  and  what  is  the  value  of  a  method  of  exploring  the 
psychic  organ  of  the  body  by  a  method  which  ignores  its  chief 
functions  and  looks  only  to  its  subordinate  functions,  which  are 
physiological,  and  in  doing  that  falls  into  endless  contradiction  ? 

It  claims  success  in  locating  cerebral  diseases,  but  when  Dr. 
Bennett  stated,  in  1884,  that  an  epileptic  patient  had  a  tumor  in  the 
upper  part  of  the  fissure  of  Rolando,  the  surgical  operation  of  Mr. 
Goodlee  found  it  "  under  the  gray  matter  of  the  ascending  frontal 
convolution,"  which  in  a  well-developed  head  would  be  three  inches 
away  from  the  supposed  location. 

The  veteran  Brown-Sequard  has  shown,  in  his  indefatigable 
researches,  a  host  of  facts  which  seem  to  contradict  nearly  everything 
that  the  whole  corps  of  vivisectors  profess  to  have  discovered.  The 
vast  ocean  of  cerebral  science,  a  larger  area  than  all  the  old  physiol- 
ogy, cannot  be  explored  by  using  such  a  single  plank  for  the  voyage 
as  vivisection. 

Here  I  might  dismiss  the  claims  of  the  colleges  of  the  nineteenth 
century  to  reveal  the  mysteries  of  life  by  means  of  vivisection,  but 
as  the  merits  of  this  fallacious  method  are  vigorously  maintained  by 
other  false  pretensions,  to  prevent  the  public  indignation  from  closing 
the  laboratories  of  torture  and  cruelty,  it  is  worth  while  to  show  that 
vivisection  has  been  one  of  those  delusions  which  have  so  often 
misled  the  profession. 

Prof.  Lawson  Tait,  F.R.C.S.,  of  Edinburgh,  the  most  eminent 
living  ovariotomist  and  skilful  surgeon,  is  in  favor  of  the  total 
abolition  of  vivisection,  as  a  method   of  no  value  to  the  progress  of 


502  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXI11. 

medical  science.  He  said  in  a  letter  published  Dec.  12,  1881  : 
"  Like  every  member  of  my  profession,  I  was  brought  up  in  the 
belief  that  by  vivisection  had  been  obtained  almost  every  important 
fact  in  physiology,  and  that  many  of  our  most  valued  means  of 
saving  life  and  diminishing  suffering  had  resulted  from  experiments 
on  the  lower  animals.  I  now  'know  that  nothing;  of  the  sort  is  true 
concerning  the  art  of  surgery ;  and  not  only  do  I  not  believe  that 
vivisection  has  helped  the  surgeon  one  bit,  but  I  know  that  it  has 
often  led  him  astray." 

These  are  not  the  opinions  of  theoretical  extremists,  but  of  the 
soundest  practical  men.  Sir  Charles  Bell  (C(  On  the  Nervous  System  ") 
said:  "The  opening  of  living  animals  has  done  more  to  perpetuate 
error  than  to  enforce  the  just  views  taken  from  anatomy  and  the 
natural  sciences." 

Dr.  Henry  J.  Bigelow,  an  eminent  surgeon  of  Boston,  said  in  a 
public  address  :  "  How  few  facts  of  considerable  value  to  our  race 
have  of  late  years  been  extorted  from  the  dreadful  sufferings  of  dumb 
animals,  the  cold-blooded  cruelties  now  more  and  more  practised 
under  the  authority  of  science." 

Sir  Wm.  Fergusson,  an  eminent  surgeon,  in  testifying  before  a 
Royal  Commission,  said  :  "  I  am  not  aware  of  any  of  these  experi- 
ments on  the  lower  animals  having  led  to  the  mitigation  of  pain,  or 
to  improvement  as  regards  surgical  details." 

G.  Macilwain,  F.R.C.S.,  maintained  that  vivisection  had  hindered 
more  rational  methods  of  research,  and  produced  great  practical 
mischief  in  surgery,  of  which  he  gives  an  example  in  the  experi- 
ments on  dogs  to  determine  the  value  of  "acupressure"  instead  of 
the  ligature  for  closing  arteries.  It  was  supposed  to  be  successful, 
but  proved  a  failure,  and  was  abandoned  for  the  reason  that  experi- 
ments on  dogs  do  not  illustrate  the  constitution  of  man  ;  and  yet 
this  miserable  method,  which  cannot  even  illustrate  the  vital  proc- 
esses of  an  artery,  is  the  great  reliance  of  the  medical  profession 
for  illustrating  the  laws  of  the  human  brain,  while  ignoring  its  chief 
functions. 

It  ought  to  be  a  final  deathblow  to  this  medical  folly  that  the 
Royal  College  of  Surgeons  in  London  a  few  years  ago  decided  not 
to  allow  experiments  on  animals  in  the  new  building  about  to  be 
erected,  and  not  to  allow  the  funds  to  be  used  for  any  such  experi- 
ments elsewhere. 

The  failure  of  vivisection  leaves  nothing  but  the  meagre  results  of 
pathology,  the  dissection  of  morbid  brains,  to  elucidate  the  mysteries 
of  life,  and  no  one  well  acquainted  with  its  progress  would  believe 
that  pathological  dissections  could  in  a  thousand  years  demonstrate 
the  functions  of  the  brain. 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  503 

The  hopes  of  mankind  must  rest  upon  the  revelations  of  Psychom- 
etry,  which  give  us  the  function  of  every  locality,  and  the  con- 
firmation of  these  revelations  in  experiment  upon  the  living  man  in 
his  most  rational  normal  condition. 

The  following  experiments  are  given  as  an  illustration  of  the 
development  of  local  functions  in  impressible  constitutions.  I  do 
not  affirm  that  such  results  are  readily  obtainable  from  all  persons, 
but  that  a  large  portion  of  mankind  —  from  one-fourth  to  one-half,  and 
in  hot  climates  nearly  all,  are  capable  of  presenting  these  phe- 
nomena. 

MISCELLANEOUS    EXPERIMENTS. 

It  is  easy  for  those  who  wish  to  realize  the  truth  of  Sarcognomy  to 
do  it  by  the  use  of  electricity  upon  an  impressible  temperament.  I 
will  briefly  describe  some  of  the  experiments  with  which  I  instructed 
my  class,  June  6,  1889,  nearly  all  of  whom  realized  similar  psychic 
influences  in  experiments  on  the  body. 

Dr.  P.,  a  very  intelligent  and  well-educated  practising  physician 
having  a  well-developed  and  well-balanced  head,  consented  to  undergo 
the  experiments,  dressing  in  a  suitable  operating  robe. 

The  positive  pole  was  first  applied  by  himself  to  the  hypochondria!  'WW 

I    while  I   held  the  negative  upon  the  healthy  region  of  the  shoulder. 

This  he  readily  realized  as  an  agreeable,  bracing  influence,  beneficial 

V  to  the  whole  person,  and  somewhat  alterative  in  the  abdominal  region. 

Then  the  positive  was  applied  upon  the  intellectual  region  of  the 
b       sternum  and  the  negative  behind  the  middle  of  the  arm  on  the  trunk, 

Y  producing,  as  he  described  it,  a  bracing  and  intellectual  influence  at 
first,  with  a  gradual  diminution  of  the  intellectual  activity  after  the 
first  minute,  as  the  influence  of  the  current  was  established. 

The  negative  was  now  transferred  to  the  lower  tibial  region,  and 
the  effect  was  a  prompt  diminution  of  intellectual  action  and  a  cool, 
sleepy  feeling. 

The  positive  was  next  applied  in  front  of  the  ileum  (the  melancholic 
region)  and  the  negative  in  the  axilla,  with  the  production  of  a  very 
pleasant,  quiet,  cheerful  feeling,  less  vigorous  than  the  influence  of 
the  shoulder. 

To  show  the  effect  of  Faradic  currents  properly  applied,  the  Fara- 
dic  electrodes  were  applied  upon  the  shoulders  (the  Health  region), 
producing  a  very  beneficial,  bracing  influence,  with  more  quietness 
than  when  the  hypochondrium  was  touched  by  the  galvanic  current. 
Applied  next  upon  the  lower  margin  of  the  ribs  on  each  side  (Region 
of  Irritability),  the  effect  was  very  disagreeable,  disturbing  and  ner- 
vous. 


t 


504  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

They  were  then  placed  upon  the  shoulder  to  stimulate  the  region  of 
Patience  or  Serenity,  but  proved  to  be  decidedly  stimulating  and  stir- 
ring, owing  to  being  placed  too  near  the  base  of  the  neck  so  as  to 
reach  the  passional  and  turbulent  region  of  the  brain.  Moving  them 
about  an  inch  farther  out,  the  pleasant,  tranquil  influence  of  the  region 
of  Patience  was  promptly  realized.  The  electrodes  were  then  applied 
upon  the  deltoid  muscle  (the  region  of  Energy),  and  its  rousing  effect 
was  quickly  felt  and  expressed,  — the  effect  being  more  marked  than 
in  any  previously  tried. 

Applied  next  upon  the  mammae,  the  delightful  and  bright  influence 
of  Love  was  not  only  realized  but  was  fully  expressed  in  his  counte- 
nance and  manner.  Next  applied  upon  Love  and  Health  (the  mam- 
mae and  centre  of  scapula),  the  effect  was  similar  but  much  more 
substantial,  —  the  emotion  being  associated  with  strength  of  character. 
Applied  upon  the  back  near  the  lower  margin  of  the  ribs  on  each  side, 
he  described  the  effect  as  producing  a  substantial  business  character, 
free  from  any  elevated  emotions. 

On  the  back  of  the  pelvis  near  or  upon  the  sacro-iliac  symphisis, 
the  effect  was  a  very  gloomy,  unsocial,  unfriendly  disposition,  unfitted 
for  society.  The  entire  experiments  occupied  not  much  over  forty- 
five  minutes. 

July  23,  1890,  I  began  a  course  of  illustrative  experiments  with  Dr. 
W.,  a  gentleman  moderately  impressible,  of  a  calm,  unexcitable,  taci- 
turn temperament  and  sound  judgment.  The  experiments  were  con- 
ducted to  obtain  a  record  of  results  that  might  confidently  be  expected 
by  my  readers  in  similar  cases,  but  not  such  as  arise  in  the  higher 
degrees  of  impressibility,  when  the  phenomena  occur  very  promptly 
and  the  mental  and  physical  phenomena  are  abundant.  The  experi- 
ments occupied  each  from  three  to  ten  minutes. 

1.  The  negative  pole  of  the  galvano-magnetic  (primary)  current 
on  the  shoulders  (Health),  the  positive  on  the  mammae  (Love). 
The  effect  he  pronounced  "  stimulating,  refreshing,  elevating." 

2.  The  poles  reversed.  The  resulting  condition  was  calm  and 
amiable,  less  stimulating, —  comparatively  negative. 

3.  The  positive  pole  at  hypochondria  (Disease)  and  the  negative 
on  the  shoulders  (Health).  The  first  impression  was  disturbing  and 
unpleasant  from  local  impression  before  the  effect  of  the  current  was 
realized,  but  in  one  minute  he  felt  that  it  wTas  "  beneficial  and  strength- 
ening," the  "  shoulders  strong,"  the  "head  clear  and  bright,"  with  a 
"  disposition  to  be  active"  and  increase  of  perspiration, —  feeling  as 
he  does  <:  when  at  work." 

4.  Poles  reversed.  He  feels  "less  active,  less  warm,"  but  nothing 
unpleasant,  no  impairment  of  strength.     The  tendency  of  the  experi- 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  505 

ment  is  to  diminish  the  energies  and  increase  the  nervous  sensibility 
at  first  but  ultimately  produce  great  depression,  which  was  not  realized 
in  him,  as  his  firm,  healthy  temperament  was  not  sufficiently  affected 
through  only  one  side  of  the  body  in  so  short  a  time.  There  are 
many  in  whom  such  an  experiment  would  have  produced  very  great 
prostration,  as  it  would  in  him  if  I  had  applied  a  stronger  current  for 
a  longer  time. 

5.  Positive  on  upper  part  of  sternum  (intellectual  region),  negative 
on  lower  half  of  tibia  (aquatic).  In  one  minute  it  is  felt  as  very 
"  depressing ;  a  general  letting  down,  mentally  and  physically."  "  Could 
not  be  very  active."  " Temperature  not  cold."  (The  lack  of  cooling  was 
due  to  a  moderate  current  affecting  only  one  side  of  the  body.  When 
the  Faradic  current  was  used  on  both  sides  on  the  tibia,  the  cooling 
was  distinct.)  After  seven  minutes  he  felt  mentally  dull  ;  disposed  to 
be  quiet  and  drowsy.     Strength  not  affected. 

6.  Poles  reversed.  In  one  minute  a  very  perceptible  difference. 
"  This  is  more  agreeable."  In  three  minutes  feels  clearer  and  brighter 
all  over.  "  General  improvement  of  feelings."  "  An  elevating  influ- 
ence." 

7.  Positive  to  tibia  (aquatic),  negative  on  shoulders  (Health). 
"This  is  an  improvement  on  the  last."  "  An  elevating  influence." 
"  Feel  it  mostly  in  the  muscular  system." 

8.  Positive  to  middle  of  sternum  (intellectual),  negative  on  back 
behind  arm  just  above  its  middle  (Repose).  "This  is  agreeable, — 
nothing  depressing  ;  a  quiet  condition,  nothing  active  ;  very  agreeable, 
—  could  rest  with  pleasure  ;  would  enjoy  repose,  quiet  or  rest  ;  intellect 
dull."  After  five  minutes  the  negative  was  moved  anteriorly  a  little 
(upon  Coolness).  After  two  minutes  feels  much  the  same  but  a  little 
cooler. 

9.  Negative  moved  two  inches  lower,  nearly  as  low  as  elbow  (Region 
of  Force).  In  two  minutes,  "not  so  dull  or  drowsy  ;  feels  a  bracing, 
active  influence,  like  a  tonic."  I  inform  him  of  the  value  of  combining 
Coolness  and  Force  in  treating  fevers. 

10.  Positive  on  Coolness,  negative  on  hypogastric  region  (Calorifi- 
cation). This  quickly  produces  a  feeling  of  heat  all  over  the  body, 
with  increase  of  perspiration. 

n.  After  four  minutes  poles  reversed  for  a  minute.  It  is  "more 
agreeable  and  cooling,  a  better  feeling,"  generally. 

12.  Negative  to  lower  end  of  sternum  (Somnolent  and  Ideal),  pos- 
itive to  antagonistic  region  on  dorsal  spine.  Agreeable  ;  stimulating 
and  brightening  to  mind  ;  pleasant  ;  tends  to  quiet  meditation  ; 
brightens  spiritual,  intuitive  faculties  ;  favors  mediumship  ;  inclined  to 
close  the  eyes."      After  eight  minutes  drowsiness  begins. 


506  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

13.  Faradic  currents  —  poles  on  end  of  sternum  (Somnolence)  and 
back  (Repose).  In  one  minute  a  drowsy,  sleepy  condition.  "  Feels 
it  more  than  the  last."     In  three  minutes  increasing  drowsiness. 

14.  Faradic  poles  on  both  tibia  (aquatic).  Feels  a  "cold,  apathetic 
condition  ;  "  a  "general  feeling  of  coldness  and  dulness  ;  "  breathing 
slower. 

15.  Both  Faradic  poles  on  shoulders  (Health).  Feels  it  instantly  ; 
"bracing,  refreshing,  and  every  way  invigorating." 

16.  Faradic  poles  on  upper  dorsal  and  middle  lumbar  region.  Feels 
as  good  as  before,  but  the  effect  is  chiefly  on  the  muscular  system  ; 
strengthening;  "the  other  was  more  agreeable  mentally." 

17.  Faradic  poles  on  Repose.  A  dull  sleepy  feeling  :  "I  could  go 
to  sleep  at  once." 

18.  Faradic  poles  on  tibia  and  Repose  on  right  side.  Feels  "much 
like  the  last;"  "cooling  and  sleepy,  more  cooling;"  "  this  is  best  for  a 
cool,  sleepy  condition." 

19.  Faradic  poles  on  ribs,  about  four  inches  below  mammae. 
Intending  to  reach  gastric  region,  it  proved  too  high,  being  on  the 
ribs.  Effect  unpleasantly  exciting,  being  Region  of  Excitability.  Poles 
removed  below  ribs.  "  Nothing  disagreeable  ;  "  "  stimulates  abdominal 
organs  agreeably." 

20.  Faradic  poles  on  each  side  below  umbilicus.  "Feel  it  in 
bowels  ;  promotes  their  action."  A  little  lower,  feels  it  in  the  urinary 
organs.  One  pole  on  lumbar  region,  one  on  Defecation,  "makes  a 
commotion  in  the  bowels." 

21.  Faradic  poles  on  margin  of  ribs  laterally  (Irritability).  "Affects 
respiration ;  a  stimulating  condition  ;  stimulus  rather  agreeable." 
After  three  minutes  :  "  Exciting  ;  begins  to  be  irritating."  (Asks  to 
stop  it  as  disagreeable.  It  would  have  been  disagreeable  at  first  in  an 
irritable  and  impressible  temperament.) 

22.  Faradic  poles  near  base  of  neck  (Patience),  on  summit  of 
shoulder.  "A  good  influence;  first-rate;  a  great  improvement  men- 
tally and  physically ;  as  agreeable  as  anything."  This  was  in  har- 
mony with  his  predominant  tendencies,  and  the  result  was  imme- 
diate. 

23.  Faradic  poles  to  mammae  (Love).  "  Very  good  ;  first-rate  ;  a 
good  pleasant  condition,  elevating,  bracing  to  physical  and  mental, 
would  make  one  social,  happy,  lively." 

24.  Faradic  poles  to  mammae  and  shoulder  (Love  and  Health). 
"Equally  good,  but  more  bracing  physically." 

25.  Faradic  poles  to  region  under  jaw  (Insanity),  a  region  very 
small  and  inactive  in  Mr.  W.  Effect  "  rousing,  exciting,  restless, 
depressing  to  mind." 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  $0? 

26.  Faradic  poles  below  axilla  (Sanity).  Feels  "  a  great  deal  better; 
it  brings  to  the  mind  a  fine  feeling.'' 

27.  (Second  day).  Faradic  poles  to  exterior  quarter  of  calf  (Aerial). 
"  A  good  deal  of  force,  but  does  not  affect  the  mind  ;  all  physical ; 
feels  like  travelling;  stimulates  muscles  of  legs;  one  could  climb  a 
mountain  or  a  tree  ;  could  not  study  or  stay  in  house  ;  would  seek  the 
open  fields." 

28.  Lateral  surface  of  the  knee.  "  More  restless,  but  not  much 
force  ;  quite  unpleasant."  On  the  patella  and  on  one  side  of  it.  "  A 
restless,  uneasy,  mischievous  feeling."  On  the  tendons  at  the  back 
of  the  knee.  "  An  ugly  condition,"  fit  for  violence  and  lawlessness, — 
41  ready  to  fight,  lawless,  reckless." 

29.  On  the  trochanters,  summit  of  femur.  "  Feel  it  in  the  limbs  ; 
stimulating ;  stimulates  to  action ;  a  feeling  of  boldness ;  fit  for 
battle." 

30.  Posterior  summit  of  thigh.  "Gives  force,  more  than  the  last; 
more  strength  ;  less  impulsive  ;  fit  for  any  undertaking  of  great  power." 
(This  makes  a  powerful  combination  with  the  summit  of  the  dorsal 
spine.) 

31.  Middle  posterior  of  thigh.  "  Muscular  force,  but  rather  lawless ; 
tends  to  rowdyism." 

32.  Middle  of  inside  of  thigh.  "Acts  on  muscular  system  ;  more 
for  frolic  than  for  work ;  tends  to  dissipation  ;  intemperance  ;  would 
seek  low  company ;  would  make  a  good  tramp  ;  lascivious  ;  don't  care 
for  dress  or  decency." 

33.  Middle  of  hips.  "  An  active  muscular  condition  ;  mentally 
exciting  ;  couldn't  study  well ;  want  to  be  on  the  move ;  would  like 
to  talk  ;  somewhat  fidgety  and  excitable ;  not  really  disagreeable." 

34.  Between  ribs  and  hips  (Baseness).  "  Rather  unpleasant; 
would  like  to  be  let  alone  and  get  away  from  everybody  ;  not  in  good 
condition  for  anything."  [How  would  you  make  a  living  ?]  "  Think 
I  would  steal  ;  not  energy  enough  to  fight  a  man." 

34J.  Just  back  of  Baseness.  "  Not  much  energy,  but  better  than  the 
last ;  too  lazy  to  work  ;  would  prefer  robbery  or  burglary." 

35.  Further  back,  on  each  side  of  spine.  "  Better  energy  ;  would 
assist  to  be  a  pugilist,  but  not  of  a  low  order  ;  gives  courage."  On 
spine,  same  level,  substantially  the  same.  A  little  lower  makes  it  a 
little  stronger. 

36.  On  deltoid  muscles.  "Very  good  influence  ;  ready  to  take  hold 
of  anything  useful  ;  rousing,  elevating." 

370  On  sacro-iliac  symphisis.  (Junction  of  sacrum  and  ilium.) 
"  Rather  disagreeable,  both  physically  and  mentally  ;  rather  lawless  ; 
disgusting  ;  disgusted   with  everything ;  would   find   fault ;  peevish  ; 


50S  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

particular    about   food,    not  particular  about   dress  ;  disgusted   with 
everything  ;  tends  to  nausea;  couldn't  stand  a  sea  voyage." 

$8.  Middle  of  buttocks,  posterior  aspect  (Hatred).  "  Much  like 
the  last,  but  not  so  nauseating ;  more  force  ;  would  not  be  agreeable  ; 
prefer  retirement  ;  don't  care  for  company  ;  would  be  quick  to  resent 
and  revengeful." 

39.  One  pole  as  the  last  and  one  on  mammae.  "A  much  more 
elevating  influence  ;  makes  things  brighter,  better,  more  agreeable." 

40.  On  back  above  38  and  behind  middle  of  hips.  "  Disagreeable  ; 
ready  to  fight  anybody,  and  kill,  too;  fight  with  any  weapons." 

41.  Summit  of  arms,  posterior  aspect  (Self-respect).  "  A  cheer- 
ful, agreeable  feeling  ;  qualifies  for  action  in  something  useful ;  would 
like  to  lead." 

42.  On  back  just  behind  locations  of  Repose.     "  Social ;  agreeable." 

43.  At  same  level  on  spine.      "  Active  in  society  or  business." 

44.  Two  inches  lower  on  spine.  "  Practical  energy  for  a  mechanic, 
to  take  hold  and  do  work." 

45.  Back  of  the  elbows.     "Very  disagreeable  ;  ugly  ;  quarrelsome." 

46.  Acromion  process.  "  Something  like  self-esteem  (41)  ;  agree- 
able, hardy,  fearless,  active,  fit  for  any  undertaking." 

47.  Middle  of  humerus,  posterior  aspect.  "  Would  help  to  carry 
on  anything;  bold  and  self-reliant." 

48.  Near  upper  dorsal  vertebrae,  on  each  side.  "  Great  energy ; 
hardens  the  muscles  and  fortifies  the  whole  person  for  any  under- 
taking, making  fearless  and  heroic ;  much  the  same  as  the  acromion 
process." 

49.  Poles  on  Health,  for  his  benefit,  to  restore  from  the  fatigue  of 
experiment.     Effects  delightful  and  restorative. 

50.  (July  26.)  Poles  on  chest  exterior  to  mammae ;  circulation  and 
respiration  stimulated.  The  poles  transferred  to  upper  dorsal 
(Oratory).     Breathing  better  ;  influence  more  agreeable. 

51.  Poles  on  inside  forearms,  two  inches  below  elbow.  "Avery 
pleasant,  agreeable  influence,  elevating  to  sentiments  ;  makes  a  social 
condition  ;  bracing  to  whole  system  ;  good  influence  on  digestive 
system."  On  the  wrist  and  in  the  hand.  "  Similar  but  not  so  strong  ; 
suitable  for  social  or  business  life." 

52.  Anterior  to  elbow  on  tendons  of  flexor  muscles.  "  Bracing, 
good,  elevating  ;   assists  a  speaker  or  person  of  social  influence." 

53.  Outside  of  middle  of  humerus.  "  A  good  influence,  more 
business-like  than  social ;  rather  showy  ;  attentive  to  dress ;  would 
like  to  be  conspicuous." 

54.  Prominence  of  front  of  shoulder.  Feels  "  decided,  firm,  not 
very  active ;  firm,  solid,  favorable  to  application,  good  for  a  student." 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SAKCOGNOMY.  5^9 

55.  Top  of  shoulders.  "  Similar  to  last ;  a  firm,  solid  man  ;  loves  to 
work,  would  not  be  idle." 

56.  Below  Adhesiveness.  (Aggressive.)  "  Bracing,  invigorating, 
energetic  ;  might  act  too  quick  sometimes." 

57.  Each  side  of  umbilicus.  "Deepens  respiration  and  affects 
bowels."  Just  below  umbilicus.  ''Affects  the  breathing  much  more; 
produces  deep  breathing." 

58.  On  groin  and  thigh.  "  Rather  bold  and  fearless."  On  groin 
alone.     "Stimulates  sexual  vigor." 

59.  On  instep.  "  Quiet,  dull,  sleepy."  On  upper  surface  over 
instep.     "  Not  so  dull ;  agreeable  ;  cooling." 

November  5,  1889,  I  recorded  the  following  experiments  with 
Dr.  J.  P.  C,  a  gentleman  of  clear  intelligence  and  habits  of  inves- 
tigation. 

1st.  The  positive  pole  of  a  small  Sampson  battery  (magneto- 
galvanic  or  primary  current)  was  applied  to  the  hypochondrium  on 
the  left  side,  and  the  negative  to  the  middle  of  the  shoulder-blades 
on  the  left.  At  first  there  was  too  much  muscular  disturbance,  and 
the  current  was  then  moderated.  He  reports  the  negative  electrode 
as  quite  warm  and  slightly  painful.  It  was  substituted  by  a  broader 
electrode.  Within  four  minutes  he  described  the  effect  as  being 
"  stimulating,  bracing,  restorative,  enlivening ;  a  good  appetizer ; 
strengthening  and  quieting." 

2d.  The  positive  was  applied  on  the  sternum,  about  the  level  of 
the  third  rib,  and  the  negative  below  the  shoulder-blade,  correspond- 
ing to  the  location  of  Adhesiveness  and  Repose.  For  two  or  three 
minutes  no  distinct  effect  appeared  ;  the  electrodes  felt  warm.  Then 
the  effect  appeared  rather  pleasing,  though  not  marked,  and  the 
breathing  appeared  deeper.  It  was  continued  fully  eight  minutes 
longer  and  felt  rather  quieting.  "  A  satisfying  sensation  ;  disposed  to 
sit  and  enjoy  myself,  at  peace  with  all  mankind  ;  a  friendly  feeling ; 
very  little  mentality  ;  somewhat  social ;  it  diminishes  mental  activity ; 
a  healthy  feeling  ;  disposed  to  take  life  easy  and  enjoy  it ;  a  good 
moral  influence  ;  a  friendly  feeling." 

3d.  The  negative  was  applied  to  the  dorsal  summit  of  the  spine, 
and  the  positive  below  the  left  hypochondrium  (Region  of  Relaxa- 
tion), and  continued  about  eight  minutes.  He  found  it  "stimulat- 
ing ;  makes  me  more  active  ;  would  not  sit  down  doing  nothing  ;  it 
stimulates  energy  and  courage  and  gives  a  sense  of  increased  power." 

4th.  The  negative  was  then  shifted  to  the  deltoid  muscle  of  the 
shoulder  (Energy).  It  felt  very  warming  ;  the  whole  arm  was 
warmed  down  to  the  elbow,  and  this  attracted  his  attention  chiefly. 
It  felt  as  if  a  warm  flannel  had  been  applied.     The  mental  condition 


5IO  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

he  pronounced  active,  with  "a  more  active  condition  of  the  nervous 
system."  The  feeling  was  "similar  to  the  last,  but  slightly  different, 
having  less  activity  or  activity  only  in  one  line ;  more  favorable  to 
application,  steady  industry  and  concentration."  This  was  continued 
about  fifteen  minutes,  to  procure  a  distinction  from  the  previous 
very  similar  experiment,  which  roused  the  region  of  maximum  force. 

5th.  The  positive  was  placed  in  front  of  the  ilium  (Melancholy), 
and  the  negative  in  the  axilla,  against  the  ribs,  covering  Tranquillity 
and  Cheerfulness.  The  positive  was  not  felt,  but  the  negative 
disturbed  the  muscles  actively  until  the  current  was  moderated.  He 
said  :  "  I  feel  like  letting  the  world  wag  ;  a  sort  of  relaxing  feeling 
compared  to  the  last ;  I  feel  like  taking  things  easy  ;  soothing,  quiet- 
ing ;  a  state  of  passive  enjoyment  ;  peaceful,  with  enjoyment  of 
life  ;  cheerful,  contented,  satisfied  with  almost  any  condition  of  life." 
Time  about  twenty  minutes. 

6th.  Previous  condition  reversed.  Negative  in  hypogastric  region 
(Melancholy).  No  change  perceived  for  two  minutes,  then:  "  I  don't 
like  this  so  well  —  it  makes  a  feeling  of  unquietness.  I  feel  as  though 
this  don't  amount  to  anything."  (Laughs  at  the  idea.)  "  I  shouldn't 
enjoy  life  well ;  the  feeling  is  depressing ;  it  makes  me  low-spirited, 
but  I  am  not  easily  depressed  ;  don't  often  have  the  blues.  It  would 
make  me  distrustful  and  put  a  damper  upon  any  business  transaction, 
fearing  it  would  not  succeed  ;  would  not  be  contented  in  any  kind  of 
business." 

7th.  Both  poles  applied  on  the  middle  of  shoulders  (Health),  with 
Faradic  current.  "  It  arouses  the  energies,  clears  the  mentality,  stim- 
ulates the  business  energies.  This  is  the  best  of  all.  It  stimulates 
the  whole  system,  makes  it  active,  as  though  I  would  like  to  be  doing 
something  actively,  pushing  ahead." 

8th.  After  ten  minutes  the  positive  current  was  received  through 
the  north  pole  of  a  magnet,  when  he  said  :  "  The  whole  action  is 
toned  down,  softer,  milder,  more  permeating  and  agreeable  ;  the  local 
sensation  is  not  like  sharp  pins,  but  gentler  ;  the  general  effect  more 
comfortable,  not  so  disturbing,  but  with  greater  power ;  a  better, 
stronger  force  ;  more  agreeable.  I  could  bear  this  three  times  longer 
than  the  other  ;  that  would  in  time  become  irritating,  this  would  not  ; 
it  is  decidedly  better." 

Experiments  with  electricity,  Nov.  2g,  1887. —  Dr.  A.  H.  F. ;  very 
sensitive. 

1.  Positive  on  Calorification  ;  negative  on  Coolness.  Recognizes 
the  effect  as  cooling  ;  felt  a  momentary  perspiration,  which  promptly 
ceased  ;  hands  feel  very  cold. 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SAKCOGNOMY.  5  I  I 

2.  Positive  on  Coolness  ;  negative  on  Calorification.  In  one  minute 
feels  increase  of  heat  ;  in  two  minutes,  perspiration  all  over  body. 

3.  (8.  10  p.  m.)  Positive  to  Calorification  ;  negative  electrodes  on 
tibial  regions.  (8.  II.)  Feels  cooler,  but  not  as  decidedly  as  when  on 
Coolness.  (8.  15.)  Same  result  distinctly,  but  less  refrigerative  than 
Coolness. 

4.  (8.  16.)  Negative  to  Cooiness ;  positive  to  Calorification.  Cools 
more  rapidly  than  last  experiment  and  is  soothing.  (8.  18.)  Pleas- 
ant, cooling  effect  and  no  perspiration. 

5.  (8.  20.)  Positive  on  middle  of  sternum  ;  negative  to  region  of 
Repose.  (8.  22.)  Sedative  to  mental  faculties  ;  begins  to  feel  drowsy. 
(8.24.)  Would  go  to  sleep  if  in  bed.     (8.25.)   Feels  dull  and  sleepy. 

6.  (8.28.)  Positive  above,  on  Coolness  ;  negative  two  inches  below 
umbilicus.  (8.30.)  Heating  ;  lively  feeling  ;  breathes  very  easily  ;  res- 
piration deeper  ;  feel  that  I  need  more  breath  ;  a  cheerful  influence  ; 
could  laugh  easily. 

7-  (8-35-)  Negative  on  thighs,  one-third  above  the  knee  ;  positive 
on  the  region  of  Tranquillity.  Proves  too  exciting,  and  the  operator 
applies  his  hand  to  conduct  the  current  to  Tranquillity.  The  current 
was  slight,  and  the  influence  of  the  hand  predominating  changed  the 
effect,  which  at  first  was  exciting,  and  it  became  very  quieting.  See- 
ing this,  I  had  the  electrode  replaced  instead  of  the  hand  in  contact, 
at  8.43.  At  8.44  he  felt  very  restless,  as  if  he  wanted  to  move  around, 
from  a  stimulating  influence.  (8.45.)  Reversed  :  positive  electrode  on 
left  thigh  ;  negative  electrodes  on  Tranquillity.  In  two  minutes  a 
very  different  feeling  ;  very  quieting.  It  would  be  agreeable  to  go  to 
sleep  under  such  an  influence. 

8.  (8.50.)  Positive  on  Coolness  and  Sleep  ;  negative  between  mam- 
mae and  lower  part  of  sternum.  In  a  few  minutes  feels  a  drowsy, 
trance-like  condition,  as  if  becoming  unconscious.  Drops  the  elec- 
trodes, applies  them  again,  and  soon  removes  them,  saying  he  feared 
he  should  tumble  down.     This  produces  the  mesmeric  condition. 

9.  The  Faradic  poles  applied  to  the  front  6f  each  thigh  roused  him 
and  removed  all  the  last  influences. 

10.  Faradic  poles  on  Health.  Restorative  ;  very  pleasant  and  invig- 
orating.    Laughs. 

11.  Faradic  poles  covered  with  Hydrangea  extract.  Applied  one  to 
kidneys  and  one  to  Health,  at  his  request,  as  he  had  been  affected  in 
kidneys  ;  produced  a  very  fine  restorative  effect. 

With  H.  M.,  a  man  of  narrow  head  and  un impressible  tempera- 
ment, I  tried  several  experiments  with  twelve  zinc  carbon  cells, 
holding  the  positive  in  his  left  hand.  The  most  distinct  effect  that 
he  experienced  was  the  warming  effect  when  the  negative  pole  was 


512  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

applied  on  Calorification  below  the  umbilicus.  At  the  epigastric 
region  of  Somnolence  he  felt  the  drowsy  effect,  which  ceased  when 
the  electrode  was  moved  higher  or  lower. 

On  the  thorax,  behind  and  below  the  left  nipple,  he  felt  the  exciting 
effect ;  and  a  very  soothing,  quieting  influence  when  the  electrode  was 
applied  at  the  organ  of  Patience  on  the  summit  of  the  head,  which 
was  well  developed.  He  also  felt  a  moderate  exciting  or  restless 
influence  on  the  posterior  quarter  of  the  neck,  and  a  very  quieting 
influence  at  the  organ  of  Tranquillity  (parietal  arch).  On  the  brow, 
at  the  root  of  the  nose,  he  felt  a  mental  excitement  and  flashing  in 
the  eyes.  On  the  opposite  occipital  region  he  recognized  a  dull 
influence.  On  the  amiable  region  of  the  top  head  he  felt  a  quiet 
influence,  but  on  the  combative  region,  which  was  small,  he  recognized 
nothing.  It  was  quite  apparent  that  he  recognized  influences  in 
proportion  to  the  development  of  the  organs.  The  visceral  region 
of  the  brain  was  small,  and  hence,  though  he  recognized  other 
influences  in  less  than  a  minute,  a  ten  minutes'  current  to  the 
abdomen  over  the  colon  produced  no  internal  effect  that  he  could 
recognize.  I  tried  the  same  upon  myself  and  felt  only  the  deeper 
respiration  which  belongs  to  the  hypogastric  region. 

I  found  the  most  responsive  point  in  his  system  was  the  phrenic 
locality  on  the  side,  which  stimulated  the  diaphragm  vigorously.  He 
felt  not  much  influence  at  the  hypogastric  location  of  Respiration,  but 
felt  Calorification  very  readily. 

Upon  Mr.  K.,  the  very  vigorous,  robust  sensitive,  I  tested  all  the 
points  connected  with  respiration.  A  current  from  side  to  side  at 
the  phrenic  locality,  on  the  lower  ribs,  affected  him  powerfully. 

A  current  from  the  hand  to  hypogastric  Respiration  produced  an 
increase  of  deep  breathing,  but  not  equal  to  the  currents  through  the 
side. 

The  current  from  the  phrenic  location  on  the  back,  about  the  7th 
dorsal  vertebra,  to  hypogastric  Respiration  produced  stronger  res- 
piration, but  not  of  so  impulsive  and  involuntary  a  character  as 
when  applied  on  the  side.  It  seemed  to  be  of  a  more  healthy  and 
vigorous  character. 

The  current  from  the  phrenic  nerve  downwards  to  hypogastric 
Respiration  was  the  feeblest  of  all,  nor  was  it  near  as  vigorous 
when  sent  to  the  side  as  the  horizontal  currents.  Evidently  the 
lateral  current  would  be  the  most  powerful  in  rousing  him  from 
asphyxia.  A  similar  influence  was  produced  by  applying  the  fingers 
on  the  head  just  over  the  cavity  of  the  ear.  In  others  in  whom 
Irritability  was  less  developed,  however,  I  have  found  the  current 
from  the  back  of  the  neck  to  the  hypogastric  seat  of  Respiration 
most  effective. 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  5  1 3 

To  reach  the  heart  I  applied  the  poles  on  each  side  about  four 
inches  obliquely  downward  and  backward  from  the  nipple.  The 
response  was  prompt ;  it  was  both  exciting  and  invigorating  to  the 
heart.  This  point  had  been  felt  quite  distinctly  also  by  H.  M.  Next 
applying  the  electrodes  on  each  side,  at  and  above  the  nipples  and  a 
little  nearer  the  median  line,  the  heart  was  excited  also,  but  with  a 
weak,  fluttering  feeling,  which  belongs  to  the  emotions  connected  with 
that  part  of  the  chest.  Love  is  always  supposed  to  affect  the  heart. 
It  is  true  in  Sarcognomy,  but  it  is  a  softening  and  enfeebling  action. 
It  is  courage  and  the  violent  passions  which  give  it  strength. 

I  made  several  experiments  in  applying  the  two  electrodes  near 
together  on  the  body  and  on  the  head,  with  the  galvanic  and  with  the 
primary  helix  current,  and  the  effects  were  similar  to  what  I  had 
been  accustomed  to  produce  by  the  hand.  When  I  held  the  negative 
pole  in  my  hand  (he  holding  the  positive),  and  applied  my  hands  to 
his  head  or  body,  he  recognized  the  effect  as  being  greater  than  when 
I  used  the  hand  without  electricity. 

As  the  hand  resembles  the  negative  pole  in  its  effects  and  the 
negative  pole  reinforces  the  hand,  the  question  arises  how  the  posi- 
tive pole  would  influence  the  power  of  the  hand.  Reason  would 
indicate  that  the  hand  would  modify  the  positive  influence,  making  it 
more  general  and  less  dispersive, — a  beneficial  stimulus, — which  is 
the  fact. 

My  own  electric  impressibility  is  of  quite  a  low  grade,  but  in  my 
personal  experience  of  the  hygienic  current  I  have  realized  its 
character.  I  had  been  suffering  from  a  disturbance  of  the  liver, 
producing  fever  and  oppression  of  the  brain,  which  made  literary 
labor  irksome.  I  tried  this  current  for  twenty  or  thirty  minutes,  and 
realized  greater  freedom  of  respiration  and  greater  activity  of  brain, 
especially  of  the  upper  region  of  the  brain,  producing  a  normal 
development  of  character  and  a  general  feeling  of  pleasure  and 
comfort.  The  liver  was  not  so  much  improved,  for  it  was  an  old 
offender,  but  it  troubled  me  much  less  and  it  had  a  healthier  feeling 
next  morning,  while  the  happy  normal  condition  of  the  general  con- 
stitution remained,  giving  me  a  personal  experience  of  the  ethical 
power  of  the  hygienic  current. 

A  partially  insane  patient  to  whom  I  applied  the  current  passed  a 
more  quiet  night  than  usual.  I  also  gave  her  the  cephalic  current 
until  it  produced  a  strong  impression  upon  the  upper  posterior  part 
of  the  head. 

Having  had  an  attack  of  irritation  of  the  liver  I  ventured,  as  an 
experiment,  to  send  a  galvanic  current  from  six  cells  through  the  liver 
from  front  to  the  spine  (the  posterior  pole  a  little  higher  than  the 


514  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

anterior).  Under  this  influence,  just  before  retiring,  I  found  my 
temperature  elevated  and  almost  feverish,  and  a  wakeful  state  of 
excitability  established  which  made  it  necessary  for  me  to  rise  very 
early  to  counteract  it,  which  I  did  by  currents  to  the  region  of  Health 
and  to  the  regions  of  Coolness  and  Sleep.  This  removed  the  fever 
and  I  slept  very  soundly  until  roused  by  the  breakfast  bell  with  an 
unfinished  nap.  During  the  whole  forenoon  I  felt  that  it  would  be 
very  easy  and  agreeable  to  renew  my  sleep. 

To  test  the  electric  transmission  of  medical  influences,  I  con- 
structed a  medical  rheophore  by  inserting  through  a  cork  a  stout 
wire  in  a  tube  of  galvanized  iron  closed  at  the  ends  and  filled  with  a 
solution  of  aloes.  Through  this  I  passed  a  current  of  six  to  twelve 
cells  from  one  hand  to  the  other  of  a  sensitive  and  intelligent  lady 
who  was  of  constipated  habit.  She  recognized  the  peculiar  influence 
of  aloes,  not  knowing  the  contents  of  the  rheophore,  and  said  that  it 
would  prove  cathartic  if  continued.  I  tried  the  same  with  another 
patient  equally  sensitive  and  somewhat  constipated,  for  a  few  minutes 
in  the  afternoon,  until  she  recognized  an  influence  on  the  bowels  and 
a  bitterness  in  the  throat  and  nostrils.  Next  day'  she  complained 
that  she  had  felt  the  disturbing  influence  all  the  evening.  I  tried  the 
experiment  with  her  again  (substituting  hydrastis  for  aloes),  less 
than  five  minutes.  She  felt  a  strong  tonic  influence  as  she  expressed 
it,  as  if  she  was  being  charged  with  power,  which  might  be  beneficial 
if  she  did  not  get  an  overdose, — taking  her  hands  off  alternately  to 
moderate  the  tension. 

Using  the  same  rheophore,  on  another  occasion,  I  placed  it  in  the 
hands  of  a  gentleman  whose  psychometric  capacity  was  sufficient  to 
judge  of  anything  held  in  his  hands.  In  less  than  two  minutes  he 
recognized  its  tendency  to  act  on  the  bowels.  Then  connecting  it 
with  a  positive  electrode  from  six  cells,  while  he  held  the  negative  in 
his  other  hand,  he  recognized  the  influence  much  more  promptly  and 
completely,  giving  a  good  description  of  the  action  of  aloes  and 
saying  that  he  felt  the  influence  three  times  as  forcibly  as  before  the 
apolication  of  the  current. 

ILLUSTRATIVE    EXPERIMENTS. 

It  is  over  forty-two  years  since  I  made  the  experiments  which 
developed  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy.  I  kept  no  record  of  their 
details.  My  publications  simply  presented  the  results,  and  my 
lectures  presented  the  verification  in  the  experiments  before  auditors. 

It  would  have  been  interesting,  no  doubt,  to  many,  if  I  had  recorded 
all  the  steps  of  the  investigation, —  the  experiments,  the  reasoning, 
the  difficulties  and  the  triumphs  of  the  research  in  the  first  develop- 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  515 

merit  of  the  Science  of  Sarcognomy,  the  revelation  of  mysteries, 
the  illumination  of  medical  philosophy.  But  I  thought  only  of  the 
grand  results,  and  knew  that  whatever  I  discovered  others  would  in 
time  verify.  Hence  I  attached  no  importance  to  my  individual  labors 
and  the  incidents  of  the  investigation. 

There  are  many  who  treasure  up  and  never  forget  the  incidents  of 
their  personal  experience  and  achievements,  who  are  inexhaustible  in 
the  narration  of  what  they  have  done  or  witnessed,  but  I  have  no 
such  ability  or  inclination  ;  I  would  gather  and  carry  with  me  the 
harvest  of  great  truths  which  are  to  make  the  world  wiser  and 
better,  but  I  leave  behind  all  irrelevant  and  personal  matter.  Content 
to  retain  principles,  I  seldom  revert  to  the  experiments  and  incidents 
of  their  development ;  and  I  have  preserved  no  record  of  my  early 
experiments  even  in  memory.  Nor  was  there  any  temptation  or 
opportunity,  at  the  time,  to  publish  the  incidents  while  they  still  had 
to  me  the  interest  of  a  marvellous  novelty,  which  they  have  long 
lost. 

All  that  I  did  was  in  an  intellectual  solitude.  There  was  no 
channel  in  current  literature  in  which  I  might  have  floated  the 
product  of  my  labors.  A  cold  inhospitality  repels  the  new  and  the 
marvellous.  As  stranger  is  synonymous  with  enemy  among  bar- 
barian races ;  so  it  is,  in  the  present  half-civilized  age,  a  strangely 
new  thought  or  discovery  meets  everywhere  with  indifference  or 
aversion,  and  I  soon  learned  to  desist  from  any  attempt  to  familiarize 
the  readers  of  periodicals  with  that  new  world  of  science  and 
philosophy  in  which  I  had  entered,  —  for  even  when  the  prejudice  of 
an  editor  has  been  overcome,  the  prejudice  of  his  readers  is  equally 
formidable. 

Believing,  however,  that  the  present  time  affords  a  small  audience 
for  the  honest  and  successful  explorer  of  mysteries,  who  may  listen 
to  his  narrative  with  interest,  I  shall  introduce  in  this  volume  a 
statement  of  experiments  which  may  give  the  reader  a  more  vivid 
idea  of  the  elementary  facts  of  Sarcognomy  and  partially  compensate 
for  my  failure  originally  to  record  such  illustrations. 

To  produce  a  good  experimental  illustration  of  anything  we  need 
the  best  materials.  For  experiments  on  the  human  constitution  we 
require  the  highest  sensibility,  impressibility,  and  intuitive  quickness 
of  conception,  by  means  of  which  we  promptly  attain  results  which 
would  be  unattainable  under  ordinary  circumstances. 

The  entire  development  of  Anthropology  was  successful,  because  I 
availed  myself  of  such  methods,  which  others  had  neglected. 

The  electrical  experiments  which  I  shall  here  record  were  made  on 
one  of  the  highest  degree  of  sensitive  impressibility  and  confirmed 


$l6  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

by  repetition  on  others.  They  were  not  the  experiments  of  discovery,, 
which  were  made  without  electricity,  but  were  the  illustration  by  the 
electric  agency  of  what  I  had  already  established  by  the  nervauric 
process,  and  therefore  were  more  concise  and  clear  than  if  they  had 
been  an  attempt  at  discovery  with  no  previous  understanding  of  the 
subject.  I  had  but  to  verify  with  galvanic  plates  and  Faradic 
currents  what  the  hand  had  already  established. 

Wishing  to  demonstrate  the  effect  of  galvanic  plates,  I  connected 
a  plate  of  iron  a  little  over  two  inches  square  with  a  silver  coin  about 
one  inch  in  diameter  by  insulated  copper  wire,  and  selected  for 
experiment  Mr.  K.,  a  very  sensitive  yet  very  vigorous  gentleman  in 
the  prime  of  life,  from  whose  quick  impressibility  I  could  get  better 
results  in  five  minutes  than  others  could  yield  in  twenty,  and  from 
appliances  that  few  could  feel  distinctly. 

I  applied  the  iron  plate  to  the  forehead  and  the  silver  to  the  back 
of  the  neck.  In  less  than  a  minute  he  began  to  feel  dull  and  drowsy 
from  the  dispersing  influence  of  the  positive  pole  upon  the  intellect- 
ual faculties. 

Reversing  the  plates,  he  immediately  felt  wakeful  and  bright. 

Applying  the  iron  on  the  adhesive  unintellectual  region  and  the 
silver  at  the  root  of  the  nose,  he  felt  disposed  to  close  his  eyes  and 
exercise  the  interior  vision.  "  It  comes  nearer  putting  me  to  sleep 
than  anything  ever  did  before,"  was  his  remark. 

Applying  the  plates  on  each  temple,  an  inch  behind  the  brow,  he 
said  the  effect  was  similar  but  greater,  —  an  inclination  to  go  into 
trance.     I  perceived  that  his  mental  condition  was  very  bright. 

Applying  the  iron  plate  at  the  back  of  the  neck  and  the  silver  at 
the  chin,  he  felt  a  heating  and  exciting  influence,  saying,  "  I  would 
soon  be  in  a  perspiration." 

Applying  the  iron  on  the  spine  near  the  kidneys  and  the  silver 
about  three  or  four  inches  below  the  umbilicus  (Calorification),  he 
felt  a  general  stimulation  and  heat,  similar  to  the  effects  at  the  chin. 

Reversing  the  plates,  the  effects  were  somewhat  confused,  as  the 
:ron  plate  had 'left  some  irritation  ;  but  placing  the  silver  on  the  side 
behind  the  middle  of  the  arm,  he  soon  felt  a  soothing  and  cooling" 
influence. 

The  iron  at  the  lumbo-sacral  region  and  silver  at  the  perineum 
produced  a  decided  erotic  influence. 

The  iron  at  the  angle  of  the  lower  jaw  and  silver  just  above  the 
parietal  arch  over  the  ear  vertically  —  the  surface  being  wet  —  (Region 
of  Tranquillity  and  Cheerfulness),  he  felt  disposed  to  study,  and  in  a 
calm,  cheerful  state  of  mind. 

The  iron  plate,  however,  being  disproportionally  large,  the  peculiar 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  517 

irritative  effect  of  the  metal  was  felt  at  each  location,  and  slightly 
disturbed  the  course  of  the  experiment  ;  and  when  I  applied  it  to  the 
region  of  Disease  on  the  cheek  this  effect  was  so  strong  that  I  dis- 
continued the  experiments  to  procure  a  better  apparatus. 

(Ap.  21.)  I  had  prepared  a  silver  plate  four  and  three-fourths  by 
three  inches  connected  to  a  zinc  (galvanized  iron)  plate  three  by  two 
and  a  half,  faced  with  a  piece  of  cloth  saturated  with  brine. 

Healtli  and  Disease.  —  The  clothing  being  removed,  I  placed  the 
zinc  plate  in  the  hypochondriac  region  (marked  Disease  on  the  map) 
and  the  silver  on  the  shoulder  (region  marked  Health).  He  said  : 
"  This  stirs  up  the  liver, — if  the  liver  was  torpid  this  would  start  it  and 
make  the  bowels  carry  off  the  effect.  The  influence  is  very  pleasant, 
—  it  would  drive  away  the  blues  and  make  one  look  on  the  cheerful 
side  of  things.  It  is  invigorating.  If  I  were  dull  and  moping,  this 
would  stir  me  up  to  go  to  work.  It  is  invigorating,  cheering  and 
pleasant." 

After  three  or  four  minutes,  I  reversed  the  position  of  the  plates. 
He  began  in  less  than  a  minute  to  express  the  effect:  "  I  don't  like 
this.  It  would  put  me  in  the  dumps,  —  to  feel  like  suicide.  It's 
decidedly  oppressive  ;  makes  me  feel  a  swelling  and  fulness  in  the 
region  of  the  liver  and  stomach.  I  feel  tight  across  the  bowels.  I 
feel  as  if  I  was  poisoned.     I  feel  as  a  poisoned  puppy  looks." 

The  plates  were  then  restored  to  the  first  position,  the  silver  plate 
on  Health,  which  elicited  the  remark  :  "This  takes  all  the  bad  feeling 
away.  I  am  growing  more  cheerful,  bright  and  hopeful.  I  could  bear 
trouble  better  under  this  influence.  Under  the  other,  everything 
would  trouble  me." 

Such  is  an  example  of  the  prompt  and  thorough  effect  which  may 
be  realized  with  the  most  impressible,  —  the  class  that  yield  readily  to 
the  nervaura  of  the  hand.  Others  require  a  longer  time  and  stronger 
current,  but  the  best  demonstration  for  the  evolution  of  science  is 
where  we  have  the  best  material  for  experiment.  Electric  science 
has  been  much  indebted  to  the  delicacy  of  the  frog  galvanoscope, 
though  its  function  has  been  limited  to  the  discovery  of  delicate 
currents.  The  human  galvanoscope  is  vastly  superior  in  importance, 
because  it  can  reveal  the  laws  of  physiology  and  psychology. 

This  foregoing  experiment  teaches  us  that  the  current  to  the 
hypochondrium  is  injurious,  dangerous  and  capable  of  doing  a  vast 
deal  of  mischief.  Dr.  Beard  avoided  this  mischief  by  currents  to 
the  epigastrium,  which  may  be  beneficial  if  cautiously  administered) 
but  which  are  liable  to  eliciting  the  morbid  hypochondriac  influence 
if  continued  or  applied  with  vigor.  Dr.  Althaus  found  it  necessary 
to  discontinue  currents  to  the  epigastric  region  on  account  of  their 


$  l8  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

injurious  effects.  It  is  presumable  that  he  used  a  stronger  or  more 
prolonged  current,  and  did  not  carefully  avoid  the  hypochondria. 
The  mesmerizers  formerly  did  a  great  deal  of  mischief  in  producing 
the  somniloquent  and  clairvoyant  state,  by  prolonging  their  passes 
down  the  thorax  as  far  as  the  margin  of  the  ribs,  the  patients  being 
sometimes  sickened,  nauseated  or  thrown  into  convulsions.  Beard 
and  Rockwell  say  :  "A  medical  friend,  who  by  our  suggestion  treated 
a  case  of  ulcer  of  the  stomach  by  the  galvanic  current,  informed  us 
that  a  very  mild  current  from  a  few  zinc  carbon  cells,  which  gave  no 
sensation  on  the  surface  whatever,  would,  after  the  electrodes  had 
been  kept  in  position  a  few  minutes,  one  on  the  epigastric  and  the 
other  on  the  back,  cause,  all  of  a  sudden  and  without  any  warning,  a 
painful  shock,  as  though  a  strong  current  had  been  suddenly  inter- 
rupted in  the  metallic  part  of  the  circuit.  This  phenomenon  occurred 
so  often  that  he  abandoned  the  treatment." 

It  is  remarkable  that  electricians  have  gathered  so  little  knowledge 
of  the  effects  of  electric  currents  near  the  middle  of  the  trunk. 
Passing  backward  they  are  apt  to  accumulate  a  morbid  irritability,  as 
in  the  above  case,  and  passing  forward  they  are  liable  to  produce 
morbid  and  exhausting  effects. 

The  demonstration  of  the  morbific  and  healthful  regions  of  the 
body  is  not  an  isolated  matter,  but  supplements  my  discovery  of  the 
same  in  the  head,  which  constitutes  a  part  of  the  systematic  and 
philosophic  science  of  Anthropology,  which  is  also  amply  verified  in 
the  history  of  diseases. 

It  teaches  us  the  controlling  principle  of  true  electro-therapeutics, 
that  currents  should  be  as  far  as  possible  upward  and  backward,  and 
only  to  a  limited  extent  downward  and  forward, —  a  principle  which 
blind  empiricism  failed  to  discover. 

Moreover,  it  teaches  us  that  the  best  position  for  the  negative  pole 
is  on  the  superior  posterior  surfaces,  and  the  best  position  for  the 
positive  is  on  the  anterior  inferior.  The  abdominal  surface  generally 
is  a  good  location  for  the  positive,  but  the  specially  appropriate  location 
for  introducing  the  current  is  at  the  hypochondria.  This  is  what 
electricians  have  entirely  failed  to  discover.  A  current  from  the 
hypochondria  to  the  shoulders,  the  thighs  or  any  part  of  the  spinal 
column  is  highly  invigorating.  To  the  region  of  Coolness  it  is  highly 
beneficial  in  fever  —  to  the  anterior  or  tibial  surface  of  the  leg  it  is 
eminently  beneficial  in  pneumonia  —  to  the  summit  of  the  dorsal 
portion  of  the  spine  it  invigorates  the  brain  —  to  the  middle  dorsal 
region  it  invigorates  the  lungs  and  heart  —  to  the  lower  dorsal  region 
all  the  abdominal  viscera  :  and  in  doing  this  it  sustains  the  tone  of 
the  nervous  system,  overcoming  all  morbid  irritability  and  depression 
of  bodv  or  mind. 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMV.  519 

2d  Experiment.  —  Abdominal  region.  The  zinc  was  placed  on 
the  top  of  the  shoulder,  in  the  region  of  Energy,  which  is  antago- 
nistic to  the  abdominal  region,  and  the  silver  on  the  hypogastric 
region  of  Evacuation  (Defecation).     His  expression  was  as  follows  : 

"I  feel  it  in  the  lower  bowels.  It  causes  a  trouble,  a  fulness,  as  if 
the  bowels  were  out  of  order.  I  feel  as  if  it  would  be  difficult  to 
retain  the  urine.  It  causes  a  tight,  oppressed  feeling  of  congestion 
in  the  bowels.     It  might  cause  an  inflammation  there." 

As  this  was  evidently  an  unhealthy,  prostrating  influence,  I  changed 
the  experiment  by  removing  the  zinc  to  the  gastric  region  towards 
the  side  at  the  margin  of  the  ribs,  a  region  that  affects  the  stomach 
and  to  some  extent  the  liver  and  spleen.  "  That's  better  and  more 
endurable,"  was  his  first  remark;  " a  decided  improvement.  This 
would  relieve  constipation.  With  a  stronger  current  it  would  open 
the  bowels.  I  feel  a  pain  in  the  region  of  the  zinc ;  it  is  going  down 
the  bowels,  something  like  a  drastic  cathartic.  It  feels  something 
like  cathartic  pills,  —  just  after  taking  them."  The  plates  were  then 
removed.  The  effect  was  obviously  that  of  a  current  through 
the  alimentary  canal  similar  to  Aldini's  experiment  of  a  current  from 
the  tongue  to  the  anus,  with  two  plates  such  as  I  used. 

The  analogy  of  this  experiment  to  a  cathartic  pill  was  very  exact. 
Pills  which  simply  rouse  and  irritate  the  alimentary  canal  are  not 
very  wholesome  in  their  effects,  and  many  physicians  have  been 
strongly  opposed  to  them,  although  there  is  ample  evidence  of  the 
utility  of  cathartics.  Certainly  the  abdominal  region,  if  much  excited 
or  irritated,  has  a  depressing  and  debilitating  effect.  But  a  proper 
energy  in  the  abdominal  functions,  associated  with  the  sustaining  and 
regulating  influence  of  the  higher  functions,  or,  in  other  words,  of 
Health,  must  be  beneficial.  Hence  aperient  medicines  which  have  a 
tonic  and  nervine  character  are  quite  wholesome  and  altogether  to  be 
commended,  of  which  we  have  a  fine  example  in  the  Chelone  Glabra 
(Balmony)  and  the  Berberis  (Barberry). 

In  electric  practice  this  happy  combination  may  be  attained  by 
passing  the  current  from  the  hypochondria  to  the  successive  parts  of 
the  gastro-intestinal  tract,  or  by  passing  the  Faradic  current  between 
the  centre  of  the  shoulders  and  the  gastro-intestinal  tract,  so  as  to 
bring  the  two  into  co-operation.  A  similar  result  may  be  produced 
in  medical  practice  by  associating  cathartic  remedies  with  Hyoscy- 
amus,  Belladonna,  Hydrastis  and  Quassia,  which  prevent  them 
from  being  either  irritating,  depressing  or  debilitating. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  abdomen  should  be  associated  with  the 
spinal  column,  especially  the  lower  dorsal  region,  in  electric  treat- 
ment. 


520  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

id  Experiment. — The  average  time  occupied  in  the  preceding 
applications  did  not  exceed  ten  minutes  each.  At  4.21  I  applied  the 
silver  to  the  region  of  Calorification  and  the  zinc  to  the  region  of 
Coldness.  In  its  first  application  it  extended  an  inch  too  far  back, 
and  his  first  remark  was  :  "  This  produces  a  sleepy  feeling."  As  this 
indicated  an  action  on  the  region  of  Repose,  I  moved  the  zinc  a 
iittle  forward.  His  first  remark  was  :  "  I'd  like  this  in  fever.  It 
would  have  a  fine  effect  in  typhoid  fever.  I  think  it  would  break  it 
up.  If  there  was  tightness  and  congestion  in  the  bowels  this  would 
relieve  it,  cool  the  fever  and  promote  sleep ;  I  did  not  think  it  would. 
It  don't  act  as  it  did  before,  to  make  a  congestion  under  the  silver." 
(In  2d  experiment.) 

4.29  —  "The  effect  begins  to  change.  I  don't  like  it  now.  It's 
getting  painful.  The  bowels  begin  to  feel  tight.  The  temperature 
is  rising.  The  condition  is  altogether  different.  I  believe  this  would 
produce  fever.  I  am  getting  warm  ;  I  feel  it  all  over,  as  if  the  veins 
were  swelling  and  the  blood  getting  hot."  4.31  — "I  feel  as  warm 
as  if  I  had  an  overcoat  on."  (He  was  naked  from  the  hips  up.) 
4.32  —  "I  begin  to  feel  nausea.  In  a  short  time,  in  this  way,  I 
would  go  to  bed  sick."  4.33 — "I'm  dizzy-headed;  my  head  is 
beginning  to  ache ;  my  head  is  heavy  and  tight.  It  is  getting 
troublesome  to  look  out  ;  the  light  is  too  strong  ;  I  don't  like  that. 
If  I  had  been  feverish  this  would  have  made  me  sick.  Look  at  my 
veins." 

4.35  —  Plates  reversed:  silver  to  Coldness;  zinc  to  Calorification. 
"  I  feel  it  in  throat  and  lungs.  The  irritation  is  leaving  below  ;  the 
feeling  is  passing  up."  4.38  —  "It's  all  gone  except  in  my  head." 
(Gapes  and  laughs.)  "The  dizziness  is  all- gone."  4.40  —  "Nearly 
all  gone,  but  a  little  feeling  remaining  in  the  eyes."  4.40! —  "  Guess 
I'm  convalescent."  (Gapes.)  4.43 — "As  soon  go  to  sleep  an  hour 
or  two  as  not." 

Question  :  What  is  your  temperature  ?  "  It  cooled  down  rapidly 
after  the  change,  rather  below  the  natural.  I  think  now  it's  fully  up 
to  the  natural,  if  not  above.  I  feel  very  comfortable  ;  the  best  feeling 
I  have  had.  I'd  advise  those  who  want  to  sleep  to  try  this.  I  never 
have  any  trouble  in  sleeping."  4.47  —  "  In  the  former  application  I 
was  entirely  upset.  Now  I'm  quite  natural,  comfortable  and  rather 
indolent  and  good-natured;  disposed  to  sleep.  A  healthy  but  not  a 
lively  feeling  ;  a  good,  social  feeling." 

This  was  a  very  instructive  experiment, — in  the  beginning  and 
throughout,  the  cooling  associated  with  the  sleepy  and  social  region  ; 
all  being  close  together.  The  first  effect  of  the  positive  current 
passing  in  at  the  cooling  region  was  to  stimulate  it,  electricity  being 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  521 

a  normal  stimulus.  It  required  several  minutes  for  the  dispersive 
and  sedative  influence  of  the  positive  current  (called  anelectrotonus 
by  electricians)  to  be  established.  In  eight  minutes  the  stimulating 
effect  gave  way  to  anelectrotonus,  suppressing  the  cool,  sedative 
influence  of  the  lateral  aspect  of  the  thorax  and  establishing  catelec- 
trotonus  in  the  calorific  region,  with  its  heat,  oppression  of  the  head, 
photophobia,  fever  and  nausea,  all  of  which  were  happily  removed  by 
reversing  the  plates,  carrying  the  developing  catelectrotonus  of  the 
negative  pole  to  the  cool,  healthy,  social  region  just  behind  the 
humerus,  and  dispersing  the  hypogastric  excitement  by  the  anelectro 
tonus  of  the  zinc  plate.  From  this  we  learn  that  fevers  are  to  be 
combated  by  positive  currents  sent  through  the  hypogastric  region  to 
the  side  of  the  thorax,  and  if  any  other  sedative  influence  can 
produce  the  dispersive  effects  of  the  positive  pole  they  should  be 
applied  in  fever  to  the  hypogastric  region.  This  is  true  of  the  hot 
water  douche,  which  is  powerful  in  fever  if  applied  to  the  hypogastric 
region. 

We  may  also  learn  from  this  experiment  that  the  negative  pole  at 
Calorification  will  counteract  the  coldness  of  a  chill,  but  if  the 
positive  pole  be  applied  on  the  postero-lateral  side  of  the  chest  its 
exhaustive  influence  there,  impairing  tone  and  nutrition,  would 
endanger  running  into  fever.  Hence,  in  counteracting  a  chill,  the 
more  appropriate  treatment  would  be  a  Faradic  current  between  the 
lumbo-sacral  or  lumbo-dorsal  and  hypogastric  regions,  which  would  be 
invigorating  as  well  as  warming. 

qth  Experiment.  —  The  fourth  experiment  was  instructive  in  both 
a  psychic  and  a  physiological  sense.  The  silver  was  applied  to  the 
lumbo-sacral  region  of  physical  force  and  virility,  the  zinc  to  the 
region  of  Reverence  on  the  side  of  the  chest  adjacent  to  the  middle 
of  the  humerus,  at  4.53.  At  4.55  he  says  :  "This  acts  on  the  whole 
system  ;  affects  the  muscles  and  viscera.  I  could  do  a  good,  hard 
day's  work.  I  feel  like  handling  the  hammer  and  the  axe.  It  is 
highly  stimulating  to  the  muscles.  A  very  fine  influence ;  good  for 
lazy  people." 

Question  :  What  effect  has  it  on  the  temper  ?  "  There  is  a  'don't- 
care  '  feeling  ;  busy  ;  don't  want  any  one  to  bother  or  meddle  ;  would 
be  quiet  if  let  alone,  but  quarrelsome  if  bothered.  I  perceive  no  sex- 
ual desire  but  there  is  sexual  vigor.  This  is  a  fine  tonic  ;  it  creates 
great  force,  driving  force,  animal  force,  no  thought.  It  is  just  like 
Damiana." 

This  illustrates  the  muscular  power  of  the  lower  part  of  the  spine 
and  its  antagonism  to  the  intellectual,  inspirational  character  of  the 
thorax.     Damiana,  to  which  he  compared  the  influence  excited  in  the 


522  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

lumbosacral  region,  has  been  classed  by  physicians  as  an  aphrodisiac, 
but  the  expression  is  incorrect.  It  is  simply  a  muscle  invigorator, 
acting  vigorously  on  the  lower  part  of  the  spine,  and  the  sexual 
impotence  which  it  has  relieved  was  probably  simply  a  muscular 
impotence  removable  by  muscular  tonics. 

Experiments  resumed.  —  3.45  —  Zinc  on  the  sternum  (intellect- 
ual region)  ;  silver  on  side  of  the  back  at  Sleep  and  Coolness. 

3.47  —  Seems  slow  to  express  himself.      "  I  think  it's  sedative." 

3-48  —  "It's  decidedly  sedative.  I  could  go  to  sleep  ;  it's  quieting. 
If  one  was  restless,  irritable  and  unable  to  sleep,  this  would  quiet 
him." 

3.49 — "It  brings  a  thoughtful  as  well  as  sleepy  feeling;  one 
would  sleep  and  yet  the  spirit  be  awake.  It  would  be  a  healthy, 
restorative  sleep,  and  one  would  wake  much  refreshed  after  pleasant 
dreams.  The  spiritual  influence  issues  from  the  front.  There  are 
two  distinct  feelings." 

In  this  case  the  zinc  plate  was  not  large  enough  to  suppress 
intellectual  action  entirely. 

3.54 — Plates  reversed.  "This  is  stimulating.  I  feel  like  using 
my  arms.  It  stimulates  the  intellect.  I  don't  feel  sleepy  at  all, —  I'm 
completely  waked  up,  mentally  and  physically.  The  other  made  me 
disposed  to  go  to  sleep  and  dream.  With  this  I  prefer  anything  else, — 
activity  and  study.     I  could  not  sleep  at  all  under  this  influence." 

4.  —  Zinc  on  shoulder;  silver  above  the  umbilicus.  "This  causes 
pain  and  swelling ;  a  feeling  like  cramp.  It  creates  nausea.  It  would 
give  me  cramp  in  the  stomach.  It  goes  down  in  the  bowels  ;  it  travels 
up  and  down  ;  it  would  bring  on  cramp  and  vomiting." 

In  this  we  see  the  evil  effect  of  downward  and  anterior  currents 
from  the  shoulder, —  a  class  especially  to  be  avoided. 

4.04  —  Zinc  changed  to  the  lower  dorsal  region.  "This  brings  a 
different  effect.  The  unpleasant  feeling  is  all  gone.  It  feels  now 
strengthening  to  the  stomach  ;  good  for  dyspepsia ;  tonic  and  stimu- 
lant to  the  stomach  ;  very  comfortable  indeed." 

4.05  —  "  It  begins  to  be  sleepy  ;  like  an  after-dinner  sleep, —  an  easy, 
good-natured  sleep,  very  soothing  to  the  stomach.  It  does  not  produce 
any  hunger.  It's  a  good  influence  to  sleep  with  ;  good  for  cramp  in 
the  stomach." 

The  negative  in  this  case  was  at  the  assimilative  region,  which  has 
a  soothing,  semi-drowsy  influence. 

4.10  —  Zinc  and  silver  on  right  and  left  side  of  back,  about  the 
middle  of  the  posterior  part  of  the  ilium ;  a  region  of  hostile  passions. 
"I'd  get  quarrelsome  under  this  influence.  I  feel  like  saying 'I'll 
kick  the  devil  out  of  you.'     I'd  fight  my  best  friend.     I  feel  it  here,  too, 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  $2$ 

in  the  hypogastric  region  ;  it  stimulates  there  ;  it  stimulates  the  pel- 
vic organs  ;  stimulating,  tonic  and  upbuilding  to  the  pelvic  region." 

4.20  —  Plates  moved  farther  out  and  higher  up;  zinc  on  the  right 
side.  "  This  affects  the  groin  on  the  right  side,  as  if  there  was  a 
swelling.  On  the  whole,  rather  good-natured,  and  inclined  to  laugh 
and  be  social  and  gallant."  (This  was  the  posterior  portion  of  the 
region  of  Vivacity.) 

4.25  —  Plates  a  little  lower.  "Much  like  the  last ;  good-natured; 
rather  dull,  but  strengthening  ;  favors  the  sexual." 

4.30  —  Zinc  to  Chastity  (on  the  ribs  laterally) ;  silver  to  sacrum. 
11  This  gives  erotic  desires  ;  excitement  and  physical  ability." 

4.39  —  Reversed:  silver  to  Chastity  and  Dignity;  zinc  to  sacrum. 
"This  is  a  nice  influence  ;  healthy  and  strong,  as  if  I  could  face  the 
world.  It's  quieting,  yet  with  strength.  The  passion  and  desire  are 
taken  away.  It  gives  a  healthy  condition  to  the  genitals,  quelling  all 
excitement.  This  would  subdue  any  excitement  in  the  genital  organs 
and  would  be  beneficial  if  inflammation  or  irritation  existed." 

4.45  —  Moved  silver  to  Reverence.  "This  is  more  subduing;  a 
gentle,  lovable  influence,  very  quiet ;  would  make  me  very  good- 
natured  and  affectionate,  but  deferential.  I'd  fall  in  love  easily.  It 
would  reduce  the  sexual  power  to  nothing,  like  castration.  I  know 
some  that  ought  to  wear  this." 

The  influence  of  Reverence  is  antagonistic  to  the  lumbo-sacral 
region,  which  supports  virility.  The  influence  of  Chastity  antagonizes 
the  sexual  organs. 

Wednesday. —  2.39  —  Experiments  on  the  Head.  Zinc  to  Disease 
on  the  left  side  ;  silver  to  Health  on  right  side.  "  This  gives  a  strange 
feeling  in  the  throat ;  nauseating  ;  this  passes  off  ;  now  very  agreeable." 
(The  first  effect  was  the  local  irritative  effect  of  the  zinc,  the  second 
the  effect  of  the  established  current.) 

3  —  "  This  is  a  very  nice  condition  ;  it  feels  strengthening,  enlivening. 
Good,  healthy,  tonic." 

3.02  —  Silver  changed  to  region  of  Vital  Force  behind  mastoid 
process. 

3.03  —  "  Rather  sickening  to  stomach.  It's  annoying.  Gives  an  irri- 
tating, impatient  feeling;  makes  me  feel  ugly.  I  feel  like  fighting; 
impatient  and  quarrelsome  with  anybody  ;  a  nasty  feeling." 

3.07  —  Silver  to  Religion  ;  zinc  to  Vitality  and  Muscularity. 
"  That's  nice.  It  clears  all  the  trouble  away  ;  makes  the  head  clear 
and  bright ;  stimulates  thought  and  helps  one  to  carry  it  out." 

The  religious  region  has  a  brightening  influence  on  the  intellect, 
especially  on  the  intuitive  portion,  and  an  invigorating  influence  on  the 
character,  when  not  carried  to  excess. 


524  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

3.10  —  Zinc  to  Firmness;  silver  to  Somnolence  and  Meditation. 
"  This  will  quiet  a  person.  I  would  forget  all  trouble  and  care  and 
be  perfectly  quiet  and  passive.  I  feel  that  my  eyes  are  going  to  shut, 
and  I  could  look  away  off, —  not  seeing, —  but  with  a  quiet,  dreamy  feel- 
ing. I  would  look  into  spiritual  science  deeply,  and  into  the  occult ; 
wouldn't  think  of  anything  but  spiritual  science." 

Experiments  on  the  Body. 

3.48  —  Zinc  to  the  perineum  ;  silver  to  region  of  Sanity  below  the 
armpit.  "Very  quieting  to  the  pelvic  organs;  quieting  to  the  mind. 
Good  for  excitement  or  hysteria  or  anything  exciting  ;  would  take 
down  sexual  excitement.  Very  cooling,  soothing  and  quieting  to  the 
head ;  good  for  insanity.  If  one  was  in  a  towering  rage  this  would 
control  it." 

3.52  —  Silver  changed  to  Health  (centre  of  shoulder-blade).  "  Not 
so  soothing,  but  healthy  and  strong.  It  gives  vigor  and  determina- 
tion ;  strengthens  genitals.  A  splendid  tonic  for  one  broken  down ; 
increases  the  strength  of  the  whole  system." 

3.55  —  Zinc  to  epigastrium  ;  silver  to  shoulder.  "  Good  for  inflam- 
mation of  stomach.  If  anything  was  wrong  it  would  scatter  pain  or 
cramp  or  take  down  inflammation.  The  effect  is  similar  to  opium. 
Morphine  would  be  stronger  and  more  deadening  ;  would  soothe 
pain  quicker,  but  deaden.  This  gives  life  and  strength  ;  has  a  tonic, 
life-giving  effect,  while  morphine  deadens  and  does  no  good.  The  influ- 
ence is  more  soothing,  outward,  at  the  top  of  the  shoulder;  stronger 
near  spine."     (The  silver  was  moved  over  the  shoulder.) 

4.03  —  Zinc  to  Disease  (hypochondria)  ;  silver  to  aquatic  region 
(front  of  the  leg).  "  I'd  like  to  go  in  swimming.  Haven't  had  such 
a  desire  for  a  long  time.  I  breathe  very  easily  ;  I  could  go  to  sleep. 
This  is  good  for  asthma  or  for  pneumonia.  There  is  a  very  strong 
feeling  for  the  water;  a  desire  to  swim.  I  think  it  is  cooling.  It's 
cooling  to  the  chest.  It  would  reduce  a  fever ;  it  has  a  very  sleepy 
feeling." 

4.20  —  Faradic  current  from  a  very  small  battery  to  Health  and 
Inspiration.  "  This  is  healthy,  tonic  and  strengthening  to  the  lungs  ; 
good  in  consumption  ;  but  the  aquatic  influence  relieves  congestion 
more  quickly."  In  this  we  perceive  that  the  Faradic  current  develops  at 
both  poles.  This  explains  the  marvellous  success  of  Dr.  Bastings  and 
others  in  consumption  by  thoracic  currents. 

4.26 — Zinc  to  Nutrition;  silver  to  Hope  and  Mortality,  above 
mammse  and  near  the  arm  (a  spiritual  region  antagonistic  to  Vital 
Force).  "  I  like  this  very  much  ;  it  is  strengthening,  cheering,  eleva- 
ting, quieting  ;  would  be  strong  and  refined.     This  would  reduce  cor- 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  525 

pulence.     Too  much  would  takedown  the  flesh  ;  would  make  one  really 
lean,  if  persisted  in.     But  I  like  it  ;  if  sickly,  it  would  build  one  up." 

In  this  experiment  the  first  sensation  was  that  which  belongs  to 
the  pleasant  and  strong  excitement  of  the  higher  emotions.  The 
second  expression  shows  the  repressive  effect  of  the  positive  pole  on 
Nutrition,  the  only  effective  method  of  controlling  obesity  without 
injurious  modification  of  diet  and  habits. 

4.30  —  Silver  changed  to  upper  end  of  sternum.     (This  is  an  intel- 
lectual location  and  would  tend  to  reduce  the  vital  forces.)     "  I  wouldn't  * 
grow  fat  under  this,  but  the  other  is  most  opposed  to  corpulence. 
This    would    develop   spirituality    and    intellectuality  ;  but  is  rather 
debilitating,  like  study." 

4.37  —  Zinc  to  Melancholy  on  the  abdomen;  silver  in  the  axilla. 
"  This  is  an  agreeable  feeling."  (He  seemed  very  meditative  and  disposed 
to  be  silent.)  "  I  don't  feel  like  speaking;  feel  quiet ;  would  like  to  sit 
down  and  sit  still.     It  would  make  me  think  all  my  friends  were  dead." 

In  this  case  the  experiment  miscarried.  The  silver  was  placed  too 
low  on  the  side,  so  as  to  cover  the  regions  of  Tranquillity,  Concentra- 
tion and  Cautiousness,  —  the  region  which  develops  the  patient  stu- 
dent, —  and  thus  detracted  from  the  influence  of  the  neighboring  region 
of  Cheerfulness,  which  could  not  easily  be  reached  by  a  flat  plate.  I 
therefore  removed  the  plates,  and  restored  his  cheerfulness  by  placing 
the  fingers  on  the  organ,  pressing  upward  in  the  axilla,  which  re_ 
stored  his  cheerful  feelings.  "  Now  I  would  put  aside  all  troubles," 
was  his  concluding  remark. 

May  3.     Plates  used  6  by  4  inches. 

1st.  Broad  plates  being  used,  the  zinc  plate  covered  the  epigas- 
tric and  hypochondriac  regions,  coming  up  to  about  two  inches  below 
mammae;  the  silver  was  applied^on  the  left  shoulder.  "This  makes 
an  unpleasant  feeling  ;  almost  a  cramp  ;  a  drawing-up  at  the  stomach." 

This  indicated  that  the  silver  plate  was  inactive  and  the  only  influ- 
ence was  the  metallic  effect  of  the  zinc  ;  therefore  I  wet  the  shoulder 
under  the  silver  plate  and  the  natural  result  promptly  appeared  (3.10). 
"That's  pleasant.  This  would  be  very  wholesome  and  soothing  to  the 
stomach;  it  removes  the  cramp.  It  is  strengthening,  and  I'm  getting 
sleepy,  too."  This  was  because  the  limited  space  touched  on  the 
shoulder  was  not  adequate  to  counteract  the  soothing  or  drowsy  influ- 
ence of  the  epigastric  region,  which  was  stimulated  by  the  first  con- 
tact before  the  current  was  effective.  As  there  is  a  more  vigilant 
influence  at  the  upper  part  of  the  dorsal  region  I  placed  the  silver 
there,  but  found  it  still  ineffective.  He  said  :  "  I  feel  very  lazy.  I  would 
hardly  roll  out  of  the  way  of  a  horse-car."  This  showed  that  the 
region  of  Indolence  or  Relaxation  covered  by  the  lower  part  of  the 


526  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

plate  was  taking  predominance,  and  therefore  I  removed  the  silver 
plate  to  the  region  of  Energy  (the  middle  of  the  superior  aspect  of 
the  shoulder).  He  said  :  "  Now  I'm  waking  up.  That's  refreshing, 
strengthening  ;  gives  a  great  deal  of  strength.  It's  bright  and  cheer- 
ful." 

2d.  Zinc  on  mammae  ;  silver  on  back  of  hand  :  producing  a  current 
from  Love  to  Hostility.  "  This  makes  me  feel  like  striking  out  to 
throw  it  off.  The  arm  feels  swelled,  as  if  the  muscles  were  ^rowin<y 
It's  an  ugly,  quarrelsome  feeling.  I'd  be  inclined  to  strike  out.  I'd 
like  to  strike  something;  I  want  to  hit  something.  It's  a  peculiar 
feeling ;  not  so  ugly,  but  a  love  of  hitting.  Boxing  would  satisfy  it. 
I'd  repel  everybody.  It  throws  great  life  and  force  into  the  arms.  I 
want  to  box,  but  it's  not  really  a  devilish  feeling.  I  would  work  off  the 
extra  force.     My  arms  feel  as  they  did  when  I  was  sparring." 

3d.  Plates  reversed  :  silver  to  the  mammae;  zinc  to  back  of  hand. 
He  laughs  heartily.  "That  knocks  all  the  fight  out  of  me  ;  I  feel  as  if 
I'd  turn  and  run  away  from  a  fight.     I  never  felt  anything  so  strong." 

4th.  Zinc  along  lower  part  of  sternum  ;  silver  to  back,  a  little  above 
and  exterior  to  lower  angle  of  scapula  (region  of  Playfulness  and 
Dignity  or  Self-sufficiency).  "  I'd  take  things  quietly,  but  it's  a  saucy, 
independent  feeling.  I  feel  as  good  a  man  as  anybody ;  not  quarrel- 
some, but  saucy  ;  quite  capable  of  taking  care  of  myself."  Moving 
silver  down  to  the  region  of  Playfulness  (top  of  the  scapula).  "That's 
nice  ;  much  the  same,  but  more  congenial.  If  I  saw  anything  funny  I 
could  laugh  at  it.  I'd  like  to  joke  under  this  influence.  I  wouldn't 
argue  ;  I'd  poke  fun  at  them." 

5th.  Current  from  hostile  to  friendly  region,  left  side  of  body.  Sits 
on  zinc  ;  silver  above  mammae.  "  There's  a  feeling  of  disgust.  I  don't 
like  it."  As  this  indicated  that  the  current  was  not  flowing,  I  wet  the 
space  under  the  silver  to  establish  the  current.  "  There's  an  affection- 
ate feeling,  as  if  I  would  put  my  arm  around  somebody.  It  sustains 
the  strength.  [The  moderate  stimulation  of  the  higher  sentiments  is 
always  invigorating.]  It's  quieting.  [How  does  it  affect  the  stomach  ?] 
There's  a  sense  of  fulness.  It  would  check  the  appetite.  If  there  was 
hunger,  I  would  forget  the  hunger.  It  is  strengthening  ;  quieting  to 
the  heart,  tonic  to  the  bowels  ;  would  overcome  looseness  and  restore 
healthy  action  ;  would  tend  to  check  seasickness.  It  works  that  way. 
One  of  the  best  general  influences  I  have  felt.  It  would  diminish 
respiration." 

This  illustrates  the  happy  hygienic  influence  of  the  higher  senti- 
ments and  their  quieting  influence  on  animal  life. 

Silver  was  removed  from  mammae  to  Health  on  the  shoulder.  "This 
gives  me  more  vigor,  health  and  activity ;  the  other  was  too  yielding 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  527 

and  spiritual.  This  is  all  activity  and  strength  ;  better,  too,  for  lungs 
and  head." 

6th.  Current  from  Love  to  Hatred  and  Disgust :  zinc  above  mam- 
mae ;  silver  on  upper  part  of  ilium  and  sacrum.  "  I  feel  a  pain 
across  the  small  of  the  back,  lumbar  and  sacral  region.  I'd  like 
to  sit  still.  I  wouldn't  go  into  company  ;  I'd  be  all  alone,  discour- 
aged, disheartened,  suspicious  of  humanity  generally.  I  wouldn't 
love  my  neighbor.  It  would  make  me  morbidly  solitary.  I  wouldn't 
care  about  eating.  I  don't  care  about  food.  It  destroys  the  ap- 
petite. I'd  rather  go  off  and  think  I  was  abused.  It's  weakening. 
A  man's  hair  would  turn  gray  early  under  this.  I'd  go  out  and 
lie  down.  It  destroys  all  activity  ;  makes  the  world  a  house  of 
mourning.  It  would  drive  one  insane  by  gloom.  This  would  be 
awful  in  seasickness;  I'd  want  to  die.  If  a  boat  should  rock  I'd  be 
sick.  Anything  disgusting  would  cause  nausea."  To  test  this  I  told 
a  little  anecdote  of  sickness  which  brought  in  a  disgusting  circum- 
stance, and  he  rose  and  rushed  to  the  basin,  nauseated,  but  did  not 
actually  vomit.      "  That's  pretty  rough,"  he  said. 

7th.  Plates  reversed.  "  This  feels  delightful.  I'd  rush  into  com- 
pany to  enjoy  it.  [How  is  the  stomach  ?]  I'd  relish  almost  any 
kind  of  dinner." 

These  experiments  illustrate  the  influence  of  despair  and  disgust ; 
the  region  of  Hope  and  Love  being  depressed  by  the  upper  plate, 
while  disgust,  aversion  and  gloom  were  developed  by  the  lower.  The 
reversal  produced  a  delightful  rush  of  affectionate  and  happy  sentiment. 

8th.  Degrading  influences.  Zinc  below  and  behind  armpit  (region 
of  Sanity  and  Dignity)  ;  silver  at  and  near  coccyx,  on  the  borders  of 
Insanity  and  Hate  and  at  the  spinal  origin  of  Animality.  "  I'd 
be  restless,  roaming  around,  finding  fault  with  everybody  and 
everything,  doing  nothing,  dissatisfied.  [Could  you  study  ?]  I'd  rather 
go  fishing  ;  I  would'nt  like  study.  It  makes  me  careless  ;  I'd  neglect 
everything;  my  chief  characteristic  would  be  carelessness.  [How 
much  intelligence  would  you  have?]  I  wouldn't  study  or  read;  I 
wouldn't  have  much  intelligence.  If  anyone  commenced  talking 
above  the  most  commonplace  I'd  be  tired  ;  disgusted  with  anything 
above  gossip.  Horses  and  dogs  would  interest  me  ;  I'd  just  be  on  their 
level.  It's  a  light-hearted,  careless,  go-as-you-please  feeling.  It  would 
impair  the  memory.  That  walking  match  would  suit  me.  I'd  enjoy 
merriment  and  company.  It  reminds  me  of  the  ignorant  old  English 
squires  of  the  14th  and  15th  centuries;  jolly  sportsmen.  I'd  be  very 
fond  of  the  women.    There's  no  intellectuality  in  this,  but  the  reverse." 

9th.  Zinc  as  before;  silver  lower,  extending  below  coccyx  and  above. 
"  That  would  make  me  a  libertine.     It   takes   away   all  the  good  of 


5-28  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXIII. 

the  other  ;  makes  the  man  more  of  a  brute.  This  is  selfish,  brutal ;  does 
mean,  underhanded  things  ;  watches  opportunity  to  take  advantage  ; 
decidedly  selfish.  It  takes  away  all  the  sunshine  of  the  other ;  makes 
one  still  more  stupid;  couldn't  study.  It  befogs  the  front  part  of  the 
head.  It's  mean,  stupid,  selfish,  low.  He'd  be  a  brute  ;  very  near  a 
lunatic;  every  one  would  despise  him  ;  something  like  Guiteau  except 
as  to  intellect ;  he  wouldn't  see  any  harm  in  anything  he  wanted  to 
do." 

ioth.  Silver  placed  underneath,  corresponding  to  the  perineum  ; 
zinc  as  before.  "  When  one  gets  this  way  they  should  be  locked  up  ; 
not  capable  of  taking  care  of  themselves  at  all  ;  would  hardly  have 
sense  enough  to  feed  themselves.  I'd  soon  lose  all  power  of  thinking  • 
the  mind  seems  a  blank." 

nth.  Silver  removed  to  inner  and  uppermost  part  of  the  thigh. 
(Region  of  Temper  or  Rage.)  "  That's  better ;  under  this  one 
would  take  care  of  himself.  It's  strengthening  to  the  muscles  ;  one 
would  have  strong  muscles.  It's  not  intellectual  but  strong  and 
hearty  ;  would  make  a  good  day  laborer ;  more  quiet  than  stirring, 
but  would  fight  very  quick.  If  started  he'd  get  wild.  He  wouldn't 
have  much  self-control ;  he  might  commit  manslaughter.  He'd 
fight  like  the  devil ;  not  combative,  but  wild  when  started,  and  very 
easily  started." 

•  12th.  Zinc  as  before  ;  silver  still  lower  on  the  back  of  the  thigh. 
(Region  of  Turbulence.)  "That's  better;  more  intelligent  and 
active.  This  would  suit  an  athlete  ;  good  for  running  and  jump- 
ing ;  not  content  in  any  quiet  life  ;  impossible  to  be  quiet  ;  if  in  a 
riot  he'd  fight  to  work  off  his  superfluous  strength.  It's  very  excit- 
ing and  stimulating  to  the  muscles,  but  not  very  devilish  ;  must  work 
off  animal  force." 

13th.  Silver  to  side  of  hip  ;  zinc  as  before.  "  There  is  more  sense 
and  less  force  in  this  ;  I  like  it  better.  I'd  enjoy  life  well  and  listen 
more  to  reason  ;  would  enjoy  society  very  well  ;  would  like  to  be  in 
lots  of  amusement,  chiefly  in  lively  •  society ;  I'd  laugh  a  good  deal, 
very  hearty,  and  take  in  all  the  funny  ;  laugh  and  talk,  not  stir  about 
much."     (This  was  the  region  of  Vivacity.) 

Some  experiments  were  made  with  the  Faradic  current,  but  his 
sensibility  was  too  acute  to  bear  it,  though  I  procured  a  brief  tolera- 
tion by  using  carbon  electrodes.  The  current  was  more  than  he 
could  endure,  and  after  several  trials  he  felt  that  the  shock  to  his 
nervous  system  disqualified  him  for  any  of  the  usual  experiments  ; 
but  this  was  overcome  by  rousing  the  serene  and  sensitive  regions  of 
the  shoulder  and  sternum.  The  momentary  trials,  however,  developed 
distinctly  the    compound    energy  of   the  spots  reached    by  the  two 


CHAP.    XXIII.]  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  529 

poles;  such  as  Health  and  Health,  Health  and  Hope,  Health  and 
Vital  Force.  In  each  ease  the  force  of  both  organs  was  distinctly 
realized  as  long  as  the  current  could  be  tolerated. 

Returning  to  the  galvanic  plates,  I  placed  the  silver  at  the  lumbo- 
sacral region  and  the  zinc  at  the  mammae ;  the  response  was  not  as 
prompt  as  usual,  but  he  felt  that  the  influence  was  a  sexual  invigora- 
tion.  Reversing  the  plates,  the  silver  above  the  mammae  produced  a 
quiet,  yielding,  non-resistant  nature,  according  to  the  Christian  pre- 
cepts, but  so  different  from  his  usual  mood  that  he  called  it  pusil- 
lanimous. 

2.  Zinc  at  the  lower  end  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae  ;  silver  below 
umbilicus  (at  and  below  Calorification).  "  This  is  warming  ;  it  would 
stimulate  the  pelvic  organs  generally." 

3.  Zinc  on  thorax  at  Coolness  ;  silver  at  epigastric  region.  "This 
stimulates  the  stomach  and  increases  digestion."  Silver  was  then 
removed  to  the  hypochondria,  left  side.  "  This  produces  nausea  ; 
the  stomach  is  deranged  ;  the  temperature  is  higher.  I  feel  feverish, 
with  disgust  for  food  ;  it  would  give  me  chills  and  fever  or  bilious 
fever."  Plates  reversed.  "  That  changes  it  ;  I  would  hold  on  to  this 
a  while  to  get  over  the  effects." 

4.  Zinc  at  Chastity  ;  silver  at  lumbo-sacral  region.  "  This  is  invig- 
orating ;  one  would  move  with  considerable  alacrity  ;  it  is  stimulant 
rather  than  tonic  ;  strengthens  virility  ;  increases  action  generally." 

5  Zinc  at  Nutrition  ;  silver  successively  at  Energy,  at  Mortality, 
and  at  Sublimity  and  Reverence.  The  influence  dispersing  nutrition 
and  favoring  the  reduction  of  flesh  appeared  to  be  more  completely 
reducing  and  debilitating  with  the  negative  at  Mortality,  more  exhaus- 
tive by  activity  under  the  influence  of  Energy,  and  more  healthily 
productive  of  reduction  through  the  influence  of  the  upper  part  of 
Sublimity  (posterior  to  mammae.) 

6.  The  zinc  being  applied  to  the  region  of  Irritability,  which  affects 
the  liver,  and  the  silver  to  that  of  Patience,  the  latter  was  too  dry  to 
start  the  current,  and  some  irritability  was  felt  from  the  sole  influ- 
ence of  the  zinc.  Moisture  being  supplied,  the  current  was  established, 
and  a  quieting  influence  was  felt.  The  silver  was  then  removed  to 
the  region  of  Health,  and  the  effect  felt  was  a  wholesome  stimulation 
of  the  liver. 

These  experiments,  which  might  be  prolonged  ad  infinitum,  are 
sufficient  to  show  that  the  Faradic  energizes  at  both  poles  when 
applied  to  the  body,  and  consequently  has  a  great  range  of  beneficial 
application,  while  the  galvanic  current  has  great  power  to  change  the 
balance  of  functions,  and  is  efficient  for  suppression  as  well  as 
development. 


53°  INVESTIGATION    OF    MAN    AND  [CHAP.    XXI  i  I. 

May  the  reader  expect  to  reproduce  phenomena  such  as  I  have 
described?  Not  unless  he  selects  constitutions  of  the  highest  grade 
of  impressibility.  Nevertheless,  similar  phenomena  will  occur  with 
lower  grades  of  impressibility,  by  longer  continuance  and  stronger 
currents.  But  where  there  is  less  mental  impressibility  the  effects 
on  the  mind  will  be  less  conspicuous,  and  the  physical  or  physiological 
effects  will  be  more  prominent. 

It  is  difficult  for  anyone  to  realize  these  psychic  transformations 
who  has  not  become  familiar  with  the  higher  forms  of  impressibility, 
and  the  reader  may  find  it  more  instructive  to  read  reports  from  lower 
grades  of  impressibility. 

The  application  of  galvanic  currents  to  the  head  would  be  justified 
by  the  experience  of  their  superior  utility  in  affections  of  the  spinal  cord, 
and  this  view  is  sustained  by  the  experience  of  Onimus  and  Legros,  who 
sa^  ;  "  We  have  many  times  passed  currents  through  the  head,  more 
or  less  intense,  but  never  in  persons  of  any  age  have  we  had  the  least 
accident.  Hence  we  are  persuaded  that  in  many  cases  of  cerebral 
excitation  and  intra-cranial  trouble  in  the  circulation,  perhaps  even 
in  certain  cases  of  delirium,  we  might  obtain  great  benefit  from  con- 
tinued currents,  and  facts  that  we  have  had  occasion  to  observe  con- 
firm us  in  this  opinion." 

"  In  a  number  of  cases  in  which  we  have  had  occasion  to  place  the 
poles  on  the  head  the  patients  have  manifested  a  tendency  to  sleep, 
and  generally  have  had,  the  following  night,  a  long  and  quiet  sleep. 
This  was  especially  marked  in  females  with  nervous  affections." 

Of  course  it  would  be  unsafe  for  physicians  to  apply  electricity  to 
the  head  without  understanding  the  brain.  They  would  learn,  of  course, 
but  at  the  serious  expense  of  the  patient  ;  and  it  must  be  long  before 
my  discoveries  can  overcome  the  inertia  of  the  colleges.  The  follow- 
ing experiments  show  the  practicability  of  substituting  electric  cur- 
rents for  the  application  of  the  fingers. 

A  young  friend,  the  very  worthy  and  estimable  Dr.  Z.,  of  a  more 
impressible  temperament  than  we  often  find,  who  had  been  practising 
a  year  or  more  in  a  New  York  hospital,  sat  with  me  to  test  the 
impressibility  of  the  brain,  and  realized  the  results  of  every  experi- 
ment nearly  as  well  as  Mr.  K.  but  not  quite  as  intensely.  I  tried 
seven  different  currents  on  the  brain,  with  Galvanic  currents  of  four 
to  six  cells. 

The  current  from  the  lateral  occiput  (Adhesiveness  and  Sleep)  to 
the  centre  of  the  front  lobe  was  very  exciting  ;  when  reversed  it  was 
recognized  as  dull  and  soothing. 

The  current  from  the  temples  (Ideality,  etc.)  to  the  base  of  the  occi- 
put, opposite  side  (Vital  Force  and  Violence),  was  disturbing,  giving 
a  restless  desire  to  be  up  and  doing. 


CHAP.    XXIII. j  DEMONSTRATION    OF    SARCOGNOMY.  531 

From  the  same  occipital  location  to  the  region  of  Religion  it  was 
extremely  pleasant  and  spiritual,  giving  the  feelings  that  are  produced 
in  a  grand  temple  or  by  sublime  scenes. 

The  current  from  the  same  spot  to  the  coronal  suture  of  opposite  side 
gave  an  aspiration  for  philanthropic  life  (which  was  characteristic), 
and  brought  up,  by  association,  all  the  feelings  of  doubt,  apprehension 
and  responsibility  associated  therewith. 

The  current  from  the  cheeks  (Disease)  to  the  organ  of  Health 
produced  the  best  effects  of  all,  —  a  feeling  of  enjoyment  and  energy; 
readiness  for  all  the  duties  of  life  and  desire  to  perform  them. 

The  current  through  the  temples  (the  Ideal  region)  produced  a 
feeling  of  mental  expansion  and  calmness. 

The  current  from  the  lateral  occiput  to  the  lower  part  of  the  fore- 
head produced  a  desire  for  profound  study  and  investigation. 

The  intellectual  and  moral  organs,  being  much  the  most  active, 
responded  more  freely.  The  region  of  animal  force  and  violence  was 
less  impressible,  and  the  lower  middle  region  of  the  occiput,  which  was 
small,  yielded  but  very  slight  results. 

To  one  thoroughly  miseducated  in  materialistic  views  of  science, 
and  kept  ignorant  of  all  psychic  and  mesmeric  literature,  ignorant  of 
what  is  going  on  in  psychometry,  clairvoyance,  mesmerism,  and  too 
thoroughly  prejudiced  to  read  such  literature,  the  foregoing  experi- 
ments must  appear  as  incredible  as  the  telephone  would  have  seemed 
to  an  ignorant  blacksmith  of  the  last  century,  and  the  balloon  to  the 
French  peasants.  If  any  such  should  read  this  page  I  would  ask 
him  to  reflect  whether  any  scientist  with  an  honorable  reputation 
would  be  reckless  enough  to  offer  such  statements  without  a  basis  of 
fact,  or  could  possibly  be  successful  in  teaching  others  to  repeat  the 
experiments  and  in  convincing  all  who  listen  to  him.  The  reading  of 
such  works  as  Dr.  Esdaile's  "  Mesmerism  in  India  "  and  Prof.  Greg- 
ory's "  Letters  on  Animal  Magnetism"  would  enable  him  to  discover 
how  much  he  had  lost  by  a  false  education,  and  prepare  him  to  appre- 
ciate Therapeutic  Sarcognomy. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS. 

Electric  treatment  —  Electricity  as  a  stimulant  and  in  cholera  —  Batteries  for  elec- 
tro-therapeutics, the  different  cells  in  use,  their  penetrative  power —  Combination 
of  cell  and  coil  —  The  common  portable  battery  —  Electric  currents  and  their  modes 
of  application  —  The  Faradic  current,  its  use  in  infantile  marasmus  —  Qualities  of 
the  currents  —  Galvanic  batteries — Current  measurement  —  Connections  —  Mode 
of  application — Important  improvement  —  Electrodes  —  Electric  measurements  — 
The  coil  and  the  cell  combined  —  Currents  applied  to  the  human  body  and  their 
modification  and  combination  —  Movable  coil  —  Standard  coil  —  Electric  baths  — 
Static  electricity  in  nature  —  Its  rationale  misunderstood  —  Wires  and  electrodes  — 
Static  treatment  by  currents  and  shocks,  not  Faradism  —  Proper  construction  for 
this  —  Method  of  using  static  electricity  —  Its  combination  with  other  currents  and 
with  magnetism  — Use  of  the  static  currents. 


Not  having  found  time  to  complete  the  treatise  on  electro-thera- 
peutics, which  I  had  hoped  to  publish,  the  importance  of  the  subject 
renders  it  necessary  that  I  should  give  in  this  volnme  a  brief  outline 
of  the  electric  treatment  of  disease,  as  I  am  accustomed  to  present 
it  to  my  pupils. 

When  Sarcognomy  becomes  generally  known,  the  electro-thera- 
peutic treatment  we  have  had  heretofore,  guided  only  by  anatomy, 
without  respect  to  the  vital  forces  and  sympathies  of  the  nervous 
system,  will  be  considered  a  rude  and  barbarous  method. 

The  subject  is  greatly  simplified  by  the  general  proposition  that 
whenever  we  wish  to  concentrate  and  stimulate  the  vital  forces  the 
negative  pole  may  be  used,  as  we  use  the  hand  in  manual  treatment ; 
while  the  positive  pole  should  be  used  to  produce  dispersive  effects, 
as  we  use  the  hand  in  dispersive  passes. 

The  dispersive  power  of  the  positive  pole,  however,  is  not  equal  to 
that  of  the  hand  for  dispersing  morbid  conditions,  though  it  is 
capable  of  more  exact  and  circumscribed  application.  Nor  is  the 
developing  power  of  the  negative  pole  equal  to  that  of  the  hand,  for 
it  is  simply  a  disturbing  and  stimulating  influence  and  cannot  impart 
the  large  amount  of  faultless  vitalit}'  which  the  hand  of  a  successful 
healer  can  give.  Nevertheless,  the  greater  power  of  electricity,  which 
no  human   being  can  resist,  gives  it  a   very  large  sphere  of  activity 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THEKAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  533 

among  those  who  are  not  sensitive  to  the  hand.  Galvanic  and 
primary  currents  have  a  chemical  effect,  tending  to  accumulate  acid 
elements  at  the  positive  pole  and  alkaline  elements  with  hydrogen  at 
the  negative.  Hence  their  use  is  to  some  extent  irritating  and 
requires  to  be  handled  with  moderation. 

In  consequence  of  this  the  best  application  that  can  be  made  of 
electric  treatment  is  that  which  combines  the  electric  and  nervauric 
methods  by  passing  the  electricity  through  the  person  of  the  oper- 
ator, or  at  least  through  his  hand.  Any  one  who  tries  it  will  recog- 
nize the  great  superiority  of  the  electro-nervauric  method. 

Electricity  as  a  Stimulant.  —  Electricity,  like  caloric,  is  a 
powerful  stimulant,  an  unlimited  power,  capable  of  killing  or  reviv- 
ing, and  therefore  can  be  much  more  extensively  applied  than  it  has 
been  in  exhausted  conditions  as  well  as  in  narcotism  and  asphyxia, 
which  it  relieves  when  all  else  fails.  Dr.  Dewees  said  in  the  New 
York  Journal  of  Medicine :  "In  cases  of  exceeding  prostration, 
where  the  pulse  was  extinct,  I  have  witnessed  a  return  of  impulse  take 
place  in  a  few  minutes,  and  the  sense  of  weakness  fully  as  well  over- 
come as  by  the  administration  of  brandy  or  wine."  Dr.  Wilson 
Philip  mentioned  the  suggestion  of  using  electricity  to  recover  from 
typhus,  but  Dr.  Gale  is  the  only  physician  who  has  extensively  attacked 
fevers  with  electricity. 

Cholera  was  successfully  treated  with  electricity  by  Dr.  C.  F. 
Favell  of  the  Sheffield  Cholera  Hospital,  but  his  success  has  not 
inspired  the  profession  to  bring  electricity  into  use  in  such  cases. 
In  a  case  that  seemed  moribund  in  spite  of  medical  treatment,  he 
applied  galvanism  from  the  wrists  to  the  ankles  and  from  the  neck  to 
the  pit  of  the  stomach,  improving  the  pulse  and  voice  and  giving  a 
disposition  to  sleep,  as  Sarcognomy  would  indicate.  The  patient 
progressed  to  recovery,  which  was  ascribed  entirely  to  the  galvanic 
treatment. 

In  another  case,  with  cold  surface  and  pulse  nearly  gone,  galvanism 
was  repeatedly  used  and  believed  to  have  produced  the  cure. 

Dr.  F.  claimed  that  very  decided  and  immediate  benefit  resulted  in 
every  cholera  case  in  which  galvanism  was  used. 

Dr.  Vigouroux,  in  the  "  Progrcs  Medical"  maintains  that  daily 
static  electrization  is  the  best  measure  of  prophylaxis  against  cholera. 
This  is  doubtless  true,  as  electric  conditions  are  greatly  disturbed 
in  cholera  seasons. 

Chickens  and  pigeons  subjected  to  etherization  were  found  by 
M.  Ducros  to  require  seven  or  eight  minutes  for  natural  recovery, 
but  were  restored  instantly  by  shocks  of  static  or  dynamic  electricity. 
They  recovered   in  about  thirty  seconds  when  charged  with  positive 


534  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.     [CHAP.  XXIV. 

electricity  on  the  insulating  stool,  but  their  recovery  was  only 
retarded  when  under  the  negative  influence,  which  shows  that  posi- 
tive electricity  is  a  real  power,  and  the  negative  a  mere  negation,  like 
cold,  —  not  a  different  electricity,  but  a  deficiency.  And  yet  we  find 
all  through  our  scientific  works  a  recognition  of  two  electricities. 
We  might  as  well  recognize  two  forms  of  caloric  —  a  positive  hot 
and  a  negative  coid. 

BATTERIES  FOR  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS. 

The  contamination  of  electricity  by  the  substances  through  which 
it  passes  leads  me  to  consider  all  cells  objectionable  which  contain 
sulphate  of  zinc,  sulphate  of  copper,  sulphate  of  mercury,  chloride 
of  silver,  sulphuric  acid,  bichromate  of  potash,  mercury  and  zinc 
and  other  unwholesome  elements.  Such  cells  impregnate  the  system 
with  harsh  medical  influences  and  leave  it  saturated  with  a  metallic 
influence  and  taste.  There  is  no  necessity  for  using  any  of  these 
except  the  zinc,  since  cells  containing  muriate  of  ammonia  have 
proved  efficient  and  satisfactory. 

The  Leclanche  cell  has  carbon  and  zinc  elements,  the  carbon  in  a 
porous  cell,  surrounded  by  peroxide  of  manganese  mixed  with 
coarsely  powdered  carbon.  This  is  placed  in  a  jar  containing  a  solu- 
tion of  muriate  of  ammonia  (sal  ammoniac).  The  polarization  of 
the  cell  is  checked  by  the  oxygen  of  the  peroxide  of  manganese, 
which  combines  with  the  hydrogen  set  free.  Chloride  of  zinc  is 
formed  in  small  quantity. 

In  the  chloride  battery  of  Fitch,  which  relies  also  on  muriate  of 
ammonia,  depolarization  is  assisted  by  the  bichloride  of  mercury  in 
very  small  quantity,  which  seizes  the  hydrogen  and  is  converted  into 
calomel.  The  Samson  cell,  which  has  become  very  popular,  is  also  a 
muriate  of  ammonia  cell,  similar  to  the  Leclanche.  The  Law  cell  is 
similar  to  the  Samson,  both  being  satisfactory.  These  are  the  four 
forms  of  cells  which  I  have  been  accustomed  to  use  and  recommend 
as  the  least  objectionable.  We  need  only  to  substitute  iron  for  zinc 
in  these  muriate  of  ammonia  cells  to  have  an  entirely  unobjectionable 
cell ;  but  this  is  impracticable,  as  it  would  reduce  the  electric  energy 
very  low,  and  the  iron  would  not  escape  corrosion  like  the  zinc.  The 
Stohrer  battery,  of  zinc  and  carbon,  with  sulphuric  acid  and  bichro- 
mate, has  a  vigorous  current  with  this  objectionable  character  which 
I  have  mentioned,  and  Bartholow  says  it  will  "  give  rise  to  great 
irritation  and  burning,"  from  the  same  number  of  cells  which  would 
be  agreeable  in  the  improved  Daniell  battery,  which  has  no  bichro- 
mate or  free  acid  and  has  more  resistance.  Cells  of  a  good  size  are 
necessary  to  furnish  a  ^ood  volume  of  electricity,  but  as  the  electro- 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  535 

motive  force  depends  on  the  number  of  cells,  twenty  small  cells  will 
send  more  through  the  human  body  than  the  same  amount  of  plates 
arranged  in  three  or  four  large  cells,  which  would  have  less  penetra- 
tive power.  The  lack  of  electro-motive  force  in  the  large  cells  may 
be  compensated  by  the  use  of  a  coil  which  gives  this  force,  as  we 
see  in  the  common  portable  battery,  in  which  a  single  cell  with  a 
coil  sends  out  strong  currents.  This  principle  I  have  adopted  in  my 
new  battery  to  produce  a  galvanic  current. 

The  current  from  a  single  large  cell  would  ignite  and  perhaps 
deflagrate  a  fine  platinum  wire  by  its  volume,  but  twenty  common 
cells  would  produce  very  little  heating  effect,  though  more  efficient 
medically  by  their  penetrative  power.  Even  the  current  of  a  single 
common  cell  of  1.5  volts  with  the  aid  of  a  helix  will  produce  as 
strong  an  impression  through  the  human  body  as  we  wish  to  bear, 
because  its  power  goes  through  us.  It  requires  very  little  electricity 
to  affect  the  human  constitution ;  there  is  very  little  in  the  most 
powerful  Faradic  current,  and  still  less  in  the  more  powerful  static, 
even  when  it  shocks  or  kills  ;  but  it  requires  some  volume  to  produce 
chemical  and  alterative  effects  on  the  blood  and  tissues,  though 
very  little  volume  is  requisite  to  produce  revolutionary  impressions 
on  the  nervous  system. 

What  can  be  done  by  my  method  of  a  few  large  cells  combined 
with  a  coil  has  not  yet  been  fully  tested,  but  I  am  confident  it  will  be 
one  of  the  most  powerful  agencies  of  electro-therapeutics.  The  coil 
has  heretofore  been  used  only  to  reinforce  the  interrupted  current, 
not  the  continuous  galvanic. 

By  this  combination,  which  I  may  call  an  invention  (simple  as  it  is), 
for  I  have  seen  no  mention  of  it  in  my  reading  on  electricity,  we 
realize  the  full  power  of  a  large  galvanic  battery,  with  a  very  few 
cells ;  the  efficiency  of  the  current  receiving  something  near  a  tenfold 
increase  by  the  use  of  a  magnetizing  coil,  so  that  a  small  portable 
battery  of  four  cells  may  furnish  all  the  galvanic  power  that  a  physi- 
cian is  likely  to  require,  besides  sustaining  primary  and  secondary 
currents  of  greater  power  than  he  is  likely  to  need,  by  means  of 
which  electro-medical  currents  can  be  propelled  through  the  body  or 
sent  any  distance  by  wires.  The  patient  in  the  fourth  story  may 
receive  any  anodyne,  soporific,  stimulant  or  alterative  sent  by  wire 
from  the  first  story. 

The  immense  power  of  electro-magnetism  in  reinforcing  an  elec- 
tric current  relieves  us  from  the  necessity  of  using  large  galvanic 
batteries.  The  single  cell  of  the  common  portable  instrument  is 
raised  to  a  power  as  high  as  one  can  bear  by  the  iron  rods  in  the  coil. 
The  most  splendid  illustration  of  this  law  was  exhibited  in  a  Rhum- 


536  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

korff  coil  at  the  London  Polytechnic  Institution  which  was  nine  feet 
ten  inches  long  and  two  feet  in  diameter.  It  had  a  soft  iron  core  of 
one  hundred  and  twenty-five  pounds,  five  feet  long  and  four  inches  in 
diameter,  surrounded  by  a  primary  wire  about  two  and  a  seventh 
miles  long,  around  which  was  the  coil  of  secondary  wire  one  hundred 
and  fifty  miles  long  !  This  coil,  run  by  forty-eight  cells,  yielded  a 
flash  of  electricity  "  twenty-nine  inches  long  and  capable  of  perforat- 
ing five  inches  of  solid  plate  glass  "  ! 

On  the  other  hand,  a  very  feeble  galvanic  current  steadily  applied 
may  produce  the  most  important  results ;  as  my  experiments  show 
that  a  very  sensitive  individual,  even  with  a  vigorous  muscular  consti- 
tution, may  experience  strong  psychic  and  physical  effects  from  two 
small  plates.  What  is  called  sometimes  the  Humboldt  battery  con- 
sists of  two  plates  (such  as  silver  and  zinc)  which  are  applied  on  the 
body  and  connected  by  an  insulated  wire  so  that  the  current  flows 
from  the  zinc  to  the  silver  through  the  body.  Dr.  Grapengeisser  has 
reported  a  case  of  restoration  of  lost  voice  by  applying  a  zinc  plate  as 
large  as  a  shilling  and  a  small  silver  plate  to  blistered  surfaces,  on 
each  side  of  the  larynx.  It  was  first  applied  half  an  hour,  producing 
convulsive  movements  of  the  larynx,  and  five  days  afterward  applied 
again  and  kept  on  all  night,  making  a  cure.  About  thirty  years  ago, 
Dr.  De  la  Rua  of  Cuba,  who  republished  in  Spanish  my  illustrations 
of  Sarcognomy,  informed  me  that  he  had  small  galvanic  plates  attached 
to  his  walking  cane,  which  he  used  upon  some  of  his  patients. 

The  common,  cheap,  portable  battery  is  an  arrangement  by  which 
one  galvanic  cell  is  used  to  produce  a  current  from  the  positive  car- 
bon or  copper  pole  to  the  negative  zinc  pole,  which  current  has  so 
little  electro-motive  force  it  would  be  of  no  therapeutic  value,  not  be- 
ing able  to  penetrate  through  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  inches  of 
the  body,  so  as  to  be  recognized  by  any  but  the  most  sensitive. 

This  feeble  current,  however,  by  being  conducted  around  an  iron  rod 
or  bundle  of  wires  in  a  coil  of  many  turns,  creates  in  this  iron  core  a 
strong  magnetism  which  reacts  upon  the  current,  giving  it  great 
electro-motive  force,  so  that  it  may  be  sent  through  the  whole  length 
of  the  body. 

But  the  efficiency  of  electricity  depends  more  upon  its  impact  than 
upon  its  current.  A  current  which  flowing  steadily  is  scarcely  recog- 
nized as  it  passes  through  the  body,  makes  a  strong  impression  or  gives 
a  shock  when  it  strikes  in  successive  blows.  Hence  the  interruption 
of  a  current,  so  that  its  stroke  or  entrance  is  rapidly  repeated,  giving 
a  vast  number  of  shocks,  makes  a  powerful  impression. 

This  end  is  attained  in  the  portable  electro-magnetic  battery  by  a 
very  ingenious  invention.     The  current  passes  through  a  screw  to  a 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  537 

spring  which  is  almost  in  contact  with  it,  and  as  soon  as  it  passes  and 
develops  magnetism  in  the  iron  core  the  attraction  of  the  magnet  on 
the  spring  pulls  it  farther  from  the  screw,  so  as  to  stop  the  passage 
of  the  electricity,  and  by  stopping  the  electricity  it  arrests  the  devel- 
opment of  magnetism  and  leaves  the  spring  free  to  fall  back  and 
receive  the  current.  The  wonderful  rapidity  of  this  operation  pro- 
duces a  buzzing  sound.  Its  rapidity  is  due  to  the  fact  that  copper  is 
a  perfect  conductor,  superior  to  everything  but  silver,  and  that  elec- 
tricity has  a  speed  which  would  rival  that  of  light,  if  it  were  not 
retarded  by  the  mediums  through  which  it  passes.  Kirchoff  decided, 
theoretically,  that  electricity  without  resistance  would  travel  192,924 
miles  in  a  second.  But  it  never  approximates  that.  Professor  Gould 
found  a  velocity  of  12,000  miles  in  telegraph  wires  at  a  moderate  height, 
but  they  may  be  raised  high  enough  to  give  a  speed  of  24,000.  Prof. 
O.  M.  Mitchell,  in  an  experiment  with  the  telegraph  at  Cincinnati, 
demonstrated  a  speed  of  over  30,000  miles  in  a  second.  But  sub- 
marine cables  transmit  slowly. 

This  rapidity  explains  the  rapid  buzz  of  the  spring  as  the  currents 
are  broken,  and  the  powerful  impression  this  makes  on  the  human 
constitution  as  the  wires  conduct  this  agitation  to  the  patient.  A 
careful  study  of  the  subject  shows  that  the  shocking  impression  on 
the  patient  is  due  to  the  discharge  of  the  electricity  in  sparks  at  the 
moment  of  interruption. 

Equally  wonderful  is  the  action  of  the  exterior  coil,  which  is  affected 
by  induction,  being  entirely  separate  from  the  interior  coil.  That  the 
interior  or  primary  coil  should  start  a  powerful  action  in  the  exte- 
rior coil  is  due  to  the  law  developed  and  applied  by  Faraday,  that  a 
current  in  one  wire  starts  an  opposite  current  in  an  adjacent  wire. 
The  current  in  the  primary  wire  starts  an  opposite  current  in  the 
exterior  coil  when  it  begins  to  flow.  Hence  we  would  expect  the 
poles  of  the  exterior  coil  to  be  opposite  to  those  of  the  interior, 
the  current  being  in  an  opposite  direction,  but  they  are  not ;  for,  when 
the  interior  current  is  interrupted,  the  exterior  current  flies  back  in  the 
same  direction  as  the  interior,  and  this  reactive  current  being  stronger 
than  its  opposite,  it  follows  that  the  Faradic  current  coincides  with 
the  primary,  as  to  its  positive  and  negative  poles.  But  the  difference 
in  the  two  poles  is  not  so  great  as  in  the  primary,  which  is  a  one-way 
current,  while  the  Faradic  is  a  reciprocal  or  two-way  impulse. 

Hence,  while  the  primary  current,  though  interrupted,  is  like  the 
galvanic,  emphatically  positive  and  negative  at  its  poles,  and  capable 
therefore  of  decomposing  water  or  being  used  in  electroplating,  the 
Faradic,  by  its  alternating  action,  counteracts  itself  as  to  decomposition 
and  produces  no  perceptible  chemical  effect,  and  no  opposite  condi- 


538  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

tions  at  its  poles,  but  simply  serves  as  a  vital  stimulant  to  nerves, 
muscles  and  bloodvessels,  but  somewhat  more  effectively  at  its  neg- 
ative pole.  Hence  the  use  of  the  Faradic  current  is  very  simple,  and 
we  ^pply  the  two  poles  on  the  right  and  left  sides  of  the  body  to 
organs  that  we  wish  to  stimulate.  There  is  a  very  energetic  force  in 
its  action,  which  is  sometimes  too  harsh,  and  its  best  or  most  agreea- 
ble effects  are  produced  when  the  coil  is  made  of  a  great  length  of 
very  fine  wire.  The  Faradic  coil  recommended  by  the  Electrical  Con- 
gress at  Paris  was  composed  of  wire  one-hundredth  of  an  inch  in 
diameter  and  over  three  thousand  feet  in  length. 

The  strength  of  the  currents  is  regulated  by  a  brass  or  copper 
shield,  a  tube  which  fits  around  the  iron  core  and,  when  it  covers  it, 
deprives  the  coil  of  its  magnetic  influence.  The  power  of  the  coil  is 
developed  as  the  shield  is  pulled  out. 

ELECTRIC  CURRENTS. 

If  the  human  body  had  the  conductivity  of  copper  or  iron  the 
contact  of  a  single  common  galvanic  cell  would  be  fatal.  But  as  it 
is,  the  contact  of  a  one-volt  cell  sends  through  the  body  not  more 
than  a  tenth  or  a  fifth  of  a  milliampere,  and  it  would  require  ten 
such  cells  to  produce  one  or  two  milliamperes  through  the  trunk. 
Hence  fifty  cells  would  be  required  to  produce  an  effective  current, 
unless  applied  to  a  small  portion  of  the  body.  But  these  numerous 
cells,  it  is  said,  produce  only  electro-motive  force,  as  they  furnish  no 
more  electricity  than  a  single  cell,  and  not  as  much  as  a  single  large 
cell  or  a  pair  of  cells  combined  to  act  as  one.  Hence,  if  we  unite 
two  or  three  cells  to  act  as  one,  and  add  to  them  a  sufficient  electro- 
motive coil  force,  we  shall  have  a  greater  galvanic  power  than  twenty- 
cell  batteries  afford,  in  a  compact  and  portable  shape. 

In  applying  the  current  our  object  is  to  produce  beneficial  and 
avoid  injurious  effects.  Injurious  or  caustic  effects  are  produced  by 
concentration  and  avoided  by  diffusion.  Broad  electrodes  are  of 
course  preferable  to  small  ones.  A  broad  wet  sponge  or  wet  piece 
of  cloth  gives  the  soothing  influence  of  moisture ;  a  moist  carbon 
electrode  has  a  good  influence,  and  the  most  objectionable  electrodes 
are  those  of  metal  which  are  in  common  use,  and  which  tend  to 
burn  the  skin,  but  which  may  be  made  more  agreeeable  by  a  broad 
surface. 

When  we  wish  to  produce  a  caustic  effect  we  use  very  small 
metallic  surfaces  ;  that  is,  we  insert  needles  in  the  parts  to  be  de- 
stroyed, which  operate  either  by  burning,  if  a  sufficient  amount  of 
electricity  is  furnished,  or  by  chemical  decomposition,  or  by  both. 
The  positive  pole  attracts  oxygen  and  may  become  corroded,  and  the 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  539 

negative  attracts  hydrogen  and  alkalies  caustic  enough  to  dissolve 
the  tissues,  for  pure  alkalies  are  intensely  caustic.  Broad  electrodes 
resist  this  caustic  tendency,  and  we  resist  it  still  further  by  moving 
them  about  over  the  surface,  especially  the  negative. 

When  we  wish  to  produce  the  sharpest  effects  of  electricity  we 
use  metal  electrodes.  Thus  a  very  small  knob  or  nail  pressing 
against  the  skin  with  a  Faradic  or  a  galvanic  negative  current  pro- 
duces a  burning  sensation  like  hot  iron.  A  wire  brush  with  an 
electric  current  brushing  over  the  skin  also  produces  a  burning  sen- 
sation. Sometimes  a  tinsel  brush  is  used  to  strike  or  brush  the  skin, 
which  is  also  painful.  If  such  applications  are  held  on  the  skin  they 
burn  like  a  moxa,  and  are  called  an  electric  moxa. 

A  wire  heated  by  an  electric  current  burns  through  the  flesh,  and 
this  method  of  galvano-cautery  appears  to  have  great  advantages  over 
the  knife,  having  been  successfully  applied  to  hemorrhoids  and  polypi. 
Dr.  Carl  Seiler  has  removed  nasal  polypi  in  this  way,  and  thinks  it 
the  only  way  to  prevent  their  return. 

Another  metallic  application  is  the  use  of  needles  in  acupuncture. 
Needles  two  to  four  inches  long,  not  insulated,  are  inserted  into 
muscles.  The  static  current  was  applied  to  them  over  fifty  years 
ago  by  Sarlandiere  at  Paris,  which  struck  the  fancy  of  the  profession 
immediately.  Since  their  galvanic  and  Faradic  currents  have  been 
used  on  the  needles.  The  positive  has  some  indifferent  connection, 
and  the  negative  is  used  to  touch  the  needles  and  start  muscular 
contraction. 

We  aim  to  produce  the  effects  of  a  current,  but  not  the  sudden 
impulse  which  makes  a  shock.  Shocks  are  produced  by  interrup- 
tions. The  interruption  of  the  static  current  causes  it  to  move  in  a 
spark,  and  shock  when  it  has  force  enough  to  make  its  way.  The 
spark  between  the  conductor  knobs  is  accompanied  by  a  shock  to  the 
one  who  holds  the  electrodes  connected  with  jars. 

When  a  galvanic  current  of  any  considerable  strength,  from  a 
number  of  cells,  or  from  a  single  cell  reinforced  by  magnetism,  is 
passing  through  conductors,  and  its  passage  is  interrupted  so  as  to 
force  it  to  travel  through  electrodes  held  in  the  hands,  its  passage 
produces  a  decided  shock.  It  is  upon  this  principle  that  the  common 
portable  battery  works.  The  primary  galvanic  current  passes  from 
the  carbon  to  the  zinc  through  the  primary  coil  and  is  not  felt  in  the 
electrodes  until  the  current  is  broken  by  the  magnet  attracting  the 
spring  from  its  contact  with  the  screw.  This  forces  the  current 
through  the  electrodes  and  the  one  who  holds  them.  But  this  is 
momentary,  as  the  contact  is  immediately  renewed  when  magnet 
ceases  to  act  (for  want  of  a  current),  and  the  current  again  flows  in 


540  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

its  former  route,  without  reaching  the  subject.  Thus  the  primary 
battery  current  is  a  succession  of  fine  shocks  which  all  pass  in  one 
direction.  Being  a  one-way  current  or  shock,  it  retains  the  galvanic 
character,  but  has  not  the  same  chemical  power  as  the- uninterrupted 
galvanic  current. 

The  Faradic  current  or  shock,  as  a  general  stimulant,  has  a  very 
extensive  applicability  to  rousing  impaired  organs.  It  has  even 
been  applied  to  the  kidneys  in  a  case  of  diabetes,  by  Dr.  Clubb  of 
England,  with  the  effect  of  reducing  the  urine  to  one-half  its 
previous  amount  in  the  course  of  six  weeks. 

Its  applicability  to  stimulating  the  growth  of  young  animals  was 
demonstrated  by  Dr.  Beard  upon  puppies,  and  its  applicability  to 
patients  exhausted  and  moribund,  especially  when  applied  through 
the  hand  of  the  operator,  conveying  his  vital  force,  is  easily  shown. 
I  would  recommend  in  all  cases  of  impaired  vitality,  endangering 
life,  the  use  of  a  Faradic  or  alternating  galvanic  current,  combined 
with  vital  force  and  with  the  remedy  that  seems  most  necessary. 

Dr.  H.  T.  Webster  of  California  has  fully  realized  the  value  of  the 
Faradic  current  in  infantile  marasmus.  He  says  :  "  An  emaciated 
infant,  which  has  become  wan  and  haggard  through  imperfect 
assimilation  of  food,  or  the  prostrating  effects  of  cholera  infantum  or 
other  depleting  disease,  and  in  which  digestion  is  impaired,  and  the 
nervous  system  disturbed,  in  which  there  is  almost  constantly  hectic 
fever  present,  with  exhaustive  alvine  evacuations,  in  many  cases 
passes  in  time  beyond  the  boundary  line  where  drugs  are  capable  of 
exerting  any  beneficial  influence."  In  such  cases,  he  says  :  "  Fara- 
dism  here  is  capable  of  establishing  for  itself  a  reputation  which  will 
stand  unrivalled."  His  method  is  "  to  apply  in  these  cases  the  posi- 
tive pole  at  the  feet  and  the  negative  pole  at  the  nape  of  the  neck, 
regulating  the  current  to  a  mild  force,  and  allow  the  poles  to  remain 
three  or  four  minutes.  Then  place  the  positive  pole  at  one  foot,  and 
hold  the  negative  at  the  opposite  hand,  for  the  same  length  of  time; 
then  place  the  positive  at  the  opposite  foot  and  hand  as  long.  A 
child  that  has  not  rested  for  weeks  will,  in  a  few  nights  after  the 
beginning  of  this  plan,  rest  quietly  all  night  and  begin  to  gain 
strength  and  flesh." 

This  is  indeed  very  good  treatment,  and  yet  it  may  be  improved 
by  adding  currents  from  the  abdomen  to  the  shoulders  and  the  area 
below  the  shoulder-blades,  also  alternating  currents  between  the 
abdomen  and  lower  dorsal  region  and  between  Nutrition  and  Health. 
The  latter  would  be  especially  valuable. 

Dr.  Webster  very  justly  maintains  that  better  effects  may  be  pro- 
duced  by   giving  the  currents   as   described   through  a  warm  bath, 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  541 

which  is  true,  as  the  water  softens  the  electric  action,  sends  its  own 
soothing  influence  through  the  person  and  receives  therefrom  the 
morbid  aura.  In  a  strong  salt-water  bath  the  greater  conductivity 
of  the  water  would  tend  to  diffuse  the  electric  influence  over  the 
surface,  while  in  pure  water  the  current  would  be  more  confined  to 
the  person. 

Softness  of  Current  is  produced  (i)  by  limiting  the  strength  of 
the  battery  supply,  (2)  by  limiting  the  influence  of  the  core  and  of 
the  primary  coil  by  a  shield,  (3)  by  increasing  the  length  of  the  wires? 
and  diminishing  their  size.  Each  of  these  methods  diminishes  the 
quantity  and  force  of  the  current,  and  may  thus  be  equivalent, — 
except  the  method  of  diminishing  the  size  of  the  wire  ;  this 
diminishes  the  quantity  of  the  current,  but  increases  its  intensity  or 
penetrative  capacity. 

As  the  primary  coil  requires  a  good  quantity  for  its  galvanoid 
effects,  it  is  proper  that  it  should  have  as  usual  a  coarser  wire,  which 
may  vary  between  No.  20  and  No.  18.  The  exterior  secondary  coil 
may  vary  between  25  and  32,  as  it  is  designed  to  act  with  force, 
but  not  to  produce  chemical  and  vital  changes  incident  to  galvanism. 
If  the  exterior  coil  has  great  length  of  fine  wire,  its  action  will  be 
more  gentle  and  penetrating. 

A  single  Samson  (muriate  of  ammonia)  cell  is  sufficient  for 
medical  practice  with  the  helix,  but  two  or  three  cells  may  be  used 
when  additional  power  is  needed  to  overcome  resistance. 

Experience,  I  believe,  has  shown  the  superiority  of  a  helix  contain- 
ing a  great  length  of  fine  wire,  which  offers  considerable  resistance, 
supplied  by  a  current  from  three  or  four  cells  ;  the  additional  cells 
being  needed  on  account  of  the  resistance.  A  single  cell  would  not 
be  sufficient  for  a  helix  of  very  long  and  fine  wires. 

The  cylinder  or  shield  of  non-magnetic  metal,  which  interrupts  the 
magnetic  influence  of  the  core  which  it  incloses,  gives  us  great 
delicacy  in  adjusting  the  strength  of  the  current.  The  current  is 
also  subdivided,  with  less  delicacy  but  more  definite  measurement,  by 
taking  it  from  different  parts  of  the  exterior  coil.  One  post  is 
connected  with  one  end  of  the  coil  and  the  other  posts  with  different 
lengths  of  the  coil.  Any  number  of  subdivisions  may  be  made  in 
this  way. 

Another  method  is  to  add  one  or  more  induction  coils,  exterior  to 
the  first ;  but  all  the  variety  required  may  be  obtained  by  having  two 
sliding  coils  of  the  same  diameter,  one  of  moderately  coarse  and  the 
other  of  very  fine  wire.  With  these  we  may  make  any  combination 
by  a  sliding  coil  with  the  primary  currents,  and  the  strength  of  the 
combination    may  be  definitely  modified  by  a  shield  graded  in  ten 


544  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.     [CHAP.  XXIV. 

long,  which  can  be  inserted  and  applied'on  almost  any  part  of  the 
body  by  loosening  and  opening  the  clothes,  and  can  be  applied  easily 
by  the  patient.  The  best  method,  however,  is  to  treat  the  patient  in 
bed,  or  to  substitute  for  the  ordinary  clothing  a  blue  flannel  gown 
with  a  number  of  vertical  slits  through  which  access  can  be  had  to 
any  part  of  the  body.  It  is  a  mistake  to  suppose  that  mere  contact 
with  the  feet  or  hands  can  be  a  satisfactory  method,  or  that  it  is  a 
good  treatment  of  all  the  parts  on  the  route  of  the  current.  It  is 
not  the  route  of  the  current  that  is  chiefly  important,  but  the  points 
of  contact  for  electrodes.  The  advantages  of  the  static  in  treat- 
ment over  the  clothing  must  give  it  pre-eminence  in  practice. 

An  Important  Improvement. —  The  essential  change  which  I 
long  since  promised  to  make  in  electric  apparatus  consists  in  reject- 
ing the  harsh  elements  through  which  the  electricity  passes  and 
substituting  those  which  are  more  wholesome.  Sulphuric  acid, 
bichromate  of  potassa,  bisulphate  of  mercury,  zinc  and  sulphate  of 
zinc  are  not  the  elements  with  which  one  would  like  to  be  saturated. 
It  is  true  they  are  not  physically  transferred  to  the  patient  and  do 
not  permanently  lodge  in  his  body,  but,  as  their  potentiality  is  con. 
veyed,  the  patient  finds  himself  saturated  with  metallic  and  injurious 
influences,  which  compel  him  to  suspend  electric  treatment  with  a 
metallic  taste  in  his  mouth  which  belongs  not  to  the  electricity  but  to 
the  metals  that  convey  it. 

We  make  a  great  change  when  we  substitute  for  the  battery  fluid 
a  solution  of  muriate  of  ammonia,  one  of  the  most  wholesome  sub- 
stances known — a  gently  tonic,  antiseptic  alterative,  closely  akin  to 
that  indispensable  element  of  the  blood,  muriate  of  soda,  but  possess- 
ing more  active  stimulant  and  alterative  properties. 

In  the  muriate  of  ammonia  cell  we  have  no  offensive  vapors,  and  it 
is  not  necessary  to  lift  the  plates  out  of  the  fluid  as  soon  as  we  are 
done  using  them,  to  prevent  their  destruction.  The  battery  stands 
unchanged  from  year  to  year,  ever  ready  for  use,  and  has  great 
durability. 

The  Rheotome  or  Vibrating  Spring  is  the  most  delicate  and 
important  part  of  the  common  battery.  If  the  spring  be  too  weak 
it  yields  too  promptly,  before  the  full  force  of  the  current  is  developed. 
It  should  be  strong  enough  or  remote  enough  from  the  magnet  to 
allow  the  full  strength  to  be  developed  before  it  moves,  in  which 
case  its  movements  are  slower.  By  screwing  up  close  to  the  magnet 
the  interruptions  are  made  more  frequent  and  the  current  more 
delicate.  I  have  endeavored  to  construct  a  rheotome  that  will  be 
always  reliable   and  also  susceptible  of   considerable  variation.     In 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  545 

some  batteries  the  rheotome  admits  of  no  variation,  and  unless  very 
accurately  adjusted  will  not  operate  at  all. 

Electrodes.  —  The  most  common  electrodes,  an  inch  or  inch  and 
a  half  in  diameter,  are  too  small.  Two  and  one-half  or  three  inches  is 
small  enough.  The  purpose  of  the  electrode  should  be  to  introduce 
as  much  electricity  as  practicable  with  the  least  irritation  or  disturb- 
ance. A  large  electrode  greatly  increases  the  facility  of  the  intro- 
duction and  diminishes  the  irritation  at  the  contact  with  the  body. 
A  pair  of  specially  large  electrodes,  five  or  six  inches  in  diameter, 
would  prove  useful  in  cases  requiring  a  good  current  but  too  sensitive 
to  its  application. 

The  electrode  should  be  covered  with  a  cap  of  canton  flannel,  a 
strip  eight  or  nine  inches  in  diameter  retained  by  a  rubber  band,  wet 
with  salt  water  (saturated),  which  will  moisten  the  skin  and  conduct 
very  freely.  This  is  necessary,  as  a  dry  skin  offers  about  as  much 
resistance  as  the  entire  person. 

To  administer  a  medical  influence,  a  pledget  of  absorbent  cotton, 
saturated  with  the  medicine  in  a  fluid  form,  may  be  placed  under  the 
cotton  flannel,  which  should  be  wet  only  far  enough  to  cover  the 
medicated  cotton.  The  best  method,  however,  is  to  use  the  medical 
electrode,  in  which  the  medicine  is  concealed,  is  always  ready  for 
use,  and  leaves  nothing  on  the  skin. 

The  best  material  by  far  for  the  electrodes  is  carbon,  which  should 
have  a  wooden  backing  and  handle  for  strength,  and  a  diameter  of 
two  and  one-half  or  three  inches.  The  carbon  is  free  from  oxidation, 
and  imparts  a  soothing  influence  very  different  from  that  of  metal. 
Small  carbon  electrodes  may  be  used  for  limited  applications. 

Next  to  the  carbon  and  cotton,  which  are  easily  changed  and  kept 
clean,  the  wet  sponge  may  be  recommended,  which  is  also  a  conven- 
ient channel  for  medical  liquids,  but  is  not  so  cleanly. 

The  irritative  effect  of  the  positive  pole  may  be  diminished  by  in- 
creasing the  size  of  the  electrodes  and  the  amount  of  water  on  their 
surface,  as  well  as  by  various  soothing  medical  liquids.  Alkalies, 
soap,  althea  powder  and  hyoscyamus  may  be  used.  The  irritant 
influence  of  the  negative  pole  may  be  reduced  by  enlarging  its  sur- 
face, or  the- obstruction  by  a  rheostat. 

When  the  object  is  to  irritate  the  skin,  a  metal  brush  is  used. 
The  interrupting  electrode  is  used  when  we  wish  to  break  and  renew 
the  current,  which  is  convenient  for  diagnosis. 

The  commutating  electrode,  which  produces  what  are  called  "  vol- 
taic alternatives,"  is  important  when  we  wish  to  make  a  galvanic  or 
a  primary  current  equal  at  both  poles,  and  thus  make  it  a  powerful 
and  equable  stimulus. 


54'6  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.     [CHAP.  XXIV. 

A  long-handled  electrode  is  valuable  for  making  applications  under 
the  clothing.  The  gliding  treatment  over  the  body  is  made  more 
facile  by  a  roller  electrode,  which  makes  diffusive  stimulation  easy. 

There  is  no  electrode  so  beneficial  and  adaptable  as  the  human 
hand,  which  may  give  strong  currents  without  irritation  and  impart 
the  vitality  of  the  operator.  A  wet  linen  glove  of  crash  material  is 
sometimes  a  useful  addition. 

For  surgical  use  in  galvano-cautery  and  for  gynecological  practice  a 
variety  of  electrodes  are  used  which  I  need  not  describe. 

Electric  Measurements.  —  The  operator  whose  nice  sensibility 
and  psychometric  perception  enables  him  to  realize  the  true  charac- 
ter of  each  current  may  not  need  the  instruments  of  exact  measure- 
ment, except  in  recording  and  describing  his  treatment  in  the  use  of 
galvanism,  which  alone  is  measurable.  But  for  scientific  accuracy  he 
needs  to  understand  electric  measurement  and  description,  which 
portrays  the  exact  amount  of  galvanic  electricity  used  upon  a  patient 
as  nearly  as  instruments  can  record  it, — the  amount  used  being  what 
the  electric  force  is  competent  to  carry  through  a  certain  amount  of 
resistance.  But  I  must  confess  it  does  not  clearly  appear  that  any 
measurement  by  instruments  is  an  exact  expression  of  the  vital 
effect  of  a  current. 

The  electro-motive  force  is  expressed  in  volts,  the  resistance  in 
ohms,  —  names  derived  from  Volta  and  Ohm.  The  volt  signifies  an 
electric  power  competent  to  produce  a  movement  of  one  metre 
(39.37  inches)  a  second  through  one  gramme  (15  grains),  and  this  force 
is  about  what  we  find  in  one  Daniell's  cell  (such  as  is  commonly 
used).  The  Daniell  cell,  lined  with  a  sheet  of  copper,  holds  about  a 
gallon,  and  about  two-thirds  of  its  content  is  occupied  by  a  saturated 
solution  of  sulphate  of  copper ;  and  a  porous  cup,  holding  a  fluid  of 
which  one-ninth  is  sulphuric  acid,  is  placed  in  the  centre  of  the  jar, 
and  a  bar  of  zinc  amalgamated  with  mercury  inserted  in  the  cup. 

This  cell  is  passive  when  the  current  is  not  flowing,  but  yields  a 
volt  of  force  when  its  poles  are  connected.  The  most  active  cells 
(with  sulphuric  and  bichromate  fluids)  yield  about  two  volts. 

The  ohm  of  resistance  is  what  is  offered  to  the  current  by  two 
hundred  and  fifty  feet  of  copper  wire  one-twentieth  of  an  inch  in  diam- 
eter, hence  a  very  minute  amount. 

The  wire  of  the  primary  coil  of  a  portable  battery  sixty  feet  long 
and  one-eighteenth  of  an  inch  in  diameter  would  offer  not  quite  one- 
fifth  of  an  ohm  of  resistance,  but  an  exterior  Faradic  coil  wire  one 
twenty-eighth  of  an  inch  in  diameter  and  two  hundred  feet  long  would 
offer  a  resistance  of  nearly  1.6  ohms.  A  wire  of  one-thirtieth,  four 
hundred  feet  long,  would  offer  a  resistance  of  3.6  ohms. 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  547 

If  the  power  of  one  volt  operates  through  one  ohm  of  resistance, 
it  transmits  a  certain  quantity  of  electricity  per  second,  which  quan- 
tity is  called  a  coulomb,  and  an  ampere  is  the  current  of  one  cou- 
lomb per  second.  The  amperes  are  measured  by  a  meter  which  is 
called  a  milliampere  meter.  The  milliampere  is  not  a  thousand  am- 
peres, but  the  thousanth  part  of  an  ampere. 

When  we  have  galvanic  batteries  yielding  from  five  to  fifty  volts  of 
force  we  might  expect  a  vast  number  of  milliamperes  to  pass  through 
the  human  body ;  but  as  the  resistance  of  the  body  is  between  two 
and  three  million  times  the  resistance  of  a  similar  mass  of  copper, 
only  a  small  amount  of  electricity  passes  through  it  without  a  strong 
voltage,  such  as  is  furnished  by  numerous  cells  or  the  motive  force  of 
a  coil  containing  a  magnet. 

The  body  and  limbs  together  offering  a  resistance  of  about  fifteen 
thousand  ohms  would  require  a  battery  of  fifteen  volts  to  produce  a 
current  of  one  milliampere.  Hence  batteries  of  fifty  to  a  hundred  cells 
are  required  to  produce  efficient  currents  between  the  hands  and  feet, 
though  batteries  of  ten  to  twenty  cells  are  sufficient  for  short  cur- 
rents. A  current  of  ten  inches  through  the  flesh  from  ten  cells  of 
1.5  volts  each  would  be  strong  enough  for  general  use,  being  about 
seven  or  eight  milliamperes. 

Without  pretending  to  any  accuracy,  which  the  nature  of  the 
subject  does  not  permit,  I  would  say  that  for  galvanic  currents  in  the 
human  body  of  adequate  strength  we  require  one  efficient  galvanic 
cell,  such  as  the  Law  or  Samson,  for  every  inch  in  the  length  of 
the  current. 

But  why  do  we  require  this  multiplication  of  cells  which  adds 
nothing  to  the  galvanism  but  electro-motive  force  to  compel  its  cir- 
culation in  the  flesh  ?  A  single  cell  of  larger  size  would  furnish  a 
greater  volume  of  galvanism  than  the  largest  battery,  and  if  to  this 
cell  we  add  the  electro-motive  force  of  an  adequate  coil  we  produce 
a  greater  effect  than  the  largest  battery  of  cells  would  produce. 

Upon  this  principle  I  have  constructed  a  small  portable  galvanic 
battery,  which  possesses  all  the  power  needed  in  galvanic  treatment, 
yielding  a  current  which  easily  flows  through  the  length  of  the  body, 
and  which  requires  a  rheostat  to  moderate  its  action.  Such  a 
rheostat  I  have  constructed  on  a  simple  and  convenient  plan. 

The  reader  will  perceive  from  these  statements  that  the  electro- 
magnetic and  galvanic  currents  are  different,  the  former  having  what 
the  latter  has  not,  great  penetrative  power  or  electro-magnetic  force, 
making  it  more  available  in  electro-therapeutics.  When  the  two  are 
combined,  as  by  union  of  the  coil  and  cell,  the  galvanic  current  is 
carried  through  the  system  by  the  electro-magnetic,  as  efficiently  as  it 


54§  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.     [CHAP.  XXIV. 

is  in  the  common  portable  battery,  and  the  power  thus  united  with 
it  is  in  some  respects  preferable  to  the  galvanic.  Those  who  feel  the 
currents  prefer  the  electro-magnetic. 

Currents  applied  to  the  human  body.  —  Our  text-books  are 
not  at  all  clear  in  reference  to  the  relation  between  the  human  body 
and  the  electric  currents.  They  tell  of  volts  and  ohms,  but  give 
little  instruction  as  to  the  relation  of  one  to  the  other  in  the  human 
body. 

We  know  that  the  conductivity  of  the  human  body  is  similar  to 
that  of  a  weak  solution  of  salt,  and  is  chiefly  developed  in  its  fluids, 
being  greatly  less  in  the  hard  and  solid  parts  and  adipose  materials. 
Parts  well  filled  with  blood,  such  as  the  viscera  of  the  trunk  and  the 
brain,  are  good  conductors,  while  bone,  tendon,  epidermis,  nails  and 
hair  offer  great  resistance.  Weber  makes  the  curious  statement  that 
the  resistance  of  the  tongue  is  equal  to  that  of  the  whole  body. 
Nevertheless  the  current  of  a  few  cells,  which  would  not  pass  or  be 
recognized  through  the  body,  will  produce  an  intolerable  burning  if 
passed  through  the  tongue.  The  tests  derived  from  passing  currents 
through  German-silver  rheostats  are  not  a  correct  criterion  of  the 
effects  on  the  human  body.  A  current  with  electro-motive  force 
making  it  five  times  as  efficient  as  another  may  show  no  appreciable 
difference  when  tested  by  such  a  rheostat. 

We  are  told  by  the  measurements  of  Dr.  Matthiesen  that  the  con- 
ductivity of  copper  is  more"  than  2,900,000  times  as  great  as  that  of 
salt  water.  Hence  we  learn  that  the  length  of  a  copper  wire  is  of 
little  importance  if  currents  have  any  force.  But  as  the  conductivity 
of  a  wire  is  inversely  as  the  square  of  its  diameter,  a  copper  wire  may 
be  fine  enough  to  offer  sensible  resistance,  and  a  fine  wire  of  German 
silver  offers  resistance  enough  to  be  used  as  a  rheostat  or  current 
obstructed 

The  resistance  of  the  human  body  is  in  proportion  to  the  length 
of  the  current  through  it,  and  in  inverse  proportion  to  the  thickness 
or  diameter  of  the  parts  —  in  other  words,  it  passes  more  readily 
through  the  trunk  than  through  the  limbs,  when  there  is  not  an 
adipose  obstruction. 

A  current  through  the  body  may  be  from  hand  to  hand  or  hand  to 
root  or  foot  to  foot.  The  difference  is  said  to  be  not  very  great,  though 
the  distance  from  hand  to  foot  is  greater,  and  I  find  the  resistance 
fifty  per  cent,  greater.  The  resistance  offered  by  this  tract  has  not 
been  stated  in  the  common  text-books.  Meyer  quotes  the  very 
opposite  opinions  of  Pouilliet  and  Lenz,  without  expressing  any 
opinion  himself.  Pouilliet's  incorrect  estimate  would  make  it  nine 
hundred  and  sixty-one  ohms.     Of  course  this  was  only  an  estimate, 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  549 

not  a  measurement.  The  estimate  of  Lenz  and  Ptschelnikoff  would 
make  it  about  one  thousand  seven  hundred  and  sixty  ohms.  These 
are  strange  statements  to  be  found  in  a  work  by  Meyer,  translated  by 
Hammond.  I  have  found  a  resistance  from  hand  to  hand  in  myself  to 
be  about  ten  thousand  ohms,  and  from  hand  to  foot  fifteen  to  seven- 
teen thousand  ohms. 

But  what  relation  this  resistance  bears  to  galvanic  and  primary 
currents  our  text-books  do  not  explain.  They  leave  us  to  find  out 
what  amount  of  current  we  are  getting  by  a  milliampere  meter, 
which  is  applicable  only  to  the  galvanic  battery.  For  the  primary 
and  secondary  currents  we  have  no  test  but  the  sensibility  of  the 
operator  and  subject,  and  I  believe  the  sensibility  of  a  psychometric 
operator  is  the  very  best  test,  for  he  can  recognize  qualities  in  the 
current  which  no  instrument  can  express.  The  electro-motive  force 
of  primary,  secondary  and  static  currents  is  so  great  as  to  seem 
beyond  computation. 

The  primary  current,  having  much  of  the  virtue  of  the  galvanic, 
has  a  propelling  force  which  makes  it  efficient  in  currents  through 
the  body  which  would  require  a  very  large  galvanic  battery ;  but  in 
portable  batteries,  generally,  the  primary  is  made  too  feeble  in  com- 
parison with  the  secondary.  Tested  by  its  power  of  overcoming  the 
resistance  of  a  rheostat,  the  primary  current  does  not  equal  the 
galvanic  cell  which  originates  it,  while  it  permeates  the  human  body 
with  the  force  of  fifty  or  a  hundred  cells.  Our  text-books  speak  of 
electro-motive  force  of  currents,  as  if  they  were  correctly  measured 
by  the  number  of  ohms  which  they  overcome  in  passing  through 
German-silver  wires.  But  that  kind  of  electro-motive  force  which  is 
efficient  in  the  human  body  is  something  very  different,  and  on  that 
subject  we  have  received  no  explanation. 

The  failure  of  the  primary  current  to  overcome  as  many  ohms  of 
resistance  as  the  cell  which  originates  it  may  be  due  to  the  interrup- 
tions, for  a  separate  coil  added  in  a  galvanic  current  increases  its 
power  of  overcoming  resistance,  though  not  as  much  as  it  increases 
its  vital  effects.  That  vital  effects  are  in  some  way  different  from, 
and  not  commensurate  with,  mechanical  effects  was  illustrated  also 
by  the  experience  of  Dr.  Piffard,  who  found  that  a  current  from 
Edison's  incandescent-light  wires,  though  reduced  by  a  rheostat  to 
the  proper  number  of  milliamperes,  was  too  painful  in  application, 
compelling  him  to  substitute  a  similar  amount  from  galvanic  cells. 

A  current  from  one  battery  may  have  irritating  and  convulsive 
effects,  when  another  battery  may  give  the  same  number  of  milliam- 
peres of  current  without  any  convulsive  effects,  as  the  current  is 
changed.     The  cells  containing  muriate  of  ammonia  have  a  much 


550  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

milder  influence  than  those  containing  the  common  sulphuric  acid 
and  bichromate  solution. 

When  we  apply  ten  cells  with  ten  or  fifteen  volts  of  electro-motive 
force  to  the  human  body,  with  the  electrodes  but  a  few  inches  apart 
and  the  connections  moist,  we  get  an  efficient  portion  of  the  motive 
force,  but  this  declines  as  we  separate  the  electrodes,  and  a  current 
which  is  very  strong  on  a  short  circuit  becomes  nearly  insensible 
when  it  traverses  the  length  of  the  body.  This  we  may  realize  and 
estimate  by  introducing  the  galvanometer  into  the  circuit.  Ten  cells 
would  send  but  one  or  two  milliamperes  through  the  length  of  the 
body. 

The  electro-motive  force  of  the  primary  and  secondary  currents  is 
so  great  that  we  have  no  difficulty  on  this  question,  and  the  sensa- 
tions of  the  operator  are  a  sufficient  guide.  He  should  not  adminis- 
ter any  current  which  he  has  not  tried  on  himself. 

The  diffusive  power  of  battery  currents  in  carrying  medical 
potencies  throughout  the  system  demands  that  the  electrician  should 
also  be  profoundly  acquainted  with  the  materia  medica,  and  should 
apply  the  appropriate  remedy  wherever  he  applies  the  positive  pole, 
unless  the  remedy  be  one  which  may  be  decomposed,  so  that  the 
positive  pole  will  attract  it.  When  we  apply  a  solution  of  iodide  of 
potassium  to  the  surface  (say  in  a  wad  of  cotton)  under  the  negative 
pole,  the  iodine  will  make  its  way  through  the  body  to  the  positive 
pole.  But  this  question  does  not  arise  in  using  my  medical  electrode, 
the  potentiality  of  the  remedy  being  conveyed  without  its  substance. 

The  strength  of  currents  is  regulated  in  portable  batteries  by  a 
shield  pulled  out  or  pushed  in,  or  by  separating  more  or  less  the 
inner  and  outer  coil.  In  the  galvanic  battery  we  regulate  by  the 
number  of  cells  used,  and  a  switch  is  arranged  to  take  into  the  circuit 
any  number  from  one  upward.  But  we  also  regulate  its  strength  by 
the  resistance  we  interpose  between  the  electrodes  and  the  patient, 
or  the  resistance  interposed  by  a  rheostat  between  the  battery  and 
the  electrodes.  The  method  by  resistance  is  better  than  by  selecting 
cells,  as  it  gives  to  all  the  cells  the  same  amount  of  action  and 
preserves  their  equality.  An  accurate  knowledge  of  the  resistance 
is  obtained  by  using  wire  rheostats  in  which  a  certain  length  of 
German  silver  makes  the  hindrance.  As  German  silver  gives  thirteen 
times  the  resistance  of  copper,  a  fine  German  silver  wire  is  an 
efficient  rheostat,  and  the  best  rheostat  is  arranged  so  that  we  easily 
change  the  resistance,  as  we  wind  the  wires  off  the  spool,  and  know 
how  many  coils  we  are  using  on  the  spool.  This  is  the  rheostat  of 
Wheatstone.  The  rheostat  or  resistance  coil  gives  us  the  number  of 
ohms  of  resistance  that  we  are  using  to  check  the  current.     Brenner's 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  55  T 

resistance  coils  are  not  so  simple  in  plan  as  Whcatstone's,  in  which 
the  wires  are  coiled  around  a  spool.  The  best  rheostat  that  I  have 
seen  is  the  Bailey  current  regulator,  which  operates  admirably  and 
has  the  additional  merit  that  it  conducts  the  current  through  carbon, 
which  is  a  beneficial  method  for  the  patient. 

Cheap  and  simple  rheostats  may  be  made  by  using  a  glass  tube 
filled  with  water,  with  corks  in  the  end  through  which  wires  may  be 
inserted,  the  distance  between  the  ends  of  which  determines  the 
amount  of  resistance,  —  or  by  using  an  open  channel  or  trough,  half 
an  inch  to  an  inch  wide,  filled  with  water.  The  great  facility  of  ad- 
justing the  distance  between  the  wires  on  this  plan  is  its  recommen- 
dation. This  channel  may  be  made  of  any  non-conducting  insulating 
substance, — -porcelain,  plaster  or  painted  wood.  The  conductivity  of 
the  water  can  easily  be  increased  by  adding-  salt. 

When  the  helix  is  constructed  so  that  the  exterior  coil  slides  over 
the  interior  or  primary  coil,  we  regulate  the  currents  by  sliding  it. 
When  the  interior  coil  is  entirely  uncovered,  we  have  the  full  force  of 
the  primary,  with  nothing  of  the  secondary  ;  but  as  the  outer  coil,  with 
its  poles  connected  by  a  wire,  slides  over  the  inner,  it  gradually 
absorbs  the  force  of  the  latter,  until,  when  the  inner  coil  is  entirely 
covered,  its  whole  force  is  absorbed  by  the  exterior,  which  gives  us  a 
powerful  Faradic  or  induction  current  and  suppresses  the  primary 
current,  for  there  is  only  a  certain  amount  of  force  and  whatever 
appears  in  one  coil  cannot  appear  in  the  other.  Hence  we  may 
arrange  it  as  we  please,  obtaining  only  primary  or  only  secondary 
currents,  or  in  any  proportion  we  please ;  for,  when  the  inner  coil  is 
half  covered  by  the  outer,  we  have  one-half  the  force  in  the  primary 
current  and  one-half  in  the  secondary,  and  we  may  administer  these 
combinations  of  definite  portions  of  each  current  to  the  patient,  by 
having  our  wires  or  cords  attached  to  the  binding  posts  for  each  cur- 
rent. But  if  the  poles  of  the  exterior  coil  are  not  connected  in  any 
way  it  has  no  effect  on  the  primary.  It  would  seem  that  each  elec- 
trode might  have  one  wire  or  cord  to  carry  both  currents,  — one  elec- 
trode thus  connecting  with  the  positive  primary  and  secondary,  the 
other  with  the  negative  primary  and  secondary,  —  and  that  with  this 
arrangement  a  skilful  and  experienced  operator  might  produce  very 
satisfactory  results,  with  primary,  secondary  and  combined  currents 
in  various  proportions  ;  but  when  the  student  attempts  to  make  this 
very  convenient  combination,  he  finds  a  difficulty  not  mentioned  in 
any  text -book.  When  the  primary  and  secondary  currents  are  brought 
together,  with  moderate  ceil  power,  they  antagonize.  The  wires  con- 
necting the  currents  apparently  into  one  bring  them  into  conflict. 
The  positive  primary,  instead  of  going  to  the  subject,  strikes  back  to 


55-  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

the  positive  secondary  and  destroys  it,  and  the  negative  primary  de- 
stroys the  negative  secondary,  leaving  the  secondary  entirely 
destroyed,  although  the  outer  coil  is  over  the  primary  in  the  position 
to  receive  all  its  force.  The  primary  current,  by  thus  acting 
through  the  outer  coil,  destroys  all  inductive  effects,  and  takes  this 
route  without  touching  the  patient,  who  then  feels  nothing. 

Hence  it  is  necessary  (to  combine  the  currents  with  moderate  cell 
powers)  that  they  should  go  to  the  subject  through  separate  wires  and 
electrodes,  without  any  metallic  contact  on  the  route,  and  both  cur- 
rents will  then  be  realized,  if  the  electrodes  are  prevented  from  touch- 
ing ;  a  strip  of  rubber  or  paper  to  keep  them  apart  until  delivered  into 
the  subject  will  prevent  their  mingling,  for  they  will  not  react  on  each 
other  through  the  subject,  but  each  will  produce  its  complete  effect 
as  if  it  were  alone.  With  a  doubled  cell  power  the  positive  primary, 
in  touching  the  positive  secondary,  suppresses  it  on  that  side  and 
increases  the  negative  secondary.  So  the  negative  primary,  in  touch- 
ing the  negative  secondary,  suppresses  it  and  reinforces  the  positive 
secondary.  In  other  words,  each  primary  current  repels  the  secondary 
of  the  same  side,  driving  it  to  the  opposite  side,  and  the  two  primary 
currents  suppress  the  two  secondary  by  touching  them,  but  if  the 
primary  and  secondary  are  kept  apart  until  they  reach  the  patient, 
each  has  its  full  effect.  It  is  curious  to  observe  how  the  primary 
electrode  on  each  side  nullifies  the  effect  of  the  secondary,  even  though 
the  secondary  coil  entirely  covers  the  primary,  and  how  quickly  a 
powerful  Faradic  current  is  then  released  on  one  side,  whenever  the 
primary  ceases  to  touch  the  secondary  electrode. 

As  batteries  are  commonly  constructed,  the  first  binding  post  gives 
the  positive  primary  and  the  second  the  negative  primary  current. 
The  second  is  also  used  to  give  the  positive  Faradic  and  the  third  the 
negative  Faradic  ;  but  the  first  and  third —  in  other  words,  the  positive 
primary  and  negative  secondary  post  —  are  used  to  give  the  combined 
current,  which  is  the  most  powerful  that  can  be  given,  and  which  is 
increased,  like  the  Faradic  current,  by  pushing  the  exterior  over  the 
inner  coil,  and  diminished  by  withdrawing  it. 

When  the  two  coils  of  the  helix  are  not  movable  but  fixed,  we  have 
a  certain  full  amount  of  available  force  in  each  current,  which  we  may 
reduce  down  to  nothing,  by  the  use  of  the  sliding  tubular  shield,  which 
reduces  the  entire  force  of  both  currents.  Thus  we  may  have  any 
grade  of  intensity  of  either  current,  singly  or  combined,  but  we  cannot 
vary  the  proportions  of  the  two  combinations  as  when  the  outer  coil 
is  movable,  and  if  we  combine  the  currents  they  combine  on  an  equal 
footing. 

Hence  I  prefer  the  movable  coil,  as  giving  a  far  greater  variety  of 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  553 

desirable  effects,  and  in  preparing  the  coils  I  give  the  primary  a  much 
fuller  development  than  usual,  because  I  attach  more  importance  to 
its  use,  and  desire  a  more  efficient  magnet  to  operate  the  rheotome 
in  slow  or  rapid  vibrations,  —  the  common  helix  being  too  feeble  to  con- 
trol the  rheotome  with  facility  and  sustain  the  desirable  variations. 

The  standard  apparatus,  as  proposed  by  the  Electrical  Congress  at 
Paris  in  1881,  may  serve  as  a  standard  for  comparison  merely,  but  I 
do  not  regard  it  as  a  satisfactory  standard  for  an  efficient  induction 
apparatus.  This  proposed  apparatus  uses  as  a  generator  the  Daniell's 
cell  of  one* volt  ;  the  operator  needs  a  cell  or  cells  capable  of  giving 
more  than  one  volt.  The  length  of  its  primary  coil  is  three  and  one- 
half  inches ;  of  the  secondary  coil,  two  and  three-fifths  inches.  The 
primary  wire  is  one  twenty-fifth  of  an  inch  in  diameter  ;  the  secondary, 
one  hundredth.  There  are  four  layers  of  the  primary  wire  and  twenty- 
eight  of  the  secondary.  The  primary  current  is  thus  hardly  sufficient 
to  generate  the  strength  of  magnetism  necessary  to  give  power  at  the 
rheotome,  or  to  make  a  strong  apparatus,  the  length  of  its  wire  being 
less  than  a  hundred  feet.  The  exterior  coil  gives  a  fine  current,  and 
contains  about  thirty  times  as  great  a  length  of  wire  as  the  interior 
coil. 

As  the  exterior  coil  covers  but  a  trifle  over  half  the  length  of  the 
interior  coil,  the  helix  can  give  primary  and  secondary  currents  at  the 
same  time,  in  nearly  equal  proportions,  the  primary  strength  being 
doubled  when  it  is  used  alone.  Such  an  arrangement  is  appropriate 
when  the  exterior  coil  is  not  movable. 

ELECTRIC   BATHS. 

The  principles  governing  electric  baths  are  not  obscure.  If  the 
bath-tub  is  metallic,  the  patient  should  be  separated  from  it  by  a 
wooden  floor  or  lattice-work,  to  avoid  contact.  A  current  applied  to 
the  bath-tub  brings  a  diffused  influence  over  the  entire  surface  of  the 
patient,  which  flows  readily  if  the  water  be  well  supplied  with  salt, 
and  at  the  same  time  conveys  the  peculiar  tonic,  antiseptic  influence 
of  salt,  which  is  beneficial  in  fevers.  An  unlimited  variety  of  medical 
impressions  may  be  made  by  introducing  the  remedies  in  the  bath, 
and  applying  the  positive  pole  to  the  metallic  bath-tub. 

The  negative  pole  may  be  held  in  the  hand,  out  of  the  water,  which 
will  bring  an  abundant  current  to  the  arms.  The  tonic  and  cooling 
influence  thus  applied  to  the  surface  will  be  peculiarly  beneficial  in 
fever,  and  in  cutaneous  diseases  of  a  relaxed  and  hyperaemic  condition. 

If  a  negative  pole,  well  insulated,  is  applied  to  the  shoulders,  a 
highly  tonic  and  restorative  impression  will  be  made. 

In  a  bath-tub  of  soapstone,   painted  wood  or  japanned  ware,  glass 


554  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

or  porcelain,  the  treatment  consists  in  applying  electrodes  (which  are 
insulated  by  varnish  or  rubber  up  to  the  point  of  contact  with  the 
body)  to  all  points  of  the  surface,  on  the  same  principles  as  when  out 
of  the  bath,  which  need  not  be  described  at  present.  Water  being 
described  as  a  poor  conductor,  the  currents  given  in  a  bath  should 
not  be  much  influenced  by  its  presence  if  not  made  saline.  But  in 
fact  warm  water  offers  less  resistance  than  the  surface  of  the  body. 
If  sufficiently  saline,  currents  may  be  passed  without  actual*  contact 
which  will  tend  to  diffuse  over  the  whole  surface,  which  is  an  impor- 
tant feature  of  the  saline  bath.  Positive  currents  may  ♦  be  diffused 
over  large  areas  of  the  surface  and  attracted  by  the  negative  pole  to 
the  region  of  Health.  This  gives  us  the  opportunity  through  the 
water  of  making  a  very  extensive  and  diffusible  electrode  through 
water  for  either  the  positive  or  negative  poles,  and  thus  gives  an 
important  variety  of  treatment,  in  which  very  large  electric  currents 
may  be  passed  through  large  areas  without  irritation.  The  liability 
to  irritation  will  be  still  less  when  the  current  is  from  the  magnetic 
battery.  This  transmission  through  water  may  be  made  when  it  is 
not  salted,  for  in  practice  we  do  not  find  in  water  so  great  a  resistance 
as  we  should  expect  from  the  statements  in  the  books,  and  when  salt 
or  carbonate  of  soda  is  freely  added  the  conductivity  becomes  much 
greater  than  that  of  the  body,  and  currents  may  pass  quite  around 
the  body  for  this  reason,  unless  the  electrodes  are  brought  into  con- 
tact with  it. 

For  galvanic  currents,  about  sixty  cells,  giving  one  and  one-half 
volts  each,  are  sufficient  for  electric  baths.  Some  patients  will  require 
the  whole  force  of  the  battery  and  others  will  be  as  much  affected  by 
one-tenth  of  its  power.  The  best  way  of  regulating  the  power  is  by  a 
rheostat  or  current  regulator,  which  gives  to  all  the  cells  an  equal 
action,  rather  than  by  selecting  a  certain  number  of  cells,  which  taxes 
them  unequally. 

Galvanic  and  primary  currents  change  the  predominance  of  func- 
tions, but  when  we  use  a  commutator  their  power  is  increased,  and 
they  manifest  the  stimulating  power  of  the  Faradic,  and  a  strong 
current  will  produce  an  extensive  contraction  of  muscles  when  sent 
through  the  length  of  the  body.  When  electrodes  are  placed  on  the 
skin  they  make  a  strong  impression,  and  when  they  are  more  remote 
the  impression  given  through  the  water  is  of  course  more  slight  and 
diffused  through  a  larger  surface.  The  greater  penetrating  power  of 
the  Faradic  enables  it  to  be  felt  at  a  greater  distance. 

When  the  medicines  are  not  too  expensive  they  may  be  administered 
through  the  bath,  in  which  case  the  positive  current  may  be  given 
from  a  metallic  bath-tub,  or  from  a  naked  wire  extending  all  around 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  555 

it  under  the  water.  Dr.  Schweig,  of  New  York,  mentions  his  success 
in  administering  iron  through  the  bath,  which  he  used  in  the  form  of 
tartrate  of  iron  and  ammonia.  He  has  also  successfully  used  the 
extract  of  malt,  and  I  have  no  doubt  that  nutritive  substances  may 
be  effectively  used  when  needed.  Iodine  he  has  found  available  in 
promoting  absorption  of  morbid  deposits,  and  iodide  of  potassium, 
one  ounce  to  the  bath,  he  found  useful  in  removing  lead  from  the 
system. 

Influence   of   Static    (Positive)    Electricity. 

It  has  been  shown,  in  the  chapter  on  Hygiene,  that  the  higher  regions 
of  the  atmosphere  are  more  congenial  to  the  brain  and  the  higher 
elements  of  humanity  and  greatly  promotive  of  the  health  of  the  lungs 
as  well  as  the  brain. 

These  higher  regions  are  largely  supplied  with  positive  electricity, 
the  accumulations  of  which  we  observe  in  thunder-clouds.  The  evap- 
oration of  water  under  almost  all  circumstances  (and  especially  from 
the  ocean)  carries  up  a  positive  condition  with  the  vapor,  and  of  course 
leaves  a  more  or  less  negative  condition  behind.  Thus  the  surface  of 
the  earth,  and  the  air  in  contact  with  it,  is  usually  negative,  except 
when  dry  and  heated  by  sunshine  ;  and  apartments  at  or  below  the 
surface  of  the  earth  are  very  unfavorable  to  health,  compared  with 
those  in  the  upper  stories  of  houses,  or  in  dry,  elevated  locations, 
where  positive  conditions  prevail.  The  positive  condition  of  the 
atmosphere  in  dry,  sunshiny  weather,  with  a  clear  blue  sky,  is  ex- 
tremely pleasant  and  healthful,  while  the  negative  conditions  of  damp 
weather,  with  deficient  sunshine,  or,  still  worse,  the  negative  condition 
produced  by  thawing  ice  and  snow  in  the  slush  of  winter,  or  the  east 
winds  from  Atlantic  icebergs,  are  very  depressing.  It  has  been  deter- 
mined by  careful  observations  that  the  electricity  of  the  atmosphere 
reaches  a  maximum  about  10  a.  m.,  which  is  the  period  most  favor- 
able to  human  activity,  and  reaches  a  minimum  after  midnight,  about 
2  a.  m.,  a  time  which  is  most  appropriate  for  rest  and  entirely  unfit 
for  labor. 

We  thus  learn  that  electricity,  like  caloric,  is  the  natural  stimulant 
of  the  nervous  system,  necessary  to  its  activity ;  and  it  is  continually 
generated,  with  caloric,  in  a  healthy  constitution,  and  so  freely  in  some 
few  individuals  as  to  be  given  off  in  sparks.  The  natural  condition 
of  the  human  constitution  in  health  and  vigor  is  positive,  but  the  pos- 
itive electricity  disappears  when  the  nervous  energies  are  reduced  by 
over-exertion,  fatigue  and  lassitude,  or  by  rheumatism  and  some  other 
diseases.  This  positive  electricity,  however,  is  not  detected  when  it 
is  carried  off  by  perspiration. 


556  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.     [CHAP.  XXIV. 

Being  thus  a  necessary  stimulant  of  life,  the  diminution  of  which 
depresses  all  vital  processes,  we  evidently  have  in  Franklinism  the 
most  valuable  agent  furnished  by  electric  science,  incapable,  unless 
violently  administered  in  shocks,  of  the  injurious  effects  that  have 
often  followed  the  use  of  chemical  electricity,  and  capable,  by  its  cur- 
rents, of  controlling  physiological  and  pathological  processes  more 
satisfactorily  and  much  more  conveniently  than  it  can  be  done  by 
chemical  electricity. 

The  true  explanation  of  the  value  of  static  electricity,  the  close 
correspondence  and  sympathy  of  all  corporeal  and  all  cerebral  surfaces, 
being  unknown  to  the  prof ession,  they  have  been  puzzled  to  account  for 
its  superior  value.  Dr.  W.  J.  Morton  says  :  "  How  can  simple  electrifi- 
cation by  insulation  and  the  drawing  of  sparks,  it  is  asked,  produce  the 
decided  effects  that  are  claimed  for  it  ?  Static  electricity,  it  is  said, 
owing  to  its  high  tension,  accumulates  merely  on  the  surface  of  the 
body,  and  does  not  penetrate  into  the  deeper  organs,  while  the  spark  is 
merely  the  briefest  kind  of  current." 

This  ignorance  of  the  rationale  may  have  been  one  of  the  causes  for 
its  signal  neglect  for  a  whole  century,  while  benevolent,  practical  men, 
like  Rev.  John  Wesley  and  Dr.  Gale  of  New  York,  went  on  in  trium- 
phant cures.  The  same  ignorance  of  the  rationale  of  animal  magnet- 
ism contributed  to  its  neglect.  Dogma  is  more  important  than  facts 
to  dogmatic  minds. 

Dr.  R.  J.  Curtis,  in  the  American  Medical  Journal ',  endeavors  to  ex- 
plain the  effects  of  electricity  as  due  to  its  mechanical  forces.  Medi- 
cal literature  is  emphatically  "  wandering  in  the  dark"  on  this  subject. 
The  superficial  notion  expressed  by  a  well-known  writer  that  static 
electricity  is  a  superficial  affair,  operating  only  on  the  skin,  like  baths 
and  massage,  is  essentially  untrue,  for  it  penetrates  the  body  in  every 
direction  as  freely  as  it  passes  through  water,  and  hence  may  act 
directly  on  the  internal  organs.  Yet,  even  if  it  did  not,  Sarcognomy 
shows  that  in  operating  on  the  surface  it  affects  every  vital  power. 
Hence  it  proves  curative  in  many  cases  in  which  medical  science  has 
entirely  failed  and  even  galvanism  is  unsuccessful,  for  it  produces 
effects  that  nothing  else  can  produce.  Dr.  F.  E.  Caldwell  mentions 
a  case  of  muscular  rheumatism  of  the  deltoid  muscle,  in  which  galvan- 
ism entirely  failed,  which  was  cured  by  tri-weekly  treatment  with 
static  electricity  by  insulation  sparks  and  massage  roller. 

Static  or  Franklinic  electricity,  which  for  near  an  entire  century 
was  neglected  or  contemptuously  treated  by  the  majority  of  the  med- 
ical profession,  is  still  but  imperfectly  presented  by  medical  authors 
and  its  great  capacities  but  little  understood. 

Electrical  machines  are  commonly  supplied  with  brass  chains  or 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  557 

cords,  with  some  textile  covering,  as  the  channel  for  conveying  elec- 
tricity to  patients,  and  long  handles  furnished  to  manipulate  the  chains 
and.  keep  them  off  the  patient  and  operator,  as  it  is  said  that  the 
"electricity  readily  leaps  off  the  conducting  cord  in  a  shower  of  fine 
sparks."  There  is  no  excuse  for  this  folly,  as  wires  covered  with  rub- 
ber or  gutta  percha  are  perfectly  insulated  and  require  no  handles  to 
manage  them,  nor  any  precautions  to  prevent  their  losing  electricity 
by  touching  the  table  or  any  other  object,  so  that  "the  electricity  may 
be  all  drawn  off  and  the  patient  will  receve  none." 

The  exposed  end  of  the  covered  wire  is  quite  sufficient,  when 
approximated  to  the  patient,  to  give  or  receive  that  gentle,  insensible 
current  which  produces  a  happy  effect  when  it  is  applied  for  delicate 
treatment. 

Handles  of  rubber  or  well-varnished  wood,  six  or  eight  inches  long, 
are  sufficient  to  protect  the  operator,  and  any  electrodes  used  with  the 
common  battery,  metal,  carbon  or  sponge,  may  be  used,  being  held  in 
contact  with  the  person  or  clothing,  or  held  near  the  surface  for  insen- 
sible passage  of  currents. 

Gentle  sparks  may  be  drawn  when  a  strong  local  impression  is 
desired,  but  otherwise  a  gentle,  barely  perceptible  current  is  the  best, 
which  is  obtained  by  contact  with  the  skin. 

Whether  treating  by  one  or  by  two  electrodes,  the  principles  guiding- 
application  are  the  same  as  in  the  application  of  chemical  electricity 
guided  by  Sarcognomy. 

The  method  of  treating  by  Franklinism,  however,  differs  materially 
from  that  of  the  electricity  originated  by  galvanism.  With  the  four 
forms  of  electricity  from  galvanism,  the  operator  has  nothing  to  do 
but  to  use  two  electrodes,  bringing  them  into  contact  with  the  body 
—  the  proper  localities  being  shown  by  Sarcognomy.  A  current  from 
the  positive  to  the  negative  electrode  through  the  intervening  body 
is  the  whole  story.     Such  is  the  common  practice. 

But  in  Franklinism  we  are  not  obliged 'to  use  two  electrodes  upon 
the  patient.  He  may  be  fully  charged  with  either  a  positive  or  a  neg- 
ative condition  from  one  electrode,  and  then  treated  with  the  opposite 
electrode  alone.  But  in  the  process  of  charging  him  with,  say,  positive 
electricity  we  do  not  ignore  the  negative  electrode  ;  we  simply  con- 
nect it  in  some  way  with  the  ground  or  floor. 

ACTION    OF    STATIC    MACHINE    IN    CURRENTS    AND    SHOCKS. 

When  the  machine  is  arranged  and  operated  as  usual,  the  Leyden 
jars  into  which  the  brass  rods  are  inserted  become  highly  charged. 
The  positive  rod  establishes  a  negative  condition  on  the  surface  of  the 
jar  and  the  negative  establishes  a  positive  condition  ;  thus  the  outside 


55^  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

of  the  jar  is  in  a  condition  opposite  to  the  inside,  and  the  knobs  con- 
nected therewith.  So  long  as  the  brass  rods  and  knobs  are  charged 
with  positive  electricity  on  one  side  and  a  negative  condition  on  the 
other,  the  jars  are  compelled  by  induction  to  retain  their  electric  con- 
ditions, and  they  cannot  discharge  or  equalize  themselves  though 
connected  by  metal  at  the  bottom  ;  but  when  the  knobs  of  the  rods  are 
near  enough  to  permit  a  spark  or  flash  to  pass,  the  moment  it  passes 
the  electricity  of  the  jar  is  freed  from  inductive  restraint,  and  the 
positive  electricity  passes  to  the  negative  jar  through  their  metallic 
connection,  with  the  same  force  but  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the 
flash  of  the  knobs.  If,  instead  of  the  brass  connection  between  the 
jars,  the  connection  should  be  through  wires  held  by  the  patient,  the 
current  would  pass  through  him  and  give  him  a  strong  shock.  If  the 
knobs  are  less  than  an  eighth  of  an  inch  apart,  the  rapid  flow  of  sparks 
between  them  corresponds  to  the  flow  from  the  outsides  of  che  jars, 
and  if  this  is  allowed  to  pass  through  a  patient  (who  is  in  connection 
with  the  disconnected  jars)  it  will  give  him  vigorous  shocks  such  as  he 
would  feel  if  the  sparks  touched  him,  which  have  some  resemblance 
in  feeling  to  a  Faradic  current.  For  my  own  comfort  I  would  prefer 
to  have  the  knobs  not  more  than  the  sixteenth  of  an  inch  apart. 
Dr.  Morton  claims  to  call  this  a  static  induced  current  similar  to  the 
Faradic  ;  but  this  is  purely  fanciful.  The  Faradic  is  a  to-and-fro  cur- 
rent, but  this  is  a  one-way  current  like  the  primary,  and  it  does  not 
differ  from  a  sparking  current  taken  direct  from  the  knobs,  or  the 
currents  from  the  inside  to  the  outside  of  a  Leyden  jar.  It  is  simply 
a  Leyden-jar  current,  kept  up  by  a  continued  flow  of  electricity  from 
the  revolving  plates. 

When  the  jars  are  disconnected  we  can  take  the  sparking  current 
from  them,  and  when  they  are  connected  we  can  take  the  same  current 
from  the  knobs  above,  which  communicate  with  their  interior,  by  bring- 
ing an  electrode  near  the  patient,  who  holds  the  other.  The  current  is 
just  the  same,  differing  only  in  duration  and  in  the  fact  that  one  comes 
from  the  tinfoil  and  the  other  from  the  brass  rods  or  knobs.  It  adds 
nothing  to  our  resources,  and  Dr.  Morton's  pretended  discovery  of  a 
static  induced  current,  with  new  properties,  is  simply  a  misunderstand- 
ing of  very  plain  facts. 

We  may  take  the  static  current  with  an  even  flow  as  insensible  as  the 
galvanic,  by  close  contact  with  the  sources  or  electrodes,  or  we  may 
take  it  in  an  interrupted  manner,  so  as  to  give  delicate  spark  shocks 
or  very  violent  ones.  But  the  interrupted,  shocking  current  is  the 
same  wherever  we  obtain  it.  We  may  obtain  it  from  the  knobs  or 
from  the  jars.  If  the  jars  are  separated  and  we  connect  ourselves  to 
them,  we  get  a  shock  for  every  spark  passing  between  the  knobs,  for 
that  compels  a  similar  current  between  the  jars. 


CHAP.    XXIV.]  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  559 

If  the  knobs  arc  separated  widely  and  we  .connect  with  them,  while 
the  jars  are  but  slightly  separated,  the  spark  will  pass  between  the 
jars,  and  we  get  a  corresponding  current  as  a  shock  from  the  knobs. 
It  matters  not  whether  we  take  our  shocking  current  from  the  knobs 
or  the  jars,  but  it  is  important  that  the  spark  should  be  small  to  make 
the  shock  delicate.  Hence  the  interrupting  space  between  the  knobs 
or  between  the  jars,  where  the  spark  passes,  must  be  very  small  if 
we  would  escape  a  painful  shock.  We  approximate  the  knobs  very 
close  when  we  take  a  shock  from  the  jars,  and  we  approximate  the  jars 
very  close,  by  proper  connections,  when  wre  take  a  shock  from  the 
knobs.  An  eighth  of  an  inch  is  a  gap  wide  enough  to  give  strong 
shocks,  and  the  thickness  of  a  sheet  of  paper  is  a  sufficient  separa- 
tion to  produce  a  pleasant  broken  current.  When  either  the  upper 
(interior)  or  the  lower  (exterior)  current  is  broken  by  a  separation 
producing  sparks,  it  causes  a  broken  or  shocking  current  in  the  other 
connection,  which  the  patient  will  feel  if  the  connection  is  through 
him. 

We  may  get  our  shocking  current  in  another  way  ;  each  rod  charged 
with  a  positive  or  a  negative  condition  has  the  opposite  condition  on 
the  outside  of  its  jar.  Hence  we  may  get  a  Leyden-jar  current  simul- 
taneously on  each  jar  between  the  jars  and  the  knobs,  and  treat  two 
patients  at  once  with  them.  My  new  static  apparatus  is  arranged 
to  demonstrate  and  use  these  two  currents  at  once,  and  also  to  com- 
bine them  with  magnetism. 

But  it  is  possible  also  to  duplicate  in  another  manner  —  to  treat 
one  patient  with  the  current  of  the  jars  in  shocking  fashion  and  at  the 
same  time  treat  another  with  gentle  shocks  from  the  sparks  of  the 
knobs,  if  we  arrange  rightly,  which  would  be  duplicating  the  jar  current 
which  Dr.  Morton  thinks  so  important. 

We  could  not,  however,  obtain  the  second  shocking  current  direct 
from  the  knobs,  as  contact  with  them  would  cause  a  smooth  flow.  An 
interruption  of  the  current  would  be  necessary,  which  should  be  pro- 
cured at  the  contact  with  the  patient,  as  when  the  negative  electrode 
is  approached  to  the  positively  charged  subject  or  when  the  fingers 
approximate  the  positive  and  negative  knobs.  But  it  is  obtained 
direct  from  the  knobs  in  my  new  apparatus. 

Thus  we  understand  the  static  machine  may  give  two  shocking 
currents  simultaneously  —  either  one  from  each  jar  in  connection  with 
its  knob,  or  one  from  the  jars  and  one  from  the  knobs,  and  these 
shocking  currents  may  be  converted  into  smooth,  continuous  currents 
by  firm  contact.  Thus  two  patients  may  be  treated  at  once  by  either 
style  of  current,  or  with  a  machine  of  sufficient  power  several  patients 
joining  their  hands  may  be  treated  as  one. 


560  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.     [CHAP.  XXIV. 

The  explanation  of  these  things  has  been  either  neglected  or  un- 
known by  the  authors  of  our  text-books,  and  machines  have  been  con- 
structed generally  with  the  jars  connected  by  brass  and  arranged  with 
a  view  to  one  current  only. 

METHODS    OF    USING    STATIC    ELECTRICITY. 

Treatment  by  static  electricity  is  more  simple  than  by  other 
methods.  Insulation  and  saturation  is  a  leading  measure.  The 
patient  is  brought  into  connection  with  the  positive  or  negative  elec- 
trode (I  prefer  the  positive),  and  the  other  electrode  is  used  to  com- 
plete the  circuit,  by  holding  it  near  enough  to  the  body  to  procure 
a  passage  of  the  current. 

Without  making  a  current,  however,  we  get  the  benefit  of  static 
electricity  from  one  pole,  in  contact  with  which  the  patient  becomes 
charged  —  his  surface  fully  covered,  and  his  hair  more  or  less  erected, 
if  the  charge  be  sufficient.  To  produce  this  result  readily  the  patient 
should  be  insulated,  to  prevent  the  escape  of  the  electricity  and  per- 
mit its  accumulation.  He  may  have  his  chair  or  stool  placed  on 
rubber  cloth,  or  on  a  varnished  wooden  platform,  resting  on  glass  legs, 
and  the  conducting  cord  may  be  attached  to  the  platform  or  may  be 
held  in  his  hand.  The  absurdity  of  using  a  brass  chain  or  a  cord 
wrapped  with  textile  material,  neither  of  which  is  capable  of  holding 
the  electricity,  seems  to  be  still  in  fashion  (I  suppose  for  want  of 
thought),  and  these  conductors  require  a  long  handle  to  manipulate 
them  and  keep  them  off  the  patient.  An  insulated  copper  or  steel 
wire  is  the  proper  conductor,  which  may  be  freely  handled  without 
the  least  escape  of  electricity.  The  steel  wire  admits  of  the  conven- 
ience of  an  elastic  extensible  coil.  Insulation  is  favored  by  a  dry 
atmosphere  and  a  dry  skin  in  the  subject.  We  should  avoid  having 
anything  pointed  about  the  patient  or  his  seat,  as  points  discharge 
electricity  with  greater  freedom  than  flat  surfaces.  Silk  and  woollen 
clothing  assist  the  insulation. 

To  insulate  and  charge  the  patient  with  positive  electricity  gives 
him  a  general  stimulus,  to  promote  the  operations  of  life,  as  the  entire 
surface  of  the  body  is  under  electric  stimulation,  and  this  produces  by 
sympathy  a  general  stimulation  of  the  brain  and  exaltation  of  the 
vital  powers,  while  it  also  stimulates  the  body  directly,  for  we  find  on 
the  surface  of  the  body  the  corresponding  seats  of  all  the  physiologi- 
cal and  psychic  powers,  parallel  with  those  of  the  brain.  Such  being 
the  case,  we  naturally  infer  that  universal  superficial  stimulation 
approximates  the  character  of  a  panacea  —  a  remedy  of  universal 
value.  But  its  character  as  a  panacea  is  not  complete,  because  its 
action  is  superficial  on  brain  and  body. 


CHAP.  XXIV.]     ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC  APPARATUS.  56 1 

What,  then,  shall  we  add  to  complete  its  power  by  acting  on  the 
interior  structure  of  body  and  brain  ?  Shall  we  use  the  galvanic  or 
the  Faradic  current  which  penetrates  deeply  ?  This  would  indeed  be 
a  valuable  combination  —  either  to  use  the  currents  simultaneously, 
by  uniting  the  wires  in  an  electrode,  or  to  use  one  after  the  other. 

I  would  recommend  the  combination  of  static  currents  with  either 
of  the  three  dynamic  currents,  galvanic,  primary  and  secondary,  as  the 
case  may  require,  and  I  think  I  see  in  these  combinations  a  new 
world  of  therapeutic  utility.  I  refer  not  merely  to  insulation,  but  to 
the  positive  and  negative  currents  of  static  electricity  in  combination 
with  the  three  dynamic  currents.  I  trust  the  medical  profession  will 
take  this  up,  which  I  can  only  mention  at  present,  and  enjoy  the 
benefit  of  these  suggestions. 

My  attention,  however,  has  been  more  especially  given  to  the  im- 
portance of  providing  an  interior  tonic  element  —  an  element  to  sus- 
tain organic  life,  which,  added  to  the  stimulating  power  of  the  static 
current,  makes  a  complete  vital  development. 

This  tonic  and  soothing  organic  influence,  which  fortifies  against 
the  waste  of  high  stimulation,  I  find  in  magnetism,  an  element  some- 
what opposite  to  dynamic  electricity  —  soothing  instead  of  irritating, 
cooling  rather  than  heating,  and  constructive  instead  of  destructive. 
Magnetism  and  heat  are  antagonistic.  Magnetism  is  entirely  de- 
stroyed in  a  magnet  at  the  temperature  of  770  degrees,  as  stated  in 
the  French  Academy. 

Its  influence  corresponds  with  that  of  the  tonic  and  conservative 
region  of  the  brain,  above  and  behind  the  ears,  while  the  influence  of 
dynamic  electricity  is  almost  entirely  basilar. 

By  combining  magnetism  with  static  electricity,  1  propose  to  fortify 
as  well  as  stimulate ;  and  by  combining  it  with  dynamic  electricity,  I 
propose  to  give  the  latter  a  more  soothing  and  wholesome  influence, 
greatly  increasing  its  hygienic  power  and  the  tolerance  of  the  consti- 
tution for  its  use. 

The  static  currents.  —  From  each  pole  of  the  static  machine  a 
wire  and  a  proper  electrode  give  us  a  current  which  we  may  use  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  positive  and  negative  electrodes  of  dynamic 
electricity,  with  this  difference,  that  static  electrodes  do  not  require 
to  touch  the  skin,  but  may  be  applied  all  over  the  body  by  holding  one 
or  more  inches  from  the  surface,  or  in  contact  with  the  clothing. 

If  the  electrodes  are  in  contact  with  the  skin,  the  currents  pass 
almost  insensibly,  as  from  galvanism.  If  the  patient  is  holding  the 
positive  electrode,  the  negative  being  approached  to  his  person 
and  presented  as  a  point  or  small  surface,  it  will  draw  a  current  from 
the  part  which  it  approaches,  giving  a  slight  and  pleasant  sensation  ; 


562  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC    APPARATUS.  [CHAP.    XXIV. 

but  if  the  electrode  be  not  pointed,  it  may  draw  a  spark,  whenever 
the  electro-motive  force  is  sufficient.  Fine  sparks  drawn  by  contact 
with  the  clothing  are  not  objectionable,  but  a  spark  of  any  length 
makes  a  sharper  impression  than  is  desirable. 

By  this  method  we  may  give  a  stimulating  impression  to  any  or 
every  region  of  the  body,  with  a  better  effect  than  by  the  negative 
pole  of  galvanic  or  primary  currents.  With  an  adequate  knowledge 
of  Sarcognomy  and  the  laws  of  therapautic  treatment  we  have  a  sim- 
ple and  satisfactory  method  in  the  use  of  the  static  negative  pole. 

When  I  see  how  charmingly  all  the  faculties  of  the  sensitive  con- 
stitution, including  all  the  powers  of  the  brain,  respond  to  this  treat- 
ment, I  am  ready  to  place  it  in  the  very  front  rank  of  therapeutic 
agencies. 

It  is  not  indispensable  that  the  electrode,  which  acts  as  a  negative, 
should  be  connected  to  the  negative  pole  of  the  machine,  for  if  the 
patient  is  well  charged  his  electricity  will  pass  off  to  conductors 
which  are  not  really  negative.  One  electrode  may  be  connected  to 
the  earth,  and  the  most  convenient  method  is  to  fasten  it  to  the  iron 
gas  or  water  pipes  —  and  even  without  such  a  connection  the 
hand  of  the  operator  may  withdraw  a  spark,  when  the  patient  is  well 
charged. 

Dynamic  electricity  can  sustain  the  action  of  two  poles  when  not 
directly  connected  to  each  other,  by  connecting  with  the  earth,  through 
which  they  communicate  as  readily  as  if  connected  by  a  wire  —  a  fact 
difficult  to  explain.  But  static  electricity  has  so  much  more  ener- 
getic diffusiveness  that  not  even  an  earth  connection  is  necessary  ; 
the  connection  occurs  through  almost  any  surroundings. 

P.  S.  —  In  reviewing  this  chapter,  I  would  refer  again  to  the  marked  difference  be- 
tween the  measurable  galvanism  and  the  dynamism  of  induction  which  has  not 
been  measured,  but  which  is  realized  in  its  effects  on  the  human  constitution.  I 
have  suggested  the  union  of  this  dvnamism  by  a  coil  with  galvanic  currents,  as  pro- 
ducing a  more  pleasant  and  efficient  continuous  current,  which  I  hope  to  introduce 
into  general  use.  In  urging  its  adoption  I  have  admitted  (through  courtesy)  the 
common  theory  that  the  multiplication  of  cells  produces  only  an  increase  of  electro- 
motive force,  and  no  increase  of  galvanism;  but- 1  must  now  state  my  individual  opin- 
ion that  an  increased  number  of  cells  increases  the  volume  of  galvanism,  as  well  as 
the  electro-motive  force,  and  that  the  gain  of  electro-motive  force  in  using  a  coil  is 
essentially  different  from  the  gain  by  multiplication  of  cells,  and  is  for  therapeutic 
purposes  preferable — in  other  words,  coil  dynamism  and  galvanism  are  essentially 
distinct,  and  the  physiological  energy  of  coil  dynamism  has  not  been  subjected  to 
mechanical  measurement. 

As  to  the  efficiency  of  batteries  or  currents,  some  of  my  remarks  might  mislead 
the  reader,  unless  he  bears  in  mind  that  the  efficiency  of  batteries  or  currents  de- 
pends more  on  their  connection  with  the  body  than  their  magnitude.  A  metallic  elec- 
trode plate  six  inches  square,  with  a  saturated  solution  of  salt  or  muriate  of  ammonia 
on  the  skin,  will  be  a  hundred  times  as  efficient  as  a  small  electrode  with  merely  a 
moist  connection,  and  will  therefore  make  a  small  battery  efficient.  It  is  especially 
important  that  the  negative  electrode  should  be  large. 


CHAPTER    XXV. 

ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS    GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY. 

Electric  currents  and  batteries  —  Treatment  of  Head  and  nervous  system,  direc- 
tions of  authors  —  Paralysis —  Cerebral  disorders  and  their  treatment —  Chorea  and 
spasm  —  Neuralgia  —  Treatment  of  eyes — Diphtheria  —  Toothache  —  Hydropho- 
bia—  Treatment  of  Thorax — Pneumonia — Asphyxia  —  Consumption —  Pleu- 
risy—  Diseases  of  the  heart  —  Aneurism  —  The  diaphragm  — Hiccough  —  Treat- 
ment of  the  Abdominal  Region — Fevers —  The  stomach  — Nausea  and  vomiting 
—  Cholera  —  Constipation  and  hernia — Dropsy  —  Rectal  diseases  —  The  liver- 
Electric  development —  Treatment  of  Pelvic  Organs  —  amenorrhea,  dysmenor- 
rhea, menorrhagia  and  parturition  —  Hemorrhoids — Stricture  of  the  urethra  — 
Impotence  and  spermatorrhoea  —  Diseases  of  the  skin — Treatment  of  limbs  —  Use 
of  apparatus  —  Batteries  —  Static  apparatus  —  Electro-puncture  —  Cauterization. 


The  object  of  this  chapter  will  be  to  present  in  a  condensed  form 
the  methods  of  treating  diseases  generally  by  electric  agencies.  The 
pathological  record  may  not  be  complete,  but  the  methods  presented 
will  probably  be  sufficient  to  guide  the  reader  in  the  treatment  of 
any  other  forms  of  disease. 

Before  presenting  the  special  treatments  of  organs,  a  few  remarks 
are  necessary  to  give  clear  ideas  of  currents  and  resistances  in  the 
human  body,  which  are  usually  left  in  a  vague  condition  in  the  mind 
of  the  student.  This  question  refers  entirely  to  galvanism,  for  static 
and  electro-magnetic  currents  are  not  subject  to  milliampere  meas- 
urement. 

The  cursory  and  inaccurate  remarks  of  the  last  chapter  were  based 
upon  the  ordinary  incidents  of  electric  application,  in  which  every- 
thing depends  upon  the  mode  of  application  of  the  currents. 
A  dry  skin  may  make  a  resistance  of  100,000  or  150,000  ohms,  reduc- 
ing the  current  of  a  powerful  battery  to  insignificance,  while  a  moist 
connection  with  a  saline  solution  may  reduce  it  to  one  or  two  thousand 
ohms.  Whether  accidental  contact  with  electric  light  or  motor  wires 
in  the  line  of  their  connection  shall  be  dangerous  or  not,  depends 
much  on  the  condition  of  the  skin.  The  resistance  of  17,000  ohms 
which  I  found  between  the  hand  and  foot  was  obtained  with  the  com- 
mon wet  connection  through  the  best  apparatus  of  Sir  W.  Thompson, 
but  in  an  experiment  with  metal  electrodes,  the  hand  and  foot  well 
wet  with  muriate  of  ammonia  solution,  the  resistance  indicated  was 
but  6,000  ohms.     With  metal  electrodes,  a  current  from  foot  to  foot, 


564  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

moist,  indicated  a  resistance  of  22,500  ohms,  but  when  thoroughly 
soaked  only  9,000,  and  with  muriate  of  ammonia  solution  instead  of 
water  4,800.  With  the  same  solution  a  current  from  summit  of  thigh 
to  foot  indicated  but  2,621  ohms,  and  from  hand  to  foot  but  3,375. 

Water  is  necessary  to  soften  the  skin  and  permit  the  entrance  of  a 
current,  but  is  not  itself  a  good  conductor.  Indeed,  pure  water  has 
been  pronounced  a  non-conductor,  but  the  water  in  common  use  has 
enough  saline  matter  and  impurities  to  make  it  a  conductor,  especially 
such  as  comes  from  the  water-works  of  Boston,  and  the  saline  materials 
always  present  on  the  skin  give  a  degree  of  conductivity.  The  resist- 
ance between  the  left  foot  and  right  hand,  wet,  I  found  equal  to  that 
of  six  inches  of  Boston  water.  A  single  inch  of  Boston  water  made 
as  much  resistance  as  appeared  in  a  current  between  the  foot  and 
summit  of  thigh,  well  wet  with  muriate  of  ammonia. 

In  administering  currents  we  should  keep  a  saturated  solution  of 
salt  or  muriate  of  ammonia  to  use  in  making  them  effective,  and  pure 
water  and  sponges  to  moderate  their  action.  The  estimate  that  one 
galvanic  cell  would  be  required  for  every  inch  of  the  circuit  in  the 
body,  to  make  an  effective  current,  is  applicable  only  to  the  common, 
'mperfect  connections.  When  we  use  saturated  saline  solutions  the 
entire  length  from  hand  to  foot  may  be  estimated  as  offering  a  resist- 
ance of  not  more  than  75  ohms  to  the  inch,  through  which  an  efficient 
cell  would  send  twenty  milliamperes  —  much  too  large  a  current  for 
ordinary  practice  ;  hence  one  cell  for  every  two  inches  of  current 
would  be  ample,  with  saline  connections,  and  forty  cells  would  send  a 
very  efficient  current  from  hand  to  foot,  while  twenty  cells  would  be 
quite  sufficient  in  ordinary  practice.  Larger  batteries,  however,  are 
used,  with  a  rheostat  or  current  regulator,  so  that  the  full  power  of 
.he  battery  is  never  used,  and  consequently  it  is  always  in  order  and 
more  durable. 

But  I  do  not  admit  the  necessity  of  these  large  batteries  for  the 
general  practitioner,  when  a  few  cells  reinforced  by  a  coil  will  produce 
as  atisfactory  current  of  combined  galvanic  and  electro-motive  force,  — 
the  latter  giving  the  penetrative  power,  which  is  sufficient  to  affect 
all  parts  of  the  body.  This  power,  though  not  measurable  by  the 
metre,  can  be  appreciated  readily  by  its  vital  influence. 

TREATMENT  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

The  treatment  of  the  brain  by  electricity  is  necessarily  a  sort  of 
terra  incoguita>  and  authors  have  but  little  to  say  on  the  subject,  as 
experience  has  shown  that  in  applying  galvanic  currents  to  the  head 
it  is  sometimes  greatly  disturbed,  leaving  feelings  of  oppression,  dul- 
nesSj  faintness,  mental  confusion,  nausea,  vomiting,  convulsions  and 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  56$ 

paralysis.     Warned  by  this  experience  they  avoid  heroic  treatment 
and  proceed  cautiously  with  one  or  two  cells  gradually  increased. 

One  of  the  most  respectable  works  (Haynes)  gives  the  present  state 
of  knowledge  on  this  subject  as  follows  :  "There  are  several  ways  in 
which  electrization  of  the  brain  may  be  performed,  i.  Place  one 
pole  on  the  forehead  and  the  other  on  the  back  of  the  head  (occiput). 


564  » 

Erratum. — On  page  564  —  23d  line  from  the  top  —  for  the  word  ''cell"  sub- 
stitute—  battery  —  to  read  :   ';  an  efficient  battery  would  send  twenty  milliamperes." 

That  such  a  battery  is  not  necessary  I  have  shown  by  the  successful  use  of  a  six- 
cell  galvano-magnetic  battery  which  is  quite  portable. 

I  take  this  opportunity  to  reinforce  my  caution  against  the  influence  of  the 
negative  pole.  To  give  the  patient  the  benefit  of  electricity  of  any  species,  there 
should  be  a  resistance  on  the  negative  side  at  least  equal  to  the  resistance  of  the 
current  through  his  body,  unless  we  desire  the  special  effects  of  the  negative  pole. 
This  resistance  must  be  effectual.  An  electrode  with  40  ohms  resistance  produced 
scarcely  an  appreciable  difference. 

With  static  electricity,  the  proper  condition  is  observed  when  the  negative  pole  is 
held  several  inches  from  the  body,  but  even  then,  if  it  presents  many  fine  points,  it 
would  attract  too  rapidly,  and  extend  an  injurious  influence.  I  have  such  an  elec- 
trode which  at  the  negative  pole  has  a  debilitating  effect. 

The  administration  of  the  positive  current  through  the  body  of  the  operator  would 
be  beneficial  with  a  resistance  at  least  equal  on  the  negative  side,  but  without  that 
resistance  would  be  injurious,  as  the  patient  would  be  kept  in  the  negative  condi- 
tion. These  principles  have  been  overlooked  by  authors,  and  it  was  for  want  of  this 
knowledge  that  injurious  effects  were  produced  in  pneumonia  and  that  many 
electro-therapeutic  treatments  prove  unsatisfactory  or  injurious. 


regulated  by  commutation. 

"The  large  electrode  on  the  top  of  the  head,"  if  negative,  may 
stimulate  the  brain  —  if  positive,  may  relieve  its  congested  and  heated 
conditions  by  a  downward  current.  But  it  is  seldom  that  a  positive 
pole  on  the  top  of  the  head  is  allowable,  for  it  would  not  require  long 
to  depress  our  most  sanative  energies.  Hyperaemia  may  be  better 
relieved  with  the  positive  pole  at  the  base  of  the  brain,  especially  the 
under-jaw  region,  to  send   a  downward  current.     The  current  to  the 


564  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

moist,  indicated  a  resistance  of  22,500  ohms,  but  when  thoroughly 
soaked  only  9,000,  and  with  muriate  of  ammonia  solution  instead  of 
water  4,800.  With  the  same  solution  a  current  from  summit  of  thigh 
to  foot  indicated  but  2,621  ohms,  and  from  hand  to  foot  but  3,375. 

Water  is  necessary  to  soften  the  skin  and  permit  the  entrance  of  a 
current,  but  is  not  itself  a  good  conductor.  Indeed,  pure  water  has 
been  pronounced  a  non-conductor,  but  the  water  in  common  use  has 


TREATMENT  OF  THE  HEAD  AND  NERVOUS  SYSTEM. 

The  treatment  of  the  brain  by  electricity  is  necessarily  a  sort  of 
terra  incognita,  and  authors  have  but  little  to  say  on  the  subject,  as 
experience  has  shown  that  in  applying  galvanic  currents  to  the  head 
it  is  sometimes  greatly  disturbed,  leaving  feelings  of  oppression,  dul- 
ness,  faintness,  mental  confusion,  nausea,  vomiting,  convulsions  and 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  565 

paralysis.     Warned  by  this  experience  they  avoid  heroic  treatment 
and  proceed  cautiously  with  one  or  two  cells  gradually  increased. 

One  of  the  most  respectable  works  (Haynes)  gives  the  present  state 
of  knowledge  on  this  subject  as  follows  :  "  There  are  several  ways  in 
which  electrization  of  the  brain  may  be  performed.  I.  Place  one 
pole  on  the  forehead  and  the  other  on  the  back  of  the  head  (occiput). 
2.  Place  one  pole  over  each  temple.  3.  Place  one  pole  behind  each 
ear  (on  mastoid  process).  4.  One  very  large  electrode  on  the  top  of 
the  head  and  another  at  the  feet,  in  the  hands,  along  the  spine  or 
under  the  chin.  5.  To  electrize  one-half  of  the  brain,  place  one  pole 
on  the  eyebrows  and  the  other  on  the  mastoid  process  or  in  the  hand 
of  the  same  side.  Less  dizziness  is  caused  when  the  current  passes 
through  one  side  of  the  head  only,  or  from  the  forehead  to  the  occi- 
put, than  when  sent  from  one  side  to  the  other  through  the  temples 
or  mastoid  processes." 

This  is  a  very  meagre  statement  to  one  who  knows  that  by  proper 
currents  through  the  head  we  may  stimulate  in  detail  every  psychic 
faculty  and  every  physiological  power.  But  let  us  review  it :  Currents 
from  the  forehead  to  the  occiput  produce  a  great  variety  of  tonic  and 
stimulant  effects  —  more  healthful  and  harmonious  as  we  approach 
the  upper  region,  more  hard  and  forcible  as  we  descend. 

"One  pole  over  each  temple"  is  an  objectionable  proceeding  with 
galvanic  currents,  but  legitimate  with  Faradic  or  alternating  treatment. 

The  galvanic  current  should  not  be  applied  to  the  brain  with- 
out understanding  its  organology  and  realizing  what  we  are  stimu- 
lating and  what  we  are  suppressing.  The  Faradic  and  alternating 
currents  applied  symmetrically  on  the  right  and  left  sides,  or  antero- 
posteriorly  on  correlative  organs  (as  when  we  combine  the  lower  occi- 
put {gyrus  angularis)  with  the  perceptive  organs  of  the  brow),  give 
a  proper  normal  stimulus  if  the  currents  are  sufficiently  gentle,  which 
generally  requires  an  effective  rheostat.  The  static  is  the  proper 
current  for  the  head,  with  or  without  contact. 

To  "  place  one  pole  behind  each  ear  on  the  mastoid  process,"  of 
the  Faradic  or  static  current,  gives  a  general  stimulation  of  the  vital 
forces  and  muscular  energies.  The  galvanic  would  be  improper,  unless 
regulated  by  commutation. 

"The  large  electrode  on  the  top  of  the  head,"  if  negative,  may 
stimulate  the  brain  —  if  positive,  may  relieve  its  congested  and  heated 
conditions  by  a  downward  current.  But  it  is  seldom  that  a  positive 
pole  on  the  top  of  the  head  is  allowable,  for  it  would  not  require  long 
to  depress  our  most  sanative  energies.  Hyperaemia  may  be  better 
relieved  with  the  positive  pole  at  the  base  of  the  brain,  especially  the 
under-jaw  region,  to  send   a  downward  current.     The  current  to  the 


566  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

hands  may  relieve  an  oppressed  brain  —  to  the  feet,  it  would  be  still 
more  effective,  if  not  carried  too  far.  Applying-  the  negative  pole 
under  the  chin  would  be  heating  —  under  the  jaw,  exciting  and 
disturbing.  That  is  a  location  for  the  positive  instead  of  the  negative 
pole. 

The  current  from  the  brow  to  the  mastoid  process  is  stimulating 
to  the  physical  forces,  but  not  so  beneficial  as  when  directed  to  the 
upper  part  of  the  occiput. 

The  directions  of  authors  as  to  cerebral  treatment  are  vague  and 
chaotic,  from  their  entire  ignorance  of  local  functions,  and  it  is  unnec- 
essary to  review  them  ;  but  I  would  mention  that  the  dispersive 
power  of  galvanism  applied  to  the  base  of  the  brain  has  been  success- 
fully used  to  remove  morbid  conditions  by  Althaus  of  London  and 
by  Hughes  of  St.  Louis. 

The  profession  has  not  entirely  succeeded  in  ignoring  the  excite- 
ment of  the  cerebral  organs  in  man  by  electricity.  One  solitary  fact 
has  been  reported.  It  is  stated  by  Haynes  as  follows :  "Helmholtz 
made  a  real  advance  in  electro-physiology.  He  observed  that  the 
descending  current  (the  positive  electrode  on  the  forehead  and  the 
negative  held  in  the  hand)  produces  not  only  irritation,  but  alteration 
of  excitability,  external  objects  becoming  less  distinct.  The  effect  of 
the  ascending  current  (the  positive  electrode  in  the  hand  and  the  neg- 
ative to  the  forehead)  is  to  render  objects  more  distinct."  This  is  a 
distinct  discovery  of  the  stimulation  and  suppression  of  the  intellectual 
organs  by  negative  and  positive  currents  applied  to  them  ;  but,  plain 
as  the  facts  are,  the  medical  man  forgets  that  there  are  organs  in  the 
brain,  and  ascribes  it  all  to  the  ascending  and  descending  direction  of 
the  currents.  Scientists  are  not  always  sufficiently  vigilant  to  per- 
ceive phenomena  for  which  they  are  not  looking. 

A  careful  diagnosis  should  precede  electric  treatment.  When  the 
operator  is  not  guided  by  Psychometry  he  should  use  electricity  for 
exploration.  The  negative  pole  of  a  Faradic  current  should  have  its 
electrode  fastened  on  the  operator's  wrist,  while  he  goes  over  the 
entire  person,  pressing  his  finger  upon  every  part  to  be  explored. 
The  patient  may  hold  the  positive  pole  in  his  hand  or  upon  the  hypo- 
chondria, or  it  may  follow  the  negative,  so  as  to  send  a  current  in  a 
short  course  through  the  part  to  be  explored,  as  the  impression  is 
stronger  the  nearer  the  electrodes  approach.  Every  part  in  an  inflam- 
matory or  actively  morbid  and  sensitive  state  will  show  by  pain  or  sen- 
sitiveness that  it  is  not  normal,  but  parts  in  a  very  torpid,  inactive 
state  will  show  less  than  the  normal  sensibility.  As  we  can  pene- 
trate and  reach  all  parts  of  the  body  in  this  way,  it  leads  to  a  correct 
diagnosis. 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  56/ 

In  cases  of  paralysis  we  wish  to  learn  if  it  belongs  to  the  brain  or 
to  the  spine  and  nerves.  If  the  brain  is  the  seat,  it  will  probably 
appear  as  hemiplegia,  being  conspicuous  only  on  one  side,  and  the 
muscles  of  that  side  will  be  as  excitable  as  ever  by  electricity  — 
sometimes  more  so.  If  it  be  seated  in  the  spine,  also,  muscular  irrita- 
blity  will  continue  ;  but  if  in  the  nerves,  there  will  be  a  great 
loss  of  excitability  to  Faradism,  while  the  muscles  may  respond 
actively  to  the  galvanic  current  and  our  prognosis  will  be  more  favor- 
able. In  such  cases  a  few  months  are  generally  required  for  recovery, 
but  of  course  there  are  some  speedy  cures. 

In  treating  over  the  bodv  it  is  convenient  to  compare  any  spot  on 
one  side  with  the  corresponding  spot  on  the  other  side.  All  changes 
in  sensibility  and  contractility  are  important.  When  the  swelled  or 
congested  condition  has  a  basis  of  inflammation  there  is  great  tender, 
ness  to  the  current.  When  it  is  the  stagnant  result  of  former 
disease,  as  in  a  congested  spleen,  there  is  great  dulness  or  but  little 
feeling.     A  similar  condition  may  exist  in  the  liver. 

When  the  spine  is  sensitive,  the  effect  of  its  irritations  is  felt  at  a 
distance,  and  a  metalic  taste  may  be  produced  by  the  current,  which 
is  not  usual  when  the  part  is  below  the  head. 

Faradic  electricity  furnishes  the  best  diagnosis  of  death.  Rosen- 
thal reports  the  apparent  death  of  a  woman,  pronounced  dead  by  a 
country  doctor,  and  lying  in  that  condition,  pulseless,  for  thirty-two 
hours,  in  whom  he  found  the  muscles  of  the  face  and  limbs  to 
respond  to  the  Faradic  current,  and  recommended  resuscitation,  which 
was  successful  in  twelve  hours.  She  was,  though  motionless,  capable 
of  hearing  the  talk  of  those  around  her.  Some  contractility  sur- 
vives death,  but  it  rapidly  declines,  never  lasting  longer  than  two  or 
three  hours.  It  persists  longer  in  well-nourished  bodies,  and  in 
those  dying  of  acute  disease,  than  in  those  exhausted  by  chronic 
diseases. 

Cerebral  disorders  are  generally  associated  with  the  predominant 
influence  of  a  position  on  the  back  of  the  neck  (at  the  upper  cervical 
vertebrae)  related  to  the  basis  of  the  brain,  and  corresponding  with  the 
sacrum,  feet  and  legs.  Consequently  a  current  from  that  locality  to 
the  middle  of  the  shoulder  is  restorative  in  almost  every  case.  If  there 
are  hyperemia  and  heat  in  the  head  a  current  to  below  the  knee  would 
be  proper.  The  most  soothing  current  in  such  a  case  is  to  the  tibial 
region  and  top  of  the  foot. 

If  the  brain  be  in  a  dull,  depressed,  inactive  condition,  the  proper 
current  should  be  directed  to  the  part  of  the  temporal  arch  marked 
Sanity  and  Cheerfulness,  and  extending  through  Health  to  the  loca- 
tion of  Power  on  the  median  line  (posterior  end  of  Firmness),  any 


56S  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

portion  of  which  tract  will  produce  a  renovating,  invigorating  effect. 
The  positive  in  this  case  may  be  held  in  the  hand,  but  it  is  better  to 
apply  it  to  the  hypochondria  or  the  groin,  or,  in  cases  of  extreme  dul- 
ness,  to  the  foot. 

Very  gentle  currents  by  broad  carbon  or  sponge  electrodes  or  the 
point  of  a  static  electrode,  from  the  front  of  the  head  to  the  upper 
occpiut,  are  generally  beneficial,  especially  from  the  locations  marked 
Disease  and  Insanity  —  also  from  the  space  in  front  of  the  upper  half 
of  the  ear,  which  is  analogous  to  the  under-jaw  region. 

With  dynamic  electricity,  the  scalp  should  be  exposed  as  much  as 
possible  and  the  surface  wet ;  with  static  electricity,  contact  is  not 
necessary,  with  a  strong  current.  With  a  weak  current  (introduced 
by  the  positive  as  before)  the  negative  may  be  applied  upon  the 
organs ;  with  a  stronger  current  it  may  be  held  over  the  organs  we 
would  excite,  and  as  the  hair  rises  to  meet  it  we  are  assured  the  cur- 
rent is  passing.  It  is  not  desirable  to  draw  sparks  from  the  head  or 
any  sensitive  locality.  The  steady,  silent  current  is  the  most  whole- 
some, and  is  best  developed  by  an  electrode  with  numerous  fine 
points  like  a  hairbrush,  or  by  contact  with  the  skin. 

The  treatment  of  the  head  by  static  electricity  may  be  made  a  very 
important  adjunct  to  ethical  culture,  and  education  generally.  It  is 
beautiful  to  observe  how  the  finer  sentiments  are  developed  and 
cultivated  in  the  sensitive  by  the  static  negative  pole  held  over  the 
head. 

Next  to  the  static  I  would  recommend  the  galvanic  current  for 
the  head,  but  that  requires  much  greater  caution  in  its  use.  One  to 
five  cells  would  be  sufficient  for  its  treatment,  but  each  case  must  be 
a  law  for  itself.  Two  cells  are  as  much  to  the  very  sensitive  as  twenty 
to  the  insensible.  In  speaking  of  galvanic  cells  I  refer  to  those  con- 
taining muriate  of  ammonia.  The  sulphuric  acid  and  bichromate 
cells  are  not  commendable  for  head  treatment. 

Insane  and  hysterical  conditions  require  a  gentle  current  from  the 
under-jaw  region  to  the  shoulder  and  axilla,  or  to  the  region  of  Sanity. 
In  hysteria,  the  current  may  be  from  the  chin  and  below  it  to  the 
spot  just  behind  and  below  Sanity,  and  on  the  body  from  the  region 
of  the  womb  and  groin  to  the  axilla,  and  also  to  the  lumbo-sacral 
region,  for  its  tonic  effect. 

Insanity  of  all  grades  requires  the  establishment  of  health  in  the 
pelvic  organs,  which  sometimes  requires  orificial  surgery. 

The  insane  condition  requires  currents  from  the  base  of  the  pelvis 
—  perineum  and  sacrum — to  the  axilla  and  shoulder.  Hence  the 
patient  .should  sit  on  the  positive  electrode,  a  large  sponge,  which 
should  be  charged  with  the  remedies  appropriate  to  the  case.     Of 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  569 

course  chronic  cases  require  very  prolonged  treatment.  A  carbon 
electrode  wrapped  in  moist  cotton  would  also  be  appropriate.  When 
the  brain  is  lacking  in  vigor  from  the  deficiency  of  spirit  and  animal 
force,  currents  may  be  passed  from  the  side  of  the  face  to  all  parts  of 
the  occiput,  as  well  as  from  the  front  of  the  body  to  the  shoulders 
and  thighs  and  entire  posterior  half  of  the  body. 

In  all  unsound  conditions  of  the  brain  great  attention  should  be 
paid  to  restoring  everything  in  the  pelvic  region,  and  also  in  the  region 
of  the  liver  and  hypochondria,  which  has  a  coinciding  relation  with 
the  pelvic  organs,  and  is  tributary  to  unsoundness  by  the  gloomy, 
fretful  and  irritable  character  which  it  produces  when  irritated. 

This  unsound  tendency,  belonging  to  the  hepatic  zone  of  the  body, 
locates  also  in  the  anterior  part  of  the  third  or  basilar  temporal  con- 
volution, and  its  external  development  is  above  and  around  the  cavity 
of  the  ear.     The  antagonism  of  this  is  in  Firmness  and  Patience. 

Sound  mental  conditions  are  promoted  by  gentle  currents  to  the 
superior  posterior  quarter  of  the  head. 

In  inflammation  of  the  brain  we  may  proceed  as  in  other  local  in- 
flammations, with  the  dispersive  power  of  the  positive  pole,  passing 
currents  to  the  feet  and  legs  to  give  the  brain 
absolute  repose  and  relieve  its  congestion. 
These  currents,  as  a  general  rule,  should  be 
from  the  anterior  and  basilar  regions  rather 
than  the  superior  and  posterior,  but  of  course 
should  be  applied  to  the  seat  of  inflammation. 
But,  as  the  influences  below  the  knee  (sub- 
human) would  tend  to  lower  very  greatly  the 
normal  condition  and  sustaining  power  of  the 
brain,  they  should  give  way,  as  soon  as  the  active  inflammation  is 
subdued,  to  the  more  tonic  influences  on  the  body  at  the  locations  of 
Repose,  Coolness,  Sanity  and  Health,  —  influences  which  promote 
soundness  of  brain  and  develop  its  recuperative  power. 

The  currents  applied  to  the  brain  in  this  case  will  of  course  be 
greatly  aided  by  combining  with  the  proper  medicine  at  the  positive 
electrode,  and  by  combining  with  the  nervaura  of  the  operator  in 
passing  through  his  person.  This  of  course  requires  a  stronger  cur- 
rent, and  it  is  modified  to  great  gentleness  in  passing  through  the 
person.  To  balance  this  obstruction,  the  negative  electrode,  which 
may  be  a  foot-plate,  should  present  considerable  obstruction  in  the 
way  of  wet  cloth,  sponges,  or  water  ;  the  feet  being  in  a  tub  of  water. 
The  negative  influence  will  penetrate  too  far  unless  its  obstruction 
equals  the  positive. 

We  must   not,   however,  confound  with  inflammation  of  the  brain 


570  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

the  wild  excitability  of  delirium  tremens,  in  which  the  cerebral  circu- 
lation is  weak,  especially  in  its  upper  posterior  region,  and  a  current 
to  the  tonic  region  (from  Sanity  to  Power  inclusive)  will  be  soothing 
and  healthful.  The  currents  in  this  case  should  be  from  the  forehead, 
face,  temples  and  under-jaw  region,  upward  and  backward,  toward 
Patience,  Tranquillity  and  Repose. 

Similar  currents  should  be  applied  on  the  body,  from  the  perineum, 
groin  and  hypochondria,  upward. 

In  this  disease  the  morbid  irritability  of  the  nervous  system  is  due 
to  a  lack  of  the  soothing  influence  of  rich  blood  ;  for  nervous  irrita- 
bility increases  as  nourishment  declines,  and  the  globulous  and  albu- 
minous materials  of  the  blood  are  diminished.  It  is  essentially  due  to 
a  failure  of  the  digestive  organs,  as  well  as  to  the  exhaustion  of  the 
energies  of  the  brain  by  the  mischievous  over-stimulation  of  alcohol. 
Hence  it  is  important  to  give  the  brain  the  restorative  influence  of 
sleep,  and  equally  or  more  important  to  restore  the  digestive  process 
by  treatment  of  the  stomach.  This  has  been  proved  by  the  success 
of  large  doses  of  capsicum,  which  has  been  used  in  doses  of  twenty 
grains,  repeated  if  necessary,  with  immediate  curative  effects,  due  to 
the  stimulation  of  the  alimentary  canal.  Chloral  has  been  used  to 
procure  sleep  more  successfully  than  morphine,  and  sulfonal  or  coch- 
ineal would  answer  the  same  purpose  well.  Hence  we  see  that  re- 
ciprocal currents  (preferably  galvanic)  between  the  lower  dorsal 
region  and  the  regions  of  Assimilation  and  Alimentiveness  on  the  body 
would  be  appropriate,  followed  by  the  liberal  use  of  milk  and  other 
easily  digested  food,  aided  by  the  best  pepsin  compounds  to  facilitate 
digestion,  not  forgetting  the  stimulant  power  of  capsicum  and  the 
gastric  influence  of  alnus  rubra  with  a  little  angelica. 

Alternating  currents  between  Assimilation  and  Repose  would  be 
specially  appropriate,  and  currents  from  the  hypochondria  to  Health. 

There  are  many  fanciful,  misguided,  unpractical  people  who  need 
invigorating  currents  from  the  temples  and  cheeks  to  the  occiput. 
Under  the  influence  of  the  occipital  organs  they  would  take  different 
views  of  life. 

There  are  many  whose  languid  and  inefficient  life  requires  the 
stimulation  of  the  upper  occiput,  and  many  indeed  whose  morally  cold 
and  selfish  nature  requires  a  strong  stimulation  of  the  whole  upper  sur- 
face of  the  brain  by  static  or  galvanic  electricity  repeated  daily  for 
months,  which  would  improve  their  health  and  longevity  as  well  as 
their  virtues.  The  new  condition  should  be  maintained  by  treatment 
until  it  becomes  constitutional.  These  principles,  I  trust,  will  be 
amply  illustrated  hereafter  in  hospitals  and  reformatory  institutions. 

Great  improvement  of  brain  conditions  and  consecyent  elevation  and 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  571 

prolongation  of  life  may  be  produced  by  static  electricity,  accum- 
mulated  on  the  surface,  which  increases  the  vitality  of  the  brain  ;  and 
when  this  is  combined,  according  to  my  new  method,  with  mineral 
magnetism,  it  becomes  one  of  the  most  powerful  sanative  agencies 
known. 

In  the  treatment  of  the  brain,  a  gentle  application  of  the  negative 
pole,  with  very  mild  primary  or  galvanic  currents,  is  a  measure  of 
immense  value  in  the  hands  of  a  master  of  science.  Still  more  valua- 
ble is  the  negative  pole  of  static  electricity,  from  its  genial  character 
and  general  safety.  To  rouse  the  brain  to  strong,  healthy  action  is 
the  best  thing  we  can  do  for  a  patient,  and  this  is  to  be  done  by  a  neg- 
ative pole  somewhat  restricted  in  its  access,  for  when  the  positive  pole 
is  applied  to  the  body  and  the  negative  pole  has  free  access  to  the 
head,  the  entire  head  may  fall  under  a  too  decidedly  negative  influ- 
ence, which  should  be  quickly  discontinued. 

The  negative  treatment  of  the  upper  occipital  region  of  the  brain 
and  the  upper  posterior  region  of  the  body  are  very  beneficial  meas- 
ures. How  much  mischief  might  be  done  by  too  negative  and  too 
prolonged  a  treatment  I  cannot  say,  as  I  have  always  been  cautious. 

The  positive  pole  applied.to  the  head  and  the  negative  on  the  front 
of  the  body  is  not  a  safe  measure,  though  it  has  been  cried  up  under 
the  name  of  central  galvanization.  Dr.  Pitzer  describes  its  effects  cor- 
rectly when  he  says  :  "  If  it  does  no  good  it  is  likely  to  do  harm.  It 
lessens  the  quantity  of  blood  in  the  brain,  and  if  used  too  strong  or 
continued  too  long  dizziness  is  experienced,  and  if  still  further  con- 
tinued the  patient  becomes  unconscious  and  falls  from  the  chair  in 
a  condition  of  syncope,  and  vigorous  efforts,  with  the  application  of 
stimulants,  may  be  required  to  bring  about  a  reaction."  "With  the 
greatest  care  and  the  use  of  the  rheostat  some  patients  cannot  bear  cen- 
tral galvanization  long  at  a  time.  We  observe  the  face  growing  pale, 
and  the  patient  sighs  a  time  or  two,  or  expresses  feelings  of  weakness 
or  depression,  and  we  are  forced  to  desist.  One  or  two  minutes  is 
as  long  as  we  can  use  it  in  such  cases  ;  in  others  it  will  be  well  borne 
for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes."  This  indicates  that  they  have  strong 
constitutions  —  no  sensitive  constitution  could  bear  it  well.  This 
description  shows  just  what  Sarcognomy  indicates.  The  method  was 
very  unsuccessful  in  the  hands  of  Althaus. 

All  treatments  applied  exclusively  to  the  front  of  the  body  and  face 
are  objectionable;  and  the  use  of  the  negative  pole  in  front  requires 
to  be  guarded  with  caution. 

It  is  true  that  a  gentle  and  brief  positive  influence  on  the  brain  may 
be  beneficial  when  it  is  in  a  state  of  over-excitement  and  vascular 
relaxation,  but  it  should  not  be  by  a  downward  current  to  the  stomach. 


572  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

The  currents  most  beneficial  will  be  from  the  forehead  and  face  to  the 
occiput ;  to  the  upper  occiput  generally,  but  to  the  lower  occiput 
and  base  of  cerebellum  when  we  wish  to  stimulate  the  physical  powers, 
and  from  the  under-jaw  region  to  the  upper  occiput  to  strengthen 
the  nervous  system.  A  great  deal  of  good  may  be  done  by  these  pos- 
terior superior  currents.  But  if  currents  are  to  be  sent  to  the  stom- 
ach, it  is  better  to  send  them  from  the  under-jaw  region  or  from  the 
lower  part  of  the  neck,  before  or  behind,  than  from  the  upper  surface 
of  the  brain,  —  a  region  which  should  never  be  under  depressing- 
influences. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  not  improper  to  apply  the  positive  pole  to 
the  head,  for  the  same  reason  that  we  might  apply  it  to  the  spine,  to 
relieve  local  irritation  or  hyperasmia.  Hence  there  are  cases  in  which, 
with  caution,  it  would  do  good.  One  who  understands  the  brain  would 
realize  the  locality  of  a  local  excitement,  needing  the  positive  pole. 

Dr.  Pitzer  speaks  of  relieving  cases  of  an  obscure  nature,  with  ner- 
vous distress,  melancholy  or  wakefulness,  by  central  galvanization. 
He  would  have  been  more  successful  by  using  upward  and  backward 
currents,  from  the  forehead,  the  side  of  the  face  and  the  under-jaw 
region,  toward  the  upper  occiput,  and  a  vigorous  treatment  across  the 
shoulders  or  between  the  epigastrium  and  spine. 

I  would  not  object  in  all  cases  to  a  moderate  current  to  the  epigas- 
trium, which  would  promote  the  action  of  the  stomach,  but  such  a 
current  should  not  be  from  the  top  of  the  head.  It  would  be  much 
better  from  the  lower  dorsal  region. 

The  treatment  of  the  brain  in  insanity  by  electricity  is  of  course  in 
a  perfectly  chaotic  state  in  the  medical  profession,  and  must  be  so 
until  its  functions  are  understood.  About  half  a  century  of  medical 
experience  has  established  nothing.  Dr.  Arndt  of  Griefs vvald  thinks 
it  of  very  great  value.  Williams  in  England  and  Bryce  in  Alabama 
speak  favorably  of  it.  Arndt  recommends  general  Faradization, 
Beard  and  Rockwell  central  galvanization  ;  but  the  whole  business 
is  crudely  empirical,  —  a  mere  fumbling  in  the  dark. 

Let  me  state  finally  a  few  obvious  principles  derived  from  Sarcog- 
nomy. 

1.  Insanity  being  a  derangement  owing  to  the  predominance  of  the 
under-jaw  region  of  insanity  and  essential  deficiency  in  the  upper  pos- 
terior region,  especially  on  the  temporal  arch,  vertically  above  the 
ear,  currents  to  the  upper  posterior  region  are  evidently  appropriate, 
while  currents  from  the  under-jaw  region  to  the  back  of  shoulder  and 
axilla  are  equally  proper. 

2.  As  insanity  may  assume  either  the  arterial  form  of  high  excite- 
ment or  the  venous  form  of  idiocy  and  dementia,  the  latter  will  requi:  e 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  573 

stimulation  of  the  upper  posterior  cerebral  circulation  by  the  negative 
pole,  while  the  former  will  require  the  sedative  tonic  action  of  the 
positive  pole,  specially  directed  to  the  regions  of  hyperemia,  the 
location  of  which  may  be  understood  from  the  phenomena,  by  those 
who  understand  the  brain,  and  may  also  be  inferred  from  the  local 
heat. 

3.  In  the  mixed  cases  of  mania,  neither  decidedly  arterial  nor 
venous,  the  healthy  action  of  the  brain  being  impaired,  we  need  in- 
vigoration  by  the  negative  pole  of  the  upper  posterior  region,  and* 
especially  of  that  marked  Sanity,  as  well  as  a  general  invigoration  of 
the  brain  by  the  positive  static  electric,  both  on  the  insulated  stool 
and  by  static  currents  from  the  sponge  or  plate  on  which  the  patient 
sits  to  the  upper  regions  of  the  brain  —  especially  the  upper  posterior. 
To  this  must  be  added  special  positive  or  negative  treatment  of  the 
various  organs  as  their  condition  requires. 

4.  The  law  of  sympathy  between  brain  and  body  requires  a  careful 
removal  of  all  derangements  in  the  pelvic  and  hepatic  regions,  im- 
provement of  general  health,  and  concentration  of  power  to  the 
shoulder  and  axilla. 

Melancholy  is  a  condition  bordering  on  insanity  and  tending  to 
suicide  in  persons  who  are  in  all  other  respects  sound,  and  who  believe 
themselves  acting  as  rationally  in  surrendering  a  life  which  yields  no 
pleasure  as  if  they  should  die  to  escape  intolerable  pain.  It  is  due  to 
a  failure  in  the  upper  posterior  region  of  the  brain,  including  Cheer- 
fulness and  Health,  leaving  Melancholy  (which  we  reach  through  the 
angle  of  the  jaw)  in  predominance.  Of  course  it  requires  gentle 
currents  in  the  brain  from  Melancholy  to  Cheerfulness  and  Health, 
and  in  the  body  from  Melancholy  above  the  groin  to  Cheerfulness  in 
the  axilla.  The  relief  of  mental  depression  in  this  way  by  the  hands 
is  one  of  my  most  familiar  experiments.  A  few  days  ago  I  was  called 
to  the  wife  of  a  physician,  in  whom  it  was  quite  apparent  that  the 
basis  of  her  trouble  was  mental  depression,  making  her  voice  extremely 
feeble.  Before  administering  any  remedies  I  relieved  her  with  the 
hands  upon  the  region  of  Cheerfulness  and  Energy,  making  her  con- 
scious of  the  relief,  which  was  expressed  in  her  more  cheerful  voice. 

I  earnestly  hope  that  these  suggestions  may  fall  into  the  hands  of 
physicians  capable  and  willing  to  carry  them  out  faithfully.  But  it  is 
only  a  small  minority  of  mankind  who  are  sufficiently  exempt  from 
the  control  of  habit  to  enter  with  facility  into  a  new  course  of  thought 
and  investigation. 

The  application  of  currents  to  the  base  of  the  brain  is  the  most  un- 
safe method  of  cerebral  treatment.  I  have  mentioned  (page  485)  the 
injurious   effects   on   man.      In    some   experiments  on  animals  at  the 


574  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

Central  Park,  New  York  (1890),  with  a  galvanic  battery,  a  savage 
baboon  was  subjected  to  galvanization,  successively  raised  to  forty 
cells,  from  a  sponge  in  his  mouth  to  one  of  his  paws,  when  it  was  at 
length  overcome,  and  "  became  lethargic  and  almost  comatose,  acting 
very  much  like  a  man  overcome  with  drink."  After  being  released 
;t  became  furious  and  attacked  its  keeper.  The  dog  subjected  to  a 
current  through  the  base  of  the  brain  "  began  to  act  queerly  a  few 
minutes  after  the  experiments,  and  within  half  an  hour  showed  symp- 
toms so  like  those  of  hydrophobia  that  the  keepers  killed  him." 

This  result  shows  that  hydrophobia,  which  is  located  in  the  base  of 
the  brain,  might  be  successfully  treated  by  the  rational  application  of 
electricity. 

Paralysis  is  a  condition  in  which  the  circulation  and  nerve  power 
of  the  affected  nerves  and  muscles  must  be  roused.  The  negative 
pole  of  the  galvanic  current  is  therefore  the  one  thing  needful. 
VWicn  me  circulation  and  life  have  been  restored  Faradism  is  appro- 
priate. At  first  the  negative  pole  is  our  reliance,  then  we  may  use 
the  alternate  current,  and  finally  the  Faradic. 

In  infantile  paralysis,  a  result  of  fever  affecting  the  spinal  cord, 
prolonged  and  gentle  galvanization,  according  to  Dr.  G.  B.  Massey,  is 
indispensable.  Faradization  is  entirely  wrong.  The  mistake  of  using 
Faradization  where  galvanism  is  the  proper  remedy  is  very  common, 
and  the  mistake  of  using  strong  currents  for  a  short  time  when  mild 
currents  for  a  longer  time  would  be  better  is  also  very  common. 

When  the  brain  is  involved,  gentle  static  currents  directed  to  the 
superior  and  posterior  regions  will  be  of  incalculable  value,  if  it  be 
due  to  softening  or  other  impairment  of  the  brain.  Two  daily  treat- 
ments by  that  method  will  have  a  happy  effect  —  the  positive  pole 
being  applied  between  the  thighs,  which  is  the  best  location  for 
cerebral  treatment,  or  upon  the  abdomen  at  Melancholy  and  Relax- 
ation. I  am  very  confident  that  static  electricity,  guided  by  Sarcog- 
nomy  and  associated  wTith  the  magnet,  will  have  a  grand  career  in  the 
treatment  of  the  br^n,  not  only  in  paralysis  and  insanity,  but  in 
many  inferior  conditions  of  the  brain  which  would  not  be  called 
disease. 

When  paralysis  is  due  to  cerebral  hemorrhage,  a  gentle  static  or 
galvanic  current  applied  to  the  lower  part  of  the  affected  hemisphere 
through  the  hand  of  the  operator,  and  sent  to  the  first  dorsal  verte- 
bra, centre  of  the  scapula,  or  any  part  of  the  shoulder,  will  be 
beneficial.  If  there  is  much  excitability  of  the  brain  or  danger  of  re- 
newed hemorrhage  (which  the  positive  current  would  check)  the 
current  might  ib~  ~ent  to  the  top  of  the  foot,  or  to  the  region  of 
Repose,  on  the  trunk. 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  575 

Paralysis  from  the  lower  part  of  the  spinal  cord  may  appear  as 
paraplegia,  disease  of  the  lower  part  of  the  body  including  the  bladder 
and  rectum.  There  is  a  complicated  form  of  paralysis  in  which  limbs 
on  one  side  or  the  other  and  portions  of  the  face  are  affected,  which 
may  involve  the  brain,  its  nerves  or  the  spinal  cord,  and  the  diagnosis 
is  difficult.  Electrical  excitability  is  sometimes  greatly  increased  by 
irritation  or  inflammation  in  the  nervous  system*  and  it  is  not  difficult 
to  discover  its  source.  Inflammations  of  the  gray  matter  of  the  cord 
produce  a  great  variety  of  effects  which  may  be  traced  by  electricity 
to  the  inflamed  portion.  The  inability  of  muscles  to  respond  to 
galvanism  indicates  impairment  of  their  structure,  and  if  far  advanced 
the  cure  is  hopeless. 

The  peculiar  value  of  the  galvanic  current  in  paralysis  is  due  to  the 
fact  that  it  operates  upon  the  muscles  themselves  rather  than  the 
nerves.  Hence  in  paralysis  we  generally  find  the  Faradic,  which  is  a 
current  for  the  nerves,  of  but  little  value,  while  the  galvanic  makes  a 
very  strong  impression.  The  action  of  the  nervous  system  is  mar- 
vellously quick  and  that  of  the  muscles  comparatively  slow  ;  hence  the 
sudden  and  rapid  alternations  of  Faradism  stimulate  it,  while  the 
slower  galvanic  current  becomes  insensible  and  acts  upon  the  motor 
nerves  only  by  its  interruptions,  its  effect  being  increased  by  the 
rapidity  of  the  interruptions.  When  the  nerves  fail,  the  galvanic 
current  makes  a  stronger  impression  on  the  muscles  than  in  the  nor- 
mal state  ;  thus  it  seems  a  substitute  for  the  nervous  system,  while 
Faradism  is  a  nerve  stimulant,  and  the  two  may  be  very  advantageously 
combined.  Thus  the  combination  of  primary  and  secondary  currents 
introduces  a  small  galvanic  element  from  the  cell  which  is  beneficial ; 
but  this  galvanic  element  is  more  conspicuous  when  the  primary 
current  is  used  alone  and  when  it  is  originated  by  two  or  more  cells. 

The  galvanic  current  is  of  a  lower  grade  than  the  Faradic  and  static, 
and  therefore  appropriate  to  lower  conditions — to  the  conditions  in 
which  the  nervous  system  is  of  a  low  grade  or  greatly  impaired  — and 
it  is  generated  in  abundance  only  in  fishes  such  as  the  electric  eel. 
On  the  other  hand  the  static,  with  its  high  electro-motive  force,  con- 
trasts with  the  slow  and  feeble  galvanic,  and  is  especially  the  current 
of  the  nervous  system,  —  the  only  current  well  adapted  to  the  brain. 

Chorea  and  Spasm.  —  Chorea  has  been  successfully  treated  by  Dr. 
Pitzer  with  galvanism  —  applying  large  sponge  electrodes  (with  from 
two  to  eight  cells)  above  the  ear  on  the  side  of  the  head  opposite 
the  affection,  the  negative  pole  being  in  the  hand  of  the  affected  side. 
From  three  to  six  minutes  of  daily  application  was  sufficient. 

This  treatment  would  reduce  excitement  and  irritation  in  the  brain, 
and  if  the  current  were  carried  to  the  feet  it  would  be  equally  bene- 


576  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

facial.  But  two  to  eight  cells,  would  not  send  a  current  of  any  force 
to  the  feet.  In  the  above  case  the  current  was  from  one-half  to  two 
milliamperes,  which  shows  how  delicate  a  galvanic  current  is  appro- 
priate, especially  about  the  brain.  A  fraction  of  a  milliampere  is 
sufficient  in  any  delicate  constitution.  Generally  I  would  recommend 
an  upward  current  on  the  limbs  affected  ;  the  negative  electrode 
being  placed  on  the  summit  of  the  shoulder  at  the  location  of 
Patience,  on  the  centre  of  the  scapula  (Health),  or  on  the  first 
dorsal  vertebra.  If  the  restlessness  is  very  great,  the  negative  may 
be  applied  under  the  arm  two  inches  below  the  centre  of  the  axilla, 
or  two  inches  further  forward  (Tranquillity).  The  quieting  influences 
of  Scutellaria,  Leonurus  and  Xanthium  are  appropriate. 

Either  of  the  forms  of  electricity  may  be  used,  but  the  static  is 
upon  the  whole  preferable. 

The  treatment  of  chorea  by  sparks  from  the  spine  was  very  suc- 
cessful with  Dr.  G.  Bird  and  Mr.  Addison  at  Guy's  Hospital.  The 
cures  were  generally  speedy,  even  in  the  worst  cases.  The  sparks 
and  current  were  beneficial,  but  shocks  objectionable. 

Dr.  Dewees  (in  the  New  York  Journal  of  Medicine)  says  :  "  In  the 
most  frightful  case  of  tonic  spasm  from  utero-spinal  causes  the  con- 
tinued current  has  in  my  hands  proved  a  perfect  charm.  The  inter- 
rupted current  (in  this  case)  proved  highly  injurious,  causing 
convulsive  actions,  while  by  the  simple  galvanic  current  the  spasms 
would  be  immediately  broken." 

The  continuous  galvanic,  being  a  one-way  current,  is  truly  valuable 
in  dispersing  irritability  by  the  positive  pole.  The  same  power 
belongs  to  the  continuous  static  current.  The  magnetic  combination 
adds  greatly  to  its  soothing  power. 

Neuralgia  finds  its  best  relief  in  electricity.  Galvanism  has  been 
successful  in  the  worst  possible  cases.  In  rheumatism,  Dr.  F.  T- 
Payne  of  Texas  reports  that  he  has  found,  in  every  case  of  chronic 
rheumatism  or  neuralgia,  "  a  dead  or  insensible  nerve  at  or  near  the 
painful  spot,"  which  does  not  feel  the  electric  current.  He  says  that 
a  steel  electrode  pressed  along  the  course  of  the  impaired  nerve  is 
curative.  "The  first  sensations  produced  by  a  concentrated  current 
are  pleasant,  then  warmer  on  to  burning,  until  the  instrument  must 
be  removed  on  account  of  the  intensity  of  heat  or  burning  sensa- 
tion ;  and  the  pain  is  banished  at  once,  and  the  limb  or  joint  is  ready 
to  move  in  any  or  all  natural  directions." 

In  cases  not  inflammatory  the  Faradic  current  gives  speedy  relief. 
A  French  physician,  Dr.  Duval,  tells  of  being  confined  to  bed  by  a 
severe  sciatica  of  the  right  leg,  which  was  cured  by  a  single  Faradiza- 
tion. 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  57? 

The  Faradic  current  is  especially  adapted  to  impaired  nervous 
action  ;  hence  it  relieves  the  excessive  perspiration  of  the  hands  or 
feet,  and  general  Faradization  is  appropriate  to  excessive  perspiration. 

To  produce  relief  by  the  Faradic  current  in  neuralgia  and  rheuma- 
tism, the  coil  should  be  of  a  great  length  of  very  fine  wire,  and  the 
interruption  very  frequent. 

Neuralgia  is  one  of  the  most  obstinate  affections  with  which  the 
electrician  has  to  deal.  Its  therapeutics  can  be  successfully  managed 
only  by  adhering  to  clear  general  principles. 

The  electric  current  carries  with  it  the  vital  conditions  of  the  parts 
through  which  it  passes  ;  consequently,  when,  for  example,  we  have  a 
descending  galvanic  current  through  the  sciatic  nerve,  by  placing  one 
electrode  behind  the  head  of  the  femur  and  the  other  at  the  foot,  a 
gentle  current,  not  strong  enough  to  produce  any  irritation,  gradually 
removes  the  irritation  or  pain.  The  positive  electrode  should  be 
placed  high  enough,  in  any  case,  to  include  the  whole  morbid  tract. 

Another  method  which  has  been  neglected  by  electricians  is  to  pass 
currents  through  the  affected  nerve  at  right  angles  to  its  course,  as 
when  we  pass  currents  through  the  sciatic  nerve  from  the  outside  to 
the  inside  of  the  thigh,  carrying  the  electrodes  downward  from  the 
origin  of  the  nerve  to  its  termination.  In  all  cases  the  currents  should 
be  of  that  degree  of  gentleness  which  is  not  disturbing,  for  strong 
currents  are  followed  by  a  reaction,  in  which  the  excitability  and 
hyperaesthesia  are  increased  and  the  result  is  injurious. 

The  inverse  or  ascending  current  is  also  often  beneficial ;  but  as  this 
current  simply  carried  to  the  spine  might  leave  an  abnormal  excita- 
bility at  the  spot  in  the  spinal  cord,  it  is  better  to  place  the  negative 
on  the  region  of  Health,  making  the  first  application  a  few  inches 
from  the  positive,  and  convey  it  along  the  spine  and  up  to  the  Health 
locality  or  to  the  dorsal  summit  of  the  cord. 

Much  delicacy  is  required  in  the  treatment  of  neuralgia,  especially 
when  the  electrodes  are  near  together,  and  the  use  of  large  sponges 
or  carbon  electrodes  will  enable  us  to  make  our  applications  delicate. 
I  would  especially  commend  the  carbon  electrodes  as  excellent  chan- 
nels for  soothing  applications. 

While  the  foregoing  is  the  general  treatment  of  neuralgia,  there  are 
numerous  cases  in  which  there  is  an  asthenic  condition  and  a  greater 
toleration  for  electricity,  —  cases  in  which  an  energetic  stimulation  is 
beneficial,  and  Faradic  currents  through  the  affected  nerves  and  their 
spinal  origins  will  be  the  best  treatment.  But  in  using  the  Faradic 
currents  we  should  begin  with  the  feeblest,  guarding  the  patient  by 
electrodes  that  mitigate  the  force,  and  gradually  increasing  the  current 
in  proportion  to  toleration. 


5/S  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

One  who  understands  the  carrying  power  of  electricity  will  never 
neglect  in  neuralgia  to  combine  the  electric  current  with  the  proper 
anodynes,  which  may  be  contained  in  the  sponge  or  cotton  electrode 
or  a  strip  of  cloth  laid  on  the  suffering  part.  Cocaine,  theine, 
hyoscyamus,  belladonna,  cannabis,  morphine,  svapnia,  tonga,  piscidia, 
chloroform,  ether,  menthol  and  salicylate  of  sodium.  He  will  give, 
thus,  relief  to  the  affected  spot  without  disturbing  the  rest  of  the  con- 
stitution and  without  requiring  the  hypodermic  syringe.  There  may 
be  a  slight  absorption  if  the  remedy  is  applied  on  the  skin,  but  when 
we  wish  to  avoid  this,  as  in  treating  the  eyes  or  any  part  on  which 
we  do  not  wish  to  leave  a  medical  stain,  a  medical  electrode  makes  it 
possible  to  convey  the  medical  potency. 

The  eyes  are  often  marvellously  relieved  by  electricity.  Dr.  F.  T. 
Payne  of  Comanche,  Texas,  reports  the  case  of  a  clergyman  who  was 
blind,  having  lost  his  right  eye,  and  the  left  being  in  a  high  state  of 
inflammation  so  that  he  "  could  scarcely  discover  anything  but  a  mass 
resembling  coagulum  filling  the  orbit."  He  had  been  sleepless  and 
suffering  intensely,  but  thirty  minutes'  treatment  gave  great  relief, 
and  after  the  third  treatment  he  slept  soundly  and  dismissed  his 
guide.  The  Faradic  was  used,  and  was  also  concentrated  upon  a  spot 
which  seemed  deficient  in  sensibility,  with  good  effects. 

In  the  case  of  another  clergyman,  P.  W.  Graves,  with  chronic  sore 
eyes,  granulated  lids  and  ulcerated  cornea,  quite  blind,  the  positive 
Faradic  current  was  applied  to  the  eye  through  an  eye-cup  of  water,  — 
an  excellent  method, — which  gave  great  relief,  although  at  first  he  did 
not  feel  it.  The  inflammation  was  rapidly  dispersed  without  the  aid 
of  medicine. 

The  great  efficiency  of  electricity  was  illustrated  in  a  case  treated 
by  Dr.  Tipton  of  Topeka.  Mr.  G.  presented  a  very  severe  case  ;  the 
destruction  of  the  under  part  of  the  lids  commenced  in  three  days 
from  the  attack,  which,  "by  the  fifth  day  sloughed  off.  The  destruc- 
tion of  the  cornea  commenced,  with  increased  pain  and  inflammation 
day  and  night,  so  that  he  could  not  rest  a  moment.  He  stated  that  he 
could  only  compare  the  corrosiveness  of  the  disease  to  a  consuming 
fire.  On  the  afternoon  of  the  eighth  day  of  attack  he  was  conducted 
to  my  office,  blind  and  distracted  with  pain.  Within  an  hour  from 
the  time  I  commenced  treating  him  with  electricity  he  went  away 
from  my  office  seeing,  and  was  free  from  pain."  His  case  was  cured 
within  three  weeks,  his  eyes  being  in  perfect  condition. 

Dr.  R.  J.  Curtis  reports  the  cure  of  a  case  of  amaurosis  by  a  gal. 
vanic  current  from  five  or  six  cells  —  the  positive  pole  being  applied 
over  the  eye,  and  the  negative  over  the  mastoid  process,  moderated 
by  a  rheostat,  but  producing  an  appearance  of  faint  flashes.  The 
treatment  was  continued  six  months. 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  579 

This  treatment  was  not  improper,  but  a  better  treatment  would 
have  been  by  very  gentle  Faradic  or  alternating  galvanic  currents 
between  the  eye  and  the  gyrus  angularis,  which  is  at  the  junction  of 
Adhesiveness  and  Combativeness. 

Opacity  of  the  cornea  was  successfully  treated  by  Dr.  C.  Usiglio 
of  Corfu,  in  a  woman  of  thirty-five,  seated  in  the  right  eye.  Six  cells 
increased  to  sixty  were  employed,  the  positive  pole  on  the  eyelid,  the 
negative  on  the  tongue.  The  strong  current  was  intermitted  occa- 
sionally, the  conjunctiva  became  reddened  and  tears  flowed.  The 
cure  was  completed  in  a  month.  Dr.  Channing  mentions  a  cure 
by  drawing  static  electricity  from  the  affected  eye. 

Opacities  of  the  eyes,  in  the  vitreous  body,  generally  yield  to  a  pos- 
itive galvanic  current.  M.  Teulon  claims  to  have  cured  twenty-two 
out  of  twenty-four  cases  by  this  method,  and  Von  Graef e  even  claimed 
the  galvanic  cure  of  cataract.  One  to  four  cells  are  sufficient  for  this 
galvanic  treatment. 

I  have  avoided  general  practice,.. but  in  November,  1890,  I  was 
induced  to  undertake  a  case  of  congenital  cataract  and  blindness, 
almost  complete  in  one  eye,  in  which  I  expect  to  effect  a  cure  by 
statico-magnetic  and  nervauric  treatment. 

All  morbid  growths  yield  to  electrolysis,  in  which  the  negative  pole 
is  applied.  Granulations  of  the  conjunctiva  have  been  successfully 
removed  by  European  physicians.  We  have  reports  from  Drs. 
Schivardi,  Areola  and  Kohn,  —  the  cures  being  made  in  a  few  applica- 
tions. 

The  use  of  acupuncture  of  the  eye  for  cataract  has  sometimes  been 
successful  and  sometimes  entirely  failed,  so  that  it  could  not  be 
recommended. 

The  rules  for  treatment  of  the  eyes  do  not  differ  materially  from 
those  for  the  treatment  of  other  delicate  organs.  Positive  currents,  to 
disperse  inflammation  and  congestion,  may  be  applied  by  static 
electricity,  or  primary  or  secondary  or  galvanic,  if  they  are  combined 
with  magnetism  or  conducted  through  water.  The  negative  pole  is 
appropriate  in  amaurotic  and  enfeebled  conditions.  I  expect  more 
from  the  static-magnetic  than  from  any  other  form.  Dispersive  posi- 
tive currents  assist  the  eyes  when  inflamed  and  sensitive,  by  applica- 
tion below  and  behind  the  eye,  at  the  cheekbone  and  just  above  the 
zygoma. 

The  lower  part  of  the  occiput  (junction  of  Adhesiveness  and  Com- 
bativeness) is  the  region  that  reinforces  and  sustains  the  eyes.  This 
is  the  "gyrus  angularis"  upon  which  Ferrier  supposes  vision  to 
depend.  To  stimulate  this  region  by  the  negative  pole  is  important 
in  all  affections  of  the  eyes. 


5S0  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

There  are  probably  many  chronic  cases  in  which  galvanism  is  the 
most  efficient  treatment.  Dr.  E.  C.  Mann  reports  the  entire  cure  of 
a  case  of  blindness  in  a  girl,  caused  by  meningitis,  which  oculists 
had  pronounced  incurable.  He  administered  the  galvanic  current 
4<  several  times  a  day,  at  first  for  a  few  moments  each  time."  Vision 
began  to  develop  in  eight  weeks  and  was  completely  restored  in  six 
months.  Other  treatment  was  used  for  her  health,  but  the  galvanic 
current  cured  the  blindness.  He  recommends  long-continued  treat- 
ment with  very  gentle  currents,  and  very  judiciously  adds  :  "There 
are  also  chronic  congestive  states  of  the  brain,  which  tend  to  mental 
disorder  if  not  checked,  where,  in  my  opinion,  we  have  in  the  constant 
current  of  electricity  the  very  best  therapeutical  means  of  cure." 

I  would  add  that  the  eye  is  very  sensitive  to  nervauric  impressions, 
and  that  good  magnetic  healers  sometimes  relieve  cases  in  which  all 
other  treatment  has  failed.  Dr.  MacGeary,  now  of  London,  has 
made  some  remarkable  cures  in  this  way. 

The  eye  may  be  conveniently  treated  with  a  sponge  impregnated 
with  water  or  medicinal  solutions.  An  effective  application  is  a  glass 
or  wooden  eye-cup  for  electric  treatment,  which  may  contain  medi- 
cated solutions  on  sponges,  with  a  conducting  wire  in  its  stem.  I 
would  recommend  the  use  of  the  new  Pyoktanin  in  all  severe  affec- 
tions of  the  eyes.     It  is  a  wonderful  remedy  for  local  application. 

Treatment  of  Ears.  —  Deafness  has  often  been  cured  by  cur- 
rents through  the  ears,  carefully  applied,  though  it  has  often  failed. 

Dr.  Fenella  of  Italy  succeeded  by  applying  the  galvanic  positive 
pole  to  the  ear  and  the  negative  to  the  tongue.  He  reported  four 
successful  cases.  The  application  should  be  made  every  other  day. 
Jobert  de  Lamballe  cured'  several  by  galvanic  currents  between  the 
Eustachian  tube  and  ear. 

Ringing  in  the  ears  was  cured  by  Dr.  Hoering  by  currents  in  the 
jar  given  twenty-two  times.  Dr.  Wright  of  London  reported  a 
number  of  cases.  The  treatment  is  strictly  local  and  according  to 
general  principles  —  negative  for  dull,  inactive  conditions,  positive  for 
rritations  and  tendency  to  inflammation.  When  suppuration  exists, 
jither  in  the  ear  or  elsewhere,  pyoktanin  and  peroxide  of  hydrogen 
ire  the  best  remedies. 

There  is  such  a  thing  as  "  hysterical  deafness,"  a  nervous  condition 
which  is  promptly  dispelled  by  electric  treatment. 

Diphtheria.  —  Electricity  combined  with  local  treatment  is 
entirely  reliable  in  diphtheria.  Dr.  G.  K.  Smith,  who  has  been  quite 
successful,  uses  it  as  follows.  His  method  is  so  good  that  I  quote 
his  whole  description. 

"I  place  the  feet  of  patient  in  water  as  hot  as  can  be  borne  with 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  5  I 

comfort,  and  put  in  that  water  one,  two,  or  three  spoonfuls  of  sale- 
ratus.  Then  take  a  glass  of  cold  water  and  put  some  saleratus  in  it, 
and  with  this  solution  wet  the  electrode  which  is  to  be  applied  to  the 
throat.  The  negative  pole  of  the  battery  is  put  into  the  bath  in 
which  the  feet  are  placed.  The  positive  is  to  be  covered  with  cotton 
and  used  in  the  throat,  on  the  tongue,  and  in  the  nose  if  needed. 
The  sponge  handles  or  ordinary  electrodes  cannot  be  used  in  these 
localities;  but  a  very  convenient  one  for  the  mouth  and  throat  is 
made  by  covering  the  blade  of  a  dinner  knife  with  a  thin  layer  of 
cotton,  soaked  with  the  solution  of  saleratus.  The  cotton  also  serves 
to  keep  the  soft  parts  of  mouth  and  throat  from  direct  contact  with 
the  metal,  which  otherwise  would  cause  pain.  Mouth  should  be  kept 
open,  so  that  teeth  will  not  touch  the  electrode.  A  convenient  elec- 
trode for  the  nose  is  made  by  winding  a  thin  layer  of  cotton  on  a 
wire.  Thus  prepared,  the  patient  is  seated  in  a  chair,  if  able  to  sit 
up.  Feet  are  placed  in  the  bath,  and  patient  holds  in  his  lap  a  basin 
to  catch  the  saliva  as  it  flows  or  as  he  has  occasion  to  spit  it  out. 
The  physician  should  not  sit  in  front  for  fear  the  patient  will  cough 
and  blow  his  poisonous  secretions  in  his  face.  Sitting  near  the  right 
side,  he  dips  the  electrode  into  the  saleratus  water  to  wet  the  cotton  ; 
then  placing  it  on  the  tongue,  he  holds  the  knife  by  its  metallic 
handle  in  the  left  hand,  while  he  lays  the  right  hand  very  gently  on 
the  sponge  of  the  positive  electrode.  The  current  will  now  pass 
through  the  operator,  and  he  can  regulate  the  power  of  the  current  to 
the  ability  of  the  patient  to  bear  it  without  pain.  If  he  wants  a 
stronger  current  he  can  grasp  the  sponge  a  little  tighter.  As  soon 
as  patient  becomes  accustomed  to  the  current  on  the  tongue,  the 
operator  may  pass  the  electrode  gently  up*  to  the  side  of  either  tonsil. 
Watching  a  good  opportunity,  he  can  now  pass  it  back  to  the  pos- 
terior wall  of  the  pharynx,  and  even  down  to  the  epiglottis.  This  last 
position  is  likely  to  make  the  patient  cough,  and  in  some  instances 
vomit.  In  either  case  mucus  in  large  quantities  will  be  thrown  out, 
and  it  will  become  necessary  to  remove  the  electrode  ;  but  before  this 
is  done  the  current  should  be  broken  by  raising  the  right  hand  from 
the  sponge  electrode.  The  cotton  on  the  electrode  should  be  secured 
by  winding  a  little  thread  around  it,  and  the  operator  should  be  care- 
ful not  to  let  the  electrode  touch  the  teeth,  as  that  will  cause  pain.  If 
the  current  passing  through  the  operator  be  too  weak,  he  may  bring 
the  positive  sponge  up  and  touch  the  handle  of  the  knife.  Electrode 
must  be  removed  occasionally,  to  give  patient  a  chance  to  breathe, 
etc.  Not  necessary  to  use  a  strong  current.  Electrode  for  the  nose 
can  often  be  passed  back  as  far  as  posterior  wall  of  pharynx. 

"  Was  called  to  see  a  gentleman  who  was  suffering  very  much. 


582  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

Had  very  intense  thirst,  throat  so  swollen  he  could  scarcely  talk  ; 
suggested  electricity  in  the  throat ;  and  in  a  few  minutes'  time  after 
its  use,  the  man,  who  was  powerful  before  he  was  taken  sick,  said : 
'  I  feel  almost  as  strong  as  I  ever  did.' 

"The  current  should  be  just  strong  enough  to  be  comfortable,  and 
so  that  it  will  not  make  the  patient  fear  it.  Can  use  it  with  children, 
and  have  done  so  with  marked  effect  for  good." 

The  use  of  saleratus  is  very  proper  to  control  inflammation  and 
promote  secretion.  Passing  the  current  through  the  operator  adds 
greatly  to  its  value.  There  are  many  diphtheria  remedies  which 
might  be  used  on  the  electrode.  Sulpho-calcine,  the  latest,  is  unques- 
tionably valuable.  Pinus  Canadensis  has  long  maintained  its  reputa- 
tion. Orchis  mascula,  a  remedy  very  little  known,  is  regarded  by 
Dr.  E.  H.  Holbrook  of  Baltimore  as  superior  to  all  other  remedies. 
Turpentine  in  substance  and  in  vapor,  vinegar,  carbolic  acid,  muriatic 
acid,  subsulphate  of  iron,  baptisia,  trypsin,  nitrate  of  sanguinaria, 
muriate  of  iron,  muriate  of  pilocarpine  and  hyposulphite  of  soda  have 
all  great  value.     The  latter  is  considered  a  preventive. 

Aphonia  was  cured  by  Dr.  Torrance  {London  Lancet)  by  Faradiza- 
tion of  the  vocal  chords  after  all  medical  treatment  had  failed.  The 
patient,  a  woman,  lost  her  voice  after  having  an  ulcerated  sore  throat, 
and  the  loss  had  continued  after  the  throat  was  healed.  The  voice 
was  thoroughly  restored. 

The  Faradic  is  certainly  appropriate,  and  may  be  assisted  by  the 
local  application  of  Jaborandi.  The  alternated  galvanic,  primary  or 
static  would  be  equally  proper.  Currents  between  the  larynx  and 
the  fossa  below  the  occipital  knob  would  be  better  than  if  confined 
to  the  larynx. 

Toothache  has  been  relieved  both  by  galvanism  and  Franklinism. 
Generally  the  positive  current  relieves  in  five  or  ten  minutes.  When 
there  is  much  swelling  or  inflammation  the  negative  pole  has  been 
used,  as  it  produces  the  alkaline  condition,  which  is  antiphlogistic  and 
solvent.  The  Faradic  current  has  also  been  used  with  success,  as  it 
gives  tone  to  the  bloodvessels  of  the  affected  part ;  and  in  the  extrac- 
tion  of  teeth  it  has  been  used  by  attaching  one  pole  to  the  forceps, 
the  other  being  held  by  the  patient.  This  may  modify  the  pain  and 
also  check  the  hemorrhage.  The  latter  object  would  be  promoted  by 
the  positive  galvanic  current.  Relief  is  sometimes  given  by  applying 
a  plate  of  silver  and  another  of  zinc  against  the  base  of  the  affected 
tooth. 

Hydrophobia  is  a  disease  of  inflammatory  irritation  in  the  central 
base  of  the  brain.  It  therefore  requires  a  sedative,  anti-inflammatory 
treatment  and  free  circulation  by  the  skin  and  kidneys  to  assist  in 
the  removal  of  a  morbific  element. 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  583 

The  most  powerful  sedative,  and  one  which  is  reported  to  have  been 
successful  in  many  cases,  is  the  Xanthium  Spinosum.  Over  sixty 
years  ago  many  cures  were  reported  by  the  use  of  Scutellaria  (skull- 
cap), which  is  not  only  a  pleasant  sedative,  but  a  tonic  to  the  spinal 
cord.  Inula  helenium  (elecampane)  has  cured  many  cases  un- 
doubtedly hydrophobic,  which  was  due  not  only  to  its  impression 
on  the  nervous  system,  but  to  its  power  of  promoting  the  secretions. 
The  vapor  bath  is  also  reported  to  have  been  successfully  used,  and 
its  success  would  justify  the  use,  for  its  diaphoretic  effect,  of 
Jaborandi,  which  is  said  to  have  proved  successful  against  snake  bites. 

The  elecampane  was  used  by  boiling  an  ounce  of  the  root  in  a  pint 
of  milk  boiled  to  half  a  pint,  the  dose  being  taken  in  the  morning,  on 
an  empty  stomach,  and  no  other  food  taken  till  late  in  the  day. 

The  electric  treatment  appropriate  would  be  by  currents  from  the 
base  of  the  brain  to  the  feet  —  also  from  the  knee  and  the  lower  end 
of  the  spine  to  the  summit  of  the  chest  and  region  of  Patience. 

TREATMENT  OF  AFFECTIONS  OF  THE  THORAX. 

Pneumonia.  —  Channing  says  :  "  The  testimony  is  universal  as  to 
the  bad  consequences  attending  the  use  of  electricity  in  this  disease  ; 
at  any  rate  in  the  active  stages  of  inflammation,"  —  which  simply 
shows  a  great  lack  of  proper  knowledge.  Dr.  Wilson  Philip  also  said 
that,  "in  ordinary  cases  of  phthisis,  nothing  could  be  more  im- 
proper than  the  use  of  galvanism."  We  cannot  thus  speak  of  gal- 
vanism as  of  a  dose  of  medicine,  for  it  is  an  agent  of  great  variety 
of  powers.  We  might  as  well  speak  of  surgery  as  the  application  of 
a  knife.  American  practitioners  of  the  liberal  school  have  not 
hesitated  to  use  electric  currents  in  both  pneumonia  and  consump- 
tion, and  Dr.  Beard  mentions  the  wonderful  cures  of  consumption 
claimed  by  Dr.  Bastings,  but  considers  them  incredible.  There  are 
some  reports  of  favorable  effects  from  galvanism,  but  the  profession 
seems  to  have  shrunk  from  the  treatment  of  pneumonia  by  elec- 
tricity. 

The  most  powerful,  prompt  and  efficient  treatment  for  pneumonia 
is  by  the  pneumatic  method,  for  which  I  refer  to  the  chapter  on  that 
subject. 

Whether  we  use  the  galvanic,  primary  or  static,  the  current  should 
be  from  the  entire  length  of  the  sternum,  the  hypochondria  and  the 
lateral  base  of  the  chest,  to  the  tibial  region  and  the  whole  leg  and 
foot ;  also  to  the  regions  -of  Health  and  Repose.  The  downward 
current  should  be  the  first,  and  continued  long  enough  to  produce  a 
sedative  effect,  after  which  the  posterior  currents  would  be  ap- 
propriate. 


584  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

We  know  that  positive  currents  of  electricity  are  powerfully  tonic, 
acting  upon  the  vasomotor  nerves,  contracting  the  bloodvessels,  and 
thus  overcoming  the  essential  characteristic  of  inflammation  by 
removing  the  congestion  and  enabling  the  bloodvessels  to  resist  it. 
In  doing  this  their  influence  is  cooling,  hence  they  fulfil  the  require- 
ments of  pneumonia  entirely,  except  that  they  are  not  sufficiently 
anodyne  and  expectorant.  These  qualities  should  be  supplied  by 
medicine.  I  would  therefore  administer  an  electric  current  qualified 
with  hyoscyamus  and  directed  to  the  whole  region  below  the  knee. 
This  will  relieve  the  congestion,  and  subdue  the  inflammation  in  a 
pleasant  manner. 

If  the  inflammation  be  high  or  advanced,  veratrum  viride  will 
powerfully  aid  in  subduing  it.  Arnica  is  also  an  efficient  contra- 
stimulant,  lowering  the  rapidity  of  the  pulse.  A  moist  atmosphere, 
maintained  by  boiling  water  in  the  room,  will  be  very  beneficial,  and 
any  soothing  agent  in  the  boiling  water,  such  as  balsam  of  Peru  or 
drosera  and  sugar,  will  improve  its  effect.  Dextroquinine  has  a 
beneficial  influence,  but  the  faculty  attach  rather  too  much  impor- 
tance to  quinine.  Declat's  syrup  of  phenic  acid  is  upon  the  whole 
rather  better.  But  of  all  the  febrifuges  in  pneumonia  I  know  of 
none  equal  to  Gnaphalium  polycephalum  (life  everlasting  is  its 
common  name).  It  is  a  most  admirable  tonic  for  the  lungs,  and  I 
think  should  be  our  leading  remedy.  Sanguinaria  is  an  admirable 
expectorant  in  small  doses,  with  extensive  influence  on  the  skin, 
kidneys  and  liver.  Its  expectorant  quality  is  much  aided  by  squills. 
Penthorum  is  very  similar  to  drosera  as  a  soothing  expectorant,  and 
tussilago,  by  its  soothing,  healing  action,  makes  an  excellent  aid  to 
gnaphalium.  The  following  proportions  will  make  an  admirable 
remedy  in  pneumonia  generally,  but  might  be  varied  to  suit  the 
peculiarities  of  each  case  :  Gnaphalium,  10;  tussilago,  5  ;  hyoscyamus, 
3  ;  sanguinaria,  1  ;  veratrum,  1  ;  Declat's  syrup  of  phenic  acid,  5  to 
10 ;  liquorice  or  syrup,  20  to  50. 

Veratrum  and  phenic  acid  might  be  increased  as  the  condition  is 
more  feverish,  and  hyoscyamus  as  its  soothing  influence  is  needed. 
Demulcents  such  as  flaxseed  and  althea  make  a  valuable  addition, 
and  Crawley  or  Jaborandi  may  be  added  if  the  skin  is  dry.  The 
reader  will  understand  that  in  speaking  of  remedies  I  generally  refer 
to  fluid  extracts. 

If  the  apparatus  of  haemospasia  is  not  within  reach,  ligatures  on 
the  thighs,  with  the  legs  in  warm  water,  should  be  an  indispensable 
adjunct  of  the  treatment.  To  preserve  the  warmth  of  the  lower 
limbs  is  of  the  highest  importance  in  curing  and  in  preventing 
pulmonic  attacks. 


CHAT.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  585 

Asphyxia  from  drowning  or  poisoning  requires  vigorous  and  pro- 
longed treatment.  As  the  restoration  of  breathing  is  the  object 
after  drowning,  it  may  be  mechanically  accomplished,  while  the 
patient  reclines  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees,  by  pressing  the  chest  and 
abdomen  firmly  to  expel  the  air,  then  suddenly  releasing  the 
abdomen  and  lifting  the  shoulders  with  the  hands  at  the  axillae  — 
continuing  this  as  long  as  necessary,  keeping  the  patient  warm. 

The  Faradic  current  from  the  back  of  the  neck  to  three  inches 
below  the  umbilicus  (Respiration)  will  stimulate  deep  breathing.  A 
current  at  the  phrenic  zone,  from  side  to  side  (on  the  level  of  the 
seventh  or  eighth  rib),  will  also  stimulate  the  diaphragm.  A  current 
between  the  upper  dorsal  vertebra  and  the  lower  end  of  the  thigh,  or 
the  region  of  Vital  Force,  will  have  great  power  in  sustaining  life 
and  restoring  respiration.  Where  narcotic  poisoning  is  the  cause, 
treatment  may  be  directed  to  the  stomach  and  lower  dorsal  region. 
In  all  cases  a  current  between  the  shoulders  on  the  location  of 
Health  is  proper.  In  a  young  lady  whose  case  was  reported  by 
Dr.  Williams  in  the  Lancet,  narcotism  from  the  effects  of  laudanum 
was  promptly  relieved  by  "  electro-magnetic  shocks "  across  the 
shoulders. 

Direct  action  on  the  diaphragm  has  been  successful  in  cases  of 
drowning.  In  the  experiments  of  Leroy  D'Etoiles  drowned  animals 
were  restored  by  electric  currents  sent  into  the  diaphragm  through 
long  needles  between  the  eighth  and  ninth  ribs. 

This  method  was  successfully  applied  by  Dr.  Ferguson  of  West- 
Eneath  Dispensary  to  a  drowned  man  after  the  failure  of  other  efforts. 
The  current  of  a  fifty-cell  battery  was  applied  directly  to  the 
diaphragm  by  cutting  down  to  it,  and  the  diaphragm  was  at  once  put 
into  action,  resulting  in  recovery. 

Dr.  J.  J.  Caldwell  of  Baltimore  relieved  a  negro  boy,  drowned  in 
the  dock  for  half  an  hour  and  apparently  dead,  by  applying  a  Faradic 
current  several  hours. 

Dr.  Russell  of  King's  College  Hospital  reports  the  relief  of  an 
infant  of  two  months,  supposed  dead  from  the  effects  of  laudanum,  by 
electro-magnetic  shocks  from  the  back  of  the  neck  to  the  sternum. 
These  roused  and  appeared  to  restore  it,  but  it  died  from  exhaustion  a 
few  hours  later.  If  the  shocks  had  been  directed  to  the  thighs 
instead  of  the  sternum  it  would  probably  have  survived. 

Dr.  Barry  treated  an  infant  of  nine  months,  narcotized  by  thirty 
drops  of  laudanum  seven  hours  previously  and  in  a  state  of  profound 
coma,  with  electro-magnetism,  which  had  to  be  kept  up  four  hours 
and  three-quarters  before  it  was  securely  restored. 

A  three  weeks'  infant,  poisoned  by  Godfrey's  Cordial  five  hours 


586  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

previously  and  apparently  dying,  was  restored  in  ten  minutes  by 
Mr.  Tubbs,  with  shocks  through  the  spine  and  cardiac  region,  as 
reported  in  the  Medical  Gazette. 

A  young  man  of  22,  apparently  dying  from  the  effects  of  a  dose  of 
cubebs  and  opium,  was  relieved  by  Dr.  Thos.  S.  Page,  after  a  great 
variety  of  strong  measures  (including  castigation)  had  been  tried  in 
vain,  by  giving  him  a  shock  from  left  to  right  through  the  heart, 
which  restored  consciousness  and  made  him  feel  as  if  a  gun  had  been 
fired  off  in  him. 

Mr.  Corp  of  Middlesex  Hospital  reported  the  case  of  a  man 
"  who  had  taken  an  ounce  and  a  half  of  laudanum  six  hours  pre- 
viously, whom  vigorous  measures,  aided  by  flagellation  with  thin 
splints  and  wet  towels,  could  not  relieve,  but  who  was  quickly  restored 
by  electro-magnetism  and  shocks  from  the  Leyden  jar. 

A  woman  who  had  swallowed  an  ounce  of  laudanum  was  brought 
into  the  Middlesex  Hospital,  an  hour  after,  unconscious.  In  half  an 
hour  vomiting  and  general  reaction  was  produced  by  the  battery, 
and  in  an  hour  she  was  quite  lively,  but  needed  further  application 
to  prevent  a  relapse,  as  stated  in  the  Lancet. 

In  these  cases  the  nervous  system  is  so  insensible  as  to  require  the 
most  powerful  electric  treatment  greatly  prolonged. 

In  a  case  reported  by  Prof.  W.  H.  Pancoast  the  battery  was  used 
fourteen  hours y  and  saved  the  life  of  a  patient  who  had  taken  one 
hundred  and  twenty  grains  of  chloral  and  eight  grains  of  morphia. 

Dr.  J.  J.  Caldwell  of  Baltimore  applied  the  Faradic  current  suc- 
cessfully, four  hours  after  the  usual  remedies  had  failed,  to  a  patient  at 
the  Maryland  Inebriate  Asylum,  who  had  attempted  suicide  by  opium. 
In  the  case  of  a  child  suffering  from  a  poisonous  dose  of  laudanum 
twelve  hours  previously,  and  not  relieved  by  medical  treatment,  a 
powerful  current  for  three  hours  restored  her.  The  current  was 
applied  with  the  negative  pole  over  the  epigastrium  and  the  positive 
to  the  pneumogastric  nerve  adjacent  to  the  sterno-cleido  muscle  in 
the  neck. 

That  currents  on  this  route  —  that  is,  along  the  course  of  the 
pneumogastric  nerve  —  are  efficient  in  sustaining  the  functions 
of  the  lungs  and  stomach  was  shown  by  the  experiments  of  Dr. 
Wilson  Philip  on  rabbits  and  dogs.  The  action  of  both  lungs  and 
stomach  failed  fatally  after  section  of  the  pneumogastric  nerve,  but 
was  fully  sustained  when  a  galvanic  current  was  used,  digestion  and 
respiration  being  well  maintained. 

I  do  not  believe,  however,  that  such  currents  are  as  efficient  as  if 
sent  to  the  hypogastric  region,  three  inches  below  the  umbilicus,  which 
excites  deep  respiration.  The  results  are  too  feeble  and  slow.   Dr.  J.  V. 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  587 

Hennessey  (in  Albany  Medical  Annals)  treated  a  case  of  poisoning 
in  a  woman  by  a  grain  and  a  quarter  of  morphine  given  hypoder- 
mically,  and  although  atropine  and  brandy  were  given  hypodermi- 
cally  it  required  thirteen  hours  of  treatment  to  restore  her.  It  was 
seven  hours  before  she  became  conscious  of  it.  It  required  twelve 
hours  to  relieve  morphine  poisoning  in  a  child  of  two  and  a  half  years, 
although  atropine  was  administered  and  coffee  given  by  rectal  injec- 
tion. In  this  case  the  electrode  was  applied  to  the  epigastrium  at 
the  beginning  of  the  inspiration  and  removed  at  the  end  of  it.  I  am 
quite  sure  the  hypogastric  application  would  have  given  speedier 
relief. 

Asthma  was  successfully  treated  by  Dr.  Wilson  Philip  with  currents 
from  the  nape  of  the  neck  to  the  epigastrium  or  lower,  from  eight  to 
sixteen  cells,  passing  the  current  through  thin  metal  plates  to  avoid 
concentration.  If  the  current  had  been  passed  to  the  hypogastric 
region  it  would  have  been  much  better,  or  if  passed  between  the 
sides  of  the  chest  (Inspiration).  The  current  also  benefited  a  cough, 
but  was  injurious  in  cases  of  inflammation.  The  current  would  not 
have  been  injurious  but  beneficial  if  passed  from  the  chest  to  the 
feet.  The  relief  given  by  galvanism  in  cases  which  defied  medicine 
was  prompt,  —  generally  in  a  few  minutes, — as  reported  by  Philip 
and  by  Pascalis.     Even  emphysematous   conditions  may  be  relieved. 

The  beneficial  effect  of  galvanism  on  the  lungs  was  shown  by  Dr. 
Philip  in  apoplexy,  who  "  states  that  the  respiration  in  sanguineous 
apoplexy  is  interrupted  more  by  accumulation  of  phlegm  than  by  the 
lessened  action  of  the  muscles  of  inspiration,  the  secretion  assuming 
its  character  and  remaining  adherent  on  account  of  the  withdrawal  of 
the  nervous  energy  from  the  lungs  —  a  conclusion  amply  established 
by  his  experiments  in  the  division  of  the  eighth  pair  of  nerves.  This 
accumulation  is  often  the  cause  of  death."  On  passing  the  battery 
current  through  the  lungs  in  this  condition,  Wilson  Philip  says  : 
"After  the  rattling  breathing  had  come  on,  and  the  patient  seemed 
about  to  be  suffocated,  he  was,  at  least  a  dozen  times,  made  to 
breathe  with  ease,  the  accumulation  of  phlegm  gradually  disappear- 
ing on  the  application  of  galvanism,  by  which  his  life  was  evidently 
prolonged."  The  beneficial  effect,  I  think,  was  simply  the  relief  of 
congestion. 

Asthma,  as  an  affection  of  respiration,  must  depend  on  the  respira- 
tory tract  of  the  brain  as  well  as  the  lungs.  Hence  it  is  sometimes 
necessary  to  treat  the  brain  on  its  respiratory  tract,  and  also  the  re- 
spiratory tract  on  the  body,  around  the  umbilicus.  The  respiratory 
tract  of  the  brain,  which  I  locate  in  the  Pons  Varolii,  has  its  exterior 
manifestation  around  the  nose  and  mouth,  through  which  we  reach  it. 


5     >  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

Any  disease  in  this  region  affects  respiration.  Hence  catarrh,  and 
the  morbid  growths  it  produces  in  the  posterior  passages,  may  become 
a  cause  of  asthma  as  well  as  of  bronchitis  and  consumption.  In 
such  cases  interior  treatment  of  the  nasal  passages  by  electricity 
(and,  if  necessary,  electrolysis)  may  become  necessary.  A  large 
sponge  electrode  on  the  nostrils  and  mouth,  with  the  other  electrode 
on  the  shoulder,  would  be  a  good  application.  Respiration  should 
also  be  stimulated  on  the  entire  respiratory  tract  around  the  umbil- 
icus. 

The  effect  of  stimulating  the  respiratory  tract  of  the  brain  through 
the  mouth  is  illustrated  by  the  experience  of  Onimus  and  Legros, 
who  found  the  best  restorative  from  asphyxia  to  be  a  current  from 
the  rectum  to  the  mouth.  This  is  explained  by  Sarcognomy.  The 
same  benefit  would  be  obtained  by  a  Faradic  current  between  the 
mouth  and  the  respiratory  tract  on  the  abdomen.  I  do  not  know, 
however,  that  the  location  would  be  any  better  than  the  middle  cer- 
vical region,  where  we  strike  the  origin  of  the  phrenic  nerves. 

The  most  direct  and  proper  treatment  in  asthma  is  by  a  Faradic 
or  an  alternating  current  on  the  chest  between  the  right  and  left 
sides,  through  the  location  marked  Inspiration,  just  in  front  of  the 
upper  part  of  the  humerus.  The  current  or  the  hand  applied  on 
this  part  produces  a  full  upward  respiration,  with  a  very  calm,  pleas- 
ant feeling,  overcoming  the  feeling  of  constriction  in  the  lungs. 
Stimulating  respiration  by  the  location  below  the  umbilicus  or  on  the 
face  just  above  the  chin  greatly  increases  the  depth  of  respiration, 
with  an  arousing  effect.  The  other  pole  may  be  applied  on  the 
dorsal  summit  or  on  the  centre  of  Health.  It  would  also  be  a  good 
combination  to  treat  upon  Inspiration  on  one  side  and  Health  on 
the  other,  treating  both  sides  of  the  body  successively.  Some  asth- 
matic remedy  —  such  as  grindelia  robusta,  for  example  —  should  be 
associated  with  the  positive  electrode. 

Phthisis  pulmonalis,  or  consumption,  which  is  mainly  a  tuber- 
culous disease,  admits  of  successful  treatment  by  electricity,  to  appre- 
ciate which  we  must  understand  its  nature.  The  researches  of 
Andral  and  Majendie,  too  little  studied  by  medical  authors,  show  that 
an  abundance  of  the  red  elements  of  the  blood  —  the  globules  or  cor- 
puscles,  as  they  are  called  —  is  the  indispensable  condition  of  good 
health,  which  gives  activity  to  all  our  powers.  The  decline  of  this 
element  marks  the  decline  of  vital  power  and  the  easy  entrance  of 
disease.  A  proper  development  of  the  red  elements  is  incompatible 
with  diseases  generally,  and  especially  with  consumption,  as  they 
vitalize  the  normal  structures  and  promote  the  speedy  destruction  or 
removal  of  abnormal  elements. 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMV.  589 

Normal  blood  depends  for  its  development  and  maintenance  chiefly 
upon  the  upper  half  of  the  brain  and  the  regions  of  Health  and  Vital 
Force  in  the  body.  Hence,  with  an  adequate  development  and  activity 
of  these  regions,  consumption  is  an  impossibility,  as  they  secure 
ample  respiration,  digestion  and  activity  of  the  secretions  which 
purify. 

A  defective  development  or  defective  exercise  of  these  functions 
predisposes  to  consumption,  impoverishing  the  blood  by  lack  of  diges- 
tion and  vitalization.  Degenerate  blood  deposits  tuberculous  material, 
which  in  time  develops  suppuration  and  a  variety  of  morbid  conditions 
in  the  lungs. 

To  vitalize  the  lungs  by  alternating  currents  between  Inspiration 
and  the  upper  dorsal  region  of  the  cord,  and  from  Health  to  Health 
on  the  shoulders,  is  the  first  indication.  Then  alternate  currents  be- 
tween Health  and  Vital  Force,  followed  by  active  exercise,  will  improve 
the  constitution  ;  and  similar  currents  between  the  lower  dorsal  region 
and  the  abdominal  surfaces  will  increase  the  power  of  the  digestive  or- 
gans, which  is  indispensable  to  recovery.  Large  losses  in  the  lungs 
by  tubercle  and  suppuration  may  be  recovered  from  if  the  digestive 
power  is  capable  of  yielding  the  material  for  a  good  supply  of  blood, 
to  accelerate  which  we  require  a  good  supply  of  the  most  nourishing 
food  and  liquids.  Animal  food  gives  the  richest  supply,  and  carniv- 
orous animals  are  free  from  tuberculous  diseases.  The  practice  of 
Dr.  Salisbury  in  feeding  his  patients  from  two  to  five  or  six  pounds 
of  beef  daily  seems  to  have  had  good  results.  Fat  meats,  cod-liver 
oil  and  hydrolein  are  used  with  good  effects  ;  and  the  mineral  elements 
of  nutrition  —  iron  and  the  phosphates — are  also  valuable. 

I  did  not  propose  in  this  work  to  lay  down  a  course  of  medical  treat- 
ment for  diseases,  but  in  speaking  of  electric  treatment  I  cannot  resist 
the  temptation  to  make  a  few  suggestions  as  to  remedies  which  may 
be  used  in  connection  with  electricity,  or  may  be  used  to  medicate 
the  electric  currents.  Everything  that  enriches  the  blood  is  valuable. 
Tonics  and  alteratives  are  largely  useful.  Common  salt  and  muriate 
of  ammonia  are  anti-tuberculous  and  promote  nutrition  and  health. 
Iodide  of  potassium  or  sodium  in  small  quantities  promotes  the  removal 
of  all  crude  or  unwholesome  elements  and  benefits  the  lungs.  Alnus 
rubra  (tag  alder)  assists  the  action  of  the  stomach,  promotes  all  the 
secretions,  and  has  a  beneficial  action  on  the  skin  which  tends  to 
relieve  the  lungs.  The  iodo-bromide  of  calcium  has  an  excellent 
alterative  quality,  like  the  tag  alder,  and  is  rather  more  soothing. 

When  the  condition  of  the  lungs  is  irritated,  feverish  or  inflamma- 
tory, gnaphalium  polycephalum  is  the  most  reliable  remedy,  and  may 
be  greatly  aided  by  the  soothing,  healing  qualities  of  tussilago.     De- 


590  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

clat's  syrup  of  nascent  pbenic  acid  is  a  febrifuge  which  has  a  fine 
effect  on  the  lungs,  and  Paraguay  tea  (ilex)  has  a  fine  effect  on  coughs, 
bronchial  irritations,  sore  throat  and  neuralgia.  Balsam  of  Peru  has 
valuable  soothing,  healing  properties. 

Drosera  is  very  beneficial  to  irritated  lungs.  Piscidia  and  Hyoscy- 
amus  are  soothing  nervines,  and  Cundurango  has  a  very  comfortable 
influence  on  the  constitution. 

Bronchial  irritations  are  benefited  by  Inula  helenium,  Sanguinaria, 
Yerba  Santa,  Collinsonia,  Coptis  (goldthread)  and  Quebracho,  —  the 
latter  chiefly  as  a  nervine  stimulant. 

Cannabis  Indica  and  Ergot  have  strengthening  effects  on  the  lungs. 
Constitutional  stimulants  may  be  found  in  Eryngium  aquaticum, 
Horse-chestnut  and  Nitrate  of  Ammonia.  For  the  general  develop- 
ment of  the  blood  and  vital  forces  we  may  use  Buchu,  Buckeye,  Red 
and  white  clover  blossoms,  Triosteum  and  Gillenia.  Alnus,  Angelica, 
Celery  seed,  Dandelion  flowers,  Lettuce  (Lactuca  elongata)  and 
Scrophularia  are  invaluable  for  the  stomach,  —  the  latter  two  soothing 
and  relieving  its  morbid  conditions. 

For  the  night-sweats  of  consumption  there  is  nothing  better  than 
Cinquefoil  (five-finger),  the  influence  of  which  is  very  wholesome. 
As  tonics  we  shall  find  Ptelea,  Hydrastis  and  Prunus  Virginiana 
(wild  cherry)  valuable,  — Ptelea  being  the  most  valuable  for  consump- 
tives. 

The  liver  may  be  relieved  by  Iris  versicolor,  Polymnia,  Grindelia 
squarrosa,  Gentian  and  Gentiana  quinqueflora,  or  by  the  mild  action 
of  Dandelion  and  Hepatica. 

Many  of  these  suggestions  are  based  on  my  own  investigations  and 
original.  If  time  permits  I  may  hereafter  review  the  materia  medica 
and  present  my  discoveries. 

In  the  treatment  of  consumption  its  hectic  conditions  may  be 
relieved  by  the  febrifuge  treatment  (Coolness,  Repose  and  Health), 
and  in  some  cases  it  may  be  necessary  to  stimulate  the  tibial  region 
to  tranquillize  morbid  conditions  in  the  lungs.  Perhaps  the  two 
most  important  functions  to  stimulate  are  Health  and  Vital  Force. 
The  adjacent  organ  of  Nutrition  is  also  important,  to  overcome  emacia- 
tion, and  should  never  be  neglected. 

Bronchitis  affects  the  portion  of  the  lungs  corresponding  to  the 
intellectual  organs,  and  therefore  has  a  sympathetic  symptom  in  pain  in 
the  forehead.  The  bronchial  region  is  congested,  inflamed  and  tending 
to  ulceration,  and  this  inflammation  extends  more  or  less  into  the 
lungs,  and  may  extend  up  as  far  as  the  larynx.  The  irritation  develops 
a  cough,  and  severe  disease  in  this  region  is  very  exhausting  to  the 
vital  forces,   especially  in  influenza  or  grippe,  and  tends  to  produce 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMV.  59 1 

much  oppression  of  the  brain.  It  is  generally  associated  with  fever, 
and  requires  febrifuge  treatment.  As  there  is  a  secondary  heat  cen- 
tre in  the  brain,  distinct  from  the  chief  centre,  the  medulla  oblongata, 
and  located  between  the  eye  and  ear,  there  is  a  corresponding  heat 
centre  in  the  chest,  below  the  mammae,  which  develops  a  feverish 
condition  in  affections  of  the  lungs  and  heart,  which  also  generally 
accompanies  bronchitis. 

This  disease  requires  the  positive  current  to  be  applied  over  the 
whole  extent  of  the  sternum,  and  the  negative  to  the  summit  and  back 
of  the  shoulder,  extending  down  upon  Coolness  and  the  entire  space 
from  that  to  the  spine,  thus  making  tonic  and  cooling  currents.  A 
similar  effect  to  this  is  produced  by  quinine,  the  influence  of  which 
on  the  brain  antagonizes  the  frontal  and  stimulates  the  lateral  occipi- 
tal region.  Hence  it  has  been  a  favorite  remedy  in  pulmonary  irrita- 
tions, notwithstanding  its  objectionable  effects,  which  make  it  inferior 
to  Gnaphalium  and  the  syrup  of  Phenic  acid. 

Currents  to  the  tibial  region  and  haemospasia  will  exert  a  decisive 
influence  on  bronchitis,  as  on  pneumonia. 

The  soothing  influences  of  Hyoscyamus,  Paregoric,  Tonga,  Bro- 
midia,  Paraguay  tea,  Hops,  Poppy  heads,  Balsam  of  Peru,  etc.,  will 
co-operate  with  Gnaphalium  and  syrup  of  Phenic  acid,  Sanguinaria, 
Drosera  and  Penthorum. 

Static  insulation,  which  acts  on  the  surface,  will  relieve  the  lungs, 
and  is  beneficial  in  all  pulmonary  affections.  Jaborandi  and  Crawley 
are  valuable  to  open  the  skin,  and  the  former  is  especially  valuable, 
as  it  has  a  decided  effect  on  the  larynx  and  bronchi,  somewhat  like 
Sanguinaria.  Ptelea  is  a  valuable  tonic  for  the  bronchial  patient, 
and  Saw  Palmetto,  recently  introduced,  is  an  efficient  restorative. 

Remedies  applied  on  the  chest  in  a  warm  poultice  of  althea  or 
althea  and  hops  have  a  good  effect,  which  is  increased  by  passing  the 
electric  current  through  them. 

As  chronic  bronchitis,  like  irritations  of  the  frontal  brain,  tends  to 
great  exhaustion,  it  needs  tonics  and  a  generous  diet,  almost  as  much 
as  consumption.  Animal  food  and  a  little  ale  or  porter  may  be 
necessary,  and  a  general  tonic  treatment  on  Health,  Vital  Force  and 
Nutrition,  as  well  as  on  the  upper  half  of  the  dorsal  region. 

Sarcognomy  shows  a  relation  between  respiration  and  the  abdomi- 
nal region.  Hence  the  lungs  are  materially  relieved  in  bronchitis  and 
pneumonia  by  the  action  of  the  bowels  produced  by  electricity  or 
by  gentle  cathartics,  such  as  Juglans,  Celandine,  Rhamnus  frangula 
(which  is  very  mild),  or  Iris,  Gentiana,  Bryonia,  Cascaraand  Phosphate 
of  Soda. 

Nauseant  remedies  divert  from  the  lungs  and  relieve  their  conges- 


59-  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [cilAP.    XXV. 

tion,  for  nausea  is  connected  with  the  pelvic  region,  and  may  be 
excited  by  the  current  from  the  front  of  the  chest  to  the  sacroiliac 
symphisis,  or  by  emetics,  of  which  a  decoction  of  lobelia  and  boneset 
(Eupatorium  perfoliatum)  in  equal  parts  is  one  of  the  best. 

In  Pleurisy  the  location  of  the  disease  would  indicate,  according 
to  Sarcognomy,  more  pain  and  irritation  than  in  bronchitis  and  con- 
sumption, but  not  so  much  as  in  some  diseases  of  the  lower  half  of 
the  body  ;  also  an  interference  with  pulmonary  respiration  requiring 
abdominal  breathing,  a  tendency  to  affect  the  brain  in  an  exciting 
way,  and  a  development  of  fever.  It  tends  to  extend  to  the  lungs 
and  develop  a  cough.  But  it  is  not  a  dangerous  disease  if  it  does  not 
lead  to  extensive  effusion  or  suppuration. 

In  all  inflammations  common-sense  and  experience  direct  us  to 
divert  the  congestion  from  the  inflamed  part.  This  is  easily  done  by 
cupping  over  the  inflamed  pleura  and  by  haemospasia  upon  the  arms 
and  lower  limbs.  To  these  promptly  efficient  measures  the  positive 
current  is  an  important  adjunct,  giving  tone  to  the  relaxed  blood- 
vessels and  diverting  both  blood  and  serous  effusion.  The  current 
should  be  sent  to  the  arms  and  lower  limbs,  especially  the  tibial  region 
and  the  region  of  Health  and  upper  dorsal  spine. 

Cathartics  and  diuretics,  as  well  as  moderate  diaphoretics,  are  bene- 
ficial in  all  inflammatory  affections  of  the  chest.  Hot  poultices  of 
hops  and  althea  or  elm  upon  the  pleuritic  trouble  are  very  beneficid; 
and  warm  water  alone,  in  the  form  of  a  wet  pack  of  maintained  warmth, 
is  beneficial  in  all  inflammatory  affections  of  the  chest.  The  benefits 
of  all  external  applications  are  increased  by  sending  the  electric  cur- 
rent through  them. 

When  much  serous  effusion  has  occurred  we  may  rely  upon  static 
and  Faradic  currents  to  disperse  it,  with  the  aid  of  diuretics,  of  which 
Galium,  Polytrichum  and  Hypericum  are  the  best,  which  may  be  aided 
by  Jaborandi,  to  act  on  the  skin. 

In  diseases  of  the  heart,  pericarditis,  endocarditis,  hypertrophy 
and  angina  pectoris  we  need  currents  from  the  heart  to  the  shoulder 
and  upper  dorsal  region,  reinforced  by  Convallaria,  Cereus  and  Even- 
ing Primrose  (CEnothera  biennis).  The  latter  I  have  discovered  to  be 
especially  valuable  in  organic  diseases  of  the  heart  and  its  valves  ;  it 
is  very  sedative,  soothing,  and  almost  soporific,  with  a  fine  influence 
on  the  bronchial  and  nasal  region,  larynx  and  throat.  The  Conval- 
laria (lily  of  the  valley)  I  think  preferable  to  Digitalis  as  a  tonic  for 
the  heart,  having  like  Digitalis  also  a  diuretic  action.  Cereus 
(grandiflora)  is  a  tonic  sedative  to  the  heart  and  brain — a  genial, 
anti-inflammatory  remedy.  The  Cereus  Bonplandii  may  not  be  equal 
to  the  grandiflora,  but  has  in  addition  a  decided  action  on  the  spleen. 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY,  593 

In  the  dilated  condition  of  the  heart,  which  is  a  condition  of  weak- 
ness, manifested  by  the  diffusion  of  cardiac  sounds  through  the  chest, 
the  Convallaria  would  be  good,  and  the  Strophanthus  might  be  used 
in  small  doses,  which  is  not  so  soothing,  but  is  a  stimulating  tonic  to 
the  heart.  General  tonics,  such  as  Coca,  Ptelea,  Saw  Palmetto  and 
Syrupus  roborans,  would  materially  assist,  in  connection  with  a  nourish- 
ing diet. 

Aneurisms  have  been  treated  by  inserting  needles  partly  insulated, 
through  which  a  strong  galvanic  current  produced  a  coagulum  of  the 
blood,  which  gives  some  relief  and  may  sometimes  cure. 

The  diaphragm  —  Erroneous  ideas  of  the  diaphragm  are  quite  com- 
mon. For  example  :  "  It  is  stated  by  Dr.  Golding  Bird  that  the  charge 
of  a  Leyden  jar  transmitted  from  the  pit  of  the  stomach  to  the  back 
causes  the  diaphragm  to  contract  violently,  expelling  the  air  from  the 
lungs  with  a  loud  shout."  This  is  reversing  the  action  of  the  dia- 
phragm. The  expulsive  action  and  shout  are  due  to  the  abdom- 
inal muscles,  the  diaphragm  being  an  inspiratory  muscle. 

The  treatment  of  the  diaphragm  has  been  explained  under  the  head 
of  asphyxia.  The  phrenic  nerve  coming  from  the  middle  cervical 
region  and  being  nearly  reached  on  the  middle  of  the  neck, 
while  the  corporeal  location  for  deep  respiration  is  three  or  four 
inches  below  the  umbilicus,  it  follows  that  Faradic  or  alterna- 
ting currents  between  these  locations  are  the  proper  method 
of  producing  deep  respiration.  But  as  the  diaphragm  itself  may  be 
reached  by  transverse  currents  through  the  trunk  at  the  seventh  and 
eighth  ribs  on  the  side,  that  method  also  is  efficient.  We  may  also 
stimulate  respiration  by  currents  between  the  cervical  region  and  the 
lower  end  of  the  thigh  behind  the  knee,  or  even  in  front,  above  the 
patella. 

Hiccough  is  commonly  referred  to  the  diaphragm,  but  is  chiefly 
an  affection  of  the  abdominal  muscles,  and  should  therefore  be  treated 
on  the  lower  dorsal  region  of  the  spine.  The  sedative  influence  of 
the  region  of  Patience  would  assist  in  its  treatment,  and  nervines  such 
as  Scutellaria,  Leonurus  and  Xanthium  would  assist. 

TREATMENT   OF   THE    ABDOMINAL    REGION. 

The  abdomen  is  the  battle-ground  or  seat  of  fever,  which  is  contin- 
uous in  proportion  as  the  location  of  the  disease  approaches  the 
region  of  Calorification. 

When  the  vital  power  of  the  spinal  region  is  sufficient  to  regulate 
abdominal  action,  we  have  proper  assimilation  and  excretion,  which 
produce  sustained  health.  When  that  spinal  power  fails,  disorders 
ensue,  of  which  fever  is  a  conspicuous  portion.     Hence,  treatment  of 


594  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

the  spine  by  manipulation  and  cupping  has  often  been  successful  in 
fevers. 

Electricity  has  great  power  over  febrile  conditions,  for  they  tend  to 
increase  impressibility  ;  but  the  medical  profession  has  failed  as  yet 
to  realize  its  value.  Dr.  Gale  of  New  York,  in  the  last  century,  was 
the  only  leader  in  this  direction,  but  without  followers. 

In  all  fevers  we  need  the  soothing  influence  of  electricity,  directed 
to  the  feet  and  legs,  as  well  as  to  Repose  and  Coolness.  As  long  as 
the  power  of  these  regions  is  maintained,  by  electrodes  on  the  tibial 
region  and  behind  the  humerus,  we  have  a  recuperative  influence 
working  against  the  fever.  Why  has  not  this  been  accidentally  dis- 
covered in  a  half  century  of  empirical  electro-therapeutics  ?  It  has 
not  entirely  escaped  notice,  as  we  find  in  the  California  Medical 
Journal  a  recommendation  of  Faradism  as  necessary  in  fever  to 
soothe  and  strengthen  the  patient.  It  proposes  to  hold  the  negative 
on  one  foot  and  pass  the  positive  all  over  the  other  limb,  then  to  hold 
the  negative  on  both  feet  and  pass  the  positive  over  the  trunk  and 
arms,  the  operator  holding  the  electrode  and  administering  through  his 
hands  —  which  the  writer  says  is  more  grateful  than  a  wet  sponge, 
but  of  course  does  not  perceive  the  reason,  for  the  reason  is  outside  of 
medical  dogmas.  This  is  a  very  beneficial  treatment,  as  the  writer 
was  convinced  by  experience,  but  needing  to  be  completed  by  the  cur- 
rent from  the  hypochondria  to  Coolness  and  Health. 

Dr.  Rockwell  speaks  of  the  reduction  of  the  pulse  effected  by 
general  Faradization  —  a  pulse  of  115  being  reduced  to  103.  This  is 
due  to  the  tonic  power  of  electricity  and  to  the  increase  of  vital  force 
from  stimulating  the  posterior  surfaces  and  lower  limbs,  relieving  the 
abdominal  oppression.  It  would  be  much  more  marked  by  direct- 
ing the  current  to  the  feet  and  to  the  locations  of  Tranquillity, 
Patience  and  Repose. 

In  all  fevers  we  need  the  influence  of  the  febrifuge  antiseptics  at 
the  positive  pole,  to  charge  the  constitution  with  their  restorative 
power.  We  need  currents  to  Health  from  the  hypochondria,  and  to 
Coolness  from  Calorification.  If  the  brain  or  lungs  are  much  affected, 
we  need  currents  to  the  tibial  region  from  the  anterior  base  of  the 
brain  and  the  anterior  base  of  the  chest.  We  need  also  currents 
from  the  abdominal  surfaces  to  the  lower  dorsal  region,  which  is  im- 
paired. 

Of  the  remedies  available  in  fever,  I  would  mention  Declat's  syrup 
of  Phenic  acid,  Dextroquinine,  Salicin,  Cornine  and  Gnaphalium,  as 
febrifuge  tonics.  Salicin  especially  antagonizes  painful  and  rheu- 
matic conditions,  and  Gnaphalium  has  a  special  bearing  on  the  lungs. 
Fucus  Marina  has,  in  addition  to  its  febrifuge  action,  an  alterative  in- 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMV.  595 

flucnce  and  favorable  effect  on  relaxed,  flabby  or  dropsical  conditions. 
Pyrus  malus  (apple-tree  bark)  is  a  tonic  and  slightly  astringent  febri- 
fuge, excellent  in  scarlet-fever,  puerperal  fever,  affections  of  the 
throat,  enlarged  tonsils,  enlarged  liver,  hemorrhoids,  summer  com- 
plaint and  dysentery.  Monesia,  though  not  especially  a  febrifuge,  is 
a  fine  antiseptic  tonic,  with  valuable  effects  on  the  throat,  lungs  and 
uterine  region. 

We  need,  in  addition  to  the  tonic  antiseptic  febrifuges,  those  reme- 
dies which  control  and  evacuate  the  morbid  materials  developed  by 
fever.  Bisulphite  of  soda  has  this  purifying  action,  controlling  decom- 
position and  resisting  microbe  development  and  pyemia.  Boracic  acid 
is  a  fine  antiseptic,  with  a  very  fine  influence  on  the  throat  and  brain. 
Condy's  fluid,  especially  as  an  external  application,  is  decidedly  febri- 
fuge, with  a  favorable  influence  on  lungs  and  stomach,  and  anti-bac- 
terial action. 

The  necessary  evacuant  and  restorative  influence  on  the  bowels  is 
found  in  a  number  of  remedies.  Chelidonium  (celandine)  is  a  very 
valuable  and  much  neglected  remedy.  Its  action  externally  is  sooth- 
ing and  healing,  fully  equal  to  arnica,  and  hence  it  is  valuable  as  an 
application  to  hemorrhoids,  and  its  influence  on  the  intestines  is 
more  favorable  than  that  of  aloes.  It  is  a  good  application  to  ulcers 
and  morbid  growths  generally,  and  affects  the  bladder  favorably.  It 
might  well  be  substituted  for  other  cathartics  generally.  As  a  very 
mild  and  healthy  evacuant  there  is  nothing  better  than  the  Juglans 
cinerea  (butternut)  in  fluid  extract  or  in  the  Juglandin,  which  com- 
pares favorably  with  that  mild  evacuant,  Rhamnus  frangula.  Iris  ver- 
sicolor (blue  flag)  in  fluid  extract  or  its  solid  form,  Iridin  or  Irisin,  is  in 
my  opinion  greatly  preferable  to  the  more  fashionable  and  harsh  Podo- 
phyllum and  Podophyllin.  It  acts  in  a  vigorous  but  restorative  manner 
on  the  liver  and  bowels,  with  good  effect  on  the  kidneys  and  womb, 
and  much  more  agreeable  effect  on  the  nervous  system  than  Podo- 
phyllin. Gentian  (Gentiana  lutea)  is  a  fine  alterative  tonic  for  the 
liver,  and  Leptandrin  is  a  pure  liver  tonic  ;  neither  of  the  two  is 
purgative. 

Chelone  glabra  (balmony)  is  a  fine  tonic  for  stomach,  liver,  spleen 
and  kidneys,  useful  in  fevers  and  after  exhausting  diseases.  Chianon- 
thus  acts  very  beneficially  on  liver,  stomach,  spleen,  kidneys  and 
bowels,  with  a  fine  soothing  and  relieving  influence  on  the  nervous 
system,  which  makes  it  valuable  in  bilious  fever,  though  not  actively 
evacuant.  Grindelia  squarrosa,  a  remedy  little  known,  is  a  very 
efficient  remedy  for  the  liver,  spleen  and  stomach,  having  great  power 
to  reduce  enlargement  and  congestion,  for  which  it  is  a  very  valuable 
external  application.    Rumex  (water  clock)  is  a  very  soothing,  purify- 


596  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

ing,  cooling  alterative.  Its  influence  on  the  brain,  stomach,  lungs 
and  female  organs  is  very  beneficial.  Polymnia  is  perhaps  our 
most  efficient  agent  as  a  powerful  alterative,  reducing  congestion  and 
enlargement  of  the  liver  and  spleen. 

Of  soothing  agents  in  fever,  I  would  mention  Hops  (Humulus), 
which  has  also  some  tonic  influence,  and  Evening  Primrose,  which  is 
especially  soothing  when  heart  and  lungs  are  affected.  Cereus  grandi- 
flora  is  a  sedative  which  is  not  debilitating  and  which  is  very  impor- 
tant in  all  affections  of  the  heart.  It  is  very  appropriate  in  fever. 
Leonurus  (motherwort)  is  a  fine  restorative  nervine,  in  fevers  and 
delirium  tremens,  which  has  no  objectionable  influence. 

To  tranquillize  and  relieve  morbid  states  of  the  stomach  we  may 
rely  upon  Lettuce  (Lactuca  elongata)  and  Scrophularia  Marylandica. 
Alnus  rubra  will  assist  in  promoting  the  flow  of  gastric  juice. 
Sambucus  nigra  (elder  flowers)  not  only  soothes  the  stomach  but  has 
a  fine  influence  on  the  skin,  and  is  very  appropriate  in  fever ;  but 
for  free  perspiration  we  rely  upon  Crawley  and  Jaborandi.  Nux  vomica 
occupies  an  indefinite  position  among  remedies,  having  a  fine  general 
influence,  which  may  be  appropriate  in  fever.  It  is  tonic  and  altera- 
tive, assists  torpid  bowels  and  liver,  and  sustains  the  nervous  system. 

For  stimulants  to  relieve  depression  we  may  rely  upon  Eryngium 
aquaticum  as  the  most  efficient ;  but  brandy,  wine  and  ale  are  some- 
times useful,  and  electricity  is  the  most  important  stimulant. 

So  far  as  diseases  are  dependent  on  microbes  we  must  depend  on 
the  new  remedies,  which  are  not  yet  fully  tested.  Of  these,  Pyok- 
tanin  appears  to  be  the  most  harmless,  and  has  a  fine  influence  on  the 
nervous  system,  as  well  as  controlling  power  over  inflammations. 

Intermittent  Fever  evidently  requires  a  current  toward  the 
shoulders  and  spine  ;  but  as  the  chill  is  approaching  there  should  also 
be  a  current  between  the  lumbar  region  and  Calorification.  In  the 
febrile  stage  the  current  should  be  from  the  hypochondria  to  the 
shoulders  and  to  Coolness  just  behind  the  humerus.  The  spleen 
and  liver  in  the  hypochondriac  region  should  receive  the  positive  cur- 
rent, but  at  the  beginning  an  alternating  current  would  be  best, 
followed  by  the  positive. 

Any  strong  impression,  to  rouse  the  spinal  region  and  the  occiput, 
would  repel  the  attack,  as  was  proven  by  Dr.  A.  Fenykovy  at  Nisch, 
when  the  military  stock  of  quinine  for  the  regiment  gave  out.  He 
ordered  that  the  patients  should  be  rubbed  twice  a  day  along  the 
spine  with  a  simple  ointment.  The  day  following,  the  ague  did  not 
appear,  and  he  has  used  this  treatment  since  with  such  success  that 
three-fourths  of  his  patients  have  recovered  without  any  quinine. 

Any  one  familiar  with  what  is  called  the  magnetic  treatment  woul 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  597 

undertake  to  cure  oy  manual  treatment  of  the  spine,  and  even  the 
common  rubber  seems  to  have  succeeded  in  this  case.  The  treat- 
ment of  the  spine  alone  in  such  cases  by  cupping  was  tested  by  Dr. 
Gondret  in  1850  (see  page  85). 

The  cure  of  ague  reported  by  Luke  Howard,  F.  R.  S.,  was  a  happy 
application  of  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy,  but  seems  not  to  have 
instructed  the  medical  profession.  The  patients,  on  an  insulating 
stool,  received  sparks  at  the  epigastrium  which  were  drawn  out  at  the 
spine.  The  cure  would  have  been  still  better  effected  if  the  sparks 
had  been  taken  from  the  back  of  the  shoulders  or  the  summit  of  the 
dorsal  spine. 

Mr.  Howard's  application  reduced  the  pulse  speedily,  if  made  in  the 
hot  stage ;  and  a  permanent  cure  was  made  in  a  few  treatments,  even 
in  obstinate  cases.  Why  should  not  this  be  the  method  in  all  fevers  ? 
In  applying  currents  thus,  the  effect  will  be  greatly  increased  by 
applying  the  proper  febrifuge  on  the  skin,  and  would  be  still  more 
decisive  if  the  skin  were  blistered  ;  which,  however,  is  rarely  required. 

In  other  cases  electricity  has  been  used  with  varying  success,  for 
want  of  guiding  principles.  The  Italian  Universal  Annals  says : 
«'  Electricity  has  been  used  by  Frank,  Borgini,  Aldini  and  others  ;  in 
these  later  times  by  Bossi  of  Rome,  by  Vizioli  of  Naples,  by  Shipul- 
ski,  Krasnogladof,  Deparquet,  etc.  Prof.  De  Renzi  of  Genoa  has  also 
largely  experimented  with  it,  and  has  found  that  in  the  majority  of 
cases  the  fever  is  stopped,  and  frequently  more  promptly  than  with  qui- 
nine. In  nine  cases  the  author  has  had  five  complete  cures,  two  better- 
ing, and  two  with  no  success.  They  were  treated  with  the  continued 
and  the  Faradic  current,  —  the  first  obtained  with  nine  to  sixty -two 
elements,  and  applied  five  to  fifteen  minutes  along  the  spinal  cord. 
The  Faradic  current  has  been  more  efficient  than  the  galvanic. 
These  experiments  have  confirmed  the  possibility  of  conquering  inter- 
mittent fever  with  electricity  ;  but,  so  far,  it  has  been  impossible  to 
ascertain  why  in  some  cases  a  rapid  and  complete  cure  is  obtained, 
and  in  others  an  incomplete  one,  and  what  are  the  best  means  of 
application  of  electricity,  and  when  it  ought  to  be  preferred  to  quinine." 

What  else  could  be  expected  from  a  purely  empirical  practice,  with 
no  principles  to  guide  it.  Cures  can  be  made  wTith  either  galvanic  or 
Faradic  or  static  electricity  by  those  who  understand  Sarcognomy. 
Merely  electrifying  the  spinal  column  is  not  enough  in  a  serious  case. 
The  focus  of  the  disease  is  at  the  spleen,  and  to  a  slight  extent  at  the 
liver.  Dispersing  positive  currents  from  that  location  are  therefore 
necessary,  and  may  be  preceded  by  negative  for  a  few  minutes.  The 
concentration  must  be  upon  the  shoulder,  aided  by  1  umbo-hypo- 
gastric treatment,  in  the  chill ;  and  concentration  from  the  hypogastric 


59$  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  :[CHAP.     XXV. 

region  to  behind  the  arm,  in  fever,  —  also  to  the  tibial  region,  if  the 
fever  is  high. 

But  as  the  patient  is  entitled  to  the  speediest  possible  cure,  the 
antiperiodic  febrifuges  should  be  applied  under  the  positive  electrode. 

The  importance  of  treating  the  spleen  was  demonstrated  by  Dr. 
Babaieff,  whose  experience  is  quoted  in  the  London  Medical  Record. 
He  found  that  Faradization  reduced  the  spleen,  and  cured  in  some 
cases  in  which  quinine  failed.  Dr.  V.  F.  Sprinion  is  also  quoted  as 
testifying  to  the  cure  of  his  cases  and  reduction  of  the  spleen  by  gal- 
vanic and  Faradic  currents.  Four  cases  of  intermittent  fever  were 
permanently  cured  by  him  with  Faradization  alone,  in  five  to  ten 
seances.  Thirty  cases  of  intermittent  fever,  —  tertian,  quartan  and 
quotidian,  —  cured  by  electricity,  were  reported  by  Dr.  Blackwood 
in  the  Medical  Bulletin  since,  and  fortv-two  cases  were  treated  and  gen- 
erally  cured  by  Dr.  Schroder  of  St.  Petersburg,  whose  principal  re- 
liance was  Faraclizing  the  spleen.  One-third  of  Dr.  Blackwood's  cases 
were  cured  by  a  single  application. 

Galvanism  is  efficient  in  reducing  enlargment  of  the  liver  and  spleen, 
but  should  be  aided  by  such  remedies  under  the  positive  pole  as 
polymnia,  dextroquinine  and  grindelia  squarrosa.  Careful  experi- 
ments have  proved  the  power  of  quinine  in  reducing  the  size  of  the 
enlarged  spleen.  Muriate  of  soda  and  muriate  of  ammonia  are 
almost  as  efficient.  The  reduction  of  the  spleen  and  liver  to  a  normal 
condition  removes  the  foundation  of  intermittent  fever,  in  doing  which 
we  may  receive  some  aid  from  the  iodide  of  potassium.  But  currents 
to  the  shoulder  and  spine  are  indispensable  in  the  treatment. 

The  principles  of  Sarcognomy  as  to  the  treatment  of  all  fevers  are 
clear  and  simple.  Currents  must  be  passed  from  Calorification  to 
Coolness  and  from  Disease  to  Health.  Currents  should  be  passed 
from  Calorification  to  the  tibial  region  and  foot  to  relieve  the  fever 
and  disturbance  of  the  brain.  Organs  that  are  congested  should  be 
treated  with  dispersive  current::,  to  the  spine  and  to  the  region  of 
Health,  and  the  lower  bowels  should  be  sufficiently  invigorated  by 
lumbo-hypogastric  alternating  currents  to  promote  the  expulsion  of 
effete  matters.  The  kidneys,  liver  and  spleen  should  receive  tonic 
currents  to  enforce  their  duties,  and  with  all  these  measures  we 
should  not  neglect  the  proper  febrifuges,  administered  by  the  medical 
electrode  or  in  a  wet  cloth  on  the  abdomen,  through  which  the  cur- 
rent is  passed.  In  addition  to  these  measures  currents  of  hot  water 
should  be  played  against  the  abdomen,  especially  at  Disease  and  Cal- 
orification, the  effect  of  which  would  be  increased  if  they  were  con- 
nected with  the  electrode  of  the  positive  current. 

In  all  abdominal  affections  of  an  irritated  or  inflammatorv  character 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  5.99 

the  treatment  would  be  similar  to  that  of  fever.  In  dysentery  and 
peritonitis  a  wet  cloth,  saturated  with  the  proper  remedies  and  laid 
over  the  entire  surface  of  the  abdomen,  should  have  the  positive  cur- 
rent passed  through  it  (the  electrode  gliding  over  the  whole  surface) 
and  the  negative  on  the  spine,  the  shoulders  or  below  the  knee, — 
generally  in  all  of  these  positions,  for  all  these  effects  are  needed. 
When  these  measures  are  used  they  will  rapidly  supersede  the  old 
methods  of  practice. 

Beard  and  Rockwell  maintain  that  the  Faradic  is  preferable  to  the 
galvanic  in  the  treatment  of  all  the  viscera  below  the  diaphragm,  and 
to  one  unacquainted  with  Sarcognomy  this  may  be  a  judicious  direction, 
if  it  is  understood  that  the  currents  are  to  be  antero-posterior,  — that 
is,  that  the  spinal  column  shall  be  included  in  the  circuit  with  the  vis- 
cera, —  for  we  thus  invigorate  the  functions. 

But  when  we  understand  Sarcognomy  we  perceive  many  occasions 
for  a  one-way  current,  which  is  the  galvanic  or  the  primary.  Such  a 
current  is  often  necessary  from  the  hypogastric  regions  upward  to  the 
shoulders,  to  overcome  the  ardor  of  fever,  the  depression  of  melancholy 
and  debility,  the  derangements  of  the  uterine  system,  and  the  morbific 
tendencies  of  the  hypochondriac  region.  It  is  also  sometimes  desira- 
ble to  send  a  current  to  the  abdominal  region  to  stimulate  inactive 
organs  for  a  few  minutes,  but  this  should  be  only  an  exception  to  the 
rule  that  visceral  organs  should  be  stimulated  in  association  with  their 
spinal  support.  This  joint  stimulation  is  well  given  by  the  Faradic 
current,  but  I  regard  the  alternating  galvanic  current,  supplied  by  a 
commutator,  as  more  appropriate  to  the  abdominal  region.  For  this 
purpose  I  have  devised  a  commutator  propelled  by  gravity,  the  speed  of 
which  may  be  increased  or  diminished  by  regulating  the  weight.  The 
liabilities  to  evil  in  the  galvanic  current  are  overcome  by  commutation, 
which  changes  it  from  a  one-way  to  an  alternating  current. 

The  Stomach.  ■ —  In  the  treatment  of  the  stomach  the  Faradic  cur- 
rent is  available  for  producing  emesis.  By  placing  one  pole  over  the 
stomach  and  the  other  in  the  throat  or  on  the  neck,  a  very  strong 
Faradic  current  (from  several  cells)  will  produce  efficient  vomiting. 
This  method  has  been  used  to  dislodge  obstructions  in  the  oesophagus. 
Vomiting  may  also  be  produced  by  introducing  one  of  the  poles  in  the 
stomach,  as  an  insulated  sound. 

The  galvanic  negative  current  in  gentle  application  produces  an 
increased  gastric  secretion.  To  produce  a  wholesome,  vigorous  action 
in  the  stomach,  we  should  associate  it  with  the  lower  dorsal  region  in 
our  treatment.  The  whole  gastro-intestinal  tract  shown  on  the  chart 
should  co-operate  with  the  lower  dorsal  and  lumbar  regions.  The 
layers  of  fat  on  the  front  of  the  abdomen  frequently  make  a  decided 


600  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

hindrance    to   electric    currents,  requiring   additional    electro-motive 
force. 

The  abdominal  organs  all  respond  to  Faradism.  The  stomach  may- 
be contracted  in  its  length  or  antero-posteriorly  according  to  the  dura- 
tion of  the  current.  The  circulation  and  normal  action  of  the  liver 
is  increased  and  its  congestion  diminished  ;  the  congestion  of  the 
spleen  is  reduced  and  the  gall-bladder  contracted.  A  gentle  galvanic 
current  from  the  mouth  to  the  anus  moves  the  bowels,  and  Faradic 
currents  are  by  some  preferred  for  stimulating  the  intestines.  The 
stimulation  of  their  contraction  is  generally  accompanied  by  increase 
of  their  secretions. 

In  all  treatment  of  the  stomach  we  must  associate  with  it  the  lower 
half  of  the  dorsal  vertebrae.  Doing  this  with  Faradic  or  alternate  cur- 
rents invigorates  the  stomach  and  overcomes  obstinate  vomiting,  but 
I  have  not  heard  of  the  application  of  this  method  to  sea-sickness,  to 
which  it  seems  so  appropriate.  I  hope  some  of  my  readers  may  have 
the  opportunity  of  applying  the  current  against  nausea  from  the  sacro- 
iliac symphisis  to  the  summit  of  the  chest  just  above  the  mammae 
and  also  to  the  location  of  Health. 

Nausea  and  vomiting  require  a  current  from  the  sacroiliac  sym- 
phisis to  the  mammae,  and  also  to  the  centre  of  the  scapula  (Health)  ; 
also  from  the  hypochondria  to  Health.  If  resulting  from  inability 
of  the  stomach  to  digest  its  contents,  alternating  currents  between 
the  lower  dorsal  vertebrae  and  epigastrium  would  be  proper.  Very 
gentle  currents  from  points  one  inch  exterior  to  the  occipital  knob 
and  half  an  inch  lower  —  which  is  a  nauseating  region  —  to  the  loca- 
tion of  Love  or  of  Health  would  be  beneficial.  Currents  of  hot  water 
on  this  spot  would  be  beneficial,  and  the  application  of  ice  has  been  suc- 
cessfully used.  Dr.  Leven  reported  success  by  the  application  of 
electricity  to  the  interior  of  the  stomach  with  the  oesophageal  sound. 

Nausea  and  vomiting  may  be  controlled,  like  all  other  conditions 
of  gastric  difficulty,  by  direct  invigoration  with  currents  alternate  or 
reciprocal  between  the  stomach  and  the  lower  dorsal  vertebrae.  This 
is  the  standard  measure  for  all  gastric  derangements,  and  has  been 
very  successfully  used  even  in  cases  of  very  obstinate  vomiting. 

Cholera.  —  The  great  disturbance  and  deficiency  of  electricity  in 
times  of  cholera  would  indicate  the  use  of  static  electricity  as  an 
invigorating  prophylactic.  This  opinion  has  been  advocated  by  Dr. 
Vigouroux  in  the  Progrcs  Medical. 

As  great  abdominal  congestion  and  general  prostration,  often 
attended  by  great  nausea,  is  the  characteristic  of  cholera,  it  is  certain 
that  strong  currents  from  the  abdominal  region  to  the  shoulders  and 
upper  occiput  would  antagonize  and  control  it,  if  given  with  sufficient 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  601 

energy  and  persistence  by  either  form  of  electricity.  In  severe  cases 
haemospasia  and  external  heat  (blankets  wrung  out  of  hot  water)  would 
add  greatly  to  our  control  of  it. 

To  this  I  would  add  vigorous  Faradic  or  alternating  galvanic  cur- 
rents between  the  lumbar  region  and  the  organ  of  Calorification. 

The  static  current  is  equally  or  more  efficient,  but  requires  the  aid 
of  a  commutator  to  act  as  an  equable  stimulant  to  the  spinal  and  vis- 
ceral system.  I  think  my  experiments  justify  the  assertion  that  an 
efficient  electric  treatment  will  control  cholera  more  effectually  than 
anything  that  has  ever  been  tried. 

Diarrhoeas  are  of  course  treated  on  the  same  principle  as  cholera 
and  readily  checked.  In  many  cases  the  domestic  remedy  —  salt, 
vinegar  and  pepper,  in  an  agreeable  dilution  — is  sufficient.  In  more 
serious  cases  Beach's  Neutralizing  Cordial  (rhubarb,  saleratus  and  pep- 
permint in  equal  portions,  with  brandy  and  sugar,  and  sometimes 
cinnamon)  or  a  little  monesia  or  salacin  would  relieve,  without  requir- 
ing professional  aid. 

Constipation  and  hernia.  —  Constipation  is  a  condition  in  which 
all  forms  of  electricity  may  be  useful.  The  galvanic  current  from  the 
mouth  to  the  anus,  even  in  the  simple  method  of  a  zinc  plate  in  the 
mouth  and  silver  electrode  in  the  anus,  is  a  good  remedy.  The 
Faradic  current  between  the  spine  and  abdomen  is  especially 
valuable  when  atony  or  relaxation  is  the  cause.  The  primary  cur- 
rent with  the  negative  on  the  spine  is  also  efficient,  and  the  alternating 
galvanic  is  better.  The  static  current,  either  continuous  or  inter- 
rupted, is  also  very  useful,  and  the  use  of  a  proper  purgative  in  the 
medical  electrode  renders  success  certain. 

Placing  a  negative  electrode  in  the  anus  and  moving  the  other  over 
the  abdomen  has  proved  efficient  in  some  difficult  cases. 

To  overcome  constipation  we  require  effective  treatment  of  the 
spinal  column  from  the  middle  dorsal  region  to  the  sacrum.  The 
ganglionic  nerves  along  the  column  have  no  insulating  material  and 
therefore  receive  most  freely  the  electric  current,  which  is  most 
effective  when  thus  applied.  Onimus  and  Legros  say  that  :  "  Our 
physiological  experiments  demonstrate  that  the  continued  currents 
never  provoke  energetic  and  efficacious  peristaltic  contractions  of  the 
intestines,  except  when  we  electrize  the  spinal  cord  or  splanchnic 
nerves.  We  must  act  on  the  spinal  cord  if  we  would  affect  the  intes- 
tinal contractions.  In  paralysis  and  other  nervous  affections  producing 
habitual  constipation  the  electrization  of  the  cord  produces  free  and 
and  frequent  stools."  It  also  restores  the  contraction  of  the  bladder, 
producing  a  normal  micturition,  and  the  current  to  the  stomach 
increases    the     secretion    of    gastric   juice.     The  alternate  current 


602  ELECTROTHERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

between  the  spine  and  abdominal  surface  may  be  effectively  used 
(the  spine  being  covered  by  an  electrode  of  vertical  length).  On  the 
other  hand  strong  interrupted  currents  or  intense  galvanic  currents 
affect  the  nerves  unfavorably,  arresting  peristaltic  action,  which  shows 
that  the  galvanic  is  more  appropriate  than  the  Faradic  current  for 
intestinal  action,  though  Onimus  and  Legros  say  that  very  feeble 
Faradic  currents  promote  peristaltic  action  and  Beard  and  Rockwell 
favor  their  general  use  for  the  abdomen 

Purgation  in  difficult  cases  is  effected  by  introducing  a  partially 
insulated  electrode  high  up  the  rectum  and  using  the  other  Faradic 
pole  on  the  lumbar  and  abdominal  surfaces.  The  Journal  of  the 
American  Medical  Association  gives  examples  of  its  success  after  the 
failure  of  purgatives  and  enemata.  The  applications  were  made  for 
ten  or  twenty  minutes,  and  repeated  at  intervals  of  three  hours. 

Dr.  Dewees  says  (in  the  N.  Y.  Medical  Journal}  :  "  There  is  in 
almost  all  cases  of  chronic  constipation  (from  entire  inactivity) 
excessive  dryness,  not  only  of  the  faeces,  but  of  the  mucous  surface  of 
the  intestines.  This  state  is  speedily  remedied  by  the  current,  the 
secretion  of  the  bowels  being  announced  in  a  few  days.  When  the 
nervous  prostration  is  very  great,  and  the  person  should  be  of  a 
relaxed  leuco-phlegmatic  habit,  the  gut  is  frequently  found  in  an  oppo- 
site condition,  being  relaxed  and  coated  with  a  gluey  mucus,  the 
presence  of  faecal  matter  not  being  noticed  by  the  bowel.  After  a 
few  days'  use  of  the  battery  this  becomes  remedied,  in  both  states ; 
the  intestine  is  stimulated,  and  a  secretion  of  fresh  mucus  takes  place, 
with  increased  propulsory  powers." 

A  remedy  so  powerful  in  intestinal  obstruction  must  necessarily  be 
valuable  in  cases  of  hernia,  when  strangulated  and  almost  impossible 
to  return.  Dr.  SuprienenKo,  in  1882,  demonstrated  this  in  a  case  of 
inguinal  hernia,  which  could  not  be  reduced,  by  applying  the  positive 
pole  on  the  hernial  tumor  and  the  negative  on  the  lumbar  vertebra, 
followed  by  application  at  the  umbilicus.  The  hernia  was  overcome 
in  about  two  minutes,  for  the  application  was  judicious.  In  a  still 
worse  case,  reported  by  Dr.  Pergamin,  after  twelve  hours  of  strangu- 
lation, fifteen  minutes  of  Faradization  and  two  minutes  of  manipula- 
tion, the  hernia  was  reduced.  Cerebral  stimulants,  as  they  divert 
from  the  pelvis,  assist  in  the  reduction.  Strong  coffee  or  belladonna 
may  be  used  with  benefit. 

Four  cases  of  hernia  have  been  reported  in  medical  journals,  in 
which  electricity  succeeded  after  other  treatment  had  failed.  In  one 
case  an  inguinal  hernia  of  ten  years'  standing  had  become  strangulated. 
Nothing  could  relieve  it  until  Faradization  was  tried,  which  made  an 
impression  in  a  few  minutes,  and  caused  a  total  disappearance  of  the 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  603 

swelling.  In  another  inguinal  hernia  of  twenty  years'  duration,  stran- 
gulated for  fourteen  hours,  it  could  not  be  reduced,  but  ten  minutes' 
Faradization  enabled  them  to  reduce  it,— one  electrode  being  applied 
to  the  swelling,  "the  other  to  the  ring  and  the  neighboring  abdominal 
walls."  In  another  case,  of  eight  hours'  strangulation,  fifteen  minutes 
of  Faradization  made  the  tumor  disappear.  Another  case  of  scrotal 
hernia  as  large  as  a  man's  head  was  Faradized  in  all  directions  and 
completely  reduced,  although  three  hours' labor  upon  it  had  previously 
failed.     These  cases  were  reported  by  a  Russian  medical  journal. 

Dropsy  and  Corpulence.- — That  dropsy  may  be  relieved  by  elec- 
tricity is  shown  by  a  case  reported  by  Dr.  Koenig  in  the  Revue  Med- 
icate (1830).  In  a  man  of  fifty,  after  suffering  lumbago,  dyspepsia, 
haemoptysis  and  cedematous  swelling  of  the  legs,  the  swelling  ex- 
tended to  the  abdominal  cavity.  He  had  costive  bowels,  scanty 
urine,  frequent  pulse,  enormous  distension  of  the  abdomen,  and  exten- 
sion of  the  anasarca  to  face  and  hands  —  yet  purgatives  and  diuretics 
did  no  good.  "Two  needles  were  then  inserted  from  one-eighth  to 
one-sixth  of  an  inch  into  the  walls  of  the  abdomen,  on  either  side  of 
the  linea  alba,  and  their  number  was  subsequently  increased.  These 
were  touched  three  times  a  day  with  the  wires  from  a  battery  of  sixty 
pairs,  twenty  or  thirty  contacts  being  made.  The  secretion  of  urine 
immediately  increased,  the  skin  became  moist  and  the  appetite 
returned.  No  internal  remedy  but  infusion  of  juniper  berries  was 
used.  In  four  weeks  the  oedema  and  ascites  had  greatly  diminished, 
and  a  few  weeks  later  the  patient  had  perfectly  recovered."  (Chan- 
ning.) 

Dr.  K.  reported  another  case  cured  in  the  same  way  in  three  weeks, 
and  also  similar  success  in  the  use  of  galvanism  in  dropsies  of  the 
joints,  in  which  he  advises  the  needles  to  be  introduced  deep  enough 
to  reach  the  bone  of  the  joint. 

Dr.  Schusten,  in  the  Revue  Medicate,  testified  to  the  successful  use 
of  electro-puncture  in  articular  dropsies,  pericardial  dropsy,  chronic 
hydrocephalus,  hydrothorax,  hydrocele  and  ascites. 

Thus  concurrent  testimony  shows  the  great  power  of  dynamic  elec- 
tricity over  all  effusions  from  serous  membranes,  as  Dr.  Gale  long  ago 
demonstrated  the  power  of  static  electricity,  and  Wesley  said  that 
"electrifying  cured  dropsies  supposed  incurable."  All  this  shows 
that  electricity  (especially  in  the  static  form)  is  a  great  invigorator  of 
organic  life. 

Hydrocele  is  readily  cured  with  fine  needles  about  four  inches  long. 
Dr.  Pecchioli  of  Sienna  originated  the  treatment  nearly  half  a  century 
ago.  With  four  needles  inserted  in  a  double  hydrocele  and  a  current 
between  them  from  a  small  battery,  the  fluid  was  nearly  all  removed  in 


604  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

five  hours.  Three  treatments  completed  the  cure.  Several  very  sat- 
isfactory reports  of  such  treatment  were  made  soon  after  its  introduc- 
tion. 

The  removal  of  dropsy  by  Faradism,  after  diuretics  and  all  known 
treatment  has  failed,  is  now  so  well  established  by  experience  that  we 
need  not  review  the  graphic  reports  of  such  cases.  I  would  rnerely 
suggest  that  it  will  be  more  efficient  when  the  kidneys  and  the  hypo- 
gastric region  are  treated,  —  the  former  increasing  the  urine  and  the 
latter  the  perspiration.  We  should  not  neglect  the  co-operation  of 
diuretics  and  diaphoretics,  which  may  be  included  in  the  current  and 
will  reinforce  the  electricity. 

The  Faradic  treatment  of  the  abdomen  from  its  front  to  the  spine 
is  a  valuable  measure  to  impart  vital  energy  to  organs  that  tend  to 
relaxation  and  congestive  enlargement.  Such  treatment  prolonged 
efficiently  would  improve  the  temperament  and  health,  and  diminish 
the  abnormal  fulness  which  is  often  a  personal  encumbrance.  But 
to  reduce  corpulence  we  need  in  addition  an  ascending  current  from 
the  organ  of  Nutrition  to  the  shoulders.  If  the  current  be  directed 
to  the  chest  above  the  mammae  the  moral  benefit  will  be  a  desirable 
acquisition  to  all  who  are  not  already  too  amiable  and  delicate. 

Rectal  diseases  may  be  treated  by  an  electrode  at  the  anus,  or 
a  flexible  electrode  introduced  in  the  rectum,  —  the  positive  current 
overcoming  relaxed  congested  conditions,  and  the  negative  serving 
to  dissolve  and  dissipate  tumors  or  morbid  growths.  In  rectal 
treatment  we  should,  as  with  all  viscera,  include  the  controlling  spinal 
region  in  our  treatment,  which  would  beat  the  upper  half  of  the  sacrum. 

In  the  treatment  of  hemorrhoids  the  dispersive  positive  current  of 
dynamic  or  static  electricity  is  generally  successful.  The  electrode 
should  be  insulated,  excepting  the  portion  applied  to  the  tumor.  In 
some  old  cases,  in  which  the  tumors  are  not  sensitive,  the  negative 
pole  may  also  be  used  ;  and  in  cases  requiring  surgery,  galvano-cautery 
is  used,  while  the  patient  is  under  anaesthesia.  The  tumors  may 
also  be  destroyed  by  electrolysis  —  inserting  platinum  needles  heated 
by  the  current. 

Dr.  Robert  Newman  of  New  York,  having  succeeded  in  the  cure  of 
urethral  stricture  by  electricity,  applied  the  same  method,  in  1871,  to 
strictures  of  the  rectum  with  success.  The  power  of  electrolysis 
against  morbid  growth  and  strictures  has  been  well  demonstrated  in 
practice,  yet  as  a  matter  of  course  still  has  the  opposition  from  dis- 
tinguished surgeons  which  is  regularly  arrayed  against  radical  prog- 
ress. 

In  this  treatment  the  galvanic  current,  regulated  by  a  milliampere 
meter,  is  applied  through  an  electrode  which  is  insulated,  ending  in  an 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDED    BY    SARCOGNOMY.  6o$ 

oval  nickel-plated  bulb  from  three-eighths  to  one  inch  in  diameter, 
increasing  as  the  stricture  is  expanded.  The  positive  pole  is  applied 
by  a  wet  sponge  to  the  hand  or  abdomen  of  the  patient,  and  the  neg- 
ative metal  bulb,  lubricated  with  glycerine,  introduced  to  the  stricture. 
The  current  is  gradually  raised  from  zero  to  as  much  as  is  well  borne, 
varying  from  five  to  fifteen  or  twenty  milliamperes,  but  generally  near 
five.  In  a  seance  of  from  five  to  fifteen  minutes  the  electrode  being 
kept  against  the  stricture  usually  overcomes  it  and  passes  through. 
The  current  is  then  reduced  to  zero  and  the  electrode  removed. 
11  Seances  may  be  repeated  in  one  or  two  weeks."  The  electrodes  are 
flexible  and  no  force  is  used.  In  some  cases  it  may  become  necessary 
to  use  needles  in  the  substance  of  the  stricture.  This  method  succeeds 
where  all  other  methods  fail,  and  if  it  does  not  make  a  complete  cure 
it  produces  decided  improvement.  Ten  to  fifteen  cells  are  commonly 
used  and  a  much  stronger  current  can  be  borne  than  in  urethral 
stricture.  The  patients  experience  great  relief  from  a  condition  that 
is  prostrating.     Rectal  diseases  derange  the  whole  nervous  system. 

Rectal  diseases  have  been  very  successfully  treated  by  electricity. 
Dr.  W.  S.  Shotwell  {Maryland Med.  Jour?)  claims  that  it  is  superior  to 
all  other  methods.  His  method  is  that  of  cutting  through  a  fistula 
with  a  loop  of  platinum  wire  by  a  cauterizing  current.  He  says  the 
wound  heals  well  without  any  dressing,  but  the  bowels  must  be  kept 
constipated  one  or  two  weeks.  Hemorrhoids  are  treated  also  with  a 
cauterizing  loop  of  wire  round  the  protruding  hemorrhoids. 

The  Liver.  —  We  are  told,  in  a  recent  publication  by  a  Professor  of 
Johns  Hopkins  University,  that :  "  No  effects  are  produced  upon  this 
organ  by  the  electric  current,  so  far  as  our  present  knowledge  extends." 
The  liver,  however,  is  not  an  exceptional  organ  in  the  human  body, 
and  it  is  easy  for  any  investigator  to  prove  its  excitability  by  electric- 
ity. It  is  therefore  astonishing  that  such  a  statement  should  be 
found  in  a  scientific  text-book.  Even  the  gall-bladder  can  be  made  to 
contract  by  direct  electrization. 

Dr.  Wilson  Philip  says  :  "  I  have  repeatedly  seen  the  same  effect 
upon  the  biliary  system  which  arises  from  calomel  ;  a  copious  bilious 
discharge  from  the  bowels  coming  on  within  a  few  hours  after  its 
employment." 

The  hepatic  secretion  is  best  promoted  by  alternating  galvanic  cur- 
rents through  the  liver  from  side  to  side  and  from  the  right  hypo- 
chondria to  the  spine  at  the  seventh  dorsal.  For  giving  tone  to  a 
relaxed  and  congested  liver,  I  would  use  the  Faradic  current.  Cur- 
rents between  the  liver  and  upper  dorsal  region  have  a  tonic  effect 
upon  it. 

Dr.  W.   H.  King,  in  a  recent  work  on  electro-therapeutics,  says  : 


606  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

"In  functional  disturbances  of  the  liver  I  know  of  no  remedy  equal 
to  galvanism.  A  medium-sized  electrode  (positive)  should  be  pressed 
down  under  the  ribs  as  near  the  liver  as  possible,  and  a  large  negative 
electrode  on*  the  back  in  such  a  position  as  to  bring  the  liver  between 
the  electrodes  ;  a  current  as  strong  lis  can  be  borne  should  be  passed 
for  ten  minutes  at  each  treatment,  and  repeated  two  or  three  times 
a  week.  It  is  sometimes  astonishing  how  the  symptoms,  such  as 
mental  depression  and  uneasiness  of  the  right  hypochondria,  depen- 
dent upon  it,  disappear.  After  an  acute  hepatitis,  which  has  left 
inflammatory  deposits,  this  same  treatment  is  very  efficacious.  In 
such  cases  the  current  can  be  reversed  with  advantage."  This  accords 
with  Sarcognomy,  and  is  the  language  not  of  a  book-maker,  but  of  a 
therapeutist. 

The  electric  current  should  be  medicated  with  Leptandrin  or 
Hydrastin  to  make  a  tonic  impression  on  the  liver.  To  excite  its 
secretion  we  may  use  Iris  or  Iridin,  Gentiana  quinqueflora,  Berberis 
(Barberry)  and  Cellandine.  To  overcome  congested  conditions  we 
may  rely  upon  Polymnia,  Grindelia  squarrosa,  and  the  tonic  power  of 
nitro-muriaticacid  in  a  weakly  acid  solution  applied  by  a  wet  cloth  or 
in  a  foot  bath. 

We  may  act  upon  the  gall-bladder  by  a  current  sent  at  the  lowest 
level  of  the  tenth  rib  on  the  right  side,  and  on  the  spleen  at  the 
corresponding  locality  on  the  left  side — marked  G  in  the  front  view 
of  the  viscera. 

Electric  development.  —  The  power  of  electricity  to  promote 
growth  has  often  been  demonstrated.  One  of  the  most  decisive  illus- 
trations was  the  experiment  of  Dr.  J.  Reid  on  a  frog  (A7!  Y.Jom-. 
Med.,  May,  1847),  the  spinal  nerves  of  which  were  cut  so  as  to  para- 
lyze the  posterior  limbs.  On  one  side  daily  exercise  of  the  limb  was 
given  by  a  weak  battery,  and  at  the  end  of  two  months  it  was  unimpaired 
in  development  and  strength,  while  the  other  limb,  without  electric  ex- 
ercise, was  reduced  to  half  its  size  and  its  contractility  impaired.  Elec- 
tricity sustains  not  only  the  nutrition  and  strength  of  the  muscles,  but 
the  normal  state  of  their  nerves,  on  which  their  strength  mainly 
depends.  Galvanism  has  not  so  much  effect  when  the  nerves  are  de- 
generate. Its  operation  is  to  raise  the  temperature  and  increase  the 
circulation,  which  is  followed  by  increased  muscular  power.  As  it 
operates  through  the  nerves,  the  spine  as  well  as  the  local  nerves 
should  be  under  its  influence.  Even  in  such  a  case  as  dropped  hands 
from  lead  poisoning,  which  would  seem  to  be  local,  the  best  effects 
were  produced  (by  Dr.  Bird)  by  sparks  from  the  upper  part  of  the 
spine.     The  local  treatment  was  not  usually  effective. 

To  promote  growth,  according  to  the  principles  of  Sarcognomy,  the 


CHAP.    XXV.]  GUIDKD    13V    SAKCOGNOMY.  607 

currents  should  be  directed  to  the  regions  of  Nutrition  and  Vital 
Force,  from  the  portions  of  the  chest  anterior  and  interior  to  the 
axilla.  The  purpose  will  be  promoted  by  stimulating  the  lower  dorsal 
region  and  the  adjacent  portions  of  the  back,  which  will  promote 
digestion  and  assimilation. 

TREATMENT   OF   THE    PELVIC    ORGANS. 

One  who  learns  by  experience  the  value  of  electricity  in  controlling 
all  female  conditions  and  diseases  will  realize  the  vast  amount  of 
suffering  endured  by  women,  which  might  have  been  prevented  by 
enlightened  electro-therapeutics.  I  have  just  been  treating  a  very 
intelligent  lady  who  had  for  years  suffered  terribly  at  her  menstrual 
periods,  sometimes  equal  to  the  pains  of  confinement,  with  prolonged 
debility,  without  relief  from  the  profession.  In  one  hour  after  I  began 
she  was  free  from  pains  and  discomfort,  and  passed  through  the  day, 
which  had  usually  been  a  period  of  suffering,  as  bright  and  happy  as 
in  her  best  condition. 

In  all  uterine  affections  electricity  is  of  supreme  value,  and  if  aided 
by  Helonias,  Aletris,  Cimicifuga  and  Viburnum  compound,  it  should 
relieve  women  from  menstrual  troubles  and  add  greatly  to  the  evolu- 
tion of  an  improved  generation. 

In  amenorrhoea  strong  stmiulation  is  needed  by  alternating  currents 
through  the  uterine  and  lumbo-sacral  regions.  In  some  cases,  where 
the  emotional  nature  is  depressed,  currents  between  the  mammae  and 
and  scapula  (Love  and  Health)  will  assist. 

In  menorrhagia,  a  strong,  tonic,  positive  influence  should  be  applied 
to  the  groin  and  the  uterine  region  —  the  negative  being  applied  to 
the  lumbo-sacral,  the  scapula  (Health)  and  axilla. 

In  dysmenorrhoea  the  condition  may  incline  toward  the  inaction  and 
feebleness  of  amenorrhoea  or  the  hyperasmia  and  relaxation  of  menor- 
rhagia, requiring  corresponding  modification  of  treatment.  An  alter- 
nating lumbo-hypogastric  current  is  generally  appropriate.  The 
influence  of  the  negative  pole  at  the  lumbo-sacral  is  most  important. 
Sometimes  it  is  necessary  on  the  scapula  and  axilla. 

Cases  of  menorrhagia  and  dysmenorrhoea  have  been  treated  heroi- 
cally by  the  positive  pole  of  galvanism  vigorously  applied  to  the 
womb  when  it  was  much  diseased.  Dr.  Mayo-Robson,  F.  R.  C.  S., 
speaks  of  using  a  current  of  150  milliamperes  for  eight  minutes  with 
the  positive  pole  in  the  uterus.  He  used  a  fifty-cell  Leclanche  bat- 
tery. For  such  a  powerful  current  the  circuit  between  the  poles  was 
probably  not  more  than  a  few  inches.  Through  the  entire  length  of 
the  person  it  would  probably  give  but  ten  to  fifteen  milliamperes. 
One  to  two  hundred  milliamperes  have  been  used  in  treating  fibroid 


COS  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

tumors  of  the   uterus  by  the  method  of  Apostoli,  which  destroys  the 
tumor. 

After  parturition  the  condition  is  similar  to  that  of  menorrhagia, 
and  requires  positive  currents  to  the  womb,  either  externally  or 
through  the  vagina,  carried  to  the  lumbo-sacral,  the  scapula  and  the 
axilla.  This  produces  a  prompt  and  satisfactory  recovery,  and  phy- 
sicians are  beginning  to  find  it  out.  Dr.  Apostoli  has  proposed  it  to 
the  Paris  Academy  of  Medicine,  recommending  after  labor  the  appli- 
cation of  the  primary  current  to  the  womb  eight  or  ten  times  in  six 
days,  and  in  cases  of  difficult  labor  fifteen  or  twenty  times  in  ten  to 
fifteen  days,  to  hasten  the  restoration  of  the  uterus  and  avoid  slow 
convalescence.  These  views  are  very  correct,  but  the  application 
might  be  made  twice  daily.  He  also  advocates  strongly  the  use  of 
Faradization,  in  every  case  of  labor,  as  safe  and  successful  —  an  opinion 
sustained  by  the  best  English  and  American  practitioners. 

The  plain  instruction  of  Sarcognomy  is  that,  as  electricity  (especially 
in  the  secondary  and  primary  currents)  is  a  powerful  muscle  contractor, 
producing  this  contraction  by  assisting  the  vital  force,  and  as  the 
lumbo-sacral  region  is  the  controlling  region  of  the  pelvic  organs, 
there  is  no  reason  why  we  should  not  use  alternating  currents,  Fara- 
dic  or  galvanic,  between  the  lumbo-sacral  and  uterine  regions,  when, 
ever  we  need  to  invigorate  the  womb  to  perform  its  full  duty  in  child- 
birth. 

Experience,  too,  has  amply  shown  that  this  use  of  electricity  is  far 
better  and  safer,  more  prompt  and  reliable,  than  the  use  of  ergot,  and, 
instead  of  exhaustingtor  injuring,  leaves  the  patient  in  far  better  con- 
dition than  when  she  is  exhausted  by  her  own  unaided  efforts. 

Various  methods  have  been  suggested,  none  of  which  are  so  proper 
or  beneficial  as  what  Sarcognomy  suggests.  To  reach  the  womb 
through  the  parietes  of  the  abdomen  does  not  bring  into  play  the 
sustaining  nerve  force  of  the  lumbo-sacral  region,  and  we  know  that 
nerve  force  is  necessary  to  sustain  any  action.  The  most  powerful 
action  is  produced  when  the  spinal  cord  is  stimulated,  and  Ziems- 
sen's  experiments  on  the  exposed  heart  show  that  a  current  directed 
to  its  ganglia  made  a  stronger  impression  than  currents  merely  to  its 
substance,  greatly  increasing  its  action.  Currents  applied  only  to 
muscles  are  much  slower  in  producing  effects  than  when  the  nerves 
are  included.  Hence  I  object  to  treating  the  uterus  without  the  aid 
of  the  lumbo-sacral  region. 

To  send  the  current  through  the  womb  vertically,  through  the  cer- 
vix and  fundus,  as  proposed  by  Dr.  Radford,  or  from  the  nape  of  the 
neck  to  the  os,  as  proposed  by  Dr.  McKenzie  (which  is  the  worst  of 
all  methods),  fails  also  in   stimulating  the  proper  spinal  region,  and 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  609 

involves  a  serious  clanger  to  the  head  of  the  child,  whether  it  is  toward 
the  fundus  or  the  os,  fur  a  strong  Faradic  current  might  be  fatal. 

The  current  between  the  cervix  and  the  abdominal  walls  at  the 
fundus,  which  is  the  only  method  proposed  in  the  work  of  Professors 
Liebig  and  Robe,  is  very  objectionable. 

Obviously  there  is  but  one  proper  method,  which  I  have  stated,  and 
the  current  should  be  an  alternating  or  reciprocal  one,  giving  strong 
stimulation  to  the  spine.  It  should  be  applied  so  as  to  reinforce  the 
efforts  of  nature  at  each  contraction,  or  may  be  used  to  rouse  con- 
traction, if  it  has  failed,  and  should  not  be  continued  long  enough  to 
produce  exhaustion. 

Thus  used,  it  diminishes  the  suffering,  promotes  expansion  of  the 
mouth  of  the  womb  and  completes  the  expulsion  of  the  placenta, 
operating  also  against  the  liability  to  hemorrhage  and  diminishing 
the  exhaustion.  Finally,  by  application  at  the  completion  of  labor,  it 
restores  the  tone  of  the  parts  and  promotes  a  rapid  recovery.  For 
this  object  we  need  the  positive  current  at  the  womb  and  groin,  with 
the  negative  at  the  lumbo-sacral  and  the  scapula. 

It  may  also  be  necessary  sometimes  to  relieve  the  depression  of  the 
patient  by  a  current  from  Melancholy  to  Cheerfulness. 

The  applications  to  the  parturient  woman  should  be  by  broad  elec- 
trodes or  by  the  hand  of  the  operator,  using  a  wrist  band  to  give  the 
current  to  his  hand,  with  which  he  may  give  the  manual  pressure 
desired  and  also  learn  the  progress  of  the  case ;  the  use  of  his  hand 
moderating  the  current  and  keeping  him  well  informed  of  its  strength. 
There  has  been  a  great  deal  of  heroic  treatment  of  the  womb  by 
surgeons  which  electricity  renders  unnecessary. 

In  the  words  of  Dr.  G.  B.  Massey,  electricity  is  an  absolute  substi- 
tute for  sharp  curetting  in  all  cases,  and,  where  it  can  be  conveniently 
performed,  this  operation  is  unjustifiable  in  the  future.  As  compared 
with  caustic  and  caustic  solutions,  it  possesses  the  advantages  of  being 
easily  and  absolutely  controllable,  permitting  either  an  alkaline  or  an 
acid  caustic  action  to  begin  gradually  and  be  terminated  at  any  desired 
instant,  accompanied  at  the  same  time  by  a  distant  action  of  a  salu- 
tary nature.  The  caustic  effect,  moreover,  may  be  confined  to  the 
interior  of  the  uterine  cavity,  leaving  the  cervical  mucous  membrane 
untouched,  or  vice  versa,  by  the  use  of  a  form  of  intra-uterine  elec- 
trode devised  by  the  author.  As  a  means  of  controlling  hemorrhage 
from  the  uterine  cavity,  whether  due  to  malignant  disease  or  not, 
powerful  positive  cauterization  is  unequalled."  "  It  is  an  agent  capable 
of  being  properly  applied  without  the  need  of  a  very  great  amount  of 
technical  skill.  Unfortunately  such  a  student  must  also  consent  to 
abstain  from  reading  any  but  the  most   recent  works  upon  electro- 


OlO  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

therapeutics."  "  I  have  more  than  once  been  simply  astounded  at  the 
lack  of  acquaintance  with  elementary  physics  on  the  part  of  physi- 
cians actively  engaged  in  this  work." 

Stricture  of  the  urethra,  which  results  most  generally  from  sex- 
ual abuse  and  excess  as  well  as  venereal  disease,  and  is  generally  pre- 
ceded by  inflammation,  occupies  the  most  sensitive  part  of  the  human 
constitution,  which  has  the  most  powerful  influence  over  vitality,  act- 
ing directly  through  the  lumbo-sacral  region.  It  produces  sexual 
debility  as  well  as  nervous  prostration.  Bougies  of  soothing  and 
tonic  character  introduced  into  the  urethra  give  relief  and  sometimes 
cure,  but  electricity  is  the  reliable  treatment. 

The  cure  is  effected  by  electrolysis ;  that  is,  the  dissolution  and 
absorption  of  the  morbid  structures,  and  removal  of  the  afflux.  The 
positive  current  externally  is  proper  for  the  latter,  but  a  mild  applica- 
tion of  the  negative  pole  in  the  urethra  is  what  is  required.  Force  is 
not  used,  nor  anything  at  all  painful.  It  is  administered  by  a  metal 
rod  with  a  bulb  on  the  end,  about  half  an  inch  long  —  the  rest  of  the 
rod  being  insulated  by  a  catheter.  The  negative  pole  is  less  painful 
than  the  positive  in  this  application.  The  alkaline  development  by 
the  negative  pole  causes  the  dissolution  and  absorption.  The  cur- 
rents must  be  weak  ;  strong  currents  are  injurious.  The  positive 
pole  is  quite  objectionable  in  the  urethra,  as  it  coagulates  the  blood 
and  produces  a  hard  cicature.  The  Faradic  current,  which  is  useful 
as  a  tonic,  is  beneficially  used  in  spasmodic  stricture. 

This  method  of  galvanic  chemical  absorption  has  been  demonstrated 
by  Dr.  Robert  Newman.  In  some  tough,  obstinate  cases,  however, 
he  uses  strong  currents  and  leaves  the  catheter  in  the  urethra  to  pre- 
vent adhesions. 

The  positive  pole,  in  these  treatments,  he  placed  in  the  patient's 
hand  or  on  the  thigh,  or  the  supra-pubic  region.  In  treatment  of  the 
genitals,  from  four  to  eight  cells  are  usually  sufficient.  Repetitions 
of  the  application  were  made  by  Dr.  Newman  but  once  in  from  two 
to  four  weeks.      He  warns  against  frequent  repetitions. 

Of  course  there  is  danger  of  urethral  fever  if  harsh  or  imprudent 
methods  are  used,  but  by  the  combination  of  medicine  with  electric- 
ity, as  in  using  medicated  currents  and  also  medicated  bougies,  I  think 
all  unfavorable  results  may  be  prevented.  Currents  which  would 
produce  inflammation  may  be  used  if  guarded,  as  medical  electricity, 
by  cocaine  or  theine. 

"Electrode  bougies"  (says  Dr.  Newman,  who  has  been  most  suc- 
cessful in  the  management  of  stricture)  "are  firm  sounds  insulated 
with  a  hard-baked  mass  of  rubber.  The  curve  of  the  bougies  is  short. 
The  problem   is  to  absorb  the  stricture,  not  to  cauterize,"  by  "weak 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  6ll 

currents  at  long  intervals."  "  As  a  general  rule,  six  to  twelve  cells 
may  be  used."  "  All  strictures  are  amenable  to  treatment  by  electro- 
lysis." "  Pain  should  never  be  inflicted."  "For  the  absorption  of 
the  stricture,  the  negative  pole  is  always  used."  "For  the  positive 
pole  a  carbon  electrode  is  used,  covered  with  sponge,  moistened  with 
warm  water,  and  held  against  the  cutaneous  surface  of  the  patient's 
hand,  thigh  or  abdomen." 

The  location  of  the  positive  pole  is  not  a  matter  of  indifference. 
The  nearer  it  is  placed,  the  milder  must  the  current  be.  Any  part  of 
the  hypogastric  region  (the  front  of  the  pelvis)  would  be  appropriate. 

Impotence  may  be  treated  both  by  galvanic  and  Faradic  currents 
between  the  lumbo-sacral  and  sacral  locations  and  the  genitals,  which 
may  be  placed  in  a  cup  of  warm  water.  The  posterior  electrode  has 
been  placed  also  in  the  rectum  with  success. 

In  cases  of  Spermatorrhoea  a  current  from  the  groin  to  the  lumbo- 
sacral region  is  the  most  appropriate.  The  positive  pole  was  applied 
to  the  perineum  successfully  by  Dr.  Newman. 

SKIN   AND    LIMBS. 

Skin  diseases  are  effectively  treated  by  galvanic  currents.  As  a 
general  rule  the  negative  current  may  be  applied  through  a  sponge 
or  roller  electrode,  followed  by  the  positive.  The  sponge  should  be 
saturated  with  the  proper  remedies,  among  which  I  would  mention 
Sambucus  (elder  flowers),  Parcira  brava,  borax,  alkaline  washes, 
carbolic  acid,  menthol,  veratrum  viride,  campho-phenique,  camphor 
and  salicylic  acid,  equal  parts,  rubbed  together  with  water,  like  honey 
and  subnitrate  of  bismuth. 

Galvanism  was  successfully  applied  to  a  case  of  cedematous  ery- 
sipelas (see  Boston  Med.  and  Surg.  Jozir.y  Oct.y  1846)  occupying  the 
whole  limb  from  groin  to  foot,  enormously  enlarged.  The  galvanic 
current  through  the  limb  greatly  improved  it,  and  reduced  it  to  one- 
half  of  its  size. 

Felons  may  be  successfully  treated  by  the  positive  pole  of  either 
the  galvanic  or  Faradic  current.     Both  have  been  successfully  used. 

Cancers  are  beginning  to  be  treated  by  electricity,  and  the  results 
indicate  that  this  may  become  the  most  successful  method. 

Treatment  of  limbs.  —  Sprains  are  promptly  relieved  by  galvan- 
ism, which  relieves  the  "sprain  immediately. 

Rheumatism,  like  neuralgia,  in  chronic  cases  sometimes  requires 
severe  treatment.  If  the  positive  pole  is  placed  near  a  rheumatic 
joint,  with  a  broad  carbon  or  sponge  electrode,  and  on  the  other  side  a 
metallic  wire  brush  applied  on  the  negative, —  which  is  a  very  frequent 
method,—  the  combined  effect  of  the  current  and  the  counter-irritation 


6l2  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

on  the  skin  will  relieve  cases  in  which  other  methods  fail.  Prof.  Seeiig- 
muller  reports  its  success  in  a  German  journal.  A  similar  success 
is  obtained  with  static  electricity,  when  sparks  are  vigorously  drawn 
so  as  to  irritate  the  skin. 

Rheumatic  swellings  of  the  joints  and  other  parts  were  cured  by 
Dr.  Hoering  of  Heilbronn  by  galvanism. 

Dynamic  electricity  was  successfully  employed  by  M.  Heller  of 
Stuttgard  to  cure  a  case  of  false  articulation  with  callous  overgrowth 
from  a  fracture  of  the  thigh  of  eight  months'  duration.  Twelve 
applications,  with  one  pole  on  the  tumor,  the  other  applied  to  the 
hand  or  foot,  produced  complete  absorption  of  the  callus. 

Contractions  from  paralysis  or  rheumatism  require  galvanism. 
A  case  is  reported  by  M.  Breschet  (Hotel  Dieu)  of  permanent  spas- 
modic contraction  of  the  fingers  cured  by  galvano-puncture  (twenty- 
five  or  thirty  plates  being  used)  after  twelve  applications. 

Dr.  Hoering  reports  a  case  of  spontaneous  luxation  of  the  femur 
of  the  left  thigh,  in  which  the  ligaments  were  strengthened  by  elec- 
tric treatment  applied  to  the  left  sacral  and  inguinal  regions,  with 
success  after  sixty-four  applications  of  fifteen  minutes.  Curvature  of 
the  spine  and  weakness  of  the  back  have  been  treated  beneficially  by 
electricity,  which  in  cases  of  curvature  strengthens  the  muscles. 

USE    OF    APPARATUS. 

For  the  foregoing  treatment  the  common  portable  battery,  costing 
ten  or  fifteen  dollars  and  supplied  with  a  muriate  of  ammonia  cell,  will 
give  good  results,  which  will  be  greatly  enhanced  by  using  the  medi- 
cal electrode  and  adapting  the  remedy  to  the  patient.  A  great  addi- 
tion is  also  made  by  magnetism,  increasing  the  soothing,  sustaining 
and  tonic  influence,  especially  fitting  it  for  fever,  inflammation  and 
nervous  debility.  This  combination  is  effected  in  my  magnetic 
battery. 

The  unwieldly  size  and  cost  of  the  galvanic  battery  has  limited 
their  use,  but  by  combining  the  cells  with  a  magnetic  coil,  to  give 
electro-motive  force,  a  powerful  galvanic  battery  can  be  produced,  not 
weighing  over  ten  pounds,  and  therefore  very  portable,  while  costing 
but  half  as  much  as  the  usual  style  of  battery  of  equal  force. 

The  maximum  therapeutic  value  of  electric  apparatus,  however,  is 
found  in  the  statico-magnetic  machine.  In  this  the  nervous  stimula- 
tion of  static  electricity  is  combined  with  the  deeper  and  more  per- 
manent action  of  magnetism,  a  tonic,  soothing  and  conservative  agent, 
operating  upon  the  tissues  in  a  restorative  manner,  and  thus  supplying 
all  that  is  lacking  in  static  electricity.  When  the  static  current  is 
also  combined  with  a  medical  influence,  it  becomes  competent  to  pro- 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  6l3 

duce  cures  so  prompt  and  marvellous  as  to  excite  astonishment.  The 
expense  of  ^uch  apparatus  and  its  imperfect  construction  have 
hindered  its  adoption,  but  even  the  most  imperfect  static  apparatus 
yields  admirable  results  in  practice,  and  makes  a  successful  impres- 
sion on  any  form  of  disease. 

The  idea  given  out  by  some  physicians  and  manufacturers,  that  no 
satisfactory  results  can  be  obtained  from  instruments  costing  less 
than  three  or  four  hundred  dollars,  is  absolutely  untrue.  A  static 
apparatus  with  my  improvements  for  magnetic  and  medicated  cur- 
rents can  be  furnished  for  from  sixty  to  seventy-five  dollars,  which 
will  accomplish  all  that  is  realized  by  the  most  costly  machines  in 
the  way  of  electric  potency,  and  many  curative  results  beyond  their 
power.  The  static  apparatus  with  my  modifications  can  give  two 
distinct  therapeutic  treatments  at  the  same  time  to  two  patients, 
which  treatments  may  be  essentially  different. 

Of  the  value  of  mineral  magnetism  as  a  hygienic  power,  and  the 
method  of  using  it,  an  additional  chapter  would  be  required  for  a 
proper  exposition,  but  it  would  delay  this  volume,  which  has  already 
been  delayed  so  long  that  I  must  postpone  that  subject  to  a  special 
treatise  on  electricity  and  electro-therapeutics,  which  I  have  long 
contemplated. 

Electro-puncture  (introduced  in  1816)  is  performed  with 
needles  not  oxidizable,  such  as  gold,  silver,  platinum  or  aluminum. 
It  is  powerful  in  the  treatment  of  tumors  and  in  producing  coagula- 
tion in  aneurisms.  With  a  strong  current  the  needles  may  be  made 
red-hot  for  cautery.  Two  or  three  large  cells  will  be  sufficient.  It 
is  also  successful  in  the  severest  cases  of  neuralgia.  Majendie,  with 
the  electro-magnetic  apparatus,  cured  a  case  of  most  intense  and 
insupportable  neuralgia  in  the  superior  maxillary  nerve  of  the  left 
side  of  the  face,  in  a  few  minutes,  by  inserting  the  positive  needle 
near  the  origin  of  the  nerve  and  the  negative  near  its  terminations. 
In  treating  neuralgia  of  the  tongue  by  this  method,  the  pain  was 
driven  into  the  mental  branch  of  the  inferior  maxillary  ;  from  that  it 
was  expelled  in  the  same  way,  and  went  to  the  infra-orbital  nerve,  from 
which  it  was  finally  expelled  at  the  same  sitting. 

The  first  application  uniformly  relieves,  but  repetition  is  needed  to 
perfect  the  cure. 

Galvanism  is  employed  with  equal  success  either  by  puncture  or 
by  contact,  and  in  severe  cases  strong  enough  to  excoriate  the  skin, 
as  from  a  forty-cell  battery.  Perspiration  of  the  part  is  a  common 
effect.  In  sciatica  the  cm  rent  is  passed  down.  There  is  ample 
evidence  of  the  success  of  this  practice  in  the  worst  cases.  But  relief 
is  also  obtained  from  static  electricity  by  drawing  sparks,  which  is 


614  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTICS  [CHAP.    XXV. 

more  agreeable.  No  matter  where  the  neuralgia,  or  how  severe,  elec- 
tricity furnishes  a  cure. 

Obstinate  cases  of  chronic  rheumatism  have  also  been  successfully- 
treated  by  electro-puncture,  and  gout  has  been  heroically  treated  by 
French  physicians  —  the  platinum  needles  being  inserted  in  the 
inflamed  part  and  made  incandescent,  so  as  to  produce  an  ulcer,  which 
serves  for  counter-irritation. 

Cauterization  is  a  successful  remedy  for  poisoned  wounds,  if  promptly 
applied.  Two  dogs  were  inoculated  with  the  saliva  of  a  rabid  dog  at 
Alfort  Veterinary  College.  One  died  in  twenty-eight  days  with 
hydrophobia.  On  the  other  the  wound  was  cauterized  with  a  forty- 
eight-cell  battery,  producing  an  eschar,  which  was  detached  on  the 
twelfth  day,  preventing  hydrophobia.  In  another  case  of  a  dog  bit- 
ten by  a  rabid  animal  and  cauterized  forty '-four  hours  afterward  there 
was  no  symptom  of  the  disease  after  four  months.  Another  pair  of 
dogs  was  inoculated  with  saliva  of  a  rabid  dog,  one  of  which  died  of 
hydrophobia  in  twelve  days,  and  the  other,  cauterized  after  fifty  four 
hours,  was  still  well  four  months  afterward. 

MEDICAL  ELECTRICITY. 

The  transmission  of  medical  potencies  by  a  current  of  electricity 
has  long  been  with  me  a  familiar  fact,  although  it  has  been  excluded 
from  the  knowledge  of  the  medical  profession  by  the  materialistic 
dogmatism  of  the  colleges.  But  for  this  dogmatism  it  would  long 
since  have  become  known.  Physicians  using  electric  apparatus,  and 
discovering  transmission  of  disease  to  themselves  from  patients  when 
they  hold  the  negative  electrode,  would  have  learned  the  carrying 
power  of  electricity.  They  would  also  have  observed  the  difference 
in  electric  currents  from  different  apparatus,  and  the  unpleasant  me- 
tallic influence  from  the  apparatus  in  common  use. 

To  those  who  are  familiar  with  psychometry,  and  who  know 
that  a  medical  potency  can  be  felt  from  remedies  held  in  the  hands 
without  actual  contact  of  the  medicine,  the  increased  transmission  of 
that  influence  by  the  addition  of  a  current  does  not  appear  strange. 

I  have  been  accustomed  to  instruct  my  students  by  placing  them  in 
a  group  with  joined  hands,  generally  moistened,  and  sending  a  current 
through  the  group,  which  has  passed  through  a  small  portion  of  med- 
icine, which  is  sometimes  used  to  saturate  a  piece  of  cloth  or  placed  in 
a  convenient  electrode.  The  effect  is  always  felt  throughout  the  group 
by  each  one,  but  with  different  degrees  of  intensity  in  proportion  to 
their  sensibility.  When  their  sensibility  is  equal,  it  is  generally 
felt  first  by  those  nearest  the  medicine.  They  are  generally  able  to 
describe  the  influence  and  properties  of  the  medicine  as  well  as  if  they 
had  taken  an  effective  dose. 


3/-a/rt  d  Pulse. 


As  the  reader  will  much  better  appreciate  the  contents  of  this  volume  by  having 
even  a  limited  knowledge  of  the  demonstrated  cerebral  science,  which  is  the  main 
body  of  Anthropology,  I  present  here  an  illustration  of  the  general  character  of  the 
different  surfaces  of  the  brain,  ascertained  by  exploration  of  its  exterior  and  interior 
regions  —  its  basilar  surfaces  being  represented  through  the  face  and  neck.  Each 
large  division  contains  almost  innumerable  subdivisions,  for  I  doubt  if  any  two 
adjacent  portions  of  the  same  convolution  have  precisely  the  same  function.  The 
subdivision  has  been  carried  as  far  as  seemed  judicious  and  practical,  in  my  pub- 
lished busts  and  charts,  in  which  one  hundred  and  twenty-four  subdivisions  are 
presented,  but  are  still  incomplete  statements  of  the  various  powers  of  the  soul  and 
organs  of  the  brain. 

The  physiological  action  of  the  brain  upon  the  circulation  as  determined  by  exper- 
iments, is  shown  in  the  other  engraving  by  the  modifications  which  each  region 
makes  in  the  pulse. 

The  entire  science  of  the  brain,  with  its  derivative  sciences  of  Psychometry,  Path- 
ognomy,  Pneumatology,  Zoology,  Archaeology,  Sociology,  etc.,  introducing  a  new 
world  of  thought,  will  appear  in  the  Syllabus  of  Anthropology.  The  demon- 
strated doctrines  of  this  science  are  in  harmony  with  the  most  recent  demonstrations 
by  vivisection,  though  discovered  nearly  fifty  years  ago.  They  confirm  many  of  the 
discoveries  of  Gall  and  Spurzheim,  but  modify  or  reject  others.  They  have  long 
been  demonstrated  in  my  collegiate  lectures,  and  have  been  demonstrated  as  often 
as  I  thought  necessary  before  scientific  committees  with  universal  acceptance.  That 
I  have  not  recently  been  engaged  in  urging  them  on  professional  or  public  attention, 
is  due  to  the  fact  that  professional  men,  even  when  convinced  of  scientific  truths  of 
a  revolutionary  character,  have  generally  no  disposition  whatever  to  engage  in  the 
cultivation  of  a  science  foreign  to  all  collegiate  teachings  and  entirely  unfamiliar  to 
their  patrons.  I  hold  myself  ever  ready  to  repeat  the  demonstration  of  the  psychic 
and  physiological  functions  of  the  brain  whenever  any  body  of  scientists  worthy  of 
such  attention  shall  engage  in  the  investigation.     If  the  French  Academy  or  any 

similar  body  in  England  should  ask  for  a  verification  I  would  go  abroad  to  meet  them. 

(OpP.  p.  615.) 


CHAP.  XXV.]  GUIDED  BY  SARCOGNOMY.  615 

When  the  medicine  is  concealed  in  an  electrode  its  effect  is  not  di- 
minished, and  the  description  is  soon  given.  When  visited  by  Dr.  A., 
a  very  intelligent  physician,  actively  engaged  in  the  use  of  electricity, 
I  placed  in  his  hands  an  electrode  in  which  I  had  concealed  a  fluid  ex- 
tract of  hyoscyamus.  When  the  current  was  passed,  he  promptly 
recognized  a  soothing  nervine  influence,  and  in  less  than  a  minute 
expressed  the  opinion  that  the  medicine  was  hyoscyamus. 

I  could  procure  as  many  testimonials  to  such  facts  as  I  had  time  to 
collect,  but  it  seems  as  needless  to  accumulate  testimony  to  a  fact  so 
easily  shown  as  to  prove  in  that  way  that  ether  is  an  anaesthetic. 
But  a  group  of  students  were  recently  in  my  office  and  I  publish  here 
the  statement  made  by  them,  remarking  that  four  of  the  number  were 
intelligent  and  experienced  physicians. 

Boston,  June  3,  1890. 
The  undersigned  have  realized  personally,  in  numerous  experi- 
ments, that  we  are  capable  of  feeling  the  medical  influences  of  vari- 
ous medicinal  substances,  not  knowing  what  they  were,  by  receiving 
a  current  through  the  hands  of  either  chemical  or  static  electricity 
which  had  passed  through  the  medicine  in  solution,  and  also  would 
state  that  we  have  recognized  the  influence  of  a  magnetic  current, 
distinct  in  character  from  any  form  of  electricity,  by  receiving  a  cur- 
rent which  had  passed  through  a  magnet. 

J.  L.  Asire,  Edw.  C.  Wales, 

J.  P.  Chamberlin,  M.  E.  Ellwood, 

W.  E.  Wheelock,  B.  Eddy, 

J.  W.  Hastings,  Mary  E.  Stringardt, 

S.  C.  Griffin,  Helen  C.  Clark. 

The  fuller  illustration  of  medicated  electric  currents  and  of  magnet- 
ism combined  with  electricity  is  reserved  for  a  special  treatise  on  elec- 
tro-therapeutics. 


CHAPTER    XXVI. 

PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION  OF  SARCOGNOMY. 

Change  of  plan  —  Concise  review  —  Sympathy  of  brain  and  skin —  Climate,  cold, 
heat,  moisture,  electricity,  clothing — Fever  —  Meningitis  —  Clammy  sweats  —  Elec- 
tric shocks  —  Nervous  prostration  and  sweating — Dr.  Luys  on  the  intellectual  in- 
fluence of  the  skin — Illustrations  of  cutaneous  anaesthesia  and  impairment  of  the 
brain  —  Eruptive  fever  and  cerebral  inflammation —  Small-pox,  erysipelas,  and  scar- 
latina— Typhus  and  typhoid  fevers  —  Sympathy  of  subjacent  organs. 

Pulmonary  Sympathies  —  Correspondence  of  lungs  with  brain  and  relation  to 
the  Pons  Varolii  as  the  seat  of  respiratory  power — Relation  to  the  nose  and  mouth  — 
Effects  of  catarrh  and  asthma —  Sunstroke —  Experiments  on  rabbits  —  Consumption 
and  its  p-ychic  symptoms — Heat  and  perspiration  —  Bronchitis  and  affection  of  the 
front  lobe  —  Its  exhausting  effect — Sympathy  of  the  abdomen  with  respiration  — 
Pneumonia  :  affecting  the  whole  brain,  delirium,  heat  of  skin,  perspiration,  antago- 
nism to  abdominal  organs  —  Pleurisy:  its  relation  to  the  womb;  its  more  violent 
manifestations  —  Laryngitis:  its  influence  on  the  brain  —  Sympathies  of  the  Heart : 
Its  correspondence  in  the  brain  —  Mania  from  heart  disease  —  Prostration  of  the 
brriin  and  impressibility — Mistakes  of  carditis  for  brain  disease  —  Close  sympathies 
of  heart  and  brain  —  Different  effects  from  other  organs —  Ganglia  in  the  neck  — 
Connection  of  apoplexy  and  hypertrophy  of  heart. 

Relations  of  the  liver  and  subjacent  region  — Disease  of  its  controlling  tem- 
poro-sphenoid  convolution  —  Relations  of  different  parts  of  the  liver  —  Its  prox- 
imity to  morbid  influences  —  The  great  depression  of  spirits  that  it  produces — Its 
influence  in  delirium  tremens  and  in  jaundice — Difference  of  its  upper  and  lower 
surfaces  —  Morbid  character  of  abdominal  inflammation  —  Dysentery,  typhoid,  irri- 
tation of  rectum  and  anus — Melaena  —  Fevers  omitted. 

Sympathies  of  pelvic  region —  Relation  to  under-jaw  region  and  destructive 
effects  on  nervous  system  —  Illustration  of  this  by  orificial  surgery  —  Relation  of 
womb  to  hypersesthesia  and  hysteria  — The  two  regions  of  sensibility  in  the  brain 
and  in  the  body  —  Relation  ot  uterine  disease  to  insanity — Sympathy  of  brain  and 
body  not  uniform  —  Pain  of  urethral  caruncles  —  Prostrating  effect  of  chronic  dis- 
eases of  the  colon  —  Statements  of  Dr.  Prout —  Cases  of  rectal  obstruction  in  Ireland 
—  Injury  of  sacrum  in  a  boy  —  of  coccyx  in  a  woman — Fractures  cf  thigh —  Mental 
phenomena  of  hysteria  and  quasi  disease  —  Inflammation  of  the  bladder —  Influence 
of  the  sexual  faculties  —  Phvsiolosrical  explanation  —  Extreme  contagiousness  — 
Puerperal  mania  —  Morbid  effects  from  glans  and  prepuce. 

Sympathies  of  the  limbs  —  Correspondence  of  upper  and  lower — Passionate 
tendencies  of  gout  and  rheumatism —  Remarkable  effects  of  injuries  of  the  knee  and 
the  foot.     Conclusion. 


In  preparing  the  present  edition  of  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy,  I 
had  made  a  review  of  the  phenomena  of  diseases  as  recognized  by 
standard  authors,  showing  that  the  doctrines  of  Sarcognomy  in 
reference  to  all  parts  of  the  body  are  fully  sustained  and  in  fact 
demonstrated  by  the  phenomena  of  all  organs  in  a  state  of  disease. 
In  fact  a  wise  pathologist  might  have  constructed  something  like  a 
correct  Sarcognomy  by  studying  the  physiological  and  mental  effects 
of  diseases. 

At  the  last  moment  I  have  reluctantly  given  up  the  idea  of  includ- 


To  assist  in  understanding  the  complex  relations 
of  soul,  brain  and  body  in  disease  which  are  illus- 
trattd  in  Chapter  twenty-six,  I  have  presented  the 
chart  of  Cerebral  Somatology,  and  another  of 
Corporeal  Cerebrology  (if  such  a  term  may  be 
allowed)  showing  to  what  part  of  the  brain  the 
various  parts  of  the  body  correspond.  These  cor- 
respondences are  shown  in  disease  more  conspic- 
uously in  proportion  as  the  sensitiveness  of 
the  nervous  system  establishes  more  perfect  and 
controlling  sympathies  between  all  parts,  and  are 
of  course  less  apparent  when  the  nervous  sensibili- 
ties are  dull.  The  sympathies  and  the  psvchic 
capabilities  of  the  nervous  system  are  so  great  as 
to  appear  incredible  to  all  who  are  not  familiar  with 
the  subject,  and  as  all  these  marvellous  phenom- 
ena are  carefully  excluded  from  the  curriculum  of 
medical  colleges  I  must  refer  the  reader  who  desires 
to  understand  the  higher  phenomena  of  life  to  my 
Manual  of  Psychometry,  now  in  the  third  edition, 
and  the  Syllabus  of  Anthropology,  which  I  hope 
to  issue  about  the  end  of  1891. 

I  have  introduced  a  sketch  of  the  locations  of  the 
senses,  which  I  discovered  fifty-three  years  ago, 
and  have  taught  and  demonstrated  ever  since. 
The  centre  of  vision  is  at  the  base  of  the  front  lobe, 
vertically  over  the  pupil  of  ihe  eye,  and  the  func- 
tion is  shared  by  all  the  convolutions  behind  the 
brow,  each  of  which  contributes  an  important  ele- 
ment to  its  perfection,  in  the  ability  to  recognize 
objects.  Hearing-,  behind  the  eye,  is  adjacent  to 
the  fissure  of  Sylvius,  and  the  organ  of  Language. 
Feeling-  occupies  the  anterior  exterior  portion  of 
the  temporo-sphenoidal  lobe,  at  its  base,  parallel 
to  the  zygoma.  These  are  the  sensitive  organs,  but 
each  anterior  organ  depends  for  its  reinforcement 
and  efficient  energy  upon  a  correlative  occipital 
organ ,  according  to  a  general  law  of  cerebral  science 
■which  may  easily  be  demonstrated,  and  my  demon- 
strations are  always  accepted.  The  occipital  or- 
gans which  sustain  the  external  senses  are  indicated 
in  the  engraving  as  correlative.  Of  these  the  cor- 
relative organ  of  vision  is  the  part  called  the  gyrus 
angularis,  and  vivisectors,  having  demonstrated  its 
importance,  have  been  led  with  Ferrier  to  believe 
it  the  entire  seat  of  vision,  which  is  a  mistake,  as 
the  visual  is  an  intellectual  function  and  all  intel- 
lectual functions  are  frontal.  The  cuneus,  to  which 
some  would  refer  vision,  co-operates  with  the  gyrus 
angularis,  but  the  latter  is  the  essential  seat  of 
ocular  vigor. 

As  for  hearing  and  feeling,  their  correlatives  are 
near  together,  but  hearing  has  a  correlation  also 
with  the  opposite  ear,  in  the  region  above  the  ear, 
recognized  as  Cautiousness,  a  vigilant  impulse 
which  listens  to  all  sounds  in  the  vicinity,  while 
the  occipital  organ  relates  chiefly  to  language  and 
music.  The  correlative  above  the  ear  has  been 
demonstrated  by  vivisection,  but  the  occipital  has 
not,  as  it  is  less  developed  in  animals.  The  various 
lorrr.s  of  feeling  and  touch  are  subdivisions  of  the  organ  of  Feeling ;  smell  and  taste  are  in  its  anterior  portion. 

The  discovery  of  the  correlative  or  sustaining  organ  of  vision  has  been  verified  in  pathological  cases.  In 
a  case  reported  by  Ratenoft,  a  student,  twenty-two  years  of  age,  accidentally  shot  himself  with  a  revolver, 
through  the  posterior  parietal  region  of  the  brain,  and  produced  complete  loss  of  vision,  but  no  motor  or 
sensory  symptoms.  After  opening  the  wound  and  removing  the  blood  clot  on  the  second  day,  vision  returned, 
but  with  left  lateral  hemianopsia.  Epileptic  attacks  followed,  and  death  in  six  months.  The  bullet  was 
found  in- the  left  hemisphere.     This  was  an  injury  of  the  correlative  visual  region.  (Opp.  p.  616.) 


CHAP.  XXVI.]      PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION.  617 

ing  this  review  of  pathology  in  the  present  edition,  as  it  would  enlarge 
the  volume  too  much  and  delay  its  publication  without  corresponding 
advantage,  as  this  volume  will  circulate  beyond  the  bounds  of  the 
medical  profession  in  the  hands  of  many  to  whom  pathological  and 
medical  details  would  neither  be  necessary  nor  interesting.  Their 
chief  value  would  be  to  physicians,  to  whom  such  evidences  are 
desirable  when  they  are  not  familiar  with  the  decisive  experiments  on 
which  the  science  is  based. 

I  cannot,  however,  entirely  omit  the  pathological  demonstration 
which  to  a  philosophic  thinker  is  quite  important  as  illustrating  Sar- 
cognomy  in  disease.  Hence  I  now  prepare  a  brief  rhumi  of  the 
subject,  showing  in  a  concise  and  imperfect  way  that  all  parts  of  the 
body  illustrate  Sarcognomy  in  disease  as  well  as  in  health. 

I  shall  pay  special  attention  at  first  to  the  sympathies  of  the  surface 
of  the  brain  with  the  surface  of  the  body,  which  is  the  cardinal  doc- 
trine of  experimental  Sarcognomy. 

SYMPATHY  OF  THE  BRAIN  AND  SKIN. 

Owing  to  this  sympathy  a  warm  glow  of  the  skin  is  the  condition 
most  favorable  to  cerebral  activity,  and  hence  in  warm  climates  the 
warmth  maintained  on  the  surface  favors  the  early  development  of 
the  brain,  leading  to  early  marriages,  and  produces  the  higher  spiritu- 
ality and  capacity  for  psychic  marvels  which  are  remarkable  in  tropi- 
cal climates. 

In  colder  climates  the  nervous  system  is  less  active  and  predominant 
and  the  muscular  system  more  powerful.  The  highest  social  enjoy- 
ment is  in  warm  apartments,  while  the  coldness  of  out-door  life  is 
more  favorable  to  the  muscular  system  than  to  the  brain.  Hence 
northern  climates  produce  muscular  and  hardy  races,  while  southern 
climates  produce  delicacy  and  refinement  without  muscular  energy  or 
industry.  Their  life  is  happy  in  a  quiet  way,  and  they  are  generally 
deficient  in  practical  energy.  The  antagonism  of  the  brain  and 
muscular  system  is  illustrated  every  year  by  the  indolence  produced 
at  the  approach  of  warm  weather. 

The  electricity  which  gathers  upon  the  skin  in  a  dry  atmosphere  is 
highly  favorable  to  the  activity  of  the  brain,  while  the  free  discharge 
of  electricity  from  the  surface  in  a  moist  atmosphere  diminishes  the 
cerebral  energy.  The  dry,  electric  atmosphere  of  the  mountains  is 
more  favorable  to  genius  than  the  seaside.  The  contact  of  water 
with  the  skin  is  still  more  exhausting  and  cannot  be  endured  long 
without  injury.  Hydropathic  treatment  has  often  produced  injury 
by  overlooking  this  tendency. 

The  warm  woollen  and  silken  clothing  of  civilized  nations  maintains 


6l8  .  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

a  degree  of  warmth  and  nervous  life  in  the  skin  which  sustains  the 
activity  of  the  brain,  which  is  less  apparent  in  the  savages  of  cool 
climates,  as  neither  their  clothing  nor  their  dwellings  keep  them  very 
warm.  The  Indian,  though  superior  in  brain  development  to  the 
negro,  who  comes  from  a  warm  climate,  has  not  as  active,  excitable  and 
emotional  a  brain. 

When  exposed  to  penetrating  cold  there  is  dulness  and  inactivity 
of  the  brain  and  entire  nervous  system,  which  gradually  advances  to 
an  irresistible  drowsiness,  and  thus  proves  fatal  by  overpowering  the 
brain. 

The  normal  action  of  the  brain  is  promoted  by  cleanliness  of  the 
skin  and  the  clothing,  and  very  much  oppressed  by  fou  clothing  of  a 
dense  texture  which  retains  exhalations.  The  killing  of  rabbits  by 
covering  their  bodies  with  a  coating  of  glue,  suet  and  rosin,  by  French 
physiologists,  is  a  very  conclusive  demonstration  of  this  cerebro-cuta- 
neous  sympathy.  The  great  oppression  and  debility  which  we  feel 
from  an  excess  of  clothing  is  a  similar  illustration. 

The  character  of  the  skin  seems  to  be  an  index  of  the  brain,  of 
which  we  judge  as  it  is  mirrored  in  the  countenance  ;  and  the  lowest 
type  of  brain  development  is  found  in  company  with  the  cold,  scaly 
and  insensible  surface  of  the  fishes  and  in  the  cold-blooded  reptiles, 
whose  cold  skin  excites  our  loathing.  From  the  dulness  of  aquatic 
animals  it  is  a  long  step  to  the  brillance  of  the  brain  power  of  birds, 
whose  surface  is  warmly  protected  by  a  feathery  clothing.  There  is 
also  no  lack  of  mental  activity  in  animals  clothed  with  fur  and  wool. 
The  rhinoceros,  tapir,  hippopotamus  and  elephant  have  a  less 
active  nervous  system,  though  the  large  size  of  the  elephant's  brain 
gives  it  a  high  grade  of  intelligence. 

This  relation  of  the  skin  explains  the  superiority  of  Franklinism, 
which  acts  on  the  surface,  over  Faradism  as  a  therapeutic  agent, 
which  penetrates  the  body.  It  leads  us  also  to  attach  great  value  to 
woollen  clothing,  which  maintains  the  most  perfect  condition  of 
healthy  vigor  in  the  skin,  and  to  dry^friction  on  the  skin  as  a  hygienic 
measure. 

This  association  of  the  brain  and  skin  leads  to  the  inference  that 
eruptive  fevers  must  have  a  special  action  on  the  brain,  in  addition  to 
the  febrile  influence,  which  is  itself  debilitating  and  deranging  as  well 
as  exciting  to  the  nervous  system.  The  cutaneous  condition  must 
affect  the  membranes  of  the  brain,  and  thus  produce  an  exciting  and 
disturbing  effect,  according  to  the  locality  of  the  eruption.  A  critical 
report  upon  cerebral  conditions  in  eruptive  diseases  would  be  valuable. 

A  good  illustration  of  cerebral  sympathies  was  furnished  by  M. 
Trousseau  in  reference  to  cerebral  meningitis,  the  diagnosis  of  which 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  619 

in  the  young  subject,  he  says,  may  be  aided  by  reference  to  the  lungs 
and  the  skin.  There  is  a  peculiar  sighing  respiration — the  child 
takes  a  long  breath  and  remains  without  breathing  from  ten  to  fifty 
seconds,  and  then  takes  another  deep  respiration.  The  skin  is  liable 
to  be  reddened  by  the  slightest  friction  or  pressure,  but  this  has  no  con- 
nection with  fever.  He  stated  that  he  had  found  this  constantly  in 
all  cases  of  meningitis  which  he  had  seen  for  some  time  past.  The 
quietude  of  respiration  which  he  describes  is  like  the  physical  tran- 
quillity which  belongs  to  long-continued  mental  action.  There  is  so 
little  use  of  the  muscles  that  there  is  little  need  for  breathing,  and 
we  can  hold  the  breath  for  a  long  time  after  quiet,  protracted  study. 

As  healthy  or  unhealthy  conditions  of  the  skin  affect  the  brain,  so 
does  the  state  of  the  brain  react  on  the  skin,  in  cerebral  inflammations 
which  develop  superficial  heat  and  depressed  conditions  which 
debilitate  the  skin.  Hence  treatment  of  the  skin  relieves  the  brain 
and  treatment  of  the  brain  relieves  the  skin.  Beard  and  Rockwell 
say  that  herpes,  prurigo  and  eczema  yield  rapidly  to  central  galvan- 
ization, which  is  treatment  of  the  brain. 

The  skin  is  the  chief  seat  of  calorification  and  regulator  of 
temperature.  Caloric  vitalizes  the  brain  as  cold  suppresses  its 
action.  Thus  the  skin  modifies  cerebral  conditions.  But  Calorifica- 
tion (with  which  the  skin  is  associated)  appears  on  the  cerebral  chart 
to  be  adjacent  to  the  throat  and  to  the  region  of  mental  derangement. 
Hence  the  hot  skin  of  fever  excites  and  disturbs  the  brain,  and  fever  or 
excessive  calorification  becomes  associated  with  throat  diseases  and 
cerebral  disorder. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  a  great  enfeeblement  of  the  skin,  pro- 
ducing cold,  clammy  and  profuse  perspiration,  when  the  brain  power 
is  undermined  in  various  diseases.  We  observe  this  in  the  colliqua- 
tive night  sweats  of  consumption,  in  the  relaxed  perspiration  which 
precedes  death  in  apoplexy,  and  in  many  examples  in  which  the 
perspiration  is  not  beneficial  to  the  disease.  It  is  never  beneficial 
when  it  proceeds  from  cerebral  debility ;  on  the  contrary,  it  is  an  ex- 
haustive condition.  From  investigations  instituted  by  M.  Sassicki 
he  deduced  the  conclusions  that  "  sweating  decreases  the  power  of  the 
gastric  juice  and  diminishes  its  acidity  both  relatively  and  absolutely. 
The  stronger  the  perspiration  the  more  the  digestive  power  and  the 
acidity  are  diminished."  Hence  the  necessity  for  vinegar,  salt  and 
condiments  in  diet  in  summer. 

Whether  it  is  the  cause  or  (more  probably)  the  effect  of  cerebral 
prostration,  it  is  a  sure  sign.  In  typhus  fever  Dr.  Henderson  (see 
Medical  Gazette,  July  24,  1846)  has  stated  that  "copious  perspiration 
in  typhus  is  generally  a  symptom  fraught  with   danger,  and  accord- 


620  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

ing  to  his  experience  such  cases  seldom  recover,  especially  if  the 
sweating  is  accompanied  with  quick  pulse."  "I  have  noticed  (he 
says)  a  favorable  change  coincide  with  the  occurrence  of  copious 
perspiration,  but  never  a  total  cessation  of  the  febrile  symptoms.  In 
the  great  majority  of  instances,  instead  of  copious  perspiration  in 
typhus  coinciding  with  symptoms  of  amendment,  it  happens  that  it 
ushers  in  or  accompanies  a  state  of  hopeless  prostration,  stupor, 
hurried  breathing  and  increased  frequency  of  pulse." 

A  case  of  sweating  sickness  was  related  by  Dr.  Laurie  in  the 
Monthly  Journal  oi  October,  1846,  in  which  the  patient,  an  active  man 
of  60,  was  seized  with  bilious  vomiting  and  pain  in  the  umbilical 
region,  and  the  same  night  awoke  with  profuse  perspiration  for  six 
hours,  which  saturated  his  body  linen,  bedclothes  and  mattress  ; 
after  this  he  was  seized  with  an  ague  fit,  cramps  and  abdominal  pain, 
and  when  visited  was  found  in  a  state  of  collapse,  with  husky,  feeble 
voice,  cold  extremities  and  intense  thirst,  some  vomiting  and  purging. 
He  was  relieved  by  stimulants.  The  connection  of  "  immense  "  per- 
spiration with  his  condition  of  collapse  is  worth  noticing. 

The  intimate  sympathy  of  the  brain  with  the  skin  is  shown  in  the 
facility  with  which  consciousness  is  abolished  by  a  shock  of  static 
electricity  which  traverses  the  surface.  Dr.  Franklin  sent  a  discharge 
from  two  Leyden  jars  through  six  robust  men,  "they  fell  to  the 
ground  and  got  up  again  without  knowing  what  had  happened  ;  they 
neither  heard  nor  felt  the  discharge." 

"Some  time  ago  (says  Prof.  Tyndall  in  his  lessons  in  electricity)  I 
stood  in  this  room  with  a  charged  battery  of  fifteen  large  Leyden  jars 
beside  me.  Through  some  awkwardness  on  my  part  I  touched  the 
wire  leading  from  the  battery  and  the  discharge  went  through  me. 
For  a  sensible  interval  life  was  absolutely  blotted  out,  but  there  was 
no  traceof  pain.  After  a  little  time  consciousness  returned.  This 
may  be  regarded  as  an  experimental  proof  that  people  killed  by 
lightning  suffer  no  pain." 

The  superior  importance  of  surfaces  in  physiology  is  illustrated  by 
the  assertion  of  Lallemand  that  he  has  never  observed  delirium  in 
simple  inflammation  of  the  substance  of  the  brain,  but  whenever  it 
has  appeared  there  was  an  inflammation  of  the  arachnoid.  The 
arachnoid  inflammation  is  generally  prior  to  the  cerebral. 

Dr.  Thomas  Dowse,  in  a  recent  work  on  massage  and  electricity, 
says  of  the  secretions  of  sweat  when  the  skin  is  pale :  "  I  assure  you 
they  are  more  common  than  is  usually  supposed,  and  it  is  indicative  of 
a  want  of  tone  and  a  low  degree  of  vitality  of  no  small  importance  ; 
it  is  always  associated  with  a  form  of  nervous  exhaustion  —  under- 
stand me,  it  is  essentially  neurotic,  and  is  not  unfrequently  followed 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMV.  621 

by  organic  changes  in  the  nerve  centres,  leading  to  mental  disturbance, 
diabetes,  albuminuria.  There  is  a  form  of  hyperidrosis  called  by 
Eulenberg  "cpileptoid  sweats."  I  think  this  form  is  very  correctly 
named.  A  man  will  suddenly,  after  walking  a  few  yards,  and  with- 
out any  apparently  exciting  cause,  break  out  into  a  profuse  perspira- 
tion, become  pale,  hungry  and  faint,  and  lose  resisting  power,  without 
vaso-motor  dilatation  or  constriction ;  indeed,  it  seems  as  though,  for 
the  time,  the  dilator  and  constrictor  fibres  were  both  paralyzed. 

"The  normal  secretion  of  sweat  diminishes  alo:i£j  with  other  dc- 
rangements  of  nutrition  of  the  skin,  in  some  nervous  diseases,  and  in 
degeneration  of  the  motor  ganglia  of  the  anterior  horns  cf  the  fpincl 
cord.  In  some  cases  the  nutrition  of  the  skin  is  interfered  with  in  a 
peculiar  way,  so  that  it  becomes  glossy  and  has  the  feeling  and 
appearance  of  parchment." 

"The  man  who  sweats  profusely,  when  his  fellows  under  the  same 
influences  do  not  do  so,  is  more  liable  to  functional  and  even  degener- 
ative changes  than  others." 

Speaking  of  the  connection  between  torpor  cf  the  skin  and  torpor 
of  the  mind,  he  says  :  — 

"The  patients  are  usually  depressed,  melancholic,  and  suffer  from 
nervous  exhaustion.  They  are  also  remarkably  insensible  to  the 
Faradic  and  galvanic  currents,  and  this  insensibility  seems  to  be  in 
proportion  to  the  obtuseness  of  their  mental  powers  ;  but  it  is  interest- 
ing to  note  that  as  their  mental  condition  improves,  so  their  sensibility 
to  Faradism  gradually  returns  to  its  normal  state." 

"  I  have  noticed  that  this  torpidity  of  intellectual  power  is  associated 
with  increased  physical  resistance  to  the  Faradic  current  and  to  the 
general  sensibility  of  the  skin.  Of  course,  in  locomotor  ataxy  and 
general  paralysis  of  the  insane,  this  is  a  marked  feature ;  but  I  am 
attending  now  to  cases  where  in  most  instances  the  patients  are  told 
that  there  is  nothing  at  all  the  matter  with  them,  and  although  we 
see  that  physical  resistance  is  increased,  we  invariably  find  that  moral 
resistance  (will  resistance)  is  below  the  normal  standard." 

"We  know  that  in  the  domain  of  intellectual  activity  proper,  sen- 
sitive impressions  are  of  the  utmost  importance ;  tactile  impres- 
sions are  specially  destined  to  provoke  reactions  in  the  intellectual 
sphere.  These  impressions  unquestionably  play  a  very  important 
part  in  the  cerebral  activity  (or  otherwise")  of  a  man's  individ- 
uality. 'We  all  know  (says  Dr.  Luys  in  his  work  on  the  Brain 
and  its  Functions)  how  fine,  delicate  and  sensitive  is  the  skin  of 
women  in  general,  and  particularly  of  those  who  live  in  idleness  and 
do  no  manual  work  ;  how  their  sensitive  nervous  plexuses  are  in  a 
manner  exposed  naked  to  exciting  agencies  of  all  sorts  ;  and  how,  from 


622  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

this  very  fact,  this  tactile  sensibility,  incessantly  awake,  and  inces- 
santly in  vibration,  keeps  their  minds  continually  informed  of  a  thou- 
sand sensations  that  escape  us  men,  and  of  tactile  subtleties  of  which 
we  have  no  notion.  Thus,  in  the  idle  women  of  society,  and  men  with  a 
fine  skin,  mental  aptitudes  are  developed  and  maintained  in  the  direct 
ratio  of  the  perfectionment  and  delicacy  of  the  sensibility  of  the  skin. 
The  perfection  of  touch  becomes  in  a  manner  a  second  sight,  which 
enables  the  mind  to  feel  and  see  fine  details  which  escape  the  gener- 
ality of  men,  and  constitutes  a  quality  of  the  first  order,  moral  tact, 
that  touch  of  the  soul,  as  it  has  been  called,  which  is  the  characteristic 
of  organizations  with  a  delicate  and  impressionable  skin,  whose  senso- 
riiim,  like  a  tender  chord,  is  always  ready  to  vibrate  at  the  contact  of 
the  slightest  impressions." 

"  Inversely,  compare  the  thick  skin  of  the  man  of  toil,  accustomed  to 
handle  coarse  tools  and  lift  heavy  burdens,  and  in  whom  the  sensitive 
plexuses  are  removed  from  the  bodies  they  touch  by  a  thick  layer  of 
epithelial  callosities,  and  see  if,  after  an  examination  of  his  intellect- 
ual and  moral  sensibility,  you  are  understood  when  you  endeavor  to 
evoke  in  him  some  sparks  of  those  delicacies  of  sentiment  that  so 
clearly  characterize  the  mental  condition  of  individuals  with  a  fine 
skin.  On  this  point  experience  has  long  ago  pronounced  judgment, 
and  we  all  know  that  we  must  speak  to  every  one  in  the  language  that 
he  can  comprehend,  and  that  to  endeavor  to  awaken  in  the  mind  of  a 
man  of  coarse  skin  a  notion  of  the  delicacies  of  a  refined  sentiment  is 
to  speak  to  a  deaf  man  of  the  deliciousness  of  harmony,  and  to  a  blind 
man  of  the  beauties  of  colors." 

"  In  the  facts  we  have  already  cited  respecting  the  pathogenic 
influence  exercised  by  certain  anaesthetics  upon  the  genealogy  of  cer- 
tain forms  of  delirium,  we  should  add  as  a  complement  the  following 
observations  reported  by  Dr.  Auzony,  which  clearly  show  what  a 
curious  influence  sensitive  impressions  may  have  upon  psycho- 
intellectual  phenomena  in  general. 

"The  case  was  that  of  a  young  man,  clever  and  rational,  who  sud- 
denly became  undisciplined  and  rebellious  to  the  utmost  extent,  and 
gave  himself  up  to  the  worst  tendencies,  even  to  the  compromising  of 
the  peace  and  honor  of  his  family.  Examination  showed  that  he  was 
completely  ancesthetic.  During  his  stay  in  the  asylum  he  successively 
experienced  several  phases  of  anaesthesia,  of  which  the  appearance 
manifestly  coincided  with  the  return  of  his  worst  instincts.  When 
sensibility  reappeared  in  the  skin,  moral  dispositions  contrary  to  the 
preceding  were  observed  to  return  in  him,  together  with  a  very  clear 
consciousness  of  his  situation." 

"  Some  years  ago  I  met  with  a  case  in  which  a  young  lady,  aged 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  623 

about  23,  stated  that  she  was  totally  unconscious  of  sensations  of 
any  kind.  In  all  her  life  she  had  never  experienced  pain,  '  had  never 
had  a  headache.'  Heat  or  cold,  sunshine  or  fog  were  all  the  same  lo 
her;  nothing  seemed  to  affect  either  her  health  or  her  spirits;  she 
was  uniformly  calm,  easy  going,  imperturbable.  She  was  married 
about  a  year  after  I  first  knew  her,  and  to  a  lady  friend  whom  she  had 
known  intimately  in  their  days  of  school-girlhood,  and  who  met  her 
six  or  seven  years  afterwards,  she  said  that  her  peculiarity  had  in  no 
way  changed.  She  was  still  insensible  to  pain,  and  during  her  three 
pregnancies  had  suffered  nothing,  even  the  critical  periods  of  labor 
having  been  passed  through  without  any  physical  distress.  She  was 
highly  educated,  musical,  and  pleasant  in  society  ;  the  only  abnormalty 
that  her  friend  detected  in  her  was  her  extreme  coldness  of  manner 
in  her  own  home,  to  her  husband  and  children  ;  to  the  latter  especially 
she  was  harsh  and  unreasonably  exacting,  and  appeared  totally  devoid 
of  the  faintest  rudiments  of  natural  affection. 

"  A  case  is  known  to  me  at  the  present  time  in  which  a  young  man, 
aged  21,  exhibits  entire  insensibility  to  the  sensation  of  pain. 
He  is  quite  willing  at  any  time  to  demonstrate  this  to  his  friends  on 
their  expressing  incredulity  on  the  subject,  performing  for  their 
entertainment  a  variety  of  unnatural  feats,  such,  for  instance,  as  run- 
ning a  darning  needle  through  a  finger  or  thumb,  in  at  one  side  and 
out  at  the  other,  or  pinning  his  hands  to  a  table  by  means  of  four 
stout  needles,  driven  through  the  thin  part  of  the  flesh  extending 
between  the  fingers  and  thumb.  About  two  years  ago  he  underwent 
an  extremely  severe  operation  on  one  of  his  eyes,  refusing  to  be 
placed  under  chloroform,  and  taking  a  conscious  interest  in  the  move- 
ments of  the  surgeons  throughout  the  whole  operation.  I  may  men- 
tion that  a  very  strong  galvanic  current  produces  but  little  impression 
upon  him.  He  is  a  young  man  of  peculiar  temperament,  given  to  the 
exhibition  of  fits  of  violent  anger  and  passion  on  quite  inadequate 
provocation,  which  are  succeeded  by  great  sullenness  and  silence  for 
several  hours.  He  sometimes  showrs  destructive  tendencies,  and  will 
wantonly  smash  and  spoil  articles  of  value." 

Dr.  Renaudin  relates  the  case  of  a  youth  in  whom  a  degenerate 
mental  condition  was  produced  by  anaesthesia  of  the  skin.  He  was 
doing  well  at  school,  when  his  mental  and  moral  powers  suddenly 
declined,  and  for  unruly  conduct  he  was  expelled.  Dr.  Renaudin 
found  an  insensibility  of  the  skin,  which  he  regarded  as  the  patholog- 
ical cause.  This  anaesthesia  was  intermittent,  and  when  it  was  absent 
"  he  was  docile  and  affectionate.  When  it  reappears  his  evil  instincts 
return,  and  we  have  reason  to  know  they  might  have  led  him  even  to 
murder." 


624  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

As  eruptive  fevers  concern  the  skin  they  affect  the  brain,  while,  in 
return,  inflammations  at  the  surface  of  the  brain  affect  the  skin. 
Hereafter  students  of  Sarcognomy  may  observe  how  the  locations  on 
the  brain  and  body  correspond.  Inflammation  of  the  dura  mater  and 
arachnoid  is,  according  to  Dr.  Thomas  Watson,  "  marked  by  pain  of 
the  head,  by  fever,  and  by  rigors  which  intermit,  and  so  regular  are 
the  intermissions  that  the  practitioner  may  be  tempted  to  believe  that 
he  has  got  an  aguish  patient."  In  encephalitis  he  recognizes  "a 
parched  and  dry  skin,  a  frequent  and  hard  pulse,  flushing  of  the  face 
and  preternatural  sensibility  to  external  impressions." 

On  the  other  hand,  in  the  opposite  condition  of  delirium  tremens, 
when  the  brain  is  exhausted,  demanding  stimulants  and  tonics,  "the 
skin  is  perspiring  and  most  commonly  the  patient  is  drenched  in 
sweat,"  the  condition  which  "commonly  accompanies  prostration  of 
the  nervous  system."  In  acute  hydrocephalus,  he  says,  "  the  face  is 
flushed,  the  eyes  are  brilliant,"  "  there  are  pain  and  tenderness  of 
the  abdomen,"  "the  disease  is  very  like  an  attack  of  continued 
fever." 

In  small  pox,  says  Watson,  there  is  "  nausea  and  vomiting,  head- 
ache, sometimes  wild  delirium,  sometimes  convulsions."  The  condi- 
tion of  the  brain  in  bad  cases  affects  the  lungs  and  in  fatal  cases, 
says  M.  Roger,  the  lungs  are  frequently  found  gorged  with  blood. 

In  erysipelas,  says  Watson,  "generally  there  is  some  wandering 
of  the  mind,  especially  at  night  ;  and  in  bad  cases  there  is  much 
delirium,  and  at  length  complete  coma."  "When  death  takes  place - 
and  the  head  is  examined,  serous  fluid  is  usually  discovered  beneath 
the  arachnoid  and  in  the  cerebral  ventricles,  and  the  veins  of  the pia 
mater  are  turgid."  Inflammation  of  the  brain,  he  says,  is  apt  to 
follow  when  the  erysipelas  deserts  the  surface.  "  The  extension  of 
the  inflammation,  the  supervention  of  delirium  and  coma  while  the 
external  inflammation  continues,  are  of  common  occurrence.  This, 
then,  is  one  way  in  which  erysipelas  is  accustomed  to  prove  fatal,  by 
effusion  within  the  head  and  coma." 

The  close  sympathy  of  the  brain  and  upper  portion  of  the  lungs 
is  such  that  skin  diseases  which  affect  the  brain  severely  must  also 
affect  the  lungs.  In  fatal  cases  of  measles,  according  to  Prof.  John 
Bell,  "the  marks  of  pulmonic  alteration  are  generally  clear,  and  next 
are  those  of  inflammation  of  the  bowels  and  the  brain." 

"In  scarlatina  the  morbid  alterations  are  chiefly  sanguineous  con- 
gestio7i  of  the  brain,  serous  membranes,  spleen,  plates  of  Peyer  and 
internal  follicles.  The  brain  exhibits  increased  vascularity,  with 
opacity  of  the  arachnoid  membrane  and  effusions  of  serous  or  turbid 
fluid  between  it  and  the  pia  mater."     (Bell.) 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  625 

There  is  a  close  analogy  in  the  exanthemata :  measles,  scarlatina 
and  small  pox  have  similar  conditions,  affecting  the  brain  and  lungs. 
In  scarlatina  anginosa  with  a  florid  eruption,  according  to  Watson, 
"  many  of  the  patients  die  apparently  from  inflammation  or  effusion 
within  the  head.  They  have  violent  headache,  with  furious  delirium, 
which  is  followed  by  coma  and  death."  The  skin  in  this  case  differs 
widely  from  the  skin  of  typhus. 

Dr.  Cathcart  Lees,  in  the  Dtiblin  Medical  Press  of  July,  1850, 
speaks  of  a  dangerous  form  of:  delirium  in  scarlet- fever,  resembling 
in  some  respects  that  of  delirium  tremens.  Dr.  Gregory  of  London 
speaks  of  this  delirium  in  his  lecture  on  eruptive  ftvers,  saying 
"delirium  often  of  a  fierce  and  unrestrainable  kind  seizes  the  adult. 
I  have  seen  two  patients  in  this  disease,  in  the  most  raging  frenzy, 
jumping  out  of  bed  naked,  and  dying  on  the  floor  of  the  chamber." 
Dr.  Lees  describes  cases  in  which  the  patient  continues  wild,  noisy 
and  sleepless,  in  which  life  can  be  saved  only  by  procuring  sleep. 
Dr.  H.  Kennedy  of  Dublin  says,  in  his  work  on  scarlatina,  that  the 
delirium  is  purely  nervous,  as  "  when  patients  died  with  well-marked 
head  symptoms,  no  morbid  appearance  was  found  in  the  brain  to 
account  for  them." 

This  condition  of  the  brain  is  overcome  by  soothing  measures 
on  the  skin  —  inunction  with  bacon  fat  or  other  oily  matter 
applied  by  a  healthy  hand.  "  With  rapidity  (says  Dr.  Schneeman)  the 
most  painful  symptoms  of  the  disease  are  allayed,  quiet,  sleep,  appetite, 
and  good  Jiumor  return"  under  this  treatment. 

The  wild  insanity  of  scarlatina  is  due  not  only  to  the  condition  of 
the  skin  but  to  the  affection  of  the  throat.  Affections  of  the  throat 
—  scarlatina,  diphtheria,  cynanche,  etc.  —  concern  a  region  adjacent  to 
the  insane  tendencies  of  the  brain  and  therefore  liable  to  producing 
insanity,  dementia  and  paralysis. 

The  conditions  of  the  brain  and  skin  cling  together  in  close  sympa- 
thy. Inflammation  of  the  brain  produces  a  hot,  sensitive  skin,  and  the 
condition  of  the  brain  in  typhus  is  indicated  by  the  very  peculiar 
mordant  heat  of  the  skin  mentioned  by  authors,  which  gives  a 
peculiar  sensation  to  the  touch.  It  is  also,  according  to  Bartlett,  "  very 
generally  attended  with  a  peculiar  and  characteristic  eruption  upon 
the  skin.  The  name  of  the  disease  has  often  been  derived  from  this 
circumstance;  hence  it  has  been  called  petechial  fever,  spotted  fever, 
maculated  fever,  and  so  on."  The  spots  are  often  purplish  and  almost 
black,  corresponding  to  the  oppressed  condition  of  the  brain.  Dr. 
Bell  says,  "the  most  characteristic  symptom  of  typhuc  is  the  exan- 
thematous  eruption,"  and  Dr.  Copland  expresses  a  similar  view  — 
that  this  eruption  is  as  characteristic  of   typhus   as  their    peculiar 


620  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

eruptions  are  of  measles  and  scarlatina.  The  morbid  condition 
of  the  skin  is  shown  by  its  "pungent  and  offensive"  odor, 
which  "increases  as  the  fever  progresses,  and  toward  the  termina- 
tion of  fatal  cases,  often  resembles  the  fetor  of  putrid  animal  matter." 
The  changing  conditions  of  the  skin  correspond  with  those  of  the 
brain  which  is  the  seat  of  the  fever — florid  at  the  beginning  and 
little  offensive  in  odor,  dark,  petechial  and  offensive  at  the  close,  or 
improved  as  the  disease  subsides.  The  "  calor  mordicans  "  (pungent, 
biting  heat)  is  usually  more  intense  during  the  first  week,  but  declin- 
ing afterwards  as  the  pulse  and  the  patient  decline  —  the  vital  force 
being  insufficient  to  maintain  the  temperature  and  the  vitality  of  the 
skin  declining  with  that  of  the  brain. 

The  medical  profession  has  been  much  embarrassed  in  drawing  the 
distinction  between  typhus  and  typhoid  fever,  which  Sarcognomy 
explains, — typhus  being  properly  a  disease  of  the  brain,  while  typhoid 
is  essentially  located  at  the  hypogastric  region  of  the  ileum  and  there- 
fore identified  with  a  region  of  the  body  which  is  not  only  feverish  in 
tendency  but  tends  to  derange  the  brain  and  affect  the  skin.  The 
diseases  are  therefore  so  analogous  and  have  so  many  similar  symp- 
toms that  an  absolute  distinction  is  not  possible,  as  they  run  into  each 
other,  and  the  older  authors  were  not  far  wrong  in  taking  them  as  one. 
Both  illustrate  the  sympathy  of  the  brain  and  skin  and  they  affect 
both. 

We  may  then  maintain  that  the  skin  and  brain  go  together  in  health 
and  in  disease,  and,  as  Sarcognomy  shows  the  exact  location  of  these 
sympathies,  it  gives  us  command  of  the  entire  brain  and  of  its  sub- 
divisions for  therapeutic  treatment. 

But  the  skin,  being  located  on  the  body,  sympathizes  with  the  sub- 
jacent organs,  enabling  us  to  affect  alike  the  bodily  physiology  and 
cerebral  psychology. 

This  was  well  explained  by  that  able  physiologist,  the  late  Pro- 
fessor Macartney,  in  his  most  valuable  work  on  inflammation,  as 
follows:  — 

"  It  is  a  law  of  the  animal  economy  that  internal  and  external  sur- 
faces that  are  opposed  to  each  other  are  more  disposed  to  sympathize 
than  tissues  that  are  continuous.  All  local  and  superficial  injuries, 
as  inflammations  of  the  skin,  are  liable  to  create  an  inflamed  state  of 
the  nearest  serous  surface  without  involving  the  interjacent  tissues. 
I  have  seen  this  opposite  inflammation  set  up  from  burns  and  scalds, 
superficial  military  punishment,  the  irritation  of  a  blister,  tinea  capitis 
spreading  to  the  face,  and  erysipelas.  It  deserves  remark  that  these 
internal  inflammations  have  a  peculiar  character.  They  keep  pace 
with  the  external  source  of   irritation.     The  surface  of   the   serous 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  &2J 

membrane  is  crowded  with  red  vessels  which  do  not,  however,  pour  out 
serum.  The  parts  are  not  conjoined  by  coagulable  lymph,  nor  is  there 
any  tendency  to  the  formation  of  pus.  The  constitution  sympathizes 
more  with  inflammations  of  the  serous  membranes  thus  produced,  and 
in  a  different  manner,  than  with  those  arising  originally  on  the  serous 
surfaces.  Instead  of  the  inflammatory  symptomatic  fever,  we  observe 
prostration,  anxiety,  perturbation,  and  in  severe  cases  there  is  delirium. 
The  result  is  not  unfrequently  fatal." 

These  remarks  seem  to  apply  to  irritations  affecting  the  abdomen, 
and  the  prostrating  effects  correspond  with  the  laws  of  Sarcognomy, 
but  I  present  them  merely  to  show  the  power  of  the  skin  over  sub- 
jacent structures  and  the  consequent  advantage  of  cutaneous  treat- 
ment by  the  hand  or  any  other  means. 

PULMONARY    SYMPATHIES. 

The  general  sympathy  of  the  thorax  and  brain  amounts  to  a  com- 
plete correspondence  of  analogous  surfaces,  —  the  superior,  inferior, 
anterior  and  posterior  of  one  corresponding  with  the  same  in  the  other, 
as  we  shall  find  by  examination.  But  there  is  also  the  special  relation 
of  the  respiratory  organs  to  respiratory  centres,  which  I  locate  at  the 
Pons  Varolii,  and  which  on  my  bust  are  marked  around  the  nostrils 
and  mouth.  The  entire  subjacent  tract  maintains  a  close  relation 
with  respiratory  conditions,  as  manifested  in  the  red  line  of  the  anterior 
gums  in  pneumonia  and  their  condition  in  consumption. 

It  follows  that  all  affections  of  the  nostrils,  mouth  and  throat  affect 
the  lungs.  Asthma  affords  a  fine  illustration  of  this.  In  the  Medi- 
cal Congress  at  Weisbaden  in  1885,  Dr.  Hack  gave  his  experience  of 
nearly  six  hundred  cases  of  asthma,  in  all  of  which  he  professed  to 
discover  a  reflex  neurosis,  of  which  the  nose  was  invariably  the 
centre,  the  treatment  of  which  was  indispensable. 

It  follows  from  these  principles  that  the  organs  of  respiration  may 
be  treated  efficiently  by  treatment  of  the  nose,  and  according  to  the 
New  York  Medical  Times  Dr.  Goldsmith  has  treated  whooping- 
cough  successfully  on  this  principle.  He  injected  a  solution  of  sali- 
cylic acid  (1  to  1000)  or  corrosive  sublimate  (1  to  10,000)  into  the 
nose  every  two  hours,  six  times  the  first  day  and  four  times  the  next 
day,  which  generally  effected  the  cure. 

Brown-Sequard  stated  in  one  of  his  lectures  that  coughing  and 
sneezing  can  be  prevented  by  pressure  on  the  lips  in  the  neighborhood 
of  the  nose.  This  is  on  the  expiratory  tract,  concerned  in  coughing 
and  sneezing.  But  I  think  the  result  depends  somewhat  on  the 
sensitive  impressibility  of  the  subject. 

We  know  that  a  little  snuff  or  capsicum  or  other  irritant  applied 


628 


PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 


to  the  nostrils  will  produce  sneezing,  and  even  a  little  whiff  of  cool 
air  may  have  the  same  effect. 

The  complicated  diseases  produced  by  catarrh  —  the  severe  affec- 
tions of  the  lun°"S,  the  brain  and  the  entire  constitution  —  are  familiar 
facts.  A  medical  pretender  has  even  undertaken  to  cure  all  diseases 
by  application  in  the  nostrils  of  his  panacea. 

This  engraving  represents  the  internal  face  of  the  right  hemisphere  of  the  brain, 
divided  exactly  on  the  median  line  from  the  left  hemisphere.  It  is  introduced  to 
show  that  in  operating  through  the  face  by  the  hand  we  impress  the  Pons  Varolii 

when  we  operate  on 
what  is  marked  on  the 
chart  as  the  respiratory 
region  of  the  face.  The 
Pons  Varolii  has  been 
shown  by  pathological 
observations  to  be  the 
seat  of  the  respiratory 
^  function.  In  stimu- 
lating Calorification 
y  through  the  chin  we 
operate  on  the  medulla 
oblongata  which  occu- 
pies the  space  from  i 
to  2.  The  prominence 
above  2  is  the  Pons. 
The  corpus  callosum 
which  connects  the  two 
hemispheres  is  the 
arch  of  white  nervous 
substance  indicated  by 
the  figures  28,  26,  27. 
The  divided  cerebel- 
lum is  indicated  by  Fig. 
4.  Fig.  7  refers  to  the 
tubercula  quadrigemina  above  the  cerebellum  and  below  the  corpus  callosum,  in 
which  the  optic  nerve  originates.  The  optic  nerve  is  indicated  at  21 — the  oculo- 
motor at  20.  The  anterior  commissure  (about  as  large  as  the  optic  nerve),  which 
is  cut  as  it  passes  to  the  left  hemisphere  connecting  the  two  regions  of  Sensibility, 
is  indicated  at  32.  The  septum  lucidum,  25,  is  a  thin  vertical  lamina  below  the 
corpus  callosum;  the  fornix,  24,  is  a  layer  of  fibres  passing  back  from  the  anterior 
commissure,  and  dipping  downward;  the  pineal  gland,  8,  9,  10,  is  a  small  nervous 
body  lying  on  the  tubercula  quadrigemina;  the  gyrus  fornicatus,  30,  and  the 
interior  frontal  convolution,  31,  are  the  seat  of  some  of  the  higher  faculties.  This 
?roup  of  five  —  the  septum,  fornix,  pineal  gland  and  two  convolutions — are  in  a 
realm  of  mystery.  No  investigator  yet  —  not  even  Gall  and  Spurzheim  —  has 
pretended  to  any  knowledge  of  their  functions,  with  which  I  have  been  familiar 
many  years.  I  shall  make  the  first  published  exposition  of  their  functions  in  the 
Syllabus  of  Anthropology.  There  is  not  sufficient  interest  in  such  knowledge  at 
present  to  induce  its  publication  except  as  a  portion  of  a  systematic  treatise. 

The  production  of  asthma  by  morbid  growths  and  conditions  in  the 
posterior  nostrils,  and  its  cure  by  extirpating  the  morbid  growths,  is 
now  well  established  by  cases  in  practice.  A  case  communicated  to 
Dr.  J.  E.  Schadle  of  St.  Paul  by  Dr.  John  N.  Mackenzie  of  Baltimore 
is  worth  mentioning.  He  says  :  "  A  man  consulted  me  for  violent 
attacks  of  asthma  which  compelled  him  to  give  up  work  entirely. 
Irritation  of  the  sensitive  area  invariably  produced  an  attack.  He 
had  two  large  posterior  hypertrophies,  both  of  which  I  removed  with 
the  cold  wire-snare.     At  each  revolution  of  the  nut  and  tightening  of 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  629 

the  wire  he  was  seized  with  a  violent  paroxysm ,  so  threatening  that  I 
was  fearful  that  the  operation  would  have  to  be  suspended.  Seeing, 
however,  that  he  came  out  of  each  attack  with  safety,  I  screwed  the 
loop  slowly  home  at  long  intervals,  and  finally  cut  through  the  masses. 
Relief  was  immediate,  and  that  night  he  slept  without  his  asthma  for 
the  first  time  in  several  years.  No  other  treatment  was  used  beyond 
the  ordinary  spray.  Two  years  or  more  have  passed  and  the  patient 
has  not  returned." 

The  close  relation  of  the  respiratory  tract  to  the  intuitive  and 
intellectual  regions  of  the  brain  is  verified  in  the  unfavorable  effect 
of  diseases  of  that  region  on  the  mind.  Dr.  R.  P.  Lincoln,  of  New 
York,  speaks  in  the  Medical  Record  of  a  "growing  stupidity  "  from 
the  morbid  growths  of  catarrh  in  the  posterior  nasal  region,  which  he 
relieved  by  galvano-cautery. 

Further  illustrations  are  not  necessary.  I  would  merely  mention 
that  it  is  easy  to  show  by  nervauric  experiment  or  by  electricity 
that  respiration  may  be  affected  through  the  respiratory  tract  at  the 
nostrils  and  mouth,  the  external  localities  through  which  we  reach 
the  Pons  Varolii ;  consequently  the  structures  that  intervene  exercise 
a  controlling  influence  on  respiration.  Hence  the  appearance  of  the 
gums  in  pneumonia,  and  the  irritation  and  feverishness  of  chil- 
dren in  teething.  Herpes  labialis  was  mentioned  by  Dr.  Tyrrell  as  a 
constant  symptom  in  an  epidemic  of  influenza  at  Sacramento. 

The  direct  sympathies  of  the  lungs  and  brain  were  illustrated  in 
Dr.  S.  Rogers'  description,  in  the  Madras  Journal,  of  the  effects  of 
sunstroke  in  soldiers.  The  patients,  he  says,  "complained  of  difficult 
breathing,  with  a  sense  of  tightness  and  oppression  about  the  chest." 

Kussmail  and  Tenner,  in  their  experiments  on  rabbits,  found  that 
when  they  checked  the  circulation  in  the  brain  the  respiration  was 
much  reduced  — in  one  case  from  135  to  18,  and  became  snoring. 

Purgation,  which  gives  relief  to  the  brain,  also  relieves  the  lungs 
and  improves  the  freedom  of  respiration. 

The  close  connection  of  the  base  of  the  lungs  and  base  of  the  brain 
is  shown  in  all  violent  exercises  and  passions,  which  produce  deep  res- 
piration bv  the  diaphragm,  wrnle  the  gentler  emotions  produce  ex- 
pansion only  of  the  upper  part  of  the  chest. 

Consumption  ranks  above  all  diseases  in  the  hopeful  and  spiritual 
tendencies  of  its  victims.  The  favorite  location  of  phthisis  is  in  the 
upper  portion  of  the  lungs,  especially  on  the  left  side  ;  thus  occupying 
the  region  associated  with  Hope,  Love  and  Conscientiousness,  in  front, 
extending  laterally  into  Cheerfulness  and  Tranquillity.  The  hopeful 
spirit  and  refined  emotions  of  consumptives,  before  the  disease  has 
destroyed  the  upper  portion  of  the  lungs,  contrast  with  the  gloomy 


63O  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

effects  of  hepatic  disease,  and  the  selfish,  irascible  temper  which  so 
often  appears  in  gout  and  rheumatism. 

Coolness  associates  with  the  lateral  posterior  surface  of  the  chest 
and  hence,  as  the  disease  advances,  chilly  feelings  frequently  appear. 
My  colleague,  Prof.  I.  G.  Jones,  who  was  himself  a  victim  of  the  dis- 
ease, says  :  "  Chilly  sensations  will  frequently  be  observed,  even  dur- 
ing the  warmest  weather."  This  coolness  is  also  a  characteristic 
premonitory  symptom  of  pneumonia.  Contrary  to  the  common 
impression,  the  general  tendency  of  the  thorax  is  cooling  rather  than 
heating.  Its  heating  influence  belongs  only  to  its  basilar  region  — 
to  depth  of  respiration. 

The  hectic  flush  of  the  cheeks  occupies  a  region  indicative  of  ner- 
vous sensibility  and  debility. 

The  exhaustion  of  the  vital  force  of  the  brain  by  consumption 
results  in  the  profuse  perspiration  which  belongs  to  nervous  exhaustion 
and  appears. in  night  sweats  when  the  brain  has  the  least  energy,  and 
which  appears  still  more  profusely  in  fatal  apoplexy.  One  of  Wat- 
son's patients  reduced  the  perspiration  by  sitting  up  at  night,  thus 
maintaining  the  activity  of  the  brain.  The  great  mortality  of  con- 
sumption is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  seat  of  the  disease  is  the  region 
antagonistic  to  Vital  Force. 

In  bronchitis  the  portion  affected  is  that  which  corresponds  to 
the  intellectual  organs  of  the  front  lobe,  and  hence  frontal  headache 
is  a  regular  symptom.  Dr.  Elliotson  says  of  the  headache  of 
bronchitis,  that  patients  almost  always  describe  it  as  a  splitting  head- 
ache, and  sometimes  there  is  drowsiness.  There  is  great  congestion 
in  the  head.  In  influenza,  as  described  by  Watson,  which  is  similar 
to  bronchitis,  "  the  patient  is  chilly  and  perhaps  shivers  ;  presently 
headache  occurs  and  a  sense  of  tightness  across  the  forehead."  Accord- 
ing to  Prof.  Bell,  when  the  pain  in  the  forehead  is  not  soon  relieved, 
feelings  of  great  depression  are  complained  of  ;  the  pulse  becomes 
weak  as  well  as  quick,  the  brain  is  disturbed  in  its  functions  and  the 
muscular  -strength  is  much  reduced.  All  this  is  the  characteristic 
tendency  of  the  front  lobe,  which  in  excitement  utterly  exhausts  the 
vital  forces.  .  p 

"  The  transition  from  this  stage  to  death  (says  Prof.  Bell)  is  soon 
made,  especially  in.  those  cases  which  have  been  neglected  from  the 
outset.  A  remarkable  feature  of  the  worst  form  of  bronchitis  is  the 
rapidity  with  which  the  collapse  and  the  symptoms  of  extreme  pros- 
tration and  debility  succeed  to  high  fever  and  well-marked  local 
excitement.  The  whole  course  of  these  fatal  cases  is  sometimes 
wonderfully  rapid  —  death  ensuing  within  two  days  from  the  com- 
mencement of  the  attack." 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  63 1 

In  the  moribund  condition,  according  to  Dr.  Elliotson,  "  the  pulse 
becomes  weaker  and  softer,  and,  at  the  very  last,  vermicular;  the  sur- 
face becomes  blue,  and  the  forehead  and  skin  are  bedewed  with  a  cold, 
clammy  perspiration."  The  cough  of  chronic  bronchitis,  according  to 
Prof.  Bell,  "  wastes  the  body  and  reduces  the  strength."  English 
writers  speak  of  the  great  prostration  of  the  patient  in  influenza,  and 
Watson  speaks  of  a  greater  loss  of  life  by  influenza  than  by  cholera. 
The  use  of  the  lancet  in  such  cases  was  destructive.  The  whole  history 
of  bronchitis  illustrates  the  anti-vital  tendency  of  the  front  lobe,  with 
which  the  bronchial  region  is  associated,  and  which  participates  by 
sympathy  in  the  disease.  Andral  reports  a  case  of  bronchitis,  ending 
in  death  from  marasmus  and  debility,  in  which  he  found  a  "sero- 
purulent  infiltration  of  the  subarachnoid  cellular  tissue  of  the 
convexity  of  the  cerebral  hemispheres,  and  the  lateral  ventricles 
were  distended  with  serum."  Elliotson  and  Bell  recommend 
cupping  between  the  shoulders,  which  is  the  location  indicated  by 
Sarcognomy. 

Abdominal  Respiration.  —  The  location  of  respiratory  impulses 
on  the  abdomen  and  the  sympathy  thereby  established  with  the  lungs 
is  illustrated  in  disease.  Purgation  is  an  important  part  of  pulmonary 
treatment.  Prof.  Bell  insists  on  purgation  in  bronchitis  —  "  free  and 
early  purging,"  — as  necessary.  So  great  is  this  sympathy  that  the 
faculty  have  often  been  puzzled  by  bronchitis  of  abdominal  origin. 
There  is  a  sympathetic  organic  cough  described  by  Broussais, 
which  he  says  is  relieved  by  treatment  of  the  gastritis.  Gastritis 
was  his  hobby,  but  it  was  nothing  more  than  gastric  irritation,  and 
such  cases  are  distinguished  from  true  bronchial  disease  by  the 
absence  of  local  symptoms  in  the  chest.  Bell  mentions  a  liability  to 
bronchitis  as  a  consequence  of  gastro-enteritis.  The  liability  to  cough 
from  intestinal  irritation  is  shown  in  the  cough  produced  by  worms. 
Dr.  Bell  mentions  a  case  of  this  kind  in  a  girl,  in  whom  the  pulmonary 
symptoms  (cough  and  remittent  fever)  were  produced  by  worms  and 
cured  by  a  vermifuge.  Autumnal  remittent  fever  is  sometimes  asso- 
ciated with  bronchitis  —  the  symptoms  alternating  in  the  chest  and 
abdomen.  The  special  locality  productive  of  the  cough  has  not  been 
designated  by  medical  authors,  but  Sarcognomy  locates  it  around  and 
below  the  umbilicus,  the  severest  cough  being  produced  below.  A 
similar  cough  may  be  produced  in  the  impressible  at  that  locality. 

The  great  sympathy  of  the  lungs  and  skin  is  a  necessary  infer- 
ence from  the  sympathy  of  lungs  and  brain.  Bronchitis  is  one  of  the 
dangers  of  scarlatina  and  small-pox. 

The  front  lobe  being  the  seat  of  the  most  delicate  and  extensive 
sympathy  and  sensibility,  the  bronchial  region  necessarily  possesses 


6$2  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

the  same  character,  making  us  acutely  susceptible  to  all  atmospheric 
or  epidemic  conditions.  "  Not  one  man  in  ten  thousand  (says  Wat- 
son) passes  a  winter  without  having  a  cold  of  some  sort." 

Pneumonia  illustrates  Sarcognomy.  The  hyperaemia  of  the  chest 
produces  a  corresponding  hyperaemia  of  the  brain.  Its  first  approach 
in  myself,  in  a  cold,  produces  an  abundant  and  pleasant  action  in  the 
entire  brain.  But  mental  conditions  are  but  little  noticed  in  patho- 
logical reports. 

The  tendency  of  the  thorax  is  to  produce  a  full  and  rather  strong 
but  steady  pulse,  as  that  of  abdominal  irritations  is  to  produce  a  fee- 
ble and  rapid  pulse.  The  former  tends  to  coolness,  the  latter  to  fever  ; 
and  this  coolness  or  chilliness  is  a  premonitory  symptom  of  pneumo- 
nia for  two  or  three  days. 

The  inflammation  of  pneumonia  affects  the  brain,  and  produces 
severe  headaches  ;  the  determination  to  the  anterior  part  of  the  brain 
produces  flushing  of  the  cheeks,  which  are  supplied  from  the  same 
artery. 

In  a  weak  constitution  there  is  determination  to  the  head,  coldness 
of  extremities  and  inaction  of  bowels  and  kidneys.  Majendie  describes 
a  dangerous  pneumonia  as  showing  a  vacant  stare,  ideas  wandering, 
general  debility  and  nasal  hemorrhage.  As  the  mouth  and  nostrils 
•correspond  externally  to  the  respiratory  tract  in  the  brain,  we  find, 
according  to  Prof.  Boiling  of  Nashville,  a  brick-red  deposit  on  the 
gums  in  severe  cases.  Prof.  Fredricq,  a  European  writer,  has 
observed  the  same  thing  in  consumption  (Revue  Medicale,  1848). 
Prof.  Jones  has  observed  that  the  lips  break  out  with  fever  blisters. 

Infants  with  pneumonia  are  disposed  to  breathe  through  the  mouth 
instead  of  the  nostrils.  Barthez  and  Rilliet  speak  of  gangrene  of  the 
mouth  as  a  concomitant  of  pneumonia  in  children. 

Delirium  is  one  of  the  most  frequent  accompaniments.  "  In  children 
(says  Ranking)  it  is  frequently  one  of  the  first  symptoms."  Hour- 
man  and  Dechambre  say  that  delirium  usually  accompanies  pneu- 
monia in  the  aged  pensioners  of  La  Salpetriere.  Delirium,  accord- 
ing to  Bell,  is  a  symptom  of  great  danger.  Pneumonia  in  patients 
worn  down  by  disease  results,  according  to  Laennec,  in  coma  and 
death.  Dr.  Condie  observes  that  head  symptoms  are  more  frequent 
in   children  when  there  is  bronchitis  co-existing. 

The  sympathy  of  the  brain  and  skin  causes  the  pungent  heat  of 
typhus  ;  pneumonia  by  affecting  the  brain  produces  the  same  result 
on  the  skin.  "  Of  all  the  symptoms  of  pneumonia  (say  Drs.  Bright 
and  Addison)  the  most  constant  and  conclusive,  in  a  diagnostic  point 
of  view,  is  a  pungent  heat  of  the  surface.  By  this  symptom  alone 
the  first  stage    of    pneumonia    has  been    repeatedly  pronounced  to 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  633 

exist,  before  asking  a  single  question  or  making  the  slightest  stetho- 
scopic  examination  of  the  chest." 

The  skin  is  usually  hot  and  dry.  A  profuse  perspiration  (indica- 
ting brain  impairment)  has  been  found  by  Dr.  Bell  to  indicate  fre- 
quently a  fatal  termination,  with  the  cold  skin  and  profuse  sweating 
in  which  powerful  stimuli  produce  very  little  effect,  and  death  comes 
by  exhaustion. 

As  the  functions  of  psychic  organs  associated  with  the  thorax  are 
antagonistic  to  those  associated  with  the  abdomen,  it  follows  that 
the  thoracic  inflammation  arrests  the  abdominal  functions,  the  kidneys, 
stomach  and  bowels  being  interrupted.  Hence  a  vigorous  emeto- 
cathartic  at  the  beginning  is  a  very  effective  measure. 

Vigorous  catharsis  is  recognized  as  necessary  by  the  best  practi- 
tioners, as  it  is  for  affections  of  the  brain,  with  the  additional  reason 
that  it  unloads  the  respiratory  abdominal  tract  and  produces  freer 
respiration. 

Pleurisy. —  The  sympathetic  relations  of  pleurisy,  according  to 
Sarcognomy,  differ  from  those  of  pneumonia,  as  the  pleura  has  not  so 
close  a  relation  to  the  brain.  It  is  a  more  inflammatory  and  less 
congestive  affection  and  does  not  usually  occupy  so  much  of  the 
thoracic  surface.  It  may  reach  the  axilla,  the  clavicle,  shoulder,  ster- 
num, mediastinum  or  whole  front  of  the  chest,  and  margins  of  false 
ribs,  but  usually  occupies  a  smaller  area.  Its  most  usual  location  is 
at  and  just  below  the  mammae,  and  as  the  mammae  are  in  close  sym- 
pathy with  the  womb  a  pain  in  this  region  is  sometimes  a  symptom 
of  uterine  disease.  The  womb  and  mammae  are  both  associated  with 
the  sentiment  of  love. 

The  connection  of  pleurisy  with  uterine  conditions  is  inevitable 
when  it  occupies  this  position.  Dr.  Bell  recognizes  pleurisy  as  one 
of  the  most  frequent  complications  of  puerperal  fever.  Cruveilhier 
speaks  of  puerperal  pleurisy  as  occurring  epidemically,  and  mentions 
a  pleurisy  which  attacks  females  just  before  delivery.  At  La  Matern- 
ite  he  was  accustomed  to  examine  and  percuss  those  in  whom  feverish 
symptoms  were  marked.  He  says  the  prognosis  of  puerperal  pleurisy 
is  bad,  few  of  those  attacked  surviving. 

When  the  pleurisy  attacks  the  inferior  surfaces,  the  results  are 
unpleasant  —  hiccough,  nausea  and  vomiting,  and  sometimes  jaundice, 
may  ensue.  All  basilar  surfaces  have  a  depressing,  exciting  and 
unpleasant  tendency. 

When  the  disease  runs  across  the  front,  below  the  mammae,  it 
affects  a  region  of  sensibility,  excitability,  imagination  and  morbidity, 
producing  an  effect  approximating  insanity,  which  was  well  described 
by  Cleghorn   in   his    "  Diseases  of  Minorca,"  who  portrays  the  wild 


634  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

excitement,  dreams  and  ravings  of  the  patients  in  this  disease,  when 
the  inferior  and  anterior  portions  of  the  chest  were  affected.  The 
symptoms  are  very  different  and  much  more  quiet  when  the  upper 
portion  of  the  chest  is  involved. 

Laryngitis  relates  to  the  brain  rather  than  the  body.  Cerebral 
science  shows  that  the  tendency  of  such  a  disease  is  to  produce 
excitement,  restlessness,  nervous  or  mental  exhaustion  and  a 
lethargic  tendency,  all  of  which  are  verified  in  its  history.  In  severe 
cases  there  is  high  fever,  disturbed  respiration,  dry,  hot  skin,  great 
restlessness  and  a  dull,  drowsy,  almost  comatose  condition.  Its  mor- 
tality (given  by  some  as  fifty  per  cent)  is  due  to  its  exhaustion  of 
the  nervous  system,  similar  to  that  of  diphtheria  —  such  is  the  ten- 
dency of  the  under-jaw  region. 

That  the  larynx  corresponds  to  the  location  of  Amativeness  just 
below  the  medulla  oblongata,  would  imply  that  its  diseases  would 
interfere  with  the  sexual  faculty.  The  relation,  however,  is  better 
established  by  the  fact  that  sexual  puberty  causes  development  of  the 
larynx  and  voice  and  that  all  sexual  irregularities  affect  the  voice. 

SYMPATHIES    OF   THE    HEART. 

The  Heart  affords  a  clear  illustration  of  Sarcognomyin  its  diseases 
and  excitements.  Its  form  indicates  that  its  superior  lateral  and 
inferior  surfaces  correspond  with  similar  surfaces  of  the  brain,  but 
the  verification  of  this  would  require  much  minute  pathological 
research. 

A  remarkable  illustration  of  the  character  of  the  different  regions 
of  the  heart  has  recently  been  presented  by  McWilliam  in  the  Jour- 
nal of  PJiysiology,  showing  that  the  superior  region  has  the  same  moder- 
ating influence  upon  the  heart  as  the  superior  anterior  region  of  the 
brain  has  upon  all  vital  processes. 

The  inhibition  or  checking  of  cardiac  activity  has  been  heretofore 
ascribed  solely  to  the  pneumogastric  nerve  ;  but  he  shows  that  in 
mammalian  hearts  there  is  a  distinct  "  inhibitory  area  on  the  dorsal 
aspect  of  the  auricles,  stimulation  of  which  causes  a  distinct  inhibi- 
tion, as  when  the  vagus  itself  is  excited."  It  is  by  means  of  this  lo- 
cality, which  contains  many  ganglia  and  nerve  cells,  connecting  with 
the  auricles  and  ventricles,  that  the  inhibition  is  produced,  for  when 
it  is  made  anaesthetic  by  the  application  of  cocaine  in  a  four  per  cent 
solution,  inhibition  no  longer  takes  place  by  irritating  the  pneumogas- 
tric or  the  local  area  itself.  Evidently,  then,  this  portion  of  the  auricles 
has  the  subduing  power  over  the  heart,  checking  the  muscular  energy 
of  its  inferior  portion,  the  ventricles.  We  may  also  observe  that  the 
chief  energy  of  the  heart  belongs  to  its  more  posterior  portion,  the 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  £?>$ 

left  ventricle,  —  a  feebler  action  occurring  in  the  more  anterior  or  riffht 
side,  which  is  also  slightly  superior,  —and  this  right  ventricle  furnishes 
the  material  upon  which  the  left  ventricle  acts,  without  which  it  would 
cease,  as  the  anterior  region  of  the  brain  furnishes  the  psychic  mate- 
rial or  impressions  which  rouse  the  posterior  region,  without  which  it 
would  go  to  sleep.  Thus  the  correspondence  of  the  heart  with  the 
general  pathognomic  law  of  vitality  is  illustrated  perhaps  as  nearly  as 
the  peculiar  form  of  the  heart  allows.  The  law  is  apparent  in  all  organs. 
The  lungs  have  their  gentler  action  above,  and  the  tendency  to  con- 
sumption ;  but  greater  force  below,  sustaining  violent  exertions  and 
tending  toward  inflammation.  The  abdomen  has  its  soothing  and  sus- 
taining functions  above  and  its  heating,  expulsive,  depressing  in- 
fluences below.  The  liver  belongs  to  the  base  of  the  thoracic  system, 
to  which  it  gives  its  gloomiest  influence,  sympathizing  with  the  pelvic 
base  of  the  abdomen.  The  limbs  as  they  descend  from  the  trunk  take 
on  a  more  restless  and  violent  tendency,  sympathizing  below  the  knee 
and  elbow  with  the  abdomen,  but  above  with  the  thorax.  The  heart 
as  a  whole  corresponds  with  its  location. 

Its  interior  position  in  the  body,  near  to  its  inferior  half  and  central 
to  its  superior  region,  corresponds  to  the  location  in  the  brain  of  the 
white  fibres  proceeding  to  the  corpus  callosum,  and  thus  brings  it  into 
sympathy  with  the  entire  brain.  Hence  the  heart  responds  to  every 
cerebral  action.  All  the  posterior  organs  give  it  strength  in  various 
degrees,  and  all  the  anterior  organs  give  it  various  degrees  of  soft- 
ness, merging  into  weakness;  and  it  is  easy  to  demonstrate  this  by 
examining  the  pulse  as  the  organs  are  excited.  This  was  the  class 
of  experiments  on  Dr.  Lane  which  I  made  in  1843,  before  a  commit- 
tee of  Boston  physicians,  eliciting  the  remark  from  one  of  them  that 
my  experiments  were  "too  perfect."  It  was  demonstrated  by  a  pub- 
lic experiment  in  the  medical  college  at  Louisville,  Ky.  The  same 
thing  is  illustrated  by  every  variation  of  the  pulse  under  emotional 
or  passional  influence. 

The  close  general  relation  of  the  heart  and  brain  is  more  intimate 
than  is  generally  believed.  Failure  of  one  produces  prompt  failure 
of  the  other.  Spiritual  consciousness  sometimes  continues  when  the 
heart  seems  at  rest,  but  the  brain  does  not  act  so  as  to  produce  any 
effect. 

Advanced  inflammation  of  the  heart  paralyzes  the  brain,  and  in 
the  various  stages  of  inflammatory  development  the  effect  on  the 
brain  is  so  great  as  to  be  mistaken  for  inflammation  of  the  brain, 
causing  the  heart  to  be  entirely  overlooked.  I  have  the  records  of 
about  twenty  cases  of  inflammation  at  the  heart,  in  which  this  mistake 
was  made. 


6$6  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

Sir  Thos.  Watson  says  that  an  important  symptom  of  pericarditis 
is  "delirium,  sometimes  quiet  but  often  wild  and  furious,  not  depend- 
ent upon  any  disease  of  the  encephalon."  "  Patients  laboring 
under  rheumatic  carditis  very  frequently  become  affected  with  deli- 
rium or  violent  mania,  or  stupor  and  coma,  or  convulsions,  or  all  of 
these  in  succession,  and  you  might  suppose  they  were  laboring  under 
inflammation  of  the  brain  or  of  its  membranes."  This  he  regards 
not  as  a  metastasis,  but  as  a  sympathetic  affection.  "  Again  and 
again,  when  death  has  occurred  and  the  delirium  had  been  extreme, 
no  traces  of  disease  have  been  discoverable  within  the  skull,  while 
marks  of  violent  and  intense  inflammation  were  visible  in  the  peri- 
cardium." 

The  prostration  of  the  energies  of  the  brain  by  this  sympathy 
explains  the  quiet  taciturnity  of  the  patients,  and  the  loss  of  courage, 
or  expression  of  fear  and  alarm,  which  Bertin  spoke  of  as  a  charac- 
teristic symptom  of  heart  disease. 

The  feeble  and  passive  conditions  developed  by  advanced  inflam- 
mation in  pericarditis  or  endocarditis  render  the  patient  more  impres- 
sible and  susceptible  of  nervauric  treatment,  as  I  realized  in  my  first 
experiments  in  1841,  when  I  relieved  an  alarming  case  of  pericarditis 
by  treatment  upon  the  brain  with  the  hand. 

As  a  specimen  of  the  cases  in  which  pericarditis  is  mistaken  for 
brain  disease,  I  give  an  abstract  of  one  reported  by  Dr.  G.  Burrows  : 
"  Boy  at  Christ's  Hospital  —  restless,  sleepless,  delirious  —  pain  in 
forehead  — -  a  convulsion  on  third  day  —  coma  and  death  on  fourth  day 
—  all  treatment  directed  to  the  brain.  No  disease  found  in  brain  — 
pericardium  covered  with  a  layer  of  lymph,  and  fibres  of  heart  dark, 
soft  and  infiltrated  with  pus."  How  forcibly  do  such  cases  teach  us 
the  necessity  of  cultivating  the  psychometric  diagnosis,  which,  with  a 
rational  practice,  would  have  saved  this  life. 

While  the  entire  brain  thus  shares  the  morbid  excitement  and  the 
prostration  of  the  heart,  it  as  regularly  shares  all  its  other  conditions, 
rising  in  energy  as  the  heart  works  vigorously,  declining  as  the  heart 
becomes  quiescent,  and  sinking  in  total  prostration  as  the  heart  is 
weakened  and  softened  in  continued  fever.  There  is  no  other  organ 
which  by  its  position  and  relations  thus  corresponds  with  the  entire 
brain,  so  as  to  represent  the  entire  person,  —  as  the  heart  is  considered 
in  popular  language  the  representative  of  the  entire  character  and 
purposes. 

Other  organs  not  occupying  this  central  position  have  no  such 
representative  character,  and  in  their  excitement  or  irritation  they 
operate  in  a  one-sided  manner  to  change  the  balance  of  the  character. 
Thus  below  the  diaphragm  we  have  the  liver,  corresponding  in  loca- 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMV.  6^/ 

tion  with  the  tract  at  the  base  of  the  middle  lobe  (the  lower  or  third 
temporal  convolution)  which  develops  the  morbid,  hypochondriac 
and  melancholy  influences  in  its  anterior  portion,  and  in  its  posterior, 
which  approximates  combativeness  and  business  energy,  promotes 
a  certain  force  of  character  which  has  originated  the  popular  idea  of 
a  bilious  temperament,  while  the  influence  of  its  anterior  portion  has 
been  ascribed  to  the  hypochondria. 

The  stomach  lies  behind  a  region  of  ^sensibility,  somnolence  and 
nervous  refinement,  and  hence  associates  with  indolent  pleasures  and 
the  social  impulses  (Adhesiveness)  which  lie  between  its  anterior 
surface  and  its  spinal  control. 

The  hypogastric  region  is  the  source  of  calorification  and  typhoid 
fever  —  and  the  pelvic  region  the  seat  of  the  influences  that  derange 
the  nervous  system.  The  thighs  are  the  seat  of  the  greatest  physi- 
cal energy  and  most  furious  passions,  the  legs  of  pure  animality, 
and  the  feet  of  mental  prostration  and  dulness  ;  while,  in  opposition 
to  all  these  debasing  influences,  the  thorax,  sympathizing  with  the 
upper  half  of  the  brain,  maintains  the  dignity  of  human  nature  and 
produces  the  great  man  whose  energies  if  the  chest  is  developed 
upwards  are  directed  to  noble  objects,  but  if  its  development  be 
chiefly  at  the  waist  will  have  a  selfish  direction,  —  from  which  it  is 
fortunate  for  the  world's  salvation  that  woman  is  comparatively  free, 
her  waist  being  charmingly  small.  The  opposite  character  is  seen  in 
the  gorilla,  in  which  the  base  predominates  over  the  summit  of  the 
chest. 

Under  the  influence  of  malaria  the  human  race  degenerates,  and 
the  lank  chest  and  drooping  attitude  proclaim  its  inferiority,  as  the 
expanded  chest  of  the  mountaineer  proclaims  his  superiority  and 
power  of  endurance. 

Our  consideration  of  the  heart  would  not  be  complete  without 
referring  to  the  fact  that  the  immediate  source  of  its  energy  is  found 
in  the  three  ganglia  of  the  neck.  These  ganglia  lie  in  the  sphere  of 
the  basilar  region  of  the  brain  — the  neck.  All  influences  through 
the  neck  produce  animal  force  and  excitement.  The  thick  neck  is  a 
familiar  indication  of  animal  force,  passion  and  strong  circulation. 
It  has  also  been  recognized  as  an  indication  of  apoplectic  tendencies, 
and  very  properly,  too,  for  the  great  cardiac  energy  drives  the  blood 
against  the  brain  with  a  force  which  becomes  destructive. 

The  total  number  of  cases  of  apoplexy  from  hypertrophy  of  the 
heart  which  Dr.  Hope  had  observed  exceeded  those  arising  from  all 
other  causes  ;  whence  he  was  led  to  coincide  in  opinion  with  MM. 
Bertin  and  Bouillaud  that  hypertrophy  predisposes  more  strongly  to 
apoplexy  than  what  is  termed  the  apoplectic  constitution  itself,  and 


658  PATHOLOGICAL    DEMONSTRATION  [CHAP.    XXVI. 

that  in  most  cases  those  who  present  the  apoplectic  constitution  in 
conjunction  with  symptoms  of  determination  of  blood  to  the  head  are 
at  the  same  time  affected  with  hypertrophy  of  the  heart.  This  opin- 
ion is  strongly  corroborated  by  the  observation  of  M.  Richerand, 
who  states  that  his  repeated  examinations  of  the  bodies  of  apo- 
plectic patients  have  proved  to  his  satisfaction  that  the  excessive 
power  of  the  left  ventricle  of  the  heart  more  directly  tends  to  the 
production  of  apoplexy  than  the  short  neck  and  large  head  which 
according  to  most  writers  constitutes  the  apoplectic  constitution. 

In  132  cases,  compiled  by  Dr.  Burrows,  of  apoplexy  and  sudden 
hemiplegia,  84  were  accompanied  by  diseased  heart. 

The  famous  physician,  Cabanis,  had  three  apoplectic  attacks  and 
died  in  the  fourth.  The  left  ventricle  of  his  heart  was  an  inch  thick 
and  three  times  the  natural  size. 

RELATIONS  OF  THE  LIVER  AND  SUBJACENT  REGION. 

The  neurological  relation  of  the  liver  is  with  the  base  of  the  mid- 
dle lobe,  just  over  the  cavity  of  the  ear,  extending  forward  and  back- 
ward.    When  this  region  is  small,  the  liver  is  usually  inactive. 

I  am  quite  sure  that  with  sufficient  observation  the  connection 
of  this  inferior  portion  of  the  temporo-sphenoidal  lobe  with  the 
abdominal  organs  would  be  demonstrated,  even  with  the  imperfect 
observation  that  exists.  I  believe  illustrations  could  be  found  by 
any  one  who  had  sufficient  time  for  research. 

I  have  met  with  a  good  illustration  in  Prof.  T.  M.  Rotch's 
report  on  Diseases  of  Children  in  Bosto?i  Medical  aiid  Surgical  Journal, 
May  30,  1889.  Dr.  Rotch  says  :  "  A  child  aged  nineteen  months  came 
under  observation  for  subcutaneous  naevus.  This  was  incised,  and  two 
days  later  she  contracted  scarlet-fever.  During  convalescence  the  child 
was  taken  with  high  temperature  and  symptoms  of  peritonitis.  She 
died  two  weeks  later.  A  post-mortem  examination  showed  no  trace  of 
peritonitis.  Venous  congestion  was  found  in  the  anterior  third  of  the 
under  and  outer' surface  of  the  left  side  of  the  brain,  and  a  firm 
clot,  the  size  of  a  walnut,  in  the  temporo-sphenoidal  lobe.  The  limita- 
tion of  the  clot  was  distinct  and  the  brain  substance  around  it  was 
firm.  It  was  apparently  of  recent  origin.  The  left  lateral  sinus  was 
filled  in  its  posterior  two-thirds  by  an  organized  clot  obviously  of 
some  date.  The  symptoms  in  this  case  were  entirely  misleading, 
and  apart  from  convulsions  on  the  day  of  death,  pointed  strongly 
to   peritonitis." 

This  is  a  clear  demonstration  that  the  temporo-sphenoidal  lobe  can 
affect  the  abdominal  organs  so  far  as  to  counterfeit  the  symptoms 
of  active  diseases. 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  639 

The  psychic  relations  of  the  liver  are  with  the  psychic  qualities  of 
the  base  of  the  middle  lobe,  the  tendency  of  which  is  to  depression 
of  spirits,  fretfulness,  melancholy,  hypochondria,  irritability,  apprehen- 
sion, anger  and  mental  disorders  of  that  character. 

The  liver  associates,  by  the  laws  of  pathognomy,  with  the  pelvic  or 
hypogastric  region,  and  thus  co-operates  with  its  calorific  power  and 
tendency  to  mental  and  nervous  derangement. 

The  different  portions  of  the  liver  have  different  psychic  relations. 
The  posterior  portion  associates,  from  its  position,  with  the  jealous, 
aggressive,  combative  tendencies.  Hence  the  liver  is  greatly  affected 
by  the  angry  passions,  and  when  we  provoke  a  man  greatly  we  are 
said  to  stir  his  bile.  There  is  a  gradation  between  the  hypochondriac 
portion  of  the  liver  in  front  and  the  hostile  portion  at  the  back.  All 
intense  excitements  in  the  liver  disturb  the  mental  serenity  and  clear- 
ness and   may  run  to  delirium. 

The  proximity  of  the  liver  to  the  location  marked  disease  makes  it 
a  frequent  focus  of  morbid  action,  and  my  professor  of  medical  prac- 
tice, whose  lectures  I  attended  in  1833-34,  had  a  very  simple  theory 
that  all  disease  depended  on  a  congestion  of  the  liver  produced 
by  weakened  action  of  the  heart,  and  was  to  be  removed  by  hepatic 
purgatives,  —  calomel,  aloes,  and  rhubarb.  Dr.  Wilson  Philip  says  : 
"  There  are  few  local  diseases  of  which  the  liver  does  not  more  or 
less  partake."  "Depressing  passions  often  instantly  derange  its 
function,  and  seldom  fail,  if  long  continued,  to  affect  its  structure." 
"  It  is  not  uncommon  for  blows  on  the  head  to  produce  inflammation 
of  the  liver,  an  effect  they  rarely,  if  ever,  produce  on  any  other  of  the 
abdominal  or  thoracic  viscera."  It  is  generally  enlarged  by  disease 
wherever  located,  and  attains  its  greatest  dimensions  from  active 
disease  in  hepatitis,  and  next  to  that,  according  to  Piorry's  meas- 
urements, in  heart  disease.  In  rheumatism,  typhus,  pneumonia,  con- 
sumption, bronchitis  and  ague  it  is  enlarged  on  an  average  fully 
one-third  in  its  linear  measurements  on  the  right  side. 

The  psychic  association  of  the  liver  with  the  melancholic  and  de- 
ranging hypogastric  region  is  illustrated  by  the  anatomical  connection, 
as  the  blood  of  the  intestines  goes  by  the  portal  vein  to  the  liver.  The 
reception  of  this  degenerate  blood  from  fecal  regions  andrthe  prompt 
reception  of  liquids  absorbed  from  the  stomach  (especially  alcoholic) 
give  to  the  liver  a  low  vital  condition,  which  causes  other  organs  to  sus- 
tain it,  while  it  acts,  like  the  ileum,  as  a  scavenger. ' 

The  liver  furnishes  combustible  elements  to  the  blood,  to  maintain 
its  temperature,  and,  like  the  pancreas,  assists  in  digesting  fatty  and 
animal  foods,  which  are  calorific.  In  cholera  its  secretion  is  sup- 
pressed ;  the  restoration  of  which  indicates  recovery. 


64O  PATHOLOGICAL    DEMONSTRATION  [CHAP.    XXVI. 

The  upper  and  lower  surfaces  of  the  liver  have  different  relations, 
according  to  pathognomy.  The  upper  surface  has  its  relations  upward 
with  the  brain  and  lungs,  by  which  it  produces  a  cough,  a  headache,  or 
cerebral  oppression.  The  lower  surface  relates  downwards,  producing 
nausea  and  extreme  prostration  (relating  to  Disease),,  sympathizing 
with  the  pelvic  region  of  nausea.  The  difficult  breathing  and  hurried 
respiration  appearing  in  hepatitis  are  produced  by  the  upper  surface 
of  the  liver. 

"  A  peculiar  symptom  of  all  forms  of  hepatitis  (says  Prof.  Jones) 
is  the  great  lowness  of  spirits,  with  a  peculiarly  depressed  condition 
of  the  nervous  energies,  affecting  the  moral  and  intellectual  faculties, 
so  that  the  individual  becomes  morose  and  unsociable."  In  chronic 
cases  he  says  :  "  A  very  striking  and  diagnostic  symptom  is  the  peculiar 
lowness  of  spirits  and  gloomy  forebodings  of  the  patient.  Individuals 
of  naturally  buoyant  and  sprightly  dispositions  are  often  changed  to 
gloomy,  morose  and  desponding  hypochondriacs.  Those  before  cheer- 
ful and  amiable  become  cross,  crabbed  and  unsociable,  —  in  short,  un- 
dergo an  entire  change  of  manner,  and  apparently  of  character." 

Dr.  Philip  says  :  "  All  affections  of  the  liver  produce  depression  of 
spirits,  hence  the  name  melancholy.  In  its  organic  affection,  this 
symptom  is  generally  more  uniform  ;  its  secretion  is  also  more  uni- 
formly deranged.  In  some  cases  the  patient  becomes  more  or  less 
lethargic,  the  mind  at  times  wandering,  and  the  long-continued  irrita- 
tion of  the  liver  occasionally  gives  rise  to  some  of  those  states  which 
dispose  to  the  different  forms  of  apoplexy.  The  headaches  of  bilious 
subjects  every  one  has  witnessed."  Hydrocephalus  he  mentions  as 
one  of  the  serious  effects  of  the  liver  on  the  brain.  Another  effect  is 
difficult  breathing  and  cough,  which  sometimes  becomes  permanent. 

No  severe  disease  of  the  liver  can  exist  without  affecting  the  brain. 
A  diseased,  yellow  and  atrophied  condition  of  the  liver  was  reported 
by  Drs.  Bamberger  and  Michly  in  women  who  were  attacked  with 
agitation  and  delirium  and  died  comatose.  The  spleen  in  these  cases 
was  enlarged  and  softened. 

Delirium  tremens  is  one  of  the  cerebral  affections  which  are  largely 
due  to  the  liver.  Dr.  S.  Thompson  and  Dr.  Corf  from  extensive  obser- 
vation in  hospitals  maintain  this  view,  and  have  cured  attacks  by 
vigorous  dosing  with  calomel  and  cathartics,  finding  no  need  for 
opiates. 

The  tendency  of  the  upper  surface  of  the  liver  to  affect  the  lungs 
and  brain  produces  sometimes  a  pain  under  the  right  shoulder-blade. 
The  affection  of  the  head  is  most  apt  to  appear  near  the  median  line 
and  especially  near  the  coronal  suture.  Some  persons  have  professed 
to  diagnose  disease  of  the  liver  by  finding  a  tenderness  at  that  spot. 


CHAT.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  64I 

Jaundice,  being  a  state  of  forced  inaction  of  the  liver,  has  very- 
different  symptoms  from  its  active  diseases.  It  may  be  produced  by 
fright,  mental  anxiety  or  passion,  and  as  a  negative  condition  is  not 
a  serious  affair;  but  jaundice  produced  by  disease  immediately  below 
the  liver  is  a  deadly  condition,  as  it  involves  the  region  of  Disease. 
M.  Leudet  states  that  phlebitis  of  the  vena  porta  produces  irregular 
shivering,  great  prostration,  delirium  and  coma.  Portal  congestion,  a 
symptom  of  various  congestive  diseases,  is  a  prostrating  influence 
which  may  alone  become  fatal,  and  when  overcome  by  strong 
emetics  the  relief  is  great. 

Jaundice  alone,  being  an  inactive  condition  of  the  liver,  produceg 
no  disturbance  of  the  brain  or  lungs,  and  may  coexist  with  good 
general  health  ;  but  active  diseases  of  the  liver  produce  many 
morbid  effects,  according  to  the  location  of  the  disease  in  the  liver,  a? 
pathognomy  indicates. 

Prof.  Stokes  speaks  of  inflammation  at  the  upper  surface  of  the  live* 
as  liable  to  extend  to  the  base  of  the  lungs  or  resemble  pleurisy,  and 
requiring  similar  treatment  —  he  cared  not  whether  the  disease  had 
passed  the  diaphragm  or  not ;  but  just  below  the  liver  the  effects  were 
entirely  different.  "  Here  we  come  (says  Prof.  Stokes)  to  an  interest- 
ing and  curious  fact.  You  recollect  that  in  speaking  of  gastro-enteric 
inflammation  I  alluded  to  the  nature  of  the  accompanying  fever,  and 
stated  that  it  was  commonly  of  a  low  character  and  that  there  were  no 
local  inflammations  in  which  the  fever  was  so  often  typhoid  as  in  affec- 
tions of  the  gastro-intestiual  surface.  This,  I  believe,  has  been  one 
great  cause  of  the  ignorance  of  medical  practitioners  with  respect  to 
gastric  and  enteric  inflammations  ;  they  have  been  most  commonly 
looked  upon  as  cases  of  typhus  and  treated  accordingly." 

Thus  there  seems  to  be  a  morbific  or  prostrating  locality  just  below 
the  liver  (where  the  portal  vein  brings  in  the  most  degenerate  blood. 
of  the  entire  circulation)  which  constitutes  the  seat  of  the  lowest 
vitality  or  closest  approximation  to  disease.  This  explains  the  deadly 
power  of  a  disease  located  just  below  the  liver, — yellow  fever, — in 
which  the  liver  is  not  congested,  but  the  stomach  is  chiefly  involved. 

Stokes  and  Graves  describe  a  gastro-intestinal  fever  in  Meath  Hospi- 
tal which  proved  fatal  in  the  first  sixteen  cases,  some  dying  in  four 
to  six  hours.  Disease  near  the  portal  vein  brings  deadly  prostration. 
In  inflammation  of  the  stomach,  according  to  Watson,  there  is  fever  of 
a  low  type  and  a  small,  weak  pulse  ;  the  patient  is  pale  and  faint,  with 
collapsed  features,  cold  extremities  and  a  damp  skin.  "In  all  this 
we  see  a  tendency  to  death  by  asthenia?'  "  The  mode  of  dying  in 
these  cases  is  precisely  what  Bichat  describes  as  death  beginning  at  the 
heart."     "  Intense  inflammation  of  the  stomach  may  destroy  life  in 


642  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

twenty-four  hours."  In  this  prostration  from  vital  exhaustion  the 
pulse  is  almost  or  quite  imperceptible,  and  medical  aid  extremely 
unsuccessful. 

In  gastritis,  according  to  Prof.  Stokes,  "the  patient  rapidly  falls  into 
a  low  typhoid  state.  There  is  no  form  of  inflammation,  except  that 
which  accompanies  severe  peritonitis,  in  which  the  typhoid  state  comes 
on  so  rapidly.  Inflammations  of  the  digestive  tube  differ  in  general 
from  similar  affections  of  other  organs  chiefly  in  this,  that  prostration 
rapidly  supersedes  excitement.  A  patient  laboring  under  inflammation 
of  the  brain  will  exhibit  for  a  long  time  the  decided  symptoms  of  high 
excitement,  and  of  what  has  been  termed  the  phlogistic  diathesis. 
Acute  pneumonia  and  inflammatory  affections  of  other  parts  will  go  on 
for  days,  without  prostration,  and  require  the  use  of  the  lancet ;  but 
gastritis  is  a  disease  in  which  the  inflammatory  symptoms,  as  they  are 
called,  last  but  for  a  very  short  time." 

ABDOMEN    AND    LOWER    LIMBS. 

The  tendency  of  the  abdominal  system  to  exhaustion,  disease,  fever 
and  death,  as  taught  by  Sarcognomy,  might  be  illustrated  by  volumes  ; 
and  this  tendency  remains  in  the  organs  after  death,  as  a  source  of 
infection.  Prof.  Macartney  says  (Macartney  on  Inflammation,  p.  62) : 
"The  sero-purulent  fluid  found  in  the  large  cavities  after  death  (if  no 
means  of  prevention  be  employed)  seldom  fails  to  infect  persons,  and 
the  most  dangerous  animal  fluid  is  that  contained  in  the  cavity  of  the 
abdomen  after  puerperal  peritonitis,  or  the  serum  found  in  parts  which 
have  suffered  diffused  or  gangrenous  inflammation." 

We  now  perceive  that  the  pathological  phenomena  of  the  brain,  the 
lungs,  the  heart,  the  pleura,  the  liver  and  the  abdomen  correspond 
with  what  Sarcognomy  indicates,  and  if  it  were  worth  the  trouble  one 
might  build  up  a  system  of  Sarcognomy  from  the  facts  of  pathology 
alone. 

Dysentery  and  typhoid  are  diseases  of  great  suffering,  —  especially 
the  former.  Sarcognomy  shows  that  the  inferior  portions  of  the  body 
have  strong  tendencies  to  restlessness,  gloom,  pain  and  suffering. 
Dysentery,  which  occupies  the  lower  part  of  the  trunk  and  often 
extends  into  the  rectum,  is  a  disease  of  torturing  pain  as  well  as  de- 
pression. This  difference  in  the  upper  and  lower  regions  is  verified 
in  pyaemia.  According  to  Dr.  Sedillot  "  the  most  common  seat  of  the 
muscular  abscess  is  in  the  thickness  of  the  muscles  of  the  calf,  where, 
though  causing  great  pain,  it  may  produce  but  little  redness  or  swelling. 
The  vast  purulent  collections  occasionally  occurring  in  t»he  pectoral 
and  deltoid  muscles  are  sometimes  only  discoverable  by  attentive 
exploration,  so  little  do  the  patients  complain  of  them"     How  great 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  643 

the  contrast  between  the  mental  conditions  of  thoracic  diseases  and  the 
prostrating  gloom  and  suffering  which  begin  in  the  liver  and  extend 
to  all  below,  showing  the  maximum  of  irritation  and  pain  in  the  gout 
and  rheumatism  of  the  lower  limbs. 

There  is  probably  no  more  severe  pathological  suffering  than  that 
of  the  rectum  and  anus  which  was  experienced  by  the  lower  class  of 
Irish,  in  the  famine  of  1846-7-8,  from  the  impaction  of  potato  skins  in 
the  bowels.  The  pain  of  the  rectum  and  anus  was  described  as  pierc- 
ing like  a  knife,  forbidding  sleep,  and  sometimes  producing  cramps  of 
the  lower  limbs.  It  was  pronounced  by  women  ten  times  worse  than 
that  of  the  severest  labor. 

All  diseases  of  the  bowels  have  more  or  less  of  the  character  which 
Sarcognomy  assigns  to  the  abdomen,  —  relaxation,  debility,  enfeebled 
pulse,  prostration,  despondency  and  oppression  of  the  brain,  fever 
and  a  putrescent  tendency.  Many  pages  might  be  filled  with  illus- 
trations of  this,  if  I  were  preparing  a  systematic  work.  Melaena  or 
hemorrhage  of  the  bowels  is  described  by  Prof.  Wood  as  follows, 
after  speaking  of  the  feelings  of  oppression,  dejection  of  spirits,  languor, 
weakness,  and  pale,  sallow  or  dingy  complexion  :  "  A  patient  in  this 
condition  is  unexpectedly  affected  with  griping  pain,  nausea,  in- 
creased paleness,  and  more  or  less  giddiness,  faintness,  depression  of 
pulse,  and  weakness  of  the  extremities,  attended  by  a  discharge  from 
the  bowels,  which  on  examination  proves  to  be  blood  of  a  black  color, 
very  offensive,  and  otherwise  altered  in  character.  In  some  instances, 
again,  the  hemorrhage  comes  on  without  any  premonitory  symptoms, 
and  the  evacuation  from  the  bowels  and  its  attendant  depression  are 
the  first  obvious  signs  of  disease.  This  depression  is  sometimes  ex- 
treme, and  the  patient  may  sink  beyond  the  point  of  reactio7i.  Sudden 
p7'ostration  and  death  have  occurred  without  any  evacuation." 

"  Next  to  diseases  of  the  brain  (says  Dr.  E.  H.  Dorland)  no  other 
class  of  ailment  is  capable  of  producing  the  amount  of  physical  and 
mental  suffering,  systemic  functional  disturbance  and  general  ner- 
vous debility,  as  are  diseases  of  the  rectum."  The  chief  pathological 
relation  of  the  abdomen  is  to  fever,  to  which  each  of  the  viscera 
contributes  its  peculiar  share,  according  to  the  laws  of  Sarcognomy. 
I  had  written  a  full  exposition  of  fevers  as  viewed  in  the  light  of 
Sarcognomy,  which  they  illustrate,  but  do  not  deem  it  expedient  to 
introduce  the  essay  in  this  volume. 

The  contrast  between  the  upper  and  lower  portions  of  the  human 
body  is  very  great.  The  bosom,  the  seat  of  love,  is  highly  attractive, 
and  is  offered  to  the  beloved  object.  The  nobility  of  the  form  lies  in 
the  development  of  the  chest.  The  odors  of  the  bosom  and  axilla  are 
pleasant.     The  lower  end   of  the  trunk,   the  region  of  the  buttocks, 


644  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVL 

is  associated  only  with  ideas  of  aversion  arid  disgust  and  unpleasant 
odors.  Diseases  involving  the  lower  part  of  the  trunk  are  not  only 
painful  and  distressing  but  offensive.  The  most  offensive  portion  of 
the  cutaneous  surface  is  that  between  the  toes.  The  climax  of  offen- 
sive disease  is  reached  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  sacrum,  which  con- 
trols the  leg  and  foot,  in  certain  conditions  of  the  rectum.  This  was 
most  forcibly  illustrated  in  the  Irish  famine  after  1846,  when  the  rec- 
tum in  many  peasants  became  obstructed  with  potato  skins,  requiring 
mechanical  removal.  Dr.  Popham,  of  the  Cork  North  Infirmary, 
says,  after  describing  the  condition  and  severe  sufferings  of  these 
patients  :  "  Another  sign  which  we  considered  almost  pathognomonic 
of  this  ailment  was  the  peculiar  fetor  emanating  from  the  patient. 
It  is  impossible  to  describe  this  offensive  smell  by  comparison,  as  it 
was  altogether  sui  generis,  presenting  nothing  of  the  natural  feculent 
odor  of  the  evacuations.  It  appeared  to  us  more  like  the  effluvium 
from  a  combination  of  vegetable  and  animal  matters  in  an  advanced 
stage  of  putrescence.  Its  insupportable  nature  to  the  stomach  may 
be  judged  from  the  fact  that  during  the  measures  necessary  for  the 
relief  of  the  patients,  the  nurses  of  the  Infirmary,  though  habituated 
to  disagreeable  smells,  could  not  abide  this  putrid  and  disgusting  odor, 
without  being  seized  with  retching.  Its  rapidity  of  diffusion  was  also 
remarkable,  the  air  of  the  whole  hospital  becoming  quickly  saturated 
with  it.  When  the  senses  have  once  taken  cognizance  of  it  the  unfor- 
tunate person  can  be  at  once  detected  amongst  a  host  of  applicants 
for  relief." 

The  lower  limbs  being  associated  with  the  base  of  the  trunk  and 
the  basilar  region  of  the  brain  brings  them  into  close  connection  with 
animal  life  as  well  as  its  offensive  elements.  Hence  the  danger  of 
amputation  and  injuries,  which  is  greater  in  proportion  as  they 
approach  the  seat  of  Vital  Force  on  the  thigh.  The  report  of  three 
hundred  amputations  at  Guy's  Hospital,  London,  for  1859,  shows  that 
thirty  per  cent  of  the  amputations  of  the  lower  limbs  resulted  fatally, 
and  but  ten  per  cent  of  the  upper  limbs.  In  traumatic  amputations 
of  the  lower  limbs  sixty  per  cent  were  fatal. 

Intense  stimulation  of  the  lower  limbs  has  great  power  to  rouse 
the  dormant  vitality  of  the  base  of  the  brain. 

The  relation  of  the  lower  limbs  to  the  brain  is  not  realized  by  phy- 
sicians generally  as  it  should  be  to  enable  them  to  relieve  the  head 
and  chest.  It  was  well  enforced  by  Prof.  Stokes,  in  his  lecture  on 
Encephalitis,  as  follows:  "You  will  meet  with  cases  of  cerebral 
inflammation  in  the  last  stage,  with  profound  coma,  general  paralysis, 
an  imperceptible  pulse  and  tracheal  rattle.  It  is  a  melancholy  thing 
to  be  called  to  a  case  of  this  description,  where  the  ordinary  means 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  645 

furnished  by  medicine  are  so  inadequate  to  the  removal  or  even  the 
alleviation  of  symptoms,  and  yet  it  is  a  fact  that  even  under  these  cir- 
cumstances cases  have  been  cured  by  the  adoption  of  an  extraordinary 
measure.     This  consists  in  the  employment  of  enormous  and  sudden 
counter-irritation,  by  pouring  boiling  water  over  the  lower  extremities, 
while  at  the  same  time  ice  is  applied  to  the  head.     This  is  certainly 
an    extraordinary   and    barbarous    method,    but  it  has  succeeded  in 
rescuing  the  patient  as  it  were  from  the  jaws  of  death.     One  of  the 
most  singular  cases  of  this  kind  is  recorded  by  Lallemand  —  that  of 
a  man  upwards  of  sixty,  who  in  consequence  of  a  fall  on  the  head 
was  attacked  with  encephalitis,  which  was  mistaken  for  an  essential 
fever  until  the  tenth  day.     At  this  time  he  was  first  seen  by  Lalle- 
mand, who  found  him  laboring  under  severe  and  long-continued  syn- 
cope ;    the    right    extremities  flexed  ;  the   hand   firmly   closed  ;   the 
surface   on  this   side   insensible  ;  the  eyelids  closed  ;  the  eyes  turned 
up,  squinting  and  insensible  to  light ;  complete  loss  of  hearing  and 
intelligence.     The  body  was   covered   with  a  cold  viscid  sweat ;  the 
respiration  frequent  and  stertorous,  and  the  pulse  absent.     Lallemand 
proposed  pouring  boiling  water  on  the  ankles,  and  at  the  same  time 
applying  ice  to  the  head,  which  was  consented  to  with  great  reluc- 
tance by  the  other  medical  attendants.     At  the  moment  the  boiling 
water  was  applied  there  was  a  sudden  motion  of  the  whole  body;  the 
left  arm  was  agitated,  the  eyes  opened,  and  the  pulse  could  be  felt  at 
the  wrist.     In  half  an  hour  the  boiling  water  was  applied  to  the  thighs 
with  still  greater  effect,  —  color  returned  to  the  face  and  the  pulse 
became  fuller.     From   this  time  improvement  went  on.     Deep,  sup- 
purating wounds  were  produced   by  the  boiling  water,   which   took 
more  than   six   weeks   to  cicatrize.     The  patient's  recovery  was  per- 
fect.    In  Dr.   Mackintosh's   work  you  will   find  this  practice  recom- 
mended." 

Dr.  H.  E.  Greene  of  Kentucky  reports  a  severe  and  protracted 
case  of  epilepsy  in  a  negro,  defying  all  medical  treatment,  which  was 
suspended  after  he  fell  in  a  fit  and  burned  badly  the  whole  of  the 
bottom  of  the  left  foot.  During  four  months  his  fits  ceased  and  his 
health  was  good,  but  the  fits  returned  after  the  foot  was  healed. 

SYMPATHIES  OF   THE  PELVIC  REGION. 

The  inferior  pelvic  region  of  the  body,  corresponding  to  the  under, 
jaw  region  of  the  head  (covering  the  interior  basis  of  the  middle  lobe) 
is  the  antagonist  of  that  portion  of  the  brain  at  the  temporal  arch,  just 
behind  a  vertical  line  from  the  ear,  which  sustains  the  tone  of  the 
brain  and  entire  nervous  system,  and  has  therefore  been  called  Sanity. 
The  inferior  pelvic  region,  the  antagonist  of  Sanity,  tends  to  general 


646  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

unsoundness  or  insanity,  as  it  prostrates  the  entire  nervous  system 
when  it  becomes  the  controlling  element,  —  by  which  I  mean  suppress- 
ing" its  opposite.  It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  no  function  of  any 
organ  is  evil  in  its  normal  action  in  association  with  its  opposite.  Evil 
exists  only  when  the  balance  is  destroyed. 

As  this  location  is  in  the  body,  its  effects  are  chiefly  physiologi- 
cal derangement  and  exhaustion,  but  by  inevitable  sympathy  they  im- 
pair and  derange  the  brain  and  nervous  system.  Unsoundness  of  mind, 
erroneous  judgment  and  unwise  impulses  are  very  common  conditions, 
but  it  is  not  until  reason  is  completely  overpowered  that  the  term  in- 
sanity is  used. 

Every  physician  knows  how  completely  the  constitution  of  the  male 
is  destroyed  by  sexual  excesses,*  and  how  completely  uterine  derange- 
ments prostrate  the  nervous  system  of  woman.  In  other  words,  any 
considerable  irritation  located  in  the  lower  pelvic  region,  and  thus  con- 
centrating the  vital  action  in  that  direction,  drawing  it  away  from 
the  tonic  regions  of  the  constitution,  is  fatal  to  nervous  integrity.  The 
general  experience  of  the  medical  profession  would  sanction  this 
statement,  but  the  most  remarkable  illustrations  of  its  truth  have  been 
recently  furnished  by  Prof.  E.  H.  Pratt  of  the  Chicago  Homoeopathic 
Medical  College,  in  his  work  on  orificial  surgery.  That  he  should  ex- 
aggerate the  truth  is  not  surprising  and  does  not  diminish  the  value 
of  his  instructive  experience.  Prof.  Pratt  boldly  asserts  that :  "  In  all 
pathological  conditions,  surgical  or  medical,  which  linger  persistently 
in  spite  of  all  efforts  at  removal,  from  the  delicate  derangements  of 
the  brain  substance  that  induce  insanity,  and  the  various  forms  of  neu- 
rasthenia; to  the  great  variety  of  morbid  changes  repeatedly  found  in 
the  coarser  structures  of  the  body,  there  will  invariably  be  found 
more  or  less  irritation  of  the  rectum,  or  the  orifices  of  the  sexual  sys- 
tem, or  both.  In  other  words,  I  believe  that  all  forms  of  chronic  dis- 
eases have  one  common  predisposing  cause,  and  that  cause  is  a  nerve 
waste  occasioned  by  orificial  irritation  at  the  lower  openings  of  the 
body.  These  irritations  induce  a  rigidity  of  the  sphincters  guarding 
the  parts,  which  either  continues,  sympathetically  affecting  the  rest 
of  the  involuntary  muscular  system,  and  steadily  draining  the  nervous 
power  that  supplies  it,  until  the  whole  struggle  terminates  in  a  rigor 
mortis,  or,  tiring  out  in  the  hopeless  grip,  relaxes  into  the  inertia  of 
paralysis." 

As  these  statements  (though  too  sweeping  as  to  the  origins  of  dis- 

*  Lallemand  (on  spermatorrhoea)  expresses  it  forcibly  by  saying,  "  I  regard  sperm- 
atorrhoea as  the  true  cause  of  all  the  cases  of  hypochondriasis,  ischuria  and  debility 
which  are  attributed  to  affections  of  the  urinary  organs.  This  position  is  proved,  I 
think,  by  the  weakness  and  rare  occurrence  of  erection,  the  rapidity  of  ejaculation  and 
the  increased  fluidity  of  the  semen  observed  in  most  of  these  patients." 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  647 

eases)  appear  to  be  sustained  by  his  cases,  the  question  naturally  arises. 
Why  do  irritations  in  this  locality  have  these  tremendous  deranging 
effects  on  vitality,  so  different  from  the  effects  of  irritations  elsewhere? 
Dr.  Pratt's  explanation  is  the  best  he  could  derive  from  the  common 
physiology,  but  Sarcognomy  replies  that  the  vital  forces  or  functions 
have  special  locations  for  all  these  tendencies  and  capacities,  and  there 
is  a  definite  law  for  their  location,  which  embraces  a  system  of  antag- 
onism or  opposite  tendencies.  According  to  these  laws  animal  force 
and  intensity  or  violence  of  action  increase  as  we  descend  in  the  brain 
and  body  —  the  base  of  the  brain  and  the  base  of  the  trunk  having 
the  maximum  of  violent  force,  which  is  exhausting  and  injurious  when 
predominant,  while  the  summit  of  each  have  their  maximum  of  gentle- 
ness and  stability  of  vital  action,  which  is  happy  in  its  tendency. 

Sensibility,  increasing  as  we  descend,  attains  its  maximum  in  the 
head  at  the  base  of  the  middle  lobe,  where  Ferrier  demonstrated  its 
location  in  the  monkey,  about  thirty  years  after  I  had  discovered  it  in 
man.  Passional  violence  and  force  also  increase  along  with  sensibility, 
but  occupying  a  more  posterior  location,  as  in  the  human  constitution 
power  is  behind  and  sensibility  before.  The  maximum  sensibility 
that  gives  pleasure  is  found  in  the  sexual  apparatus,  and  the  intensity 
of  this  overrules  all  other  human  motives,  so  that  it  stimulates  ani- 
mals to  battle  and  often  stimulates  men  to  murder  even  the  innocent 
object  of  their  passion,  as  well  as  competing  rivals. 

Of  course  painful  distutbances  in  this  region  are  more  overwhelm- 
ing than  such  disturbances  anywhere  else,  and  I  recollect  that  Dupuy. 
tren,  the  famous  French  surgeon,  expressed  the  opinion  that  laudanum 
was  three  times  more  effective  in  the  rectum  than  in  the  stomach. 

There  are  two  locations  relating  to  sensibility  in  the  brain,  and 
two  corresponding  locations  in  the  body.  The  most  familiar  location 
is  at  the  base  of  the  middle  (or  temporo-sphenoidal)  lobe,  just  above 
the  level  of  the  zygoma  (cheekbone),  a  location  which  I  discovered  in 
1837-38,  and  which  has  of  late  been  illustrated  by  Ferrier's  experiment 
on  the  monkey,  abolishing  sensibility  by  injuring  the  base  of  the  brain. 
There  is  another  correlative  location,  the  external  avenue  to  which  is 
just  below  the  prominence  of  the  chin  and  the  internal  location  at  the 
medulla  oblongata.  This  is  correlative  with  the  temporal  organ,  but 
differs  materially.  The  temporal  organ  has  an  intellectual  character, 
and  gives  us  knowledge  of  objects  touched  or  felt ;  the  posterior  organ 
is  not  intellectual,  but  produces  a  peculiar  excitability  and  intensity  of 
feeling,  which  acts  upon  the  emotions  and  passions  instead  of  the  in- 
tellect. The  corresponding  locations  on  the  body  are,  for  the  tempo- 
ral organ  the  epigastric  region,  nearer  to  the  sternum  than  the  umbili- 
cus, where  any  one  can  verify  the  sensibility  by  proving  with  a  sudden 


648  PATHOLOGICAL    DEMONSTRATION  [CHAP.    XXVI. 

pressure  that  it  is  the  seat  of  the  greatest  sensibility  in  the  body,  as  the 
opposite  region,  the  shoulder,  is  the  seat  of  the  greatest  hardihood. 
The  lower  organ  has  its  representative,  in  Sarcognomy,  below  the  um- 
bilicus at  a  space  corresponding  to  the  womb.  Hence  uterine  excite- 
ments (especially  in  hysteria)  develop  a  remarkable  exaltation  and  per- 
version of  sensibility,  both  physical  and  moral  —  giving  rise  to  a  great 
variety  of  diseases  or  quasi  diseases,  which  are  not  organic,  and  which 
disappear  in  a  marvellous  manner  by  mild  or  even  mental  agencies 
properly  applied.  Hyperesthesia  is  especially  the  characteristic  of 
hysteria,  of  which  the  etiology  and  pathology  were  elaborately  devel- 
oped in  the  classical  work  of  Prof.  Schutzenberger.  He  shows  that  dis- 
ease of  the  ovaries  is  a  very  prominent  but  not  universal  cause,  and 
that  pressure  on  the  ovaries  may  induce  pain  and  convulsive  action. 
Hyperesthesia  is  the  special  indication  of  hysteria.  According  to  M. 
Bricquet  this  hysterical  hyperaesthesia  is  located  in  the  muscles,  and 
felt  immediately  beneath  the  skin,  where  very  slight  pressure  or 
scratching  will  produce  very  great  pain.  This  symptom  was  present  in 
all  but  twenty  of  four  hundred  hysterical  women.  It  has  often  been 
maltreated  from  not  understanding  its.  nature  as  due  to  hysteria. 
Schutzenberger  speaks  of  this  as  a  pathological  condition,  the  mate- 
rial element  of  which  is  unknown  ;  but  there  is  no  such  material  ele- 
ment as  he  seeks, — exaltation  of  the  uterine  nerves  is  entirely  sufficient, 
or  the  corresponding  nervous  cause  may  be  in  the  medulla  oblongata. 
In  this  state  very  slight  electro-magnetic  currents  become  intolerable, 
and  they  are  all  cases  in  which  the  gentle  manual  treatment  prescribed 
by  therapeutic  Sarcognomy  is  promptly  efficient.  Hyperaesthesia  about 
the  head  is  found  in  about  nine-tenths  of  these  cases  ;  and  also  hyperaes- 
thesia of  the  muscles  of  the  back  is  frequently  found,  but  five  times  more 
frequently  in  the  lower  than  the  upper  part  of  the  back,  and  much  more 
often  on  the  left  side  than  the  right.  This  must  not  be  confounded 
with  disease  of  the  spine. 

A  very  remarkable  fact  is  the  close  sympathy  between  the  two  loca- 
tions of  Sensibility  on  the  body,  producing  epigastralgia  as  a  common 
symptom  of  hysteria,  —  being  observed,  according  to  M.  Bricquet,  in 
317  out  of  358  hysterical  subjects.  The  two  organs  in  the  brain,  accord- 
ing to  the  fixed  laws  of  cerebral  science,  are  correlative,  co-operative 
and  similar.  Being  thus  co-operative  in  action  on  the  brain,  we  should 
expect  a  similar  co-operation  and  sympathy  in  the  body,  which  is  veri- 
fied by  the  epigastric  pains  just  stated  in  five-sixths  of  the  cases  of 
hysteria  reported  by  M.  Bricquet.  This  epigastralgia  is  produced,  ac- 
cording to  M.  Bricquet,  not  only  by  fully  developed  hysteria  and  men- 
strual derangements,  but  by  depressing  moral  emotions,  as  in  girls  sub- 
jected to  unkind  treatment.     The  pain  is  continuous  and  severe,  and 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  649 

may  be  aggravated  by  emotion,  but  is  not  affected  by  digestion,  and  he 
condemns  the  mistake  of  treating  this  as  an  affection  of  the  stomach  or 
solar  plexus.  It  tends  more  to  the  left  than  the  right  side.  The  study 
of  the  brain  explains  this  emotional  relation,  as  the  organ  of  Sensibility 
is  closely  connected  with  that  of  emotional  excitement. 

This  hyperesthesia  and  epigastralgia  have  been  sadly  misunderstood 
heretofore,  and  thus  allowed  to  continue  through  life,  wearing  out  the 
patient,  making  active  occupation  intolerable,  and  bringing  on  emaci- 
ation and  premature  old  age.  M.  Bricquet  affirms  the  ease  with 
which  it  is  relieved,  and  every  magnetic  healer  finds  it  under  his 
control. 

The  pleuritic  extension  of  this  pain  has  been  mentioned,  and  M. 
Bricquet  speaks  of  it  as  extending,  after  epigastralgia,  in  a  semi-circle 
from  the  fifth  to  the  eighth  ribs,  chiefly  on  the  left  side.  The  hyperes- 
thesia of  hysteria  produces  intense  pain  and  sensibility  to  pressure,  but 
is  free  from  inflammation,  and  differs  materially  from  rheumatism  and 
neuralgia  and  is  much  more  easily  relieved.  Its  dependence  on  the 
sexual  system,  which  is  the  seat  of  the  greatest  sensibility,  is  further 
illustrated  by  the  remark  of  Dr.  Garratt  (the  electrician)  that  "there  is 
not  a  question  that  habitual  indulgence  in  mere  thoughts  of  venery 
may  also  produce  it,  and  much  more  the  habitual  excess."  Thus  we 
perceive  the  two  correlative  organs  in  the  brain  are  thoroughly  illus- 
trated by  their  correspondences  in  the  body  ;  and  a  complete  investiga- 
tion would  show  that  all  organs  which  co-operate  or  antagonize  in  the 
brain  have,~in  their  somatic  organs,  as  shown  by  Sarcognomy,  a  similar 
co-operation  or  antagonism. 

Sarcognomy  indicates  that  the  lower  pelvic  region  is  the  seat  of 
physiological  insanity  or  derangement,  corresponding  to  cerebral  in- 
sanity, capable  of  deranging  every  bodily  function,  and  of  this  Prof. 
Pratt  has  given  many  new  illustrations  of  great  value.  He  states 
that  dilation  or  stretching  of  the  sphincter  ani,  including  its  internal 
portion,  will  produce  a  greater  effect  upon  a  patient  in  anaesthesia 
than  any  other  operation,  as  it  causes  an  oppression  and  almost  entire 
paralysis  of  breathing,  if  done  with  force.  "  A  similar  effect  (he  adds) 
is  often  seen  in  the  use  of  sounds  in  the  sexual  organs,  but  it  is  not  so 
marked  or  so  constant."  It  may  be  added  that  the  same  degree  of 
force  is  not  used. 

He  gives  the  sympathy  of  involuntary  fibres,  contracting  and 
relaxing,  as  his  explanation  "why  orificial  work  has  such  instantane- 
ous and  truly  marvellous  effects  upon  the  entire  circulation,  warming 
at  once  all  parts  that  before  were  abnormally  cold,  and  cooling  parts 
that  were  abnormally  hot,  starting,  as  if  by  magic,  functions  that  had 
been  long  dormant,  and  subduing  those  that  had  been  abnormally 


65O  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

active  ;  in  a  word,  more  or  less  completely  re-establishing  uniformity 
of  circulation  and  function." 

These  results  attained  by  a  successful  surgeon  fully  establish  as  a 
practical  therapeutic  doctrine  the  principle  of  Sarcognomy  that  the 
lower  pelvic  region  is  the  source  of  nervous  derangement  for  the  body 
and  that  by  removing  its  irritations  we  may  restore  the  normal  and 
more  vigorous  action  of  the  nervous  system.  I  feel  much  indebted 
to  Dr.  Pratt  for  giving  this  demonstration  of  what  I  have  long  known 
to  be  true,  but  he  is  mistaken  in  limiting  explanation  by  the  term 
orifices.  "  Orifices  "  exist  and  occupy  a  great  part  of  the  space,  but 
it  is  not  really  necessary  that  the  irritations  should  be  in  the  orifices, 
to  produce  deleterious  effects.  The  injurious  effects  arise  and  obtain 
their  maximum  at  the  inferior  pelvic  region,  and  analogous  effects  are 
developed  as  we  approach  that  region,  whether  in  the  sacrum,  the 
bladder,  the  womb,  or  the  lower  small  intestines,  in  which  we  have  the 
cause  of  the  very  deranging  effects  seen  in  typhoid.  The  extreme 
mobility  and  irregularity  of  the  nervous  system  under  the  influence 
of  the  womb  approximates  closely  to  the  phenomena  of  insanity,*  and 
even  counterfeits  a  great  variety  of  diseases  which  are  explained  when 
we  find  that  they  belong  to  the  protean  condition  of  hysteria. 

That  the  lower  pelvic  pain  produced  in  the  rectum  should  almost 
suspend  respiration  is  explained  by  the  close  connection  of  the  pelvic 
region  with  the  higher  emotions,  which  give  expansion  to  the  chest. 
Love  ever  agitates  the  respiration  and  expands  the  lungs  when  in- 
tense, and  sexual  love  belongs  to  the  region  from  the  sacro-lumbar 
junction  to  the  external  genitals,  in  the  exercise  of  which  respiration 
is  greatly  affected. 

*  The  connection  of  uterine  disease  and  mania  was  illustrated  by  Dr.  Lever  in  Guy's 
Hospital  Reports  (Oct.,  1849),  by  a  case  xn  which  a  woman  who  had  borne  six  chil- 
dren was  subject  to  melancholy,  insomnia  and  religious  delusions,  fearing  eternal 
damnation,  with  an  increase  of  the  symptoms  at  catamenial  periods.  Treatment  in 
an  asylum,  not  directed  to  the  uterine  condition,  had  not  relieved  her.  The  uterus 
was  enlarged  somewhat,  ante-verted,  deeply  congested,  with  granulations  and  strong 
pulsation  in  its  bloodvessels,  and  discharging  a  thick  mucus.  Cupping  the  sacrum 
and  local  treatment  of  the  uterus,  including  leeching,  restored  her  to  health  and  san- 
ity. Dr.  L.  reports  a  similar  case,  and  states  his  conclusion  that  insanity  some- 
times depends  on  disease  of  the  sexual  organs  and  may  become  permanent  unless 
they  are  treated,  and  that  at  the  close  of  the  treatment  counter-irritation  over  the 
sacrum  will  be  a  valuable  auxiliary. 

"  Simple  feverishness  in  nervous  subjects  or  in  those  whose  brain  is  kept  in  a  con- 
stant state  of  activity  will  often  occasion  delirium.  Violent  pain  may  also  cause 
it.  Some  organs  seem  also  to  have  the  privilege  of  being  in  their  diseases  accom- 
panied by  this  symptom.  The  ruomb  is  one  of  those.  In  some  instances  of  painful 
and  difficult  menstruation,  the  patients  are  delirious  at  each  period.  Others  become 
partially  insane  at  the  beginning  of  pregnancy,  and  puerperal  mania  has  been  met 
with  frequently  by  all  those  who  have  given  much  attention  to  the  practice  of  mid- 
wifery." —  Andral :  Lectures  on  General  Pathology. 

In  cases  of  Abortion  artificially  procured,  Majendie  says  that  he  has  ascertained 
that  serious  mental  disorders  or  incurable  mental  alienation  often  follow  —  in  other 
cases,  horrible  sufferings,  abdominal  neuralgia,  etc.,  arise,  which  are  as  bad  as  death 
itself. 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  65 1 

The  most  remarkable  feature  of  Dr.  Pratt's  operations  is  their  sim- 
plicity and  success.  Mechanical  dilation  of  the  anal  region,  removal 
of  rectal  pockets  and  hemorrhoidal  tumors,  and  the  introduction  of 
sounds  into  the  genital  organs  have  been  his  main  reliance,  though 
he  has  also  used  electric,  pneumatic  and  homoeopathic  medical  treat- 
ment quite  judiciously,  as  I  infer  from  his  language,  but  to  what  ex- 
tent he  has  relied  upon  them  is  not  apparent  from  his  brief  mono- 
graph. 

To  give  the  full  force  of  Dr.  Pratt's  testimony,  his  entire  book 
should  be  quoted.  I  will  venture,  however,  to  quote  the  very  brief 
statement  of  the  character  of  each  case  and  the  mode  of  treatment. 

Twenty  cases  are  reported  by  the  author,  embracing  "  Nervous 
prostration,"  "  Insanity  and  insomnia  with  constipation,"  "Secon- 
dary syphilis"  (two  cases),  "Nervous  prostration,  followed  by  cough, 
hectic  fever  and  night  sweats,"  "  Constipation,  —  congestion  of  the 
liver,  following  operation,"  "Articular  inflammation,"  "Albuminuria,'* 
"  Hyperaemia  of  the  liver,"  "General  debility  with  complications," 
"  Rheumatism,  dropsy  and  heart  failure,"  "  Jaundice,"  "  Chronic  bron- 
chitis, nervous  prostration,  slight  paralysis  agitans  and  rheumatism," 
"Melancholia,"  "Hydrocephalus,"  "  Chronic  diarrhoea,"  "Priapism," 
"Supra  and  infra-clavicular  abscesses,"  "Abscess  with  infiltration  of 
pus,"  and  "  Abscess  of  the  groin." 

The  operations  in  these  cases  were  stretching  the  sphincter,  removal 
of  rectal  pockets,  removal  of  rectal  papilla,  passage  of  urethral 
sounds,  dilation  of  the  uterine  canal,  excision  of  piles,  dilation  of  the 
uterus  by  sounds,  cauterizing  of  rectal  ulcer,  circumcision,  and  removal 
of  remains  of  hymen.  The  brief  reports  of  the  cases  are  very  interest- 
ing and  are  corroborated  by  thirty-two  similar  reports  from  other  physi- 
cians. I  would  mention  his  case  of  melancholia:  "A  stout,  heavy 
man,  aged  forty-seven,  afraid  of  everybody  and  everything  ;  has  not 
left  his  room  for  months,  and  yet  presenting  no  organic  lesion  ; 
bowels  regular."  A  contracted  sphincter  and  four  rectal  pockets 
were  discovered  and  treated,  and  a  contracted  prepuce  slit  and  sound 
passed.  Result  :  perfectly  cured  in  three  weeks,  though  "he  had  been 
under  the  care  of  doctors,  more  or  less,  for  ten  years." 

The  most  marvellous  examples  are  the  two  cases  of  syphilis,  cured 
without  medicine,  by  removal  of  rectal  pockets  and  papilla  and  passing- 
sounds.  These  cases  show  the  wonderful  recuperative  power  of  the 
nervous  system  when  relieved  from  the  lower  pelvic  irritation  which 
prostrates  its  power,  and  the  importance  of  looking  for  hypo-pelvic 
irritations  when  the  recuperative  power  of  nature  is  inefficient.  Thev 
give  additional  force  to  the  teaching  of  Sarcognomy  that  in  all  cases 
of  insanity  and  paralysis  the  hypo-pelvic  region  should  be  investigated 


652  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

and  should  be  subjected  to  tonic  treatment  for  the  sympathetic  effects 
on  the  brain.  This  will  produce  a  new  era  in  the  treatment  of  insanity. 
Positive  currents  from  the  perineum  to  dorsal  spine  summit  and  to 
the  axilla  will  become  a  leading  element  of  treatment  in  addition  to 
surgical  and  medical  measures. 

Of  the  cases  reported  as  treated  and  cured  by  orificial  surgery  in 
this  volume,  there  were  twelve  cases  of  chronic  headache  combined 
with  various  other  symptoms,  two  of  neuralgia,  one  of  blindness,  one 
of  paralysis,  one  of  hydrocephalus,  one  of  priapism,  one  of  melan- 
cholia and  two  of  insanity,  — twenty-one  neurological  affections  in  the 
fifty-two  cases. 

It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  sympathy  between  the  body  and  the 
brain  varies  greatly  in  different  constitutions.  In  those  impressible 
individuals  upon  whom  I  have  made  the  most  satisfactory  experiments, 
the  sympathy  is  very  close  and  the  brain  responds  promptly  to  every 
experiment  on  the  body.  But  in  those  whose  sensibility  and  impres- 
sibility are  moderate  the  brain  is  much  less  affected  by  bodily  condi- 
tions and  the  body  itself  is  less  affected  by  external  influences  and 
by  mental  conditions.  The  sensitive  nervous  system  brings  soul, 
brain  and  body  into  closer  communion  with  each  other,  as  well  as  closer 
communion  with  the  influences  of  nature,  art  and  society,  so  that 
they  are  more  amenable  to  treatment,  whether  it  be  medical,  nervau- 
ric  or  psychic.  When  the  nervous  sensibility  is  below  par,  mental 
influence  is  of  less  importance  and  treatment  requires  to  be  more 
strictly  local. 

I  have  referred  to  these  cases  because  they  make  so  striking  and 
practical  a  demonstration  of  what  is  taught  by  Sarcognomy  and  con- 
firmed by  all  relevant  pathological  history  —  the  increasing  intensity 
of  functions  as  we  descend  in  the  trunk,  and  the  antagonism  of  these 
intense  functions  to  the  orderly  action  of  the  brain,  although  they 
may,  under  control,  act  in  harmony  with  it  to  intensify  or  strengthen 
its  action.  The  sexual  power,  which  is  so  destructive  in  its  riotous 
excess,  is  one  of  the  most  important  elements  in  lending  its  intensity 
to  invigorate  both  love  in  its  passionate  strength  and  courage  in  its 
passional  energy. 

An  illustration  of  this  intense  sensibility  in  morbid  conditions  is 
shown  in  sensitive  urethral  caruncles,  which  are  described  in  the 
Columbia   Hospital  Report   of  1873,  as  follows  : 

"  If  we  except  fissure  of  the  anus,  there  is  no  disease  of  so  trifling 
a  magnitude,  productive  of  so  much  intense  suffering  as  irritable 
caruncle.  I  have  known  women  who  would  bear  the  pains  of  child- 
birth without  a  murmur  shrink  from  the  necessity  of  urinating,  and 
put  it  off  until  the  bladder  became  over-distended,  and  when  finally 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  653 

compelled  to  pass  water,  their  groans  revealed  the  excruciating  ago- 
nies they  endured.  Prof.  Simpson  reports  the  case  of  a  shepherd's 
wife  who  had  one  of  these  sensitive  caruncles  at  the  orifice  of  the 
urethra,  and  whenever  she  was  obliged  to  pass  water  was  in  the  habit 
of  going  some  distance  from  her  cottage,  in  order  that  she  might 
moan  and  scream  unheard,  so  intense  and  intolerable  was  the  suffer- 
ing." 

The  influence  of  these  pelvic  irritations  (which  are  not  confined 
to  orifices  but  occupy  a  large  space),  in  deranging  the  entire  nervous 
system,  has  innumerable  illustrations,  and  is  familiar  to  physicians. 
Prof.  Stokes,  referring  to  this,  says :  "  If  the  encephalitis  be 
caused  by  the  suppression  of  bleeding  piles  or  a  sudden  checking 
of  the  menstrual  flux,  leeches  to  the  anus  or  vulva  are  found  useful." 

A  good  illustration  of  the  exhaustive  influence  which  may  be 
developed  in  the  iliac  and  inguinal  regions  is  shown  in  a  case  reported 
by  Dr.  Geo.  Johnson  of  malignant  disease  affecting  a  retained  testicle 
in  the  abdominal  cavity.  The  disease  produced  considerable  pain, 
and  the  patient  (a  tutor  at  College)  began  to  lose  flesh  and  strength. 
A  tumor  appeared  above  Poupart's  ligament  on  the  right  side,  which 
then  rapidly  extended  to  the  median  line,  producing  great  emaciation 
and  exhaustion,  and  death  in  about  a  month  from  its  appearance. 

This  exhaustion  and  emaciation  are  equally  conspicuous  in  dysen- 
tery and  typhoid.  In  this  case  the  mental  symptoms  were  not 
reported. 

Dr.  Wm.  Cumming,  F.  R.  C.  P.  E.,  described,  in  the  Medical  Gazette 
of  December,  1849,  a  disease  located  in  the  lower  bowels  and  accom- 
panied by  the  discharge  of  a  peculiar  membranous,  fibrinous  matter 
from  the  bowels,  which  are  alternately  constipated  and  relaxed — in 
some  uniformly  costive.  There  is  frequently  a  discharge  of  blood  in 
evacuation,  and  a  sense  of  exhaustion  afterwards.  The  evacuation  is 
generally  painful.  They  have  a  fixed  pain  in  the  left  iliac  region 
(or  sometimes  the  hypochondriac,  or  both),  of  a  gnawing,  irritating 
character,  sometimes  acute  and  severe.  The  pain  in  the  course  of 
the  colon  is  increased  an  hour  or  two  after  the  taking  of  food,  and  is 
temporarily  relieved  by  the  counter-irritation  of  a  mustard  plaster. 

The  patients  look  emaciated  and  anxiotts,  with  a  peculiar  and  char- 
acteristic expression.  "  In  all  there  is  more  or  less  nervousness, 
greatly  increased  towards  night,  inducing  sleeplessness,  and  when 
towards  morning  sleep  does  come  on,  nightmare  is  frequent  —  dreams 
(generally  of  an  unpleasant  nature),  invariable.  One  lady  was 
troubled  with  spectral  illusions."  Prof.  Simpson  found  the  com- 
mand of  language  in  such  cases  very  much  impaired,  but  Dr.  C.  says 
in  many  cases  this  symptom  is  absent. 


654  PATHOLOGICAL    DEMONSTRATION  [CHAP.    XXVI. 

"When  the  affection  has  been  of  long  duration  the  mental  irrita- 
bility is  very  great,  and,  what  is  more  painful  still,  the  patient's  views 
and  feelings  are  perverted and 'distorted"  The  disease  often  originates 
in  drastic  purgation,  and  is  more  common  in  females  than  in  males  — 
often  accompanied  by  dysmenorrhea. 

Dr.  C.  found  all  the  cases  easily  cured  by  omitting  aperients  and 
using  electro-galvanism  between  the  spine  and  iliac  region,  aided  by 
tar  internally  —  the  galvanism  regularly  overcoming  constipation  and 
dispersing  the  morbid  conditions.  These  cases  show  clearly  the 
tendency  of  the  iliac  region  to  depression,  exhaustion,  and  mental 
impairment  and  derangement. 

The  effect  of  hypogastric  diseases  on  the  brain  and  the  connection 
of  this  region  with  the  liver  (to  which  the  venous  blood  from  the 
intestines  is  carried)  are  illustrated  in  Dr.  Prout's  work  on  the 
"Stomach  and  Urinary  Disorders,"  p.  75,  as  follows:  "Excessive 
acidity  of  the  cecum  is  generally  accompanied  by  a  deficient  secretion 
of  bile,  and  sometimes  by  a  complete  temporary  suppression  of  the 
bilious  discharge,  apparently  from  spasmodic  constriction  of  the  com- 
mon gall  duct,  or  it  may  be  of  the  biliary  ducts  themselves.  In  this 
state  of  things  all  individuals  feel  more  or  less  of  uneasiness  ;  but  the 
point  we  wish  to  mention  is  that  certain  individuals,  under  these 
circumstances,  experience  what  is  called  a  nervous  JieadacJie.  This 
species  of  headache  is  frequently  accompanied  by  nausea,  is  confined  to 
the  forehead,  and,  when  severe,  produces  complete  intolerance  of  light 
and  sounds,  and  a  state  of  mind  bordering  on  delirium.  After  a 
greater  or  less  period,  the  pain  ceases,  sometimes  quite  suddenly  ; 
and  the  remarkable  circumstances  to  be  mentioned  here  are:  that  this 
sudden  termination  is  preceded  by  a  peculiar  sensation  (sometimes 
accompanied  by  an  audible  clicking  noise)  in  the  region  of  the  gall 
duct  ;  that  immediately  afterwards  a  gurgling  sensation  is  felt  in  the 
upper  bowels,  as  if  a  fluid  was  passing  through  them  ;  and  that,  in  a 
few  seconds,  when  this  fluid,  which  we  suppose  to  be  bile,  has  reached 
the  cecum,  the  headache  at  once  vanishes  like  a  dream.  One  of  the 
greatest  martyrs  to  this  species  of  headache  I  have  ever  seen  invaria- 
bly experiences  the  train  of  symptoms  above  described,  and  I  have 
witnessed  it  in  a  greater  or  less  degree  in  many  instances  ;  indeed  I 
have  experienced  it  in  my  own  person." 

What  are  the  psychic  and  physiological  effects  of  rectal  irritation 
by  impacted  materials  was  shown  in  Ireland,  and  reported  by  Dr. 
Popham  of  the  Cork  Infirmary  in  the  Lancet  of  June  19,  1850.  The 
patients  were  suffering  from  impaction  in  the  rectum  of  potato  skins 
and  matter  of  diseased  potatoes,  producing  great  internal  tenderness 
and  an  erysipelatous  ring  of  two  or  three  inches  around   the  anus. 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  655 

There  was  a  peculiar  offensiveness  of  fetor  emanating  from  the 
patient,  compelling  those  around  him  to  nausea  or  vomiting,  but  sel- 
dom any  nausea  or  vomiting  in  the  patient  —  the  appetite  not  being 
affected  — the  site  of  the  irritation  being  remote  from  the  small  intes- 
tines and  stomach.  In  some  feeble  subjects  there  was  prostration 
and  chilliness  of  the  surface  ;  in  those  of  more  sanguine  temperament, 
the  surface  was  hot  and  perspiring.  The  pulse  under  irritation  seldom 
rose  above  ioo,  and  fell  back  when  the  irritation  was  relieved.  The 
pain  was  sometimes  worse  than  that  of  parturition. 

A  notable  moral  symptom  in  this  disease  is  the  recklessness  of  the 
patients  and  their  disregard  of  decency.  As  to  the  mental  condition 
of  such  patients,  it  fully  illustrated  the  low  animal  condition  associated 
with  the  region  of  the  sacrum.  Dr.  Popham  said  :  "  They  are  unable 
to  rest  in  any  position,  but  throw  themselves  about  without  seeming 
much  to  regard  either  personal  injury  or  the  natural  restraint  imposed 
by  the  presence  of  others."  Some  of  the  persons  are  very  intractable, 
requiring  to  be  held  down  by  force,  while  under  treatment ;  and, 
maddened  by  pain,  they  seem  not  indisposed  to  follow  the  example 
of  Horace's  patient,  "  cum  fit  pugil,  et  medicum  urget." 

All  irritations  at  the  base  of  the  trunk  disturb  the  brain.  Dr.  Roe- 
ser  reported  in  a  German  journal,  in  1859,  a  case  in  which  the  coc- 
cyx of  a  woman  was  separated  from  the  sacrum  and  forced  to  the 
left.  Pain  extended  up  to  the  neck  and  arm,  and  she  could  not  move. 
Her  countenance  was  distorted,  and  there  was  "  confused  headache  and 
some  mental  distzirbance"  When  it  was  restored  by  pressure  she 
'felt  as  if  roused  from  a  dream  and  all  her  pains  vanished."  * 

Even  at  the  head  of  the  thigh  we  have  this  disturbing  influence. 
In  Malgaigne,  on  fractures,  it  is  stated  that  "extra  capsular  fracture, 
like  the  other  variety,  may  involve  much  more  serious  dangers  ;  too 
often,  whether  from  the  shock  occasioned  by  the  external  violence, 
or  from  some  unfortunate  predisposition  of  the  patient,  there  ensues 
nervous  delirium,  or  intense  fever  of  the  adynamic  type,  which  sooner 
or  later  terminates  fatally."  In  cases  progressing  unfavorably  after 
the  first  dangers  are  over,  "  the  pain  about  the  seat  of  the  injury  per- 
sists ;  ©edematous  swelling  of  the  affected  limb,  and  sometimes  even 
of  the  sound  one,  occurs  ;  a  slow  fever  undermines  the  strength,  im- 
pairs the  appetite  and  disturbs  the  sleep  ;  and  in  hospitals  there  appear 
occasionally,  also,  symptoms  of  scurvy."  The  tendency  of  severe 
injuries  at  the  summit  of  the  thigh  must  necessarily  be  adynamic. 
Wounds  and  surgical  operations  in  that  region  are  very  fatal. 

*  "  Hoffman  mentions  a  boy,  who,  after  a  blow  on  the  sacrum,  was  seized  with  a 
violent  convulsive  affection,  nearly  resembling  tetanus,  with  loss  of  memory,  diffi- 
cult articulation  and  delirium.  The  complaint  continued  with  great  severity  for  five 
days,  and  afterwards  returned  at  nearly  regular  periods  for  six  months."  —  Abcrcrom- 
btey  p.  281. 


656  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

In  the  region  of  the  womb  we  find  an  exalted  sensibility,  tending 
to  mental  irregularity,  sometimes  approaching  insanity,  and  tending 
strongly  to  imaginative  deception.  Dr.  Watson  says  the  deceptive 
appearances  displayed  in  the  bodily  functions  and  feelings  find  their 
counterpart  in  the  mental.  Dr.  Prout  says  the  whole  energies  of  the 
patient's  mind  are  bent  on  deception. 

Hysteria,  which  has  been  called  the  Protean  disease  from  its  vast 
variety  of  symptoms,  appears  to  be  an  exalted  sensibility  and  excita- 
bility associated  by  some  recondite  law  with  the  imagination  so  as  to 
produce  a  fantastic  play  of  conditions  which  give  a  dramatic  imitation 
of  insanity,  convulsions  of  various  kinds,  and  almost  every  form  of 
disease,  —  the  dramatic  imitation  being  often  so  perfect  as  to  deceive 
spectators  and  even  puzzle  physicians. 

It  is  often  difficult  indeed  to  tell  to  what  extent  the  diseases  of 
women  are  the  products  of  organic  trouble,  or  of  the  nervous  condi- 
tions which  belong  to  the  hysteric  temperament  and  appear  or  dis- 
appear with  but  slight,  if  any,  organic  cause.  We  may  have  a  variety 
of  convulsions  resembling  epilepsy  and  tetanus,  we  may  have  apparent 
diseases  of  the  joints  and  contractions  of  limbs,  apparent  palsies  of 
every  variety,  coughing,  vomiting,  haematemesis,  haemoptysis,  inflamed 
breasts,  hiccoughs,  spinal  diseases,  pains  of  every  variety,  and  even 
quasi  inflammations. 

What  does  it  all  mean  ?  Simply  exalted  sensibility,  and  impressi- 
bility, liable  to  experience  extreme  effects  from  slight  causes,  and  to 
be  controlled  by  mental  conditions,  but  lacking  in  self-control. 

How  is  this  produced  ?  The  sensibilities,  increasing  as  we  descend 
in  the  body,  attain  an  extremely  high  development  in  the  sexual  sys- 
tem, of  which  the  womb  is  the  chief  element  in  woman.  This  uterine 
sensibility,  belonging  to  a  portion  of  the  medulla  oblongata,  is  by 
the  law  of  Pathognomy  associated  with  the  portion  of  the  brain  just 
above  the  cheekbone,  which  is  the  region  of  sensibility,  and  impressi- 
bility, and  which  might  be  called  an  involuntary  region,  as  it  has  the 
minimum  degree  of  will-power,  or  rather  antagonizes  the  will,  and 
subjects  the  individual  to  any  transient  influence.  This  sensitive 
region  is  closely  associated  in  action  with  the  region  of  Imagination, 
Versatility  and  Pliability,  which  gives  the  Protean  capacity  of  realiz- 
ing any  mental  condition;  just  as,  in  the  occiput,  Firmness  is  associated 
with  Combativeness  in  resisting  every  external  influence.  No  woman 
with  much  Firmness  and  Combativeness  will  be  controlled  by  hys- 
teria. 

The  womb  is  a  part  of  the  pelvic  or  hypogastric  apparatus  which 
deranges  the  nervous  system.  But  unlike  the  other  hypogastric 
organs,  which  belong  to  the  destructive,  feverish,  wasting  and  exhaust- 


CHAP.    XXVI.]  OF    SARCOGNOMY.  657 

ing  apparatus,  and  leave  their  effects  visible  in  exhaustive  emaciation, 
gloom,  suffering,  fever,  insanity  and  death,  the  womb  belongs  to  the 
ascending  group  of  developing  functions,  and  consequently  the  victims 
of  hysteria  are  neither  feverish,  insane,  gloomy  nor  emaciated,  but  pre- 
sent generally  a  plump  and  pleasing  appearance  which  contradicts 
their  dramatic  display  of  diseases. 

The  bladder  and  rectum,  which  belong  to  the  class  of  downward 
acting  expulsives,  dealing  only  with  the  offensive  and  injurious,  have 
terrific  effects  when  they  are  the  seat  of  irritations  ;  and  the  male  gen- 
itals, differently  constituted,  have  much  more  pernicious  liabilities  than 
the  female,  as  Pathognomy  indicates. 

In  inflammation  of  the  bladder  we  have  general  fever  (though  the 
bladder  is  not  so  closely  associated  with  calorification  as  the  ileum), 
accompanied  by  prostration,  anxiety  and  restlessness.  The  pain, 
extending  to  the  perineal  and  rectal  regions  and  even  into  the 
abdomen,  is  often  accompanied  by  nausea.  The  bowels  are  irritated 
and  deranged.  It  ultimates  in  great  cerebral  depression,  with  a  dull, 
stupid,  typhus  condition,  with  a  pale,  cadaverous  countenance,  deli- 
rium and  coma,  and  sometimes  convulsions. 

The  bladder  is  next  to  the  region  of  complete  mental  derangement, 
and  coincides  with  lethargy,  which  we  locate  at  the  pubes.  Hence 
its  dull,  drowsy  influence. 

In  chronic  cystitis  there  is  "fever,  anxiety,  restlessness  and  gene- 
ral distress,"  "  the  strength  gives  way,  rapid  emaciation  takes  place, 
and  the  patient  dies,  in  a  hectic  state,  worn  out." 

Spasm  of  the  bladder  produces  a  feeble  pulse,  pale  surface,  some- 
times cold  perspiration,  with  "  great  restlessness  and  general  distress." 

Of  all  physiological  functions  the  sexual  are  those  which  have  the 
greatest  power  over  the  mind.  In  their  normal  action,  under  the 
control  of  the  higher  faculties,  they  sustain  love,  hope,  and  imaginative 
brightness  of  the  intellect,  which  they  develop  as  puberty  comes  on ; 
but  in  their  abnormal  or  disordered  condition  their  action  is  reversed, 
and  in  their  excess  they  are  debasing  and  destructive,  like  all  unbridled 
and  controlling  action  of  the  lower  half  of  the  body.  In  this  they  are 
like  the  other  functions  of  the  lower  half  of  the  spinal  cord  —  the  mus- 
cular functions  which  use  the  lower  limbs.  In  their  normal  action, 
subordinate  to  the  higher  powers,  they  give  force  to  the  character,  en- 
ergy to  courage,  and  ability  to  endure  severe  exertion.  In  their  ex- 
cessive action  they  tend  to  brutalize  the  character  and  exhaust  the 
entire  nervous  system,  producing  prostration  and  death,  with  de- 
fibrinized  blood,  by  over-exertion. 

Dr.  Bell  observes,  very  justly,  that  "  there  cannot  be  derangement  of 
function  in  any  part  of  the  animal  economy,  without  some  change  in 


6$S  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  XXVI. 

the  disposition,  mood  or  mind  of  the  individual.  But  in  no  case  is 
this  fact  so  strongly  exemplified  as  in  either  congenital  or  acquired 
defects  of  the  genital  organs."  "  Love  and  all  its  associations  would 
be  for  an  eunuch  what  song  and  orchestral  accompaniments  are  to 
a  deaf-mute  —  things  unfelt  and  unappreciated  except  by  analogies  "  — 
a  statement  which  shows  the  unnatural  folly  and  mischief  of  those 
systems  of  religious  fanaticism  which  war  against  the  Divine  wisdom 
of  the  human  constitution,  by  endeavoring  to  ignore  or  suppress  an 
indispensable  portion. 

"  Can  there  be,  for  example  (says  Dr.  Bell),  a  greater  contrast  in  the 
disposition,  feelings  and  general  frame  of  mind  between  a  young  girl 
suffering  under  chlorosis  and  uterine  atony  and  the  same  person  a 
year  afterwards,  with  rich  blood  coursing  through  her  heart  and  limbs 
and  new  vitality  in  her  uterine  organs  ? "  Even  the  suspicion  of  im- 
potence, he  says,  sometimes  causes  persons  to  keep  aloof  from  society 
with  feelings  of  aversion  or  suspicion  degenerating  into  misanthropy. 

The  portion  of  the  body  between  the  sacrum  and  coccyx  behind 
and  the  os  pubis  in  front  is  the  portion  which  corresponds  to  the  re- 
gion of  mental  derangement  in  the  brain,  productive  of  fierce  insanity, 
mania,  idiocy,  dementia,  paralysis  and  lethargy,  and  adjacent  to  hyste- 
ria and  melancholy.  On  the  body  melancholy  appears  in  front  of  the 
hips,  and  hysteric  excitability  between  the  pubes  and  navel.  From  this 
location  it  appears  that  the  excessive  excitability  which  in  the  brain 
makes  the  liability  to  insanity  and  idiocy  occurs  in  the  body  where 
the  sexual  organs,  rectum,  prostate  gland  and  nerves  proceeding 
to  the  lower  extremities  are  located.  From  the  latter  we  may  derive 
the  animation  and  wild  energy  of  passion,  which  belong  to  insanity, 
while  from  the  sexual  functions  we  derive  the  animation  and  excite- 
ment of  normal  life,  as  well  as  the  utter  prostration,  wretchedness, 
imbecility  and  paralysis  which  they  produce  in  their  unrestrained,  ex- 
cessive activity.  The  insane  tendencies  of  the  rectal  and  anal  regions 
are  shown  in  the  reports  of  orificial  surgery  and  the  conditions  of  the 
Irish  patients  described  by  Popham. 

The  reader  will  observe,  however,  that  the  body  is  not  the  organ 
of  the  soul,  but  the  organ  of  physiological  functions  ;  consequently, 
the  rage,  the  animalism,  the  delusion,  melancholy  and  imbecility  of 
which  we  speak,  in  the  body,  are  not  its  own  functions  under  irritation, 
but  its  effects  upon  the  brain,  and  unless  the  brain  is  affected  they  are 
simply  corporeal  results  of  an  analogous  character  —  derangements  of 
the  higher  functions  of  the  nervous  system  in  the  body,  as  shown  in 
many  diseases  and  so  well  illustrated  in  the  reports  of  orificial  surgery. 

In  the  brain  the  most  posterior  part  of  the  deranging  region  pro- 
duces wildness  of  excitement  and  turbulent  rage,  with  terrible  energy 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  659 

—  the  most  anterior  produces  Lethargy.  So,  in  the  body,  the  most 
posterior  portion  corresponds  with  the  nerves  supplying  the  genitals* 
and  the  lower  extremities,  which  produce  wild,  restless  muscularity, 
without  intelligence  ;  and  the  most  anterior  portion  corresponds  with  the 
pubic  surface,  over  the  bladder,  which  produces  the  dull,  lethargic  or 
comatose  condition  attributable  to  urea  (the  most  narcotic  element  in 
the  body),  and  the  sexual  action  which  rapidly  destroys  cerebral  and 
nervous  power. 

The  reader  may  well  imagine  my  surprise  in  discovering  the  exter- 
nal localities  of  such  functions  in  the  body  as  Sarcognomy  reveals 
(though  my  surprise  was  diminished  by  their  previous  recognition  in 
the  brain),  and  this  surprise  was  not  removed  until  I  could  perceive  an 
anatomical  and  physiological  basis  for  the  discovery  in  the  facts  that  all 
parts  of  which  Sarcognomy  reveals  the  tendency  have  an  interior  struc- 
ture and  operation  precisely  adapted  to  realize  the  psycho-physiological 
tendencies  revealed  by  Sarcognomy. 

Of  the  insanifying  effects  of  the  sexual  organs  we  see  ample  il- 
lustrations, which  would  require  a  large  volume  to  portray  them, 
in  the  fierceness  and  warfare  among  animals  in  their  amative  season 
(the  rutting  season  of  deer),  in  the  jealousies  and  combats  among 
men,  in  the  murders  prompted  by  disappointment  in  courtship  or  jeal- 
ousy in  marriage,  in  the  total  prostration,  demoralized  and  wrecked 
lives  of  profligate  libertines,  the  hopeless  mental  prostration  and  ruin 
produced  by  masturbation  and  by  the  abandoned  licentiousness  of  both 
sexes.  The  first  French  book  I  ever  read  —  Tissot  on  Onanism  —  was 
a  frightful  record  of  the  ruin  produced  by  this  vice,  the  terrible  con- 
sequences of  which  are  too  well  known  to  need  repetition  here;  suffice 
it  to  say  that  physiology  and  pathology  clearly  show  that  the  base  of  the 
trunk,  when  it  has  undue  influence  on  life,  works  the  destruction  of 
the  whole  nervous  system  of  the  body,  as  the  corresponding  region 
of  the  brain  works  the  destruction  of  the  mental  and  moral  faculties  by 
its  unbridled  excess,  although  in  its  symmetrical  normal  action,  as 
an  assistant  to  the  higher  powers,  it  is  as  necessary  and  valuable  as  the 
powers  of  locomotion  and  calorification. 

In  the  female  sexual  system  the  influence  of  the  womb  is  less  ab- 
normal in  its  excitement,  and  I  have  already  'spoken  of  its  derang- 
ing influence  in  hysteria  as  less  destructive  than  the  irritations  behind 
and  below  it.  But  the  womb  in  its  abnormal  and  downward  condi- 
tions becomes  the  bane  of  woman's  life  in  dysmenorrhea,  menorrhagia 
and  misplacement.  Its  position  is,  according  to  Pathognomic  law,  a 
barometer  of  woman's  condition,  and  when  it  goes  down   her  whole 

*  Sir  Astley  Cooper  savs  that  in  cases  of  irritable  testes  the  pain  produced  by 
touch  is  felt  in  the  back  and  groin. 


660  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION       [CHAP.  -XXVI. 

life  goes  down  with  it,  as  her  whole  life  is  elevated  in  the  latter  stages 
of  gestation,  to  be  prostrated  again  by  its  downward  expulsive  action 
and  the  consequences  thereof;  a  critical  and  tragical  time,  which  may 
result  in  prostrating  and  dangerous  disease  —  in  puerperal  fever,  which, 
being  associated  with  a  region  of  maximum  sensibility,  has  the  maxi- 
mum degree  of  contagiousness.  The  typhus  fever,  which  plays  upon 
the  brain,  produces  such  contagious  energy  that  a  single  approach  to 
the  bedside  has  sometimes  resulted  in  an  overpowering  contagion  and 
speedy  and  fatal  attack.  Puerperal  fever  is  still  more  contagious,  be- 
cause it  belongs  to  the  region  of  maximum  sensibility,  and  physicians, 
with  every  possible  precaution  of  disinfection,  sometimes  carry  the  dis- 
ease from  one  patient  to  another.  I  have  even  a  stronger  record  in 
the  case  of  a  physician,  Dr.  Huntley  of  Jarrow-on-Tyne,  described  in 
the  British  Medical  Journal,  February,  1875,  who  had  a  remarkable  ex- 
perience of  persistent  contagion  that  was  truly  marvellous.  Puerperal 
fever  broke  out  in  his  practice  and  seemed  to  be  confined  to  his  patients. 
Changing  his  clothes,  bathing,  etc.,  failed  to  prevent  the  contagion,  and 
he  went  to  Ireland,  staying  there  six  weeks  to  dissipate  the  contami- 
nation ;  but  in  the  first  two  or  three  cases  on  resuming  practice  the  in- 
fection reappeared,  and  he  gave  up  this  branch  of  his  practice  to  a 
substitute  in  whose  practice  no  puerperal  fever  appeared.  He  thought, 
therefore,  that  the  toxic  influence  might  be  associated  with  his  per- 
son. This  could  not  be  established,  however,  unless  he  had  entirely 
laid  aside  his  former  clothing.  At  any  rate  it  illustrates  the  intense 
sensitiveness  and  susceptibility  of  the  uterine  region,  which  is  also 
illustrated  in  the  familiar  fact  that  hysteria  is  contagious,  and  when 
one  case  appears  in  a  female  hospital  it  rapidly  spreads,  whether  by 
mental  or  physical  sympathy.  It  is  illustrated,  too,  in  the  extreme  im- 
pressibility of  the  gestating  female,  which  affects  the  condition  of  her 
offspring,  and  in  the  contagious  diffusion  of  superstitious  fanaticism, 
with  its  wild,  hysterical  actions,  due  to  the  hysterical  element  in  both 
sexes. 

The  puerperal  fever  has  more  serious  consequences  than  hysteric  ex- 
citement, as  it  is  liable  to  run  into  puerperal mania.  It  frequently  runs 
into  a  wild,  incoherent  and  furious  character,  but  very  seldom  into  de- 
mentia. 

The  deranging  influences  of  the  external  genitals  of  the  male,  in 
their  disorders,  are  better  understood  of  late.  Abnormal  states  of  the 
glans  and  prepuce  in  children  are  sometimes  connected  with  aphasia  as 
their  cause,  which  is  explicable  only  by  the  fact  that  the  larynx  corre- 
sponds with  the  location  of  the  organ  of  Amativeness  in  the  brain,  and 
is  associated  in  its  development  with  sexual  puberty. 

Dr.  A.  A.  Camp,  basing  his  views  chiefly  on  the^experience  of  Dr. 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  66 1 

L.  A.  Sayre  of  New  York,  says  :  "In  many  children,  partial  paralysis, 
lack  of  power  of  co-ordination  and  apparent  idiocy,  are  dependent,  in 
a  great  part  at  least,  upon  some  irritation  of  the  genital  organs.  In 
males  this  is  sometimes  clue  to  a  constriction  around  the  glans  penis, 
producing  continual  priapism,  the  result  of  which  is  wasting  and  ex- 
haustion of  the  nervous  system,  sufficient  to  produce  more  or  less 
paralysis,  and  in  some  instances  a  complete  loss  of  speech  and  vision. 
In  girls,  on  the  other  hand,  much  the  same  results  are  produced  by  an 
irritation  of  the  clitoris,  which  is  not  uncommon.  All  kinds  of  treat- 
ment for  such  cases  are  utterly  useless,  unless  we  recognize  and  remove 
the  cause  of  the  irritation.  ...  Of  course  this  condition  presents 
itself  to  us  in  all  degrees  of  severity,  from  one  of  simple  irritation  to 
that  of  complete  constriction  of  the  prepuce,  and  so  its  symptoms  will 
also  vary." 

"  Prominent  among  the  most  marked  cases  are  the  following  symp- 
toms :  Sometimes  the  patients  are  to  all  intents  and  purposes  idiotic. 
They  are  neither  able  to  speak  nor  walk,  nor  to  feed  themselves ; 
sometimes  they  are  blind.  On  account  of  falling,  and  reflex  convul- 
sions of  the  extremities,  the  disease,  by  an  inaccurate  observer,  might 
be  called  epilepsy.  The  patient  usually  sits  cross-legged,  and  in  some 
there  presents  such  a  rigidity  of  the  tendons  that  it  is  almost  impossible 
to  produce  flexion  of  the  legs.  Certain  phases  of  this  deformity  have 
been  mistaken  by  even  astute  observers,  who  have  been  on  the  point 
of  operating  for  a*club-foot." 

Dr.  Sayre  was  once  called  by  the  famous  Dr.  Sims  to  operate  up- 
on a  boy  of  five  years  (who  was  unable  to  walk  from  his  knees  being- 
placed  at  an  angle  of  45  degrees)  and  "  perform  tenotomy  upon  his 
hamstring  tendon."  Dr.  Sayre  discovered  that  it  was  not  a  contrac- 
tion of  the  flexors,  but  paralysis  of  the  extensors,  and  therefore,  instead 
of  cutting,  had  him  subjected  to  the  galvanic  current,  in  doing  which 
he  found  the  penis  tender,  erect,  and  imprisoned  in  the  contracted  pre- 
puce. Touching  the  orifice  of  the  urethra  produced  a  convulsive  move- 
ment and  orgasm.  Circumcision  was  performed,  the  glans  uncovered 
and  the  parts  soon  restored  to  their  natural  condition,  and  the  child 
fully  restored  in  three  weeks  without  any  other  treatment  than  this 
operation.  A  psychometric  observer  would  not  have  made  the  mis- 
take of   Dr.   Sims. 

Dr.  Sayre  mentions  a  case  of  hip  disease  in  a  boy,  which  apparently 
had  no  other  cause  than  the  state  of  the  prepuce  and  irritation  of  the 
glans  penis. 

Dr.  Camp  relates  the  case  of  a  boy  of  about  four  years,  in  whom  there 
appeared  to  be  congenital  paralysis  of  the  lower  limbs,  as  he  had  never 
used  them,  and  also  paralysis  of  the  sphincters,  resulting  in  involuntary 


662  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

discharge  of  urine  and  faeces.  He  found  the  penis  in  semi-erection, 
and  notwithstanding  a  previous  circumcision,  which  did  some  good, 
there  was  adhesion  at  the  corona  glandis,  which  he  dissected  away  and 
healed  the  wound.  He  quickly  recovered  the  control  of  the  sphinc- 
ters, and  was  very  slowly  regaining  the  use  of  his  lower  limbs. 

I  need  not  dwell  upon  the  horrors  of  syphilis,  to  illustrate  any  fur- 
ther the  pernicious  energy  of  sexual  disorders  in  the  destruction  of 
the  integrity  of  the  nervous  system  —  a  mischief  which  is  the  more 
widely  and  terribly  diffused  on  account  of  the  great  sensitiveness  and 
consequent  contagiousness  attached  to  the  sexual  system  ;  a  law 
which  is  efficient  in  establishing  sympathy,  unity  and  harmony  in  the 
conjugal  relation,  and  also  efficient  in  diffusing  evil,  in  demoralization; 
disease  and  misery. 

SYMPATHIES    OF    THE    LIMBS. 

The  upper  and  lower  limbs  are  parallel  and  analogous  in  their  rela- 
tions —  those  of  the  upper  limbs  being  on  a  higher  or  more  psychic 
plane. 

The  arms  sympathize  with  the  trunk  according  to  their  parallelism, 
—  the  ^humerus  with  the  chest,  the  forearm  with  the  abdomen,  the 
wrist  and  hand  with  the  pelvic  region.  Hence  we  affect  digestion  and 
assimilation  by  the  internal  surface  of  the  forearm,  and  calorification 
and  sensibility  by  the  wrist  and  hand.  It  has  long  been  known  that 
we  may  produce  coolness  by  plunging  hands  and  wrists  in  cold  water, 
and  that  their  warmth  has  a  diffusive  influence.  Dr.  Reeves  of  West 
Virginia  has  utilized  this  principle  by  applying  cold  water  to  the 
wrists  in  typhoid  fever,  which  readily  reduced  the  temperature.  He 
passed  the  cold  water  through  rubber  tubing  wrapped  around  the 
wrists. 

The  control  of  all  inflammatory  diseases,  especially  of  the  head  and 
chest,  by  diversion  to  the  region  below  the  knees,  has  been  fully  illus- 
trated in  the  chapter  on  Pneumatic  treatment ;  but  the  psychic  rela- 
tions of  the  thigh  and  leg  require  a  fuller  illustration. 

Passing  below  the  region  of  the  evil  passions,  sensuality  and  insanity, 
at  the  base  of  the  trunk,  we  reach  the  region  of  muscularity  and  tur- 
bulent impulse  on  the  thighs,  which  is  controlled  by  the  lower  portion 
of  the  spine,  the  seat  of  the  evil  passions,  which  find  their  executive 
instruments  in  the  lower  limbs.  Turbulence  is  the  most  comprehen- 
sive term  for  the  thighs,  and  this  becomes  more  violent  as  we 
descend  the  thigh,  reaching  its  maximum  of  violence  at  the  knees, 
from  which  we  may  expect  the  most  violent  and  uncontrollable  dis- 
plays of  temper.  Below  the  knees  the  same  blind  animalism  exists, 
with  less  and  less  of  intelligence  as  we  descend  to  the  foot,  in  which 
intelligence  disappears. 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  663 

The  passionate  character  of  the  thighs  is  well  illustrated  in  the 
history  of  gout  and  rheumatism.  "The  gouty  patient  (says  Watson) 
is  apt  to  be  excessively  dejected  and  hypochondriacal,  morbidly  atten- 
tive to  every  bodily  feeling,  disposed  to  exaggerate  his  sufferings,  and 
apprehensive  of  the  worst  event."  "  In  the  head,  occur  pain,  giddi- 
ness, transient  affections  of  the  vision  and  of  the  hearing,  threaten- 
ings  of  palsy  and  apoplexy." 

"  How  few  are  the  men  (says  Dr.  Ashburner)  who  acquire  gouty 
habits,  who  do  not  lose  the  power  of  calm  reasoning.  They  are 
notoriously  an  irritable  race.  Their  irritability  often  leads  them  to 
conclude  that  every  one  is  wrong  except  themselves.  No  matter  if 
you  can  bring  abundant  evidence  to  prove  the  insanity  of  their  con- 
duct, it  is  of  no  avail." 

While  irritative  diseases  develop  this  passionate  violence,  injuries 
of  a  different  character,  free  from  inflammation,  produce  a  different 
effect,  as  I  realized  last  year  by  a  severe  fall  on  the  knees,  which  pro- 
duced a  great  impairment  for  some  weeks  of  all  the  energies  of  mind 
and  body.  Dr.  J.  A.  Roberts  reported  in  the  Eclectic  Medical  Jotmial 
of  October,  1887,  a  case  of  swelling  in  the  thyroid  and  parotid  glands, 
accompanied  by  a  painful  swollen  knee,  which  produced  a  sullen, 
crabbed  state  of  mind,  so  that  "he  could  scarcely  speak,  unless  asked 
a  question,"  and  the  doctor  "  had  hard  work  to  gain  his  confidence." 
But  after  opening  the  gland,  discharging  its  pus,  and  aspirating  four 
ounces  of  fluid  from  the  knee,  he  "  became  quite  talkative,"  and 
"anything  I  wished  was  cheerfully  granted." 

The  great  changes  of  deportment  and  sentiments  in  patients  are 
explained  by  the  nature  and  location  of  their  diseases  to  those  who 
understand  Sarcognomy. 

Pain  is  itself  an  irritating  element,  but  in  other  parts  of  the  body 
it  may  be  accompanied  by  fortitude  or  resignation  ;  but  in  the  foot, 
which  is  the  site  of  the  first  attack  of  gout,  the  irritation  is  accompa- 
nied by  the  violence  of  the  lower  limbs  and  the  unreasoning  or  anti- 
cerebral  character  of  the  foot.  This  local  disturbance  deranges  the 
balance  even  of  strong  constitutions;  but  if  we  would  realize  fully  the 
character  which  Sarcognomy  recognizes  in  each  spot,  we  must  have  a 
constitution  sufficiently  weak,  sensitive  and  impressible  to  surrender 
to  the  control  of  the  local  excitement.  In  such  a  case  the  mind  may 
be  entirely  perverted  by  an  irritation  in  the  foot,  as  in  a  case  reported 
by  Dr.  Anderson  of  idiocy  and  violence  produced  by  an  injury  of  the 
foot  and  the  tibial  nerve,  the  irritation  of  which  extended  up  the  thigh. 

Dr.  James  Anderson  of  New  York  reported  in  the  N.  Y.  Medical  and 
Physical  Journal  of  December,  1822,  a  case  of  prostration  of  the  intel- 
lect from  an  injury  of  the  foot  affecting  the  anterior  tibial  nerve.     The 


664  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

patient,  G.  T.,  a  lad  of  fourteen  years,  of  plethoric  habit  and  nervous 
temperament,  "received  an  injury  on  the  top  of  the  foot  from  a  stone 
thrown  with  violence  by  one  of  his  playmates."  The  injury  was 
attended  to,  but  appeared  unimportant  until  eight  or  ten  weeks  later, 
when  pain  and  swelling  occurred  and  were  treated  by  Dr.  Kissam  with 
fomentations,  saturnine  applications,  and,  as  the  pain  increased  and 
irritation  extended,  frequent  blisters,  "saline  cathartics  and  other 
purgatives,"  and  "large  anodynes  "  were  used  without  success.  The 
pain  extended  up  the  trunk  of  the  nerve,  affecting  the  adjacent  mus- 
cles with  spasms,  "  the  pulse  increased  in  frequency  and  force," 
"though  the  digestive  organs  performed  their  duty  with  wonted 
regularity  if  not  increased  strength." 

The  pain  now  extended  above  the  knee  and  was  very  severe;  bella- 
donna, cicuta,  assafcetida,  gave  no  relief.  The  great  toe  was  drawn 
at  right  angles  by  the  extensor  pollicis,  and  any  attempt  to  return  it 
produced  great  suffering. 

"At  about  three  months  from  the  time  of  the  accident  the  whole 
system  became  involved  in  these  spasmodic  irritations,  and  his  ner- 
vous energy  enfeebled.  The  common  sensorium  was  disturbed :  he 
lost  his  reasoning  and  recollection,  was  unable  to  distinguish  occa- 
sional visitors,  or  recognize  even  his  parents  or  any  members  of  the 
family  ;  his  mind  became  imbecile  and  idiotic ;  he  was  deprived  of  the 
ability  to  read  or  distinguish  the  lettei's  of  the  alphabet.  As  the  pain 
extended  up  and  beyond  the  thigh  it  spasmodically  affected  the  muscles 
of  respiration,  and  at  the  invasion  of  each  paroxysm  of  suffering  his 
breathing  became  more  frequent  and  labored.  This  frequency  of 
respiration  was  generally  the  first  indication  of  approaching  exacerba- 
tion. Though  his  distress  was  most  acute,  he  gave  no  utterance  to  his 
feelings.  While  the  paroxysms  were  on  him  he  would  roll  his  fist  and 
imitate  the  actions  of  a  pugilist,  but  with  much  greater  violence  and 
rapidity,  often  striking  his  nearest  and  best  friends  and  all  around 
him.  If  no  person  was  in  reach  of  his  arms,  the  force  of  his  actions 
would  be  lost  in  the  air."  The  violent  actions  and  excited  respira- 
tion belong,  according  to  Sarcognomy,  to  the  lower  part  of  the  thigh. 

It  was  determined  finally  to  divide  the  tibial  nerve.  An  incision 
was  made  on  the  outside  of  the  tibia,  about  four  inches  above  the 
ankle,  and  about  an  inch  of  the  nerve  cut  out.  The  toe  then  resumed 
its  place,  the  local  affections  soon  ceased,  the  wound  healed,  and  his 
health  of  body  and  mind  was  restored. 

Something  slightly  analogous  to  this  was  related  by  Brown-Sequard 
in  his  lectures,  on  the  authority  of  C.  DeMorgan,  as  follows : 

"  A  lad  aged  fourteen  as  he  was  getting  up  in  the  morning  was 
heard  by  his  father  to  be  making  a  great  noise  in  his  bedroom.     On 


CHAP.  XXVI.]  OF  SARCOGNOMY.  665 

the  latter  rushing  into  the  room,  he  found  his  son  in  his  shirt,  violently 
agitated,  talking  incoherently,  and  breaking  to  pieces  the  furniture. 
His  father  caught  hold  of  him  and  put  him  back  into  bed,  when  at 
once  the  boy  became  composed,  but  did  not  seem  at  all  conscious  of 
what  he  had  done.  On  getting  out  of  bed  he  had  felt  somethi?ig  odd, 
he  said,  but  he  was  quite  well.  A  surgeon  who  was  sent  for  found 
him  still  reading  quietly,  with  a  clean  tongue  and  cheerful  counte- 
nance, and  wishful  to  get  up.  He  had  never  had  epilepsy,  but  had 
enjoyed  good  health  hitherto.  He  was  told  to  get  up  ;  but  on  put- 
ting his  foot  on  the  floor  and  standing  up  his  countenance  instantly 
changed,  the  jaw  became  instantly  convulsed,  and  he  was  about  to 
rush  forward,  when  he  was  seized  and  pushed  back  onto  the  bed. 
At  once  he  became  calm  again,  said  he  had/*?//  odd,  but  was  surprised 
when  asked  what  was  the  matter  with  him.  He  had  been  fishing  on 
the  previous  day,  and  having  got  his  line  entangled  had  waded  into 
the  river  to  disengage  it,  but  was  not  aware  that  he  had  hurt  his 
feet  in  any  way,  or  that  he  had  even  scratched  them.  '  But  in  holding 
up  the  right  great  toe  with  my  finger  and  thumb,  to  examine  the  sole 
of  the  foot,  the  leg  was  drawn  up,  and  the  muscles  of  the  jaw  were 
suddenly  convulsed,  and  on  letting  go  the  toe  these  effects  instantly 
ceased.' 

"  There  was  no  redness,  nor  swelling,  but  on  the  bulb  of  the  toe  a 
small  elevation,  as  if  a  bit  of  gravel,  less  than  the  head  of  a  pin,  had 
been  pressed  beneath  the  cuticle.  On  compressing  this  against  the 
nail  cautiously,  a  slight  convulsion  ensued ;  there  was  no  pricking 
when  pressed,  but  he  said  something  made  him  feel  very  odd.  The 
slightly  raised  part  was  clipped  away,  no  gravel  was  found,  but  the 
strange  sensation  was  gone  and  never  returned." 

Here  I  must  pause  in  this  hasty  pathological  illustration  of  Sarcog- 
nomy,  although  the  theme  is  not  half  exhausted.  Time  does  not 
permit  a  fuller  exposition  at  present,  and  the  readers  of  this  volume 
care  less  for  these  illustrations,  which  are  not  really  needed,  than  for 
the  full  development  and  practical  application  of  the  science.  To 
those  who  do  not  know  the  absolute  certainty  of  Sarcognomy  as 
a  science,  and  have  made  no  experiments  for  its  illustration,  it  is 
probable  that  the  facts  of  pathology  may  be  useful  in  relieving  them 
from  the  feeling  of  uncertainty  which  embarrasses  the  approach  to  a 
new  and  revolutionary  doctrine  in  science. 

It  is  true  that  a  full  development  of  the  facts  of  pathology  would 
of  itself  organize  a  system  of  Sarcognomy  in  the  mind  of  a  clear 
thinker,  and  there  may  be  those  whose  minds  are  so  engrossed  in 
pathological  studies,  and  so  averse  to  the  experimental  methods  that 


666  PATHOLOGICAL  DEMONSTRATION.      [CHAP.  XXVI. 

illustrate  Sarcognomy,  as  to  prefer  that  kind  of  evidence,  of  which 
there  is  a  great  abundance  already  in  medical  literature,  and  a  still 
larger  amount  will  appear  when  the  human  constitution  and  its 
diseases  shall  have  been  studied  in  the  light  of  Sarcognomy. 

CONCLUSION. 

In  presenting  this  brief  abridgment  of  what  I  had  intended  saying 
of  the  pathological  illustration  of  Sarcognomy,  I  trust  the  reader  will 
accept  it,  not  as  the  demonstration  of  the  doctrine,  but  merely  as  a 
hint  or  indication  of  the  wealth  of  illustrative  facts  which  may  be 
adduced,  which  would  fill  several  vermes,  and  which,  if  I  should  no 
have  time  to  collect  and  present  them,  will,  I  trust,  be  presented  by 
some  of  the  indefatigable  devotees  of  science.  Every  day  of  the  year 
there  are  facts  enough  developed  among  millions  of  patients  to  make 
a  demonstration  entirely  complete  and  satisfactory  of  all  the  doctrines 
pf  Sarcognomy.  When  the  science  becomes  known,  these  facts  will 
no  longer  be  neglected. 

The  ease  with  which  experiments  upon  the  brain  and  the  body  may 
be. made  by  any  intelligent  person  according  to  my  methods,  the  con- 
sciousness of  the  action  of  the  different  portions  of  the  brain  which 
any  sensitive  person  may  attain  in  studying  the  sensations  of  his  own 
head,  and  the  innumerable  illustrations  of  Sarcognomy  observable  in 
disease  will  make  the  subject  so  clear  to  intelligent  inquirers,  that  the 
wonder  will  be,  hereafter,  how  anything  so  plain  and  so  accessible  could 
have  been  so  long  overlooked  and  its  first  scientific  announcement 
received  with  such  absent-minded  indifference,  owing  to  the  mental 
perversions  of  a  false  education  and  the  self-satisfied  enjoyment  of 
old  theories,  with  a  thoughtless  unconsciousness  of  the  vast  realms  of 
knowledge  upon  which  mankind  are  slowly  entering.  This  work,  I 
hope,  may  be  the  means  of  stimulating  the  sincere  and  fearless  lovers 
of  beneficent  science  to  explore  still  farther  the  boundless  realm  to 
which  it  has  opened  the  way,  which  will  be  enjoyed  by  thousands 
when  the  hand  that  pens  these  lines  shall  have  vanished  from  earthly 
scenes. 


GLOSSARY 


Of    Unfamiliar    Words,    which    Readers     Unfamiliar    with 

Scientific    Language    are   Advised   to    Peruse 

Before    Reading    this    Volume. 


Abiogenesis — production  of  life  without 
prior  life  (now  considered  impossible). 

Ablation — taking  away,  as  in  cutting  out 
parts  of  the  brain. 

Acephalous — without  a  brain. 

Achromatic — without  color  (applied  to 
glasses  which  refract  light  without  pro- 
ducing colors). 

Actinism — the  active  chemical  power  of 
light. 

Acupuncture — treatment  by  puncture 
with  a  needle. 

Adjuvant — assisting. 

Albumen — the  substance  of  the  white  of 
an  egg  and  the  serum  of  blood  (found 
also  in  vegetable  substances). 

Albuminoid — similar  to  albumen. 

Alimentation — supplying  with  food. 

Alvine — relating  to  the  intestines. 

Amaurosis — blindness  from  paralysis  of 
the  optic  nerve. 

Amceba — a  minute  microscopic  living 
body  which  moves  and  changes  its 
form. 

Amceboid — similar  to  amoebae. 

Amenorrhcea — deficiency  of  the  menses. 

Amorphous — without  shape. 

Ampere — a  certain  amount  of  electric 
force  equal  to  one  volt  of  power  passing 
through  one  ohm  of  resistance. 

Anastomose — to  unite  with  another 
tube,  as  when  two  arteries  connect. 

Anelectrotonous — the  condition  of  a 
nerve  produced  by  entrance  of  a  posi- 
tive current. 

Angular  gyrus — see  gyrus  angularis. 

Anaesthesia — suppression  of  sensibility. 

Anaesthetic — capable  of  producing  an- 
aesthesia. 

Anaemia — deficiency  and  poverty  of  the 
blood. 

Aneurism — a  morbid  enlargement  of  an 
artery. 

Anode — the  entrance  of  a  current  of  elec- 
tricity. 

Anodyne — pain  relieving. 

Antiphlogistic — antagonistic  to  inflam- 
mation. 

Antiseptic — opposed  to  putrefaction. 

Antithesis — opposition  or  contrast. 

Aorta — the  largest  artery  of  the  body, 
proceeding  from  the  heart. 


Aphonia — loss  of  voice. 

Aphasia — loss  of  language  or  speech. 

A  priori — reasoning  before  knowing  the 
facts  is  called  the  a  priori  method. 

Assimilation — appropriating  to  the  liv- 
ing body. 

Asphyxia — stopping  of  breath,  as  from 
drowning,  hanging,  etc. 

Athlete — one  well  trained  and  strong. 

Atonic — lacking  tone  or  strength. 

Atrophy — loss  of  flesh. 

Atropine — the  active  element  of  bella- 
donna. 

Auricle — one  of  the  cavities  of  the  heart 
that  receives  the  blood. 

Ascultation — listening  (with  a  stetho- 
scope, commonly,  to  explore  disease). 

Axilla — the   cavity   under  the  shoulder. 

Bacilli — microscopic  substances  in  the 
blood  supposed  to  produce  disease. 
They  are  regarded  as  vegetable  infu- 
soria. 

Bacteria — minute  bodies  found  in  de- 
composing or  morbid  fluids,  generally 
about  the  ten-thousandth  of  an  inch 
long. 

Basilar — belonging  to  the  base. 

Bichromate  of  potash — a  combination 
of  chromic  acid  with  potash. 

Bifurcation — forki  ng. 

Bifurcated — forked  or  divided. 

Bioplasm — the  living  matter  from  which 
the  tissues  of  the  body  are  formed. 

Bougies — slender  instruments  which  are 
introduced  into  the  urethra. 

Cadaveric — appertaining  to  a  corpse. 

Caisson — a  frame  or  box  used  under  water 
in  bridge  building;  also  a  box  for  am- 
munition in  war. 

Caloric — the  element  or  force  which  pro- 
duces heat. 

Capillary— the  adjective  applied  to  a 
minute    hair-like  tube. 

Capsule — a  small  cap,  cover  or  seed  ves- 
sel. 

Carbohydrates — compounds  of  carbon 
and  hydrogen. 

Carbon — a  simple  substance,  nearly  pure 
in  charcoal,  entirely  pure  in  the  dia- 
mond. 


66S 


GLOSSARY 


Cardiac — relating  to  the  heart. 

Caries — decay  of  bones. 

Carotid — the  name  of  an  artery  in  the 
neck,    carrying   blood  to  the  head. 

Carnification— making  flesh. 

Catalepsy — a  sudden  suspension  of  sen- 
sibility and  voluntary  motion. 

Ca  i  electrotonous — the  nervous  condi- 
tion produced  at  the  negative  pole. 

Cathode — the  vicinity  of  the  negative 
pole. 

Caidate — with  a  tail. 

Cellular— composed  of  cells. 

Cephalic — relating  to  the  brain. 

Cerebellum— the  little  brain  beneath 
the  cerebrum  and  behind  the  ears. 

Cerebrum — the  chief  mass  of  the  brain, 
with  surface  composed  of  convolutions. 

Cervical — relating  to  the  neck. 

Chorda  tympani — the  name  of  a  nerve 
of  the  seventh  pair  going  to  the  tym- 
panum. 

Chorea — an  agitating  or  convulsive  dis- 
ease commonly  called  St.  Vitus'  dance. 

Chylopoietic — relating  to  the  formation 
of  chyle  in  the  digestive  organs. 

Cilia — very  minute  hair-like  bodies  that 
have  a  vibratory  motion. 

Cilio-spinal — relating  to  a  dorsal  por- 
tion of  the  spinal  cord,  which  affects 
the  iris. 

Coagulate — to  curdle  or  solidify  albu- 
minous liquids. 

Coherence — adhering  together;  consis- 
tency. 

Collocation — placing  'together. 

Coma — unconsciousness  and  oppression  of 
the  brain. 

Commissure — a  structure  •  that  unites 
other  parts  (a  term  used  in  the  anatomy 
of  the  brain). 

Commutator — that  which  changes  or  re- 
verses. 

Complement — that  which  completes. 

Concomitant — that  which   goes   with  it. 

Convoluted — composed  of  convolutions. 

Cornea — the  anterior  part  of  the  eyeball. 

Coronal — pertaining  to  the  upper  sur- 
face. 

Corpuscle — a  minute  particle. 

Corrigent — correcting. 

Corpora  striata — the  striped  bodies; 
white  and  gray  substances  just  behind 
the  front  lobe,  which  send  fibres  to  the 
spinal  system. 

Corpus  callosum — the  firm  body  of 
white  fibre  connecting  the  right  and 
left  hemispheres  of  the  cerebrum. 

Crepitant — crackling  or  snapping. 

Crural — relating  to  the  thighs. 

Cuneus — a  portion  of  the  occipital  lobe 
of  the  brain  at  the  median  line,  corre- 
sponding to  the  upper  part  of  the  occip- 
ital bone. 

Decussate — to  cross,  as  do  the  anterior 
fibres  of  the  medulla  oblongata. 


Defecation — discharging  the  contents 
of  the  bowels. 

Deltoid — the  name  of  the  shoulder 
muscle  that  lifts  the  arm. 

Diagnosis — discovery  of  condition  in 
disease. 

Diaphragm — the  thin  muscle  at  the 
base  of  the  lungs  which  pulls  them 
down  for  inspiration. 

Diaphoresis — perspiration. 

Divagation — going  astray. 

Dorsal — relating  to  the  back.  The  dor- 
sal vertebrae  of  the  spine  extend  from  the 
neck  to  the  loins. 

Dynamometer — an  instrument  to  meas- 
ure strength. 

Dysmenorrhea — diseased,  painful,  dis- 
orderly menstruation. 

Electrode — that  through  which  electric- 
ity passes. 

Electrolysis — decomposition  by  electric- 
ity- 

Electrolytic — pertaining  to  electro- 
lysis. 

Electro-magnetism — magnetism  pro- 
duced by  electricity. 

Embrocation — a  liquid  remedy  applied 
to  the  surface. 

Embryo — the  first  rudiments  of  an  ani- 
mal or  plant. 

Empirical — guided  by  experience  (some- 
times applied  contemptuously  to  those 
not  guided  by  scientific  doctrines). 

Ensiform  cartilage — the  lower  end  of 
the  sternum  or  breastbone. 

Epigastrium — the  surface  over  the  stom- 
ach. 

Epithelium — the  cuticle  covering  a  mu- 
cous membrane. 

Expiratory — relating  to  expiration. 

Extensor — that  which  extends  (applied 
to  muscles  that  extend  the  limbs). 

Fahrenheit — the  name  of  the  inventor 
of  the  thermometer  in  common  use 
among  the  English  nations. 

Faradic — developed  by  Faraday  (ap- 
plied to  the  electric  action  produced  by 
induction). 

Femur — the  thigh  bone. 

Fcetus — the  unborn  infant. 

Fibril — a  delicate  fibre. 

Fibrous — composed  of  fibres. 

Fibrillary — of  a  fibrous  nature. 

Flexors — the  term  applied  to  muscles 
that  bend  the  limbs. 

Gallic  acid — an  astringent  acid  found 
abundantly  in  the  gall  nut. 

Galvanoscope — an  instrument  to  show 
galvanic  action. 

Galvanized — treated  with  a  galvanic  cur- 
rent. 

Ganglion— an  enlargement  in  the  course 
of  a   nerve;  also  a  tumor  on  a  tendon. 


GLOSSARY. 


6O9 


Gangrene — mortification  or  death  of  the 
tissues. 

Gelatinous — similar  to  gelatine. 

Globule — a  very  small  round  body. 

Granules — little  grains. 

Gyrus  angularis — a  convolution  of  each 
occipital  lobe  midway  from  right  to 
left    and    from    upper   to  lower  margin. 

Hebetude — dulness;  stupidity. 

Helix — coils  of    wire   used  in  a    battery. 

Hemiplegia — paralysis  of  one  side  of 
the  body. 

HvEMOSPASiA — control  of  the  blood  by 
atmospheric  pressure. 

H^emostasis — control  of  the  blood  by 
ligatures. 

Hemorrhage — loss  of  blood. 

Hemorhoids — piles  (tumors  near  the 
anus). 

Haemoptysis — spitting  blood  (hemor- 
rhage from  the  lungs). 

Hepatic — relating  to  the  liver. 

Hepatization — acquiring  a  solid  texture 
like  the  liver. 

Homogeneous — of  a  uniform  constitution. 

Humerus — the  arm  bone  from  shoulder 
to  elbow. 

Hydrangea — as  a  medicine  a  tonic  for 
the  kidneys. 

Hydrastis — or  golden  seal;  a  powerful 
tonic,  especially  for  mucous  membranes. 

Hydrocephalus — water  on  the  brain. 

Hydrogen — a  simple  element;  the  light- 
est of  gases,  a  constituent  of  water. 

Hydrotherapia — water  cure  (treating 
diseases  with  water). 

Hygiene — the  science  of  health. 

Hyoscyamus — henbane  (an  anodyne  ner- 
vine). 

Hyperesthesia — excessive  sensibility. 

Hypertrophy — overgrowth. 

Hypnotism — properly,  producing  sleep; 
but  improperly  applied  to  producing  a 
passive  state  and  controlling  the  mind 
by  suggestion. 

Hypochondria — the  space  at  the  base  of 
the  ribs ;  the  mental  condition  which 
that  portion  produces. 

Hypogastric — a  term  applied  to  the 
lower  part  of  the  abdomen. 

Hypophosphite — a  substance  partly  com- 
posed of  hypophosphorous  acid,  united 
to  a  base. 

Hypostatic — caused  by  stagnation  or  a 
lower  position. 

Hypothesis — a  supposition  or  theory. 

Ileum— the  lower  intestine  between  je- 
junum and  colon. 

Ilium — the  hip  bone. 

Induction — the  effect  of  an  electric  cur- 
rent in  producing  another  current  in 
adjacent  bodies. 

Inertia — the  tendency  to  remain  in  a 
fixed  condition  either  of  rest  or  motion. 

Influx — inflowing. 


Infusoria — microscopic  animalculx 
found  in  infusions. 

Inspiratory — relating  to  inspiration  or 
taking  breath. 

Insulated — separated  from  other  things 
(applied  in  electricity  to  bodies  sur- 
rounded by  non-conductors). 

Integument — the  skin  or  covering. 

Jugular — the  name  applied  to  the  large 
veins  in  the  neck,  carrying  blood  from 
the  head. 

Lancinating — tearing;  lacerating. 

Leyden  jar — a  glass  used  to  hold  static 
electricity,  having  one  charge  on  the 
inside  which  keeps  a  similar  charge  on 
the    outside. 

Locomotor  ataxy — a  dangerous  disease 
of  the  spinal  cord  interfering  with  the 
control  of  the  muscles. 

Lumbago — a  rheumatic  affection  of  the 
muscles  of  the  loins. 

Lumbo-sacral — applied  to  the  junction 
of  the  lumbar  vertebrae  with  the  sa- 
crum. 

Luxation — dislocation  of  a  bone. 


Mammae — the  female  breasts. 

Marasmus — wasting  away. 

Mechano-therapy — curing  by  mechan- 
ical means. 

Median — the  middle;  between. 

Medulla — the  marrow;  medulla  oblon- 
gata (the  oblong  head  of  the  spinal 
marrow  in  the  base  of  the  skull). 

Membrane — a  skin-like  tissue  composed 
of  fibres  found  in  the  interior  of  the 
body,    either  mucous,  serous  or  fibrous. 

Meningeal — relating  to  the  meninges  or 
membranes  of  the  brain. 

Meningitis — inflammation  of  the  mem- 
branes around  the  brain. 

Miasmatic — of  the  nature  of  miasm  or 
malaria. 

Micro-organisms — very  small  living 
bodies. 

Milliampere — the  thousandth  part  of  an 
ampere  or  electrical  current.  Ten  mil- 
liamperes  are  an  efficient  galvanic  cur- 
rent. 

Molecules — the  smallest  particles  into 
which  bodies  may  be  divided. 

Mucous — of  the  nature  of  mucus,  a  viscid, 
glairy  fluid  on  the  surface  of  internal 
membranes. 

Nascent — being  developed. 

Nates — the  buttocks. 

Neophyte — a  new  convert. 

Nervaura — the  emanation  of  the  nervous 
system. 

Neurasthenia — exhaustion  of  the  ner- 
vous   system. 

Neurine — the  matter  of  which  the  ner- 
vous system  is  composed. 


.670 


GLOSSARY. 


Neurological — relating  to  neurology, 
the  science  of  the  nervous  system. 

Nucleus — a  centre  with  some  degree  of 
density,  around  which  matter  gathers 
or  organizes. 

Nymphomania — uncontrollable  sexual  im- 
pulse in  a  woman. 

Occiput — the  back  part  of  the  head. 
Occipital — relating  to  the  occiput. 
GEsophagus — the     tube     in     the     throat 

through  which  we  swallow. 
Oleaginous — of  an  oily  nature. 
Optimistic — disposed   to    recognize   only 

the  hopeful  aspect  of  a  subject. 
Osseous — bony. 
Osmosis — the    passage  of  a  fluid  through 

a  membrane  or  porous  partition. 
Ovum — an  egg  (or  the  vesicle  from  which 

animal  life  originates). 
Ova — plural  of  ovum. 
Oxygen — the   gas  in  the  atmosphere  that 

sustains  life. 
Oxidizable — capable   of    being    oxidized 

or  rusted. 

Papillae — minute  projections  containing 
nerves. 

Parietal — from  parietes  (the  side  walls)  ; 
the  name  applied  to  the  skull  bones 
of  the  middle  superior  and  upper  lateral 
part  of  the  head. 

Parenchyma — the  substance  of  animal 
organs,    distinct  from  the  bloodvessels. 

Pathognomy — the  science  of  the  expres- 
sion of  feeling  or  impulse  (a  mathemat- 
ical science). 

Pathological — relating  to  disease. 

Pelvis — the  cavity  between  the  hips, 
sacrum  and  pubis. 

Periphery — the  part  remote  from  the 
centre. 

Periscope — a  comprehensive  general 
view. 

Peristaltic — a  term  applied  to  the  con- 
tractile movement  of  the  intestines. 

Peritonitis — inflammation  of  the  peri- 
toneum. 

Pia  mater — a  fine  membrane  on  the  sur- 
face of  the  brain. 

Pineal  gland — a  small  nervous  structure 
lying  on  the  tubercula  quadrigemina,  at 
the  origin  of  the  optic  nerve. 

Plastic — capable  of  being  moulded  in- 
to form. 

Pleurisy — inflammation  of  the  pleura 
which  invests  the  lungs. 

Plumule — the  expanding  germ  of  a  plant. 

Pneumogastric — the  name  of  a  nerve  go-  i 
ing  from   the  medulla  oblongata  to  the 
lungs  and  stomach. 

Pneumonia — inflammation   of  the  lungs.  \ 

Pneumatology — the  science  of  the  soul.  j 

Polypi — the  plural  of  polypus  (a  tumor 
named  from  the  animal  polypus). 

Ponderable — capable  of  being  weighed  1 
or  having  weight. 


Popliteal— relating  to  the  popliteal  mus- 
cle, a  flexor  muscle  from  the  upper  end 
of  the  thigh  to  the  tibial  bone. 

Potential— possessing  power. 

Precordial— before  the  heart. 

Priority— being  before. 

Protein— a  general  term  applied  to  such 
a  compound  of  carbon,  oxygen,  hy- 
drogen and  nitrogen  as  is  found  in  an- 
imal substances  generally. 

Protoplasm— organized  matter  capable 
of  life  (a  conception  similar  to  protein). 

Psora — a  cutaneous  disease  or  itch. 

Puberty — sexual  development. 

Radicle — a  small  root. 

Ramollissement — a  French  word  for 
softening  (usually  applied  to  the  brain). 

Rationale — a  reasonable  explanation. 

Recurrent — running  back. 

Regimen— regulation  or  mode  of  living. 

Reophore — a  current  bearer  in  electric- 
ity- 

Rheostat — a  current  obstructor. 

Rhonchus — a  rattling,  wheezing  sound 
in  breathing. 

Rigor  mortis — the  stiffness  of  death. 

Sacrum — the  bone  forming  the  end  of 
the  spinal  column. 

Sanative — promoting  health. 

Satyriasis — excessive  sexual  impulse  in 
a  man. 

Sciolism — superficial,  incorrect  knowl- 
edge. 

Sensorium — the  part  that  recognizes  sen- 
sations (usually  applied  to  the  brain.) 

Serous — of  the  nature  of  serum  (also  ad- 
plied  to  membranes  which  are  not  mu- 
cous.) 

Serosity — a  serous  fluid. 

Siesta — a  short  sleep  in  the  afternoon. 

Solar  plexus — a  mass  of  ganglionic 
nerves  below  the  diaphragm,  near  the 
spine. 

Somnambulism — literally,  sleep-walking ; 
a  dreamy  condition  in  which  the  subject 
has  much  intelligence  and  intuition. 

Somniloquence — speaking  in  the  som- 
nambulic condition. 

Soporific — capable  of  producing  sleep. 

Sorbefacient — promoting  absorption. 

Spermatozoa — the  animalcular  moving 
bodies  in  semen. 

Sternum — the  breastbone. 

Striata — literally  striped.  The  corpora 
striata  are  the  nervous  substance  just 
behind  the  front  lobe  from  which  mus- 
cular impulses  proceed. 

Synthesis — putting  things  together. 

Terra    incognita — a    Latin   expression 

for  an  unknown  land. 
Thalami—  the  first  large  expansion  of  the 

ascending  fibres  of  the  brain,  above  the 

medulla  oblongata  and  pons. 
Therapeutic — heal  i  ng. 


GLOSSARY. 


671 


Thoracic — relating  to  the  thorax. 

Thorax — the  portion  of  the  trunk  con- 
taining the  ribs. 

Tibia — the  principal  bone  from  the  knee 
to  the  foot. 

Tox  ic — poisonous. 

Trachea — the  windpipe  in  the  neck. 

Translucent — allowing  light  to  pass 
through. 

Traumatic — relating  to  or  caused  by 
wounds. 

Trifacial — the  name  applied  to  the  three- 
branched  nerve  of  the  face,  or  fifth 
pair.  I 

Tubercle — a  small  deposit  of  devitalized  ' 
substance  occurring  in  various  parts  of 
the  body,  chiefly  in  the  lungs. 

Turgid — swelled  or  bloated. 

Tympanitic — showing  a  flatulent  dis- 
tension of  the  abdomen. 

Ulna — the  chief  bone  of  the  forearm. 
Unstriated — not  striped     (a  descriptive 

term   applied  to  the  structure  of  the  vol- | 

untary  muscles). 

Vertebra — one  of  the  bones  that  make 
the  spinal  column  or  backbone. 


Vitreous  body — the  clear  fluid  in  the  back 
of  the  e\e. 

Vascular — composed  of  vessels. 

Vasomotor — moving  or  controlling  the 
vessels  (a  term  applied  to  the  minute 
ganglionic  nerves  which  govern  the  ar- 
teries). 

Ventricle — one  of  the  muscular  portions 
of  the  heart  which    propels    the  blood. 

Vibriones — the  infusoria  developed  in 
putrefying  animal  fluids,  not  materially 
different  from   bacteria. 

Vesicle — literally  a  minute  cell  or  bladder. 

Visceral — relating  to  viscera,  the  soft  or- 
gans in  the  trunk. 

Volition — the  art  of  willing  or  deter- 
mining. 

Vivisection — cutting  up  living  animals. 

Vortices — plural  of  vortex,  place  of  a 
whirling  movement  of  fluids  similar  to 
an  eddy  or  whirlwind. 

Viscera — organs  in  the  trunk,  abdominal 
and  pulmonary. 

Zona  pellucida — pellucid  zone  (the 
transparent  ring  surrounding  the  yolk  in 
the  centre  of  the  ova  of  mammalian 
animals). 


pHRAG/V/ 


CAVITVO.'      \ 

PEBITONtUIVl 

PANCREA3 
DUODENUM 


COMMON     I  LIAC 


PERITONEUM 

VESTING    IMC  LIVEB 


[-^PERITONEUM 


OMENTUM 


MALL  IMTEST. 
oiuioeo 


%      % 


This  engraving  in  addition  to  the  other  views  of.  the  viscera  will 
nelp  the  physician  to  apprehend  more  readily  the  effects  of  manual 
and  electric  treatment.  We  see  in  this  view,  that  independent  of  the 
distribution  of  the  spinal  nerves  and  the  sources  of  the  ganglionic 
nerves,  the  relations  of  proximity  should  be  considered.  Thus  the 
rectum  is  adjacent  to  the  sacrum,  and  the  bladder  is  nearly  on  the 
same  level,  the  womb  lying  between.  The  five  lumbar  vertebrae,  count- 
ing up  from  the  section  of  the  common  iliac  artery,  are  seen  to  be  op- 
posite the  mass  of  intestines  —  the  two  upper  lumbar  vertebrae,  which 
are  adjacent  to  the  kidneys,  are  opposite  to  the  pancreas  and  to  the 
lower  margin  of  the  stomach,  while  the  transverse  colon  corresponds 
to  the  second  and  third  lumbar  vertebras.  The  stomach  corresponds 
to  the  last  two  dorsal  vertebrae  and  first  lumbar,  and  the  liver,  as  its 
development  varies,  may  occupy  any  portion  of  the  level  of  the  six 
lower  dorsal  vertebrae. 

These  positions  should  be  borne  in  mind  when  we  pass  electric  cur- 
rents through  the  organs,  or  when  we  would  reach  them  by  the  influ- 
ence of  the  hands  or  of  cupping  apparatus. 


RYNX 

SPINAL 
Cord 
>5final 
Vertebrae 


£6mmon  Duct-\)$ 


<$? 


lLEO-CC£CAu^ 

Valve-* 

COECU 

Append  iy. 
VERMiFowusHk 


Ar-iUS 


The  Digestive  Organs,  or  Alimentary  Canal,  are  here  drawn 
out  to  show  all  the  constituent  parts,  which  are  duly  labelled. 
This  will  prepare  the  reader  to  understand  the  next  engraving, 
which  shows  the  parts  nearly  in  their  natural   position. 


Vena  Innomwata 
Descending 

Vena  Cava 
Arch  of  Aorta 

R. Auricle. 


Transvsr.se 

MESOtOLON 

Jejunum 


Ascending  Colon 
Ileum. 


LONOITUDINAL 

Band  of- Colon 


I  s 
ti 


Subclavian! 

.Carotid 


L.A0R1CU.&. 


LVlntricui 


The  Ribs  on.one 
Side  of  the Che$t 


End  of  Transverse. 

FThANSv«5E     COU"ON 
MESOCOLON 

DESCENDING   COUON 


-Mesocolon 
Jejunum 


Sigmoid  Flejcurc 

PpendrcVermifo^m/5 


G  o  e  c  Uj\- 


In  this  view,  which  includes  the  heart  and  its  large  blood- 
vessels, the  uplifted  colon  conceals  the  stomach,  liver  and  spleen. 
The  names  explain  all  the  parts  except  the  mesocolon,  which  is 
a  band  formed  by  the  peritoneum  (investing  all  the  abdominal 
organs)   to   which  the   colon  is  attached. 


IntJuqular 
R.Carotid  A. 


Art.  Innoniinata 

Carotid  A. 
I  nt  Jugular 

End  of 
T»-\orm:ic  Duct 

Thoracic  Duct  and  Aorta.  —  In  this  view  the  vessels  are  presented  horizontally  as  they  appear  when 
lying  down.  The  reader  will  turn  up  the  engraving  to  understand  their  normal  position.  We  see  the  aorta 
turning  its  arch  between  the  fourth  vertebra  and  second  rib  to  descend —  in  the  chest  called  the  thoracic  aorta, 
and  below  the  diaphragm  the  abdominal  aorta.  The  nourishing  chyle,  gathered  by  the  lacteals  from  the 
intestines*  together  with  the  lymph  gathered  by  the  lymphatic  absorbents  from  the  entire  left  side  and  entire 
lower  half  of  the  body,  goes  into  the  receptaculum  chyli  (receptacle  of  chyle)  opposite  the  second  lumbar  ver- 
tebra, and,  being  now  similar  in  most  respects  to  the  blood,  the  duct  ascends  eighteen  or  twenty  inches  and 
enters  the  left  subclavian  vein  (coming  from  the  arms)  near  the  first  rib.  It  flows  into  the  vein  in  the  hori- 
zontal position  much  more  freely  than  when  we  are  standing;  up ;  hence  that  position  favors  nourishment 
and  growth.  The  horizontal  position  is  the  best  for  rest  and  digestion.  The  right  and  left  subclavian  veins, 
fed  by  the  rightand  left  jugulars  from  the  head,  are  seen  going  to  the  superior  vena  cava  (which  carries  their 
blood  to  the  right  heart)  to  enter  its  auricle.  This  great  vein  also  receives  a  supply  from  the  vena  azygos,  a 
singular  vein  coming  up  and  bringing  blood  from  below  the  diaphragm  to  mingle  with  the  blood  from  above 
in  the  vena  cava,  just  before  it  reaches  the  heart.  On  the  right  side  we  see  the  right  subclavian  vein  receiving 
the  right  lymphatic  duct,  which  brings  in  the  lymph  absorbed  from  the  right  side  of  the  upper  part  of  the 
body. 


LOWER  END   OF   TRUNK   OF   FEMALE    DIVIDED   ON   MEDIAN   LINE. 
In   this  view,  the  names  of  each  part  being  inscribed,  little  comment  is  necessary.    The  bladder  is  shown 
fully   distended,   pressing  back   the   parts   behind   it,  which  would  come  forward  when  it  is  emptied.    The 
junction  of  the  sacrum  and  last  lumbar  vertebra  is  shown. 


THERAPEUTIC 
APPARATUS. 


Dr.  J.  P.  Chamberlin, 

President  of  the  Buchanan  Anthropological  Society, 

Boston, 

Having  given  his  attention  to  the  therapeutic  measures  introduced  by  Prof. 
Buchanan,  offers  his  services  to  those  who  are  interested  in  the  subject,  in  furnishing 
the  apparatus  for  therapeutic  treatment  described  in  "  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy." 

The  apparatus  for  pneumatic  treatment  is  not  now  in  the  market,  and  any  one 
who  wishes  to  procure  it  would  have  to  pay  an  enormous  price  or  manufacture  it 
himself.  To  promote  the  introduction  of  anything  so  valuable  would  be  an  act  of 
philanthropy,  and  Dr.  C.  has  made  the  necessary  arrangements  and  study  of  the 
subject  to  enable  him  to  offer  the  pneumatic  cases  for  the  limbs,  together  with  air 
pump  and  spinal  cupping  glasses,  three  in  number,  for  the  sum  of  $45,  or  any  por- 
tion thereof  at  the  same  rates.  This  would  enable  any  intelligent  person  to  demon- 
strate the  wonderful  power  of  pneumatic  treatment  or  Hsemospasia,  in  the  control 
of  many  diseases,  as  shown  by  Prof.  Buchanan. 

If  applications  should  be  received  for  the  pneumatic  cabinet,  for  treatment  of  the 
entire  body,  Dr.  C.  will  report  the  terms  upon  which  he  can  procure  its  manufacture. 

He  will  also  receive  orders  and  supply  the  new  ELECTRO-THERAPEUTIC 
APPARATUS  of  Prof.  Buchanan  at  the  following  rates  : 

The  new  Magnetic  and  Medical  Battery,  vh.'ch  is  designed  to  furnish  the 
soothing,  hygienic  current  of  magnetism,  and  of  all  kinds  of  medical  potency,  con- 
veyed by  electricity,  for  $30.  A  similar  battery,  with  Dr.  Buchanan's  new  helix  and 
rheotome,  giving  a  fine,  powerful  current,  capable  of  adjustment  and  variation 
of  speed  and  power,  always  reliable,  and  the  flexible  electrode,  making  treatment 
under  the  clothing  easy,  for  $45. 

The  Statico-Magnetic  Battery,  combining  the  diffusive,  wholesome  and  irre- 
sistible power  of  static  electricity  with  the  soothing,  tonic  power  of  magnetism,  which 
is  considered  the  ne  plus  ultra  of  electro-therapeutics,  can  be  furnished,  with  its  mag- 
netic and  medical  attachments  and  duplex  attachments  for  giving  two  currents  at 
once,  all  invented  by  Prof.  Buchanan,  for  $65. 

The  Portable  Galvanic  battery,  giving  as  strong  a  galvanic  current  as  physi- 
cians generally  require  in  practice,  can  be  furnished  for  $iS.  This  is  the  only  bat- 
tery of  the  kind,  being  the  application  of  a  new  principle  in  the  use  of  galvanism. 
Dr.  C.  may  be  addressed  at  South  Weymouth,  Mass.,  or  6  James  St.,  Boston. 


their  investigations  and  conclusions,  occupying  an  entire  page,  in  which  they  say 
41  they  have  had  sufficient  evidence  to  satisfy  them  that  Dr.  Buchanan's  views  have 
a  rational  experimental  foundation,  and  that  the  subject  opens  a  field  of  investiga- 
tion second  to  no  other  in  immediate  interest,  and  in  promise  of  important  future 
results  to  science  and  humanity."  Even  more  favorable  reports  were  made  at  that 
time  by  committees  in  Boston. 

In  1843  the  subject  was  fully  investigated  by  the  Faculty  of  the  Indiana  State 
University  (under  President  Wylie)  at  Bloomington,  who  published  their  report  of 
several  columns,  and  expressed  their  acceptance  of  the  science  as  follows,  —  saying 
that  it  "develops  the  rudimentary  science  of  phrenology  into  a  perfect  and  pro- 
found science,  which  explains  the  phenomena  of  animal  magnetism  and  which  ren- 
ders intelligible  those  things  in  physiology  —  disease  and  insanity — which  have 
heretofore  been  entirely  inexplicable." 

"  If  the  science  of  Neurology  as  discovered  and  developed  by  Dr.  Buchanan  be 
anything  at  all,  it  furnishes  a  key  to  the  whole  philosophy  of  man  —  the  whole  of 
the  laws  of  his  moral  and  physical  nature  —  the  noblest  of  all  sciences.  If  he  has 
made  a  single  discovery  in  physiology  he  has  made  more  than  any  previous  explorer 
of  that  science,  in  furnishing  us  this  key  to  the  whole  of  its  principles  by  his  cere- 
bral and  corporeal  experiments."  "  Although  our  story  may  resemble  the  legends 
of  romance  or  necromancy  in  the  great  powers  that  have  been  displayed  over  the 
human  mind,  its  wonderful  character  will  subserve  its  chief  aim  and  end  —  to 
induce  those  who  are  interested  in  the  science  of  man,  in  education  and  moral  phi- 
losophy to  make  these  subjects  a  matter  of  experimental  inquiry." 

The  medical  class  attending  the  lectures  of  Dr.  Buchanan  in  the  Eclectic  Medical 
Institute  (the  leading  medical  college  of  Cincinnati)  in  the  session  of  1849-50  ex- 
pressed themselves  as  follows  :  "  While,  therefore,  we  gratefully  accord  distinguished 
honor  to  the  labors  of  Dr.  Gall  and  his  coadjutors,  we  do  at  the  same  time  regard 
the  contributions  which  have  been  made  to  Anthropology  by  Dr.  Buchanan  as  far 
exceeding  those  of  his  predecessors.  We  have  personally  performed  many  of  the 
experiments  set  forth  in  the  Journal  of  Man,  and  can  testify,  as  can  many  in  this 
city  who  have  witnessed  our  experiments  in  private  circles,  that  the  half  has  not 
yet  been  published  to  the  world." 

It  is  unnecessary  to  quote  from  pages  of  similar  endorsements  during  the  last 
forty  years  —  the  most  recent  being  from  the  students  of  the  College  of  Therapeu- 
tics, who  say  in  their  published  statements  in  18SS :  "We,  in  common  with  all 
others  who  have  had  the  pleasure  of  witnessing  the  demonstrations  of  Dr.  Buchanan 
in  Therapeutic  Sarcognomy,  Psychometric  Diagnosis  and  Electro-therapeutics, 
regard  them  as  beyond  the  shadow  of  a  doubt,  and  as  surpassing  both  in  philo- 
sophic importance  and  practical  utility  any  physiological  discoveries  of  the  present 
century,  and  laying  the  foundation  for  a  truly  scientific  system  of  therapeutics."  In 
1889  they  said  :  "  We  one  and  all  unite  in  pronouncing  the  instruction  given  as  the 
first  and  only  clear,  satisfactory  and  complete  explanation  ever  received  of  the  sci- 
ence of  man  and  mind  in  all  relations." 

Psychometry  being  recognized  by  its  friends  as  the  most  important  contribution 
of  the  century  to  psychic  science,  and  Sarcognomy  as  the  most  important  addition 
ever  made  to  Biology  —  a  fortiori,  it  is  evident  that  Anthropology,  of  which  they 
are  constituent  portions,  has  larger  claims  upon  the  enlightened  than  anything 
which  has  been  presented  in  the  entire  history  of  science  and  philosophy.  Yet 
it  is  not  simply  as  science  and  philosophy  that  the  Anthropological  sciences  are 
presented  by  Dr.  Buchanan,  but  as  the  greatest  possible  intellectual  contribution  to 
human  welfare.  The  purpose  of  his  life,  embodied  in  these  sciences,  is  to  promote 
and  make  possible  that  social  reconstruction  and  elevation  of  humanity  which  will 
abolish  the  degradation  of  poverty,  pestilence  and  crime.  That  Anthropology, 
accepted  and  applied,  will  lead  to  this  result  will  become  apparent  to  all  faithful 
students  of  the  science. 

The  Syllabus  of  Anthropology  will  be  issued  for  $3.00  in  December,  1812,  or 
sooner  if  practicable.  Subscribers  who  wish  to  receive  it  when  first  issue  T  should 
send  their  address  to  Dr.  J.  R.  Buchanan,  6  James  St.,  Boston. 


MANUAL  OF  PSYCHOMETRY:  The  Dawn  of  a 
New  Civilization.  Third  Edition.  With  Portrait  of 
Mrs.  Buchanan. 

The  "Manual  of  Psychometry "  demonstrates  by  numerous  experiments  that 
there  are  divine  faculties  in  man,  superior  to  the  external  tenses  and  external  intel- 
lect, by  means  of  which  knowledge  may  be  attained  with  wonderful  rapidity,  which 
is  far  beyond  the  established  sciences,  and  beyond  the  ordinary  means  of  research, 
upon  which  the  world  has  heretofore  relied.  Upon  this  subject  philosophy  and 
science  have  heretofore  been  in  the  dark,  and  the  wonderful  di.-covery  of  Professor 
Buchanan  in  1842,  endorsed  by  many  of  our  best  thinkers,  is  the  opening  of  a  new 
era  lor  intellectual  progress.  The  "  Manual  of  Psvchometry"  is  the  first  complete 
presentation  of  this  momentous  science  (and  art)  which  is  destined  to  enlarge  all 
sciences,  to  overturn  all  existing  philosophies,  and  to  extend  its  influence  into  every 
sphere  of  human  intelligence. 

This  volume  of  500  pages  shows  in  its  preface  that  it  is  but  a  partial  and  limited 
exposition  of  a  grand  science,  that  will  require  several  other  volumes  to  complete  its 
illustration.  The  introduction  opens  with  the  very  terse  and  expressive  poem  in  which 
the  Rev.  Jno.  Pierpont  illustrated  the  truth  and  greatness  of  Psychometry  at  the 
Yale  anniversary,  and  proceeds  to  show  the  nature,  power  and  scope  of  the  science, 
the  presentation  of  which  is  arranged  in  three  parts  :  1st,  the  original  sketch  and 
history  of  the  discovery;  2d,  the  uses  and  applications  of  Psychometry ;  3d,  the  new 
philosophy  and  religion  to  which  Psychometry  leads. 

RECOGNITION  OF  PSYCHOMETRY. 
This  work  needs  no  other  endorsement  than  that  so  gracefully  given  in  his  poem 
on  progress  by  the  Rev.  Jno.  Pierpont,  and  the  endorsement  of  *its  doctrines  by  the 
Faculty  of  the  Indiana  State  University  and  the  Faculty  of  the  leading  medical  col- 
lege of  Cincinnati,  the  E.  M.  Institute;  but  to  show  the  unanimous  accord  of  liberal 
minds,  a  few  of  the  recent  expressions  of  the  press  are  quoted  : 

"The  like  of  this  work  is  not  to  be  found  in  the  whole  literature  of  the  past.  .  .  .  He  has  given  a  lifetime 
to  the  study  of  psychical  science  in  its  various  branches,  and  his  1  ame  stands  honorably  among  those  who 
have  extended  the  real  boundaries  of  knowledge  "  —  Home  Journal,  New  York. 

"  The  author,  Dr.  Buchanan,  has  been  an  investigator  and  an  ardent  student  along  this  line  of  thought  for 
nearly  half  a  century.  He  has  written  several  works  which  have  shown  evidence  of  research  and  profound 
thought."  —  Chicago  Inter -Ocean. 

"  Dr.  Buchanan  is  among  the  most  eminent  of  the  physicians  of  the  American  Eclectic  School  and  would 
for  that  reason  alone  be  set  down  by  the  adherents  of  the  '  tegular'  school  as  a  'crank.'  Harvey  was  a 
crank,  but  we  believe  now-a-days  in  the  circulation  of  the  blood.  .  .  .  He  will  certainly  be  entitled  to 
rank  among  the  pioneers  in  experimental  investigation."  — Chicago  Times. 

'"The  more  considerate  would  be  inclined  10  look  upon  him  as  a  century  in  advance  of  his  time."  — 
People's  Health  Journal,  Chicago. 

"  He  is  a  moral  Columbus.  .  .  .  He  has  boldly  navigated  unknown  seas,  till  he  has  found  a  far  greater 
and  more  important  world  than  the  Genoese  navigator  discovered.  His  Manual  of  Psychometry  is  in  many  re- 
spects one  of  the  most  remarkable  works  ever  published.  By  the  more  liberal  portion  of  the  medical  profes- 
sion Dr.  Buchanan  is  justly  regarded  as  the  highest  living  authori  y  on  the  brain  and  nervous  system,  and 
many  have  been  looking  for  years  for  some  exposition  from  his  pen  r  f  the  world  of  scientific  wonders  with. 
which  for  more  than  forty  years  he  has  been  familiar,  and  of  which  he  has  been  the  recognized  exponent." 
—  Hartjord  Times. 

"  The  literature  of  America  and  Europe  during  the  present  century  has  produced  no  work  superior  to  the 
Manual  of  P.-ychometry,  either  for  originality  and  profundity  cf  thought,  elevation  of  moral  principle,  revo- 
lutionary power,  or  practical  utility."  —  Banner  oj Light,  Boston. 

*'  It  can  hardly  fail  to  originate  an  active  discussion  throughout  the  literary  and  scientific  world.  As  an 
experimental  s-cience,  it  is  likely  to  make  its  way  to  universal  recognition.  But  the  recognition  of  Psy- 
chometry involves  a  tremendous  change  in  the  ODinions  of  the  world,  the  teachings  of  colleges,  and  the 
prevalent  doctrines  of  science  and  philosophy."  —  Health  Monthly,  New  York. 

"The  credulity  of  the  reader  is  taxed  to  the  utmost  extent ;  but  the  author's  observations  seem  to  have 
been  conducted  scientifically,  and  his  deductions  therefrom  logically  drawn."  —  Health  Journal,  Chicago. 

"  The  above  is  an  extraordinary  title,  suggesting  the  'dawn  of  a  new  civilization,'  and  it  is  the  title  of  an 
extraordinary  book.  Our  readers  know  the  scientific  standing  of  Prof.  Buchanan,  and  the  profound  original 
physiological  discoveries  for  which  the  world  is  indebted  to  hi*  genius  and  untiring  labors  for  half  a  century. 
When  such  an  author  brings  forth  a  volume  with  the  c'aim  that  it  embodies  discoveries  which  may  be  the  dawn 
of  a  n<>w  civilization,  it  demands  more  than  ordinary  attention.  .  .  .  To  physicians  this  is  a  work  of 
the  highest  importance.  The  chapter  on  Psychometry  in  medicine  illustrates  by  experiments  the  philosophy 
of  Homoeopathy  and  Allopathy,  the  philosophy  of  contagion,  and  the  principles  of  diagnosis.  It  shows 
how  professional  success  is  attained,  ard  how  the  skilful  physician  may  diagnosticate  the  condition  of 
patients  at  a  distance  whom  he  knows  only  by  correspondence.  In  addition  to  biographical,  medical,  and 
geological  scence  (all  of  which  are  essentially  charged  and  enlarged  by  Psychometric  investigations),  this 
volume  shows  a  great  many  practical  applications  in  the  study  of  character,  in  determining  the  destiny  of 
the  young,  in  forming  conjugal  and  business  associations,  in  selecting  candidates  for  important  offices,  and 
in  determining  questions  of  guilt  or  innocence.  But  the  limits  of  our  notice  are  quite  insufficient  forgiv- 
ing an  idea  of  the  multifarious  contents  of  this  curious  work.  We  can  but  assure  the  readers  that  it  is  in- 
tensely interesting  as  well  as  marvellous.  The  scientific  reader  feels  as  if  he  were  transported  to  a  realm  of 
romance,  yet  all  is  presented  in  the  form  of  simple  scientific  experiments  which  have  been  repeated  a  hun- 
dred thousand  times,  and  which  invite  the  reader  to  repeat  them  for  himself.  No  one  can  read  this  volume 
in  a  candid  spirit  without  feeling  a  conviction  that  the  author  has  opened  up  a  new  and  wonderful  world 
of  science,  and  no  physician  can  read  it  withovit  gaining  very  important  ideas  concerning  diagnosis  and  the 
action  of  medicines."  —  Medical  Advocate,  New  York. 

Published  by  the  author  ($2.16  by  mail).     Remit  to 

Dr.  JOS.   RODES  BUCHANAN,  6  James  Street,  Boston. 


(FOURTH  EDITION.} 

THE  NEW  EDUCATION:  Moral,  Industrial,  Hy- 
gienic, Intellectual.  By  Prof.  J.  R.  Buchanan, 
Author  cf  "Anthropology,"  "Therapeutic  Sarcog- 
nomy,"    and    "  Manual    of    Psychometry." 

The  following  are  a  few  of  the  spontaneous  commendations  of  this  work  immedi- 
ately following  its  publication  :  — 

Rev.  B.  F.  BARRETT,  one  of  the  most  eminent  writers  of  his  church,  says  : 

"  We  are  perfectly  charmed  with  your  book.  I  regard  it  by  far  as  ihe  most  valu- 
able work  on  education  ever  published.  You  have  herein  formulated  the  very  wis- 
dom of  heaven  on  the  highest  and  most  momentous  of  all  themes.  Your  work  is 
destined,  in  my  judgment,  to  inaugurate  a  new  era  in  popular  education.  It  con- 
tains more  and  higher  wisdom  on  the  subject  of  which  it  treats  than  all  ihe  other 
books  ever  "written  on  education." 

Rev.  Dr.  W.  P,  STRICKLAND  says  : 

"The  book  is  a  desideratum  long  wanted,  and  it  seems  to  me  every  Christian 
and  every  man  who  has  a  shade  of  philanthropy  ought  not  only  to  bid  it  God-speed, 
but  to  pray  and  labor  and  give  to  plant  these  truths  in  the  minds  and  heart  of  the 
community.  God  bless  the  author!  His  great  work  will  live  when  all  bigoted 
opposers  are  forgotten." 

"This  is  an  important  work  on  a  most  important  subject.  The  importance  of 
the  book  is  indicated  by  the  very  significant  fact  that  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Thompson, 
the  noted  philanthropist  of  New  York,  has  purchased  half  the  edition  for  gratuitous 
distribution.  Dr.  Buchanan  has  set  before  himself  the  Herculean  task  of  revolu- 
tionizing our  entire  system  of  education.  .  .  .  These  points  are  enforced  with 
unflagging  energy,  with  great  originality,  and  with  elaborate  but  always  pertinent 
illustration."  —  Boston  Commonwealth. 

"  Clear,  fresh,  and  forcible  in  every  page,  there  has  appeared  no  work  like  it,  none 
which  can  compare  with  it  in  practical  suggestiveness."  —  H.  T.  in  Religio-Philo- 
sophical  Joitrnal. 

"  Great  as  have  been  the  improvements  made  in  educational  matters  during  the 
past  quarter  of  a  century,  they  are  small  and  inadequate  compared  to  the  system 
proposed  by  Dr.  Buchanan."  —  Hartford  Times. 

*'The  high  opinion  we  have  heretofore  expressed  of  this  profoundly  original  and 
instructive  work  is  more  than  sustained  by  the  judgment  of  the  best  and  most  lib- 
eral writers."  —  Banner  of  Light. 

"A  copy  of  it  should  be  in  every  household  and  on  every  teacher's  desk.  The 
twelfth  chapter  relates  to  '  Ventilation  and  Health,'  and  contains  matter  of  such  vital 
importance  that  were  it  all  the  book  contained,  it  would  more  than  compensate  the 
reader  for  any  outlay  of  time  or  money  he  may  have  made  upon  it.  ...  A  needed 
book,  whose  teachings  would  lift  humanity  out  of  darkness  into  light."  —  Newmarket 
Advertiser. 

"The  originality  of  this  work  is  remarkable.  It  is  one  of  those  works  which,  like 
Bacon's  '  Novum  Organum  '  or  Hahnemann's  '  Organon,'  compels  us,  if  we  accept 
it,  to  make  a  new  departure  from  old  methods  and  principles." — Health  Monthly. 

"The  author  displays  learning  and  deep  study  of  every  branch  of  morals,  and 
presents  his  knowledge  in  a  convincing  manner.  The  book  is  moreover  extremely 
interesting  even  to  the  ignorant  or  superficial  reader."  —  Boston  Globe. 

"  The  chapter  on  ventilation  alone  makes  your  book  invaluable.  No  language 
can  sufficiently  commend  it.  Every  family,  all  architects,  builders,  school  commit- 
tees, proprietors  of  halls,  theatres,  churches,  school-houses,  colleges  and  hospitals 
should  have  it." —  Rev.   Wm.  Bradley,  Boston. 

Pages  might  be  filled  with  similar  testimonials  from  enlightened  teachers  and 
friends  of  progress,  who  have  received  this  volume  with  enthusiasm,  the  first  edition 
being  sold  in  three  months.  Being  published  by  the  author,  copies  may  be  obtained 
by  addressing  Dr.  J.  R.  Buchanan,  Boston,  remitting  the  price,  $1.50,  by  postal 
order  or  registered  letter. 


THE  DOUBLE  CYLINDER  LAW  BATTERY. 

This  battery  has  been  brought  to  a  high  state  of 
perfection.  Its  £.  M.  F.  is  1.5  volts  and  its  internal  re- 
sistance .5  of  an  ohm  at  the  start 
and  continues  the  same  until  the  zinc 
is  consumed  and  the  solution  exhausted. 
Cells  put  in  use  in  1880  are  still 
working  as  well  as  at  the  start,  nothing 
but  the  zinc  and  solution,  costing  but 
a  few  cents,  ever  having  been  re- 
newed. 

Endorsed  by  the  following  author- 
ities in  their  works :  Alex.  J.  C.  Skene, 
G.  Betton  Massey,  H.  R.  Biglow. 
More  than  13,000  cells  in  use  for  electro-therapeutical 
work. 


THE   BAILEY  CURRENT    REGULATOR 


For  regulating  the  strength 
of  the  current  or  dosage  this  in- 
strument perfectly  supplants  the 
switch-board  as  a  means  of 
modifying  the  current.  It  im- 
poses equal  work  upon  all  cells 
of  the  battery.  The  CUR- 
RENT REGULATION  is 
perfect.  From  full  strength  of 
the  battery  down  to  a  current 
so  feeble  as  to  be  impercep- 
tible to  the  most  sensitive  organ, 
and  this  without  any  possibility 
of  breaks  in  the  circuit  or  sud- 
den shocks  to  the  patient;  a 
most  important  feature.  With 
the  regulator  but  two  wires  are 
necessary  leading  to  the  battery. 
No  more  rule  of  thumb  in 
electro-therapeutics. 

Sole   manufacturers : 
LAW    TELEPHONE    CO., 

85    John    St.,     New  York. 


>A 


A  D  2.9 


"  THE  LONG  LOOKED  FOR  COMES  AT  LAST." 

During  the  past  three  years,  over  one  thousand  Practical  Electricians  have 
used  what  we  originallv  recommended  to  them  as 

"  TUB  BEST  OPEN-GIRCDIT  BATTERY  in  tlie  WORLD." 

We  believed  what  we  then  stated,  and  to-day  the  opinions  of  our  numerous  cus- 
tomers throughout  the  country  overwhelmingly  confirm  the  statement.  Kindly 
examine  the  following  report: 

Report  on  the  performance  of  two  cells  L,eclanche  and  two  cells  SAMSON  Battery,  ex- 
amined for  their  E.  M.  F.,  Internal  Resistance  and  Current  Strength,  by  Prof. 
A.  E.  Dolbear,  of  Tufts  College,  Nov.  15th,  1889  : 


NAME  OF  CELL. 

E.  M.  F. 

INT.    RES. 

Current  At 
Outset. 

C,  After  30 

Minutes. 

Genuine  Gonda  "  Disque  "  Lee. 
E.  G.  L.  Co.'s  "  Disque  "  Lee. 
Samson  No.  i, 
Samson  No.  2, 

1.46  volts. 

1.52     " 

j. 44       " 
i-47       " 

1.25  ohms. 

.14       " 
.11       " 

.61  ampere- 

.63       '• 
1. 16       " 
1. 21       " 

.  mpere. 
•37 
•52       " 

.70       " 

"  The  cells  were  all  put  in  circuit  with  a  resistance  of  1.1  ohms,  and  kept  on  that  cir- 
cuit for  the  above  measure  of  current.  The  very  small  internal  resistance  of  the  two 
SAMSONS  enables  them  to  give  a  current  very  nearly  twice  as  great  at  the  beginning 
as  either  of  the  others,  while  the  SAMSON  No.  2  gave  a  stronger  current  (.70  am- 
pere) after  half  an  hour  short  circuit  than  either  of  the  Disque  Leclanche  cells  at  the 
beginning.  It  should  be  remarked  here  that  the  SAMSON  No.  1  was  a  smaller  cell 
than  the  No.  2,  and  of  course  would  not  be  expected  to  give  the  current  of  the  large 
one. 

"  It  appears,  however,  that  the  SAMSON  cells  are  much  more  energetic  than  the 
ones  they  were  compared  with  ;  so  much  so,  that  one  of  them  is  about  as  good  as  two 
of  the  latter  kind  for  such  service  as  the  production  of  strong  currents  or  strong 
magnetic  effects.  The  device  of  making  the  carbon  cylindrical  and  fluted  enables 
them  to  contain  a  large  quantity  of  the  binoxide  of  manganese,  and  presents  a  large 
surface  to  the  solution.  The  shape  of  the  zinc  and  its  proximity  to  the  carbon  is 
another  advantage  for  such  work.  I  have  also  tested  the  cells  for  telephone  work 
and  find  them  very  superior.  Their  small  internal  resistance  enables  them  to  give 
a  stronger  current  through  the  induction  coil  than  any  Leclanche  cell  I  have  ever 
tested.     This  amounts  to  25  or  30  per  cent.     The  cell  meets  my  commendation." 


The  SAMSON'S  great  superiority  grows  out  of  its  remarka- 
bly low  internal  resistance,  which  enables  it  to  give  a  current  for  ordinary 
circuits  from  one-third  to  one-half  stronger  than  the  best  Open-circuit  Cells ;  it  does 
not  polarize  as  readily  as  other  sal-ammoniac  cells ;  and  polarization  does  not  de- 
stroy its  efficiency  or  materially  shorten  its  life,  its  negative  element  being  practically 
inexhaustible.  It  recuperates  quickly  after  having  been  over-taxed  and 
short-circuited,  and  will  do  more  effective  work  after  repeated  short-cir- 
CUitingS  than  any  other  sal-ammoniac  cell.  It  does  not  require  to  be  "  regener- 
ated "  or  doctored  :  Simply  give   it  a  rest,  and  it  quickly  regains  its  strength. 

This  wonderful  French  battery  is  warranted  to  stand  more  hard  usage 
and  continue  its  service  longer  and  more  stubbornly,  than  any  other  open-circuit 
battery  made.    About  80,000  now  in   use  in  this  country. 

For  Descriptive  Circulars  Address, 

The  Electric  Gas   Lighting   Company, 

No.    195    Devonshire    Street,    Boston,    Mass. 

Sole  Manufacturing  Agents  for  the  United  States. 


% 


J.0**,     v 


£°*    .' 


q.  *-.T 


%f  : 


J8?s  /\  fWW'  <rH>  '-.W  /\  "WR-*  **v%  --S| 


>* 


\-    P«fe 


A  9* 


4  O  •  1 


\*     $++ 


•a.    '• . » «    «<S 


5*  ••"'•      o.  a*     »0'#» 


<»    ''TV.4    ,0 


.o*  ..»•-•.   *< 


+*rf 


•  ^ri*    : 


k"«     «i,    j*     •* 


a<i 


bo 


y^*  -=  ->^v0o   ^'-*m-\<r  -o.->^-'.d 


0"    ♦*«itf%t»_     o  J*     ,. 


^<c. 


>•* 


J.°V     V 


^°«6  - 


•."^•'  #'         V*77'7'^        %'^-.o>        _V*^'-*V*      V 

%'*^£\«^    V"*-.vr.**/v*'    -%/*S??\.<^  %/*-.v?V 


^°* 


'      v*K 


>°V  '"." 


.  '•^•"  ,o°         +?  - 


*>%.    '. 


■I 


LIBRARY  OF  CONGRESS 


DD0ES7^Sbb0 


■ 

■ 

■ 


■  u/li 


m